Bizhub / Develop 223 Service

SERVICE MANUAL
Date: 2013/04/26
Table of Contents
Revision history......................................................................................................................................1
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS............................................................................A-1
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE.................................................................................................................................................A-2
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION..........................................................................A-3
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual...................................................................................................................................A-3
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items.........................................................................................................A-3
3. SAFETY WARNINGS..................................................................................................................................................A-4
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC.......................................................................................A-4
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention...................................................................................................................................A-4
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION.....................................................................................................................................................A-5
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug.......................................................................................................................................A-5
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE...................................................................................................A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply..................................................................................................................................................................A-7
3.3.2 Installation Requirements..............................................................................................................................................A-11
3.3.3 After Service..................................................................................................................................................................A-13
3.4 Used Batteries Precautions.....................................................................................................................................................A-18
3.4.1 ALL Areas......................................................................................................................................................................A-18
3.4.2 Germany........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.4.3 France...........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.4.4 Denmark........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.4.5 Finland, Sweden............................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.4.6 Norway..........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5 Laser Safety............................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.1 Laser Safety..................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.2 Internal Laser Radiation................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.3 Laser Safety Label........................................................................................................................................................A-22
3.5.4 Laser Caution Label......................................................................................................................................................A-23
3.5.5 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT.....................................................................................A-23
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE.........................................................................................................A-24

4.1 Warning indications inside the machine..................................................................................................................................A-24
4.2 Warning indications on the boards..........................................................................................................................................A-25
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT...............................................................................................A-26
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS..................................................................................................B-1

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL..........................................................................................................B-1
2. PRODUCT NAME.......................................................................................................................................................B-2
3. BRAND NAME............................................................................................................................................................B-3
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES...............................................................................................................................B-3
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS................................................................................................................................................................B-3
4. FEEDING DIRECTION................................................................................................................................................B-4
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................................C-1
1. bizhub 423/363/283/223..............................................................................................................................................C-1
1.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.3 Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.4 Materials....................................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.5 Print volume..............................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.6 Machine specifications..............................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.7 Operating environment..............................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.8 Print functions............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.9 Scan functions...........................................................................................................................................................................C-6
1.10 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-7
2. DF-621/SP-501...........................................................................................................................................................C-8
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
Paper feed prohibited originals..................................................................................................................................................C-8
Paper feed not guaranteed originals.........................................................................................................................................C-8
Mixed original feed chart...........................................................................................................................................................C-9
Machine specifications..............................................................................................................................................................C-9
Operating environment..............................................................................................................................................................C-9
Note for the Specifications........................................................................................................................................................C-9
3. PC-109/PC-208.........................................................................................................................................................C-10
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-10
Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-10
Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-10
Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-10
Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-10
4. PC-409......................................................................................................................................................................C-11
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-11
Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-11
5. JS-505.......................................................................................................................................................................C-12
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
Offset function.........................................................................................................................................................................C-12
6. JS-603.......................................................................................................................................................................C-14
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
7. FS-527......................................................................................................................................................................C-15
7.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-15
7.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-15
7.3 Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-15
7.3.1 Non sort/sort/group.......................................................................................................................................................C-15
7.3.2 Sort offset/group offset..................................................................................................................................................C-15
7.3.3 Sort staple.....................................................................................................................................................................C-16
7.4 Stapling...................................................................................................................................................................................C-16
7.5 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-16
7.6 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-17
7.7 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-17
8. FS-529......................................................................................................................................................................C-18
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-18
Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-18
Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-18
Offset function.........................................................................................................................................................................C-18
Stapling...................................................................................................................................................................................C-18
9. PK-517......................................................................................................................................................................C-20
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-20
Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-20
Paper type...............................................................................................................................................................................C-20
10. SD-509....................................................................................................................................................................C-21
10.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-21
10.2 Paper.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-21
10.2.1 Saddle stitching...........................................................................................................................................................C-21
10.2.2 Folding........................................................................................................................................................................C-21
10.3 Machine specifications..........................................................................................................................................................C-21
10.4 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-21
10.5 Consumables........................................................................................................................................................................C-21
10.6 Note for the Specifications....................................................................................................................................................C-21
11. i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105........................................................................................................................C-22

11.1 Available function for i-Option...............................................................................................................................................C-22
11.2 Web browser function............................................................................................................................................................C-22
11.3 Photo registration function.....................................................................................................................................................C-23
12. FK-508....................................................................................................................................................................C-24
12.1 Basic specifications...............................................................................................................................................................C-24
ii
12.1.1 General specifications.................................................................................................................................................C-24

12.1.2 Scanning section.........................................................................................................................................................C-24
12.1.3 Recording section.......................................................................................................................................................C-25
12.1.4 Line connecting section...............................................................................................................................................C-25
12.1.5 Operation panel...........................................................................................................................................................C-26
12.2 Functional specifications.......................................................................................................................................................C-26
12.2.1 Dial functions...............................................................................................................................................................C-26
12.2.2 Transmission...............................................................................................................................................................C-27
12.2.3 Polling.........................................................................................................................................................................C-28
12.2.4 Line seizure mode and telephone function.................................................................................................................C-28
12.2.5 Message reception and record....................................................................................................................................C-29
12.2.6 Memory function..........................................................................................................................................................C-29
12.2.7 Various communication function.................................................................................................................................C-29
12.2.8 User lists / reports.......................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.2.9 Other user functions....................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.3 Network fax specifications.....................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.3.1 Internet fax..................................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.3.2 IP address fax.............................................................................................................................................................C-31
D OVERALL COMPOSITION ...........................................................................................................D-1

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................................D-1
1.1 System front view......................................................................................................................................................................D-1
1.2 System rear view.......................................................................................................................................................................D-1
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................................................................D-3
3. PAPER PATH.............................................................................................................................................................D-4
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM....................................................................................................................................D-5
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS..................................................................................................................................D-6
6. IMAGE FORMING CONTROL....................................................................................................................................D-7
7 PROCESS SPEED......................................................................................................................................................D-8
E SERVICE TOOL.............................................................................................................................E-1
1. bizhub 223/283/363/423..............................................................................................................................................E-1
1.1 Service material list...................................................................................................................................................................E-1
2. DF-621........................................................................................................................................................................E-2
2.1 CE tool list.................................................................................................................................................................................E-2
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................F-1
1. Concept of periodical maintenance.............................................................................................................................F-1
2. Periodical maintenance items......................................................................................................................................F-2
2.1 Main body..................................................................................................................................................................................F-2
2.1.1 bizhub 223.......................................................................................................................................................................F-2
2.1.2 bizhub 283.......................................................................................................................................................................F-2
2.1.3 bizhub 363.......................................................................................................................................................................F-3
2.1.4 bizhub 423.......................................................................................................................................................................F-4
2.2 Option........................................................................................................................................................................................F-5
2.2.1 DF-621.............................................................................................................................................................................F-5
2.2.2 PC-109/PC-208/PC-409..................................................................................................................................................F-5
2.2.3 JS-505.............................................................................................................................................................................F-6
2.2.4 JS-603/FS-527/SD-509/PK-517......................................................................................................................................F-6
2.2.5 FS-529.............................................................................................................................................................................F-6
3. Periodical replacement parts list..................................................................................................................................F-7

3.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423............................................................................................................................................................F-7
3.2 Option........................................................................................................................................................................................F-8
3.2.1 DF-621.............................................................................................................................................................................F-8
3.2.2 PC-109............................................................................................................................................................................F-8
3.2.3 PC-208............................................................................................................................................................................F-8
3.2.4 PC-409............................................................................................................................................................................F-8
3.2.5 FS-527.............................................................................................................................................................................F-8
4. Periodical cleaning parts list........................................................................................................................................F-9

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
bizhub 223/283/363/42..............................................................................................................................................................F-9
DF-621.......................................................................................................................................................................................F-9
JS-505.......................................................................................................................................................................................F-9
JS-603/SD-509/PK-517.............................................................................................................................................................F-9
FS-527.......................................................................................................................................................................................F-9
FS-529.......................................................................................................................................................................................F-9
5. Concept of parts life...................................................................................................................................................F-10

5.1 Life value of consumables and parts.......................................................................................................................................F-10
iii
5.1.1 bizhub 223/283..............................................................................................................................................................F-10

5.1.2 bizhub 363.....................................................................................................................................................................F-10
5.1.3 bizhub 423.....................................................................................................................................................................F-10
5.2 Conditions for life specifications values...................................................................................................................................F-10
6. Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub 223/283/363/423....................................................................................F-12

6.1 Housing section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-12
6.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter..............................................................................................................................................F-12
6.1.2 Replacing the toner filter (main body)............................................................................................................................F-12
6.2 Photo conductor section..........................................................................................................................................................F-13
6.2.1 Replacing the drum unit.................................................................................................................................................F-13
6.3 Developing section..................................................................................................................................................................F-13
6.3.1 Replacing the toner filter (developing unit)....................................................................................................................F-13
6.3.2 Replacing the developing unit.......................................................................................................................................F-14
6.3.3 Replacing the developer................................................................................................................................................F-16
6.4 Toner supply section................................................................................................................................................................F-19
6.4.1 Replacing the toner bottle..............................................................................................................................................F-19
6.5 Transfer section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-21
6.5.1 Replacing the transfer roller unit....................................................................................................................................F-21
6.6 Paper feed section...................................................................................................................................................................F-21
6.6.1 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller...............................................................................................................F-21
6.6.2 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy.............................................................................................F-22
6.6.3 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller......................................................................................................F-23
6.6.4 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller............................................................................................................................F-25
6.6.5 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller......................................................................................................F-26
6.6.6 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller............................................................................................................................F-26
6.7 Registration section.................................................................................................................................................................F-26
6.7.1 Replacing the timing roller bearings/timing roller gear1, 2............................................................................................F-26
6.7.2 Replacing the paper dust remover................................................................................................................................F-28
6.7.3 Cleaning of the timing roller...........................................................................................................................................F-28
6.8 Fusing section..........................................................................................................................................................................F-29
6.8.1 Replacing the fusing unit...............................................................................................................................................F-29
6.9 Duplex section.........................................................................................................................................................................F-30
6.9.1 Cleaning of the duplex transport rollers.........................................................................................................................F-30
7. Periodical maintenance procedure DF-621...............................................................................................................F-31

7.1 Take-up section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-31
7.1.1 Cleaning of the pick-up roller/feed roller........................................................................................................................F-31
7.1.2 Cleaning of the separation roller....................................................................................................................................F-31
7.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller / feed roller........................................................................................................................F-31
7.1.4 Replacing the separation roller......................................................................................................................................F-33
7.2 Transport section.....................................................................................................................................................................F-33
7.2.1 Cleaning of the pick-up roller/feed roller........................................................................................................................F-33
7.2.2 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers............................................................................................................................F-34
7.3 Scanning section.....................................................................................................................................................................F-35
7.3.1 Cleaning of the cleaning shaft.......................................................................................................................................F-35
7.3.2 Cleaning of the reflective sensor section.......................................................................................................................F-35
8. Periodical maintenance procedure PC-109/PC-208..................................................................................................F-37

8.1.2 Replacing the feed roller................................................................................................................................................F-38
8.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller...........................................................................................................................................F-40
9. Periodical maintenance procedure PC-409...............................................................................................................F-42

9.1.2 Replacing the feed roller................................................................................................................................................F-43
9.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller...........................................................................................................................................F-45
10. Periodical maintenance procedure JS-505..............................................................................................................F-48

10.1 Paper exit section..................................................................................................................................................................F-48
10.1.1 Cleaning of the roller and roll.......................................................................................................................................F-48
11. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-527.............................................................................................................F-49

11.1.1 Cleaning procedure for each parts..............................................................................................................................F-49
11.1.2 Replacing the upper paddles.......................................................................................................................................F-49
11.1.3 Replacing the lower paddles.......................................................................................................................................F-50
12. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-529.............................................................................................................F-52

12.1.1 Cleaning procedure for each parts..............................................................................................................................F-52
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY....................................................................................................G-1
iv
1. Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items...................................................................................................................G-1

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Paint-locked screws..................................................................................................................................................................G-1
Red-painted screws..................................................................................................................................................................G-1
Variable resistors on board.......................................................................................................................................................G-1
Removal of PWBs.....................................................................................................................................................................G-1
Precautions for disassembly.....................................................................................................................................................G-1
Precautions during setup or transportation...............................................................................................................................G-2
2. Units from which removing is prohibited.....................................................................................................................G-3

2.1 CCD unit....................................................................................................................................................................................G-3
2.1.1 Reason for prohibition.....................................................................................................................................................G-3
2.2 PH unit......................................................................................................................................................................................G-3
2.3 Fusing unit.................................................................................................................................................................................G-3
3. Notes when transporting the machine........................................................................................................................G-4

3.1 Protective materials...................................................................................................................................................................G-4
3.1.1 Protective materials for the photo conductors.................................................................................................................G-4
4. bizhub 223/283/363/423.............................................................................................................................................G-5
4.1 Disassembly/reassembly parts list............................................................................................................................................G-5
4.1.1 Exterior parts...................................................................................................................................................................G-5
4.1.2 Units................................................................................................................................................................................G-5
4.1.3 Boards.............................................................................................................................................................................G-5
4.1.4 Motors.............................................................................................................................................................................G-6
4.1.5 Clutches..........................................................................................................................................................................G-6
4.1.6 etc...................................................................................................................................................................................G-6
4.2 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Exterior parts)................................................................................................................G-6
4.2.1 Front door.......................................................................................................................................................................G-6
4.2.2 Left cover........................................................................................................................................................................G-7
4.2.3 Exit tray...........................................................................................................................................................................G-7
4.2.4 Rear right cover..............................................................................................................................................................G-7
4.2.5 Upper right cover............................................................................................................................................................G-7
4.2.6 Rear cover/1...................................................................................................................................................................G-8
4.2.7 Rear cover/2...................................................................................................................................................................G-8
4.2.8 Lower rear cover.............................................................................................................................................................G-8
4.2.9 Scanner rear cover.........................................................................................................................................................G-9
4.2.10 Scanner right cover.....................................................................................................................................................G-10
4.2.11 Scanner right front cover.............................................................................................................................................G-10
4.2.12 USB interface cover....................................................................................................................................................G-10
4.2.13 Scanner left front cover...............................................................................................................................................G-10
4.2.14 Scanner upper front cover..........................................................................................................................................G-11
4.2.15 Scanner left cover.......................................................................................................................................................G-11
4.2.16 Scanner upper rear cover...........................................................................................................................................G-11
4.2.17 Scanner front cover.....................................................................................................................................................G-11
4.2.18 Slit glass cover............................................................................................................................................................G-12
4.2.19 Original glass..............................................................................................................................................................G-12
4.2.20 Control panel assy......................................................................................................................................................G-13
4.2.21 Tray 1..........................................................................................................................................................................G-13
4.2.22 Tray 2..........................................................................................................................................................................G-13
4.2.23 Front cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-14
4.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Units)............................................................................................................................G-15
4.3.1 Imaging unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-15
4.3.2 Tray 1 paper feed unit...................................................................................................................................................G-15
4.3.3 Tray 2 paper feed unit...................................................................................................................................................G-16
4.3.4 PH unit..........................................................................................................................................................................G-17
4.3.5 CCD board unit.............................................................................................................................................................G-18
4.3.6 Exposure unit................................................................................................................................................................G-19
4.3.7 LED exposure unit........................................................................................................................................................G-20
4.3.8 Toner hopper unit..........................................................................................................................................................G-21
4.3.9 Regist unit.....................................................................................................................................................................G-21
4.3.10 Switchback unit...........................................................................................................................................................G-22
4.3.11 Manual bypass tray unit..............................................................................................................................................G-23
4.3.12 Conveyance unit.........................................................................................................................................................G-24
4.3.13 Hopper drive unit.........................................................................................................................................................G-24
4.3.14 MFP board box...........................................................................................................................................................G-26
4.3.15 Main drive unit.............................................................................................................................................................G-27
4.3.16 Hard disk drive............................................................................................................................................................G-28
4.4 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Boards)........................................................................................................................G-29
4.4.1 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for fluorescent lamp)..........................................................................................G-29
4.4.2 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for LED lamp).....................................................................................................G-29
4.4.3 Inverter board (INVB) (for fluorescent lamp).................................................................................................................G-30

4.4.4 LED exposure drive board (LEDEDB) (for LED lamp)..................................................................................................G-31
4.4.5 Machine condition monitor board (MCMB)...................................................................................................................G-31
4.4.6 Printer control board (PRCB)........................................................................................................................................G-31
4.4.7 DC power supply (DCPU).............................................................................................................................................G-32
4.4.8 MFP board (MFPB).......................................................................................................................................................G-33
4.4.9 High voltage unit (HV)...................................................................................................................................................G-35
4.4.10 SODIMM (DIMM)........................................................................................................................................................G-36
4.4.11 NVRAM board (NRB)..................................................................................................................................................G-36
4.4.12 Paper feed tray 1 paper FD sensor board (PSDB/1)..................................................................................................G-36
4.4.13 Paper feed tray 2 paper FD sensor board (PSDB/2)..................................................................................................G-37
4.4.14 Paper feed tray 1 LED board, Paper feed tray 2 LED board (LEDB1, LEDB2)..........................................................G-39
4.5 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Motors).........................................................................................................................G-39
4.5.1 Scanner motor (M201)..................................................................................................................................................G-39
4.5.2 Duplex transport motor (M92).......................................................................................................................................G-40
4.5.3 Transport motor (M1)....................................................................................................................................................G-41
4.5.4 PC motor (M2)..............................................................................................................................................................G-41
4.5.5 Toner bottle motor (M3)................................................................................................................................................G-42
4.5.6 Toner supply motor (M4)...............................................................................................................................................G-42
4.5.7 Switchback motor (M91)...............................................................................................................................................G-42
4.5.8 Tray 1 lift-up motor (M11).............................................................................................................................................G-43
4.5.9 Tray 2 lift-up motor (M21).............................................................................................................................................G-43
4.5.10 Power supply cooling fan motor (FM1).......................................................................................................................G-43
4.5.11 Cooling fan motor (FM2).............................................................................................................................................G-44
4.5.12 Fusing unit cooling fan motor (FM3)...........................................................................................................................G-45
4.5.13 Toner suction fan motor (FM4)...................................................................................................................................G-45
4.5.14 MFP board cooling fan motor (FM5)...........................................................................................................................G-46
4.6 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Clutches)......................................................................................................................G-46
4.6.1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL11)...................................................................................................................................G-46
4.6.2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL21)...................................................................................................................................G-47
4.6.3 Tray 2 vertical transport clutch (CL22)..........................................................................................................................G-48
4.6.4 Manual paper feed clutch (CL81)..................................................................................................................................G-49
4.6.5 Registration clutch (CL1)..............................................................................................................................................G-49
4.7 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (etc.)..............................................................................................................................G-49
4.7.1 Manual pick-up solenoid (SD81)...................................................................................................................................G-49
4.7.2 Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUM)...................................................................................................................G-50
4.7.3 Scanner drive cable......................................................................................................................................................G-51
5. Option.......................................................................................................................................................................G-55
5.1 Disassembly/reassembly parts list..........................................................................................................................................G-55
5.1.1 DF-621..........................................................................................................................................................................G-55
5.1.2 PC-109/PC-208.............................................................................................................................................................G-55
5.1.3 PC-409..........................................................................................................................................................................G-55
5.1.4 JS-505...........................................................................................................................................................................G-56
5.1.5 JS-603...........................................................................................................................................................................G-56
5.1.6 FS-527..........................................................................................................................................................................G-56
5.1.7 FS-529..........................................................................................................................................................................G-56
5.1.8 PK-517..........................................................................................................................................................................G-57
5.1.9 SD-509..........................................................................................................................................................................G-57
5.1.10 FK-508........................................................................................................................................................................G-57
5.2 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (DF-621)........................................................................................................................G-57
5.2.1 Front cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-57
5.2.2 Rear cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-58
5.2.3 Upper door cover..........................................................................................................................................................G-58
5.2.4 Document feed tray rear cover.....................................................................................................................................G-59
5.2.5 Reverse automatic document feeder............................................................................................................................G-59
5.2.6 Glass cleaning brush....................................................................................................................................................G-60
5.2.7 DF control board (DFCB)..............................................................................................................................................G-61
5.2.8 Document CD size sensor (VR1)..................................................................................................................................G-61
5.2.9 Document reading motor (M1)......................................................................................................................................G-61
5.2.10 Document feed motor (M2).........................................................................................................................................G-62
5.2.11 Reading roller release motor (M3)..............................................................................................................................G-62
5.2.12 Glass cleaning motor (M4)..........................................................................................................................................G-62
5.2.13 DF cooling fan motor (FM1)........................................................................................................................................G-63
5.2.14 Document feed clutch (CL1).......................................................................................................................................G-63
5.2.15 Document registration clutch (CL2)............................................................................................................................G-64
5.2.16 Document exit roller release solenoid (SD1)..............................................................................................................G-64
5.2.17 Stamp unit...................................................................................................................................................................G-65
5.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PC-109/PC-208)..........................................................................................................G-66
5.3.1 Right door.....................................................................................................................................................................G-66
5.3.2 Rear right cover/Lower right cover/Front right cover.....................................................................................................G-66
vi
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.3.3 Rear cover/Left cover....................................................................................................................................................G-66

5.3.4 Paper feed cabinet........................................................................................................................................................G-66
5.3.5 PC Control board (PCCB31).........................................................................................................................................G-68
5.3.6 Tray 3 LED board (LEDB31)/Tray 4 LED board (LEDB41)...........................................................................................G-68
5.3.7 Tray 3 lift-up motor (M33) / Tray 4 lift-up motor (M43)..................................................................................................G-68
5.3.8 Tray 3 paper feed motor (M31) / Tray 3 vertical transport motor (M32) / Tray 4 paper feed motor (M41) / Tray 4 vertical
transport motor (M42).............................................................................................................................................................G-69
Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PC-409)........................................................................................................................G-70
5.4.1 Right door.....................................................................................................................................................................G-70
5.4.2 Rear right cover/Lower right cover/Front right cover.....................................................................................................G-70
5.4.3 Rear cover/Left cover....................................................................................................................................................G-70
5.4.4 Paper feed cabinet........................................................................................................................................................G-70
5.4.5 PC Control board (PCCB51).........................................................................................................................................G-72
5.4.6 Tray 3 LED board (LEDB51).........................................................................................................................................G-72
5.4.7 Paper feed motor (M51) / Vertical transport motor (M52).............................................................................................G-73
5.4.8 Division board position motor (M53).............................................................................................................................G-74
5.4.9 Shift motor (M54)..........................................................................................................................................................G-74
5.4.10 Tray lock solenoid (SD51)...........................................................................................................................................G-75
5.4.11 Drawer........................................................................................................................................................................G-75
5.4.12 Wire.............................................................................................................................................................................G-76
Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-505)........................................................................................................................G-79
5.5.1 Separator......................................................................................................................................................................G-79
5.5.2 Front cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-79
5.5.3 Rear left cover...............................................................................................................................................................G-80
5.5.4 Rear right cover............................................................................................................................................................G-80
5.5.5 Upper tray.....................................................................................................................................................................G-80
5.5.6 Paper guide plate..........................................................................................................................................................G-80
5.5.7 JS control board (JSCB)...............................................................................................................................................G-81
5.5.8 Transport motor (M1)....................................................................................................................................................G-81
5.5.9 Route change motor (M3).............................................................................................................................................G-82
5.5.10 Shift motor (M2)..........................................................................................................................................................G-82
5.5.11 Roller pressure/retraction clutch (CL1).......................................................................................................................G-84
Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-603)........................................................................................................................G-85
5.6.1 Separator......................................................................................................................................................................G-85
5.6.2 Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17).........................................................................................................................G-85
Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FS-527)........................................................................................................................G-86
5.7.1 Upper cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-86
5.7.2 Rear cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-87
5.7.3 Front door.....................................................................................................................................................................G-87
5.7.4 Front upper cover..........................................................................................................................................................G-87
5.7.5 Front lower cover..........................................................................................................................................................G-88
5.7.6 Finisher.........................................................................................................................................................................G-88
5.7.7 Horizontal transport unit................................................................................................................................................G-89
5.7.8 Stapler unit....................................................................................................................................................................G-89
5.7.9 FS control board (FSCB)..............................................................................................................................................G-90
5.7.10 Paper passage motor/1 (M1)......................................................................................................................................G-91
5.7.11 Duplex path switching motor (M2)..............................................................................................................................G-91
5.7.12 Exit motor (M5)...........................................................................................................................................................G-92
5.7.13 Paper passage motor/2 (M3)......................................................................................................................................G-93
5.7.14 Conveyance motor (M4).............................................................................................................................................G-94
5.7.15 Upper lower path switching motor (M6)......................................................................................................................G-95
5.7.16 Tray1 path switching motor (M8)................................................................................................................................G-96
5.7.17 Exit roller retraction motor (M9)..................................................................................................................................G-96
5.7.18 Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10).............................................................................................................G-96
5.7.19 Stapler movement motor (M11)..................................................................................................................................G-97
5.7.20 Accommodation paddle motor (M12)..........................................................................................................................G-97
5.7.21 Elevate motor (M15)...................................................................................................................................................G-98
5.7.22 Tray2 shift motor (M16)...............................................................................................................................................G-98
5.7.23 Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1)......................................................................................................................G-99
Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FS-529)......................................................................................................................G-100
5.8.1 Front left cover............................................................................................................................................................G-100
5.8.2 Front right cover..........................................................................................................................................................G-100
5.8.3 Upper cover................................................................................................................................................................G-100
5.8.4 Rear cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-101
5.8.5 Finisher.......................................................................................................................................................................G-101
5.8.6 Conveyance roller unit................................................................................................................................................G-102
5.8.7 Stapler unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-102
5.8.8 Paper exit tray unit......................................................................................................................................................G-103
5.8.9 FS control board (FSCB)............................................................................................................................................G-105
5.8.10 Pick up roller position motor (M1).............................................................................................................................G-106
5.8.11 Tray up/down motor (M2)..........................................................................................................................................G-106
vii
5.8.12 Alignment motor/F (M3), Alignment motor/R (M4)....................................................................................................G-107

5.8.13 Conveyance motor/1 (M5)........................................................................................................................................G-110
5.8.14 Conveyance motor/2 (M6)........................................................................................................................................G-111
5.8.15 Stapler movement motor (M7)..................................................................................................................................G-111
5.8.16 Fan motor (FM1).......................................................................................................................................................G-112
5.8.17 Paddle solenoid (SD2)..............................................................................................................................................G-113
5.8.18 Flapper solenoid (SD4).............................................................................................................................................G-114
5.8.19 Belt retract solenoid (SD5)........................................................................................................................................G-115
5.8.20 Harness guide...........................................................................................................................................................G-116
5.9 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PK-517)......................................................................................................................G-116
5.9.1 Punch kit.....................................................................................................................................................................G-116
5.10 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (SD-509)....................................................................................................................G-118
5.10.1 Front cover................................................................................................................................................................G-118
5.10.2 Right cover................................................................................................................................................................G-118
5.10.3 Staple unit cover.......................................................................................................................................................G-119
5.10.4 Saddle unit................................................................................................................................................................G-119
5.10.5 Paper exit tray...........................................................................................................................................................G-121
5.10.6 Staple unit.................................................................................................................................................................G-121
5.10.7 SD drive board (SDDB).............................................................................................................................................G-122
5.10.8 Leading edge stopper motor (M20)...........................................................................................................................G-123
5.10.9 Upper paddle motor (M21)........................................................................................................................................G-123
5.10.10 Lower paddle motor (M22)......................................................................................................................................G-124
5.10.11 Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)..................................................................................................................G-125
5.10.12 Center staple alignment motor/F (M24)..................................................................................................................G-125
5.10.13 Center fold roller motor (M25).................................................................................................................................G-126
5.10.14 Center fold plate motor (M26).................................................................................................................................G-126
5.10.15 Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)..........................................................................................................................G-126
5.11 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FK-508)....................................................................................................................G-128
5.11.1 FAX board.................................................................................................................................................................G-128
5.11.2 FAX board (Extension line).......................................................................................................................................G-128
5.11.3 Configuration of the FK-508 board............................................................................................................................G-129
6. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS..................................................................................................................G-131

6.1 Installing the key counter......................................................................................................................................................G-131
6.1.1 Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................G-131
6.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................G-131
6.2 Installing the original size detection sensor/2 (PS205).........................................................................................................G-132
6.2.1 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................G-132
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION...........................................................................................................H-1
1. bizhub 223/283/363/423..............................................................................................................................................H-1
1.1 Cleaning parts list......................................................................................................................................................................H-1
1.2 Lubrication parts list..................................................................................................................................................................H-1
1.3 Cleaning procedure...................................................................................................................................................................H-1
1.3.1 Tray 1 feed roller, tray 1 pick-up roller, tray 1 separation roller.......................................................................................H-1
1.3.2 Tray 2 feed roller, tray 2 pick-up roller, tray 2 separation roller.......................................................................................H-2
1.3.3 Tray 2 transport roller......................................................................................................................................................H-2
1.3.4 Manual bypass tray feed roller........................................................................................................................................H-3
1.3.5 Manual bypass tray separation roller..............................................................................................................................H-3
1.3.6 Original glass..................................................................................................................................................................H-3
1.3.7 Scanner rails...................................................................................................................................................................H-3
1.3.8 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd)........................................................................................................................................................H-3
1.3.9 Lens................................................................................................................................................................................H-4
1.3.10 CCD sensor...................................................................................................................................................................H-4
2. Option..........................................................................................................................................................................H-6
2.1 Cleaning parts list......................................................................................................................................................................H-6
2.1.1 PC-109/PC-208...............................................................................................................................................................H-6
2.1.2 PC-409............................................................................................................................................................................H-6
2.2 Cleaning procedure (PC-109/PC-208)......................................................................................................................................H-6
2.2.1 Separation roller..............................................................................................................................................................H-6
2.2.2 Feed roller.......................................................................................................................................................................H-6
2.2.3 Pick-up roller...................................................................................................................................................................H-7
2.2.4 Vertical transport roller....................................................................................................................................................H-7
2.3 Cleaning procedure (PC-409)...................................................................................................................................................H-7
2.3.1 Separation roller..............................................................................................................................................................H-7
2.3.2 Feed roller.......................................................................................................................................................................H-8
2.3.3 Pick-up roller...................................................................................................................................................................H-8
2.3.4 Vertical transport roller....................................................................................................................................................H-9
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.................................................................................................................I-1
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION............................................................................................I-1
viii
1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................I-1
1.2 Advance checks..........................................................................................................................................................................I-1
2. TOUCH PANEL ADJUSTMENT...................................................................................................................................I-2

2.1 Use..............................................................................................................................................................................................I-2
2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................I-2
3. UTILITY........................................................................................................................................................................I-3
3.1 List of utility mode (outline) ........................................................................................................................................................I-3
3.2 List of utility mode (detail)...........................................................................................................................................................I-4
3.2.1 One-Touch/User Box Registration....................................................................................................................................I-4
3.2.2 User Settings....................................................................................................................................................................I-5
3.2.3 Administrator Settings.......................................................................................................................................................I-8
3.2.4 Other Settings.................................................................................................................................................................I-17
3.3 Starting/Exiting..........................................................................................................................................................................I-19
3.3.1 Starting procedure..........................................................................................................................................................I-19
3.3.2 Exiting procedure............................................................................................................................................................I-19
4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX REGISTRATION)..............................................................................................I-20

One-Touch User Box Registration-Outline.......................................................................................................................................I-20
4.1 Create One-Touch destination..................................................................................................................................................I-20
4.1.1 Address Book (Public)/(Personal)...................................................................................................................................I-20
4.1.2 Group..............................................................................................................................................................................I-21
4.1.3 E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................................................I-21
4.2 Create User Box.......................................................................................................................................................................I-21
4.2.1 Public/Personal User Box...............................................................................................................................................I-21
4.2.2 Confidential RX User Box...............................................................................................................................................I-22
4.2.3 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................................................I-22
4.2.4 Relay User Box...............................................................................................................................................................I-22
4.3 Limiting Access to Destinations................................................................................................................................................I-22
4.3.1 Outline............................................................................................................................................................................I-22
4.3.2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations..............................................................................................................................I-23
5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)......................................................................................................................................I-24

5.1 System Settings........................................................................................................................................................................I-24
5.1.1 Language Selection........................................................................................................................................................I-24
5.1.2 Measurement Unit Settings............................................................................................................................................I-24
5.1.3 Paper Tray Settings........................................................................................................................................................I-24
5.1.4 Auto Color Level Adjust..................................................................................................................................................I-25
5.1.5 Power Save Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-25
5.1.6 Output Settings...............................................................................................................................................................I-25
5.1.7 AE Level Adjustment......................................................................................................................................................I-26
5.1.8 Auto Paper Select for Small Original..............................................................................................................................I-26
5.1.9 Blank Page Print Settings...............................................................................................................................................I-26
5.1.10 Page Number Print Position.........................................................................................................................................I-27
5.1.11 Select Keyboard...........................................................................................................................................................I-27
5.2 Custom Display Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-27
5.2.1 Copier Settings...............................................................................................................................................................I-27
5.2.2 Scan/Fax Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-28
5.2.3 User Box Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-30
5.2.4 Copy Screen...................................................................................................................................................................I-30
5.2.5 Fax Active Screen...........................................................................................................................................................I-30
5.2.6 Color Selection Settings.................................................................................................................................................I-31
5.2.7 Left Panel Display Default..............................................................................................................................................I-31
5.2.8 Search Option Settings...................................................................................................................................................I-31
5.3 Copier Settings.........................................................................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.1 Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple.....................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.2 Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet.....................................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.3 Auto Sort/Group Selection..............................................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.4 Default Copy Settings.....................................................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.5 Default Enlarge Display Settings....................................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.6 When AMS Direction is Incorrect....................................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.7 Separate Scan Output Method.......................................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.8 Enlargement Rotation.....................................................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.9 Auto Zoom (Platen).........................................................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.10 Auto Zoom (ADF)..........................................................................................................................................................I-34
5.3.11 Specify Default Tray when APS Off..............................................................................................................................I-34
5.3.12 Select Tray for Insert Sheet..........................................................................................................................................I-34
5.3.13 Half-Fold Specification..................................................................................................................................................I-34
5.3.14 Print Jobs During Copy Operation................................................................................................................................I-35
5.3.15 Automatic Image Rotation............................................................................................................................................I-35
5.3.16 Finishing Program.........................................................................................................................................................I-35
5.3.17 Card Shot Settings........................................................................................................................................................I-35
ix
5.4 Scan/Fax Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................I-36

5.4.1 JPEG Compression Level...............................................................................................................................................I-36
5.4.2 Black Compression Level...............................................................................................................................................I-36
5.4.3 TWAIN Lock Time...........................................................................................................................................................I-36
5.4.4 Default Scan/Fax Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-36
5.4.5 Default Enlarge Display Settings....................................................................................................................................I-37
5.4.6 Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level.........................................................................................................................I-37
5.4.7 Color TIFF Type..............................................................................................................................................................I-37
5.4.8 OCR Operation Setting...................................................................................................................................................I-37
5.4.9 Graphic Outlining............................................................................................................................................................I-38
5.5 Printer Settings.........................................................................................................................................................................I-38
5.5.1 Basic Settings.................................................................................................................................................................I-38
5.5.2 Paper Setting..................................................................................................................................................................I-40
5.5.3 PCL Settings...................................................................................................................................................................I-41
5.5.4 PS Setting.......................................................................................................................................................................I-42
5.5.5 XPS Settings...................................................................................................................................................................I-42
5.5.6 Print Reports...................................................................................................................................................................I-42
5.5.7 TIFF Image Paper Setting..............................................................................................................................................I-43
5.6 Change Password.....................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.6.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.6.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.7 Change E-mail Address............................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.7.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.7.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.8 Change Icon..............................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.8.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.8.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.9 Register Authentication Settings...............................................................................................................................................I-43
5.9.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.10 Register Authentication Settings-Default Application Selection..............................................................................................I-44
5.10.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.10.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.11 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting....................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.11.1 Link File Error Notification.............................................................................................................................................I-44
5.11.2 Proxy Server Use..........................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.11.3 Print Settings................................................................................................................................................................I-44
6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS)..................................................................................................................I-45

Administrator Settings-Outline.........................................................................................................................................................I-45
6.1 System Settings-Power Save Settings.....................................................................................................................................I-45
6.1.1 Low Power Mode Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-45
6.1.2 Sleep Mode Settings.......................................................................................................................................................I-45
6.1.3 Power Save Key.............................................................................................................................................................I-45
6.1.4 Enter Power Save Mode.................................................................................................................................................I-45
6.1.5 Auto Power OFF Setting.................................................................................................................................................I-46
6.2 System Settings-Output Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-46
6.2.1 Print/Fax Output Settings................................................................................................................................................I-46
6.2.2 Output Tray Settings.......................................................................................................................................................I-46
6.2.3 Shift Output Each Job.....................................................................................................................................................I-46
6.3 Date/Time Settings...................................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.3.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.3.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.4 System Settings-Daylight Saving Time.....................................................................................................................................I-47
6.4.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.4.2 Default setting.................................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.4.3 Setting item.....................................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.5 System Settings-Weekly Timer Settings...................................................................................................................................I-47
6.5.1 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings.....................................................................................................................................I-47
6.5.2 Time Settings..................................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.5.3 Date Settings..................................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.5.4 Select Time for Power Save...........................................................................................................................................I-47
6.5.5 Password for Non-Business Hours.................................................................................................................................I-48
6.6 System Settings-Restrict User Access.....................................................................................................................................I-48
6.6.1 Copy Program Lock Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-48
6.6.2 Delete Saved Copy Program..........................................................................................................................................I-48
6.6.3 Restrict Access to Job Settings......................................................................................................................................I-48
6.6.4 Restrict Operation...........................................................................................................................................................I-50
6.7 System Settings-Expert Adjustment.........................................................................................................................................I-50
Expert Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................................I-50
6.7.1 AE Level Adjustment......................................................................................................................................................I-50
6.7.2 Printer Adjustment-Leading Edge Adjustment................................................................................................................I-50
6.7.3 Printer Adjustment-Centering.........................................................................................................................................I-51

6.7.4 Printer Adjustment-Leading Edge Adjustment: Duplex Side 2.......................................................................................I-51
6.7.5 Printer Adjustment-Centering: Duplex 2nd Side.............................................................................................................I-52
6.7.6 Printer Adjustment-Erase Leading Edge........................................................................................................................I-52
6.7.7 Printer Adjustment-Vertical Adjustment..........................................................................................................................I-53
6.7.8 Printer Adjustment-Media Adjustment............................................................................................................................I-53
6.7.9 Finisher Adjustment-Center Staple Position...................................................................................................................I-54
6.7.10 Finisher Adjustment-Half-Fold Position........................................................................................................................I-54
6.7.11 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment.........................................................................................I-55
6.7.12 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment...........................................................................................I-56
6.7.13 Finisher Adjustment-Paper Alignment Plate Settings...................................................................................................I-56
6.7.14 Paper Separation Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................I-56
6.7.15 Gradation Adjustment...................................................................................................................................................I-56
6.7.16 Scanner Area................................................................................................................................................................I-58
6.7.17 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge......................................................................................................I-58
6.7.18 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Centering.............................................................................................................I-59
6.7.19 Scanner Area-Horizontal Adjustment...........................................................................................................................I-59
6.7.20 Scanner Area-Vertical Adjustment................................................................................................................................I-60
6.7.21 ADF Adjustment............................................................................................................................................................I-61
6.7.22 ADF Adjustment-Centering...........................................................................................................................................I-61
6.7.23 ADF Adjustment-Original Stop Position........................................................................................................................I-61
6.7.24 ADF Adjustment-Centering Auto Adjustment...............................................................................................................I-62
6.7.25 ADF Adjustment-Auto Adj. of Stop Position..................................................................................................................I-62
6.7.26 Line Detection-Prior Detection Setting..........................................................................................................................I-62
6.7.27 Line Detection-Feed Cleaning Settings........................................................................................................................I-63
6.7.28 User Paper Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-63
6.7.29 Erase Adjustment-Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings.....................................................................................I-64
6.7.30 Maximum Density Adjustment......................................................................................................................................I-64
6.7.31 Drum Dry......................................................................................................................................................................I-64
6.7.32 Replenish Toner...........................................................................................................................................................I-64
6.7.33 PS Designer Settings....................................................................................................................................................I-65
6.8 System Settings-List/Counter...................................................................................................................................................I-65
6.8.1 Management List............................................................................................................................................................I-65
6.8.2 Paper Size/Type Counter...............................................................................................................................................I-65
6.8.3 Meter Counter List..........................................................................................................................................................I-65
6.8.4 Check Consumables List................................................................................................................................................I-66
6.9 System Settings-Reset Settings...............................................................................................................................................I-66
6.9.1 System Auto Reset.........................................................................................................................................................I-66
6.9.2 Auto Reset......................................................................................................................................................................I-66
6.9.3 Job Reset........................................................................................................................................................................I-66
6.10 System Settings-User Box Settings........................................................................................................................................I-67
6.10.1 Delete Unused User Box..............................................................................................................................................I-67
6.10.2 Delete Secure Print Documents...................................................................................................................................I-67
6.10.3 Auto Delete Secure Document.....................................................................................................................................I-68
6.10.4 Encrypted PDF Delete Time.........................................................................................................................................I-68
6.10.5 ID & Print Delete Time..........................................................................................................................................I-68
6.10.6 Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................................................I-68
6.10.7 External Memory Function Settings..............................................................................................................................I-69
6.10.8 Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................................................I-69
6.10.9 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting......................................................................................................................I-69
6.10.10 Document Delete Time Setting...................................................................................................................................I-69
6.11 System Settings-Standard Size Setting..................................................................................................................................I-70
6.11.1 Original Glass Original Size Detect..............................................................................................................................I-70
6.11.2 Foolscap Size Setting...................................................................................................................................................I-70
6.12 System Settings-Stamp Settings............................................................................................................................................I-70
6.12.1 Header/Footer Settings.................................................................................................................................................I-70
6.12.2 Fax TX Settings............................................................................................................................................................I-70
6.13 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings............................................................................................................................I-70
6.13.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-70
6.13.2 Default setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-70
6.13.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-70
6.14 System Settings-Application Key Settings..............................................................................................................................I-71
6.14.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.14.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.15 System Settings-Skip Job Operation Settings........................................................................................................................I-71
6.15.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.15.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.16 System Settings-Default Bypass Paper Type Setting.............................................................................................................I-71
6.16.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.16.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-71
xi
6.17 System Settings-Page Number Print Position........................................................................................................................I-71

6.17.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.17.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.18 System Settings-Advanced Preview Setting...........................................................................................................................I-71
6.18.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.18.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.19 Administrator/Machine Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-71
6.19.1 Administrator Registration............................................................................................................................................I-71
6.19.2 Input Machine Address.................................................................................................................................................I-72
6.20 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create One-Touch Destination........................................................................................I-72
6.20.1 Address Book...............................................................................................................................................................I-72
6.20.2 Group............................................................................................................................................................................I-73
6.20.3 E-mail Settings..............................................................................................................................................................I-73
6.21 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create User Box..............................................................................................................I-73
6.21.1 Public/Personal User Box.............................................................................................................................................I-73
6.21.2 Confidential RX User Box.............................................................................................................................................I-73
6.21.3 Bulletin Board User Box................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.21.4 Relay User Box.............................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.21.5 Annotation User Box.....................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.22 One-Touch/User Box Registration-One-Touch/User Box Registration List............................................................................I-74
6.22.1 Address Book List.........................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.22.2 Group List.....................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.22.3 Program List.................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.22.4 E-mail Subject/Text List................................................................................................................................................I-75
6.23 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Maximum Number of User Boxes....................................................................................I-75
6.23.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-75
6.23.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-75
6.24 User Authentication/Account Track-General Settings.............................................................................................................I-75
6.24.1 User Authentication......................................................................................................................................................I-75
6.24.2 Public User Access.......................................................................................................................................................I-75
6.24.3 Account Track...............................................................................................................................................................I-75
6.24.4 Account Track Input Method.........................................................................................................................................I-76
6.24.5 Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track..............................................................................................I-76
6.24.6 When # of Jobs Reach Maximum.................................................................................................................................I-76
6.24.7 Number of User Counters Assigned.............................................................................................................................I-76
6.24.8 Ticket Hold Time Setting...............................................................................................................................................I-77
6.25 User Authentication/Account Track-User Authentication Setting............................................................................................I-77
6.25.1 Administrative Setting-User Name List.........................................................................................................................I-77
6.25.2 Administrative Setting-Default Function Permission.....................................................................................................I-77
6.25.3 Administrative Setting-ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................I-77
6.25.4 Administrative Setting-ID & Print Operation Settings............................................................................................I-78
6.25.5 Administrative Setting-Default Operation Selection......................................................................................................I-78
6.25.6 User Registration..........................................................................................................................................................I-78
6.25.7 User Counter................................................................................................................................................................I-78
6.26 User Authentication/Account Track-Account Track Setting....................................................................................................I-78
6.26.1 Account Track Registration...........................................................................................................................................I-79
6.26.2 Account Track Counter.................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.27 User Authentication/Account Track-Print without Authentication............................................................................................I-79
6.27.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.27.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.28 User Authentication/Account Track-Print Counter List............................................................................................................I-79
6.28.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.28.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.29 External Server Settings.........................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.29.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.29.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.29.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.30 User Authentication/Account Track-Limiting Access to Destinations......................................................................................I-80
6.30.1 Create Group................................................................................................................................................................I-80
6.30.2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations............................................................................................................................I-80
6.30.3 Apply Levels/Groups to Users......................................................................................................................................I-80
6.31 User Authentication/Account Track-Authentication Device Settings.......................................................................................I-80
6.31.1 General Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-80
6.31.2 Logoff Settings..............................................................................................................................................................I-80
6.32 User Authentication/Account Track-Auth/Acct Track Common Setting..................................................................................I-81
6.32.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-81
6.32.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-81
xii
6.33 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Home Settings...................................................................................................I-81

6.33.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-81
6.33.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-81
6.34 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Authorized Folder Settings................................................................................I-81
6.34.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-81
6.34.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-81
6.35 Network Settings-TCP/IP Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-81
6.35.1 TCP/IP Settings............................................................................................................................................................I-81
6.35.2 IPv4 Settings.................................................................................................................................................................I-81
6.35.3 IPv6 Settings.................................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.35.4 DNS Host......................................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.35.5 DNS Domain.................................................................................................................................................................I-83
6.35.6 DNS Server Settings (IPv4)..........................................................................................................................................I-83
6.35.7 DNS Server Settings (IPv6)..........................................................................................................................................I-83
6.35.8 IPsec Settings...............................................................................................................................................................I-84
6.35.9 IPsec Settings-IKE Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-84
6.35.10 IPsec Settings-IPsec SA Settings...............................................................................................................................I-85
6.35.11 IPsec Settings-Peer....................................................................................................................................................I-86
6.35.12 IP Filtering...................................................................................................................................................................I-87
6.35.13 RAW Port Number......................................................................................................................................................I-87
6.35.14 LLMNR Setting...........................................................................................................................................................I-87
6.36 Network Setting-NetWare Settings.........................................................................................................................................I-87
6.36.1 IPX Settings..................................................................................................................................................................I-87
6.36.2 NetWare Print Settings.................................................................................................................................................I-88
6.36.3 P Server Settings..........................................................................................................................................................I-88
6.36.4 Nprinter/Rprinter Settings.............................................................................................................................................I-89
6.36.5 User Authentication Setting (NDS)...............................................................................................................................I-89
6.37 Network Settings-http Server Settings....................................................................................................................................I-89
6.37.1 http Server Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-90
6.37.2 PSWC Settings.............................................................................................................................................................I-90
6.37.3 IPP Settings..................................................................................................................................................................I-90
6.37.4 Accept IPP jobs............................................................................................................................................................I-90
6.37.5 Support Information......................................................................................................................................................I-90
6.37.6 Printer Information........................................................................................................................................................I-90
6.37.7 IPP Authentication Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-91
6.37.8 Authentication Method..................................................................................................................................................I-91
6.37.9 User Name....................................................................................................................................................................I-91
6.37.10 Password....................................................................................................................................................................I-91
6.37.11 realm...........................................................................................................................................................................I-91
6.38 Network Settings-FTP Settings...............................................................................................................................................I-91
6.38.1 FTP TX Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-91
6.38.2 FTP Server Settings.....................................................................................................................................................I-92
6.39 Network Settings-SMB Setting................................................................................................................................................I-92
6.39.1 Client Settings...............................................................................................................................................................I-92
6.39.2 Print Settings................................................................................................................................................................I-93
6.39.3 WINS Settings..............................................................................................................................................................I-94
6.39.4 Direct Hosting Setting...................................................................................................................................................I-94
6.40 Network Settings-LDAP Settings............................................................................................................................................I-94
6.40.1 Enabling LDAP.............................................................................................................................................................I-95
6.40.2 Setting Up LDAP...........................................................................................................................................................I-95
6.40.3 Default LDAP Server Setting........................................................................................................................................I-98
6.41 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-E-mail TX (SMTP).............................................................................................................I-98
6.41.1 E-mail TX (SMTP).........................................................................................................................................................I-98
6.41.2 Scan to E-mail..............................................................................................................................................................I-98
6.41.3 Status Notification.........................................................................................................................................................I-98
6.41.4 Total Counter Notification.............................................................................................................................................I-99
6.41.5 SMTP Server Address..................................................................................................................................................I-99
6.41.6 Binary Division..............................................................................................................................................................I-99
6.41.7 Divided Mail Size..........................................................................................................................................................I-99
6.41.8 Connection Timeout......................................................................................................................................................I-99
6.41.9 Server Capacity............................................................................................................................................................I-99
6.41.10 SSL/TLS Setting.......................................................................................................................................................I-100
6.41.11 Port No......................................................................................................................................................................I-100
6.41.12 Port Number (SSL)...................................................................................................................................................I-100
6.41.13 Certificate Verification Level Settings.......................................................................................................................I-100
6.41.14 Detail Settings: SMTP Authentication.......................................................................................................................I-100
6.41.15 Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Authentication...................................................................................................I-100
6.41.16 Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Time.................................................................................................................I-101
xiii
6.42 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-E-mail RX (POP).............................................................................................................I-101

6.42.1 E-mail RX (POP).........................................................................................................................................................I-101
6.42.2 POP Server Address..................................................................................................................................................I-101
6.42.3 Connection Timeout....................................................................................................................................................I-101
6.42.4 SSL Setting.................................................................................................................................................................I-101
6.42.5 Port No........................................................................................................................................................................I-101
6.42.6 Port Number (SSL).....................................................................................................................................................I-102
6.42.7 Certificate Verification Level Settings.........................................................................................................................I-102
6.42.8 Login Name................................................................................................................................................................I-102
6.42.9 Password....................................................................................................................................................................I-102
6.42.10 APOP Authentication................................................................................................................................................I-102
6.42.11 Check for New Messages.........................................................................................................................................I-102
6.42.12 Polling Interval..........................................................................................................................................................I-103
6.43 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-S/MIME Communication Settings...................................................................................I-103
6.43.1 S/MIME Communication Settings...............................................................................................................................I-103
6.43.2 Digital Signature.........................................................................................................................................................I-103
6.43.3 E-mail Text Encryption Method...................................................................................................................................I-103
6.43.4 Print S/MIME Information............................................................................................................................................I-103
6.43.5 Automatically Obtain Certificates................................................................................................................................I-104
6.44 Network Settings-SNMP Setting...........................................................................................................................................I-104
6.44.1 SNMP Setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-104
6.44.2 UDP Port Number.......................................................................................................................................................I-105
6.44.3 SNMP v1/v2c Settings................................................................................................................................................I-105
6.44.4 SNMP v3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................................I-105
6.45 Network Settings-AppleTalk Settings....................................................................................................................................I-107
6.45.1 AppleTalk Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-107
6.45.2 Printer Name...............................................................................................................................................................I-108
6.45.3 Zone Name.................................................................................................................................................................I-108
6.45.4 Current Zone...............................................................................................................................................................I-108
6.46 Network Settings-Bonjour Setting.........................................................................................................................................I-108
6.46.1 Bonjour Setting...........................................................................................................................................................I-108
6.46.2 Bonjour Name.............................................................................................................................................................I-108
6.47 Network Settings-TCP Socket Settings................................................................................................................................I-108
6.47.1 TCP Socket.................................................................................................................................................................I-108
6.47.2 TCP Socket (ASCII Mode)..........................................................................................................................................I-109
6.48 Network Settings-Network Fax Setting.................................................................................................................................I-109
6.48.1 Network Fax Setting...................................................................................................................................................I-109
6.48.2 SMTP TX Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-110
6.48.3 SMTP RX Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-110
6.49 Network Settings-WebDAV Settings-WebDAV Client Settings.............................................................................................I-110
6.49.1 WebDAV Client Setting...............................................................................................................................................I-110
6.49.2 Proxy Server Address.................................................................................................................................................I-111
6.49.3 Proxy Server Port Number..........................................................................................................................................I-111
6.49.4 User Name..................................................................................................................................................................I-111
6.49.5 Password....................................................................................................................................................................I-111
6.49.7 Server Authentication Character Code.......................................................................................................................I-111
6.50 Network Settings-WebDAV Settings-WebDAV Server Settings...........................................................................................I-112
6.50.1 WebDAV Server Settings...........................................................................................................................................I-112
6.50.2 SSL Setting.................................................................................................................................................................I-112
6.50.3 Password Setting........................................................................................................................................................I-112
6.51 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Web Service Common Settings............................................................................I-112
6.51.1 Friendly Name............................................................................................................................................................I-112
6.51.2 Publication Service.....................................................................................................................................................I-112
6.51.3 SSL Setting.................................................................................................................................................................I-112
6.52 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Printer Settings.....................................................................................................I-113
6.52.1 Printer Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-113
6.52.2 Printer Name...............................................................................................................................................................I-113
6.52.3 Printer Location...........................................................................................................................................................I-113
6.52.4 Printer Information......................................................................................................................................................I-113
6.53 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Scanner Settings...................................................................................................I-114
6.53.1 Scanner Settings........................................................................................................................................................I-114
6.53.2 Scanner Name............................................................................................................................................................I-114
6.53.3 Scanner Location........................................................................................................................................................I-114
6.53.4 Scanner Information...................................................................................................................................................I-114
6.54 Network Settings-SSDP Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-114
xiv
6.54.1 SSDP Settings............................................................................................................................................................I-114

6.54.2 Multicast TTL Setting..................................................................................................................................................I-114
6.55 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Device Setting..................................................................................................................I-115
6.55.1 MAC Address..............................................................................................................................................................I-115
6.55.2 Network Speed...........................................................................................................................................................I-115
6.55.3 LLTD Setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-115
6.56 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Time Adjustment Setting..................................................................................................I-115
6.56.1 Time Adjustment Setting.............................................................................................................................................I-115
6.56.2 Auto IPv6 Retrieval.....................................................................................................................................................I-115
6.56.3 NTP Server Setting.....................................................................................................................................................I-116
6.56.4 Auto Time Adjustment................................................................................................................................................I-116
6.56.5 Polling Interval............................................................................................................................................................I-116
6.57 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Status Notification Setting................................................................................................I-116
6.57.1 Register Notification Address (IP Address)................................................................................................................I-116
6.57.2 Register Notification Address (IPX Address)..............................................................................................................I-116
6.57.3 Register Notification Address (E-mail Address)..........................................................................................................I-117
6.58 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Total Counter Notification Settings...................................................................................I-117
6.58.1 Notification Schedule Setting......................................................................................................................................I-117
6.58.2 Notification Address Setting........................................................................................................................................I-117
6.58.3 Model Name...............................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.58.4 Send Now...................................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.59 Network Settings-Detail Settings-PING Confirmation...........................................................................................................I-117
6.59.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.59.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.60 Network Settings-Detail Settings-SLP Setting......................................................................................................................I-117
6.60.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.60.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.60.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.61 Network Settings-Detail Settings-LPD Setting......................................................................................................................I-118
6.61.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.61.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.62 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Prefix/Suffix Setting..........................................................................................................I-118
6.62.1 ON/OFF Setting..........................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.62.2 Prefix/Suffix Setting....................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.63 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Error Code Display Setting...............................................................................................I-118
6.63.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.63.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.64 Network Settings-IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings........................................................................................................I-118
6.64.1 IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings..........................................................................................................................I-118
6.64.2 Auth. Status................................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.64.3 Reset Job Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.65 Network Settings-Web Browser Setting................................................................................................................................I-119
6.65.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.65.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.66 Network Settings-Bluetooth Setting......................................................................................................................................I-119
6.66.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.66.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.67 Copier Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.67.1 Auto Zoom (Platen).....................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.67.2 Auto Zoom (ADF)........................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.67.3 Specify Default Tray when APS OFF.........................................................................................................................I-120
6.67.4 Select Tray for Insert Sheet........................................................................................................................................I-120
6.67.5 Print Jobs During Copy Operation..............................................................................................................................I-120
6.67.6 Automatic Image Rotation..........................................................................................................................................I-120
6.67.7 Card Shot Settings-Layout..........................................................................................................................................I-120
6.67.8 Card Shot Settings-Zoom...........................................................................................................................................I-121
6.67.9 Card Shot Settings-Store Original Size......................................................................................................................I-121
6.68 Printer Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.68.1 USB Timeout..............................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.68.2 Network Timeout.........................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.68.3 Print XPS Errors.........................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.68.4 PSWC Direct Print......................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.68.5 Assign Account to Acquire Device Info.......................................................................................................................I-122
6.69 Fax Settings-NOTE...............................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.70 Fax Settings-Header Information..........................................................................................................................................I-122
xv
6.70.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.70.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.71 Fax Settings-Header/Footer Position....................................................................................................................................I-122
6.71.1 Header Position..........................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.71.2 Print Receiver's Name................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.71.3 Footer Position............................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.72 Fax Settings-Line Parameter Setting....................................................................................................................................I-123
6.72.1 Dialing Method............................................................................................................................................................I-123
6.72.2 Receive Mode.............................................................................................................................................................I-123
6.72.3 Number of RX Call Rings (Receive Time Interval Setting).........................................................................................I-123
6.72.4 Number of Redials......................................................................................................................................................I-123
6.72.5 Redial Interval.............................................................................................................................................................I-124
6.72.6 Line Monitor Sound.....................................................................................................................................................I-124
6.72.7 Line Monitor Sound Volume (Send)............................................................................................................................I-124
6.72.8 Line Monitor Sound Volume (Receive).......................................................................................................................I-124
6.73 Fax Settings-TX/RX Settings................................................................................................................................................I-124
6.73.1 Duplex Print (RX)........................................................................................................................................................I-124
6.73.2 Letter/Ledger over A4/A3............................................................................................................................................I-125
6.73.3 Print Paper Selection..................................................................................................................................................I-125
6.73.4 Print Paper Size..........................................................................................................................................................I-125
6.73.5 Incorrect User Box No. Entry......................................................................................................................................I-125
6.73.6 Tray Selection for RX Print.........................................................................................................................................I-125
6.73.7 Min. Reduction for RX Print........................................................................................................................................I-126
6.73.8 Print Separate Fax Pages...........................................................................................................................................I-126
6.73.9 File After Polling TX....................................................................................................................................................I-126
6.73.10 No. of Sets (RX)........................................................................................................................................................I-126
6.73.11 Individual Receiving Line Setup................................................................................................................................I-126
6.73.12 Individual Sender Line Setup....................................................................................................................................I-126
6.74 Fax Settings-Function Settings-Function ON/OFF Setting...................................................................................................I-127
6.74.1 F-Code TX..................................................................................................................................................................I-127
6.74.2 Relay RX.....................................................................................................................................................................I-127
6.74.3 Relay Printing.............................................................................................................................................................I-127
6.74.4 Destination Check Display Function...........................................................................................................................I-128
6.74.5 Confirm Address (TX).................................................................................................................................................I-128
6.74.6 Confirm Address (Register)........................................................................................................................................I-128
6.75 Fax Settings-Function Settings.............................................................................................................................................I-128
6.75.1 Memory RX Setting.....................................................................................................................................................I-128
6.75.2 Closed Network RX....................................................................................................................................................I-128
6.75.3 Forward TX Setting.....................................................................................................................................................I-128
6.75.4 Incomplete TX Hold....................................................................................................................................................I-129
6.75.5 PC-Fax RX Setting.....................................................................................................................................................I-129
6.75.6 TSI User Box Setting..................................................................................................................................................I-129
6.76 Fax Settings-PBX Connection Setting..................................................................................................................................I-130
6.76.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-130
6.77 Fax Settings-Report Settings................................................................................................................................................I-130
6.77.1 Activity Report.............................................................................................................................................................I-130
6.77.2 TX Result Report........................................................................................................................................................I-131
6.77.3 Sequential TX Report.................................................................................................................................................I-131
6.77.4 Timer Reservation TX Report.....................................................................................................................................I-131
6.77.5 Confidential RX Report...............................................................................................................................................I-131
6.77.6 Bulletin TX Report.......................................................................................................................................................I-131
6.77.7 Relay TX Result Report..............................................................................................................................................I-131
6.77.8 Relay Request Report................................................................................................................................................I-132
6.77.9 PC-Fax TX Error Report.............................................................................................................................................I-132
6.77.10 Broadcast Result Report...........................................................................................................................................I-132
6.77.11 TX Result Report Check...........................................................................................................................................I-132
6.77.12 Network Fax RX Error Report...................................................................................................................................I-132
6.77.13 MDN Message..........................................................................................................................................................I-133
6.77.14 DSN Message...........................................................................................................................................................I-133
6.77.15 Print E-mail Message Body......................................................................................................................................I-133
6.78 Fax Settings-Job Settings List..............................................................................................................................................I-133
6.78.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-133
6.78.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-133
6.79 Fax Settings-Multi Line Settings...........................................................................................................................................I-133
6.79.1 Line Parameter Setting-Dialing Method......................................................................................................................I-134
6.79.2 Line Parameter Setting-Number of Rx Call Rings......................................................................................................I-134
6.79.3 Line Parameter Setting-Line Monitor Sound...............................................................................................................I-134
6.79.4 Function Settings-PC-FAX TX Setting........................................................................................................................I-134
6.79.5 Multi Line Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-134
xvi
6.79.6 Sender Fax No............................................................................................................................................................I-135

6.80 Fax Settings-Network Fax Settings.......................................................................................................................................I-135
6.80.1 Black Compression Level...........................................................................................................................................I-135
6.80.2 Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method....................................................................................................I-135
6.80.3 SIP Adaptor Connection Check..................................................................................................................................I-135
6.80.4 Internet Fax Self RX Ability.........................................................................................................................................I-135
6.80.5 Internet Fax Advanced Settings..................................................................................................................................I-136
6.80.6 IP Address Fax Operation Settings............................................................................................................................I-137
6.81 Fax Settings-Fax Print Quality Settings................................................................................................................................I-137
6.81.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-137
6.81.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-137
6.82 System Connection...............................................................................................................................................................I-137
6.82.1 OpenAPI Settings-Access Setting..............................................................................................................................I-137
6.82.2 OpenAPI Settings-SSL/Port Settings..........................................................................................................................I-138
6.82.3 OpenAPI Settings-Authentication...............................................................................................................................I-138
6.82.4 Call Remote Center....................................................................................................................................................I-138
6.82.5 Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting...................................................................................................................................I-138
6.82.6 Printer Information......................................................................................................................................................I-139
6.82.7 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting........................................................................................................................................I-139
6.83 Security Settings-Administrator Password............................................................................................................................I-139
6.83.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-139
6.83.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-139
6.84 Security Settings-User Box Admin. Setting...........................................................................................................................I-139
6.84.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-139
6.84.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-139
6.85 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels...................................................................................................................I-140
6.85.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-140
6.85.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-140
6.86 Security Settings-Security Details.........................................................................................................................................I-140
6.86.1 Password Rules..........................................................................................................................................................I-140
6.86.2 Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error........................................................................................................I-141
6.86.3 Confidential Document Access Method......................................................................................................................I-141
6.86.4 Manual Destination Input............................................................................................................................................I-141
6.86.5 Print Data Capture......................................................................................................................................................I-142
6.86.6 Job Log Settings.........................................................................................................................................................I-142
6.86.7 Restrict Fax TX...........................................................................................................................................................I-142
6.86.8 Hide Personal Information..........................................................................................................................................I-143
6.86.9 Hide Personal Information (MIB)................................................................................................................................I-143
6.86.10 Display Activity Log...................................................................................................................................................I-143
6.86.11 Initialize.....................................................................................................................................................................I-143
6.86.12 Job History Thumbnail Display.................................................................................................................................I-143
6.86.13 Secure Print Only......................................................................................................................................................I-144
6.86.14 Copy Guard..............................................................................................................................................................I-144
6.86.15 Web browser contents access..................................................................................................................................I-144
6.86.16 Web browser contents access..................................................................................................................................I-144
6.87 Security Settings-Enhanced Security Mode..........................................................................................................................I-145
6.87.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-145
6.87.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-145
6.88 Security Settings-HDD Settings/SSD Settings......................................................................................................................I-146
6.88.1 Check HDD Capacity/Check SSD Capacity...............................................................................................................I-146
6.88.2 Overwrite HDD Data...................................................................................................................................................I-146
6.88.3 Overwrite All Data.......................................................................................................................................................I-147
6.88.4 HDD Lock Password...................................................................................................................................................I-148
6.88.5 Format HDD................................................................................................................................................................I-148
6.88.6 Format SSD................................................................................................................................................................I-148
6.88.7 HDD Encryption Setting..............................................................................................................................................I-149
6.89 Security Settings-Function Management Setting..................................................................................................................I-149
6.89.1 Each Function Setting.................................................................................................................................................I-149
6.89.2 Max Copy Set.............................................................................................................................................................I-149
6.89.3 Network Function Usage Settings..............................................................................................................................I-150
6.89.4 Authentication Time Setting........................................................................................................................................I-150
6.90 Security Settings-Stamp Settings.........................................................................................................................................I-151
6.90.1 Apply Stamps..............................................................................................................................................................I-151
6.90.2 Delete Registered Stamp............................................................................................................................................I-151
6.91 Security Settings-Image Log Transfer Settings....................................................................................................................I-151
6.91.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-151
xvii

6.91.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-151
6.92 Security Settings-Driver Password Encryption Setting.........................................................................................................I-151
6.92.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-151
6.92.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-152
6.93 License Settings....................................................................................................................................................................I-152
6.93.1 Get Request Code......................................................................................................................................................I-152
6.93.2 Install License.............................................................................................................................................................I-152
6.93.3 List of Enabled Functions...........................................................................................................................................I-152
6.94 Restriction Code Setting-Restriction Code Setting...............................................................................................................I-152
6.94.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-152
7. UTILITY (OTHER SETTINGS).................................................................................................................................I-153

7.1 My Panel Settings...................................................................................................................................................................I-153
7.1.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-153
7.1.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-153
7.2 Device Information..................................................................................................................................................................I-153
7.2.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-153
7.2.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-153
7.3 Meter Count............................................................................................................................................................................I-153
7.3.1 Counter details..............................................................................................................................................................I-153
8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST.......................................................................................................................................I-155

8.1 Replace paper feed roller........................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.2 Replace separation roller assy................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.3 Change marketing area..........................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.4 Install LCT...............................................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.5 Replace CCD unit...................................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.6 Replace mirror unit..................................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.7 Replace developing unit..........................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.8 Replace drum unit...................................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.9 Replace developer..................................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.10 Replace transfer roller unit....................................................................................................................................................I-155
8.11 Replace fusing unit...............................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.12 Replace ozone filter..............................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.13 Replace paper dust remover.................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.14 Replace PH unit....................................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.15 Replace original size detection sensor.................................................................................................................................I-156
8.16 Wind scanner drive cables....................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.17 Replace scanner motor.........................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.18 Replace exposure unit/LED exposure unit............................................................................................................................I-156
8.19 Replace scanner home sensor.............................................................................................................................................I-156
8.20 Replace printer control board................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.21 Replace MFP board..............................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.22 Replace original glass...........................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.23 Replace hard disk.................................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.24 Install hard disk.....................................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.25 Execute initialize...................................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.26 Execute add. option..............................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.27 Execute F/W update.............................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.28 Add fax board........................................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.29 Replace DF control board.....................................................................................................................................................I-157
9. INHIBITED COMBINATIONS...................................................................................................................................I-158
9.1 Scan Setting............................................................................................................................................................................I-158
9.1.1 Original Image Type.....................................................................................................................................................I-158
9.1.2 Density..........................................................................................................................................................................I-158
9.1.3 Simplex/Duplex.............................................................................................................................................................I-158
9.1.4 Resolution.....................................................................................................................................................................I-158
9.1.5 Special Original.............................................................................................................................................................I-159
9.1.6 Bind Position.................................................................................................................................................................I-159
9.1.7 Number of Original........................................................................................................................................................I-159
9.1.8 Scan Size......................................................................................................................................................................I-159
9.1.9 Frame Erase.................................................................................................................................................................I-162
9.1.10 Background Adjustment..............................................................................................................................................I-162
9.1.11 TX Stamp....................................................................................................................................................................I-162
9.1.12 Sharpness...................................................................................................................................................................I-162
9.1.13 File Type.....................................................................................................................................................................I-162
9.2 Comm. Setting........................................................................................................................................................................I-162
9.2.1 Quick Memory TX.........................................................................................................................................................I-162
9.2.2 Memory TX (Quick Memory TX OFF)...........................................................................................................................I-163
9.2.3 Memory TX (=Quick Memory TX OFF).........................................................................................................................I-163
xviii
9.2.4 F-Code TX....................................................................................................................................................................I-163

9.2.5 Polling RX.....................................................................................................................................................................I-163
9.2.6 Timer TX.......................................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.2.7 Password TX................................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.2.8 Oversea TX...................................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.2.9 ECM OFF......................................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.2.10 V34 OFF.....................................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.2.11 Line Selection.............................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.2.12 URL Information..........................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.3 Others.....................................................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.3.1 Separate Scan..............................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.3.2 Multiple Destination Select...........................................................................................................................................I-165
9.3.3 Scan To E-Mail.............................................................................................................................................................I-165
9.3.4 Scan To Box.................................................................................................................................................................I-165
9.3.5 Scan Mode....................................................................................................................................................................I-165
9.4 Caution when using prefix/suffix auto setting (North American users only)............................................................................I-165
10. LIST OF SERVICE MODE......................................................................................................................................I-166

10.1 List of service mode (outline)................................................................................................................................................I-166
10.2 List of service mode (detail)..................................................................................................................................................I-166
10.2.1 Machine......................................................................................................................................................................I-166
10.2.2 Imaging Process Adjustment......................................................................................................................................I-167
10.2.3 CS Remote Care........................................................................................................................................................I-168
10.2.4 System 1.....................................................................................................................................................................I-169
10.2.5 System 2.....................................................................................................................................................................I-169
10.2.6 Counter.......................................................................................................................................................................I-170
10.2.7 List Output..................................................................................................................................................................I-171
10.2.8 State Confirmation......................................................................................................................................................I-171
10.2.9 Test Mode...................................................................................................................................................................I-172
10.2.10 ADF...........................................................................................................................................................................I-172
10.2.11 FAX...........................................................................................................................................................................I-173
10.2.12 Finisher.....................................................................................................................................................................I-173
10.2.13 Internet ISW..............................................................................................................................................................I-174
11. SERVICE MODE....................................................................................................................................................I-175

11.1 Starting/Exiting......................................................................................................................................................................I-175
11.1.1 Starting procedure......................................................................................................................................................I-175
11.1.2 Exiting procedure........................................................................................................................................................I-175
11.2 Date/Time Input mode..........................................................................................................................................................I-175
11.2.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-175
11.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-175
11.3 Machine................................................................................................................................................................................I-176
11.3.1 Fusing Temperature...................................................................................................................................................I-177
11.3.2 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj..................................................................................................................................I-177
11.3.3 Printer Area.................................................................................................................................................................I-177
11.3.4 Tray Printing Position: Tip...........................................................................................................................................I-180
11.3.5 Scan Area...................................................................................................................................................................I-181
11.3.6 Printer Reg. Loop Adj.................................................................................................................................................I-183
11.3.7 Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj...................................................................................................................................I-184
11.3.8 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................I-184
11.3.9 ADF Scan Glass Contamination.................................................................................................................................I-184
11.3.10 Non-Image Area Erase Check..................................................................................................................................I-184
11.3.11 Cooling Fan Stop Delay............................................................................................................................................I-185
11.3.12 Fusing Productivity Choice.......................................................................................................................................I-185
11.3.13 Print Interval Extension.............................................................................................................................................I-185
11.4 Firmware Version..................................................................................................................................................................I-186
11.4.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-187
11.4.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-187
11.5 Imaging Process Adjustment................................................................................................................................................I-188
11.5.1 Gradation Adjust.........................................................................................................................................................I-188
11.5.2 Max Image Density Adj...............................................................................................................................................I-189
11.5.3 TCR Level Setting.......................................................................................................................................................I-190
11.5.4 Image Background Adj...............................................................................................................................................I-190
11.5.5 Transfer Voltage Fine Adj...........................................................................................................................................I-190
11.5.6 TCR Sensor Adjust.....................................................................................................................................................I-191
11.5.7 Paper Separation Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................I-191
11.5.8 Manual Toner Add......................................................................................................................................................I-192
11.5.9 Dot Enhancement.......................................................................................................................................................I-192
11.6 CS Remote Care (Outlines)..................................................................................................................................................I-192
11.7 Setting up the CS Remote Care...........................................................................................................................................I-193
11.7.1 Using the telephone line modem................................................................................................................................I-193
11.7.2 Using the Fax line modem..........................................................................................................................................I-193
xix
11.7.3 Using E-mail...............................................................................................................................................................I-194

11.7.4 When using a WebDAV server in http communication...............................................................................................I-195
11.8 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care............................................................................................................................I-197
11.8.1 Input procedure...........................................................................................................................................................I-197
11.8.2 List of software SW for CS Remote Care...................................................................................................................I-197
11.8.3 SW No. 01..................................................................................................................................................................I-197
11.8.4 SW No. 02..................................................................................................................................................................I-198
11.8.5 SW No. 03..................................................................................................................................................................I-198
11.8.6 SW No. 04..................................................................................................................................................................I-199
11.8.7 SW No. 05..................................................................................................................................................................I-199
11.8.8 SW No. 06..................................................................................................................................................................I-199
11.8.9 SW No. 07..................................................................................................................................................................I-200
11.8.10 SW No. 08................................................................................................................................................................I-200
11.8.11 SW No. 09................................................................................................................................................................I-200
11.8.12 SW No. 10................................................................................................................................................................I-201
11.8.13 SW No. 11................................................................................................................................................................I-201
11.8.14 SW No. 12................................................................................................................................................................I-201
11.8.15 SW No. 14................................................................................................................................................................I-202
11.8.16 SW No. 15................................................................................................................................................................I-202
11.8.17 SW No. 18................................................................................................................................................................I-202
11.8.18 SW No. 21................................................................................................................................................................I-203
11.8.19 SW No. 22................................................................................................................................................................I-203
11.8.20 SW No. 23................................................................................................................................................................I-203
11.9 Detail on settings for CS Remote Care.................................................................................................................................I-204
11.9.1 System Selection........................................................................................................................................................I-204
11.9.2 ID Code.......................................................................................................................................................................I-204
11.9.3 Detail Setting..............................................................................................................................................................I-204
11.9.4 Server Setting (E-Mail1 or E-mail2 is selected.).........................................................................................................I-206
11.9.5 Server Setting (http1 or http2 is selected)..................................................................................................................I-209
11.9.6 Setup confirmation......................................................................................................................................................I-209
11.9.7 Calling the maintenance.............................................................................................................................................I-209
11.9.8 Calling the center from the administrator....................................................................................................................I-210
11.9.9 Checking the transmission log....................................................................................................................................I-210
11.10 System 1.............................................................................................................................................................................I-210
11.10.1 Marketing Area.........................................................................................................................................................I-210
11.10.2 Tel/Fax Number........................................................................................................................................................I-211
11.10.3 Serial Number...........................................................................................................................................................I-211
11.10.4 Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting..................................................................................................................................I-211
11.10.5 Foolscap Size Setting...............................................................................................................................................I-212
11.10.6 Original Size Detection.............................................................................................................................................I-212
11.10.7 Install Date................................................................................................................................................................I-213
11.10.8 Initialization-Clear All Data........................................................................................................................................I-213
11.10.9 Initialization-Clear Individual Data............................................................................................................................I-213
11.10.10 Initialization-System Error Clear.............................................................................................................................I-214
11.10.11 Problem Unit Isolation Set......................................................................................................................................I-214
11.10.12 Machine State LED Setting.....................................................................................................................................I-214
11.11 System 2.............................................................................................................................................................................I-215
11.11.1 HDD..........................................................................................................................................................................I-216
11.11.2 Image Controller Setting...........................................................................................................................................I-216
11.11.3 Option Board Status.................................................................................................................................................I-217
11.11.4 Consumable Life Reminder......................................................................................................................................I-217
11.11.5 Unit Change..............................................................................................................................................................I-217
11.11.6 Software Switch Setting............................................................................................................................................I-218
11.11.7 CCD Calibration........................................................................................................................................................I-218
11.11.8 LCT Paper Size Setting............................................................................................................................................I-219
11.11.9 Line Mag Setting.......................................................................................................................................................I-219
11.11.10 Data Capture..........................................................................................................................................................I-219
11.11.11 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.............................................................................................................................I-221
11.11.12 Stamp.....................................................................................................................................................................I-221
11.11.13 Network Fax Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-222
11.11.14 User Paper Settings................................................................................................................................................I-222
11.11.15 Coverage Rate Screen...........................................................................................................................................I-223
11.11.16 JAM Code Display Setting......................................................................................................................................I-223
11.11.17 BootUp Screen.......................................................................................................................................................I-223
11.11.18 Install Data..............................................................................................................................................................I-224
11.11.19 Bluetooth Settings...................................................................................................................................................I-224
11.11.20 Auto Drum Dry........................................................................................................................................................I-224
11.12 Counter...............................................................................................................................................................................I-225
11.12.1 Common procedure..................................................................................................................................................I-225
11.12.2 Life............................................................................................................................................................................I-225
xx
11.12.3 Service Call Counter.................................................................................................................................................I-226

11.12.4 Section Service Call..................................................................................................................................................I-226
11.12.5 Warning....................................................................................................................................................................I-226
11.12.6 Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................................I-226
11.12.7 Service Total.............................................................................................................................................................I-227
11.12.8 Counter of Each Mode..............................................................................................................................................I-227
11.12.9 Service Call History (Data).......................................................................................................................................I-227
11.12.10 ADF Paper Pages...................................................................................................................................................I-227
11.12.11 Paper Jam History..................................................................................................................................................I-227
11.12.12 Fax Connection Error..............................................................................................................................................I-227
11.12.13 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Counter......................................................................................................................I-227
11.12.14 Jam.........................................................................................................................................................................I-228
11.12.15 Section JAM............................................................................................................................................................I-228
11.13 List Output...........................................................................................................................................................................I-228
11.13.1 Batch List CSV Output..............................................................................................................................................I-228
11.13.2 Machine Management List........................................................................................................................................I-229
11.13.3 Adjustment List.........................................................................................................................................................I-229
11.13.4 Parameter List..........................................................................................................................................................I-229
11.13.5 Service Parameter....................................................................................................................................................I-230
11.13.6 Protocol Trace..........................................................................................................................................................I-231
11.13.7 Fax Setting List.........................................................................................................................................................I-232
11.13.8 Fax Analysis List.......................................................................................................................................................I-235
11.13.9 SIP Protocol Trace....................................................................................................................................................I-235
11.14 State Confirmation..............................................................................................................................................................I-235
11.14.1 Sensor Check...........................................................................................................................................................I-236
11.14.2 Table Number...........................................................................................................................................................I-242
11.14.3 Level History1...........................................................................................................................................................I-242
11.14.4 Level History 2..........................................................................................................................................................I-243
11.14.5 Temp. & Humidity.....................................................................................................................................................I-243
11.14.6 CCD Check...............................................................................................................................................................I-243
11.14.7 Memory.....................................................................................................................................................................I-243
11.14.8 Adjustment Data List.................................................................................................................................................I-247
11.15 Test Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................I-247
11.15.1 Procedure for test pattern output..............................................................................................................................I-247
11.15.2 Gradation Pattern.....................................................................................................................................................I-247
11.15.3 Halftone Pattern........................................................................................................................................................I-248
11.15.4 Lattice Pattern...........................................................................................................................................................I-248
11.15.5 Paper Passage Test.................................................................................................................................................I-249
11.15.6 Fax Test-Signal Send Test.......................................................................................................................................I-249
11.15.7 Fax Test-Signal Receive Test...................................................................................................................................I-251
11.15.8 Fax Test-NCU TEST.................................................................................................................................................I-252
11.16 ADF.....................................................................................................................................................................................I-252
11.16.1 Original Stop Position...............................................................................................................................................I-252
11.16.2 Registration Loop Adj...............................................................................................................................................I-253
11.16.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment.................................................................................................................................I-254
11.16.4 Paper Passage.........................................................................................................................................................I-255
11.16.5 Sensor Check...........................................................................................................................................................I-255
11.16.6 Original Tray Width...................................................................................................................................................I-256
11.16.7 Read Pos Adj............................................................................................................................................................I-257
11.16.8 Feed Zoom...............................................................................................................................................................I-258
11.16.9 Scanning Light Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................I-258
11.16.10 Mixed original Size adjustment...............................................................................................................................I-258
11.16.11 FD-Mag. Adj. (B).....................................................................................................................................................I-259
11.17 FAX setting (Line1).............................................................................................................................................................I-260
11.17.1 Modem/NCU.............................................................................................................................................................I-260
11.17.2 Network.....................................................................................................................................................................I-263
11.17.3 System......................................................................................................................................................................I-265
11.17.4 Fax File Format.........................................................................................................................................................I-268
11.17.5 Communication.........................................................................................................................................................I-268
11.17.6 List Output................................................................................................................................................................I-272
11.17.7 Function Parameter..................................................................................................................................................I-272
11.17.8 Initialization...............................................................................................................................................................I-280
11.18 FAX setting (Line2).............................................................................................................................................................I-281
11.18.1 Modem/NCU.............................................................................................................................................................I-281
11.18.2 Network.....................................................................................................................................................................I-284
11.18.3 Communication.........................................................................................................................................................I-286
11.18.4 Initialization...............................................................................................................................................................I-288
11.19 FAX setting (Address parameter list: for main line and sub line)........................................................................................I-288
11.19.1 0b000*......................................................................................................................................................................I-288
11.19.2 0b001*......................................................................................................................................................................I-291
xxi
11.19.3 0b002*......................................................................................................................................................................I-292
11.19.4 0b003*......................................................................................................................................................................I-293
11.19.5 0b004*, 0b005*.........................................................................................................................................................I-294
11.19.6 0b006*......................................................................................................................................................................I-294
11.19.7 0e000*......................................................................................................................................................................I-295
11.19.8 0e001*......................................................................................................................................................................I-298
11.19.9 0e002*......................................................................................................................................................................I-300
11.19.10 0e003*....................................................................................................................................................................I-300
11.19.11 0e004*....................................................................................................................................................................I-300
11.19.12 0e005*....................................................................................................................................................................I-302
11.19.13 12000*....................................................................................................................................................................I-304
11.19.14 13000*....................................................................................................................................................................I-307
11.19.15 13003*....................................................................................................................................................................I-309
11.19.16 13004*....................................................................................................................................................................I-310
11.19.17 13005*....................................................................................................................................................................I-311
11.19.18 13006*....................................................................................................................................................................I-311
11.19.19 13007*....................................................................................................................................................................I-312
11.19.20 13008*....................................................................................................................................................................I-314
11.20 FAX setting (Address parameter list: for main line)............................................................................................................I-315
11.20.1 0e009*......................................................................................................................................................................I-315
11.20.2 0e00a*......................................................................................................................................................................I-318
11.20.3 0e00b*......................................................................................................................................................................I-320
11.20.4 0e00c*.......................................................................................................................................................................I-322
11.20.5 0e00d*......................................................................................................................................................................I-325
11.20.6 0e00e*......................................................................................................................................................................I-327
11.20.7 0e00f*.......................................................................................................................................................................I-329
11.20.8 0e010*......................................................................................................................................................................I-330
11.20.9 0e011*......................................................................................................................................................................I-332
11.20.10 0f000*.....................................................................................................................................................................I-333
11.20.11 0f001*.....................................................................................................................................................................I-335
11.20.12 10000*....................................................................................................................................................................I-336
11.20.13 10001*....................................................................................................................................................................I-338
11.21 FAX setting (Address parameter list: for sub line)..............................................................................................................I-339
11.21.1 0e01a*......................................................................................................................................................................I-339
11.21.2 0e01b*......................................................................................................................................................................I-341
11.21.3 0e01c*.......................................................................................................................................................................I-343
11.21.4 0e01d*......................................................................................................................................................................I-346
11.21.5 0e01e*......................................................................................................................................................................I-348
11.21.6 0e01f*.......................................................................................................................................................................I-351
11.21.7 0e020*......................................................................................................................................................................I-353
11.21.8 0e021*......................................................................................................................................................................I-354
11.21.9 0e022*......................................................................................................................................................................I-355
11.21.10 0f002*.....................................................................................................................................................................I-356
11.21.11 0f003*.....................................................................................................................................................................I-359
11.21.12 10002*....................................................................................................................................................................I-359
11.21.13 10003*....................................................................................................................................................................I-362
11.22 Finisher...............................................................................................................................................................................I-362
11.22.1 FS-FN adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................I-362
11.22.2 Punch Option Setting................................................................................................................................................I-366
11.22.3 Job Separator...........................................................................................................................................................I-366
11.23 Internet ISW........................................................................................................................................................................I-367
11.23.1 Internet ISW (HTTP Setting).....................................................................................................................................I-367
11.23.2 Internet ISW (FTP Setting).......................................................................................................................................I-368
11.23.3 Forwarding Access Setting.......................................................................................................................................I-369
11.23.4 Download..................................................................................................................................................................I-370
12. ENHANCED SECURITY........................................................................................................................................I-371

12.1 List of Enhanced Security.....................................................................................................................................................I-371
12.3 Enhanced Security................................................................................................................................................................I-372
12.3.1 CE Password..............................................................................................................................................................I-372
12.3.2 Administrator Password..............................................................................................................................................I-372
12.3.3 Administrator Feature Level........................................................................................................................................I-372
12.3.4 CE Authentication.......................................................................................................................................................I-373
12.3.5 Life Stop Setting.........................................................................................................................................................I-373
12.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup.................................................................................................................................................I-373
12.3.7 Operation Ban release time........................................................................................................................................I-373
12.3.8 Administrator unlocking..............................................................................................................................................I-374
12.3.9 Engine FW DipSW......................................................................................................................................................I-374
xxii
13. BILLING SETTING.................................................................................................................................................I-375

Billing setting..................................................................................................................................................................................I-375
13.1 List of billing setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-375
13.3 Billing setting.........................................................................................................................................................................I-376
13.3.1 Counter Setting...........................................................................................................................................................I-376
13.3.2 Management Function Choice....................................................................................................................................I-377
13.3.3 Management Function Choice-Key Counter IF Vendor..............................................................................................I-377
13.3.4 Management Function Choice-Authentication Device................................................................................................I-377
13.3.5 Management Function Choice-Key Counter Only......................................................................................................I-378
13.3.6 Management Function Choice-Management Device..................................................................................................I-379
13.3.7 Management Function Choice-Vendor 1....................................................................................................................I-380
13.3.8 Management Function Choice-Vendor 2....................................................................................................................I-380
13.3.9 Setting items that automatically change the setting values........................................................................................I-380
13.3.10 Coverage Rate Clear................................................................................................................................................I-383
13.3.11 License management-Activation...............................................................................................................................I-383
13.3.12 License management-Deactivation..........................................................................................................................I-387
13.3.13 License management-Repair....................................................................................................................................I-391
13.3.14 License management-Initialize.................................................................................................................................I-394
13.3.15 License management-Request Code.......................................................................................................................I-395
13.3.16 License management-List.........................................................................................................................................I-395
13.3.17 License management-Function List..........................................................................................................................I-395
13.3.18 OpenAPI Authentication Management.....................................................................................................................I-395
14. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION........................................................................................I-396

15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub 223/283/363/423.......................................................................................I-397
15.1 Scanner section....................................................................................................................................................................I-397
15.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt.........................................................................................................................I-397
15.1.2 Positioning of the exposure unit/LED exposure unit and mirrors unit.........................................................................I-397
15.2 Paper feed section................................................................................................................................................................I-398
15.2.1 Skew adjustment of the tray 1/2.................................................................................................................................I-398
15.2.2 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2...........................................................................................................................I-398
15.3 Manual bypass tray section..................................................................................................................................................I-399
15.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit...................................................................................................................I-399
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-621..................................................................................................................I-401

16.1 Original document feed section............................................................................................................................................I-401
16.1.1 Adjusting the height....................................................................................................................................................I-401
16.1.2 Adjusting skew feed....................................................................................................................................................I-402
17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-109/PC-208.....................................................................................................I-404

17.1 Paper reference position.......................................................................................................................................................I-404
17.1.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-404
17.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-404
18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-409..................................................................................................................I-405

18.1 Paper reference position.......................................................................................................................................................I-405
18.1.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-405
18.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-405
18.2 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment..............................................................................................................................I-406
18.2.1 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-406
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-517..................................................................................................................I-408

19.1 Punch section.......................................................................................................................................................................I-408
19.1.1 Punch hole deviation correction..................................................................................................................................I-408
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-509..................................................................................................................I-409

20.1 Paper exit section.................................................................................................................................................................I-409
20.1.1 Half-fold skew adjustment...........................................................................................................................................I-409
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE.........................................................................................................J-1
1. Confirming the firmware version..................................................................................................................................J-2
1.1 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................J-2
2. USB memory................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.1 Preparation.................................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.3 Action when data transfer fails...................................................................................................................................................J-5
3. Internet ISW.................................................................................................................................................................J-6
3.1 Preparations for firmware rewriting............................................................................................................................................J-6
3.1.1 Outline..............................................................................................................................................................................J-6
3.1.2 Service environment........................................................................................................................................................J-6
3.1.3 Preparations for firmware rewriting..................................................................................................................................J-6
xxiii
3.2 Firmware rewriting from the control panel..................................................................................................................................J-7

3.2.1 Firmware rewriting from the control panel........................................................................................................................J-7
4. CS Remote Care........................................................................................................................................................J-10
4.1 Firmware rewriting from the CS Remote Care.........................................................................................................................J-10
K TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................................................................K-1
1. JAM CODE..................................................................................................................................................................K-1
JAM DISPLAY..................................................................................................................................................................................K-1
(1) JAM DISPLAY.....................................................................................................................................................................K-1
(2) Misfeed display resetting procedure...................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1 List of the JAM code..................................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.2 JAM that do not display the JAM code......................................................................................................................................K-2
1.3 Sensor layout.............................................................................................................................................................................K-4
1.3.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423..................................................................................................................................................K-4
1.3.2 DF-621............................................................................................................................................................................K-4
1.3.3 PC-109/PC-208...............................................................................................................................................................K-5
1.3.4 PC-409............................................................................................................................................................................K-6
1.3.5 JS-505.............................................................................................................................................................................K-6
1.3.6 FS-529.............................................................................................................................................................................K-7
1.3.7 FS-527/SD-509/PK-517/JS-603......................................................................................................................................K-7
1.4 Initial check items......................................................................................................................................................................K-7
1.5 1*-**...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-8
1.5.1 10-01, 10-40....................................................................................................................................................................K-8
1.5.2 11-01, 11-44....................................................................................................................................................................K-8
1.5.3 12-01, 12-40....................................................................................................................................................................K-9
1.5.4 13-01, 13-40....................................................................................................................................................................K-9
1.5.5 14-01, 14-40..................................................................................................................................................................K-10
1.5.6 15-01, 15-40, 15-43.......................................................................................................................................................K-10
1.5.7 17-08, 17-21, 17-22.......................................................................................................................................................K-11
1.6 2*-**.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-12
1.6.1 20-01, 20-11..................................................................................................................................................................K-12
1.6.2 20-12, 20-21..................................................................................................................................................................K-12
1.6.3 20-13, 20-22..................................................................................................................................................................K-13
1.7 3*-**.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-13
1.7.1 30-01, 30-03..................................................................................................................................................................K-13
1.7.2 32-01, 32-05, 32-31.......................................................................................................................................................K-14
1.8 6*-**.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-14
1.8.1 66-01, 66-11, 66-21.......................................................................................................................................................K-14
1.8.2 66-02, 66-12..................................................................................................................................................................K-15
1.8.3 66-03, 66-13, 66-23, 66-33............................................................................................................................................K-15
1.8.4 66-04, 66-14, 66-24, 66-34............................................................................................................................................K-16
1.8.5 66-05, 66-06, 66-07, 66-15............................................................................................................................................K-16
1.9 7*-**.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-17
1.9.1 72-14.............................................................................................................................................................................K-17
1.9.2 72-15.............................................................................................................................................................................K-17
1.9.3 72-16.............................................................................................................................................................................K-18
1.9.4 72-17.............................................................................................................................................................................K-19
1.9.5 72-18.............................................................................................................................................................................K-19
1.9.6 72-19.............................................................................................................................................................................K-20
1.9.7 72-21.............................................................................................................................................................................K-20
1.9.8 72-22.............................................................................................................................................................................K-21
1.9.9 72-26.............................................................................................................................................................................K-21
1.9.10 72-43...........................................................................................................................................................................K-22
1.9.11 72-81...........................................................................................................................................................................K-22
1.9.12 72-85...........................................................................................................................................................................K-22
1.9.13 72-86...........................................................................................................................................................................K-23
1.9.14 72-87...........................................................................................................................................................................K-23
1.10 9*-**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-23
1.10.1 92-01, 92-40................................................................................................................................................................K-23
1.10.2 93-01...........................................................................................................................................................................K-24
1.10.3 99-01...........................................................................................................................................................................K-24
2. MALFUNCTION CODE.............................................................................................................................................K-26
2.1 Display procedure....................................................................................................................................................................K-26
2.2 List of the malfunction code.....................................................................................................................................................K-26
2.3 S-1...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-26
2.3.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-26
2.3.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.4 D-1...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.4.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.4.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-27
xxiv
2.5 P-27.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.5.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.5.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.6 L-4...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.6.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.7 L-6...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.7.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.8 L-7...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.8.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-27
2.9 L-8...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-28
2.9.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-28
2.10 L-9.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-28
2.10.1 Contents......................................................................................................................................................................K-28
2.11 L-10.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-28
2.11.1 Contents......................................................................................................................................................................K-28
2.12 L-11.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-28
2.12.1 Contents......................................................................................................................................................................K-28
3. TROUBLE CODE......................................................................................................................................................K-29
3.2 Trouble resetting procedure....................................................................................................................................................K-29
3.2.1 Trouble resetting procedure by Trouble Reset key.......................................................................................................K-29
3.3 Trouble isolation function.........................................................................................................................................................K-29
3.4 List of the trouble code............................................................................................................................................................K-30
3.5 C0***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-34
3.5.1 C0001............................................................................................................................................................................K-34
3.5.2 C0202............................................................................................................................................................................K-35
3.5.3 C0204............................................................................................................................................................................K-35
3.5.4 C0206, C0208...............................................................................................................................................................K-36
3.5.5 C0209............................................................................................................................................................................K-36
3.5.6 C0210............................................................................................................................................................................K-37
3.5.7 C0211............................................................................................................................................................................K-37
3.5.8 C0212............................................................................................................................................................................K-38
3.5.9 C0213............................................................................................................................................................................K-38
3.5.10 C0214..........................................................................................................................................................................K-39
3.5.11 C0215..........................................................................................................................................................................K-39
3.6 C1***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-40
3.6.1 C1004............................................................................................................................................................................K-40
3.6.2 C1081............................................................................................................................................................................K-40
3.6.3 C1113............................................................................................................................................................................K-40
3.6.4 C1114............................................................................................................................................................................K-41
3.6.5 C1115............................................................................................................................................................................K-41
3.6.6 C1116............................................................................................................................................................................K-42
3.6.7 C1150............................................................................................................................................................................K-42
3.6.8 C1156............................................................................................................................................................................K-43
3.6.9 C1158............................................................................................................................................................................K-43
3.6.10 C1181..........................................................................................................................................................................K-44
3.6.11 C1182..........................................................................................................................................................................K-44
3.6.12 C1183..........................................................................................................................................................................K-45
3.6.13 C1190..........................................................................................................................................................................K-47
3.6.14 C1191..........................................................................................................................................................................K-47
3.6.15 C1194..........................................................................................................................................................................K-48
3.6.16 C11A1.........................................................................................................................................................................K-49
3.6.17 C11A2.........................................................................................................................................................................K-50
3.6.18 C11A7.........................................................................................................................................................................K-50
3.6.19 C11B0.........................................................................................................................................................................K-50
3.6.20 C11B2.........................................................................................................................................................................K-51
3.6.21 C11B5.........................................................................................................................................................................K-52
3.6.22 C11C0.........................................................................................................................................................................K-52
3.6.23 C11E0.........................................................................................................................................................................K-53
3.6.24 C11E1.........................................................................................................................................................................K-53
3.6.25 C11E2.........................................................................................................................................................................K-54
3.6.26 C1301..........................................................................................................................................................................K-54
3.6.27 C1402..........................................................................................................................................................................K-55
3.7 C2***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-55
3.7.1 C2201............................................................................................................................................................................K-55
3.7.2 C2253, C2254...............................................................................................................................................................K-56
3.7.3 C2350............................................................................................................................................................................K-56
3.7.4 C2557, C2558...............................................................................................................................................................K-56
3.7.5 C255C, C2564...............................................................................................................................................................K-57
3.7.6 C2650............................................................................................................................................................................K-58
xxv
3.8 C3***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-58
3.8.1 C3421, C3423...............................................................................................................................................................K-58
3.8.2 C3721, C3723...............................................................................................................................................................K-59
3.8.3 C3821, C3823...............................................................................................................................................................K-60
3.9 C4***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-60
3.9.1 C4101............................................................................................................................................................................K-60
3.9.2 C4501............................................................................................................................................................................K-60
3.10 C5***......................................................................................................................................................................................K-61
3.10.1 C5102, C5103.............................................................................................................................................................K-61
3.10.2 C5351..........................................................................................................................................................................K-61
3.10.3 C5356..........................................................................................................................................................................K-62
3.10.4 C5370..........................................................................................................................................................................K-62
3.10.5 C5501..........................................................................................................................................................................K-63
3.10.6 C5601..........................................................................................................................................................................K-63
3.10.7 C5602..........................................................................................................................................................................K-63
3.11 C6***......................................................................................................................................................................................K-64
3.11.1 C6102, C6103.............................................................................................................................................................K-64
3.11.2 C6704..........................................................................................................................................................................K-64
3.11.3 C6751..........................................................................................................................................................................K-65
3.11.4 C6752..........................................................................................................................................................................K-65
3.11.5 C6901, C6902, C6903.................................................................................................................................................K-65
3.11.6 C6F01..........................................................................................................................................................................K-66
3.12 C8***......................................................................................................................................................................................K-66
3.12.1 C8101..........................................................................................................................................................................K-66
3.12.2 C8107..........................................................................................................................................................................K-67
3.12.3 C8302..........................................................................................................................................................................K-67
3.13 C9***......................................................................................................................................................................................K-68
3.13.1 C9401, C9402.............................................................................................................................................................K-68
3.14 CA***.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-68
3.14.1 CA051, CA052, CA053...............................................................................................................................................K-68
3.15 CC***.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-69
3.15.1 CC001.........................................................................................................................................................................K-69
3.15.2 CC151, CC152, CC153...............................................................................................................................................K-69
3.15.3 CC155.........................................................................................................................................................................K-70
3.15.4 CC156.........................................................................................................................................................................K-70
3.15.5 CC159, CC15A............................................................................................................................................................K-70
3.15.6 CC15B.........................................................................................................................................................................K-71
3.15.7 CC163.........................................................................................................................................................................K-71
3.15.8 CC164.........................................................................................................................................................................K-71
3.15.9 CC165.........................................................................................................................................................................K-72
3.15.10 CC170, CC171, CC172, CC173, CC174, CC180, CC181, CC182, CC183, CC184, CC185, CC186......................K-72
3.15.11 CC190.......................................................................................................................................................................K-73
3.15.12 CC191.......................................................................................................................................................................K-73
3.16 CD***.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-73
3.16.1 CD002.........................................................................................................................................................................K-73
3.16.2 CD004, CD00F, CD020...............................................................................................................................................K-74
3.16.3 CD010.........................................................................................................................................................................K-74
3.16.4 CD011.........................................................................................................................................................................K-75
3.16.5 CD030.........................................................................................................................................................................K-75
3.16.6 CD041, CD042, CD043, CD044, CD045, CD046.......................................................................................................K-75
3.16.7 CD047, CD048, CD049, CD04A, CD04B....................................................................................................................K-75
3.16.8 CD201, CD202, CD203...............................................................................................................................................K-76
3.16.9 CD211, CD212............................................................................................................................................................K-76
3.16.10 CD231.......................................................................................................................................................................K-77
3.16.11 CD241, CD242..........................................................................................................................................................K-77
3.16.12 CD261.......................................................................................................................................................................K-77
3.16.13 CD271.......................................................................................................................................................................K-78
3.16.14 CD272.......................................................................................................................................................................K-78
3.16.15 CD3##.......................................................................................................................................................................K-78
3.16.16 CD370.......................................................................................................................................................................K-79
3.16.17 CD401, CD402, CD403, CD404, CD405, CD406, CD407........................................................................................K-79
3.16.18 CDC##.......................................................................................................................................................................K-80
3.17 CE***.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-80
3.17.1 CE001, CE003, CE004, CE005, CE006, CE007........................................................................................................K-80
3.17.2 CE002.........................................................................................................................................................................K-80
3.17.3 CEEE1.........................................................................................................................................................................K-81
3.17.4 CEEE2.........................................................................................................................................................................K-81
3.17.5 CEEE3.........................................................................................................................................................................K-81
4. ABORT CODE...........................................................................................................................................................K-82
Abort code......................................................................................................................................................................................K-82
xxvi
(1) Contents............................................................................................................................................................................K-82
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................K-82
4.1 CF0**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-82
4.2 CF1**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-82
4.3 CF2**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-82
4.4 CF3**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-82
4.5 CF4**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-83
4.6 CF5**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-83
4.7 CF6**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-83
4.8 CF7**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-83
4.9 CF8**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-84
4.10 CF9**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-84
4.11 CFA**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-84
4.12 CFB**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-85
4.12.1 CFB0*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-85
4.12.2 CFB1*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-85
4.12.3 CFB7*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-85
4.12.4 CFB8*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-85
4.12.5 CFBA*.........................................................................................................................................................................K-85
4.13 CFC**....................................................................................................................................................................................K-85
4.13.1 CFC0*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-85
4.13.2 CFC1*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-86
4.13.3 CFC2*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-86
4.13.4 CFCC*.........................................................................................................................................................................K-86
4.13.5 CFCD*.........................................................................................................................................................................K-87
4.13.6 CFCE*.........................................................................................................................................................................K-87
4.14 CFD**....................................................................................................................................................................................K-87
4.14.1 CFD0*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-87
4.14.2 CFD1*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-87
4.15 CFE**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-87
4.15.1 CFE0*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-87
4.15.2 CFE1*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-88
4.16 CFF**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-88
4.16.1 CFF0*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-88
4.16.2 CFF1*..........................................................................................................................................................................K-88
5. ERROR CODE FOR THE INTERNET ISW..............................................................................................................K-90

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Error code list for the Internet ISW..........................................................................................................................................K-90

0x0*.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-90
0x1*.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-91
0x2*.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-91
6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE..............................................................................................................................K-92

6.1 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care.....................................................................................................................................K-92
6.2 CS Remote Care Operation under Enhanced Security Mode.................................................................................................K-92
6.3 List of the CS Remote Care error code...................................................................................................................................K-92
6.3.1 When connecting by modem.........................................................................................................................................K-92
6.3.2 When connecting by e-mails.........................................................................................................................................K-93
6.3.3 When connecting by http...............................................................................................................................................K-95
6.3.4 When connecting by Fax modem..................................................................................................................................K-96
7. NETWORK ERROR CODE.......................................................................................................................................K-98

7.2 IEEE802.1X.............................................................................................................................................................................K-98
7.3 LDAP.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-98
7.4 E-Mail/Internet Fax..................................................................................................................................................................K-99
7.5 FTP transmission...................................................................................................................................................................K-100
7.6 SMB transmission..................................................................................................................................................................K-100
7.7 SMTP transmission...............................................................................................................................................................K-101
7.8 WebDAV transmission...........................................................................................................................................................K-102
7.9 SMB browsing.......................................................................................................................................................................K-103
7.10 User authentication..............................................................................................................................................................K-104
7.11 WebDAV client....................................................................................................................................................................K-104
7.12 WS scan..............................................................................................................................................................................K-105
8. FAX TROUBLE CODE............................................................................................................................................K-106

The error in the transmission/reception system............................................................................................................................K-106
8.1 B0-**......................................................................................................................................................................................K-106
8.2 B1-1*......................................................................................................................................................................................K-106
8.3 B1-2*......................................................................................................................................................................................K-106
8.4 B1-3*......................................................................................................................................................................................K-106
8.5 B1-4*......................................................................................................................................................................................K-107
8.6 B1-5*......................................................................................................................................................................................K-107
xxvii
8.7 B1-6*......................................................................................................................................................................................K-107
8.8 B1-7*......................................................................................................................................................................................K-107
8.9 B1-8*......................................................................................................................................................................................K-108
8.10 B1-9*....................................................................................................................................................................................K-108
8.11 T0*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-108
8.12 T1*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-108
8.13 T2*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-109
8.14 T3*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-109
8.15 T4*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-109
8.16 T5*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-109
8.17 T6*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-110
8.18 T7*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-110
8.19 T8*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-110
8.20 T9*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-111
8.21 R0*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-111
8.22 R1*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-111
8.23 R2*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-112
8.24 R3*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-112
8.25 R4*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-112
8.26 R5*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-112
8.27 R6*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-113
8.28 R7*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-113
8.29 R8*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-113
8.30 R9*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-114
9. DIAGNOSTIC CODES............................................................................................................................................K-115
9.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................K-115
9.2 Explanation............................................................................................................................................................................K-115
9.2.1 The diagnostic code....................................................................................................................................................K-115
9.2.2 Information of communication results and conditions.................................................................................................K-115
10. NETWORK FAX ERROR CODE...........................................................................................................................K-117

10.1 Error code list of the transmission system...........................................................................................................................K-117
10.2 Error code list of the reception system................................................................................................................................K-117
11. Open API RELATED TROUBLE...........................................................................................................................K-119

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................K-119
Supported Version...............................................................................................................................................................K-119
Types of Trouble..................................................................................................................................................................K-119
Solution................................................................................................................................................................................K-119
11.4.1 When using an application........................................................................................................................................K-119
11.4.2 After rewriting the firmware of the machine...............................................................................................................K-119
12. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE TROUBLE CODE............................................................................K-121

12.1 Machine is not energized at all (DCPU operation check)....................................................................................................K-121
12.1.1 Contents....................................................................................................................................................................K-121
12.1.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................................................................K-121
12.2 Fusing heaters do not operate.............................................................................................................................................K-121
12.2.1 Contents....................................................................................................................................................................K-121
12.2.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................................................................K-121
12.3 Power is not supplied to option............................................................................................................................................K-121
12.3.1 DF-621......................................................................................................................................................................K-121
12.3.2 PC-109/PC-208/PC-409............................................................................................................................................K-122
12.3.3 FS-527/FS-529..........................................................................................................................................................K-122
13. TROUBLESHOOTING OF i-Option.......................................................................................................................K-123

13.1 Structure of license management........................................................................................................................................K-123
13.2 License management information.......................................................................................................................................K-123
13.3 Error message.....................................................................................................................................................................K-123
13.3.1 License management error.......................................................................................................................................K-123
14. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM................................................................................................................................K-124

14.1 How to read element data...................................................................................................................................................K-124
14.1.1 Table number............................................................................................................................................................K-124
14.1.2 Level history 1...........................................................................................................................................................K-124
14.1.3 Level history 2...........................................................................................................................................................K-125
14.2 How to identify problematic part..........................................................................................................................................K-125
14.2.1 Initial check items......................................................................................................................................................K-125
14.3 Solution (Scanner system)..................................................................................................................................................K-126
Solution..................................................................................................................................................................................K-126
14.3.1 Scanner system: Blank copy or black copy...............................................................................................................K-126
14.3.2 Scanner system: Low image density or rough image................................................................................................K-127
14.3.3 Scanner System: Foggy background........................................................................................................................K-127
14.3.4 Scanner system: Black streaks or bands..................................................................................................................K-128
14.3.5 Scanner system: Black spots....................................................................................................................................K-128
xxviii
14.3.6 Scanner system: White streaks or bands..................................................................................................................K-129

14.3.7 Scanner system: Uneven pitch..................................................................................................................................K-129
14.4 Solution (Printer system).....................................................................................................................................................K-130
Solution..................................................................................................................................................................................K-130
14.4.1 Printer system: Blank copy or black copy..................................................................................................................K-130
14.4.2 Printer system: Low image density or rough image..................................................................................................K-130
14.4.3 Printer system: Foggy background............................................................................................................................K-131
14.4.4 Printer system: Black streaks or bands in sub scan direction...................................................................................K-132
14.4.5 Printer system: Black streaks or bands in main scan direction.................................................................................K-132
14.4.6 Printer system: Black spots.......................................................................................................................................K-133
14.4.7 Printer system: White streaks or bands in sub scan direction...................................................................................K-133
14.4.8 Printer system: White streaks or bands in main scan direction.................................................................................K-134
14.4.9 Printer system: Void areas........................................................................................................................................K-134
14.4.10 Printer system: Smears on back of paper...............................................................................................................K-135
14.4.11 Printer system: Uneven image density....................................................................................................................K-135
14.4.12 Printer system: Gradation reproduction failure........................................................................................................K-135
14.4.13 Printer system: Uneven pitch..................................................................................................................................K-136
15. IC PROTECTOR...................................................................................................................................................K-137
15.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................K-137
15.2 IC protector list....................................................................................................................................................................K-137
15.2.1 bizhub C220/C280/C360...........................................................................................................................................K-137
15.2.2 DF-621......................................................................................................................................................................K-137
15.2.3 PC-109/PC-208.........................................................................................................................................................K-137
15.2.4 PC-409......................................................................................................................................................................K-137
15.2.5 JS-505.......................................................................................................................................................................K-138
15.2.6 FS-527.......................................................................................................................................................................K-138
15.2.7 SD-509......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
15.2.8 FS-529.......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..................................................................................L-1

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING.......................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423............................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.1 Scanner section...............................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.2 Front side........................................................................................................................................................................L-3
1.1.3 Back side.........................................................................................................................................................................L-4
1.1.4 Left side...........................................................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.5 Right side.........................................................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.6 Duplex/Switchback/Fusing section..................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.7 Manual bypass tray..........................................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.8 Tray 1...............................................................................................................................................................................L-9
1.1.9 Tray 2.............................................................................................................................................................................L-10
1.2 DF-621/SP-501........................................................................................................................................................................L-11
1.2.1 Load...............................................................................................................................................................................L-11
1.2.2 Sensor/board.................................................................................................................................................................L-11
1.3 PC-109/PC-208 (Option)..........................................................................................................................................................L-12
1.3.1 Tray 3.............................................................................................................................................................................L-12
1.3.2 Tray 4.............................................................................................................................................................................L-13
1.3.3 Board/switch/others.......................................................................................................................................................L-14
1.4 PC-409 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-14
1.4.1 Load...............................................................................................................................................................................L-14
1.4.2 Sensor...........................................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.4.3 Board/switch/others.......................................................................................................................................................L-16
1.5 JS-505 (Option)........................................................................................................................................................................L-16
1.6 JS-603 (Option)........................................................................................................................................................................L-17
1.7 FS-527 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-17
1.8 FS-529 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-19
1.9 PK-517 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-20
1.10 SD-509 (Option).....................................................................................................................................................................L-21
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..........................................................................................................................L-23

2.1 BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..........................................................................................................................L-23
2.1.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423................................................................................................................................................L-23
2.1.2 DF control board (DFCB)...............................................................................................................................................L-26
2.1.3 PC Control board (PCCB)..............................................................................................................................................L-26
2.1.4 FS control board (FSCB)...............................................................................................................................................L-27
2.1.5 SD drive board (SDDB).................................................................................................................................................L-29
2.2 RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING...........................................................................................................................L-30
2.2.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423................................................................................................................................................L-30
M TIMING CHART............................................................................................................................M-1
1. bizhub 223/283/363/423.............................................................................................................................................M-1
xxix
1.1 Timing chart when the main power switch is turned ON...........................................................................................................M-1
1.2 Timing chart in monochrome mode..........................................................................................................................................M-1
1.2.1 Operating conditions.......................................................................................................................................................M-1
1.2.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-2
2. DF-621........................................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.1 1-sided mode............................................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.2 2-sided mode............................................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.2.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-4
3. JS-603........................................................................................................................................................................M-5
3.1 Tray3 paper exit mode..............................................................................................................................................................M-5
3.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-5
4. FS-527/SD-509/PK-517..............................................................................................................................................M-6
4.1 Shift mode.................................................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.2 2 flat stitching staples mode......................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.2.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-7
4.3 Center staples mode.................................................................................................................................................................M-7
4.3.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-8
4.4 Punch mode..............................................................................................................................................................................M-8
4.4.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-9
5. FS-529......................................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.1 Shift mode...............................................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.1.1 Operating conditions.....................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.2 1 flat stitching staple mode.....................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.2.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-11
5.3 2 flat stitching staples mode....................................................................................................................................................M-11
5.3.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-12
N WIRING DIAGRAM........................................................................................................................N-1
1. bizhub 223/283/363/423..............................................................................................................................................N-1
1.1 Main body..................................................................................................................................................................................N-1
2. Option..........................................................................................................................................................................N-3
2.1 Wiring diagram list.....................................................................................................................................................................N-3
2.1.1 Option wiring diagram.....................................................................................................................................................N-3
2.2 Reverse automatic document feeder DF-621...........................................................................................................................N-4
2.3 Finisher FS-529.........................................................................................................................................................................N-5
2.4 Job separator JS-505................................................................................................................................................................N-6
2.5 Job separator JS-603................................................................................................................................................................N-6
2.6 Punch kit PK-517.......................................................................................................................................................................N-7
2.7 Finisher FS-527.........................................................................................................................................................................N-8
2.8 Saddle stitcher SD-509.............................................................................................................................................................N-9
2.9 Paper feed cabinet PC-409.....................................................................................................................................................N-10
2.10 Paper feed cabinet PC-208...................................................................................................................................................N-11
2.11 Paper feed cabinet PC-109...................................................................................................................................................N-12
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423....................................................................O-1

1. INTERFACE SECTION...............................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1.1 Rear side 1......................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1.2 Rear side 2......................................................................................................................................................................O-1
2. SCANNER SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-2
2.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................O-2
2.2 Drive..........................................................................................................................................................................................O-2
2.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................O-2
2.3.1 When the power is ON....................................................................................................................................................O-2
2.3.2 Control when the Start key is pressed............................................................................................................................O-3
2.3.3 Original scanning area....................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.3.4 Original size detection control.........................................................................................................................................O-5
xxx
2.3.5 Image processing............................................................................................................................................................O-6
3. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)..............................................................................................................................O-7

3.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................O-7
3.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................O-7
3.2.1 Laser exposure process..................................................................................................................................................O-7
3.2.2 Laser emission timing.....................................................................................................................................................O-7
3.2.3 Advance polygon rotation...............................................................................................................................................O-8
3.2.4 Laser emission stop........................................................................................................................................................O-8
3.2.5 Laser emission area........................................................................................................................................................O-8
4. TONER SUPPLY SECTION.......................................................................................................................................O-9

4.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................O-9
4.2 Drive..........................................................................................................................................................................................O-9
4.2.1 Toner bottle drive............................................................................................................................................................O-9
4.2.2 Toner hopper drive..........................................................................................................................................................O-9
4.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-10
4.3.1 Toner flow.....................................................................................................................................................................O-10
4.3.2 Toner replenishing mechanism.....................................................................................................................................O-10
4.3.3 Toner replenishing control............................................................................................................................................O-10
4.3.4 T/C ratio recovery control..............................................................................................................................................O-11
4.3.5 Manual Toner Add control.............................................................................................................................................O-11
4.3.6 Toner level detection control.........................................................................................................................................O-12
4.3.7 Main body interior temperature measurement system..................................................................................................O-14
5. IMAGING UNIT SECTION (IU SECTION)................................................................................................................O-15

5.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-15
5.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-15
5.2.1 Drum unit......................................................................................................................................................................O-15
5.2.2 Developing unit.............................................................................................................................................................O-16
5.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-16
5.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................O-16
5.3.2 Imaging unit detection...................................................................................................................................................O-16
6. DRUM UNIT SECTION.............................................................................................................................................O-17

6.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-17
6.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-17
6.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-18
6.3.1 Charge corona control..................................................................................................................................................O-18
6.3.2 Photo conductor cleaning mechanism..........................................................................................................................O-18
6.3.3 Erase mechanism.........................................................................................................................................................O-19
6.3.4 Ozone suction function.................................................................................................................................................O-19
6.3.5 Drum dry control...........................................................................................................................................................O-20
6.3.6 Measure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor mechanism...........................................................O-20
6.3.7 Drum unit detection.......................................................................................................................................................O-21
6.3.8 Drum unit life detection.................................................................................................................................................O-21
6.3.9 Life value of drum unit...................................................................................................................................................O-23
6.3.10 Ozone filter new article detection................................................................................................................................O-23
6.3.11 Ozone filter life detection............................................................................................................................................O-24
6.3.12 Life value of ozone filter..............................................................................................................................................O-25
7. DEVELOPING SECTION..........................................................................................................................................O-26
7.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-26
7.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-26
7.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-27
7.3.1 Toner flow.....................................................................................................................................................................O-27
7.3.2 Developing roller...........................................................................................................................................................O-27
7.3.3 HMT (High grade Micro Toning) development..............................................................................................................O-27
7.3.4 Developing bias............................................................................................................................................................O-28
7.3.5 Developer scattering preventive mechanism................................................................................................................O-28
7.3.6 TCR sensor control.......................................................................................................................................................O-28
7.3.7 Developing unit detection..............................................................................................................................................O-29
7.3.8 Developing unit life detection........................................................................................................................................O-30
7.3.9 Life value of developing unit.........................................................................................................................................O-32
7.3.10 Developer new article detection..................................................................................................................................O-32
7.3.11 Developer life detection..............................................................................................................................................O-33
7.3.12 Life value of developer................................................................................................................................................O-35
8. IMAGE TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION.........................................................................................................O-36

8.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-36
8.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-36
8.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-36
8.3.1 Image transfer roller control..........................................................................................................................................O-36
8.3.2 Image transfer roller cleaning.......................................................................................................................................O-36
8.3.3 Image transfer current upper/lower limit control............................................................................................................O-37
xxxi
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
Charge neutralization and separation of paper.............................................................................................................O-37

Measure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor mechanism...........................................................O-37
Image transfer roller new article detection....................................................................................................................O-38
Image transfer roller life detection.................................................................................................................................O-38
Life value of image transfer roller..................................................................................................................................O-39
9. PAPER FEED SECTION (MANUAL BYPASS TRAY)..............................................................................................O-40

9.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-40
9.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-40
9.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-40
9.3.1 Up/down control............................................................................................................................................................O-40
9.3.2 Paper feed control.........................................................................................................................................................O-42
9.3.3 Paper size detection control..........................................................................................................................................O-44
9.3.4 Paper empty detection..................................................................................................................................................O-45
9.3.5 Remaining paper detection control...............................................................................................................................O-46
10. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY 1/TRAY 2)...........................................................................................................O-49

10.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-49
10.1.1 Tray 1..........................................................................................................................................................................O-49
10.1.2 Tray 2..........................................................................................................................................................................O-50
10.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-51
10.2.1 Layout of sensors and rollers......................................................................................................................................O-51
10.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-52
10.3.1 Up/down control..........................................................................................................................................................O-52
10.3.2 Paper feed control.......................................................................................................................................................O-53
10.3.3 Paper size detection control........................................................................................................................................O-60
10.3.4 Paper level detection control.......................................................................................................................................O-61
10.3.5 Paper feed tray locking mechanism............................................................................................................................O-63
11. REGISTRATION SECTION....................................................................................................................................O-65

11.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-65
11.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-65
11.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-65
11.3.1 Registration control.....................................................................................................................................................O-65
11.3.2 Registration roller paper dust remover mechanism....................................................................................................O-66
11.3.3 Paper dust remover new article detection...................................................................................................................O-66
11.3.4 Paper dust remover life detection...............................................................................................................................O-66
11.3.5 Life value of paper dust remover................................................................................................................................O-67
12. FUSING SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-68

12.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-68
12.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-68
12.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-68
12.3.1 Fusing roller drive control............................................................................................................................................O-68
12.3.2 Fusing temperature control.........................................................................................................................................O-68
12.3.3 Protection from abnormal temperatures.....................................................................................................................O-70
12.3.4 Paper feed wait control...............................................................................................................................................O-70
12.3.5 Paper-to-paper distance control..................................................................................................................................O-70
12.3.6 Curl prevention control................................................................................................................................................O-70
12.3.7 Fusing unit new article detection.................................................................................................................................O-70
12.3.8 Fusing unit life detection.............................................................................................................................................O-70
12.3.9 Life value of fusing unit...............................................................................................................................................O-72
13. PAPER EXIT/SWITCHBACK SECTION.................................................................................................................O-73

13.1 Configuration/Drive...............................................................................................................................................................O-73
13.2 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-73
13.2.1 Transport control.........................................................................................................................................................O-73
14. DUPLEX SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-74

14.1 Configuration/Drive...............................................................................................................................................................O-74
14.2 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-74
14.2.1 Paper transport control...............................................................................................................................................O-74
14.2.2 Duplex circulation control............................................................................................................................................O-75
15. IMAGE PROCESSING...........................................................................................................................................O-79

15.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram................................................................................................................O-79
15.2 Write section image processing block diagram.....................................................................................................................O-80
16. POWER SUPPLY SECTION..................................................................................................................................O-82

16.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON..................................................................................................O-82
16.1.1 Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................O-82
16.1.2 Operation....................................................................................................................................................................O-82
16.1.3 Auto power OFF system.............................................................................................................................................O-82
16.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON....................................................................................................O-83
16.2.1 Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................O-83
16.2.2 Operation....................................................................................................................................................................O-83
xxxii
16.3 Power cables.........................................................................................................................................................................O-83

16.3.1 Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................O-83
16.3.2 Operation....................................................................................................................................................................O-83
17. FAN CONTROL......................................................................................................................................................O-84

17.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-84
17.2 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-84
17.2.1 Function......................................................................................................................................................................O-84
17.2.2 Control condition.........................................................................................................................................................O-84
18. COUNTER INFORMATION....................................................................................................................................O-86

18.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-86
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-621..........................................................................................PA-1

1. PAPER FEED PATH.................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.1 In 1-sided mode......................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2 In 2-sided mode......................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PA-2
2.1 Section configuration...............................................................................................................................................................PA-2
2.2 Electrical parts configuration...................................................................................................................................................PA-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PA-4
3.1 Paper feed drive......................................................................................................................................................................PA-4
3.2 Transport/paper exit drive.......................................................................................................................................................PA-4
3.3 Original glass cleaning drive...................................................................................................................................................PA-5
4. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PA-6
4.1 Document set section..............................................................................................................................................................PA-6
4.1.1 Original size detection mechanism...............................................................................................................................PA-6
4.1.2 Original set detection control........................................................................................................................................PA-9
4.2 Document feed section...........................................................................................................................................................PA-9
4.2.1 Pick-up roller up/down control.......................................................................................................................................PA-9
4.2.2 Document feed/separation control..............................................................................................................................PA-10
4.3 Document registration section...............................................................................................................................................PA-11
4.3.1 Document registration loop formation process...........................................................................................................PA-11
4.3.2 Adjustment of document registration loop amount......................................................................................................PA-12
4.4 Document reading section....................................................................................................................................................PA-12
4.4.1 Document reading roller pressure/release control......................................................................................................PA-12
4.4.2 DF original glass contamination prevention control....................................................................................................PA-13
4.5 Document exit section...........................................................................................................................................................PA-14
4.5.1 Document switchback/second feed control (in the 2-sided mode only)......................................................................PA-15
4.5.2 Document 2nd side registration control (in the 2-sided mode only)............................................................................PA-16
4.5.3 Document exit roller pressure/release control (in the 2-sided mode only)..................................................................PA-16
4.5.4 Faxed document stamp function.................................................................................................................................PA-16
4.6 Original feed operation..........................................................................................................................................................PA-17
4.6.1 Document transport operation flow in the 1-sided mode............................................................................................PA-17
4.6.2 Document transport operation flow in the 2-sided mode............................................................................................PA-18
4.7 Raised/lowered position detection mechanism.....................................................................................................................PA-19
4.7.1 Document exchange detection control........................................................................................................................PA-19
4.7.2 DF raised/lowered position detection mechanism......................................................................................................PA-19
4.8 Cooling inside the unit...........................................................................................................................................................PA-20
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-109/PC-208.............................................................................PB-1

1. PAPER FEED PATH.................................................................................................................................................PB-1
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PB-2
2.1 Electrical parts configuration...................................................................................................................................................PB-2
2.2 Mechanical parts configuration...............................................................................................................................................PB-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PB-4
4. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PB-5
4.1 Up/down control......................................................................................................................................................................PB-5
4.1.1 Up operation.................................................................................................................................................................PB-5
4.1.2 Down operation.............................................................................................................................................................PB-5
4.1.3 Operation timing............................................................................................................................................................PB-6
4.2 Paper feed control...................................................................................................................................................................PB-6
4.2.1 Pick-up control..............................................................................................................................................................PB-6
4.2.2 Separation control.........................................................................................................................................................PB-6
4.2.3 Paper feed retry control................................................................................................................................................PB-7
4.2.4 Paper feed control.........................................................................................................................................................PB-7
4.2.5 Paper misfeed display...................................................................................................................................................PB-8
4.2.6 Periodically replaced parts............................................................................................................................................PB-9
4.3 Paper size detection control..................................................................................................................................................PB-10
4.3.1 Main scanning direction..............................................................................................................................................PB-10
xxxiii
4.3.2 Sub scanning direction................................................................................................................................................PB-10

4.3.3 Paper size determination............................................................................................................................................PB-10
4.4 Paper level detection control.................................................................................................................................................PB-11
4.4.1 Paper near-empty detection........................................................................................................................................PB-11
4.4.2 Paper empty detection................................................................................................................................................PB-11
4.4.3 Paper level display......................................................................................................................................................PB-12
4.5 Paper feed tray locking mechanism......................................................................................................................................PB-12
4.5.1 Unlocking the paper feed tray.....................................................................................................................................PB-13
4.5.2 Locking the paper feed tray........................................................................................................................................PB-13
PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-409..........................................................................................PC-1

1. PAPER FEED PATH................................................................................................................................................PC-1
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PC-2
2.1 Section configuration..............................................................................................................................................................PC-2
2.2 Electrical parts configuration...................................................................................................................................................PC-2
2.3 Mechanical parts configuration...............................................................................................................................................PC-3
3. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PC-4
3.1 Up/down control......................................................................................................................................................................PC-4
3.1.1 Up operation.................................................................................................................................................................PC-4
3.1.2 Down operation.............................................................................................................................................................PC-4
3.1.3 Operation timing...........................................................................................................................................................PC-4
3.2 Paper feed control...................................................................................................................................................................PC-6
3.2.1 Pick-up control..............................................................................................................................................................PC-6
3.2.2 Separation control.........................................................................................................................................................PC-6
3.2.3 Paper level detection control........................................................................................................................................PC-6
3.2.4 Paper empty detection..................................................................................................................................................PC-7
3.3 Paper shift control...................................................................................................................................................................PC-8
3.3.1 Overview of paper shift operation.................................................................................................................................PC-8
3.3.2 Division board drive mechanism...................................................................................................................................PC-8
3.3.3 Shifter drive mechanism...............................................................................................................................................PC-8
3.4 Paper misfeed display.............................................................................................................................................................PC-9
3.4.1 Tray3 (typical)...............................................................................................................................................................PC-9
3.4.2 System 2/ JAM Code Display Setting...........................................................................................................................PC-9
3.5 Paper level display..................................................................................................................................................................PC-9
3.6 Periodically replaced parts....................................................................................................................................................PC-10
PD THEORY OF OPERATION JS-505...........................................................................................PD-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PD-1
1.1 Exit to the lower tray...............................................................................................................................................................PD-1
1.2 Exit to the sub tray..................................................................................................................................................................PD-1
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PD-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PD-3
4. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PD-4
4.1 Transport/exit section..............................................................................................................................................................PD-4
4.1.1 Paper transport.............................................................................................................................................................PD-4
4.1.2 Transport path switching...............................................................................................................................................PD-4
4.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism..............................................................................................................................PD-7
4.1.4 Lower tray exit roller pressure/retraction......................................................................................................................PD-7
4.2 Paper shift section..................................................................................................................................................................PD-8
4.2.1 Paper shift mechanism.................................................................................................................................................PD-8
4.2.2 Shift operation overview...............................................................................................................................................PD-8
PE THEORY OF OPERATION JS-603...........................................................................................PE-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PE-1
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PE-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PE-3
4. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PE-4
4.1 Conveyance/exit section.........................................................................................................................................................PE-4
4.1.1 Paper conveyance........................................................................................................................................................PE-4
4.1.2 Conveyance path switching..........................................................................................................................................PE-4
4.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism...............................................................................................................................PE-4
4.1.4 Exit roller pressure/retraction........................................................................................................................................PE-4
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527...........................................................................................PF-1

1. PAPER FEED PATH.................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.1 Tray1.......................................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.2 Tray2.......................................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.3 Stapling...................................................................................................................................................................................PF-2
xxxiv
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PF-3
3. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION................................................................................................................PF-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PF-4
3.2 Horizontal conveyance mechanism.........................................................................................................................................PF-4
3.2.1 Paper conveyance........................................................................................................................................................PF-4
3.2.2 Conveyance path switching motor mechanism.............................................................................................................PF-5
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PF-6
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PF-6
4.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PF-6
4.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PF-7
4.3.1 Upper lower path switching gate...................................................................................................................................PF-7
4.3.2 Tray1 path switching gate.............................................................................................................................................PF-7
4.3.3 Conveyance operation..................................................................................................................................................PF-8
5. EXIT TRAY SECTION.............................................................................................................................................PF-10

5.1 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PF-10
5.2 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PF-10
5.2.1 Tray lift........................................................................................................................................................................PF-10
5.2.2 Exit to tray1.................................................................................................................................................................PF-11
5.2.3 Exit to tray2.................................................................................................................................................................PF-12
5.2.4 Tray2 shift control........................................................................................................................................................PF-13
6. ALIGNMENT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PF-15
6.1 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PF-15
6.2 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PF-15
6.2.1 Alignment plate...........................................................................................................................................................PF-15
6.2.2 Alignment section conveyance mechanism................................................................................................................PF-15
7. STAPLER................................................................................................................................................................PF-17
7.1 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PF-17
7.2 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PF-17
7.2.1 Stapler movement.......................................................................................................................................................PF-17
7.2.2 Stapler control.............................................................................................................................................................PF-18
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-529..........................................................................................PG-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PG-1
2. CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................................................PG-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PG-3
4. OPERATION............................................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.1 Conveyance section...............................................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.1.1 Paper conveyance........................................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.1.2 Conveyance path switching..........................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.1.3 Tray exit roller pressure/retraction................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.2 Alignment section...................................................................................................................................................................PG-6
4.2.1 Drive.............................................................................................................................................................................PG-6
4.2.2 Operation......................................................................................................................................................................PG-6
4.3 Stapler....................................................................................................................................................................................PG-7
4.3.1 Drive.............................................................................................................................................................................PG-7
4.3.2 Operation......................................................................................................................................................................PG-7
4.4 Exit tray section......................................................................................................................................................................PG-8
4.4.1 Drive.............................................................................................................................................................................PG-8
4.4.2 Operation......................................................................................................................................................................PG-8
PH THEORY OF OPERATION PK-517..........................................................................................PH-1

1. UNIT CONFIGURATION..........................................................................................................................................PH-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PH-2
3. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PH-3
4. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PH-4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Skew correction mechanism...................................................................................................................................................PH-4

Punch mechanism..................................................................................................................................................................PH-4
Punch status detection............................................................................................................................................................PH-4
Punch trash box full detection mechanism.............................................................................................................................PH-5
PI THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509.............................................................................................PI-1

1. PAPER FEED PATH..................................................................................................................................................PI-1
2. CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................................................................................PI-2
3. ALIGNMENT SECTION.............................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.1 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
xxxv
3.2.1 Alignment.......................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.2.2 Stopper...........................................................................................................................................................................PI-4
4. STAPLER...................................................................................................................................................................PI-6
4.1 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-6
4.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-6
4.2.1 Stapling..........................................................................................................................................................................PI-6
5. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING................................................................................................................................PI-8
5.1 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-8
5.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-8
5.2.1 Folding plate...................................................................................................................................................................PI-8
5.2.2 Folding conveyance.......................................................................................................................................................PI-9
6. EXIT SECTION........................................................................................................................................................PI-11
6.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PI-11
6.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PI-11
6.2.1 Exit...............................................................................................................................................................................PI-11
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION EK-604/EK-605/SC-507.................................................................PJ-1

1. EK-604.......................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
2. EK-605.......................................................................................................................................................................PJ-2
2.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-2
3. SC-507......................................................................................................................................................................PJ-3
3.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-3
PK THEORY OF OPERATION AU-102/AU-201.............................................................................PK-1

1. AU-102......................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
1.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
1.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
2. AU-201......................................................................................................................................................................PK-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PK-2
2.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PK-2
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FK-508...........................................................................................PL-1

1. COMMUNICATION CONTROL.................................................................................................................................PL-1
1.1 FIF bits of DIS, DTC and DCS.................................................................................................................................................PL-1
1.1.1 FIF data configuration list (DIS/DTC)............................................................................................................................PL-1
1.1.2 FIF data configuration list (DCS)...................................................................................................................................PL-5
1.2 Modem fallback sequence.......................................................................................................................................................PL-9
1.2.1 V17, V29, and V27 ter...................................................................................................................................................PL-9
1.2.2 V34................................................................................................................................................................................PL-9
1.3 V8/V34 sequence....................................................................................................................................................................PL-9
1.3.1 V34................................................................................................................................................................................PL-9
1.3.2 Sample of a signal procedure at sending two pages...................................................................................................PL-10
1.3.3 Procedure details........................................................................................................................................................PL-10
1.3.4 Common signal bit definition.......................................................................................................................................PL-12
1.3.5 Phase 2 (Probing) ..... V.34 basic setting....................................................................................................................PL-13
1.3.6 Phase 3 .....Training of the main channel equalizer....................................................................................................PL-14
1.3.7 Re-synchronization procedure / Startup procedure.....................................................................................................PL-16
1.3.8 Others..........................................................................................................................................................................PL-16
2. FUNCTION..............................................................................................................................................................PL-18
2.1 Telephone function................................................................................................................................................................PL-18
2.1.1 TEL/FAX switching......................................................................................................................................................PL-18
2.2 F-code...................................................................................................................................................................................PL-18
2.2.1 Signal format...............................................................................................................................................................PL-19
2.2.2 F-code confidential transmission.................................................................................................................................PL-19
2.2.3 F-code bulletin board polling.......................................................................................................................................PL-20
2.2.4 F-code relay transmission...........................................................................................................................................PL-21
2.3 Transmission function............................................................................................................................................................PL-22
2.3.1 Original scan mode.....................................................................................................................................................PL-22
2.4 Reception function.................................................................................................................................................................PL-22
2.4.1 Reduction / division of reception.................................................................................................................................PL-22
2.4.2 Cassette / paper selection...........................................................................................................................................PL-23
2.4.3 Compulsory memory reception...................................................................................................................................PL-23
2.4.4 Closed reception (Junk FAX)......................................................................................................................................PL-24
2.5 Management function............................................................................................................................................................PL-24
xxxvi
2.5.1 Operation without the key counter...............................................................................................................................PL-24
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition)..........................................................................................Q-1

INFORMATION FOR PARTS GUIDE MANUAL..............................................................................................................Q-1
HOW TO MAKE THE BEST USE OF THIS MANUAL.....................................................................................................Q-2
SYSTEM OUTLINE..........................................................................................................................................................Q-3
1. DIGITAL MFP B/W (bizhub 223/bizhub 283/bizhub 363/bizhub 423/bizhub 7828)....................................................Q-4
DIAGRAM OF MAIN PARTS SECTION...........................................................................................................................................Q-4
1.1 EXTERNAL PARTS..................................................................................................................................................................Q-5
1.2 IR COVER.................................................................................................................................................................................Q-7
1.3 OPERATION PANEL SECTION...............................................................................................................................................Q-8
1.4 CCD SECTION.........................................................................................................................................................................Q-9
1.5 SCANNER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................................Q-11
1.6 SCANNER DRIVE SECTION..................................................................................................................................................Q-12
1.7 PRINT HEAD/POWER SUPPLY SECTION............................................................................................................................Q-13
1.8 OZONE DUCT/FAN MOTOR SECTION.................................................................................................................................Q-14
1.9 IU SECTION............................................................................................................................................................................Q-15
1.10 HOPPER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................................Q-16
1.11 1ST PAPER FEED SECTION...............................................................................................................................................Q-18
1.12 2ND PAPER FEED SECTION..............................................................................................................................................Q-20
1.13 IU/CASSETTE RAIL SECTION.............................................................................................................................................Q-24
1.14 CASSETTE SIZE SECTION.................................................................................................................................................Q-25
1.15 CASSETTE SECTION..........................................................................................................................................................Q-26
1.16 MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION......................................................................................................................................Q-29
1.17 PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................Q-33
1.18 FUSING SECTION................................................................................................................................................................Q-39
1.19 PAPER EXIT SECTION........................................................................................................................................................Q-40
1.20 HOPPER/PAPER FEED DRIVE SECTION..........................................................................................................................Q-42
1.21 MAIN DRIVE SECTION........................................................................................................................................................Q-43
1.22 REAR FRAME SECTION......................................................................................................................................................Q-44
1.23 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.............................................................................................................................................Q-45
1.24 WIRING.................................................................................................................................................................................Q-47
1.25 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS....................................................................................................................................Q-50
1.26 ACCESSORY PARTS...........................................................................................................................................................Q-51
1.27 MAINTENANCE LIST...........................................................................................................................................................Q-51
1.28 DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-52
2. DOCUMENT FEEDER (DF-621)..............................................................................................................................Q-54

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
EXTERNAL PARTS................................................................................................................................................................Q-54
PAPER FEED TRAY SECTION..............................................................................................................................................Q-56
PAPER TAKE-UP SECTION..................................................................................................................................................Q-57
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION............................................................................................................................................Q-60
DRIVE SECTION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-63
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS......................................................................................................................................Q-65
MAINTENANCE LIST.............................................................................................................................................................Q-65
DESTINATION........................................................................................................................................................................Q-65
3. OTHER OPTION (OC-509).......................................................................................................................................Q-67

3.1 OC-509....................................................................................................................................................................................Q-67
3.2 DESTINATION........................................................................................................................................................................Q-67
4. SORTER/FINISHER (FS-527)..................................................................................................................................Q-69
4.1 EXTERNAL PARTS................................................................................................................................................................Q-69
4.2 FRAME SECTION...................................................................................................................................................................Q-70
4.3 PAPER ENTRANCE SECTION..............................................................................................................................................Q-73
4.4 PAPER EXIT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................................Q-77
4.5 ALIGNMENT/STAPLER SECTION.........................................................................................................................................Q-81
4.6 ELEVATE DRIVE SECTION...................................................................................................................................................Q-85
4.7 ELEVATE/SHUTTER DRIVE SECTION.................................................................................................................................Q-87
4.8 PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION............................................................................................................................................Q-90
4.9 WIRING...................................................................................................................................................................................Q-94
4.11 ACCESSORY PARTS...........................................................................................................................................................Q-97
4.12 MAINTENANCE LIST...........................................................................................................................................................Q-97
4.13 DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-97
5. SORTER/FINISHER (FS-529)..................................................................................................................................Q-99
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
EXTERNAL PARTS................................................................................................................................................................Q-99
ELEVATE TRAY SECTION..................................................................................................................................................Q-100
PAPER ENTRANCE SECTION............................................................................................................................................Q-101
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................Q-104
ALIGNMENT SECTION........................................................................................................................................................Q-107
xxxvii
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
STAPLER SECTION.............................................................................................................................................................Q-110
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.............................................................................................................................................Q-111
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS....................................................................................................................................Q-113
DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-113
6. SORTER/FINISHER (SD-509)................................................................................................................................Q-115
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
EXTERNAL PARTS..............................................................................................................................................................Q-115
FRAME SECTION.................................................................................................................................................................Q-116
PAPER CEASE UNIT...........................................................................................................................................................Q-118
UPPER STAPLER SECTION...............................................................................................................................................Q-120
LOWER STAPLER SECTION...............................................................................................................................................Q-123
WIRING.................................................................................................................................................................................Q-126
ACCESSORY PARTS...........................................................................................................................................................Q-128
DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-129
7. STACKER (JS-505)................................................................................................................................................Q-130
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
EXTERNAL PARTS..............................................................................................................................................................Q-130
PRESSURE/RELEASE SECTION........................................................................................................................................Q-131
SHIFT DRIVE SECTION.......................................................................................................................................................Q-132
DRIVE SECTION..................................................................................................................................................................Q-133
PAPER EXIT SECTION........................................................................................................................................................Q-134
WIRING.................................................................................................................................................................................Q-135
ACCESSORY PARTS...........................................................................................................................................................Q-138
DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-138
8. STACKER (JS-603)................................................................................................................................................Q-140
8.1 JS-603...................................................................................................................................................................................Q-140
8.3 DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-141
9. PUNCH UNIT (PK-517)..........................................................................................................................................Q-143

9.1 PK-517..................................................................................................................................................................................Q-143
9.3 DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-144
10. PAPER FEEDER (PC-109)...................................................................................................................................Q-146

10.1 EXTERNAL PARTS............................................................................................................................................................Q-146
10.2 FRAME SECTION...............................................................................................................................................................Q-147
10.3 PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION........................................................................................................................................Q-150
10.4 PAPER TAKE-UP SECTION..............................................................................................................................................Q-151
10.5 PAPER TRAY UNIT............................................................................................................................................................Q-153
10.6 RECIPT TRAY....................................................................................................................................................................Q-154
10.7 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS..................................................................................................................................Q-155
10.8 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-156
10.9 MAINTENANCE LIST.........................................................................................................................................................Q-156
10.10 DESTINATION..................................................................................................................................................................Q-156
11. PAPER FEEDER (PC-208)...................................................................................................................................Q-158

11.1 EXTERNAL PARTS............................................................................................................................................................Q-158
11.2 FRAME SECTION...............................................................................................................................................................Q-159
11.3 PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION........................................................................................................................................Q-162
11.4 UPPER PAPER TAKE-UP SECTION.................................................................................................................................Q-163
11.5 LOWER PAPER TAKE- UP SECTION...............................................................................................................................Q-165
11.6 PAPER TRAY UNIT............................................................................................................................................................Q-167
11.8 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-169
11.9 MAINTENANCE LIST.........................................................................................................................................................Q-169
11.10 DESTINATION..................................................................................................................................................................Q-169
12. PAPER FEEDER (PC-409)...................................................................................................................................Q-171

12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
EXTERNAL PARTS............................................................................................................................................................Q-171
FRAME SECTION...............................................................................................................................................................Q-172
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION........................................................................................................................................Q-174
PAPER TAKE-UP SECTION..............................................................................................................................................Q-175
PAPER TRAY UNIT............................................................................................................................................................Q-177
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS..................................................................................................................................Q-182
ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-183
MAINTENANCE LIST.........................................................................................................................................................Q-183
DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-183
13. OTHER OPTION (MK-726)...................................................................................................................................Q-185

13.1 MOUNT KIT........................................................................................................................................................................Q-185
13.3 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-186
xxxviii
14. OTHER OPTION (HT-507)...................................................................................................................................Q-188

14.1 HT-507................................................................................................................................................................................Q-188
14.2 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-188
15. OTHER OPTION (FK-508)...................................................................................................................................Q-189

15.1 FAX KIT...............................................................................................................................................................................Q-189
15.2 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-189
16. OTHER OPTION (EK-604)...................................................................................................................................Q-191

16.1 EK-604................................................................................................................................................................................Q-191
16.3 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-192
17. OTHER OPTION (EK-605)...................................................................................................................................Q-194

17.1 EK-605................................................................................................................................................................................Q-194
17.3 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-195
18. OTHER OPTION (HD-518)...................................................................................................................................Q-197

18.1 HARD DISC KIT..................................................................................................................................................................Q-197
18.2 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-197
R TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE BASED ON REPORTS FROM THE FIELD.................................R-1

1. PAPER JAM................................................................................................................................................................R-1
1.1 Original......................................................................................................................................................................................R-1
1.1.1 J66-02, J66-12................................................................................................................................................................R-1
1.2 Main body..................................................................................................................................................................................R-1
1.2.1 J11-01, J12-01: #1..........................................................................................................................................................R-1
1.2.2 J11-01, J12-01: #2..........................................................................................................................................................R-3
1.2.3 J12-01, J12-40................................................................................................................................................................R-7
1.3 Optional paper feed tray/cabinet...............................................................................................................................................R-9
1.3.1 J30-01.............................................................................................................................................................................R-9
1.4 Optional finisher........................................................................................................................................................................R-9
1.4.1 J72-17.............................................................................................................................................................................R-9
2. IMAGE TROUBLE.....................................................................................................................................................R-13
2.1 When using fax, the sent image is shrunk at the receiving machine.......................................................................................R-13
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-13
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-13
Countermeasure......................................................................................................................................................................R-13
2.2 Black line on paper edge in the main scanning direction........................................................................................................R-13
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-13
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-13
3. OPERATING NOISE.................................................................................................................................................R-15
3.1 DF Operation noise.................................................................................................................................................................R-15
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-15
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-15
3.2 Noise from line monitor when telephone is off-hook...............................................................................................................R-18
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-18
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-18
4. TROUBLE CODE......................................................................................................................................................R-19
4.1 C0208, C0206.........................................................................................................................................................................R-19
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-19
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-19
4.2 CC211.....................................................................................................................................................................................R-19
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-19
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-19
4.3 CD004.....................................................................................................................................................................................R-19
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-19
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-19
4.4 CD390.....................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
4.5 CFA14.....................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
xxxix
4.6 CB120.....................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
4.7 CR11.......................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-20
5. ERROR MESSAGE/ABNORMAL DISPLAY.............................................................................................................R-21

5.1 Freezes at KONICA MINOLTA logo / hourglass pointer.........................................................................................................R-21
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-21
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-21
5.2 Freezes at KONICA MINOLTA logo / hourglass pointer when recovering from sleep mode..................................................R-21
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-21
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-21
6. MALFUNCTION........................................................................................................................................................R-22
6.1 Dog-ear occurs on the paper fed from tray 2..........................................................................................................................R-22
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-22
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-22
6.2 At "Default Copy Settings", the default setting of "Original Quality" cannot be changed........................................................R-23
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-23
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-23
6.3 E-mail is always selected when FAX address is selected.......................................................................................................R-23
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-23
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-23
6.4 Remaining amount of toner is not displayed correctly.............................................................................................................R-24
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-24
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-24
6.5 Ozone Smell............................................................................................................................................................................R-24
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-24
6.6 Print job won't be printed in sleep mode.................................................................................................................................R-27
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-27
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-27
6.7 Print Job does not resume after loading paper for paper empty detection..............................................................................R-27
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-27
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-27
6.8 Unable to communicate between CSRC server and MFP......................................................................................................R-27
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-27
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-27
7. PARTS......................................................................................................................................................................R-28
7.1 Lever (paper feed section) is broken.......................................................................................................................................R-28
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-28
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-28
Related trouble........................................................................................................................................................................R-29
7.2 The right rear side of the paper feed tray is broken................................................................................................................R-29
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-29
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-29
Related trouble........................................................................................................................................................................R-33
7.3 Hook of DF-open/close-lever is broken...................................................................................................................................R-33
Symptom.................................................................................................................................................................................R-33
Cause......................................................................................................................................................................................R-33
S LAYOUT DRAWINGS FOR RELATED PARTS BY EACH TROUBLE CODE...............................S-1

1. C0001..........................................................................................................................................................................S-1
2. C0202..........................................................................................................................................................................S-2
xl
3. C0204..........................................................................................................................................................................S-3
4. C0206, C0208.............................................................................................................................................................S-4
5. C0209..........................................................................................................................................................................S-5
6. C0210..........................................................................................................................................................................S-6
7. C0211..........................................................................................................................................................................S-7
8. C0212..........................................................................................................................................................................S-8
9. C0213..........................................................................................................................................................................S-9
10. C0214......................................................................................................................................................................S-10
11. C0215......................................................................................................................................................................S-11
12. C1004, CC155.........................................................................................................................................................S-12
13. C1081, C11B5.........................................................................................................................................................S-13
14. C1113......................................................................................................................................................................S-14
15. C1114......................................................................................................................................................................S-15
16. C1115......................................................................................................................................................................S-16
17. C1116......................................................................................................................................................................S-17
18. C1150......................................................................................................................................................................S-18
19. C1156......................................................................................................................................................................S-19
20. C1158......................................................................................................................................................................S-20
21. C1181......................................................................................................................................................................S-21
22. C1182......................................................................................................................................................................S-22
23. C1183......................................................................................................................................................................S-23
23.1 FS-527...................................................................................................................................................................................S-23
23.2 FS-529...................................................................................................................................................................................S-24
24. C1190......................................................................................................................................................................S-25
24.1 FS-527...................................................................................................................................................................................S-25
24.2 FS-529...................................................................................................................................................................................S-26
25. C1191......................................................................................................................................................................S-27
26. C1194......................................................................................................................................................................S-28
26.1 FS-527...................................................................................................................................................................................S-28
26.2 FS-529...................................................................................................................................................................................S-29
27. C11A1.....................................................................................................................................................................S-30
27.1 FS-527...................................................................................................................................................................................S-30
27.2 FS-529...................................................................................................................................................................................S-31
28. C11A2.....................................................................................................................................................................S-32
29. C11A7.....................................................................................................................................................................S-33
30. C11B0.....................................................................................................................................................................S-34
30.1 FS-527...................................................................................................................................................................................S-34
30.2 FS-529...................................................................................................................................................................................S-35
31. C11B2, C1402.........................................................................................................................................................S-36

31.1 FS-527...................................................................................................................................................................................S-36
31.2 FS-529...................................................................................................................................................................................S-36
32. C11C0.....................................................................................................................................................................S-37
33. C11E0.....................................................................................................................................................................S-38
33.1 FS-527...................................................................................................................................................................................S-38
33.2 JS-505...................................................................................................................................................................................S-39
34. C11E1.....................................................................................................................................................................S-40
35. C11E2.....................................................................................................................................................................S-41
36. C1301......................................................................................................................................................................S-42
37. C2201......................................................................................................................................................................S-43
38. C2253, C2254.........................................................................................................................................................S-44
39. C2350......................................................................................................................................................................S-45
40. C2557, C2558, C255C, C2564...............................................................................................................................S-46
41. C2650, C5601, C5602, CC163, CEEE3..................................................................................................................S-47
42. C3421, C3423, C3721, C3723, C3821, C3823, C5501..........................................................................................S-48
43. C4101, C4501.........................................................................................................................................................S-49
44. C5102, C5103.........................................................................................................................................................S-50
45. C5351......................................................................................................................................................................S-51
xli
46. C5356......................................................................................................................................................................S-52
47. C5370......................................................................................................................................................................S-53
48. C6102, C6103.........................................................................................................................................................S-54
49. C6704......................................................................................................................................................................S-55
50. C6751......................................................................................................................................................................S-56
51. C6752......................................................................................................................................................................S-57
52. C6901 - C6903, CA051 - CA053, CC164, CC190, CC191, CC211 - CC214, CC216, CD002, CD004, CD00F,
CD010, CD020, CD211, CD212, CD231, CD241, CD242, CD261, CD271, CD272, CD401 - CD407, CE001 - CE007,
CEEE1............................................................................................................................................................................S-58
53. C6F01......................................................................................................................................................................S-59
54. C8101......................................................................................................................................................................S-60
55. C8107......................................................................................................................................................................S-61
56. C8302......................................................................................................................................................................S-62
57. C9401, C9402.........................................................................................................................................................S-63
58. CC001.....................................................................................................................................................................S-64
59. CC156, CC165........................................................................................................................................................S-65
60. CC170 - CC174, CC180 - CC186...........................................................................................................................S-66
61. CD201 - CD203.......................................................................................................................................................S-67
62. CEEE2.....................................................................................................................................................................S-68
xlii
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Revision history
Revision history
No.
1
2
ID
Title
D00002392 F.6.8.1 Replacing the fusing unit

22
-
Section Q
Ver.
2
1
D00002597 C.1.1 Type

36
D00002375 G.4.1.2 Units

81
D00002375 G.4.1.3 Boards

82
D00002376 G.4.3.13 Hopper drive unit

61
D00008986 G.4.3.7 LED exposure unit

66
D00008986 G.4.4.2 Scanner relay board (REYB/

73
SCAN) (for LED lamp)
D00008986 G.4.4.4 LED exposure drive board

74
(LEDEDB) (for LED lamp)
10
D00002385 G.5.1.7 FS-529

42
11
D00008745 G.5.8.12 Alignment motor/F (M3),

26
Alignment motor/R (M4)
12
D00002373 I.15.1.2 Positioning of the exposure unit/

17
LED exposure unit and mirrors unit
13
D00002390 L.1.1.1 Scanner section

19
14
D00002391 L.2.1.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423

38
15
D00002620 I.6.1 System Settings-Power Save

64
Settings
16
D00002380 I.8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST

30
17
D00002341 N.1. bizhub 223/283/363/423

22
18
D00002362 O.16.1 Parts energized when the main

27
power switch is turned ON
19
20
Section R
Section S
Descriptions of revision
Error correction
Add to the section Q (Parts guide manual 1st edition)
The specification value was added.
The items ware added.
The NOTE was added.
The procedure steps ware added.
The explanation was added.
The explanation was added.
Date
2011/09/01
2012/02/28
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/24
2012/08/27
2012/08/27
2012/08/27
2012/08/27
Add to the section R (R. Troubleshooting guide based

on reports from field.)
2012/10/05
Add to the section S (S. Layout drawings for related

parts by each trouble code.)
2012/11/23
21
D00010780 A.1. IMPORTANT NOTICE and others.

92
22
D00002384 I.11.14.7 Memory

52
The company name was changed.

The explanation was modified.
2013/04/01
2013/04/04
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A-1
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 1. IMPORTANT

NOTICE
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA, INC. (hereafter called KM) strongly
recommends that all servicing be performed only by KM-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KM does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the
information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended. Therefore,
this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of
technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product
properly.
Keep this service manual also for future service.
A-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 2. DESCRIPTION

ITEMS FOR DANGE...
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions DANGER, WARNING, and
CAUTION are defined as follows.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER
: Action having a high possibility of suffering

death or serious injury
WARNING
: Action having a possibility of suffering death

or serious injury
CAUTION
: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

wound and property damage
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
: Precaution when
servicing the product.
: Prohibition when
: Direction when
General
precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General
prohibition
Do not touch with

wet hand
Do not
disassemble
General
instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
Illustrations representing the power plug and wall outlet used in the following descriptions are
only typical. Their shapes differ depending on the country or region.
A-3
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. SAFETY WARNINGS
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at
proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high
risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly
prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind
this policy.
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention
WARNING
Do not make any modifications to the product
unless otherwise instructed by KM.
Do not use any part not specified by KM.
Do not use any power cord or power plug not
specified by KM.
Use only the protective fuses specified by KM.
Use of any type of fuse or related part not
specified by KM makes safety devices
inoperative which may result in a fire from
high heat.
Do not disable fuse functions or use a wire,
metal clip, solder, or other conductor in place
of the fuse.
Fire may result from high heat.
Do not disable relay functions (for example,
inserting a piece of paper between relay
contacts to hamper circuit action.)
Fire may result from high heat.
A-4

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
WARNING
Do not disable safety functions (for example,
interlocks and safety circuits).
Safety devices become inoperative, resulting
in fire from high heat, electric shock, or
injury.
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit the wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is the obligation of the customer engineer (hereafter called the
CE) to attach the appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to
the supply.
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
Use a power supply cord set which meets the
following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration
intended for the connection to wall outlet
appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having
enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for
the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric
shock.
A-5
kw

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
WARNING
Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection
to wall outlet appropriate for the products rated
voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product
connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage,
current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire
or electric shock.
The wires in the power supply cord shall be
connected to the terminals of the plug in accordance
with the following:
Color of the wire
Terminal of the plug
Marked with "L", "A" or "W"
Brown
Black
or colored RED
Marked with "N"
Light Blue
White
or colored BLACK
Marked with "E", "PE" or "
"
Green-and-Yellow
or colored GREEN
or GREEN-AND-YELLOW
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer
(hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and
reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
A-6

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.3.1 Power Supply

(1) Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
The power outlet should have a capacity of at
least the maximum power consumption and
be dedicated only to the product.
The current that can be passed through the
outlet is limited and any current exceeding
the limit could result in fire.
If the wall outlet has two or more receptacles
and the product and another electrical
appliance are plugged into this wall outlet,
make sure that the total load does not exceed
the rating of the wall outlet. The current that
can be passed through the outlet is limited
and any current exceeding the limit could
result in a fire.
Do not use any conversion plug adapter even
if the power plug shape does not match your
wall outlet.
The shapes of the power plug and the wall
outlet are set according to the voltage and
allowable current. Use of a conversion plug
adapter could result in an abnormal voltage
or insufficient current capacity, leading to a
fire. It may also result in an electric shock
due to a grounding failure.
If the plug shape does not match the wall
outlet, request the user to perform power
source installation work.
A-7
kw

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
WARNING
Make sure the power cord is plugged into the
wall outlet securely.
If the power plug is left loose in the wall
outlet, contact failure may occur, leading to
abnormal heating of the power plug and a
risk of fire.
(2) Ground Connection
WARNING
Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded
product, you may suffer electric shock while
operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall
outlet.
Make sure of correct ground connection.
If the grounding wire is connected to an
inappropriate part, there is a risk of
explosion or electric shock. Do not connect
the grounding wire to any of the following
parts:
a. Gas pipe: Gas explosion or fire may
result.
b. Lightning rod: Risk of electric shock or
fire during lightning.
c. Grounding wire for telephone line: Risk of
electric shock or fire during lightning.
d. Water pipe and faucet: These parts do
not serve as a ground connection
because of a plastic part that is very
often installed midway within the water
pipe.
A-8

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
When using the power cord set (inlet type)
that came with this product, make sure the
connector is securely inserted in the inlet of
the product.
When a securing measure is provided,
secure the cord with the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not
connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
Do not allow the power cord to be stepped on
or pinched.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is damaged.
Check whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is
damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plug and connector on each end)
specified by KM. Using the damaged power
cord may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the
power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet
without removing dust may result in fire.
Do not insert the power plug into the wall
outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
A-9

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
WARNING
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the
plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk
of fire and electric shock.
(4) Wiring
WARNING
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple
power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
When an extension cord is required, use one
that meets the rated current, rated voltage,
and the relevant safety standards of the
country.
Current that can be passed through the
extension cable is limited and fire may
result from the use of an inappropriate type
of an extension cable.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the
cable taken up. Fire may result.
A-10

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(1) Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
Do not place the product near flammable
materials or volatile materials that may catch
fire.
A risk of fire exists.
Do not place the product in a place exposed
to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
(2) When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
When the product is not to be used for an
extended period of time (for holidays, for
example), instruct the user to turn OFF the
power switch and unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Dust collected around the power plug and
outlet may cause fire.
A-11

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Ventilation
CAUTION
The product generates ozone gas during
operation.
If the smell of ozone is present in the
following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly
ventilated room
b. When making a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the
same time
(4) Stability
CAUTION
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake, the product
may slide, leading to an injury.
A-12

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.3.3 After Service

(1) Inspection before Servicing
WARNING
Before conducting an inspection, read all
relevant documentation (service manual,
technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the
inspection following the prescribed procedure
using the recommended personal safety
equipment and using only the prescribed
tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described
in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not
used, the product may break and a risk of
injury or fire exists.
Before conducting an inspection, be sure to
disconnect the power plugs from the Main
Body and Accessories (Options).
When the power plug is inserted into the
wall outlet, some units are still powered
even if the POWER switch is turned OFF.
A risk of electric shock exists.
CAUTION
The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burned.
A-13

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CAUTION
Do not leave the machine unattended during
transportation, installation, and/or inspection.
If the machine is left unattended, face
protrusions toward the wall or take other
necessary precautions to prevent a user or
other person in the area from stumbling
over a protrusion of the machine or being
caught by a cable, possibly causing a fall to
the floor or other personal injury.
(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
Take every care when making adjustments or
performing an operation check with the
product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an
operation check with the external cover
detached, you may touch live or highvoltage parts or you may be caught in
moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a
risk of injury.
Take every care when servicing with the
external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A
risk of electric shock exists.
If it is absolutely necessary to service the
machine with the door open or external
covers removed, always be attentive to the
motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause
unexpected hazards.
A-14

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CAUTION
Do not keep gazing at a lamp light during the
service procedure with the product powered
ON.
Eyestrain may result.
(3) Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
When a product fault is reported from a user,
check parts and repair the fault appropriately
with safety in mind.
A damaged product, personal injury, or fire
may result.
Whenever mounting an option on the
machine, be attentive to the motion of the
other workers performing the task.
Another worker may be injured by a pinch
point between the machine and the option.
When mounting an option on the machine, be
careful about the clearance between the
machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand
pinched between the machine and the
option.
When removing a part that secures a motor,
gear, or other moving part, disassembling a
unit, or reinstalling any of such parts and
units, be careful about moving parts and use
care not to drop any part or unit. During the
service procedure, give sufficient support for
any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
A-15

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
WARNING
Check the external covers and frame for
possible sharp edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or
servicing.
When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow
spot, be careful about sharp edges and burrs
on the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,
staples, and screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause
electric shock or spark bursting into flame.
Check wiring for pinched and any other
damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of
electric shock or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for
any damage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
Do not disassemble or adjust the write unit
(PH unit) incorporating a laser.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
Do not supply power with the write unit (PH
unit) shifted from the specified mounting
position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
After replacing a part to which AC voltage is
applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be
sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
A-16

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
WARNING
Check the interlock switch and actuator for
loosening and check whether the interlock
functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may
receive an electric shock or be injured
when you insert your hand in the product
(e.g., for clearing paper jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into
contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other
pointed parts.
Damage may lead to the risk of electric
shock or fire.
Make sure that all screws, components,
wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for
safety check and maintenance have been
reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors,
pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, personal injury,
electric shock, and fire exists.
Never use any flammable or combustible
spray, fluid, gas, or similar substance in and
around the product.
Do not use any flammable or combustible
dust spray, in particular, to clean the interior
of the product.
Fire or explosion may result.
CAUTION
Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust
from electrical parts and electrode units such
as a charging corona unit.
Toner remnants and dust may lead to
product failure and/or the risk of fire.
A-17

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CAUTION
Check electrode units such as a charging
corona unit for deterioration and signs of
leakage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
When replacing a battery, replace it with a
new one as specified.
Dispose of the used battery as instructed
on its packaging or by local ordinance.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with an incorrect type.
(4) Handling of Consumables
WARNING
For handling of consumables (toner,
developer, photoconductor, etc.) and their
storage precautions, see MSDS.
(5) Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
Handle with care according to MSDS.
Use of solvent may involve explosion, fire,
or personal injury.
3.4 Used Batteries Precautions
3.4.1 ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
A-18

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.4.2 Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
3.4.3 France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand
par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant.
3.4.4 Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren.
3.4.5 Finland, Sweden

VAROlTUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
3.4.6 Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
3.5 Laser Safety

3.5.1 Laser Safety
This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of danger
from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this manual.
3.5.2 Internal Laser Radiation

This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The laser
diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.
A-19

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit
should not be opened under any circumstances.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode
bizhub 223/283
Maximum average radiation power
(*)
bizhub 363/423
Wavelength
15 mW
13.9W
17.3W
770 to 800 nm
*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit

[1]
[2]
[1]
Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit
[2]
Print Head Unit
(1) U.S.A., Canada (CDRH Regulation)

This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is
mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center
for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of
the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
The label shown on A.3.5.3 Laser Safety Label indicates compliance with the CDRH
regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
semiconductor laser
Wavelength
15 mW
770 to 800 nm
A-20

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) All Areas
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
semiconductor laser
Wavelength
15 mW
770 to 800 nm
(3) Denmark
ADVARSEL
Usynlig laserstrling ved bning, nr sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af
funktion. Undg udsttelse for strling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der
opfylder IEC60825-1 sikkerheds kravene.
halvlederlaser
Laserdiodens hjeste styrke
blgelngden
15 mW
770 to 800 nm
(4) Finland, Sweden
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
Laitteen kyttminen muulla kuin tss kyttohjeessa mainitulla
tavalla saattaa altistaa kyttjn turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittvlle
nkymttmlle lasersteilylle.
puolijohdelaser
Laserdiodin suurin teho
aallonpituus
15 mW
770 to 800 nm
A-21

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
VARNING!
Om apparaten anvnds p annat stt n i denna bruksanvisning
specificerats, kan anvndaren utsttas fr osynlig laserstrlning, som
verskrider grnsen fr laserklass 1.
halvledarlaser
Den maximala effekten fr laserdioden
vglngden
15 mW
770 to 800 nm
VARO!
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina nkymttomlle
lasersteilylle. l katso steeseen.
VARNING!
Osynlig laserstrining nr denna del r ppnad och sprren r
urkopplad. Betrakta ej strien.
(5) Norway
ADVERSEL
Dersom apparatet brukes p annen mte enn spesifisert i denne
bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes fr unsynlig laserstrlning,
som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1.
halvleder laser
Maksimal effekt till laserdiode
blgelengde
15 mW
770 to 800 nm
3.5.3 Laser Safety Label

A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.
A-22

WARNINGS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
*only for the U.S.A.
3.5.4 Laser Caution Label

A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
3.5.5 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the
above specifications.
When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when
working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.
If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser
protective goggles.
A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use
utmost care when handling tools on the users premises.
A-23
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING

INDICATIONS ON THE ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are
advised not to touch by any caution label. Do not remove caution
labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the
caution cannot be read, contact our service office.
Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be
taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine
A-24
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING

INDICATIONS ON THE ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.2 Warning indications on the boards

High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
A-25
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 5. MEASURES

TO TAKE IN CASE OF...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take
emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KM must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through
direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KM.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by
every distributor.
A-26
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 1. PRECAUTION ON

HANDLING THIS MANUAL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL
CAUTION
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
B-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 2. PRODUCT NAME
2. PRODUCT NAME
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
1
bizhub 423/363/283/223: Main body
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows 7: Windows 7
When the description is made in combination of the OSs mentioned above:
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP/Vista/7
B-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 3. BRAND NAME
3. BRAND NAME
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company.
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS

KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA logo, bizhub and PageScope are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
2010 KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
B-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. FEEDING DIRECTION
4. FEEDING DIRECTION
When the long side of the paper is parallel with the feeding direction, it is called short edge feeding. The feeding direction which is
perpendicular to the short edge feeding is called the long edge feeding.
Short edge feeding will be identified with [S (abbreviation for Short edge feeding)] on the paper size. No specific notation is added for the
long edge feeding. When the size has only the short edge feeding with no long edge feeding, [S] will not be added to the paper size.
Sample notation
Paper size
Feeding direction
A4
Long edge feeding
A4
Short edge feeding
A4S
Short edge feeding
A3
A3
B-4
Notation
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.1 Type
Type
Desktop/console * scanner/printer
Printing process
Laser electrostatic printing system
PC drum type
OPC drum: KM-1
Scanning density
600 dpi in main scanning direction x 600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Exposure lamp
White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W

White LED light-source illumination
Platen
Stationary (mirror scan)
Original scanning
Mirror scanning CCD optical system

Sheet through system when DF-621 is used
Reading device
CCD sensor
Registration
Rear left edge
Paper feeding separation system

(Manual bypass)
Small roller separation system with torque limiter
Paper feeding separation system (Tray 1) Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Paper feeding separation system (Tray 2) Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Exposure system (exposing system)
1 beam LD exposing system
Exposure system (scan system)
Polygon mirror scan system
Exposure density (main scanning

direction)
Equivalent to 1800 dpi
Exposure density (sub scanning

direction)
600 dpi
Developing system
Dry 2 components developing method, HMT developing system
Charging system
DC comb electrode scorotron system
Neutralizing system
Pre-charging + Red LED system
Image transfer system
Roller image transfer system
Paper separating system
Neutralization needle bias superimposed voltage, separating claws and combination of curvature
system
Fusing system
Roller fusing
Heating system
Halogen lamp
*: Only when the optional paper feed cabinet/desk is installed.
1.2 Functions
Types of original
Sheets
Books
Three-dimensional objects
Max. original size
A3 or 11 x 17
Max. original weight
Max. 2 kg
Multiple copies
1 to 9999
Warm-up time (at ambient temperature of When the sub power

12 sec. or less
23 C/73.4 F and rated source voltage) switch is turned ON at any
timing while the main
power switch remains ON
for a predetermined period
of time or more.
When the main power
switch is turned ON during
the sub power switch
being ON.
When hard disk is installed: 30 sec. or less

When hard disk is not installed: 25 sec. or less
Copy
Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)

Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
PC print
Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)

Trailing edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)
Rear edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)
Front edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)
First copy time (Tray1/2 A4 or 8 1/2 x 11,

full size)
bizhub 223/283
4.2 sec. or less
bizhub 363/423
3.6 sec. or less
Processing speed
bizhub 223/283
140.0 mm/s
bizhub 363/423
173.0 mm/s
Image loss
C-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Copying/printing speed for multi-copy/
print cycle
(A4 or 8 1/2 x 11)

bizhub 223
1-sided: Plain paper 22 copies/min

1-sided: Thick paper 9 copies/min
2-sided:22 copies/min
bizhub 283

1-sided: Thick paper 10 copies/min
2-sided: 28 copies/min
bizhub 363

1-sided: Thick paper 12.5 copies/min
2-sided: 36 copies/min
bizhub 423
1-sided: Plain paper 42 copies/min (A4)

2- sided: Thick paper 13 copies/min (A4)
2-sided: 42 copies/min (A4)
1-sided: Plain paper 41.5 copies/min (8 1/ x 11)
2
1- sided: Thick paper 13 copies/min (8 1/ x 11)
2
2-sided: 41.5 copies/min (8 1/ x 11)
2
Fixed zoom ratios
Full size
x1.000
Reduction
Metric area
x0.500
x0.707
x0.816
x0.866
Inch area
x0.500
x0.647
x0.733
x0.785
Metric area
x1.154
x1.224
x1.414
x2.000
Inch area
x1.214
x1.294
x1.545
x2.000
A3 to B5/B5S
A5S
16K
8K
Enlargement
Zoom ratios memory
3 memories
Variable zoom ratios
x0.250 to x4.000
in 0.001 increments
Paper size
Tray 1
Metric area
Inch area
11 x 17 to 8 1/ x 11
2
8 1/ x 11S
2
5 1/ x 8 1/ S
2
2
8 x 13
Metric area
A3 to B5/B5S
6K
8K
Inch area
12 x 18 to 8 1/ x 11
2
8 1/ x 11S
2
5 1/ x 8 1/ S
2
2
8 x 13
Metric area
Inch area
12 x 18 to 5 1/ x 8 1/
2
2
5 1/ x 8 1/ S
2
2
4 x 6S
8 x 13
Tray 2
Manual bypass tray
Copy exit tray capacity
External memory function
A3 to A6S
A5
16K/16KS
8K
Plain paper
250 sheets
Thick paper
10 sheets
OHP film
1 sheet
Supported external
memory devices
USB flash memory compatible with the USB (1.1/2.0) interface

Formatted to the FAT32 file system
Memory capacity of 2GB or less recommended
(Possible to be non-operational for 4 GB or more)
Not including security features
(Possible to turn OFF security features)
C-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223

A USB flash memory that appears as multiple drives on a computer
cannot be used.
1.3 Paper
Paper source (maximum tray capacity)
Type
Copy paper
type
Tray 1
Tray 2
Manual bypass tray
Plain paper (60 to 90 g/

m2 / 16 to 24 lb)
(500 sheets)
(500 sheets)
(150 sheets)
Translucent paper
OHP film (crosswise

feeding only)
Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/

m2 / 24.25 to 40 lb)
Thick paper 2 (151 to 210

g/m2 / 40.25 to 55.75 lb)
Copy paper
dimensions
(20 sheets)
Postcards
Envelopes
(10 sheets)
Labels
(20 sheets)
Width
139.7 to 297 mm
5 1/ to 11 3/ inch
2
4
139.7 to 297 mm
5 1/ to 11 3/ inch
2
4
90 to 297 mm
3 1/ to 11 3/ inch
2
4
Length
182 to 431.8 mm
7 1/ to 17 inch
4
182 to 431.8 mm
7 1/ to 17 inch
4
139.7 to 431.8 mm
5 1/ to 17 inch
2
Automatic duplex unit : Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) are reliably fed.
NOTE
Precautions regarding the use of paper.
Do not use the following types of paper. Not observing these precautions may lead to reduced print quality, a paper jam or a
damage to the machine.
OHP film that have already been fed through the machine (even if they are still blank)
Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer
Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper
Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time
Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes
Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface
Treated paper such as carbon-backed paper, thermal paper, pressure-sensitive paper, or iron-on transfer paper
Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing
Paper of a non-standard shape (paper that is not rectangular)
Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips
Paper with labels attached
Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached
1.4 Materials
Number of prints
(specification value)
Parts name
Toner bottle
Developer
Drum unit
Developing unit
Type name
bizhub 223/283
17,500 prints
TN217
bizhub 363/423
25,000 prints
TN414
DV411
bizhub 223
80,000 prints
bizhub 283
100,000 prints
bizhub 363
110,000 prints
bizhub 423
120,000 prints
bizhub 223
80,000 prints
bizhub 283
100,000 prints
bizhub 363
110,000 prints
bizhub 423
120,000 prints
bizhub 223
320,000 prints
bizhub 283
400,000 prints
bizhub 363
440,000 prints
bizhub 423
480,000 prints
DR411
A1UD R711 XX
1.5 Print volume

bizhub 223
Europe
Except for Europe
Average
2,900 prints/month
Maximum
19,000 prints/month
Average
2,300 prints/month
C-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Maximum
19,000 prints/month
Average
4,800 prints/month
Maximum
28,000 prints/month
Average
3,700 prints/month
Maximum
28,000 prints/month
Average
7,900 prints/month
Maximum
48,000 prints/month
Average
6,100 prints/month
Maximum
48,000 prints/month
Average
10,700 prints/month
Maximum
60,000 prints/month
Average
8,300 prints/month
Maximum
60,000 prints/month
bizhub 283
Europe
Except for Europe
bizhub 363
Europe
Except for Europe
bizhub 423
Europe
Except for Europe
1.6 Machine specifications

Power
requirements
Voltage:
Current:
100 V
15 A
110 V
15 A
120 V
12 A
127 V
12 A
230 V
7A
Frequency:
AC 100 V,
120 V,
127 V,
220-240 V
50/60 Hz 3 Hz
Max power consumption
1,500 W or less
Dimensions
ADF is installed
623 mm *1 (W) x 799 mm *2 (D) x 816 mm (H)

24.5 inch *1 (W) x 31.5 inch *2 (D) x 32.1 inch (H)
ADF is not installed
623 mm *1 (W) x 794 mm *2 (D) x 700 mm (H) *3

24.5 inch *1 (W) x 31.25 inch *2 (D) x 27.5 inch (H) *3
Space requirements
Weight
1,634 mm (W) x 895 mm (D) x 1,141 mm (H) *4

64.3 inch (W) x 35.2 inch (D) x 44.9 inch (H) *4
bizhub 223/283
Approx. 66 kg / 145.5 lb (except for developer and toner bottle)
bizhub 363/423
Approx. 78 kg / 172 lb (except for developer and toner bottle)
*1: Width when the manual bypass tray is closed

*2: Including the control panel.
*3: Height up to the original glass
*4: When the sub tray of the finisher FS-527 and the paper feed tray is slide out, and ADF is open.
1.7 Operating environment

Temperature
10 to 30 C / 50 to 86 F (with a fluctuation of 10 C / 18 F or less per hour)
Humidity
15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 10%/h)
Levelness
Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or under.
1.8 Print functions

Type
Built-in printer controller
RAM
2 GB (shared with the main body)
HDD
250 GB (shared with the main body) * Optional in some models and marketing areas.
SSD
1 GB
Interface
Standard
Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB2.0/1.1
Option
USB 2.0
Frame type
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
C-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Ethernet II
Ethernet SNAP
Supported protocols
TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6)
BOOTP
ARP
ICMP
DHCP
DHCPv6
AutoIP
SLP
SNMP
FTP
LPR/LPD
RAW Socket
SMB over TCP/IP
IPP
HTTP
POP
SMTP
LDAP
NTP
SSL
IPX/SPX
AppleTalk
Bonjour
NetBEUI
WebDAV
DPWS
S/MIME
IPsec
DNS
DynamicDNS
LLMNR
LLTD
Printer language
PCL5c/6 Emulation
PCL XL ver. 2.1 Emulation
PostScript 3 Emulation (3016)
XPS ver.1.0
Print resolution
Equivalent to 1,800 dpi in main scanning direction x 600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Printer fonts
PCL Latin 80 Fonts

Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 137 Fonts
Supported computer
IBM PC/AT compatible machine

Macintosh (PowerPC/Intel processor: Only MacOS X 10.4/10.5 for Intel processor)
Printer driver
PCL KONICAMINOLTA
driver (PCL driver)
Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)

Windows NT Server Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later)
Windows 2000 Server (SP3 or later)
Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Vista Business *
Windows Vista Enterprise *
Windows Vista Home Basic *
Windows Vista Home Premium *
Windows Vista Ultimate *
Windows Server 2008 Standard *
Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate *
C-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223

PostScript
KONICAMINOLTA driver
(PS driver)

XPS KONICAMINOLTA
driver (XPS driver)

PostScript PPD driver (PSPPD)
Mac OS 9.2 or later

Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5
Fax driver
Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)

Windows NT Server Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
* 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported
1.9 Scan functions

Scanner
TWAIN
Scannable range
Same as the copier (Max. 11 x 17: inch area, A3: metric area)
Scan speed (A4 or 8 1/2 x

11, DF scan, 1-side
original Resolution 300
dpi)
70 pages/min
Functions
Scan to E-mail
Scan to FTP
Scan to SMB
Scan to WebDAV
Scan to BOX
Scanning resolution
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Driver
TWAIN Driver
HDD TWAIN Driver
C-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Supported operating
systems
PC
Conform to the specification of operating system
Required memory
Conform to the specification of operating system
Network
Computer to which TCP/IP protocol is correctly set
Hard disk
SMB
Supported
operating
systems
Windows 2000 Professional (SP4)

Windows XP Home Edition (SP3)
Windows XP Professional (SP3)
Windows NT 4.0 (SP6a)
Windows Vista Home Basic (SP1)
Windows Vista Home Premium (SP1)
Windows Vista Business (SP1)
Windows Vista Enterprise (SP1)
Windows Vista Ultimate (SP1)
Required 20 MB or more disk space

Windows
Windows NT4.0 Server/Workstation

Windows 2000 Server/Professional
Windows XP Home/Professional
Windows Server 2003 each edition
Windows Vista each edition
Windows Server 2008
DFS function is supported only in the environment that structured with the following Windows
server operating systems.
Windows 2000 Server each edition
Windows Server 2003 each edition
Windows Server 2008
Direct hosting function apply to the following operating systems.
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Vista
(IPv6 function is available only when the Windows Vista is installed.)
Samba *
2.2.x
3.x
Novell
Netware
Netware 6.5 (SP6 or later)
*: This machine supports Unicode. However, if the operating system used in a destination computer does not support Unicode (2 and 3 byte
characters), SMB transmission may be unavailable. If SMB transmission is unsuccessful, specify the shared name of the destination folder
using ASCII codes (one-byte alphanumeric characters).
1.10 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
C-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-621/SP-501
2. DF-621/SP-501
2.1 Type
Name
Reverse automatic document feeder
Type
Feeding order
Forward
Feed section
Paper feed from top of stack
Switchback section
Switch back system
Exit section
Straight exit system
Installation
Screw cramp to the main body
Document alignment
Center
Document loading
Left image side up
2.2 Functions
Modes
1-sided mode / 2-sided mode
2.3 Paper
Type of
document
Standard mode (Plain

paper)
1-sided mode: 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lb)
Mixed original detection

mode (Plain paper)
1-sided / 2-sided mode: 50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
FAX mode (Plain paper)

Detectable
document
size
Standard mode
Metric area
A6S to A3
Inch area
5.5 x 8.5 to 11 x 17
Mixed original detection

mode
For the mixed original detection mode, refer to the mixed original feed chart.
FAX mode
Metric area
Standard size: A5 to A3
Width: 100 to 297 mm
Length (1-sided mode): 139.7 to 1,000 mm
Length (2-sided mode): 139.7 to 431.8 mm
Inch area
Standard size: 5.5 x 8.5 to 11 x 17

Width: 3.95 to 11.69 inch
Length (1-sided mode): 5.5 to 39.37 inch
Length (2-sided mode): 5.5 to 17 inch
100 sheets (80 g/m2 (21.25 lb))
Capacity
2.4 Paper feed prohibited originals

If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.
Type of original
Original that is stapled or clipped.
Possible trouble
Feed failure, damaged sheet, or drive failure due to clip clogging
Book original
Feed failure, damaged sheet, or drive failure
Original weighing less than 35g/m2 or
Feed failure
more than128g/m2
Torn original
Feed failure, damaged sheet
Highly curled original (15 mm or more)
Original misfeed due to dog-ear or skew
OHP transparencies
Feed failure
Label sheet
Feed failure
Offset master
Feed failure
Glossy photographic paper or glossy

enamel paper
Feed failure
Sheets clipped or notched
Damaged sheet
Sheets patched
Patched part folded or torn sheet
2.5 Paper feed not guaranteed originals

If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of original
Possible trouble
Sheets lightly curled

(Curled amount: 10 to 15 mm)
Dog-eared, exit failure
Heat sensitive paper
Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure
C-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-621/SP-501
Type of original
Possible trouble
Coated paper (Ink jet paper)
Take-up failure, transport failure
Translucent paper
Paper immediately after paper exit from

the main unit
Paper with many punched holes (e.g.,

loose leaf) limited to vertical feeding*
Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes
Sheets with 2 to 4 holes*
Transport failure
Sheets folded (e.g., sheets two-folded or

Z-folded)
Take-up failure, transport failure, image deformation, multi-page feed
*: Before using loose leaf or folded original, straighten the perforations or fold first.
The permissible lift amount is 15 mm or less.
2.6 Mixed original feed chart

For metric
Max. original size
297 mm
297 mm
257 mm
Mixed
original size
182 mm
148 mm
128 mm
A3
A4
B4
257 mm
B5
A4S
210 mm
A5
B5S
A5S
A6S
A3
OK
OK
A4
OK
OK
B4
OK
OK
OK
OK
B5
OK
OK
OK
OK
A4S
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
A5
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
182 mm
B5S
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
148 mm
A5S
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
128 mm
A6S
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
210 mm
For inch
Max. original size
11
11
Mixed
original size
8.5
5.5
8.5
5.5
11 x 17
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 11S
5.5 x 8.5
8.5 x 5.5S
11 x 17
OK
OK
8.5 x 11
OK
OK
8.5 x 14
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
8.5 x 11S
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
5.5 x 8.5
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
8.5 x 5.5S
OK
Mixed original feed available (Tilted with in 1.5 % or less)
NG
NO. mixed original feed
Can not set original

Power requirements
DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)

Max. power consumption
60 W or less
Dimensions
596 mm (W) x 542 mm (D) x 116 mm (H) * excluding the protruding part
23.46 inch (W) x 21.34 inch (D) x 4.57 inch (H)
Weight
11.5 kg (25.35 lb) or less

Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

NOTE
C-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. PC-109/PC-208
3. PC-109/PC-208
3.1 Type
Name
1 way paper feed cabinet (PC-109)

2 way paper feed cabinet (PC-208)
Type
Front loading type

1 way paper feed device (PC-109)
2 way paper feed device (PC-208)
Installation
Desk type
Document alignment
Center
3.2 Paper
Type
Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2, 16 to 24 lb)
Copy paper dimensions
Capacity
Size
A5S (Metric area only),
B5
B5S
A4
A4S
B4
A3,
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S (Inch area only),
8 1/2 x 11
8 1/2 x 11S,
8 1/2 x 14
11 x 17
8K
16K
Tray 3
Tray 4
500 sheets
500 sheets
Width
139.7 to 297 mm
5.5 to 11.7 inch
Length
182 to 431.8 mm
7.2 to 17 inch

Power requirements
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main body)

DC 5 V 5 %
15 W or less
Dimensions
600 mm (W) x 603 mm (D) x 325 mm (H)

Weight
PC-109
29.0 kg (63.93 lb)
PC-208
34.0 kg (74.95 lb)


NOTE
C-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 4. PC-409
4. PC-409
4.1 Type
Name
Large capacity cabinet
Type
Front loading type LCC
Installation
Desk type
Document alignment
Center
4.2 Paper
Type
Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb))
Size
Metric area: A4,
Inch area: 8 1/ x 11
2
2,500 sheets

Power requirements
Capacity
DC 24 V 10% (supplied from the main body)

DC 5 V 5%
45 W or less
Dimensions
600 mm (W) x 603 mm (D) x 325 mm (H)

Weight
33.0 kg (72.75 lb)


NOTE
C-11
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 5. JS-505
5. JS-505
5.1 Type
Type
Built-in type 2-bin stacker
Installation
Installed in main body
Document alignment
Center
5.2 Functions
Modes
Sort, group, sort offset, group offset
5.3 Paper
Exit tray
Lower tray
Size
A6S
A5S
A5
B6S
B5S
B5
A4S
A4
B4
A3
A3 Wide
Post card S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2,
8 1/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 11,
8 1/2 x 14
11 x 17
12 1/4 x 18
Special
paper
Type
Capacity
150 sheets
Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2 , 24.25 to 40 lb)

Thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2, 40.25 to 55.5 lb)
Thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2, 55.75 to 68 lb)
20 sheets
OHP film
Post card
Label
Envelope
10 sheets
Long size paper
1 sheet
Max.:
311.1 mm x 1200 mm
12.25 inch x 47.25 inch
Min.:
90 mm x 139.7 mm
3.5 inch x 5.5 inch
Upper tray
A5S
B5S
B5
A4S
A4
B4
A3
8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11
8 1/2 x 14
11 x 17
Max.:
297 mm x 431.8 mm
11.75 inch x 17 inch
Min.:
148 mm x 210 mm
5.75 inch x 8.25 inch
50 sheets
5.4 Offset function

Exit tray
Lower tray
Shift amount
30 mm
Types of paper to be used
Plain paper, Thick paper 1/2/3/4
Size
B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, A3

8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17

Power requirements

DC5 V 5 %
C-12
bizhub 423/363/283/223
40 W or less
Dimensions
423 mm (W) x 477 mm (D) x 129.5 mm (H)

16.75 inch (W) x 18.75 inch (D) x 5 inch (H)
543 mm (W) x 477 mm (D) x 129.5 mm (H) *
21.5 inch (W) x 18.75 inch (D) x 5 inch (H) *
Weight
5.0 kg (11 lb)
*: Size when the paper exit tray is pulled out


NOTE
C-13
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. JS-603
6.1 Type
Type
Fixed to the finisher
Document alignment
Center
6.2 Functions
Modes
Sort
Group
6.3 Paper
Size
A5S
B5S
B5
A4S
A4
B4
A3
A3 Wide
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 11
8 1/2 x 14
11 x 17
12 1/4 x 18
Type
Capacity
100 sheets
Special
paper
10 sheets
Thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2, 40.25 to 55.5 lb)
Max.:
311.15 mm x 457.2 mm
12.25 inch x 18 inch

Min.:
139.7 mm x 182 mm
OHP film
Label
Envelope

Power requirements

DC5 V 5 %
Dimensions
165 mm (W) x 389 mm (D) x 63 mm (H)

Weight
1.0 kg (2.2 lb)


NOTE
C-14
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 7. FS-527
7. FS-527
7.1 Type
Name
Multi staple finisher
Type
Freestanding
Document alignment
Center
Consumables
Staples
7.2 Functions
Modes
Sort
Group
Offset
Group
Offset
Sort staple
7.3 Paper
7.3.1 Non sort/sort/group
Size
Type
A6S
A5S
A5
B5S
B5
B6S
A4S
A4
B4
A3
A3Wide
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2
8 1/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 11
8 1/2 x 14
11 x 17
12 1/4 x 18
Tray1 (Sub tray) Max.:
311.15 mm x 1200 mm
Tray1 (Sub tray) Max.:
12.25 x 47.24 inch
Tray1 (Sub tray) Min.:
90 mm x 139.7 mm
Tray1 (Sub tray) Min.:
3.54 x 5.5 inch
Tray2 (Main tray) Max.:
311.15 mm x 457.2 mm
Tray2 (Main tray) Max.:
12.25 x 18 inch
Tray2 (Main tray) Min.:
100 mm x 139.7 mm
Tray2 (Main tray) Min.:
3.94 x 5.5 inch
Plain
paper
Recycled
paper
210 mm to 297 mm x
457.2 mm to 1200 mm
Weight
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
Envelope
OHP
transparenci
es
Label
Letterhead
Max. capacity
Exit tray1
200 sheets
Exit tray2
A4S x 11S or less

8 1/ x 11S or less
2
3,000 sheets
B4 x 14 or greater
8 1/ x 14 or greater
2
1,500 sheets
A5S or less
5 1/ x 8 1/ S or less
2
2
500 sheets
Thick paper
1
91 to 150 g/m2
24.25 to 40 lb
Thick paper
2
151 to 209 g/m2

40.25 to 55.5 lb
Thick paper
3
210 to 256 g/m2

55.75 to 68 lb
Thick paper
4
257 to 271 g/m2

68.25 to 72 lb
Long size
paper *
127 to 160 g/m2

33.75 to 42.5 lb
20 sheets
*: Long size paper is available only for non-sort mode.
7.3.2 Sort offset/group offset

Size
A5
B5S
B5
A4S
A4
B4
A3
A3Wide
8 1/2 x 11S
Type
Plain
paper
Recycled
paper
Weight
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
Max. capacity
Exit tray2
C-15
A4S or less
8 1/ x 11S or less
2
3,000 sheets *
B4 or greater
8 1/ x 14 or greater
2
1,500 sheets
A5
500 sheets
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Size
8 1/ x 11
2
8 1/ x 14
2
11 x 17
12 1/ x 18
4

Type
Thick paper
Weight
Max. capacity
91 to 271 g/m2
24.25 to 72 lb
Max.:
311.15 mm x 457.2 mm
12.25 x 18 inch
Min.:
182 mm x 148.5 mm
7.17 x 5.85 inch
*: 2,000 sheets when SD-509 is mounted
7.3.3 Sort staple

Max. capacity
Size
A5
B5S
B5
A4S
A4
B4
A3
8 1/2 x 11S
8 1/ x 11
2
8 1/ x 14
2
11 x 17
Max.:
297 mm x 431.8 mm
11.75 x 17 inch
Type
Plain
paper
Recycled
paper
Thick paper
1
Weight
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
No. of sheets to be stapled A4S, 8 1/2 x

11 S or less
Exit tray2
2 to 9
sheets
100 copies
50 copies
10 to 20
sheets
50 copies
50 copies
21 to 30
sheets
30 copies
30 copies
31 to 40
sheets
25 copies
25 copies
41 to 50
sheets
20 copies
20 copies
91 to 209 g/m2
24.25 to 55.5 lb
50 sheets
15 sheets
-
Min.:
182 mm x 148.5 mm
7.25 x 5.75 inch
7.4 Stapling
Staple filling mode
Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Stapling position
Back/Front of the corner (45 degree)
A4
A3
8 1/ x 11
2
11 x 17
Back/Front of the corner (35 degree)
B5
B4
Back/Front of the corner (Parallel)
Side: Parallel 2 point
A4S
B5S
A5
8 1/2 x 11S
8 1/ x 14
2
A4S
A4
A3
B5S
B5
B4
A5
8 1/2 x 11S
8 1/ x 11
2
8 1/ x 14
2
11 x 17
None

Power requirements
Max. No. of
sheets to be
stapled
30 sheets
Thick paper
2
Manual staple
B4, 8 1/2 x
14 or
greater
C-16
bizhub 423/363/283/223
56 W or less
Dimensions
528 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,025 (H) mm

20.79 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 40.35 (H) inch
658 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,087 (H) mm *
25.91 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 42.8 (H) inch *
Weight
42 kg (92.59 lb)
*: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out


NOTE
C-17
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. FS-529
8.1 Type
Type
Multi staple finisher built into the main body
Installation
Installed in main body
Document alignment
Center
8.2 Functions
Modes
Sort
Group
Sort offset
Group offset
Sort staple
8.3 Paper
Capacity
Size
A6S
A5S
A5
B6S
B5S
B5
A4S
A4
B4
A3
A3 Wide
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2,
8 1/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 11
8 1/2 x 14,
11 x 17
12 1/4 x 18
Type

Special
paper
Letter S
A4S
8 1/ x 11S
2
or less
Legal
B4
8 1/ x 14
2
or greater
300 sheets (30 copies)
250 sheets (30 copies)
Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/

m2, 24.25 to 40 lb)
g/m2, 40.25 to 55.5 lb)
g/m2, 55.75 to 68 lb)
OHP film
Label
Envelope
Long size paper
Max.:
311.15 mm x 1200 mm
12.25 inch x 47.24 inch
Min.:
90 mm x 139.7 mm
8.4 Offset function

Shift amount
30 mm
Types of paper to be used
Plain paper
Thick paper (91 to 209 g/m2, 24.25 to 55.5 lb)
Size
B5
A4S
A4
B4
A3
8 1/2 x 11S
8 1/ x 11
2
8 1/ x 14
2
11 x 17
8.5 Stapling
No. of sheets to be stapled
10 sheets

g/m2, 68.25 to 72 lb)
Letter S
A4S
8 1/ x
2
11S
50 sheets
C-18
bizhub 423/363/283/223

or less
Legal
30 sheets
B4
8 1/ x 14
2
or greater
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb): 48 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2 (55.5 lb))
Stapling position
Back of the corner

Front of the corner
Center two points

Power requirements

DC5.1 V 5 %
56 W or less
Dimensions
471 mm (W) x 564 mm (D) x 147 mm (H)

Weight
12.0 kg (26.46 lb)


NOTE
C-19
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 9. PK-517
9. PK-517
9.1 Type
Name
Punch kit
Type
FS-integrated type punching operation device
9.2 Functions
Punching method
Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes
2-3 holes
4 holes
Sweden 4 holes
Hole diameter/pitch
2 holes / 8.0 mm 70 mm pitch - 3 holes /8.0 mm / 108 mm pitch

4 holes /6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch
Sweden 4 holes /6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch
Supported mode
Punch mode
Applicable post processing mode
Sort
Group,
Staple
9.3 Paper type

Size
2 hole punch setting:11 x 17, 8 1/ x 14, 8 1/ x 11/8 1/ x 11S

2
2
2
3 hole punch setting:11 x 17, 8 1/ x 11
2
4 hole punch setting:A3, B4, A4, B5
Sweden 4 hole punch setting:A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5
Supported paper
Plain paper
Bond paper
Thick paper 1/2/3 (Main unit specifications prioritized)
Weight
60 to 256 g/m2
Punch prohibited paper
Label paper
Tab paper
Transparency film
2nd base paper
Holed paper and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch kit or the
punch blade

Power requirements

30 W or less
Dimensions
58 mm (W) x 470 mm (D) x 135 mm (H)

Weight
1.8 kg (3.97 lb)


NOTE
C-20
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. SD-509
10. SD-509
10.1 Type
Name
Saddle sticher SD-509
Type
Built into the finisher
Installation
Screwed to the finisher
Document alignment
Center
Stapling function
Center parallel two points
10.2 Paper
10.2.1 Saddle stitching
Type
Plain paper
Thick paper 1
Thick paper 2
Size
Max. saddle stitching capacity
15 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
A3
B4
A4S
A3 Wide
11 x 17
8 1/2 x 14
8 1/ x 11S
2
Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inch
Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch
14 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb) + 1 sheet (60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 , 16 to 55.5 lb)
10.2.2 Folding
Type
Plain paper
Size
Max. number of sheets folded together
3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
A3
B4
A4S
A3 Wide
11 x 17
8 1/2 x 14
8 1/ x 11S
2
Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inch
Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch

Dimensions
239 mm (W) x 579 mm (D) x 534 mm (H)

Weight
24 kg (52.91 lb)

10.5 Consumables
Staples 5,000 (SK-602: Staple kit)

NOTE
C-21
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103

v2/105
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11. i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105

11.1 Available function for i-Option
Available function for i-OptionThe functions available for i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105 are as follows.
Function
Web browser
Overview
Application
LK-101 v2
LK-102
LK-103 v2
From the control panel, access

content on the Internet or Intranet, in
order to display or print this content.
Additionally, you can operate
PageScope Web Connection to use
documents saved in user boxes.
This is a new control panel user

interface.
It enables the whole operation
workflow to be easily grasped.
You can add photo data to a

registered address book entry.
Registered photos are reflected in the
Destination List of the Image Panel.
Assignment of application keys
Enhanced function can be assigned

to the application key.
PDF processing
When transmitting documents in PDF

format, you can encrypt PDF file with
password or digital ID, add a digital
signature, and specify properties.
Image panel
Photo registration
Searchable PDF
You can create a text searchable

PDF file by pasting transparent text
data on the area of a document in
which characters are recognized
through an OCR process. You can
create a searchable PDF file when
saving or sending an original in the
PDF format using the scan or User
Box functions.
11.2 Web browser function

Main specifications of the web browser installed are as follows.
Browser engine
NetFront
Supported protocols
HTTP
HTTPS
TCP/IP
Supported markup/script languages
HTML
CSS
JavaSrcript
Ajax
Supported image formats
JPEG
BMP
PNG
GIF
Animation GIF
PDF
XPS
Flash
Supported SSL/TLS versions
SSL2.0
SSL3.0
TLS1.0
Supported character codes
Display modes
Normal
Just-Fit Rendering
Smart-Fit Rendering
PDF viewer
Adobe Reader LE
Flash player
Adobe Flash Player 7
Western (ISO-8859-1)
Unicode (UTF-8)
Simplified Chinese (GB2312)
Traditional Chinese (Big5)
Japanese (Shift-JIS)
Japanese (ISO-2022-JP)
Japanese (EUC-JP)
C-22
LK-105
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103

v2/105
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
The Flash player installed on the MFP does not support the following:
The function to trigger an event caused by a key operation.
The function to paste or acquire data such as character strings from the clipboard.
The context menu.
The Flash printing function.
The function to execute JavaScript from Flash or to operate Flash by JavaScript.
A screen that has no window (pop-up).
The Flash bookmark function.
The function to send/receive data in real time using the Flash Media Server.
The function to communicate via the XMLSocket.
11.3 Photo registration function

Specifications of the photo data to be registered are as follows.
File type
BMP format
24-bit color,
Uncompressed
Image size
48 x 48 pixels
Data size
6,966 Byte
C-23
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. FK-508
12. FK-508
12.1 Basic specifications
12.1.1 General specifications
Applicable lines
PSTN, PBX
Protocol
Group 3 (compliant to ITU-T T.30)

ECM
F-code communication
Konica Minolta non-standard protocol: No
Group 4: No
Maximum data rate
33,600 bps
Coding method
MH
MR
MMR
JBIG
Modulation method
V27ter
V29
(V.33): V.33 is for reception only.
V17
V8
V34
Communication resolution
Normal
8 x 3.85 lines / mm
Fine
8 x 7.7 lines / mm
200 x 200 pixels / inch
Super fine
8 x 15.4 lines / mm (Reception only)

16 x 15.4 lines / mm
Ultra Super
fine
Fax memory size
FAX memory backup
Fixed to mm at transmission (except 600 dpi)

mm and inch are available at reception.
Selection by using the [Resolution] key.
You can not change settings on every page.
With HDD
installed
128 GB (128 GB in the main body HDD 250 GB is used as a memory.)

10000 pages can be stored including all Scan/Box/Printer/Fax documents.
With no
HDD
installed
Approx. 200 pages can be saved at 240 MB of image memory capacity.
With HDD
installed
Image data is saved in HDD.
With no
HDD
installed
The image data is saved on the RAM disk which is backed up with the battery on the
copier side. Back-up time is less than 60 minutes (at full-charge).
Multiple line connection
Two lines can be connected by installing the Line Extension kit.
Communication time
Level of 2 seconds (Konica Minolta standard A4 chart, 33,600 bps)
Resolution conversion
At sending:
Scanner: inch
Density conversion: inch mm
Communication: mm / inch (600 dpi only)
At receiving:
Communication: mm
Density conversion: mm inch
Print: inch
At receiving:
Communication: inch
Density conversion: inch inch
Print: inch
12.1.2 Scanning section

Scanning method
Scanning resolution
Platen
documents
Impossible to scan book documents (book mode)
ADF book
documents
Scanning mode: 1-Sided, 2-Sided and cover + 2-Sided

Possible to scan the ADF mixed size documents.
Normal
8 x 3.85 lines/mm
Fine
8 x 7.7 lines/mm
Super fine
16 x 15.4 lines /mm
Ultra Super
fine
600 x 600 dpi
C-24
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Selection by using the [Resolution] key.
You can not change settings on each page.
Mixed original
Possible to mix documents of different sizes.

After rotation of images, sizes are changed by EOM every time the length of the scan line is
changed at sending.
Possible to mix sizes (A and B).
Density selection
Selection by using the [Density] key. [Light] / [Dark] / [Standard]

You can not change settings on each page.
Maximum scanning document width
297 mm (A3 width) both for ADF and Platen
Maximum scanning document length
432 mm (A3 length) / 17 inches (double letter) in the regular mode

1000 mm in the long original mode
Effective scanning range
When a document is smaller than the effective scanning area, the area outside the document is
erased.
ADF scanning: left, right, head and bottom mask of 3mm each (0 to 5mm)
Platen scanning: left, right and head mask of 2mm each (fixed)
Automatic reduction at sending
A3 B4, A3 A4 and B4 A4
Automatically reduced and sent in accordance with the recording paper size of remote station.
Rotation transmission
A4 / Letter size only. LEF documents are rotated by 90 degrees at sending to send it in SEF
direction.
Page division at sending
No
Halftone
256 level error diffusion

Users can change settings by using the [Photo], [Text], [Text/Photo], [Dot Matrix Original] or
[Copied Paper] key.
Automatic background control (ABC)
Yes
Finished stamp
Yes
Scanning time
42 sheets/min (A4, 600 dpi)

70 sheets/min (A4, 300 dpi)
Automatic feeder capacity
Compliant to the copier standards
12.1.3 Recording section

Recording
Recording paper size
All sizes except for B6 and Postcard (See the copier basic specifications.)
Auto recording paper selection
Note: A5 and B5 paper is used only for A5 and B5 reception respectively
Recording paper cassette
Tray 1 to Tray 4
Bypass Tray
Staple
No
Recording speed
Recording size
A3 size maximum
A3 fix as reception record ability declaration in protocol.
Maximum reception length
1000 mm
In case of being larger than the maximum reception length, a communication error occurs.
When the memory over occurs during reception, the received data is printed.
Reduction record
When the received image information is larger than the recording paper, it is automatically reduced
to the recording paper size and recorded.
Page separation record
Yes
Offset output at each communication
Yes (Job unit reception only)
Rotation reception
Yes
Images are rotated by 90 degrees and recorded on the recording paper in LEF direction.
Two-sided reception
Yes (Utility Mode)
2-in-1 reception
No
Smoothing
Yes (at converting the resolution)
Print/Fax output settings
Yes
Bypass print
Possible to use as an active tray in auto selection mode.
Total page counter
Monitor print
No (copy at sending)
12.1.4 Line connecting section

NCU type
A-A~, line control by silicon DAA
Connecting terminal
RJ11
Modem
Matsushita MMD-5020
Modem sending level
-10 to -15 dBm (Country spec)
DTMF sending level
-10 to -15 dBm (Country spec)
Receiving sensitivity
G3 reception: up to -48 dB
C-25
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Tone reception: up to -52 dB
Dialing signal
DP (10pps) and DTMF
12.1.5 Operation panel

FAX / copy / scan / box
Mode switching
by panel key selection

Possible to change modes during an operation of each mode.
No mode return by the auto reset.
Initial screen after poweron
Screen at power off or facsimile screen. (depending on parameter

setting)
Interruption during scanning
When pressing the interrupt button while scanning documents to be transmitted, INTERRUPT LED
blinks. Copy screen appears after scanning is completed.
Interruption during recording in the FAX

mode screen
Operations by using the interrupt button are invalid.
FAX start
by using the start button.
Stop
by using the stop button.

Possible to appoint to stop from the job list so as to stop during operations of the multi jobs.
FAX free memory display
RDH memory
% indication on LCD during scanning, recording and stand-by.
File memory (RAM disk/HDD)
Display in the JOB LIST screen
File existence indication
In the following cases, the data Indicator (LED) on the control panel lights up.
Upon reception of FAX
When a document is saved in the bulletin board box, polling TX box, and memory RX user box.
Display during the FAX communications
Icons are not displayed on the FAX waiting screen and the FAX operation screen.
Error display
Displayed by LCD panel
Time display
Date and time displayed.

Present time is displayed on the sub-area.
Remote station ID display
Yes
The TSI/CSI display during communications
Other operation buttons
[Scan Settings], [Communication Settings] key: Moves to the FAX application function setting
screen.
Mode Check button: Valid
*/# button: Yes
Help button: Yes
12.2 Functional specifications

12.2.1 Dial functions
Abbreviated dial
Yes
Possible to register 2000 stations. (1000 with no optional HDD installed)
38 digits maximum
Possible to search the remote station list in the order of abbreviation numbers and Indexes.
The registration names must be 24 digits or less.
Registration name auto registration function: No
Second FAX No. registration function: No
Impossible to register the communication mode.
Possible to register Line Setting (Overseas TX, ECM Off, V.34 OFF, check destination, line
selection (Only with the line extension kit installed)).
There is no registration function provided of [Scan Setting], [Comm. Setting] except the line
setting.
Program dial
400 dials (200 with no optional HDD installed)
Key pad dial
38 digits maximum
Group dial
Up to 100 groups. Possible to register group names. up to 500 remote stations per each group by
abbreviated numbers only.
Dialing of multiple remote stations
605 remote stations maximum (abbreviated 500 + key pad 100 + manual input e-mail destination
5)
Manual redial
Yes
Possible to select from five latest histories.
Automatic redial
Yes
Automatically redial when remote stations are busy or return no responses or transmission errors
occur at the memory transmission
Possible to receive during redial waiting.
Another call is possible. (Not possible when there are two redial waiting jobs.)
JOB LIST redial
No
Pulse/tone switching
Possible to switch by using the [*] key on the key pad or [Tone] key on the Direct Input screen.
PBX mode setting
Yes
Possible to turn ON or OFF the PBX connection and to register the external access code.
C-26
bizhub 423/363/283/223

There is the automatic removal function of external access code to registered abbreviated
remote station No. Nothing is automatic addition function.
Pseudo off-hook
Yes
The manual start is possible by using the pseudo off-hook.
[Off-Hook] button on LCD
Call progress detection
DC loop (Depends on country spec).

Dial tone (Ditto)
Busy tone (Ditto)
Second dial tone (Ditto)
Dial parameters
Dialing signals DP (10 pps) and DTMF (Depends on country spec)

Pause between digits1 to 7 seconds (Users cannot set.)
Pause between digits 3 seconds (fixed)
Phone book dial (Abbr)
Yes
After appointing character to search, use up and down cursor keys.
External phone connection jack
Yes
Depends on specifications of each country.
12.2.2 Transmission
Timer transmission
24-hour (max.) timer setting is possible. (one station, sequential multi-stations transmission)
Batch transmission
No
Timer polling
24-hour (max.) timer setting is possible. (one remote station polling and sequential polling
reception)
No. of timers
21 transmissions and pollings in total.

The number of sequential pollings is one.
Memory transmission reservation
The memory transmission reservation is possible during communications. (memory registration of

the ADF memory transmission and platen memory transmission documents)
ADF transmission reservation
No
Fold erase transmission
No
Frame erase transmission
Yes
Platen documents and book documents
ADF documents are possible as well.
The regular mode only
Automatic layout transmission (Outside

documents are erased.)
No
Reverse-image transmission
No
2-in-1 transmission
No
Book transmission
No
Scanning size appointment
Yes
Scans documents in the appointed size irrelevant to document sizes and sends them. Transmits
documents in the appointed scanning width and length at the platen transmission and the ADF
transmission.
The effective image area is based on the center in the ADF transmission. (Corner-base scanning
in mixed-size document mode.)
Document image quality appointment
Yes
Selected from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Dot Matrix Original or Copied Paper.
Multi-stations
605 stations maximum (Abbr dial x 500 stations, keypad dial x 100 stations and E-Mail x 5) The
timer appointment is possible.
Memory transmission
Yes
Quick
ADF transmission
memory
Platen transmission
transmission
Mixture of ADF/platen
documents
Varies depending on models.

One page only
No
Advanced communication
function
Partly Yes
(Only the communication mode is possible)
Manual transmission
Yes
Transmission when the

printer is active
No
Memory
ADF transmission
transmission Platen transmission
Mixture of ADF/platen
documents
C-27
Yes
Yes
After the Separate Scan setting, the setting is read with
the [Start] key and the communication is started up with
the [Finish] key.
Yes
After the Separate Scan setting, the setting is read with
the [Start] key and the communication is started up with
the [Finish] key.
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Advanced communication
function
Yes
Manual transmission
No
Transmission when the

printer is active
Yes
Forwarding transmission
Yes
Automatic forward: Automatic forward of received documents to remote stations registered in
advance.
Manual forward: No
Interruption transmission
Single station transmission reservation automatically interrupts between stations of multiple station
communications.
International communication
Yes
When the remote station is V17, communications start at TCM 7,200 bps. When the remote
station is V34, they start at 28,800 bps.
V34-off transmission
Transmitted without V34 mode. The V34-off appointment can be registered in the abbreviated /
program dials. This is used when the transmission error code related to V34 occurs frequently.
Long original transmission
Yes
ADF irregular-size transmission
Possible to transmit irregular-size originals from ADF. The main scanning is the max. document
width set on ADF, and the sub scanning depends on document length.
Width: 297 mm/11.69 inch at the maximum
Length: 1000 mm/39.37 inch at the maximum
Incomplete TX hold
Yes
Instant batch transmission (Bundled

transmission)
No
Confidential transmission
Transmission to the confidential BOX of a remote station by using the F code (SUB/SID). Appoints
the confidential BOX No. by using SUB. Set the communication password using SID as required.
Relay request
The relay request by using the F-code (SUB/SID). Appoints the relay BOX No. by using SUB.
Relay transmission
No
Transmission error prevention
Check destination: When transmitting, compares the FAX No. specified with the FAX No.
information (CSI) of the remote station and transmits only when both numbers are the same.
Destination check display function: When transmitting, displays the list of addresses to allow to
check the address again and then transmit.
Restrict FAX broadcasting: Prohibits to specify multiple addresses for FAX transmission.
Confirm Address (at calling and

registration)
During direct dialing, call is initiated only if the destination number inputted a first time matches
with that inputted a second time.
12.2.3 Polling
Polled transmission
Polling reception
The sequential polling is possible.

600 stations maximum (abbreviated dial x 500 stations and key pad dialing x 100 stations)
Call turnaround polling
No
Called turnaround polling
Yes
Closed polling transmission
No
Selective polling
Transmission and reception.

The selective polling by using the F-code (SEP). There is a bulletin board BOX polling reception.
No confidential BOX polling transmission
There is one documents which allows the transmission setting.

Documents are deleted after transmission.
No additional scanning of documents
No ADF polled transmission reservation
12.2.4 Line seizure mode and telephone function

Line seizure mode switching
Possible to set the automatic reception and the manual reception.

When the memory is full and there are no polling transmission reservations, the automatic
reception mode is cancelled.
No switching of the auto / manual mode by appointing data and time
Ans. Machine mode
Yes
At the time of the CNG detection with the external phone off hook, a line is caught to start
reception.
Automatic reception mode
Time and the number of rings.

No. of rings: 0 to 15 times (country spec)
Time: 0 to 15 secs (country spec)
Hold
No
Handset
No
One-piece phone
Country spec
Call to external telephone
No
C-28
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Conversation reservation

No
12.2.5 Message reception and record

Confidential reception
Reception at the confidential BOX appointed at the F-code (SUB). When a transmission password
(SID) has been set for the confidential box, the SID should be specified as the communication
password. At the time of printing documents received at the confidential BOX, a password to
access to the confidential BOX is required.
Closed reception
Closed reception by using the SID (PWD) (Junk FAX)
Adaptive (automatic) reduction
87 to 96 % in steps of 1 % Becomes the adaptive reduction when Print Separate Fax Pages =
OFF is selected. In case of the adaptive reduction, if the reception image size is a little bigger than
recording paper, the size is automatically reduced so that it becomes within the recording paper
size and is recorded.
Fixed reduction
No
Page separation record
Does not overlap at the division.
Equal size recording
Records the received image at an equal size. When the reception size is larger than A3 form,
excessive image is destructed.
Cassette selection
Appropriate paper size auto selection

When paper is running out, paper is provided from another cassette with the same size of paper.
Tray-fix mode available
2-in-1 reception
No
12.2.6 Memory function

Display of used memory space
Yes (Fax screen: RDH memory)
Memory RX
A password is required for printing received files. The password (up to 8 digits) is set when the
memory RX mode is set in the utility mode. First page can be printed.
Memory substitute reception
Yes (when there is no paper / no toner)
12.2.7 Various communication function

Short protocol
No
ECM
Yes
Frame size: 64 byte / 256 byte
Communication timer
Yes
24 hours maximum. 21 including one for sequential polling timer.
Redial waiting
Five redial timers maximum
Error page resending
No (becomes the error page redial.)
Error page redial
Effective to both quick memory transmission and memory transmission. Redial and retransmission
in case of RTN or comm error.
Redial interval: follows the busy redial interval.
Num. of redials: 0 to 7 times (different counter from the busy redial)
Total page number print
Yes
Automatic print to the TTI in memory transmission.
Added when the number of document pages is appointed for quick memory transmission.
Header memo
No
TTI (Transmitting terminal ID)
Yes
30 characters maximum
Added not to the original read image, but to the top of the transmission image while in the image
rotation being specified.
The registration of up to 20 sender names is available.
It is possible to make a selection to decide whether or not the address is printed at the header
position.
RTI (Receiving terminal ID)
Yes
After processing the enlargement and/or reduction operations, a record is made at the bottom
position specified before conducting an image rotation.
Date, time and page no. are recorded.
Fax remote diagnosis
Yes
MH fix
Yes. Setting can be made from the service mode.
Document insertion after dialing
Yes
Document insertion is possible after dialing. Starts calling by using the [Start] button.
Communication history
Yes
The last 700 communication histories are recorded in the communication journal.
Electronic key counter
Yes
The number of transmitted pages to each user. Limit control is not done.
Key counter
Yes
Coin vendor
Yes. (Support timing varies depending on models.)

It is possible to use with FAX.
C-29
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.2.8 User lists / reports

Activity report
The total of 700 communications (sending and reception) can be recorded.

Automatic output: Daily / Every 100 Comm. / 100/ Daily
Manual output: Yes
Timer reservation TX report
Automatic output Users can turn ON/OFF.
TX result report
Automatic output (ON / If TX Fails / OFF)

Possible to output with images
Sync transmit reservation report
Automatic output: Users can turn ON / OFF.
Broadcast result report
Automatic output: Users can select All Destination, 1 Destination at a time.
Polled Tx reserve report

Polled Tx result report
Polled Rx result report
Sequential poll, Rx reservation report
Sequential poll, Rx result report
An address polling Rx reserved report

Relay TX result report
Relay request report
PC-Fax TX error report
Address book list
Manual output (numeric order: output to be produced for each destination type)
Program list
Group address list
Manual output
Fax setting list

Bulletin TX report
Confidential RX report
Auto output at the F code confidential reception.

Subject/Text list
Manual output
12.2.9 Other user functions

Fax ID
Number ID: 20 digits (max.)
Header note
No
Language selection
Yes
12.3 Network fax specifications

12.3.1 Internet fax
Main product specifications relating to internet fax functions are indicated below.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Image memory capacity
128 GB* (128 GB of 250 GB of the hard disk is used as a memory.)
Max. no. of stored pages
Approx. 10000 pages* (numbers of pages in the case of storing standard A4-size pages containing
approximately 700 characters at fine resolution)
Scanning line density
Ultra fine
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Super fine
400 dpi x 400 dpi
Fine
200 dpi x 200 dpi
Normal
200 dpi x 100 dpi
Transmission mode (File type)
monochrome (TIFF-FX)
Transmission coding methods
TIFF-S (MH)
TIFF-F (MR/MMR)
Max. scanning size
420 mm x 297 mm (A3 size)

Width: 297 mm
Length: 1000 mm at the maximum (432 mm at the maximum for 600 dpi resolution)
Max. recording size
420 mm x 297 mm (A3 size)

The data of an original that is longer than 1000 mm cannot be received. (For 600 dpi resolution,
data of an original that is longer than 460 mm cannot be received.)
When receiving the data of an original that is longer than the paper sizes set in the paper trays,
the data is printed according to the setting of [Print Separate Fax Pages].
Treatment of transmission error
Mail transmitted again.
None
Internet fax Rx error report When documents cannot be sent to the SMTP server, transmission
error report to be printed/not printed can be set.
When MDN/DSN response is received, to be printed/not to be printed
can be set.
When MDN/DSN response is received, transmission result is
indicated on the transmission control report.
MDN/DSN response monitoring time can be set in the range from 0 to
99 hours.
C-30
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Mail reception
List/report

Mail acquisition interval
Can be set to 1 to 60 minutes.
Manual POP reception
Possible
Reception by specifying a
box
Not Available (except Memory RX)
Received document size
width: A4 / B4 / A3
Reception coding system
TIFF-S (MH), TIFF-F (MR/MMR)
Print DSN message
Output can be produced
Print MDN message
Print receipt mail text
Network fax relay result

report
Network fax activity report
During automatic output: Shared with Fax Activity Report. Max. 100.
During manual output: Shared with Fax Activity Report. Max. 700.
Network fax Rx error

report
12.3.2 IP address fax

Main product specifications relating to IP Address Fax functions are indicated below.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Image memory capacity
128 GB* (128 GB of 250 GB of the hard disk is used as a memory.)
Max. no. of stored pages
Approx. 10000 pages* (numbers of pages in the case of storing standard A4-size pages containing
approximately 700 characters at fine resolution)
Scanning line density
Ultra fine
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Super fine
400 dpi x 400 dpi
Fine
200 dpi x 200 dpi

300 dpi x 300 dpi (Color: Compact PDF only)
Normal (Monochrome
only)
200 dpi x 100 dpi
Transmission mode (File type)
Color (PDF, Compact PDF, TIFF-C) / Monochrome (TIFF)

Capable of transmitting TIFF-C (JPEG);
Incapable of receiving TIFF-C (JPEG) (any receiving TIFF-C jobs are discarded)
Coding methods
MH (applicable only to monochrome format)

MR (applicable only to monochrome format)
MMR (applicable only to monochrome format)
Max. scanning size
A3 (420 mm x 297 mm)

Width: 297 mm
Length: Max. 1000 mm.
Max. recording size
Treatment of transmission error
Retry
Error codes subject to retry:

N10
N12
N15 to 17 only
TX error report
TX error report printing ON/OFF can be set.

A TX error report is printed when a TX error occurs and the TX error
is recorded in the activity.
Reception
Report
A3 (420 mm x 297 mm)

1000 mm in the maximum recording size
Originals in excess of 1000 mm cannot be received.
In the color mode, the reception of an original in excess of 432 mm in length is unavailable.
When receiving originals longer than the paper size in the paper trays, printing is made
according to the setting of [Print Separate Fax Pages].
Received document size
Max. document width to be received: A3
Reception coding system
Received file size
Unlimited (depends on the space available for use in the HDD)

The file is not received, if the space available for use in the HDD is
107 MB or less.
If the space available for use in the HDD runs out during reception,
the session is abnormally terminated and the received file is
deleted.
Print receipt mail text
Possible
TIFF-S (MH)
TIFF-F (MR/MMR)
PDF
Compact PDF
TIFF-C
*: The Internal hard disk is common used of each function of the Copy, the Scan, the Print and the Box.
C-31
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
D OVERALL COMPOSITION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 System front view
[3]
[2]
[4]
[21]
[5]
[17]
[18]
[6]
[19]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[16]
[20]
[15]
[14]
[10]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[1]
bizhub 223/283/363/423
[2]
Reverse automatic document feeder *1 DF-621
[3]
Assist handle AH-101
[4]
Original cover OC-509
[5]
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102
[6]
Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201
[7]
Working table WT-506
[8]
Local interface kit EK-604
[9]
Local interface kit EK-605
[10]
Keyboard holder KH-101
[11]
Desk DK-508
[12]
Paper feed cabinet PC-109
[13]
[14]
[15]
Saddle stitcher SD-509
[16]
Finisher FS-527
[17]
Punch kit PK-517
[18]
Job separator JS-603
[19]
Finisher FS-529
[20]
[21]
Stamp unit SP-501
*1: Standard equipment only on bizhub 423, and bizhub 363 for North America and Europe.
NOTE
Use the desk or the paper feed cabinet without fail when installing on the floor in order to keep the function and quality of the unit.
1.2 System rear view

[7]
[8]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
bizhub 223/283/363/423
[2]
Fax kit FK-508
[3]
Security kit SC-507
[4]
Hard Disk *1 HD-516
[5]
Mount kit MK-726
[6]
Key counter kit KIT-1
[7]
i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105
[8]
Upgrade kit UK-203
*1: Being standard or optional depends on each marketing area and machine model. For details, see the following list.
D-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Marketing area
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

North America
Europe
Others
bizhub 223
Option
Option
Option
bizhub 283
Option
Option
Option
bizhub 363
Standard
Standard
Option
bizhub 423
Standard
Standard
Standard
Model
D-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 2. SECTION CONFIGURATION
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[13]
[14]
[4]
[5]
[12]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[1]
DF-621 *
[2]
Scanner section
[3]
Paper exit/switchback section
[4]
Fusing section
[5]
Duplex section
[6]
Image transfer/separation section
[7]
Registration section
[8]
Paper feed section (manual bypass tray)
[9]
Paper feed section (tray 2)
[10]
Paper feed section (tray 1)
[11]
Write section (PH section)
[12]
Developing section
[13]
Toner supply section
[14]
Drum unit section
*: Option
D-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
Machine equipped with a DF-621, FS-527, and PC-208.
D-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
Scanner
section
CCD board
Reverse
automatic
document
feeder
Inverter board
Scanner
relay board
Control panel
DC power supply
Secret boad
HDD
USB board
Authentication
unit
MFP board
Printer control
board
FAX board
Total counter
Fusing unit
Image transfer
section
Drum unit section
SSD
Developing
section
High voltage unit
Main body
Paper feed
section
Laser drive
board
PH section
Key counter
Polygon motor
Duplex section
Manual bypass
tray section
Index board
Finisher
Paper feed unit
D-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

[1]
[12]
[11]
[14]
[2]
[13]
[10]
[9]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[6] [7] [8]
[1]
CCD
(Photoelectric
conversion)
Light reflected off the surface of the original is converted to a corresponding electric signal by CCD and the resultant
electric signal is sent to the MFP board.
[2]
MFP board
The MFP board performs image processing.
[3]
Photo
conductor
The image formed by a laser light with which the surface of the photo conductor is irradiated is changed to a
corresponding electrostatic latent image.
Photo
conductor
charging
Supply DC ( - ) charge on the photo conductor.
[4]
[5]
PH (Laser
exposure)
Expose photo conductor to a laser beam to develop electrostatic latent image.
Developing
The toner, agitated and negatively charged in the developer mixing chamber, is attracted onto the electrostatic latent
image formed on the surface of the photo conductor. It is thereby changed to a visible, developed image.
[7]
Paper feed
The paper is supplied from the paper feed cassette.
[8]
Bypass paper
feed
The paper is supplied from the manual bypass tray.
Image transfer
A DC positive charge is applied to the image transfer roller to transfer the visible image on the surface of the photo
conductor onto the paper.
Paper
separation
The charge neutralizing needle and separation claws remove paper from the surface of the photo conductor.
[6]
[9]
[10]
[11] Cleaning
[12]
Erase
The remaining toner left on the surface of the photo conductor is scraped off.
The surface of the photo conductor is irradiated with light, which neutralizes any surface potential remaining on the
surface of the photo conductor.
[13] Fusing
The toner is permanently fused to the paper by the combination of heat and pressure applied by the fusing roller.
[14] Paper exit
The paper is fed out face down onto the exit tray.
D-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE FORMING CONTROL
6. IMAGE FORMING CONTROL
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[21]
[11]
[21]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[1]
Transport motor (M1)
[2]
PC motor (M2)
[3]
Polygon motor (M5)
[4]
LD
[5]
Paper exit sensor (PS3)
[6]
Charge
[7]
Developing bias DC
[8]
Developing bias AC
[9]
Erase lamp (LA)
[10]
Transfer
[11]
Separation
[12]
Registration clutch (CL1)
[13]
Registration sensor (PS1)
[14]
TOD
[15]
Tray 1 paper feed sensor (PS11)
[16]
Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL11)
[17]
Power supply cooling fan motor (FM1)
[18]
Fusing unit cooling fan motor (FM3)
[19]
Cooling fan motor (FM2)
[20]
Toner suction fan motor (FM4)
[21]
Printing
D-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 7 PROCESS SPEED
7 PROCESS SPEED
The process speed is not changed according to the size or type of the paper. Instead, the main body controls the intervals between sheets
of paper (paper transport timing).
Process speed
bizhub 223
140 mm/s
bizhub 283
bizhub 363
173 mm/s
bizhub 423
D-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
E SERVICE TOOL > 1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
E SERVICE TOOL
1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
1.1 Service material list
Name
Cleaning pad
Shape
Material No.
000V-18-1
Remarks
10pcs/1pack
Isopropyl alcohol
-
E-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
E SERVICE TOOL > 2. DF-621
2. DF-621
2.1 CE tool list
Tool name
ADF reading chart
Shape
Personnel
1
Parts No.
9J06 PJG1 XX
E-2
Remarks
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 1. Concept of periodical

maintenance
bizhub 423/363/283/223
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
1. Concept of periodical maintenance
TestCleaning/replacement cycle for each maintenance item of main body/options can be evaluated with the total counter or each life counter
value of [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life].
F-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. Periodical maintenance items
2. Periodical maintenance items

2.1 Main body
2.1.1 bizhub 223
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 60,000 counts)
No.
1
Section
Overall
Description/part name
Qt.
Clean
Paper feed and image conditions
Appearance
Qt.
Clean
Conveyance
section
Timing roller
Duplex section
Duplex transport roller
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Replace
Descriptions
(2) Periodical maintenance 2 (life counter; every 80,000 counts)

No.
Section
Processing section
Toner filter (Developing unit)
Drum unit
Developer
Check Lubrication

No.
Section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Conveyance
section
Paper dust remover
Transfer section
Transfer roller unit
Processing section
Ozone filter
Descriptions

No.
Section
Paper feed section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Manual bypass tray feed roller
Manual bypass tray separation roller assy
Descriptions

No.
Section
Paper feed section
Qt.
Tray 1 pick-up roller
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Tray 1 feed roller
Tray 1 separation roller assy
Tray 2 feed roller

No.
1
Section
Fusing section
Qt.
Fusing unit
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Processing section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Developing unit
Toner filter (Main body)
Descriptions

No.
1
2
Section
Conveyance
section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Timing roller bearing
Timing roller gear
Descriptions
2.1.2 bizhub 283

No.
1
2
Section
Overall
Qt.
Appearance
F-2
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No.
Section
Conveyance
section
Timing roller
Duplex section
Qt.
Clean
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Processing section
Drum unit
Developer

No.
Section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Conveyance
section
Paper dust remover
Transfer section
Processing section
Ozone filter
Descriptions

No.
Section
Paper feed section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Paper feed section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Tray 1 feed roller
Tray 2 feed roller

No.
1
Section
Fusing section
Qt.
Fusing unit
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Processing section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Developing unit
Descriptions

No.
1
2
Section
Conveyance
section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Timing roller gear
Descriptions
2.1.3 bizhub 363

No.
1
Section
Overall
Qt.
Clean
Appearance
Qt.
Clean
Conveyance
section
Timing roller
Duplex section
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Processing section
F-3
Check Lubrication
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No.
Section
Qt.
Drum unit
Developer
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Qt.
Conveyance
section
Paper dust remover
Transfer section
Processing section
Ozone filter

No.
Section
Paper feed section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Paper feed section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Tray 1 feed roller
Tray 2 feed roller

No.
1
Section
Fusing section
Qt.
Fusing unit
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Processing section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Developing unit
Descriptions

No.
1
2
Section
Conveyance
section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Timing roller gear
Descriptions
2.1.4 bizhub 423

No.
1
Section
Overall
Qt.
Appearance
Conveyance
section
Timing roller
Duplex section
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Replace
Descriptions
Qt.
Clean

No.
Section
Processing section
Drum unit
Developer
Check Lubrication

No.
1
Section
Conveyance
section
Qt.
Paper dust remover
F-4
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No.
Section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Transfer section
Processing section
Ozone filter
Descriptions

No.
Section
Paper feed section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Paper feed section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Tray 1 feed roller
Tray 2 feed roller

No.
1
Section
Fusing section
Qt.
Fusing unit
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions

No.
Section
Processing section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Developing unit
Descriptions

No.
1
2
Section
Conveyance
section
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Timing roller gear
Descriptions
2.2 Option
2.2.1 DF-621
No.
1
Section
Overall
2
3
Paper feed section
4
5
Qt.
Clean
Appearance
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
Replace
Descriptions
Replace
Descriptions
Conveyance
section
Roller and rolls
Scanning section
Cleaning shaft
Paper feed section
Reflective sensor section
Check Lubrication

No.
1
Section
Qt.
Paper feed section Pick-up roller
Clean
Check
Lubrication
Feed roller
Separation roller assy
*1
*1: Replace those three parts at the same time.
2.2.2 PC-109/PC-208/PC-409
No.
1
2
Section
Overall
Qt.
Appearance
F-5
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No.
Section
Paper feed section

Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication
Replace
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
Descriptions
*1
2.2.3 JS-505
No.
1
Section
Overall
2
3
Conveyance
section
Qt.
Clean
Appearance
Roller and rolls
Check
Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
Replace
Descriptions
Replace
Descriptions
2.2.4 JS-603/FS-527/SD-509/PK-517
No.
1
Section
Overall
2
3
4
Conveyance
section
Qt.
Clean
Appearance
Roller and rolls
Paddles
Qt.
Clean
Check Lubrication

No.
1
2
Section
FS-527
Conveyance
section
Check Lubrication
Upper paddle
Lower paddle
2.2.5 FS-529
No.
1
Section
Overall
2
3
Conveyance
section
Qt.
Clean
Appearance
Roller and rolls
F-6
Check Lubrication
Replace
Descriptions
bizhub 423/363/283/223
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. Periodical replacement parts list
3. Periodical replacement parts list

To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life, it is recommended that the maintenance jobs described in
this schedule be carried out as instructed.
Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the total counter, the life counter or the messages displayed on the control
panel.
Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 1/ x 11, standard mode and low power mode OFF.
2
B/W
*Standard mode
bizhub 223
2 pages per job
bizhub 283
3 pages per job
bizhub 363
4 pages per job
bizhub 423
4 pages per job
3.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423

Classification
Parts name
Parts No.

Manual bypass
tray
Manual bypass tray separation

roller assy
Qt.
A00F 6232 XX
Tray 2
4034 0151 XX
200,000
300,000
300,000
Tray 1 separation roller
300,000
300,000
300,000
300,000
A00J 5636 XX
Tray 2 feed roller
A00J 5636 XX
Conveyance
section
Fusing section
1164 3549 XX
900,000
Timing roller gear 1
1164 3508 XX
900,000
Timing roller gear 2
1164 3515 XX
900,000
Paper dust remover
4040 0778 XX
150,000
340,000
420,000
450,000
A1UD R705 XX
150,000
bizhub 223
80,000
bizhub 283
100,000
bizhub 363
110,000
bizhub 423
120,000
bizhub 223
80,000
bizhub 283
100,000
bizhub 363
110,000
bizhub 423
120,000
Fusing unit
100V
A1UD R708 XX
bizhub 223 120V
A1UD R709 XX
200V
A1UD R710 XX
100V
A1UD R708 XX
bizhub 283 120V
A1UD R709 XX
200V
A1UD R710 XX
100V
A1UD R708 XX
120V
A1UD R709 XX
200V
A1UD R710 XX
bizhub
363/423
Transfer
section
200,000
Tray 1 feed roller
Drum unit
Developer
Processing
section
Developing
unit
Toner filter
(Developing
unit)
bizhub 223
320,000
bizhub 283
400,000
440,000
bizhub 423
480,000
bizhub 223
80,000
bizhub 283
100,000
110,000
120,000
bizhub 363
bizhub 363
Descriptions
*2
*4

Tray 1
Replacing cycle
A1UD R711 XX
A1UD 3707 XX
bizhub 423
F-7
*2
*4
*2
*4
Ref. page
F.6.6.1 Replacing the
manual bypass tray feed
roller
manual bypass tray
separation roller assy
F.6.6.3 Replacing the tray
1 feed roller/tray 1 pickup roller
1 separation roller
2 feed roller/tray 2 pickup roller
2 separation roller
timing roller bearings/
timing roller gear1, 2
*2

paper dust remover
*3

fusing unit
*2

transfer roller unit
*3
*5

drum unit
*3

developer
*3
*6

developing unit
*3
*5

toner filter (developing
unit)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Classification
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. Periodical replacement parts list

Parts name
Parts No.
Qt.
bizhub 223
Toner filter
(Main body)
320,000
400,000
440,000
480,000
A1UD 1351 XX
150,000
bizhub 223
17,500
bizhub 283
17,500
bizhub 363
25,000
bizhub 423
25,000
bizhub 283
A02E 1484 XX
bizhub 363
bizhub 423
Ozone filter
Toner bottle
Replacing cycle
Descriptions
Ref. page
*3
*6

toner filter (main body)
*3

ozone filter
*1

toner bottle
*1: The parts can be replaced either by user or service engineer.

*2: Actual durable cycle (life counter value)
*3: Specification value
*5: The drum unit and toner filter (Developing unit) should be replaced with new ones at the same time.
*6: The drum unit and toner filter (Main body) should be replaced with new ones at the same time.
3.2 Option
3.2.1 DF-621
Parts No.
Qt.
Replacing cycle
Pick-up roller
Parts name
A143 PP52 XX
200,000
Descriptions
Ref. Page
Feed roller
A143 5631 XX
200,000
*1
*2
F.7. Periodical
maintenance procedure
DF-621
Separation roller assy
A143 PP01 XX
200,000
Qt.
Replacing cycle
300,000
Descriptions
Ref. Page
300,000
*1
*2
F.8. Periodical
PC-109/PC-208
300,000
Qt.
Replacing cycle
300,000
Descriptions
Ref. Page
300,000
*1
*2
F.8. Periodical
PC-109/PC-208
300,000
Qt.
Replacing cycle
300,000
Descriptions
Ref. Page
300,000
*1
*2
F.9. Periodical
PC-409
300,000
Parts No.
Qt.
Replacing cycle
Descriptions
Ref. Page
Upper paddle
A0HR 7313 XX
Lower paddle
800,000
*1
800,000
*1
F.11. Periodical
FS-527
A0HR 7348 XX

*2: Replace those parts at the same time.
3.2.2 PC-109
Parts name
Parts No.
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
A00J 5636 XX
Separation roller
3.2.3 PC-208
Parts name
Parts No.
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
A00J 5636 XX
Separation roller
3.2.4 PC-409
Parts name
Parts No.
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
A00J 5636 XX
Separation roller
3.2.5 FS-527
Parts name
*1: Total counter value
F-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. Periodical cleaning parts list
4. Periodical cleaning parts list

Clean with reference to the numeric values displayed on the total counter, the life counter or the messages displayed on the control panel.
4.1 bizhub 223/283/363/42

Classification
Parts name
Conveyance section
Timing roller
Duplex section
Cleaning cycle
Descriptions
Ref. Page
60,000
*1
F.6.7.3 Cleaning of the

timing roller
60,000
*1
F.6.9.1 Cleaning of the

duplex transport rollers
4.2 DF-621
Parts name
Cleaning cycle
Descriptions
Ref. Page
Pick-up roller
50,000
*1
Feed roller
50,000
*1
Separation roller
50,000
*1
Rollers and rolls
50,000
*1
Cleaning shaft
50,000
*1
Reflective sensor section
50,000
*1
Cleaning cycle
Descriptions
Ref. Page
300,000
*1
F.10. Periodical
JS-505
Ref. Page
F.7. Periodical
DF-621
4.3 JS-505
Parts name
Roller and rolls
4.4 JS-603/SD-509/PK-517
Parts name
Cleaning cycle
Descriptions
Roller and rolls
300,000
*1
Paddles
300,000
*1
4.5 FS-527
Parts name
Cleaning cycle
Descriptions
Ref. Page
Roller and rolls
300,000
*1
Upper paddle
300,000
*1
Lower paddle
300,000
*1
F.11. Periodical
FS-527
Cleaning cycle
Descriptions
Ref. Page
300,000
*1
F.12. Periodical
FS-529
4.6 FS-529
Parts name
Roller and rolls
F-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 5. Concept of parts life
5. Concept of parts life

5.1 Life value of consumables and parts
The life counter value of each materials and parts is available from [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life].
Life specification value means an actual life terminated when prints are made under the conditions as defined in the next section,
Conditions for life specifications values.
The actual life may vary greatly depending on how the machine has been used and other factors.
M refers to the rotation time of each unit.
Item
Fusing unit
Description
Rotation time of the fusing unit is counted, and detected when it reaches to the set life value shown on the right.
Paper dust remover The drum rotation time (paper dust remover) is counted and the life is detected when the count reaches the set life value
shown on the right.
When the number of printed pages *2 reaches the set life value shown on the right, the end of unit life is detected.
Ozone filter
When the number of printed pages *2 reaches the set life value shown on the right, the end of unit life is detected.
Drum unit
Rotation time of the drum unit is counted, and detected when it reaches to the set life value shown on the right.
Developer
The developer use time is counted and the life is detected when the count reaches the set life value shown on the right.
Developing unit
The developing unit rotation time is counted and the life is detected when the count reaches the set life value shown on
the right and, at the same time, the developer use time reaches the set life value shown on the right.
*1: The initiation of any new print cycle is inhibited when reaching the life stop threshold value.
*2: For counting the number of prints, the paper size in the sub-scan direction is added up and the count is incremented by one for the size
of 216.0 mm or less and by two for the size of more than 216.0 mm.
5.1.1 bizhub 223/283

Item
Fusing unit
Rotation time excess warning

threshold value
19,930 M
Life threshold value
Life stop threshold value
21,350 M
22,300 M *1
Paper dust remover 4,845 M
150,000 counts
Ozone filter
150,000 counts
Drum unit
4,845 M
5,329 M
6,056 M *1
Developer
4,845 M
5,329 M
6,056 M *1
Developing unit
19,380 M
19,380 M and 5,329 M (developer use

time)

time)
5.1.2 bizhub 363

Item
Fusing unit

threshold value
16,130 M
17,200 M
17,920 M *1
150,000 counts
Ozone filter
150,000 counts
Drum unit
3,921 M
4,313 M
4,901 M *1
Developer
3,921 M
4,313 M
4,901 M *1
Developing unit
15,684 M

time)

time)
5.1.3 bizhub 423

Item
Fusing unit

threshold value
14,800 M
15,800 M
16,440 M *1
150,000 counts
Ozone filter
150,000 counts
Drum unit
3,921 M
4,313 M
4,901 M *1
Developer
3,921 M
4,313 M
4,901 M *1
Developing unit
15,684 M

time)

time)
5.2 Conditions for life specifications values

Item
Job type
Description
bizhub 223
Making 2 copies per job
bizhub 283
F-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 5. Concept of parts life

Item
Description
bizhub 363
bizhub 423

A4 or 8 1/2 11
Paper size
PV/M
bizhub 223
bizhub 283
bizhub 363
bizhub 423
Average
2,300 (US) / 2,900 (EU)
Maximum
19,000
Average
3,700 (US) / 4,800 (EU)
Maximum
28,000
Average
6,100 (US) / 7,900 (EU)
Maximum
48,000
Average
8,300 (US) / 10,700 (EU)
Maximum
60,000
Original density
B/W = 6 %
Low power mode
OFF
No. of operating days per month
20 days (Main power switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)
F-11
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 6. Periodical maintenance

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub 223/283/363/423

NOTE
The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.
6.1 Housing section

6.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter
(1) Periodically replacing parts/cycle
Ozone filter: Every 150,000 counts
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the imaging unit.
G.4.3.1 Imaging unit
2. Unhook the tab [1] and lower the stopper [2].
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the ozone filter [1].
[1]
4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

5. Clear the following life counter using the Service Mode.
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [Ozone Filter].
I.11.12.2 Life
6.1.2 Replacing the toner filter (main body)

Toner filter (main body): Every 320,000 counts (bizhub 223)

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/2.
G.4.2.7 Rear cover/2
2. Peel off the toner filter (Main body) [1].
[1]
F-12

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.2 Photo conductor section

6.2.1 Replacing the drum unit
Drum unit: Every 80,000 counts (bizhub 223)

(2) Removal procedure

Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] [2] and clear the count of [Drum unit Rotation Time].
I.11.12.2 Life
2. Touch [END].
3. Turn OFF the main power switch.
NOTE
Be sure to clear the life counter before removing the imaging unit from the main body.
After the life counter is cleared, be sure to turn OFF the main power switch.
[2]
[1]
5. Remove four screws (silver) [1].

6. Slightly opening the lower part (the shadowed portion) on both
sides of the drum unit, disassemble the drum unit [2] and the
developing unit [3].
NOTE
Do not touch or scratch the photo conductor.
Cover the drum unit, which has been removed, with a
protective cloth or similar tool.
[1]
[3]
(3) Reinstall procedure
[3]
1. Align the shaft [2] of the developing unit with the inner guide [1] of
the drum unit.
2. Slide the drum unit along the guide [1] to check that the positioning
pin [3] is properly aligned with the mating hole.
3. Tighten four screws (silver) [4].
[4]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
4. Install the imaging unit in position.
5. Turn ON the main power switch.
6. Select [Service Mode] [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Gradation Adjust] and carry out gradation adjust.
I.11.5.1 Gradation Adjust
6.3 Developing section

6.3.1 Replacing the toner filter (developing unit)
Toner filter (developing unit): Every 80,000 counts (bizhub 223)

(2) Procedure
F-13

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. Remove the toner filter cover [1].
[1]
3. Remove the toner filter (Developing unit) [1].

4. Attach the new toner filter (developing unit).
NOTE
The toner filter may be installed in either direction.
Replace the drum unit with a new one at the same time.
[2]
[1]
6.3.2 Replacing the developing unit

Developing unit: Every 320,000 counts (bizhub 223)

(2) Procedure
1. Select [Administrator Settings] [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Forward] [Drum Dry].
2. Press the start key to start [Drum Dry] (which will take about 60 sec.).
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] [2] and clear the count of [Developing unit Rotation Time].
I.11.12.2 Life
NOTE
Clearing the [Developing unit Rotation Time] will automatically clear [Developer Replace Count] and [Developer Use Time].
4. Touch [END].
NOTE
Be sure to run [Drum Dry] and clear the life counter before removing the imaging unit from the main body.
[2]
[1]
[1]

NOTE
[3]
F-14

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9. Remove three screws [1] of the new developing unit and remove
the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
10. Remove the toner supply port [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
11. Affix the sheets [1] that are furnished with the drum unit.
NOTE
Make sure that the collar [2] is completely covered with
the sheet.
If the sheets [1] are not available, use paper as a
substitute.
[1]
[2]
[1]
A
12. While turning the gear in the direction of the arrow, pour the packet
of developer evenly into the developer [1] chamber.
NOTE
Be sure not to let developer get inside the collar [2].
Turn the magnet roller in the direction of its normal
rotation, and not the backward.
Not touching the gear of A side.
13. Remove the sheets that were attached in step 11.
[2]
F-15

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14. Reinstall the toner supply port [1].

NOTE
Make sure of the correct mounting position and direction.
[1]
15. Using three screws [1], secure the cover [2].

NOTE
Make sure that the tabs on the cover are properly fitted
into respective slits.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
the drum unit.
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
21. Execute [Service Mode] [Imaging Process Adjustment] [TCR Sensor Adjust].
I.11.5.6 TCR Sensor Adjust
NOTE
Be sure to replace the toner filter (on the main body side) at the same time.
6.3.3 Replacing the developer

Developer: Every 80,000 counts (bizhub 223)

(2) Procedure
1. Select [Administrator Settings] [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Forward] [Drum Dry].
I.6.7.31 Drum Dry
2. Press the start key to start [Drum Dry] (which will take about 60 sec.).
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] [2] and clear the count of [Developer Use Time].
I.11.12.2 Life
NOTE
Clearing the [Developer Use Time] will automatically increase the [Developer Replace Count].
4. Touch [END].
NOTE
Be sure to run [Drum Dry] and clear the life counter before removing the imaging unit from the main body.
F-16

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
[2]
[1]

NOTE
[3]
9. Tilt the developing unit as shown in the illustration to remove the
developer [2] from the discharge port [1].
[1]
[2]
10. While holding the developing unit [1] horizontally with the
discharge port [2] side up, shake the unit back and forth.
[2]
[1]
11. In the same way as step 9., remove the developer from the discharge port.
12. Rotating the gear [1] in the direction of the arrow, remove the
developer from the surface of the magnet roller [2].
A
NOTE
[1]
13. Repeat steps 9. to 12. several times.

14. Repeat these steps two to three times until the developer is almost
completely removed from the surface of the magnet roller [2].
[2]
15. Remove three screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F-17

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16. Remove the toner supply port [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
17. Affix the sheets [1] that are furnished with the drum unit.
NOTE
Make sure that the collar [2] is completely covered with
the sheet.
If the sheets [1] are not available, use paper as a
substitute.
[1]
[2]
[1]
A
18. While turning the gear in the direction of the arrow, pour the packet
of developer evenly into the developer [1] chamber.
NOTE
Be sure not to let developer get inside the collar [2].
19. Remove the sheets that were attached in step 17.
[2]
[1]
20. Reinstall the toner supply port [1].

NOTE
Make sure of the correct mounting position and direction.
F-18

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
21. Using three screws [1], secure the cover [2].

NOTE
Make sure that the tabs on the cover are properly fitted
into respective slits.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
the drum unit.
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
27. Execute [Service Mode] [Imaging Process Adjustment] [TCR Sensor Adjust].
I.11.5.6 TCR Sensor Adjust
6.4 Toner supply section

6.4.1 Replacing the toner bottle
Toner bottle: Every 17,500 counts (bizhub 223/283)
Toner bottle: Every 25,000 counts (bizhub 363/423)

1. Open the front door and slide the toner hopper [1] out of the
machine.
[1]
[2]
2. Pull the toner holder [1] and remove the toner bottle [2].
[1]
F-19

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223

1. From a height of about 10 cm, tap the toner bottle against a table
or other hard object four to five times. Then turn it upside down
and repeat the same procedure.
NOTE
Toner can be caked in the toner bottle. Be sure to perform
this procedure.
2. Shake the toner bottle [1] well about five times in the vertical
direction. Then, turn it over and repeat the same procedure.
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
3. To move toner to the toner supply port side in the bottle, drop the
toner bottle [1] with the supply port side down onto a table or other
hard surface from the height of about 10 cm several times.
4. Open the toner holder [1] and mount the toner bottle [2].
NOTE
Place the toner bottle [2] so that its seal surface faces [3]
upward.
5. Close the toner holder [1].
[1]
[1]
6. Gently peel off the seal [1] toward you from the bottle.
NOTE
Perform this procedure slowly, as toner can burst out
when the seal [1] is peeled off.
F-20

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. Slide the toner hopper [1] back into the machine until it clicks into
position. Then, close the front door [2].
[1]
[2]
6.5 Transfer section

6.5.1 Replacing the transfer roller unit
Transfer roller unit: Every 150,000 counts

1. Open the right door.
[2]
2. Pull down the knobs [1] forward and remove the transfer roller unit
[2].
[1]
[1]
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [Transfer Roller Unit].
I.11.12.2 Life
6.6 Paper feed section

6.6.1 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller
Manual bypass tray feed roller: Every 200,000 counts
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the manual bypass tray unit.
G.4.3.11 Manual bypass tray unit
2. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy.
F.6.6.2 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy
3. Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
G.4.6.4 Manual paper feed clutch (CL81)
[1]
4. Snap off the C-clip [1] for the feed roller, and remove the bearing
[2].
[2]
F-21

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. Snap off the C-clip [1], and remove the manual bypass tray feed
roller [2].
[1]
[2]
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [Manual Tray].
I.11.12.2 Life
NOTE
Replace the manual bypass tray feed roller and the manual bypass tray separation roller assy at the same time.
6.6.2 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy

Manual bypass tray separation roller assy: Every 200,000 counts
(2) Procedure
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[3] [4]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[2]
3. Loosen two screws [1].

4. Remove two screws [2] and slide the two guides [3] in the direction
of the arrow.
5. Remove two springs [4], and remove the transportation guide [5].
[2]
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove manual bypass tray
separation roller unit [2].
[1]
F-22

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. Snap off the C-clip [1], and remove the spring [2] and the guide
plate [3]. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy
[4].
NOTE
Use care not to lose the spring [2] during the removal
procedure.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [Manual Tray].
I.11.12.2 Life
NOTE
Replace the manual bypass tray feed roller and the manual bypass tray separation roller assy at the same time.
6.6.3 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller

Tray 1 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts
Tray 1 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the tray 1 paper feed unit.
G.4.3.2 Tray 1 paper feed unit
2. Remove the tray 1 separation roller unit.
F.6.6.4 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller
[1]
[2]
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the separation roller unit
attachment plate [2].
[1]
4. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1].
5. Remove two screws [2] and two shoulder screws [3], remove the
tray 1 feed roller cover [4].
[4]
[2][1]
[3]
[1] [2]
F-23

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
6. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], remove the tray 1
pick-up roller assy [3].
[3]
7. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the tray 1 pick-up roller [2].
[1]
[2]
8. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the tray 1 paper feed clutch
[2].
[1]
[2]
9. Remove the C-ring [1] and bearing [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and bearing [2], and remove the tray 1 feed
roller assy [3].
NOTE
procedure.
[3] [4] [2]
F-24

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
[2]
11. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the tray 1
feed roller [3].
[1]
13. Replace the tray 1 separation roller.
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [1st.].
I.11.12.2 Life
NOTE
Replace the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller and the tray 1 separation roller at the same time.
6.6.4 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller

Tray 1 separation roller: Every 300,000 counts
(2) Procedure
2. Remove two screws [1], remove the tray 1 separation roller unit
[2].
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[1]
3. Remove the C-ring [1] and shaft [2], and remove the separation
roller assy [3].
NOTE
procedure.
[2]
[3]
[1]
4. Remove the C-clip [1] and C-ring [2], and remove the tray 1
separation roller assy [3].
[2]
F-25

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller [2].
[1]
[2]
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [1st.].
I.11.12.2 Life
NOTE
6.6.5 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller

Tray 2 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts
Tray 2 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts
(2) Procedure
2. The remainder of the removal procedure is same as the one for the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller. See Replacing the tray 1 feed
roller/tray 1 pick-up roller.
F.6.6.3 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller
3. Replace the tray 2 separation roller.
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [2nd.].
I.11.12.2 Life
NOTE
6.6.6 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller

Tray 2 separation roller: Every 300,000 counts
(2) Procedure
2. The remainder of the removal procedure is same as the one for the tray 1 separation roller. See Replacing the tray 1 separation roller.
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [2nd.].
I.11.12.2 Life
NOTE
6.7 Registration section

6.7.1 Replacing the timing roller bearings/timing roller gear1, 2
Timing roller bearings: Every 900,000 counts
Timing roller gears: Every 900,000 counts
(2) Procedure
F-26

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[3]
2. Remove two E-rings [1].

3. Remove the timing roller gear 1 [2] and timing roller gear 2 [3].
[2]
[1]
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground plate [2].
NOTE
When reinstalling the ground plate, make sure that the
ground plate [1] is in contact with the side faces of the
bearings [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove the spring [1], and remove two timing roller bearings [2].
NOTE
When reinstalling the bearings, make sure that the flanges
of the bearings are on the outside.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[2]
[1]
6. Remove the E-ring [1] and disconnect the connector [2]. Then,
remove the timing roller clutch [3].
7. Remove two washers [4] and two wave washers [5].
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the washers.
When mounting the clutch, set the convex part of the
stopper into the concave part of the timing roller clutch
[6].
[4] [5] [4] [3]
F-27

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
[2]
8. Remove the spring [1] and two E-rings [2], remove two timing roller
bearings [3].
NOTE
When reinstalling the bearings, make sure that the flanges
of the bearings are on the outside.
[1]
[3] [2]
6.7.2 Replacing the paper dust remover

Paper dust remover: Every 150,000 counts
(2) Procedure
[3]
[3]
[2]
2. Unhook the tab [1] and remove the paper dust remover [2].
NOTE
When reinstalling the paper dust remover, be sure first to
fit the two tabs [3] in place.
[1]
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [Paper Dust Remover].
I.11.12.2 Life
6.7.3 Cleaning of the timing roller

(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
Timing roller: Every 60,000 counts (upon each call)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the paper dust remover.
F.6.7.2 Replacing the paper dust remover
3. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the timing roller [1] clean
of dirt.
[1]
F-28

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.8 Fusing section

6.8.1 Replacing the fusing unit
CAUTION
The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fusing
unit. You may get burned when you come into contact
with the area. Before replacement operations, make
sure that more than 20 minutes have elapsed since
the main and sub power switches were turned off.
Fusing unit:: Fusing unit: Every 340,000 counts (bizhub 223)

Fusing unit: Every 420,000 counts (bizhub 283)
Fusing unit:: Every 450,000 counts (bizhub 363)
Fusing unit:: Every 450,000 counts (bizhub 423)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the Remove the scanner right front cover..
G.4.2.11 Scanner right front cover
3. Open the paper exit upper guide [1].
[1]
[1]
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cover [2].
[2]
5. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1]
F-29

procedure bizhub...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the fusing unit [2].
NOTE
Use care not to allow the harness to be scratched by the
metal bracket.
[1]
Select [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] and clear the count of [Fusing Unit Rotation Time].
I.11.12.2 Life
6.9 Duplex section

6.9.1 Cleaning of the duplex transport rollers
Duplex transport rollers: Every 60,000 counts (upon each call)
(2) Procedure
[1]
2. Using a cleaning pad with water or alcohol, wipe the duplex

transport rollers [1] clean of dirt.
F-30

procedure DF-621
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. Periodical maintenance procedure DF-621

NOTE
7.1 Take-up section

7.1.1 Cleaning of the pick-up roller/feed roller
Pick-up roller: Every 50,000 counts
Feed roller: Every 50,000 counts
(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
2. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the pick-up rollers [1] /
feed roller [2] clean of dirt.
[1]
[2]
7.1.2 Cleaning of the separation roller

Separation roller: Every 50,000 counts
(2) Procedure
2. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the separation roller [1]
clean of dirt.
[1]
7.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller / feed roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
Pick-up roller: Every 200,000 counts
Feed roller: Every 200,000 counts
(2) Procedure
[2]
2. Remove the C-ring [1] and the gear assy [2].

NOTE
When reinstalling the gear assy [2], push the gear assy [2]
into position while rotating it.
[1]
F-31

procedure DF-621
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
3. Remove the pin [1].

NOTE
Be careful not to lose the pin [1].
[1] [5]
4. Remove two screws [2] and the ground terminal [4]. Then, remove
the bearing assy [3].
NOTE
When reinstalling the bearing assy [3], make sure that the
dowel pin fits into the dowel hole [5] in the bearing assy
[3].
[3]
[2]
[4]
5. Remove the C-clip [1] and slide the bushing [2] in the direction of
the arrow.
6. Remove the pick-up roller/feed roller assy [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
7. Remove two C-rings [1].

8. Remove the arm [2] and the pin [3].
NOTE
[4]
[5]
[6]
9. Remove the C-ring [4] and the belt [5], and remove the pick-up
roller assy [6].
[3]
[2]
[1]
10. Remove two levers [1].
[1]
[1]
[3]
11. Remove two C-rings [1] and two pins [2], and remove two pick-up
rollers [3].
NOTE
[3]
[2]
F-32

procedure DF-621
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12. Remove the C-ring [1] and the pin [2], and remove the arm [3].
NOTE
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[5]
13. Remove the C-ring [1], the pulley [2] and the gear [3].
14. Remove two pins [4], and remove the feed roller [5].
NOTE
[2]
[4]
[4]
7.1.4 Replacing the separation roller
Separation roller assy: Every 200,000 counts
(2) Procedure
2. Pinch the portion [1] and remove the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
3. Remove the separation roller assy [1].

NOTE
Use care not to lose the spring on the underside of the
separation roller assy.
7.2 Transport section

7.2.1 Cleaning of the pick-up roller/feed roller
Miscellaneous rolls: Every 50,000 counts
(2) Procedure
1. Lift up the document feed tray.
F-33

procedure DF-621
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the rolls [1]
clean of dirt.
[1]

clean of dirt.
[1]
5. Open the reverse automatic document feeder.

6. While opening the before scanning film assy [1], wipe the rolls [2]
using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
clean of dirt.
[1]
7.2.2 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers

Miscellaneous rollers: Every 50,000 counts
(2) Procedure
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the rollers [1]
clean of dirt.
[1]
F-34

procedure DF-621
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]

4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the rollers [1]
clean of dirt.
5. While turning processing knob [1], wipe the rollers [2] using a
cleaning pad dampened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
7.3 Scanning section

7.3.1 Cleaning of the cleaning shaft
Cleaning shaft: Every 50,000 counts
(2) Procedure
[1]
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the cleaning

shaft [1] clean of dirt.
7.3.2 Cleaning of the reflective sensor section

Reflective sensor section: Every 50,000 counts
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
2. While opening the before scanning film assy [1], wipe the reflective
sensor [2] using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol.
F-35

procedure DF-621
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]

4. Clean the cloth [1] using a brush or other similar tools.
5. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the reflective

sensor [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
F-36

procedure PC-109...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. Periodical maintenance procedure PC-109/PC-208

NOTE

Separation roller: Every 300,000 feed
NOTE
Replace the separation roller, feed roller and pick-up roller at the same time.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the right door.
G.5.3.1 Right door
2. Remove two springs [1].
3. Remove the jam clearing cover [2].
[1]
[2]
4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the paper separation roller
mounting bracket assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
5. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the shaft [2].
6. Remove the guide [3] and bracket [4].
NOTE
Be careful not to lose spring [5] at this time.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[2]
7. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the separation roller assy [2].
[1]
[2]
F-37

procedure PC-109...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the separation roller [2].
[1]
[2]
9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 similarly for the 4th drawer.

NOTE
Install the separation roller assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine.
Make sure that the separation roller assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed.
8.1.2 Replacing the feed roller

Feed roller: Every 300,000 feed
NOTE
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear right cover. (Remove the right lower cover for 4th row.)
G.5.3.2 Rear right cover/Lower right cover/Front right cover
2. Remove the tray 3. (Remove the tray 4 from 4th row.)
3. Remove the paper separation roller mounting bracket assy.
See the procedures 1 to 4 in F.8.1.1 Replacing the separation roller
4. Unlock three tabs [1], and remove the harness cover [2].
[1]
[4]
5. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
7. Remove three screws [1] and remove the feed unit [2].
[1]
F-38

procedure PC-109...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting frame [2] for the
paper separation roller mounting bracket assy.
[2]
[1]
9. Remove two screws [1] and remove the feed roller cover [2].
[2]
[1]
10. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the bushing [2].
[2]
[1]
11. Detach the hook [1] of the spring and shift the shaft assy [2] in the
direction shown in the illustration.
12. Remove the C-ring [3] and the gear [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
13. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bushing [2], and remove the shaft
assy [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-39

procedure PC-109...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14. Remove two C-rings [1] and the bushing [2], and remove the pickup roller fixing bracket assy [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
15. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the feed roller [2].
[1]
[2]
8.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller

Pick-up roller: Every 300,000 feed
NOTE
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear right cover. (Remove the right lower cover for 4th row.)
2. Remove the tray 3. (Remove the tray 4 from 4th row.)
3. Remove the separation roller mounting bracket assy.
See the procedures 1 to 4 in F.8.1.1 Replacing the separation roller
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[2]
7. Remove three screws [1] and remove the feed unit [2].
[1]
F-40

procedure PC-109...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
10. Remove two C-rings [1] and two bushings [2], and remove the
pick-up roller assy [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
11. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the pick-up roller [2].
[1]
[2]
F-41

procedure PC-409
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9. Periodical maintenance procedure PC-409

NOTE

Separation roller: Every 300,000 feed
NOTE
(2) Procedure
G.5.4.1 Right door
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the separation roller mounting
bracket assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
3. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the shaft [2].
4. Remove the guide [3] and bracket
NOTE
Be careful not to lose spring [5] at this time.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[2]
5. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the separation roller assy [2].
[1]
[2]
6. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the separation roller [2].
[1]
[2]
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

NOTE
Install the separation roller assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine.
Make sure that the separation roller assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed.
F-42

procedure PC-409
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.1.2 Replacing the feed roller

Feed roller: Every 300,000 feed
NOTE
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear right cover.
G.5.4.1 Right door
[2]
[1]
2. Remove two screws [1] and separation roller mounting bracket

assy [2].
[1]
3. Insert a driver into the hole [1] at the rear of the feed tray and pull
out the paper feed tray.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
F-43

procedure PC-409
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. Remove four screws [1] and remove the feed unit [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
10. Remove two C-rings [1] and remove two bushings [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-44

procedure PC-409
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11. Detach the hook [1] of the spring and shift the shaft assy [2] in the
direction shown in the illustration.
12. Remove the C-ring [3], the gear [4] and the bushing [5].
13. Remove the shaft assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[3]
14. Remove two C-rings [1] and the bushing [2], and remove the pickup roller fixing bracket assy [3].
[1]
[1]
[2]
15. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the feed roller [2].
[1]
[2]
9.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller

Pick-up roller: Every 300,000 feed
NOTE
(2) Procedure
[2]
[1]
2. Remove two screws [1] and separation roller mounting bracket

assy [2].
[1]
F-45

procedure PC-409
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
7. Remove four screws [1] and remove the feed unit [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-46

procedure PC-409
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10. Remove two C-rings [1], two bushings [2], and the pick-up roller
assy [3].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
11. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the pick-up roller [2].
[1]
[2]
F-47

procedure JS-505
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10. Periodical maintenance procedure JS-505

NOTE
10.1 Paper exit section

10.1.1 Cleaning of the roller and roll
Roller and roll: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the separator.
G.5.5.1 Separator
[2]
[1]
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1]
and roll [2].
[2]
3. Remove the upper tray.

[2]
[1]
4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1]
and roll [2].
[2]
F-48

procedure FS-527
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-527

NOTE

11.1.1 Cleaning procedure for each parts
Each rollers/Each rolls: Every 300,000 counts
Paddle: Every 300,000 counts
(2) Cleaning point
11.1.2 Replacing the upper paddles

Upper paddles: Every 800,000 counts
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door of the finisher.
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
3. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the upper paddle assy [2].
[1]
[2]
F-49

procedure FS-527
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. Remove two paddles [1].

NOTE
When installing the paddles, use alcohol to moisten the
surface of the paddles that are inserted into the grooves.
[1]
11.1.3 Replacing the lower paddles

Lower paddles: Every 800,000 counts
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the finisher.
G.5.7.6 Finisher
NOTE
In case SD-509 is not mounted, remove the four screws [1]
and take out the plate [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
3. Slide the stapler unit [1] backward.

[1]
F-50

procedure FS-527
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. Move the stopper [1] forward, and release the lock.

5. Remove the lower paddle assy [2].
[1]
[2]
6. Remove nine paddles [1].

NOTE
When installing the paddles, use alcohol to moisten the
surface of the paddles that are inserted into the grooves.
[1]
[1]
7. Put the front side of the lower paddle Assy [1] through the belt.
8. Attach the lower paddle Assy to the arm and put the belt on the
gear [2].
9. Move the stopper [3] to secure.
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-51

procedure FS-529
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-529

NOTE

12.1.1 Cleaning procedure for each parts
Each rollers/Each rolls: Every 300,000 counts
(2) Cleaning point
F-52
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 1. Disassembly/adjustment

prohibited items
bizhub 423/363/283/223
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
1. Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items
1.1 Paint-locked screws
NOTE
To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws.
The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to
the vibrations created during transportation.
If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed, be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened.
1.2 Red-painted screws

NOTE
The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order to prevent them from being removed by
mistake.
Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be noted that, when two or more screws are
used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
1.3 Variable resistors on board

NOTE
Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting.
1.4 Removal of PWBs
CAUTION
To avoid electrical shock, after turning OFF the power switch, do not
touch the DC power supply for 22 minutes.
When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to
Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal
procedures.
The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of
connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit
board.
Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical
components on the board, be sure to ground your body.
1.5 Precautions for disassembly
CAUTION
When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow spot, be careful about
sharp edges and burrs of the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
If it is absolutely necessary to service the machine with the door
open or external covers removed, always be attentive to the motion
of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause unexpected hazards.
G-1
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 1. Disassembly/adjustment

prohibited items
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CAUTION
When removing a part that secures a motor, gear, or other moving
part, disassembling a unit, or reinstalling any of such parts and units,
be careful about moving parts and use care not to drop any part or
unit. During the service procedure, give sufficient support for any
heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
1.6 Precautions during setup or transportation
CAUTION
Whenever mounting an option on the machine, be attentive to the
motion of the fellow worker of the joint work.
The fellow worker may be injured with his or her finger or hand
pinched between the machine and the option.
When mounting an option on the machine, be careful about the
clearance between the machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand pinched between the
machine and the option.
Do not leave the machine unattended during transportation,
installation, and inspection of the machine. If it is to be unavoidably
left unattended, face protrusions toward the wall or take other
necessary risk reducing action.
The user may stumble over a protrusion of the machine or be caught
by a cable, falling to the floor or being injured.
G-2
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 2. Units from which removing is

prohibited
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. Units from which removing is prohibited

2.1 CCD unit
2.1.1 Reason for prohibition
Since the accuracy of the CCD unit is guaranteed as a unit, no accuracy is guaranteed if it is disassembled.
Therefore, screws that lead to the disassembly of the CCD unit must not be removed.
2.2 PH unit
The laser runs inside the PH unit. Opening the cover may cause dust to enter and interrupt the laser. Do no remove any screw which may
disassemble the PH unit.
2.3 Fusing unit

Inner part of the fusing unit and the position of the fusing belt are adjusted prior to shipping. Do not remove any screw which may
disassemble the fusing unit.
G-3
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. Notes when transporting the

machine
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. Notes when transporting the machine

NOTE
When transporting a machine to reinstall it in another location, attach the following protective materials to the machine in order to
prevent the machine from being damaged or spilling out by vibration during transportation.
The protective materials are removed when the machine is set up. However, be sure to keep the protective materials after finishing
the set-up.
3.1 Protective materials

3.1.1 Protective materials for the photo conductors
1. Check that the exposure unit/LED exposure unit is at the home position.
2. Remove four caps.
3. Secure the protective material [2] in place using four screws [1].
[2]
[1]
4. Install the scanner fixing bracket [1] to fix the scanner in place.
[1]
G-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. bizhub 223/283/363/423
4. bizhub 223/283/363/423
4.1 Disassembly/reassembly parts list
4.1.1 Exterior parts
No.
Part name
Ref. page
Front door
G.4.2.1 Front door
Left cover
G.4.2.2 Left cover
Exit tray
G.4.2.3 Exit tray
Rear right cover
G.4.2.4 Rear right cover
Upper right cover
G.4.2.5 Upper right cover
Rear cover/1
Rear cover/2
Lower rear cover
G.4.2.8 Lower rear cover
Scanner rear cover
G.4.2.9 Scanner rear cover
10
Scanner right cover
G.4.2.10 Scanner right cover
11
Scanner right front cover
12
USB interface cover
G.4.2.12 USB interface cover
13
Scanner left front cover
G.4.2.13 Scanner left front cover
14
Scanner upper front cover
G.4.2.14 Scanner upper front cover
15
Scanner left cover
G.4.2.15 Scanner left cover
16
Scanner upper rear cover
G.4.2.16 Scanner upper rear cover
17
Scanner front cover
G.4.2.17 Scanner front cover
18
Slit glass cover
G.4.2.18 Slit glass cover
19
Original glass
G.4.2.19 Original glass
20
Control panel assy
G.4.2.20 Control panel assy
21
Tray 1
G.4.2.21 Tray 1
22
Tray 2
G.4.2.22 Tray 2
23
Front cover
G.4.2.23 Front cover
4.1.2 Units
No.
Part name
Ref. page
Imaging unit
Tray 1 paper feed unit
Tray 2 paper feed unit
PH unit
G.4.3.4 PH unit
CCD board unit
G.4.3.5 CCD board unit
Exposure unit
G.4.3.6 Exposure unit
LED exposure unit
G.4.3.7 LED exposure unit
Toner hopper unit
G.4.3.8 Toner hopper unit
Regist unit
G.4.3.9 Regist unit
10
Switchback unit
G.4.3.10 Switchback unit
11
Manual bypass tray unit
12
Conveyance unit
G.4.3.12 Conveyance unit
13
Hard disk drive
G.4.3.16 Hard disk drive
14
MFP board box
G.4.3.14 MFP board box
15
Main drive unit
G.4.3.15 Main drive unit
16
Hopper drive unit
G.4.3.13 Hopper drive unit
4.1.3 Boards
No.
Part name
Ref. page
Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for fluorescent lamp)
G.4.4.1 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for

fluorescent lamp)
Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for LED lamp)
G.4.4.2 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for LED

lamp)
Inverter board (INVB) (for fluorescent lamp)
G.4.4.3 Inverter board (INVB) (for fluorescent lamp)
LED exposure drive board (LEDEDB) (for LED lamp)
G.4.4.4 LED exposure drive board (LEDEDB) (for LED

lamp)
Machine condition monitor board (MCMB)
G.4.4.5 Machine condition monitor board (MCMB)
DC power supply (DCPU)
G.4.4.7 DC power supply (DCPU)
Printer control board (PRCB)
G.4.4.6 Printer control board (PRCB)
G-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No.
Part name
Ref. page
MFP board (MFPB)
G.4.4.8 MFP board (MFPB)
High voltage unit (HV)
G.4.4.9 High voltage unit (HV)
10
SODIMM (DIMM)
G.4.4.10 SODIMM (DIMM)
11
NVRAM board (NRB)
G.4.4.11 NVRAM board (NRB)
12
Paper feed tray 1 paper FD sensor board (PSDB/1)
G.4.4.12 Paper feed tray 1 paper FD sensor board

(PSDB/1)
13
Paper feed tray 2 paper FD sensor board (PSDB/2)
G.4.4.13 Paper feed tray 2 paper FD sensor board

(PSDB/2)
14
Paper feed tray 1 LED board, paper feed tray 2 LED board (LEDB1,
LEDB2)
G.4.4.14 Paper feed tray 1 LED board, Paper feed tray

2 LED board (LEDB1, LEDB2)
4.1.4 Motors
No.
Part name
Ref. page
Scanner motor (M201)
G.4.5.1 Scanner motor (M201)
Duplex transport motor (M92)
G.4.5.2 Duplex transport motor (M92)
Toner supply motor (M4)
G.4.5.6 Toner supply motor (M4)
G.4.5.3 Transport motor (M1)
PC motor (M2)
G.4.5.4 PC motor (M2)
Switchback motor (M91)
G.4.5.7 Switchback motor (M91)
Toner bottle motor (M3)
G.4.5.5 Toner bottle motor (M3)
Tray 1 lift-up motor (M11)
G.4.5.8 Tray 1 lift-up motor (M11)
G.4.5.9 Tray 2 lift-up motor (M21)
10
G.4.5.10 Power supply cooling fan motor (FM1)
11
G.4.5.11 Cooling fan motor (FM2)
12
G.4.5.12 Fusing unit cooling fan motor (FM3)
13
G.4.5.13 Toner suction fan motor (FM4)
14
MFP board cooling fan motor (FM5)
G.4.5.14 MFP board cooling fan motor (FM5)
4.1.5 Clutches
No.
Part name
Ref. page
G.4.6.1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL11)
G.4.6.2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL21)
Tray 2 vertical transport clutch (CL22)
G.4.6.3 Tray 2 vertical transport clutch (CL22)
Manual paper feed clutch (CL81)
G.4.6.5 Registration clutch (CL1)
4.1.6 etc.
No.
Part name
Ref. page
Manual pick-up solenoid (SD81)
G.4.7.1 Manual pick-up solenoid (SD81)
Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUM)
G.4.7.2 Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUM)
Scanner drive cable
G.4.7.3 Scanner drive cable
4.2 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Exterior parts)

4.2.1 Front door
1. Remove the exit tray.
G.4.2.3 Exit tray
2. Open the front door.
3. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the front door [2].
[1]
[2]
G-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.2.2 Left cover

2. Remove two screws [1].
3. Remove four screws [2], and remove the left cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
4.2.3 Exit tray

[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
2. Loosen three screws [1].

3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the exit tray [2].
[2]
4.2.4 Rear right cover

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the connector cover [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove five screws [1], and remove the rear right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
4.2.5 Upper right cover

1. Remove the scanner rear cover.
G-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the upper right cover [2].
[1]
[2]
4.2.6 Rear cover/1

1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the rear cover/1 [2].
[1]
[2]
4.2.7 Rear cover/2

[1]
[1]
[2]
4.2.8 Lower rear cover

[3]
[3]
2. Remove six screws [3], and remove the lower rear cover [4].
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
G-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.2.9 Scanner rear cover

1. Remove the screws [1], and remove the connector cover [2].
[2]
[1]
2. Remove the cable tie [1].
[1]
3. Disconnect two connectors [1].

NOTE
When connecting the connectors [1], be careful about
routing of the harness.
[1]
[1]
OK
NG
4. Remove three screws [1], and remove the scanner rear cover [2].
[1]
[2]
G-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.2.10 Scanner right cover

1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the scanner right cover [2].
[1]
[2]
4.2.11 Scanner right front cover

1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the scanner right front cover [2].
[1]
[2]
4.2.12 USB interface cover

1. Remove the scanner right front cover.
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the USB interface cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4.2.13 Scanner left front cover

1. Remove the control panel assy.
G.4.2.20 Control panel assy
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the scanner left front cover [2].
[1]
[2]
G-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.2.14 Scanner upper front cover

1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the scanner upper front
cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4.2.15 Scanner left cover

1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the scanner left cover [2].
[1]
[2]
4.2.16 Scanner upper rear cover

4. Remove the upper right cover.
[2]
[1]
[1]
5. Remove three shoulder screws [1] and the screw [2], and remove
the scanner upper rear cover [3].
[3]
4.2.17 Scanner front cover

1. Remove the scanner left cover.
3. Remove the USB interface cover.
G.4.2.12 USB interface cover
4. Remove the scanner upper front cover.
G-11
bizhub 423/363/283/223

5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the scanner front cover [2].
NOTE
Do not remove it in rush as it is connected to the harness.
[1]
[2]
6. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].

[1]
[2]
4.2.18 Slit glass cover

1. Remove the scanner upper rear cover.
2. Remove the scanner left cover.
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the slit glass cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4.2.19 Original glass

1. Remove the scanner right cover.
[2]
[2]
[1]
2. Remove each screw [1], and remove the original glass fixing
bracket (near side/inmost side) [2].
[1]
G-12
bizhub 423/363/283/223

3. Remove the original glass [1].
[1]
4.2.20 Control panel assy

[1]
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the control panel assy [2].
[2]
[1]
4.2.21 Tray 1
1. Slide out the tray 1.
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stopper [2].
3. Remove the tray 1 [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
4.2.22 Tray 2
1. Slide out the tray 2.
G-13
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stopper [2].
3. Remove the tray 2 [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
4.2.23 Front cover

1. Remove the scanner left front cover.
G.4.2.13 Scanner left front cover
G.4.2.3 Exit tray
3. Open the front door and right door.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
6. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the front cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
G-14
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Units)

4.3.1 Imaging unit
[2]
[1]
[1]
4. Remove the imaging unit [1].

[1]
4.3.2 Tray 1 paper feed unit

1. Remove the tray 1.
G.4.2.21 Tray 1
[1]
[2]
G-15
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 paper feed unit [2].
[1]
[2]
4.3.3 Tray 2 paper feed unit

G.4.2.21 Tray 1
G.4.2.22 Tray 2
[2]
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the front lower cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]
5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 paper feed unit [2].
[2]
G-16
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.3.4 PH unit
CAUTION
Do not replace the printer head unit while the power is
ON.
Laser beam generated during the above mentioned
activity may cause blindness.
Do not disassemble or adjust the printer head unit.
Laser beam generated during the above mentioned
activity may cause blindness.
G.4.2.3 Exit tray
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
6. Remove two screws [1] and unhook the tab [2], and remove the
cover [3].
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
7. Disconnect the connector (CN19) [1] and flat cable (CN20) [2] on
the printer control board.
8. Remove the harness and flat cable from the wire saddle [3] and
edge cover [4].
[2]
G-17
bizhub 423/363/283/223

9. Disconnect the flat cable (PJ02) [1] from the MFP board.
[1]
10. Remove the harness from eight wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
11. Remove seven cable holders [1] of the flat cable.

12. Remove the flat cable from three wire saddles [2].
[2]
[1]
13. Remove three screws [1], three springs [2] and the spacer [3].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
NOTE
The position, number, and color of the spacers [3] installed in the screw holes vary depending on the machine model. When
removing the PH unit, therefore, be sure to remember the position, number, and color of the spacers [3] installed in each of the
screw holes. (Depending on the individual PH unit performance difference, the machine may not have the spacers [3])
This machine does not incorporate the system of determining the number and types of spacers installed in the PH unit by the
color of the label affixed to the PH unit. The label affixed to the PH unit therefore has no special meaning in this machine.
14. Remove the PH unit [4].
NOTE
When reinstalling the PH unit, be sure to attach the spacer [3] to its original position.
4.3.5 CCD board unit

1. Remove the original glass.
G-18
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]

2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the CCD board protective
shield [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]

[1]
4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the CCD board unit [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]

1. Set the CCD unit to the mounting position at the center of the
scale, and fix it with four screws.
2. Reinstall the original glass.

3. Turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch.
4. Carry out the [Main Scan Zoom Adj.] in Service Mode. If the specifications are not met, loosen the CCD board unit mounting screws and
move the CCD board unit in the sub scan direction as necessary.
I.11.3.5.(3) Main Scan Zoom Adj.
NOTE
Hold the CCD board unit by hand when moving it. NEVER use a screwdriver or similar tool to tap to move it, as a varied
distance between the CCD sensor and lens results.
4.3.6 Exposure unit

G-19
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove the two sheets [1] as shown in the illustration.
[1]
[2]
[2]
5. Move the exposure unit [1] to the position where the sheets are
removed (where a screwdriver can reach the screws) in the
previous step.
6. Remove two screws [2], and remove the exposure unit [1].
[1]
7. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1], and disconnect the
connector [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exposure lamp [2] from the
exposure unit.
[2]

10. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] [ADF] [Read Pos Adj]
I.11.16.7 Read Pos Adj
4.3.7 LED exposure unit

G-20
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove the sheet [1] as shown in the illustration.
[1]
[2]
[2]
5. Move the LED exposure unit [1] to the position where the sheet is
removed (where a screwdriver can reach the screws) in the
previous step.
6. Remove two screws [2], and remove the LED exposure unit [1].
[1]
[2]
7. Remove four screws [1], and disconnect the flat cable [2].
8. Remove the LED exposure lamp [3] from the LED exposure unit.
[1]
[1]
[3]

NOTE
When replacing the LED exposure unit with a brand-new one, peel the protective film from the unit after attaching it.
10. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] [ADF] [Read Pos Adj]
4.3.8 Toner hopper unit

G.4.2.3 Exit tray
3. Loosen the screw [1].
4. Pull out the toner hopper unit [2].
[1]
[2]
4.3.9 Regist unit

G-21
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
2. Widen two tabs [1] in the direction of the arrow to unlock them.
Then, raise the regist unit [2] as illustrated.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
3. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the regist unit [2].
[1]
4.3.10 Switchback unit

1. Remove the fusing unit.
F.6.8.1 Replacing the fusing unit
[2]
[1]
[1]
G-22
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
[5]
[1]
Loosen the screw [1] in front.

Remove the screw [2] in front.
Loosen the screw [3] in the back.
Remove the screw [4] in the back.
Remove the switchback unit [5].
[4]
[2]
[3]
4.3.11 Manual bypass tray unit
[1]
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the manual bypass tray unit
right cover [2].
[2]
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the manual bypass tray unit left
cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1] and wire saddle [2].
[1]
G-23
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Disconnect five connectors [1].
[1]
[1]
5. Remove four screws [1] and remove the manual bypass tray unit [2]
as illustrated.
[1]
[1]
[2]
4.3.12 Conveyance unit

2. Remove the lower rear cover.
[2]
[3]
3. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the wire
saddle [2].
4. Remove the screw [3].
[1]
[2]

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the conveyance unit [2].
NOTE
When removing the conveyance unit, be careful not to
damage or deform the guide sheet of the tray 1 paper feed
unit.
[1]
4.3.13 Hopper drive unit

2. Remove the toner hopper unit.
G.4.3.8 Toner hopper unit
3. Remove the front cover.
G-24
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]

[2]
4. Remove the harness from nine wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2].
[1]
NOTE
Europe only: Disconnect the connector [1].
[1]
5. Disconnect three connectors [1].

[2]
[1]
[1]
7. Disconnect four connectors [1] from main switch.

NOTE
When mounting the main switch connectors, make sure
that they are mounted at the right positions as detailed
below.
[1]
<Europe only> [1]
[1]
G-25
No.
Color of connectors
Color of harnesses
White
Black
Red
Black
White
White
Red
White
bizhub 423/363/283/223

8. Remove four screws [1], and remove the hopper drive unit [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4.3.14 MFP board box

5.
6.
7.
8.
[5]
[3]
Remove the screw [1], and remove the harness band [2].
Disconnect the connector (PJ04) [3] on the MFP board.
Disconnect the flat cable (PJ02) [4] on the MFP board.
Disconnect the connector (PJ30) [5] on the MFP board.
[1] [4] [2]
9. Disconnect the flat cable (PJ2) [1] on the scanner relay board.
[1]
10. Disconnect the flat cable (CN28) [1] on the printer control board.
[1]
G-26
bizhub 423/363/283/223

11. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1], and disconnect two
connectors [2].
[1]
[2]
12. Remove seven screws [1], and remove the MFP board box [2].
[2]
[1]
4.3.15 Main drive unit

3. Remove the MFP board box.
4. Remove the transport motor.
5. Remove the PC motor.
G.4.5.4 PC motor (M2)
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the ground plate [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
7. Remove three screws [1], and remove the relay connector

[2]
[1]
G-27
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]

8. Remove the screw [1], and remove the spring [2].
[2]
9. Remove five screws [1], and remove the main drive unit [2].
[1]
[2]
4.3.16 Hard disk drive

[1]

NOTE
When reinstalling the hard disk drive, slightly bend the
harness so that it does not protrude outwardly.
[1]
<OK>
<NG>
[3]
[1]
[3]
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the hard disk assy [2].
NOTE
Align two dowels [3] during reinstallation.
[2]
[1]
G-28
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the hard disk [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]

NOTE
When the hard disk is replaced, select [State Confirmation] - [Memory/HDD Adj.] - [HDD Format] in Service Mode for logical
format.
After formatting the HDD, make the settings below as necessary.
Reinstallation of movie data and OCR dictionary data.
I.11.11.18 Install Data
Resetting of HDD lock password
I.6.88.4 HDD Lock Password
4.4 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Boards)

4.4.1 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for fluorescent lamp)
4. Disconnect all connectors and flat cables on the scanner relay
board.
5. Remove five screws [1], and remove the scanner relay board [2].
[1]
[2]
4.4.2 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for LED lamp)

G-29
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Disconnect all connectors and flat cables on the scanner relay
board [1].
[1]
5. Remove five screws [1], and remove the scanner relay board [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
4.4.3 Inverter board (INVB) (for fluorescent lamp)

2. Remove the scanner relay board.
G.4.4.1 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for fluorescent lamp)
[1]
4. Remove the harness from two edge covers [1].
[1]
[2]

6. Remove three screws [2].
[1]
G-30
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
7. Remove two screws [1] and two PWB supports [2], and remove the
Inverter board [3].
[2]
[3]
4.4.4 LED exposure drive board (LEDEDB) (for LED lamp)

[2]
[1]
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and flat cable [2].
3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the LED exposure drive
board [2].
[1]
[2]
4.4.5 Machine condition monitor board (MCMB)

1. Remove the scanner front cover.
[2]
[3]

3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the machine condition monitor
board [3].
[1]
4.4.6 Printer control board (PRCB)

G-31
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Disconnect all connectors on the printer control board.
3. Remove six screws [1], and remove printer control board [2].
[2]
[1]
NOTE
When the printer control board (PRCB) has been replaced, be sure to remount EEPROM (IC51) [1]. Remove EEPROM (IC51) [1]
from the old printer control board and mount it on the new printer control board.
[1]
NOTE
When mounting EEPROM (IC51), align the notches (indicated by A in the illustration).
NOTE
When the printer control board is to be replaced, rewriting the firmware to the latest one.
When the EEPROM (IC51) is replaced to the brand-new one, the error License management error occurred. will be occurred.
In this case, it is necessary to repair the i-Option license management information.
4.4.7 DC power supply (DCPU)
CAUTION
Remove the DC power supply after 22 minutes or
more have passed since the power plug was
disconnected.
1. Remove the left cover.
G.4.2.2 Left cover
G.4.2.3 Exit tray
G-32
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]

4. Remove six screws [2], and remove the DC power supply protective
shield [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
5. Disconnect six connectors [1] on the DC power supply.

[1]
6. Remove two screws [1], and slide out the DC power supply [2].
[2]
[1]
7. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the DC power supply [2].
[1]
[2]
4.4.8 MFP board (MFPB)

2. Remove the FAX board if it is mounted.
G.5.11.1 FAX board
3. Remove the hard disk drive if it is mounted.
G.4.3.16 Hard disk drive
G-33
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the hard disk attachment plate
[2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
5. Disconnect all connectors and flat cables on the MFP board.

7. Remove 12 screws [1] of the MFP board.

[1]
[1]
8. Remove three screws [1], and remove the MFP board assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
G-34
bizhub 423/363/283/223

10. Remove six bolts [1][2], and remove the interface cover [3].
NOTE
Notice that the two bolts [2] are slightly longer than the
others.
[3]
[1]
[2]
11. Remove four screws [1], and remove two PWB rails [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
12. Remove two ground plates [1] and two sponges [2].
[2]
[1]
13. Remove the DIMM.

G.4.4.10 SODIMM (DIMM)
14. Remove the NVRAM.
G.4.4.11 NVRAM board (NRB)
NOTE
When the MFP board is to be replaced, rewriting the firmware to the latest one.
4.4.9 High voltage unit (HV)

[2]
2. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the harness from four guides
[2].
[1]
G-35
bizhub 423/363/283/223

3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]

5. Slide the high voltage unit [2] in the direction of the arrow.
6. Disconnect four connectors [3], and remove the high voltage unit
[2].
NOTE
Install the high voltage unit so that the machine terminals
come into contact with the counterparts on the high
voltage unit.
[3]
[1]
4.4.10 SODIMM (DIMM)

2. Remove the SODIMM [1] on the MFP board.
[1]
4.4.11 NVRAM board (NRB)

2. Remove the NVRAM board [1] on the MFP board.
[1]

NOTE
When the NVRAM board is replaced to the brand-new one, the error License management error occurred. will be occurred.
In this case, it is necessary to repair the i-Option license management information.
4.4.12 Paper feed tray 1 paper FD sensor board (PSDB/1)

G-36
bizhub 423/363/283/223
G.4.2.21 Tray 1
G.4.2.22 Tray 2
[3]

7. Remove two screws [2], and remove the toner suction fan motor
assy [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
8. Remove the harness from six wire saddles [1].

9. Disconnect the connector (CN12) [2] on the MFP board.
[2]
[1]
10. Remove three screws [1], and remove the tray 1 sensor unit [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]

12. Unhook four tabs [2], and remove the paper feed tray 1 paper FD
sensor board assy [3].
13. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper feed tray 1 paper FD
sensor board [2].
NOTE
When removing the lever, be careful not to deform the
lever.
[2]
[1]
4.4.13 Paper feed tray 2 paper FD sensor board (PSDB/2)

G-37
bizhub 423/363/283/223

G.4.2.21 Tray 1
G.4.2.22 Tray 2
[3]
[2]
[2]

6. Remove two screws [2], and remove the toner suction fan motor
assy [3].
[1]
7. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1].

8. Disconnect the connector (CN11) [2] on the MFP board.
[2]
[1]
9. Remove three screws [1], and remove the tray 2 sensor unit [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]

11. Unhook four tabs [2], and remove the paper feed tray 2 paper FD
sensor board assy [3].
12. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper feed tray 2 paper FD
sensor board [2].
NOTE
When removing the lever, be careful not to deform the
lever.
[2]
[1]
G-38
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.4.14 Paper feed tray 1 LED board, Paper feed tray 2 LED board (LEDB1, LEDB2)
1. Slide out the tray 1 and tray 2.
[2]
2. Remove two screws [1] and place the lower front cover [2] with the
inside up.
[1]
3. Remove the screw [1] each, disconnect the connector [2] each, and
remove the paper feed tray 1 LED board [3] and the paper feed tray
2 LED board [4].
[3] [1] [2]
[4] [1] [2]

4.5 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Motors)

4.5.1 Scanner motor (M201)
2. Remove the upper right cover.
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the angle sensor assy [2].
[1]
[2]
5. Remove three screws [1], and remove the ADF base plate [2].
[2]
[1]
G-39
bizhub 423/363/283/223

6. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove three screws [2].
[2]
[1]
7. Remove the spring [1] and the belt [2], and remove the scanner
motor assy [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the scanner motor [2].
[1]
[2]

1. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with three screws
[2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
2. With the scanner drive gear set screw [1] located on the right-hand
side as shown on the left, slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the
left and check that it is returned to the original position by the
tension of the spring [3]. Perform this step three times.
3. Turn the pulley and make sure that the belt does not ride up on the
pulley teeth.
4. Tighten the three screws [4] to fix the scanner motor assy [2] into
position.
[4]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[2]
4.5.2 Duplex transport motor (M92)

G-40
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the duplex transport cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]

4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the duplex transport motor [3].
[2]
4.5.3 Transport motor (M1)

3. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the sheet metal cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]

5. Remove four screws [2], and remove transport motor [3].
[1]
4.5.4 PC motor (M2)

G-41
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
2. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the
connector [2].
3. Remove four screws [3], and remove the PC motor [4].
[3]
4.5.5 Toner bottle motor (M3)

G.4.2.3 Exit tray
[3]
[2]

3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the toner bottle motor [3].
[1]
4.5.6 Toner supply motor (M4)

1. Remove the hopper drive unit.
G.4.3.13 Hopper drive unit
[3]
[1]

3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the toner supply motor [3].
[2]
4.5.7 Switchback motor (M91)

2. Remove the switchback unit.
[1] [3]

4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the switchback motor [3].
[2]
G-42
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.5.8 Tray 1 lift-up motor (M11)

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the MFP board cooling fan
motor assy [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]

5. Remove three screws [2], and remove the tray 1 lift-up motor [3].
[1]
[2]
4.5.9 Tray 2 lift-up motor (M21)

[1]
[2]
[3]
4.5.10 Power supply cooling fan motor (FM1)

1. Remove the left cover.
G.4.2.2 Left cover
G.4.2.3 Exit tray
G-43
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove six screws [2], and remove the DC power supply protective
shield [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
5. Remove the harness from two wire saddle [1], and disconnect the
connector [2].
6. Remove two screws [3], and remove the power supply cooling fan
motor [4].
[4]
4.5.11 Cooling fan motor (FM2)

[1]
2. Widen two tabs [1] in the direction of the arrow to unlock them.
Then, raise the regist unit [2] as illustrated.
[1]
[2]
connector [2].
[1]
[2]
G-44
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the cooling fan motor [2].
[2]
[1]
4.5.12 Fusing unit cooling fan motor (FM3)

2. Remove the switchback unit.
[2]
[1]
[2]

4. Unlock two locks [2], and remove the switchback unit cover [3].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]

6. Remove the harness from four guides [2].
7. Remove two screws [3], and remove fusing unit cooling fan motor
[4].
[2]
4.5.13 Toner suction fan motor (FM4)

[3]
[2]
[2]

4. Remove two screws [2], and remove toner suction fan motor [3].
[1]
G-45
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[3]
[1]
5. Remove the harness from guide [1].

6. Unhook two tabs [2], and remove the toner suction fan motor [3].
[2]
4.5.14 MFP board cooling fan motor (FM5)

[1]
4. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the MFP board cooling
fan motor assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
5. Unhook two tabs [1], and remove the MFP board cooling fan motor
[2].
[2]
4.6 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Clutches)

4.6.1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL11)
G-46
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller unit
[2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove two screws [2] and two shoulder screws [3], and remove
the tray 1 paper feed roller cover [4].
[4]
[2][1]
[1] [2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [5]
[6]

7. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and the edge cover
[3].
8. Remove the C-ring [4], and remove the tray 1 paper feed clutch [5].
NOTE
When mounting the paper feed tray 1 paper feed clutch, set
the convex part of the stopper into the concave part [6] of
the paper feed tray 1 paper feed clutch [5].
[4]
4.6.2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL21)

G-47
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 separation roller unit
[2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove two screws [2] and two shoulder screws [3], and remove
the tray 2 paper feed roller cover [4].
[4]
[2][1]
[1] [2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [5]
[6]

7. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and the edge cover
[3].
8. Remove the C-ring [4], and remove the tray 2 paper feed clutch [5].
NOTE
When mounting the paper feed tray 2 paper feed clutch, set
the convex part of the stopper into the concave part [6] of
the paper feed tray 2 paper feed clutch [5].
[4]
4.6.3 Tray 2 vertical transport clutch (CL22)

1. Remove the conveyance unit.
G.4.3.12 Conveyance unit
G-48
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[4]
[3]
[1][2]
connector [2].
3. Remove the E-ring [3], and remove the tray 2 vertical transport
clutch [4].
NOTE
When mounting the tray 2 vertical transport clutch, set the
convex part of the stopper into the concave part [5] of the
tray 2 vertical transport clutch [4].
[5]
4.6.4 Manual paper feed clutch (CL81)

[2]
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the sensor assy [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
3. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the manual paper feed clutch
[2].
NOTE
When mounting the manual paper feed clutch, set the
convex part of the stopper into the concave part [3] of the
manual paper feed clutch [2].
[3]
4.6.5 Registration clutch (CL1)

2. Remove the regist unit.
G.4.3.9 Regist unit
[3]
[2]
[4]

4. Remove the E-ring [2], and remove the registration clutch [3].
NOTE
When mounting the registration clutch, set the convex part
of the stopper into the concave part [4] of the registration
clutch [3].
[1]
4.7 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (etc.)

4.7.1 Manual pick-up solenoid (SD81)
1. Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
G-49
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the manual pick-up solenoid
assy [2].
NOTE
Use care not to lose the actuator [3].
[2]
4. Remove the screws [1], and remove the manual pick-up solenoid
[2].
[2]
[1]
4.7.2 Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUM)

3. Unhook two tabs [2], and remove the temperature/humidity sensor
assy [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the temperature/humidity sensor

[2].
[1]
G-50
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.7.3 Scanner drive cable

1. Remove the scanner front cover.
2. Remove the exposure unit/LED exposure unit.
G.4.3.6 Exposure unit
G.4.3.7 LED exposure unit
3. Remove the scanner motor.
G.4.5.1 Scanner motor (M201)
4. Remove the hook side spring [1] of the scanner drive cables.
[1]
5. Remove the bead side [1] of the scanner drive cables from the
adjustment anchor.
[1]
[1]
6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the scanner drive gear [2].
7. Remove the bearing [3].
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
8. Remove the scanner drive cables [2] from each pulley [1].
9. Remove the screw [3] each, and remove two pulleys [1] from the
shaft.
[2]
G-51
bizhub 423/363/283/223

(a) Overall figure
(b) Winding of the scanner drive cables

Front side
1. Set the round bead [1] of the scanner drive cable (silver) into the
hole of the pulley [2] as shown in the illustration.
NOTE
Make sure that the bead securely rests in the hole of the
pulley.
[3]
[2]
2. Twist the scanner drive cable [3] (of which side has the bead at
the end) around the pulley 4 times as shown in the illustration.
3. Twist the hook side scanner drive cable [4] around the pulley 4
times as shown in the illustration.
NOTE
Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
[4]
[1]
Rear side
4. Set the round bead [1] of the scanner drive cable (black) into the
hole of the pulley [2] as shown in the illustration.
NOTE
Make sure that the bead securely rests in the hole of the
pulley.
[3]
[2]
5. Twist the scanner drive cable [3] (of which side has the bead at
the end) around the pulley 4 times as shown in the illustration.
6. Twist the hook side scanner drive cable [4] around the pulley 4
times as shown in the illustration.
NOTE
Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
[4]
[1]
Same for the front and the rear
7. Apply the tape to fix the scanner drive cable to the pulley [1].
[1]
G-52
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
8. Put the front/rear pulleys [1] into the shaft [2], and fix them with
one screw each [3].
NOTE
Set the pulley at the direction as shown in the
illustration.
Fix the pulley at the position as shown in the illustration.
Apply the screw lock on the screw.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]

[4]
[1]
[3]
9. Install the shaft [1] and the bearing [2].

10. Install the gear [4] with the screw [3].
NOTE
Apply the screw lock on the screw.
[2]
Front side
[2]
[1]
11. Run the bead side scanner drive cable [1] from the pulley B [2] to
the pulley C [3]. Attach the bead to the adjustment anchor [4].
NOTE
Make the cable run inside the rear groove of the pulley C.
[3]
[4]
Front side
12. Run the hook side scanner drive cable [1] around the pulley D [2]
and the pulley C [3] in this order.
NOTE
Make the cable run inside the front groove of the pulley D
[2].
[3]
[1]
[2]
G-53
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Front side
13. Run the scanner drive cable from the pulley C [1] to the hole [2]
on the scanner left frame, and pass the cable through the hole
[2].
[1]
[2]
Front side
[1]
14. Attach the spring [1] to the cable and attach the other end of the
spring to the hook [2] on the scanner left frame.
[2]
15. Install the scanner drive cable with the same procedure as the front one.
Rear side
16. Attach the spring [2] to the hooks [1] of the front and rear scanner
drive cables.
[2]
[1]
17. Remove the tape that fixes the front/rear pulleys.

18. Adjust the positioning of the exposure unit/LED exposure unit and mirrors unit.
I.15.1.2 Positioning of the exposure unit/LED exposure unit and mirrors unit
19. Perform the following setting.
[Service Mode] [Machine] [Scan Area] [Sub Scan Zoom Adj.]
I.11.3.5.(4) Sub Scan Zoom Adj.
[Service Mode] [ADF] [Read Pos Adj]
G-54
bizhub 423/363/283/223
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 5. Option
5. Option
5.1 Disassembly/reassembly parts list
5.1.1 DF-621
Section
Exterior parts
Units
Board and etc.
Others
Part name
Ref. page
Front cover
G.5.2.1 Front cover
Rear cover
G.5.2.2 Rear cover
Upper door cover
G.5.2.3 Upper door cover
Document feed tray rear cover
G.5.2.4 Document feed tray rear cover
G.5.2.5 Reverse automatic document feeder
Glass cleaning brush
G.5.2.6 Glass cleaning brush
DF control board (DFCB)
G.5.2.7 DF control board (DFCB)
Document CD size sensor (VR1)
G.5.2.8 Document CD size sensor (VR1)
Document reading motor (M1)
G.5.2.9 Document reading motor (M1)
Document feed motor (M2)
G.5.2.10 Document feed motor (M2)
Reading roller release motor (M3)
G.5.2.11 Reading roller release motor (M3)
Glass cleaning motor (M4)
G.5.2.12 Glass cleaning motor (M4)
DF cooling fan motor (FM1)
G.5.2.13 DF cooling fan motor (FM1)
Document feed clutch (CL1)
G.5.2.14 Document feed clutch (CL1)
Document registration clutch (CL2)
G.5.2.15 Document registration clutch (CL2)
Document exit roller release solenoid (SD1)
G.5.2.16 Document exit roller release solenoid (SD1)
Stamp unit
G.5.2.17 Stamp unit
5.1.2 PC-109/PC-208
Section
Exterior parts
Part name
Ref. page
Right door
G.5.3.1 Right door
Rear right cover
G.5.3.2 Rear right cover/Lower right cover/Front right

cover
Lower right cover

Front right cover
Rear cover
G.5.3.3 Rear cover/Left cover
Left cover
Unit
Paper feed cabinet
G.5.3.4 Paper feed cabinet
Boards
PC control board (PCCB31)
G.5.3.5 PC Control board (PCCB31)
Tray 3 LED board (LEDB31)
G.5.3.6 Tray 3 LED board (LEDB31)/Tray 4 LED board

(LEDB41)

Others
Tray 3 vertical transport motor (M32)
G.5.3.8 Tray 3 paper feed motor (M31) / Tray 3 vertical

transport motor (M32) / Tray 4 paper feed motor (M41) /
Tray 3 paper feed motor (M31)

G.5.3.7 Tray 3 lift-up motor (M33) / Tray 4 lift-up motor

(M43)
5.1.3 PC-409
Section
Exterior parts
Part name
Ref. page
Right door
G.5.4.1 Right door
Rear right cover
G.5.4.2 Rear right cover/Lower right cover/Front right

cover
Lower right cover

Front right cover
Rear cover
Left cover
Units
Boards
Motors
Solenoid
Paper feed cabinet
G.5.4.4 Paper feed cabinet
Drawer
G.5.4.11 Drawer
G.5.4.5 PC Control board (PCCB51)
G.5.4.6 Tray 3 LED board (LEDB51)
Paper feed motor (M51)

Vertical transport motor (M52)
G.5.4.7 Paper feed motor (M51) / Vertical transport

motor (M52)
Division board position motor (M53)
G.5.4.8 Division board position motor (M53)
Shift motor (M54)
G.5.4.9 Shift motor (M54)
Tray lock solenoid (SD51)
G.5.4.10 Tray lock solenoid (SD51)
G-55
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Section
Other

Part name
Ref. page
Wire
G.5.4.12 Wire
5.1.4 JS-505
Section
Part name
Ref. page
Unit
Separator
G.5.5.1 Separator
Exterior parts
Front cover
G.5.5.2 Front cover
Rear left cover
G.5.5.3 Rear left cover
Rear right cover
Upper tray
G.5.5.5 Upper tray
Paper guide plate
G.5.5.6 Paper guide plate
Board
JS control board (JSCB)
G.5.5.7 JS control board (JSCB)
Motors
Route change motor (M3)
G.5.5.9 Route change motor (M3)
Shift motor (M2)
G.5.5.10 Shift motor (M2)
Roller pressure/retraction clutch (CL1)
G.5.5.11 Roller pressure/retraction clutch (CL1)
Clutch
5.1.5 JS-603
Section
Part name
Ref. page
Unit
Separator
G.5.6.1 Separator
Other
Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)
G.5.6.2 Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)
5.1.6 FS-527
Section
Exterior parts
Units
Others
Part name
Ref. page
Upper cover
G.5.7.1 Upper cover
Rear cover
G.5.7.2 Rear cover
Front door
G.5.7.3 Front door
Front upper cover
G.5.7.4 Front upper cover
Front lower cover
G.5.7.5 Front lower cover
Finisher
G.5.7.6 Finisher
Horizontal transport unit
G.5.7.7 Horizontal transport unit
Stapler unit
G.5.7.8 Stapler unit
FS control board (FSCB)
G.5.7.9 FS control board (FSCB)
Paper passage motor/1 (M1)
G.5.7.10 Paper passage motor/1 (M1)
Duplex path switching motor (M2)
G.5.7.11 Duplex path switching motor (M2)
G.5.7.13 Paper passage motor/2 (M3)
Conveyance motor (M4)
G.5.7.14 Conveyance motor (M4)
Exit motor (M5)
G.5.7.12 Exit motor (M5)
Upper lower path switching motor (M6)
G.5.7.15 Upper lower path switching motor (M6)
Tray1 path switching motor (M8)
G.5.7.16 Tray1 path switching motor (M8)
Exit roller retraction motor (M9)
G.5.7.17 Exit roller retraction motor (M9)
Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10)
G.5.7.18 Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10)
Stapler movement motor (M11)
G.5.7.19 Stapler movement motor (M11)
Accommodation paddle motor (M12)
G.5.7.20 Accommodation paddle motor (M12)
Elevate motor (M15)
G.5.7.21 Elevate motor (M15)
Tray2 shift motor (M16)
G.5.7.22 Tray2 shift motor (M16)
Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1)
G.5.7.23 Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1)
5.1.7 FS-529
Section
Exterior parts
Units
Part name
Ref. page
Front left cover
G.5.8.1 Front left cover
Front right cover
G.5.8.2 Front right cover
Upper cover
G.5.8.3 Upper cover
Rear cover
G.5.8.4 Rear cover
Finisher
G.5.8.5 Finisher
Conveyance roller unit
G.5.8.6 Conveyance roller unit
Stapler unit
G.5.8.7 Stapler unit
Paper exit tray unit
G.5.8.8 Paper exit tray unit
G-56
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Section
Board and etc.
Other

Part name
Ref. page
Pick up roller position motor (M1)
G.5.8.10 Pick up roller position motor (M1)
Tray up/down motor (M2)
G.5.8.11 Tray up/down motor (M2)
Alignment motor/F (M3), Alignment motor/R (M4)
G.5.8.12 Alignment motor/F (M3), Alignment motor/R

(M4)
Conveyance motor/1 (M5)
G.5.8.13 Conveyance motor/1 (M5)
G.5.8.15 Stapler movement motor (M7)
Fan motor (FM1)
G.5.8.16 Fan motor (FM1)
Paddle solenoid (SD2)
G.5.8.17 Paddle solenoid (SD2)
Flapper solenoid (SD4)
G.5.8.18 Flapper solenoid (SD4)
Belt retract solenoid (SD5)
G.5.8.19 Belt retract solenoid (SD5)
Harness guide
G.5.8.20 Harness guide
5.1.8 PK-517
Section
Unit
Part name
Ref. page
Punch kit
G.5.9.1 Punch kit
5.1.9 SD-509
Section
Exterior parts
Units
Board and etc.
Part name
Ref. page
Front cover
Right cover
G.5.10.2 Right cover
Staple unit cover
G.5.10.3 Staple unit cover
Saddle unit
G.5.10.4 Saddle unit
Paper exit tray
G.5.10.5 Paper exit tray
Staple unit
G.5.10.6 Staple unit
SD drive board (SDDB)
G.5.10.7 SD drive board (SDDB)
Leading edge stopper motor (M20)
G.5.10.8 Leading edge stopper motor (M20)
Upper paddle motor (M21)
G.5.10.9 Upper paddle motor (M21)
Lower paddle motor (M22)
G.5.10.10 Lower paddle motor (M22)
Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)
G.5.10.11 Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)
Center staple alignment motor/F (M24)
G.5.10.12 Center staple alignment motor/F (M24)
Center fold roller motor (M25)
G.5.10.13 Center fold roller motor (M25)
Center fold plate motor (M26)
G.5.10.14 Center fold plate motor (M26)
Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)
G.5.10.15 Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)
5.1.10 FK-508
Section
Board and etc.
Part name
Ref. page
FAX board
G.5.11.1 FAX board
FAX board (Extension line)
G.5.11.2 FAX board (Extension line)
5.2 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (DF-621)

5.2.1 Front cover
G-57
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove two screws [1], remove the front cover [2].
[2]
[1]
5.2.2 Rear cover

[1]

4. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2].
[1]
[2]
5.2.3 Upper door cover

G.5.2.1 Front cover
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.5.2.2 Rear cover
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove two shafts [2].

4. Remove the upper door unit [3].
[1]
G-58
bizhub 423/363/283/223

5. Remove five screws [1], and remove the upper door cover [2].
[2]
[1]
5.2.4 Document feed tray rear cover

G.5.2.2 Rear cover
4. Remove five screws [1], and remove the document feed tray rear
cover [2].
[1]
[2]
5.2.5 Reverse automatic document feeder

[2]
[1]
2. Remove the cable tie [1].
[1]
G-59
bizhub 423/363/283/223

NOTE
When connecting the connectors [1], be careful about
routing of the harness.
[1]
[1]
OK
NG

NOTE
If the reverse automatic document feeder is set to be lifted
up at angles up to 60 degrees due to the set position of the
stopper for the hinge, change the set position to the lower
side so that the reverse automatic document feeder can be
opened completely.
[1]
[1]
6. Remove the reverse automatic document feeder [1].
NOTE
When carrying the reverse automatic document feeder, be
sure to hold onto the specified positions. The feeder main
body can be distorted if held at inappropriate positions.
OK
NG
5.2.6 Glass cleaning brush

G-60
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the glass cleaning brush [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
5.2.7 DF control board (DFCB)

G.5.2.2 Rear cover
2. Disconnect all the connectors from the DF control board.
3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the DF control board [2].
[1]
[2]

NOTE
Be sure to perform the following steps after the DF control board has been replaced with a new one.
5. Execute [Service Mode] - [ADF] - [Original Tray Width].
I.11.16.6 Original Tray Width
6. Execute [Service Mode] - [ADF] - [Mixed Original Size Adjustment].
I.11.16.10 Mixed original Size adjustment
5.2.8 Document CD size sensor (VR1)

1. Remove the document feed tray rear cover.
G.5.2.4 Document feed tray rear cover
[1]
[3]

3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the document CD size sensor
[3].
NOTE
Be sure to perform the following operation when the
document CD size sensor is replaced.
4. Execute [Service Mode] - [ADF] - [Original Tray Width].
I.11.16.6 Original Tray Width
5. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again and check
whether size detection operates normally.
[2]
5.2.9 Document reading motor (M1)

G.5.2.2 Rear cover
[2]
[3]
2. Remove the spring [1].

4. Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the document reading
motor [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
G-61
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.2.10 Document feed motor (M2)

G.5.2.2 Rear cover
[3]
[1]

3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the document feed motor [3].
[2]
5.2.11 Reading roller release motor (M3)

G.5.2.2 Rear cover
2. Disconnect the connector (J15) [1] on the DF control board.
[1]
3. Remove the harness form five wire saddles [1].

[1]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the reading roller release
motor [2].
[2]
[1]
5.2.12 Glass cleaning motor (M4)

G.5.2.1 Front cover
G-62
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
[2]

3. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the glass cleaning motor
[3].
[1]
5.2.13 DF cooling fan motor (FM1)

G.5.2.2 Rear cover
[3]
[1]
2. Disconnect the connector (J13) [1] on the DF control board.

3. While unlocking two tabs [2], remove the DF cooling fan motor [3].
[2]
NOTE
When reinstalling the DF cooling fan motor, make sure of
its correct mounting direction.
5.2.14 Document feed clutch (CL1)

G.5.2.2 Rear cover
[2]
[3]
2. Remove the E-ring [1].

3. Remove the screw [2], and remove the metal plate [3].
[1]
G-63
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove the harness form the wire saddle [1].
5. Disconnect the relay connector [2], and remove the document feed
clutch [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
5.2.15 Document registration clutch (CL2)

G.5.2.2 Rear cover
2. Remove the reading roller release motor assy.
G.5.2.11 Reading roller release motor (M3)
[2]
3. Remove the E-ring [1].

4. Remove the screw [2], and remove the metal plate [3].
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
5. Disconnect the relay connector [1], and remove the document

registration clutch [2].
5.2.16 Document exit roller release solenoid (SD1)

G.5.2.2 Rear cover
2. Disconnect the relay connector [1].
[1]
G-64
bizhub 423/363/283/223

3. Mark the positions of two screws [1] with a pen.
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the document exit roller
release solenoid [2].
NOTE
When reinstalling the solenoid, tighten the screws at the
correct positions marked before they have been removed.
[2]
[1]
5.2.17 Stamp unit

[1]
1. Open the upper door [1].

2. Open the processing guide [2].
[2]
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the guide plate [2].
[2]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].
5. Disconnect the connector [3], remove the stamp unit [4].
NOTE
Place the harness as illustrated at reinstallation.
[3]
G-65
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PC-109/PC-208)

5.3.1 Right door
3. Remove the right door [2].
[1]
[2]
5.3.2 Rear right cover/Lower right cover/Front right cover
[6]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[3]
1. Remove two screws [1] and remove the rear right cover [2].
2. Remove four screws [3] and remove the lower right cover [4].
3. Remove two screws [5] and remove the front right cover [6].
5.3.3 Rear cover/Left cover

[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
1. Remove five screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2].
2. Remove five screws [3] and remove the left cover [4].
5.3.4 Paper feed cabinet

G-66
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the fixing bracket [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the fixing bracket [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove two fixing brackets [2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]

[1]
[1]
G-67
bizhub 423/363/283/223

7. Lift the main body [1] and then remove the paper feed cabinet [2].
[1]
[2]
5.3.5 PC Control board (PCCB31)
[2]
2. Disconnect all connectors of the PC control board.

3. Remove six screws [1], and remove the PC control board [2].
[1]
[1]
5.3.6 Tray 3 LED board (LEDB31)/Tray 4 LED board (LEDB41)

[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
4. Remove the screw [1] each, disconnect the connector [2] each, and
remove the tray 3 LED board [3] and the tray 4 LED board [4].
[3] [2]
[1]
5.3.7 Tray 3 lift-up motor (M33) / Tray 4 lift-up motor (M43)

G-68
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]

[1]
[2]
4. Follow the same procedure as the above to remove the tray 4 lift-up motor.
5.3.8 Tray 3 paper feed motor (M31) / Tray 3 vertical transport motor (M32) / Tray 4 paper feed motor (M41) / Tray 4
vertical transport motor (M42)
3. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the motor assy [2].
[2]
[1]
5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 3 paper feed motor
[2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
6. Remove the C-ring [1] and the gear [2].

7. Remove two screws [3], and remove the tray 3 vertical transport
motor [4].
[1]
8. Follow the same procedure as the above to remove the tray 4 paper feed motor/tray 4 vertical transport motor.
G-69
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.4 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PC-409)

5.4.1 Right door
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the right door [2].
[1]
[2]
5.4.2 Rear right cover/Lower right cover/Front right cover

[6]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[3]
1. Remove two screws [1] and remove the rear right cover [2].
2. Remove four screws [3] and remove the lower right cover [4].
3. Remove two screws [5] and remove the front right cover [6].
5.4.3 Rear cover/Left cover

[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
1. Remove five screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2].
2. Remove five screws [3] and remove the left cover [4].
5.4.4 Paper feed cabinet

G-70
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the fixing bracket [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the fixing bracket [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove two fixing brackets [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
G-71
bizhub 423/363/283/223

7. Lift the main body [1] and then remove the paper feed cabinet [2].
[1]
[2]
5.4.5 PC Control board (PCCB51)

[2]
2. Disconnect all connectors of the PC control board.

3. Remove six screws [1], and remove the PC control board [2].
[1]
[1]
5.4.6 Tray 3 LED board (LEDB51)

[1]
[3]

[2]
[1]
G-72
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]

5. Remove the screw [2], and remove the tray 3 LED board [3].
[3]
[1]
5.4.7 Paper feed motor (M51) / Vertical transport motor (M52)

[1]
[2]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the motor assy [2].
[1]
[2]
5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the paper feed motor [2].
[2]
[1]
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the vertical transport motor [2].
[2]
[1]
G-73
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.4.8 Division board position motor (M53)

[1]
[3]

3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the division board position
motor assy [3].
[1]
[2]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the division board position
motor [2].
[2]
[1]
5.4.9 Shift motor (M54)

1. Remove six screws [1].
2. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the front cover assy [3].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]

4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the shift motor assy [3].
[1]
G-74
bizhub 423/363/283/223

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the shift motor [2].
[2]
[1]
5.4.10 Tray lock solenoid (SD51)

[1]
[2]
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

4. Remove two screws [4], and remove the tray lock solenoid assy [5].
[3]
[5]
[4]
5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray lock solenoid [2].
[1]
[2]
5.4.11 Drawer
2. Remove the paper.
[1]
[1]
[3]

4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the connector board [3].
[2]
G-75
bizhub 423/363/283/223

5. Remove four screws [1] and remove the drawer [2].
NOTE
When removing the drawer, be careful not to drop the
drawer from the guide rails.
[1]
CAUTION
[2]
To prevent injuries, slide the

guide rail [1] into the machine.
[1]
[1]
[1]
5.4.12 Wire
1. Remove six screws [1].
2. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the front cover assy [3].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
3. Remove two screws [1] and the inner cover assy [2].
NOTE
Do not peel off pulley protective mylar sheet.
[2]
[1]
[1]
G-76
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove four screws [1] and remove the driver cover [2].
[2]
[1]
5. Remove three screws [1] and remove the driver mounting plate
assy [2].
[2]
[1]
NOTE
When assembling, be sure to engage rib of gear 1 [1] with
convex section of gear 2 [2].
[1]
[2]
6. Remove three screws [1] and remove the reinforcement bracket

assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
7. Remove two C-clips [1].

8. Remove four pulley covers [2].
9. Unhook four pulleys [3].
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
G-77
bizhub 423/363/283/223

10. Remove the ground plate [1].
11. Remove four cable holding jigs [2] and remove the main drawer [3].
NOTE
Use care not to bend the wires.
[2]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
12. Remove four screws [1] and remove the rear trailing edge assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
13. Remove four screws [1] and remove the front trailing edge assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
14. Remove three C-rings [1], the bushing [2], and two gears [3].
15. Remove the feed drum assy [4].
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
16. Remove two C-rings [1] and the feed drum [2].
NOTE
Take care not to lose fixing pins.
When reinstalling the feed drum, check that the direction of
the wire coming from both feed drums are the same.
Install so that cut parts [3] at both ends of shaft face up.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
G-78
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.5 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-505)

5.5.1 Separator
1. Disconnect the relay connector [1].
[1]
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the separator [1].

NOTE
When installing the job separator, align the U-groove on
the job separator with the shoulder screw [2].
[1]
5.5.2 Front cover

G.5.5.1 Separator
2. Open the misfeed clearing cover [1].
[1]
[1]
3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the front cover [2].
[2]
G-79
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.5.3 Rear left cover

G.5.5.1 Separator
2. Remove three screws [1] and remove the rear left cover [2].
[2]
[1]
5.5.4 Rear right cover

G.5.5.1 Separator
2. Remove the rear left cover.
3. Remove three screws [1] and remove the rear right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
5.5.5 Upper tray

G.5.5.1 Separator
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the screw [1]. Push two protrusions [2] in the directions of
the arrows and remove the upper tray [3].
[3]
5.5.6 Paper guide plate

G.5.5.1 Separator
2. Remove the upper tray.
G.5.5.5 Upper tray
G-80
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the paper guide plate cover [2].
[2]
4. Remove eight paper guide plates [1].

NOTE
When reinstalling the paper guide plates [1], make sure that
the film side must face the roller.
[1]
[1]
5.5.7 JS control board (JSCB)

G.5.5.1 Separator
3. Disconnect all seven connectors [1] from the JS control board.
[1]
[1]
4. Remove four screws [1] and remove the JS control board [2].
[2]
[1]
5.5.8 Transport motor (M1)

G.5.5.1 Separator
G-81
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[4]

3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the wire saddle [2].
4. Remove two screws [3] and remove the transport motor assy [4].
[3]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove two screws [1] and remove the transport motor [2].
[2]
[1]
5.5.9 Route change motor (M3)

G.5.5.1 Separator
[1]
4. Remove the screw [1] and disconnect two connectors [2], and
remove the route change motor assy [3].
[2]
[3]
5. Remove two screws [1] and remove the route change motor [2].
[2]
[1]
5.5.10 Shift motor (M2)

G.5.5.1 Separator
G.5.5.2 Front cover
3. Remove the route change motor.
G-82
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
[1]
4. Remove the C-clip [1] and the lever [2], and remove the route
change guide [3].
[2]
[2]
5. Remove two wire saddles [1], disconnect two connectors [2], and
remove two screws [3]. Pull out the sensor assy [4] in the direction
of the arrow.
[3]
[1]
[1]
[4]
6. Remove six screws [1] and remove the transport guide/lower [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[3]
7. Disconnect the connector [1], remove two screws [2], and remove
the harness from four wire saddles [3]. Remove the sensor
mounting plate assy [4].
[2]
8. Remove three screws [1] and two shoulder screws [2].

[2]
[1]
G-83
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
10. Remove the screw [1] and remove the belt fixed plate [2].
[2]
[1]
11. Remove five wire saddles [1] and pull out the shift drive section
assy [2] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
[2]
12. Remove two screws [1] and remove the shift motor assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
13. Disconnect the connector [1], remove wire saddle [2] and two
screws [3], and remove the shift motor [4].
[2]
[1]
5.5.11 Roller pressure/retraction clutch (CL1)

1. Remove the route change motor.
G-84
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove the E-ring [1] and disconnect the connector [2], and
remove the roller pressure/retraction clutch [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
5.6 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-603)

5.6.1 Separator
1. Remove the horizontal transport unit.
[2]
[1]

[1]
4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the separator [2].

[1]
[2]
[1]
5.6.2 Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)

G.5.6.1 Separator
G-85
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the exit roller assy [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]

[2]
[1]
4. Remove two E-rings [1] and two bushings [2].

5. Remove two screws [3], and remove the exit rolls assy [4].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]

8. Remove two screws [3], and remove the tray3 exit roller retraction
motor [4].
[1]
[3]
[4]
5.7 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FS-527)

5.7.1 Upper cover
G-86
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
5.7.2 Rear cover

1. Remove ten screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
5.7.3 Front door

1. Remove the screw [1] and the plate [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the front door [2].
[1]
5.7.4 Front upper cover

1. Remove the front door.
G.5.7.3 Front door
G-87
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Loosen the screw [1], and remove the dial (F2) [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the front upper cover [2].
[1]
[2]
5.7.5 Front lower cover

1. Remove the front door.
G.5.7.3 Front door
2. Remove the front upper cover.
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the front lower cover [2].
[2]
[1]
5.7.6 Finisher
2. Remove the screw [1], and pull out the lever [2].
NOTE
At the time of the finisher installation, make sure that the
screw hole [3] locates within the scope of the mounting
hole of the lever [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
G-88
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove the cord clamp [2].
5. Remove the finisher [3] from the main body.
[2]
CAUTION
When transporting the finisher,
make sure to push it to the
direction as shown in the
illustration. (to prevent
turnover during
transportation).
[1]
[3]
5.7.7 Horizontal transport unit

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.5.7.6 Finisher
2. Remove the relay connector [1].
[1]
[2]
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the horizontal transport unit
[2].
[1]
5.7.8 Stapler unit

G-89
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stapler unit cover [2].
[1]
[2]

[1]
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stapler unit [2].
[2]
[1]
NOTE
When installing the staple unit, make sure to adjust the
mark-off line [1] with the notch [2].
[1]
[2]
5.7.9 FS control board (FSCB)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
G.5.7.2 Rear cover
[1]
[2]
3. Remove all connectors from the FS control board.

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the FS control board [2].
[1]
G-90
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.7.10 Paper passage motor/1 (M1)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
2. Remove the horizontal transport unit.
3. Remove five screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2] of the
horizontal transport unit.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]

5. Remove four screws [2], and remove the paper passage motor assy
[3].
[2]
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the paper passage motor/1 [2].
[2]
[1]
5.7.11 Duplex path switching motor (M2)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
[1]
2. Remove five screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2] of the
horizontal transport unit.
[2]
G-91
bizhub 423/363/283/223

3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the plate [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]

5. Remove the harness from the edge cover [2].
6. Remove two screws [3], and remove the duplex path switching
motor assy [4].
[1]
[2]
7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the duplex path switching
motor [2].
[1]
5.7.12 Exit motor (M5)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.5.7.1 Upper cover
G.5.7.2 Rear cover
4. Remove the accommodation paddle motor.
[1]
[2]
G-92
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]

[1]
[2]

[2]
[1]
9. Remove three screws [1], and remove the exit motor assy [2].
[2]
[1]
10. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit motor [2].
[1]
[2]
5.7.13 Paper passage motor/2 (M3)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
G.5.7.1 Upper cover
G.5.7.2 Rear cover
G-93
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]

5. Remove three screws [2], and remove the paper passage motor/2
assy [3].
[3]
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the paper passage motor/2 [2].
[2]
[1]
5.7.14 Conveyance motor (M4)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
G.5.7.1 Upper cover
G.5.7.2 Rear cover
4. Remove the accommodation paddle motor.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]

[2]
G-94
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[2]
[1]
9. Remove the harness from the wire saddles [1].

[1]
[2]
11. Remove two screws [1], and remove the conveyance motor assy
[2].
[1]
[2]
12. Remove two screws [1], and remove the conveyance motor [2].
[1]
[2]
5.7.15 Upper lower path switching motor (M6)

G.5.7.1 Upper cover
[2]
[3]

4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the upper lower path switching
motor [3].
[1]
G-95
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.7.16 Tray1 path switching motor (M8)

G.5.7.1 Upper cover
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the tray1 path switching motor
assy [2].
[2]
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray1 path switching motor
[2].
[1]
[2]
5.7.17 Exit roller retraction motor (M9)

G.5.7.1 Upper cover
[3]
[1]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit roller retraction motor
[2].
[2]
5.7.18 Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10)

G.5.7.1 Upper cover
G-96
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the accommodation roller
retraction motor [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
5.7.19 Stapler movement motor (M11)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
G.5.7.1 Upper cover
G.5.7.2 Rear cover
[2]
[1]

7. Remove two screws [2], and remove the stapler movement motor
[3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
5.7.20 Accommodation paddle motor (M12)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
G.5.7.1 Upper cover
G.5.7.2 Rear cover
G-97
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
[2]
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the accommodation paddle

motor [2].
[1]
[2]
5.7.21 Elevate motor (M15)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
G.5.7.1 Upper cover
G.5.7.2 Rear cover
[1]
[2]

5. Remove three screws [2], and remove the elevate motor assy [3].
[3]

7. Remove four screws [2], and remove the elevate motor [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
5.7.22 Tray2 shift motor (M16)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
G-98
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
[1]

3. Remove three screws [2], and remove the tray2 shift motor assy [3].
[1]
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the gear assy [2].
[2]
[2]
5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray2 shift motor [2].
[1]
[2]
5.7.23 Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1)

G.5.7.6 Finisher
G.5.7.1 Upper cover
G.5.7.2 Rear cover
[2]
[4]
[3]

6. Remove the screw [3], and remove the plate [4].
[1]
G-99
bizhub 423/363/283/223

7. Remove the screw [1], and remove the accommodation paddle
solenoid [2].
[1]
[2]
5.8 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FS-529)

5.8.1 Front left cover
1. Remove the screw [1] and two tabs [2], and remove the front left
cover [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
5.8.2 Front right cover
[2]
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the front right cover [2].
[1]
5.8.3 Upper cover

1. Remove the front left cover.
G.5.8.4 Rear cover
[2]
[1]
G-100
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Remove six screws [1], and remove the upper cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
5.8.4 Rear cover

1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2].
[1]
[2]
5.8.5 Finisher
[1]
[1]
1. Remove the relay cord [1].
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the rear left cover [2] of the
main body.
[2]
G-101
bizhub 423/363/283/223

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the finisher [2].
[2]
[1]
NOTE
When carrying the finisher, be sure to hold onto the
specified positions as shown in the illustlation.
5.8.6 Conveyance roller unit

1. Remove the front right cover.
2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the conveyance roller unit
[2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
5.8.7 Stapler unit

1. Remove the front right cover.
2. Remove the conveyance roller unit.
3. Move the stapler unit [1] to the marked position [2].
[1]
[2]
G-102
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
4. Put the finisher as shown in the illustration and remove two screws
[2] from the screw access holes [1] on the bottom plate.
[2]
[2]
[1]
[4]
6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stapler cover plate [2].
8. Remove the stapler unit [4].
[2] [1] [3]

5.8.8 Paper exit tray unit

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
3. Remove the support tray [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
G-103
bizhub 423/363/283/223

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit roller cover [2].
[2]
[1]
6. Remove four screws [1], and remove the plate [2].
[2]
[1]
7. Remove the screw [1], and remove the rear sub cover [2].
[2]
[1]
8. Press the dowel [1] and remove the cover rail [2].
[1]
[2]
G-104
bizhub 423/363/283/223

9. Turn the motor [1] in the direction shown by the arrow and raise the
exit tray [2].
10. Unhook two shutter tabs [3].
11. Turn the motor [1] further and raise the exit tray [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
12. Raise the exit tray [1] until the spring tension becomes weak as
shown in the illustration.
13. Remove the clip [2] and bushing [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
14. Remove the front shaft and remove the exit tray unit [1].

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
2. Remove all connectors from the FS control board.
3. Remove the screw [1] and two board supports [2], and remove the FS control board [3].
G-105
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
5.8.10 Pick up roller position motor (M1)

[2]

3. Remove three screws [2], and remove the pick up roller position
motor assy [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
[2]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the pick up roller position
motor [2].
[1]
5.8.11 Tray up/down motor (M2)

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
G.5.8.3 Upper cover
3. Remove the FS control board.
5. Remove the harness guide.
G-106
bizhub 423/363/283/223

6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear rail [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
7. Remove the screw [1], and remove the rear sub cover [2].
[1]
8. Remove four screws [1], and remove the tray up/down motor assy
[2].
NOTE
When removing the tray up/down motor assy [2], the exit
tray [3] bounces. Be sure to press the exit tray [3] down
when removing the tray up/down motor assy [2].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray up/down motor [2].
[1]
5.8.12 Alignment motor/F (M3), Alignment motor/R (M4)

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
G.5.8.3 Upper cover
4. Remove the paper exit tray unit.
G.5.8.8 Paper exit tray unit
G-107
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]

7. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the flange [2].
8. Remove the belt [3] from the gear.
[1]
[2]
9. Unlock the tab [1], and remove the actuator [2].
[1]
[2]
1-
[2]
NOTE
When reinstalling the actuator, make sure that two tabs [1]
are fitted into the holes [2].
0)
[1]
[1]
[2]
10. Remove four screws [1], and remove the exit roller unit [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
G-108
bizhub 423/363/283/223

12. Disconnect three connectors [1], and remove the harness from the
harness guide [2].
[1]
[2]
13. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
17. Unlock the tab [2], and remove the gear [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3] [2]
[2] [3]

19. Remove two C-rings [2], and remove two bushings [3] from the
plates.
20. Lift up the alignment unit [4], and remove the paddle assy [5].
[4]
[1]
[5] [1]
G-109
bizhub 423/363/283/223

21. Remove the alignment unit [1].
NOTE
When removing the alignment unit, make sure that the
paper holder [2] do not get stuck with the paper guide [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
22. Remove two screws [1], and remove the harness from harness
guide [3].
23. Remove the alignment motor/F [2].
24. Remove two screws [4], and remove the harness from harness
guide [3].
25. Remove the alignment motor/R [5].
[4]
[2]
[5]
5.8.13 Conveyance motor/1 (M5)

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
[2]
[1]
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the sensor assy [2].
[2]
[1]
G-110
bizhub 423/363/283/223

8. Remove three screws [2], and remove the conveyance motor/1 [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
5.8.14 Conveyance motor/2 (M6)

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
3. Remove the flapper solenoid.
G.5.8.18 Flapper solenoid (SD4)
4. Remove the conveyance motor/1.
5. Remove two screws [1] and the solenoid mounting plate [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]

7. Remove three screws [2], and remove the conveyance motor/2 [3].
[3]
5.8.15 Stapler movement motor (M7)

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
G.5.8.3 Upper cover
4. Remove the pick up roller position motor.
G.5.8.10 Pick up roller position motor (M1)
5. Disconnect the connector (CN18) [1] of the FS control board.
[1]
G-111
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]

[2]
[2]
8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the stapler movement motor
[2].
[1]
[1]
9. Remove the harness from the harness guide [1].
5.8.16 Fan motor (FM1)

3. Remove the belt retract solenoid.
G.5.8.19 Belt retract solenoid (SD5)
[2]
4. Remove the spring [1], and remove the lever [2].
[1]
G-112
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[2]
[1]
[1]
6. Remove the JAM processing dial [1].
[1] [3]
[2]
[3]
[4]
9. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove two gears [2].
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the pin.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
10. Remove the bushing [1].

11. Remove two screws [2], and remove the gear assy [3].
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]

14. Remove two screws [3], and remove the fan motor [4].
[3]
5.8.17 Paddle solenoid (SD2)

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
G.5.8.3 Upper cover
G-113
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[2]
[1]
8. Remove the spring [2] and the screw [3], and remove the paddle
solenoid [4].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
5.8.18 Flapper solenoid (SD4)

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
[2]
[1]
[2]
[5] [4]
[4]
[3]
4.
5.
6.
7.
[1]
G-114
Remove the harness from four wire saddles [1].

Disconnect the connector [2].
Disconnect the connector (CN16) [3] of the FS control board.
Remove two screws [4], and remove the sensor assy [5].
bizhub 423/363/283/223

8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the flapper solenoid [2].
[2]
[1]
(1) Adjustment after installation

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
[1]
[2]
3. Illuminate the inside from the opening [1] shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the flapper solenoid [2].
[1]
[2]
5. Make sure that the flapper [1] and the damper [2] are in contact
with each other and then tighten two screws [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
5.8.19 Belt retract solenoid (SD5)
G-115
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove the spring [1], and remove the lever [2].
[2]
[1]
5. Remove the screw [3], and remove the belt retract solenoid [4].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
5.8.20 Harness guide

G.5.8.4 Rear cover
5. Remove the screw [3], and remove the ground terminal [4].
6. Remove all harness from the harness guide [5].
7. Remove the screw [6], and remove the harness guide [5].
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
5.9 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PK-517)

5.9.1 Punch kit
G-116
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the finisher upper cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
4. Remove three screws [1].
[1]
[1]

NOTE
At the time of installation, secure it by adjusting the plate
dowel [2] to the center of the stamp mark.
[2]
G-117
bizhub 423/363/283/223

6. Remove the plate [1], and remove the punch kit [2].
NOTE
At the time of installation, align the position of the three
dowel holes of the plate [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
5.10 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (SD-509)

5.10.1 Front cover
1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the jam clearing dial [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the front cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
5.10.2 Right cover

1. Remove the saddle unit.
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
G-118
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.10.3 Staple unit cover

3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the staple unit cover [2].
[1]
[2]
5.10.4 Saddle unit
CAUTION
Be careful not to catch your finger in the edge of the
rail when mounting the saddle unit on the right rail for
the saddle unit installation.
Be careful not to jam your finger in the connecting
section of the pantograph.
1. Remove the finisher.
G.5.7.6 Finisher
[1]

3. Pull out the saddle unit.
NOTE
For installation of the saddle unit, install the screw after
confirming that the protruding portion of the rail [2] locates
behind the screw hole.
OK
[2]
NG
[2]

[1]
G-119
bizhub 423/363/283/223

7. Remove the screw [1], and remove the pantograph [2].
[2]
[1]
NOTE
For installation of the pantograph, insert two hooks on the
pantograph of the saddle unit into the back holes inside the
finisher referring the punch mark [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
9. Grip the portion as shown in the illustration [1] to raise the saddle
unit and take it out.
NOTE
For installation of the saddle unit, insert two hooks on the
left rail [3] into the two holes of the saddle unit [2].
[1]
[3]
CAUTION
Be careful not to catch your finger in the edge of the rail [1] when
mounting the saddle unit on the right rail for the saddle unit
installation.
G-120
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CAUTION
[1]
Be careful not to jam your finger in the connecting section of the

pantograph [1]
[1]
5.10.5 Paper exit tray

1. Remove the screw [1], and unlock the stopper [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the paper exit tray [2].
[1]
[2]
5.10.6 Staple unit

2. Remove the staple unit cover.
G-121
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
[2]
[1]
4. Remove six screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]

6. Remove two screws [2], and remove the staple unit [3].
[3]
[2]
5.10.7 SD drive board (SDDB)

3. Remove the staple unit cover.
5. Remove the board support film [3] from two spacer [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
G-122
bizhub 423/363/283/223

6. Disconnect all the twelve connectors from the SD drive board.
7. Remove four screws [1], and remove the SD drive board [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
5.10.8 Leading edge stopper motor (M20)

[1]
[2]

3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the leading edge stopper
motor assy [3].
[3]
[2]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the leading edge stopper
motor [2].
[1]
5.10.9 Upper paddle motor (M21)

G-123
bizhub 423/363/283/223

3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the upper paddle motor assy
[3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the upper paddle motor [2].
[1]
[2]
5.10.10 Lower paddle motor (M22)

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the paper exit tray guide [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]

4. Remove three screws [2], and remove the lower paddle motor assy
[3].
[3]
[1]
5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the lower paddle motor [2].
[2]
[1]
G-124
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.10.11 Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)

2. Remove the right cover.
[1]
[2]
[1]

5. Remove two screws [2], and remove the center staple alignment
motor/R [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
5.10.12 Center staple alignment motor/F (M24)

2. Remove the right cover.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]

5. Remove two screws [2], and remove the center staple alignment
motor/F [3].
[2]
G-125
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.10.13 Center fold roller motor (M25)

[1]

3. Remove four screws [2] and two card spacers [3], and remove the
center fold roller motor [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
5.10.14 Center fold plate motor (M26)

2. Remove the leading edge stopper motor.
G.5.10.8 Leading edge stopper motor (M20)
3. Lay down the saddle unit as shown in the illustration.
[1]
5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the center fold plate motor [2].
[1]
[2]
5.10.15 Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)

G-126
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Lay down the saddle unit as shown in the illustration.
3. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the drive lever [2].
[1]
[2]
[5]
4. Remove the harness from the cord clamp [1].

5. Remove the C-clip [2], and remove the drive lever [3].
6. Remove the tape [4], and disconnect the connector [5].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the leading edge grip solenoid
[2].
[1]
[2]

NOTE
Secure the plate edge section of the leading edge grip
solenoid by fitting the mark-off line [1].
[1]
G-127
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.11 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FK-508)

5.11.1 FAX board
[1]
1. Open the door located on the right side of the main body.
2. Disconnect the modular cable [1].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4. Disconnect two cables [1].
[1]
5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the FAX board [2].
NOTE
For installation of the FAX board, push the fax board
against the main body to remove clearance between the
main body plate and the fax board.
[1]
[1]
[2]
5.11.2 FAX board (Extension line)

1. Open the door located on the right side of the main body.
2. Disconnect the modular cable [1].
[1]
G-128
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
[2]
[1]
4. Disconnect two cables [1].

[1]
5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the FAX board [2].
NOTE
For installation of the FAX board, push the fax board
against the main body to remove clearance between the
main body plate and the fax board.
[2]
[1]

NOTE
When installing the cable [1], retract it to the back side of the cable clamp [2] so that the cable [1] does not run behind the
screw hole.
[2]
[1]
5.11.3 Configuration of the FK-508 board

The following shows the configuration of the FK-508.
NOTE
When using it as a main line, set SW2 to [LINE-1].
When using it as a sub line, set SW2 to [LINE-2].
G-129
bizhub 423/363/283/223
G-130
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 6. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE

PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS

6.1 Installing the key counter
6.1.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[1]
Key counter socket
[2]
Key counter
6.1.2 Procedure
NOTE
When mounting the key counter, the optional key counter kit KIT-1 (4623-472) is necessary.
Procedure for directly mounting the key counter to the main unit is described below.
For mounting the key counter to the optional working table WT-506, refer to WT-506 installation manual.
1. Remove the scanner right cover [1].
[3]
[2]
2. Cut out the knockouts [2] of the scanner right cover.
3. Remove two caps [3].
[1]
4. Remove the harness for the key counter from three wire saddles [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
5. Mount the scanner right cover [1], and insert the harness for the key
counter through the hole [2] knockouts were removed from.
G-131

PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. Using two screws [2], secure the counter mounting bracket [1].
NOTE
Secure the counter mounting bracket passing the
connector into the bracket.
Use the two long screws (V116 0418 14: M4 x 18) in the key
counter kit to secure the counter mounting bracket.
[2]
[1]
[2]
7. Mount the edge cover [1] to the counter mounting bracket and set
the harness to the edge cover.
8. Connect the key counter socket connector [2].
9. Using two screws [4], secure the counter socket [3].
[1]
[3]
[4]
10. Using two screws [2], secure the key counter cover [1].
[1]
[2]
11. Select [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] [Key Counter Only], [Vendor 1 + Key Counter] or [Vendor 2 +
Key Counter].
Set message.
For details on setting, see ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.
6.2 Installing the original size detection sensor/2 (PS205)

6.2.1 Procedure
[2]
2. Using the screw [1], mount the original size detection sensor/2
(PS205) [2] and fix it.
[1]
G-132
bizhub 423/363/283/223

PARTS
3. Select [Service Mode] [System 1] [Original Size Detection],
and set the original glass to [Table2].
4. Select [Service Mode] [Machine] [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj].
5. Check to make sure that the [Org. Size Detecting Sensor (Option): Set] is displayed on the original size detection sensor adjustment screen.
G-133
bizhub 423/363/283/223
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION
1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
1.1 Cleaning parts list
No.
1
Section
Tray 1

Tray 2
Tray 2 feed roller
7
8
Manual bypass tray
9
10
Ref. page
H.1.3.1 Tray 1 feed roller, tray 1 pick-up roller, tray 1
separation roller
3
4
Part name
Tray 1 feed roller
Scanner section
H.1.3.2 Tray 2 feed roller, tray 2 pick-up roller, tray 2

separation roller
Tray 2 transport roller
H.1.3.3 Tray 2 transport roller
H.1.3.4 Manual bypass tray feed roller
Manual bypass tray separation roller
H.1.3.5 Manual bypass tray separation roller
Original glass
H.1.3.6 Original glass
11
Scanner rails
H.1.3.7 Scanner rails
12
Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd)
H.1.3.8 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd)
13
Lens
H.1.3.9 Lens
14
CCD sensor
H.1.3.10 CCD sensor
1.2 Lubrication parts list

NOTE
With this machine, the lubrication is not necessary.
1.3 Cleaning procedure

NOTE
The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the ethanol isopropyl alcohol.
1.3.1 Tray 1 feed roller, tray 1 pick-up roller, tray 1 separation roller
[1]
[1]
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 feed
roller [1] clean of dirt.
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 pickup roller [1] clean of dirt.
H-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]

4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1
separation roller [1] clean of dirt.
1.3.2 Tray 2 feed roller, tray 2 pick-up roller, tray 2 separation roller
[1]
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 feed
[1]
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 pickup roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]

separation roller [1] clean of dirt.
1.3.3 Tray 2 transport roller

[1]

transport rollers [1] clean of dirt.
H-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.3.4 Manual bypass tray feed roller

1. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the manual
bypass tray feed roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
1.3.5 Manual bypass tray separation roller
1. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller unit.
F.6.6.2 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the manual
bypass tray separation roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
1.3.6 Original glass
1. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the original
glass [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
1.3.7 Scanner rails

2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the scanner rails
[1] clean of dirt.
NOTE
Apply lubricant after cleaning.
[1]
[1]
1.3.8 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd)

H-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the mirror 1 [1]
and mirror 2/3 [2].
[1]
[2]
1.3.9 Lens
2. Remove two screws [1] and lens cover [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the lens [1]
clean of dirt.
[1]
1.3.10 CCD sensor

[1]
[1]
[2]
2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the CCD board protective
shield [2].
[1]
3. Unhook two tabs [1], and remove the CCD sensor cover [2].
[2]
[1]
H-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223

4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the CCD sensor
[1] clean of dirt.
[1]
H-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 2. Option
2. Option
2.1 Cleaning parts list
2.1.1 PC-109/PC-208
No.
1
Section
Part name
Feed section
Ref. page
Separation roller
H.2.2.1 Separation roller
Feed roller
H.2.2.2 Feed roller
Pick-up roller
H.2.2.3 Pick-up roller
Vertical transport roller
H.2.2.4 Vertical transport roller
Transport section
2.1.2 PC-409
No.
1
Section
Part name
Ref. page
Separation roller
H.2.3.1 Separation roller
Feed roller
H.2.3.2 Feed roller
Pick-up roller
H.2.3.3 Pick-up roller
H.2.3.4 Vertical transport roller
Feed section
Transport section
2.2 Cleaning procedure (PC-109/PC-208)

NOTE
2.2.1 Separation roller

G.5.3.1 Right door
2. Remove two springs [1].
3. Remove the jam clearing cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the separation roller mounting
bracket assy [2].
[1]
[1]
5. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the separation

2.2.2 Feed roller

1. Remove the tray 3. (remove the tray 4 from 4th row.)
H-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
See the procedures 1 to 4 in H.2.2.1 Separation roller

3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the feed roller
[1] clean of dirt.
[1]
2.2.3 Pick-up roller

1. Remove the tray 3. (remove the tray 4 from 4th row.)
See the procedures 1 to 4 in H.2.2.1 Separation roller
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the pick-up roller
[1] clean of dirt.
[1]
2.2.4 Vertical transport roller

2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the vertical
transport roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
[1]
2.3 Cleaning procedure (PC-409)
NOTE
2.3.1 Separation roller

G.5.4.1 Right door
[2]
[1]
2. Remove two screws [1] and separation roller mounting bracket assy
[2].
[1]
H-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223

3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the separation
[1]
2.3.2 Feed roller

[1]
[2]
[1]
[2].
[1]
[1]
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the feed roller
[1] clean of dirt.
2.3.3 Pick-up roller

[1]
H-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[2].
[1]
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the pick-up roller
[1] clean of dirt.
[1]
2.3.4 Vertical transport roller

2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the vertical
transport roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
H-9
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/

SETTING SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION
1.1 Outline
Adjustment/Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
Throughout this Adjustment/Setting, the default settings are indicated by .
1.2 Advance checks

Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made. Check to see if:
The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
The power supply is properly grounded.
The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner
that generate electric noise).
The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the
installation site.
A.3.3.2 Installation Requirements
The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
The density is properly selected.
The original glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
Correct paper is being used for printing.
The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the
end of their useful service life.
Toner is not running out.
CAUTION
To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the
service job procedures.
If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its
power turned ON, use utmost care not to be caught in the
scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit/LED exposure
unit.
Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit
which can be extremely hot.
The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches
and measuring instruments away from it.
Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar
device.
Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
I-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 2. TOUCH PANEL ADJUSTMENT
2. TOUCH PANEL ADJUSTMENT

2.1 Use
To adjust the position of the touch panel display.
Make this adjustment if the touch panel is slow to respond to a pressing action.
Use during the setup procedure.
2.2 Procedure
1. Press the Accessibility key.
2. Touch [Touch Panel Adj.].
3. Using the tip of a pen or similar object, touch the four keys (+) on the screen in sequence.
These crosses may be touched in any order; but be sure to touch the center of each cross.
Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen.
4. Touching all four crosses will turn the Start key ON in blue.
5. Press the Start key.
I-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY
3. UTILITY
3.1 List of utility mode (outline)
Utility Mode
One-Touch/User Box Registration Create One-Touch destination

Create User Box
I.3.2.1 One-Touch/User Box

Registration
Limiting Access to Destinations

User Settings
System Settings
I.3.2.2 User Settings
Custom Display Settings

Copier Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Printer Settings
Change Password
Change E-mail Address
Change Icon
Register Authentication Settings
Registered Application Setting
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
Administrator Settings
System Settings
I.3.2.3 Administrator Settings
Administrator/Machine Settings
One-Touch/User Box Registration
User Authentication/Account
Track
Network Settings
Copier Settings
Printer Settings
Fax Settings
System Connection
Security Settings
License Settings
OpenAPI Authentication
Management Settings
Check Consumable Life
Print List
My Panel Settings
Language Setting
Measurement Unit Setting
Copier Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Color Selection Setting
Main Menu Settings
Initial Screen Setting
Device Information
Meter Count
Check Details
Remaining Copy Count *

Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
I-3
I.3.2.4 Other Settings
bizhub 423/363/283/223
*: Displayed after a user or account authentication if maximum limit is set for the number of copies the user or account can make.
3.2 List of utility mode (detail)

3.2.1 One-Touch/User Box Registration

Create
One-Touch
destination
Address Book (Public)/

(Personal)
Ref. page
E-mail
I.4.1.1.(1) E-mail
User Box
I.4.1.1.(2) User Box
Fax
I.4.1.1.(3) Fax
PC (SMB)
I.4.1.1.(4) PC (SMB)
FTP
I.4.1.1.(5) FTP
WebDAV
I.4.1.1.(6) WebDAV
IP Address Fax
I.4.1.1.(7) IP Address Fax
Internet Fax
I.4.1.1.(8) Internet Fax
Group
E-mail
Settings
Create User
Box
I.4.1.2 Group
E-mail Subject
I.4.1.3.(1) E-mail Subject
E-mail Body
I.4.1.3.(2) E-mail Body
Public/Personal User Box
I.4.2.1 Public/Personal User Box
Confidential RX User Box
I.4.2.2 Confidential RX User Box
Bulletin Board User Box
I.4.2.3 Bulletin Board User Box
Relay User Box

Limiting
Access to
Destinations
Apply Levels/
Groups to
Destinations
I.4.2.4 Relay User Box

Address Book
I.4.3.2.(1) Address Book
A Group
I.4.3.2.(2) Group
Program
I.4.3.2.(3) Program
I-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.2.2 User Settings
(1) System Settings

User Settings
System Settings
Ref. page
Language Selection
I.5.1.1 Language Selection
Measurement Unit Settings
I.5.1.2 Measurement Unit

Settings
Paper Tray Settings
Auto Tray Selection Settings
I.5.1.3.(1) Auto Tray Selection

Settings
Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF
I.5.1.3.(2) Auto Tray Switch ON/

OFF
No Matching Paper in Tray Setting
I.5.1.3.(3) No Matching Paper in

Tray Setting
Print Lists
I.5.1.3.(4) Print Lists
Auto Color Level Adjust.

Power Save Settings*
Output Settings**
I.5.1.4 Auto Color Level Adjust.

Low Power Mode Settings *
I.5.1.5.(1) Low Power Mode

Settings
Sleep Mode Settings *
I.5.1.5.(2) Sleep Mode Settings
Print/Fax Output
Settings **
I.5.1.6.(1) Print/Fax Output

Settings
Print**
Fax**
Output Tray Settings **
I.5.1.6.(2) Output Tray Setting
AE Level Adjustment **
I.5.1.7 AE Level Adjustment
Auto Paper Select for Small Original
I.5.1.8 Auto Paper Select for

Small Original
Blank Page Print Settings **
I.5.1.9 Blank Page Print Settings
Page Number Print Position **
I.5.1.10 Page Number Print

Position
Select Keyboard **
I.5.1.11 Select Keyboard

For displaying the keys with *, ** marks, see I.6.86 Security Settings-Security Details.
(2) Custom Display Settings

User Settings
Custom Display Settings
Ref. page
Copier Settings
Default Tab
I.5.2.1.(1) Default Tab
Shortcut Key 1
I.5.2.1.(2) Shortcut Key 1/2
Shortcut Key 2
Quick Settings 1
Quick Settings 2
I.5.2.1.(3) Quick Settings 1, 2, 3,

4
Quick Settings 3
Quick Settings 4
Scan/Fax Settings
I-5
Default Tab Density Settings
I.5.2.1.(4) Default Tab Density

Settings
Default Tab
Program Default
I.5.2.2.(2) Program Default
bizhub 423/363/283/223

User Settings
Ref. page
Address Book Index Default
I.5.2.2.(3) Address Book Index

Default
Shortcut Key 1
Shortcut Key 2
User Box Settings
Default Address Book
I.5.2.2.(5) Default Address Book
Default Address Type
I.5.2.2.(6) Default Address Type
Default Tab
Shortcut Key 1
Shortcut Key 2
Copy Screen
Copy Operating Screen
I.5.2.4.(1) Copy Operating

Screen
Fax Active Screen
TX Display
I.5.2.5.(1) TX Display
RX Display
I.5.2.5.(2) RX Display
Color Selection Settings
I.5.2.6 Color Selection Settings
Left Panel Display Default
I.5.2.7 Left Panel Display Default
Search Option Settings
I.5.2.8.(2) Search Option Screen
(3) Copier Settings

User Settings
Copier Settings
Ref. page
Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple
I.5.3.1 Auto Booklet ON when

Fold & Staple
Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet
I.5.3.2 Auto Zoom for Combine/

Booklet
Auto Sort/Group Selection
I.5.3.3 Auto Sort/Group Selection
Default Copy Settings
I.5.3.4 Default Copy Settings
Default Enlarge Display Settings
I.5.3.5 Default Enlarge Display

Settings
When AMS Direction is Incorrect
I.5.3.6 When AMS Direction is

Incorrect
Separate Scan Output Method
I.5.3.7 Separate Scan Output

Method
Enlargement Rotation
I.5.3.8 Enlargement Rotation
Auto Zoom (Platen)*
I.5.3.9 Auto Zoom (Platen)
Auto Zoom (ADF)*
I.5.3.10 Auto Zoom (ADF)
Specify Default Tray when APS Off*
I.5.3.11 Specify Default Tray

when APS Off
Select Tray for Insert Sheet*
I.5.3.12 Select Tray for Insert

Sheet
Half-Fold Specification
I.5.3.13 Half-Fold Specification
Print Jobs During Copy Operation**
I.5.3.14 Print Jobs During Copy

Operation
Automatic Image Rotation
I.5.3.15 Automatic Image

Rotation
Finishing Program
I.5.3.16 Finishing Program
Card Shot Settings
Layout
I.5.3.17 Card Shot Settings
Zoom
Store Original Size
For displaying the keys with *, ** marks, see I.6.86 Security Settings-Security Details.
(4) Scan/Fax Settings

User Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Ref. page
JPEG Compression Level
I.5.4.1 JPEG Compression Level
Black Compression Level
I.5.4.2 Black Compression Level
TWAIN Lock Time
I.5.4.3 TWAIN Lock Time
Default Scan/Fax Settings
I.5.4.4 Default Scan/Fax Settings
Default Enlarge Display Settings
I.5.4.5 Default Enlarge Display

Settings
Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level
I.5.4.6 Compact PDF/XPS

Compression Level
I-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223

User Settings
Ref. page
Color TIFF Type
I.5.4.7 Color TIFF Type
OCR Operation Setting
I.5.4.8 OCR Operation Setting
Graphic Outlining
I.5.4.9 Graphic Outlining
(5) Printer Settings

User Settings
Printer Settings
Ref. page
Basic Settings
PDL Setting
I.5.5.1.(1) PDL Setting
Number of Copies
I.5.5.1.(2) Number of Copies
Original Direction
I.5.5.1.(3) Original Direction
Spool Print Jobs in HDD before

RIP
I.5.5.1.(4) Spool Print Jobs in

HDD before RIP
A4/A3 LTR/LGR Auto Switch
I.5.5.1.(5) A4/A3 LTR/LGR

Auto Switch
Banner Sheet Setting
I.5.5.1.(6) Banner Sheet Setting
Binding Direction Adjustment
I.5.5.1.(7) Binding Direction

Adjustment
Line Width Adjustment
I.5.5.1.(8) Line Width Adjustment
Gray Background Text Correction I.5.5.1.(9) Gray Background Text

Correction
Paper Setting
Paper Tray
I.5.5.2.(1) Paper Tray
Paper Size
I.5.5.2.(2) Paper Size
2-Sided Print
I.5.5.2.(3) 2-Sided Print
Binding Position
I.5.5.2.(4) Binding Position
Staple
I.5.5.2.(5) Staple
Punch
I.5.5.2.(6) Punch
Banner Paper Tray
I.5.5.2.(7) Banner Paper Tray
Font Settings
I.5.5.3.(1) Font Settings
Symbol Set
I.5.5.3.(2) Symbol Set
Font Size
I.5.5.3.(3) Font Size
Line/Page
I.5.5.3.(4) Line/Page
CR/LF Mapping
I.5.5.3.(5) CR/LF Mapping
PS Setting
Print PS Errors
I.5.5.4.(1) Print PS Errors
XPS Settings
Verify XPS Digital Signature
I.5.5.5.(1) Verify XPS Digital

Signature
Print Reports
Configuration Page
I.5.5.6 Print Reports
PCL Settings
Demo Page
PCL Font List
PS Font List
TIFF Image Paper Setting
I.5.5.7 TIFF Image Paper Setting
(6) Other
User Settings
Ref. page
Change Password
I.5.6 Change Password
Change E-mail Address
I.5.7 Change E-mail Address
Change Icon
I.5.8 Change Icon
Register Authentication Settings
I.5.9 Register Authentication

Settings
Registered Application Setting
Default Application Selection
I.5.10 Register Authentication

Settings-Default Application
Selection
Link File Error Notification
I.5.11.1 Link File Error

Notification
Proxy Server Use
I.5.11.2 Proxy Server Use
Print Settings
I.5.11.3 Print Settings
I-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.2.3 Administrator Settings

Administrator setting 1/2
Administrator setting 2/2
(1) System Settings

System Settings
Power Save Settings
Output Settings
Ref. page
Low Power Mode Settings
I.6.1.1 Low Power Mode Settings
Sleep Mode Settings
I.6.1.2 Sleep Mode Settings
Power Save Key
I.6.1.3 Power Save Key
Enter Power Save Mode
I.6.1.4 Enter Power Save Mode
Auto Power OFF Setting <Europe only>
I.6.1.5 Auto Power OFF Setting
Print/Fax Output Settings
I.6.2.1 Print/Fax Output Settings
Output Tray Settings
I.6.2.2 Output Tray Settings
Shift Output Each Job
I.6.2.3 Shift Output Each Job
Date/Time Settings
I.6.3 Date/Time Settings
Daylight Saving Time
I.6.4 System Settings-Daylight

Saving Time
Weekly Timer Settings
Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
I.6.5.1 Weekly Timer ON/OFF

Settings
Time Settings
I.6.5.2 Time Settings
Date Settings
I.6.5.3 Date Settings
Select Time for Power Save
I.6.5.4 Select Time for Power

Save
Password for Non-Business Hours
I.6.5.5 Password for NonBusiness Hours
I-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Restrict User Access
Ref. page
Copy Program Lock Settings
I.6.6.1 Copy Program Lock

Settings
Delete Saved Copy Program
I.6.6.2 Delete Saved Copy

Program
Restrict
Access to Job
Settings
Changing Job Priority
I.6.6.3.(1) Changing Job Priority
Delete Other User Jobs
I.6.6.3.(2) Delete Other User

Jobs
Registering and
Changing Addresses
I.6.6.3.(3) Registering and

Changing Addresses
Changing Zoom Ratio
I.6.6.3.(4) Changing Zoom Ratio
Changing the From

Address
I.6.6.3.(5) Change the From

Address
Change Registered
Overlay
I.6.6.3.(6) Change Registered

Overlay
Biometric/IC Card Info.

Registration
I.6.6.3.(7) Biometric/IC Card Info.

Registration
Restrict Broadcasting
I.6.6.4 Restrict Operation
Restrict
Operation
Expert Adjustment
AE Level Adjustment
I.6.7.1 AE Level Adjustment
Printer
Adjustment
Leading Edge
Adjustment
I.6.7.2 Printer AdjustmentLeading Edge Adjustment
Centering
I.6.7.3 Printer AdjustmentCentering
Leading Edge
Adjustment (Duplex Side
2)
I.6.7.4 Printer AdjustmentLeading Edge Adjustment:

Duplex Side 2
Centering (Duplex 2nd

Side)
I.6.7.5 Printer AdjustmentCentering: Duplex 2nd Side
Erase Leading Edge ***
I.6.7.6 Printer Adjustment-Erase

Leading Edge
Vertical Adjustment ***
I.6.7.7 Printer AdjustmentVertical Adjustment
Media Adjustment
I.6.7.8 Printer Adjustment-Media

Adjustment
Center Staple Position
I.6.7.9 Finisher AdjustmentCenter Staple Position
Half-Fold Position
I.6.7.10 Finisher AdjustmentHalf-Fold Position
Punch Horizontal
Position Adjustment
I.6.7.11 Finisher AdjustmentPunch Horizontal Position

Adjustment
Punch Regist Loop Size

Adjustment
I.6.7.12 Finisher AdjustmentPunch Regist Loop Size

Adjustment
Paper Alignment Plate

Setting
I.6.7.13 Finisher AdjustmentPaper Alignment Plate Settings
Finisher
Adjustment
Paper Separation Adjustment
I.6.7.14 Paper Separation

Adjustment
Gradation
Adjustment
I.6.7.15 Gradation Adjustment
Maximum Density
Adjustment
Gradation Adjustment
Initialization
Scanner Area
***
Scanner Adjustment:
Leading Edge ***
I.6.7.17 Scanner Area-Scanner

Adjustment: Leading Edge
Scanner Adjustment:
Centering ***
I.6.7.18 Scanner Area-Scanner

Adjustment: Centering
Horizontal Adjustment *** I.6.7.19 Scanner Area-Horizontal

Adjustment
ADF
Adjustment ***
I-9
Vertical Adjustment ***
I.6.7.20 Scanner Area-Vertical

Adjustment
Centering ***
I.6.7.22 ADF AdjustmentCentering
Original Stop Position ***
I.6.7.23 ADF Adjustment-Original

Stop Position
Centering Auto
Adjustment ***
I.6.7.24 ADF AdjustmentCentering Auto Adjustment
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Ref. page
Auto Adj. of Stop Position I.6.7.25 ADF Adjustment-Auto
***
Adj. of Stop Position
Line Detection
List/Counter
Reset Settings
Prior Detection Setting
I.6.7.26 Line Detection-Prior

Detection Setting
Feed Cleaning Settings
I.6.7.27 Line Detection-Feed

Cleaning Settings
User Paper Settings ***
I.6.7.28 User Paper Settings
Erase
Adjustment
I.6.7.29 Erase Adjustment-NonImage Area Erase Operation

Settings
Non-Image Area Erase

Operation Settings
Maximum Density Adjustment
I.6.7.30 Maximum Density

Adjustment
Drum Dry
I.6.7.31 Drum Dry
Replenish Toner
I.6.7.32 Replenish Toner
PS Designer Settings
I.6.7.33 PS Designer Settings
Management
List
I.6.8.1.(1) Job Settings List
Job Settings List
Paper Size/Type Counter
I.6.8.2 Paper Size/Type Counter
Meter Counter List
I.6.8.3 Meter Counter List
Check Consumables List
I.6.8.4 Check Consumables List
System Auto Reset
I.6.9.1 System Auto Reset
Auto Reset
Job Reset
User Box
Settings
Standard Size Setting***
Stamp Settings
I.6.9.2 Auto Reset

When Account is
changed
I.6.9.3.(1) When Account is

changed
When Original is set on

ADF
I.6.9.3.(2) When Original is set

on ADF
NEXT JOB
Staple
Setting
I.6.9.3.(3) Next Job: Staple

Setting
Original
Set/Bind
Direction
I.6.9.3.(4) Next Job: Original Set/

Bind Direction
Reset Data
After Job
I.6.9.3.(5) Next Job: Reset Data

After Job
Delete Unused User Box
I.6.10.1 Delete Unused User Box
Delete Secure Print Documents
I.6.10.2 Delete Secure Print

Documents
Auto Delete Secure Documents
I.6.10.3 Auto Delete Secure

Document
Encrypted PDF Delete Time
I.6.10.4 Encrypted PDF Delete

Time
ID & Print Delete Time
I.6.10.5 ID & Print Delete

Time
Document Hold Setting
I.6.10.6 Document Hold Setting
External Memory Function Settings
I.6.10.7 External Memory

Function Settings
Allow/Restrict User Box
I.6.10.8 Allow/Restrict User Box
ID & Print Delete after Print Setting
I.6.10.9 ID & Print Delete

after Print Setting
Document Delete Time Setting
I.6.10.10 Document Delete Time

Setting
Original Glass Original Size Detect ***
I.6.11.1 Original Glass Original

Size Detect
Foolscap Size Setting ***
I.6.11.2 Foolscap Size Setting
Header/Footer Settings
I.6.12.1 Header/Footer Settings
Fax TX Settings
I.6.12.2 Fax TX Settings
Blank Page Print Settings
I.6.13 System Settings-Blank

Page Print Settings
Application Key Settings
I.6.14 System SettingsApplication Key Settings
Skip Job Operation

Settings
Fax
Other than Fax
Default Bypass Paper Type Setting
I-10
I.6.15 System Settings-Skip Job

Operation Settings
I.6.16 System Settings-Default
Bypass Paper Type Setting
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Ref. page
Page Number Print Position
I.6.17 System Settings-Page

Number Print Position
Advanced Preview Setting
I.6.18 System SettingsAdvanced Preview Setting

For displaying the keys with *** marks, see I.12.3.3 Administrator Feature Level.
(2) Administrator/Machine Settings One-Touch/User Box Registration

Administrator/Machine
Settings
Ref. page
Administrator Registration
I.6.19.1 Administrator
Registration
Input Machine Address

One-Touch/User Box
Registration
Create One-Touch
Destination
I.6.19.2 Input Machine Address

Address Book
E-mail
I.6.20.1 Address Book
User Box
I.6.20.1.(2) User Box
Fax
I.6.20.1.(3) Fax
PC (SMB)
I.6.20.1.(4) PC (SMB)
FTP
I.6.20.1.(5) FTP
WebDAV
I.6.20.1.(6) WebDAV
IP Address Fax
Internet Fax
I.6.20.1.(8) Internet Fax
E-mail Subject
I.6.20.3.(1) E-mail Subject
E-mail Body
I.6.20.3.(2) E-mail Body
Group
E-mail Settings
Create User Box
One-Touch/User Box
Registration List
I.6.20.2 Group
Public/Personal User Box
I.6.21.1 Public/Personal User Box
Confidential RX User Box
I.6.21.2 Confidential RX User Box
Bulletin Board User Box
I.6.21.3 Bulletin Board User Box
Relay User Box
I.6.21.4 Relay User Box
Annotation User Box
I.6.21.5 Annotation User Box
Address Book List
I.6.22.1 Address Book List
Group List
I.6.22.2 Group List
Program List
I.6.22.3 Program List
E-mail Subject/Text List
I.6.22.4 E-mail Subject/Text List
Maximum Number of User Boxes
I.6.23 One-Touch/User Box

Registration-Maximum Number of
User Boxes
(3) User Authentication/Account Track

User Authentication/Account
Track
Ref. page
General Settings
User Authentication
Settings
Account Track Settings
I.6.24 User Authentication/

Account Track-General Settings
Administrative
Setting
User Name List
I.6.25.1 Administrative SettingUser Name List
Default Function
Permission
I.6.25.2 Administrative SettingDefault Function Permission
ID & Print Settings
I.6.25.3 Administrative Setting-ID

& Print Settings
ID & Print
Operation Settings
I.6.25.4 Administrative Setting-ID

& Print Operation Settings
Default Operation
Selection
I.6.25.5 Administrative SettingDefault Operation Selection
User Registration
I.6.25.6 User Registration
User Counter
I.6.25.7 User Counter
Account Track Registration
I.6.26.1 Account Track

Registration
Account Track Counter
I.6.26.2 Account Track Counter
Print without Authentication

Account Track-Print without
Authentication
Print Counter List

Account Track-Print Counter List
External Server Settings
I.6.29 External Server Settings
I-11
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Limiting Access to
Destinations
Ref. page
Create Group
I.6.30.1 Create Group
Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations
I.6.30.2 Apply Levels/Groups to

Destinations
Apply Levels/Groups to Users
I.6.30.3 Apply Levels/Groups to

Users
Authentication Device
Settings
General Settings
I.6.31.1 General Settings
Logoff Settings
I.6.31.2 Logoff Settings
Auth/Acct Track Common

Setting
Logout Confirmation Screen Display

Setting

Account Track-Auth/Acct Track
Common Setting
Scan to Home Settings

Account Track-Scan to Home
Settings
Scan to Authorized Folder Settings

Account Track-Scan to
Authorized Folder Settings
(4) Network Settings

Network Settings
TCP/IP Settings
NetWare Settings
Ref. page
IPv4 Settings
I.6.35.2 IPv4 Settings
IPv6 Settings
I.6.35.3 IPv6 Settings
DNS Host
I.6.35.4 DNS Host
DNS Domain
I.6.35.5 DNS Domain
DNS Server Settings(IPv4)
I.6.35.6 DNS Server Settings

(IPv4)
DNS Server Settings(IPv6)
I.6.35.7 DNS Server Settings

(IPv6)
IPsec Settings
I.6.35.8 IPsec Settings
IP Filtering (Permit Access)
I.6.35.12.(1) Permit Access
IP Filtering (Deny Access)
I.6.35.12.(2) Deny Access
RAW Port Number
I.6.35.13 RAW Port Number
LLMNR Setting
I.6.35.14 LLMNR Setting
IPX Settings
I.6.36.1 IPX Settings
NetWare Print Settings
I.6.36.2 NetWare Print Settings
User Authentication Settings (NDS)
I.6.36.5 User Authentication

Setting (NDS)
HTTP Server Settings

FTP Settings
SMB Settings
LDAP Settings
E-mail Settings
I.6.37 Network Settings-http

Server Settings
FTP TX Settings
I.6.38.1 FTP TX Settings
FTP Server Settings
I.6.38.2 FTP Server Settings
Client Settings
I.6.39.1 Client Settings
Print Settings
I.6.39.2 Print Settings
WINS Settings
I.6.39.3 WINS Settings
Direct Hosting Settings
I.6.39.4 Direct Hosting Setting
Enabling LDAP
I.6.40.1 Enabling LDAP
Setting Up LDAP
I.6.40.2 Setting Up LDAP
Default LDAP Server Setting
I.6.40.3 Default LDAP Server

Setting
E-mail TX (SMTP)
I.6.41 Network Settings-E-mail

Settings-E-mail TX (SMTP)
E-mail RX (POP)

Settings-E-mail RX (POP)
S/MIME Communication Settings

Settings-S/MIME Communication
Settings
SNMP Settings
I.6.44 Network Settings-SNMP

Setting
AppleTalk Settings
I.6.45 Network SettingsAppleTalk Settings
Bonjour Setting
I.6.46 Network Settings-Bonjour

Setting
TCP Socket
TCP Socket
I-12
I.6.47.1 TCP Socket
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Settings
TCP Socket (ASCII Mode)
Network Fax Settings
WebDAV Settings
Web Service Settings
Network Fax
Function
Settings
IP Address Fax
Function

Function
Internet Fax
Function
I.6.48.1.(2) Internet Fax Function
SMTP TX Settings
I.6.48.3 SMTP RX Settings
SMTP RX Settings
I.6.48.3 SMTP RX Settings
WebDAV Client Settings
I.6.49.1 WebDAV Client Setting
WebDAV Server Settings
I.6.50 Network Settings-WebDAV

Settings-WebDAV Server
Settings
Web Service Common Settings
I.6.51 Network Settings-Web

Service Settings-Web Service
Common Settings
Printer Settings

Service Settings-Printer Settings
Scanner Settings

Service Settings-Scanner
Settings
SSDP Settings
Detail Settings
Ref. page
I.6.47.2 TCP Socket (ASCII
Mode)
I.6.54 Network Settings-SSDP

Settings
Device Setting
I.6.55 Network Settings-Detail

Settings-Device Setting
Time Adjustment Setting

Settings-Time Adjustment Setting
Status Notification
Setting
I.6.57.1 Register Notification

Address (IP Address)
Register
Notification
Address
Total Counter Notification Settings

Settings-Total Counter
Notification Settings
PING Confirmation

Settings-PING Confirmation
SLP Setting

Settings-SLP Setting
LPD Setting

Settings-LPD Setting
Prefix/Suffix
Setting
ON/OFF Setting
I.6.62.1 ON/OFF Setting
Prefix/Suffix
Setting
I.6.62.2 Prefix/Suffix Setting
Error Code Display Setting

Settings-Error Code Display
Setting
IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings
I.6.64 Network SettingsIEEE802.1X Authentication

Settings
Web Browser Setting

Browser Setting
Bluetooth Setting
I.6.66 Network Settings-Bluetooth

Setting
(5) Copier Settings

Copier Settings
Ref. page
Auto Zoom (Platen)
I.6.67.1 Auto Zoom (Platen)
Auto Zoom (ADF)
I.6.67.2 Auto Zoom (ADF)
Specify Default Tray when APS OFF
I.6.67.3 Specify Default Tray

when APS OFF
Select Tray for Insert Sheet
I.6.67.4 Select Tray for Insert

Sheet
Print Jobs During Copy Operation
I.6.67.5 Print Jobs During Copy

Operation
Automatic Image Rotation
I.6.67.6 Automatic Image

Rotation
I-13
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Ref. page
Card Shot Settings
Layout
I.6.67.7 Card Shot SettingsLayout
Zoom
Store Original Size
(6) Printer Settings

Printer Settings
Ref. page
USB Timeout
I.6.68.1 USB Timeout
Network Timeout
I.6.68.2 Network Timeout
Print XPS Errors
I.6.68.3 Print XPS Errors
PSWC Direct Print
I.6.68.4 PSWC Direct Print
Assign Account to Acquire Device Info
I.6.68.5 Assign Account to

Acquire Device Info
(7) Fax Settings

Fax Settings
Ref. page
Header Information
Header/Footer Position
Line Parameter Setting
I.6.70 Fax Settings-Header

Information
Header Position
I.6.71.1 Header Position
Print Receiver's Name
I.6.71.2 Print Receiver's Name
Footer Position
I.6.71.3 Footer Position
Dialing Method
I.6.72.1 Dialing Method
Receive Mode
I.6.72.2 Receive Mode
Number of RX Call Rings (Receive Time I.6.72.3 Number of RX Call Rings

Interval Setting)
(Receive Time Interval Setting)
TX/RX Settings
Function Settings
Number of Redials
I.6.72.4 Number of Redials
Redial Interval
I.6.72.5 Redial Interval
Line Monitor Sound
I.6.72.6 Line Monitor Sound
Line Monitor Sound Volume (Send)
Line Monitor Sound Volume (Receive)

Volume (Receive)
Duplex Print (RX)
I.6.73.1 Duplex Print (RX)
Letter/Ledger over A4/A3
I.6.73.2 Letter/Ledger over A4/A3
Print Paper Selection
I.6.73.3 Print Paper Selection
Print Paper Size
I.6.73.4 Print Paper Size
Incorrect User Box No. Entry
I.6.73.5 Incorrect User Box No.

Entry
Tray Selection for RX Print
I.6.73.6 Tray Selection for RX

Print
Min. Reduction for RX Print
I.6.73.7 Min. Reduction for RX

Print
Print Separate Fax Pages
I.6.73.8 Print Separate Fax

Pages
File After Polling TX
I.6.73.9 File After Polling TX
No. of Sets (RX)
I.6.73.10 No. of Sets (RX)
Individual Receiving Line Setup
I.6.73.11 Individual Receiving

Line Setup
Individual Sender Line Setup
I.6.73.12 Individual Sender Line

Setup
Function ON/OFF
Setting
F-Code TX
I.6.74.1 F-Code TX
Relay RX
I.6.74.2 Relay RX
Relay Printing
I.6.74.3 Relay Printing
Destination Check
Display Function
I.6.74.4 Destination Check

Display Function
Confirm Address
(TX)
I.6.74.5 Confirm Address (TX)
Confirm Address
(Register)
I.6.74.6 Confirm Address

(Register)
Memory RX Setting
I.6.75.1 Memory RX Setting
Closed Network RX
I.6.75.2 Closed Network RX
I-14
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Ref. page
Forward TX Setting
I.6.75.3 Forward TX Setting
Incomplete TX Hold
I.6.75.4 Incomplete TX Hold
PC-Fax RX Setting
I.6.75.5 PC-Fax RX Setting
TSI User Box Setting
I.6.75.6 TSI User Box Setting
PBX Connection Setting

Report Settings
I.6.76 Fax Settings-PBX

Connection Setting
Activity Report
I.6.77.1 Activity Report
TX Result Report
I.6.77.2 TX Result Report
Sequential TX Report
I.6.77.3 Sequential TX Report
Timer Reservation TX Report
I.6.77.4 Timer Reservation TX

Report
Confidential RX Report
I.6.77.5 Confidential RX Report
Bulletin TX Report
I.6.77.6 Bulletin TX Report
Relay TX Result Report
I.6.77.7 Relay TX Result Report
Relay Request Report
I.6.77.8 Relay Request Report
PC-Fax TX Error Report
I.6.77.9 PC-Fax TX Error Report
Broadcast Result Report
I.6.77.10 Broadcast Result

Report
TX Result Report Check
I.6.77.11 TX Result Report Check
Network Fax RX Error Report
I.6.77.12 Network Fax RX Error

Report
MDN Message
I.6.77.13 MDN Message
DSN Message
I.6.77.14 DSN Message
Print E-mail Message Body
I.6.77.15 Print E-mail Message

Body
Job Settings List

Multi Line Settings
I.6.78 Fax Settings-Job Settings

List
Line Parameter
Setting
Dialing Method
I.6.79.1 Line Parameter SettingDialing Method
Number of Rx Call
Rings
I.6.79.2 Line Parameter SettingNumber of Rx Call Rings
Line Monitor Sound I.6.79.3 Line Parameter SettingLine Monitor Sound

Function Settings
PC-FAX TX Setting I.6.79.4 Function Settings-PCFAX TX Setting
Multi Lines Settings
I.6.79.5 Multi Line Settings
Sender Fax No.
I.6.79.6 Sender Fax No.
Black Compression Level
I.6.80.1 Black Compression Level
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value
Compression Method
I.6.80.2 Color/Grayscale MultiValue Compression Method
SIP Adaptor Connection Check
I.6.80.3 SIP Adaptor Connection

Check
Internet Fax Self RX Ability
I.6.80.4 Internet Fax Self RX

Ability
Internet Fax Advanced Settings
I.6.80.5 Internet Fax Advanced

Settings
IP Address Fax Operation Settings
I.6.80.6 IP Address Fax

Operation Settings
Fax Print Quality Settings
I.6.81 Fax Settings-Fax Print

Quality Settings
(8) System Connection

System Connection
OpenAPI Settings
Ref. page
Access Setting
I.6.82.1 OpenAPI SettingsAccess Setting
SSL/Port Number
I.6.82.2 OpenAPI Settings-SSL/

Port Settings
Authentication
I.6.82.3 OpenAPI SettingsAuthentication
Call Remote Center
I.6.82.4 Call Remote Center
Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting
I.6.82.5 Automatic Prefix/Suffix

Setting
I-15
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Printer Information
I.6.82.6 Printer Information
I.6.82.7 Cellular Phone/PDA

Setting
(9) Security Settings

Security Settings
Ref. page
Administrator Password
I.6.83 Security SettingsAdministrator Password
User Box Administrator Setting
I.6.84 Security Settings-User Box

Admin. Setting
Administrator Security Levels
I.6.85 Security SettingsAdministrator Security Levels
Security Details
Password Rules
I.6.86.1 Password Rules
Prohibited Functions When

Authentication Error
I.6.86.2 Prohibited Functions

When Authentication Error
Confidential Document Access

Method
I.6.86.3 Confidential Document

Access Method
Manual Destination Input
I.6.86.4 Manual Destination Input
Print Data Capture
I.6.86.5 Print Data Capture
Job Log Settings
I.6.86.6 Job Log Settings
Restrict Fax TX
I.6.86.7 Restrict Fax TX
Hide Personal Information
I.6.86.8 Hide Personal

Information
Hide Personal Information (MIB)
I.6.86.9 Hide Personal

Information (MIB)
Display Activity Log
I.6.86.10 Display Activity Log
Initialize
I.6.86.11 Initialize
Job History Thumbnail Display
I.6.86.12 Job History Thumbnail

Display
Secure Print Only
I.6.86.13 Secure Print Only
Copy Guard
I.6.86.14 Copy Guard
Password Copy
I.6.86.15 Web browser contents

access
Web browser contents access
I.6.86.16 Web browser contents

access
Enhanced Security Mode
I.6.87 Security SettingsEnhanced Security Mode
HDD Settings
/SSD Settings
Check HDD Capacity/Check SSD I.6.88.1 Check HDD Capacity/

Capacity
Check SSD Capacity
Function Management Settings
Overwrite HDD Data
I.6.88.2 Overwrite HDD Data
Overwrite All Data
I.6.88.3 Overwrite All Data
HDD Lock Password
I.6.88.4 HDD Lock Password
Format HDD/Format SSD
I.6.88.5 Format HDD

I.6.88.6 Format SSD
HDD Encryption Setting
I.6.88.7 HDD Encryption Setting
Usage Settings for Each Function I.6.89.1 Each Function Setting

Maximum Job Allowance
I.6.89.2 Max Copy Set
Network Function Usage Settings I.6.89.3 Network Function Usage

Settings
Stamp Settings
Authentication Time Setting
I.6.89.4 Authentication Time

Setting
Apply Stamps
I.6.90.1 Apply Stamps
Delete Registered Stamp
I.6.90.2 Delete Registered Stamp
Image Log Transfer Settings
I.6.91 Security Settings-Image

Log Transfer Settings
Driver Password Encryption Setting
I.6.92 Security Settings-Driver

Password Encryption Setting
(10) Other Settings

License Settings
Ref. page
Get Request Code
I.6.93.1 Get Request Code
I-16
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Ref. page
Install License
I.6.93.2 Install License
List of Enabled Functions
I.6.93.3 List of Enabled Functions
Restriction Code Setting-Restriction Code Setting
I.6.94 Restriction Code SettingRestriction Code Setting
3.2.4 Other Settings

(1) Device Information
Other Settings
Ref. page
Device Information
I.7.2 Device Information
(2) Check Consumable Life

Check consumable life 1/2
I-17
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Check consumable life 2/2
Other Settings
Check Consumable Life
Ref. page
Print List
(3) Meter Count

Meter count/Check detail
Other Settings
Meter Count
Check
Details
Ref. page
Print List
I.7.3 Meter Count
Coverage Rate *
Copy
Print
Scan/Fax
Other

*: Coverage rate can be used as a rough toner consumption estimate and may not completely reflect the actual amount of toner used.
(4) Remaining Copy Count

Other Settings
Ref. page
Remaining Copy Count *

*: Displayed after a user or account authentication if maximum limit is set for the number of copies the user or account can make.
(5) My Panel Settings

Other Settings
Ref. page
I-18
bizhub 423/363/283/223
My Panel
Settings

Language Setting
I.7.1 My Panel Settings

Copier Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Main Menu Settings

Registering, editing, and deleting My Panel settings are allowed only when logging in as a registered user.
When My Panel is not customized, the settings for MFP take effect in the three ofthe control panel settings, Language setting,
Measurement unit setting, and Colorselection setting.
Depending on the functions provided by each MFP and the optional device configuration, not all My Panel settings may not take effect.
3.3 Starting/Exiting
3.3.1 Starting procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. The Utility Mode screen will appear.
3.3.2 Exiting procedure

1. Touch the [Close] key.
I-19
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX

REGISTRATION)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX REGISTRATION)

One-Touch User Box Registration-Outline
In a copier where the user authentication function that uses an external server or MFP is set to ON, when you operate the copier without
performing user authentication, this menu is not displayed.
It will not be displayed when the authentication device is set to Set by the following setting.
[Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice]
4.1 Create One-Touch destination

4.1.1 Address Book (Public)/(Personal)
(1) E-mail
(a) Use
To register/change e-mail address to send scanned data.
(b) Procedure
A new address can be registered by touching [New].
Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting.
(2) User Box

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted.
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)
It will be displayed only when the hard disk is installed.
(a) Use
To register/change the Box address when storing the scanned data in the box in the hard disk in the main body.
(b) Procedure
At least one User Box must be registered for registering a Box address.
(3) Fax
(a) Use
To register/change the fax destinations.
(b) Procedure
(4) PC (SMB)
(a) Use
To register/change SMB address to send scanned data.
(b) Procedure
(5) FTP
(a) Use
To register/change FTP address to send scanned data.
(b) Procedure
(6) WebDAV
(a) Use
To register/change WebDAV address to send scanned data.
(b) Procedure
(7) IP Address Fax

Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to ON in the following settings.
I-20

REGISTRATION)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[Administrator Settings] [Network Settings] [Network Fax Settings] [Network Fax Function Settings]
(a) Use
To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax data.
(b) Procedure
Select any displayed address to check, change or delete the setting.
(8) Internet Fax

Setting will be available only when [Internet FAX] is set to ON in the following settings.
(a) Use
To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data.
(b) Procedure
4.1.2 Group
(1) Use
To register/change a group to send scanned data/fax data simultaneously.
(2) Procedure
Select any displayed group to check, edit or delete them.
At least one address must be registered for registering a new group.
4.1.3 E-mail Settings

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the management device 2 is mounted.
(1) E-mail Subject

(a) Use
To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the scanned data.
(b) Procedure
Select any displayed address to detail check, edit or delete the setting.
The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default].
(2) E-mail Body

(a) Use
To register the e-mail message when transmitting the scanned data.
(b) Procedure
Select any displayed address to detail check or delete the setting.
The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default].
4.2 Create User Box

It will not be displayed when the authentication device is set to Set by the following setting.
It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the vendor is mounted.
This menu is not available due to functional restriction during user authentication when [User Box] is set to Restrict.
It will not be displayed when [Allow/Restrict User Box] is set to Restrict in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] [System Settings] [User Box Settings]
It will not be displayed when both the hard disk and optional fax kit FK-508 are not installed.
4.2.1 Public/Personal User Box

(1) Use
To register/change the box for storing text data in the hard disk of the machine.
I-21

REGISTRATION)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Shared or personal box can be registered according to its intended use.
(2) Procedure
A new box can be registered by touching [New].
Select any displayed box to change or delete it.
4.2.2 Confidential RX User Box

It will be displayed only when the hard disk is not installed.
(1) Use
To register/change the box for confidential RX document.
If a hard disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User
Box.
(2) Procedure
4.2.3 Bulletin Board User Box

It will not be displayed when the authentication device 1 is set to Set by the following setting.
It will not be displayed due to functional restriction upon user authentication when [User Box] is set to OFF.
It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-508) is mounted.
It will not be displayed during user authentication if the fax operation is set to Restrict by the function restriction.
(1) Use
To register/change the bulletin board user box.
(2) Procedure
4.2.4 Relay User Box

It will not be displayed due to functional restriction upon user authentication when [User Box] is set to OFF.
It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-508) is mounted.
It will be displayed when the following setting is set to ON.
[Service Mode] [FAX] [System] [Display Setting] [Relay]
(1) Use
To register/change the Relay User Box.
(2) Procedure
4.3 Limiting Access to Destinations

It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to ON.
[Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhanced Security Mode]
4.3.1 Outline
The Limiting Access to Destinations setting allows or restricts individual users access to each destination. This enables security control by
restricting information that can be accessed.
(1) Apply Levels

One of the six levels from 0 to 5 can be assigned to all destinations. Similarly, one of the levels from 0 to 5 can be assigned to all users.
Depending on the combination of the destination and user levels, destinations that a user can access can be limited.
For example, users of level 2 can access the destinations that belong to the levels 0 to 2, but cannot access to the destinations that
belong to the levels 3 to 5. Level 5 users can access all destinations of the levels 0 to 5.
I-22

REGISTRATION)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Groups
A group can be made with a certain name to allow its members to access its destinations. Users and destinations can be registered for
the group so that the registered destinations can be accessed by the registered users.
Access restriction depending on an individual level is also applied to the group with access to the destinations determined by the
combination of the user and destination levels within a group.
A destination can be included in only one group.
A user can be included in multiple different groups.
4.3.2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations

(1) Address Book
(a) Use
Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the address book.
(b) Procedure
Select a destination, press [Apply Level] or [Apply Group] and make a setting.
(2) Group
(a) Use
Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the group.
(b) Procedure
(3) Program
(a) Use
Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the program.
(b) Procedure
I-23
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)
5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

5.1 System Settings
5.1.1 Language Selection
(1) Use
To select the language on the LCD display.
To change the language used on the control panel.
(2) Procedure
The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area] available from [System 1] under Service Mode.
5.1.2 Measurement Unit Settings

(1) Use
To select the unit displayed on the LCD display.
(2) Default setting

The default setting varies depending on the marketing area.
(3) Setting item

mm (Numerical Value)
inch (Numerical Value)
inch (Fraction)
5.1.3 Paper Tray Settings

(1) Auto Tray Selection Settings
(a) Use
To set the tray for automatic selection when APS is being set.
To establish the priority for switching the tray when ATS is being set.
(b) Procedure
Select the tray on the [Auto Tray Select] screen.
Set the priority on the [Tray Priority] screen.
(2) Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF

(a) Use
To set whether to automatically switch to another tray with same size paper when the paper feed tray runs out of paper during printing.
(b) Default setting

Restrict
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
(3) No Matching Paper in Tray Setting

(a) Use
To set whether to switch to another tray automatically when the specified tray runs out of paper during printing.
Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)
It stops printing when the specified tray runs out of paper.
Switch Trays (Tray Priority)
To switch to another tray with the specified paper and print when the tray is out of paper
(b) Default setting

(c) Setting item

Switch Trays (Tray Priority)
(4) Print Lists

(a) Use
To set the paper feed tray for output the list for the meter count or the unit check.
I-24
bizhub 423/363/283/223
It sets the simplex/duplex printing of the output for the sales counter or the unit check list.
(b) Default setting

Paper tray : Tray 1
Simplex/Duplex : 1-Sided
5.1.4 Auto Color Level Adjust.

(1) Use
To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a black-and-white original.
(2) Default setting

3
(3) Setting item

1 (Black) to 5 (Full Color)
5.1.5 Power Save Settings

It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to Level 1 or Level 2.
[Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Administrator Security Level]
It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or the vendor is mounted.
(1) Low Power Mode Settings

(a) Use
To set the time until low power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed.
Low power : To turn LED and LCD OFF, and lower the power consumption.
(b) Procedure
Use the 10-key pad for setting.
(c) Default setting

15 min.
(d) Setting range

2 to 240
(2) Sleep Mode Settings

(a) Use
To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed.
Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control.
OFF will only be displayed when [Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting] in Service Mode is set.
(b) Procedure
(c) Default setting

20 min
(d) Setting range

2 to 240
OFF
5.1.6 Output Settings

It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to Level 2.
[Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Administrator Security Levels]
(1) Print/Fax Output Settings

(a) Use
To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or fax received.
Batch Print
Starts printing when all data are received
Page Print
Starts printing every time data for each page are received
I-25
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

Printer: Page Print
Fax: Batch Print
NOTE
[FAX] will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-508) is mounted.
(2) Output Tray Setting

It will be displayed when the optional finisher FS-527 or the job separator JS-505 is mounted.
(a) Use
To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print Reports).
(b) Default setting

Copy : Tray 1
Print: Tray 1
Report Output : Tray 2
Fax: Tray 2
NOTE
[Tray 3] will be displayed only when the job separator JS-603 is mounted to the finisher FS-527.
5.1.7 AE Level Adjustment

(1) Use
To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure).
The larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be.
To make the background level foggier : Increase the setting value
To make the background level less foggy : Decrease the setting value
(2) Default setting

2
(3) Setting range

0 to 4
5.1.8 Auto Paper Select for Small Original

(1) Use
To make the copy setting when the paper is undetectably small, or no original is being set.
To copy the original such as business cards with which the original detection is not effective.
Copy on Small Size
Copies on A5 paper.
Copy on A4/Letter
Copies on A4 or Letter (8 1/2 x 11) size paper.
Prohibit Copy
Does not copy since the original size cannot be detected. Paper feed tray needs to be selected
prior to pressing the Start key.
(2) Default setting

Prohibit Copy
(3) Setting item

Copy on Small Size
Copy on A4/Letter
Prohibit Copy
5.1.9 Blank Page Print Settings

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
(1) Use
Select whether or not to print the stamp/composition on blank pages.
I-26
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

Do Not Print
(3) Setting item

Print
Do Not Print
5.1.10 Page Number Print Position

(1) Use
Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to
print the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position.
(2) Default setting

Left & Right Bind: All the Same/Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same
(3) Setting item

Left & Right Bind: All the Same/Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same
Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical/Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same
Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical/Top & Bottom Bind: Symmetrical
5.1.11 Select Keyboard

(1) Use
Select the keyboard type displayed by default in the touch panel.
The type of keyboard to be displayed when [Local Keyboard] is selected depends on the language selected in [User Settings] [System
Settings] [Language Selection].
The type of keyboard corresponding to each language is shown below.
Language
Japanese
Keyboard
Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Japanese)
English (US) *1
Standard keyboard (US ASCII) only
English (UK) *1
Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (UK)
French
Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (French)
Italian
Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (Italian)
German
Spanish
Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (German)

Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (Spanish)
Simplified Chinese
Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Simplified Chinese)
Traditional Chinese
Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Traditional Chinese)
Korean
Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Korean)
*1 : If [Marketing Area] is set to Europe and [Language Selection] is set to English, English (UK) takes effect. If another marketing
area and English are selected, English (US) takes effect.
(2) Setting item

Standard Keyboard
Local keyboard
NOTE
The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area] available from [System 1] under Service Mode.
5.2 Custom Display Settings

5.2.1 Copier Settings
(1) Default Tab
(a) Use
Selects a default tab display in the copy mode.
Basic
Normal basic screen
Quick Copy
This screen displays all options that can be selected for Paper, Zoom, and Duplex/Combine
functions.
The normal [Basic] screen is also displayed as another tab on the screen.
(b) Default setting

Basic
(c) Setting item

Basic
I-27
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Quick Copy
(2) Shortcut Key 1/2

(a) Use
Selects whether to use the shortcut key.
Adds frequently used shortcut keys of auxiliary functions to the basic screen.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When this setting is set to ON, select auxiliary functions to get their shortcut keys displayed on the screen.
(3) Quick Settings 1, 2, 3, 4

(a) Use
Allows you to register setting conditions for frequently used copy functions and place them on the basic settings screen.
The registered setting condition can be invoked by only pressing the corresponding easy setting key.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When this setting is set to ON, select the copy functions you wish to register.
(4) Default Tab Density Settings

(a) Use
Specify whether to display the copy density setting in the basic settings screen. If [ON] is selected, you can press [Dark] or [Light] in the
basic settings screen to adjust the copy density.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
If [ON] is selected, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] cannot be specified.
5.2.2 Scan/Fax Settings

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted.
(1) Default Tab

(a) Use
To set the basic screen display in scan/fax mode.
(b) Default setting

Address Book
(c) Setting item
Address Search (LDAP)

Job History
Address Book
Direct Input
(2) Program Default

(a) Use
To set the default display for the program screen during scan/fax mode.
To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during scan/fax mode.
I-28
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

PAGE 1
(c) Setting item

Temporary One-Touch
PAGE1 to PAGE27
(3) Address Book Index Default

(a) Use
To set the default display for the address book screen during scan/fax mode.
To keep the default display instead of search string on the address book which frequently changes during scan/fax mode.
(b) Default setting

Favorite
(c) Setting item

Favorite
ABC to WXYZ
etc

(a) Use
Adds frequently used shortcut keys of auxiliary functions to the basic screen.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
(5) Default Address Book

(a) Use
Sets a default screen display for the scan/fax mode where the address book is set to be displayed.
(b) Default setting

Index
(c) Setting item

Index
Address Type
(6) Default Address Type

(a) Use
When the Default Address Book setting is set to Address Type, select an address type that is displayed as the default in the Address
Book tab.
(b) Default setting

Group
(c) Setting item
Fax
E-Mail
Box
I-Fax
IP Ad. Fax
PC(SMB)
FTP
WebDAV
Group
I-29
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.2.3 User Box Settings

(1) Default Tab
(a) Use
Selects a default tab display in the user box mode.
(b) Default setting

Public
(c) Setting item
Public
Personal
System
Group

(a) Use
Adds the shortcut keys of frequently used user box functions to the basic screen.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
5.2.4 Copy Screen

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, or authentication device 1 is mounted.
However, this menu is available when the key counter is installed and [The next job reservation] is set to License.
(1) Copy Operating Screen

(a) Use
To set the display on the control panel screen during printing.
Yes
The screen shows that the printing is being carried out. The job can be reserved with [Program Next Job].
No
The screen does not indicate the printing being carried out. The normal copy setting screen will be displayed. The copy
reservation is available.
(b) Default setting

No
(c) Setting item

Yes
No
5.2.5 Fax Active Screen

It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-508) is mounted.
It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, or authentication device 1 is mounted.
(1) TX Display
(a) Use
To set the screen display for the control panel when transmitting fax.
(b) Default setting

No
(c) Setting item

Yes
No
I-30
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) RX Display
(a) Use
To set the screen display on the control panel when receiving fax.
(b) Default setting

No
(c) Setting item

Yes
No
5.2.6 Color Selection Settings

(1) Use
Specifies a color that highlights a selection on the control panel.
(2) Default setting

Green
(3) Setting item
Green
Blue
Yellow
Pumpkin
5.2.7 Left Panel Display Default

(1) Use
Specifies an item that is shown as a default on the left panel display.
Job List (List Display)
Displays a list of jobs that are both being printed and waiting to be printed.
Job List (Status Display)
Displays the status of jobs that are being processed.
Check Job Settings
Displays the setting of the copy job that is being printed.
(2) Default setting

Job List
(3) Setting item

Job List
Check Job Settings
5.2.8 Search Option Settings

(1) Uppercase and Lowercase Letters
(a) Use
Select whether or not to differentiate between upper case and lowercase letters.
(b) Default setting

Differentiate
(c) Setting item

Differentiate
Do Not Differentiate
(2) Search Option Screen

(a) Use
Select whether or not to display [Uppercase and Lowercase Letters] setting in the advanced search.
Displaying the search option screen allows changing the search criteria for an individual search.
(b) Default setting

Off
(c) Setting item

On
Off
I-31
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.3 Copier Settings

5.3.1 Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple
It will be displayed only when the optional finisher is mounted.
(1) Use
To set whether to set the auto booklet when fold & staple is selected.
(2) Default setting

Auto Select Booklet
(3) Setting item

Auto Select Booklet
OFF
5.3.2 Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet

(1) Use
To set whether to select the appropriate magnification when combine or booklet is selected during auto paper select.
(2) Default setting

Auto Display Zoom Ratio
(3) Setting item

Auto Display Zoom Ratio
OFF
5.3.3 Auto Sort/Group Selection

(1) Use
Selects whether to use the auto sort/group selection function when a job has output of two or more sheets.
Yes
Automatically disables the Auto sort/group selection when a sheet of original is placed on the
ADF and the start key is pressed. Automatically enables the Auto sort/group selection when two
or more sheets of originals are placed on the ADF and the start key is pressed.
No
Disable the Auto sort/group selection.
(2) Default setting

Yes
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
5.3.4 Default Copy Settings

This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication devices is set to Set in the [Service Mode]
[Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice].
This menu is not available when the key counter is set or when a warning appears to inform that the vendors main power switch needs to
be checked or coins (a card) are not inserted under the condition where the vendor is set to Set in the [Service Mode] [Billing Setting]
[Management Function Choice].
(1) Use
To make default settings for the copy mode.
Current Setting
The settings made on the control panel before entering the setting menu screens are registered
as the default settings of copy functions.
Factory Default
The settings made at the time of shipment from the factory are registered as the default settings
of copy functions.
The machine is initialized at the following timings:

The main power switch is turned ON.
Panel is reset.
In an Interrupt mode.
Auto Reset
The password entry screen for account track is changed.
(2) Setting item

Current Setting
Factory Default
I-32
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.3.5 Default Enlarge Display Settings

Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] [User Settings] [Copier Settings] in the enlarge display mode.
(1) Use
To make default settings for the enlarge display mode.
Current Setting
as the default settings of copy functions.
Factory Default
of copy functions.

Panel is reset.
Auto Reset
(2) Setting item

Current Setting
Factory Default
5.3.6 When AMS Direction is Incorrect

(1) Use
To set whether to print when the original is set in different direction from the set paper during auto zoom select.
Print
To print according to the selected direction and size of paper
Delete Job
To display alarm and cancel the job
(2) Default setting

Print
(3) Setting item

Print
Delete Job
5.3.7 Separate Scan Output Method

(1) Use
To set the output mode at Separate Scan setting.
Page Print
Print consecutively during the read operation.
Batch print
Print all at once after reading all data.

Copy setting can be changed after the read operation.
(2) Default setting

Page Print
(3) Setting item

Page Print
Batch print
5.3.8 Enlargement Rotation

(1) Use
Sets whether to rotate images of which length is more than 297 mm in the main scan direction (in the horizontal direction on the ADF or
the Original glass) in the copying process.
Allow
Makes an enlargement rotation.
Restrict
Disables an enlargement rotation.
(2) Default setting

Restrict
(3) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
5.3.9 Auto Zoom (Platen)

I-33
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Use
To set whether to function the auto magnification when the feed tray is selected with document set on the original glass (excepting at
automatic paper selection mode.)
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
5.3.10 Auto Zoom (ADF)

(1) Use
To set whether to function the auto magnification when the feed tray is selected with document set on the ADF (excepting at automatic
paper selection mode.)
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
5.3.11 Specify Default Tray when APS Off

(1) Use
To set the tray to be used when APS is cancelled.
(2) Default setting

Tray Before APS OFF
(3) Setting item

Tray Before APS OFF
Default Tray
5.3.12 Select Tray for Insert Sheet

(1) Use
To select the default setting of the tray for cover sheet paper.
(2) Default setting

Tray 2
5.3.13 Half-Fold Specification

It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher SD-509 is installed in the finisher FS-527.
(1) Use
Specify whether to apply Half-Fold together for all pages or for each page when handling a job containing multiple pages.
When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are half-folded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected.
If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the Fold function setting is cancelled automatically, and the
sheets are printed without being folded.
(2) Default setting

Multiple Sheets
(3) Setting item

One Sheet at a Time
Multiple Sheets
I-34
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.3.14 Print Jobs During Copy Operation

(1) Use
To set whether to accept the printing job for print data or fax data during copy operation.
Accept
Receives the print data or fax data to print.
Receive Only
Print data or fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished.
(2) Default setting

Accept
(3) Setting item

Accept
Receive Only
5.3.15 Automatic Image Rotation

(1) Use
Sets whether to automatically rotate images to print if the original and specified paper directions are not consistent with each other.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
5.3.16 Finishing Program

(1) Use
Configure whether to display the Finishing Program button in the basic settings screen.
To display the button, register the contents of the finishing program.
Register frequently used finishing functions so that you can set them at once by using the button that appears in the basic settings screen.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When selecting ON, select the contents to be registered in the finishing program.
5.3.17 Card Shot Settings

(1) Layout
(a) Use
To set the initial copy layout setting in card shot mode.
(b) Default setting

Top/Bottom
(c) Setting item

Top/Bottom
Left/Right (Top Half)
Left/Right
(2) Zoom
(a) Use
To set the initial zoom setting in card shot mode.
I-35
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

Full Size
(c) Setting item

Full Size
x 1.0
(3) Store Original Size

(a) Use
To pre-register original sizes that are used in card shot mode.
(b) Procedure
Enter an original size, name it, and register the data.
5.4 Scan/Fax Settings

5.4.1 JPEG Compression Level
(1) Use
To set the JPEG compression method when scanning with JPEG while in scan/fax mode.
High Quality
Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning.
Standard
Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scanning.
High Compression
Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering the data volume while scanning.
(2) Default setting

Standard
(3) Setting item

High Quality
Standard
High Compression
5.4.2 Black Compression Level

(1) Use
To set the black compression method for scanning in the black mode while in scan/fax mode.
(2) Default setting

MMR
(3) Setting item

MH
MMR
5.4.3 TWAIN Lock Time

(1) Use
To set the period of time for unlocking the operation panel while in TWAIN scanning.
(2) Default setting

120 sec.
(3) Setting range

30 to 300 sec.
5.4.4 Default Scan/Fax Settings

This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication devices is set to set in the [Service Mode]
[Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice].
This menu is not available when the key counter is set or when a warning appears to inform that the vendors main power switch needs to
be checked or coins (a card) are not inserted under the condition where the vendor is set to Set in the [Service Mode] [Billing Setting]
(1) Use
To make default settings for the fax/scan mode.
Current Setting
as the default settings of fax/scan functions.
Factory Default
of fax/scan functions.
I-36
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Panel is reset.
Auto Reset
(2) Setting item

Current Setting
Factory Default
5.4.5 Default Enlarge Display Settings

Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] [User Settings] [Scan/Fax Settings] in the enlarge display mode.
(1) Use
To make default settings for the enlarge display mode.
Current Setting
as the default settings of fax/scan functions.
Factory Default
of fax/scan functions.

Panel is reset.
Auto Reset
(2) Setting item

Current Setting
Factory Default
5.4.6 Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level

(1) Use
Selects a compression method applied to scanned data that is produced with the use of Compact PDF/XPS in the scan/fax mode.
High Quality
Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning.
Standard
Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scanning.
High Compression
Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering the data volume while scanning.
(2) Default setting

Standard
(3) Setting item

High Quality
Standard
High Compression
5.4.7 Color TIFF Type

(1) Use
Select the compression level used for saving TIFF format data in color.
TIFF (TTN2)
Scan in TTN2.
TIFF (modified TAG)
Scan in modified TAG.
(2) Default setting

TIFF (TTN2)
(3) Setting item

TIFF (TTN2)
TIFF (modified TAG)
5.4.8 OCR Operation Setting

It will be displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-105) is activated.
(1) Use
To set the method of OCR operation where a searchable PDF file is created.
I-37
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

Prioritize Quality
(3) Setting item

Prioritize Quality
Prioritize Speed
5.4.9 Graphic Outlining

(1) Use
To set the precision of outline conversion where outline PDFs are created.
To set the processing level where scanned document is divided into text areas and image areas and the text is converted to outlines.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item
OFF
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
5.5 Printer Settings

5.5.1 Basic Settings
(1) PDL Setting
(a) Use
To set the PDL (Page Description Language) for PC printing.
(b) Default setting

Auto
(c) Setting item

Auto
PCL
PS
(2) Number of Copies

(a) Use
To set the number to be copied when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
To use when the number cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
(b) Default setting

1
(c) Setting range

1 to 9999
(3) Original Direction

(a) Use
To set the default setting for the direction of the original during PC printing.
(b) Default setting

Portrait
(c) Setting item

Portrait
Landscape
(4) Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP

(a) Use
To set whether to store the print data to HDD when receiving the next job during RIP process of the current job.
(b) Default setting

OFF
I-38
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(5) A4/A3 LTR/LGR Auto Switch

(a) Use
To set whether to switch between A4 and Letter (8 1/ x 11) size paper, and A3 and Ledger (11 x 17) size paper in reading.
2
NOTE
When switching the size, the image will be printed in the same magnification.
The image will not be reduced when there is image deficiency.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(6) Banner Sheet Setting

(a) Use
To set whether or not to print on the banner (front cover) page.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(7) Binding Direction Adjustment

(a) Use
Specifies the alignment between the sides of paper (binding position adjustment) in duplex printing.
To achieve faster printing performance, select Productivity Priority. To address misalignment problems between sides of copies in the
horizontal and vertical directions, select Finishing Priority.
Finishing Priority
Able to optimize sides aligning operation as the process is performed after the machine
receives all of the print data.
Productivity Priority
Able to accelerate print speed as sides alignment proceeds together with data reception and
print operation.
Control Adjustments
Comply with the command from the printer driver and does not take the side alignment step.
(b) Default setting

Finishing Priority
(c) Setting item

Finishing Priority
Control Adjustments
(8) Line Width Adjustment

(a) Use
To correct line width of the output data during PC print.
(b) Default setting

Thin
(c) Setting item

Thin
Normal
Thick
(9) Gray Background Text Correction

(a) Use
Letters or lines on a gray background may look thicker than those on a non-gray background.
ON
Makes characters and lines on a grayscale background thicker and sharpens the outlines of characters and figures.
I-39
bizhub 423/363/283/223
OFF
Makes grayscale background text correction by selecting Thin, Normal, or Thick in [Line Width Adjustment]. If selecting
ON makes lines too thick, select OFF.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
5.5.2 Paper Setting

(1) Paper Tray
(a) Use
To set the paper feed tray when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
To use when paper feed tray cannot be specified by the printer driver when printing from Windows DOS, etc.
(b) Default setting

Auto
(2) Paper Size

(a) Use
To set the paper size when not specified by the printer diver during printing.
To use when the paper size cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
(3) 2-Sided Print

(a) Use
To set whether to carry out duplex print during PC printing when not specified by the printer driver.
To use when 2-sided printing cannot be specified by the printer driver while printing by Windows DOS, etc.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(4) Binding Position

(a) Use
To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing by Windows DOS, etc.
(b) Default setting

Left Bind
(c) Setting item

Top Bind
Left Bind
Right Bind
(5) Staple
It will be displayed only when the optional finisher is mounted.
(a) Use
To set whether to staple or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
To use hen staple is not specified by the printer driver during printing by the Windows DOS, etc.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

1 Position
2 Position
OFF
I-40
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(6) Punch
It will be displayed only when the optional finisher and punch kit are mounted.
(a) Use
To select whether to make punch-holes or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
To use when the printer driver cannot specify punching during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

2-Hole *
3-Hole *
4-Hole *
NOTE
*The number of punch holes being set is available from [Service Mode] [Finisher].
OFF
(7) Banner Paper Tray

(a) Use
To set the feed tray for printing on the banner (front cover) page.
(b) Default setting

Auto
5.5.3 PCL Settings

(1) Font Settings
(a) Use
To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
It can be selected from the Resident font or the download font.
(b) Procedure
1. When selecting from the Internal font, touch [Internal], and select the one from the displayed font list.
(c) Default setting

Courier
(2) Symbol Set

(a) Use
To set the font symbol set when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
To use when the font symbol set cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
(b) Default setting

Roman-8 or PC8, Code Page 437
(3) Font Size

(a) Use
To set the font size when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
To set the font size when it cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
To set scalable font (: Point) and bitmap font (: Pitch) respectively.
(b) Default setting

Scalable Font : 12.00 points
Bitmap Font : 10.00 pitch
(4) Line/Page
(a) Use
To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data.
(b) Default setting

60 or 64 lines
NOTE
Default setting value differs depending on the values by the following two different settings.
[Utility/Counter] [User Setting] [Printer Setting] [Basic Setting] [Original Direction]
I-41
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[Utility/Counter] [User Setting] [Printer Setting] [Paper Setting] [Default Paper Size]
(c) Setting range

5 to 128
(5) CR/LF Mapping

(a) Use
To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data.
Mode 1
CR CR-LF LF=LF FF=FF
Mode 2
CR=CR LFCR-LF FFCR-FF
Mode 3
CRCR-LF LFCR-LF FFCR-FF
OFF
Does not replace
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
OFF
5.5.4 PS Setting
(1) Print PS Errors
(a) Use
To set whether to print or not the error information when an error occurred during PS rasterizing.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
5.5.5 XPS Settings

(1) Verify XPS Digital Signature
(a) Use
Selects whether to verify digital signatures attached to XPS (XML Paper Specification) files when printing the files.
When digital signature verification is selected, files with invalid digital signatures are not printed.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
5.5.6 Print Reports

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or vendor is mounted.
(1) Use
To output the report or demo page concerning the print setting.
To check the setting concerning the printer.
The types of report available for output are as follows.
Configuration Page
The list of printer setting will be output.
Demo Page
The test page will be output.
PCL Font List
PCL font list will be output.
PS Font List
PS font list will be output.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [User Setting] [Printer Setting] [Print Reports].
2. Select the report to be output.
3. Select the feed tray.
I-42
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. Select simplex or duplex print, and touch the Start key.
5.5.7 TIFF Image Paper Setting

(1) Use
Select this option to configure how to determine the paper size when directly printing TIFF or JPEG image data.
Auto
Select this option to calculate the size of the image based on its resolution and the number of
pixels to print the image on paper that fits the image size.
Select this option to print images on paper of the same size as the image.
Priority Paper Size
Select this option to print on paper of the priority paper size specified on the machine. If the
image size is larger than the paper size, it is automatically reduced.
NOTE
When Auto is selected and paper larger than the image size is not in the paper trays, paper size error occurs.
(2) Default setting

Auto
(3) Setting item

Auto
Priority Paper Size
5.6 Change Password

When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete.
This menu is available only when box administrator authentication is established during user authentication or account track.
5.6.1 Use
To modify the password used for the user authentication.
5.6.2 Procedure
Enter the user authentication password with the keys on the control panel.
1. Current Password : Enter the user authentication password currently used.
2. New Password : Enter the new user authentication password to be used.
3. Retype Password : Enter the new user authentication password again.
NOTE
When [Password Rules] which can be displayed by the following setting is set to ON, password using the single letter or the
password same with the previous one, less than 8-digit will not be modified.
[Utility/Counter] [Administrator Settings] [Security Setting]
When the following setting is set to ON, entering the incorrect password three times will cause access lock. When an access
lock occurred, turn the main power switch OFF, and wait for 10 seconds or more and turn main power switch ON again to enter
the password again.
[Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Enhanced Security Mode]
5.7 Change E-mail Address

When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete.
5.7.1 Use
To modify the e-mail address which is registered as a user.
5.7.2 Procedure
Enter the new e-mail address using the keys on the control panel.
5.8 Change Icon

When conducting user authentication, it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete.
5.8.1 Use
Change the icon specified as registered user information.
5.8.2 Procedure
Select the icon and press [OK].
5.9 Register Authentication Settings

It will be displayed when user authentication (MFP) is completed and the following is met; [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] is set to
Allow in [Utility/Counter] [Administrator Settings] [System Settings] [Restrict User Access] [Restrict Access to Job Settings].
I-43
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.9.1 Use
To enable users to register or delete their own biometric/IC card information.
5.10 Register Authentication Settings-Default Application Selection

It will be displayed only when the intermediate authentication server is used for user authentication and user authentication is completed.
However, it cannot be displayed depending on the setting of the application side.
5.10.1 Use
For each user, set the application that is started just after the intermediate authentication.
5.10.2 Procedure
As the applications registered in MFP appear, select an application you wish to set as the one to be started at the beginning, and touch
[OK].
5.11 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting

5.11.1 Link File Error Notification
It will be displayed only when the optional local interface kit EK-605 is mounted.
(1) Use
To set whether to print a job where a link error occurs when you are trying to print a web page and its links (page or file) from a cellular
phone or PDA.
(2) Default setting

Yes
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
5.11.2 Proxy Server Use

(1) Use
To set whether to use a proxy server when communicating with a cellular phone or PDA.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
5.11.3 Print Settings

(1) Use
To set different print settings used when printing from a cell phone or PDA.
(2) Procedure
The following items can be set.
Basic : 1-sided/2-sided, Finishing
Application : Page Margin, Stamp/Composition
I-44
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS)

Administrator Settings-Outline
The Administrator Settings will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the Administrator Settings or Service
Mode. (The administrator password is initially set to 12345678.)
NOTE
When the following setting is set to ON, entering the incorrect administrator password three times will cause access lock.
The access lock is released after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the main power switch is turned OFF and then
ON more than 10 seconds later.
The access lock can be released by touching keys as follows.
[Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [Administrator unlocking]
6.1 System Settings-Power Save Settings

6.1.1 Low Power Mode Settings
(1) Use
To set the time until low power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed.
Low power: To turn LED and LCD OFF, and lower the power consumption.
(2) Procedure
(3) Default setting

15 min.
(4) Setting range

2 to 240
6.1.2 Sleep Mode Settings

(1) Use
To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed.
Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control.
OFF will only be displayed when [Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting] in Service Mode is set.
NOTE
The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to OFF.
(2) Procedure
(3) Default setting

20 min.
(4) Setting item

2 to 240
OFF
6.1.3 Power Save Key

(1) Use
To set the type of the power save mode which starts by pressing the Power Save key.
(2) Default setting

Low Power
(3) Setting item

Low Power
Sleep
6.1.4 Enter Power Save Mode

(1) Use
To set whether to immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of receiving the fax/PC print during power save mode.
Normal
Switches to the power save mode according to the normal power save mode after the printing.
Immediately
Switches to the power save mode immediately after the printing.
(2) Default setting

Immediately
I-45

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting item

Normal
Immediately
6.1.5 Auto Power OFF Setting

NOTE
This function is used only in the Europe area. However, it is limited to the machine by which it was equipped with the main power
switch (A2WUM600**) corresponding to "AUTO POWER OFF SETTING."
(1) Use
To specify the time when the main power switch should be automatically turned off.
(2) Default setting

Yes (20:00)
(3) Setting item

Yes
OFF
NOTE
If you select "Yes", specify the time when the main power switch should be turned off.
6.2 System Settings-Output Settings

6.2.1 Print/Fax Output Settings
(1) Use
To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or fax received.
Batch Print
Starts printing when all data are received
Page Print
Starts printing every time data for each page are received
(2) Default setting

Printer : Page Print
Fax : Batch Print
NOTE
[FAX] will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-508) is mounted.
(3) Setting item

Batch Print
Page Print
6.2.2 Output Tray Settings

It will be displayed when the optional finisher FS-527 or the job separator JS-505 is mounted.
(1) Use
To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print Reports).
(2) Default setting

Copy : Tray 2
Print : Tray 2
Report Output : Tray 1
Fax : Tray 1
NOTE
[Tray 3] will be displayed only when the job separator JS-603 is mounted to the finisher FS-527.
6.2.3 Shift Output Each Job

It will be displayed when the optional finisher FS-527/529 or the job separator JS-505 is mounted.
(1) Use
To set whether to offset each job when paper is printed using the finisher.
Some paper type may fail to be discharged or get deteriorated loading when large volume copies are printed using the finisher. This
function is used to print large volume copies when finisher is mounted. (When this function is set to No, the paper is discharged without
offsetting the paper to the center of the tray.)
(2) Default setting

Yes
(3) Setting item

Yes
I-46

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No
6.3 Date/Time Settings

6.3.1 Use
To set the date/time and the time zone to start the clock.
This setting should be carried out for set up.
6.3.2 Procedure
For time zone, set the time difference with the world standard time.
Setting range for the time zone: -12:00 to +12:00 (by 30 minutes)
When the following setting is set to ON, [Set Data] will be displayed. Touch [Set Data] and modify the time.
[Administrator Settings] [Network Settings] [Detail Settings] [Time Adjustment Setting]
6.4 System Settings-Daylight Saving Time

6.4.1 Use
To set whether to set the daylight saving time.
To set the time difference in setting the daylight saving time.
6.4.2 Default setting

No
6.4.3 Setting item

Yes
No
NOTE
When setting to Yes, set the time difference to move up.
The default setting : 60 min.
Setting range : 1 to 150
6.5 System Settings-Weekly Timer Settings

6.5.1 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
(1) Use
To set whether to use or not to use the weekly timer.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.5.2 Time Settings

(1) Use
To set the time to turn ON/OFF the weekly timer for each day of the week.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch the key of the day to be set.
2. Using the 10-key pad, input the ON time and the OFF time.
3. For cancelling the setting, press [Clear].
6.5.3 Date Settings

(1) Use
To select the date or the day of the week for the weekly timer to function.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Year/Month with [+] / [-] keys.

For setting by the date, touch the appropriate key of the day.
For setting by the day of the week, touch the appropriate key of the week by [Daily Setting].
Check to make sure that the set key of the day is highlighted, and touch [OK].
6.5.4 Select Time for Power Save

(1) Use
To set the time to turn power OFF/ON when the weekly timer is set and the power is ON.
I-47

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
NOTE
Set Time for Power Save : When Yes is selected, using the 10-key pad, input the time to turn OFF and to turn back ON again.
6.5.5 Password for Non-Business Hours

(1) Use
To set whether to input the password before using when the weekly timer is set.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
NOTE
When setting to Yes, enter the password (eight digits).
6.6 System Settings-Restrict User Access

6.6.1 Copy Program Lock Settings
(1) Use
To set the prohibition for modifying the registered copy program.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch the key for the appropriate copy program.
2. Touch [OK].
6.6.2 Delete Saved Copy Program

(1) Use
To delete the registered program job.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch the appropriate program job.
2. Touch [Delete].
3. Touch [Yes] on the check screen to delete the program job.
6.6.3 Restrict Access to Job Settings

(1) Changing Job Priority
It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor 2 is mounted.
(a) Use
To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the print priority for the job.
(b) Default setting

Allow
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
(2) Delete Other User Jobs

(a) Use
To set whether to allow or restrict job delete by other users when the user is authenticated.
(b) Default setting

Restrict
I-48

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
(3) Registering and Changing Addresses

(a) Use
To set whether to allow or restrict the change of the registered address.
(b) Default setting

Allow
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
NOTE
[Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to ON.
(4) Changing Zoom Ratio

(a) Use
To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification.
(b) Default setting

Allow
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
(5) Change the From Address

(a) Use
To set whether or not to prohibit the registered from address to be changed.
(b) Default setting

Allow
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
(6) Change Registered Overlay

(a) Use
Selects allow or restrict for the change of registered overlay.
(b) Default setting

Allow
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
(7) Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration

It will be displayed only when both of the following are met: Authentication Device 2 is selected in [Service Mode] [Billing Setting]
[User Authentication] is set to ON (MFP) in [Administrator Settings] [User Authentication/Account Track] [General Settings].
(a) Use
Allow or restrict the registration or deletion of authentication information.
(b) Default setting

Allow
I-49

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
6.6.4 Restrict Operation

(1) Restrict Broadcasting
(a) Use
To set whether or not to prohibit sending the fax to more than one address.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.7 System Settings-Expert Adjustment

Expert Adjustment
(It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX
assignment. [Service Mode] [System 2] [Software Switch Setting])
6.7.1 AE Level Adjustment

(1) Use
To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) the larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be.
To make the background level foggier : Increase the setting value
To make the background level less foggy : Decrease the setting value
(2) Default setting

2
(3) Setting range

0 to 4
6.7.2 Printer Adjustment-Leading Edge Adjustment

It will not be displayed if the management device 1 is OFF or authentication is not made while [Management Device 1] is selected in
[Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice].
This adjustment is unavailable if the key counter is not inserted although only the key counter is selected in [Service Mode] [Billing
Setting] [Management Function Choice].
(1) Use
To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types.
(to adjust the timing starting from the roller connection up to start of transfer output)
The adjustment is made for the paper feed from the manual bypass tray, but the changes made with this adjustment are applied to every
paper feed tray.
The PH unit has been replaced.
The paper type has been changed.
The print image deviates in the sub scan direction.
A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper, thick 1/1+, thick 2, transparencies, and envelopes.
(2) Setting range
Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.
Specifications
4.2 0.5 mm
Setting range
-3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)
(3) Procedure
1. Place A3 paper on the manual bypass tray.
I-50

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Printer Adjustment] [Leading Edge Adjustment].
Select the [Normal].
Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again.
If width A falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
Following the same procedure, adjust for thick 1 to 3, OHP, and envelope.
6.7.3 Printer Adjustment-Centering

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no
authentication is set.
This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to set by [Service Mode] [Billing Setting]
(1) Use
To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source.
A paper feed unit has been added.
The print image deviates in the main scan direction.
(2) Setting range

A
Width A on the test print produced should fall within the following range.
Specifications
3.0 0.5 mm
Setting range
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Printer Adjustment] [Centering].
Select the paper source to be adjusted.
Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the bypass.)
6.7.4 Printer Adjustment-Leading Edge Adjustment: Duplex Side 2

(1) Use
Makes an adjustment by changing the image write start position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd side of duplex printing for plain
paper. (to adjust the timing starting from the roller connection up to start of transfer output)
When the 2nd side image on paper fed from the tray is shifted in the sub scan direction.
This adjustment is available only for plain paper.
I-51

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Setting range
Backside
For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test print.
Specifications
4.2 0.5 mm
Setting range
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Printer Adjustment] [Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex side 2)].
6.7.5 Printer Adjustment-Centering: Duplex 2nd Side

(1) Use
To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-sided mode.
The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.
(2) Setting range

A
Backside
For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test print.
Specifications
3.0 0.5 mm
Setting range
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Printer Adjustment] [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)].
Check the dimension of width A on the test print on the backside of the copy.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the manual bypass tray.)
6.7.6 Printer Adjustment-Erase Leading Edge

I-52

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [Administrator Feature Level]
(1) Use
To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.
To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper.
To make this setting independently for Front and Back sides.
(2) Default setting

4 mm
(3) Setting item

4 mm
5 mm
7 mm
6.7.7 Printer Adjustment-Vertical Adjustment

(1) Use
To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed.
The printed image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk).
When the printed image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction.
Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper, thick 1/1+, thick 2 or envelope.
(2) Setting range
A
B
Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges.
NOTE
Width A: equivalent to one grid
Width B: equivalent to 48 grids
Specifications
A: 7.9 to 8.3
B: 389.1 to 392.1
Setting range
A: -7 to +7
B: -7 to +7
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Load manual bypass tray with A3 or 11 x 17 plain paper.

Touch these keys in this order: [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Vertical Adjustment].
Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.
Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test pattern.
If width of A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] keys.
If width A or B is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
If width A or B is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern again.
Check width A and width B on the test pattern.
If width A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting value and make a check again.
If width A or B falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
Following the same procedure, adjust for thick and envelope.
6.7.8 Printer Adjustment-Media Adjustment

(1) Use
Adjust the image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type.
This function is provided to open [Transfer Voltage Fine Adj] of Service Mode up to administrator and the fine-adjusted value is reflected
in the Service Mode setting.
To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
Pressing the [AUTO] key down activates the image transfer amperage upper and lower limit control. In this case, the machine uses the
voltage determined by the transfer voltage control and the image transfer output fine adjustment value does not take effect.
I-53

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

AUTO
(3) Setting item

-8 to +7 (Step: 1)
AUTO
(4) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Expert Adjustment] [Printer Adjustment] [Media Adjustment].
3. Select the side of the image (1st side or 2nd side), on which the transfer failure occurs.
NOTE
For envelopes, OHP film and thick paper, only 1st side can be selected.
4. Select the paper type with the transfer failure.
5. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] keys.
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), increase the setting value.
To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), decrease the setting value.
6. Touch [OK] to validate the adjustment value.
7. Check the print image for any image problem.
NOTE
To automatically control the image transfer output without using the 2nd image transfer output fine adjustment value, press
[AUTO].
6.7.9 Finisher Adjustment-Center Staple Position

(1) Use
Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple function.
(2) Setting range
Width A should fall within the following range.

Specifications
0 1.0 mm
Setting range
-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(3) Procedure
NOTE
After half-fold position adjustment, make this center staple position adjustment.
1. Place five sheets of originals on the ADF.
2. Make a set of copy in the saddle stitching mode.
3. Check the amount of horizontal deviation (width A) between the staple and the half fold positions on the set of copy.
4. If width A is out of the specified range, make the following adjustment.
6. Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Finisher Adjustment] [Center Staple Position].
7. Touch the paper size where staple position is adjusted.
8. Look at the copy and adjust the staple position with the [+] / [-] key.
9. Touch [OK].
10. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width A.
6.7.10 Finisher Adjustment-Half-Fold Position

(1) Use
Use this adjustment to adjust the half-fold position in half-fold printing.
I-54

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Setting range

A
Exit direction

Specifications
0 1.0 mm
Setting range
-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Place two sheets of originals on the ADF.

Make a copy in the folding mode.
Fold the copies along the crease.
Measure the amount of width A.
If width A is out of the specified range, make the following adjustment.
Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Finisher Adjustment] [Half-Fold Position].
Touch the paper size where half-fold position is adjusted.
Look at the copy and adjust the half-fold position with the [+] / [-] key.
10. Touch [OK].

11. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width A.
6.7.11 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment

(1) Use
To change the horizontal position of the punch holes.
(2) Setting range
Width B should fall within the following range.

Specifications
9.5 mm 1.0 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm 1.0 mm (2-4 hole)

10.5 mm 1.0 mm (SWE4 hole)
Setting range
-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Make a copy sample in the punch mode.

Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the specified range.
Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Finisher Adjustment] [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment].
Touch the paper type where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
Look at the copy and adjust the punch horizontal position with the [+] / [-] key.
To make width B greater: Enter the value of [+]
To make width B smaller: Enter the value of [-]
I-55

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. Touch [OK].
8. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width B.
6.7.12 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment

(1) Use
Adjusts the punch loop size used for paper exited from the main body.
To address problems such as misaligned punch holes, wrinkled paper, and jam at the punch registration section.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Finisher Adjustment] [Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment].
Touch the paper size where punch regist loop size is adjusted.
Set the correction value using the [+] / [-] keys.
Misaligned punched holes: Enter the value of [+]
Wrinkled paper: Enter the value of [-]
5. Touch [OK].
6.7.13 Finisher Adjustment-Paper Alignment Plate Settings

(1) Use
Fine adjusts the paper alignment plate that aligns ejected paper when FS-529 is installed.
(2) Default setting

0.0 mm
(3) Setting range

(4) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Finisher Adjustment] [Paper Alignment Plate Settings].
Select the [Paper Alignment Plate Pos.(Back)] or [Paper Alignment Plate Pos.(Front)].
Touch [OK].
6.7.14 Paper Separation Adjustment

(1) Use
For duplex printing, the paper separation position is adjusted for the first and second sides of paper.
To adjust the balance between paper separation and image transfer performances by changing the paper separation position in duplex
printing.
(2) Default setting

0
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Paper Separation Adjustment].
Select [Front] or [Back].
Change the setting value with [+] or [-] key.
Priority on paper separation performance: Increase the setting value
Priority on image transfer performance: Decrease the setting value
5. Touch [OK] to determine the adjusted value.
6. Make a print and check the image.
6.7.15 Gradation Adjustment

This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] [Billing Setting]
I-56

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Use
To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the scanner.
Use this adjustment when reproduction of gradations and density has deteriorated.
The drum unit, developer or developing unit has been replaced.
The density of solid image can change depending on the variations in developing, light
intensity of the exposure lamp, and PC drum sensitivity as well as the changes in the
amount of electrostatic charge of toner due to the ambient environment and duration of
machine use. To prevent the change, the amount of toner adhered to paper is read by the
scanner and in accordance with the result, Vdc is adjusted. Perform this adjustment before
the Gradation Adjustment.
The gradations are corrected.
Initialization
The current gradation correction table (Items adjusted in [Gradation Adjustment]) and the
difference value of Vdc (Items adjusted in [Maximum Density Adjustment]) are cleared.
After selecting [Initialization] [Initialize], if you press the Start key, initialization starts.
(2) Procedure
1. Load plain paper of A3/11 x 17 or A4/8 1/ x 11 into the paper feed tray.
2
2. Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Gradation Adjustment].
3. Touch [Maximum Density Adjustment], select the paper size, and press the Start key.
A test pattern is output.
4. Place the test pattern produced on the original glass.
A3/11 x 17
A4/8 1/ x 11
2
5. Place ten blank paper on the test pattern and close the original cover.
6. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
7. Touch [Gradation Adjustment], select the paper size, and press the Start key.
A3/11 x 17
A4/8 1/ x 11
2
I-57

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.
10.
11.
Place ten blank paper on the test pattern and close the original cover.
Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
Repeat steps from 7 through 10 twice (a total of three times).
If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.
6.7.16 Scanner Area

Use the following test chart for the adjustment of the scanner section.
If the test chart is not available, a scale may be used instead.
This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] [Billing Setting]
Adjustment item
Ref.
A: Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge Adjustment
I.6.7.17 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge
B: Scanner Adjustment: Centering
I.6.7.18 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Centering
C: Horizontal Adjustment
I.6.7.19 Scanner Area-Horizontal Adjustment
D: Vertical Adjustment
I.6.7.20 Scanner Area-Vertical Adjustment
6.7.17 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge

(1) Use
To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale
by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
When the original glass is replaced.
When the original width scale is replaced.
The scanner home sensor has been replaced.
(2) Setting range
Magnified view of the test chart
A=20 mm
A width on the test chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the specifications
shown below.
I-58

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment.
Specifications
0.5 mm
Setting range
-3.0 to +3.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge].
Position the test chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.
Press the Start key to make a copy.
Check point A on the image of the test print.
If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
If the copy image is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
If the copy image exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
7. Press the Start key to make another test print.
8. Check the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
6.7.18 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Centering

(1) Use
To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of scanner parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main
scan direction.
When the CCD unit is replaced.
(2) Setting range

B=20 mm
B width on the test chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the specifications
shown below.
An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment.
Specifications
1.0 mm
Setting range
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment: Centering].
Check point B on the image of the test print.
If the copy image is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
If the copy image exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
8. Check point B of the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
6.7.19 Scanner Area-Horizontal Adjustment

(1) Use
To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section.
The CCD unit has been replaced.
I-59

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Setting range
9pt.
14pt.

8pt.
12pt.
18pt.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10pt.
Measure C width on the test chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Vertical Adjustment] of the printer adjustment.
Specifications
1.0 mm
Setting range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment] [Horizontal Adjustment].
Press the Start key to make a test print.
Check the C width on the image of the test print.
If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on test chart, increase the setting.
If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting.
6.7.20 Scanner Area-Vertical Adjustment

(1) Use
To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section.
The exposure unit/LED exposure unit has been replaced.
The scanner motor has been replaced.
The scanner drive cables have been replaced.
(2) Setting range

Measure D width on the test chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Vertical Adjustment] of the printer adjustment.
Specifications
1.5 mm
Setting range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment] [Vertical Adjustment].
Check the D width on the image of the test print.
If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart, increase the setting.
If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on test chart, decrease the setting.
I-60

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.7.21 ADF Adjustment

6.7.22 ADF Adjustment-Centering

(1) Use
To adjust the read position in the main scanning direction.
When the result is Unable in the [Centering Auto Adjustment].
When ADF has been replaced.
(2) Setting range
The difference in the widths of A between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications
0 2.0 mm
Setting range
-3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
Make a full size copy of the chart.
Check that the difference in the widths of A between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range.
Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [ADF Adjustment] [Centering].
Look at the copy and make adjustment with the [+] / [-] key.
If the difference in the widths of A is greater than the specifications, enter the [+] value.
If the difference in the widths of A is smaller than the specifications, enter the [-] value.
7. Touch [OK].
8. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of A falls within the specified range.
6.7.23 ADF Adjustment-Original Stop Position

(1) Use
To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF modes.
When the result is Unable in the [Auto Adj. of Stop Position].
(2) Setting range

B
The difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications
0 2.0 mm
Setting range
-4.0 mm to +4.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(3) Procedure
1. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
2. Make a full size copy of the chart.
NOTE
In the same way place the chart with the blank side facing up in the document feed tray in the duplex mode and make a
copy. Check the difference in the widths of a between the chart and the second sided surface of the copy sample.
3. Check that the difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range.
I-61

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

5. Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [ADF Adjustment] [Original Stop position].
6. Look at the copy and adjust [Front] or [Back] with the [+] / [-] key.
If the difference in the widths of B is greater than the specifications, enter the [+] value.
If the difference in the widths of B is smaller than the specifications, enter the [-] value.
7. Touch [OK].
8. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of B falls within the specified range.
6.7.24 ADF Adjustment-Centering Auto Adjustment

(1) Use
To automatically adjust the read position in the main scanning direction.
(2) Procedure
2. Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [ADF Adjustment] [Centering Auto Adjustment].
5. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [New].
6. Touch [Close].
NOTE
If the result is Unable:
Check and correct the skew of the document.
Manually correct the value of [Original Stop Position].
6.7.25 ADF Adjustment-Auto Adj. of Stop Position

(1) Use
To automatically adjust the read position for the Sub Scanning Direction.
To check skew feed.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [ADF Adjustment] [Auto Adj. of Stop Position].
Touch [Front] or [Back].
Place the chart in the document feed tray.
[Front]: Set the chart with its arrow side facing upward.
[Back]: Set the chart with its blank side facing upward.
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [New].
7. Touch [Close].
NOTE
6.7.26 Line Detection-Prior Detection Setting

(1) Use
To set whether or not to perform pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.
To set the detection level of the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.
To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected.
Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the
lines.
TYPE1
Warning will be displayed by the maintenance mark. (warning code: D-1)
TYPE2
Warning will be displayed on the message area on the basic screen.
TYPE3
Warning will be displayed on all screens.
OFF
Warning will not be displayed.
Use when changing the detection level for the pre-detection of stain on the original glass.
Low
Stain on the glass will not be detected easily.
Normal
Normal detection level
High
Stain on the glass will easily be detected.
I-62

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

Yes
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
NOTE
[Warning Level] and [Detection Level] can be set when Yes is selected.
Warning Level
Detection Level
Default setting
TYPE2
Setting item
Default setting
Std.
Setting item
Low
Std.
High
TYPE1
TYPE2
TYPE3
OFF
Be aware that selecting No and performing the pre-detection with the following setting will display NG.
[Service Mode] [Machine] [ADF Scan Glass Contamination]
When No is selected, the original glass cleaning operation after the job ends does not operate.
6.7.27 Line Detection-Feed Cleaning Settings

(1) Use
To set the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
Use when changing the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
Do not remove
Cleaning is not conducted as the cleaning brush does not rotate.
Remove
Glass is cleaned with the cleaning brush rotating at one original intermittent.
(2) Default setting

Remove
(3) Setting item

Remove
Do not remove
6.7.28 User Paper Settings

(1) Use
To set and register individual user paper that includes different basic weight and transfer output fine adjustment data.
To register a paper type that is suitable for customers intended use and use environment.
The feature available from [Service Mode] [System 2] [User Paper Settings] is extended to Administrator. However, the fusing
temperature setting is not possible in Administrator Settings.
The user paper registration keys and corresponding paper types are as follows:
User Paper 1, 2 : Plain paper
User Paper 3 : Thick 1
User Paper 4 : Thick 2
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Forward] [User Paper Settings].
Select the desired key from [User Paper 1] to [User Paper 4] to register user paper.
Select [Basic Weight] and enter a value with the [+] / [-] key.
Select one from the following; [Media Front] or [Media Back]. Enter a transfer output value with the [+] / [-] key.
Setting range: -7 to +8 (1 step: 1 increment or decrement)
Touch [Print Interval Extension], and set the Print Interval Extension mode.
Load the tray with A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S paper.
Touch [Test Pattern Output]. Specify a paper feed tray and select either 1st side or 2nd side.
Press the Start key and check the image of the output test pattern. If the image is not acceptable, adjust the settings, output and check a
test pattern again.
(3) Test pattern in user paper settings

The printable test pattern for user paper settings is provided to ease determining the most appropriate transfer output value used when
customizing user paper.
This test pattern changes output voltage as shown below based on the standard voltage A (voltage determined by the image transfer auto
transfer voltage control) on a sheet of paper.
I-63

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A +600 V
A +400 V
A +200 V
A 0V
A -200 V
A -400 V
A -600 V
A: standard voltage
6.7.29 Erase Adjustment-Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings

(1) Use
Configure Non-Image Area operation settings.
Auto
Automatically detects the background density of the original, and selects either [Bevel] or
[Rectangular] accordingly.
Specify
Allows you to manually specify an erase method and original density. As an erase method, select
[Bevel] or [Rectangular]. Specify an original density from five levels.
(2) Default setting

Specify
(3) Setting item

Auto
Specify
6.7.30 Maximum Density Adjustment

(1) Use
After completing Gradation Adjustment, supplementarily make a manual fine-adjustment of Vdc to change the maximum amount of toner
to be adhered to paper so that the gradation and density are adjusted to the target reproduction level.
Use this adjustment if [Maximum Density Adjustment] provided in the [Gradation Adjustment] does not help to obtain the target density.
The function provided in [Service Mode] [Image Process Adjustment] [Max Image Density Adj] is made available to the
administrator. However, the adjustable range is limited to 5 levels in the Administrator Settings.
(2) Default setting

0
(3) Setting range

-2 to +2 (step: 1*)
*: 1 step is the equivalent of 0.02 of difference in density.
(4) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Administrator Settings.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Forward] [Maximum Density Adjustment].
Select [Light] or [Dark] to change its setting.
Check that printed image has no problem.
6.7.31 Drum Dry

(1) Use
To rotate the PC motor to remove condensation from around the PC drum.
Use this function when a quick change in room temperature occurs or image failure occurs due to condensation around the PC drum
under a very humid condition.
Use this function when the developer or the developing unit is replaced.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Administrator Settings.

Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Forward] [Drum Dry].
Press the Start key to start Drum Dry. To cancel the operation, press the Stop key.
When Drum Dry is completed, a message appears.
6.7.32 Replenish Toner

(1) Use
If many copies of high density original reduce the T/C ratio and causes ID decrease, toner is automatically supplied to the developing unit
to maintain the specified T/C level.
I-64

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Use this function when the T/C ratio has decreased.
(2) Procedure
1. Enter the Administrator Settings.
2. Touch [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [Forward] [Replenish Toner].
3. If you press the Start key, the current toner density is detected. If the density is lower than the specified value, toner is supplied. Then,
toner is agitated.
4. When toner supply is completed, a message appears.
6.7.33 PS Designer Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the density correction control for printing from the PS printer driver.
Images produced by the machine in accordance with the PostScript specifications tend to be darker compared to images produced by the
conventional machines or those from the PCL driver. As an action, density correction is provided for PS printing to adjust image density.
This setting is used to set whether to enable or disable density correction.
ON
Disables density correction so that images are output in accordance with the PostScript specifications.
OFF
Enables density correction.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.8 System Settings-List/Counter

6.8.1 Management List
It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX
assignment.
[Service Mode] [System 2] [Software Switch Setting])
(1) Job Settings List

(a) Use
To output the value set by the setting menu.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Job Settings List].
6.8.2 Paper Size/Type Counter

(1) Use
To register the combination of the specific paper size and the paper type, and to set the count.
(2) Procedure
1. Press a key out of 1 to 10 registration keys.
2. Select the paper type.
3. Touch the paper size key to select the paper size.
6.8.3 Meter Counter List

Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either authentication device, management device 2, vendor 2 is
mounted.
(1) Use
To output the meter counter list.
To print out the list in this setting because counter list cannot be printed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Meter Counter] [Details]
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Meter Counter List].
2. Select the Feed tray.
I-65

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.8.4 Check Consumables List

Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either authentication device, management device 2, vendor 2 is
mounted.
(1) Use
To output the consumable life list.
To print out the list in this setting because the list cannot be printed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Utility] [Check Consumable Life]
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Consumable Life List].
6.9 System Settings-Reset Settings

6.9.1 System Auto Reset
(1) Use
To set the period of time until system auto reset starts functioning.
(2) Procedure
To set the functions displayed during system auto reset from Copy, User Box and Scan/Fax.
(3) Default setting

Priority Mode: Copy
System Auto Reset Time: 1 min.
(4) Setting item

Priority Mode:
Copy
User Box
Scan/Fax
System Auto Reset Time:
1 to 9
OFF
6.9.2 Auto Reset

(1) Use
To set the period of time until auto reset starts functioning in Copy, Scan/Fax, User Box and Web Browser.
(2) Default setting

1 min.
(3) Setting range

1 to 9
No
6.9.3 Job Reset

(1) When Account is changed
It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
(a) Use
Selects whether to reset (initialize) a machine when the key counter is unplugged, a magnetic card is pulled out, or user authentication/
account track is set.
To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed through the use of a data management device.
(b) Default setting

Reset
(c) Setting item

Reset
Do Not Reset
I-66

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) When Original is set on ADF

(a) Use
Select whether to reset the function when originals are placed on the ADF.
(b) Default setting

Do Not Reset
(c) Setting item

Reset
Do Not Reset
(3) Next Job: Staple Setting

(a) Use
To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the staple setting job started and the next job setting has become available.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(4) Next Job: Original Set/Bind Direction

(a) Use
To set whether to cancel the original set/bind direction when the job (which original set/bind direction is set) started and the next job
setting has become available.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(5) Next Job: Reset Data After Job

(a) Use
To set whether to cancel the setting for scanning or transmitting fax when the scanning is finished or fax is transmitted, making the next
job setting available. (The address will be cleared even when [OFF] is selected.)
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.10 System Settings-User Box Settings

6.10.1 Delete Unused User Box
(1) Use
To delete the unnecessary box without data.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Unused User Box].
2. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen.
6.10.2 Delete Secure Print Documents

(1) Use
To delete the whole classified documents in the box.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Secure Documents].
I-67

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.10.3 Auto Delete Secure Document

(1) Use
To delete the whole classified documents in the box.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Secure Documents].
6.10.4 Encrypted PDF Delete Time

(1) Use
Specifies whether to delete encrypted PDF data stored in the box after a lapse of a predetermined period of time.
Sets the time period for which encrypted PDF data can be stored.
(2) Default setting

1 Day
(3) Setting item

12 Hours
1 Day
2 Days
3 Days
7 Days
30 Days
Save
NOTE
The period can be also set on a minute/hour basis with the range of 5 minutes to 12 hours in increments of 1 minute.
6.10.5 ID & Print Delete Time

(1) Use
Specifies whether to delete ID & print data stored in the box after a lapse of a predetermined period of time.
Sets the time period for which ID & print data can be stored.
(2) Default setting

1 Day
(3) Setting item

12 Hours
1 Day
2 Days
3 Days
7 Days
30 Days
Save
NOTE
6.10.6 Document Hold Setting

(1) Use
Selects whether to store the document again in the box after it was retrieved from the box.
If the function is set to No, the document is automatically deleted after it was retrieved.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-68

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.10.7 External Memory Function Settings

(1) Use
This operation enables or disables functions using an external memory connected to this machine.
Capability to enable [Save Document] and [Print Document] separately.
Save Document
A function that saves scanned documents into the external memory using [Save Document] in the
box mode.
Print Document
A function that prints and sends documents saved in the external memory using [Use Document]
in the box mode.
(2) Default setting

Save Document: OFF
Print Document: ON
(3) Setting item

Save Document:
ON
OFF
Print Document:
ON
OFF
6.10.8 Allow/Restrict User Box

(1) Use
Specify whether to release functions so that the user can create, edit, or delete a User Box.
(2) Default setting

Allow
(3) Setting item

Allow
Prohibit
6.10.9 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting

(1) Use
Select whether to check that the document saved in the ID & Print User Box has been deleted after printed.
(2) Default setting

Confirm with User
(3) Setting item

Confirm with User
Always Delete
6.10.10 Document Delete Time Setting

(1) Use
This function enables the administrator to specify the time to delete a document from a User Box when you cannot specify the document
deletion time. When automatically specifying the document deletion time, select [Yes] and set the deletion time.
(2) Default setting

1 Day
(3) Setting item

12 Hours
1 Day
2 Days
3 Days
7 Days
30 Days
Save
NOTE
I-69

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.11 System Settings-Standard Size Setting

6.11.1 Original Glass Original Size Detect

(1) Use
To change the document size detection table.
(2) Default setting

Table1
(3) Setting item

Table1
Table2
6.11.2 Foolscap Size Setting

(1) Use
To set the size for foolscap paper.
Upon setup.
(2) Procedure
Select the size from among the following five.
(3) Default setting

8 x 13
(4) Setting item

220 x 330 mm
8 1/ x 13
2
8 1/ x 13
4
8 1/ x 131/
8
4
8 x 13
6.12 System Settings-Stamp Settings

6.12.1 Header/Footer Settings
(1) Use
Saves or deletes header/footer settings.
Able to obtain registered header/footer data by [Application] [Stamp/Composition]
(2) Procedure
Touch [New] to register new headers and footers.
6.12.2 Fax TX Settings

(1) Use
Specifies whether to reset a stamp setting when fax is sent.
(2) Default setting

Cancel
(3) Setting item

Cancel
Do Not Cancel
6.13 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings

6.13.1 Use
Specifies whether to print a stamp/page number on blank pages.

Print
6.13.3 Setting item

Print
Do Not Print
I-70

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.14 System Settings-Application Key Settings

This is displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-101 or LK-103) is activated.
6.14.1 Use
To assign the additional functions provided by i-Option to the application keys.
This settings allow free application key assignment to additional functions provided by i-Option as well as to User Box, Fax/Scan and
Copy to which the application keys were conventionally assigned. (However, Key 0 is assigned to the function of displaying the application
menu so that other functions cannot be assigned to Key 0.)
The functions that can be assigned are as follows:
Copy
Fax/Scan
User Box
Image Panel
Web Browser
My Panel
6.14.2 Procedure
1. Select [Key 1] or [Key 2].
2. Select a function to which the key is assigned, and touch [OK].
6.15 System Settings-Skip Job Operation Settings

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor 2 is mounted.
6.15.1 Use
Configure whether to start processing for the next job when the current job stops due to running out of paper in the paper tray.
6.15.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Skip Job Operation Settings].
2. Make settings and touch [OK].
6.16 System Settings-Default Bypass Paper Type Setting

6.16.1 Use
Configure the initial settings for the paper type to be used for the bypass tray.
6.16.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Default Bypass Paper Type Setting].
2. Select the desired paper type and touch [OK].
6.17 System Settings-Page Number Print Position

6.17.1 Use
Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print
the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position.
6.17.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Page Number Print Position].
2. Check test print and fine adjust the position.
6.18 System Settings-Advanced Preview Setting

6.18.1 Use
To set whether to display the screen where the original set direction can be selected after touching [Preview] when printing with the
advanced preview function.

ON
6.18.3 Setting item

ON
OFF
6.19 Administrator/Machine Settings

6.19.1 Administrator Registration
(1) Use
Registers administrator information displayed Help service/Administrator information screen as well as sender addresses used for E-mail
transmission from the machine.
I-71

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator Name], [E-mail Address] to input them.
2. Using the 10-key pad, enter the extension No.
6.19.2 Input Machine Address

(1) Use
To register the name of the machine and e-mail address.
Machine Name
When the file name of the transmitted file or the document name of document registered in Box is
generated automatically, it is added.
E-mail
To be used as from address at internal Fax transmission.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Device Name] and input the name.
2. Touch [E-mail Address] and input the E-mail address.
6.20 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create One-Touch Destination

6.20.1 Address Book
(1) E-mail
(a) Use
To register/change the e-mail address for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.
(b) Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new address.
Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting.
(2) User Box

(a) Use
To register or change the box address for storing the scanned data to the box in the hard disk of the machine.
(b) Procedure
At least one user box must be registered in order to register the box address.
(3) Fax
(a) Use
To register or change the fax number for transmitting the fax.
(b) Procedure
(4) PC (SMB)
(a) Use
To register or change the SMB address for transmitting the scanned data by SMB.
(b) Procedure
(5) FTP
(a) Use
To register and change the FTP address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP.
(b) Procedure
(6) WebDAV
(a) Use
To register and change the WebDAV address for transmitting the scanned data by Web-DAV.
(b) Procedure
I-72

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(7) IP Address Fax

(a) Use
To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax data.
(b) Procedure
(8) Internet Fax

(a) Use
To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data.
(b) Procedure
6.20.2 Group
(1) Use
To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit data simultaneously.
(2) Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new group.
Select any displayed group to check, edit, or delete the setting.
At least one address must be registered in order to register the group.
6.20.3 E-mail Settings

(1) E-mail Subject
(a) Use
To register the e-mail subject for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.
(b) Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new subject.
Select any displayed subject to detail check, edit, or delete the setting.
The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default].
(2) E-mail Body

(a) Use
To register the e-mail message for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.
(b) Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new message.
Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting.
The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default].
6.21 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create User Box

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted.
It will not be displayed when both the hard disk and optional fax kit FK-508 are not installed.
6.21.1 Public/Personal User Box

(1) Use
To register or change the box for storing the text data in the hard disk of the machine.
(2) Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new box.
Select any displayed box to edit or delete it.
6.21.2 Confidential RX User Box

(1) Use
To register/change the box for confidential RX document.
I-73

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
If a hard disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User
Box.
(2) Procedure
6.21.3 Bulletin Board User Box

(1) Use
To register or change the bulletin board user box.
(2) Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new box.
Select any displayed box to edit or delete it.
6.21.4 Relay User Box

It will be displayed when the optional fax kit FK-508 is installed.
(1) Use
To register/change the Relay User Box.
(2) Procedure
6.21.5 Annotation User Box

(1) Use
To register or change the annotation user box.
To attach the image of the date, time, and/or filing number to the document data stored in the scanner mode, and to distribute them.
(2) Procedure
Touch [New] key to register the new box.
6.22 One-Touch/User Box Registration-One-Touch/User Box Registration List

6.22.1 Address Book List
(1) Use
To output the address book list.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the destination type to be output.

Touch [Starting destination No.] and enter the number from which output starts.
Touch [No. of Destinations] and specify the number of destinations to be output.
Touch [Print], and select the paper feed tray.
Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses.
6.22.2 Group List

(1) Use
To output the group list.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.22.3 Program List

(1) Use
To output the program list.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the destination type to be output.

I-74

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.22.4 E-mail Subject/Text List

(1) Use
To output the subject or the text list.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the paper feed tray.
2. Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses.
6.23 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Maximum Number of User Boxes

6.23.1 Use
Set the maximum of public, personal, and group boxes that individual users can hold.
6.23.2 Procedure
1. Select a user box type and name.
2. If a maximum number of user boxes is not specified, set Max. No. of Use Boxes to [OFF].
3. If a maximum number of user boxes is not specified, set Max. No. of Use Boxes to [OFF].
6.24 User Authentication/Account Track-General Settings

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter or vendor is mounted.
NOTE
Before registering a user, select an authentication method. If all management data is cleared after the authentication method was
selected, the histories of the registered users, print, send, receive, and save jobs are deleted.
6.24.1 User Authentication

(1) Use
To set the user authentication method.
To select whether to authenticate the user by the external server or MFP.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

OFF
ON (External Server)
ON (MFP)
NOTE
[OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to ON.
[ON (External Server)] cannot be selected when external servers are not registered in the following setting.
[Administrator Settings] [User Authentication/Account Track] [External Server Settings]
Neither [ON (External Server)] or [ON (MFP)] can be selected when the presence of management device is set in the following
setting.
6.24.2 Public User Access

(1) Use
To set whether to allow or prohibit the nonregistered user to use the system when User authentication has been set.
Able to use the machine without authentication by logging in as a public user when [ON (Without Login)] is selected.
(2) Default setting

Restrict
(3) Setting item

Restrict
ON (With Login)
ON (Without Login)
NOTE
This setting is not available without user authentication.
[Allow] cannot be selected when [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] is set to Do Not Synchronize.
6.24.3 Account Track

(1) Use
To set whether to enable the account track function or not.
I-75

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

OFF
ON
6.24.4 Account Track Input Method

(1) Use
To set the authentication method for the account track.
To select whether to authenticate by password or by account name & password.
(2) Default setting

Account Name & Password
(3) Setting item

Account Name & Password
Password Only
NOTE
This setting is not available without the account track.
Password Only cannot be set when using both user authentication and account track.
6.24.5 Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track

(1) Use
To set whether to synchronize the user authentication and account track.
(2) Default setting

Synchronize
(3) Setting item

Synchronize
Do not synchronize
NOTE
The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication and account track.
6.24.6 When # of Jobs Reach Maximum

(1) Use
To set whether to stop the currently printing job and start the next job, or to stop the machine, when reaching to the upper limit for the
number of printed pages set by the user authentication and the account track.
To stop the machine when the number of printed pages reach the upper limit set by the user authentication and the account track.
(2) Default setting

Skip Job
(3) Setting item

Skip Job
Stop Job
6.24.7 Number of User Counters Assigned

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is mounted.
(1) Use
To set the number available to be assigned for the user registration and account registration.
(2) Procedure
The total number to be registered for the user authentication and account track is 1000.
The number for the user registration will be set.
When setting the [# of Counters Assigned for Users] to 50, the number available for Account Track will be 950.
(3) Default setting

500
NOTE
The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication and account track.
Up to 99 users can be registered when a hard disk is not installed.
I-76

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.24.8 Ticket Hold Time Setting

(1) Use
Specify the desired length of holding time of Kerberos authentication ticket.
NOTE
This setting takes effect only when the authentication server type is set to active directory.
(2) Default setting

60 min.
(3) Setting range

1 to 60 min.
6.25 User Authentication/Account Track-User Authentication Setting

The settings are available only when carrying out the user authentication.
6.25.1 Administrative Setting-User Name List

It cannot select [OFF] when the following setting is set to ON.
(1) Use
To set whether to display or not the list key for user names on user authentication screen.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
[ON] cannot be selected when [ON] is specified in the following setting.
6.25.2 Administrative Setting-Default Function Permission

(1) Use
To set the default value for the function permission in user authentication by the external server.
To set the function which authenticated user can use when initially authenticating the user by the external server.
Items available for setting:
Copy, Scan, Fax, Print, User Box, Print Scan/Fax TX, Save to External Memory, Read the stored document in External Memory, Manual
destination input, Cellular Phone/PDA and Web browser
(2) Default setting

Allow
(3) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
6.25.3 Administrative Setting-ID & Print Settings

(1) ID & Print
(a) Use
To set whether to use ID & Print (a job sent by a user cannot be printed until the user authentication is completed).
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Public User

(a) Use
To set whether to print a job of unauthenticated or public user or to save the job into the ID & Print User Box.
(b) Default setting

Print Immediately
I-77

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item

Print Immediately
Save
6.25.4 Administrative Setting-ID & Print Operation Settings

It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device is set to installed.
(1) Use
To set whether to print all jobs or only one job from the same authenticated user when ID & Print is selected.
(2) Default setting

Print All Jobs
(3) Setting item

Print All Jobs
Print Each Job
6.25.5 Administrative Setting-Default Operation Selection

(1) Use
In the Login screen for user authentication where ID and print jobs are stored, specify the default values for the operation to be carried out
after authentication has been completed.
When using this machine while the ID & print function is disabled, the user can select [Access] to log in to this machine without specifying
the operation to be carried out after authentication.
(2) Default setting

Print
(3) Setting item

Print
Print & Access Basic Screen
Access Basic Screen
6.25.6 User Registration

(1) Use
To register, change or delete the user for authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the user, and touch [Edit].
2. Input the user name, user password, and e-mail address.
NOTE
It cannot be entered when conducting authentication by external server.
3. Set the output permission, max allowance set, function permission, and touch [OK].
NOTE
When the public users are allowed, the output permission and the function permission can be set.
[Authentication Information Registration] does not appear when the presence of Authentication Device 2 is set in the following
setting.
[Output Permission], [Max. Allowance Set], and [Function Permission] do not appear when the presence of Management Device
1 is set in the following setting.
6.25.7 User Counter

(1) Use
To display the status of use of the copy+print, copy, print and scan/fax for each user.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the user and touch [Counter Details].

Select the key to check to see the status of use.
For clearing the counter, touch [Clear Counter].
For clearing the all counters, touch [Reset All Counters].
6.26 User Authentication/Account Track-Account Track Setting

The settings are available only when carrying out the account track.
I-78

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.26.1 Account Track Registration

(1) Use
To register and change the account.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the proper Account and touch [Edit].
2. Input the [Account Name], [Password] and [Name].
3. Set the [Output Permission], and [Max. Allowance Set], and touch [OK].
NOTE
When the Password Only is selected for [Account Track Input Method], [Account Name] does not appear.
When the Account Name & Password is selected for [Account Track Input Method], [Name] does not appear.
6.26.2 Account Track Counter

(1) Use
To display the status of use of the copy+print, copy, print and scan/fax for each account.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the account and touch [Counter Details].

Select the key for the item to be checked.
For clearing the counter, touch [Clear Counter].
For clearing the all counters, touch [Reset All Counters].
6.27 User Authentication/Account Track-Print without Authentication

It cannot select [Allow] when the following setting is set to ON.
6.27.1 Use
To set whether to allow or restrict the print which user and account are not specified.
To allow or restrict printing which user and account are not specified.
When Allow is selected, pages printed by unidentified users are counted and included in the count of the public user.

Restrict
6.27.3 Setting item

Allow
Restrict
6.28 User Authentication/Account Track-Print Counter List

The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication or account track.
It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, authentication device1 or management device 2 is
mounted.
6.28.1 Use
To print out the User counter and the account counter.
6.28.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Counter List].
2. Select the paper feed tray.
3. Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the start key to output the counter list.
6.29 External Server Settings

6.29.1 Use
Registers and sets an external server that is used for user authentication.
6.29.2 Procedure
1. Select one from No. 1 to No. 20 and touch [NEW].
2. Set [Server Name] and [Server Type].
3. To change settings, select an external server to be edited and touch [Edit].
6.29.3 Setting item

Server Type:
Active Directory
NTLM v1
NTLM v2
NDS
LDAP
I-79

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
Neither [NTLM v1] nor [NTLM v2] appear when OFF is selected in the following setting.
[Administrator Settings] [Network Settings] [SMB Settings] [User Authentication (NTLM)]
[NDS] does not appear when OFF is selected in the following setting.
[Administrator Settings] [Network Settings] [NetWare Settings] [User Authentication Setting (NDS)]
6.30 User Authentication/Account Track-Limiting Access to Destinations

6.30.1 Create Group
(1) Use
Registers and edits groups of destinations for limiting access.
(2) Procedure
1. Select a group and touch [Edit].
2. Enter [Group Name].
3. Set the Access Allowed Level and touch [OK].
6.30.2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations

(1) Use
Sets Apply Level and Apply Group for individual destinations.
(2) Procedure
1. Select one from Address Book, Group, and Program.
2. Select a registered address. Touch [Apply Group] and [Apply Level] independently to make each settings.
6.30.3 Apply Levels/Groups to Users

(1) Use
Sets Apply Level or Apply Group for individual users.
(2) Procedure
1. Select a registered user. Touch [Apply Group] and [Apply Level] independently to make each settings.
6.31 User Authentication/Account Track-Authentication Device Settings

It will be displayed only when the extension server is used for user authentication.
6.31.1 General Settings

(1) Use
Specifies a device used for user authentication.
Card Authentication
Select the IC card type and operation settings.
Bio Authentication
Select the beep and operation settings.
(2) Procedure
Select either one of the authentication devices and press the corresponding key to go to the individual operation setting screen.
The screen displays the authentication device that is selected in [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice]
[Authentication Device 2].
When [Card 1] is selected as the authentication device, select the card type from among [FeliCa], [TypeA], [SSFC], [FCF], and [FCF
(Campus)] and make the operation settings.
If [FeliCa+Type A], [SSFC+Type A], [FCF+Type A], or [FCF (Campus)+Type A] is selected, both the FeliCa and Type A cards can be
used in this machine at the same time.
When [Card 2] is selected as authentication device, the authentication device name will be displayed differently depending on the type of
installed loadable device driver.
If SSFC (Shared Security Formats Cooperation) is selected in Card Authentication, set [Company Code], [Company Identification Code],
[Area No.], [Building No.], [Floor No.], [Room No.], and [Security Level].
If LEGIC (PID) is selected in Card Authentication, perform the access setting (STAMP input) for LEGIC (PID).
If MIFARE (PID) is selected in Card Authentication, perform the MIFARE key setting.
6.31.2 Logoff Settings

(1) Use
Select whether or not the user is logged off after a scan or fax is sent or after the copy document is scanned.
(2) Default setting

Do not log off
(3) Setting item

Do not log off
Log off
I-80

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.32 User Authentication/Account Track-Auth/Acct Track Common Setting

6.32.1 Use
Select whether or not to display the logout confirmation screen.
If the setting is made not to display the confirmation screen, the logout sequence is performed only through the access key operation with
no confirmation screen appearing.

ON
6.32.3 Setting item

ON
OFF
6.33 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Home Settings

6.33.1 Use
To set whether or not to enable the Scan to Home function that is used to send scanned data to users home folder.

Disable
6.33.3 Setting item

Enable
Disable
6.34 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Authorized Folder Settings

6.34.1 Use
Use to restrict specification of sending destinations by users.
Enabling this item disables manual entry of destinations except for recipients of faxes or IP address faxes. Therefore users can specify
sending destinations only by accessing the address book. Enabling this item also applies the following restrictions.
Users cannot save documents to User Boxes
Users cannot transmit documents from User Boxes
Users cannot use annotation User Boxes
Users cannot use the image panel
Users cannot select addresses from the transmission history
Users cannot use the URL notification function

Do Not Limit
6.34.3 Setting item

Limit
Do Not Limit
6.35 Network Settings-TCP/IP Settings

6.35.1 TCP/IP Settings
(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable TCP/IP settings.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When the setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
6.35.2 IPv4 Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to enter the IP address (IPv4) directly or to obtain it automatically.
(2) Default setting

Auto Input
(3) Setting item

Manual Input
I-81

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Auto Input
NOTE
When it is set to [Auto Input], select the method to obtain it automatically.
DHCP Setting
ON
OFF
BOOTP Setting
ON
OFF
ARP/PING Setting
ON
OFF
AUTO IP Setting
ON
OFF
[ARP/PING Setting] and [Auto IP Setting] cannot be set to OFF simultaneously.

They will all be set to ON when [Manual Input] is changed to [Auto Input].
When it is set to [Manual Input], set the IP address, subnet mask and default gate way.
6.35.3 IPv6 Settings

(1) IPv6 Settings
(a) Use
To set whether or not to use IP address (IPv6).
To set whether to enter the IP address (IPv6) directly or to obtain it automatically.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) IPv6 Setting (Auto IPv6 Setting)

(a) Use
To set whether or not to automatically obtain IP address (IPv6).
When selecting [OFF], set a global address or gateway address.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(3) IPv6 Setting (DHCP IPv6 Setting)

(a) Default setting
ON
(b) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.35.4 DNS Host

(1) DNS Host Name
(a) Use
To set the DNS host name.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [DNS Host Name].
2. Enter the DNS host name on the screen key board, and touch [OK].
(2) Dynamic DNS Settings

(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the dynamic DNS setting.
(b) Default setting

No Limit
I-82

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item

Enable
No Limit
6.35.5 DNS Domain

(1) DNS Domain Name Auto Retrieval
(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining for the DNS domain name.
To set the DNS default domain name.
(b) Default setting

Enable
(c) Setting item

Enable
No Limit
NOTE
Enable cannot be set when [IP Settings] is set to Auto Input.
(2) Search Domain Name Auto Retrieval

(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining for the DNS domain name.
To set the DNS search domain name.
(b) Default setting

Enable
(c) Setting item

Enable
No Limit
(3) Procedure
Touch [Default DNS Domain Name] or [DNS Search Domain Name 1 to 3], and enter the domain name using the keyboard on the screen
and touch [OK].
6.35.6 DNS Server Settings (IPv4)

(1) DNS Server Auto Obtain
(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the DNS server address.
(b) Default setting

Enable
(c) Setting item

Enable
No Limit
NOTE
(2) Priority/secondary DNS server.

(a) Use
To set the priority/substitute DNS server address.
(b) Procedure
Touch the corresponding key, and input the server address.
6.35.7 DNS Server Settings (IPv6)

(1) DNS Server Auto Obtain
(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the DNS server address.
(b) Default setting

Enable
(c) Setting item

Enable
I-83

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No Limit
NOTE
(2) Priority/secondary DNS server.

(a) Use
To set the priority/substitute DNS server address.
(b) Procedure
Touch the corresponding key, and input the server address.
6.35.8 IPsec Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to use IPsec protocol for IP network communication.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When selecting [ON], make settings in [IKE Setting], [IPSec SA Setting], and [Peer].
6.35.9 IPsec Settings-IKE Settings

(1) IKE Settings
(a) Use
To make the settings that relate to IKE (Internet Key Exchange) protocol which is used for IPsec communication.
Settings can be made independently for four different sets (Group 1 to 4).
(2) Group
(a) Procedure
Among four groups (Group 1 to 4), select a group where settings are made.
(3) Encryption Algorithm

(a) Procedure
Set an encryption algorithm used for IPsec communication.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

DES_CBC
3DES_CBC
OFF
(4) Authentication Algorithm

(a) Procedure
Set an authentication algorithm used for IPsec communication.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

MD5
SHA-1
OFF
(5) Key Validity Period

(a) Procedure
Set a key validity period.
(b) Default setting

28800 (sec.)
I-84

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting range

80 to 604800 (sec.)
(6) Diffie-Hellman Group

(a) Procedure
Set Diffie-Hellman group.
(b) Default setting

Group 2
6.35.10 IPsec Settings-IPsec SA Settings

(1) IPsec SA Settings
(a) Use
To make the settings that relate to IPsec SA (Security Association) which is used for IPsec communication.
Settings can be made independently for eight different sets (Group 1 to 8).
(2) Group Set Number

(a) Procedure
1. Among Group 1 to 8, select a group where settings are made.
2. After touching the key of the Group, make the following settings.
(If the combination of each selection is not allowed among different settings, the key operation of the corresponding option is locked.)
(3) Security Protocol

(a) Procedure
Set a security protocol.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item
AH
ESP
ESP_AH
OFF
(4) ESP Encryption Algorithm

(a) Procedure
Set an encryption algorithm used for ESP protocol.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item
DES_CBC
3DES_CBC
AES_CBC
AES_CTR
NULL
OFF
(5) ESP Authentication Algorithm

(a) Procedure
Set authentication algorithm used for ESP protocol.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

MD5
SHA-1
OFF
(6) AH Authentication Algorithm

(a) Procedure
Set authentication algorithm used for AH protocol.
I-85

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

MD5
SHA-1
OFF
(7) Lifetime After Establishing SA

(a) Procedure
Set the period of time starting from when SA connection is established and ending when the SA connection is cut.
(b) Default setting

3600 (sec.)
(c) Setting range

120 to 604800 (sec.)
6.35.11 IPsec Settings-Peer

(1) Peer
(a) Use
To register destinations used for IPsec communication.
Settings can be made independently for different ten sets (Group 1 to 10).
(2) Registered Peer

(a) Procedure
1. Among Group 1 to 10, select a group where settings are made.
2. After touching the key of the Group, make the following setting.
(3) Encapsulation Mode

(a) Procedure
Set a encapsulation mode used for IPsec.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

Tunnel Mode
Transport Mode
OFF
(4) IP Address
(a) Use
When the encapsulation mode is set, specify the IP address of destinations.
(b) Procedure
Touch [IP Address] and enter the IP address with IPv4 or IPv6 format.
(5) Pre-Shared Key Text

(a) Use
When the encapsulation mode is set, specify a Pre-shared key (Key data).
(b) Procedure
Touch [Input] and enter the Pre-shared key.
(6) Perfect Forward Secrecy

(a) Use
When the transport mode is selected, set whether to use Perfect forward secrecy.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
I-86

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
OFF
6.35.12 IP Filtering
(1) Permit Access
(a) Use
To set the IP filtering (Permit Access).
To set whether to allow only IP addresses that are within a specified range.
(b) Procedure
1. Select Enable or Disable.
2. When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and specify the range of IP addresses to be allowed using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [OK].
(2) Deny Access

(a) Use
To set the IP filtering (Deny Access).
When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and specify the range of IP addresses to be allowed using the 10-key pad.
(b) Procedure
1. Select Enable or Disable.
2. When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and enter the range of IP addresses to be denied using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [OK].
6.35.13 RAW Port Number

(1) Use
To set the RAW port number.
Several data can be accepted at the same time by selecting several ports.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the necessary port number.
2. When using the selected port, press the Clear key to clear the value, and enter the RAW port number using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [OK].
6.35.14 LLMNR Setting

(1) Use
To set whether or not to enable LLMNR (Linklocal Multicast Name Resolution) setting.
To perform the name resolution to send data to a computer with Windows Vista/Server 2008 installed, select [Enable].
To perform the name resolution especially in the IPv6-only communication environment, enable this setting.
(2) Default setting

Enable
(3) Setting item

Enable
No Limit
6.36 Network Setting-NetWare Settings

6.36.1 IPX Settings
(1) IPX Settings
(a) Use
To enable or disable the NetWare (IPX) setting.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Ethernet Frame Type

(a) Use
To set the ethernet frame type.
(b) Default setting

Auto Detect
I-87

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item
Auto Detect
802.2
802.3
Ethernet II
802.3SNAP
6.36.2 NetWare Print Settings

(1) NetWare Print Settings
(a) Use
To set whether to use the NetWare print mode.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) NetWare Print Mode

(a) Use
To set the NetWare print mode.
(b) Default setting

PServer
(c) Setting item

PServer
Nprinter/Rprinter
NOTE
After selecting either key in the NetWare print mode setting, proceed to each setting screen.
(3) Status
(a) Use
To display NetWare status.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Status].
2. Touch up/down arrow keys to select the server to check.
3. Check the NetWare status.
6.36.3 P Server Settings

(1) Print Server Name/Print Server Password
(a) Use
To set the print server name and print server password.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Print Server name] or [Print Server Password].
2. Enter the print server name or the print server password (up to 63 characters) using the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(2) Polling Interval

(a) Use
To set the polling interval.
To set the interval to search the print queue.
(b) Procedure
1. Press the Clear key.
2. Enter the polling interval between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
(3) NDS/Bindery Setting

(a) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the bindery setting when using NetWare4.x model and after.
To enable the bindery service.
I-88

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

NDS
(c) Setting item

NDS
NDS/Bindery
(4) File Server Name

(a) Use
To set the full server name for the print server to logon.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [File Server Name].
2. Enter the File server name (up to 47 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(5) NDS Context Name

(a) Use
To set the NDS context name (context name to register NDS print server).
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [NDS Context name].
2. Enter the NDS context name (up to 191 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(6) NDS Tree Name

(a) Use
To set the NDS tree name (name to login).
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [NDS Tree Name].
2. Enter the NDS tree name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.36.4 Nprinter/Rprinter Settings

(1) Print Server Name
(a) Use
To set the print server name.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Print Server Name].
2. Enter the printer name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(2) Printer Number

(a) Use
To set the printer number.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Auto] and cancel the reverse display.
3. Enter the number between 0 and 254 using the 10-key pad.
6.36.5 User Authentication Setting (NDS)

(1) Use
To set whether or not to use the user authentication setting.
To conduct user authentication in netware environment.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.37 Network Settings-http Server Settings

I-89

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.37.1 http Server Settings

(1) Use
To set whether or not to use the http server setting.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.37.2 PSWC Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to use the PageScope Web Connection.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.37.3 IPP Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) setting.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.37.4 Accept IPP jobs

(1) Use
To set whether to allow or restrict the IPP job.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.37.5 Support Information

(1) Use
To set the operation support information.
For the response setting to see if IPP transmission supports each function.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Support Information].
2. Set ON or OFF for each item.
6.37.6 Printer Information

(1) Use
To set the printer information.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Information].
2. Enter the printer name, printer location, and printer information on the on-screen keyboard.
3. Touch [Print URI] to check the printer URI information.
I-90

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.37.7 IPP Authentication Settings

(1) Use
To set whether or not to use the IPP authentication setting.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.37.8 Authentication Method

(1) Use
To set the authentication method for IPP authentication.
(2) Default setting

requesting-user-name
(3) Setting item

requesting-user-name
basic
digest
6.37.9 User Name

(1) Use
To set the User name for IPP authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [User Name].
2. Enter the user name on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.37.10 Password
(1) Use
To set the password for IPP authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Password].
2. Enter the password on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.37.11 realm
(1) Use
To set the realm for identifying the authentication setting for IPP authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [realm].
2. Enter the realm on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.38 Network Settings-FTP Settings

6.38.1 FTP TX Settings
(1) FTP TX Settings
(a) Use
To set whether to use FTP TX settings.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Proxy Server Address

(a) Use
To set the proxy server address.
I-91

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address].
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input], or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.
(3) Proxy Server Port Number

(a) Use
To set the proxy server port number.
(b) Procedure
2. Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
(4) Port No.

(a) Use
To set the port number to be used for transmission with FTP server.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad.
(5) Connection Timeout

(a) Use
To set the timeout period for connecting to FTP server.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the connecting timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-key pad.
6.38.2 FTP Server Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to use this machine as FTP server.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
[ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to ON.
6.39 Network Settings-SMB Setting

6.39.1 Client Settings

(1) Client Settings
(a) Use
To set whether or not to use the SMB transmission setting.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) NTLM Settings

(a) Use
To set the NTLM version for the user authentication.
NTLM has v1 and v2. Select the version which suits the network environment.
I-92

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

v1
(c) Setting item

v1
v2
v1/v2
(3) User Authentication (NTLM)

(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the user authentication setting by NTLM.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(4) DFS Setting

(a) Default setting
Enable
(b) Setting item

Enable
Invalid
NOTE
Select [ON] when using SMB transmission under an environment that uses a distributed file system (DFS).
6.39.2 Print Settings

(1) Print Settings
(a) Use
To set whether to use SMB port or not in printer mode.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) NetBIOS Name

(a) Use
To set NetBIOS name.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [NetBIOS Name].
2. Enter the NetBIOS name (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(3) Print Service Name

(a) Use
To set the print service name.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Print Service Name].
2. Enter the print service name (up to 13 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(4) Workgroup
(a) Use
To set the workgroup.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Workgroup].
2. Enter the workgroup (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
I-93

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.39.3 WINS Settings

(1) WINS Settings
(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the WINS setting.
To use the WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) setting is necessary.
By using the WINS, the traffic by broadcast can be reduced, and the communication becomes available with the network where
broadcast does not reach.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Automatic Retrieval Settings

(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the WINS server address.
To acquire the WINS server address automatically.
To obtain the WINS server address from DHCP server. If there are more than on address settings, up to two can be acquired.
(b) Default setting

Enable
(c) Setting item

Enable
No Limit
(3) WINS Server Address 1, 2

(a) Use
To set the WINS server address.
To use when manually entering the WINS server address.
The primary address and the secondary address can be set.
(The primary address has the priority during operation.)
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [1] or [2].
2. Enter the WINS server address.
(4) Node Type Setting

(a) Use
To set a node type.
(b) Default setting

H Node
(c) Setting item
B Node
P Node
N Node
H Node
6.39.4 Direct Hosting Setting

(1) Use
To set whether or not to enable the direct hosting setting.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.40 Network Settings-LDAP Settings

I-94

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.40.1 Enabling LDAP

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the LDAP function.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.40.2 Setting Up LDAP

Registration and/or setting concerning the LDAP server can be conducted.
Touch [Setting Up LDAP], and select the optional blank key to register and/or set.
(1) LDAP Server Name

(a) Use
Set the LDAP server name.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Server Name].
2. Enter the server name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(2) Max. Search Results

(a) Use
To set the Max. results of address for LDAP search.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Max. Search Results].
3. Enter the Max. Search result numbers between 5 and 1000 using the 10-key pad.
(3) Timeout
(a) Use
To set the timeout period for LDAP search.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Timeout].
3. Enter the timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-key pad.
(4) Initial Setting for Search Details

(a) Use
To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Initial Setting for Search Details].
2. Touch the key about condition for each search item, and select the condition.
3. Touch [OK].
(5) Check Connection

It will not be displayed when [Enabling LDAP] is set to OFF.
It will not be displayed when the following is set to Restrict.
[Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Security Details] [Manual Destination Input]
(a) Use
To check the connection with the LDAP server which has been set.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Check Connection].
2. Confirm a proper connection and touch [Close].
(6) Reset All Settings

(a) Use
To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the shipping.
I-95

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Reset All Settings].
2. Check the message and touch [Yes].
3. Touch [OK].
(7) Server Address

(a) Use
To set the LDAP server address.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Server Address].
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input], and enter the server address.
(8) Search Base

(a) Use
To set the directory path for LDAP server.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Search Base].
2. Enter the search base (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(9) SSL Setting

(a) Use
To set whether to use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(10) Port Number

(a) Use
To set the LDAP server port number.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad.
(11) Port Number (SSL)

(a) Use
To set the port number for LDAP server when using SSL.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad.
(12) Certificate Verification Level Settings

(a) Use
To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate.
(b) Procedure
Expiration Date
Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
Key Usage
Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by
the issuer.
Chain
Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. The chain
is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
Expiration Date Confirmation
Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. The OCSP
service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List) are checked in this order when the expiration date
of the certificate is checked.
CN
Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address.
I-96

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(13) Authentication Type

(a) Use
To set the authentication method to logon to LDAP server.
Anonymous
User name and password are not necessary

(Dynamic authentication will be invalid when anonymous is selected.)
Simple
Simple method which needs the user name and the password
Digest-MD5
Method available with normal LDAP server. When failing to authenticate with Digest-MD5, it
automatically switches to CRAM-MD5.
GSS-SPNEGO
Method available with Windows active directory (Kerberos authentication).
NTLM (v1)
Standard user authentication format used for Windows NT, etc.
NTLM (v2)
Standard user authentication format used for Windows NT, etc. It has been applied to the
Windows NT4.0 SP4 and later versions. Its security has been enhanced compared to v1.
(b) Default setting

Anonymous
(c) Setting item
Anonymous
Simple
Digest-MD5
GSS-SPNEGO
NTLM v1
NTLM v2
(14) Select Server Authentication Method

(a) Use
To set the authentication system when conducting LDAP server authentication.
To use when changing the server authentication system.
Use Set Value
It conducts authentication with the setting value set by [LDAP Server

Registration].
Use User Authentication ID and Password
It conducts authentication with the registration data for the copiers user
authentication.
Dynamic Authentication
It conducts authentication by dynamic authentication.
(b) Default setting

Set Value
(c) Setting item

Set Value
User Authentication
Dynamic Authentication
(15) Referral Setting

(a) Use
To set whether or not to use the referral setting.
To use when tracing the server with referral at the time of LDAP connection.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(16) Login Name

(a) Use
To set the login name to connect to LDAP server.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Login Name].
2. Enter the logon name (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
The setting is not available when authentication method is set to anonymous.
I-97

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(17) Password
(a) Use
To set the password for connecting to LDAP server.
(b) Procedure
2. Enter the password (up to 128 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
The setting is not available when authentication method is set to anonymous.
(18) Domain Name

(a) Use
To set the domain name for connecting to LDAP server.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Domain Name].
2. Enter the domain name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.40.3 Default LDAP Server Setting

(1) Use
To set the server to be used as the default when searching LDAP.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Default LDAP Server Setting].
2. Select the optional server.
6.41 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-E-mail TX (SMTP)

6.41.1 E-mail TX (SMTP)

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail transmission setting.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.41.2 Scan to E-mail

(1) Use
To set whether or not to transfer scanned data by e-mail.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.41.3 Status Notification

(1) Use
To set whether or not to inform the status by e-mail.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-98

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.41.4 Total Counter Notification

(1) Use
To set whether or not to inform the total counter by e-mail.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.41.5 SMTP Server Address

(1) Use
To set the SMTP server address.
(2) Procedure
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input], and enter the server address.
6.41.6 Binary Division

(1) Use
To set whether to carry out binary division for data to be transmitted.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.41.7 Divided Mail Size

(1) Use
To set the dividing size when carrying out the binary division for data to be transmitted.
To change the dividing size of the data.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter the dividing mail size between 100 and 15000 (in 100 increments) using the 10-key pad.
6.41.8 Connection Timeout

(1) Use
To set the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server.
(2) Procedure
Select the timeout period using [+] / [-] keys.
(3) Default setting

60 sec
(4) Setting range

30 to 300, in 30 sec. increments
6.41.9 Server Capacity

(1) Use
To set the Max. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive.
(2) Default setting

No Limit
(3) Setting item

No Limit
1 to 100
I-99

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.41.10 SSL/TLS Setting

(1) Use
To set whether or not to use SSL/TLS when sending an e-mail.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

SMTP over SSL
Start TLS
OFF
6.41.11 Port No.

(1) Use
To set the port number for transmission with SMTP server.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
6.41.12 Port Number (SSL)

(1) Use
To set the port number when using SSL.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
6.41.13 Certificate Verification Level Settings

(1) Use
(2) Procedure
Expiration Date
Key Usage
the issuer.
Chain
Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. The chain is
validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. The OCSP service
and CRL (Certificate Revocation List) are checked in this order when the expiration date of the
certificate is checked.
CN
6.41.14 Detail Settings: SMTP Authentication

(1) Use
To set whether or not to enable SMTP authentication.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When set to ON, enter the [User ID], [Password] and [Domain Name].
6.41.15 Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Authentication

(1) Use
To set whether or not to enable the POP Before SMTP authentication.
(2) Default setting

OFF
I-100

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.41.16 Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Time

(1) Use
To set the time necessary for POP Before SMTP authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the time for POP Before SMTP between 0 and 60 using the 10-key pad.
6.42 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-E-mail RX (POP)

6.42.1 E-mail RX (POP)

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail reception setting.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.42.2 POP Server Address

(1) Use
To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e-mail to POP server.
(2) Procedure
Select the timeout period of connection using [-] / [+] keys.

(1) Use
To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e-mail to POP server.
(2) Procedure
Select the timeout period of connection using [-] / [+] keys.
6.42.4 SSL Setting

(1) Use
To set whether or not to use SSL when receiving an e-mail.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.42.5 Port No.

(1) Use
To set the port No. for transmitting with POP server.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port No. between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
I-101

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.42.6 Port Number (SSL)

(1) Use
To set the port number when using SSL.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

(1) Use
(2) Procedure
Expiration Date
Key Usage
the issuer.
Chain
CN
6.42.8 Login Name

(1) Use
To enter a login name used for POP server authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Login Name].
2. Enter a login name.
6.42.9 Password
(1) Use
To enter a login name used for POP server authentication.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter a password.
6.42.10 APOP Authentication

(1) Use
To set whether to use APOP authentication.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.42.11 Check for New Messages

It will not be displayed when either [Internet Fax] is set to OFF in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] [Network Setting] [Network Fax Setting] [Network Fax Function Settings]
(1) Use
To set whether to automatically check a POP server for new messages.
(2) Default setting

Yes
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
I-102

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.42.12 Polling Interval

It will not be displayed when either [Internet Fax] is set to OFF in the following settings.
(1) Use
To set a polling interval at which a POP server is checked for new messages.
(2) Default setting

15 minutes
(3) Setting range

1 to 60 minutes
6.43 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-S/MIME Communication Settings

6.43.1 S/MIME Communication Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to activate S/MINE communication that provides encrypted E-mail transmission.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.43.2 Digital Signature

(1) Use
Set whether to add a digital signature to S/MIME messages.
(2) Default setting

Do not add signature
(3) Setting item

Do not add signature
Always add signature
Select when sending
6.43.3 E-mail Text Encryption Method

(1) Use
To select an encryption method used for S/MIME E-mail text.
(2) Default setting

3DES
(3) Setting item
RC2-40
RC2-64
RC2-128
DES
3DES
AES-128
AES-192
AES-256
6.43.4 Print S/MIME Information

(1) Use
To select whether to print S/MIME information when sending and receiving E-mail.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
I-103

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No
6.43.5 Automatically Obtain Certificates

(1) Use
To set whether to automatically acquire a certificate when sending or receiving E-mail.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No

(1) Use
(2) Procedure
Expiration Date
Key Usage
the issuer.
Chain
6.44 Network Settings-SNMP Setting

6.44.1 SNMP Setting
(1) SNMP Setting
(a) Use
To set whether to use SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) or not.
To set the SNMP version to be used.
To readout management information base and to enter community name for writing.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) SNMP v1/v2c (IP)

(a) Use
To set whether or not to use SNMP v1/v2c (IP).
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(3) SNMP v3 (IP)

(a) Use
To set whether or not to use SNMP v3 (IP).
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-104

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(4) SNMP v1 (IPX)

(a) Use
To set whether or not to use SNMP v1 (IPX).
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.44.2 UDP Port Number

(1) Use
To set the UDP standby port number which is used for SNMP (IP).
(2) Procedure
1. Touch the Clear key.
6.44.3 SNMP v1/v2c Settings

(1) Use
To conduct setting when using SNMP v1/v2c.
To use when entering the community name for reading the Management Information Base (MIB) and writing to it.
(2) Read Community Name Settings

(a) Procedure
Enter a read community name.
(3) Write Setting

(a) Default setting
Enable
(b) Setting item

Enable
Disable
NOTE
[Enable] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to ON.
(4) Write Community Name Settings

(a) Procedure
Enter a write community name.
6.44.4 SNMP v3 Settings

(1) Context Name Settings
(a) Use
Set the context name which is used for SNMP v3.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Name].
2. Enter the context name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen key board, and touch [OK].
(2) Discovery User Permissions

(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the discovery authority user which is used for SNMP v3.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-105

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Discovery User Name Settings

(a) Use
To set the name of the discovery authority users which is used for SNMP v3.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Discovery User Name].
2. Enter the discovery user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
The user name same with the read user name or the write user name cannot be set.
(4) Read User Name Settings

(a) Use
To set the read-only user name used for SNMP v3.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Read User Name].
2. Enter the read user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
The user Name same with the discovery user name cannot be used.
(5) Security Level

(a) Use
To set the security level of the read-only user used for SNMP v3.
OFF
No authentication will be conducted when the read-only user accesses.
auth-password
Conducts authentication only for the authentication password when the read-only user
accesses.
auth-password/priv-password
Conducts authentication by authentication password and privacy password when read-only user
accesses.
(b) Default setting

(c) Setting item

OFF
auth-password
(6) Password Setting

(a) Use
To set the authentication password for the read-only user which is used for SNMP v3.
(b) Procedure
1. Select a type of password.
2. Enter the password (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(7) Write User Name Settings

(a) Use
To set the name of the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3.
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Write User Name].
2. Enter the write user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
The user name same with the discovery use name cannot be used.
(8) Security Level

(a) Use
To set the security level for the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3.
OFF
Authentication will not be conducted when reading/writing authority user accesses.
auth-password
Conducts authentication only with authentication password when reading/writing authority user
accesses.
Conducts authentication by authentication password and privacy password when reading/

writing authority user accesses.
I-106

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

(c) Setting item

OFF
auth-password
NOTE
[Authentication OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to ON.
(9) Encryption Algorithm

(a) Use
To set the encryption algorithm in SNMPv3 communication.
(b) Default setting

DES
(c) Setting item

DES
AES-128
(10) Authentication Algorithm

(a) Use
To set the authentication algorithm in SNMPv3 communication.
(b) Default setting

MD5
(c) Setting item

MD5
SHA-1
(11) TRAP Setting

(a) Use
To set whether or not to allow the TRAP function.
(b) Default setting

Allow
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
(12) TRAP Setting When Authentication failed

(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable the TRAP function when authentication failed.
(b) Default setting

Invalid
(c) Setting item

Enable
Invalid
6.45 Network Settings-AppleTalk Settings

6.45.1 AppleTalk Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the AppleTalk setting.
(2) Default setting

OFF
I-107

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.45.2 Printer Name

(1) Use
To set the printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Name].
2. Enter the printer name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.45.3 Zone Name

(1) Use
To set the zone name connected with AppleTalk network.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Zone Name].
2. Enter the zone name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.45.4 Current Zone

(1) Use
To display the current zone on AppleTalk network.
6.46 Network Settings-Bonjour Setting

6.46.1 Bonjour Setting
(1) Use
To use when operating under the Bonjour service environment.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.46.2 Bonjour Name

(1) Use
To set the name for identifying over the bonjour network.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Bonjour Name].
2. Enter the Bonjour name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.47 Network Settings-TCP Socket Settings

6.47.1 TCP Socket
(1) TCP Socket
(a) Use
To set whether or not to set the TCP socket.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Port Number

(a) Use
To set the port number for TCP socket transmission.
(b) Procedure
I-108

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
When SSL Certificate is registered, the following can be set.
(3) SSL Setting

(a) Default setting
OFF
(b) Setting item

ON
OFF
(4) Port Number

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Enter].
2. Press Clear key.
3. Enter a port number within the range between 1 and 65535 with the 10-key pad.
(5) Port Number (SSL)

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Enter].
2. Press Clear key.
3. Enter a port number within the range between 1 and 65535 with the 10-key pad.
6.47.2 TCP Socket (ASCII Mode)

(1) TCP Socket/ASCII Mode
(a) Use
To set whether or not to set the TCP socket for ASCII mode.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Port Number (ASCII Mode)

(a) Use
To set the port number which is used for TCP socket transmission by ASCII mode.
(b) Procedure
6.48 Network Settings-Network Fax Setting

It will not be displayed on the screen when all items are set to OFF in the following settings.
[Service Mode] [System 2] [Network Fax Settings]
6.48.1 Network Fax Setting

It will not be displayed on the screen when all items are set to OFF in the following settings.
(1) IP Address Fax Function

Setting will be available only when [IP Address Fax] is set to ON in the following settings.
(a) Use
To set whether or not to use IP address fax function.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-109

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Internet Fax Function

Setting will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to ON in the following settings.
(a) Use
To set whether or not to use Internet fax function.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.48.2 SMTP TX Settings

(1) Use
To set SMTP TX when network fax function is being used.
To set SMTP TX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function is being used.
(2) Port Number

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Enter the connection timeout time between 5 and 1000 (sec.) using the 10-key pad.
6.48.3 SMTP RX Settings

(1) Use
To set SMTP RX when network fax function is being used.
To set SMTP RX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function is being used.
(2) SMTP RX
(a) Default setting
ON
(b) Setting item

ON
OFF
(3) Port No.

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Enter the connection timeout time between 5 and 1000 (sec.) using the 10-key pad.
6.49 Network Settings-WebDAV Settings-WebDAV Client Settings

6.49.1 WebDAV Client Setting
(1) Use
To set whether to use WebDAV Client Settings.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-110

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.49.2 Proxy Server Address

(1) Use
To set the proxy server address.
(2) Procedure
6.49.3 Proxy Server Port Number

(1) Use
To set the proxy server port number.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
6.49.4 User Name

(1) Use
To set the user name for WebDAV authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [User Name].
2. Enter the user name on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.49.5 Password
(1) Use
To set the password for WebDAV authentication.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter the password on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

(1) Use
To set the timeout period for connecting to WebDAV server.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
6.49.7 Server Authentication Character Code

(1) Use
To set a character code used during WebDAV server authentication.
(2) Default setting

UTF-8
(3) Setting item

UTF-8
Windows Code page

(1) Use
(2) Procedure
Expiration Date
Key Usage
the issuer.
Chain
I-111

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CN
6.50 Network Settings-WebDAV Settings-WebDAV Server Settings

6.50.1 WebDAV Server Settings
(1) Use
To set whether to use WebDAV Server Settings.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.50.2 SSL Setting

It is displayed only when SSL Certificate is registered.
(1) Use
To set whether to use SSL/TSL for communications when using the machine as WebDAV server.
(2) Default setting

Non-SSL Only
(3) Setting item

Non-SSL Only
SSL Only
SSL/Non-SSL
NOTE
When ON is selected in [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhanced Security Mode], only [SSL Only] is
selectable.
6.50.3 Password Setting

(1) Use
To set a password to access WebDAV server.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Password Setting].
2. Enter a password with the keyboard on the screen, and touch [OK].
NOTE
Touching [Initial Password] can restore the default password setting.
(Default password: sysadm)
6.51 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Web Service Common Settings

6.51.1 Friendly Name
(1) Use
To define a friendly name that is used when printing a job with WSD (Web Service on Devices) function.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Friendly Name].
2. Enter the friendly name (up to 62 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.51.2 Publication Service

(1) Use
To set whether or not to enable Publication Service.
Select [Enable] when using this machine under an environment where communication is possible only with Windows Vistas IPv6.
(2) Default setting

Invalid
(3) Setting item

Enable
Invalid
6.51.3 SSL Setting

It will be displayed only when SSL Certificate is registered.
I-112

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Use
To set whether to use SSL when using WSD (Web Service on Devices) function.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF

It will be displayed only when SSL Certificate is registered.
(1) Use
(2) Procedure
Expiration Date
Key Usage
the issuer.
Chain
6.52 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Printer Settings

6.52.1 Printer Settings
(1) Use
To set whether to use this printer as a WSD printer.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.52.2 Printer Name

(1) Use
To set the WS printer name.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Name].
6.52.3 Printer Location

(1) Use
To set the WS printer location.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Location].

(1) Use
To set the WS printer information.
(2) Procedure
I-113

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.53 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Scanner Settings

6.53.1 Scanner Settings
(1) Use
To set whether to use this machine as a WSD scanner.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.53.2 Scanner Name

(1) Use
To set the WS scanner name.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Scanner Name].
6.53.3 Scanner Location

(1) Use
To set the WS scanner location.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Scanner Location].
6.53.4 Scanner Information

(1) Use
To set the WS scanner information.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Scanner Information].

(1) Use
To set the timeout period for connection of WS scanner.
(2) Procedure
6.54 Network Settings-SSDP Settings

6.54.1 SSDP Settings
(1) Use
To set whether to use SSDP protocol.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.54.2 Multicast TTL Setting

(1) Use
To set the multicast TTL value.
(2) Default setting

1
I-114

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting range

1 to 10
6.55 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Device Setting

6.55.1 MAC Address
(1) Use
To display the MAC address of the machine.
(2) Procedure
The address cannot be changed.
6.55.2 Network Speed

(1) Use
To set the network speed.
(2) Default setting

Auto (10M/100Mbps)
(3) Setting item

Auto (10M/100Mbps)
Auto (10M/100Mbps/1Gbps)
10Mbps Full Duplex
10Mbps Half Duplex
100Mbps Full Duplex
100Mbps Half Duplex
1Gbps Full Duplex
NOTE
When Network speed setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
6.55.3 LLTD Setting

(1) Use
To set whether or not to enable LLTD (Link Layer Topology Discovery).
By enabling LLTD, Windows Vista's Network Map can show this machine's location on the network.
(2) Default setting

Enable
(3) Setting item

Enable
Disable
6.56 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Time Adjustment Setting

6.56.1 Time Adjustment Setting
(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the NTP setting.
To synchronize the time between the server and the client.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.56.2 Auto IPv6 Retrieval

(1) Use
To set whether or not to automatically obtain NTP server's IPv6 address.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-115

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.56.3 NTP Server Setting

(1) Host Address
(a) Use
To set the NTP server address.
(b) Procedure
2. Select [IP Address Input], and enter the IP address.
3. Select [Host name Input], and enter the host name.
(2) Port Number

(a) Procedure
6.56.4 Auto Time Adjustment

(1) Use
To set whether or not to automatically adjust time.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.56.5 Polling Interval

(1) Use
To set a polling interval when Auto Time Adjustment is set to ON.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter a polling interval within the range between 1 to 240 hours with the 10-key pad.
6.57 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Status Notification Setting

To notify status, notifications both by E-mail and by SNMP TRAP function can be set. For E-mail, up to ten IP addresses and one IPX
address can be set. For SNMP TRAP function, up to five IP addresses and one IPX can be set.
6.57.1 Register Notification Address (IP Address)

(1) Use
To set IP addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.
Up to 5 addresses can be registered.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
From IP address 1 to 5, select an IP address where settings are made.

Touch [Host Address].
Select [Input Host], [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.
Touch the Clear key and enter a port number within the range of 1 to 65535 using the 10-key pad.
Touch [Community Name] and enter a community name.
Touch [Notification Item] and set the items to be notified to [ON].
Touch [OK] and finish the settings.
6.57.2 Register Notification Address (IPX Address)

(1) Use
To set IPX addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Touch [IPX Address].

Touch [Network Address] or [Node Address] and enter an address.
Touch [Community Name] and enter a community name.
I-116

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.57.3 Register Notification Address (E-mail Address)

(1) Use
To set E-mail addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.
Up to 10 addresses can be registered.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Touch [Forward].
From E-mail addresses 1 to 10, select an E-mail address where settings are made.
Touch [Edit E-mail Address].
Enter an E-mail address (up to 320 one-byte characters) using the keyboard on the screen and touch [OK].
6.58 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Total Counter Notification Settings

6.58.1 Notification Schedule Setting
(1) Use
To set the schedule for informing the total counter value.
Two different schedules can be set for reporting.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Touch [Schedule 1] or [Schedule 2].

Select the reporting cycle from [Daily], [Weekly] or [Monthly].
When selecting [Daily] for the reporting cycle, set the Interval of day(s).
When selecting [Weekly] for the reporting cycle, set the Interval of week(s) and day of the Week.
When selecting [Monthly] for the reporting cycle, set the Interval of month(s) and date of the month.
6.58.2 Notification Address Setting

(1) Use
To set the e-mail address for reporting the total counter value.
Up to three e-mail addresses can be set.
It can be selected whether to apply the schedule of the [Set Schedule] to each address.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Touch [Address 1], [Address 2] or [Address 3].

Touch [E-mail Address Edit].
Enter the e-mail address (up to 320 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
Touch [Set Schedule].
Select ON/OFF for each schedule.
6.58.3 Model Name

(1) Use
To set the device name for identifying the copier when reporting the total counter.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Model Name].
2. Enter the model name (up to 20 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
6.58.4 Send Now

(1) Use
To transfer the current total counter value to the set address.
6.59 Network Settings-Detail Settings-PING Confirmation

6.59.1 Use
To set the TCP/IP network diagnosis by PING.
6.59.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address] for PING transmission.
3. Touch [Check Connection] key to check the connection.
6.60 Network Settings-Detail Settings-SLP Setting

6.60.1 Use
To set whether to use SLP or not.
Device search will be available with TWAIN by setting SLP enable.
I-117

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Enable
6.60.3 Setting item

Enable
Disable
6.61 Network Settings-Detail Settings-LPD Setting

6.61.1 Use
To set whether to use LPD during printing or not.

Enable
6.61.3 Setting item

Enable
Disable
6.62 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Prefix/Suffix Setting

6.62.1 ON/OFF Setting
(1) Use
To set whether to add prefix or suffix to the address when calling or entering an address.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.62.2 Prefix/Suffix Setting

(1) Use
To register or change the prefix or suffix.
Eight types of prefix and suffix can be added.
Prefix
Letters added to the top of the text (header part)
Suffix
Letters added to the bottom of the text (footer part)
(2) Procedure
Available number to be registered as prefix is up to 20 characters.
Available number to be registered as suffix is up to 64 characters.
6.63 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Error Code Display Setting

6.63.1 Use
To set whether or not to display an error code when a network-related error occurs.
To help to identify the cause of network error by displaying an error code.

OFF
6.63.3 Setting item

ON
OFF
6.64 Network Settings-IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings

NOTE
IEEE802.1X authentication settings are made with PageScope Web Connection.
6.64.1 IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings

(1) Use
To set whether or not to use IEEE802.1X authentication.
(2) Default setting

OFF
I-118

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.64.2 Auth. Status

(1) Use
Displays present IEEE802.1X authentication status.
6.64.3 Reset Job Settings

(1) Use
Returns all IEEE802.1X authentication settings to initial values.

(1) Procedure
Sets a certificate verification method for server certificate verification.
Expiration Date
CN
Chain
Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct. The
chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
6.65 Network Settings-Web Browser Setting

It will be displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-101 v2 or LK-103 v2) is activated.
6.65.1 Use
To set whether to use the web browser function.

Enable
6.65.3 Setting item

Enable
Invalid
6.66 Network Settings-Bluetooth Setting

It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to Invalid.
[Service Mode] [System 2] [Bluetooth Settings]
6.66.1 Use
To set whether to enable or disable the Bluetooth function.

Enable
6.66.3 Setting item

Enable
Invalid
6.67 Copier Settings

6.67.1 Auto Zoom (Platen)
(1) Use
To set whether to function the auto zoom when the tray is selected with document set on the original glass (excepting at automatic paper
selection mode.)
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.67.2 Auto Zoom (ADF)

(1) Use
To set whether to function the auto zoom when the feed tray is selected with document set on the ADF (excepting at automatic paper
selection mode.)
I-119

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.67.3 Specify Default Tray when APS OFF

(1) Use
To set the tray to be used when APS is cancelled.
To set the tray (tray 1) for the default setting when cancelling APS.
(2) Default setting

Tray Before APS ON
(3) Setting item

Tray Before APS ON
Default Tray
6.67.4 Select Tray for Insert Sheet

(1) Use
To select the initial value for the tray for the cover sheet paper.
(2) Default setting

Tray 2
6.67.5 Print Jobs During Copy Operation

(1) Use
To set whether to receive printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation.
To restrict receiving printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation.
Accept
Receives the print data or fax data and print
Receive Only
Print data or fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished
(2) Default setting

Accept
(3) Setting item

Accept
Receive Only
6.67.6 Automatic Image Rotation

(1) Use
Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the document and copy paper orientations are different.
When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set
If the Auto Paper setting, Auto Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the
image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper.
When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set
If the Auto Paper setting or Auto Zoom setting is selected, the image is
automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper.
When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set
If the Auto Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is

automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper.
When Auto Zoom is set
If the Auto Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the
orientation of the paper.
(2) Default setting

(3) Setting item
When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set

When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set
When Auto Zoom is set
6.67.7 Card Shot Settings-Layout

(1) Use
To set the initial copy layout setting in card shot mode.
I-120

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

Top/Bottom
(3) Setting item

Top/Bottom
Left/Right (Top Half)
Left/Right
6.67.8 Card Shot Settings-Zoom

(1) Use
To set the initial zoom setting in card shot mode.
(2) Default setting

Full Size
(3) Setting item

Full Size
x 1.0
6.67.9 Card Shot Settings-Store Original Size

(1) Use
To pre-register original sizes that are used in card shot mode.
(2) Procedure
Enter an original size, name it, and register the data.
6.68 Printer Settings

6.68.1 USB Timeout
(1) Use
To set a period of time that elapses before input and output timeouts of communication are activated.
(2) Default setting

60 seconds
(3) Setting range

10 to 1000 seconds
6.68.2 Network Timeout

(1) Use
To set a period of time that elapses before input and output timeouts of communication are activated.
(2) Default setting

60 seconds
(3) Setting range

10 to 1000 seconds
6.68.3 Print XPS Errors

(1) Use
To set whether to print error information when an error occurs while printing a XPS file.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
6.68.4 PSWC Direct Print

(1) Use
To set whether or not to allow direct print with PageScope Web Connection.
(2) Default setting

No
I-121

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
6.68.5 Assign Account to Acquire Device Info

(1) Use
Specify whether this machine requests the password from the Windows printer driver when the Windows printer driver acquires device
information, for example, which options are installed in this machine.
Yes
Sets a password. By setting a password, the speed at which the printer driver obtains the machine information increases.
No
Does not set a password. The machine authenticates the printer driver with the OpenAPI feature.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
6.69 Fax Settings-NOTE

Settings are available only when the optional fax kit (FK-508) is mounted.
6.70 Fax Settings-Header Information

6.70.1 Use
To register the name of the sender and fax ID which will be printed when transmitting the fax.
6.70.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Sender] and enter the name of the sender (up to 30 characters) on the onscreen keyboard.
2. Enter Sender Fax No. (up to 20 characters) using the 10-key pad and [+], [Space] displayed on the screen.
6.71 Fax Settings-Header/Footer Position

6.71.1 Header Position
(1) Use
To set the position to print the header when transmitting the fax.
(2) Default setting

Outside Body Text
(3) Setting item

Inside Body Text
Outside Body Text
OFF
NOTE
[Outside Body Text] cannot be selected for Internet Fax/IP Address Fax.
6.71.2 Print Receiver's Name

It will not be displayed on the screen when [Fax Target] is set to beside US or HK in the following settings.
[Service Mode] [System 1] [Marketing Area]
(1) Use
To set whether to print the information of TX destination (Fax No.) when transmitting the fax.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.71.3 Footer Position

(1) Use
To set the position to print the footer when transmitting the fax.
(2) Default setting

OFF
I-122

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting item

Inside Body Text
Outside Body Text
OFF
NOTE
[Outside Body Text] cannot be selected for the color mode of IP Address Fax.
6.72 Fax Settings-Line Parameter Setting

6.72.1 Dialing Method
(1) Use
To set the dialing method.
(2) Default setting

PB
(3) Setting item

PB
10 pps
NOTE
The displays are different depending on the country.
6.72.2 Receive Mode

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is mounted.
(1) Use
To set the fax reception mode.
To change to manual reception when using the remote reception function, etc. when connected to the external telephone.
(2) Default setting

Auto RX
(3) Setting item

Auto RX
Manual RX
6.72.3 Number of RX Call Rings (Receive Time Interval Setting)

When the following setting is set to Time, [Receive Time Interval Setting] will be displayed.
[Service Mode] [Fax Settings] [Network] [Network setting 1] [Receive Signal Detection Mode]
(1) Use
To set the number of times (times) to receive call rings.
To change the number of times (times) of the fake ringback tone after it starts calling until it starts receiving.
(2) Default setting

Number of RX Call Rings : 2 X
Receive Time Interval Setting: 6 sec
(3) Setting range

Number of RX Call Rings: 0 to 15
Receive Time Interval Setting: 0 to 15
6.72.4 Number of Redials

(1) Use
To set the number of redials.
To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy, etc.
(2) Default setting

3X
(3) Setting range

0 to 7
NOTE
The line which can be set up is different depending on the country.
I-123

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.72.5 Redial Interval

(1) Use
To set the interval for redialing.
(2) Default setting

3 min
(3) Setting range

1 to 15
6.72.6 Line Monitor Sound

(1) Use
To set whether to output the line monitor sound from the speaker or not.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.72.7 Line Monitor Sound Volume (Send)

(1) Use
To set the volume of the speaker for the sent signal sound.
(2) Procedure
Change the volume by touching the [Lower] or [Higher].
(3) Default setting

10
(4) Setting range

0 to 31
6.72.8 Line Monitor Sound Volume (Receive)

(1) Use
To set the volume of the speaker for the received signal sound.
(2) Procedure
Change the volume by touching the [Lower] or [Higher].
(3) Default setting

20
(4) Setting range

0 to 31
6.73 Fax Settings-TX/RX Settings

6.73.1 Duplex Print (RX)
It will not be displayed when [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to ON.
(1) Use
To set whether to carry out the duplex print for the received original when receiving the fax.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-124

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.73.2 Letter/Ledger over A4/A3

(1) Use
To set whether to use the inch paper priority when receiving the fax.
(2) Default setting

The default setting is different depending on the country.
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.73.3 Print Paper Selection

(1) Use
To set the priority for paper feed tray when receiving the fax.
Auto select
Selected automatically.
Fixed Size
Printed only on the fixed size.
Priority Size
Printed on size with priority. When the size is not set, it will be printed on the closest size.
(2) Default setting

Auto Select
(3) Setting item

Auto Select
Fixed Size
Priority Size
6.73.4 Print Paper Size

(1) Use
To set the paper size to print the text when receiving the fax.
To make the setting of [Print Paper Size] enable, set [Tray Selection for RX Print] to [Auto].
(2) Default setting

A4
(3) Setting item

A3
B4
A4
NOTE
6.73.5 Incorrect User Box No. Entry

(1) Use
To set the operation when the unregistered box number is entered.
(2) Default setting

Print
(3) Setting item

Print
Show Error Message Auto
Create User Box
6.73.6 Tray Selection for RX Print

(1) Use
To select the paper tray to be fixed when printing the received text.
(2) Default setting

Auto
(3) Setting item
Auto
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
I-125

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
Items available for selection are different depending on the paper feed option mounted.
6.73.7 Min. Reduction for RX Print

(1) Use
To set the print magnification for received text.
(2) Default setting

96 %
(3) Setting item

87 % to 96 %
Full Size
6.73.8 Print Separate Fax Pages

It will not be displayed when [Duplex Print (RX)] is set to ON.
(1) Use
To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.73.9 File After Polling TX

(1) Use
To set whether to delete the original which polling transmission has been completed.
(2) Default setting

Delete
(3) Setting item

Delete
Save
6.73.10 No. of Sets (RX)

(1) Use
To set the number of copies to be printed with the received document.
(2) Default setting

1 set
(3) Setting range

1 to 10
6.73.11 Individual Receiving Line Setup

It will be displayed only when the optional FAX Kit (FK-508) line 2 is installed and the following setting is set to TX and RX or RX Only.
[Administrator Settings] [Fax Settings] [Multi Line Settings] [Multi Line Settings] [Line 2 Setting]
(1) Use
Specify whether to configure the individual receiving line setup.
When this setting is set to ON, the following settings can be made separately for each fax line:
Forward TX setting, TSI User Box Setting, PC-FAX RX setting, Memory RX Setting
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.73.12 Individual Sender Line Setup

It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-508) line 2 is installed and the following setting is set to TX and RX or TX Only.
I-126

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[Administrator Settings] [Fax Settings] [Multi Line Settings] [Multi Line Settings] [Line 2 Setting]
(1) Use
Specify whether to configure the individual sender line setup.
When this setting is set to ON, the following settings can be made separately for each fax line:
Header Information
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.74 Fax Settings-Function Settings-Function ON/OFF Setting

6.74.1 F-Code TX
(1) Use
To set whether to use the F code transmission.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When the setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
6.74.2 Relay RX
(1) Use
To set whether to use the relay RX function.
To use the machine as the relay delivery station during relay TX.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.74.3 Relay Printing

(1) Use
To set whether to use the relay print function.
To print out the document that the machine relayed during relay TX.
The relay print will be output in the following case.
1. When the relay delivery completes appropriately.
2. When the delivery job is cancelled halfway by turning OFF sub power switch.
3. When the delivery job is cancelled due to redial over.
4. When main power switch is turned OFF/ON during relay print error.
5. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during redialing.
6. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during relay delivery.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-127

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.74.4 Destination Check Display Function

(1) Use
To set whether or not to display the list of specified addresses when sending the fax.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.74.5 Confirm Address (TX)

(1) Use
To set whether to use Confirm Address (the machine displays the screen where the user reenters the fax number for confirmation when
the user faxes by entering the fax number directly with the keys).
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.74.6 Confirm Address (Register)

(1) Use
To set whether to use Confirm Address (the machine displays the screen where the user reenters the fax number for confirmation when
the user faxes by entering the fax number directly with the keys).
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.75 Fax Settings-Function Settings

6.75.1 Memory RX Setting
It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to ON.
[Service Mode] [FAX] [System] [Display Setting] [Compulsory Memory RX]
It will not be displayed when [PC-Fax RX Setting], [Forward TX Setting] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to ON.
(1) Use
To set whether to use the forced memory RX function.
To store the received text in the hard disk without printing, and print it out when ordered.
(2) Default setting

NO
NOTE
Enter the password (up to 8 digits) for printing when set to [ON].
6.75.2 Closed Network RX

[Service Mode] [FAX] [System] [Display Setting] [Closed area RX]
(1) Use
To set whether to use the closed network function.
To receive data only from the device which password matches.
(2) Default setting

OFF
NOTE
When set to [OK], enter the password (up to 4 digits) to be used.
6.75.3 Forward TX Setting

It will not be displayed when [PC-Fax RX Setting], [Memory RX Setting] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to ON.
It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor or authentication device is mounted.
I-128

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Use
To set whether to use the forward fax function.
To forward the received text to the receiver which has been specified.
Forward & Print
Forward the received text, and print all out
Forward & Print (If TX Fails)
Forward the received text, and prints out only when fails to be forwarded
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
NOTE
When set to [Yes], set [Output Method], [Forward Dest.], and [Select Line].
6.75.4 Incomplete TX Hold

[Service Mode] [FAX] [System] [Display Setting] [Re-Transmission]
(1) Use
To set whether to use incomplete TX hold function.
To re-send the data failed to be sent after a given time.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
NOTE
When set to Yes, specify the File Storage Duration.
6.75.5 PC-Fax RX Setting

It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting], [Memory RX Setting] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to ON.
(1) Use
To set whether to use the PC-FAX reception function.
To store the received text file in the box in the hard disk.
(2) Default setting

Restrict
(3) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
NOTE
When Allow is selected, make the settings of Receiving User BOX Destination, Print ON/OFF, and Password check ON/OFF.
6.75.6 TSI User Box Setting

It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting], [Memory RX Setting] or [PC-Fax RX Setting] is set to ON.
(1) TSI User Box Setting

(a) Use
To set whether to use TSI distribution or not.
(b) Procedure
Touch the [TSI User Box Registration] and register the distribution.
(c) Default setting

No
(d) Setting item

Yes
No
I-129

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Action when TSI User Box is not set.

(a) Use
To set setting method when there is no matched box at receiving.
Automatically Print
To print the received data.
Memory RX Use Box
To store the received data in the forced memory receiving box.
Specified User Box
To store the received documents in a User Box of this machine.
(b) Default setting

Automatically Print
(c) Setting item

Automatically Print
Memory RX User Box
Specified User Box
(3) Print
(a) Default setting
Yes
(b) Setting item

Yes
No
6.76 Fax Settings-PBX Connection Setting

6.76.1 Use
To set whether to use PBX connection setting or not.
This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line.

No
NOTE
When use this function, enter the external number between 0 and 9999.
6.77 Fax Settings-Report Settings

6.77.1 Activity Report
(1) Use
To set whether to print out the activity report or not, and also the timing for printing.
(2) Activity Report

(a) Default setting
ON
(b) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When this setting is set to ON, make the setting of Output Setting and Output Time Settings.
(3) Output Setting

(a) Default setting
Every 100 Comm.
(b) Setting item

Daily
Every 100 Comm.
100/ Daily
(4) Remark Column Print Setup

(a) Default setting
Normal Printing
(b) Setting item

Normal Printing
User Name Printing
I-130

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Account Name Printing
6.77.2 TX Result Report

(1) Use
To set whether to print out the TX report, and also the timing for printing.
(2) Default setting

If TX Fails
(3) Setting item

ON
If TX Fails
OFF
6.77.3 Sequential TX Report

(1) Use
To set whether to print out the sequential TX report or not.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.4 Timer Reservation TX Report

(1) Use
To set whether to print out the reservation TX or not.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.5 Confidential RX Report

(1) Use
To set whether to print out the confidential RX report.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.6 Bulletin TX Report

(1) Use
To set whether to print out the bulletin TX report or not.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.7 Relay TX Result Report

(1) Use
To set whether to print out the relay TX result report or not.
To print out the relay TX result report after the relay delivery is completed when the machine is used as the relay delivery station.
I-131

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.8 Relay Request Report

(1) Use
To set whether to print out the relay request RX report or not.
To print out the relay request RX report during relay request RX when the machine is used as the relay delivery station.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.9 PC-Fax TX Error Report

(1) Use
To set whether to print out the PC-fax TX error report or not.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.10 Broadcast Result Report

(1) Use
To set the format to output the broadcast result report.
All Destinations
Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses
Each Destination
Outputs a report after each transmission
(2) Default setting

All Destinations
(3) Setting item

All Destinations
Each Destination
6.77.11 TX Result Report Check

(1) Use
To set whether to display the TX result report screen.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.12 Network Fax RX Error Report

Settings will be available when either [IP Address Fax Function] or [Internet Fax Function] is set to ON in the following settings.
(1) Use
To set whether to print RX error report when network fax function is being used.
To print the error report at unusual situation such as receiving the image data that cannot be processed.
I-132

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.13 MDN Message

Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax Function] is set to ON in the following settings.
(1) Use
To set whether to print message when receiving response message to MDN request when internet fax function is being used.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.14 DSN Message

(1) Use
To set whether to print message when receiving response message to DSN request when network fax function is being used.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.77.15 Print E-mail Message Body

(1) Use
To set whether to print mail text received normally as the report when internet fax function is being used.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.78 Fax Settings-Job Settings List

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted.
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX
assignment.
[Service Mode] [System 2] [Software Switch Setting])
6.78.1 Use
The set value list of the fax set up into this machine can be printed.
6.78.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator Settings] [Fax Settings] [Job Settings List]
3. Select the 1-Sided or 2-Sided, and touch the Start key.
6.79 Fax Settings-Multi Line Settings

It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-508) line 2 is mounted.
I-133

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.79.1 Line Parameter Setting-Dialing Method

(1) Use
To set the dial method for the expanded line.
(2) Default setting

PB
(3) Setting item

PB
10 pps
NOTE
6.79.2 Line Parameter Setting-Number of Rx Call Rings

(1) Use
To set the number of RX call rings for the expanded line.
To change the number of artificial ringback tones with expanded line when receiving calls until it starts receiving operation.
(2) Default setting

2X
(3) Setting range

0 to 15
6.79.3 Line Parameter Setting-Line Monitor Sound

(1) Use
To set whether or not to output the line monitor sound of the expanded line from the speaker.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.79.4 Function Settings-PC-FAX TX Setting

This setting does not appear when RX Only is selected for [Multi Line Settings].
(1) Use
To set the number of the line used for PC-FAX transmission.
(2) Default setting

No Selection
(3) Setting item

No Selection
Line 1
Line 2
6.79.5 Multi Line Settings

To set the system for using each line when using more than one line.
(1) Multi Line Usage

(a) Procedure
When selecting [Normal], perform the transmission setting for Line 2.
(2) Line 2 Setting

(a) Default setting
TX and RX
(b) Setting item

TX and RX
RX Only
TX Only
I-134

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.79.6 Sender Fax No.

(1) Use
To register the fax ID when using the additional line.
(2) Procedure
Use 10-key pad or [+] / [Space], enter the fax ID (up to 20 characters).
6.80 Fax Settings-Network Fax Settings

It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax Function] or [Internet Fax Function] is set to ON in the following settings.
6.80.1 Black Compression Level

(1) Use
To set black compression level at black TX mode when network fax function is being used.
(2) Default setting

MH
(3) Setting item

MMR
MR
MH
6.80.2 Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method

(1) Use
To set a color/black multi value compression method used when faxing selecting JPEG or PDF as a file format under network fax
operation.
JPEG (Color)
Data is compressed in color JPEG format.
JPEG (Gray Scale)
Data is compressed in monochrome JPEG format.
Not Set
Data transmission in color or grayscale is disabled. Data is compressed in black and white
(binary) with a specified compression method.
(2) Default setting

JPEG (Color)
(3) Setting item

JPEG (Color)
JPEG (Gray Scale)
Not Set
6.80.3 SIP Adaptor Connection Check

Not used.
6.80.4 Internet Fax Self RX Ability

It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to ON in the following settings.
(1) Use
To set image data compression system, paper size and resolution, which can be received by the machine with internet fax.
(2) Procedure
The following shows the options of each setting item.
Compression Type
Paper Size
MMR
A3
600 x 600dpi (Ultra Fine)
MR
B4
400 x 400dpi (Super Fine)
MH
A4
200 x 200dpi (Fine)
200 x 100dpi (Standard)
I-135
Resolution

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.80.5 Internet Fax Advanced Settings

It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to ON in the following settings.
To set advanced functions of internet fax.
NOTE
Only MDN Request will be sent when both MDN Request and DSN Request are set to Yes.
(1) MDN Request

(a) Use
To set whether to send MDN (Message Disposition Notification) request when transmitting through internet fax.
(b) Default setting

Yes
(c) Setting item

Yes
Do Not Send
(2) DSN Request

(a) Use
To set whether to send DSN (Delivery Status Notification) request when transmitting through internet fax.
(b) Default setting

Do Not Send
(c) Setting item

Yes
Do Not Send
(3) MDN Response

(a) Use
To set whether to send DSN (Delivery Status Notification) request when transmitting through internet fax.
(b) Default setting

Yes
(c) Setting item

Yes
Do Not Send
(4) MDN/DSN Response Monitoring Time

(a) Use
To set the period to observe the response from the other machine when sending MDN/DSN request.
In the case of time over, time out message is notified.
(b) Default setting

24 hours
(c) Setting item

1 to 99
Do Not Monitor
(5) Maximum Resolution

(a) Use
To set maximum resolution for reading, TX/RX and record when internet fax function is being used.
(b) Default setting

(c) Setting item

400 x 400dpi (Super Fine)
(6) Add Content-Type Information

(a) Use
To set whether or not to add Content-Type information when using Internet fax.
I-136

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
When [Yes] is selected, application=faxbw is added as sub-type to MIME Content-Type header.
(b) Default setting

Do Not Send
(c) Setting item

Yes
Do Not Send
6.80.6 IP Address Fax Operation Settings

It will not be displayed when [IP Address Fax Function] is set to OFF in the following settings.
(1) Operation Mode

(a) Use
To set the operational mode applied to IP address fax.
Mode1
This mode allows communication between Konica Minolta models capable of transmitting IP address faxes and
models compatible with the Direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ. However, a unique method developed for Konica
Minolta models is used to transmit a color fax.
Mode2
This mode allows communication between Konica Minolta models capable of transmitting IP address faxes and
models compatible with the Direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ. The transmission in color mode is performed in
the communication mode (Profile-C format) compatible with the Direct SMTP standard.
(b) Default setting

Mode1
(c) Setting item

Mode1
Mode2
NOTE
When selecting Mode 2, make color original transmission settings.
6.81 Fax Settings-Fax Print Quality Settings

6.81.1 Use
To set whether to correct the received text of G3 fax according to the resolution.
Prioritize Quality
Corrects and outputs the received image.
Prioritize Speed
Does not correct the received image, which results in a shorter output time.

Low Resolution: Prioritize Quality
High Resolution: Prioritize Speed
6.81.3 Setting item

(1) Low Resolution
Prioritize Quality
Prioritize Speed
(2) High Resolution

Prioritize Quality
Prioritize Speed
6.82 System Connection

6.82.1 OpenAPI Settings-Access Setting
(1) Use
To allow or restrict the access from other systems with OpenAPI when using PageScope Data Administrator.
(2) Default setting

Allow
(3) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
I-137

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.82.2 OpenAPI Settings-SSL/Port Settings

(1) Use
To set the SSL/access port for other systems with OpenAPI.
(2) SSL Setting

(a) Default setting
Non-SSL Only
(b) Setting item

Non-SSL Only
SSL Only
SSL/Non-SSL
(3) Port No./Port No.(SSL)

(a) Procedure
1. Select Port No. or Port No. (SSL), and touch [Input].
(4) Client Certificates

(a) Default setting
Do Not Request
(b) Setting item

Request
Do Not Request
(5) Certificate Verification Level Settings

Expiration Date
Key Usage
the issuer.
Chain
CN
6.82.3 OpenAPI Settings-Authentication

(1) Use
To set whether to authenticate access of other systems which uses OpenAPI when using PageScope Data Administrator.
To set authentication of the access from other systems using OpenAPI.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When setting to [ON], enter the login name and the password to be set.
6.82.4 Call Remote Center

It will be displayed when the setup at the CS Remote Care center is complete.
(1) Use
To call the CS Remote Care center from the administrator, when the CS Remote Care setup is complete.
(2) Procedure
For details, see I.11.6 CS Remote Care (Outlines).
6.82.5 Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting

(1) Use
Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number.
I-138

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF

(1) Use
Specify [Printer Name], [Printer Location], [Printer Information], and [Printer URI].
The [Printer Information] setting is linked to [Printer Information] in [HTTP Server Settings].
(2) Procedure
2. Enter the printer name, printer location and printer information using the keyboard on the display.
3. Touch [Printer URI], and confirm the printer URI information.
6.82.7 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting

(1) Use
Specify whether to allow the user to print data in a cellular phone or PDA or save such data in a User Box.
(2) Default setting

Restrict
(3) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
6.83 Security Settings-Administrator Password

6.83.1 Use
To set/change the administrator password.
6.83.2 Procedure
Enter the administrator password on the on-screen keyboard.
1. Current Password : Enter the current administrator password
2. New Password : Enter the new administrator password to be used
3. Re-Input Password : Re-enter the new administrator password
NOTE
When selecting [Utility/Counter] [Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Security Details] leads to [Password Rules]
being ON, the password with the same letters, the password which is same as the previous one and the password of less than
eight digits cannot be changed.
6.84 Security Settings-User Box Admin. Setting

Setting is disabled if user authentication or account track is not performed.
6.84.1 Use
To set whether to allow or restrict the box administrator to use the system.
To allow the box administrator to use the system.
The box administrator is the special administrator for box, who is allowed to browse contents in common box / individual box without the
password.
NOTE
[Allow] cannot be set when the user authentication or account track is not carried out.

Restrict
6.84.3 Setting item

Allow
Restrict
NOTE
[Allow] cannot be selected when user authentication and account track are not conducted.
Set the password when setting to [Allow].
I-139

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
When the following setting shows that [Password Rules] is set to ON, the Password using only a single letter or the password
same with the previous one, or the password with less than eight letters cannot be accepted.
[Administrator Settings] [Security Settings]
6.85 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels

It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor or authentication device 1 is mounted.
6.85.1 Use
To set the level for administrator settings item open to the user.
To make part of the administrator settings items open to the user.
Level 1
[Power Save Setting]

[Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)]
[Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)]
[Specify Default Tray when APS Off]
[Select Tray for Insert Sheet]
[Card Shot Settings]
are available to users.
Level 2
[Power Save Setting]

[Output Setting], [Date/Time Setting]
[Daylight Savings Time Setting]
[AE Level Adjustment]
[Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)]
[Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)]
[Specify Default Tray when APS Off]
[Select Tray for Insert Sheet]
[Print Jobs During Copy Operation]
are available to users.
Prohibit
Not to allow the user to set neither Level 1 nor Level 2

Prohibit
6.85.3 Setting item

Level 1
Level 2
Prohibit
6.86 Security Settings-Security Details

6.86.1 Password Rules
(1) Use
To set whether to apply the password rules.
To apply the password rule to enhance security.
Passwords to be covered: CE password, administrator password, public user box password, user password, account track password,
passwords for confidential documents, SNMPv3 WriteUser password, Web-DAV server password.
Details of the password rules:
Password except user password, public user box password, SNMPv3 WriteUser password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric
characters. (Case-sensitive)
User password shall be 8 to 64 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. (Case-sensitive)
Public user box password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters.
SNMPv3 WriteUser password shall be 8 to 32 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters.
Password with only the same letter is prohibited.
Password same with the one prior to change is prohibited.
NOTE
When the password rule is set to [ON], the password cannot be changed or registered unless it follows the above
conditions.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
[Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhances Security Mode]
[ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to OFF.
[Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [CE Authentication]
[CE Authentication] will not be displayed and cannot be set to OFF when [Password Rules] is set to ON.
I-140

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.86.2 Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error

(1) Use
To set the function for prohibiting authentication operation in order to prevent the unauthorized access.
To use when setting the system to prohibit authentication failure when conducting authentication by password, etc.
Authentications which are subjected to this function: CE authentication, administrator authentication, user+ accounts authentication,
SNMP authentication, secure print authentication, user box authentication.
Mode 1
When failed to authenticate, authentication operation (entering the password) will be prohibited
for a certain period of time.
Mode 2
When failed to authenticate, authentication operation (entering the password) will be prohibited
for a certain period of time.
The number of times failure occurred will be counted, and when the number reaches to the
specified time, authentication will be prohibited and the access will be locked. When the access is
locked, touch [Release] on the main body, or turn main power switch OFF/ON to cancel it. For CE
authentication and administrator authentication, only turning main power switch OFF/ON will
cancel it. When the machine goes into an access lock condition, release the lock in the following
procedure.
Touch keys in the following order. [Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Security
Details] [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error]. Then touch [Release].
User+ accounts authentication

SNMP authentication
Secure print authentication
User box authentication
Administrator authentication
After the main power switch is turned OFF and ON, the access lock is released automatically
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.
CE authentication
The lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop 0 9 3 1 7 in [Meter
Count] [Check Details] [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and
ON. When the timer reaches the time specified in this setting, the access lock is released.
[Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [Administrator unlocking]
(2) Default setting

Mode 1
(3) Setting item

Mode 1
Mode 2
NOTE
[Mode2] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to ON.
Only the number of times for trials up to the access lock can be changed.
When [Mode 2] is selected, set the number of times where checks are made before access is locked.
(4) Procedure
Touch [Release Time Settings] and set a period of time that elapses before access lock is released.
6.86.3 Confidential Document Access Method

(1) Use
To display the status of the authentication system on the control panel for the confidential document access.
It cannot be changed at the operators option since it will automatically be set according to the [Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error]
setting.
It will be set to [Mode 1] when [Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error] is set to [Mode 1].
It will be set to [Mode 2] when [Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error] is set to [Mode 2].
Mode 1
This mode is for authentication by confidential document ID and password. It displays the list of
the corresponding confidential document to print them.
Mode 2
This mode is for authentication by confidential document ID. It displays the list of the
corresponding confidential document, and print them with authentication by password.
(2) Default setting

Mode 1
(3) Setting item

Mode 1
Mode 2
NOTE
[Mode2] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to ON.
6.86.4 Manual Destination Input

(1) Use
To set whether to allow or prohibit to manually enter the destination address on the destination Input screen.
Allow All
Allows manual destination input in all transmission options.
I-141

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Enable Functions Individually
Allows manual destination input only for G3 fax and restricts it in other transmission options.
Restrict
Hides the [Direct Input] tab to prevent you from directly entering destinations.
(2) Default setting

Allow All
(3) Setting item

Allow All
Enable Functions Individually
Restrict
6.86.5 Print Data Capture

(1) Use
To set whether to allow or restrict capturing the print job data.
To be used when carrying out [Service Mode] [System 2] [Data capture].
(2) Default setting

Allow
(3) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
NOTE
6.86.6 Job Log Settings

(1) Use
Selects whether to keep logs of operations and access made by users and service engineers.
To set whether to overwrite existing logs.
To ensure security, this settings is used to keep logs of operations and access including security settings changes, authentication, and job
executions by users and service engineers.
Logs are saved in HDD and NVRAM.
(2) Job Log Settings

(a) Default setting
No
(b) Setting item

Yes
No
NOTE
After selecting Yes, the main power switch must be turned OFF and ON so that the new setting takes effect.
When ON is selected in [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhanced Security Mode], this setting is
automatically set to Yes.
(3) Overwrite
(a) Use
Set whether to allow or restrict overwriting existing logs when saving audit logs.
(b) Default setting

Restrict
(c) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
NOTICE
To erase audit logs, press [Erase Job Log].
6.86.7 Restrict Fax TX

(1) Use
To set whether or not to prohibit sending fax.
(2) Default setting

OFF
I-142

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.86.8 Hide Personal Information

(1) Use
It will not be displayed when the two settings below are as follows:
The authentication device is set in [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Function Management Choice] [Authentication Device].
NO is selected in [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Function Management Settings] [Authentication Device Setting]
[Job Confirmation Display].
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.86.9 Hide Personal Information (MIB)

It will not be displayed when the setting below is as follows:
ON is selected in [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhanced Security Mode].
(1) Use
Specify whether to display the file name, address, or User Box number as MIB information in Job List.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.86.10 Display Activity Log

It will not be displayed when both settings are as follows:
The authentication device is set in [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Function Management Choice] [Authentication Device].
NO is selected in [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Function Management Settings] [Authentication Device Setting]
[Job Confirmation Display].
(1) Use
Selects whether to display communication logs for scan/fax transmission.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.86.11 Initialize
(1) Use
All data of selected items is cleared.
Data of the following items can be cleared.
Job history
Copy Program
Network Settings
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Initialize].
2. Select the desired item to clear its data and touch [OK].
3. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK] to initialize the data.
6.86.12 Job History Thumbnail Display

(1) Use
To set whether or not to display a thumbnail of originals when displaying a job history.
I-143

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.86.13 Secure Print Only

(1) Use
To set whether or not to allow only Secure Print for print jobs from PC. When ON is selected in this setting, the Secure Print feature must
be always used for printing from a printer driver. As all print jobs require ID or a password, output documents remains private.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
6.86.14 Copy Guard

It will be displayed only when the optional security kit SC-507 is mounted.
(1) Use
Specify whether to use the Copy Guard function.
If [Copy Guard] is selected in [Application], you can embed copy inhibit information on paper.
This is used upon set-up of the optional security kit SC-507.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
6.86.15 Web browser contents access

It will be displayed only when the optional security kit SC-507 is mounted.
(1) Use
Specify whether to use the Password Copy function. If [Password Copy] is selected in [Application], you can embed a password on paper.
You can also detect a password embedded on paper.
This is used upon set-up of the optional security kit SC-507.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
6.86.16 Web browser contents access

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable access to locally-stored files (pre-installed contents, image files, and help files) from the web browser
that is interacting with MFP via OpenAPI applications.
(2) Default setting

Allow
(3) Setting item

Allow
Restrict
NOTE
When using the application where server authentication is carried out by web browser extensions, [Allow] is automatically
selected.
I-144

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.87 Security Settings-Enhanced Security Mode

6.87.1 Use
To set whether or not to enhance security.
To use when enhancing the security function at user's option.
The following settings are necessary for setting the security enhancement ON.
Change it with the one which meets password rules.
User Authentication
Set to User Authentication (MFP) or User Authentication (External Server).
HDD encryption word
Set the encryption word with 20 characters.
SSL Certificate
Register self-certificate for SSL communication from the PSWC.
Image Controller Setting
Set to [Controller 0].
CE Password
Change it with the one which meets password rules.
CE Authentication
Set to [ON].
Management Function Choice
Set to Unset.

OFF
6.87.3 Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
Note that setting Enhanced Security Mode to ON disables the following functions.
Terminal Debug (forcibly prohibited when Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON)
Print Data Capture (forcibly prohibited when Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON)
In CS Remote Care, the following operation is prohibited.
Rewriting instructions of firmware, communication of the account track counter information, the setting renewal of the
machine
Firmware upgrading through Internet ISW (When the Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON, the setting of this function cannot
be changed from OFF.)
Setting the Enhanced Security Mode ON will change the setting values for the following functions.
Function Name
Default Setting
When Enhanced Security mode is set to [ON]
Password Rules
To apply the password rule to enhance
security.
OFF
ON (not to be changed)
Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error

To set the function for prohibiting
Authentication operation in order to
prevent the unauthorized access.
Mode 1
Mode 2 (not to be changed): Three times is set.

* The number of times can be changed to once, twice, or
three times. (It is twice, four or six times for WebDAV
server password.)
Secure Document Access Method

To display the status of the Authentication
system on the control panel for the
Confidential document access.
Mode1
Mode 2 (not to be changed)

* In association with Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error,
the method is changed from authentication using Secure
Document ID and password (Mode 1) to that using the
password with the Secure Document first narrowed down
by Secure Document ID (Mode 2).
Public User Access

To permit use by a public user having no
user registration if user authentication
setting has been made.
Restrict
Restrict (not to be changed)
User List
To display the list key for User names on
User Authentication screen.
OFF
OFF (not to be changed)
Print without Authentication

Restrict
To allow or restrict printing which user and
account are not specified.
User Box Admin. Setting

To set whether to allow or restrict the Box
Administrator to use the system.
Restrict
SSL
To set whether to encrypt access by SSL.
I.6.40.2.(9) SSL Setting
I.6.47.1.(3) SSL Setting
I.6.51.3 SSL Setting
OFF
ON (not to be changed)
SSL Encryption Strength

To set the SSL encryption strength for the
SSL encryption communication.
I.6.35.9.(3) Encryption Algorithm
I.6.35.10.(4) ESP Encryption Algorithm
I.6.43.3 E-mail Text Encryption Method
I.6.44.4.(9) Encryption Algorithm
AES/3DES
(not to be changed to one containing strength lower than
AES/3DES)
AES-256
3DES-168
RC4-128
DES-56
RC4-40
I-145

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Function Name
Default Setting
When Enhanced Security mode is set to [ON]
Automatically Obtain Certificates of S/MIME
No
No (not to be changed)
S/MIME Encryption Method
3DES
3DES (not to be changed to DES or RC-2)
FTP Server
To set whether to use FTP server or not.
ON
SNMPv1/v2c
To use when changing Write setting.
Read/Write enable
Only Read is enabled (not to be changed)
SNMP v3 Security Level and auth/privpassword

To set the security level for the Reading/
Writing Authority User which is used for
SNMP v3.
auth/priv-password
The security level can be selected from among

[authpassword] and [auth/priv-password]. An 8-digit-ormore auth-password and privpassword can both be set.
Print Data Capture

To set whether to allow or restrict
capturing the Print Job Data.
Allow
Network Setting Clear

To clear the network setting through
PageScope Web Connection.
Enabled
Restrict
Administrator Password Change Via Network Enabled

To clear the network setting through
PageScope Web Connection.
Release Time Settings

To set the period of time to be elapsed
before the access lock state is released.
5 min.
The setting value should be 5 min. or more (no value less

than 5 can be set)
Destination Registration Change by User

(Address Book and Program destination)
Enabled
Secure Print User Box Preview
Thumbnail View
Detail View
Document Details are
enabled
Only Detail View is enabled before password

authentication (Mode 2)
Initialize (Network Settings)

To clear the network related settings.
Enabled

Specifies whether to transfer the input or
output image data to the server using
whenever MFP inputs or outputs image
data.
OFF
Internet ISW Set

OFF
To set firmware upgrading by Internet ISW,
and enable or disable various settings.
Operation Ban release time

To set the period of time to be elapsed
before the access lock state is released in
CE password authentication.
The setting value should be 5 min. or more (no value less

than 5 can be set)
5 min.
6.88 Security Settings-HDD Settings/SSD Settings

6.88.1 Check HDD Capacity/Check SSD Capacity
(1) Use
To display the used space capacity, total space capacity, and the remaining capacity of the hard disk or the SSD.
To check the capacity and the status of use of the hard disk or the SSD.
6.88.2 Overwrite HDD Data

When the image becomes unnecessary, temporary data overwrite function will write meaningless data over all area where images are
stored, and destroy the image data itself. The structure of image data will be destroyed so that in case HDD is stolen, the remaining data
included in the image data will not leak. Using the HDD lock password function or HDD encryption function along with this function will
provide a high level of security which prevents images of great importance from leaking. It is recommended to use HDD lock password
function or HDD encryption function along with this function for those who require high level of security.
(1) Overwrite HDD Data

(a) Use
To set whether or not to use overwrite temporary data.
To use when making temporary data overwrite function valid.
All data are temporarily written into HDD during PC print, copier print, scanning and fax transmission. When the operation is complete,
perform overwriting to the area data were once written in HDD in order to enhance security.
(b) Default setting

OFF
I-146

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When selecting [ON], select an overwrite method.
(2) Overwrite Method

(a) Use
To set overwriting method to use temporary data overwrite function.
To change overwriting method to use temporary data overwrite function.
Mode 1
To overwrite 0x00 one time.
Mode 2
Overwrite 0x00 overwrite 0xff overwrite 0x61 validation
(b) Default setting

Mode 1
(c) Setting item

Mode 1
Mode 2
(3) Encryption Priority/Overwrite Priority

(a) Use
Encryption Priority/Overwrite Priority can be selected.
Encryption Priority
When the encryption word is set, the security level of the data will be enhanced before writing
to HDD. When erasing data, they will all be converted into encryption data before overwritten.
Therefore, overwriting will be executed with the value besides the value specified by the
selected mode.
Overwrite Priority
Standard encryption method will be applied to data written to HDD even when the encryption
word is set, so overwriting and erasing will be performed without fail using the specified value
in the selected mode. It is used for performing the overwriting and erasing according to the
HDD data erase standard.
NOTE
It is necessary to make HDD format when encryption priority/overwrite priority setting is changed.
(b) Default setting

Encryption Priority
(c) Setting item

Encryption Priority
Overwrite Priority
6.88.3 Overwrite All Data

(1) When the HDD is installed
(a) Use
To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting.

To initialize the area of use for the user stored in NVRAM.
To use when disposing of the hard disk.
Select the overwriting method from Mode 1 through 8.
Mode 1
It overwrites 0x00 once.
Mode 2
Overwrites with random numbers overwrites with random numbers overwrites with 0x00
Mode 3
Overwrites with 0x00 overwrites with 0xff overwrites with random numbers verifies
Mode 4
Overwrites with random numbers overwrites with 0x00 overwrites with 0xff
Mode 5
Overwrites with 0x00 overwrites with 0xff overwrites with 0x00 overwrites with 0xff
Mode 6
Overwrites with 0x00 overwrites with 0xff overwrites with 0x00 overwrites with 0xff overwrites with 0x00
overwrites with 0xff overwrites with random numbers
Mode 7
overwrites with 0xff overwrites with 0xaa
Mode 8
overwrites with 0xff overwrites with 0xaa verifies
(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Overwrite All Data].
2. Touch [Overwrite].
3. Touch [Yes] on the check screen.
I-147

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. Touch [YES] on the confirmation screen.

5. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
(2) When the HDD is not installed

(a) Use
To delete the area in SSD that is used by users.

To initialize the area in NVRAM that is used by users.
To use when disposing of the main body.
0x00 is used as the overwriting method.
(b) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch [Overwrite All Data].

Touch [Overwrite].
Touch [YES] on the confirmation screen.
Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
6.88.4 HDD Lock Password

(1) Use
To set the lock password for the hard disk.
To enter, change or delete the lock password for the hard disk.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [HDD Lock Password].
2. Enter the password (20 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
Password using only a single letter is not acceptable.
Dont forget the password. When the password is forgotten, the replacement of hard disk is needed.
After setting a lock password, if you replace the HDD due to its breakage or other reasons and install a new HDD, an error
message is displayed. In that case, clear the HDD lock password and set a new password with the procedure shown below.
3. Re-enter the password to confirm.
4. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after.
6.88.5 Format HDD

(1) Use
To conduct logical formatting of HDD.
The following shows the data deleted by formatting the HDD.
Program
Address Book
Authentication method setting
User authentication setting
Account track setting
User Box
User Box setting
Documents in User Boxes
Confidential User Box setting
Bulletin Board User Box setting
NOTE
It is subject to logical formatting here, therefore if starting with physical formatting, follow as [Service Mode] [State
Confirmation] [Memory/HDD Adj.] [HDD Format].
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Format HDD].
2. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK].
6.88.6 Format SSD

(1) Use
To conduct logical formatting of SSD.
The following shows the data deleted by formatting the SSD.
Program
Address Book
Authentication method setting
User authentication setting
Account track setting
I-148

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
User Box
User Box setting
Documents in User Boxes
Confidential User Box setting
Bulletin Board User Box setting
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Format SSD].
2. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK].
6.88.7 HDD Encryption Setting

(1) Use
To re-set encrypting word due to exchange of NVRAM board or etc.
NOTE
HDD formatting is required after this setting. Therefore it is necessary to retrieve certain data from HDD in advance. The
following data will be lost after HDD formatting.
1. Address data
2. Authentication data : Authentication mode, user authentication setting, account track setting
3. Box setting data : Box and text in the box, setting information of each box, box for fax
4. Job history, fax transmission history
And after setting the HDD encryption key, the movie data and OCR dictionary data need to be reinstalled as necessary since
these data will be deleted by HDD format.
If you replace the HDD due to its breakage or other reasons, you can automatically reset the encryption key by installing a new
HDD and performing the logical format.
(2) Procedure
1. Press [HDD Encryption Setting].
2. Enter encryption key (20 characters) with the keyboard on the operation panel and press [OK].
NOTE
Double-byte and identical characters are not acceptable.
4. Open [Administrator Settings] and conduct HDD formatting according to the instruction appeared on the panel.
6.89 Security Settings-Function Management Setting

6.89.1 Each Function Setting
It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that Vendor 2 or Management Device is mounted.
(1) Use
To set whether to use management function for each item of [Copy], [PC print], [Send data] and [Print others].
[Print others] is not displayed when vendor is connected.
[ON] for [Send Data] will not be displayed when the optional image controller (IC-409) is mounted.
To set whether to use Management function for each item of [Copy], [PC print], [Send data] and [Print others].
[Print others] is not displayed when Vendor is connected.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
Prohibit
6.89.2 Max Copy Set

It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
(1) Use
To set the upper limit of the number of copy or PC print when management function has been set.
(2) Default setting

9999
I-149

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting range

1 to 9999
6.89.3 Network Function Usage Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable applications that use the network.
Not to use the network function whose counter is difficult to be managed when management function has been set.
The following are target functions.
PC-FAX transmission/Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in user boxes/Using PageScope Box Operator to view
and retrieve documents in user boxes/Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in user boxes/Using Page-Scope Job Spooler
to view and retrieve documents in user boxes/Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
However, when the vendor or management device setting in the Service Mode is set, this setting is set to OFF.
Exercise caution since it will stay in OFF setting even when unset is selected on vendor or management device setting in
Service Mode later.
6.89.4 Authentication Time Setting

It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted.
(1) Authentication Method

(a) Use
To set the authentication mode when authentication device is used.
To change the authentication mode when authentication device is used.
Keep Card
Authentication is available leaving the card in the given place when making authentication
with the device.
Touch and Print
Card is placed only when authentication is made with the device and if the card is left for a
given time (authentication reset time) the authentication setting is reset.
When selecting Touch and Print, authentication reset is set after completing the job in [Authentication Time].
(b) Default setting

Touch and Print
(c) Setting item

Keep Card
Touch and Print
(2) Authentication Time

(a) Default setting
1 min.
(b) Setting range

1 to 30 min.
(3) Authentication Log-out When Job is Completed

(a) Default setting
Yes
(b) Setting item

Yes
No
(4) Job Confirmation Display

(a) Default setting
Yes
(b) Setting item

Yes
I-150

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No
6.90 Security Settings-Stamp Settings

6.90.1 Apply Stamps
(1) Use
Selects whether to add a stamp to documents when jobs are printed or fax/scanned data is sent.
(2) Default setting

Do Not Apply
(3) Setting item

Apply
Do Not Apply
(4) Procedure
Touch Apply to make stamp settings independently for print and transmission modes.
6.90.2 Delete Registered Stamp

(1) Use
Deletes registered stamps, and copy protect/repeat stamps.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Registered Stamp].
2. Select [Stamp] or [Copy Protect/Stamp Repeat].
3. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK] to delete the registered stamps.
6.91 Security Settings-Image Log Transfer Settings

It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.63 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
[Service Mode] [System 2] [Software Switch Setting]
6.91.1 Use
Specifies whether to transfer the input or output image data to the server using whenever MFP inputs or outputs image data.
Makes the settings of the WebDAV server or the FTP server where image data are transferred.
Use this settings to keep logs of input and output image data for security purpose.

No
6.91.3 Setting item

Yes
No
NOTE
When selecting [Yes], make the settings of the server where data are transferred.
Set the following item.
WebDAV Server setting
Host Name
File Path
User Name
Password
Port Number
Proxy
SSL Setting
FTP Server setting
Host Name
File Path
User Name
Password
Port Number
PASV
Proxy
6.92 Security Settings-Driver Password Encryption Setting

6.92.1 Use
To set whether to use the factory default encryption word or user-defined one as a common key that encrypts a password used for a print
job.
User-Defined
Sets an encryption word. Enter an encryption word of 20 letters.
Use Factory Default
Uses the factory default encryption word (undisclosed predefined encryption key).
I-151

SETTINGS)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
When selecting [User-Defined], set an encryption key being consisted of the same letters in the printer driver. If the encryption
word set in the main body differs from the encryption key set in the printer driver, different encrypted passwords are created and
printing cannot be made.
The use of OpenAPI allows an encryption key to be obtained from the main body.

Use Factory Default
6.92.3 Setting item

User-Defined
Use Factory Default
6.93 License Settings

6.93.1 Get Request Code
(1) Use
To display and print a request code and serial number used to activate i-Option.
Used to confirm the request code and serial number.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Get Request Code], and [Yes].
2. A serial number and request code are issued.
3. By touching [Print], the serial number and request code are printable.
6.93.2 Install License

This is displayed only when the additional memory included in the optional upgrade kit UK-203 is installed.
(1) Use
To allow administrator to activate functions provided by i-Option.

Used when administrator activates functions provided by i-Option.
By selecting a desired function and entering the corresponding license code, the function can be activated.
By making settings in [Service Mode] [Billing Setting], CE can also activate functions provided by i-Option.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Touch [Install License].

Touch [Select Function].
Select i-Option function to be activated, and touch [Yes].
Touch [OK].
Touch [License Code].
Enter the license code that was issued in the license management server using the key board on the control panel, and touch [OK].
Touch [Install] key.
Confirm the message, select [Yes], and touch [OK].
Turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
6.93.3 List of Enabled Functions

This is displayed only when the additional memory included in the optional upgrade kit UK-203 is mounted.
(1) Use
To display currently activated functions.
Used to check the functions that are activated now.
6.94 Restriction Code Setting-Restriction Code Setting

6.94.1 Use
These are communication settings for the application which is developed by the third vendor.
Do not set or change these settings without vendors instructions.
I-152
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. UTILITY (OTHER SETTINGS)
7. UTILITY (OTHER SETTINGS)

7.1 My Panel Settings
This is displayed only when a registered user is logging in after user authentication. However, this is not displayed when both management
device 2 and user authentication are used.
7.1.1 Use
To make various settings about My Panel.
To customize My Panel screen for individual registered users.
Items that can be set are as follows:
Language Setting
Copier Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Main Menu Settings
7.1.2 Procedure
1. Touch [My Panel Settings].
2. Touch a key that represents a desirable item and change its settings.
NOTE
Registering, editing, and deleting My Panel settings are allowed only when logging in as a registered user.
When My Panel is not customized, the settings for MFP take effect in the three of the control panel settings, Language setting,
Measurement unit setting, and Color selection setting.
Depending on the functions provided by each MFP and the optional device configuration, not all My Panel settings may not take
effect.
7.2 Device Information

7.2.1 Use
To display the function version of the firmware installed in MFP and the IP address.
7.2.2 Procedure
Touch [Device Information] to check the function version and IP address.
About function version
Function version
Model
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Version 1
Version 2
Version 3
Initial firmware
Initial firmware
Function
enhancement 1
Function
enhancement 2
bizhub C452
Initial firmware
Function
enhancement 2
bizhub C652DS/C552DS
Initial firmware
bizhub C360/C280/C220
Initial firmware
Function
enhancement 2
bizhub C652/C552
7.3 Meter Count

7.3.1 Counter details
(1) Meter Count
You can check the total number of pages printed after the counting start date.
Total
To check the total number of printed pages.
Black
To check the total number of pages printed in Black mode.
(2) Copy
To check the total number of pages copied.
This value includes the number of pages on which data saved in a User Box in copy mode is printed, and the number of pages list-output
in [Administrator Settings].
Total
Black
Indicates the total number of

pages copied in Black mode
Large Size*
Total (Copy + Print)

pages copied on large-size paper pages copied in Black mode and
in Black mode
that of pages printed in Black
mode through a computer
*: The large size setting is configured in [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [Counter Setting].
(3) Print
Check the total number of pages printed through a computer.
Total
Large Size*
I-153
Total (Copy + Print)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Black
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. UTILITY (OTHER SETTINGS)

pages printed in Black mode

pages copied on large-size paper pages copied in Black mode and
in Black mode
that of pages printed in Black
mode through a computer
*: The large size setting is configured in [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [Counter Setting].
(4) Scan/Fax
Check the total number of original pages scanned in the Scan/Fax or User Box mode.
Check the total number of pages on which a file in a User Box or a received file is printed.
Check the total number of pages sent and received in the fax mode.
Total
Large Size *1
Black
Indicates the total number of pages on which

a file in a User Box or a received file is
printed in Black mode *2
Indicates the total number of pages on which

a file in a User Box or a received file is
printed on large-size paper in Black mode *2
Scans
Indicates the total number of original pages

scanned in the Scan/Fax and User Box
modes
Indicates the total number of large-size

original pages that are scanned in the Scan/
Fax and User Box modes.
Fax TX
indicates the total number of pages in a sent

fax (G3)
Fax RX
Indicates the total number of pages in a

received fax (G3)
*1: The large size setting is configured in [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [Counter Setting].
*2: In the Memory RX mode, pages are counted when printed.
(5) Other
Check the total number of scanned and printed original pages, total number of printed sheets, and total number of pages printed on both
sides regardless of functions.
Original Counter
To check the total number or original pages that are scanned and printed in the Copy, Print, and Scan/Fax
modes*
Paper Counter
To check the total number of sheets that are printed in the Copy, Print, and Scan/Fax modes*
Total Duplex
To check the total number of pages printed on both sides
*: If a file is saved in a User Box, its pages are not counted unless they are printed. Report or list output pages are not targeted for
counting.
(6) Print List

The counter list is printed.
(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Print List].
2. Select a paper tray
3. Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided, and touch [Start] or press the Start key.
(7) Coverage Rate

This is not displayed when [Service Mode] -> [System 2] -> [Coverage Rate Screen] is set to Do Not Display.
The coverage rate can be cleared in [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [Coverage Rate Clear].
(a) Use
The coverage rate does not match the actual amount of toner used but only an indication.
The coverage rate is the average printing dot percentage with A4 paper area as 100 %.
The coverage rate displays the printing dot accumulated average (calculated in A4) for copy, printer, and fax/scan in unit of 0.001 %.
The coverage rate is calculated from all output excluding the following items.
<items excluded in the calculation>
Output of meter counter list
Output in service mode
Output automatically performed by MFP such as image stabilization pattern
I-154
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST
8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST

8.1 Replace paper feed roller
Replacement part/Service job
Replace paper feed roller
Adjustment/setting items
[Service Mode] / [Counter] / [Life] / [Counter Reset]
Procedure
1
8.2 Replace separation roller assy

Replace separation roller assy
Procedure
1
8.3 Change marketing area

Change marketing area
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Org. size Detecting Sensor Adj.]
Procedure
1
8.4 Install LCT

Install LCT
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Printer Image Centering Side 1]
Procedure
1
8.5 Replace CCD unit

Replace CCD unit
Procedure
[Service Mode] / [System 2] / [CDD Calibration]
[Service Mode] / [System 2] / [Line Mag Setting]
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Paper Feed Direction Adj.]
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Main Scan Zoom Adj.]
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Scanner Image Centering]
8.6 Replace mirror unit

Replace mirror unit
Procedure
Exposure unit/LED exposure unit/Mirrors unit positioning
[Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Read Pos Adj]
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Paper Feed Direction Adj.]
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Sub Scan Zoom Adj.]
8.7 Replace developing unit

Replace developing unit
Procedure
[Administrator Settings] / [System Settings] / [Expert Adjustment] / [Drum Dry]
[Service Mode] / [Imaging Process Adjustment] / [TCR Level Setting]
[Service Mode] / [Imaging Process Adjustment] / [Gradation Adjust]
8.8 Replace drum unit

Replace drum unit
Procedure
8.9 Replace developer

Replace developer
Procedure
[Administrator Settings] / [System Settings] / [Expert Adjustment] / [Drum Dry]
[Service Mode] / [Imaging Process Adjustment] / [TCR Level Setting]
8.10 Replace transfer roller unit

Replace transfer roller unit
I-155
Procedure
1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8.11 Replace fusing unit

Replace fusing unit
Procedure
1
8.12 Replace ozone filter

Replace ozone filter
Procedure
1
8.13 Replace paper dust remover

Replace paper dust remover
Procedure
1
8.14 Replace PH unit

Replace PH unit
Procedure
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Leading Edge Adjustment]
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Printer Image Centering Side 1]
8.15 Replace original size detection sensor

Replace original size detection sensor
Procedure
Installation of original size sensor
[Service Mode] / [State Confirmation] / [Table Number]
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Org. size Detecting Sensor Adj.]
8.16 Wind scanner drive cables

Wind scanner drive cables
Procedure
Scanner motor belt adjustment
8.17 Replace scanner motor

Replace scanner motor
Procedure
Scanner motor belt adjustment
8.18 Replace exposure unit/LED exposure unit

Replace exposure unit/LED exposure
unit
Procedure
8.19 Replace scanner home sensor

Replace scanner home sensor
Procedure
1
8.20 Replace printer control board

Replace printer control board
Procedure
Remounting of EEPROM (Printer control board)
F/W upgrading
8.21 Replace MFP board

Replace MFP board
Procedure
Remounting of NVRAM (MFP board)
F/W upgrading
I-156
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[Service Mode] / [Enhanced Security] / [NVRAM Data Backup]
Procedure
4
8.22 Replace original glass

Replace original glass
Procedure
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Image position: Leading Edge]
8.23 Replace hard disk

Replace hard disk
Procedure
[Service Mode] / [State Confirmation] / [Memory/HDD Adj.] / [HDD Format]
[Service Mode] / [State Confirmation] / [Memory/HDD Adj.] / [HDD R/W Check]
8.24 Install hard disk

Install hard disk
[Service Mode] / [State Confirmation] / [Memory/HDD Adj.] / [SSD HDD Data
Copy]
Procedure
1
8.25 Execute initialize

Execute initialize
Procedure
Re-entry of Utility settings
[Service Mode] / [State Confirmation] / [Table Number]
[Service Mode] / [System 1] / [Serial Number]
Re-entry of System
Re-entry of Enhanced Security settings
[Service Mode] / [Touch Panel Adjust]
8.26 Execute add. option

Execute add. option
[Service Mode] / [Firmware Version]
Procedure
1
8.27 Execute F/W update

Execute F/W update
[Service Mode] / [Firmware Version]
Procedure
1
8.28 Add fax board

Add fax board
F/W upgrading
Procedure
1
8.29 Replace DF control board

Replace DF control board
Procedure
F/W upgrading
[Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Original Tray Width]
[Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Mixed Original Size adjustment]
I-157
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. INHIBITED COMBINATIONS
9. INHIBITED COMBINATIONS
9.1 Scan Setting
9.1.1 Original Image Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Dot. Matrix
Exclusive (Ante-priority)
Post-priority
(Ante-input items are released.)
Original Image Type -Text/Photo

Original Image Type - Photo
Original Image Type - Dot. Matrix
Post-priority
Original Image Type - Text

Post-priority

Original Image Type - Text/Photo
Post-priority

Original Image Type - Text/Photo
Post-priority
9.1.2 Density
Density *
*: In the color transmission mode of the IP address fax, it is not possible to specify density and sharpness.
9.1.3 Simplex/Duplex
Single Sided
Double Sided
Cover + 2 Sided
Post-priority
Simplex/Duplex - Double Sided

Simplex/Duplex - Cover + 2 Sided
Special Original - Long Original *2
Post-priority
Simplex/Duplex - Single Sided

Others
Scan Mode - Platen *1
Post-priority
Simplex/Duplex - Single Sided

Others
Scan Mode - Platen *1
Special Original - Long Original *2

Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *2
Polling RX
*1: When it is recognized that an original is being read by the platen to start a job while in the double sided or cover + 2 sided setting, this
results in a setting in which the double sided or cover + 2 sided is released.
*2: The long original, Z-folded original, TX stamp, sharpness and quick memory TX functions are available or not depending on models.
9.1.4 Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Post-priority
Resolution - Fine
Resolution - Super Fine
Resolution - Ultra Fine
Post-priority
Resolution - Standard
Post-priority
Resolution - Fine
Post-priority
Resolution - Fine
I-158
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.1.5 Special Original

Long Original *
Z-Folded Original *
Mixed Original

Bind Position
Frame Erase
Polling RX
Separate Scan
Post-priority
Special Original - Z-Folded Original *

Special Original - Mixed Original
Polling RX
Separate Scan
Post-priority
Special Original - Long Original *

Post-priority

Bind Position
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
*: The long original, Z-folded original, TX stamp, sharpness and quick memory TX functions are available or not depending on models.
9.1.6 Bind Position

Bind Position
Post-priority

Polling RX
Separate Scan
9.1.7 Number of Original

Number of Original

Scan Size - A3 Length
Scan Size - B4 Length
Scan Size - A4 Width
Scan Size - B5 Width
Scan Size - 8.5*11 Length
Scan Size - 8.5*11 Width
Scan Size - 11*17 Length
Frame Erase
Quick Memory TX *
Polling TX
Polling RX
Timer TX
Separate Scan
Post-priority
Memory TX (=Quick Memory TX OFF)

Multiple Destination Select
Scan Mode - Platen
9.1.8 Scan Size

A3 Length
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority

I-159
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B4 Length
A4 Length
A4 Width
B5 Length
B5 Width
A5 Width
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX





I-160
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B6 Length
8.5*11 Length
8.5*11 Width
8.5*14 Length
11*17 Length
Post-priority

Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX




I-161
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Post-priority

9.1.9 Frame Erase

Frame Erase
Post-priority

Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
9.1.10 Background Adjustment

Background
Adjustment
Post-priority
Post-priority
Scan Mode - Platen
9.1.11 TX Stamp
TX Stamp *
9.1.12 Sharpness
Sharpness *1 *2
Post-priority
*2: In the color transmission mode of the IP address fax, it is not possible to specify density and sharpness.
9.1.13 File Type

TIFF *
PDF *
Post-priority
File Type - PDF
Post-priority
File Type - TIFF
*: The Internet fax is TIFF fixed. The IP address fax is TIFF fixed in the monochromatic transmission mode and PDF fixed in the color
transmission mode.
9.2 Comm. Setting

NOTE
For the network fax (Internet fax/IP address fax), the use of the comm. setting is unavailable.
9.2.1 Quick Memory TX

Quick Memory TX * Exclusive (Ante-priority)

I-162
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Post-priority

Frame Erase
Polling TX
Polling RX
Timer TX
Separate Scan
Scan To E-Mail
Scan To Box
Memory TX (=Quick Memory TX OFF)

9.2.2 Memory TX (Quick Memory TX OFF)

Memory TX
(=Quick Memory
TX OFF)
Number of Original
Post-priority
Quick Memory TX *
9.2.3 Memory TX (=Quick Memory TX OFF)

F-Code TX
Polling TX
Polling RX
Password TX
Post-priority
Others
Scan To E-Mail *
Scan To Box *
*: An F code transmission is ignored when it is sent to any receiving ends other than FAX.
9.2.4 F-Code TX
Polling TX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
F-Code TX
Polling RX
Timer TX
Password TX
Oversea TX
ECM OFF
V34 OFF
Line Selection
Scan To E-Mail
Scan To Box
9.2.5 Polling RX
Polling RX

Bind Position
Number of Original
Frame Erase
Quick Memory TX *
F-Code TX
Polling TX
Password TX
I-163
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Post-priority
Oversea TX
ECM OFF
V34 OFF
Separate Scan
Scan To E-Mail
Scan To Box
9.2.6 Timer TX
Timer TX
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling TX
Scan To E-Mail
Scan To Box
9.2.7 Password TX
Password TX
F-Code TX
Polling TX
Polling RX
Post-priority
Polling TX
Polling RX
Post-priority
Polling TX
Polling RX
V34 OFF
Post-priority
Polling TX
Polling RX
ECM OFF
Post-priority
9.2.8 Oversea TX
Oversea TX
9.2.9 ECM OFF

ECM OFF
9.2.10 V34 OFF

V34 OFF
9.2.11 Line Selection

Line Selection
Polling TX
Post-priority
9.2.12 URL Information

URL Information
Post-priority
9.3 Others
9.3.1 Separate Scan
Separate Scan

Bind Position
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling RX
I-164
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Post-priority

-
9.3.2 Multiple Destination Select

Multiple Destination Exclusive (Ante-priority)
Select
Post-priority
Number of Original
Quick Memory TX *
Polling TX
-
9.3.3 Scan To E-Mail

Scan To E-Mail
Quick Memory TX *1
Polling TX
Polling RX
Timer TX
Post-priority
Others
F-Code TX *2
*2: An F code transmission is ignored when it is sent to any receiving ends other than FAX.
9.3.4 Scan To Box

Scan To Box
Quick Memory TX *1
Polling TX
Polling RX
Timer TX
Post-priority
Others
F-Code TX *2
*2: An F code transmission is ignored when it is sent to any receiving ends other than FAX.
9.3.5 Scan Mode

Platen
DF
Post-priority
Scan Mode - DF
Others
Post-priority
Scan Mode - Platen
Simplex/Duplex - Double Sided *1

Simplex/Duplex - Cover + 2 Sided *1
Number of Original *3
TX Stamp *2, *3
*1: When it is recognized that an original is being read by the platen to start a job while in the double sided or cover + 2 sided setting, this
results in a setting in which the double sided or cover + 2 sided is released.
*3: Automatically reset when the original is read with the platen glass.
9.4 Caution when using prefix/suffix auto setting (North American users only)
When turning ON the [Prefix/Suffix Auto Setting], following settings are required in the service mode.
Select [System 2]-[Option Board Status] and set the fax to [Unset].
Select [System 1]-[Marketing Area] and set the [Marketing Area] and [Fax Target] to the place of installation of the unit.
I-165
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. LIST OF SERVICE MODE
10. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

10.1 List of service mode (outline)
Service Mode
Machine
I.10.2.1 Machine
Firmware Version
I.11.4 Firmware Version
Imaging Process Adjustment
I.10.2.2 Imaging Process Adjustment
CS Remote Care
I.10.2.3 CS Remote Care
System 1
I.10.2.4 System 1
System 2
I.10.2.5 System 2
Counter
I.10.2.6 Counter
List Output
I.10.2.7 List Output
State Confirmation
I.10.2.8 State Confirmation
Test Mode
I.10.2.9 Test Mode
ADF
I.10.2.10 ADF
FAX *1
I.10.2.11 FAX
Finisher *3
I.10.2.12 Finisher
Internet ISW
I.10.2.13 Internet ISW
The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
*1: It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-508) line 1 is mounted.
*3: It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-527) is mounted.
*4: It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-527/529) is mounted.
*6: It will be displayed only when the optional separator (JS-505) is mounted.
*7: It will be displayed only when the [Internet ISW Set] is set to ON.
*8: It will be displayed only when the reverse automatic document feeder DF-621 is mounted.
10.2 List of service mode (detail)

10.2.1 Machine
Machine
Ref. Page
Fusing Temperature
I.11.3.1 Fusing
Temperature
Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.
I.11.3.2 Org. Size

Detecting Sensor Adj.
Printer Area
Leading Edge Adjustment
I.11.3.3.(1) Leading Edge

Adjustment
Printer Image Centering Side 1
I.11.3.3.(2) Printer Image

Centering Side 1
Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Duplex)
I.11.3.3.(3) Leading Edge

Adj. Side 2 (Duplex)
Prt. Image Center. Side 2 (Dup)
I.11.3.3.(4) Prt. Image

Center. Side 2 (Dup)
I-166
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Machine
Scan Area
Ref. Page
Paper Feed Direction Adj.
I.11.3.3.(5) Paper Feed

Direction Adj.
Tray Printing Position: Tip
I.11.3.4 Tray Printing

Position: Tip
Image Position: Leading Edge
I.11.3.5.(1) Image Position:

Leading Edge
Scanner Image Centering
I.11.3.5.(2) Scanner Image

Centering
Main Scan Zoom Adj.
I.11.3.5.(3) Main Scan

Zoom Adj.
Sub Scan Zoom Adj.
I.11.3.5.(4) Sub Scan

Zoom Adj.
Printer Reg. Loop Adj.
I.11.3.6 Printer Reg. Loop

Adj.
Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj
I.11.3.7 Manual Bypass

Tray Width Adj
Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
I.11.3.8 Lead Edge Erase

Adjustment
ADF Scan Glass Contamination
I.11.3.9 ADF Scan Glass

Contamination
Non-Image Area Erase Check
I.11.3.10 Non-Image Area

Erase Check
Cooling Fan Stop Delay
I.11.3.11 Cooling Fan Stop

Delay
Fusing Productivity Choice
I.11.3.12 Fusing
Productivity Choice
Print Interval Extension
I.11.3.13 Print Interval

Extension
10.2.2 Imaging Process Adjustment
Imaging Process Adjustment
Ref. Page
Gradation Adjust
Max Image Density Adj
I.11.5.2 Max Image

Density Adj
TCR Level Setting
I.11.5.3 TCR Level Setting
Image Background Adj
I.11.5.4 Image Background

Adj
Transfer Voltage Fine Adj
I.11.5.5 Transfer Voltage

Fine Adj
TCR Sensor Adjust
I.11.5.6 TCR Sensor

Adjust
Paper Separation Adjustment
Paper separation adjustment
I.11.5.7.(1) Paper
separation adjustment
Paper Separation Voltage Adjust
I.11.5.7.(2) Paper
separation voltage adjust
Manual Toner Add
I.11.5.8 Manual Toner Add
Dot Enhancement
I.11.5.9 Dot Enhancement
I-167
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10.2.3 CS Remote Care
(1) Setting up the CS Remote Care

CS Remote Care
Ref. Page
Using the telephone line modem
I.11.7.1 Using the telephone line

modem
Using the fax line modem
I.11.7.2 Using the Fax line

modem
Using the E-mail
I.11.7.3 Using E-mail
When using a WebDAV server in http

communication
http (bilateral communication)
I.11.7.4.(1) Bilateral
communication
http (unilateral communication: Device to Center)
I.11.7.4.(2) Unilateral
communication: Device to Center
(2) List of software SW for CS Remote Care

SW No.
Functions
Communication settings
01
Auto call
02
03
Trouble display setting
Ref. Page
Dial Mode
I.11.8.3 SW No. 01
Line for send only
I.11.8.3 SW No. 01
Baud rate
I.11.8.3 SW No. 01
Emergency transmission
I.11.8.4 SW No. 02
Date specified transmission
I.11.8.4 SW No. 02
Call parts replace date
I.11.8.4 SW No. 02
Call drum replace date
I.11.8.4 SW No. 02
Call regular service date (PM)
I.11.8.4 SW No. 02
Auto call on the IC Life
I.11.8.4 SW No. 02
Auto call of the IR shortage
I.11.8.4 SW No. 02
Auto call on the zero reset of the fixed parts replacement
I.11.8.4 SW No. 02
Trouble display setting
I.11.8.5 SW No. 03
Auto call on the toner empty
I.11.8.5 SW No. 03
04
CS Remote Care communication mode
I.11.8.6 SW No. 04
05
Modem redial interval
I.11.8.7 SW No. 05
06
Modem redial times
I.11.8.8 SW No. 06
07
Redial for response time out
I.11.8.9 SW No. 07
08
Retransmission interval on E-Mail/http delivery error
I.11.8.10 SW No. 08
09
Retransmission times on E-Mail/http delivery error
I.11.8.11 SW No. 09
10
Time zone settings
I.11.8.12 SW No. 10
11
Timer 1
RING reception CONNECT reception
I.11.8.13 SW No. 11
12
Timer 2
Dial request completed CONNECT reception
I.11.8.14 SW No. 12
13
Reservation
14
Timer 4
Line connection Start request telegram delivery
I.11.8.15 SW No. 14
15
Timer 5
Wait time for other side's response
I.11.8.16 SW No. 15
16
Reservation
17
Reservation
18
Attention display
To set weather to give the alarm display when using the modem but the power for I.11.8.17 SW No. 18
the modem is OFF.
19
Reservation
20
Reservation
21
Transmission of misfeed Transmission of paperbased misfeed frequent occurrence warning

frequent occurrence
Transmission of originalbased misfeed frequent occurrence warning
warning
I.11.8.18 SW No. 21
I-168
I.11.8.18 SW No. 21
bizhub 423/363/283/223
SW No.
22
23
24 to
40

Functions
Misfeed frequent
occurrence threshold
value
Ref. Page
Automatic transmission of chronological misfeed data at the time of transmission

of misfeed frequent occurrence warning
I.11.8.18 SW No. 21
Paper-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value
I.11.8.19 SW No. 22
Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value
I.11.8.20 SW No. 23
Reservation
10.2.4 System 1
System 1
Ref. Page
Marketing Area
I.11.10.1 Marketing Area
Tel/Fax Number
I.11.10.2 Tel/Fax Number
Serial Number
I.11.10.3 Serial Number
Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting
I.11.10.4 Sleep ON/OFF

Choice Setting
Foolscap Size Setting
I.11.10.5 Foolscap Size

Setting
Original Size Detection
I.11.10.6 Original Size

Detection
Install Date
Initialization
I.11.10.7 Install Date

Clear All Data
I.11.10.8 InitializationClear All Data
Clear Individual Data
System Error Clear
Copy Program Data
I.11.10.9.(1) Copy
Program Data
Address Registration Data
I.11.10.9.(2) Address
Registration Data
Fax Setting Data
I.11.10.9.(3) Fax Setting

Data
All History Data
I.11.10.9.(4) All History

Data
Network Setting Data
I.11.10.9.(5) Network
Setting Data
I.11.10.10 InitializationSystem Error Clear
Problem Unit Isolation Set.
I.11.10.11 Problem Unit

Isolation Set.
Machine State LED Setting
I.11.10.12 Machine State

LED Setting
10.2.5 System 2
I-169
bizhub 423/363/283/223

System 2
Ref. Page
HDD
I.11.11.1 HDD
I.11.11.2 Image Controller

Setting
Option Board Status
I.11.11.3 Option Board

Status
Consumable Life Reminder
I.11.11.4 Consumable Life

Reminder
Unit Change
I.11.11.5 Unit Change
Software Switch Setting
I.11.11.6 Software Switch

Setting
CCD Calibration
I.11.11.7 CCD Calibration
LCT Paper Size Setting
I.11.11.8 LCT Paper Size

Setting
Line Mag Setting
I.11.11.9 Line Mag Setting
Data Capture
I.11.11.10 Data Capture
ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.
I.11.11.11 ADF Scan

Glass Contamin. Set.
Stamp
I.11.11.12 Stamp
I.11.11.13 Network Fax

Settings
User Paper Settings
I.11.11.14 User Paper

Settings
Coverage Rate Screen
I.11.11.15 Coverage Rate

Screen
JAM Code Display Setting
I.11.11.16 JAM Code

Display Setting
Boot up Screen
I.11.11.17 BootUp Screen
Install Data
I.11.11.18 Install Data
Bluetooth Settings
I.11.11.19 Bluetooth
Settings
Auto Drum Dry
I.11.11.20 Auto Drum Dry
10.2.6 Counter
Counter
Ref. Page
Life
I.11.12.2 Life
Service Call
I.11.12.3 Service Call

Counter
Section Service Call
I.11.12.4 Section Service

Call
Warning
I.11.12.5 Warning
Maintenance
I.11.12.6 Maintenance
Service Total
I.11.12.7 Service Total
Counter Of Each Mode
I.11.12.8 Counter of Each

Mode
Service Call History (Data)
I.11.12.9 Service Call

History (Data)
ADF Paper Pages
I.11.12.10 ADF Paper

Pages
Paper Jam History
I.11.12.11 Paper Jam

History
Fax Connection Error
I.11.12.12 Fax Connection

Error
I-170
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Counter
Ref. Page
ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Counter
I.11.12.13 ADF Scan

Glass Contamin. Counter
Jam
I.11.12.14 Jam
Section JAM
I.11.12.15 Section JAM
Counter Reset
10.2.7 List Output
List Output
Ref. Page
Batch List CSV Output
I.11.13.1 Batch List CSV

Output
Machine Management List
I.11.13.2 Machine
Management List
Adjustments List
I.11.13.3 Adjustment List
Parameter List
I.11.13.4 Parameter List
Service Parameter
I.11.13.5 Service
Parameter
Protocol Trace
Last
I.11.13.6 Protocol Trace
Error
I.11.13.6 Protocol Trace
Fax Setting List
I.11.13.7 Fax Setting List
Fax Analysis List
I.11.13.8 Fax Analysis List
10.2.8 State Confirmation
State Confirmation
Ref. Page
Sensor Check
I.11.14.1 Sensor Check
Table Number
I.11.14.2 Table Number
Level History1
I.11.14.3 Level History1
Level History2
I.11.14.4 Level History 2
Temp. & Humidity
I.11.14.5 Temp. &

Humidity
CCD Check
Memory/HDD Adj.
I.11.14.6 CCD Check

Memory Check
I.11.14.7.(1) HDD Adj.Memory Check
Compress / Decompression Check
I.11.14.7.(2) HDD Adj.Memory Check Decompression Check
JPEG Check
I.11.14.7.(3) HDD Adj.JPEG Check
Memory Bus Check
I.11.14.7.(4) HDD Adj.Memory Bus Check
I-171
bizhub 423/363/283/223

State Confirmation
Ref. Page
DSC Bus Check
I.11.14.7.(5) HDD Adj.DSC Bus Check
HDD R/W Check/ SSD R/W Check
I.11.14.7.(6) HDD Adj.HDD R/W Check

I.11.14.7.(7) HDD Adj.SSD R/W Check
HDD Format/SSD Format
I.11.14.7.(8) HDD Adj.HDD Format

I.11.14.7.(9) HDD Adj.SSD Format
SSD HDD Data Copy
I.11.14.7.(10) HDD Adj.SSD -> HDD Data Copy
Memory/HDD State
I.11.14.7.(11) HDD State
Adjustment Data List
I.11.14.8 Adjustment Data

List
10.2.9 Test Mode
Test Mode
Ref. Page
Gradation Pattern
I.11.15.2 Gradation
Pattern
Halftone Pattern
I.11.15.3 Halftone Pattern
Lattice Pattern
I.11.15.4 Lattice Pattern
Paper Passage Test
I.11.15.5 Paper Passage

Test
Fax Test
I.11.15.6 Fax Test-Signal

Send Test
10.2.10 ADF
ADF
Ref. Page
Original Stop Position *
I.11.16.1 Original Stop

Position
Registration Loop Adj. *
I.11.16.2 Registration Loop

Adj.
Auto Stop Position Adjustment *
I.11.16.3 Auto Stop

Position Adjustment
Paper Passage *
I.11.16.4 Paper Passage
Sensor Check *
I.11.16.5 Sensor Check
Original Tray Width *
I.11.16.6 Original Tray

Width
Read Pos Adj *
Read Pos Adj *
Auto Adjust *
I-172
bizhub 423/363/283/223

ADF
Feed Zoom *
Ref. Page
Orig. Feed Zoom Ad *
I.11.16.8 Feed Zoom
Auto Adjust *
I.11.16.8 Feed Zoom
Scanning Light Adjustment *
I.11.16.9 Scanning Light

Adjustment
Mixed Original Size adjustment *
I.11.16.10 Mixed original

Size adjustment
FD-Mag. Adj. (B) *
Orig. Feed Zoom Ad. *
I.11.16.11 FD-Mag. Adj.

(B)
Auto Adjust *
I.11.16.11 FD-Mag. Adj.

(B)
*: It will be displayed only when the reverse automatic document feeder DF-621 is mounted.
10.2.11 FAX
FAX
Line 1 *1
Line 2 *2
Ref. Page
Modem/NCU *1
I.11.17.1 Modem/NCU
Network *1
I.11.17.2 Network
System *1
I.11.17.3 System
Fax File Format *1
I.11.17.4 Fax File Format
Communication *1
I.11.17.5 Communication
List Output *1
I.11.17.6 List Output
Function Parameter *1
I.11.17.7 Function
Parameter
Initialization *1
I.11.18.4 Initialization
Modem/NCU *2
I.11.17.1 Modem/NCU
Network *2
I.11.17.2 Network
Communication *2
I.11.18.3 Communication
Initialization *2
I.11.18.4 Initialization
10.2.12 Finisher
Finisher
FS-FN adjustment *3
Ref. Page
Center Staple Position *1
I.11.22.1.(1) Center Staple

Position
Half-Fold Position *1
I.11.22.1.(2) Half-Fold
Position
Punch Edge Adj *1
I.11.22.1.(3) Punch Edge

Adj
Punch Regist Loop Size *1
I.11.22.1.(4) Punch Regist

Loop Size
I-173
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Finisher
Ref. Page
Finisher Components Test Mode *2
I.11.22.1.(5) Finisher
Components Test Mode
Load Data *2
I.11.22.1.(6) Load Data
Alignment Plate Position *3
I.11.22.1.(7) Alignment
Plate Position
Paper Alignment Guides W. Adj. *1
I.11.22.1.(8) Paper
Alignment Guides W. Adj.
Punch Option setting
I.11.22.2 Punch Option

Setting
Job Separator *6
I.11.22.3 Job Separator
*2: It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-527/529) is mounted.
*4: It will be displayed only when the optional separator (JS-505) is mounted.
10.2.13 Internet ISW
Internet ISW
Ref. Page
Internet ISW Set
I.11.23.(1) Internet ISW

Set
HTTP Setting *

(HTTP Setting)
FTP Setting *

(FTP Setting)
Forwarding Access Setting *
I.11.23.3 Forwarding
Access Setting
Download *
I.11.23.4 Download
*: It will be displayed only when the [Internet ISW Set] is set to ON.
I-174
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 11. SERVICE MODE
11. SERVICE MODE

NOTE
Ensure appropriate security for Service Mode function setting procedures. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized
person not involved with service jobs.
(1) Procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. Touch [Details] on meter count display.
3. Press the following keys in this order.; Stop 0 0 Stop 0 1
NOTE
When selecting [CE Authentication] under [Enhanced Security] available from Service Mode, authentication by CE password
is necessary. Enter the 8 digits CE password, and touch [END]. (The initial setting for CE password is 92729272.)
When the following setting is set to ON, CE password authentication is necessary; [Administrator Settings] [Security
Settings] [Enhanced Security Mode]
If a wrong CE password is entered, re-enter the right password. The machine will not enter Service Mode unless the CE
password is entered correctly. To return to the basic screen, turn OFF the sub power switch and turn it ON again. When the
following setting is set to Mode 2, operation will be prohibited since it indicates authentication failure by failing to enter
the correct CE password within the specified number of times.
If the access lock is activated, the lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop 0 9 3 1 7 in [Meter
Count] [Check Details] [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and On. When the timer reaches the
time specified in this setting, the access lock is released.
The service code entered is displayed as *
4. The Service Mode menu will appear.
NOTE
Be sure to change the CE password from its default value.
For the procedure to change the CE password, see the Enhanced Security.

1. Touch the [Exit] key.
NOTE
If you change settings or adjustment values in the Service Mode and exit the mode, be sure to turn OFF the main power switch,
wait 10 seconds or more, and turn it ON again.
11.2 Date/Time Input mode

11.2.1 Use
This mode is used to set time-of-day and date.
11.2.2 Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Press the following keys in this order.
Stop 1 1 4 4 Clear
3. Enter year, month, day, hour, and minute, in that order, from 10-key pad.
Year 4 digits Month 2 digits Day 2 digits Hour 2 digits Minute 2 digits
NOTE
Before entering date and time, press the Clear key to delete the present time from the place where data and time is entered.
When setting the month, day, hour, or minute, enter 0 first if the data one digit.
I-175
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch [Entry].
5. Touch [END] to return to the Service Mode.
11.3 Machine
Machine 1/2
Machine 2/2
I-176
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.1 Fusing Temperature

(1) Use
To adjust individually the temperature of the heating roller for each type of paper, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under
changing environmental conditions.
When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of paper is changed or environmental conditions change.
Use when the curling of the paper due to the paper type or environmental change occurred, or when the paper jam, as well as stapling or
folding position error occurred due to the curling of the paper.
By setting the temperature higher (+), gloss of print can be improved.
By setting the temperature lower (-), exit roller mark can be reduced.
(2) Adjustment range

Paper type
Setting range
step
-20 C to +10 C
5 C
Plain Paper
OHP Film
Thick1/Envelope
(post card, letter head)
Thick2
(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Call the Service Mode to the screen.

Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Fusing Temperature].
Select the paper type.
Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] key.
If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting.
If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting.
If offset is poor, decrease the setting.
If curling of the paper occurs, decrease the setting.
Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value.
Return to the basic screen.
Output two or three test printing and check to see whether the image has any problem.
Make the adjustment for each type of paper.
11.3.2 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.

(1) Use
To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the original size detection sensor/1.
To display if the original size detection sensor/2 is mounted.
When the sensor is replaced with a new one.
When an optional sensor has been added.
When an erroneous original size detection is made.
When the marketing area setting is changed.
(2) Procedure
1. Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper on the original glass and lower the original cover.
3. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.].
If the adjustment has been successfully made, it completes the adjustment procedure.
If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful, check the optional original size sensors for correct installation and change the defective
sensor or harness.
11.3.3 Printer Area

(1) Leading Edge Adjustment
(a) Use
To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types. (to adjust the timing starting from the roller
connection up to start of transfer output)
The paper type has been changed.
The print image deviates in the sub scan direction.
A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
This setting can be made independently for plain paper, Thick 1, Thick 2, OHP films, and envelopes.
I-177
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Setting range
Specifications
4.2 0.5 mm
Setting range
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Place A3 paper on the manual bypass tray.

Touch [Machine] [Printer Area] [Leading Edge Adjustment].
Select the [Plain Paper].
If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END].
Following the same procedure, adjust for Thick 1/2, OHP film, and Envelope.
(2) Printer Image Centering Side 1

(a) Use
To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source.
A paper feed unit has been added.
The print image deviates in the main scan direction.
(b) Setting range

A
Specifications
3.0 0.5 mm
Setting range
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Touch [Machine] [Printer Area] [Printer Image Centering Side 1].
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the bypass.)
(3) Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Duplex)

(a) Use
For plain paper, this function allows the adjustment of the image write start position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd side of duplex
printing. (to adjust the timing starting from the roller connection up to start of 2nd transfer output)
I-178
bizhub 423/363/283/223
The adjustment is made for the paper feed from the manual bypass tray, but the changes made with this adjustment are applied to
every paper feed tray.
This adjustment is made when the image on the 2nd side of paper deviates from the original position in the sub scan direction.
(b) Setting range
Backside
For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern.
Specifications
4.2 0.5 mm
Setting range
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Place A3 paper on the tray.

Touch [Machine] [Printer Area] [Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Duplex)].
(4) Prt. Image Center. Side 2 (Dup)

(a) Use
To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode.
The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.
(b) Setting range

A
Backside
For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern.
Specifications
3.0 0.5 mm
Setting range
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Touch [Machine] [Printer Area] [Prt. Image Center. Side 2 (Dup)].
Check the dimension of width A on the test print on the backside of the copy.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the manual bypass tray.)
I-179
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(5) Paper Feed Direction Adj.

(a) Use
To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed.
[Sub Scan Zoom Adj.] becomes necessary.
The print image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk).
When the print image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction.
This setting can be made independently for plain paper, Thick 1, Thick 2 and Envelope.
(b) Setting range
A
B
Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges.
NOTE
Width A: equivalent to one grid
Width B: equivalent to 48 grids
Specifications
A: 7.9 to 8.3
B: 389.1 to 392.1
Setting range
A: -7 to +7
B: -7 to +7
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Load manual bypass tray with A3 or 11 x 17 plain paper.

Touch [Machine] [Printer Area] [Paper Feed Direction Adj.].
Select [Plain Paper].
Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test print.
Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Printer Area] [Paper Feed Direction Adj].
If width of A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] keys.
If width A or B is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
If width A or B is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print again.
Check width A and width B on the test print.
If width A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting value and make a check again.
If width A or B falls within the specified range, touch [END].
Following the same procedure, adjust for thick paper and envelope.
11.3.4 Tray Printing Position: Tip

(1) Use
To change and adjust image printing position at vertical scanning direction by each feed. (to adjust the timing starting from the roller
connection up to start of transfer output). It is not applicable in case the job is fed at re-feed.
To be used when [Printer Area-leading Edge Adjustment] is not enough for full adjustment (as such case that image printing position gets
deviated due to pattern of each feed.)
Setting is available according to feed of 1st. Short (the length of paper at vertical scanning direction is under 276.4 mm), 1st. Long (the
length of paper at vertical scanning direction is over 276.4 mm), 2nd/3rd/4th and manual.
Adjustment is made for plain paper.
(2) Setting range

NOTE
[Printer Area-leading Edge Adjustment] should be made within specification.
Image printing position at vertical scanning direction is adjusted based on the combination value of this setting figure and
[Printer Area-leading Edge Adjustment] figure. In case the value is larger than +3.0mm or less than -3.0mm, the figure should be
rounded to 3.0mm or -3.0mm.
Specifications
4.2 0.5 mm
I-180
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Setting range

(3) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Touch [Machine] [Printer Area] [Tray Printing Position: Tip].
Set plain paper to the targeted tray, and select the feed tray.
11.3.5 Scan Area

Use the following test chart for the adjustment of the scanner section.
If the test chart is not available, a scale may be used instead.
Adjustment item
Ref. page
A: Image Position: Leading Edge
I.11.3.5.(1) Image Position: Leading Edge
B: Scanner Image Centering
I.11.3.5.(2) Scanner Image Centering
C: Main Scan Zoom Adj.
I.11.3.5.(3) Main Scan Zoom Adj.
D: Sub Scan Zoom Adj.
I.11.3.5.(4) Sub Scan Zoom Adj.
(1) Image Position: Leading Edge

(a) Use
To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width
scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
When the original width scale is replaced.
(b) Setting range
A=20 mm
A width on the test chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the
specifications shown below.
An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of [Printer Area].
Specifications
A: 0.5 mm (10 0.5 mm if a scale is used)
Setting range
-3.0 o +3.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)
(c) Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Scan Area] [Image Position: Leading Edge].
I-181
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check point A on the test print.
If width A on the test print falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
If the test print is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
If the test print exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
(2) Scanner Image Centering

(a) Use
To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of scanner parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main
scan direction.
When the CCD unit is replaced.
(b) Setting range

B=20 mm
B width on the test chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the
An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Printer Image Centering Side 1] of [Printer Area].
Specifications
B: 1.0 mm
Setting range
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Scan Area] [Scanner Image Centering].
Check point B on the image of the test print.
If the test print falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
If the test print is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
If the test print exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
7. Press the Start key to make a test print.
8. Check point B of the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
(3) Main Scan Zoom Adj.

(a) Use
To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section.
The CCD unit has been replaced.
(b) Setting range
9pt.
14pt.

8pt.
12pt.
18pt.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10pt.
Measure C width on the test chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Paper Feed Direction Adj. of [Printer Area].
Specifications
C: 1.0 mm
Setting range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
I-182
bizhub 423/363/283/223
* Standard size when using a scale: 200.0 mm
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Scan Area] [Main Scan Zoom Adj.].
Check the C width on the image of the copy.
If the C width on the test print is less than one on test chart, increase the setting.
If the C width on the test print exceeds one on test chart, decrease the setting.
(4) Sub Scan Zoom Adj.

(a) Use
To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section.
The exposure unit/LED exposure unit has been replaced.
The scanner motor has been replaced.
The scanner drive cables have been replaced.
(b) Setting range

Measure D width on the test chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Paper Feed Direction Adj. of [Printer Area].
Specifications
D: 1.5 mm
Setting range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
* Standard size when using a scale: 200.0 mm
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Scan Area] [Sub Scan Zoom Adj.].
Check the D width on the image of the test print.
If the D width on the test print is less than one on test chart, increase the setting.
If the D width on the test print exceeds one on test chart, decrease the setting.
11.3.6 Printer Reg. Loop Adj.

(1) Use
To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each process speed of tray 1 to tray 4, LCT, bypass, and duplex.
To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the registration rollers.
Use Paper Passage for paper passage check.
When a paper skew occurs.
When a paper misfeed occurs.
(2) Adjustment range

The adjustable range is different depending on paper source.
173 mm/sec
Tray 1
Tray 2/3/4, LCT
Manual
Duplex
-3 to +3
-6 to +6
-6 to +6
-6 to +6
(3) Procedure
I-183
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Printer Reg. Loop Adj.].
3. Select a paper source where the settings are made by touching the corresponding keys.
4. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.
To decrease the loop amount: Decrease the setting value
To increase the loop amount: Increase the setting value
11.3.7 Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj

(1) Use
To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the bypass paper width detection resistor of the manual bypass guide.
Use when the bypass paper width detection resistor of the manual bypass guide has been changed.
Use when a false paper size is displayed when the manual bypass is used.
(2) Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj].
3. Touch [Max. Width].
4. Load the bypass tray with paper having a width of 297 mm.
5. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK].
6. Touch [Min. Width.].
7. Load the bypass tray with paper having a width of 100 mm.
8. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK].
* Make the adjustment again if the results are [NG].
11.3.8 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment

(1) Use
To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.
Upon user requests, it is possible to specify the void area where image is not printed along the leading edge.
(2) Default setting

4 mm
(3) Setting Item

4 mm
5 mm
7 mm
NOTE
When 4 mm is selected, 4.2 mm is the actual amount to be erased in print based on the control system of the machine.
11.3.9 ADF Scan Glass Contamination

(1) Use
To check the stain on the ADF original glass and display the result.
To manually perform the pre-detection of the stain which is normally conducted when the main/sub power switch is turned ON, recovering
from the sleep/low power mode, etc.
[ADF Scan Glass Contamination] will be conducted with the detection level set by the following setting.
[Service Mode] [System 2] [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.] [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity]
When the above setting is set to Not Set, NG will be displayed even though the predetection is conducted.
(2) Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [ADF Scan Glass Contamination].
3. Press the start key to start the pre-detection.
4. Check to make sure that OK is displayed for the result.
* When the result says NG, clean the glass and check again.
11.3.10 Non-Image Area Erase Check

(1) Use
The non-image area erase function may not work properly under bright light source. Incoming light quantity is checked to verify that the
non-image area erase function can work properly under the environment.
Verification results are shown as follows:
OK
Works properly.
NG1
Works properly. However, data that may interfere with the non-image area erase function was
found. This function may not work well with dark original.
NG2
Data that may interfere with the non-image area erase function was found.
Use this feature when installing a new machine or reinstalling a machine in a new place.
Use this feature when the non-image area erase function fails to work properly due to the changes of the surrounding environment at the
installation site.
I-184
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Non-Image Area Erase Check].
3. Press the Start key to start a check.
NOTE
Before the check, make sure that the ADF or original cover is completely opened. In addition, make sure that no scratch or
stain exists on the original glass.
4. Check the result is OK.
* If the check result is NG1 or NG2, reinstall the machine in another place or adjust the orientation of the machine to reduce light incidence
on the machine. Then, perform the check again.
11.3.11 Cooling Fan Stop Delay

(1) Use
To set the period of time before the cooling fan motor stops.
At the completion of a print job/image stabilization or at jam/malfunction, the fan motor rotating at full speed comes to a stop. The period
of time before the fan motor stops can be delayed so that ozone left around the PC drum can be discharged.
(2) Default setting

0
(3) Setting range

0 to 15
(4) Procedure
0 to 15 (minutes) can be entered with the ten-key pad.
NOTE
When this setting is set to 0 (minute), the fan motor runs for 20 seconds before it stops.
11.3.12 Fusing Productivity Choice

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the paper-to-paper distance control.
Change the default setting if you give a higher priority to fusing productivity than fusing characteristics provided by the paper-to-paper
distance control when printing on thick paper.
(2) Default setting

Fusing Priority
(3) Setting item

Fusing Priority
11.3.13 Print Interval Extension

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the curl prevention control that prevents paper curl problem.
Use this setting when plain paper curl problem occurs.
0
Disables the curl prevention control.
Enables the curl prevention control only under low temperature high humidity or high temperature high
humidity conditions.
Always enables the curl prevention control.
(2) Default setting

0
(3) Setting item

0
1
2
I-185
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.4 Firmware Version

Firmware version 1/5
I-186
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.4.1 Use
To check the firmware version.
Use when the firmware is upgraded.
When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced.
11.4.2 Procedure
2. Touch [Firmware Version].
3. Select the appropriate key from 1 to 3 to check the Firmware Version.
I-187
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.5 Imaging Process Adjustment
11.5.1 Gradation Adjust

To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the scanner.
Use this adjustment when reproduction of gradations and density has deteriorated.
The drum unit, developer or developing unit has been replaced.
The density of solid image can change depending on the variations in developing, light intensity
of the exposure lamp, and PC drum sensitivity as well as the changes in the amount of
electrostatic charge of toner due to the ambient environment and duration of machine use. To
prevent the change, the amount of toner adhered to paper is read by the scanner and in
accordance with the result, Vdc is adjusted. Perform this adjustment before the Gradation
Adjustment.
The gradations are corrected.
Initialization
The current gradation correction table (Items adjusted in [Gradation Adjustment]) and the
difference value of Vdc (Items adjusted in [Maximum Density Adjustment]) are cleared.
After selecting [Initialization], if you press the Start key, initialization starts.
(1) Procedure
1. Load plain paper of A3/11 x 17 or A4/8 1/ x 11 into the paper feed tray.
2
3. Touch these keys in this order: [Image Process Adjustment] [Gradation Adjust].
4. Touch [Maximum Density Adjustment], select the paper size, and press the Start key.
A3/11 x 17
A4/8 1/ x 11
2
I-188
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Place ten blank paper on the test pattern and close the original cover.
Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
After original scan is completed, confirm that OK is shown for Maximum Density Adjustment on the top right of the screen.
Touch [Gradation Adjustment], select the paper size, and press the Start key.
Place the test pattern produced on the original glass.
A3/11 x 17
A4/8 1/ x 11
2
11. Place ten blank paper on the test pattern and close the original cover.
12. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
13. Repeat steps from 9 through 12 twice (a total of three times).
14. Touch [Gradation Adjust] to display the Adj. Values and Conv. Values for Dark and Highlight.
15. Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Value.
NOTE
Dark: 0 100 and Highlight: 0 60: It completes the adjustment procedure.
If neither Dark nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform steps from 9 to 12.
If the convergence falls within the specified range after the second Gradation Adjustment, further adjustment may not be
necessary.
If a fault is detected, 0 is displayed for all values. In that case, after turning off the main power switch, turn it on again more than 10
seconds after and then make the gradation adjustment again.
If a total of four sequences of gradation adjust do not bring the values into the specified range, check the image.
If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.
11.5.2 Max Image Density Adj

(1) Use
To adjust gradation and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through
auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of gamma after gradation adjust.
After completing Gradation Adjust, supplementarily make a manual fine-adjustment of Vdc and Vg to change the maximum amount of
toner adhered to paper so that the gradation and density are adjusted to the target reproduction level.
(The Vdc and Vg values calculated in their control system are changed while the difference between the two values is kept unchanged.)
Use this adjustment if the target density is not obtained after performing [Maximum Density Adjustment].
(2) Default setting

0
I-189
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Setting range

-8 to +8 (step: 1 *)
*: 1 step is the equivalent of 0.02 of difference in density.
(4) Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Max Image Density Adj].
3. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad or [+/-].
To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking, increase the setting value.
To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking, decrease the setting value.
11.5.3 TCR Level Setting

(1) Use
To adjust the T/C control level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a change in the amount of charge of toner and
carrier due to an environmental change.
Use when T/C changes due to changes in environmental conditions of the user site.
(2) Default setting

0
(3) Setting range

-3 to +3
(1 step in positive (+) direction: 0.5 % increase, 1 step in negative (-) direction: 0.5 % decrease, The target T/C ratio is 5.0 to 7.0 %.)
(4) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch these keys in this order: [Process] [TCR Level Setting].
Select the color to be adjusted.
Enter the new setting from the 10-Key pad and [+/-] key.
To increase T/C, increase the setting value.
To decrease T/C, decrease the setting value.
5. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value.
11.5.4 Image Background Adj

(1) Use
To supplementarily make a manual fine-adjustment of Vg after performing [Gradation Adjust].
(While both the Vdc and Vg values are changed with [Max Image Density Adj], only the Vg value is changed with this setting.)
Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem.
(2) Default setting

0
(3) Setting range

-5 to +5 (step: 1)
* 1 step is equivalent to 10 V.
(4) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Image Background Adj].
Select the color to be adjusted.
Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.
To make the background level foggier, decrease the setting value.
To make the background level less foggy, increase the setting value.
11.5.5 Transfer Voltage Fine Adj

(1) Use
Adjust the image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type.
To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
Pressing the [AUTO] key down activates the image transfer amperage upper and lower limit control. In this case, the machine uses the
voltage determined by the auto transfer voltage control and the image transfer output fine adjustment value does not take effect.
(2) Default setting

0
(3) Setting range

-8 to +7 (step: 1 *)
I-190
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(4) Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Transfer Voltage Fine Adj].
3. Select the side of the image (1st side or 2nd side), on which the transfer failure occurs.
NOTE
For thick 1, thick 2, envelopes and OHP film only 1st side can be selected.
4. Select the paper type with the transfer failure.
5. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] keys.
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), increase the setting value.
To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), decrease the setting value.
6. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value.
* Press [Auto] to automatically control the image transfer output without using the 2nd image transfer output fine adjustment value.
11.5.6 TCR Sensor Adjust

(1) Use
To automatically adjust the TCR sensor.
To obtain the output value of the TCR sensor and determine a standard value for the TC ratio determination control so that the toner
supply control can be optimized.
Use this adjustment at the set-up.
Use this adjustment when the developer or the developing unit is replaced.
(2) Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [TCR Sensor Adjust].
3. Touch [Black], and press the Start key.
NOTE
After pressing the Start key, wait 1 minute without touching any keys. The Start key lights up in red.
4. When the adjustment is completed, the Start key lights up in blue.
5. Touch [END] to complete the automatic adjustment.
11.5.7 Paper Separation Adjustment

(1) Paper separation adjustment
(a) Use
By changing the period between the activation of the timing roller and the image transfer output, the paper separation position can be
adjusted for the 1st and 2nd sides of paper in duplex print.
To ensure proper balance between paper separating and image transferring performances by varying the paper separation position
applied for duplex printing.
(b) Default setting

0
(c) Setting range

-2 mm to +2 mm (step: 0.1 mm)
(d) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Paper Separation Adjustment] [Paper separation adjustment].
Select [First Side] or [Second Side].
Use the [+] or [-] key to change the setting value.
Priority on paper separation performance: Increase the setting value.
Priority on image transfer performance: Decrease the setting value.
5. Touch [OK] and determine the adjustment value.
6. Make a print and check the produced image.
(2) Paper separation voltage adjust

(a) Use
To fine-adjust the paper separation voltage determined by the separation output determination control for each type of paper.
(However, you cannot fine-adjust the paper separation voltage for the 2nd side of paper.)
Use this adjustment when image failure such as voids on solid black image occurs under low temperature and low humidity conditions.
(b) Default setting

0
(c) Setting range

-5 to +5 (step: 1 *)
I-191
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(d) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Paper Separation Adjustment] [Paper Separation Voltage Adjust].
Select the paper type.
Use the [+] or [-] key to change the setting value.
Priority to separating ability: Increase the setting value.
Priority to transferring ability: Decrease the setting value.
NOTE
If the paper separation voltage that is calculated based on the fine-adjusted value is not between the lower limit (500 V)
and the upper limit (2000 V), the lower limit value or the upper limit value is used as the paper separation voltage.
5. Touch [OK] and determine the adjustment value.

6. Make a print and check the produced image.
11.5.8 Manual Toner Add

(1) Use
To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID occurs due to a lowered T/C ratio after large
numbers of prints have been made of originals having a high image density.
When there is a drop in T/C ratio.
Use this function at the set-up.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Manual Toner Add].
Touch [Black].
Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and; if the density is lower than a reference value, a toner
replenishing sequence and then a developer agitation sequence are run.
5. When toner supply is completed, the Start key lights up in blue.
6. Touch [END] to complete toner supply.
11.5.9 Dot Enhancement

(1) Use
Not used.
(2) Default setting

63
11.6 CS Remote Care (Outlines)
CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone/fax line in order to
control the machine.
CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble occurs. It also enables the computer at the center to
contact the machine for the necessary data.
Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups.
Data which show the status of use of the machine such as total count, PM count.
Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how often errors occur.
Data on adjustment
Data on setting
NOTE
It cannot be set when the following setting is set to ON.
I-192
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.7 Setting up the CS Remote Care

NOTE
For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up, clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before
resetting.
When using a telephone line modem for connection, use the data modem which is based on the ITU-T recommendations V.34/V.
32 bis/V.32 and AT command.
11.7.1 Using the telephone line modem

1. Register the device ID
Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care center.
NOTE
The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
2. Connecting the modem
Turn the power for the modem OFF. Connect the machine and the modem with a modem cable. Connect the modem and the wall jack
with a modular cable.
NOTE
For connecting the modular cable, see the manual for the modem.
3. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
4. Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and touch [OK].
5. Selecting the CS Remote Care function
Select [Service Mode] [CS Remove Care] [System Selection], and touch [Modem].
7. Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-key pad, and touch [Set].
8. Setting the Center ID
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
9. Confirm the Device ID
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Device ID], and input Device ID (13 digits).
NOTE
[Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode][System 1][Serial Number].
10. Setting the telephone number of the Center
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Center Telephone Number].
3. Input the telephone number of the center using the 10-keys pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
11. Inputting the device telephone number
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Device Telephone Number].
3. Input the Device telephone number using the 10-key pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
12. Inputting the AT command for initializing the modem
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [AT Command].
3. Input AT Command.
NOTE
Change this command only when it is necessary. (They do not need to be changed in normal condition.)
For details on AT command, see the manual for the modem.
13. Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
This setting is not normally necessary.
Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition.
14. Executing the initial transmission
2. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
3. When the machine is properly connected with the center, CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed.
NOTE
The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the center ID, the device ID,
Telephone number of the center and the device telephone number have been input.
11.7.2 Using the Fax line modem

NOTE
Setting will be available only when the optional fax board is installed.
I-193
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
NOTE
Rmove the telephone line modem
Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when the fax line is used.
Inputting the ID code
Clearing the RAM
Selecting the CS Remote Care function
Select [Service Mode] [CS Remove Care] [System Selection], and touch [Fax].
Inputting the ID code
Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
Setting the Center ID
Confirm the Device ID
NOTE
Setting the telephone number of the Center
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Center Telephone Number].
3. Input the telephone number of the center using the 10-keys pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
Inputting the device telephone number
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Device Telephone Number].
3. Input the Device telephone number using the 10-key pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
This setting is not normally necessary. Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition.

NOTE
The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the center ID, the device ID,
Telephone number of the center and the device telephone number have been input.
11.7.3 Using E-mail

NOTE
2. Remove the telephone line modem
Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when e-mail is used.
4. Clearing the RAM
Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [System Setting], and touch [E-Mail 1] or [E-Mail 2].
I-194
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
NOTE
Encryption setting
2. Touch [Basic Setting] and select either Encryption or No Encryption.
Retransmission interval on e-mail delivery error
When selecting [E-mail2], set the retransmission interval on e-mail delivery error in software SW setting.
Setting the Respond Timeout
2. Touch [Respond Timeout] and enter the response timeout using the 10-key pad.
NOTE
Under normal conditions, there is no need to change the default setting.
Setting the E-mail address
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care], and touch [Server Set].
2. Touch [Server for RX], and set POP3 server address, POP3 login name, POP3 password and POP3 port number.
3. Press [Receive], and set the E-Mail address, Mail Check, Connection Time Out and APOP Authentication.
4. Touch [Send], and set the SMTP server address, SMTP port number, Connection Time Out, and APOP Authentication.
5. Touch [TX/RX Test], and press Start key to carry out a transmission/reception test. If it fails to exchange messages, see the error
message to take necessary measure, and try again.
When selecting [E-Mail2]:
2. Touch [Schedule] and set the schedule of periodic transmission.
3. Touch [Center Notifi. Item] and set items that will be reported to the Center.
Receiving the initial connection E-mail message
Sending the initial connection E-mail message from the center to the address of the copier.
NOTE
When receiving the initial connection E-mail message from the center while CS Remote Care-related screen is being
displayed, the current setting information will be deleted, and CS Remote Care setting will be displayed.
For sending the initial connection E-mail, see the manual for CS Remote Care center.
Messages can be exchanged only between the center with initial connection and the copier.
The initial connection from the center will be carried out, and the E-mail address of the center will be stored in the copier.
When the initial registration is complete, the E-mail address of the center will be displayed by selecting [Service Mode]
[CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting], [Basic Setting] [E-Mail address].
11.7.4 When using a WebDAV server in http communication

(1) Bilateral communication
NOTE
Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when the http communication is used.
4. Clearing the RAM
Select [Service Mode] [CS Remove Care] [System Selection], and touch [http1].
NOTE
[Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode] [System 1] [Serial Number].
10. Encryption setting
2. Touch [Basic Setting] [Client Setting] and select either Encryption or No Encryption.
11. Heart Beat
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting], and touch [Heart Beat].
2. In [Communication], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat communication. (Default: Yes)
3. Touch [Comm. Interval] and enter a Heart Beat transmission interval (1 to 256 minutes, Default: 30 minutes).
4. In [Specified Transmission], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat transmission at a specified interval. (Default: Yes)
5. Touch [Hour] and [Minute] and enter a time for specified transmission.
I-195
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
Heart Beat is a feature that uploads a Heart Beat file to the registered web server at a specified interval to report that the
device is operating. Heart Beat files include total counter and status information.
12. Setting the http server
2. Touch [HTTP Server Settings] and set a URL address, account, password, and port number.
3. Touch [Proxy/SSL] and make proxy server and SSL settings.
NOTE
NOTE
The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the center ID and the URL
address have been input.
If communication error between the machine and Center occurs, check the error code that appears.
(2) Unilateral communication: Device to Center

NOTE
Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when the http communication is used.
4. Clearing the RAM
Select [Service Mode] [CS Remove Care] [System Selection], and touch [http2].
NOTE
[Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode] [System 1] [Serial Number].
10. Encryption setting
2. Touch [Basic Setting] [Client Setting] and select either Encryption or No Encryption.
11. Heart Beat
NOTE
Heart Beat is a feature that uploads a Heart Beat file to the registered web server at a specified interval to report that the
device is operating. Heart Beat files include total counter and status information.
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting], and touch [Heart Beat].
2. In [Communication], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat communication. (Default: Yes)
3. Touch [Comm. Interval] and enter a Heart Beat transmission interval (1 to 256 minutes, Default: 30 minutes).
4. In [Specified Transmission], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat transmission at a specified interval. (Default: Yes)
5. Touch [Hour] and [Minute] and enter a time for specified transmission.
12. Notification Setting
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting], and touch [Notification Setting].
2. Touch [Schedule] and set the schedule of periodic transmission.
3. Touch [Center Notifi. Item] and set items that will be reported to the Center.
13. Setting the http server
2. Touch [HTTP Server Settings] and set a URL address, account, password, and port number.
3. Touch [Proxy/SSL] and make proxy server and SSL settings.
NOTE
I-196
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the center ID and the URL
address have been input.
If communication error between the machine and Center occurs, check the error code that appears.
11.8 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care

NOTE
Software SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident, be
sure to restore the previous state.
Do not change any bit not described.
11.8.1 Input procedure

1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting], and touch [Software Switch Setting].
2. Touch [Switch No.], and input the switch number (two digits) using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [Bit Assignment], and select switch bit number using the arrow keys, and input 0 or 1 using the 10-key pad.
(For setting by hexadecimal numbers, touch [HEX Assignment] key, and input using the 10-key pad or A to F keys.)
4. Touch [Fix].
NOTE
About functions of each switch, see to I.11.8.2 List of software SW for CS Remote Care.
11.8.2 List of software SW for CS Remote Care

SW No.
Functions
Ref.
01
Dial Mode, Line for send only, Baud rate
I.11.8.3 SW No. 01
02
Emergency transmission, Date specified transmission, Call parts replace date,

Call drum replace date, Call regular service date (PM), Auto call on the IC Life,
Auto call of the IR shortage, Auto call on the zero reset of the fixed parts
replacement
I.11.8.4 SW No. 02
03
Trouble display setting, Auto call on the toner empty
I.11.8.5 SW No. 03
04
I.11.8.6 SW No. 04
05
I.11.8.7 SW No. 05
06
Modem redial times
I.11.8.8 SW No. 06
07
I.11.8.9 SW No. 07
08
Retransmission interval on E-Mail/http delivery error
I.11.8.10 SW No. 08
09
Retransmission times on E-Mail/http delivery error
I.11.8.11 SW No. 09
10
Time zone settings
I.11.8.12 SW No. 10
11
Timer 1 RING reception CONNECT reception
I.11.8.13 SW No. 11
12
Timer 2 Dial request completed CONNECT reception
I.11.8.14 SW No. 12
13
Reservation
14
Timer 4 Line connection Start request telegram delivery
I.11.8.15 SW No. 14
15
Timer 5 Wait time for other side's response
I.11.8.16 SW No. 15
16
Reservation
17
Reservation
18
Attention display
To set weather to give the alarm display when using the modem but the power for
the modem is OFF.
I.11.8.17 SW No. 18
19
Reservation
20
Reservation
21
Automatic transmission of chronological misfeed data at the time of transmission

of misfeed frequent occurrence warning, transmission of paper-based misfeed
frequent occurrence warning, transmission of original-based misfeed frequent
occurrence warning
I.11.8.18 SW No. 21
22
Paper-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value
I.11.8.19 SW No. 22
23
Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value
I.11.8.20 SW No. 23
24
:
40
Reservation
11.8.3 SW No. 01
(1) Default
Bit
I-197
bizhub 423/363/283/223
HEX
81
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Logic
Functions
Description
1
0110
9600 bps
0111
19.2 Kbps
1000
38.4 Kbps
Other
Not available
Baud rate
Reservation
2
1
Line for send only
Dial Mode
Disable
Enable
Pulse
Tone
11.8.4 SW No. 02
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
FF
(2) Functions
Bit
Logic
Functions
Auto call on the zero reset of the fixed parts

replacement
Disable
Enable
Auto call of the IR shortage
Disable
Enable
Auto call on the IC Life
Disable
Enable
Call regular service date(PM)
Disable
Enable
Call drum replace date
Disable
Enable
Call parts replace date
Disable
Enable
Date specified transmission
Disable
Enable
Emergency transmission
Disable
Enable
Description
11.8.5 SW No. 03
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
0A
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Functions
Logic
0
Disable
Enable
Description
Reservation
6
5
4
3
Reservation
Reservation
Auto call on the toner empty
Trouble Display setting
When the CSRC is not

connected
I-198
When the CSRC is

connected
Select the type of

message to be displayed
at the time of automatic
trouble notification made
when the CSRC is
connected, either the
message when the CSRC
is connected or that when
the CSRC is not
connected.
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.8.6 SW No. 04
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
02
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Logic
Functions
Description
Reservation
6
5
4
3
2
1
00
DATA
01
FAX
10
E-mail
11
Not available
11.8.7 SW No. 05
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
03
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Logic
Functions
Description
Reservation
6
5
4
00001
1 minute
00010
2 minutes
00011
3 minutes
00100
4 minutes
00101
5 minutes
00110
6 minutes
00111
7 minutes
01000
8 minutes
01001
9 minutes
01010
10 minutes
Others
Not available
11.8.8 SW No. 06
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
0A
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Functions
Logic
0
Modem redial times
0000 0000
0 time
0000 0001
1 time
0000 1010
I-199
Description
:
10 times
:
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Bit

Logic
Functions
Description
0110 0010
98 times
0110 0011
99 times
Others
Not available
11.8.9 SW No. 07
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
01
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Logic
Functions
Description
1
0000 0000
0 time
0000 0001
1 time
5
4
3
Others
Not available
1
0
11.8.10 SW No. 08
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
06
(2) Functions
Bit
7
6
Logic
Functions
Retransmission interval on E-mail/http

delivery error
Description
1
0000 0000
0 minute
0000 0001
10 minutes
0000 0110
0000 1011
110 minutes
0000 1100
120 minutes
Others
Not available
60 minutes
:
11.8.11 SW No. 09
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
0A
(2) Functions
Bit
7
6
Functions
Logic
0
Retransmission times on E-mail/http delivery

error
Description
1
0000 0000
0 time
0000 0001
1 time
0000 1010
:
10 times
0110 0010
98 times
0110 0011
99 times
I-200
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Bit

Logic
Functions
Description
Others
Not available
11.8.12 SW No. 10
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
00
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Logic
Functions
Time zone settings
Description
1
0000 0000
-12 hours
0000 0001
-11 hours
0110 0010
+12 hours
0001 1010
+13 hours
2
1
Others
Not available
11.8.13 SW No. 11
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
20
(2) Functions
Bit
7
6
Logic
Functions
Timer 1
RING reception CONNECT reception
Description
1
0000 0000
0 sec
0000 0001
1 sec
0010 0000
1111 1110
254 sec
1111 1111
255 sec
1
0
:
32 sec
:
11.8.14 SW No. 12
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
40
(2) Functions
Bit
7
6
5
Functions
Logic
0
Timer 2
Dial request completed CONNECT
reception
Description
1
0000 0000
0 sec
0000 0001
1 sec
0100 0000
1111 1110
254 sec
1111 1111
255 sec
1
0
I-201
64 sec
:
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.8.15 SW No. 14
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
20
(2) Functions
Bit
7
6
5
Logic
Functions
Timer 4
Line connection Start request telegram
delivery
Description
1
0000 0000
0 msec
0000 0001
100 msec
0010 0000
3,200 msec
1111 1110
25,400 msec
1111 1111
25,500 msec
1
0
11.8.16 SW No. 15
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
1E
(2) Functions
Bit
7
6
Logic
Functions
Timer 5
Wait time for other sides response
Description
1
0000 0000
0 msec
0000 0001
1 sec
0001 1110
1111 1110
254 sec
1111 1111
255 sec
1
0
:
30 sec
:
11.8.17 SW No. 18
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
01
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Functions
Logic
0
OFF
ON
Reservation
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Attention display
To set weather to give the alarm display when
using the modem but the power for the
modem is OFF.
I-202
Description
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.8.18 SW No. 21
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
00
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Logic
Functions
Description
Reservation
6
5
4
3
2
Automatic transmission of chronological

misfeed data at the time of transmission of
misfeed frequent occurrence warning
OFF
ON
Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence

threshold value
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
If the number of jams

exceeds the threshold
specified per day (0:00 to
23:59), Jam Frequent
Occurrence Warning is
sent. At 12 a.m. of the
next day, the counter is
reset.
Paper-based misfeed frequent occurrence

threshold value
11.8.19 SW No. 22
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
05
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Logic
Functions
0
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0101
5
:
Paper-based misfeed frequent occurrence

threshold value
Description
0000 1110
14
0000 1111
15
Others
Not available
11.8.20 SW No. 23
(1) Default
Bit
HEX
05
(2) Functions
Bit
7
Functions
Logic
0
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0101
Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence

threshold value
Description
0000 1110
14
0000 1111
15
I-203
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Bit

Logic
Functions
1
Others
Description
Not available
11.9 Detail on settings for CS Remote Care

11.9.1 System Selection
(1) Use
To select the system type for remote diagnosis.
Use to newly build or change the system.
(2) Setting range
E-Mail1
E-Mail2
Modem
Fax
http1
http2
(3) Procedure
Select E-Mail, Modem, or Fax.
Fax is available only when the optional fax kit is being installed.
11.9.2 ID Code
(1) Use
To register the service ID.
Use when registering and changing service ID.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [ID code] and enter the service ID.
Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-key pad. (0000001 to 9999999)
2. Touch [ID code] to register the ID.
3. The [Detail Setting] will appear when the ID has been registered.
11.9.3 Detail Setting

(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
(a) Use
Execute the primary setting.
Use to change the set contents.
Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center.
(b) Procedure
2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting.
<Center Setting>
Set the center ID, Device ID, and the phone No.
When e-mail is selected for system and all setup procedures are completed, e-mail address of the center is displayed.
* When entering the phone number, 10-keys and keys on the screen have following meanings.
[-] Pose
Waits to start transmitting after dialing
[W] Wait
Detects the dial tone of the other end
[T] Tone dial
Carry out tone dialing
[P] Pulse dial
Carry out pulse dialing
[*], [#]
To be used as necessary
<Schedule (Only when the [E-Mail2] is selected)>
Set the schedule of notification to the center.
Up to three different notification schedules can be registered.
Select the notification cycle from [Day], [Week], or [Month].
When selecting [Day] for the notification cycle, set the Day Frequency.
When selecting [Week] for the notification cycle, set the Week Frequency and day of the week.
When selecting [Month], set the Month Frequency and the date of the month.
<Center Notification (Only when the [E-Mail2] is selected)>
Select the items of data that will be sent to the center in one-way transmission through E-Mail2.
The following table shows each of the notification item keys and corresponding data.
[1]
Sales count data
[7]
EKC data
[2]
Error count data
[8]
Adjustment data
[3]
Service count data
[9]
Coverage data
[4]
Life count data
[10]
Not used
I-204
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Life cycle data
[5]
CSRC-System data
Device config data
[11]
Not used
[6]
History data
[12]
Not used
NOTE
Multiple items of data can be selected and sent at one time. However, be sure that only EKC data cannot be sent together
with other items of data.
<Initial Transmission>
Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care center to register the machine.
(Only when the modem or fax is selected on the system Input.)
(2) Basic Setting (http1 or http2)

(a) Use
Execute the primary setting.
Use to change the set contents.
Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center.
(b) Procedure
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting.
<Center Setting>
Set the center ID.
Display the device ID.
<Client Setting>
To set whether or not to encrypt communication.
<Heart Beat>
To make Heart Beat related settings.
Heart Beat is a feature that uploads a Heart Beat file to the registered web server at a specified interval to report that the device is
operating. Heart Beat files include total counter and status information.
<Initial Transmission>
Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care center to register the machine.
(3) Date & Time Setting

(a) Use
To set the data and time-of-day.
Use to set or change the date and time-of-day.
(b) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Touch [CS Remote Care].
Touch [Detail Setting] to access Date & Time Setting.
Enter the date (month, day and year), time-of-day, and the time zone from the 10-key pad.
Touch [SET] to start the clock.
(4) RAM Clear

(a) Use
To clear the following data at the center.
ID Code, Primary Setting, Date/Time Input (Time Zone), Software SW Setting and AT Command.
To be used for setting CS Remote Care.
To be used for reset the every data of the center to default.
NOTE
If RAM clear is selected during transmission, RAM clear processing will be implemented at the time the transmission is
completed regardless of whether it is done properly or not.
(b) Default setting

Unset
(c) Setting item

Set
Unset
(5) Communication Log Print

(a) Use
To print out the communication log.
Use to output and use the communication log.
(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode on the screen.
I-205
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. Touch [Detail Setting] to access communication log print.

4. Load tray 1 or bypass tray with A4S or 8 1/ x 11 paper.
2
5. Press Start key to print out the communication log.
(6) Software Switch Setting

(a) Use
To change the CS Remote Care settings.
(b) Procedure
Refer to I.11.8 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care for the setting.
(7) Response Time Out

(a) Use
It sets the intervals for resending e-mails when transmission error occurred.
It can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting.
To use when changing the intervals for resending e-mails when transmission error occurred.
(b) Default setting

60 minute
(c) Setting range

10 to 1440
(8) AT Command
(a) Use
To set the command to be issued at the time of modem initialization.
This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting.
(b) Procedure
Enter the command and touch [SET] to register.
(9) Notification Setting

(a) Use
To make the settings of notification to the Center that is performed under unilateral communication via http.
This setting is available only when [http2] is selected in System Setting.
(b) Procedure
<Schedule>
Set the schedule of notification to the center.
Up to three different notification schedules can be registered.
Select the notification cycle from [Day], [Week], or [Month].
When selecting [Day] for the notification cycle, set the Day Frequency.
When selecting [Week] for the notification cycle, set the Week Frequency and day of the week.
When selecting [Month], set the Month Frequency and the date of the month.
<Center Notifi. Item>
The following table shows each of the notification item keys and corresponding data.
[1]
Sales count data
[7]
EKC data
[2]
Error count data
[8]
Adjustment data
[3]
Service count data
[9]
Coverage data
[4]
Life count data

Life cycle data
[10]
Not used
[5]
CSRC-System data
Device config data
[11]
Not used
[6]
History data
[12]
Not used
NOTE
Multiple items of data can be selected and sent at one time. However, be sure that only EKC data cannot be sent together
with other items of data.
11.9.4 Server Setting (E-Mail1 or E-mail2 is selected.)

(1) Server for RX-POP3 server
(a) Use
To set the POP3 server address used for the CS Remote Care.
To set the address of the POP3 Server.
POP3 server address can be set with IP address or the domain name.
I-206
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Procedure
<Input IP Address>
IP address version 4 format
[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255]
<Input FQDN>
Enter the domain name.
(2) Server for RX-POP3 login name

(a) Use
To set the logon name for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Procedure
Up to 64 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
(c) Default setting

No
(3) Server for RX-POP3 password

(a) Use
To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Procedure
(c) Default setting

No
(4) Server for RX-POP3 port number

(a) Use
To set the POP3 port number used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Default setting

110
(c) Setting range

1 to 65535
(5) Receive-E-mail Address

(a) Use
To set the e-mail address used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Procedure
(c) Default setting

No
(6) Receive-Mail Check

(a) Use
To set whether or not to use mail check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care.
To change the time interval for mail check.
(b) Default setting

No
(c) Setting item

No
1 to120 min.
(7) Receive-Connection timeout

(a) Use
To set the timeout period for connection during reception.
I-207
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

60 Sec
(c) Setting range

30 to 300 Sec
(8) Receive-APOP Authentication

(a) Use
To set whether or not to authenticate the APOP during reception.
(b) Default setting

No
(c) Setting item

Yes
No
(9) Send-SMTP server

(a) Use
To set the SMTP sever address for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.
SMTP server address can be set by the IP address or the domain name.
(b) Procedure
<Input IP Address>
IP address version 4 format
[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255]
<Input FQDN>
Enter the domain name.
(10) Send-SMTP port number

(a) Use
To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Default setting

25
(c) Setting range

1 to 65535
(11) Send-SMTP Connection Time-out

(a) Use
To set the timeout period for transmission.
(b) Default setting

60 Sec
(c) Setting range

30 to 300 Sec
(12) Send-Authentication Setting

(a) Use
To set whether or not to authenticate during transmission via SMTP server.
To use when authenticating during transmission.
Available authentication mode: POP Before SMTP, SMTP authentication
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

OFF
POP Before SMTP
SMTP Authentication
NOTE
Setting to POP Before SMTP will set the time for POP Before SMTP.
Default setting: 60 Sec
Setting range: 0 to 60 Sec
When setting to SMTP authentication, touch the Setting Check key for authentication.
I-208
bizhub 423/363/283/223
User ID
Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication.
Password
Enter the password for SMTP authentication.
Domain name
Enter the domain name for SMTP authentication.
(13) TX/RX Test

(a) Use
To determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care.
(b) Procedure
1. Press the Start key to let the machine start the transmission and reception test.
2. The test procedure and result will be displayed on the screen.
(14) Data Initialization

(a) Use
To initialize the contents for the sever setting.
(b) Default setting

No
(c) Setting item

Yes
No
11.9.5 Server Setting (http1 or http2 is selected)

(1) HTTP Server Settings
(a) Use
To set a http server at the other end that is used in CS Remote Care.
(b) Procedure
<URL>
To set the address of the http server.
<Account>
To set an account that is used to access the http server.
<Password>
To set a password that is used to access the http server.
<Port Number>
To set a port number that is used to access the http server.
(2) Proxy/SSL
(a) Use
To make proxy/SSL settings of the http server at the other end that is used in CS Remote Care.
(b) Procedure
<Proxy Server>
To set whether or not to use a proxy server.
<SSL Settings>
To set whether or not to use SSL communication.
(3) Data Initialization

(a) Use
To initialize values in the server settings.
11.9.6 Setup confirmation
1.
2.
3.
Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set up.
Touch [CS Remote Care].
Check to make sure that only selected item is displayed.
11.9.7 Calling the maintenance

When CE starts maintenance, inputting the ID code of CE (seven digits: numbers which CE can identify. They are controlled by the
distributor.) will transmit the information to the Center side and tells that the maintenance has started. When the maintenance is finished,
touching [Maintenance Complete] key will transmit the information to the center and tells that it is finished.
(1) When starting the maintenance

1. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
2. Touch [ID Code], and input ID Code.
3. Touch [ID Coke].
I-209
bizhub 423/363/283/223
* The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out.
(2) When finishing the maintenance

1. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
2. Touch [Maintenance Complete].
11.9.8 Calling the center from the administrator
1.
2.
3.
When the CS Remote Care setup is complete, the administrator can call the CS Remote Care center.
Select [Administrator Settings], and touch [System Connection].
Touch [Admin. transmission].
Press the Start key.
When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out, the Admin. transmission key will not be displayed, and the
transmission is not available.
NOTE
For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date and time, refer to the manual for CS Remote Care
center.
11.9.9 Checking the transmission log
1.
2.
3.
4.
The transmission log list will be output to be checked.

Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail setting].
Touch [Communication Log Print].
Load tray 1 or bypass tray with A4S paper.
Press the Start key to output transmission log.
11.10 System 1
11.10.1 Marketing Area

(1) Use
To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according to the applicable marketing area.
Upon setup.
(2) Procedure
Marketing Area
Select the applicable marketing area and touch [END] to set the marketing area.
(3) Setting item- Marketing Area
JAPAN
US
Europe
Others1 to 5
(a) List of functions affected by marketing area setting

The listed are the functions of which setting is automatically changed depending on the selected marketing area.
Marketing area
Setting item
JAPAN
US
Europe
Others1
Others2
Others3
Others4
Others5
Language
(Default value)
Japanese
English
English
English
English
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
English
Language Selection
(Selectable language)
Japanese
English
English
French
English
French
English
French
English
French
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
English
French
I-210
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Marketing area
Setting item
Additional selectable
language when the
UK-203 is installed.
Foolscap size
LCT size
JAPAN
US
Europe
Others1
Others2
Others3
Others4
Others5
French
Italian
German
Spanish
Italian
German
Spanish
Japanese
Italian
German
Spanish
Japanese
Spanish
Japanese
Spanish
Traditional
Chinese
English
English
Spanish
Hangul
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
Hangul
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
Hangul
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
Hangul
Italian
German
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
Hangul
Italian
German
Japanese
Simplified
Chinese
Hangul
French
Italian
German
Spanish
Japanese
Traditional
Chinese
Hangul
French
Italian
German
Spanish
Japanese
Simplified
Chinese
Hangul
Italian
German
Japanese
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
8 x 13
8 x 13
8 x 13
8 x 13
8 x 13
8 x 13
8 x 13
8 x 13
A4 LEF
Letter LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
Unit
Metric
Inch
Metric
Metric
Metric
Metric
Metric
Metric
Total counter mode
Mode1
Mode2
Mode2
Mode2
Mode2
Mode2
Mode2
Mode2
Size counter
No count
A3, 11x17
A3, B4,
11x17,
8 1/2x14
A3, B4,
11x17,
8 1/2x14
A3, B4,
11x17,
8 1/2x14
A3, B4,
11x17,
8 1/2x14
A3, B4,
11x17,
8 1/2x14
A3, B4,
11x17,
8 1/2x14
Unit Change
Japan
US
Europe
Europe
Europe
Europe
Europe
Europe
NOTE
The language used in the service mode depends on the Language Selection setting, and changes to the language as following
table.
Language Selection
Service Mode
Japanese
Japanese
Simplified Chinese
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Hangul
Hangul
Language other than listed above
English
(4) Setting item- Fax Target

1. Touch the [Fax Target].
2. Select the applicable marketing area using [+] and [-] keys, and touch [END].
11.10.2 Tel/Fax Number

(1) Use
To enter the tel/fax number of the service contact that will appear on the control panel when a malfunction occurs in the machine.
Upon setup.
(2) Procedure
Enter the tel/fax number (19 digits) from the 10-key pad.
Use Interrupt key to enter -.
11.10.3 Serial Number

(1) Use
To register the serial numbers of the machine and options.
The numbers will be printed on the list output.
To use the serial number as machine ID during CS Remote Care communication.
Upon setup.
NOTE
When main power switch was turned ON while the serial No. was not entered, the message to require entering the serial No. will
be displayed.
Do not change the serial number registered in the machine. If memory data is lost and entering the serial number is required,
enter the original correct serial number. Be careful to enter the correct serial number since characters other than alphanumeric
can be also entered. CSRC communication is not available if a wrong serial number is entered.
The serial number of Printer can be checked through the following: [Utility] [Meter Count] [Check Details].
(2) Procedure
Type the serial numbers.
Printer, Scanner, ADF, LCT, Sorter/FN, Duplex, Vendor, Fax1, Fax2, RU, ZU (Not used)
11.10.4 Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting

(1) Use
To display the option of OFF for the sleep mode setting screen available from administrator settings.
I-211
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to OFF.
(2) Default setting

Prohibit
(3) Setting item

Permit
Prohibit
11.10.5 Foolscap Size Setting

(1) Use
To set the size for foolscap paper.
Upon setup.
(2) Setting item

81/ x 131/
2
2
220 x 330 mm
81/ x 13
2
81/ x 13
4
81/ x 131/
8
4
8 x 13
11.10.6 Original Size Detection

(1) Copy Glass
(a) Use
To change the size detection table for the document glass.
(b) Default setting

Table1
(c) Setting item

Table1
Table2
NOTE
Table 2 can be set only when original size detection sensor 2 is being mounted.
(2) 81/2 x 14/Foolscap Size Detection

(a) Use
To set whether paper of 81/ x 131/ size is detected as 81/ x 14 or foolscap in original glass or ADF size detection.
2
2
2
When Table 1 is selected in Copy Glass, paper of 81/2 x 131/2 size is detected as foolscap despite of the setting of 81/2 x 14/Foolscap
Size Detection.
(b) Default setting

81/ x 14
2
(c) Setting item

81/ x 14
2
Foolscap
(3) ADF Size Detection

(a) Use
To set whether to use 8K/16K or B standards (8K B4, 16K B5) for original size detection on the ADF.
(This setting is available only when Other3 is selected in [Service Mode] [System 1] [Marketing Area].)
(b) Default setting

K Size
(c) Setting item

K Size
B series
I-212
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.10.7 Install Date

(1) Use
To register the date the main body was installed.
Upon setup.
(2) Procedure
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] [Install Date].
3. Enter the date (Year 4 digit Month 2 digit date 2 digit) from the 10-key pad.
4. Touch [Entry] to set the date of installation.
11.10.8 Initialization-Clear All Data

(1) Use
To initialize the setting data.
For details on items to be cleared, see I.14. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION.
NOTE
When removing or installing the hard disk after registering the data below, be sure to clear the data.
Referring data: One-touch registration, user authentication/account track.
(2) Procedure
[System 1] [Initialization] [Clear All Data].
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
11.10.9 Initialization-Clear Individual Data

Clear Individual Data enables you to select and clear multiple items at a time.
(1) Copy Program Data

(a) Use
To clear data registered as copy program.
Use this feature to clear all copy program data at a time.
(b) Procedure
[System 1] [Initialization] [Copy Program Data].
(2) Address Registration Data

(a) Use
To clear address registration data.
Use this feature to initialize address registration data.
The following are address registration data:
Group address data, Program key data, One-touch destination data, Mail body data, Subject data, Prefix/suffix data
(b) Procedure
[System 1] [Initialization] [Address Registration Data].
(3) Fax Setting Data

(a) Use
To clear fax-related settings and parameters. However, address-related data is not cleared.
Use this feature to clear fax-related settings and parameters at a time.
(b) Procedure
[System 1] [Initialization] [Fax Setting Data].
(4) All History Data

(a) Use
To clear history data.
I-213
bizhub 423/363/283/223
The following are history data:

Job history, Journal history, Receive reject history, Destination history, Job secure counter (Internal data for history management)
(b) Procedure
[System 1] [Initialization] [All History Data].
(5) Network Setting Data

(a) Use
To clear network-related settings.
Use this feature to initialize and set network-related settings again when the machine does not work properly upon change of networkrelated settings.
(b) Procedure
[System 1] [Initialization] [Network Setting Data].
11.10.10 Initialization-System Error Clear

(1) Use
To reset the trouble data.
Use to clear the [Jam], [Trouble], [Error] displays, and other improper displays.
For details on items to be cleared, see I.14. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION.
(2) Procedure
[System 1] [Initialization] [System Error Clear].
11.10.11 Problem Unit Isolation Set.

(1) Use
Individual units and options have a set or unset setting for the problem unit isolation function.
When a problem occurs, this function enables the continuous use of the units that are not affected by separately controlling them and
isolating other units that have a problem.
The machine isolates only units that have a set setting.
NOTE
The malfunction detection mechanism is not applied to units and options that are being isolated.
This function can be selected for the following units and options.
Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, LCT, manual, Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling, Staple, Scanner, ADF
Though Problem Unit Isolation Set. is not selected, if the specified malfunctions occur on the above listed units or options, an alert screen
appears and asks users whether to isolate the units or options where malfunction occurs.
See the TROUBLESHOOTING section for the corresponding trouble codes.
(2) Default setting

Unset
(3) Setting item

Set
Unset
After changing the setting, touch [Decision] and turn the main power switch OFF and ON to make the new setting effective.
11.10.12 Machine State LED Setting

(1) Use
To set how to display main body statuses on the machine state LED (state display lamp, paper empty lamp).
NOTE
Each of Type1 and Type2 has the following LED display forms.
Warning statuses
Type1
Type2
Attention
Toner supply door open
Improper toner bottle placement
Blinking
Blinking
Near life
Blinking
Unlit
Alert code
Unlit
Unlit
Problem unit isolation
Blinking
Blinking
I-214
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Amount of paper remaining

(Tray 1 and 2)
Amount of paper remaining

(Tray 3 and 4)
Type1
Type2
Fatal error
Trouble code
Jam
Door opened
Life stop
Lit
Lit
100 % to near empty
Unlit
Unlit
Near empty
Blinking
Unlit
Empty
Lit
Lit
Being lifted up
Door opened or closed
Unlit
Unlit
100 % to near empty
Unlit
Unlit
Near empty
Blinking
Unlit
Empty
Lit
Lit
Being lifted up
Door opened or closed
Unlit
Unlit
(2) Default setting

Type 2
(3) Setting item

Type 1
Type 2
11.11 System 2
System2 1/2
I-215
bizhub 423/363/283/223
System2 2/2
11.11.1 HDD
Making this setting is necessary only on the machine models and in the marketing areas where the hard disk is set as an option. If the hard
disk is standard on the machine or in the marketing area, changing this setting is unnecessary.
(1) Use
To set whether the machine has the hard disk or not.
Use this setting when installing the optional hard disk HD-516.
After installing the hard disk HD-516, if you change this setting from [Not Installed] to [Installed], the machine backs up the authentication
related data stored in NVRAM to SSD as a preparation of transferring data stored in SSD to the hard disk.
The backup data is restored when [SSD -> HDD Data Copy] is performed.
(2) Default setting

The default setting depends on each marketing area and machine model.
(3) Setting item

Installed
Not Installed
NOTE
If an unformatted hard disk is installed and this setting is changed, the trouble code C-D010 appears after the main power
switch is turned OFF/ON. In this case, perform the logical format.
If the machine has a hard disk lock password or a HDD encryption word, changing this setting to [Not Installed] is impossible.
If this setting is changed from [Installed] to [Not Installed], data relating to user authentication/account track are cleared.
Be aware that if you change this setting of HDD installation, the following settings are also automatically changed.
[Not Installed] -> [Installed]
[Installed] -> [Not Installed]
ON is automatically selected in [Utility] [User Settings]

[Printer Settings] [Basic Settings] [Spool Print Jobs in
HDD before RIP].
(When you touch [Installed], ON becomes selected.)
OFF is automatically selected in [Utility] [User Settings]

[Printer Settings] [Basic Settings] [Spool Print Jobs in
HDD before RIP].
(When you touch [Not Installed], OFF becomes selected.)
OFF is automatically selected for IP Address Fax and
Internet Fax in [Service Mode] [System 2] [Network FAX
Settings].
If the browser start mode is set to authentication mode, the
mode setting is automatically changed from authentication
mode to normal mode.
If the authentication setting is the authentication mode that
uses the intermediate authentication server, the
authentication mode is automatically canceled.
11.11.2 Image Controller Setting

(1) Image Controller Setting
(a) Use
To set the type of the controller.
When setting up the controller.
(b) Procedure
Select the controller to be used.
I-216
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Default setting

Controller 0
(d) Setting item

Controller 0 : The standard controller is used.
Controller 1 : undefined.
Others : undefined.
*: [Peripheral Mode] appears when [Others] is selected.
(2) Peripheral Mode

(a) Procedure
Select the operating mode of the Scanner.
(b) Setting item

Mode 1: undefined.
Mode 2: undefined.
Mode 3: undefined.
11.11.3 Option Board Status

(1) Use
To set when the optional fax board (FK-508) or DSC board (SC-507) is mounted.
Use when setting up the optional fax kit (FK-508) or security kit (SC-507) is mounted.
(2) Default setting

Unset
(3) Setting item

Fax (circuit 1)
Set
Unset
Fax (circuit 2)
Set
Unset
DSC1
Set
Unset
DSC2
Not used
NOTE
When the setting has been changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
11.11.4 Consumable Life Reminder

(1) Use
To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime
PM parts lifetime display
An entire screen warning is given when the service life of a specific unit has been reached,
prompting the user to replace the part.
Applicable units:
Fusing unit, ozone filter, transfer roller unit, developing unit, drum unit, developer
Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime.
Yes
A malfunction code and an entire screen warning appear on the control panel when the life value is reached.
No
A malfunction code appears at a lower portion of the screen and a one-line message appears at the upper
portion of the screen when the life value is reached.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
11.11.5 Unit Change

(1) Unit Change
(a) Use
To select who is to replace a unit.
Upon setup.
I-217
bizhub 423/363/283/223
To set whether or not to display a toner near empty warning.
(b) Default setting

User
(c) Setting item

Japan
US, Europe
Others1/2/3/4/5
Toner Bottle
User
Service
User
Service
User
Service
Punch Dust Box
User
Service
User
Service
User
Service
(2) Warning Display (Toner Near Empty)

(a) Use
Upon setup.
When the unit life arrives, the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit.
When User is selected : Printing is inhibited.
When Service is selected : Life warning.
(b) Default setting

Yes
(c) Setting item

Yes
No
11.11.6 Software Switch Setting

(1) Use
To set the operating characteristic of each function from software switch depending on what types of printing are normally made.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Touch [Software Switch Setting].

Touch [Switch No.] and enter the intended switch number with the ten-key pad.
Touch [Bit Assignment].
Use [] or [] to select a bit. To set the bit, enter 0 or 1 with the ten-key pad.
To set the bit in hex, touch [HEX Assignment] and use the ten-key pad and [A] to [F] keys to enter numbers and characters.
Touch [Fix].
(3) Printing on paper of nonstandard size fed from the bypass tray (AnySize mode)
(a) Use
To enable printing only by the setting made on the printer driver when printing is attempted on paper of nonstandard size fed by way of
the bypass tray (the default setting is the conventional operation).
bit0-0
Conventional operation
bit0-1
The print cycle is initiated for the paper specified on the printer driver regardless of the bypass tray paper
setting.
(b) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Touch [Software Switch Setting].

Touch [Switch No.] and enter 69 with the ten-key pad.
Touch [BIT Assignment] and select bit0 with []/[] key.
Enter 0 or 1 with the 10-key pad.
Touch [Fix].
11.11.7 CCD Calibration

(1) Use
To set whether to use the calibration adjustment value set prior to the shipping.
To display the current calibration adjustment value.
When CCD unit has been replaced, set to OFF.
After replacing the CCD unit, the default generic value needs to be set since the calibration value set for each unit changes to control the
differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD).
The original calibration adjustment value can be disabled to address image failure and other problems caused by individual CCD
performance difference.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-218
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
When the setting is changed, the function becomes available by turning the main power switch OFF and ON again.
11.11.8 LCT Paper Size Setting

(1) Use
To set the paper size for the LCT.
Use this feature upon LCT set-up.
(2) Default setting

The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area.
(3) Setting item

A4
81/ x 11
2
11.11.9 Line Mag Setting

(1) Use
To set whether to use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping.
To display the current magnification offset value.
When CCD unit has been replaced, set to OFF.
After replacing the CCD unit, the default generic value needs to be set since the magnification offset value between the lines set for each
unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD).
The original offset value can be disabled to address image failure and other problems caused by individual CCD performance difference.
(2) Default setting

ON
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When the setting is changed, the function becomes valid by turning the main power switch OFF and ON again.
11.11.10 Data Capture

(1) Use
When an error occurs, it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of the error.
When an error occurs, this will be used to analyze the cause of the error according to the print job data.
(2) Procedure
NOTE
The following conditions are necessary for this function.
When selecting [Security Setting] [Security Details] [Print Data Capture] in Administrator Settings, [Allow] must be set.
The hard disk must be mounted to the machine.
When selecting [Administrator Settings] [Network Settings] [FTP Settings], [FTP Server Settings: ON] must be set.
1. Select [Service Mode] [System 2], and touch [Data Capture]. Select [ON].
(While the Data Capture setting is [ON], the print job data from the PC will be stored in the hard disk.)
NOTE
Maximum 5 print job data can be stored, and the data will be overwritten beginning with the chronologically oldest one.
2. Check the IP address of the machine.
3. Connect the PC (Windows) and the machine with ethernet cable.
4. Start the DOS command prompt of the PC, and specify the IP address of the machine to start FTP.
5. Input the user name and the password.

User name: capture
Password: sysadm
I-219
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. Using the ls command, display the list of the file available for capture.
7. Using the binary command, set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer.
8. Using the get command, transfer the data for capture to PC.
9. Finish the command prompt.

NOTE
After receiving capture data, select [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Security Details], and select [Restrict]
for print data capture in order to delete the job data stored in the hard disk.
When HDD Format or Overwrite Temporary Data is performed, job data is deleted.
I-220
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.11.11 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.

(1) ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity
(a) Use
To set the detection level for the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.
Use when changing the setting for whether or not to detect the stain on the ADF original glass when opening/closing ADF as well as its
detection level as the main/sub power being ON, recovering from the sleep/low power mode, etc.
Not Set
Detection of stain on the glass will not be conducted.
Low
Stain on the glass will not be detected easily.
Normal
Normal level detection.
High
Stain on the glass will easily be detected.
NOTE
Be aware that selecting Not Set and performing the pre-detection with the following setting will display NG.
[Service Mode] [Machine] [ADF Scan Glass Contamination]
When Not Set is selected, the original glass cleaning operation after the job ends does not operate.
(b) Default setting

Normal
(c) Setting item
Not Set
Low
Normal
High
(2) ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Warn/Level

(a) Use
To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected.
Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the
lines.
0
Warning will not be displayed.
Warning will be displayed by the maintenance mark. (warning code: D-1/D-2)
Warning will be displayed on the message area on the basic screen.
3
Warning will be displayed on all screens.
NOTE
This setting is invalid when [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity] is set to Not Set.
(b) Default setting

2
(c) Setting item
0
1
2
3
(3) Feed Cleaning Settings

(a) Use
To set the operation for cleaning on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
Use when changing the operation for cleaning on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
0
Cleaning is not conducted as the cleaning brush does not rotate.
Glass is cleaned with the cleaning brush rotating at two originals intermittent.
(b) Default setting

1
(c) Setting item

0
1
11.11.12 Stamp
(1) Use
To set the mounting status of the optional stamp unit SP-501.
To use when setting up the stamp unit SP-501.
I-221
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Default setting

Unset
(3) Setting item

Set
Unset
11.11.13 Network Fax Settings

(1) Use
To set whether or not to use network fax function.
To use network fax function (IP address fax, internet fax).
Selection will be available when each network fax function is set to ON in the following settings.
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

IP Address Fax
ON
OFF
SIP-Fax
Not Used
Internet Fax
ON
OFF
11.11.14 User Paper Settings

(1) Use
To set and register individual user paper that includes a different basic weight, fusing temperature, image transfer output fine adjustment
value.
User Paper Settings is also available from [Administrator Settings] [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [User Paper Settings].
To register a paper type that is suitable for individual customers intended use and use environment.
The following shows user paper registration keys and corresponding paper types.
User Paper 1/2
Plain paper
User Paper 3
Thick1
User Paper 4
Thick2
(2) Procedure
[System 2] [ ] [User Paper Settings].
3. Select the desired key from [User Paper 1] to [User Paper 4] to register user paper.
4. Select [Basic Weight] and enter a value with the [ + ]/[ - ] key.
5. Select [Heating Side] and enter a fusing temperature with the [ + ]/[ - ] key.
The setting range is -20 C to +10 C. (1 step: 5 C)
6. Select [Print Interval], and set the print interval setting.
7. Select one from the following: [Front] or [Back]. Enter an image transfer output fine adjustment value with the [ + ]/[ - ] key.
The setting rage is -7 to +8. (1 step: 1 increment or decrement)
8. Set paper of A4S or 8 1/ x 11S on the manual tray.
2
9. Select [1-side] (only front side) or [Front side] (only back side) and press the Start key.
10. Check the image of the output test pattern.
If the image is not acceptable, adjust the settings and output the test pattern again.
(a) Test Pattern in User Paper Settings

The printable test pattern for user paper settings is provided to ease determining the most appropriate 2nd image transfer output value
when customizing user paper.
This test pattern changes output voltage as shown below based on the standard voltage A (voltage determined by the image auto
transfer voltage control) on a sheet of paper.
I-222
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A +600 V
A +400 V
A +200 V
A 0V
A -200 V
A -400 V
A -600 V
11.11.15 Coverage Rate Screen

(1) Use
To set whether or not to display a coverage rate on the sales counter screen and sales counter list.
(2) Default setting

Display
(3) Setting item

Display
Do Not Display
11.11.16 JAM Code Display Setting

(1) Use
To set whether or not to add a jam code to a jam warning display on the control panel when a jam occurs.
(2) Default setting

Do Not Display
(3) Setting item

Display
Do Not Display
11.11.17 BootUp Screen

(1) Use
To customize the BootUp Screen displayed upon machine start-up.
Use this feature when changing the KonicaMinolta logo displayed on the control panel upon start-up to a client company logo or others for
clients intended use of the machine.
Register logo data in the machines flash ROM via a USB memory device.
The following are the logo data specifications that should be met.
Image format
PNG format
File extension
*. png
File name
BootupScreen.png
Image size
800 x 480 dots
Color
256 colors (Palette that the machine specifies is used.)
NOTE
When making the logo data, use the exclusive image making tool.
If a USB memory device is not connected or a nonconforming USB memory device is connected, USB NG is displayed and
logo data cannot be registered.
If the file name of logo data does not conform to the above specifications, File NG message is displayed and logo data
cannot be registered.
(2) Procedure
1. Save logo data that conforms to the above specifications in the root directory of a USB memory device.
NOTE
Be sure to save data in the root directory as the machine cannot detect data saved in other directories.
2. Connect the USB memory device to the machine USB port.
[System 2] [ ] [BootUp Screen].
4. Touch [Set].
5. Check result OK is displayed and touch [END].
NOTE
If logo data is already registered, new logo data overwrites the existing logo data.
The color of logo data may look different between the machine control panel and some PC screens. After registering logo
data, restart the machine and check the color of the logo data on the BootUp screen.
I-223
bizhub 423/363/283/223
* To delete registered data, touch [Delete] and check result OK is displayed.
11.11.18 Install Data

(1) Use
To install movie help data or OCR dictionary data into HDD.
To use when the logical format of the hard disk is performed.
To install each data into the machine HDD via USB memory device.
(2) Procedure
NOTE
To use OCR function, the optional i-Option LK-105 must be activated.
1. Save data (*.tar) into the root directory of a USB memory device.
2. Connect the USB memory device to the machine USB port.
[System 2] [ ] [Install Data].
4. Touch [Movie Data] or [OCR Dictionary].
You can select the above two types of data at a time and install them.
5. Touch [Set].
6. Press the Start key to install the data.
7. Check result OK is displayed and touch [END].
NOTE
If data is already installed, it is necessary to delete old data before installing new one.
* To delete registered data, select the data to be deleted and touch [Delete]. Check result OK is displayed.
11.11.19 Bluetooth Settings

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable the Bluetooth function.
Use this setting upon set-up of the optional local interface kit EK-605.
(2) Default setting

Invalid
(3) Setting item

Effective
Invalid
11.11.20 Auto Drum Dry

(1) Use
To set whether to enable or disable auto drum dry that makes the PC motor rotate for a specified period of time when the machine is
turned ON after it has not been used for long hours.
Use this function if the problem of uneven density occurs with the machine that has not been used for long hours.
Yes
Under the condition where 6 hours or more has passed after the PC motor stopped rotating, when the main
power switch/sub power switch are turned ON or when the machine completes warm-up in recovering from
the low power mode/ sleep mode, drum dry is performed as initial operation.
No
Auto drum dry is not performed.
(2) Default setting

No
(3) Setting item

Yes
No
I-224
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.12 Counter
Counter 1/2
Counter 2/2
The counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the technical representative to check or set as necessary.
11.12.1 Common procedure

1. Touch [Counter] to show the counter menu.
2. Select the specific counter to be displayed.
3. To clear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at once, touch [Counter Reset], select the specific
counters to be cleared, and touch [END]. Two or more counters can be selected.
(However, the [Service Call], [Service Total], and [JAM] counters cannot be selected.)
11.12.2 Life
(1) Use
To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has been used.
To clear the count of each counter.
To check how many times maintenance parts have been used.
When each of the maintenance parts is replaced.
(2) Procedure
(a) Counter clear
To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key.
If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.
For the count method of each counter, see the table Count method of each life counter.
Count method of each life counter
Counter item
Fusing Unit Rotation Time
Counting method
Counts how many hours the fusing roller (transport motor) has turned.
I-225
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Counter item
Counting method
Transfer Roller Unit
Counts how many sheets of paper have been printed. The counter increases by 1 for paper of
216 mm or less in the sub scan direction and increases by 2 for paper longer than 216 mm in
the sub scan direction.
Ozone Filter
Counts how many sheets of paper have been printed. The counter increases by 1 for paper of
216 mm or less in the sub scan direction and increases by 2 for paper longer than 216 mm in
the sub scan direction.
Paper Dust Remover
Counts how many hours the PC motor has turned.
1st.
Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 1
2nd.
3rd.
4th.
Manual Tray
Drum Unit Rotation Time
Number of sheets of paper fed from the bypass

Counts how many hours PC drum has turned.
Developing Unit Rotation Time
Counts how many hours the developing roller (PC motor) has turned.
When this counter is cleared, Developer Replace Count and Developer Use Time will be
cleared at a time automatically.
Developer Replace Count
Counts how many times developers are replaced (how many times the Developer Use Time
counter is reset).
Developer Use Time

LCT Parts
ADF Feed
Counts how many hours the PC motor has turned.

Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT
Number of sheets of original fed through the take-up section of the ADF
ADF Reverse
Number of sheets of original fed through the turnover unit of the ADF
Sorter/Finisher
Number of sheets of paper fed out of the sorter/finisher
11.12.3 Service Call Counter

(1) Use
To count and display how many times trouble has been detected on a trouble type basis.
Use this feature to check how many times trouble has occurred.
NOTE
In the service call counter list, Reboot shows how many times abort code (CFXXX) has occurred.
11.12.4 Section Service Call

(1) Use
To count and display how many times trouble has been detected during a certain period, i.e. an interval between service visits, on a
trouble type basis.
Use this feature to check how many times trouble has occurred in a certain period, i.e. an interval between service visits.
By clearing the counter at the time of visit to your customer, i.e. service visit, you can check how many times trouble has occurred since
the previous visit. To reset the counter, use [Counter Reset].
NOTE
In the zone service call list, Reboot shows how many times abort code (C-FXXX) has occurred.
11.12.5 Warning
(1) Use
To count and display how many times warning code has been detected on a warning code type basis.
To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type.
(2) Procedure
To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key.
If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.
When a warning condition occurs, an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the basic screen.
Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen.
11.12.6 Maintenance
(1) Use
To set a count value for maintenance of any given part.
When any given part is replaced.
(2) Procedure
Maint.-Set
Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-key pad.
Maint.-Count
The number of sheets that have been ejected is counted up. (1 sided: 1 count, 2 sided: 2 count)
Pressing the Clear key will clear the count.
If the count is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.
I-226
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.12.7 Service Total

(1) Total
(a) Use
To display the count value for the service total counter.
Use to check the total No. of printed pages including the ones printed by the Service Mode.
(b) Procedure
Service Total: No. of pages printed by user mode and Service Mode.
Service Total (Duplex): No. of pages printed by user mode and Service Mode in duplex.
(2) Paper Size 1/2

(a) Use
To display the count value for service total counter of each paper size.
To check the total number of printed pages including the one at Service Mode according to each paper size.
The count of Paper Size 1 and Paper Size 2 that contain the following paper sizes is provided respectively.
Paper Size 1
A3, A4, A4S, A5, A6, B4, B5, B5S, B6, Post., 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 71/4 x
101/2, 51/2 x 81/2, 4 x 6, Foolscap
Paper Size 2
8K, 16K, Others
11.12.8 Counter of Each Mode

(1) Use
To display the printed pages in the following specified modes; copy, printer, scanner, and fax. It also displays the count value of using the
specified mode.
Use to check the printed pages in the following specified modes; copy, printer, scanner, and fax, as well as No. of times each mode was
used, in order to know the using condition.
Copy/printer/scanner counter
Displays individual counts in copy, printer, and scan mode.
Fax-related counter
Displays individual counts in fax mode
Counter by finishing option
Displays individual counts on a finishing option basis.
PJ counter
Jobs that the machine has processed are divided according to the number of pages per job:
1P/J, 2P/J, ... 10P/J, or 11P/J and more.
The counter is used to understand how the machine has been used in the field.
11.12.9 Service Call History (Data)

(1) Use
To display the trouble history in chronological order.
Use to check the trouble history in chronological order.
11.12.10 ADF Paper Pages

(1) Use
To display the No. of pages fed to the automatic document feeder.
Use to check the No. of pages fed to the automatic document feeder.
11.12.11 Paper Jam History

(1) Use
To display the jam history in chronological order.
Use to check the jam history in chronological order.
NOTE
[Code] displayed on the screen of JAM history indicates JAM code.
For details of JAM code, see TROUBLESHOOTING.
11.12.12 Fax Connection Error

(1) Use
To display the No. of fax transmission errors occurred.
Use to check the No. of fax transmission errors occurred.
11.12.13 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Counter

(1) Use
To display the average number of detected stain on the ADF original glass at the predetection.
Used for checking the number of detected stain on the ADF original glass.
Pre-detect Large Size
Large-sized detected stain divided by the number of times pre-detection is practiced (average
number of detected lines) will be displayed.
Pre-detect Small Size
Small-sized detected stain divided by the number of times pre-detection is practiced (average
number of detected lines) will be displayed.
Cleaning Brush Rotation Count
Total rotation count is displayed by counting 1 per one rotation of cleaning brush.
I-227
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
To clear each counter value, select the items to be cleared, and press the Clear key. (When selecting [Pre-detect Large Size] or [Predetect Small Size] is selected, both values will be cleared.)
If the count is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.
11.12.14 Jam
(1) Use
To count and display how many times jam has been detected on a jam location basis.
11.12.15 Section JAM

To count and display how many times jam has been detected in a certain period, i.e. an interval between service visits, on a jam location
basis.
Use this feature to check how many times jam has occurred in a certain period, i.e. an interval between service visits.
By clearing the jam counter at the time of visit to your customer site, i.e. service visit, you can check how many times jam has occurred
since the previous visit.
To reset the counter, use [Counter Clear].
11.13 List Output

List Output 1/2
List Output 2/2
11.13.1 Batch List CSV Output

(1) Use
To save various lists data into a USB memory device all together with the CSV format.
Compared to output to paper, outputting various lists data to the USB memory device can save time, paper, and toner.
With the output data, analyzing the machine statistically becomes easier.
Lists data to be output are as follows:
I-228
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Target list
Data symbol
S1
Adjustments List
S2
Parameter List
S3
Service Parameter
S4
Protocol Trace List
S5
Fax Setting List
S6
Management List
A1
Paper Size/Type Counter
A2
Configuration Page
U1
PCL Font List
U2
PS Font List
U3
Meter Count
C1
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch [List Output].
Insert the USB memory device to the USB port (for user).
Touch [USB save] displayed in the Batch List CSV Output.
Then, List data are transferred to the USB memory device.
5. Confirm that OK is displayed as the result of data saving.
<File names of lists data>
Each list data has its file name in accordance with the following file name rule.
[2-digit data symbol that corresponds to each list (see the above table)] + [_(underscore)] + [13-digit serial number] + [6-digit date (year,
month, and day)] + [2-digit hour] + [2-digit minute].csv
11.13.2 Machine Management List

(1) Use
To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, total counter values, and others.
At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Procedure
Load the A4S plain paper to a paper source.
Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list.
The time-of-day and date will also be printed.
11.13.3 Adjustment List

(1) Use
To output the adjustment list for machine adjustment, process adjustment, etc. in Service Mode.
At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Procedure
11.13.4 Parameter List

(1) Use
Output a nonvolatile parameter list.
(2) Procedure
I-229
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.13.5 Service Parameter

(1) Use
Output a FAX Service Mode set value list.
(2) Procedure
I-230
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.13.6 Protocol Trace

(1) Use
Protocol Trace List (Last)
The facsimile protocol of the communication which was executed previously is output.
Protocol Trace List (Error)
Output the facsimile procedure for the last error communication.
(2) Procedure
I-231
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.13.7 Fax Setting List

(1) Use
Output a FAX user set value list. (Items vary depending on models.)
(2) Procedure
I-232
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I-233
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I-234
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.13.8 Fax Analysis List

(1) Use
Following list is output in the Fax Analysis List.
Parameter List
Protocol Trace List (Error)
Fax Setting List
Communication Management List
Service Parameter List
(2) Procedure
11.13.9 SIP Protocol Trace

Not used.
11.14 State Confirmation
I-235
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.14.1 Sensor Check

(1) Use
To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary.
Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs.
(2) Procedure
The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real-time basis.
It can be checked as long as the 5-V power line remains intact even when a door is open.
(a) Electrical components check procedure through input data check

When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper feed section of the machine, the tray 2 paper feed sensor is considered to be responsible for
it.
1. Remove the sheet of paper misfed.
2. From the sensor check list that follows, check the panel display of the tray 2 paper feed sensor. For the tray 2 paper feed sensor, you
check the data of Paper feed of Tray 2.
4. Select [State Confirmation] [Sensor Check] and then select the screen that contains Paper feed under Tray 2. For Paper feed
under Tray 2, select 1 on the left-hand side of the screen.
5. Check that the data for Paper feed under Tray 2 is 0 (sensor blocked).
6. Move the actuator to unblock the tray 2 paper feed sensor.
7. Check that the data for Paper feed under Tray 2 changes from 0 to 1 on the screen.
8. If the input data is 0, change the sensor.
(3) Sensor check screens

These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each individual machine.
(a) Sensor monitor 1
Sensor monitor 1 (Main body, PC-109/208)

Symbol
Panel display
Part/signal name
Operation characteristics/panel display

1
In position
Out of position
Paper feed tray 1

PS13
Tray 1 Set Sensor
Tray 1 detection sensor
PS15
Paper empty
Tray 1 paper empty sensor
Paper not present
Paper present
PS14
Near Empty
Tray 1 near empty sensor
Near empty
Not near empty
PS11
Paper feed
Tray 1 paper feed sensor (bizhub 423 only)
Paper present
Paper not present
PS12
Upper Limit
Tray 1 upper limit sensor
At raised position
Not at raised
position
In position
Out of position
Paper feed tray 2

PS23
Tray 2 Set Sensor
PS25
Paper empty
Paper not present
Paper present
PS24
Near Empty
Near empty
Not near empty
PS28
Vertical transport
Tray 2 vertical transport sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS21
Paper feed
Tray 2 paper feed sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS22
Upper Limit
At raised position
Not at raised
position
Paper feed tray 3
I-236
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Symbol

Panel display
Part/signal name
PS31
Tray 3 Set Sensor
PS34
Paper empty
PS32
Near Empty
PS36
Vertical transport
PS35
Paper feed
PS33
Upper Limit

1
Set
Unset
Paper not present
Paper present
Near empty
Not near empty
Paper present
Paper not present
Paper present
Paper not present
At raised position
Not at raised
position
Paper feed tray 4

PS41
Tray 4 Set Sensor
PS44
Paper empty
Set
Unset
Paper not present
Paper present
PS42
Near Empty
Near empty
Not near empty
PS46
Vertical transport
Paper present
Paper not present
PS45
Paper feed
Paper present
Paper not present
PS43
Upper Limit
At raised position
Not at raised
position
Manual
PS84
Bypass Length Sensor

1
Manual multi FD sensor /1
Paper present
Paper not present
PS85

2
Paper present
Paper not present
PS86

3
Paper present
Paper not present
PS83
Lift-Up Position Sensor
Manual lift-up position sensor
Paper feed
available position
Standby position
PS82
Paper empty
Manual paper empty sensor
Paper not present
Paper present
PS81
Paper detection
Manual paper detection sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
Paper passage transportation

PS1
Sensor in front of tim.

roller.
Registration sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS3
Paper exit
Paper exit sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
(b) Sensor monitor 2
Sensor monitor 2 (Main body, PC-409)

Symbol
Panel display
Part/signal name

1
LCT
PS54
Lift-Up Upper
Lift-up upper limit sensor
PS5D
Lift-Up Lower
Lift-down lower limit sensor
PS5C
Shift Tray Home
Shifter home position sensor
At home
Not at home
PS5B
Shift Tray Stop
Shifter stop position sensor
Return position
Not at return
position
PS51
Paper feed
Paper feed sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
I-237
Raised Position
Not raised
Lowered Position
Not lowered
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Symbol

Panel display
Part/signal name

1
Paper present
Paper not present
Paper empty sensor
Paper not present
Paper present
PS52
Vertical Transport
Vertical transport sensor
PS53
Paper empty
MTPEB
Main Tray Empty
Main tray paper empty board
Paper not present
Paper present
PS59
Shift Tray Empty
Shift tray empty sensor
Paper not present
Paper present
malfunction
operational
PS57
Lower Over Run
Lift-down over run sensor
MDCB
Manual Button Down
Manual down control board
PS5E
Division Board Position Division board position sensor
PS56
Cassette Open
Tray detection sensor
PS58
Shift Motor Pulse
PS5A
Elevator Motor Pulse
ON
OFF
At home
Not at home
Open
Closed
Shift motor sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
Elevator motor sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
Duplex
PS92
Duplex paper passage

1
Duplex unit upper transport sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS93
Duplex paper passage

2
Duplex unit lower transport sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
At home
Not at home
Toner Bottle
PS4
Home Sensor
Toner bottle home sensor
(c) Sensor monitor 3
Sensor monitor 3 (FS-527)

Symbol
Panel display
Part/signal name

1
Finisher 1
PS1
paper passage 1
Paper passage sensor/1
Paper present
Paper not present
PS2
paper passage 2
Paper present
Paper not present
PS10
punch regist
Registration sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS8
Upper path
Upper path sensor
Paper present
Paper not present

Paper not present
PS9
Lower path
lower path sensor
Paper present
PS6
Tray 2 Path
Tray 1 path sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS11
Saddle path
Saddle path sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS17
Alignment Plate home
Alignment plate home sensor
At home
Not at home
FD Stopper Home
Leading edge stopper home sensor
At home
Not at home
Paper present
Paper not present
PS20
Main finishing tray

PS16
Paper detection
Tray 2 paper detection sensor
Stapler Movement
PS18
Home Sensor 1 (Rear)
Stapler home sensor/1
At home
Not at home
PS19
Home Sensor 2 (Front)
At home
Not at home
Staple Unit
-
Staple empty
No staple
Staple
Self Prime
Staple
No staple
I-238
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Symbol
SW2

Panel display
Part/signal name
Home
At home
Not at home
At lower limit
position
Not at lower limit

position
Lock
Other than lock
At lower limit
position
Not at lower limit

position
Elevate upper/lower
limit SW
Tray 2 upper position switch
M15
Elevate motor lock

detection
Elevate motor
PS21
Elevate Minimum
Detection
Tray 2 lower position sensor
PS25
Home (Shift)
Tray 2 shift home sensor
Rear
Front
PS13
Accommodation R
Retraction Home
Accommodation roller pressure sensor
No electricity
restrictions
Electricity
restrictions
PS12
Tray 1 Exit R
Retraction Home
Exit roller pressure sensor
No electricity
restrictions
Electricity
restrictions
PS3
2-Side Path switch

Home
Duplex path switching sensor
Duplex
Not duplex
PS26
Upper Lower path

switch Home
Upper lower path switching sensor
Upper path
Lower path
PS7
Tray 2 path Change

Home
Tray 1 path switching home sensor
Tray 1
Upper path
SW3
Tray 2 lower position switch
(d) Sensor monitor 4
NOTE
Tray 1 indicates the tray 2 (lower) and Tray 2 is the tray 1 (upper) shown on the panel.
Sensor monitor 4 (FS-527/SD-509/PK-517/JS-603)
Symbol
Panel display
Part/signal name

1
Finisher 2
SW1
Front Door Open

Detection
Front door switch
Closed
Open
PS14
Upper Door Open

Detection
Upper door sensor
Closed
Open
PS5
Horizontal transport
Open
Horizontal conveyance cover sensor
Closed
Open
Top detected
Other than top

detected
Other than full
Tray 1
PS24
Upper position
Detection
Tray 2 upper position sensor
Tray 2
PS22
Full detection
Tray 1 full sensor
Full
PS300
Punch pulse
Punch pulse sensor/1
ON
OFF
PS200
Punch Cam Position
Punch cam position sensor
At home
Not at home
PS100
Punch Home
Punch home sensor/1
At home
Not at home
PS30
Punch Hole Full Detect
Punch hole full sensor
PS45
Punch Unit Set

Edge Stopper M Home
I-239
Full
Other than full
Set
Other than set
At home
Not at home
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Symbol
-

Panel display
Part/signal name
Saddle Set

1
Set
Other than set
PS42
Center Staple align M

HP (F)
Center staple alignment home sensor/F
At home
Not at home
PS41
Center Staple align M

HP (R)
Center staple alignment home sensor/R
At home
Not at home
No staple
Saddle Tray
PS43
Upper Paper Detection
Paper detection sensor/1
Staple
PS44
lower Paper Detection
Staple
No staple
Saddle Staple Home
At home
Not at home
Saddle Staple 1 Empty
Staple
No staple
Saddle Staple 2 Empty
Staple
No staple
At home
Not at home
Lock
Other than lock
PS47
Center fold plate M

Home
Center fold plate home sensor
M25
Center fold M Lock

detection
Center fold roller motor
PS48
Booklet tray empty

detection
Booklet tray near full sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS50
Booklet tray full

detection
Booklet tray full sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
Tray 3
-
Set Detection
PS36
Full detection
Tray 3 full sensor
PS35
Exit R Retraction
Tray 3 exit roller retraction sensor
Set
Other than set
Full
Other than full
No electricity
restrictions
Electricity
restrictions
(e) Sensor monitor 5
Sensor monitor 5 (FS-529)

Symbol
Panel display
Part/signal name

1
Finisher 3
PS1
paper passage 1
Paper present
Paper not present
PS10
paper passage 2
Paper present
Paper not present
PS13
Belt position
Belt position sensor
At home
Not at home
PS14
FD Stopper Detection
PS8
Alignment HP Sensor
(Front)
PS9
ON
OFF
Alignment plate home sensor/ F
At home
Not at home
Alignment HP Sensor
(Rear)
Alignment plate home sensor/ R
At home
Not at home
PS7
Empty Sensor (Tray 1)
Paper empty sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS12
Pick up Roller position
Pick up roller position sensor
No electricity
restrictions
Electricity
restrictions
At home
Not at home
Stapler Home
I-240
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Symbol

Panel display
Part/signal name

1
Self Prime
Staple
No staple
Staple empty
No staple
Staple
PS11
Staple Slide HP
Stapler home sensor
At home
Not at home
PS2
Paper Surface Detect

Sensor 1
Paper surface detect sensor/ 1
Blocked
Unblocked
PS3
Paper Surface Detect

Sensor 2
Paper surface detect sensor/ 2
Blocked
Unblocked
PS6
Tray Lower Limit

Sensor
Tray lower limit sensor
At lower limit
position
Not at lower limit

position
PS4
Tray up/down
Operation
Tray up/down operation sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
SW1
Front Cover Switch
Front door switch
Closed
Open
FM1
Fan Lock Detection
Fan motor
Lock
Other than lock
(f) Sensor monitor 6
Sensor monitor 6 (JS-505)

Symbol
Panel display
Part/signal name

1
Finisher 4
PS1
Tray 1 exit sensor
Lower tray exit sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS2
Exit (Non-sort2)
Upper tray exit sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
T1FDT B/
LED
Tray 1 full sensor
Lower tray paper full detect board/LED
Full
Other than full
T2FDT B/
LED
Full (Non-sort2)
Upper tray paper full detect board/LED
Full
Other than full
PS3
Front cover
Front door sensor
Closed
Open
PS4
path switch home
Route change home sensor
At home
Not at home
PS5
Retraction Home
Pressure/retraction home sensor
At home
Not at home
PS6
Home (Shift)
Shift home sensor
At home
Not at home
I-241
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(g) Sensor monitor 7
Sensor monitor 7
Symbol
Panel display
Part/signal name

1
Scanner home sensor
At home
Out of home
Lowered
Raised
Less than 20
degree *1
20 degree or more
*1
Scanner
PS201
Home Sensor
Org. Detecting Sensor
RS201
Original Cover
Original cover switch
PS202
20 Degree
Angle sensor
PS204

1
Original size detection 1 sensor
Original loaded,
not mounted
Original not loaded
PS205

2
Original size detection 2 sensor
Original loaded,
not mounted
Original not loaded

3
Not used

4
Not used

5
Not used

6
Not used

7
Not used

8
Not used
11.14.2 Table Number

(1) Use
To display Vg/Vdc output value.
Used for troubleshooting of image problems.
Reference values: Vdc: around 400 V, Vg: around 500 V
(2) Procedure
If the value is high, correct so that the image density becomes low.
If the value is low, correct so that the image density becomes high.
11.14.3 Level History1

(1) Use
To display TCR (T/C ratio), drum temperature and fusing temperature.
(2) Procedure
TCR-K
Shows the T/C output reading taken last.
Fusing Temperature (Main)
Shows the last temperature detected by the heating roller thermistor (center).
I-242
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Fusing Temperature (Sub)
Shows the last temperature detected by the heating roller thermistor (edge).
Drum Temperature
Shows the last temperature detected by the PC thermistor of the drum unit.
Reading taken last means

Density of toner of the latest image
When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while level history 1 is being displayed.
11.14.4 Level History 2

(1) Use
To display the transfer output (ATVC) value.
(2) Procedure
ATVC
Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value (300 to 5000 V).
11.14.5 Temp. & Humidity

(1) Use
To display the temperature and humidity of the machine.
Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Procedure
Temp-Inside
0 to 100 C in 1 C increments
Humidity
0 to 100 % in 1 % increments
Absolute Humidity
0 to 100 in 1 increments
11.14.6 CCD Check

(1) Use
To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R, G, and B.
Used for troubleshooting for the CCD sensor.
(2) Procedure
Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values.
<CCD>
CLAMP:The maximum value and the minimum value of the output value should be within the range shown below.
Acceptable clamping rage
Minimum value
Maximum value
600
1500
600
1700
600
1600
GAIN :The maximum value and the minimum value of the output value should be within the range shown below.
Acceptable gain rage
Minimum value
Maximum value
20
238
10
222
70
247
11.14.7 Memory
(1) HDD Adj.- Memory Check
(a) Use
To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through write/ read check.
If the copy image is faulty.
The following shows the memory names that correspond to each memory where check is made.
WORK0
Standard memory (DIMM0)
WORK1
Expanded memory (DIMM1)
FILE0, 1
Memory of ASIC200 installed in the MFP board
FILE2, 3
Not used.
FILE4, 5
Not used.
(b) Rough Check

A check is made for each memory to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a very limited area.
The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage. (calculated based on all checks from WORK0 to FILE1 constituting
100%)
When the rough checks of all memories are completed, results are displayed beside the memory display (OK/NG).
Rough check time: approx. 10 sec.
I-243
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Typical rough check result display: Exemplary display when all memories have been checked okay
(c) Detail Check

A write check and a read check are repeated in all areas for each memory.
NOTE
For a write check, a specific write value is set and the specific value is written in all areas of the memory and the written
data is thereafter read. This sequence is performed for all memories (from WORK0 to FILE1) (which forms one cycle of the
check sequence).
When one cycle of the check sequence is completed, the write value is changed automatically and a new check cycle is
performed. This sequence is repeated with the write value changed for each sequence.
Unlike the rough check, the detail check is not automatically terminated. The check cycle is repeated until the Stop key is
pressed.
The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage. (calculated based on all checks from WORK0 to FILE1 constituting
100%)
NOTE
The check progress status display is 100% when one cycle of the check sequence is completed.
The check progress status display is automatically reset to 0% and restarted as soon as a new check sequence is started.
The detail check of all memories (one cycle) is completed in about 3 min.
The press of the Stop key will terminate the detail check.
If a write/read error is detected, NG appears beside the memory display and the check sequence is automatically terminated.
(d) Rough check procedure

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [Memory Check].
Touch [Rough Check].
Press the Start key to start the rough check procedure.
The procedure is automatically completed (in about 10 sec.) and the results are shown on the screen.
NOTE
The rough check procedure can be interrupted by pressing the Stop key.
6. If the check results for WORK0 to 1 are NG, check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one.
If the check results for FILE0 to 1 are NG, replace the MFP board with a new one.
(e) Detail check procedure

1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [Memory Check].
Touch [Detail Check].
Press the Start key to start the detail check procedure.
The check sequence is started and the current check progress status is displayed in percentage.
5. When the check progress status display is 100% after the start of the check sequence, the first check cycle is completed (which takes
about 3 min.).
The results are displayed on the screen. (The sequence has been checked okay, if NG does not appear.)
The current check progress status display is associated with the latest check sequence.
NOTE
If a write/read error is detected, NG appears beside the memory display and the check cycle is automatically terminated.
6. Press the Stop key at any timing to terminate the detail check procedure.
7. If the check results for WORK0 to 1 are NG, check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one.
If the check results for FILE0 to 1 are NG, replace the MFP board with a new one.
(2) HDD Adj.- Memory Check - Decompression Check

(a) Use
To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly.
I-244
bizhub 423/363/283/223
If the copy image is faulty.
(b) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [Compress / Decompression Check].
Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression/decompression check sequence.
The check result will be displayed.
(3) HDD Adj.- JPEG Check

Not used.
(4) HDD Adj.- Memory Bus Check

(a) Use
To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from scanner to memory, and from memory to printer.
Bus check between scanner and memory has two steps; the scanner internal check step as internal processing and the check step
between scanner and memory. If either of the two steps is NG, NG1 or NG2 is displayed respectively.
If the print image is faulty.
(b) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [Memory Bus Check].
Select either [Scanner Memory], [Memory PRT], or both.
Pressing the Start key will start the memory bus check and be terminated automatically.
The check result will be displayed, [OK] or [NG].
(5) HDD Adj.- DSC Bus Check

(a) Use
To check the connection between the DSC board and the scanner section when the optional security kit SC-507 is installed.
When an error is detected after checking, NG1 or NG2 is displayed depending on the location of the board where the defect is found.
(b) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [DSC Bus Check].
Touch [Scanner DSC].
Pressing the Start key will start the DSC bus check and be terminated automatically.
The check result will be displayed.
(6) HDD Adj.- HDD R/W Check

(a) Use
To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly, and if read/write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed.
When the hard disk is mounted.
(b) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [HDD R/ W Check].
Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R/W check sequence and be terminated automatically.
(7) HDD Adj.- SSD R/W Check

(a) Use
To check to see if the SSD is connected properly, and if read/write operation of the SSD is correctly performed.
(b) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [SSD R/ W Check].
Pressing the Start key will start the SSD R/W check sequence and be terminated automatically.
(8) HDD Adj.- HDD Format

(a) Use
To format the hard disk.
The function proceeds in the order of physical format to logical format.
I-245
bizhub 423/363/283/223
If the hard disk is yet to be formatted, the malfunction code C-D010 will appear. Ignore this code and continue with the formatting
procedure.
When the hard disk is mounted.
When the hard disk is to be initialized. (Physical format to logical format)
NOTE
As formatting of HDD deletes movie data and OCR dictionary data, after formatting HDD, you need to reinstall these data as
necessary.
(b) Procedure (Physical Format)

2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [HDD Format].
3. Touch [Physical Format].
4. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
5. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
NOTE
If [HDD Encryption Setting] is not set to ON, when the physical format is completed and the main power switch is turned
OFF/ON, a message that prompts you to set an encrypting word is displayed.
If you perform [HDD Encryption Setting], after setting an encrypting word, perform the logical format.
(c) Procedure (Logical Format (only when initial is set up))

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [HDD Format].
Touch [Logical Format].
Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
(9) HDD Adj.- SSD Format

(a) Use
To format the SSD.
The function proceeds in the order of physical format to logical format.
When the hard disk is to be initialized. (Physical format to logical format)
(b) Procedure (Physical Format)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [SSD Format].
Touch [Physical Format].
Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
(c) Procedure (Logical Format (only when initial is set up))

2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [SSD Format].
3. Touch [Logical Format].
4. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
5. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
NOTE
Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it.
(10) HDD Adj.- SSD -> HDD Data Copy

Making this setting is necessary only on the machine models and in the marketing areas where the hard disk is set as an option. If the
hard disk is standard on the machine or in the marketing area, this setting must not be used.
(a) Use
To copy the machine data stored in SSD to the hard disk.
To restore the authentication related data that is backed up to NVRAM when the setting of HDD installation is changed from [Not
Installed] to [Installed].
Use this function when installing the optional hard disk HD-516.
The data to be copied to the hard disk is as follows:
User management data/account track data/authentication device management data/Address Book/Group data/Program data/created
Personal User Box/setting values of System User Box
(b) Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [SSD -> HDD Data Copy].
3. Press the Start key to start the copying sequence.
I-246
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
If the hard disk has data, the data is overwritten and deleted.
4. When copying data is completed, the results appear on the screen.
(11) HDD State

(a) Use
To display the condition and amount of the memory and hard disk.
NOTE
If the hard disk is not installed, the capacity of SSD is displayed.
(b) Procedure
When the encryption board is mounted, the machine automatically recognizes it and displays [Set].
11.14.8 Adjustment Data List

(1) Use
To display the adjustment and setting value set in the main body.
Use to check the adjustment and setting value set in the main body.
11.15 Test Mode
To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern. It also tests the printing operation in
Paper Passage Test, as well as the fax transmission.
The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, LCT and tray 1 for paper of the maximum size for
printing.
11.15.1 Procedure for test pattern output

1. Touch [Test Mode] to display the test mode menu.
2. Touch the desired test pattern key.
3. Set up the desired functions and press the Start key.
11.15.2 Gradation Pattern

(1) Use
To produce a gradation pattern.
Used for checking gradation reproducibility.
(a) Test pattern
e.g.
SINGLE
HYPER
256 gradations
Gradation
I-247
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Black (1PC)
(2) Procedure
# of Print (1 to 999)
Select SINGLE (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).
Select FEET or HYPER.
Select 1-Sided, 2-Side1 or 2-Side2.
2-Side1: The same pattern is printed on both front and back sides.
2-Side2: The front side is blank and the pattern is printed on the back side.
Select Gradation, Resolution or Error diffusion if HYPER has been selected.
Select 12 Gradations, 24 Gradations or 256 Gradations.
11.15.3 Halftone Pattern

(1) Use
To produce a solid halftone pattern.
Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise.
(a) Test pattern
e.g.
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
Black (1PC)
Density: 255
(2) Procedure
Select 1-Sided, 2-Side1 or 2-Side2.
Select a printable area from [Full Bleed] or [Front Half].
NOTE
[Front Half] is selectable only for one-side printing.
Type the density level (0 to 255).
11.15.4 Lattice Pattern

(1) Use
To produce a lattice pattern.
Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density.
A reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a solid background.
(a) Test pattern
e.g.
SINGLE
FEET
Black (1PC)
CD Width: 5
FD Width: 5
Density: 255
Normal
I-248
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Select1-Sided, 2-Side1 or 2-Side2.
Select Gradation or Resolution. (Only select HYPER)
Enter CD width and FD width (0 to 191 dots).
Type the density level (0 to 255).
Select Normal or Reverse.
11.15.5 Paper Passage Test

(1) Use
To test the printing operation in running mode.
Use to check the printing operation in running mode from each paper source.
If Yes is selected in [Pattern Printing], paper is conveyed with pattern printed.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Touch these keys in this order: [Test Mode] [Running Mode].
Touch [Pattern Printing] and select [Yes] or [No].
Touch [Select Tray] and select the paper feed tray to be tested.
When feeding paper from the manual bypass tray, touch [Paper Size]/[Paper Kind] and select paper size and type.
Press the Start key to start the paper passage test.
Pressing the Stop key will stop operation.
11.15.6 Fax Test-Signal Send Test

(1) Use
Image information signals, control signals and DTMF can be individually output.
Signal sounds are monitored by the monitor speaker.
When the Fax Multi Line kit is installed, Line 2 can be specified.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Touch [Service Mode] [Test Mode] [FAX Test], in that order.

Select the [Line1] or [Line2], and touch the [Signal Send Test].
Select a test item.
Select the parameter you would like to test.
Press the [Start] key.
(In order to move to another test, select the next test item after pressing the [Stop] key.)
Signal is output from pressing [Start] to pressing [Stop].
(3) V34 Main CH

(a) Default setting
33,600
(b) Setting range

2,400 to 33,600 (step: 2,400)
(4) V34 Control CH

(a) Default setting
CTL CH
(b) Setting item
CTL CH
INFOc
INFOa
ToneA
ToneB
(5) V8
(a) Default setting
CM
(b) Setting item

CM
JM
I-249
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(6) V17
(a) Default setting
14,400bps
(b) Setting item
14,400bps
12,000bps
9,600bps
7,200bps
(7) V29
(a) Default setting
9,600bps
(b) Setting item

9,600bps
7,200bps
(8) V27ter
(a) Default setting
4,800bps
(b) Setting item

4,800bps
2,400bps
(9) PB
(a) Default setting
0
(b) Setting item

0 to 9, *, #, A, B, C, D
(10) DP
(a) Default setting
0
(b) Setting range

0 to 9
(11) Special Tone

(a) Default setting
1,100Hz
(b) Setting item
1,100Hz
1,300Hz
1,650Hz
2,100Hz
(12) Optional Tone

(a) Default setting
200Hz
(b) Setting range

200 to 4,000 (step: 100)
(13) PB Tone (High)

(a) Default setting
1,209Hz
(b) Setting item

1,209Hz
1,336Hz
1,477Hz
I-250
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1,633Hz
(14) PB Tone (Low)

(a) Default setting
697Hz
(b) Setting item

697Hz
770Hz
852Hz
941Hz
NOTE
To check Line 1, [Administrator Settings] [Fax Setting] [Line Parameter Setting] [Line Monitor Sound] should be set to
ON.
To check Line 2, [Administrator Settings] [Fax Setting] [Multi Line Settings] [Line Parameter Setting] [Line Monitor
Sound] should be set to ON.
11.15.7 Fax Test-Signal Receive Test

(1) Use
Check a signaling tone by connecting the machine to the line to output a test signal of the fax board.
Signal sounds are monitored by the monitor speaker.
When the Fax Multi Line kit is installed, Line 2 can be specified.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the [Line1] or [Line2], and touch the [Signal Receive Test].
Select a test item.
Select the parameter you would like to test.
Signal is output from pressing [Start] to pressing [Stop].
The status of testing or results of tests are shown in the title line as follows
RCV
Waiting signals
OK/NG
Results of signal reception
(3) V17
(a) Default setting
14,400bps
(b) Setting item
14,400bps
12,000bps
9,600bps
7,200bps
(4) V29
(a) Default setting
9,600bps
(b) Setting item

9,600bps
7,200bps
(5) V27ter
(a) Default setting
4,800bps
(b) Setting item

4,800bps
2,400bps
(6) PB
(a) Default setting
0
(b) Setting item

0 to 9, *, #, A, B, C, D
I-251
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(7) Special Tone

(a) Default setting
1,100Hz
(b) Setting item

1,100Hz
1,300Hz
2,100Hz
NOTE
To check Line 1, [Administrator Settings] [Fax Setting] [Line Parameter Setting] [Line Monitor Sound] should be set to
ON.
To check Line 2, [Administrator Settings] [Fax Setting] [Multi Line Settings] [Line Parameter Setting] [Line Monitor
Sound] should be set to ON.
11.15.8 Fax Test-NCU TEST

(1) Use
To check the operation of NCU.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the [Line1] or [Line2], and touch the [NCU TEST].
Select a test item.
NOTE
When CML / CTL / TEL relay test is selected and the [Start] is pressed, ON is displayed in the parameter and relay is turned to
ON. When [Stop] is pressed, relay is turned OFF.
When the DC-LOOP detection test is selected and [Start] is pressed, DT=0001 is shown in the title row in case of detecting the
DC-LOOP. If not detected, DT=0000 is displayed.
When the speaker test is selected and [Start] is pressed, ON is displayed in the parameter and the speaker is turned ON. When
[Stop] is pressed, the speaker is turned OFF.
Contents of test
Device to be tested
CML Relay
IC201, IC202
CTL Relay
RL201
TEL Relay
RL501
DC-LOOP Detect
Speaker
Outside Ring Send
Audio Response Send
* RL501 mounts only the Japanese.
11.16 ADF
11.16.1 Original Stop Position

(1) Use
To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF modes.
I-252
bizhub 423/363/283/223
When the result is Unable in the automatic adjustment of the original stop position.
(2) Procedure
(a) Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side / Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side
NOTE
Before performing this adjustment, the feed zoom adjustment needs to be complete.
B
Specifications
0 2.0 mm
Setting range
-4.0 mm to +4.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
NOTE
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Check that the difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range.
Touch [ADF] [Original Stop Position].
Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side] or [Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side].
Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.)
If the difference in the widths of B is greater than the specifications, enter the + value.
If the difference in the widths of B is smaller than the specifications, enter the - value.
Touch [END].
Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of B falls within the specified range.
(b) Main Scanning (Front) / Main Scanning (Back)
The difference in the widths of A between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications
0 2.0 mm
Setting range
-3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
NOTE
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Check that the difference in the widths of A between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range.
Touch [ADF] [Original Stop Position].
Touch [Main Scanning (Front)] or [Main Scanning (Back)].
Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.)
If the difference in the widths of A is greater than the specifications, enter the + value
If the difference in the widths of A is smaller than the specifications, enter the - value.
Touch [END].
Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of A falls within the specified range.
11.16.2 Registration Loop Adj.

(1) Use
To adjust the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the registration rollers.
When an original misfeed or skew occurs.
I-253
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch [ADF] [Registration Loop Adj].
Select either [1-Side] or [Second Side] for the adjustment.
Press the clear key and change the setting value using the 10-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.)
The amount of loop increases by the amount of positive (+) value and decreases by the amount of negative (-) value.
5. Touch [END].
6. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
7. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
(3) Default setting

0
(4) Setting range

-5 mm to + 5 mm (in 1-mm increments)
11.16.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment

(1) Use
To automatically adjust the read position for the Sub Scanning Direction.
To check skew feed.
(2) Procedure
(a) Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side
2. Touch [ADF] [Auto Stop Position Adjustment].
3. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side].
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
7. Touch [END].
NOTE
(b) Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side

3. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side].
4. Place the chart in the document feed tray (Set the chart with its blank side facing upward).
7. Touch [END].
NOTE
(c) Main Scanning (Front)

3. Touch [Main Scanning (Front)].
7. Touch [END].
NOTE
(d) Main Scanning (Back)

1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch [ADF] [Auto Stop Position Adjustment].
Touch [Main Scanning (Back)].
Place the chart in the document feed tray (Set the chart with its blank side facing upward.).
I-254
bizhub 423/363/283/223

7. Touch [END].
NOTE
11.16.4 Paper Passage

(1) Use
To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes.
Used for checking the document path for any abnormal condition when a document misfeed occurs.
(2) Procedure
2. Touch [ADF] [Paper Passage].
3. Select a paper passage mode to be tested from [1-Sided No Detect], [1-Sided Mixed Org.], [2-Sided], or [AMS Mixed Org.].
4. Set the original in the feed tray.
5. The Start key changes from red to blue.
6. Press the Start key. The operation starts.
NOTE
After starting the operation by pressing the Start key, if the Start key is pressed during the operation, the operation will be
suspended. Then, if the Start key is pressed again during the suspension, the operation will be resumed.
If the Stop key is pressed during the test operation, the test will be forced to end.
If there is no Original set in the feed Tray, the Start key will not work.
All Originals set in the feed Tray are passed through. Upon the completion of all Originals passed through, the Paper Through
Test ends.
11.16.5 Sensor Check

(1) Use
To check sensors on the paper path.
When a document misfeed occurs.
(2) Procedure
2. Touch [ADF] [Sensor Check].
3. Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like, and check the screen display.
(Paper detected: 1, No paper detected: 0)
(3) Sensor check screen

This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
(4) Sensor check list

Symbol
Panel display
Part/signal name
PS14
Feed Open&Close
Upper door sensor
PS3
Registration Sensor
Document registration sensor
I-255

1
Open
Close
Paper present
(Blocked)
Paper not present

(Unblocked)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Symbol
Panel display

Part/signal name

1
PS2
After Separate
Separation roller sensor
Paper present
(Unblocked)
Paper not present

(Blocked)
PS5
Exit Sensor
Document exit sensor
Paper present
(Unblocked)
Paper not present

(Blocked)
PS12
Read Roller
Reading roller release position sensor
Pressure (Blocked)
Retraction
(Unblocked)
RS201
DF Open
Original cover switch (main body)
PS4
Before Read
Reading roller sensor
Open
Close
Paper present
(Blocked)
Paper not present

(Unblocked)
VR1
Original Width Sensor
Document CD size sensor
PS6
Length Sensor1
Document FD size sensor/1
Paper present
PS7
Length Sensor2
Blocked
Unblocked
PS8
Length Sensor3
Paper present
Paper not present
PS13
Glass Cleaning home

position
Glass cleaning roller home sensor
At home
Not at home
PS1
Original Detection Sensor
Document set sensor
Paper present
Paper not present
PS9
Mixed Original 1
Mixed Original sensor/1
Paper present
Paper not present
PS10
Mixed Original 2
Paper present
Paper not present
PS11
Mixed Original 3
Paper present
Paper not present
FM1
Fan Lock Detection
DF cooling fan motor
Lock detected
Normal status
Analog value
Paper not present
11.16.6 Original Tray Width

(1) Use
NOTE
To set the values of maximum (A3 position) and minimum (B6 position) widths on the document width detection variable
resistor.
When an original misfeed occurs.
When an original size detection error occurs.
When the document width detection variable resistor has been replaced.
When the DF control board has been replaced.
(2) Procedure
2. Touch [ADF] [Original Tray Width].
[1]
3. Widen the width across the edge guides [1] by sliding them to the
A3 position.
4. Touch [Max. Width].

6. OK is displayed when the adjustment has been completed.
[1]
7. Narrow the width across the edge guides [1] by sliding them to the
B6 position.
8. Touch [Min. Width].

10. OK is displayed when the adjustment has been completed.
I-256
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11. Touch [END].

NOTE
If the result is NG:
Possible causes includes failure of the document width detection variable resistor, wrong wiring to the volume and failure of the
DFCB.
11.16.7 Read Pos Adj

(1) Use
To adjust the original read position.
When the first/second carriage, the scanner wire, the scanner assy, the DF original glass, and/or the have been replaced.
(2) Procedure
(a) Auto Adjust
2. Touch [ADF] [Read Pos Adj].
3. Touch [Auto Adjust].
4. Open the ADF.
5. Place the ADF reading chart [1] so that a triangular mark may
become the original glass side (downward) and the pointed tip of
the triangle points toward the black sheet on the left side.
NOTE
Be sure that the ADF reading chart is in position.
Keep the automatic document feeder open while making
the adjustment.
[1]
7. Make sure that the result is OK.

8. Touch [END].
NOTE
Check that the chart is in the correct place.
Make the manual adjustment on the [Read Pos Adj] screen.
(b) Read Pos Adj

B
Specifications
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0 1.0 mm
Setting range
-89 mm to +89 mm (1 step: 1 mm)
Touch [ADF] [Read Pos Adj].
Touch [Read Pos Adj].
If the difference in the widths of B is greater than the specifications, enter the - value.
If the difference in the widths of B is smaller than the specifications, enter the + value.
Touch [END].
I-257
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of B falls within the specified range.
11.16.8 Feed Zoom

(1) Use
To adjust the feed zoom of ADF in the feeding direction.
(2) Procedure
(a) Auto Adjust
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Touch [ADF] [Feed Zoom].
Touch [Auto Adjust].
Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
Touch [END].
(b) Orig. Feed Zoom Ad
c
The difference in the widths of C between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
0 1.0 mm
Setting range
-2.00% to +2.00% (1 step: 0.1%)
Touch [ADF] [Feed Zoom].
Touch [Orig. Feed Zoom Ad].
Enter the value using the [-] / [+] keys.
If the difference in the widths of C is greater than the specifications, enter the - value.
If the difference in the widths of C is smaller than the specifications, enter the + value.
Touch [END].
Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of C falls within the specified range.
11.16.9 Scanning Light Adjustment

(1) Use
To adjust the scanning light of ADF.
Used for adjusting the difference in the scanning lights between scanning from the original glass and scanning from the ADF original
glass.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch [ADF] [Scanning Light Adjustment].
Select a color by pressing [Red], [Green], or [Blue].
Press the value using the [+] / [-] key.
NOTE
It is recommended that the scanning light adjustment should be made by the same steps for all the three colors of red,
green, and blue.
5. Touch [END].
(3) Setting range

-4 to + 4 (1 step)
11.16.10 Mixed original Size adjustment

(1) Use
To adjust paper length detection accuracy used during paper feed in ADF mixed original mode.
To set the threshold for each size detection based on the length detected when feeding standard sizes (large and small sizes).
I-258
bizhub 423/363/283/223
When the DF control board has been replaced.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Touch [ADF] [Mixed original Size adjustment].
Touch [END].
11.16.11 FD-Mag. Adj. (B)

(1) Use
To adjust the feed zoom in the back side feeding direction on the ADF.
(2) Procedure
(a) Auto Adjust
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Touch [ADF] [FD-Mag. Adj. (B)].
Touch [Auto Adjust].
Place the chart in the document feed tray (Set the chart with its blank side facing upward).
Touch [END].
(b) Orig. Feed Zoom Ad
The difference in the widths of D between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
0 1.0 mm
Setting range
-2.00% to +2.00% (1 step: 0.1%)
Place the chart in the document feed tray (Set the chart with its blank side facing upward).
D width on the chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of D width satisfies the
Touch [ADF] [FD-Mag. Adj. (B)].
Touch [Orig. Feed Zoom Ad].
Enter the value using the [-] / [+] keys.
If the difference in the widths of D is greater than the specifications, enter the - value.
If the difference in the widths of D is smaller than the specifications, enter the + value.
Touch [END].
Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of D falls within the specified range.
I-259
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.17 FAX setting (Line1)
The line 1/2 can be specified. When the Line 2 is specified, only the Modem/NCU, Communication, Network and Initialization items are
displayed.
11.17.1 Modem/NCU
(1) V34:1/2 : RX Max. Bit Speed
(a) Use
To set the max. bit speed for reception in V.34.
(b) Default setting

33600 bps
(c) Setting range

2400 to 33600 bps (step: 2400 bps)
(2) V34:1/2 : TX Max. Bit Speed

(a) Use
To set the max. bit speed for transmission in V.34.
(b) Default setting

33600 bps
(c) Setting range

2400 to 33600 bps (step: 2400 bps)
(3) V34:1/2 : Control CH Speed

(a) Use
A bit speed of the control channel.
The negotiation of 2400/1200 is performed in the V.34 start-up procedure.
(b) Default setting

1200 bps
(c) Setting item

1200 bps
2400 bps
(4) V34:1/2 : Max. SYMB Speed

(a) Use
Maximum modulation speed (baud rate) of V.34
3429 33.6 k to 4.8 k
3200 31.2 k to 2.4 k
3000 28.8 k to 2.4 k
2800
2400
Effective both at the time of sending and receiving.
I-260
bizhub 423/363/283/223
The upper limit value of V.34 maximum bit speed is determined.

Normally you do not need to change the value. In case that a V.34 error frequently occurs, you can attempt to set up SYMB3000 and
decrease the symbol rate, for instance.
(b) Default setting

3429 SYMB
(c) Setting item
2400 SYMB
2800 SYMB
3000 SYMB
3200 SYMB
3429 SYMB
(5) V34:2/2 : SYMB Select Criterion (S/N)

(a) Use
To set the SYMB Select Criterion (S/N).
S/N is measured by sending and receiving line conditioning signal (L1/L2) in the Phase 2. Its result determines the SYMB speed
(modulation speed).
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

-6 to 6 dB (step: 1 dB)
* It becomes easy to select a high SYMB by using - direction.
(6) V34:2/2 : SYMB Select Criterion (Distortion)

(a) Use
To set the SYMB Select Criterion (Distortion).
(modulation speed).
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

* It becomes easy to select a high SYMB by using + direction.
(7) V34:2/2 : Main CH Speed Selection Standard

(a) Use
The bit speeds of V.34 are determined by the Phase 3 (training).
This functional parameter sets thresholds for the bit speed determination.
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

* It becomes easy to select a high speed by using - direction.
(8) V17 Send Max Speed: TX Max. Speed

(a) Use
To set the max. speed for transmission.
(b) Default setting

V17-14400bps
(c) Setting item
V17-14400bps
V17-12000bps
V17-9600bps
V17-7200bps
V29-9600bps
V29-7200bps
V27-4200bps
I-261
bizhub 423/363/283/223
V27-2400bps
(9) V17 Send Max Speed: RX Max. Speed

(a) Use
To set the max. speed for reception.
(b) Default setting

V17-14400bps
(c) Setting item

V17-14400bps
V29-9600bps
V27-4800bps
(10) TxATT: PIX TxATT

(a) Use
To set the output level of PIX TxATT.
Directly sets modem. There are no external attenuator.
(b) Procedure
The setting value are different depending on the country.
(11) TxATT: TONE/Procedure Signal TxATT

(a) Use
To set the output level of TONE/Procedure Signal TxATT.
(b) Procedure
(12) TxATT: CED/ANSam TxATT

(a) Use
To set the output level of CED/ANSam TxATT.
(b) Procedure
(13) TxATT: DTMF TxATT

(a) Use
To set reception signal sensitivity level.
SED is not used.
(b) Default setting

-48 dBm
(c) Setting item

-48 to -33 dBm (step: 5 dBm)
(14) Level: CD/SED ON Level

(a) Use
SED is not used.
(b) Default setting

-48 dBm
(c) Setting item

(15) Level: DTMF H-L Level Difference

(a) Use
To set DTMF H-L level difference.
I-262
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

2.0 dB
(c) Setting range

1.0 to 4.0 dB (step: 0.5 dB)
(16) Cable EQL: TX

(a) Use
Frequency response of the cable attenuation equalizer.
Frequency response of the cable amplitude equalizer
8
6
Gain (dB)
4
2
0 dB
4 dB
8 dB
12 dB
0
-2
-4
-6
-8
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Frequency (Hz)
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

0 to 12 dB (step: 4 dB)
(17) Cable EQL: RX

(a) Use
8
6
Gain (dB)
4
2
0 dB
4 dB
8 dB
12 dB
0
-2
-4
-6
-8
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Frequency (Hz)
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

11.17.2 Network
(1) Network Setting 1: Receive Signal Detection Mode
(a) Use
To set whether to detect the receive signal by the number of times or by time.
Sets to Time when ringer can not be detected by the number.
(b) Default setting

No. of Times
(c) Setting item

No. of Times
Time
I-263
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Network Setting 1: BUSY TONE Detection

(a) Use
To set whether to use the Busy Tone detection or not.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(3) Network Setting 1: No. of Times of Busy Tone Detection

(a) Use
To set the number of times of Busy Tone detection.
Toot
Toot
Toot
Toot
When the number of tones is

set to three, judged to be busy
here.
(b) Default setting

0
(c) Setting range

0 to 15 count (step: 1)
(4) Network Setting 2: 1300 Hz Detection

(a) Use
To set whether to use the 1300 Hz detection or not.
Set this function to ON if the facsimile network (F-net) is to be used.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(5) Network Setting 2: Dial Tone Detection

(a) Use
To set whether to use the Dial Tone detection or not.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(6) Network Setting 2: DC-LOOP Check

(a) Use
Checks the DC loop current before dialing.
When the current is zero, an error occurs. (T.80)
You can change the setting to be compliant to standards in other countries. In Japan, set this parameter to OFF.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(7) Network Setting 2: min. RING OFF Time

(a) Use
Minimum time to recognize ringer interval.
I-264
bizhub 423/363/283/223
For country spec.
a
a
To avoid judging a as a ring-off time.
Ring-off time
(b) Default setting

0 ms
(c) Setting range

0 to 1000 ms (step: 100 ms)
(8) Network Setting 2: Response Waiting Time

(a) Use
To set the response waiting time.
(b) Default setting

55 s
(c) Setting range

35 to 115 sec (step: 5 s)
(9) Network Setting 2: Pause Time

(a) Use
The pause time for one pause key (pause between digits)
(b) Default setting

1s
(c) Setting range

11.17.3 System
(1) Display Setting: Closed area Rx
(a) Use
To set whether or not to use the menu display for closed reception by using F-code for junk fax messages.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Display Setting: Re-Transmission

(a) Use
To set whether to use the re-transmission function or not.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(3) Display Setting: Compulsory Memory RX

(a) Use
To set whether to use the compulsory memory reception function or not.
(b) Default setting

ON
I-265
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
When turned ON, the function permits selection of ON or OFF setting for the compulsory memory reception function that
allows a document when received not to be printed automatically and, instead, to be printed through manual operation.
(4) Display Setting: Reject Calls

(a) Use
To set whether to use the reject calls function or not.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
NOTE
Menu display for the Reject Calls function. When turned ON, the function displays the function that allows the user to set a
remote machine to be rejected as a reject call number.
(5) Display Setting: Relay

(a) Use
To set whether to use the relay function or not.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(6) Scan Setting: Frame Erasure HP

(a) Use
To set the frame erasure size during reading.
The four edges of the original are erased by the same width.
Erases the outer lines to prevent black lines from appearing. Effective in the book transmission.
(b) Default setting

10 mm
(c) Setting item

5 mm
10 mm
15 mm
(7) System Function: Fax Board Watchdog

(a) Use
To set whether to enable watchdog by the fax board CPU or not.
ON
Reset when hung up.
OFF
Keeps being hung up.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
I-266
bizhub 423/363/283/223
OFF
(8) System Function: Fax BOOT Rewrite on ISW

(a) Use
Required when a BOOT BLOCK program is upgraded or a hardware is changed.
Flash memory
Application
program area
BOOT BLOCK
ISW program
System initialization
program
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(9) System Function: Error Code Display Time

(a) Use
To set the communication error code display time.
(b) Default setting

20 s
(c) Setting item

10 to 250 s
HOLD
(10) Communication Setting: Auto Rotation Send (LT)

(a) Use
To set whether to rotate the Letter size original automatically or not for transmission.
ON
Transmits in the A4 width.
OFF
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(11) Communication Setting: Auto Rotation Send (A4T)

(a) Use
To set whether to rotate the A4T size original automatically or not for transmission.
ON
OFF
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(12) Communication Setting: Error Page Resending

(a) Use
To set whether to retransmit, after a communication error occurs, the document starting with the error page or all pages.
All Page
Retransmit the document all pages
Error Page
Retransmit the document starting with the error page
I-267
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

Error Page
(c) Setting item

All Page
Error Page
(13) Communication Setting: Number of Redials (Error Page)

(a) Use
To set the number of redials for the error page.
Counted as a busy redial when the error page redial is busy.
(b) Default setting

The default setting is different depending on the country.
(c) Setting range

0 to 7 (step: 1)
11.17.4 Fax File Format

The following data can be initialized.
All of the scan/fax documents stored in the box are erased.
All of the boxes produced automatically by the F code are erased.
Supplement: For the formats of the Fax Function Parameter and the Communication Journal, see I.11.18.4 Initialization
(1) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Display the [Service Mode] screen.

Touch the [FAX] key.
Touch the [Fax File Format] key.
Press [START] key.
The Fax File Format is executed.
11.17.5 Communication
(1) Protocol: V8 / V34 Protocol
(a) Use
To set whether to use the V.8/V.34 protocol or not.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Protocol: V17 EP TONE (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
Whether the EP tone (Echo Protect: 2100Hz) is added to the top of the training signal.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(3) Protocol: V29 EP TONE (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
Whether the EP tone (Echo Protect: 2100Hz) is added to the top of the training signal.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-268
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(4) Protocol: V17 Selection Mode - (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
V.34 is not used when a dash (-) is added at the top of dial number.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(5) Protocol: ANSam Send Time (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
To set the transmission time for the V.8 protocol signal ANSam.
(b) Default setting

4.0 s
(c) Setting range

1.0 to 5.5 s (step: 0.5 s)
(6) Intl Comm. Function: Foreign Communication Function

(a) Use
To set whether or not to use the mode that employs the number of DIS waiting times.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(7) Intl Comm. Function: No. of DIS Waiting Times at Foreign Communication
(a) Use
To set the number of DIS waiting times.
(b) Default setting

1
(c) Setting item

1
2
(8) Intl Comm. Function: V34 Speed

(a) Use
To set the V.34 international communication mode speed.
(b) Default setting

28800 bps
(c) Setting range

16800 to 33600 bps (step: 2400 bps)

(a) Use
(b) Default setting

7200 bps
(c) Setting range

7200 to 14400 bps (step: 2400 bps)
I-269
bizhub 423/363/283/223

(a) Use
(b) Default setting

4800 bps
(c) Setting range

2400 to 9600 bps (step: 2400 bps)
(11) TIMER 1: T1
(a) Use
T1 timer (T.30 standard)
Calling
Response waiting timer (55sec)
Designate by the response waiting timer
Called
Starts after DIS is output. The waiting time until DCS is received.
Calling
Starts after dialing. Until CED is received.
(b) Default setting

35 s
(c) Setting range

30 to 90 s (step: 5 s)
(12) TIMER 1: DCS-TCF DELAY (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
To set the delay time between DCS and TCF.
(b) Default setting

80 ms
(c) Setting range

50 to 150 ms (step: 10 ms)
(13) TIMER 1: CED-DIS DELAY (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
To set the delay time between CED and DIS.
(b) Default setting

80 ms
(c) Setting range

50 to 150 ms (step: 10 ms)
(14) TIMER 1: PIX-PMC DELAY (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
To set the delay time between PIX and PMC.
(b) Default setting

80 ms
(c) Setting range

50 to 150 ms (step: 10 ms)
(15) TIMER 2: EOL-EOL (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
To set the transmission time between EOLs.
EOL
1 line data
EOL
1 line data
(b) Default setting

13.0 s
I-270
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting range

4.0 to 25.5 s (step: 0.5 s)
(16) TIMER 2: CFR-PIXWAIT (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
Sets the waiting time from CFR is sent to the image signals are received.
Radio fax on boats occasionally requires more than 6 sec.
(b) Default setting

6.0 s
(c) Setting range

6.0 to 25.5 s (step: 0.5 s)
(17) TIMER 2: EOM-PIXWAIT (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
Waiting time to receive PIX before sending DIS when EOM is used.
Some fax machines sends PIX without returning to Phase B in spite of EDM.
(b) Default setting

5.5 s
(c) Setting range

5.5 to 25.5 s (step: 0.5 s)
(18) TIMER 2: JM WAIT (Line 1 only)

(a) Use
Time to continue outputting CM until receiving JM.
(b) Default setting

9.0 s
(c) Setting range

6.0 to 25.5 s (step: 0.5 s)
(19) Others: ECM Function

(a) Use
Set whether or not to cancel reception ECM (error correction mode).
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(20) Others: Frame Size at ECM TX

(a) Use
To set the frame size at ECM transmission.
(b) Default setting

256
(c) Setting item

64
256
(21) Others: Coding Ability

(a) Use
To set the coding ability.
Effective to both sending and reception.
(b) Default setting

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
I-271
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item
MH
MH/MR
MH/MR/MMR
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
11.17.6 List Output

(1) Report Addition Information
(a) Use
To set whether or not to add the diagnosis code or dial number to the communication journal.
Diagnosis Code
The diagnosis code is printed on the communication journal.
Dial Number
The dial number is printed on the communication journal.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

Diagnosis Code
Dial Number
OFF
(2) TX Result Report

(a) Use
To set whether or not to add image to the transmission result report.
Even if set to "With image" images are not attached at the time of the quick memory transmission and the manual transmission.
(b) Default setting

Without image
(c) Setting item

With image
Without image
(3) Protocol Trace Auto Output

(a) Use
To set the timing for the protocol trace auto output.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

Always
Error
OFF
11.17.7 Function Parameter

(1) Use
Function parameters can be set through addressing.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch the [Function Parameter] key.
Select the address and then, enter the address using [A] to [F] key or keypad.
or
is pushed.
* A Cursor is movable if
5. Next, select the data and enter a value using binary numbers with keypad.
6. When the address and the value are correct, touch the [Apply] key.
7. After the settings have been completed, touch the [END] key.
(3) Address parameter list

NOTE
When changing a value in this address parameter list, be sure to comply with the phone line standards of other countries.
Depending on values that have been changed, compliance with the phone line standards of other countries may not be
obtained.
I-272
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(a) Address: 0b0000: Redial interval

Settin
g
Utility Mode (0-3)
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
Redial interval (min, HEX, 0 - 15)
2
1
0
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x03
0x03
0x03
X0
00
(b) Address: 0b0001: No. of busy redials

Setting
Utility Mode (0-2)
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x03
0x01
0x03
X0
01
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
No. of busy redials (No, HEX, 0 - 15)
2
1
0
(c) Address: 0b0002: No. of error redials

Setting
Utility Mode Special Setting (0-2)
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x03
0x01
0x03
X0
02
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
No. of error redials (No, HEX, 0 - 15)
2
1
0
(d) Address: 0b0003: Setting related to FAX memory

Setting
Utility Mode (0-2)
Utility Mode Special Setting
(0-2,4)
Default
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
03
bit
Contents
7
6
CSRC
Japan
V34 mode at the time of error page redial (0: Inhibited, 1: Enabled)
5
4
Resend from the first page at the time of error page redial
0: Retransmitted from error page
1: Retransmitted from initial page
Call acceptance operation with toner empty (0: Refused, 1: Permitted)
I-273
bizhub 423/363/283/223
bit
Contents
1
0
(e) Address: 0b0004: FAX communication HP

Setting
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x05
0x05
0x05
X0
04
Utility Mode (3-5)

Utility Mode Special Setting
(2,6,7)
bit
Contents
7
6
5
Quick memory transmission (0: OFF, 1: ON)
File deleted after polled transmission (0: Yes, 1: No)
Reception mode (0: Auto, 1: Manual)
V.34
0: OFF, 1: ON
International transmission (0: OFF, 1: ON)
ECM transmission (0: OFF, 1: ON)
(f) Address:: 0b0005: Forward TX Setting

Setting
Utility Mode (0,1,6)
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
05
bit
Contents
7
6
Two-sided recording of FAX (0: Possible. 1: Impossible)
5
4
3
Default transfer FAX setting (00: Not specified, 01: Line 1, 10: Line 2)
2
1
0
Forward TX Setting
00: No forwarding, 01: Forwarding + Always (print), 10: Forwarding + Only when not delivered (print), 11: Not defined
(g) Address:: 0b0006: FAX reception automatic output setting

Setting
Utility Mode (0,1,2,4,6,7)
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x01
0x01
0x01
X0
06
bit
Contents
Two-sided recording
2in1 recording
Inched recording paper selection
Fax Output Setting (only for color MFP)

0: Batch Print, 1: Page Print
NOTE
In the case of B&W MFP, only Batch Print can be supported. Therefore, always set the value to 0.
Face-up output
Page division recording
Output tray HP
00:Tray 1, 01:Tray 2, 10:Tray 3, 11:Tray 4
(h) Address:: 0b0007: FAX reception automatic output setting 2

Setting
Utility Mode (2-5)
Utility Mode Special Setting (6,7)
Default
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0xd4
0xf4
0xd4
X0
07
bit
7
CSRC
Japan
Contents
STOP is effected for printing during reception
I-274
bizhub 423/363/283/223
bit
Contents
STOP is effected for printing after reception
Inched paper priority
Paper tray fixing

000: Tray 1, 001: Tray 2, 010: Tray 3, 011: Tray 4, 100: LCT, 101: Auto
3
2
1
LG is used.
LT is used.
(i) Address: 0b0008: Setting of recording paper for reception

Setting
Utility Mode (0,1)
Default
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
08
bit
7
CSRC
Japan
Contents
Selection without A5R
0: A4->B5, 1: B5->A4
Only when all of the following conditions are met:
A. Destination is Japan or Europe.
B. Fax reception print is set as follows: [Split print ON or Split print OFF] and [Paper tray/paper size is auto]
C. Letter/Ledger over A4/A3 OFF
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Paper select mode

00: APS, 01: Recording paper designation mode 1, 10: Recording paper designation mode 2
(j) Address: 0b0009: Setting of recording paper size for reception

Setting
Utility Mode
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x0f
0x1f
0x0f
X0
09
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
01000: A3R, 01001: B4R, 01111: A4, 10001: 8.5x14R, 11000: 11x17R, 11111: 8.5x11
3
2
1
0
(k) Address: 0b000a: Target reduction rate when A4/LTR is used

Setting
bit
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x5a
0x5a
0x5a
X0
0A
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I-275
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(l) Address: 0b000b: Other target reduction rate

Setting
-
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x5d
0x5d
0x5d
X0
0B
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(m) Address: 0b000c: BOOT rewrite on FAX ISW

Setting
Utility Mode Special Setting (0)
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
0C
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Boot area rewrite

0: No, 1: Yes
(n) Address: 0b000d: Reduction rate used in APS

Setting
-
Default
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x5d
0x5d
0x5d
X0
0D
bit
7
CSRC
Japan
Contents
Received image reduction rate at APS
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(o) Address: 0b000e: Minimum reduction rate

Setting
Utility Mode
Default
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x60
0x60
0x60
X0
0E
bit
7
CSRC
Japan
Contents
Received image reduction rate at APS (A3/B4 width)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I-276
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(p) Address: 0b000f: Incomplete TX hold

Default
Setting
Japan
North America
CSRC
Europe
Utility Mode (0-3)
Parameter
X0
bit
7
Command
Contents
Debug mode
0: OFF
1: ON(3min)
6
5
4
3
2
File holding time

0000: 12 hours, 0001: 24 hours, 0010: 48 hours, 0011: 72 hours
1
0
(q) Address: 0b0010: Inter-station timer

Default
Setting
-
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x03
0x03
0x03
X0
10
bit
7
CSRC
Japan
Contents
HEX (unit: second)(00 - ffh)(00 means 03)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(r) Address: 0b0012 - 0b0015: Reserved area

Default
Setting
-
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0xff
0xff
0xff
X0
12 - 15
(s) Address: 0b0016: PC-FAX RX

Setting
Utility Mode (0-5)
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x10
0x10
0x10
X0
16
bit
Contents
TSI routing function

0: OFF, 1: ON
At operation with PC-FAX Rx code unspecified

0: PC Reception, 1: Print
PC-FAX Rx print
0: No, 1: Yes
4
3
2
1
0
PC-FAX reception mode

000: OFF, 001: ON + Received at fixed box, 010: Dialin + Received at fixed box, 011: ON + Received at specified box, 100: Dialin
+ Reception at specified box
Password check
0: OFF, 1: ON
(t) Address: 0b0017 - 0b002a: PC-FAX reception password

Setting
Utility Mode
bit
7
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ALL 0x20
ALL 0x20
ALL 0x20
X0
17 - 2A
Contents
ASCII 20 digits
I-277
bizhub 423/363/283/223
bit
Contents
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(u) Address: 0b002b: FAX reception automatic output setting 3

Setting
Utility Mode (0-3)
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x01
0x01
0x01
X0
2B
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
2
Output No. of copies

Setting range:0 - (15)
1
0
(v) Address: 0b002c: Setting for 2 lines

Setting
Utility Mode (0)
Default
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
2C
bit
7
CSRC
Japan
Contents
Line 2 transmission setting (00: Transmission/Reception, 01: Reception only, 10: Transmission only)
6
5
Default Ext/Out setting for PC-FAX transmission (0: Out, 1: Extension)
Default Ext/Out setting for Forward TX: (0: Out, 1: Extension)
Default Ext/Out setting (0: Out, 1: Extension)
Setting using Line 1 (0: Out, 1: Extension)
Setting using multiple lines (0: Normal, 1: Ext/Out)
(w) Address: 0b002d: PC-FAX Setting

Setting
Utility Mode (0-1)
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
2D
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PC-FAX transmission line specification (00: Not specified, 01: Line 1, 10: Line 2, 11: Reserved)
(x) Address: 0b0032: I-Fax encoding system capability (default for auto transmission capability)
Setting
Utility Mode (0)
bit
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x04
0x04
0x04
X0
32
Contents
I-278
bizhub 423/363/283/223
bit
Contents
6
5
4
3
2
000: (Setting prohibited), 001: MH, 010: MR/MH, 100: MMR/MR/MH
1
0
(y) Address: 0b0039: communication function

Setting
Default
Japan
North America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Utility Mode (0-3)
Parameter
X0
bit
Contents
Interception of 1-address transmission in broadcasting transmission (0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited)
ITI printing, unit ID preference function (0: Not preferred, 1: Preferred)
Dial number duplication check during broadcasting transmission

0: Checked, 1: Not checked
F code transmission function

0: No, 1: Yes
Abandoning error pages during transmission

0: Not abandoned, 1: Abandoned
Incomplete TX hold function

0: Yes, 1: No
Relay reception function

0: Yes, 1: No
Confidential reception function

0: Yes, 1: No
(z) Address: 0b003a - 0b0067: Character ID [46]

Setting
Utility Mode
Service Mode
Default
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ALL 0x00
ALL 0x00
ALL 0x00
X0
3A - 67
bit
7
CSRC
Japan
Contents
ASCII [46] When ID is less than 46 digits, justify to the left and insert space at the top. (With NULL terminators)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(aa) Address: 0b0068: Reception refuse

Setting
Utility Mode (0)
Default
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
68
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CSRC
Japan
Call acceptance rejected - Number display

0: Disconnected line, 1: No response
I-279
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(ab) Address: 0b0069: Recording paper priority selection

Setting
Default
Japan
North America
CSRC
Europe
Utility Mode
bit
Command
Parameter
X0
69
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
00: Automatic selection

01: Fixed size, 10: Priority
(ac) Address: 0b006a: Box number error operation

Setting
Utility Mode
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
6A
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
Print or not print the images received when the TSI transfer terminates normally.
0:OFF, 1:ON
Operation with no routing registration or no registered BOX upon the TSI routing turned ON
(0: Print output, 1: Saved in forced memory reception BOX)
Reception of unregistered box sub No.

00: Print, 01: Main line, 10: Sub line
1
0
(ad) Address: 0b006b: Transmission line specification

Setting
Utility Mode
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
6B
bit
Contents
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Transmission line specification

00: Not specified, 01: Main line, 10: Sub line
(ae) Address: 0b006c: Reserved area

Setting
Utility Mode
Default
CSRC
Japan
North America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
6C
11.17.8 Initialization
(1) Use
The following data can be initialized. Select data you want to initialize and touch the [Yes].
Fax Function Parameter
The function set condition is initialized into the Factory Default condition.
Communication Journal Data
All of the Communication Journal is erased.
NOTICE
For the formats of the Abbreviated Registration Data, the Program Registration Data, The Group Registration Data, and the F-code
Box Data, seeI.11.17.4 Fax File Format.
I-280
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch the [Initialization] key.
Select data you want to initialize.
Supplement: Two or more selections are possible for data.
5. Touch the [Yes].
6. When a verification message is displayed, touch the [Yes].
7. The data selected is initialized.
11.18 FAX setting (Line2)
The line 1/2 can be specified. When the Line 2 is specified, only the Modem/NCU, Communication, Network and Initialization items are
displayed.
11.18.1 Modem/NCU
(1) V34:1/2 : RX Max. Bit Speed
(a) Use
To set the max. bit speed for reception in V.34.
(b) Default setting

33600 bps
(c) Setting range

2400 to 33600 bps (step: 2400 bps)
(2) V34:1/2 : TX Max. Bit Speed

(a) Use
To set the max. bit speed for transmission in V.34.
(b) Default setting

33600 bps
(c) Setting range

2400 to 33600 bps (step: 2400 bps)
(3) V34:1/2 : Control CH Speed

(a) Use
A bit speed of the control channel.
The negotiation of 2400/1200 is performed in the V.34 start-up procedure.
(b) Default setting

1200 bps
(c) Setting item

1200 bps
I-281
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2400 bps
(4) V34:1/2 : Max. SYMB Speed

(a) Use
Maximum modulation speed (baud rate) of V.34
3429 33.6 k to 4.8 k
3200 31.2 k to 2.4 k
3000 28.8 k to 2.4 k
2800
2400
Effective both at the time of sending and receiving.
The upper limit value of V.34 maximum bit speed is determined.
Normally you do not need to change the value. In case that a V.34 error frequently occurs, you can attempt to set up SYMB3000 and
decrease the symbol rate, for instance.
(b) Default setting

3429 SYMB
(c) Setting item
2400 SYMB
2800 SYMB
3000 SYMB
3200 SYMB
3429 SYMB
(5) V34:2/2 : SYMB Select Criterion (S/N)

(a) Use
To set the SYMB Select Criterion (S/N).
(modulation speed).
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

* It becomes easy to select a high SYMB by using - direction.
(6) V34:2/2 : SYMB Select Criterion (Distortion)

(a) Use
To set the SYMB Select Criterion (Distortion).
(modulation speed).
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

* It becomes easy to select a high SYMB by using + direction.
(7) V34:2/2 : Main CH Speed Selection Standard

(a) Use
The bit speeds of V.34 are determined by the Phase 3 (training).
This functional parameter sets thresholds for the bit speed determination.
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

* It becomes easy to select a high speed by using - direction.
(8) V17 Send Max Speed: TX Max. Speed

(a) Use
To set the max. speed for transmission.
I-282
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

V17-14400bps
(c) Setting item
V17-14400bps
V17-12000bps
V17-9600bps
V17-7200bps
V29-9600bps
V29-7200bps
V27-4200bps
V27-2400bps
(9) V17 Send Max Speed: RX Max. Speed

(a) Use
To set the max. speed for reception.
(b) Default setting

V17-14400bps
(c) Setting item

V17-14400bps
V29-9600bps
V27-4800bps
(10) TxATT: PIX TxATT

(a) Use
To set the output level of PIX TxATT.
(b) Procedure
(11) TxATT: TONE/Procedure Signal TxATT

(a) Use
To set the output level of TONE/Procedure Signal TxATT.
(b) Procedure
(12) TxATT: CED/ANSam TxATT

(a) Use
To set the output level of CED/ANSam TxATT.
(b) Procedure
(13) TxATT: DTMF TxATT

(a) Use
SED is not used.
(b) Default setting

-48 dBm
(c) Setting item

(14) Level: CD/SED ON Level

(a) Use
SED is not used.
I-283
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

-48 dBm
(c) Setting item

(15) Level: DTMF H-L Level Difference

(a) Use
To set DTMF H-L level difference.
(b) Default setting

2.0 dB
(c) Setting range

1.0 to 4.0 dB (step: 0.5 dB)
(16) Cable EQL: TX

(a) Use
8
6
Gain (dB)
4
2
0 dB
4 dB
8 dB
12 dB
0
-2
-4
-6
-8
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Frequency (Hz)
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

(17) Cable EQL: RX

(a) Use
8
6
Gain (dB)
4
2
0 dB
4 dB
8 dB
12 dB
0
-2
-4
-6
-8
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Frequency (Hz)
(b) Default setting

0 dB
(c) Setting range

11.18.2 Network
(1) Network Setting 1: Receive Signal Detection Mode
(a) Use
To set whether to detect the receive signal by the number of times or by time.
I-284
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Sets to Time when ringer can not be detected by the number.
(b) Default setting

No. of Times
(c) Setting item

No. of Times
Time
(2) Network Setting 1: BUSY TONE Detection

(a) Use
To set whether to use the Busy Tone detection or not.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(3) Network Setting 1: No. of Times of Busy Tone Detection

(a) Use
To set the number of times of Busy Tone detection.
Toot
Toot
Toot
Toot
When the number of tones is

set to three, judged to be busy
here.
(b) Default setting

0
(c) Setting range

0 to 15 count (step: 1)
(4) Network Setting 2: 1300 Hz Detection

(a) Use
To set whether to use the 1300 Hz detection or not.
Set this function to ON if the facsimile network (F-net) is to be used.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(5) Network Setting 2: Dial Tone Detection

(a) Use
To set whether to use the Dial Tone detection or not.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(6) Network Setting 2: DC-LOOP Check

(a) Use
Checks the DC loop current before dialing.
When the current is zero, an error occurs. (T.80)
You can change the setting to be compliant to standards in other countries. In Japan, set this parameter to OFF.
I-285
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(7) Network Setting 2: min. RING OFF Time

(a) Use
Minimum time to recognize ringer interval.
For country spec.
a
a
To avoid judging a as a ring-off time.
Ring-off time
(b) Default setting

0 ms
(c) Setting range

0 to 1000 ms (step: 100 ms)
(8) Network Setting 2: Response Waiting Time

(a) Use
To set the response waiting time.
(b) Default setting

55 s
(c) Setting range

(9) Network Setting 2: Pause Time

(a) Use
The pause time for one pause key (pause between digits)
(b) Default setting

1s
(c) Setting range

11.18.3 Communication
(1) Protocol: V8 / V34 Protocol
(a) Use
To set whether to use the V.8/V.34 protocol or not.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Intl Comm. Function: No. of DIS Waiting Times at Foreign Communication
(a) Use
To set the number of DIS waiting times.
(b) Default setting

1
(c) Setting item

1
I-286
bizhub 423/363/283/223

(a) Use
(b) Default setting

28800 bps
(c) Setting range

16800 to 33600 bps (step: 2400 bps)

(a) Use
(b) Default setting

7200 bps
(c) Setting range

7200 to 14400 bps (step: 2400 bps)

(a) Use
(b) Default setting

4800 bps
(c) Setting range

2400 to 9600 bps (step: 2400 bps)
(6) TIMER 1: T1
(a) Use
T1 timer (T.30 standard)
Response waiting timer (55sec)
Calling
Designate by the response waiting timer
Called
Starts after DIS is output. The waiting time until DCS is received.
Calling
Starts after dialing. Until CED is received.
(b) Default setting

35 s
(c) Setting range

30 to 90 s (step: 5 s)
(7) Others: ECM Function

(a) Use
Set whether or not to cancel reception ECM (error correction mode).
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(8) Others: Frame Size at ECM TX

(a) Use
To set the frame size at ECM transmission.
(b) Default setting

256
(c) Setting item

64
I-287
bizhub 423/363/283/223
256
(9) Others: Coding Ability

(a) Use
To set the coding ability.
Effective to both sending and reception.
(b) Default setting

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
(c) Setting item
MH
MH/MR
MH/MR/MMR
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
11.18.4 Initialization
(1) Use
The following data can be initialized. Select data you want to initialize and touch the [Yes].
Fax Function Parameter
The function set condition is initialized into the Factory Default condition.
Communication Journal Data
All of the Communication Journal is erased.
NOTICE
For the formats of the Abbreviated Registration Data, the Program Registration Data, The Group Registration Data, and the F-code
Box Data, seeI.11.17.4 Fax File Format.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch the [Initialization] key.
Select data you want to initialize.
Supplement: Two or more selections are possible for data.
5. Touch the [Yes].
6. When a verification message is displayed, touch the [Yes].
7. The data selected is initialized.
11.19 FAX setting (Address parameter list: for main line and sub line)
11.19.1 0b000*
Address
0b0000
Items
Redial interval
Default
Bit
No
7
Contents
Default
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility Mode
(0-3)
0x03
0x03
0x03
X0
00
Utility Mode
(0-2)
0x03
0x01
0x03
X0
01
Utility Mode
Special Setting
(0-2)
0x03
0x01
0x03
X0
02
5
4
3
2
Redial interval (min, HEX,

0 - 15)
1
0
0b0001
No. of busy redials
7
6
5
4
3
2
No. of busy redials (No,

HEX, 0 - 15)
1
0
0b0002
No. of error redials
7
6
5
4
3
2
No. of error redials (No,

HEX, 0 - 15)
1
0
I-288
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0b0003
Items
Setting related to
FAX memory

Default
Bit
No
Contents
7
6
V34 mode at the time of

error page redial
(0: Inhibited, 1: Enabled)
5
4
Resend from the first page

at the time of error page
redial
0: Retransmitted from error
page
1: Retransmitted from
initial page
Call acceptance operation

with toner empty
(0: Refused, 1: Permitted)
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility Mode
(0-2)
Utility Mode
Special Setting
(0-2,4)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
03
Utility Mode
(3-5)
Utility Mode
Special Setting
(2,6,7)
0x05
0x05
0x05
X0
04
Utility Mode
(0,1,6)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
05
Utility Mode
(0,1,2,4,6,7)
0x01
0x01
0x01
X0
06
2
1
0
0b0004
0b0005
FAX
communication HP
Forward TX
Setting
7
6
5
Quick memory
transmission
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
File deleted after polled

transmission
(0: Yes, 1: No)
Reception mode
(0: Auto, 1: Manual)
V.34
0: OFF
1: ON
International transmission
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
ECM transmission
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
7
6
Two-sided recording of
FAX
(0: Possible. 1: Impossible)
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b0006
FAX reception
automatic output
setting
Default transfer FAX

setting
(00: Not specified, 01: Line
1, 10: Line 2)
Forward TX Setting
00: No forwarding
01: Forwarding + Always
(print)
10: Forwarding + Only
when not delivered (print)
11: Not defined
Two-sided recording
2in1 recording
Inched recording paper

selection
Fax Output Setting (only

for color MFP)
0: Batch Print
1: Page Print
NOTE
In the case of B&W MFP,
only Batch Print can be
supported. Therefore,
always set the value to 0.
Face-up output
I-289
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
No
2
Page division recording
Output tray HP
00:Tray 1
01:Tray 2
10:Tray 3
11:Tray 4
0b0007
FAX reception
automatic output
setting 2
STOP is effected for

printing during reception
STOP is effected for

printing after reception
Inched paper priority
Paper tray fixing

000: Tray 1 001: Tray 2
010: Tray 3 011: Tray 4
100: LCT 101: Auto
3
2
0b0008
Setting of
recording paper
for reception
Default
Contents
LG is used.
LT is used.
Selection without A5R

0: A4->B5
1: B5->A4
Only when all of the
following conditions are
met:
A. Destination is Japan or
Europe.
B. Fax reception print is set
as follows: [Split print ON
or Split print OFF] and
[Paper tray/paper size is
auto]
C. Letter/Ledger over A4/
A3 OFF
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility Mode
(2-5)
Utility Mode
Special Setting
(6,7)
0xd4
0xf4
0xd4
X0
07
Utility Mode
(0,1)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
08
Utility Mode
0x0f
0x1f
0x0f
X0
09
0x5a
0x5a
0x5a
X0
0A
0x5d
0x5d
0x5d
X0
0B
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b0009
Setting of
recording paper
size for reception
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b000a
Target reduction
rate when A4/LTR
is used
Paper select mode

00: APS
01: Recording paper
designation mode 1
10: Recording paper
designation mode 2
01000: A3R
01001: B4R
01111: A4
10001: 8.5 x 14R
11000: 11 x 17R
11111: 8.5 x 11
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b000b
Other target
reduction rate
7
6
5
4
I-290
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address

Bit
No
Items
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility Mode
Special Setting
(0)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
0C
3
2
1
0
0b000c
BOOT rewrite on
FAX ISW
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0b000d
Reduction rate
used in APS
Boot area rewrite

0: No
1: Yes
Received image reduction

rate at APS
0x5d
0x5d
0x5d
X0
0D
Received image reduction

rate at APS (A3/B4 width)
Utility Mode
0x60
0x60
0x60
X0
0E
Debug mode
0: OFF
1: ON (3min)
Utility Mode
(0-3)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
0F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b000e
Minimum
reduction rate
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b000f
Incomplete TX
hold
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
File holding time

0000: 12 hours
0001: 24 hours
0010: 48 hours
0011: 72 hours
11.19.2 0b001*
Address
0b0010
Items
Interstation
timer
Bit
No
7
Default
Contents
Setting
HEX (unit: second)(00 - ffh)(00 means 03)
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x03
0x03
0x03
X0
10
0xff
0xff
0xff
X0
12 - 15
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b0012 0b0015
Reserved
area
7
6
5
4
I-291
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
(0-5)
0x10
0x10
0x10
X0
16
Utility
Mode
ALL
0x20
ALL 0x20
ALL
0x20
X0
17 1F
3
2
1
0
0b0016
PC-FAX
RX
TSI routing function

0: OFF
1: ON
At operation with PC-FAX Rx code unspecified

0: PC Reception
1: Print
PC-FAX Rx print
0: No
1: Yes
4
3
2
1
0b0017 0b001f
PC-FAX
reception
password
PC-FAX reception mode

000: OFF
001: ON + Received at fixed box
010: Dialin + Received at fixed box
011: ON + Received at specified box
100: Dialin + Reception at specified box
Password check
0: OFF
1: ON
ASCII 20 digits
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.3 0b002*
Address
0b0020 0b002a
Items
PC-FAX
reception
password
Default
Bit
No
7
Contents
Setting
ASCII 20 digits
Japan
North
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
ALL
0x20
ALL 0x20
ALL
0x20
X0
20 - 2A
Utility
Mode
(0-3)
0x01
0x01
0x01
X0
2B
Utility
Mode
(0)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
2C
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b002b
FAX
reception
automatic
output
setting 3
7
6
5
4
3
2
Output No. of copies

Setting range:0 - (15)
1
0
0b002c
Setting for 2
lines
7
6
Line 2 transmission setting

(00: Transmission/Reception,
01: Reception only,
10: Transmission only)
Default Ext/Out setting for PC-FAX

transmission
(0: Out, 1: Extension)
Default Ext/Out setting for Forward TX:

I-292
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Default Ext/Out setting

Setting using Line 1

Setting using multiple lines

(0: Normal, 1: Ext/Out)
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
2D
0
0b002d
PC-FAX
Setting
Utility
Mode
(0-1)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC-FAX transmission line specification

(00: Not specified, 01: Line 1,
10: Line 2, 11: Reserved)
11.19.4 0b003*
Address
0b0032
Items
I-Fax encoding
system capability
(default for auto
transmission
capability)
Bit
No
Default
Contents
Setting
7
6
5
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
(0)
0x04
0x04
0x04
X0
32
Utility
Mode
(0-3)
0x44
0x44
0x44
X0
39
Utility
Mode
Service
Mode
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
X0
3A 3F
4
3
2
1
0
0b0039
Communication
function
0b003a - Character ID [46]

0b003f
000: (Setting prohibited)

001: MH
010: MR/MH
100: MMR/MR/MH
Interception of 1-address transmission in

broadcasting transmission
(0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited)
ITI printing, unit ID preference function

(0: Not preferred, 1: Preferred)
Dial number duplication check during

broadcasting transmission
0: Checked
1: Not checked
F code transmission function

0: No
1: Yes
Abandoning error pages during

transmission
0: Not abandoned
1: Abandoned
Incomplete TX hold function

0: Yes
1: No
Relay reception function

0: Yes
1: No
Confidential reception function

0: Yes
1: No
ASCII [46] When ID is less than 46 digits,

justify to the left and insert space at the
top. (With NULL terminators)
6
5
4
3
2
1
I-293
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address

Bit
No
Items
Default
Contents
Setting
Contents
Setting

top. (With NULL terminators)
Utility
Mode
Service
Mode
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
X0
40 5F
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
Service
Mode
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
X0
60 - 67
Utility
Mode
(0)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
68
X0
69
X0
6A
Europe
Command
Parameter
11.19.5 0b004*, 0b005*

Address
Bit
No
Items
0b0040 - Character ID [46]

0b005f
7
6
5
Default
CSRC
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.6 0b006*
Address
Items
0b0060 - Character ID
0b0067 [46]
Bit
No
7
6
5
Default
Contents
Setting

justify to the left and insert space at the top.
(With NULL terminators)
CSRC
4
3
2
1
0
0b0068
Reception
refuse
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b0069
Recording
paper priority
selection
Call acceptance rejected - Number display

0: Disconnected line
1: No response
Utility
Mode
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b006a
Box number
error
operation
00: Automatic selection

01: Fixed size
10: Priority
Utility
Mode
6
5
4
Print or not print the images received when

the TSI transfer terminates normally.
0:OFF
1:ON
Operation with no routing registration or no

registered BOX upon the TSI routing turned
ON
(0: Print output, 1: Saved in forced memory
reception BOX)
Reception of unregistered box sub No.
I-294
0x00
0x00
0x00
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
1
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
6B
Utility
Mode
0x00
0x00
0x00
X0
6C
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x01
0x01
0x01
X1
00
00: Print
01: Main line
10: Sub line
0
0b006b
Transmission
line
specification
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0b006c
Reserved
area
Transmission line specification

00: Not specified, 01: Main line, 10: Sub line
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.7 0e000*
Address
0e0000
Items
Error line processing/
judgment
Bit
No
7
Default
Contents
Setting
RTP transmission
CSRC
6
5
Error line recirculation
Addition of error sign
0e0001
No. of error lines-very

good
Judgment of No. of sequential error

lines
Error line rate judgment
Judgment of No. of error lines
No. of very good judgment lines

(HEX) No. of error
linesVeryGoodErrorNum, MCF is
transmitted.
0x10
0x10
0x10
X1
01
No. of good judgment error lines

(HEX)
VeryGoodErrorNum<No. of error
linesGoodErrorNum, RTP is
transmitted
0x40
0x40
0x40
X1
02
No. of bad judgment error lines

(HEX)
GoodErrorNum<No. of error lines
BadErrorNum, RTN is transmitted.
No. of error lines>BadErrorNum, it is
considered to be error line over.
0x80
0x80
0x80
X1
03
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0002
No. of error lines-good
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0003
No. of error lines-bad
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
I-295
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0
0e0004
Rate of error lines-very

good
7
6
5
4
Rate of very good judgment error

lines (HEX, %)
Rate of error
linesVeryGoodErrorPercent, MCF is
transmitted.
0x05
0x05
0x05
X1
04
Rate of good judgment error lines

(HEX, %)
VeryGoodErrorPercent<Rate of error
linesGoodErrorPercent, RTP is
transmitted.
Rate of error
lines>GoodErrorPercent, RTN is
transmitted.
0x0a
0x0a
0x0a
X1
05
No. of bad judgment sequential error

lines (HEX) Normal
No. of sequential error
linesErrorContNormal, MCF is
transmitted.
lines>ErrorContNormal, RTN is
transmitted.
0x03
0x03
0x03
X1
06

lines (HEX) Fine
transmitted.
transmitted.
0x06
0x06
0x06
X1
07

lines (HEX) 300dpi
transmitted.
transmitted.
0x09
0x09
0x09
X1
08

lines (HEX) Super fine
transmitted.
transmitted.
0x0c
0x0c
0x0c
X1
09
0x06
0x06
0x06
X1
0A
3
2
1
0
0e0005
Rate of error linesgood
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0006
No. of continuous error

lines-bad
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0007

lines-bad
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0008

lines-bad
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0009

lines-bad
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e000a
EP tone addition
7
6
5
4
3
2
V.17
V.33
I-296
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
0
0e000b
CED detectiontransmission frequency
Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X1
0B
0xe0
0xe0
0xe0
X1
0C
0x00
0x00
0x00
X1
0D
0x00
0x00
0x00
X1
0E
V.29
7
6
5
4
3
2
0e000c
TSI/CSI/CIG
parameter
CED detection
0: Detect
1: Not detect
CED transmission frequency

0: 2100Hz
1: 1100Hz
TSI transmission
0: No
1: Always
CSI transmission
0: No
1: Always
CIG transmission
0: No
1: Always
4
3
2
1
0e000d
0e000e
G3ModeError
Step up/down
Character ID is put on CSI.
Ph-C8 min. limit timer at Non-ECM

0: No
1: Yes
Selection of -at dial top

0: OFF
1: ON
RTN reception
0: step down
1: Line
disconnect.
Remote reception
ID received
1: No limit
DIS retransmission interval in

manual reception
0: 4.5 sec.
1: 3.0 sec.
DCN transmission at T200
DIS length at reception limited to

4byte
0: No limit
1: Limit
DCN transmitted at stop of ph.C
Strict TCF check

0: Normal
1: Strict check
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
The PC/BC of the PostMsg is

checked while in the ECM reception.
0: Yes
1: No
I-297
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0e000f

Bit
No
Items
Delay timer between
DCS-TCF
7
6
Default
Contents
Setting
DCS - TCF delay timer Unit: (10 ms,

HEX)
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x08
0x08
0x08
X1
0F
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.8 0e001*
Address
0e0010
Items
Delay timer
between PIXPMC
Bit
No
7
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
PIX - PMC delay timer Unit: (10 ms, HEX)
0x08
0x08
0x08
X1
10
CED - DIS delay timer (Unit: 10 ms, HEX)
0x08
0x08
0x08
X1
11
T1 timer for transmission (Unit: 1sec, HEX)
0x23
0x23
0x23
X1
12
T1 timer for reception (Unit: 1 sec, HEX)
0x23
0x23
0x23
X1
13
Max. reception time per page (Unit: min,

HEX) 1 to 255 min.
0x0f
0x0f
0x0f
X1
14
EOL - EOL timer (Unit: 100 ms, HEX)
0x82
0x82
0x82
X1
15
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0011
Delay timer
between CEDDIS
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0012
T1 timer for
calling
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0013
T1 timer for
called
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0014
ph.C reception
limited time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0015
Timer between
EOLs
7
6
5
I-298
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
No
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
4
3
2
1
0
0e0016
Timer between
frames
Timer between frames (Unit: 1 sec, HEX)
0x23
0x23
0x23
X1
16
ANSam signal transmission time (Unit: 100

ms, HEX)
0x28
0x28
0x28
X1
17
Ci signal transmission time (Unit: 100 ms,

HEX)
0x05
0x05
0x05
X1
18
High-speed signal transmission waiting

delay timer
(Unit: 10 ms, HEX) (Between CFR-PIX/
MPS-PIX/CTR-PIX)
0x37
0x37
0x37
X1
19
ph.C top dummy data transmission time

(Unit: 100 ms, HEX) (Dummy data for nonECM /Preamble at ECM)
0x04
0x04
0x04
X1
1A
0x01
0x01
0x01
X1
1B
0x00
0x00
0x00
X1
1C
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0017
ANSam signal
transmission
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0018
Ci signal
transmission
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0019
High-speed
signal
transmission
waiting delay
timer
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e001a
ph.C top dummy

data transmitting
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e001b
RTC Counter
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e001c
Closed area
communication
The EOL counter judged to be RTC

000: EOL*2 001: EOL*3 010: EOL*4
011: EOL*5 100: EOL*6
7
6
5
I-299
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address

Default
Bit
No
Items
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
X1
1D 1F
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
X1
20 2F
4
3
2
Polling TX
Polling RX
0
0e001d - Machine
0e001f
password [20]
7
6
5

top. (No NULL terminators)
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.9 0e002*
Address
Bit
No
Items
0e0020 - Machine
0e002f
password [20]
7
6
5
Default
Contents
Setting

CSRC
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.10 0e003*
Address
0e0030
Items
Machine
password
[20]
Default
Bit
No
7
6
5
Contents
Setting
ASCII [20] When ID is less than 20 digits, justify

to the left and insert space at the top. (No NULL
terminators)
ALL
0x20

to the left and insert space at the top. (No NULL
terminators)
ALL
0x20
Japan
North
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
ALL 0x20
ALL
0x20
X1
30
ALL 0x20
ALL
0x20
X1
31 3F
4
3
2
1
0
0e0031 0e003f
CSRC
password
[20]
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.11 0e004*
Address
Items
0e0040 - CSRC password

0e0044 [20]
Bit
No
7
6
5
Default
Contents
Setting

I-300
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
X1
40 - 44
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x01
0x01
0x01
X1
45
3
2
1
0
0e0045
Watch dog
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0e0046
T2 timer after
CFR
Watch dog
0: OFF
1: ON
T2 timer value after CFR x100ms (HEX)
0x3c
0x3c
0x3c
X1
46
T2 timer after EOM x100ms (HEX)
0x37
0x37
0x37
X1
47
JM waiting timer value x100ms (HEX)
0x5A
0x5A
0x5A
X1
48
0: US 1: Canada 2: Japan 3: Australia 4:

New Zealand 5: Europe 6: Germany 7: UK
8: France 9: Switzerland 10: Netherlands
11: Belgium 12: Austria 13: Norway 14:
Sweden 15: Finland 16: Ireland 17:
Denmark 18: Italy 19: Spain 20: Portugal
21: Poland 22: South Africa 23: Taiwan 24:
Saudi Arabia 25: China 26: Malaysia 27:
Singapore 28: Korea 29: Hong Kong 30:
General purpose (OT) 31: Argentina 32:
Brazil 33: Vietnam 34: Philippines 35:
Russia
0x02
0x00
0x05
X1
49
0x01
0x01
0x01
X1
4A
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0047
T2 timer after
EOM
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0048
JIM waiting timer
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0049
Destination
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e004a
Function when
DIS signal is
created
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Change-over of the silent interval between

ANSam and DIS (For revision T.30)
0: Silent interval of 450 ms
1: 75 ms
I-301
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
No
0
0e004b
Signal check at
the time of F
code
communication
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X1
4B
V8 capability, if available, of DIS to

transmit with V.21
0: V8bitON
1: V8bitOFF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0e004c
No. of CI signal
transmission in
manual
transmission
Check of PWD and SID received signal in

F code communication
0: Signal checked
1: PWD and SID not distinguished
CI signal repetitive transmission frequency

when no ANSam received after CI
transmission (times, HEX)
0x03
0x03
0x03
X1
4C
PB OFF time integration

0 to 15 (x10ms) (50ms if 0)
0x55
0x55
0x55
X1
4D
Waiting event from modem/Response

waiting timeout time (x10sec, HEX)
(0 counted as 90 sec.)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X1
4E
Sequential CRP reception frequency

resulting in error (x1 time, HEX)
(0 counted as 3 times)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X1
4F
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x17
0x17
0x17
X1
50
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e004d
Tone detection
time (PB)
7
6
5
4
3
2
PB ON time integration
0 to 15 (x10ms) (50ms if 0)
1
0
0e004e
Time for modem

response waiting
timeout
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e004f
Continuous CRP
reception
frequency
resulting in an
error
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.12 0e005*
Address
0e0050
Items
1300Hz line
seizure
parameter
detection time
Bit
No
7
6
Default
Contents
Setting
1300Hz tone detection time for no-ringing

reception (x100ms, HEX)
5
4
3
2
I-302
CSRC
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
No
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
1
0
0e0051
1300Hz line
seizure
parameter
detection
frequency upper
limit
7
6
1300Hz tone detection frequency upper

limit for no-ringing reception (x10Hz, HEX)
0x85
0x85
0x85
X1
51
1300Hz tone detection frequency lower

limit for no-ringing reception (x10Hz, HEX)
0x7f
0x7f
0x7f
X1
52
0x00
0x00
0x00
X1
53
0x1e
0x1e
0x1e
X1
54
0x03
0x03
0x03
X1
55
0x00
0x00
0x00
X1
56
0x08
0x08
0x08
X1
57
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0052
1300Hz line
seizure
parameter
detection
frequency lower
limit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0053
German
specifications
7
6
5
4
0e0054
Retransmission
intervals of DIS
(Auto reception)
ERR transmission (DTS sequence)
DCN reception error ignored
Line disconnected within 6 sec. after CD

OFF in ph.C
Line disconnected upon reception of DIS to

DTC
DIS re-transmission interval in automatic

reception (x0.1 sec.)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0055
TTI for
transmission
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0056
Image reduction
parameter
TTI in transmission TTI added

00: OFF 01: (OFF)
10: INSIDE 11: OUTSIDE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0e0057
Main body
polling
Reduction parameter in main scanning

direction
0: Thick line kept
1: Thick line not kept
Timer for waiting a transmission command

(+FDT) from the main body during
I-303
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address

Default
Bit
No
Items
transmission
command wait
timer
5
4
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
X1
58 -
turnaround of polling transmission

(x100ms, HEX) (0 is defaulted to 8 sec.)
3
2
1
0
0e0058 - Reserved area
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.13 12000*
Address
120000
Items
TTI/RTI
setting
Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
7
6
SW for prohibiting the printing of the TTI

address
0: Printing of the address allowed
1: Printing of the address not allowed
RTI addition
00:OFF
01: (OFF)
10: INSIDE
11: OUTSIDE
TTI denominator display

0: Total
1: Individual
Inhibition of TTI setting menu INSIDE display

0: No
1: Yes
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
(0,1,4)
0x03
0x03
0x03
X2
80
Utility
Mode
(2 - 5)
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
(6)
6c
6c
6c
X2
81
Utility
Mode
(0 - 2)
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
(0,1)
0x04
0x04
0x04
X2
82
1
0
120001
Report
setting 1
7
6
Addition of image
0: No, 1: Yes
Automatic output of reserved report

0: No, 1: Yes
TX result report
00: Not output
01: Output only at errors
10: Always output
11: (Normal output)
Automatic output of sequential communication

report
0: No, 1: Yes
1
0
120002
Report
setting 2
The FAX CSRC communication log is printed

on the Activity Report
0: No, 1: Yes
6
5
4
Abbreviation List
0: numerical order
1: sorted order
I-304
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
120003
Items
Output
time of
daily
automati
c output
of journal
(hour:
grade of
10)
Bit
No

Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Automatic daily output of journal

0: No
1: Yes
Automatic output of journal 100 communication

0: No
1: Yes
Automatic output or error trace list

0: No
1: Yes
Automatic output of trace list

0: No
1: Yes
Designation of 24 hours ASCII four-digit
0x30
0x30
0x30
X2
83
0x39
0x39
0x39
X2
84
0x30
0x30
0x30
X2
85
0x30
0x30
0x30
X2
86
Utility
Mode
(3 - 5)
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
(0)
0x00
0x00
0x00
X2
87
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
120004
Output
time of
daily
automati
c output
of journal
(hour:
grade of
1)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
120005
Output
time of
daily
automati
c output
of journal
(minute:
grade of
10)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
120006
Output
time of
daily
automati
c output
of journal
(minute:
grade of
1)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
120007
Output
setting
Setting of daily difference for daily mode set for

automatic output
0: Daily difference not limited
1: Daily difference limited
6
5
Transmission result report selection screen

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Broadcast result report output method

0: All destinations
1: 1Each destination
Printing during auxiliary power OFF

0: No
1: Yes
I-305
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
Bit
No
2

Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
X2
88
0x00
0x00
0x00
X2
89
Utility
Mode
(0 - 3)
0x0f
0x0f
0x0f
X2
8B
Utility
Mode
0x61
0x61
0x61
X2
8C
Utility
Mode
0x00
0x00
0x00
X2
8D
Output order of journal transmission result

reservation report
0: From old one
1: From new one
1
0
120008
Invisible
mode
7
6
5
4
3
2
Display of PCFAX TX [PC] in Note of report

0: No
1: Yes
1
0
120009
Reserve
d area
Details of remote station display during program

direct registered calls and abbreviated dialing
0: Display of registered name
1: Display of number
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
12000b
F code
report
setting
7
6
5
4
12000c
Internet
Fax
report
Setting
Relay request report output

0: No
1: Yes
Relay TX result report output

0: No
1: Yes
Bulletin polling transmission report output

0: No
1: Yes
Confidential reception report output

0: No
1: Yes
7
6
Network Fax RX Error Report

(0: OFF, 1: ON)
Internet Broadcast Fax Result Report

(0: OFF, 1: ON)
12000d
FAX
report
setting
E-Mail Message Body printing

(0: ON, 1: OFF)
TX Error Report printing

(0: ON, 1: OFF)
MDN Message printing

(0: ON, 1: OFF)
DSN Message printing

(0: ON, 1: OFF)
7
6
5
4
I-306
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
X2
8E - 9F
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
0x11
0x11
0x11
XE
00
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
(6,7)
0x41
0x41
0x41
XE
01
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
(0,1,2)
0x04
0x04
0x04
XE
02
0x06
0x06
0x06
XE
03
0x09
0x09
0x09
XE
04
3
2
12000e 12000f
Reserve
d area
PC-Fax Error report output

0: No, 1: Yes
Relay print
0: No, 1: Yes
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.14 13000*
Address
130000
Items
Reserve
d area
Bit
No
Default
Contents
Setting
7
6
CSRC
5
4
3
2
1
0
130001
FAX
scan
HP2
7
6
Frame erasure HP
01: 5mm 10: 10mm 11: 15mm
5
4
3
2
1
0
130002
FAX
scan
HP3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
130003
Reserve
d area
Original reading mode

00: Normal
01: Mixed size
10: ADF irregular
Scanned from the right side at book
transmission
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
130004
Reserve
d area
7
6
5
4
I-307
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x05
0x05
0x05
XE
05
0x01
0x01
0x01
XE
06
Utility
Mode
(2 - 7)
0x09
0x09
0x09
XE
07
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
(0,1)
0x03
0x03
0x03
XE
08
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
09
XE
0A
3
2
1
0
130005
Reserve
d area
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
130006
Reserve
d area
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
130007
HP for
FAX
main
screen
7
6
5
4
3
FAX main screen selection

0000: Program
0001: Group
0010: Abbreviation
0011: Keypad
Automatic screen switching at the time of
reception
0: ON
1: OFF
2
1
0
130008
Rotation
setting
HP
7
6
5
4
3
130009
Reserve
d area
B5R
0: No
1: Yes
Letter
0: No
1: Yes
A4
0: No
1: Yes
Time until auto reset

0: OFF, 1-9 min.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13000a
Not
used.
6
5
4
3
I-308
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
0x14
0x14
0x14
XE
0B
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
0C
0x05
0x05
0x05
XE
0D
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
0E - 34
2
1
0
13000b
Error
display
time
10 - 250 seconds, 0: Error display HOLD
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13000c
Reserve
d area
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13000d
Reserve
d area
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13000e
Reserve
d area
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.15 13003*
Address
130035
Items
Utility
Mode
display
setting
Default
Bit
N
o
7
Contents
Setting
Relay display
0: Yes
1: No
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
6
5
Incomplete TX hold display

0: Yes
1: No
Compulsory memory reception display

0: Yes
1: No
Caller No./Name display

0: Yes
1: No
Closed communication display

0: Yes
1: No
Remote reception display

0: Yes
1: No
I-309
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x0b
0x0b
XE
35
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
130036
Default
Bit
N
o
Utility
Mode
display
setting 2
Contents
Setting
Japan
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x05
0x0f
0x07
XE
36
XE
37
DialIn display
0: Yes
1: No
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
(0,1)
6
5
4
3
CSRC
North
America
OFF display of Header Position

0: Yes
1: No
2
1
Receive reject display

0: Yes
1: No
0
130037
Not used.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
130038
Destinatio
n default
screen
setting
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0x00: Group
0x01: FAX
0x02: E-mail
0x03: BOX
0x04: I-Fax
0x05: IP address FAX
0x06: SMB
0x07: FTP
0x08: WebDAV
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
38
Utility
Mode
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
39 3F
0
13003913003f
Reserved
area
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.16 13004*
Address
Items
130040130044
Reserved
area
Bit
No
Default
Contents
Setting
7
6
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
40 - 44
Utility
Mode
ALL
0x00
ALL 0x00
ALL
0x00
XE
45 4F
5
4
3
2
1
0
130045 DialIn
13004f
additional
No.
(FAX)
ASCII 11 digits + NULL
6
5
4
3
2
I-310
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
Japan
North
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
1
0
11.19.17 13005*
Address
130050
Items
DialIn
additional
No. (FAX)
Bit
N
o
7
Default
Contents
Setting
Japan
North
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
ASCII 11 digits + NULL
Utility
Mode
ALL
0x00
ALL 0x00
ALL
0x00
XE
50
ASCII 11 digits + NULL ALL
Utility
Mode
ALL
0x00
ALL 0x00
ALL
0x00
XE
51 - 5C
Utility
Mode
ALL
0x00
ALL 0x00
ALL
0x00
XE
5D 5F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
130051 - DialIn
13005c
additional
No. (PCFAX)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13005d
13005f
DialIn
additional
No.
(telephone
)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.18 13006*
Address
Items
130060 - DialIn
130068
additional
No.
(telephone)
Bit
N
o
7
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
XE
60 - 68
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
0x0a
0x0a
0x08
XE
69
Utility
Mode
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
6A
5
4
3
2
1
0
130069
Upper limit
for signal
transmissio
n level
setting
7
6
(-dBm) Switched according to destination of

FAX
5
4
3
2
1
0
13006a
Lower limit
for call
termination
frequency
setting
range
7
6
(No. of times) Switched according to

destination of FAX
5
4
I-311
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
0x0f
0x0f
0x0f
XE
6B
0x00
0x22
0x11
XE
6C
Utility
Mode
Utility
Mode
Special
Setting
0x07
0x01
0x07
XE
6D
(Minutes) Switched according to destination of

FAX
Utility
Mode
0x01
0x01
0x01
XE
6E
(Minutes) Switched according to destination of

FAX
Utility
Mode
0x0f
0x0f
0x0f
XE
6F
Contents
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode( 0,1)
Utility
Mode
Special
0x7f
0x00
0x00
XE
70
3
2
1
0
13006b
Upper limit
for call
termination
frequency
setting
range
7
6

destination of FAX
5
4
3
2
1
0
13006c
Dial method
setting
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13006d
Upper limit
for redial
frequency
setting
range
7
6
Dial method setting (Switched according to

destination of FAX)
00: PB, 10pps, 20pps
01: PB
10: PB, 10pps
11: PB, 10pps, 16pps
destination of FAX
5
4
3
2
1
0
13006e
Upper limit
for redial
interval
setting
range
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13006f
Lower limit
for redial
interval
setting
range
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.19 13007*
Address
Items
130070
Telephonerelated
function
setting
menu
display (1)
Default
Bit
N
o
7
6
Remote reception
0: OFF
1: ON
I-312
CSRC
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
130071
Items
Number
display
related
function
setting
Setting
CSRC
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
Utility
Mode
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
71

FAX
0x0e
0x0f
0x09
XE
72

FAX
0x0a
0x0a
0x05
XE
73
(dB) Switched according to destination of FAX
0x01
0x01
0x01
XE
74
(dB) Switched according to destination of FAX
0x04
0x04
0x04
XE
75
Dial-in
0: OFF
1: ON
Number display
0: OFF
1: ON
Pseudo RBT form

0: OFF
1: ON
Pseudo RBT transmission level

0: OFF
1: ON
Connection to answering machine

0: OFF
1: ON
TEL/FAX switching
0: OFF
1: ON
Setting (2 6)
7
6
5
4
2
1
0
Setting of
lower limit
for DTMF
transmissio
n level
setting
range
Contents
130072
Default
Bit
N
o
7
6
Name display at the time of FAX reception

(line 2)
00: No display
01: Display of number
10: Display of name
Name displayed Type of display at fax
reception
00: Not displayed
01: Number displayed
10: Name displayed
5
4
3
2
1
0
130073
Setting of
upper limit
for DTMF
transmissio
n level
setting
range
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
130074
Setting of
lower limit
for DTMF
H-L level
difference
setting
range
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
130075
Setting of
upper limit
for DTMF
H-L level
difference
setting
range
7
6
5
4
3
I-313
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
76
2
1
0
130076
For
transmissio
n
7
6
5
4
3
130077
Lower limit
setting of
the signal
send-out
level setting
range
Restrict Plural Fax Destination

0: OFF
1: ON
Destination Check Display Function

0: OFF
1: ON
Screen display during transmission

0: OFF
1: ON

FAX
0x0f
0x0f
0x0f
XE
77
bit0 :[Main] 0: OFF, 1: ON

bit10 :[ABC] 0: OFF, 1: ON
bit11 :[DEF] 0: OFF, 1: ON
bit12 :[GHI] 0: OFF, 1: ON
bit13 :[JKL] 0: OFF, 1: ON
bit14 :[MNO] 0: OFF, 1: ON
bit15 :[PQRS] 0: OFF, 1: ON
bit16 :[TUV] 0: OFF, 1: ON
bit17 :[WXYZ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
bit18 :[etc] 0: OFF, 1: ON
0x01
0x01
0x01
XE
78 - 7B
XE
7C
XE
7D
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
130078
13007b
Characterto-search
default for
FAX main
screen
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13007c
Not used.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13007d
Initial
program
display
page
7
6
1 - 27 page (HEX: 0x01 - 0x1b), 0: Temporary

distribution
0x01
0x01
0x01
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.19.20 13008*
Address
Items
130080 - Reserved
130082
area
Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
6
5
4
I-314
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XE
80 - 82
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x01
0x01
0x01
XE
83
0x0e
0x0e
0x0e
XE
84
3
2
1
0
130083
Destinatio
n type
display
setting
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
130084
No. of
destination
display
characters
setting
Destination type display

0: No
1: Yes
0x0e: 14 characters
0x18: 24 characters 4
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.20 FAX setting (Address parameter list: for main line)

11.20.1 0e009*
Address
0e0090
Items
Transmissio
n ATT
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
Contents
Setting
Tone signal/FSK transmission ATT (HEX)

every 1 dBm (0 to -15dBm)
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0xAA
0xAA
0xAA
XB
00
0x0A
0x0A
0x0A
XB
01
0x03
0x03
0x03
XB
02
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
03
5
4
3
2
High-speed signal transmission ATT (HEX)

every 1 dBm (0 to -15dBm)
1
0
0e0091
CED
transmission
ATT
7
6
5
4
3
2
CED/ANS transmission ATT (HEX) every 1

dBm (0 to -15dBm)
1
0
0e0092
CD/SED ON
level
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0093
Transmissio
n cable
amplitude
EQL
CD/SED ON level [dBm]

00: -33 01: -38 10: -43 11: -48
7
6
5
4
Transmission cable EQL

00: 0dB 01: 4dB
10: 8dB 11: 12dB
I-315
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
04
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
05
0x2A
0x4A
0x68
XB
06
0x40
0x40
0x40
XB
07
0x02
0x02
0x02
XB
08
3
2
1
0
0e0094
Reception
cable
amplitude
EQL
7
6
5
4
Reception cable EQL

00: 0dB 01: 4dB
10: 8dB 11: 12dB
3
2
1
0
0e0095
Tel-Fax
switching
Time from vocal response to RBT transmission

(CNG detection waiting time 2)
0: 4 sec.
1: 2 sec.
Time from reception to voice response

transmission (CNG detection waiting time 1)
0: 2 sec.
1: 4 sec.
TEL/FAX switching mode

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
External telephone no ringing setting

0: Disabled
1: Enabled (disconnected)
TEL/FAX switching ON response details

0: Voice response + RBT transmission
1: RBT transmission only
2
1
0
0e0096
Ring Back
Tone
parameter
7
6
5
RBT format
000: None 001: Japan 010: US
011: UK 100: Germany 101 to 111: Others
CED transmitted upon Tel/Fax switching
RBT transmission level (HEX)0 to -15 dBm
2
1
0
0e0097
International
com mode
operation
DIS waiting frequency

0: Always 1 time
1: Twice in overseas communication
Overseas communication
0: No
1: Yes
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0098
Starting
speed in
international
mode (V29
modem)
7
6
5
4
9600bps/V.29
7200bps/V.29
2
1
4800bps/V.27ter
2400bps/V.27ter
I-316
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0e0099
Items
Starting
speed in
international
mode (V17
or V33
modem)

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
14400bps/V.17
12000bps/V.17
9600bps/V.17
7200bps/V.17
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x10
0x10
0x10
XB
09
0x20
0x20
0x20
XB
0A
3
2
1
0
0e009a
0e009b
Starting
speed in
international
mode (V34)
CD OFF
timer
33600bps/V.34
31200bps/V.34
28800bps/V.34
26400bps/V.34
24000bps/V.34
21600bps/V.34
19200bps/V.34
16800bps/V.34
CD OFF timer (Unit: 100 ms, HEX)
0x14
0x14
0x14
XB
0B
CD ON integration time (Unit: 100 ms. HEX)
0x06
0x06
0x06
XB
0C
V34 controlled ch data rate

0: 1200
1: 2400
0x05
0x05
0x05
XB
0D
0x66
0x66
0x66
XB
0E
0x08
0x08
0x08
XB
0F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e009c
CD ON
integration
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e009d
Symbol rate
maximum
allowable
value
6
5
4
3
2
1
Max. allowable symbol speed

0000: 2400 0001: Reserved 0010: 2800
0011: 3000 0100: 3200 0101: 3429
0
0e009e
Symbol rate
selection
criteria
7
6
5
Attenuation distortion property (-6dB to +6dB)

0000:-6 0001:-5 0010:-4 0011:-3 0100:-2
0101:-1 0110:0 0111:+1 1000:+2 1001:+3
1010:+4 1011:+5 1100:+6
4
3
2
1
Band end S/N (-6dB to +6dB)

0000:-6 0001:-5 0010:-4 0011:-3 0100:-2
0101:-1 0110:0 0111:+1 1000:+2 1001:+3
1010:+4 1011:+5 1100:+6
0
0e009f
Primary
channel data
rate
selection
criteria
7
6
5
4
3
2
V.34 reception gain correction (-4.0dB to

+3.5dB)
0000:0 0001:+0.5 0010:+1.0 0011:+1.5
0100:+2.0 0101:+2.5 0110:+3.0 0111:+3.5
1000:-4.0 1001:-3.5 1010:-3.0 1011:-2.5
1100:-2.0 1101:-1.5 1110:-1.0 1111:-0.5
Primary channel data rate selection criteria
(-8dB to +7dB)
I-317
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address

Bit
N
o
Items
1
0
Default
Contents
Setting
Japan
North
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
0000:-8 0001:-7 0010:-6 0011:-5 0100:-4

0101:-3 0110:-2 0111:-1 1000:0 1001:+1
1010:+2 1011:+3 1100:+4 1101:+5 1110:+6
1111:+7
11.20.2 0e00a*
Address
0e00a0
Items
V34
primary
channel
fallback
Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
No. of frame errors subjected to fallback (HEX)
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x03
0x03
0x03
XB
10
EQMVAL value for fallback (HEX)
0x40
0x40
0x40
XB
11
Timer value after V34 reception error used to

reset V34 off reception (min, HEX)
(Valid only when transmission side cannot be
specified)
0x0a
0x0a
0x0a
XB
12
No. of continuous success of V17 receptions

used to reset V34 off reception after V34
reception error (times, HEX)
(Valid only when transmission side can be
specified with Caller ID)
0x0a
0x0a
0x0a
XB
13
V34off function for manual reception

0: Enable
1: Disable
0x00
0x02
0x02
XB
14
0x01
0x01
0x01
XB
15
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00a1
V34
control
channel
fallback
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00a2
V34 off
Rx-V34
off time
after
error
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00a3
V34 off
Rx-V17
OK Rx
times to
reset V34
off Rx
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00a4
(Inhibit
of) V34
off RxFunction
ON/OFF
6
5
4
3
2
0e00a5
JBIG
paramete
r
V.34 OFF reset mode = No. of successful

consecutive V.17 reception times (ID specified)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
V.34 OFF reset mode = time (ID cannot be

specified)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
7
6
I-318
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
Bit
No
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x80
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x80
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x80
XB
16 - 19
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
1A
5
4
3
2
0e00a6 0e00a9
JBIG LO
size
Use of following FP JBIG option LO size at

reduction
0: No, 1: Yes
JBIG optional L0 capacity

0: No, 1: Yes
JBIG optional LO size used for reduction (HEX)

(setting range:0x01to0xffffffff)
[0] = HH, [1] = HL, [2] = LH, [3] = LL
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00aa
(Inhibit
of) JBIG
off RxFunction
ON/OFF
7
6
5
4
3
2
0e00ab
JBIG off
Rx-JBIG
off time
after
error
JBIG off function at A3 high-definition reception

(DIS re-transmission)
0: OFF, 1: ON
JBIG off function after JBIG reception error

0: Enable
1: Disable
Timer value after JBIG reception error to reset

JBIG off reception (min, HEX)(10 min. if 0)
0x0a
0x0a
0x0a
XB
1B
PBX dial tone detection frequency upper limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x31
0x00
0x00
XB
1C
PBX dial tone detection frequency lower limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x1f
0x00
0x00
XB
1D
PBX dial tone detection time or max. ON time

value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x32
0x00
0x00
XB
1E
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ac
PBX dial
tone
detection
frequenc
y upper
limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ad
PBX dial
tone
detection
frequenc
y lower
limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ae
PBX dial
tone
detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
I-319
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
1F
2
1
0
0e00af
PBX dial
tone ON
time min.
value
7
6
PBX dial tone ON time min. value (unit: 20ms,

HEX)
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.20.3 0e00b*
Address
0e00b0
Items
PBX dial
tone OFF
time max.
value
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
PBX dial tone OFF time max. value (unit: 20

ms, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
20
PBX dial tone OFF time min. value (unit: 20

ms, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
21
PBX dial tone waiting time or pre-pause time

(unit: 1 sec, HEX)
0x03
0x03
0x03
XB
22
Instantaneous shutdown time (unit: 20 ms,

HEX) or tone detection frequency (times, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
23
1st dial tone detection frequency upper limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x31
0x35
0x34
XB
24
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00b1
PBX dial
tone OFF
time min.
value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00b2
PBX dial
tone waiting
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00b3
PBX dial
tone
instantaneou
s break
detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00b4
1st dial tone

detection
frequency
upper limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I-320
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0e00b5
Items
Bit
N
o
1st dial tone

detection
frequency
lower limits
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
1st dial tone detection frequency lower limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x1f
0x23
0x1c
XB
25
1st dial tone detection time or ON time max.

0x32
0x32
0x1a
XB
26
1st dial tone ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
27
1st dial tone OFF time max. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
28
1st dial tone OFF time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
29
1st dial tone waiting time or pre-pause time

(unit: 1 sec, HEX)
0x03
0x03
0x04
XB
2A
Instantaneous shutdown detection time (unit:

20 ms, HEX) or tone detection frequency
(times, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x05
XB
2B
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00b6
1st dial tone

detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00b7
1st dial tone

ON time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00b8
1st dial tone

OFF time
max. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00b9
1st dial tone

OFF time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ba
1st dial tone

waiting time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00bb
1st dial tone

instantaneou
s break
detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I-321
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0e00bc
Items
Bit
N
o
2nd dial tone

detection
frequency
upper limits
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
2nd dial tone detection frequency upper limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x31
0x00
0x00
XB
2C
2nd dial tone detection frequency lower limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x1f
0x00
0x00
XB
2D
2nd dial tone detection time or ON time max.

0x08
0x00
0x00
XB
2E
2nd dial tone ON time min. value (20 ms, HEX)
0x02
0x00
0x00
XB
2F
Contents
Setting
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00bd
2nd dial tone

detection
frequency
lower limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00be
2nd dial tone

detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00bf
2nd dial tone

ON time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.20.4 0e00c*
Address
0e00c0
Items
2nd dial tone
OFF time
max. value
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
CSRC
2nd dial tone OFF time max. value (unit: 20

ms, HEX)
0x0a
0x00
0x00
XB
30
2nd dial tone OFF time min. value (20 ms,

HEX)
0x04
0x00
0x00
XB
31
2nd dial tone waiting time or pre-pause time

(unit: 1 sec, HEX)
0x03
0x03
0x03
XB
32
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00c1
2nd dial tone

OFF time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00c2
2nd dial tone

waiting time
7
6
5
I-322
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
4
3
2
1
0
0e00c3
2nd dial tone

instantaneou
s break
detection
time
7
6
5
Instantaneous shutdown detection time (unit:

20 ms, HEX) or tone detection frequency
(times, HEX)
0x03
0x00
0x00
XB
33
3rd dial tone detection frequency upper limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
34
3rd dial tone detection frequency lower limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
35
Detection frequency upper limit (unit: 10 Hz,

HEX)
0x31
0x00
0x00
XB
36
Detection frequency lower limit (unit: 10 Hz,

HEX)
0x1f
0x00
0x00
XB
37
Busy tone ON time max. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x1e
0x00
0x00
XB
38
Busy tone ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x14
0x00
0x00
XB
39
4
3
2
1
0
0e00c4
3rd dial tone

detection
frequency
upper limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00c5
3rd dial tone

detection
frequency
lower limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00c6
Busy tone
detection
frequency
upper limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00c7
Busy tone
detection
frequency
lower limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00c8
Busy tone
ON time
max. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00c9
Busy tone
ON time
min. value
7
6
5
I-323
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ca
Busy tone
OFF time
max. value
7
6
Busy tone OFF time max. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x1e
0x00
0x00
XB
3A
Busy tone OFF time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x14
0x00
0x00
XB
3B
Ringer detection frequency upper limit (unit: 1

Hz, HEX)
0x46
0x46
0x46
XB
3C
Ringer detection frequency lower limit (unit: 1

Hz, HEX)
0x0c
0x0c
0x0c
XB
3D
Ringer ON time max. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
3E
Ringer ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x0a
0x0a
0x08
XB
3F
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00cb
Busy tone
OFF time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00cc
Ringer
detection
frequency
upper limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00cd
Ringer
detection
frequency
lower limits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ce
Ringer ON
time max.
value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00cf
Ringer ON
time min.
value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I-324
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.20.5 0e00d*
Address
0e00d0
Items
Ringer OFF
time max.
value
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
Contents
Setting
North
Japan
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
Ringer OFF time max. value (unit: 100 ms,

HEX)
0x3c
0x3c
0x46
XB
40
Ringer OFF time min. value (unit: 100 ms,

HEX)
0x02
0x00
0x00
XB
41
PB dial signal transmission time (unit: 5 ms,

HEX)
0x15
0x19
0x15
XB
42
PB dial inter digit pause time (unit: 5 ms, HEX)
0x11
0x15
0x11
XB
43
10pps pulse dial break rate (%, HEX)
0x44
0x3d
0x3d
XB
44
10pps pulse dial inter digit pause (unit: 10 ms,

HEX)
0x68
0x68
0x5e
XB
45
20pps pulse dial brake rate (%, HEX)
0x44
0x3d
0x3d
XB
46
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00d1
Ringer OFF
time max.
value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00d2
PB dial
signal
transmission
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00d3
PB dial inter
digit pause
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00d4
10pps pulse
dial break
rate
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00d5
10pps pulse
dial inter
digit pause
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00d6
20pps pulse
dial break
rate
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
I-325
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
North
Japan
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
0
0e00d7
20pps pulse
dial inter
digit pause
7
6
20pps pulse dial inter digit pause (unit: 10 ms,

HEX)
0x59
0x40
0x5c
XB
47
PB signal transmission level (unit: 1 dBm, HEX)
0x0a
0x0a
0x06
XB
48
PB level difference (HL) (unit: 0.5 dBm, HEX)
0x04
0x04
0x04
XB
49
DCLOOP integration time at CML relay OFF

(unit: 5 ms, HEX) (Lower limit 20 ms)
0x50
0x50
0x50
XB
4A
DCLOOP integration time at CML relay ON

0x10
0x10
0x10
XB
4B
0x01
0x01
0x01
XB
4C
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
4D
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00d8
PB signal
transmission
level
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00d9
PB signal
level
difference
(HL)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00da
DcLoop
integration
time when
CML is set to
OFF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00db
DcLoop
integration
time when
CML is set to
ON
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00dc
Pause time
7
6
5
4
3
2
Pause time (unit: sec, HEX)
1
0
0e00dd
DCLOOP
check mode
DC-LOOP check
0: No
1: Always
6
5
4
3
2
I-326
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
North
Japan
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
1
0
0e00de
DCLOOP
waiting time
DCLOOP waiting time (unit: 100 ms, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
4E
DCLOOP instantaneous shutdown allowable

time (unit: 10 ms, HEX) (at the time of calling,
CML ON to end of dialing)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
4F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00df
DCLOOP
instantaneou
s shutdown
allowed time
(ph.A)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.20.6 0e00e*
Address
0e00e0
Items
DCLOOP
instantaneou
s shutdown
allowed time
(ph.B)
Default
Bit
N
o
7
6
5
Contents
Setting
DCLOOP instantaneous shutdown allowable

time (unit: 10ms, HEX) (after completion of
dialing and after CML ON at the time of
reception)
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
50
0x12
0x10
0x10
XB
51
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
52
0x11
0x01
0x01
XB
53
4
3
2
1
0
0e00e1
Dial mode
RING DET
mode
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00e2
1st/2nd DT
detection
parameter
RING detection mode

01: No. of times
10: TIme
Pulse format
00: General
01: SW 10: NO
Dialing method
00: PB 01: 10pps
10: 20pps 11: 16pps
7
6
5
4
3
At 2nd DT detection DP dialing only
2
1
0
0e00e3
Tone
detection
1st DT2 type
7
6
5
1300Hz
0: No
1: Yes
I-327
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0e00e4
Items
No. of busy
tone
detection

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
BusyTone
0: No
1: Yes
Busy Tone detection is fixed to ON during TEL/
FAX selection.
PBX DT
0: No
1: Yes
3rd DT
0: No
1: Yes
2nd DT
0: No
1: Yes
1st DT
0: No
1: Yes
Busy tone detection frequency (HEX)
0x02
0x00
0x00
XB
54
Ring detection frequency (times, HEX)
0x02
0x02
0x02
XB
55
Ring detection time (sec, HEX)
0x06
0x06
0x06
XB
56
Time waiting response from remote station

after calling (unit: sec, HEX)
0x37
0x37
0x37
XB
57
Answering machine CNG detection time

(unit: 10sec, HEX) (1 - 7)
0x64
0x64
0x64
XB
58
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00e5
No. of RING
detection
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00e6
RING
detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00e7
Time to wait
for a
response
from a
remote
station
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00e8
Answering
machine
function
7
6
5
4
Answer mode
0: OFF
1: ON
Answering machine DCLOOP detection time

(unit: 5sec, HEX) (1 - 15)
2
1
0
I-328
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
0e00e9 - Remote
0e00ea reception
password

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ASCII [2]
0x2a
0x20
0x2a
0x20
0x2a
0x20
XB
59 - 5A
RingBackTone signal transmission time (unit:

1000 ms, HEX)
0x14
0x14
0x14
XB
5B
CAR ON time max. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x28
0x00
0x00
XB
5C
CAR ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x0a
0x00
0x00
XB
5D
CAR OFF time max. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x28
0x00
0x00
XB
5E
CAR OFF time min. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x0a
0x00
0x00
XB
5F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00eb
RBT
transmission
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ec
CAR signal
ON time
max. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ed
CAR signal
ON time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ee
CAR signal
OFF time
max. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00ef
CAR signal
OFF time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.20.7 0e00f*
Address
0e00f0
Items
CAR signal
detection
frequency
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
Contents
CAR (information receiving terminal start
signal) detection frequency (times, HEX)
I-329
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x01
0x00
0x00
XB
60
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address

Bit
N
o
Items
Default
CSRC
Contents
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ID waiting time after Caller ID/DIAL IN primary

response (unit 1000 ms, HEX)
0x05
0x00
0x00
XB
61
Password signal (DTMF) detection waiting

time (unit: 100 ms, HEX)
0x14
0x14
0x14
XB
62
Automatic judgment function

0: OFF
1: ON
0x83
0x00
0x00
XB
63
0x0A
0x0A
0x0A
XB
64
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
XB
65 6F
4
3
2
1
0
0e00f1
Caller ID signal
waiting time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00f2
Remote
reception
password entry
waiting time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e00f3
Normal/number
display
automatic line
determination
function
6
5
4
3
2
V23 signal detection waiting time when judged

(x1 sec, HEX)
1
0
0e00f4
Monitor
speaker
(Transmission
signal sound)
PB tone monitoring at the time of off-hook
6
5
Monitor speaker in communication

00: OFF
11: ON
Speaker volume (HEX)(0-1F)
3
2
1
0
0e00f5 0e00ff
Numeric ID [20]
7
6
5

justify to the left and insert space at the top (no
NULL terminator).
4
3
2
1
0
11.20.8 0e010*
Address
Items
0e0100 0e0108
Numeric
ID [20]
Bit
N
o
7
6
5
Default
Contents
Setting

to the left and insert space at the top (no NULL
terminator).
I-330
Japan
ALL
0x20
North
America
ALL 0x20
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
ALL
0x20
XB
70 - 78
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x0f
0x0f
0x0f
XB
79
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
7A
0x3f
0x3f
0x3f
XB
7B
0xff
0xff
0xff
XB
7C
0xff
0xff
0xff
XB
7D
3
2
1
0
0e0109
PBX
connectio
n mode
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PBX call
0000 - 1001: keypad 1011: Reserved
1100: Reserved 1101: Reserved
1110: Reserved 1111: PBX unconnected
0
0e010a
Protocol
monitor
7
6
5
TEL/FAX switching RBT monitor sound

0: OFF
1: ON
Inhibit the speaker to sound when off-hook

button is pressed
1: Inhibit
0: Not inhibit
3
2
1
0
0e010b
0e010c
Reception
function
(disable)
PBX
outside
line
access
code 1
(BCD)
7
6
5
Name display
0: Not inhibit
1: Inhibit
Compulsory Memory RX
0: Not inhibit
1: Inhibit
No. of caller / name display (number display /

(display of subscribers for trace-back system))
0: Not inhibit
1: Inhibit
Closed-area communication
0: Not inhibit
1: Inhibit
Remote RX
0: Not inhibit
1: Inhibit
DialIn
0: Not inhibit
1: Inhibit
1st digit
6
5
4
3
2nd digit
2
1
0
0e010d
PBX
outside
line
access
code 2
(BCD)
3rd digit
6
5
4
3
4th digit
2
1
I-331
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
7E
0x64
0x64
0x64
XB
7F
0
0e010e
Limit of
long size
reception
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0e010f
Max. size
of long
original
received
(In the
case of
400 dpi or
less)
Limit of long size reception

0: Limit
1: Unlimited
When the resolution for reception is 400 dpi or

less, the size of a long original received that is
regarded as an error
(The maximum size is a decimal value x 10
mm. 0 is regarded as 1000 mm.)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.20.9 0e011*
Address
0e0110
Items
Max. size of
long original
received
(In the case
of 600 dpi or
less)
Bit
N
o
7
6
5
4
3
Default
CSRC
Contents
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
When the resolution for reception is 600 dpi,

the size of a long original received that is
(The maximum length is a decimal value x 10
mm. 0 is regarded as the same as a value less
than 400 dpi above.)
0x64
0x64
0x64
XB
80
0x0E
0x0E
0x0E
XB
81
0x14
0x14
0x14
XB
82
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
XB
83 - 8D
2
1
0
0e0111
Voice
response
output level
adjustment
7
6
5
4
3
2
Voice response volume (HEX)

0000: min - 1111: max
1
0
0e0112
Monitor
speaker
(Received
signal sound)
7
6
5
4
Speaker volume (HEX) (0-1F)
3
2
1
0
0e0113 - Reserved
0e011d area
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I-332
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0e011e

Default
Bit
N
o
Items
External
phone off
hook
determination
threshold
value
7
6
Contents
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XB
8E
External phone off hook determination

threshold value current (unit: 1 mA, HEX)
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.20.10 0f000*
Address
0f0000
Items
Receptio
n main
scan line
resolutio
n ability
[0]
Default
Bit
No
Contents
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0xaa
0xaa
0xaa
X2
00
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
01
0xbb
0xbb
0xbb
X2
02
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
03
0x1f
0x1f
0x1f
X2
04
0x0e
0x0e
0x0e
X2
05
4
3
16pels/mm
2
1
8pels/mm
0
0f0001
0f0002
0f0003
0f0004
0f0005
Receptio
n main
scan line
resolutio
n ability
[0]
Receptio
n sub
scannin
g
resolutio
n ability
[0]
Receptio
n sub
scannin
g
resolutio
n ability
[1]
Receptio
n coding
method
ability
Receive
d
docume
7
6
5
4
3
2
(1200dpi)
(800dpi)
600dpi
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
100dpi
15.4 l/mm
2
1
7.7 l/mm
3.85 l/mm
7
6
5
4
3
2
(1200dpi)
(800dpi)
600dpi
7
6
5
(JPEG)
JBIG
MMR
MR
MH
THRU
7
6
5
(Legal)
I-333
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0f0006

Default
Items
Bit
No
nt width
ability
(Letter)
A3
B4
A4
(A5)
Receive
d
docume
nt length
ability
Contents
Setting
7
6
Unlimited
(Legal)
(Letter)
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x46
0x46
0x46
X2
06
0x1b
0x1b
0x1b
X2
07
0xfc
0xfc
0xfc
X2
08
0xff
0xff
0xff
X2
09
0x3f
0x3f
0x3f
X2
0A
0f0007
Receptio
n speed
ability [0]
B4
A4
(A5)
7
6
5
4
V.29-96
V.29-72
0f0008
0f0009
0f000a
0f000b
Receptio
n speed
ability [1]
Receptio
n speed
ability [2]
Receptio
n speed
ability [3]
Receptio
n MSLT
ability
V.27-48
V.27-24
V.17-144
V.17-120
V.17-96
V.17-72
V.33-144
V.33-120
(TCM-96)
(TCM-72)
V.34-192
V.34-168
V.34-144
V.34-120
V.34-96
V.34-72
V.34-48
V.34-24
7
6
5
V.34-336
V.34-312
V.34-288
V.34-264
V.34-240
V.34-216
T3.85 or 200*100dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
0B
T7.7 or 200*200dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
0C
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0f000c
Receptio
n MSLT
ability
7
6
5
I-334
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
4
3
2
1
0
0f000d
Receptio
n MSLT
ability
T11.55 or 300*300dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
0D
T15.4 or 400*400dpi or 600*600dpi (0-40) ms

unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
0E
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
0F
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x39
0x39
0x39
X2
10
0x07
0x07
0x07
X2
11
ALL
0x00
ALL 0x00
ALL
0x00
X2
12 - 1F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0f000e
Receptio
n MSLT
ability
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0f000f
Receptio
n ECM
ability
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ECM reception capability

0: OFF
1: ON
11.20.11 0f001*
Address
0f0010
Items
Receptio
n
protocol
ability
Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
6
5
FAX-CSRC
V8/V34
DIAG
2
1
0
0f0011
0f0012 0f001f
Receptio
n option
frame
ability
Reserve
d area
G3S
7
6
5
4
(BFT)
(BTM)
PWD
(SEP)
SUB
7
6
5
4
3
I-335
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
Japan
North
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
2
1
0
11.20.12 10000*
Address
100000
Items
Transmissio
n main scan
line
resolution
instruction
[0]
Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x22
0x22
0x22
X2
40
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
41
0x11
0x11
0x11
X2
42
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
43
0x1f
0x1f
0x1f
X2
44
0x0e
0x0e
0x0e
X2
45
4
3
16pels/mm
2
1
8pels/mm
0
100001
100002
Transmissio
n main scan
line
resolution
instruction
[1]
Transmissio
n sub
scanning
resolution
instruction
[0]
7
6
5
4
3
2
(1200dpi)
(800dpi)
600dpi
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
100dpi
15.4 l/mm
100003
100004
100005
Transmissio
n sub
scanning
resolution
instruction
[1]
Transmissio
n coding
method
instruction
Transmissio
n document
width
instruction
7.7 l/mm
3.85 l/mm
7
6
5
4
3
2
(1200dpi)
(800dpi)
600dpi
7
6
5
(JPEG)
JBIG
MMR
MR
MH
THRU
7
6
5
(Legal)
(Letter)
A3
B4
A4
(A5)
I-336
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
100006

Default
Items
Bit
N
o
Transmissio
n document
length
instruction
Unlimited
(Legal)
(Letter)
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x46
0x46
0x46
X2
46
0x1b
0x1b
0x1b
X2
47
0xf0
0xf0
0xf0
X2
48
0xff
0xff
0xff
X2
49
0x3f
0x3f
0x3f
X2
4A
100007
Transmissio
n speed
instruction
[0]
B4
A4
(A5)
7
6
5
4
V.29-96
V.29-72
100008
100009
10000a
10000b
Transmissio
n speed
instruction
[1]
Transmissio
n speed
instruction
[2]
Transmissio
n speed
instruction
[3]
Transmissio
n MSLT
instruction
V.27-48
V.27-24
V.17-144
V.17-120
V.17-96
V.17-72
V.33-144
V.33-120
(TCM-96)
(TCM-72)
V.34-192
V.34-168
V.34-144
V.34-120
V.34-96
V.34-72
V.34-48
V.34-24
7
6
5
V.34-336
V.34-312
V.34-288
V.34-264
V.34-240
V.34-216
T3.85 or 200*100dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
4B
T7.7 or 200*200dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
4C
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
10000c
Transmissio
n MSLT
instruction
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I-337
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
10000d
Items
Bit
N
o
Transmissio
n MSLT
instruction
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
T11.55 or 300*300dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
4D
T15.4 or 400*400dpi or 600*600dpi (0-40) ms

unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
4E
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
4F
5
4
3
2
1
0
10000e
Transmissio
n MSLT
instruction
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
10000f
Transmissio
n ECM
instruction
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ECM transmission frame size

0: 256
1: 64
ECM transmission instruction

0: OFF
1: ON
11.20.13 10001*
Address
100010
Items
Bit
N
o
Transmissi
on
protocol
instruction
Default
Contents
Setting
7
5
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x11
0x11
0x11
X2
50
0x00
0x00
0x00
X2
51
ALL
0x00
ALL 0x00
ALL
0x00
X2
52 - 5F
FAX-CSRC
V8/V34
DIAG
2
1
0
100011
Transmissi
on option
frame
instruction
100012 - Reserved
10001f
area
G3S
7
6
5
4
(BFT)
(BTM)
PWD
(SEP)
SUB
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
I-338
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
Japan
North
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
11.21 FAX setting (Address parameter list: for sub line)

11.21.1 0e01a*
Address
0e01a0
Items
Transmissio
n ATT
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
Contents
Setting
Tone signal/FSK transmission ATT (HEX) 1

dBm every (0 - -15dBm)
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0xAA
0xAA
0xAA
XC
00
0x0A
0x0A
0x0A
XC
01
0x03
0x03
0x03
XC
02
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
03
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
04
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
05
5
4
3
2
High-speed signal transmission ATT (HEX) 1

dBm every (0 - -15dBm)
1
0
0e01a1
CED
Transmissio
n ATT
7
6
5
4
3
2
CED/ANS transmission ATT (HEX) 1 dBm

every (0 - -15dBm)
1
0
0e01a2
CD/SED ON
level
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01a3
Transmissio
n cable
amplitude
EQL
CD/SED ON level [dBm]

00: -33, 01: -38, 10: -43, 11: -48
7
6
5
4
Transmission cable EQL0

00: 0dB, 01: 4dB, 10: 8dB, 11: 12dB
3
2
1
0
0e01a4
Reception
cable
amplitude
EQL
7
6
5
4
Reception cable EQL

00: 0dB, 01: 4dB, 10: 8dB, 11: 12dB
3
2
1
0
0e01a5
TEL/FAX
switching
Time from vocal response to RBT transmission

(CNG detection waiting time 2)
0: 4 sec.
1: 2 sec.
Time from reception to voice response

transmission (CNG detection waiting time 1)
0: 2 sec.
1: 4 sec.
TEL/FAX switching mode

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
I-339
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
External telephone no ringing setting

0: Disabled
1: Enabled (disconnected)
TEL/FAX switching ON response details

0: Voice response + RBT transmission
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
06
0x40
0x40
0x40
XC
07
0x02
0x02
0x02
XC
08
0x10
0x10
0x10
XC
09
0x20
0x20
0x20
XC
0A
0x14
0x14
0x14
XC
0B
2
1
0
0e01a6
Ring Back
Tone
parameter
7
6
5
RBT form
000: No, 001: Japan, 010: US, 011: UK, 100:
Germany, 101 - 111: Others
CED transmitted upon TEL/FAX switching
RBT transmission level (HEX) 0 - -15 dBm
2
1
0
0e01a7
Operated in
international
mode
DIS waiting frequency

0: Always once, 1: Twice in overseas
communication
Overseas communication
0: No, 1: Yes
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01a8
Starting
speed in
international
mode (V29
modem)
7
6
5
4
9600/V.29bps
7200/V.29bps
0e01a9
Starting
speed in
international
mode (V17
or V33
modem)
4800/V.27bps
2400/V.27bps
14400bps/V.17
12000bps/V.17
9600bps/V.17
7200bps/V.17
3
2
1
0
0e01aa
0e01ab
Starting
speed in
international
mode (V34)
CD OFF
timer
33600bps/V.34
31200bps/V.34
28800bps/V.34
26400bps/V.34
24000bps/V.34
21600bps/V.34
19200bps/V.34
16800bps/V.34
CD OFF timer (unit: 100 ms, HEX)
6
5
4
3
2
I-340
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
1
0
0e01ac
CD ON
integration
time
CD ON integration time (unit: 100 ms, HEX)
0x06
0x06
0x06
XC
0C
V34 control ch data rate

0: 1200, 1: 2400
0x05
0x05
0x05
XC
0D
0x66
0x66
0x66
XC
0E
0x08
0x08
0x08
XC
0F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01ad
Symbol
speed
maximum
allowable
value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Max. allowable symbol speed

0000: 2400, 0001: Reserved, 0010: 2800
0011: 3000, 0100: 3200, 0101: 3429
0
0e01ae
Symbol rate
selection
criteria
7
6
5
Attenuation distortion property (-6dB - +6dB)

0000:-6, 0001:-5, 0010:-4, 0011:-3, 0100:-2,
0101:-1, 0110:0, 0111:+1, 1000:+2, 1001:+3,
1010:+4, 1011:+5, 1100:+6
4
3
2
1
Band end S/N (-6dB - +6dB)

0000:-6, 0001:-5, 0010:-4, 0011:-3, 0100:-2,
0101:-1, 0110:0, 0111:+1, 1000:+2, 1001:+3,
1010:+4, 1011:+5, 1100:+6
0
0e01af
Primary
channel data
rate
selection
criteria
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
V.34 reception gain correction (-4.0dB +3.5dB)

0000:0, 0001:+0.5, 0010:+1.0, 0011:+1.5,
0100:+2.0, 0101:+2.5, 0110:+3.0, 0111:+3.5,
1000:-4.0, 1001:-3.5, 1010:-3.0, 1011:-2.5,
1100:-2.0, 1101:-1.5, 1110:-1.0, 1111:-0.5
Primary channel data rate selection criteria
(-8dB - +7dB)
0000:-8, 0001:-7, 0010:-6, 0011:-5, 0100:-4,
0101:-3, 0110:-2, 0111:-1, 1000:0, 1001:+1,
1010:+2, 1011:+3, 1100:+4, 1101:+5, 1110:+6,
1111:+7
11.21.2 0e01b*
Address
0e01b0
Items
V34
primary
channel
fall back
Bit
N
o
7
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
No. of fall back frame errors (Hex)
0x03
0x03
0x03
XC
10
Fall back EQMVAL value (HEX)
0x40
0x40
0x40
XC
11
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01b1
V34
control
channel
fall back
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
I-341
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0
0e01b2
V34 OFF
reception V34 OFF
time after
error
7
6
5
Timer value after V34 reception error to reset

the V34 OFF reception (min., HEX)
(Enabled only when the transmission side
cannot be specified)
0x0a
0x0a
0x0a
XC
12
No. of successful consecutive V17 reception

times to reset V34 OFF reception after V34
reception error (No. of times, HEX)
(Enabled only when the transmission side can
be specified with Caller ID)
0x0a
0x0a
0x0a
XC
13
V34 OFF function at manual reception

0: Enabled,
1: Disabled
0x00
0x02
0x02
XC
14
0x01
0x01
0x01
XC
15
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x80
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x80
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x80
XC
16 - 19
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
1A
4
3
2
1
0
0e01b3
0e01b4
V34 OFF
reception No. of
successful
consecutiv
e V17
reception
times to
reset V34
OFF
V34 OFF
reception Function
switch
(disabled)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
0e01b5
JBIG
parameter
V.34 OFF reset mode = No. of successful

consecutive V.17 reception times (ID specified)
0: Enabled,
1: Disabled
V.34 OFF reset mode = time (ID cannot be

specified)
0: Enabled,
1: Disabled
7
6
5
4
3
2
0e01b6 - JBIG L0
0e01b9
size
Use of following FP JBIG option LO size at

reduction
0: No, 1: Yes
JBIG optional L0 capacity

0: No, 1: Yes
JBIG optional LO size used for reduction (hex)

(setting rangeF0x01 - 0xffffffff)
[0] = HH, [1] = HL, [2] = LH, [3] = LL
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01ba
JBIG OFF
reception Function
switch
(disabled)
7
6
5
4
3
2
I-342
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0e01bb
Items
JBIG OFF
reception JBIG OFF
time after
error

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
JBIG OFF function at A3 high-definition

reception (DIS re-transmission)
0: OFF, 1: ON
JBIG OFF function after JBIG reception error

0: Enabled,
1: Disabled
Timer value after JBIG reception error to reset

JBIG OFF reception (min., HEX) (10 min. in
case of 0)
0x0a
0x0a
0x0a
XC
1B
PBX dial tone detection frequency upper limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x31
0x00
0x00
XC
1C
PBX dial tone detection frequency lower limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x1f
0x00
0x00
XC
1D
PBX dial tone detection time or max. ON time

0x32
0x00
0x00
XC
1E
PBX dial tone ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
1F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01bc
PBX dial
tone
detection
frequency
upper limit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01bd
PBX dial
tone
detection
frequency
lower limit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01be
PBX dial
tone
detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01bf
PBX dial
tone ON
time min.
value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.21.3 0e01c*
Address
0e01c0
Items
PBX dial
tone OFF
time max.
value
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
Contents
Setting
PBX dial tone OFF time max. value (unit: 20

ms, HEX)
5
4
3
2
I-343
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
20
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
1
0
0e01c1
PBX dial
tone OFF
time min.
value
7
6
PBX dial tone OFF time min. value (unit: 20

ms, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
21
PBX dial tone waiting time or pre-pause time

(unit: 1 sec, HEX)
0x03
0x03
0x03
XC
22
Instantaneous break detection time (unit: 20

ms, HEX) or tone detection frequency (times,
HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
23
1st dial tone detection frequency upper limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x31
0x35
0x34
XC
24
1st dial tone detection frequency lower limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x1f
0x23
0x1c
XC
25
1st dial tone detection time or max. ON time

0x32
0x32
0x1a
XC
26
1st dial tone ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
27
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01c2
PBX dial
tone waiting
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01c3
PBX dial
tone
instantaneou
s break
detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01c4
1st dial tone

detection
frequency
upper limit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01c5
1st dial tone

detection
frequency
lower limit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01c6
1st dial tone

detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01c7
1st dial tone

ON time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
I-344
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
1st dial tone OFF time max. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
28
1st dial tone OFF time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
29
1st dial tone waiting time or pre-pause time

(unit: 1 sec, HEX)
0x03
0x03
0x04
XC
2A

HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x05
XC
2B
2nd dial tone detection frequency upper limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x31
0x00
0x00
XC
2C
2nd dial tone detection frequency lower limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x1f
0x00
0x00
XC
2D
2nd dial tone detection time or max. ON time

0x08
0x00
0x00
XC
2E
1
0
0e01c8
1st dial tone

OFF time
max. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01c9
1st dial tone

OFF time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01ca
1st dial tone

waiting time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01cb
1st dial tone

instantaneou
s break
detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01cc
2nd dial tone

detection
frequency
upper limit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01cd
2nd dial tone

detection
frequency
lower limit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01ce
2nd dial tone

detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
I-345
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x02
0x00
0x00
XC
2F
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
1
0
0e01cf
2nd dial tone

ON time
min. value
7
6
2nd dial tone ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.21.4 0e01d*
Address
0e01d0
Items
2nd dial tone
OFF time
max. value
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
2nd dial tone OFF time max. value (unit: 20

ms, HEX)
0x0a
0x00
0x00
XC
30
2nd dial tone OFF time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x04
0x00
0x00
XC
31
2nd dial tone waiting time or pre-pause time

(unit: 1 sec, HEX)
0x03
0x03
0x03
XC
32

HEX)
0x03
0x00
0x00
XC
33
3rd dial tone detection frequency upper limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
34
3rd dial tone detection frequency lower limit

(unit: 10 Hz, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
35
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01d1
2nd dial tone

OFF time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01d2
2nd dial tone

waiting time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01d3
2nd dial tone

instantaneou
s break
detection
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01d4
3rd dial tone

detection
frequency
upper limit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01d5
3rd dial tone

detection
I-346
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
frequency
lower limit

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01d6
Busy tone
detection
frequency
upper limit
7
6
Detection frequency upper limit (unit: 10 Hz,

HEX)
0x31
0x00
0x00
XC
36
Detection frequency lower limit (unit: 10 Hz,

HEX)
0x1f
0x00
0x00
XC
37
Busy tone ON time max. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x1e
0x00
0x00
XC
38
Busy tone ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x14
0x00
0x00
XC
39
Busy tone OFF time max. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x1e
0x00
0x00
XC
3A
Busy tone OFF time min. value (unit: 20 ms,

HEX)
0x14
0x00
0x00
XC
3B
Ringer detection frequency upper limit (unit: 1

Hz, HEX)
0x46
0x46
0x46
XC
3C
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01d7
Busy tone
detection
frequency
lower limit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01d8
Busy tone
ON time
max. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01d9
Busy tone
ON time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01da
Busy tone
OFF time
max. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01db
Busy tone
OFF time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01dc
Ringer
detection
I-347
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
frequency
upper limit

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01dd
Ringer
detection
frequency
lower limit
7
6
Ringer detection frequency lower limit (unit: 1

Hz, HEX)
0x0c
0x0c
0x0c
XC
3D
Ringer ON time max. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
3E
Ringer ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x0a
0x0a
0x08
XC
3F
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01de
Ringer ON
time max.
value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01df
Ringer ON
time min.
value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.21.5 0e01e*
Address
0e01e0
Items
Ringer OFF
time max.
value
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
Contents
Setting
North
Japan
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
Ringer OFF time max. value (unit: 100 ms,

HEX)
0x3c
0x3c
0x46
XC
40
Ringer OFF time min. value (unit: 100 ms,

HEX)
0x02
0x00
0x00
XC
41
PB dial signal transmission time (unit: 5 ms,

HEX)
0x15
0x19
0x15
XC
42
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01e1
Ringer OFF
time min.
value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01e2
PB dial
signal
transmission
time
7
6
5
4
I-348
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Bit
N
o
Default
Contents
Setting
PB dial inter-digit pause time (unit: 5 ms, HEX)
0x11
10 pps pulse dial break rate (%, HEX)
10 pps pulse dial inter digit pause (unit: 10 ms,

HEX)
North
Japan
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x15
0x11
XC
43
0x44
0x3d
0x3d
XC
44
0x68
0x68
0x5e
XC
45
20 pps pulse dial break rate (%, HEX)
0x44
0x3d
0x3d
XC
46
20 pps pulse dial inter-digit pause (unit: 10 ms,

HEX)
0x59
0x40
0x5c
XC
47
PB signal transmission level (unit: 1 dBm, HEX)
0x0a
0x0a
0x06
XC
48
PB signal level difference (HL) (unit: 0.5 dBm,

HEX)
0x04
0x04
0x04
XC
49
3
2
1
0
0e01e3
PB dial interdigit pause
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01e4
10 pps pulse
dial break
rate
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01e5
10 pps pulse
dial interdigit pause
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01e6
20 pps pulse
dial break
rate
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01e7
20 pps pulse
dial interdigit pause
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01e8
PB signal
transmission
level
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01e9
PB signal
level
difference
(HL)
7
6
5
4
I-349
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
North
Japan
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
3
2
1
0
0e01ea
DCLOOP
integration
time at CML
OFF
7
6
DCLOOP integration time at CML relay OFF

0x50
0x50
0x50
XC
4A
DCLOOP integration time at CML relay ON

0x10
0x10
0x10
XC
4B
0x01
0x01
0x01
XC
4C
DC-LOOP check
0: No, 1: Always
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
4D
DC-LOOP waiting time (unit: 100 ms, HEX)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
4E
DC-LOOP instantaneous break allowable time

(unit: 10 ms, HEX) (at the time of calling, CML
ON to end of dialing)
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
4F
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01eb
DCLOOP
integration
time at CML
ON
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01ec
Pause time
7
6
5
4
3
2
Pause time (unit:sec, HEX)
1
0
0e01ed
DC-LOOP
check mode
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01ee
DC-LOOP
waiting time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01ef
DC-LOOP
instantaneou
s break
allowable
time (ph.A)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I-350
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.21.6 0e01f*
Address
0e01f0
Items
DC-LOOP
instantaneou
s break
allowable
time (ph.B)
Default
Bit
N
o
7
6
5
Contents
Setting
DC-LOOP instantaneous break allowable time

(unit: 10ms, HEX) (after completion of dialing
and after CML ON at the time of reception)
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
50
0x12
0x10
0x10
XC
51
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
52
0x11
0x01
0x01
XC
53
4
3
2
1
0
0e01f1
Dial mode
RING DET
mode
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01f2
1st/2nd DT
detection
parameter
RING detection mode

01: No. of times, 10: Time
Pulse format
00: General, 01: SW, 10: NO
Dialing method
00: PB, 01: 10pps, 10: 20pps, 11: 16pps
7
6
5
4
3
At 2nd DT detection DP dialing only
2
1
0
0e01f3
0e01f4
Tone
detection
No. of busy
tone
detection
times
1st DT2 type
7
6
5
1300Hz
0: No,
1: Yes
BusyTone
0: No,
1: Yes
PBX DT
0: No,
1: Yes
3rd Dt
0: No,
1: Yes
2nd DT
0: No,
1: Yes
1st DT
0: No,
1: Yes
No. of busy tone detection times (HEX)
0x02
0x00
0x00
XC
54
No. of RING detection times (times, HEX)
0x02
0x02
0x02
XC
55
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01f5
No. of RING
detection
times
7
6
5
4
3
2
I-351
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
1
0
0e01f6
RING
detection
time
Ring detection time (sec, HEX)
0x06
0x06
0x06
XC
56
Remote station response waiting time at calling

(unit:sec, HEX)
0x37
0x37
0x37
XC
57
Answering machine CNG detection time

(unit: 10 sec, HEX) (1-7)
0x64
0x64
0x64
XC
58
ASCII[2]
0x2a
0x20
0x2a
0x20
0x2a
0x20
XC
59 - 5A
RingBackTone signal transmission time (unit:

1000 ms, HEX)
0x14
0x14
0x14
XC
5B
CAR ON time max. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x28
0x00
0x00
XC
5C
CAR ON time min. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x0a
0x00
0x00
XC
5D
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01f7
Remote
station
response
waiting time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01f8
Answering
machine
function
7
6
5
4
Answer mode
0: OFF,
1: ON
Answering machine DC-LOOP detection time

(unit: 5 sec, HEX) (1-15)
2
1
0
0e01f9 0e01fa
Remote
reception
password
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01fb
RBT
transmission
time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01fc
CAR signal
ON time
max. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01fd
CAR signal
ON time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
I-352
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
2
1
0
0e01fe
CAR signal
OFF time
max. value
CAR OFF time max. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x28
0x00
0x00
XC
5E
CAR OFF time min. value (unit: 20 ms, HEX)
0x0a
0x00
0x00
XC
5F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e01ff
CAR signal
OFF time
min. value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.21.7 0e020*
Address
Items
0e0200
No. of CAR
signal detection
times
Bit
N
o
7
6
Default
Contents
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
No. of CAR (information reception terminal

start signal) detection times (times, HEX)
0x01
0x00
0x00
XC
60
ID waiting time after Caller ID/DIAL IN primary

response (unit 1000 ms, HEX)
0x05
0x00
0x00
XC
61
Password signal (DTMF) detection waiting

time (unit: 100 ms, HEX)
0x14
0x14
0x14
XC
62
Automatic distinction function

0: OFF,
1: ON
0x83
0x00
0x00
XC
63
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0201
Caller ID signal
waiting time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0202
Remote
reception
password entry
waiting time
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0203
Normal/number
display
automatic line
distinction
function
6
5
4
3
2
V23 signal detection waiting time when

distinguished (x1 sec, HEX)
I-353
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x10
0x10
0x10
XC
64
ASCII [20] When ID is less than 20 digits, leftjustify and insert a space at the head. (No
NULL terminator)
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
XC
65 6F
Contents
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
ASCII [20] When ID is less than 20 digits, leftjustify and insert a space at the head. (No
NULL terminator)
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
ALL
0x20
XC
70 - 78
0x0f
0x0f
0x0f
XC
79
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
7A
0x3f
0x3f
0x3f
XC
7B
0
0e0204
Monitor
speaker
(Transmission
signal sound)
PB tone monitor at off-hook
6
5
Monitor speaker in communication

00: OFF
11: ON
3
2
1
0
0e0205 Numeric ID [20]
- 0e020f
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.21.8 0e021*
Address
Items
Bit
N
o
0e0210
0e0218
Numeric ID [20]
7
6
5
Default
CSRC
4
3
2
1
0
0e0219
PBX
connection
mode
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PBX call
0000 - 1001: Ten-key, 1011: Reserved, 1100:
Reserved, 1101: Reserved
1110: Reserved, 1111: PBX unconnected
0
0e021a
Protocol
monitor
7
6
Speaker selection
0: FK-102 side
1: FL-102 side
TEL/FAX switching RBT monitor sound

0: OFF,
1: ON
Speaker sounding disabled when off-hook

button is pressed
1: Disabled,
0: Not disabled
3
2
1
0
0e021b
Reception
function
(disabled)
7
6
I-354
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
0e021c
Items
PBX outside
line access
code 1 (BCD)

Default
Bit
N
o
Contents
Remote station name display (name display)

(variable)
0: Enabled,
1: Disabled
Reserved
(fixed at 1)
Remote station No./name display (variable)

0: Enabled,
1: Disabled
Closed Network RX (variable)

0: Valid
1: Prohibited
Be sure to set the same value as that for the
main line. (Impossible of each setting)
Reserved
(Fixed at 1)
Reserved
(Fixed at 1)
1st digit
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0xff
0xff
0xff
XC
7C
0xff
0xff
0xff
XC
7D
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
7E
0x64
XC
7F
6
5
4
3
2nd digit
2
1
0
0e021d
PBX outside
line access
code 2 (BCD)
3rd digit
6
5
4
3
4th digit
2
1
0
0e021e
Limit of long
size reception
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0e021f
Max. size of
long original
received
(In the case of
400 dpi or less)
Limit of long size reception

0: Limit
1: Unlimited
When the resolution for reception is 400 dpi or

less, the size of a long original received that is
(The maximum size is a decimal value x 10
mm. 0 is regarded as 1000 mm.)
0x64
0x64
Contents
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x64
0x64
0x64
XC
80
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.21.9 0e022*
Address
0e0220
Items
Max. size of
long original
received
Bit
N
o
7
6
5
Default
When the resolution for reception is 600 dpi,

the size of a long original received that is
I-355
CSRC
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
Bit
N
o
(In the case of

600 dpi or less)
4
3
2
Default
Contents
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x0E
0x0E
0x0E
XC
81
0x14
0x14
0x14
XC
82
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
ALL
0x00
XC
83 - 8D
0x00
0x00
0x00
XC
8E
(The maximum length is a decimal value x 10

mm. 0 is regarded as the same as a value less
than 400 dpi above.)
1
0
0e0221
Voice response
output level
adjustment
7
6
5
4
3
2
Voice response volume (HEX)

0000: min - 1111: max
1
0
0e0222
Monitor
speaker
(Received
signal sound)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e0223
0e022d
Reserved area
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0e022e
External phone
off hook
determination
threshold value
7
6
External phone off hook determination

threshold value current (unit: 1 mA, HEX)
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.21.10 0f002*
Address
0f0020
Items
Recepti
on main
scan
resolutio
n
capacity
[0]
Default
Bit
No
Contents
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0xaa
0xaa
0xaa
X2
20
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
21
4
3
16pels/mm
2
1
8pels/mm
0
0f0021
Recepti
on main
scan
resolutio
n
capacity
[1]
7
6
5
4
3
2
(1200dpi)
I-356
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
0f0023
0f0024
0f0025
0f0026
Recepti
on sub
scan
resolutio
n
capacity
[0]
Recepti
on sub
scan
resolutio
n
capacity
[1]
Recepti
on
coding
system
capacity
Recepti
on
original
width
capacity
Recepti
on
original
length
capacity
Default
Bit
No
1
0f0022
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0xbb
0xbb
0xbb
X2
22
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
23
0x1f
0x1f
0x1f
X2
24
0x0e
0x0e
0x0e
X2
25
0x46
0x46
0x46
X2
26
0x1b
0x1b
0x1b
X2
27
0xfc
0xfc
0xfc
X2
28
(800dpi)
600dpi
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
100dpi
15.4 l/mm
2
1
7.7 l/mm
3.85 l/mm
7
6
5
4
3
2
(1200dpi)
(800dpi)
600dpi
7
6
5
(JPEG)
JBIG
MMR
MR
MH
THRU
7
6
5
(Legal)
(Letter)
A3
B4
A4
(A5)
7
6
Unlimited
(Legal)
(Letter)
0f0027
Recepti
on
speed
capacity
[0]
B4
A4
(A5)
7
6
5
4
V.29-96
V.29-72
0f0028
Recepti
on
speed
capacity
[1]
V.27-48
V.27-24
V.17-144
V.17-120
V.17-96
V.17-72
V.33-144
V.33-120
I-357
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items
0f002a
0f002b
Recepti
on
speed
capacity
[2]
Recepti
on
speed
capacity
[3]
Recepti
on
MSLT
capacity
Default
Bit
No
1
0f0029
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0xff
0xff
0xff
X2
29
0x3f
0x3f
0x3f
X2
2A
(TCM-96)
(TCM-72)
V.34-192
V.34-168
V.34-144
V.34-120
V.34-96
V.34-72
V.34-48
V.34-24
7
6
5
V.34-336
V.34-312
V.34-288
V.34-264
V.34-240
V.34-216
T3.85 or 200*100 dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
2B
T7.7 or 200*200 dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
2C
T11.55 or 300*300 dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
2D
T15.4 or 400*400 dpi or 600*600 dpi (0-40) ms

unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
2E
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
2F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0f002c
Recepti
on
MSLT
capacity
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0f002d
Recepti
on
MSLT
capacity
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0f002e
Recepti
on
MSLT
capacity
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0f002f
Recepti
on ECM
capacity
7
6
5
4
3
2
I-358
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x11
0x11
0x11
X2
30
0x07
0x07
0x07
X2
31
ALL
0x00
ALL 0x00
ALL
0x00
X2
32 - 3F
Europe
Command
Parameter
1
0
ECM reception capacity

0: OFF,
1: ON
11.21.11 0f003*
Address
0f0030
Items
Recepti
on
protocol
capacity
Default
Bit
No
Contents
Setting
CSRC
6
5
4
V8/V34
3
2
1
0
0f0031
0f0032 0f003f
Recepti
on
option
frame
capacity
Reserve
d area
G3S
7
6
5
4
(BFT)
(BTM)
PWD
(SEP)
SUB
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.21.12 10002*
Address
100020
Items
Transmission
main scan
line
resolution
instruction [0]
Default
Bit
No
Contents
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x22
0x22
0x22
X2
60
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
61
0x11
0x11
0x11
X2
62
4
3
16pels/mm
2
1
8pels/mm
0
100021
Transmission
main scan
line
resolution
instruction [1]
7
6
5
4
3
2
100022
Transmission
sub scanning
resolution
instruction [0]
1200dpi
800dpi
600dpi
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
I-359
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
Items

Default
Bit
No
Contents
100dpi
15.4 l/mm
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
63
0x1f
0x1f
0x1f
X2
64
0x0e
0x0e
0x0e
X2
65
0x46
0x46
0x46
X2
66
0x1b
0x1b
0x1b
X2
67
0xf0
0xf0
0xf0
X2
68
0xff
0xff
0xff
X2
69
100023
Transmission
sub scanning
resolution
instruction [1]
7.7 l/mm
3.85 l/mm
7
6
5
4
3
100024
100025
100026
Transmission
coding
method
instruction
Transmission
document
width
instruction
Transmission
document
length
instruction
1200dpi
800dpi
600dpi
7
6
5
(JPEG)
JBIG
MMR
MR
MH
THRU
7
6
5
(Legal)
(Letter)
A3
B4
A4
(A5)
7
6
Unlimited
(Legal)
(Letter)
100027
Transmission
speed
instruction [0]
B4
A4
(A5)
7
6
5
4
V.29-96
V.29-72
100028
100029
Transmission
speed
instruction [1]
Transmission
speed
instruction [2]
V.27-48
V.27-24
V.17-144
V.17-120
V.17-96
V.17-72
V.33-144
V.33-120
(TCM-96)
(TCM-72)
V.34-192
V.34-168
V.34-144
I-360
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address
10002a
10002b
Items
Transmission
speed
instruction [3]
Transmission
MSLT
instruction

Default
Bit
No
Contents
V.34-120
V.34-96
V.34-72
V.34-48
V.34-24
CSRC
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x3f
0x3f
0x3f
X2
6A
6
5
V.34-336
V.34-312
V.34-288
V.34-264
V.34-240
V.34-216
T3.85 or 200*100dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
6B
T7.7 or 200*200dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
6C
T11.55 or 300*300dpi (0-40) ms unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
6D
T15.4 or 400*400dpi or 600*600dpi (0-40) ms

unit
0x05
0x05
0x05
X2
6E
0x01
0x01
0x01
X2
6F
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
10002c
Transmission
MSLT
instruction
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
10002d
Transmission
MSLT
instruction
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
10002e
Transmission
MSLT
instruction
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
10002f
Transmission
ECM
instruction
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ECM transmission frame size

0: 256
1: 64
I-361
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Address

Default
Bit
No
Items
Contents
Setting
Japa
n
North
America
CSRC
Europe
Command
Parameter
ECM transmission instruction

0: OFF
1: ON
11.21.13 10003*
Address
100030
Items
Bit
N
o
Transmissi
on
protocol
instruction
Default
Contents
Setting
CSRC
Japan
North
America
Europe
Command
Parameter
0x11
0x11
0x11
X2
70
0x00
0x00
0x00
X2
71
ALL
0x00
ALL 0x00
ALL
0x00
X2
72 - 7F
5
4
V8/V34
3
2
1
0
100031
Transmissi
on option
frame
instruction
100032 - Reserved
10003f
area
G3S
7
6
5
4
(BFT)
(BTM)
PWD
(SEP)
SUB
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11.22 Finisher
11.22.1 FS-FN adjustment

(1) Center Staple Position
(a) Use
Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple function.
I-362
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Setting range

Specifications
0 1.0 mm
Setting range
-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(c) Procedure
NOTE
After [Half-Fold Position] adjustment, make this [Center Staple Position] adjustment.
1. Place five sheets of originals on the ADF.
2. Make a set of copy in the saddle stitching mode.
3. Check the amount of horizontal deviation (width A) between the staple and the half fold positions on the set of copy.
4. If width A is out of the specified range, make the following adjustment.
6. Touch [Finisher] [FS-FN adjustment] [Center Staple Position].
7. Touch the paper size where staple position is adjusted.
8. Look at the copy and adjust the staple position with the [+] / [-] key.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Press the Reset key.

Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width A.
(2) Half-Fold Position

(a) Use
Use this adjustment to adjust the half-fold position in half-fold printing.
(b) Setting range

A
Exit direction

Specifications
0 1.0 mm
Setting range
-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Place two sheets of originals on the ADF.

Make a copy in the folding mode.
Fold the copies along the crease.
Measure the amount of width A.
If width A is out of the specified range, make the following adjustment.
Touch [Finisher] [FS-FN adjustment] [Half-Fold Position].
Touch the paper size where half-fold position is adjusted.
Look at the copy and adjust the half-fold position with the [+] / [-] key.
I-363
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10.
11.
12.
13.

Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width A.
(3) Punch Edge Adj

(a) Use
To change the horizontal position of the punch holes.
(b) Setting range
Width B should fall within the following range.

Specification
9.5 mm 1.0 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm 1.0 mm (2-4 hole), 10.5 mm 1.0 mm (SWE4 hole)
Setting range
-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Make a copy sample in the punch mode.

Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the following range.
Touch [Finisher] [FS-FN adjustment] [Punch Edge Adj].
Touch the paper type where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
Look at the copy and adjust the punch horizontal position with the [+] / [-] key.
To make width B greater: Enter the value of [+]
To make width B smaller: Enter the value of [-]
7.
8.
9.
10.

Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width B.
(4) Punch Regist Loop Size

(a) Use
Adjusts the punch loop size used for paper exited from the main body.
To address problems such as misaligned punch holes, wrinkled paper, and jam at the punch registration section.
(b) Setting range

-4.0 to +4.0
(c) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch [Finisher] [FS-FN adjustment] [Punch Regist Loop Size].
Touch the paper size where punch regist loop size is adjusted.
Misaligned punched holes: Enter the value of [+]
Wrinkled paper: Enter the value of [-]
I-364
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. Press the Reset key.

(5) Finisher Components Test Mode

(a) Use
Use this adjustment to check finishers operation.
(b) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Touch [Finisher] [FS-FN adjustment] [Finisher Components Test Mode].
Touch [1] or [2] to select a mode.
Press the Start key to start finisher operation.
Press the Stop key to stop ongoing finisher operation.
(c) Finisher Components Test Mode list (FS-527/SD-509)

NOTE
Tray 1 indicates the tray 2 (lower) and Tray 2 is the tray 1 (upper) shown on the panel.
Mode
Finisher Components Test
Mode1
Stapler movement
Alignment Moving
Tray up/down operation
FD Stopper Operation
Punch Drive Standard Holes
Punch Drive MC (2 Holes)
Tray 1 Exit Roller Open/Close
Accommodation Roller Open/Close
2-Side Path Switch
Conveyance Drive
Tray 2 Path Switch
Upper/Lower Path Switch
Paddle Operation
Shift Operation

Mode2
Saddle Stapler Operation

Center fold knife operation
Center staple Transport motor Drive
Edge Stopper Operation
Center Staple Paddle operation
(d) Finisher Components Test Mode list (FS-529)

Mode
Mode1
Stapler Movement
Alignment Plate F/R Movement
Tray up/down operation
FD Stopper operation
Exit Roller Retraction
Paper Path Switch
Conveyance Drive
Paper surface Detect Solenoid
Paddling Belt Up/Down
Paddle 1 Rotation Solenoid Drive
(6) Load Data

(a) Use
Register or call values adjusted for the finisher when it was installed at the customer site.
(b) Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] [FS-FN adjustment] [Load Data].
3. Select a mode from the following.
Present adjusted value enrollment: Registers values adjusted for the finisher at the installation.
Enrollment lingua set point call: Calls values adjusted for the finisher at the installation.
I-365
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check that [OK] is displayed.

Touch [END].
Turn OFF the main power switch. Then, wait for 10 sec. or more and turn ON the main power switch.
(7) Alignment Plate Position

(a) Use
When FS-529 is installed, use this feature to fine adjust the aligning plate that aligns ejected paper.
(b) Default setting

0.0mm
(c) Setting range

-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(d) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Touch [Finisher] [FS-FN adjustment] [Alignment Plate Position].
Select the [Alignment Plate Position (Back)] or [Alignment Plate Position (Side)].
Set and adjust a value with the [+] / [-] key.
Touch [OK].
(8) Paper Alignment Guides W. Adj.

(a) Use
To fine adjust the horizontal width of the aligning plate.
Use this feature to fine adjust the aligning plate that aligns ejected paper.
(b) Default setting

0.0mm
(c) Setting range

-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
(d) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Touch [Finisher] [FS-FN adjustment] [Paper Alignment Guides W. Adj.].
Select a mode from the following.
Set and adjust a value with the [+] / [-] key.
11.22.2 Punch Option Setting

(1) Use
Specifies punch settings depending on the optional punch kit attached to the finisher.
An individual punch setting needs to be made according to the type of the punch option.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Touch [Finisher] [Punch Option Setting].
Touch [PK-517].
Touch [2-Holes/3-Holes], [2-Holes/4-Holes], [EU4 holes] or [SWE4 holes].
Touch [decision].
Touch [END].
Turn OFF the main power switch. Then, wait for 10 sec. or more and turn ON the main power switch.
11.22.3 Job Separator

(1) Use
Checks the job separators operation.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch [Finisher] [Job Separator].
Select the mode where you wish to check the operation.
Press the Start key to start job separator operation.
I-366
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. Press the Stop key to stop ongoing job separator operation.
11.23 Internet ISW
By using this setting, the firmware stored in the server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading.
For details for upgrading the firmware, refer to J.3.1 Preparations for firmware rewriting.
(1) Internet ISW Set

(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable each setting for Internet ISW.
To use when upgrading the firmware by Internet ISW.
Each setting such as Server setting will be valid by setting this to ON.
NOTE
When the following setting is set to ON, this setting will automatically be set to OFF and cannot be changed.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
11.23.1 Internet ISW (HTTP Setting)

It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to ON.
(1) Data Input Setting

(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable downloading using the HTTP protocol.
To use when accessing the server using the HTTP protocol.
Setting on the proxy server will be valid when this setting is ON.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(2) Connect Proxy

(a) Use
To set whether or not to connect via proxy server when accessing the server.
To use when accessing the server via proxy server.
(b) Default setting

OFF
I-367
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(3) Proxy Server

(a) Use
To set the address and the port number for the proxy server.
To use when accessing the server via proxy server.
(b) Procedure (Server Address)

Enter an address using IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN format.
Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
(c) Default setting (Server Address)

80
(d) Procedure (Port Number)

(e) Default setting (Server Address)

80
(4) Proxy Authentication

(a) Use
To set the login name or password when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server.
To use when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server.
(b) Default setting (Authentication)

OFF
(c) Setting item (Authentication)

ON
OFF
(d) Procedure (Log-in Name)

Enter the login name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
(e) Procedure (Password)

Enter the password (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
(5) Connection Time-Out

(a) Use
To set the time for the timeout for accessing the server.
(b) Default setting

60 sec
(c) Setting range

30 to 300 sec.
11.23.2 Internet ISW (FTP Setting)

It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to ON.
(1) Data Input Setting

(a) Use
To set whether or not to enable downloading using FTP protocol.
To use when accessing the server with FTP protocol.
Setting this to ON will enable the proxy server setting.
(b) Default setting

ON
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
I-368
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Connect Proxy

(a) Use
To set whether or not to access the server via proxy server.
(b) Default setting

OFF
(c) Setting item

ON
OFF
(3) Proxy Server

(a) Use
To set the address and the port No. of the proxy server.
(b) Procedure (Server Address)

Enter an address using IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN format.
(c) Procedure (Port Number)

(4) Connection Setting

(a) Use
To set the port No. and the time for timeout when accessing the FTP server, and also to set whether or not to enable PASV mode.
To use when accessing the FTP server.
To use when connecting by the PASV (passive) mode (FTP server side will inform the connection port before connecting).
(b) Procedure (Port Number)

(c) Procedure (Connection Time Out)

Enter the value between 1 and 60 (min.) using the 10-key pad.
(d) Default setting (PASV Mode)

OFF
(e) Setting item (PASV Mode)

ON
OFF
11.23.3 Forwarding Access Setting

(1) User ID
(a) Use
To register the user ID for accessing the program server where firmware is to be stored.
(b) Procedure
1. Select [User ID].
2. Enter the user ID (up to 64 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
(2) Password
(a) Use
To register the password for accessing the program server where firmware is to be stored.
(b) Procedure
1. Select [Password].
2. Enter the password (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
(3) URL
(a) Use
To register the address and directory of the program server where the firmware is to be stored in URL.
(b) Procedure
1. Select [URL].
2. Enter the URL (up to 256 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
I-369
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
Enter the URL which format suits the protocol to be used.
When connecting to http http:// (Host name or IP address)/ directory name or https:// (Host name or IP address)/directory
name.
When connecting to ftp ftp:// (Host name or IP address) / directory name.
(4) FileName
(a) Use
To register the file name of the firmware data to be downloaded.
(b) Procedure
1. Select [FileName].
2. Enter the file name (up to 63 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
11.23.4 Download
(1) Use
Access the program server according to the Internet ISW setting, and download the firmware.
To use when updating the firmware via network.
(2) Procedure
1. Select [Download].
2. Touch [ISW Start] to start downloading the firmware.
3. The message to show the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting and transferring data.
NOTE
When it failed to connect to the program server, or failed to download, the error code and the message will be displayed.
Check the cause of the error by the error code, and follow the message for resetting.
Refer to Error code list for the error codes.
When the firmware is normally upgraded, the main body will automatically be restarted to complete the Internet ISW.
I-370
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. ENHANCED SECURITY
12. ENHANCED SECURITY

12.1 List of Enhanced Security
Enhanced Security
Ref. Page
CE Password
I.12.3.1 CE Password
I.12.3.2 Administrator Password
Administrator Feature Level
I.12.3.3 Administrator Feature Level
CE Authentication
I.12.3.4 CE Authentication
Life Stop Setting
I.12.3.5 Life Stop Setting
NVRAM Data Backup
I.12.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup
Operation Ban release time
I.12.3.7 Operation Ban release time
Administrator unlocking
I.12.3.8 Administrator unlocking
Engine FW DipSW
I.12.3.9 Engine FW DipSW
Stop 0 Clear
3. Enhanced Security menu will appear.

1. Touch the [Exit].
I-371
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3 Enhanced Security
12.3.1 CE Password
(1) Use
To set and change the CE password.
(2) Default setting

92729272
(3) Procedure
Enter the CE password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
1. Current Password: Enter the currently using CE password.
2. New Password: Enter the new CE password.
3. Re-Input Password: Enter the new CE password again.
NOTE
When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password with the same letters as well as the password which
is same as the previous one cannot be changed.
NEVER forget the CE password. When forgetting the CE password, call responsible person of KM.
12.3.2 Administrator Password

(1) Use
To set and change the administrator password.
Use this function when the administrator forget the administrator password because a new password can be set without entering the
current administrator password with this.
(2) Default setting

12345678
(3) Procedure
Enter the administrator password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
1. New Password: Enter the new administrator password.
2. Re-Input Password: Enter the new administrator password again.
NOTE
When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password with the same letters, the password which is same
as the previous one and the password of less than eight digits cannot be changed.
12.3.3 Administrator Feature Level

(1) Use
To set which modes to be allowed for the administrator to use in Service Mode.
Use when allowing the administrator to use some modes in Service Mode.
The modes allowed for the administrator to use in each setting are as follows.
Administrator settings function
[System Setting] [Expert
Setting]
Level 1
Level 2
Printer Adjustment
Erase Leading Edge
Scanner Adjustment
Leading Edge Adjustment
Centering
I-372
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Administrator settings function
Level 1
Level 2
Horizontal Adjustment
Vertical Adjustment
Centering
Original Stop Position
Centering Auto Adjustment
Auto Adj. of Stop Position
User paper Settings
Original Glass Original Size Detect
Foolscap Size Setting
ADF Adjustment
[Standard Size Setting]
(2) Default setting

Prohibit
(3) Setting item

Level1
Level2
Prohibit
12.3.4 CE Authentication
It will not be displayed when the following settings are set to ON.
[Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Enhanced Security Mode] or [Password Rules].
(1) Use
To determine whether or not to authenticate CE password as entering Service Mode.
Use when authenticating CE password as entering Service Mode.
NOTE
For setting the following setting to ON, set the CE Authentication to ON and change the initial CE password beforehand.
[Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Enhanced Security Mode] or [Password Rules]
(2) Default setting

OFF
(3) Setting item

ON
OFF
12.3.5 Life Stop Setting

(1) Use
To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the drum unit, developing unit, developer or fusing unit reaches its service life.
(2) Default setting

Stop
(3) Setting item

Stop
No Stop
12.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup

(1) Use
To backup NVRAM data in the main body to the flash memory.

To backup current data in order to prevent data in NVRAM from being erased unexpectedly.
To backup data manually. It usually makes backup every hour automatically.
Backup data can be restored by following the specified procedure when the trouble (CD3XX) occurred.
Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING for details on restoration procedure.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [NVRAM Data Backup].
2. Touch [Start] to start making a backup.
3. Check the message [Backup is completed.], and turn main power switch OFF. Wait for ten seconds or more and turn main power switch
back ON.
12.3.7 Operation Ban release time

(1) Use
To set the time that elapses before the machine releases an access lock that is activated after the CE password authentication.
I-373
bizhub 423/363/283/223
To set the period of time that elapses before the machine releases the access lock, which aims to prevent the unintentional release of the
access lock.
After the CE password authentication, if the access lock is activated, the lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop 0 9
3 1 7 in [Meter Count] [Check Details] [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and ON.
When the timer reaches the time specified in this setting, the access lock is released.
(2) Default setting

1
(3) Setting range

1 to 60 (minutes)
NOTE
When Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON in [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhanced Security Mode], the
period of time that can be set in this setting is 5 minutes or more.
12.3.8 Administrator unlocking

(1) Use
To release an access lock that is activated after an administrator password authentication.
To release the access lock with service authority when an administrator password authentication fails and the access lock is activated.
When the main power switch is turned OFF and ON or the period of time set in the Release Time Settings elapses, the machine releases
the access lock that is activated after the administrator password authentication.
In addition to these operations, this setting provides another way to release the access lock.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator unlocking].
2. Touch [unlocking] to release an access lock.
3. When [OK] is displayed, touch [OK].
12.3.9 Engine FW DipSW

(1) Use
Not used.
I-374
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 13. BILLING SETTING
13. BILLING SETTING

Billing setting
When using i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105, license management is done with the following procedures. [Service Mode] [Billing
Setting] [License Management]
[License Management] can set Activation/Deactivation of each i-Option functions, Repair/Initialize of functions for troubleshooting, or etc.
13.1 List of billing setting

Billing Setting
Ref. Page
Counter Setting
I.13.3.1 Counter Setting
Management Function Choice
I.13.3.2 Management Function Choice
Coverage Rate Clear
I.13.3.10 Coverage Rate Clear
License Management *1
OpenAPI Authentication
Management
Activation *1
I.13.3.11 License management-Activation
Deactivation *1
I.13.3.12 License management-Deactivation
Repair *1, 2
I.13.3.13 License management-Repair
Initialize *1
I.13.3.14 License management-Initialize
Request Code *1
I.13.3.15 License management-Request Code
List *1
I.13.3.16 License management-List
Function list *1
I.13.3.17 License management-Function List
Restriction Code
I.13.3.18.(1) Restriction Code
Region Code
I.13.3.18.(2) Region Code
*1: It is displayed only when the expanded memory furnished with the optional upgrade kit UK-203 is mounted.
*2: It is displayed only when license management error occurs.
Stop 9
3. Billing Setting menu will appear.
I-375
bizhub 423/363/283/223

1. Touch the [Exit].
13.3 Billing setting

13.3.1 Counter Setting
(1) Use
To set the counting method for the total counter and size counter.
To set the size regarded as the large size (2 counts.)
Use to change the counting method for the counters.
(2) Default setting (Total Counter)

US, Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3, Others 4: Mode 2
Japan: Mode 1
(3) Setting item (Total Counter)

Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle
Mode 2: Large size is double counts
NOTE
The content of this setting is reflected in the count method with the key counter.
Others 1 to Others 4 are setting items in [Marketing Area] available from Service Mode.
(4) Default setting (Size Counter)

US: A3 and 11 x 17
Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3, Others 4: A3, B4, 11 x 17, and 8 1/ x 14
2
Japan: Not counted
(5) Setting item (Size Counter)

A3/11 x 17
When it exceeds 279 mm in the main scan direction and 420 mm in the sub scan direction
(exceeds 399 mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size.
A3/B4/11 x 17/8 1/2 x 14
(exceeds 337 mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size.
A3/11 x 17/B4/8 1/2 x 14/Foolscap
(exceeds 313 mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size (However the size in the main scan
direction changes according to the foolscap size setting.)
NOTE
When the Size Counter setting is set to Not counted, the machine operate with following conditions regardless of the each
control panel settings.
Total Counter: Mode1
(6) Count-up table

Print mode
1-Sided
Sizes other than those
specified
Size
Mode
Total
2-Sided
Specified sizes
Mode

specified
Mode
Specified sizes
Mode
Mode
I-376
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Print mode
1-Sided
specified
Size
Mode
2-Sided
Specified sizes
Mode

specified
Mode
Specified sizes
Mode
Mode
Size
2-sided Total
0: No count
1: 1 count
2: 2 counts
3: 3 counts
4: 4 counts
13.3.2 Management Function Choice

To set whether or not the following items are to be mounted.
Key Counter
Management Device (Data controller)
Authentication Device
Vendor
NOTE
It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to ON.
When the setting shows that [Management Device 1], [Management Device 2] or [Vendor 2] is mounted, the following applications
will be invalid.
PC FAX transmission
HDD TWAIN/PS Box Operator
PS Scan Direct
PS Job Spooler
Fiery: Scan to Box
Also, the following setting will be set to Disable.
[Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Management Function Setting] [Network Function Setting]
13.3.3 Management Function Choice-Key Counter IF Vendor

Not used.
13.3.4 Management Function Choice-Authentication Device

(1) Device 1
(a) Use
To set whether or not the authentication device 1 is installed.
Set when the authentication device 1 (PageACSES) is mounted.
NOTE
The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are set OFF with [Administrator Settings] [User
Authentication/Account Track] [General Setting].
When the Authentication Device mount setting is set to mount, make sure that the [IP Address Fax] and [Internet Fax]
settings are set to OFF with [Service Mode] [System 2] [Network Fax Settings].
(2) Device 2
(a) Use
To set whether or not the authentication device 2 is installed.
Set when the authentication unit (biometric type or card type) is mounted.
Card 1
Uses IC card authentication system (AU-201)
Card 2
Uses loadable device card authentication system
Bio1
Uses biometrics (finger vein) authentication system (AU-101)
Bio2
Uses biometrics (finger vein) authentication system (AU-102)
When selecting [Bio1], set a film timeout interval.

When selecting [Bio2], set a film timeout interval, capture trial time and authentication trial time.
When selecting [Card 1] or [Card 2], a response timeout interval is displayed.
(The interval is unchangeable.)
When the setting is set to Card 2, the main power switch must be turned OFF and ON to let the new setting take effect.
Selecting Card 2, a loadable device driver allows to install.
(b) Setting item

Authentication Mode
Card 1
Card 2
Bio1
Bio2
I-377
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) Installing method of the loadable device driver

The firmware is updated using the USB memory device.
NOTE
NEVER remove or insert the USB memory device with the machine power turned ON.
1. Prepare a USB memory device on which the driver data of the loadable device to be used was written.
4. Lift up the cover [2] of the service port.
5. Insert the USB memory device to the service port [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
NOTE
USB memory must be connected with the main power switch/sub power switch off.
When updating the firmware, use the service port. It cannot be updated when connected to another USB port.
6. Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
7. Select [Yes] on the loadable device driver installation screen.
8. Press the [START] to start installing the driver. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.)
9. Check that the control panel shows the message indicating that the data has been installed correctly ([Downloading Completed]).
Check also the check sum value ([Check Sum ####]) shown on the control panel. (The Start key lights blue.)
11. Remove the USB memory device from the port.
12. Turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch.
13.3.5 Management Function Choice-Key Counter Only

(1) Use
To set whether or not the key counter is installed.
Set when the key counter is mounted.
Select [Message] when the key counter is mounted.
(2) Color mode

Not used.
(3) Message
(a) Use
Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted.
Type 1
Message for key counter
Type 2
Message for card scanning
Type 3
Message for ID management
Type 4
Message for remote SW
I-378
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Setting item
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
(4) Confirmation copy

(a) Use
Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.
(b) Default setting

Ban
(c) Setting item

License
Ban
(5) The next job reservation

(a) Use
Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed.
(b) Default setting

Ban
(c) Setting item

License
Ban
NOTE
(6) Count setting

(a) Use
To set the count timing used when the key counter is installed.
(b) Default setting

Paper feed
(c) Setting item

Paper feed
Paper out
13.3.6 Management Function Choice-Management Device

(1) Device 1
(a) Use
To set whether or not the management device 1 is installed.
NOTE
The setting is available only when user authentication is set OFF and account track is set Off or Account Name +
Password with [Administrator Settings] [User Authentication/Account Track] [General Settings].
(2) Device 2
(a) Use
To set whether or not the management device 2 is installed.
Select the Management Setting Mode
Mode 1
Use contact type device (Logout with ID key is not allowed.)
Mode 2
Use non-contact type device (Logout with ID key is allowed.)
(b) Setting item (Management Setting)

Mode 1
Mode 2
NOTE
The setting is not available when either External Server of user authentication, Password Only of account track, Do not
synchronize of user authentication and account track or Allow of public user access has been set with [Administrator
Settings] [User Authentication/Account Track] [General Settings].
I-379
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13.3.7 Management Function Choice-Vendor 1

Not used
13.3.8 Management Function Choice-Vendor 2

(1) Use
To set whether or not the vendor 2 is installed.
NOTE
When using the vendor along with the key counter, inserting the key counter will set it to the Key Counter Mode and
removing it will set it to the Vendor Mode.
(2) Procedure
Select message of key counter. (Only for key counter, the type of the message is same after mounting.)
(3) Procedure (Confirmation copy)

(a) Use
Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.
(b) Default setting

Ban
(c) Setting item

License
Ban
(4) Procedure (The next job reservation)

(a) Use
Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed.
(b) Default setting

Ban
(c) Setting item

License
Ban
(5) Procedure (Message)

(a) Use
Select message of vendor.
Type 1
Message for key counter
Type 2
Message for card scanning
Type 3
Message for ID management
(b) Setting item

Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
NOTE
(6) Procedure (Count Setting)

(a) Use
To set the count timing used when the key counter is installed.
(b) Default setting

Paper feed
(c) Setting item

Paper feed
Paper out
13.3.9 Setting items that automatically change the setting values

NOTE
Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting values below. It needs resetting when
cancelling the setting in order to set back to not mounted because the setting value will remain.
I-380
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) When the vendor2 or authentication device 1/2 is mounted

Setting Item
Vendor 2
Authentication Device 1
Factory Default
Default Scan/Fax
Settings
Factory Default
[Yes]
Tx/Rx Display [Yes]

Utility
Fax Active Screen

Scan/Fax Settings
Default Tab
Direct Input
Left Panel Display

Default
Each Function Setting
Network Function Usage
Settings
[Job List]
Weekly Timer ON/OFF

Setting
Reset Setting
Restrict Access to Job

Settings
External Memory
Function Settings
Skip Job Operation
Settings
ID & Print Settings
OFF
PC-Fax RX Setting
OpenAPI Setting
Prohibit
OFF
When Key 1 is set to My Panel, reset the setting and assign

Key 1 to [FAX/SCAN]. When Key 2 is set to My Panel, reset
the setting and assign Key 2 to [Copy].
Changing Job Priority, Deleting Other Users Jobs,

Registering and Changing Addresses, Changing Zoom Ratio
will be set to Restrict.
Save Document and Print Document will be set to OFF.
All settings be set to Yes.

-
LDAP Settings
Prefix/Suffix Setting
WebDAV Client Settings
Printer setting/Scanner
setting
Status Notification
Setting
Notification Item Setting
ID & Print will be set to ON.
OFF
Password for Memory RX
Setting is set to the default
value of the administrator
password
Restrict
No
Access Setting will be set to

Restrict and Authentication
will be changed to OFF
setting.

Restrict.
IPP Setting will be set to

OFF, and Accept IPP job
will be set to OFF.
OFF
Scan Setting, Print Setting

will be set to OFF.
E-mail TX Setting, Scan to Email, E-mail Notification,

Meter Count Notification will
be set to Restrict.
E-mail RX Setting will be set

to OFF.
Enabling LDAP will be set to

OFF.
Prefix/Suffix Setting will be

set to OFF.
WebDAV Client Settings will

be set to OFF.
E-mail TX (SMTP)
E-mail RX (POP)
Reset Data After Job will be

set to ON.
SMB Setting
IPP Setting
AppleTalk Setting
Forward TX Setting
Memory RX Setting
Copy, PC print, Send Data, and Print others will be set to ON.
Administrator Security
Level
Administrator
Settings
Printer Setting and Scanner setting will be set to OFF.

All setting items will be set to
OFF.
I-381
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Setting Item
Image Log Transfer
Settings
Bluetooth Settings
Service Mode
Vendor 2
[No]
Bluetooth Settings will be

changed to Invalid.
SW No. 63 will be changed to

01 (HEX).
Management function
choice
Confirmation copy will be set

to Ban.
FAX
[System] [Display Setting]

[Re-Transmission] will be
set to OFF.
(2) When the key counter IF vendor or management device 1/2 is mounted
Setting Item
Key counter IF Vendor
Management Device 1
Management Device 2
Factory Default
Default Scan/Fax Settings
Factory Default
[Yes]
Tx/Rx Display [Yes]
Direct Input

Utility
Fax Active Screen

Scan/Fax Settings Default
Tab
Left Panel Display Default
Each Function Setting
[Job List]
Copy, PC print will be set to
ON.
Send Data, Print others will
be set to OFF.
Network Function Usage

Settings
Administrator Security Level
Weekly Timer ON/OFF
Setting
Copy will be set to ON.

PC print, Send Data, and
Print others will be set to
OFF.
OFF
Prohibit
OFF
When Key 1 is set to My

Panel, reset the setting
and assign Key 1 to
[FAX/SCAN].
When Key 2 is set to My
Panel, reset the setting
and assign Key 2 to
[Copy].
Changing Job Priority,

Deleting Other Users Jobs,
Registering and Changing
Addresses, Changing Zoom
Ratio will be set to Restrict.
OFF
Restrict Access to Job

Settings
Administrator
Settings
External Memory Function

Settings
Forward TX Setting
Memory RX Setting
Copy, PC print, Send

Data, and Print others
will be set to ON.
Password for Memory RX

Setting is set to the default
value of the administrator
password
Restrict
No

Restrict and Authentication
will be changed to OFF
setting.
Apply Stamps/Stamp
No
Apply Stamps/Copy Protect
No
Apply Stamps/Stamp Repeat
No
Apply Stamps/Copy Protect
No
Apply Stamps/Page Number
No
Apply Stamps/Date/Time
No
PC-Fax RX Setting
OpenAPI Setting

Printer setting/Scanner
setting
Printer Setting and Scanner setting will be set to OFF.
I-382
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Setting Item
Key counter IF Vendor
Management Device 1
Management Device 2
[No]
Software Switch Setting SW

No. 63 will be changed to 01
(HEX).
Management function choice Confirmation copy will be set

to Ban.

Service Mode
FAX
[System] [Display Setting]

[Re-Transmission] will be
set to OFF.
13.3.10 Coverage Rate Clear

(1) Use
To clear the coverage rate.
(2) Procedure
Touching [END] key will clear the coverage rate.
(3) Default setting

Unset
(4) Setting item

Set
Unset
13.3.11 License management-Activation

(1) Functions
To activate i-Option functions.
(2) Use
To activate i-Option functions with CE.
The functions can be activated by selecting the desired function and enter the appropriate license code and function code.
Administrators also can activate i-Option functions through Administrator Settings.
(3) Procedure
NOTE
You need to access License Management System (LMS) to implement each function setting.
Before accessing the LMS, CE are required to register the E-mail address and the password in the LMS. To register, click [CE
Initial Registration] that is located in the upper right of CE Login screen.
1. Prepare token certification.
2. Access the following URL using the PC connected to the Internet.
https://lms.konicaminolta.com/license/KM/support.aspx
3. Click [CE Login].
4. Enter [E-Mail Address] and [Password], and click [Login].
I-383
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. Click [Generate License Code].
6. Enter the serial number of the target MFP, and click [Next].
NOTE
Make sure to enter alphabet letters of the serial number in all capital letters.
7. Click [Next].
I-384
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. Enter the token number written in the token certification, and select the product description.
9. Click [Add].
10. Confirm the registered items, and click [Next].
11. Click [Generate license Code].
I-385
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12. LMS issues license code and function code.

13. Write down the serial number, license code and function code.
14. Select [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [License Management].
15. Select [Activation] -> [Function Code] or [License Code], and enter the function code and the license code confirmed at Step13.
16. Touch [Apply].
I-386
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17. Follow the massage appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
18. Select [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [License Management] -> [Function List], and confirm that the activated function is displayed
at the list.
13.3.12 License management-Deactivation

(1) Functions
To deactivate i-Option functions.
(2) Use
To deactivate i-Option functions due to registration error, expiration of lease term, change to other MFP or etc.
The functions can be deactivated by selecting the desired function and enter the appropriate deactivation code.
(3) Procedure
NOTE
1. Check the serial number of the target MFP.
I-387
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. Click [Deactivate License Code].
6. Enter the serial number of the target MFP, and click [Retrieve].
NOTE
7. Select the token to be deactivated, and click [Registration].
I-388
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. LMS issues deactivation code and function code.

9. Write down the serial number, deactivation code and function code.
11. Select [Deactivation] -> [Function Code] or [Deactivation Code], and enter the function code and the deactivation code confirmed at
Step9.
12. Touch [Apply].
I-389
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13. Write down or print out the serial number and deactivation complete code.
NOTE
When A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S is set to the paper feed tray, the above-mentioned serial number and deactivation complete code
can be printed out by pressing the start key.
Serial number and deactivation complete code can be confirmed in [List] available from [License Management].
Serial Number
0123456789012
Deactivation
Complete Code
01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789-01234
Turn the main switch OFF and ON.
14. Follow the message appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
15. Access to the LMS and login again.
For detail of the login method, refer to step 2 to step4.
16. Click [Deactivate License Code in LMS].
17. Enter the serial number and the deactivation complete code confirmed at step13.
NOTE
18. Deactivation Complete message will be displayed.

The license become invalid at both MFP and LMS, and deactivated token number can be used for another MFP.
I-390
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13.3.13 License management-Repair

(1) Functions
To repair license management information.
(2) Use
To be used when license management information is lost due to replacement of NVRAM board (NRB) or EEPROM (IC51) or any other
trouble.
License management information can be repaired by acquiring repair code with repair request code, and entering the repair code.
(3) Procedure
NOTE
When the message License management error occurred. is displayed, carry out the repair operation with the following steps.
License management error occurred.
2. Select [Repair] -> [Repair Request Code].
I-391
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Repair
Request Code
Repair Code
Repair
3. Write down or print out the serial number, repair request code and request code.
NOTE
When A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S is set to the paper feed tray, the above-mentioned serial number and repair request code can be
printed out by pressing the start key.
Serial Number
0123456789012
Repair
Request Code
01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789-01234
Request Code
01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789

I-392
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. Click [Repair License Code].

8. Enter the serial number, repair request code and request code confirmed at step3, and click [Registration].
NOTE
9. LMS issues repair permission code.

10. Write down the serial number and repair permission code.
I-393
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12. Select [Repair] -> [Repair Code], and enter the repair code confirmed at step10.
Repair
Request Code
Repair Code
Repair
13. Touch [Apply].
Repair
Request Code
Repair Code
12345-67890-12345-67890-12345-67890-12345
Repair
14. Follow the massage appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
NOTE
When carrying out the repair operation after NVRAM board replacement, it is necessary to reactivate the i-Option license.
13.3.14 License management-Initialize

(1) Functions
To initialize license management information.
(2) Use
To be used when license management information cannot be repaired.
License management information should be initialized when the machine fails to generate request code or repair request code due to any
trouble and the information cannot be repaired.
(3) Procedure
NOTE
When license management information cannot be repaired, initialize the information with the following procedure.
I-394
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Contact the license management section of sales company to report the information necessary to issue the initialize code.
The license management section of sales company supplies the initialize code.
Call the Billing Setting to the screen.
Touch [License Management] [Initialize].
Enter the initialize code issued by call center using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [Apply].
6. After completing the initialization, follow the message appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
13.3.15 License management-Request Code

When the license management error is occurred, it will not be displayed until the repair code is input.
(1) Functions
To display and print request code and serial number.
(2) Use
To check the request code and serial number.
(3) Procedure
Set A4S or 8 1/ x 11S paper to the tray, and press start key at request code screen to print.
2
13.3.16 License management-List

(1) Functions
To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number.
(2) Use
To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number.
(3) Procedure
Set A4S or 8 1/ x 11S paper to the tray, and press start key at deactivation complete code screen to print.
2
13.3.17 License management-Function List

(1) Functions/ Use
To display activated functions.
13.3.18 OpenAPI Authentication Management

(1) Restriction Code
(a) Use
(2) Region Code

(a) Use
I-395
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY

RESET FUNCTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION

Function for clearing
Initialize
Right
door
open/
close
Main
power
switch
OFF/
ON
Trouble
reset
Clear All Data

Syste
m
Error
Clear
Clear
All
Data
Job
Memo
ry
Settin
g Data
Address
Registratio
n Data
Fax
Settin
g
Data
All
Histo
ry
Data
Networ
k
Setting
Data
Contents to be cleared
Jam display
Rank A
Malfunction
Rank B
display
Rank C
Erratic operation / display
Utility Mode
(Except items on engine
adjustment)
Job memory setting data
Address registration data
Fax setting data

(Excluding destination
related data)
History data
(Job history, Journal
history, Receive reject
history, Destination
history, Job secure
counter)
Network setting data

(Excluding destination
related data)
Service Mode (System

1/2)
*1
Adjustment of the touch

panel position
Toner counter
Billing
Setting
Management
Function
Choice
:Will be cleared (initialized)

- :Will not be cleared
*1: Items to be cleared
System 1
Marketing Area (Fax Target only)
System 2
HDD
I-396
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT

bizhub 223/283/363/4...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub 223/283/363/423

15.1 Scanner section
15.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
The scanner motor assy has been removed.
The scanner drive cables have been rewound.
(2) Procedure
1. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with three screws
[2].
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
2. With the scanner drive gear set screw [1] located on the right-hand
side as shown on the left, slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the
left and check that it is returned to the original position by the
tension of the spring [3].
Perform this step three times.
3. Tighten the three screws [4] to fix the scanner motor assy into
position.
[4]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[2]
15.1.2 Positioning of the exposure unit/LED exposure unit and mirrors unit
(1) Purpose
The scanner drive cables have been rewound
(2) Procedure
1. While temporarily attaching the exposure unit/LED exposure unit to
the scanner drive cables, move the mirrors unit [1] to the center
and hit the mirrors unit against the side of the rails [2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
I-397

bizhub 223/283/363/4...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. While keeping the mirrors unit hit against the side of the rail, move
the temporarily attached exposure unit/LED exposure unit [1] to
the right on the scanner frame as far as the exposure unit/LED
exposure unit will go.
[1]
[3]
[3]
3. Slowly move the exposure unit/LED exposure unit [1] and the
mirrors unit [2] until they reach the position [3] where you can
insert the screws into the exposure unit/LED exposure unit.
NOTE
Be careful so that the temporarily attached exposure unit/
LED exposure unit and the mirrors unit do not become out
of position.
4. Tighten the screws to fix the exposure unit/LED exposure unit [1].
[1]
[2]

15.2.1 Skew adjustment of the tray 1/2
(1) Purpose
To reduce paper skew that cannot be corrected by the registration loop adjustment when the tray 1 or 2 is within the specifications.
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made.
2. Load the tray with the paper.
3. Move the set of the paper guides [1] until no gap is produced
between the both ends of paper and the paper guides.
[1]
4. Remove the paper from the tray.

5. Secure the set of paper guides [1] on the tray using a screw (M3 x
8 mm: V121 0308 04).
[1]
15.2.2 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2

(1) Purpose
When an image printed on a copy is displaced from the correct position with the use of the tray1/2.
I-398

bizhub 223/283/363/4...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
1. Make a test print and check the amount of misalignment.
2. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made.
3. Stretch the paper guides [1] to the maximum size position.
[1]
[1]
[2]
5. Move the paper guides [1] complete according to the amount of

the mis-centering you checked in step 1 and adjust the center
position of it.
6. Tighten two screws [2].
7. Make another test print and check the amount of misalignment.
[1]
[1]
15.3 Manual bypass tray section

15.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit
(1) Purpose
The bypass paper size unit has been removed.
(2) Procedure
[1]
[2]
1. Align the match mark [1] on the bypass guide rack gear with the
groove on the gear rim at two places and install two bypass guide
rack gears [2].
[2]
[1]
I-399

bizhub 223/283/363/4...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. When installing the manual CD size sensor assy [3], make sure
that the part [1] (pointed by the arrow) on the bypass guide rack
gear and the gears hole [2] on the manual CD size sensor assy
are placed in a straight line.
3. Secure the manual CD size sensor assy with two screws.
[3]
[2]
[1]
4. After the bypass paper size unit base has been mounted, check that the lever of the bypass paper size unit moves smoothly in a manner
operatively connected to the bypass guide.
5. Call the Service Mode to the screen and select [Machine] [Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj]. Then, carry out manual bypass tray width
adjustment.
I-400

DF-621
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-621

16.1 Original document feed section
16.1.1 Adjusting the height
(1) Purpose
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
When the reverse automatic document feeder has been reinstalled.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the document pad [1].
NOTE
When removing the document pad [1], pull apart the hook
and loop fastener one by one. Pulling the mall at once
may damage the sponge.
[1]
2. Check the clearance between the upper face [1] of scanner and
the protrusion on the reverse automatic document feeder side. (2
spots, front/back)
NOTE
There must be no clearance between the protrusion on the
reverse automatic document feeder and the upper face [1]
of scanner.
3. If there is any clearance, the following adjustment is needed.
[1]
[1]
4. Remove the clearance by turning the adjusting screw [1].

Clockwise rotation: Lifting up the rear side
Counterclockwise rotation: Lowering the rear side
5. Use the adjusting screw [1] when further adjustment is needed.
Clockwise rotation: Lifting up the rear side
Counterclockwise rotation: Lowering the rear side
[1]
I-401

DF-621
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16.1.2 Adjusting skew feed

(1) Procedure
1. Check how the edges of the chart are misaligned.
The amount of the deviation of the chart will be X.
Deviation in + (plus)
Deviation in - (minus)
2. Place the chart [1] in the document feed tray (with the side having
an arrow facing up).
[1]
3. Make copies 5 times repeatedly in single side mode.

4. Fold all 5 sample copies as illustrated and check for any deviation.
Deviation on the sample will be Y.
5. Obtain the difference between the deviation of the chart and the
deviation of the sample.
Difference of the deviation = Y - X
Specifications: 0 2 mm
6. If the difference of the deviation does not fall within the specified
range, perform the following adjustment.
Deviation in + (plus)
Deviation in - (minus)
7. Remove two supplied hinge covers [1].

[1]
8. Loosen the mounting screw [1] on the right hinge viewed from the
front.
[1]
I-402

DF-621
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9. Loosen the nut [1].
[1]
[2]
10. When the difference of the deviation is + (plus), turn the screw [1]
counterclockwise to adjust.
NOTE
Look at the guide lines [2] when making the adjustment.
When turning the screw, be sure not to raise the reverse
automatic document feeder until in an upright position.
To prevent the adjustment screw [2] breakage, be sure to
follow the above instructions.
[2]
11. When the difference of the deviation is - (minus), turn the screw [1]
clockwise to adjust.
NOTE
Look at the guide lines [2] when making the adjustment.
When turning the screw, be sure not to raise the reverse
automatic document feeder until in an upright position.
To prevent the adjustment screw [2] breakage, be sure to
follow the above instructions.
[1]
[1]
12. After completing the adjustment, tighten the nut loosened in step 9.
13. After completing the adjustment, tighten the screw loosened in step 8.
14. Attach the two supplied hinge covers.
I-403

PC-109/PC-208
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-109/PC-208

17.1 Paper reference position
17.1.1 Purpose
When the PH unit has been replaced.
When the image on the print is offset in the main scan direction.
When adjustment in the following screen does not resolve a problem.
[Service Mode] - [Machine] - [Printer Area] - [Centering].
17.1.2 Procedure
1. Measure the width of printed reference line A.
Specification: 3.0 mm 1.0 mm
A
2. Slide out the drawer [1] and unload paper from it.
3. Loosen two screws [2] at the center of the paper lifting plate.
[2]
[1]
[2]
4. Watching the graduations [1] provided in the drawer, move the edge
guide [2] in the rear.
If width A is greater than the specified value, move the edge
guide toward the front.
If width A is smaller than the specified value, move the edge
guide toward the rear.
[1]
5. Perform another test print and check the reference deviation.
I-404

PC-409
bizhub 423/363/283/223
18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-409

18.1 Paper reference position
18.1.1 Purpose
When the PH unit has been replaced.
When the image on the print is offset in the main scan direction.
When adjustment in the following screen does not resolve a problem.
[Service Mode] - [Machine] - [Printer Area] - [Centering].
18.1.2 Procedure
1. Measure the width of printed reference line A.
Specification: 3.0 mm 1.0 mm
A
2. Press the drawer release button [1] and then slide out the drawer [2]
from the paper feed cabinet.
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the right door [1].
[1]
4. Remove the harness cover [1].

[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
I-405

PC-409
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. Loosen the adjustment screw [1] and turn screw [2] to make the
adjustment.
NOTICE
Do not damage the passage surface of the right door.
[1]
[2]
NOTICE
If width A is greater than the specified value: Turn screw [1]
counterclockwise.
[1]
NOTICE
If width A is smaller than the specified value: Turn screw
[1] clockwise.
[1]
7. Perform another test print and check the reference deviation.
18.2 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment

18.2.1 Procedure
1. Remove the drawer.
[3]
[1]
2. While raising the main tray [1], remove the screw [2] and the
connector cover [3].
[2]
3. While raising the main tray [1], remove two screws [2] that hold the
shift tray in position.
NOTE
When reinstalling, use caution because the wire of the
main tray [1] comes off easily.
[1]
[2]
[2]
I-406

PC-409
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the shifter [2].

[2]
[1]
[2]
5. Push the tab [1] of the shift tray [2] as shown on the left and release
the lock.
6. Remove the shift tray [2].
[1]
7. Loosen the screw [1] fixing the tension pulley assy as shown on the
left and move it in the direction of the arrow.
8. After moving the shifter, tighten the fixing screw [1].
[1]
I-407

PK-517
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-517

19.1 Punch section
19.1.1 Punch hole deviation correction
(1) Purpose
The punch holes are on a slanted line.
(2) Procedure
1. Set the mode to Punch mode for printing.
2. Hold the output paper half and check the displacement of the
punch hole.
Standard value: 0 2.0 mm
3. In case the figure exceeds the above mentioned standard value, follow the procedures shown below.
4. Open the upper cover [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
6. Move the punch unit forward or backward for adjustment referring

the mark-off line [1].
I-408

SD-509
bizhub 423/363/283/223
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-509

20.1.1 Half-fold skew adjustment
(1) Purpose
Fold line goes off the tolerance in the half-fold mode.
(2) Procedure
1. Make a copy in the half-fold mode.
2. Unfold the paper that exits the machine and lay the paper with the
ridge facing up.
Exit direction
[A1]
[1]
3. Confirm the skew of the fold line [1] of the output copy sample
(Widths of A1 and A2)
Standard value: A1-A2=1.0 mm
4. In case the figure exceeds the above mentioned standard value,
follow the adjustment procedures below.
[A2]
6. Pull the saddle unit.
7. Remove the screw [1], and pull the saddle unit out completely.
[1]
[1]
8. Slide down the movable part [1] of the right rail and remove the
screw [2].
[2]
I-409

SD-509
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
9. Push down the right rail [2] until the two notches [1] are visible as
shown in the illustration below.
[3]
11. Loosen three screws [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
12. Incline the stopper [2] forward or backward according to the skew
of the crease using the shoulder screw [1] as the supporting point.
NOTE
Push the driver or equivalent into the cover hole [3] to
incline the stopper [2].
[1]
[2]
In case the cease [1] skews as the right side:
In case the cease [1] skews as shown in the illustration:

Incline the stopper backward.
In case the cease [1] skews as shown in the illustration:
Incline the stopper forward.
[1]
In case the cease [1] skews as the left side:
[1]
I-410

SD-509
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13. Move the stopper [1] up and down to confirm that the stoppers
light blocking plate [2] does not touch the inner surfaces of the
sensor slit [3].
14. In case of <NG>, take the following step.
[3]
[1]
<OK>
[2]
[3]
<NG>
<NG>
15. Raise the stopper [1] and loosen the screw [2] that holds the
sensor mounting plate.
[1]
[2]
[2]

16. To make the light blocking plate pass the center of the sensor slit
[1], move the sensor mounting plate [2] from side to side and
adjust the mounting plates position.
[1]
I-411

SD-509
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17. Lower the stopper [1] and confirm that the state is that of <OK>.
[1]
18. Raise the stopper [1] again and tighten the screw [2] that was
loosened in step 15.
19. Make the copy sample again to confirm the cease skew.
[1]
[2]
I-412
bizhub 423/363/283/223
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE
There are two ways to update the firmware: One is by directly connecting with the main body using the USB memory device, and the
other is by downloading over a network using the Internet ISW.
NOTE
The settings in the "Utility" mode and the "Service Mode" will not be changed, when the firmware is updated.
J-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 1. Confirming the firmware version
1. Confirming the firmware version

Example: Firmware 1/5
1.1 Procedure
2. Select the [Firmware Version].
3. Check if the firmware version is updated.
NOTE
After conducting firmware updating, check the firmware version No. and confirm that the firmware has been normally updated.
J-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 2. USB memory
2. USB memory
NOTE
When updating the firmware, use the service port for the service.
It cannot be updated when connected to another service port.
2.1 Preparation
Conditions for USB memory which can be used for updating the firmware are as follows:
Without security function added (security function can be turned off)
Memory with 1 GB to 2 GB are recommended (One with 4 GB or more may not operate)
Corresponds to USB 2.0
Formatted with FAT32 type
A USB flash memory that appears as multiple drives on a computer cannot be used.
2.2 Procedure
1. Connect the USB to the PC, and copy the firmware data to the USB memory.
NOTE
The firmware data to be updated must be copied to the root directory with the file name A1UDFW. tar.
More than one firmware data with a single model or multiple models can be stored in the USB memory. (Maximum of fifteen
files)
When storing more than one firmware data, make a folder with a name (model code) FW (A1UDFW for this machine) right
under the root directory. (File names can be set arbitrarily)
When making a folder and storing more than one firmware data, it is also necessary to copy the firmware data A0EDFW. Tar
to the root directly.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn OFF the main power switch and the sub power switch.
Remove the screw [1].
Lift up the cover [2] of the service port.
Insert the USB memory device to the service port [3] for service.
J-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[3]
[2]
NOTE
When updating the firmware, use the service port for the service.
It cannot be updated when connected to another service port.
7. Control panel shows F/W items to be updated, and select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].)
F/W to be updated
Appropriate board
Remark
MFP CONTROLLER
MFP board (MFPB)
SCANNER
MFP board (MFPB)
PRINTER
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1
Fax board (Main)
Only when the FK-508 is mounted
Fax board (Sub)
ADF (DF-M)
FINISHER
FNS control board (FSCB)
RU
Transfer control board (TRCB)
SD
Only when the SD-509 is mounted
DSC
DSC board
Only when the SC-507 is mounted
DSC2
Not used
Only when the FS-527/529 is mounted
NOTE
Unless one of the keys on the control panel is pressed, firmware is automatically updated after 30 seconds when the main
power switch/sub power switch is turned on.
When the BootRom file is in the firmware data, [RootRom] key is displayed. Pressing the key updates data.
When more than one firmware are stored in step 1, pressing [FW Data Select] enables selection. (Data of other models cannot
be selected.)
(Data with * at the left top of data selection screen will be the default data copied to the root directly in the USB memory.)
8. Press the [START]. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.)
9. Check that the control panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly ([Downloading Completed]). Check
also the check sum value ([Check Sum ####]) shown on the control panel. (The Start key lights blue.)
10. Turn OFF the main power switch and the sub power switch.
11. Remove the USB memory device, and fix the cover of the USB port using a screw.
NOTE
When turning the main power switch ON for the first time after the firmware is updated, data may sometimes be internally
updated.
In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power switch OFF until either the serial number
input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.
J-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223

14. Select [Firmware Version].
15. Make sure if the version of firmware is updated.
2.3 Action when data transfer fails

If NG appears on the control panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red), take the
following steps.
1. Perform the data rewriting procedure again.
2. If the procedure is abnormally terminated, change the USB memory for a new one and try another rewriting sequence.
3. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated, change the board that has caused NG and carry out data rewriting procedure.
F/W to be updated
Appropriate board
MFP CONTROLLER
MFP board (MFPB)
SCANNER
MFP board (MFPB)
Remark
PRINTER
Fax board (Main)
Fax board (Sub)
ADF (DF-M)
FINISHER
RU
SD
DSC1
DSC board
DSC2
Not used
J-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 3. Internet ISW
3. Internet ISW
3.1 Preparations for firmware rewriting
3.1.1 Outline
[Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the firmware with the control panel of the main body, so the main body
will automatically receive the firmware from the program server over a network for updating. With the Internet ISW, the firmware can be
updated when the CE is at the users without firmware data.
3.1.2 Service environment

The following conditions are necessary for using the Internet ISW function.
The main body is connected to such a network environment that the firmware can be downloaded on the internet using the ftp or http
protocol.
The Internet ISW will not operate under the following conditions.
Main power switch is set to OFF.
Sub power switch is set to OFF.
When the following setting is set to ON:
[Administrator Setting] [Security Setting] [Enhanced Security Mode]
Machine is operating, or there are jobs present (including appointed jobs).
Machine is in idle with suspended job
Paper jam has occurred
Image file is in the memory
Model or the circuit board of the program does not match
3.1.3 Preparations for firmware rewriting

For using the Internet ISW, the network parameter, program server address as well as firewall address need to be set to the main body.
For details of each setting item, refer to Adjustment/Setting I.11.23 Internet ISW.
(1) Internet ISW Set

2. Touch [Internet ISW Set] which is available from [Internet ISW].
3. Touch [ON], and touch [END].

NOTE
Settings such as server setting, etc. will be available by selecting ON on this setting.
When the following setting is set to ON, ON cannot be selected on this setting.
[Administrator Setting] [Security Setting] [Enhanced Security Mode]
(2) Protocol setting

It performs the setting concerning the protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the Internet ISW.
When connecting to the program server using a proxy server, perform the setting for a proxy server.
(a) Connecting by http

1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode].
2. Data Input Setting
Touch [HTTP Setting], and select [ON].
3. Connect Proxy
For connecting via proxy server, select [ON].
4. Proxy Server
For connecting via proxy server, set the proxy server address and the port number.
1. Select the [Server Address], and set the proxy server address by IP addressing scheme or FQDN scheme.
2. Select [Port Number], and set the port number for the proxy server from 1 through 65535.
5. Proxy Authentication
Set the login name and the password which may be necessary for authentication when accessing to the proxy server.
1. When Authentication is necessary for accessing to the proxy server, select [Authentication], and select [ON].
2. Select [Log-in Name], and enter the login name on the on-screen keyboard.
3. Select [Password], and enter the password on the on-screen keyboard.
J-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. Connection Time-Out
Select [Connection Time-Out], and set the time for the connection time out between 30 and 300 seconds.
(b) Connecting by ftp

2. Data Input Setting
Touch [FTP Setting], and select [ON].
3. Connect Proxy
For connecting via proxy server, select [ON].
4. Proxy Server
For connecting via proxy server, set the proxy server address and the port number.
1. Select the [Server Address], and set the proxy server address by IP addressing scheme or FQDN scheme.
2. Select [Port Number], and set the port number for the proxy server from 1 through 65535.
5. Connection Setting
Perform the setting for accessing FTP server.
1. Select [Port Number], and set the port number for FTP server from 1 through 65535.
2. Select [Connection Time Out], and set the time for the connection time out from 1 through 60.
3. When connecting in PASV mode, select [PASV Mode], and select [ON].
NOTE
PASV Mode:
This mode is for transferring the file with FTP under the condition where communication is restricted such as
inside the firewall. Since with PASV mode, the client with restriction sets the port number, data transmission port
can be secured to enable the file transmission.
(3) Forwarding access setting

To make the access setting for the program server which stores the firmware data.
2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting].
3. Select [User ID], and enter the user ID which is necessary for connecting to the program server on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[END].
4. Select [Password], and enter the password which is necessary for connecting to the program server on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [END].
5. Select [URL], and enter the directory which stores the program server address and the firmware on the on-screen keyboard by URL
method, and touch [END].
NOTE
Enter the URL which matches to the protocol to be used.
When connecting to
http
http://(host name or IP address)/directory name or https://(host name or IP address)/directory

name
When connecting to
ftp
ftp://(host name or IP address)/directory name
6. Select [File Name], and enter the file name of the firmware data to be downloaded on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [END].
7. Touch [END] to finish setting.
3.2 Firmware rewriting from the control panel

3.2.1 Firmware rewriting from the control panel
NOTE
When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission beforehand.
DO NOT turn OFF the main/sub power switch while downloading.
(1) Conducting rewriting on the control panel

[Service Mode] [Internet ISW] [Download]
2. Touch [ISW Start].
J-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. The main body will automatically start running, and it starts accessing the server.
4. Control panel shows F/W items to be updated, and select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].)
F/W to be updated
Appropriate board
Remark
MFP CONTROLLER
MFP board (MFPB)
SCANNER
MFP board (MFPB)
PRINTER
Fax board (Main)
Fax board (Sub)
ADF (DF-M)
FINISHER
RU
SD
DSC1
DSC board
DSC2
Not used
NOTE
Unless one of the keys on the control panel is pressed, firmware is updated after 30 seconds when the unit has restarted.
(2) During firmware updating

1. The message to indicate the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting or transferring data.
(3) Completed or failed

(a) Firmware updated normally
1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return
to the main screen.
(b) Failing to update the firmware due to the network trouble

1. When updating failed to complete due to the trouble on connecting to the network, an error code and the message will be displayed.
2. Restart the main body in auto or manual mode, and touch [OK]. It can be used with the firmware version before conducting updating.
3. Check the settings for the network by error codes, and try updating again.
Refer to K.5.1 Error code list for the Internet ISW
(c) Failing to update the firmware after downloading has started

1. Once firmware updating has started, the ROM in the main body will be deleted.
When it failed right after updating has started, restart the main body, and shift to the standby screen to retry downloading.
J-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. When updating on the control panel, touch [settings] on the standby screen, and check the Network settings again.
Touch [Download], and restart the Internet ISW.
NOTE
Return to the standby screen without fail after turning the main power switch OFF/ON if the firmware is not updated.
Firmware can be updated with the USB memory with the main power switch OFF.
J-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 4. CS Remote Care
4. CS Remote Care
4.1 Firmware rewriting from the CS Remote Care
For detailed error information relating to CS Remote Care, refer to I.11.7 Setting up the CS Remote Care
For the firmware update procedure using CS Remote Care, refer to CS Remote Care Center Manual.
J-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE
K TROUBLESHOOTING
1. JAM CODE
JAM DISPLAY
(1) JAM DISPLAY
When the paper jam occurred, the message, the position jam occurred (number blinks), position of the remaining paper (number lights
up), and the JAM code are displayed.
NOTE
JAM code is displayed on the jam warning screen only when the following setting is set to Display.
[Service Mode] [System 2] [JAM Code Display Setting]
(2) Misfeed display resetting procedure

Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfed, and close the door.
1.1 List of the JAM code

JAM code
10-01
JAM type
Ref. page
Manual bypass feed section
K.1.5.1 10-01, 10-40
Tray 1 feed section
K.1.5.2 11-01, 11-44
Tray 2 feed section
K.1.5.3 12-01, 12-40
Tray 3 feed section
K.1.5.4 13-01, 13-40
Tray 4 feed section
K.1.5.5 14-01, 14-40
LCT feed section
K.1.5.6 15-01, 15-40, 15-43
LCT vertical transport section
K.1.5.7 17-08, 17-21, 17-22
Vertical transport section
K.1.6.1 20-01, 20-11
10-40
11-01
11-44
12-01
12-40
13-01
13-40
14-01
14-40
15-01
15-40
15-43
17-08
17-21
17-22
20-01
20-11
20-12
K.1.6.2 20-12, 20-21
20-13
K.1.6.3 20-13, 20-22
20-21
K.1.6.2 20-12, 20-21
20-22
30-01
K.1.6.3 20-13, 20-22

Image transfer section
K.1.7.1 30-01, 30-03
Exit section
K.1.7.2 32-01, 32-05, 32-31
ADF turnover section
K.1.8.1 66-01, 66-11, 66-21
ADF paper feed section
K.1.8.2 66-02, 66-12
30-03
32-01
32-05
32-31
66-01
66-11
66-21
66-02
K-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
JAM code
JAM type
Ref. page
66-12
66-03
ADF transport section
K.1.8.3 66-03, 66-13, 66-23, 66-33
ADF paper exit section
K.1.8.4 66-04, 66-14, 66-24, 66-34
ADF image reading section
K.1.8.5 66-05, 66-06, 66-07, 66-15
72-14
FS transport section <When FS-527 is installed>
K.1.9.1 72-14
72-15
K.1.9.2 72-15
72-16
FS transport section <When FS-527 is installed, When

FS-529 is installed>
Job separator transport section <When JS-505 is
installed>
K.1.9.3 72-16
72-17

K.1.9.4 72-17
72-18
K.1.9.5 72-18
72-19
K.1.9.6 72-19
72-21

K.1.9.7 72-21
72-22
K.1.9.8 72-22
72-26
SD paper exit section <When FS-527+SD-509 is

installed>
K.1.9.9 72-26
72-43
PK JAM <When FS-527+PK-517 is installed>
K.1.9.10 72-43
72-81
FS staple section
K.1.9.11 72-81
72-85
SD staple section <When FS-527+SD-509 is installed>
K.1.9.12 72-85
72-86
SD transport section <When FS-527+SD-509 is

installed>
K.1.9.13 72-86
72-87
SD transport section <When FS-527+SD-509 is

installed>
K.1.9.14 72-87
92-01
Duplex pre-registration section
K.1.10.1 92-01, 92-40
93-01
Duplex transport section
K.1.10.2 93-01
99-01
Controller JAM
K.1.10.3 99-01
66-13
66-23
66-33
66-04
66-14
66-24
66-34
66-05
66-06
66-07
66-15
92-40
1.2 JAM that do not display the JAM code

JAM type
Detection timing
Ref. page
Manual bypass feed

section
In case paper position is detected as locating properly after main power switch is
turned ON, door and cover are opened /closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is
regarded as paper jam at manual bypass feed section.
K.1.5.1 10-01, 10-40
Tray 1 feed section
regarded as paper jam at tray 1 feed section.
K.1.5.2 11-01, 11-44
Tray 2 feed section
Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28) is unblocked or turned ON when the main
power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
K.1.5.3 12-01, 12-40
Tray 3 feed section
The tray 3 vertical transport sensor (PS36) is turned ON when the main power
switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
K.1.5.4 13-01, 13-40
Tray 4 feed section
The tray 4 vertical transport sensor (PS46) is turned ON when the main power
switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
K-2
K.1.5.5 14-01, 14-40
bizhub 423/363/283/223
JAM type

Detection timing
Ref. page
LCT feed section
The paper feed sensor (PS51) is turned ON when the main power switch is set to
ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
K.1.5.6 15-01, 15-40, 15-43
regarded as paper jam at LCT feed section.
LCT vertical transport
section
The vertical transport sensor (PS52) is blocked when the main power switch is set
to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
K.1.5.7 17-08, 17-21, 17-22
regarded as paper jam at LCT vertical transport section.
Image transfer section
The registration sensor (PS1) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned
K.1.7.1 30-01, 30-03
regarded as paper jam at image transfer section.
Exit section
The paper exit sensor (PS3) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON,
a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
K.1.7.2 32-01, 32-05, 32-31
regarded as paper jam at exit section.
Duplex pre-registration
section
regarded as paper jam at duplex pre-registration section.
K.1.10.1 92-01, 92-40
Duplex transport section
The paper does not unblock the duplex unit lower transport sensor (PS93) even
after lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the duplex unit
upper transport sensor (PS92).
K.1.10.2 93-01
The paper does not unblock the duplex unit lower transport sensor (PS93) even
after lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the PS93.
In case the duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92) or the duplex unit lower
transport sensor (PS93) is blocked after main power switch is turned ON, door and
cover are opened /closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is regarded as paper jam
at duplex transport section.
regarded as paper jam at duplex transport section.
K-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.3 Sensor layout

1.3.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
Duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92)
[3]
[4]
Duplex unit lower transport sensor (PS93)
[5]
Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28)
1.3.2 DF-621
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[1]
Separation roller sensor (PS2)
[2]
Document registration sensor (PS3)
[3]
Reading roller sensor (PS4)
[4]
Document exit sensor (PS5)
K-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.3.3 PC-109/PC-208
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
K-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.3.4 PC-409
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Vertical transport sensor (PS52)
[4]
Paper feed sensor (PS51)
1.3.5 JS-505
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
Upper tray exit sensor (PS2)
[2]
K-6
Lower tray exit sensor (PS1)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.3.6 FS-529
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)
[3]
Paper empty sensor (PS7)
[2]
1.3.7 FS-527/SD-509/PK-517/JS-603
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Tray 1 path sensor (PS6)
[5]
Saddle path sensor (PS11)
[6]
Paper detection sensor/1 (PS43)
[7]
[8]
Lower path sensor (PS9)
[9]
Tray 2 paper detection sensor (PS16)
[10]
Upper path sensor (PS8)
1.4 Initial check items

When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item
Action
K-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Does paper meet product specifications?
Replace paper.
Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp?
Replace paper.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the paper path deformed or
worn?
Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the Set as necessary.
paper?
Are the actuators operating correctly?
Correct or replace the defective actuator.
1.5 1*-**
1.5.1 10-01, 10-40
(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at manual bypass feed section
JAM code
10-01, 10-40
Detection timing
10-01
The leading edge of the paper does not unblocked or turn ON the tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28)
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the manual bypass starts to feed paper.
10-40
For paper fed from the manual bypass, the image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.
In case paper position is detected as locating properly after main power switch is turned ON, door and
cover are opened / closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is regarded as paper jam at manual bypass
feed section.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
Action
Initial check items
PS28 I/O check, sensor check
Control signal
Location of electrical component
PRCB CN23-16 (ON)
C-17
C-19
CL81 operation check
PRCB CN9-2 (ON)
C-10
SD81 operation check
PRCB CN9-4 (ON)
C-10
PRCB CN3-4 (REM)

PRCB CN3-7 (LOCK)
C-16
5
6
M1 operation check
Change PRCB
Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 3.6MB)
1.5.2 11-01, 11-44

(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at tray 1 feed section
JAM code
11-01, 11-44
Detection timing
11-01
The leading edge of the paper does not unblocked the registration sensor (PS1) even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the tray 1 starts to feed paper.
11-44
At the start of paper feed retry, the registration sensor (PS1) has already detected paper passage.
cover are opened / closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is regarded as paper jam at tray 1 feed section.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Tray 1
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
3
Action
Control signal
Initial check items

K-8
PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
PRCB CN13-2 (ON)
C-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
4
5
Action
Control signal
M1 operation check
Change PRCB

C-3
PRCB CN3-4 (REM)

PRCB CN3-7 (LOCK)
C-16
1.5.3 12-01, 12-40

(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at tray 2 feed section
JAM code
12-01, 12-40
Detection timing
12-01
The leading edge of the paper does not unblocked or turn ON the tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28)
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 2 starts to feed paper.
12-40
For paper fed from the tray 2, the image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.
Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28) is unblocked or turned ON when the main power switch is turned
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Tray 2
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Action
Control signal
Initial check items

M1 operation check
Change PRCB
PRCB CN23-16 (ON)
C-17
C-19
PRCB CN14-2 (ON)
C-4
C-6
PRCB CN23-13 (ON)
C-17
C-19
PRCB CN3-4 (REM)

PRCB CN3-7 (LOCK)
C-16
1.5.4 13-01, 13-40

(1) Contents
JAM type
Tray 3 feed section misfeed
JAM code
13-01, 13-40
Detection timing
13-01
The leading edge of the paper does not block the tray 3 vertical transport sensor (PS36) even after the
set period of time has elapsed after the tray 3 starts to feed paper.
13-40
For paper fed from the tray 3, image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
predetermined period of time after the timing of image write start signal output.
The tray 3 vertical transport sensor (PS36) is turned ON when the main power switch is set to ON, a
door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Tray 3
Relevant parts

PC Control board (PCCB31)
K-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
Action
Control signal
PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
PCCB31 CN6-11 (ON)
PC-208 B-2
PRCB CN23-16 (ON)
C-17
C-19
Initial check items

M31 operation check
PCCB31 CN5-1 to 4
PC-208 B-3
M32 operation check
PCCB31 CN5-5 to 8
PC-208 B-3
PCCB ICP1, ICP3 conduction check
Change PCCB31
Change PRCB
Link to the wiring diagram of bizhub 223/283/363/423 (PDF format, 3.6MB)

Link to the wiring diagram of PC-208 (PDF format, 1.2MB)
1.5.5 14-01, 14-40

(1) Contents
JAM type
Tray 4 feed section misfeed
JAM code
14-01, 14-40
Detection timing
14-01
The leading edge of the paper does not block the tray 4 vertical transport sensor (PS46) even after the
set period of time has elapsed after the tray 4 starts to feed paper.
14-40
For paper fed from the tray 4, image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
predetermined period of time after the timing of image write start signal output.
The tray 4 vertical transport sensor (PS46) is turned ON when the main power switch is set to ON, a
door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Tray 4
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
Action
Control signal
Initial check items

PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
PCCB31 CN11-2 (ON)
PC-208 G-5
PCCB31 CN6-11 (ON)
PC-208 B-2
PRCB CN23-16 (ON)
C-17
C-19
M41 operation check
PCCB31 CN9-1 to 4
PC-208 G-5 to 6
M42 operation check
PCCB31 CN9-6 to 9
PC-208 G-6
Change PCCB31
10
Change PRCB

1.5.6 15-01, 15-40, 15-43

(1) Contents
JAM type
LCT paper feed section misfeed
JAM code
15-01, 15-40, 15-43
Detection timing
15-01
The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the paper feed sensor (PS51) even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the LCT starts to feed paper.
15-40
For paper fed from the LCT, image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a predetermined
period of time after the timing of image write start signal output.
K-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223

There is no response to the paper feed command sent to the LCT even after the set period of time has
elapsed.
15-43
-
The paper feed sensor (PS51) is turned ON when the main power switch is set to ON, a door or cover is
opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
cover are opened / closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is regarded as paper jam at LCT feed section.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
2
3
4
5
Control signal
PCCB51 PJ5-2 (ON)
PC-409 G-9
PCCB51 PJ5-5 (ON)
PC-409 G-9
PRCB CN23-16 (ON)
C-17
C-19
PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20

M51 operation check
PCCB51 PJ6-1 to 4
PC-409 G-10
M52 operation check
PCCB51 PJ6-5 to 8
PC-409 G-9
Change PCCB51
10
Change PRCB

1.5.7 17-08, 17-21, 17-22

(1) Contents
JAM type
LCT vertical transport section misfeed
JAM code
17-08, 17-21, 17-22
Detection timing
17-08
The paper feed sensor (PS51) is not turned OFF even after the lapse of a given period of time after
PS51 has been turn ON.
17-21
The vertical transport sensor (PS52) is not turned ON even after the lapse of a given period of time after
the paper feed sensor (PS51) has been turn ON.
17-22
The vertical transport sensor (PS52) is not turned OFF even after the lapse of a given period of time
after the PS53 has been turn ON.
The vertical transport sensor (PS52) is blocked when the main power switch is set to ON, a door or
cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
cover are opened / closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is regarded as paper jam at LCT vertical
transport section.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
2
3
Control signal
PCCB51 PJ5-2 (ON)
PC-409 G-9
PCCB51 PJ5-5 (ON)
PC-409 G-9
K-11
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
4
5
Action
Control signal
PRCB CN23-16 (ON)
C-17
C-19
PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
M51 operation check
PCCB51 PJ6-1 to 4
PC-409 G-10
M52 operation check
PCCB51 PJ6-5 to 8
PC-409 G-9
Change PCCB51
10
Change PRCB

1.6 2*-**
1.6.1 20-01, 20-11
(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at vertical transport section
JAM code
20-01, 20-11
Detection timing
20-01
The registration sensor (PS1) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the
tray 2, tray 3 or tray 4 starts to feed paper.
20-11
The tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28) is not unblocked or turned OFF even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the paper has been blocked or turn ON the PS28.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Action
Control signal
Initial check items

CL1 operation check
M1 operation check
Change PRCB
PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
PRCB CN23-16 (ON)
C-17
C-19
PRCB CN23-13 (ON)
C-17
C-19
FREYB CN23-11 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
PRCB CN3-4 (REM)

PRCB CN3-7 (LOCK)
C-16
1.6.2 20-12, 20-21

(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at vertical transport section (tray 3)
JAM code
20-12, 20-21
Detection timing
20-12
The tray 3 vertical transport sensor (PS36) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time
after PS36 has been blocked by a paper.
20-21
The tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28) is not blocked or turned ON even after the lapse of a given
period of time after the tray 3, tray 4 or LCT starts to feed paper.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Relevant parts

K-12
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
Action
Control signal
PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
PCCB31 CN6-11 (ON)
PC-208 B-2
PRCB CN23-16 (ON)
C-17
C-19
Initial check items

M31 operation check
PCCB31 CN5-1 to 4
PC-208 B-3
M32 operation check
PCCB31 CN5-5 to 8
PC-208 B-3
Change PCCB31
Change PRCB

1.6.3 20-13, 20-22

(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at vertical transport section (tray 4)
JAM code
20-13, 20-22
Detection timing
20-13
The tray 4 vertical transport sensor (PS46) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time
after PS46 has been blocked by a paper.
20-22
The tray 3 vertical transport sensor (PS36) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time
after the tray 4 starts to feed paper.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
Action
Control signal
Initial check items

PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
PCCB31 CN11-2 (ON)
PC-208 G-5
PCCB31 CN6-11 (ON)
PC-208 B-2
PRCB CN23-16 (ON)
C-17
C-19
M41 operation check
PCCB31 CN9-1 to 4
PC-208 G-5 to 6
M42 operation check
PCCB31 CN9-6 to 9
PC-208 G-6
Change PCCB31
10
Change PRCB

1.7 3*-**
1.7.1 30-01, 30-03
(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at image transfer section
JAM code
30-01, 30-03
Detection timing
30-01
A sheet of paper does not block the registration sensor (PS1) after a predetermined period of time has
elapsed since the sheet unblocks PS1.
30-03
The leading edge of paper does not block the paper exit sensor (PS3) since the paper feeding is started.
The registration sensor (PS1) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is
K-13
bizhub 423/363/283/223

cover are opened / closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is regarded as paper jam at image transfer
section.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Action
Control signal
Initial check items

CL1 operation check
M1 operation check
Change PRCB
PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
FREYB CN23-11 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
PRCB CN3-4 (REM)

PRCB CN3-7 (LOCK)
C-16
1.7.2 32-01, 32-05, 32-31

(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at exit section
JAM code
32-01, 32-05, 32-31
Detection timing
32-01
The duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of
time after the switchback operation is started.
32-05
The paper exit sensor (PS3) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the
paper has blocked PS3.
32-31
The paper exit sensor (PS3) is unblocked before the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has
blocked the PS3.
The paper exit sensor (PS3) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is
cover are opened / closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is regarded as paper jam at exit section.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Initial check items
M1 operation check
PRCB CN3-4 (REM)

PRCB CN3-7 (LOCK)
C-16
M91 operation check
PRCB CN18-4 to 7
C-13
Change PRCB
Action
1.8 6*-**
1.8.1 66-01, 66-11, 66-21
(1) Contents
JAM type
ADF turnover section
JAM code
66-01, 66-11, 66-21
Detection timing
66-01
The document registration sensor (PS3) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the reverse
motion is started.
66-11
The document registration sensor (PS3) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the reverse
registration motion is started.
K-14
bizhub 423/363/283/223

The reading roller sensor (PS4) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the document
registration sensor (PS3) is turned ON during reverse transportation.
66-21
Misfeed processing
location
Left cover
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Control signal
DFCB J10-12 (ON)
DF-621 G-5
DFCB J11-3 (ON)
DF-621 G-3
M1 operation check
DFCB J6-1 to 4
DF-621 B-2
SD1 operation check
DFCB J14-1 (ON)
DF-621 B-4
DFCB F6 conduction check
Change DFCB
Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1MB)
1.8.2 66-02, 66-12

(1) Contents
JAM type
ADF paper feed section
JAM code
66-02, 66-12
Detection timing
66-02
The separation roller sensor (PS2) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the document feed
motor (M2) is turned ON.
66-12
The size of the original on the tray detected by ADF does not match the size of the original detected by
the main body.
Misfeed processing
location
Left cover
Relevant parts

Document FD size sensor/1 (PS6)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Initial check items
DFCB J10-8 (ON)
DF-621 G-5
DFCB J7-6 (ON)
DF-621 G-4
DFCB J7-5 (ON)
DF-621 G-3
DFCB J7-7 (ON)
DF-621 G-4
CL1 operation check
DFCB J17-1 (ON)
DF-621 B-4
CL2 operation check
DFCB J16-1 (ON)
DF-621 B-4
M2 operation check
DFCB J3-1 to 4
DF-621 B-2
10
11
Change DFCB
1.8.3 66-03, 66-13, 66-23, 66-33

(1) Contents
JAM type
ADF transport section
JAM code
66-03, 66-13, 66-23, 66-33
Detection timing
66-03
The separation roller sensor (PS2) is not turn OFF after a lapse of a given time after PS2 is turned ON.
66-13
The document registration sensor (PS3) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the
separation roller sensor (PS2) is turned ON.
K-15
bizhub 423/363/283/223

66-23
The document registration sensor (PS3) is not turned OFF after a lapse of given time after the
separation roller sensor (PS2) is turned OFF.
66-33
The reading roller sensor (PS4) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the document
registration sensor (PS3) is turned ON.
Misfeed processing
location
Left cover
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Control signal
DFCB J10-8 (ON)
DF-621 G-5
DFCB J10-12 (ON)
DF-621 G-5
DFCB J11-3 (ON)
DF-621 G-3
M1 operation check
DFCB J6-1 to 4
DF-621 B-2
M2 operation check
DFCB J3-1 to 4
DF-621 B-2
Change DFCB
1.8.4 66-04, 66-14, 66-24, 66-34

(1) Contents
JAM type
ADF paper exit section
JAM code
66-04, 66-14, 66-24, 66-34
Detection timing
66-04
The document exit sensor (PS5) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the reading roller
sensor (PS4) is turned ON.
66-14
The document exit sensor (PS5) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the reading roller
sensor (PS4) is turned OFF.
66-24
The document exit sensor (PS5) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the reading roller
sensor (PS4) is turned ON during reverse motion.
66-34
sensor (PS4) is turned OFF during reverse transportation.
Misfeed processing
location
Left cover
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Control signal
DFCB J11-3 (ON)
DF-621 G-3
DFCB J11-4 (ON)
DF-621 G-3
M1 operation check
DFCB J6-1 to 4
DF-621 B-2
Change DFCB
1.8.5 66-05, 66-06, 66-07, 66-15

(1) Contents
JAM type
ADF image reading section
JAM code
66-05, 66-06, 66-07, 66-15
Detection timing
66-05
sensor (PS4) is turned OFF during 1st side transportation.
66-06
The reading roller sensor (PS4) is turned ON earlier than a given time after the PS4 is turned OFF during
original transportation.
66-07
Due to a remaining sheet of paper that has not been detected by sensors, before the start of a job, a
sensor detects the sheet at an unexpected timing.
K-16
bizhub 423/363/283/223

The reading roller sensor (PS4) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the document
registration sensor (PS3) is turned OFF after the reverse registration motion is started.
66-15
Misfeed processing
location
Left cover
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Initial check items
Action
Make the adjustment of original stop position.
DFCB J10-12 (ON)
DF-621 G-5
DFCB J11-3 (ON)
DF-621 G-3
M1 operation check
DFCB J6-1 to 4
DF-621 B-2
M3 operation check
DFCB J15-4 to 5
DF-621 G-2
DFCB F4, F5 conduction check
Change DFCB
1.9 7*-**
1.9.1 72-14
(1) Contents
JAM type
FS transport section
JAM code
72-14
Detection timing
<When FS-527 is installed>

The saddle path sensor (PS11) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
lower path sensor (PS9) is turned ON by the paper.
72-14
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Control signal
FSCB PJ16-5 (ON)
FS-527 J-4
FSCB PJ13-6 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-5
M4 operation check
FSCB PJ10-5 to 8
FS-527 B to C-3
FSCB F7 conduction check
Change FSCB
1.9.2 72-15
(1) Contents
JAM type
JAM code
72-15
Detection timing

The saddle path sensor (PS11) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it turns
ON.
72-15
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
1
Action
Initial check items
K-17
Control signal
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Action
Change FSCB
Control signal
FSCB PJ13-6 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-5
1.9.3 72-16
(1) Contents
JAM type
FS transport section, Job separator transport section
JAM code
72-16
Detection timing
<When FS-527/FS-529 is installed>

The paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the copiers exit sensor (PS3) is turned ON by the paper.
The paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed
after it is turned ON by the paper.
72-16
<When JS-505 is installed>

The lower tray exit sensor (PS1) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the copiers paper exit sensor (PS3) is turned ON by the paper.
The upper tray exit sensor (PS2) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the copiers paper exit sensor (PS3) is turned ON by the paper.
The lower tray exit sensor (PS1) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the copiers paper exit sensor (PS3) is turned OFF by the paper.
The upper tray exit sensor (PS2) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the copiers paper exit sensor (PS3) is turned OFF by the paper.
The paper exit sensor (PS25) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
copiers paper exit sensor (PS3) is turned ON by the paper.
The lower tray exit sensor (PS1) is turned ON when the power switch is set to ON, a door or cover is
The upper tray exit sensor (PS2) is turned ON when the power switch is set to ON, a door or cover is
Misfeed processing
location
Horizontal conveyance cover <When FS-527 is installed>

Front cover <When FS-529 is installed>
Misfeed clearing cover <When JS-505 is installed>
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
When FS-527 is installed
Step
Action
Control signal
Initial check items
FSCB PJ11-2 (ON)
FS-527 I-11 to 12
M1 operation check
FSCB PJ28-1 to 4
FS-527 I-12
M3 operation check
FSCB PJ7-1 to 4
FS-527 C to B-3
FSCB F5, F6 conduction check
Change FSCB

Step
Control signal
Initial check items
Action
FSCB CN3-3 (ON)
FS-529 B-3
Change FSCB
K-18
bizhub 423/363/283/223

When JS-505 is installed
Step
Action
Control signal

-
Initial check items
JSCB PJ7-6 (ON)
JS-505 F-4 to 5
JSCB P7-9 (ON)
JS-505 F-4
M1 operation check
JSCB PJ5-1 to 4
JS-505 B-2 to 3
JSCB F7 conduction check
Change JSCB
Change PRCB
1.9.4 72-17
(1) Contents
JAM type
JAM code
72-17
Detection timing
72-17

after the paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) is turned ON by the paper.
The paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after
it turns ON.
The paper passage sensor/2 (PS10) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed
Misfeed processing
location
Horizontal conveyance cover <When FS-527 is installed>

Front door <When FS-529 is installed>
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Control signal
FSCB PJ11-2 (ON)
FS-527 I-11 to 12
FSCB PJ11-8 (ON)
FS-527 I-11
Change FSCB
Control signal

Step
Action
Initial check items
FSCB PJ11-2 (ON)
FS-527 I-11 to 12
FSCB CN7-3 (ON)
FS-529 B-4 to 5
Change FSCB
Link to the wiring diagram of FS-527 (PDF format, 1.8MB)

Link to the wiring diagram of FS-529 (PDF format, 1MB)
1.9.5 72-18
(1) Contents
JAM type
JAM code
72-18
Detection timing
72-18

The registration sensor (PS10) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) is turned ON by the paper.
The registration sensor (PS10) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it
turns ON.
K-19
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Misfeed processing
location
Horizontal conveyance cover
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Initial check items
FSCB PJ11-8 (ON)
FS-527 I-11
FSCB PJ13-8 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-5
Change FSCB
1.9.6 72-19
(1) Contents
JAM type
JAM code
72-19
Detection timing

The lower path sensor (PS9) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
registration sensor (PS10) is turned ON by the paper.
The lower path sensor (PS9) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it turns
ON.
The upper path sensor (PS8) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
The upper path sensor (PS8) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it
turns ON.
The lower path sensor (PS9) is not turned ON by the paper even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the switchback operation caused by the conveyance motor (M4) is completed.
After the switchback operation caused by the conveyance motor (M4) is completed, the lower path
sensor (PS9) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after PS9 is turn ON by
the paper.
72-19
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Control signal
FSCB PJ14-12 (ON)
FS-527 J-5
FSCB PJ16-5 (ON)
FS-527 J-4
FSCB PJ13-8 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-5
M4 operation check
FSCB PJ10-5 to 8
FS-527 B to C-3
FSCB F7 conduction check
Change FSCB
1.9.7 72-21
(1) Contents
JAM type
JAM code
72-21
Detection timing

The tray 2 paper detection sensor (PS16) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the lower path sensor (PS9) is turned ON by the paper.
72-21
Misfeed processing
location

The paper empty sensor (PS7) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper passage sensor/2 (PS10) is turned ON by the paper.
The paper empty sensor (PS7) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the paper empty sensor (PS7) is turned ON by the paper.
Front door
K-20
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Relevant parts

Tray 2 paper detection sensor (PS16)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Control signal
FSCB PJ16-5 (ON)
FS-527 J-4
FSCB PJ17-8 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-8
Change FSCB
Control signal

Step
Action
Initial check items
FSCB CN7-3 (ON)
FS-529 B-4 to 5
FSCB CN6-3 (ON)
FS-529 B-1 to 2
Change FSCB
1.9.8 72-22
(1) Contents
JAM type
JAM code
72-22
Detection timing

The tray 1 path sensor (PS6) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
The tray 1 path sensor (PS6) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it turns
ON.
72-22
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Relevant parts

Tray 1 path sensor (PS6)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Control signal
FSCB PJ13-8 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-5
FSCB PJ14-9 (ON)
FS-527 J-5
Change FSCB
1.9.9 72-26
(1) Contents
JAM type
SD paper exit section
JAM code
72-26
Detection timing
72-26
<When FS-527+SD-509 is installed>

The paper detection sensor/2 (PS44) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after
it turns ON.
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Stacker unit
Relevant parts

K-21
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Change SDDB
Change FSCB
Control signal
SDDB PJ13-2 (ON)
SD-509 G-3
1.9.10 72-43
(1) Contents
JAM type
PK JAM
JAM code
72-43
Detection timing
<When FS-527+PK-517 is installed>

Though the punch home sensor/1 (PS100) is not turned ON after the punch motor/1 (M100) starts
rotating forward, PS100 is turned ON after M100 starts rotating backward.
72-43
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Relevant parts
Punch motor/1 (M100)

Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
3
4
Control signal
M100 operation check

Change FSCB
FSCB PJ19-8 (ON)
FS-527 (PK-517) J-9
FSCB PJ19-1 (CW)

FSCB PJ19-3 (CCW)
FS-527 (PK-517) J-8
1.9.11 72-81
(1) Contents
JAM type
FS staple section
JAM code
72-81
Detection timing
Though the stapler sensor is not turned ON after the stapler motor starts rotating forward, the stapler
sensor is turned ON after the stapler motor starts rotating backward.
72-81
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Front cover
Relevant parts
Stapler unit
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Initial check items
Action
Change stapler unit
Change FSCB
1.9.12 72-85
(1) Contents
JAM type
SD staple section
JAM code
72-85
Detection timing
72-85

Though the saddle stapler home sensor is not turned ON after the saddle stapler motor starts rotating
forward, the saddle stapler home sensor is turned ON after the saddle stapler motor starts rotating
backward.
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Stacker unit
Relevant parts
Saddle stapler unit

K-22
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Initial check items
Action
Change saddle stapler unit
Change SDDB
Change FSCB
1.9.13 72-86
(1) Contents
JAM type
SD transport section
JAM code
72-86
Detection timing

The paper detection sensor/1 (PS43) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the saddle path sensor (PS11) is turned ON by the paper.
72-86
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Stacker unit
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Initial check items
FSCB PJ13-6 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-5
SDDB PJ9-8 (ON)
SD-509 G-1
SDDB F1 conduction check
Change SDDB
Change FSCB

Link to the wiring diagram of SD-509 (PDF format, 1MB)
1.9.14 72-87
(1) Contents
JAM type
SD transport section
JAM code
72-87
Detection timing

The paper detection sensor/2 (PS44) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the saddle path sensor (PS11) is turned ON by the paper.
72-87
Misfeed processing
location
Front door
Stacker unit
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
Control signal
FSCB PJ13-6 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-5
SDDB PJ13-2 (ON)
SD-509 G-3
SDDB F1 conduction check
Change SDDB
Change FSCB

Link to the wiring diagram of SD-509 (PDF format, 1MB)
1.10 9*-**
1.10.1 92-01, 92-40
(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at duplex pre-registration section
JAM code
92-01, 92-40
K-23
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Detection timing
92-01
The registration sensor (PS1) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a
duplex paper feed sequence has been started.
92-40
For the second-side feed of paper in the duplex mode, the image write start signal permit continues to be
disabled for a predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.
cover are opened / closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is regarded as paper jam at duplex preregistration section.
Misfeed processing
location
Right door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
1
2
3
Action
Control signal
PRCB CN23-9 (ON)
C-17 to 18
C-20
M1 operation check
PRCB CN3-4 (REM)

PRCB CN3-7 (LOCK)
C-16
Initial check items

M91 operation check
PRCB CN18-4 to 7
C-13
M92 operation check
PRCB CN5-4 to 7
C-22
Change PRCB
1.10.2 93-01
(1) Contents
JAM type
Misfeed at duplex transport section
JAM code
93-01
Detection timing
93-01
The paper does not unblock the duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92) even after lapse of a given
period of time after the paper has blocked the PS92.
The paper does not unblock the duplex unit lower transport sensor (PS93) even after lapse of a given
period of time after the paper has blocked the duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92).
The paper does not unblock the duplex unit lower transport sensor (PS93) even after lapse of a given
period of time after the paper has blocked the PS93.
In case the duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92) or the duplex unit lower transport sensor (PS93) is
blocked after main power switch is turned ON, door and cover are opened /closed or jam/trouble reset is
done, it is regarded as paper jam at duplex transport section.
cover are opened / closed or jam/trouble reset is done, it is regarded as paper jam at duplex transport
section.
Misfeed processing
location
Duplex door
Relevant parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Initial check items
2
3
Control signal
PRCB CN5-10 (ON)
C-22
PRCB CN5-13 (ON)
C-21
M91 operation check
PRCB CN18-4 to 7
C-13
M92 operation check
PRCB CN5-4 to 7
C-22
Change PRCB
1.10.3 99-01
(1) Contents
JAM type
Controller JAM
K-24
bizhub 423/363/283/223
JAM code

99-01
Detection timing
99-01
Forced stop command was sent from the controller to the printer engine due to the error in paper size,
media, etc.
Media error has occurred in both sides printing.
Misfeed processing
location
Relevant parts
K-25
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2.1 Display procedure
The machines CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding warning code and
maintenance call mark on the control panel.
Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the state confirm screen.
Maintenance mark
2.2 List of the malfunction code

If an image stabilization or scanner fault occurs, the corresponding warning code appears.
Code
Item
Ref. page
S-1
CCD gain adjustment failure
K.2.3 S-1
D-1
Split line detect
K.2.4 D-1
P-27
Transfer ATVC failure
K.2.5 P-27
L-4
Drum unit rotation time excess warning
K.2.6 L-4
L-6
Warning of excess hours of developer use
K.2.7 L-6
L-7
Warning of ozone filters excess number of prints
K.2.8 L-7
L-8
Paper dust remover excess warning
K.2.9 L-8
L-9
Developing unit rotation time excess warning
K.2.10 L-9
L-10
Warning of transfer roller units excess number of prints
K.2.11 L-10
L-11
Fusing unit rotation time excess warning
K.2.12 L-11
2.3 S-1
2.3.1 Contents
Malfunction type
CCD gain adjustment failure
Malfunction code
S-1
Description timing
It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment value is faulty.
Relevant parts
Exposure unit/LED exposure unit

CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)
K-26
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.3.2 Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Correct the harness connection between CCDB and MFPB if faulty.

Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary.
Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading sheet if dirty.
Correct reflective mirror of the scanner if faulty, or change scanner.
Change CCD sensor unit.
Change MFPB.
2.4 D-1
2.4.1 Contents
Malfunction type
Split line detect
Malfunction code
D-1
Description timing
When the main/sub power switches are turned ON or when the machine is recovering from the power save
mode, if the original cover is not open, the cleaning brush rotates 360 degrees to detect whether or not
stain exists in the original reading section. This warning will be displayed if the original is set to ADF when
stain exist.
The thin line detection level and the warning display can be changed by the following setting.
[Service Mode] [System 2] [Split Line Detect. Setting]
Relevant parts
Glass cleaning roller home sensor (PS13)

2.4.2 Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Wipe clean the glass surface of the DF original glass.

Check the glass cleaning roller unit for proper installation and correct if necessary.
Select [Service Mode] [System 2] [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.], and change the setting.
Check the DFCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
M4 operation check.
Change glass cleaning brush.
Change DFCB.
2.5 P-27
2.5.1 Contents
Malfunction type
Transfer ATVC failure
Malfunction code
P-27
Description timing
An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the image transfer ATVC value.
Relevant parts
High voltage unit (HV)

2nd image transfer assy
2.5.2 Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check that the spring does not come off during the pressure operation of the transfer roller and correct if necessary.
Check the contact at the joint of the transfer roller unit and HV. Clean the joint or correct if necessary.
Change HV.
Change PRCB.
2.6 L-4
2.6.1 Contents
Malfunction type
Drum unit rotation time excess warning
Malfunction code
L-4
Description timing
PC drum rotation time count value used for the life judgment of drum unit (the value for PC drum rotation
distance calculated into the rotation time) is above the threshold value for the excess warning.
Printing with this warning being displayed is not included in the image warranty.
2.7 L-6
2.7.1 Contents
Malfunction type
Warning of excess hours of developer use
Malfunction code
L-6
Description timing
The count of hours the developer has been used (PC motor rotation time), which is used to judge the life of
the developer, exceeds the excess warning threshold.
2.8 L-7
2.8.1 Contents
Malfunction type
Warning of ozone filters excess number of prints
K-27
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Malfunction code
L-7
Description timing
The ozone filters count of sheets printed, which is used to judge the life of the ozone filter, exceeds the
excess warning threshold.
2.9 L-8
2.9.1 Contents
Malfunction type
Paper dust remover excess warning
Malfunction code
L-8
Description timing
The paper dust removers count (PC motor rotation time), which is used to judge the life of the paper dust
remover, exceeds the excess warning threshold.
2.10 L-9
2.10.1 Contents
Malfunction type
Developing unit rotation time excess warning
Malfunction code
L-9
Description timing
The count of hours the developing unit has been rotated (PC motor rotation time), which is used to judge
the life of the developing unit, exceeds the excess warning threshold.
2.11 L-10
2.11.1 Contents
Malfunction type
Warning of transfer roller units excess number of prints
Malfunction code
L-10
Description timing
The transfer roller units count of sheets printed, which is used to judge the life of the transfer roller unit,
exceeds the excess warning threshold.
2.12 L-11
2.12.1 Contents
Malfunction type
Fusing unit rotation time excess warning
Malfunction code
L-11
Description timing
The count of hours the fusing unit has been rotated (main motor rotation time), which is used to judge the
life of the fusing unit, exceeds the excess warning threshold.
K-28
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE
3. TROUBLE CODE
The machines CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the
control panel.
3.2 Trouble resetting procedure

Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the rank of the trouble code.
* List of malfunction resetting procedures
Trouble code rank
Resetting procedures
Rank A
Trouble reset: Refer to the Trouble resetting procedure by Trouble Reset key.
Rank B
Opening/closing the right door
Rank C
Turning main power switch OFF/ON
3.2.1 Trouble resetting procedure by Trouble Reset key

(1) Use
If the all troubles occur and the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and ON again, or opening and closing the
right door, clear the status of the machine.
To be used when the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and ON again, or opening and closing the right door
in case of a trouble.
(2) Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn OFF the main power switch.

Turn main power switch ON while pressing the Utility/Counter key.
Touch [Trouble Reset].
Check to make sure that [OK] is displayed and it has been reset.
After turning off the main power switch, turn it on again more than 10 seconds after and check if the machine starts correctly.
3.3 Trouble isolation function

The trouble isolation function enables you to control MFP temporarily isolating faulty units and options where the trouble isolation function
can be applied when trouble occurs. This allows you to continue using the other units that are not affected and reduce down time that
continues until CE resolves the problem.
This function can be selected for the following units and options.
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCT
Manual
Half-Fold
Center Stapling
Tri-Fold
Staple
Scanner
ADF
If a problem occurs with the units where the trouble isolation function can be applied, the control panel displays a trouble code and a key
with which you decide whether to continue using the MFP. When you press down the key, the control panel displays the units that will be
isolated as well as the next confirmation key with which you decide to continue.
When you press down the confirmation key, the message on the control panel asks you to turn OFF and ON the sub power switch. After
turning OFF and ON the sub power switch, the MFP starts operating, isolating the faulty units. The message on the control panel also tells
that the MFP is working, isolating the faulty units.
To temporarily isolate faulty units and continue using the MFP with the trouble isolation function, be sure to make the above mentioned
control panel operation. The faulty units cannot be automatically isolated.
K-29
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
The malfunction detection mechanism is not applied to units and options that are being isolated.
3.4 List of the trouble code

Code
Item
Rank
Ref. page
C0001
LCT communication error
K.3.5.1 C0001
C0202
Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality
K.3.5.2 C0202
C0204
K.3.5.3 C0204
C0206
Tray 3 lift-up failure
K.3.5.4 C0206, C0208
C0208
Tray 4 lift-up failure
C0209
LCT elevator motor failure
K.3.5.5 C0209
C0210
LCT lift failure
K.3.5.6 C0210
C0211
Manual feed up/down abnormality
K.3.5.7 C0211
C0212
LCT lock release failure
K.3.5.8 C0212
C0213
LCT shift gate operation failure
K.3.5.9 C0213
C0214
LCT shift failure
K.3.5.10 C0214
C0215
LCT shift motor failure
K.3.5.11 C0215
C1004
FNS communication error
K.3.6.1 C1004
C1081
SD communication error
K.3.6.2 C1081
C1113
Center-staple lead edge stopper motor malfunction

K.3.6.3 C1113
C1114
Center-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction <When B

FS-527+SD-509 is installed>
K.3.6.4 C1114
C1115
Center-staple knife drive motor malfunction <When

K.3.6.5 C1115
C1116
Center-staple transfer motor malfunction <When

K.3.6.6 C1116
C1150
Center-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction <When

K.3.6.7 C1150
C1156
Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (trailing

edge) <When FS-527+SD-509 is installed>
K.3.6.8 C1156
C1158
Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (leading

edge) <When FS-527+SD-509 is installed>
K.3.6.9 C1158
C1181
Malfunctioning of belt up/down movement <When FS-529 B

is installed>
K.3.6.10 C1181
C1182
Shift motor drive malfunction <When JS-505 is installed,

When FS-527 is installed>
K.3.6.11 C1182
C1183
Elevate drive malfunction <When FS-527 is installed,

K.3.6.12 C1183
C1190
Alignment plate motor drive malfunction <When FS-527

is installed>
K.3.6.13 C1190
Alignment plate R drive malfunction <When FS-529 is

installed>
C1191
Alignment plate F drive malfunction <When FS-529 is

installed>
K.3.6.14 C1191
C1194
Leading edge stopper motor drive malfunction <When

FS-527 is installed, When FS-529 is installed>
K.3.6.15 C1194
C11A1
Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction <When

K.3.6.16 C11A1
Exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction <When FS-529

is installed>
C11A2
Accommodation roller pressure/ retraction malfunction

K.3.6.17 C11A2
C11A7
Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction <When

JS-603 is installed>
K.3.6.18 C11A7
C11B0
Stapler movement drive malfunction <When FS-527 is

installed, When FS-529 is installed>
K.3.6.19 C11B0
C11B2
Staple drive malfunction <When FS-527 is installed,

K.3.6.20 C11B2
C11B5
Saddle stapler drive malfunction <When FS-527+SD-509 B

is installed>
K.3.6.21 C11B5
C11C0
Punch motor drive malfunction <When FS-527+PK-517 is B

installed>
K.3.6.22 C11C0
C11E0
Duplex path switching motor drive malfunction <When

K.3.6.23 C11E0
K-30
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Item
Rank
Ref. page
Finisher route change malfunction <When JS-505 is

installed>
C11E1
Upper lower path switching motor drive malfunction

K.3.6.24 C11E1
C11E2
Tray 1 path switching motor drive malfunction <When

K.3.6.25 C11E2
C1301
Fan motor drive malfunction <When FS-529 is installed>
K.3.6.26 C1301
C1402
FS NVRAM memory error <When FS-529 is installed>
K.3.6.27 C1402
C2201
Toner bottle motors turning at abnormal timing
K.3.7.1 C2201
C2253
PC motors failure to turn
K.3.7.2 C2253, C2254
C2254
PC motors turning at abnormal timing
C2350
Toner suction fan motors turning at abnormal timing
K.3.7.3 C2350
C2557
Abnormally low toner density detected TCR sensor
K.3.7.4 C2557, C2558
C2558
Abnormally high toner density detected TCR sensor
C255C
TCR sensor adjustment failure
C2564
TCR sensor failure
C2650
Main backup media access error
K.3.7.6 C2650
C3421
Fusing heaters trouble (center)
K.3.8.1 C3421, C3423
C3423
Fusing heaters trouble (edge)
C3721
Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (center)
C3723
Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (edge)
C3821
Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (center)
C3823
Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (edge)
C4101
Polygon motor rotation trouble
K.3.9.1 C4101
C4501
Laser malfunction
K.3.9.2 C4501
C5102
Transport motors failure to turn
K.3.10.1 C5102, C5103
C5103
Transport motors turning at abnormal timing
C5351
Power supply cooling fan motors failure to turn
K.3.10.2 C5351
C5356
Cooling fan motors failure to turn
K.3.10.3 C5356
C5370
MFP control board cooling fan motors failure to turn
K.3.10.4 C5370
C5501
AC signal abnormality
K.3.10.5 C5501
C5601
Engine control malfunction
K.3.10.6 C5601
C5602
FPGA configuration error
K.3.10.7 C5602
C6102
Drive system home sensor malfunction
K.3.11.1 C6102, C6103
C6103
Slider over running
C6704
Image input time out
K.3.11.2 C6704
C6751
CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure
K.3.11.3 C6751
C6752
ASIC clock input error
K.3.11.4 C6752
C6901
DSC board mount failure 1
K.3.11.5 C6901, C6902, C6903
C6902
DSC board bus check NG1-1
C6903
DSC board bus check NG1-2
C6911
Undetectable
C6912
Undetectable
C6913
Undetectable
C6F01
Scanner sequence trouble 1
C6F02
Reserved
C6F03
Reserved
C6F04
Reserved
C6F05
Reserved
C6F06
Reserved
C6F07
Reserved
C6F08
Reserved
C6F09
Reserved
K.3.7.5 C255C, C2564
K.3.8.2 C3721, C3723

K.3.8.3 C3821, C3823
K.3.11.6 C6F01
C6F0A
Reserved
C6FDC
Reserved
C8101
Before reading pressure welding alienation mechanism

trouble
K.3.12.1 C8101
C8107
Glass cleaning mechanism trouble
K.3.12.2 C8107
C8302
Cooling fan trouble
K.3.12.3 C8302
K-31
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Item
Rank
C9401
Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection
C9402
Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection
CA051
Standard controller configuration failure
CA052
Controller hardware error
CA053
Controller start failure
CB001
For details, refer to K.8. FAX TROUBLE CODE

(FK-508) .
CB002
CB003
CB051
CB052
CB110
CB111
CB112
CB113
CB114
CB115
CB116
CB117
CB118
CB119
CB120
CB122
CB123
CB125
CB126
CB127
CB128
CB129
CB130
CB131
CB132
CB133
CB134
CB135
CB136
CB137
CB140
CB141
CB142
CB143
CB144
CB145
CB146
CB150
CB151
CB152
CB153
CB154
CB160
CB161
CB162
CB163
CB164
CB165
CB166
CB167
CB168
CB169
K-32
Ref. page
K.3.13.1 C9401, C9402
K.3.14.1 CA051, CA052, CA053
K.8. FAX TROUBLE CODE (FK-508)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Item
Rank
CB170
CB171
CB172
CB173
CB174
CB175
CB176
CB177
CB178
CB179
CB180
CB181
CB182
CB183
CB184
CB185
CB186
CB187
CB188
CB190
CB191
CB192
CB193
CB194
CB195
CB196
Ref. page
CC001
Vendor connection failure
K.3.15.1 CC001
CC151
ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)
K.3.15.2 CC151, CC152, CC153
CC152
ROM contents error upon startup (scanner)
CC153
ROM contents error upon startup (PRT)
CC155
Finisher ROM error
K.3.15.3 CC155
CC156
ADF ROM error
K.3.15.4 CC156
CC159
ROM contents error upon startup (DSC1)
K.3.15.5 CC159, CC15A
CC15A
ROM contents error upon startup (DSC2)
CC15B
Flash ROM error (saddle)
K.3.15.6 CC15B
CC163
ROM contents error (PRT)
K.3.15.7 CC163
CC164
ROM contents error (MSC)
K.3.15.8 CC164
CC165
ROM contents error (ADF)
K.3.15.9 CC165
CC170
Dynamic link error during starting (AP0)
CC171
CC172
K.3.15.10 CC170, CC171, CC172, CC173,

CC174, CC180, CC181, CC182, CC183,
CC184, CC185, CC186
CC173
CC174
CC180
Dynamic link error during starting (LDR)
CC181
Dynamic link error during starting (IBR)
CC182
Dynamic link error during starting (IID)
CC183
Dynamic link error during starting (IPF)
CC184
Dynamic link error during starting (IMY)
CC185
Dynamic link error during starting (SPF)
CC186
Dynamic link error during starting (OAP)
CC190
Outline font load error
K.3.15.11 CC190
CC191
Setting parameter load error (LDR)
K.3.15.12 CC191
CD002
JOB RAM save error
K.3.16.1 CD002
K.3.16.2 CD004, CD00F, CD020
CD004
Hard disk access error (connection failure)
CD00F
Hard disk data transfer error
CD010
Hard disk unformat
K.3.16.3 CD010
CD011
Hard disk out of specifications mounted
K.3.16.4 CD011
CD020
Hard disk verify error
K.3.16.2 CD004, CD00F, CD020
K-33
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Item
Rank
Ref. page
CD030
Hard disk management information reading error
K.3.16.5 CD030
CD041
HDD command execution error
K.3.16.6 CD041, CD042, CD043, CD044,

CD045, CD046
CD042
CD043
CD044
CD045
CD046
CD047
C
HDD SCSI library error
CD048
CD049
CD04A
CD04B
K.3.16.7 CD047, CD048, CD049, CD04A,

CD04B
CD201
File memory mounting error
CD202
Memory capacity discrepancy
K.3.16.8 CD201, CD202, CD203
CD203
Memory capacity discrepancy 2
CD211
PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure
CD212
Compression/extraction timeout detection
CD231
No Fax memory at FAX board mounting
K.3.16.10 CD231
CD241
Encryption ASIC setting error
K.3.16.11 CD241, CD242
CD242
Encryption ASIC mounting error
CD251
Undetectable
CD252
Undetectable
K.3.16.9 CD211, CD212
CD261
USB host board failure
K.3.16.12 CD261
CD271
i-Option activated and additional memory not installed
K.3.16.13 CD271
CD272
i-Option activated and additional memory and HDD not

installed
K.3.16.14 CD272
CD3##
NVRAM data error
K.3.16.15 CD3##
CD370
NVRAM data multiple errors
K.3.16.16 CD370
CD401
NACK command incorrect
CD402
ACK command incorrect
K.3.16.17 CD401, CD402, CD403, CD404,

CD405, CD406, CD407
CD403
Checksum error
CD404
Receiving packet incorrect
CD405
Receiving packet analysis error
CD406
ACK receiving timeout
CD407
Retransmission timeout
CDC##
Trouble related to security
K.3.16.18 CDC##
CE001
Abnormal message queue
K.3.17.1 CE001, CE003, CE004, CE005,

CE006, CE007
CE002
Message and method parameter failure
K.3.17.2 CE002
CE003
Task error
CE004
Event error
K.3.17.1 CE001, CE003, CE004, CE005,

CE006, CE007
CE005
Memory access error
CE006
Header access error
CE007
DIMM initialize error
CEEE1
MFP board malfunction
K.3.17.3 CEEE1
CEEE2
Scanner section malfunction
K.3.17.4 CEEE2
CEEE3
Printer control board malfunction
K.3.17.5 CEEE3
Trouble code (CF***) is referred to as abort code. For

details of abort code, refer to K.4. ABORT CODE .
K.4. ABORT CODE
CF***
3.5 C0***
3.5.1 C0001
(1) Contents
Trouble type
LCT communication error
Trouble code
C0001
Rank
Detection timing
Due to malfunctioning of the software or other causes, the watchdog timer triggers a reset when time is up.
Trouble isolation
K-34
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Relevant electrical parts

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Location of electrical components
Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more,
and turn ON the main power switch.
Action
PCCB51 replacement
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.1. C0001)
3.5.2 C0202
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Trouble code
C0202
Rank
Detection timing
The paper feed tray 1 upper limit sensor (PS12) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time
after the lifting motion has been started.
Trouble isolation
Tray 1

Tray 1 upper limit sensor (PS12)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between M11-PRCB CN12 for proper

connection and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M11 for proper drive coupling and

correct as necessary.
Check the connector between PS12-relay CN1-PRCB CN13

for proper connection and correct as necessary.
PRCB CN13-5 (ON)
C-2
C-3
Action
M11 operation check
PRCB CN12-18 to 19
K-8
Change M11
Change PRCB

3.5.3 C0204
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Trouble code
C0204
Rank
Detection timing
The paper feed tray 2 upper limit sensor (PS22) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time
after the lifting motion has been started.
Trouble isolation
Tray 2

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal


Check the connector between PS22-relay CN6-PRCB CN14

PRCB CN14-5 (ON)
C-4 to 5
C-6
M21 operation check
PRCB CN11-18 to 19
K-5
Change M21
Change PRCB
K-35
bizhub 423/363/283/223

3.5.4 C0206, C0208

(1) Contents
Trouble type
Tray 3 lift-up failure, Tray 4 lift-up failure
Trouble code
C0206, C0208
Rank
Detection timing
The tray 3 upper limit sensor (PS33) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper lift-up operation for the drawer began.
The tray 4 upper limit sensor (PS43) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper lift-up operation for the drawer began.
Trouble isolation
Tray 3
Tray 4

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the connector between M33-PCCB31 CN4 for proper

Check the connector between M43-PCCB31 CN8 for proper

Check the connector between PS33-relay CN18-PCCB31

CN6 for proper connection and correct as necessary.

CN10 for proper connection and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of each motor for proper drive

coupling, and correct as necessary.
PCCB31 CN6-3 (ON)
PC-208 B-1
PCCB31 CN10-3 (ON)
PC-208 G-4
M33 operation check
PCCB31 CN4-4 (ON)
PC-208 B-4
M43 operation check
PCCB31 CN8-12 (ON)
PC-208 G-1
10
Change PCCB31
11
Change PRCB

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.4. C0206, C0208)
3.5.5 C0209
(1) Contents
Trouble type
LCT elevator motor failure
Trouble code
C0209
Rank
Detection timing
The elevator motor sensor (PS5A) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has
elapsed while the elevator motor (M55) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
Trouble isolation
LCT
Elevator motor (M55)

Elevator motor sensor (PS5A)
PC relay board (PCREYB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the connector between M55-PCREYB CN2 for proper

Check the connector between PS5A-PCREYB CN2 for

proper connection and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M55 for proper drive coupling, and

PS5A I/O check, sensor check
PCREYB CN2<A>-5 (ON)
PC-409 K-5
K-36
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Action
Control signal
PCREYB CN2<B>-6 to 7
PC-409 K-6
Change PCREYB
Change PCCB51
M55 operation check
6
7

3.5.6 C0210
(1) Contents
Trouble type
LCT lift failure
Trouble code
C0210
Rank
Detection timing
The lift-up upper limit sensor (PS54) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper lift-up operation began.
The lift-up upper limit sensor (PS54) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the elevator motor
sensor (PS5A) after the paper lift-up operation began.
The lift-down lower limit sensor (PS5D) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the elevator
motor sensor (PS5A) after the paper lift-up operation began.
The lift-up upper limit sensor (PS54) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper lift-up operating.
The lift-down lower limit sensor (PS5D) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper lift-down operation began.
The lift-down lower limit sensor (PS5D) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the elevator
motor sensor (PS5A) after the paper lift-down operation began.
The lift-up upper limit sensor (PS54) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the elevator
motor sensor (PS5A) after the paper lift-down operation began.
The lift-down over run sensor (PS57) is blocked while the paper lift-down operating.
Trouble isolation
LCT
Lift-up upper limit sensor (PS54)

Lift-down lower limit sensor (PS5D)
Lift-down over run sensor (PS57)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

PJ5 for proper connection and correct as necessary.
Action
Check the connector between PS5D-PCREYB CN2 for

Check the connector between PS5A-PCREYB CN2 for

Check the connector between PS57-PCREYB CN2 for

PCCB51 PJ5-12 (ON)
PC-409 G-8
PS5D I/O check, sensor check
PC-409 K-3 to 4
PS5A I/O check, sensor check
PC-409 K-5
REYB CN2<A>-2 (ON)
PC-409 K-6
Change PCCB51

3.5.7 C0211
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Manual feed up/down abnormality
Trouble code
C0211
Rank
Detection timing
Paper does not unblock the manual lift-up position sensor (PS83) even after the transport motor (M1) rotates
for a given period of time after the position is switched from stand by position at lift-up plate to the feed
position.
The manual lift-up position sensor (PS83) is not blocked even after the transport motor (M1) rotates for a
given period of time after the position is switched from stand by position at lift-up plate to the feed position.
Trouble isolation
Manual

Manual lift-up position sensor (PS83)
K-37
bizhub 423/363/283/223

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal


Check the connector between PS83-PRCB CN9 for proper

Check the connector between SD81-relay CN99-relay

CN15-PRCB CN9 for proper connection and correct as
necessary.
PRCB CN9-7 (ON)
C-10
Action
M1 operation check
PRCB CN9-4 (ON)
C-10
PRCB CN3-4 (REM)

PRCB CN3-7 (LOCK)
C-16
Change M1
Change PRCB

3.5.8 C0212
(1) Contents
Trouble type
LCT lock release failure
Trouble code
C0212
Rank
Detection timing
The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
tray lock solenoid (SD51) is energized after the lowering operation is finished.
Trouble isolation
LCT

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the connector between SD51-PCCB51 PJ7 for proper

PCCB51 PJ7-4 (ON)
PC-409 G-10
Change PCCB51

3.5.9 C0213
(1) Contents
Trouble type
LCT shift gate operation failure
Trouble code
C0213
Rank
Detection timing
The division board position sensor (PS5E) cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the operation of the division board position motor (M53) began with the division board position sensor (PS5E)
set to L.
Trouble isolation
LCT
Division board position sensor (PS5E)

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between PS5E-PCREYB CN2<B> for

Action
Check the connector between M53-PCREYB CN2<B> for


K-38
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Action
Control signal
PS5E I/O check, sensor check
PCREYB CN2<B>-1 (ON)
PC-409 K-7
M53 operation check
PCREYB CN2<B>-2 to 3
PC-409 K-7
Change PCCB51

3.5.10 C0214
(1) Contents
Trouble type
LCT shift failure
Trouble code
C0214
Rank
Detection timing
The shifter stop position sensor (PS5B) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
shift operation began (shift to the right).
The shifter stop position sensor (PS5B) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the shift motor
sensor (PS58) after the shift operation began (shift to the right).
The shifter home position sensor (PS5C) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the shift
motor pulse sensor (PS58) after the shift operation began (shift to the right).
The shifter home position sensor (PS5C) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
return operation began (shift to the left).
The shifter home position sensor (PS5C) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the shift motor
pulse sensor (PS58) after the return operation began (shift to the left).
The shifter stop position sensor (PS5B) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the shift
motor pulse sensor (PS58) after the return operation began (shift to the left).
Trouble isolation
LCT
Shift motor sensor (PS58)

Shifter stop position sensor (PS5B)
Shifter home position sensor (PS5C)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between PS58-PCREYB CN2<A> for

Action
Check the connector between PS5B-PCREYB CN2<A> for

Check the connector between PS5C-PCREYB CN2<A> for

PC-409 K-6
PS5B I/O check, sensor check
PC-409 K-4
PS5C I/O check, sensor check
PC-409 K-4
Change PCCB51

3.5.11 C0215
(1) Contents
Trouble type
LCT shift motor failure
Trouble code
C0215
Rank
Detection timing
The shift motor sensor (PS58) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed
while the shift motor (M54) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
Trouble isolation
LCT
Shift motor (M54)

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between M54-PCREYB CN2<B> for

Action
Check the connector between PS58-PCREYB CN2<A> for


K-39
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Action
M54 operation check
Change PCCB51
Control signal
PC-409 K-6
PCREYB CN2<B>-4 to 5 (ON)
PC-409 K-7

3.6 C1***
3.6.1 C1004
(1) Contents
Trouble type
FNS communication error
Trouble code
C1004
Rank
Detection timing
When the FS control board (FSCB) is receiving data, a communication error is detected.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn OFF the
main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, and turn ON the
main power switch.
Rewrite the firmware.
Change FSCB
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.12. C1004, CC155)
3.6.2 C1081
(1) Contents
Trouble type
SD communication error
Trouble code
C1081
Rank
Detection timing
When a communication error is detected between the FS control board (FSCB) and the SD control board
(SDCB).
Trouble isolation
Half-Fold/Tri-Fold/Center Stapling

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
main power switch.
Change SDDB
Change FSCB
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.13. C1081, C11B5)
3.6.3 C1113
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Center-staple lead edge stopper motor malfunction
Trouble code
C1113
Rank
Detection timing

The leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time
has elapsed after the leading edge stopper motor (M20) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
Staple
Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling

Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45)
K-40
bizhub 423/363/283/223

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between M20-SDDB PJ8 for proper

Action
Check the connector between PS45-SDDB PJ10 for proper


SDDB PJ10-3 (ON)
SD-509 G-6
SDDB PJ8-1 to 4
SD-509 B-5
M20 operation check
Change M20
Change SDDB
Change FSCB

3.6.4 C1114
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Center-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction
Trouble code
C1114
Rank
Detection timing

The center staple alignment home sensor/F (PS42) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the center staple alignment motor/F (M24) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

Center staple alignment home sensor/F (PS42)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


SDDB PJ9-6 (ON)
SD-509 G-2
M24 operation check
SDDB PJ7-1 to 4
SD-509 G-3
Change M24
Change SDDB
Change FSCB

3.6.5 C1115
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Center-staple knife drive motor malfunction
Trouble code
C1115
Rank
Detection timing

The center fold plate home sensor (PS47) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the center fold plate motor (M26) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

Center fold plate home sensor (PS47)
K-41
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Check the connector between M26-relay CN21-SDDB PJ2



SDDB PJ10-6 (ON)
SD-509 G-6
M26 operation check
SDDB PJ2-1 (CW)

SDDB PJ2-3 (CCW)
SD-509 B-4
Action
Change M26
Change SDDB
Change FSCB

3.6.6 C1116
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Center-staple transfer motor malfunction
Trouble code
C1116
Rank
Detection timing

The center fold roller motor (M25) does not reach the specified speed even after the set period of time has
elapsed after it starts to operate.
Trouble isolation

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal


M25 operation check
SDDB PJ4-1 to 11
SD-509 B-3
Change M25
Change SDDB
Change FSCB

3.6.7 C1150
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Center-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction
Trouble code
C1150
Rank
Detection timing

The center staple alignment home sensor/R (PS41) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the center staple alignment motor/R (M23) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

Center staple alignment home sensor/R (PS41)
(2) Procedure
Step
1
Action
K-42
Control signal
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Control signal

Action
Check the connector between PS41-relay CN91-SDDB PJ9


SDDB PJ9-3 (ON)
SD-509 G-2
M23 operation check
SDDB PJ7-5 to 8
SD-509 G-2
Change M23
Change SDDB
Change FSCB

3.6.8 C1156
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (trailing edge)
Trouble code
C1156
Rank
Detection timing

Even after the set period of time has elapsed after the upper paddle motor (M21) starts running, a change of
motor lock signal is not detected and neither the paper detection sensor/1 (PS43) nor the paper detection
sensor/2 (PS44) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


Check the connector between PS44-relay CN137-SDDB


SDDB PJ9-8 (ON)
SD-509 G-1
SDDB PJ13-2 (ON)
SD-509 G-3
M21 operation check
SDDB PJ5-6 to 10
SD-509 B-3
Change M21
10
Change SDDB
11
Change FSCB

3.6.9 C1158
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (leading edge)
Trouble code
C1158
Rank
Detection timing

Even after the set period of time has elapsed after the lower paddle motor (M22) starts running, a change of
motor lock signal is not detected and neither the paper detection sensor/1 (PS43) nor the paper detection
sensor/2 (PS44) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

K-43
bizhub 423/363/283/223

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper

connection, and correct as necessary.

SDDB PJ9-8 (ON)
SD-509 G-1
SDDB PJ13-2 (ON)
SD-509 G-3
Check the connector between PS44-relay CN137-SDDB

M22 operation check
SDDB PJ5-1 to 5
SD-509 B-4
Change M22
Change SDDB
Change FSCB

3.6.10 C1181
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Malfunctioning of belt up/down movement
Trouble code
C1181
Rank
Detection timing

The belt position sensor (PS13) is not turned OFF after the set period of time has elapsed after the belt
retract solenoid (SD5) is turned ON.
The belt position sensor (PS13) is not turned ON after the set period of time has elapsed after the
conveyance motor/1 (M5) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
Staple

Belt position sensor (PS13)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between M5-FSCB CN17 for proper

Action
Check the connector between SD5-FSCB CN19 for proper

Check the connector between PS13-FSCB CN7 for proper


FSCB CN7-12 (ON)
FS-529 B-5 to 6
M5 operation check
FSCB CN17-3 to 6
FS-529 G-6
Change M5
SD5 operation check
9
10
FSCB CN19-5 (ON)
FS-529 G-4
Change SD5
Change FSCB

3.6.11 C1182
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Shift motor drive malfunction
Trouble code
C1182
Rank
Detection timing

The shift home sensor (PS6) is not blocked after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift motor (M2)
is turned ON (start of moving to the home position.)
K-44
bizhub 423/363/283/223

The shift home sensor (PS6) is not unblocked twice in a row after the set period of time has elapsed after the
shift motor (M2) is turned ON (start of moving to the shift position.)
When moving to the front (home) position: The tray 2 shift home sensor (PS25) is not turned ON even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the tray 2 shift motor (M16) is turned ON.
When moving to the rear (shift) position: The tray 2 shift home sensor (PS25) is not turned OFF even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the tray 2 shift motor (M16) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
Staple

Shift motor (M2)
Shift home sensor (PS6)
Tray 2 shift motor (M16)
Tray 2 shift home sensor (PS25)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between M2-JSCB PJ4 for proper

Action
Check the connector between PS6-JSCB PJ7 for proper


JSCB PJ7-18 (ON)
JS-505 F-3
JSCB PJ4-1 to 4
JS-505 F-6
M2 operation check
Change M2
Change JSCB

Step
Control signal
Check the connector between M16-FSCB PJ5 for proper

Action
Check the connector between PS25-FSCB PJ21 for proper


FSCB PJ21-6 (ON)
FS-527 J-3
M16 operation check
FSCB PJ5-5 (REM)
FS-527 B to C-9
Change M16
Change FSCB

3.6.12 C1183
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Elevate drive malfunction
Trouble code
C1183
Rank
Detection timing

During downward movement, the tray 2 upper limit sensor (PS24) is turned OFF and the tray 2 lower limit
sensor (PS21) is turned ON.
The elevate motor (M15) lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while the elevate motor (M15) is
turning.
The tray 2 upper position switch (SW2) is turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed while the
elevate motor (M15) is energized.
The tray 2 lower position switch (SW3) is turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed while the
elevate motor (M15) is energized.
K-45
bizhub 423/363/283/223

When the exit tray is moving up: When the tray up/down motor (M2) starts rotating with the output of the tray
lower limit sensor (PS6) being ON, PS6 is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed.
The paper surface detect sensor/1 (PS2) or the paper surface detect sensor/2 (PS3) is not turned ON even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the tray up/down motor (M2) starts rotating.
When the exit tray is moving down: The tray lower limit sensor (PS6) is not turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the tray up/down motor (M2) starts rotating.
Trouble isolation

Elevate motor (M15)
Tray 1 lower position sensor (PS21)
Tray 1 upper position sensor (PS24)
Tray 1 upper position switch (SW2)
Tray 1 lower position switch (SW3)
Tray lower limit sensor (PS6)
Paper surface detect sensor/1 (PS2)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


Check the connector between PS24-relay CN164-FSCB

Check the connector between SW2-FSCB PJ3 for proper

Check the connector between SW3-FSCB PJ3 for proper


FS-527 J-3
FSCB PJ21-3 (ON)
FSCB PJ16-9 (ON)
FS-527 J-4
10
SW2 I/O check, sensor check
FSCB PJ3-2 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-10
11
SW3 I/O check, sensor check
FSCB PJ3-2 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-10
12
M15 operation check
FSCB PJ4-1 to 11
FS-527 B to C-4
13
Change M15
14
Change FSCB
Control signal

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.23.1 FS-527)
Step
Action





FSCB CN5-9 (ON)
FS-529 B-2
FSCB CN4-3 (ON)
FS-529 B-3
FSCB CN4-6 (ON)
FS-529 B-2
M2 operation check
FSCB CN12-1 to 2
FS-529 G-2
10
Change M2
11
Change FSCB
K-46
bizhub 423/363/283/223

3.6.13 C1190
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Alignment plate motor drive malfunction <When FS-527 is installed>
Trouble code
C1190
Rank
Detection timing

The alignment plate home sensor (PS17) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the alignment plate motor (M13) is turned ON.
Alignment plate R drive malfunction <When FS-529 is installed>

The alignment plate home sensor/R (PS9) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the alignment motor/R (M4) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

Alignment plate motor (M13)
Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)
Alignment plate home sensor/R (PS9)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action
Check the connector between M13-relay CN81-FSCB PJ8



FSCB PJ17-3 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-8
FSCB PJ8-1 to 4
FS-527 B to C-7
M13 operation check
Change M13
Change FSCB

Step
Control signal

Action


FSCB CN6-9 (ON)
FS-529 B-1
M4 operation check
FSCB CN14-5 to 8
FS-529 G-3
Change M4
Change FSCB

3.6.14 C1191
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Alignment plate F drive malfunction
Trouble code
C1191
Rank
Detection timing

The alignment plate home sensor/F (PS8) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the alignment motor/F (M3) is turned ON.
K-47
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Trouble isolation
Alignment motor/F (M3)

Alignment plate home sensor/F (PS8)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


FSCB CN6-6 (ON)
FS-529 B-1
M3 operation check
FSCB CN14-1 to 4
FS-529 G-2
Change M3
Change FSCB

3.6.15 C1194
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Leading edge stopper motor drive malfunction
Trouble code
C1194
Rank
Detection timing

The leading edge stopper home sensor (PS20) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time
has elapsed after the leading edge stopper motor (M14) is turned ON.
The leading edge stopper home sensor (PS14) is not turned OFF after the set period of time has elapsed after
the stapler motor (M8) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
Staple

Stapler motor (M8)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action



FSCB PJ17-6 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-8
M14 operation check
FSCB PJ8-9 to 12
FS-527 B to C-6
Change M14
Change FSCB

Step
Control signal

Action

K-48
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Action

Control signal
FSCB CN8-3 (ON)
FS-529 B-6
M8 operation check
Change stapler unit
Change FSCB

3.6.16 C11A1
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction <When FS-527 is installed>

Exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction <When FS-529 is installed>
Trouble code
C11A1
Rank
Detection timing

The exit roller pressure sensor (PS12) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the exit roller retraction motor (M9) is turned ON.
The pick up roller position sensor (PS12) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the pick up roller position motor (M1) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

Exit roller pressure sensor (PS12)
Pick up roller position sensor (PS12)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


FSCB PJ16-12 (ON)
FS-527 J-4
M9 operation check
FSCB PJ9-5 (REM)
FS-527 J-1
Change M9
Change FSCB

Step
Control signal

Action


FSCB CN7-9 (ON)
FS-529 B-5
M1 operation check
FSCB CN11-3 to 6
FS-529 G-1
Change M1
Change FSCB

K-49
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.6.17 C11A2
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Accommodation roller pressure/ retraction malfunction
Trouble code
C11A2
Rank
Detection timing

The accommodation roller pressure sensor (PS13) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the accommodation roller retraction motor (M10) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

Accommodation roller pressure sensor (PS13)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


FSCB PJ16-15 (ON)
FS-527 J-3
M10 operation check
FSCB PJ9-8 (REM)
FS-527 J-1
Change M10
Change FSCB

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.28. C11A2)
3.6.18 C11A7
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction
Trouble code
C11A7
Rank
Detection timing

The tray 3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the tray 3 exit roller retraction motor (M17) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
Tray 3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)

Tray 3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


FSCB PJ12-6 (ON)
FS-527 (JS-603) L-10
M17 operation check
FSCB PJ30-2 (REM)
FS-527 (JS-603) L-9
Change M17
Change FSCB

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.29. C11A7)
3.6.19 C11B0
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Stapler movement drive malfunction
Trouble code
C11B0
Rank
Detection timing
K-50
bizhub 423/363/283/223

During home position search, neither the stapler home sensor/1 (PS18) nor the stapler home sensor/2 (PS19)
is turned ON or OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the stapler movement motor (M11) is
turned ON.
During the home position search, the stapler home sensor (PS11) is not turned ON or OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the stapler movement motor (M7) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
Staple

Stapler home sensor/1 (PS18)
Stapler home sensor (PS11)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action




FS-527 B to C-7
FSCB PJ17-12 (ON)
FSCB PJ17-15 (ON)
FS-527 B to C-7
M11 operation check
FSCB PJ8-5 to 8
FS-527 B to C-6
Change M11
10
Change FSCB

Step
Control signal

Action


FSCB CN7-6 (ON)
FS-529 B-5
M7 operation check
FSCB CN18-1 to 4
FS-529 G-5
Change M7
Change FSCB

3.6.20 C11B2
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Staple drive malfunction
Trouble code
C11B2
Rank
Detection timing

The stapler home sensor is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
stapler motor is turned ON.
During the initial operation, the stapler home sensor is not turned ON even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the stapler movement motor (M7) is turned ON.
The stapler home sensor is not turned ON after the set period of time has elapsed after the stapler motor
(M8) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
Staple
K-51
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Stapler unit
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal

Change stapler unit
Change FSCB
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.31. C11B2, C1402)
3.6.21 C11B5
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Saddle stapler drive malfunction
Trouble code
C11B5
Rank
Detection timing

The center stapler home sensor is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the center stapler motor is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
Saddle stapler unit

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action
Change saddle stapler unit
Change SDDB
Change FSCB
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.13. C1081, C11B5)
3.6.22 C11C0
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Punch motor drive malfunction
Trouble code
C11C0
Rank
Detection timing
<When FS-527+PK-517 is installed>

The punch home sensor/1 (PS100) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed while the
punch motor/1 (M100) is energized.
Trouble isolation

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Check the connector between M100-relay CN191-FSCB


Check the connector between PS100-relay CN191-FSCB


Action
FSCB PJ19-8 (ON)
FS-527 (PK-517) J-9
FSCB PJ19-1 (CW)

FSCB PJ19-3 (CCW)
FS-527 (PK-517) J-8
Change M100
Change FSCB
K-52
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.32. C11C0)
3.6.23 C11E0
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Duplex path switching motor drive malfunction <When FS-527 is installed>
Trouble code
C11E0
Rank
Detection timing

The duplex path switching sensor (PS3) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the duplex path switching motor (M2) is turned ON.
Finisher route change malfunction <When JS-505 is installed>

The route change home sensor (PS4) is not blocked after the set period of time has elapsed after the route
change motor (M3) is turned ON (start of shifting to the lower tray route.)
The route change home sensor (PS4) is not unblocked after the set period of time has elapsed after the route
change motor (M3) is turned ON (start of shifting to the upper tray route.)
Trouble isolation

Duplex path switching sensor (PS3)
Route change home sensor (PS4)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


Check the connector between PS3-relay CN111-FSCB PJ11


FSCB PJ11-6 (ON)
FS-527 I-11
M2 operation check
FSCB PJ29-1 to 3
FS-527 I-12
Change M2
Change FSCB

Step
Control signal
Check the connector between M3-JSCB PJ6 for proper

Action
Check the connector between PS4-JSCB PJ7 for proper


JSCB PJ7-15 (ON)
JS-505 F-4
M3 operation check
JSCB PJ6-1 to 2
JS-505 F-6
Change M3
Change JSCB

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.33.2 JS-505)
3.6.24 C11E1
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Upper lower path switching motor drive malfunction
Trouble code
C11E1
K-53
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Rank
Detection timing

The upper lower path switching sensor (PS26) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time
has elapsed after the upper lower path switching motor (M6) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

Upper lower path switching sensor (PS26)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


FSCB PJ21-9 (ON)
FS-527 J-2
M6 operation check
FSCB PJ9-1 (REM)
FS-527 J-2
Change M6
Change FSCB

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.34. C11E1)
3.6.25 C11E2
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Tray 1 path switching motor drive malfunction
Trouble code
C11E2
Rank
Detection timing

The tray 1 path switching home sensor (PS7) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the tray 1 path switching motor (M8) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
Tray 1 path switching motor (M8)

Tray 1 path switching home sensor (PS7)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action


FSCB PJ16-3 (ON)
FS-527 J-5
M8 operation check
FSCB PJ9-4 (REM)
FS-527 J-2
Change M8
Change FSCB

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.35. C11E2)
3.6.26 C1301
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Fan motor drive malfunction
Trouble code
C1301
Rank
Detection timing

While the motor is rotating, the fan lock signal remains L for the set period of time.
Trouble isolation
Fan motor (FM1)

K-54
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between FM1-FSCB CN19 for proper

Action
Check the connector of FM1 for proper drive coupling, and

FM1 operation check
FSCB CN19-2 (LOCK)
FS-529 G-4
Change FM1
Change FSCB

3.6.27 C1402
(1) Contents
Trouble type
FS NVRAM memory error
Trouble code
C1402
Rank
Detection timing

When the main power switch is turned ON, malfunctioning of the non-volatile memory on the FS control board
(FSCB) is detected.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
main power switch.
Change FSCB
3.7 C2***
3.7.1 C2201
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Toner bottle motors turning at abnormal timing
Trouble code
C2201
Rank
Detection timing
The toner bottle home sensor (PS4) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
toner bottle motor (M3) starts rotating.
The toner bottle home sensor (PS4) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
toner bottle motor (M3) starts rotating.
Trouble isolation

Toner bottle home sensor (PS4)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action
Check the connector between PS4-PRCB CN15 for proper

Check the M3 connector for proper drive coupling and

FSCB CN15-10 (ON)
C-24
M3 operation check
PRCB CN8-5 to 6
C-7
Change M3
Change PRCB

K-55
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.7.2 C2253, C2254

(1) Contents
Trouble type
PC motors failure to turn
Trouble code
C2253
Rank
Detection timing
The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
Trouble isolation
PC motor (M2)
Trouble type
PC motors turning at abnormal timing
Trouble code
C2254
Rank
Detection timing
The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation
PC motor (M2)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Check the M2 connector for proper drive coupling and

PRCB CN4-4 (REM)

PRCB CN4-7 (LOCK)
C-15
Action
M2 operation check
Change M2
Change PRCB

3.7.3 C2350
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Toner suction fan motors turning at abnormal timing
Trouble code
C2350
Rank
Detection timing
The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
Trouble isolation

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between FM4-relay CN43-PRCB CN6

Check the fan for possible overload and correct as

necessary.
PRCB CN6-14 (REM)

PRCB CN6-15 (LOCK)
C-9
Action
FM4 operation check
Change FM4
Change PRCB

3.7.4 C2557, C2558

(1) Contents
Trouble type
Abnormally low toner density detected TCR sensor
Trouble code
C2557
Rank
Detection timing
When sampling data is determined in TC ratio calculation control, TCR sensor output is lower than a
predetermined value for a predetermined number of times in a row even though there is toner in the sub
hopper.
K-56
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Trouble isolation
Trouble type
Abnormally high toner density detected TCR sensor
Trouble code
C2558
Rank
Detection timing
TC ratio in the developing unit, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is a
predetermined value or more for a given number of times consecutively.
Trouble isolation
Developing unit
Toner bottle
Toner near empty switch (RS1)
TCR sensor board (TCRSB)
Developing unit
Toner bottle
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Make sure that the following counter is cleared at the

developer replacing.
[Service Mode] [Counter] [Life] [Developer Use
Time]
Action
Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is

low.
Reinstall developing unit
Reinstall toner bottle
Check the contact of developing unit for proper connection

and correct as necessary.
Check the connector between TCRSB CN29-relay CN28PRCB CN24 for proper connection and correct as
necessary.

Check the connector between M4-relay CN13-PRCB CN8

Check the connector between RS1-relay CN38-PRCB CN15

10
M3 operation check
PRCB CN8-5 to 6
C-7
11
M4 operation check
PRCB CN8-1 to 4
C-7
12
Change developing unit
13
Change TCRSB
14
Change PRCB

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.40. C2557, C2558, C255C, C2564)
3.7.5 C255C, C2564

(1) Contents
Trouble type
TCR sensor adjustment failure
Trouble code
C255C
Rank
Detection timing
TCR sensor automatic adjustment does not function properly, failing to adjust to an appropriate value.
Trouble isolation
Trouble type
TCR sensor failure
Developing unit
Toner bottle
K-57
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Trouble code
C2564
Rank
Detection timing
Alarm signals for a TCR sensor are detected. This detection is used for detecting disconnection of TCR sensor
board (TCRSB) connector.
Trouble isolation
Developing unit
Toner bottle
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Reinstall developing unit
Reinstall toner bottle
Check the contact of developing unit for proper connection

Check the connector between TCRSB CN29-relay CN28PRCB CN24 for proper connection and correct as
necessary.

Check the connector between M4-relay CN13-PRCB CN8

M3 operation check
PRCB CN8-5 to 6
C-7
M4 operation check
PRCB CN8-1 to 4
C-7
Change developing unit
10
Change TCRSB
11
Change PRCB

Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.40. C2557, C2558, C255C, C2564)
3.7.6 C2650
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Main backup media access error
Trouble code
C2650
Rank
Detection timing
When an error is detected at the data reading process.

The machine writes and reads data, and judges that the data has error. Then the machine performs the same
process and judges again that the data has error.
When counter values are read, error is detected.
The machine detects that it does not have EEPROM.
Trouble isolation
EEPROM (IC51 on the printer control board)

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Reboot the machine.
Action
Check the EEPROM on the PRCB for proper connection

Change PRCB
Change EEPROM
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.41. C2650, C5601, C5602, CC163, CEEE3)
3.8 C3***
3.8.1 C3421, C3423
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Fusing heaters trouble (center)
Trouble code
C3421
Rank
K-58
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Detection timing
Detected temperature of the heating roller thermistor (TH2; center) does not go up a given range of
temperature even after a lapse of given period of time at warm up.
The warm-up is not completed even after the set period of time has elapsed after the warm-up is started.
Trouble isolation
Fusing unit
Trouble type
Fusing heaters trouble (edge)
Trouble code
C3423
Rank
Detection timing
Detected temperature of the heating roller thermistor (TH2; edge) does not go up a given range of
temperature even after a lapse of given period of time at warm up.
The warm-up is not completed even after the set period of time has elapsed after the warm-up is started.
Trouble isolation
Fusing unit
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is

secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the right door.
Check the fusing unit CN30-PRCB CN16, fusing unit-relay

CN4AC-DCPU CN2 for proper connection and correct or
change as necessary.
Change fusing unit
Change PRCB
Change DCPU
Action
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.42. C3421, C3423, C3721, C3723, C3821, C3823, C5501)
3.8.2 C3721, C3723

(1) Contents
Trouble type
Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (center)
Trouble code
C3721
Rank
Detection timing
Detected temperature of the heating roller thermistor (TH2; center) goes beyond a given temperature for a
given period of time consecutively.
Trouble isolation
Fusing unit
Trouble type
Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (edge)
Trouble code
C3723
Rank
Detection timing
Detected temperature of the heating roller thermistor (TH2; edge) goes beyond a given temperature for a given
period of time consecutively.
Trouble isolation
Fusing unit
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal


Change fusing unit
Change PRCB
Change DCPU
Action
K-59
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.8.3 C3821, C3823

(1) Contents
Trouble type
Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (center)
Trouble code
C3821
Rank
Detection timing
Detected temperature of the heating roller thermistor (TH2; center) goes below a given temperature for a given
period of time consecutively after warm up is completed.
Trouble isolation
Fusing unit
Trouble type
Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (edge)
Trouble code
C3823
Rank
Detection timing
Detected temperature of the heating roller thermistor (TH2; edge) goes below a given temperature for a given
period of time consecutively after warm up is completed.
Trouble isolation
Fusing unit
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal


Change fusing unit
Change PRCB
Change DCPU
Action
3.9 C4***
3.9.1 C4101
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Polygon motor rotation trouble
Trouble code
C4101
Rank
Detection timing
The polygon motor (M5) fails to turn stably even after the lapse of a given period of time after activating the
polygon motor.
Motor lock signal detects HIGH for a given period time consecutively during the polygon motor (M5) is
rotating.
Trouble isolation
PH unit
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between PH unit-PRCB CN19, CN20

Action
Change PH unit
Change PRCB
3.9.2 C4501
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Laser malfunction
Trouble code
C4501
K-60
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Rank
Detection timing
SOS signal is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time after starting the laser output.
SOS signal is not detected for a given period of time during printing.
Trouble isolation
PH unit
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between PH unit-PRCB CN19, CN20

Action
Change PH unit
Change PRCB
3.10 C5***
3.10.1 C5102, C5103
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Transport motors failure to turn
Trouble code
C5102
Rank
Detection timing
The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation

Trouble type
Transport motors turning at abnormal timing
Trouble code
C5103
Rank
Detection timing
The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Check M1 for proper drive coupling and correct as

necessary.
PRCB CN3-4 (REM)

PRCB CN3-7 (LOCK)
C-16
Action
M1 operation check
Change M1
Change PRCB

3.10.2 C5351
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Power supply cooling fan motors failure to turn
Trouble code
C5351
Rank
Detection timing
The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation

K-61
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between FM1-relay CN95-PRCB CN3


necessary.
PRCB CN8-8 (REM)

PRCB CN8-9 (LOCK)
C-7
Action
FM1 operation check
Change FM1
Change PRCB

3.10.3 C5356
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Trouble code
C5356
Rank
Detection timing
stationary.
Trouble isolation

(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the connector between FM2-relay CN44 relay CN46PRCB CN5 for proper connection and correct as necessary.

necessary.
PRCB CN5-2 (REM)

PRCB CN5-3 (LOCK)
C-22 to 23
FM2 operation check
Change FM2
PRCB ICP6 conduction check
Change PRCB

3.10.4 C5370
(1) Contents
Trouble type
MFP control board cooling fan motors failure to turn
Trouble code
C5370
Rank
Detection timing
stationary.
Trouble isolation

MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the connector between FM5-relay CN61-MFPB PJ26


necessary.
FM5 operation check
MFPB PJ26-3 (LOCK)
X-17
Change FM5
Change MFPB

K-62
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.10.5 C5501
(1) Contents
Trouble type
AC signal abnormality
Trouble code
C5501
Rank
Detection timing
Zero cross signal is not detected for a given period of interval when AC frequency is measured with the power
switch ON or when fusing heater is turned ON/OFF.
Trouble isolation
Fusing unit
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action

Change fusing unit
Change PRCB
Change DCPU
3.10.6 C5601
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Engine control malfunction
Trouble code
C5601
Rank
Detection timing
Engine control malfunction is detected with port monitor control.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connectors on the PRCB for proper connection

and correct or change as necessary.
Action
Change PRCB
3.10.7 C5602
(1) Contents
Trouble type
FPGA configuration error
Trouble code
C5602
Rank
Detection timing
When a configuration check is performed on the extended IC chip (FPGA) located on the printer control board
(PRCB), error is detected.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Reboot the machine.
Change PRCB
K-63
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.11 C6***
3.11.1 C6102, C6103
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Drive system home sensor malfunction
Trouble code
C6102
Rank
Detection timing
The scanner home sensor (PS201) is unable to detect the scanner located at its home position.
The scanner home sensor (PS201) is unable to detect a scanner even when the scanner motor has been
driven to move the scanner over the maximum travelling distance.
The scanner home sensor (PS201) detects the scanner when the scanner has moved the maximum travelling
distance from the position, at which it blocks the scanner home sensor.
Trouble isolation
Scanner
Trouble type
Slider over running
Trouble code
C6103
Rank
Detection timing
The scanner home sensor (PS201) detects the scanner at its home position during a period of time that begins
with the time when a pre-scan command and a scan preparation command are executed and ends when a
home return command is executed.
Trouble isolation
Scanner
Scanner home sensor (PS201)

Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
MFP board (MFPB)

MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Correct or change the scanner drive (cable, pulley, gear,

belt) if it is faulty.
Correct the scanner motor set screw if loose.
Adjust [Image Position Leading Edge] and [Feed Direction

Adjustment].
Check the connector between M201-REYB/SCAN PJ5 for

Check the connector between PS201-REYB/SCAN PJ8 for

Check the connector between REYB/SCAN PJ2-MFPB

Action
REYB/SCAN PJ8-3 (ON)
S-12
REYB/SCAN PJ5-1 to 4
S-9
Change REYB/SCAN (for fluorescent lamp)

Change REYB/SCAN (for LED lamp)
10
Change MFPB

3.11.2 C6704
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Image input time out
Trouble code
C6704
Rank
Detection timing
Image data is not input from the scanner to the MFP board (MFPB).
Trouble isolation
Scanner
MFP board (MFPB)

CCD board (CCDB)
K-64
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Select [Service Mode] [State Confirmation] [Memory/

HDD Adj.] [Memory Bus Check] [Scanner Memory],
and conduct the memory bus function.
Check the connectors between scanner section and MFPB

Change MFPB
Change CCDB
3.11.3 C6751
(1) Contents
Trouble type
CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure
Trouble code
C6751
Rank
Detection timing
The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a CCD clamp adjustment.

The peak value of the output data is 64 or less during a CCD gain adjustment.
Trouble isolation
Scanner

CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between CCDB PJ2-MFPB PJ01 for

Action
Check for possible extraneous light and correct as

necessary.
Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading sheet if

dirty.
Correct reflective mirror of the scanner if faulty, or change

scanner.
Change CCDB
Change MFPB
3.11.4 C6752
(1) Contents
Trouble type
ASIC clock input error
Trouble code
C6752
Rank
Detection timing
When starting the scanner, verification on reading and writing the predetermined value for image processing
ASIC on CCD board (CCDB) was conducted, and verification failure was detected.
Trouble isolation

CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Correct the harness connection of CCDB if faulty.
Action
Change CCDB
Change PRCB
Change MFPB
3.11.5 C6901, C6902, C6903

(1) Contents
Trouble type
DSC board mount failure 1
Trouble code
C6901
K-65
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Rank
Detection timing
When MFP detects that DSC board is not properly installed.
Trouble isolation
DSC board (SC-507)

MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type
DSC board bus check NG1-1, DSC board bus check NG1-2
Trouble code
C6902, C6903
Rank
Detection timing
When DSC bus check detects an error.
Trouble isolation
DSC board (SC-507)

MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Correct the harness connection of DSC board if faulty.
Action
Change DSC board
Change MFPB
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.52. C6901 - C6903, CA051 - CA053, CC164, CC190, CC191, CC211
- CC214, CC216, CD002, CD004, CD00F, CD010, CD020, CD211, CD212, CD231, CD241, CD242, CD261, CD271, CD272, CD401 CD407, CE001 - CE007, CEEE1)
3.11.6 C6F01
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Scanner sequence trouble 1
Trouble code
C6F01
Rank
Detection timing
The original transport interval becomes shorter than the designed value due to an original transport control error
in original reading in ADF.
Trouble isolation
Scanner
MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Correct the harness connection between main body and

ADF if faulty.
Action

Change DFCB
Change MFPB
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.53. C6F01)
3.12 C8***
3.12.1 C8101
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Before reading pressure welding alienation mechanism trouble
Trouble code
C8101
Rank
Detection timing
During a pressure motion being performed, the reading roller release position sensor (PS12) output does not
change from H to L.
During a retraction motion being performed, the reading roller release position sensor (PS12) output does not
change from L to H.
Trouble isolation

Reading roller release position sensor (PS12)
K-66
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between M3-relay CN5-DFCB J15 for

Action
Check the connector between PS12-DFCB J15 for proper


DFCB J15-3 (ON)
DF-621 G-1
M3 operation check
DFCB J15-4 to 5
DF-621 G-2
Change M3
Change DFCB

3.12.2 C8107
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Trouble code
C8107
Rank
Detection timing
The glass cleaning roller home sensor (PS13) is not turned ON after the set period of time has elapsed after the
glass cleaning motor (M4) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between M4-DFCB J1 for proper

Action
Check the connector between PS13-DFCB J8 for proper


DFCB J8-3 (ON)
DF-621 G-2
M4 operation check
DFCB J1-1 to 4
DF-621 B-2
Change M4
Change DFCB

3.12.3 C8302
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Cooling fan trouble
Trouble code
C8302
Rank
Detection timing
The lock signal continues to detect H during a given time while the DF cooling fan motor (FM1) is spinning.
Trouble isolation

(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between FM1-DFCB J13 for proper


necessary.
DFCB J13-1 (ON)

DFCB J13-3 (LOCK)
DF-621 B-3
Action
FM1 operation check
K-67
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Control signal
Change FM1
Action
Change DFCB

3.13 C9***
3.13.1 C9401, C9402
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection
Trouble code
C9401
Rank
Detection timing
The output from the CCD sensor is a predetermined value or less during CCD sensor gain adjustment.
Trouble isolation
Scanner
Trouble type
Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection
Trouble code
C9402
Rank
Detection timing
The average output value of the CCD sensor with the scanner at its standby position is a predetermined value
or more at the end of a scan job.
Trouble isolation
Scanner

Flat cable
Inverter board (INVB)
LED exposure drive board (LEDEDB)
CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)

Flat cable
CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connection between the lamp harness and the

inverter board, and correct if necessary.
Action
Check the connector between INVB CN1-REYB/SCAN

Check the connector between LEDEDB CN1-REYB/SCAN
Check the connector between REYB/SCAN PJ2-MFPB

Check the connector between CCDB PJ2-MFPB PJ01 for

Change INVB
Change LEDEDB
Change exposure unit

Change LED exposure unit
Change CCDB

3.14 CA***
3.14.1 CA051, CA052, CA053
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Standard controller configuration failure
Trouble code
CA051
Rank
Detection timing
The controller of the MFP board (MFPB) is faulty.
K-68
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type
Controller hardware error
Trouble code
CA052
Rank
Detection timing
A controller hardware error is detected in the network I/F.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type
Controller start failure
Trouble code
CA053
Rank
Detection timing
A controller start failure is detected in the controller interface.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check to see if the following setting has been correctly

made: [Service Mode] [System 2] [Image Controller
Setting].
If changing the setting, turn OFF the main power switch and
turn it ON again after 10 seconds or more.
Check the connectors of the MFP board (MFPB) for proper

Change MFPB
3.15 CC***
3.15.1 CC001
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Vendor connection failure
Trouble code
CC001
Rank
Detection timing
It is detected that communications with the vendor are interrupted for a given period of time or more with
Installed selected for the setting of vendor installation.
Trouble isolation

Coin vendor (Japan)
Coin vendor kit (North America, Europe)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the connector between vendor-PRCB CN17 for

Action
Change PRCB
Change vendor
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.58. CC001)
3.15.2 CC151, CC152, CC153

(1) Contents
Trouble type
ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)
Trouble code
CC151
Rank
Detection timing
A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the MFPB during starting.
Trouble isolation
Trouble type
ROM contents error upon startup (scanner)
Trouble code
CC152
K-69
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Rank
Detection timing
A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the MFPB during starting.
Trouble isolation
Trouble type
ROM contents error upon startup (PRT)
Trouble code
CC153
Rank
Detection timing
A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the PRCB during starting.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the ROM version.
Replace the appropriate board.

MSC: MFP board (MFPB)
IR: MFP board (MFPB)
PRT: Printer control board (PRCB)
3.15.3 CC155
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Finisher ROM error
Trouble code
CC155
Rank
Detection timing
Data of flash ROM of the finishing options is determined to be faulty when the power is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
main power switch.
Rewrite firmware.
Change FSCB
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.12. C1004, CC155)
3.15.4 CC156
(1) Contents
Trouble type
ADF ROM error
Trouble code
CC156
Rank
Detection timing
Upgrade of the firmware has not been successful.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
main power switch.
Rewrite the firmware
Change DFCB
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.59. CC156, CC165)
3.15.5 CC159, CC15A

(1) Contents
Trouble type
ROM contents error upon startup (DSC1), ROM contents error upon startup (DSC2)
Trouble code
CC159, CC15A
K-70
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Rank
Detection timing
A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the DSC board during starting.
Trouble isolation
DSC board (SC-507)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the DSC board connector for proper connection and

Action
main power switch.
Change DSC board
3.15.6 CC15B
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Flash ROM error (saddle)
Trouble code
CC15B
Rank
Detection timing
Data of flash ROM of the saddle is determined to be faulty when the power is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
3.15.7 CC163
(1) Contents
Trouble type
ROM contents error (PRT)
Trouble code
CC163
Rank
Detection timing
The wrong model of firmware is detected in the engine during the initial connection to the engine is being
checked.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Unplug and plug the power cord from/into the outlet, turn the
main power switch OFF, wait 10 seconds or more, and turn
it ON.
Change PRCB
3.15.8 CC164
(1) Contents
Trouble type
ROM contents error (MSC)
Trouble code
CC164
Rank
Detection timing
The wrong model of firmware is detected in the MFP board when the main power switch is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the ROM version.
Change MFPB
When not reviving even if the above-mentioned procedure is

done, contact the responsible people of KM.
K-71
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.15.9 CC165
(1) Contents
Trouble type
ROM contents error (ADF)
Trouble code
CC165
Rank
Detection timing
When the power is turned ON, DF control board or firmware error is detected.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
main power switch.
Change DFCB
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.59. CC156, CC165)
3.15.10 CC170, CC171, CC172, CC173, CC174, CC180, CC181, CC182, CC183, CC184, CC185, CC186
(1) Contents
Trouble type

Dynamic link error during starting (LDR)
Dynamic link error during starting (IBR)
Dynamic link error during starting (IID)
Dynamic link error during starting (IPF)
Dynamic link error during starting (IMY)
Dynamic link error during starting (SPF)
Dynamic link error during starting (OAP)
Trouble code
CC170
CC171
CC172
CC173
CC174
CC180
CC181
CC182
CC183
CC184
CC185
CC186
Rank
Detection timing
A dynamic link error occurs in the program on the MFP board due to an insufficient memory space available, a
ROM fault, or other reason when the main power switch is turned ON.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

NVRAM board (NRB)
(2) Procedure
Step
1
Action
If the malfunction code C-C172 has occurred, access
[Service Mode] [System 2] [Image Controller Setting]
and check to see if Controller 1, Controller 2, Controller
3, or Others is set for [Image Controller Setting].
K-72
Control signal
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Action
If any of these is set, select Controller 0.
Control signal
Change MFPB.
When not reviving even if the above-mentioned procedure is

done, contact the responsible people of KM.
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.60. CC170 - CC174, CC180 - CC186)
3.15.11 CC190
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Outline font load error
Trouble code
CC190
Rank
Detection timing
An error occurred while loading the outline font.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Hard disk
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the connector between hard disk-MFPB PJ11 for

Format hard disk.
Change hard disk.
Change MFPB.
3.15.12 CC191
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Setting parameter load error (LDR)
Trouble code
CC191
Rank
Detection timing
Upon startup, the processing of the loadable device driver setting data file failed.
RAM disk file creation failed.
Reading from the flash ROM failed.
An error occurred in API of the authentication module.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more,
and turn ON the main power switch.
Reinstall the loadable device driver.
Change MFPB.
3.16 CD***
3.16.1 CD002
(1) Contents
Trouble type
JOB RAM save error
Trouble code
CD002
Rank
Detection timing
The error in save of job data to the memory/ hard disk and its read error are detected.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Hard disk
K-73
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Procedure
Step
1
Action
Control signal

Format hard disk.
Change hard disk.
Change MFPB.
3.16.2 CD004, CD00F, CD020

(1) Contents
Trouble type
Hard disk access error (connection failure)
Trouble code
CD004
Rank
Detection timing
Unable to communicate between the hard disk and printer control board (PRCB).
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Hard disk
Trouble type
Hard disk data transfer error
Trouble code
CD00F
Rank
Detection timing
Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Hard disk
Trouble type
Hard disk verify error
Trouble code
CD020
Rank
Detection timing
The data abnormality is detected by the HDD verify check.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Hard disk
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action
Reinstall the hard disk.
Change hard disk.
Change MFPB.
3.16.3 CD010
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Hard disk unformat
Trouble code
CD010
Rank
Detection timing
Unformatted hard disk is connected.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Hard disk
(2) Procedure
Step
1
Action
Select [Service Mode] [State Confirmation] [Memory/
HDD Adj.] [HDD Format], and conduct the HDD format
function.
K-74
Control signal
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Control signal
Change hard disk
Action
Change MFPB
3.16.4 CD011
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Hard disk out of specifications mounted
Trouble code
CD011
Rank
Detection timing
A hard disk that falls outside the specifications is connected.
Trouble isolation
Hard disk
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the hard disk specifications.
Change the hard disk.
3.16.5 CD030
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Hard disk management information reading error
Trouble code
CD030
Rank
Detection timing
The machine fails to read administrative information data saved in the hard disk.
Trouble isolation
3.16.6 CD041, CD042, CD043, CD044, CD045, CD046

(1) Contents
Trouble type
HDD command execution error
Trouble code
CD041, CD042, CD043, CD044, CD045, CD046
Rank
Detection timing
The error occurred inside the hard disk.
Trouble isolation
Hard disk
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Format hard disk.
3.16.7 CD047, CD048, CD049, CD04A, CD04B

(1) Contents
Trouble type
HDD SCSI library error
Trouble code
CD047, CD048, CD049, CD04A, CD04B
Rank
Detection timing
The error occurred inside the hard disk.
Trouble isolation
Hard disk
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Action
Format hard disk.
K-75
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
3
Action
Control signal
3.16.8 CD201, CD202, CD203

(1) Contents
Trouble type
File memory mounting error
Trouble code
CD201
Rank
Detection timing
The file memory is not mounted.

The file has any abnormality.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Memory
Trouble type
Memory capacity discrepancy
Trouble code
CD202
Rank
Detection timing
File memory capacity on the MFP board (MFPB) is not enough.

File memory capacity necessary for duplex printing is not enough during duplex unit mounting.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Memory
Trouble type
Memory capacity discrepancy 2
Trouble code
CD203
Rank
Detection timing
File memory capacity on the MFP board (MFPB) is not enough.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Memory
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check to see if the memory on MFPB is installed correctly.
Action
Change the memory on MFPB.
Change MFPB.
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.61. CD201 - CD203)
3.16.9 CD211, CD212

(1) Contents
Trouble type
PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure
Trouble code
CD211
Rank
Detection timing
Hardware related to the transfer of memory image of the MFP board (MFPB) fails to respond.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type
Compression/extraction timeout detection
Trouble code
CD212
Rank
Detection timing
Hardware related to the BTC compression function of the MFP board (MFPB) fails to respond.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
1
Action
Change MFPB.
Control signal
K-76
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.16.10 CD231
(1) Contents
Trouble type
No FAX memory at FAX board mounting
Trouble code
CD231
Rank
Detection timing
The DIMM for FAX is not mounted during the FAX board is mounting.
The FAX board is not mounted when the FAX board mounting is set ON at Service Mode.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

FAX board
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check to see if the FAX board is installed correctly.
Action
Change MFPB
3.16.11 CD241, CD242

(1) Contents
Trouble type
Encryption ASIC setting error
Trouble code
CD241
Rank
Detection timing
Initialization error of the encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type
Encryption ASIC mounting error
Trouble code
CD242
Rank
Detection timing
The faulty of the installation of encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the MFP board connector for proper connection and

Action
Change MFPB
3.16.12 CD261
(1) Contents
Trouble type
USB host board failure
Trouble code
CD261
Rank
Detection timing
When a failure is detected in USB host board included in the local interface kit.
Non-standard USB device is connected.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

USB host board (EK-604)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the operation with another USB device.
Check the USB host board connector for proper connection

Change USB host board
Change MFPB
K-77
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.16.13 CD271
(1) Contents
Trouble type
i-Option activated and additional memory not installed
Trouble code
CD271
Rank
Detection timing
While the i-Option is activated, the additional memory included in UK-203 is not installed.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Memory for i-Option (UK-203)
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Check the memory (UK-203) for proper connection and

Change memory (UK-203)
Change MFPB
3.16.14 CD272
(1) Contents
Trouble type
i-Option activated and additional memory and HDD not installed
Trouble code
CD272
Rank
Detection timing
While the i-Option is activated, the additional memory included in UK-203 and the HDD are not installed.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Hard disk
Memory for i-Option (UK-203)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check the memory (UK-203) for proper connection and

Action
Check the HDD for proper connection and correct as

necessary.
Change memory (UK-203)
Change HDD
Change MFPB
3.16.15 CD3##
(1) Contents
Trouble type
NVRAM data error
Trouble code
CD3##
Rank
Detection timing
Abnormality is detected by the abnormal check of each NVRAM data.
Trouble isolation
When the data stored due to the NVRAM trouble is lost, backup data can be used for restoration.
Trouble code [C-D370] will be displayed when multiple errors (over 5) of NVRAM data are detected, which can be restored with one
restoration command.
Data backup will be automatically performed every hour. Backup can also be performed manually with the following setting.
[Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [NVRAM Data Back Up]
1. When a trouble caused by NVRAM data error occurs, the screen below appears.
K-78
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. Select [Yes] and touch [OK].

3. The screen will be shifted to the data restoration screen to perform data restoration.
NOTE
When the restoration is performed in a short time, data restoration screen may not be displayed.
4. Check the message which indicates that the data restoration was successfully conducted. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON
again more than 10 seconds after.
NOTE
In case it failed to restore data, return to the trouble code screen.
3.16.16 CD370
(1) Contents
Trouble type
NVRAM data multiple errors
Trouble code
CD370
Rank
Detection timing
Multiple errors (Over 5) are detected by the abnormal check of each NVRAM data.
Trouble isolation
3.16.17 CD401, CD402, CD403, CD404, CD405, CD406, CD407

(1) Contents
Trouble type
NACK command incorrect

ACK command incorrect
Checksum error
Receiving packet incorrect
Receiving packet analysis error
ACK receiving timeout
Retransmission timeout
Trouble code
CD401
CD402
CD403
CD404
CD405
CD406
CD407
Rank
Detection timing
When abnormality is found in the communication of controller.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Check whether there is a strong electromagnetic noise

source near the main body.
Action
Check the connectors on MFPB for proper connection and

Change MFPB
K-79
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.16.18 CDC##
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Trouble related to security
Trouble code
CDC##
Rank
Detection timing
Contact the responsible people of KM before taking some countermeasures.
Trouble isolation
3.17 CE***
3.17.1 CE001, CE003, CE004, CE005, CE006, CE007
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Abnormal message queue

Task error
Event error
Memory access error
Header access error
DIMM initialize error
Trouble code
CE001
CE003
CE004
CE005
CE006
CE007
Rank
Detection timing
MFP board (MFPB) is faulty.
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action
Change MFPB
3.17.2 CE002
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Message and method parameter failure
Trouble code
CE002
Rank
Detection timing
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

Hard disk
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again, and
conduct the following setting. [Service Mode] [System 1]
[Initialization] [Data Clear].
Format hard disk
Change hard disk
Change MFPB
K-80
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.17.3 CEEE1
(1) Contents
Trouble type
MFP board malfunction
Trouble code
CEEE1
Rank
Detection timing
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal

Action
Change MFPB
3.17.4 CEEE2
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Scanner section malfunction
Trouble code
CEEE2
Rank
Detection timing
A scanner part is faulty.
Trouble isolation

CCD board (CCDB)
(2) Procedure
Step
Control signal
Correct the connector connection between CCDB and

REYB/SCAN if faulty.
Action

Change CCDB
Control signal
Link to the layout drawings for related parts by each trouble code (S.62. CEEE2)
3.17.5 CEEE3
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Printer control board malfunction
Trouble code
CEEE3
Rank
Detection timing
Printer control board (PRCB) is faulty.
Trouble isolation
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and

Change PRCB
K-81
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE
4. ABORT CODE
Abort code
The machine displays an abort code (CF###) on the control panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software
control.
When the system program is aborted, check the electrical component, unit, option, and connection relating to the specific type of the abort
condition.
(1) Contents
Trouble type
Abort code
Trouble code
CFB00 to CFF5E
Rank
Detection timing
Trouble isolation
MFP board (MFPB)

DIMM0/DIMM1
(2) Procedure
Step
Action
Control signal
Location of electrical
components
Check the MFPB connector for proper connection and

Conduct the following setting.

[Service Mode] [Memory/HDD Adj.] [Memory Check]
[Detail Check].
When NG is displayed, replace the appropriate memory or
PWB.
WORK0: DIMM0
WORK1: DIMM1
FILE0,1: MFP board
Change MFPB
4.1 CF0**
Code
CF001
Item
CT_singleList table abnormal
CF004
CT_queue full abnormal
CF011
Array link abnormal
CF012
FAT link abnormal
CF013
File size abnormal
CF021
setDelayMessage Table
OverFlow
CF023
MsgQue OverFlow
CF033
setDivTbl() limitation over
Component
An exceptional instance occurred

due to the unexpected parameter
in the system F/W.
MFP board (MFPB)
Rank
C
4.2 CF1**
Code
Item
CF112
Compress table OverFlow
CF113
Compress table check
Component
Compression malfunctions
MFP board (MFPB)
Rank
C
4.3 CF2**
Code
CF211
Item
setParameterBandColorPlane()
Table OverFlow
Component

in the system F/W.
MFP board (MFPB)
Rank
C
4.4 CF3**
Code
CF300
Item
IR Bus Check Timeout
Component
Image transfer error on IR input

bus
K-82
MFP board (MFPB)
Rank
C
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.5 CF4**
Code
Item
CF411
Parity error
CF421
Overrun error
CF431
Parity error + Overrun error
CF441
Framing error
CF451
Parity error + Framing error
CF461
Overrun error + Framing error
CF471
Parity error + Overrun error +

Framing error
CF412
Parity error
CF422
Overrun error
CF432
CF442
Framing error
CF452
CF462
CF472

Framing error
Component
Communication error (between

IR-systems)
MFP board (MFPB)
Rank
C
4.6 CF5**
Code
Item
Component
CF510
Parity error
Communication error (between

IR-systems)
CF520
Framing error
CF530
Communication error (IR

detected)
CF540
Overrun error
CF550
CF560
CF570

Framing error
CF580
Frame distortion of ADF
MFP board (MFPB)
Rank
C
4.7 CF6**
Code
Item
CF600
Report receiving of print start that

is out of sequence
CF601
Report receiving of paper feeding

that is out of sequence
CF604
Outside IF/Command queue
CF614
Output sequence queue
CF624
Panel LCD date queue
Component

in the system F/W.
MFP board (MFPB)/

Engine
Rank
C
MFP board (MFPB)
4.8 CF7**
Code
Item
Component
CF704
Common data Delete-waiting

HDD accumulated job ID queue

in the system F/W.
CF714
IRC/Command queue
CF724
Engine/Command queue
MFP board (MFPB)/

Engine
CF734
Panel/Command queue
MFP board (MFPB)/

Control Panel
CF744
File memory transfer start-waiting

command queue
MFP board (MFPB)
CF754
File memory compression

requesting command queue
CF764
Panel instruction delete job queue
CF774
Warning delete job queue
CF784
Application instruction delete job

queue
CF794
Output page information for

duplex back side queue
K-83
MFP board (MFPB)
Rank
C
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Item
CF7A4
Paper feed completion output

pate information queue
CF7B4
Exposure compaction output page

information queue
CF7C4
Pre-discharge completion output

page information queue
CF7D4
Touch panel coordinate data

queue
CF7E4
Direct key data queue
CF7F4
Scan sequence queue
Component
Rank
4.9 CF8**
Code
Item
Component
Rank
CF802
SIO sending port...ENG
MFP board (MFPB)/

Engine
CF806
SIO sending port...IRC
MFP board (MFPB)
CF807
SIO sending port...ADF
CF808
Transmission buffer overflow (DSC1)
MFP board (MFPB)/

DSC board (SC-507)
CF809
Unsupported option trouble
CF812
CF815
SIO sending port...PIC/PIC terminal
MFP board (MFPB)
CF8ED
SIO sending port...EPNet
4.10 CF9**
Code
Item
Component
Rank
CF902
SIO receiving port...ENG
MFP board (MFPB)/

Engine
CF906
SIO receiving port...IRC
MFP board (MFPB)
CF907
SIO receiving port...ADF
CF908
Reception buffer overflow (DSC1)
MFP board (MFPB)/

DSC board (SC-507)
CF909
CF912
CF915
SIO receiving port...PIC/PIC terminal
MFP board (MFPB)
CF9ED
SIO receiving port...EPNet
4.11 CFA**
Code
Item
Component
CFA01
getOneImgTransInfoFromTh() No
applied thread

in the system F/W.
CFA03
setTransBandAndRepeatNum()
error
CFA06
getOneImgIndexNumFromTh()
No applied thread
CFA11
cancelTransExec() No applied
thread
CFA12
ImgTransInfo No space
CFA13
Clear Buffer Sequence error
CFA14
Thread software error
Whole electrical
components, units, and
options
MFP board (MFPB)
CFA15
Global semaphore time out (ten seconds)
CFA16
Thread software error (upper parameter error)
CFA50
IGC control error
CFA51
DB error
IGC internal error
K-84
MFP board (MFPB)
Rank
C
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.12 CFB**
4.12.1 CFB0*
Code
Item
CFB00
ASIC200 first sheet DMA00
CFB01
CFB02
CFB03
CFB04
CFB05
CFB06
CFB07
CFB08
CFB09
CFB0A
CFB0B
CFB0C
CFB0D
CFB0E
CFB0F
Component
MFP board (MFPB)/
DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.12.2 CFB1*
Code
Item
CFB10
CFB11
CFB12
CFB13
CFB14
CFB15
CFB16
CFB17
CFB18
CFB19
CFB1A
CFB1B
CFB1C
CFB1D
CFB1E
CFB1F
Component
MFP board (MFPB)/
DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.12.3 CFB7*
Code
CFB70
Item
Component
ASIC200 first sheet interruption
MFP board (MFPB)/

DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.12.4 CFB8*
Code
CFB80
Item
Component
ASIC200 first sheet common register setting
MFP board (MFPB)/

DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.12.5 CFBA*
Code
CFBA0
Item
Component
ASIC200 first sheet BTC compression/extension unit
Rank
MFP board (MFPB)/

DIMM0/DIMM1
4.13 CFC**
4.13.1 CFC0*
Code
CFC00
Item
Component
ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 error interruption
K-85
MFP board (MFPB)/

DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code

Item
CFC01
CFC02
CFC03
CFC04
CFC05
CFC06
CFC07
CFC08
CFC09
CFC0A
CFC0B
CFC0C
CFC0D
CFC0E
CFC0F
Component
Rank
Component
Rank
4.13.2 CFC1*
Code
Item
CFC10
CFC11
CFC12
CFC13
CFC14
CFC15
CFC16
CFC17
CFC18
CFC19
CFC1A
CFC1B
CFC1C
CFC1D
CFC1E
CFC1F
MFP board (MFPB)/

DIMM0/DIMM1
4.13.3 CFC2*
Code
Item
Component
CFC20
ASIC200 watchdog timer error interruption
CFC21
ASIC200 first sheet image output interface 1 had underrun
CFC22
ASIC200 first sheet image input interface had overflow
CFC23
ASIC200 first sheet LCD output interface had underrun
CFC24
ASIC200 first sheet JBIG core detected unknown marker
CFC25
ASIC200 first sheet JBIG core detected SC count overflow
CFC26
ASIC200 first sheet SDC slave illegal access error occurred
CFC27
ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had Completer Abort
CFC28
ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had Unsupported

Request
CFC29
ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had Completion Timeout
CFC2A
ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had Poisoned TLP
CFC2B
ASIC200 first sheet memory target access had Unsupported Request
CFC2C
ASIC200 first sheet memory target access had Poisoned TLP
CFC2D
ASIC200 first sheet config target access had Unsupported Request
CFC2E
ASIC200 first sheet config target access had Poisoned TLP
MFP board (MFPB)/

DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.13.4 CFCC*
Code
Item
Component
CFCC0
CPS2007 PCI slave ileagal access error occurred
CFCC1
CPS2007 watchdog timer error occurred
K-86
MFP board (MFPB)/

DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Item
Component
CFCC2
CPS2007 address parity error occurred
CFCC3
CPS2007 slave write data parity error occurred
CFCC4
CPS2007 slave read data parity error occurred
Rank
4.13.5 CFCD*
Code
Item
Component
CFCD0
PIC2007 PCI slave illegal access error occurred
CFCD1
PIC2007 address parity error occurred
CFCD2
PIC2007 slave write data parity error occurred
CFCD3
PIC2007 slave read data parity error occurred
MFP board (MFPB)/

DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.13.6 CFCE*
Code
Item
CFCE0
ASIC22 watchdog timer error occurred
CFCE1
ASIC22 local bus error occurred
CFCE2
ASIC22 another type of error occurred
Component
MFP board (MFPB)/
DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.14 CFD**
4.14.1 CFD0*
Code
Item
CFD00
ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 time out
CFD01
CFD02
CFD03
CFD04
CFD05
CFD06
CFD07
CFD08
CFD09
CFD0A
Component
MFP board (MFPB)/
DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.14.2 CFD1*
Code
CFD10
Item
Component
CFD11
CFD12
CFD13
CFD14
CFD15
CFD16
CFD17
CFD18
CFD19
CFD1A
CFD1B
CFD1C
CFD1D
CFD1E
CFD1F
MFP board (MFPB)/

DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.15 CFE**
4.15.1 CFE0*
Code
Item
CFE00
CFE01
CFE02
Component
MFP board (MFPB)/
DIMM0/DIMM1
K-87
Rank
C
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code

Item
CFE03
CFE04
CFE05
CFE06
CFE07
CFE08
CFE09
CFE0A
CFE0B
CFE0C
CFE0D
CFE0E
CFE0F
Component
Rank
4.15.2 CFE1*
Code
Item
CFE10
CFE11
CFE12
CFE13
CFE14
CFE15
CFE16
CFE17
CFE18
CFE19
CFE1A
CFE1B
CFE1C
CFE1D
CFE1E
CFE1F
Component
MFP board (MFPB)/
DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.16 CFF**
4.16.1 CFF0*
Code
Item
CFF00
CFF01
CFF02
CFF03
CFF04
CFF05
CFF06
CFF07
CFF08
CFF09
CFF0A
CFF0B
CFF0C
CFF0D
CFF0E
CFF0F
Component
MFP board (MFPB)/
DIMM0/DIMM1
Rank
C
4.16.2 CFF1*
Code
Item
CFF10
CFF11
Component
MFP board (MFPB)/
DIMM0/DIMM1
K-88
Rank
C
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code

Item
CFF12
CFF13
CFF14
CFF15
CFF16
CFF17
CFF18
CFF19
CFF1A
CFF1B
CFF1C
CFF1D
CFF1E
CFF1F
Component
K-89
Rank
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 5. ERROR CODE FOR THE INTERNET

ISW
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. ERROR CODE FOR THE INTERNET ISW

5.1 Error code list for the Internet ISW
When a trouble occurred while conducting the Internet ISW and it was not normally connected, the message on the status and the error
code will be displayed on the control panel.
When updating with CS Remote Care, the error code will be sent to the CS Remote Care center.
Sample display
NOTE
When a code other than the error code list is displayed, contact KM and inform the error code.
5.2 0x0*
Error code
Description
Countermeasure
0x00000001
Illegal error on the control
Check if the following setting is set to Valid. [Service Mode] [Internet

ISW] [Internet ISW setting]
Check the status of the following setting. [Service Mode] [Internet ISW]
[Transfer access setting]
If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding
error code to the KONICA MINOLTA.
0x00000010
Parameter error

error code to KONICA MINOLTA.
0x00111000
Error concerning the network

Connection has been completed.
Check the Users network environment. (LAN cables connection)

Check the status of the following setting. [Service Mode] [Internet ISW]
[Transfer access setting]
Check to see if the FTP server operates normally.
0x00111001

It cannot be connected to the server.
Check the network environment of the User.

0x00111100

Communication timeout.
0x00111101

Disconnection occurred.
0x00111110

The network is not connected.
0x00110010

Others
0x00001###
FTP error
Reply code when it failed to be
connected.
Check to see if FTP server normally operates.

Check the IP address, users name, etc.
0x00002###
FTP error
Error reply code for the user command
or pass command.
Check to see if FTP server operates normally.
0x00003###
FTP error
Error reply code for CWD command.
0x00004###
FTP error
Error reply code for the TYPE
command.
0x00005###
FTP error
Error reply code for the PORT
command.
0x00006###
FTP error
Error reply code for the PASV
command.

Set the PASV mode to Invalid, and try it again.
0x00007###
FTP error
Check the network environment of the User.

K-90
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 5. ERROR CODE FOR THE INTERNET

ISW
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Error code
Description
Error reply code for the RETR
command.
Countermeasure
Wait for about 30 minutes and try it again.
5.3 0x1*
Error code
Description
Countermeasure
0x10000100
It cannot be accepted because of the

job currently being executed.
ISW being executed by other method.
Wait for the current job to be completed and try it again.
0x10000101
It cannot be accepted because the sub

power switch is OFF.
Turn sub power switch ON and try it again.
0x10000102
The Internet ISW is already being

executed.
Wait for the current Internet ISW to be completed.
0x10000103
It failed to prohibit the job. (It failed to

lock the operation.) It failed to lock the
job because the operation is already
locked with PSWC, etc.

error code to the KONICA MINOLTA.
0x10000104
There is no space for F/W data to be

downloaded.
0x10000106
Check sum error
0x10000107
File access error

The file downloaded has an error.
The header of the file which has been
read has an error.
The size of the file to be downloaded is
too large.
When it is identified to be the different
type of F/W.
Check to see if the downloaded F/W is of the correct type.
0x10000108
The area F/W is stored is destroyed, and

another ISW is necessary.
Wait until ISW is automatically executed on MFP side.
5.4 0x2*
Error code
0x20000000
Description
Countermeasure
The temporary error when running the

Wait until ISW is automatically executed on MFP side.
subset
When starting the Internet ISW in a
normal program, the rebooting will start
and the Internet ISW will be executed
with the subset program. During the
process by the subset program, it has
to be in the Failed status unless the
Internet ISW is successfully conducted.
This code is used temporarily to make
it in error status.
K-91
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE
6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE

6.1 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care
If communication is not done properly, check the condition by following the procedures shown below.
1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting].
At this time, in the cases of initial transmitting / administrator transmitting / maintenance start transmitting / maintenance finish transmitting,
the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
For the communication result, the following message will be displayed based on its success or failure.
Display of communication result
Cause
Solution
Communicating
Communication trouble with the center
Although the machine tries to communicate

with the center, there is any trouble and the
communication completes unsuccessfully.
See the list of error message and confirm the

corresponding point.
Complete successfully
Modem trouble

with the center, there is any trouble in the
modem.
Check if the power of modem in ON.

Check if there is any problem in connection
between the modem and the main body.
Busy line

with the center, the line to the center is busy.
Communicate with the center again.
No response

with the center, there is no response from the
center.
Communicate with the center again.

Check the communication environment of
the center side.
6.2 CS Remote Care Operation under Enhanced Security Mode

CS Remote Care can be used even when ON is selected in [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhanced Security Mode].
However, to keep the enhanced security level, the following restrictions are accompanied.
Only SSL communication is available.
Error occurs if the Center tries to send the following commands.
Firmware update command
Command of reading and updating account track information
Machine settings update command
Command of reading and updating Internet ISW setting information
6.3 List of the CS Remote Care error code

6.3.1 When connecting by modem
NOTE
When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed, contact KM and inform the error code.
Error code
Error
Solution
0001
The line is busy (Busy detection)
Transmit again manually.
0002
Failure of the Modem default setting at transmitting (When the

transmission completes with modem initial setting failed)
Check if the power of the modem is ON.

Check the connecting condition between the modem
and the main body.
0003
Timeout of CONNECT at transmitting (No response to ATD)

and the main body.
0005
Timeout of CONNECT at receiving (No response to ATA)

and the main body.
0006
Shut down of the data modem line (Host) (Carrier OFF is detected)
No solution, because the line is shut down at the host

side.
0008
Timeout of start request telegram delivery

(Start request telegram is not delivered after line connection)
0009
Timeout of finish request telegram delivery

(Finish request telegram is not delivered (Start of shut down).)
000A
Receiving rejection
(Receiving is made when the main body is set to reject receiving.)
Check the setting condition of the host side.

Check the setting condition of the main body side.
000B
RS232C driver over run

(When the modem detects over run.)
If the same error is detected several times, turn the

modem power OFF and ON.
000C
If the same error is detected several times, turn the modem power
OFF and ON.

000D
Break Interrupt (BI) indicator

(When the modem detects Break Interrupt (BI) indicator.)

0011
Baud rate ERROR

(When selected baud rate is out of the specification (9600 bps to
38400 bps).)
Check the baud rate of the software DipSW.
K-92
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Error code

Error
Solution
0018
Machine ID has already been registered

(Request telegram 2 (SET-UP) comes from the main body that has
already registered machine ID.)
Set the initial registrations again for all including the

host side.
0019
Center ID error
(Center ID of the host is not identical with the one of start request
telegram.)
Check center ID setting of the main body side.

Check center ID setting of the main body side.
001A
Device ID inconsistency
(Device ID of the host is not identical with the one of start request
telegram.)
Check device ID setting of the main body side.

Check the setting of the host side.
001B
Device ID unregistered
(Request telegram 2 (Constant data transmitting, emergency call)
comes from the main body that has not registered machine ID yet.)
Check device ID setting of the main body side.

Check the setting of the host side.
001E
Impossible to change (during printing)

(Setting cannot be changed because the setting change is made
during the machine is printing or starts printing.)
Try again when the machine is not printing.
0020
Timeout of telegram delivery

(At waiting mode of telegram delivery the machine fails to receive the
telegram in a given time.)
Try communication again.
0027
Transmission / receiving collision

(Receiving is detecting during transmitting processing)
Try communication again.
6.3.2 When connecting by e-mails

NOTE
(1) 0***
Error code
Error
Solution
0001
Connection timeout during transmission
Check the SMTP server on User side.
0###
Transmission error
###: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal)
For SMTP responding code, see RFC issued by IETF after
converting hexadecimal number into decimal one.
Check the SMTP server on User side.
0003
Connection timeout when receiving
Check the POP3 server on User side.
0005
Receiving error
Check the POP3 server on User side.
0020
SMTP communication error
Check SMTP authentication setting.
(2) 1***
Error code
Error
Solution
1030
Machine ID mismatching
Received an e-mail which tells that machine ID mismatches.
Check the machine ID setting.

Check the machine ID setting on host side.
1050
Grammar error
Received mail did not define the CS Remote Care command (2
digits).
The Type of Subject and the command of attached file are not
consistent.
Check mail content.
1061
Modifying not allowed

The host sent a command mail that asked modifying data of item
where setting change is not allowed.
Ask the host to send another instruction mail for

modifying.
1062
Modifying not available due to the copy job currently performing

When informing the host that it cannot be modified due to the copy
job currently performing.

modifying.
1080
Data length problem

LEN value of TEXT data and actual data length are not consistent.

modifying.
1081
Frame No. error

The last frame has not been received.
There are missing frame No.
Check the status of the machine registration on host

side.
1082
Subject Type problem

Received code did not define the Type of Subject.

modifying.
1084
Date expired
Expiration date for data modification command has passed.

modifying.
1091
Oversized command
Received attached file exceeds the machines receive buffer size.

modifying.
1092
Received an error mail when center setup is not complete

side.
K-93
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) 2***
Error code
Error
Solution
2039
Socket is not connected

LAN cable on the copier side is detached.
Check the SMTP server and POP3 server on user

side.
203C
Connection timeout
Check timeout setting.
203E
Network is down
LAN cable on the copier side is detached.
Check the connection between the copier on the

users side and the network connector.
Check the network environment on the users side.
(4) 3***
Error code
Error
Solution
3000
POP3_AUTHORIZATION_ERR
Check the POP3 server environment on users side.
3001
POP3_TRANSACTION_ERR
3002
POP3_CONNECT_ERR
3003
POP3_TIMEOUT_ERR
3004
POP3_FORMAT_ERR
3005
POP3_MEMORY_ERR
3006
POP3_JOBID_ERR
3007
POP3_NO_DATA_ERR
3008
POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR
3009
POP3_MAILBOX_FULL
(5) 4***
Error code
Error
Solution
4103
During polling from MFP, MIO is not active and MFP cannot start
communication.
Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
4104
During e-mail transmission from MFP to the center, the SMTP

channel is not in the Ready status and MFP cannot send e-mail.
4105
During polling from MFP, the POP3 channel is not in the Ready
status and MFP cannot receive e-mail.
4106
During e-mail transmission from MFP to the center, MIO is not active
and MFP cannot start communication.
41F9
Control error
In the CS Remote Cares internal sequence, message transfer
failed.
Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
41FA
Control error
MIO response timed out.
41FB
Control error
As the file descriptor of the e-mail that MFP receives from MIO is
invalid, MFP cannot receive the e-mail.
41FC
Control error
During the creation of data to be sent by e-mail, the CS Remote
Cares internal status error occurs or the data that need to be sent
has not been created.
41FD
Control error
During e-mail reception, the parameter sent from MIO to the CS
Remote Care is invalid and MFP cannot receive the e-mail.
41FE
Control error
After the completion of e-mail transmission, MFP received the
transmission completion message from MIO. However, the CS
Remote Cares internal status was not the status of transmission
completion.
41FF
Control error
During e-mail reception, MIO became inactive.
4210
Control error
E-mail sent from MIO could not be properly handled in the CS
Remote Care.
(6) 5***
Error code
5***
Error
Solution
MIO detects error when sending an attached file.
Check the SMTP server /POP3 server environment

on users side.
K-94
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(7) 6***
Error code
6***
Error
Solution
MIO detects error during a sending sequence.
Check the SMTP server /POP3 server environment

on users side.
6.3.3 When connecting by http

NOTE
(1) 0***
Error code
Error
Solution
0001
Connection timeout during transmission
Check the http server.
0***
Transmission error
###: http responding code (hexadecimal)
For http responding code, see RFC issued by IETF after converting
hexadecimal number into decimal one.
0003
Connection timeout when receiving
0005
Receiving error
(2) 1***
Error code
Error
Solution
1030
Machine ID mismatching
Received file which tells that machine ID mismatches.
Check the machine ID setting.

Check the machine ID setting on host side.
1050
Grammar error
Received file did not define the CS Remote Care command (2
digits).
The Type of Subject and the command of file are not consistent.
Check file content.
1061
Modifying not allowed

The host sent a command file that asked modifying data of item
where setting change is not allowed.
Ask the host to send another instruction file for

modifying.
1062
Modifying not available due to the copy job currently performing

When informing the host that it cannot be modified due to the copy
job currently performing.

modifying.
1080
Data length problem

LEN value of TEXT data and actual data length are not consistent.

modifying.
1081
Frame No. error

The last frame has not been received.
There are missing frame No.

side.
1082
Subject Type problem

Received code did not define the Type of Subject.

modifying.
1084
Date expired
Expiration date for data modification command has passed.

modifying.
1091
Oversized command
Received file exceeds the machines receive buffer size.

modifying.
(3) 2***
Error code
Error
2001
http request result problem

Internal status error
2002

File list acquisition result problem
2003

Request header transmission failure
2004

Request body transmission failure
2005

Response header receive response failure
2006

Response body receive response failure
2007

Session ID inconsistent
Solution
Check user network environment.
Check http server environment.
(4) 3***
Error code
3002
Error
Solution
Check user network environment.
K-95
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Error code
Error
Unopened client ID was specified
Solution
Check http server environment.
3003

Receive time out occurred
3004

Receive error occurred. Or wrong request URL was specified.
3005

Content-Length or receive size exceeded the specified max.
transfer size. Message body size was too large.
3006

Due to reset, process was stopped. Or message body size
exceeded the specified max. transfer size.
3007

Internal error occurred. Or due to internal reset, process was
stopped.
3008

Connection to WebDAV server failed.
3009

Error occurred during transmission to the WebDAV server.
3010

Time out occurred during transmission to the WebDav server.
3011

Connection to the proxy server failed.
3012

The proxy server refused CONNECT request.
3013

The proxy server was set to enabled, but the proxy server host
was not set.
3014

Proxy server authentication failed.
3015

Other errors were sent from the proxy server.
3016

Internal error occurred.
3017

As the device application specified MIO_REQBODY_ERROR,
process was stopped.
(5) 4***
Error code
Error
Solution
4106
When data is uploaded from MFP to the web server, the network
connection is not enabled and MFP cannot start communication.
41FA
Control error
MIO response timed out.
(6) 5***
Error code
5***
Error
Solution
MIO detects error at file sending.
Check the http server environment.
(7) 6***
Error code
6***
Error
Solution
MIO detects error at sending sequence.
Check the http server environment.
6.3.4 When connecting by Fax modem

Error code
Error
Solution
T50
Host terminal ID not correct
Check the telephone number set for host.
R80
Serial number received from the host not correct.
Check the status of the Machine registration on host

side.
R81
Disconnection of writing instruction from host during machine is

running.
R82
Disconnection of FAX-CSRC instruction when FAX-CSRC is not

allowed.
Check the status of the Machine registration on host

side.
R83
Host command error.
Contact KM and inform the error code.
K-96
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Error code
R84

Error
Solution
NVRAM writing error.
Contact KM and inform the error code.
K-97
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE
7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

It displays the error code when a network error occurred.
Network error code is displayed only when the following setting is in Display.
[Administrator Settings] [Network Settings] [Detail Settings] [Error Code Display Setting]
7.2 IEEE802.1X
Code
Description
Connection has already been established.
Parameter error.
Unable to find the destination AP (SSID).
The authentication mode does not match the AP (IEEE8021X/WPA-EAP/WPA-PSK/NONE).
Negotiation of the EAP method failed.
The EAP authentication failed (user ID, password, certificate, etc.)
Encryption negotiation with the AP failed (TKIP/CCMP).
Failed to retrieve the client certificate.
The client certificate has expired.
10
Verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
11
Although the WPA-PSK mode is selected, the Pre-Shared Key is not specified.
12
An authentication error occurred in the WPA-PSK mode (un-matched Pre-Shared Key).
13
The phase 2 method is not specified (PEAP).
14
Negotiation of the phase 2 method failed (PEAP).
15
Response from the server has timed out.
16
Failed to allocate memory.
17
Failed to start the supplicant task.
18
The driver does not work.
19
The server certificate has expired (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
20
CA verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
21
Server ID verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
22
The CA certificate is not specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
23
The server ID is not specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
24
The setting combination is correct.
25
Connection and authentication are complete.
26
The server certificate does not have the expected usage (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
27
The server certificate has expired (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
28
Access to the server to check for expiration of the server certificate is rejected (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
29
Access to the server to check for expiration of the server certificate has timed out (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
30
Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size that has been retrieved to check for the expiration of the server
certificate exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB) (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
31
Incorrect format of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
32
Verification of the server certificate is invalid (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
33
Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is unable to perform verification because the HDD path has not
been specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
34
Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20) (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
35
Parameter error of the certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
36
Internal error of the certificate verification (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
7.3 LDAP
Code
Description
An invalid operation occurred.
The number of search results has exceeded the maximum number of items allowed.
The LDAP server does not support SASL.
10
Unable to trace the link although Referral is specified.
32
Cannot find the search route.
49
Failed to log in to the LDAP server.
80
An unexpected error occurred.
85
The connection has timed out.
86
The supported SASL does not match the LDAP server side.
K-98
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Description
88
Cancelled by the user.
90
A memory shortage occurred.
91
Unable to connect to the LDAP server.
92
The supported LDAP version does not match the LDAP server side.
128
Failed to resolve the LDAP server name using the DNS server.
129
The certificate of the LDAP server has expired.
130
Mutual authentication using GSS-SPNEGO (Kerberos v5) failed.
131
The search result remains.
2238
The CN field of the LDAP server certificate does not match the server address.
2239
The LDAP server certificate does not have the expected usage for a server.
2240
The LDAP server certificate is not trusted.

To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241
The LDAP server certificate has expired.
2242
The CA server rejected the connection.
2243
The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
2244
Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261
The format of the LDAP server certificate is invalid.
2263
been specified.
2264
can be verified at a time is 20).
2266
Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267
The device certificate does not exist.
2268
No certificate is sent from the server.
7.4 E-Mail/Internet Fax

Code
Description
Failed to log in to the E-mail server.
An internal error occurred.
Failed to connect to the server.
Decoding failed due to invalid MIME format or S/MIME format.
Available free memory is insufficient. Reception is not possible.
Failed to delete an E-mail message.
10
The mail box is full.
11
Failed to search the certificate.
12
Failed to retrieve the device certificate or private key.
13
An I/O error occurred.

An HDD operation error occurred, or memory capacity of the computer may be insufficient.
14
The S/MIME function is disabled.
15
The HDD is disabled.
16
The format of the certificate from the E-mail sender is invalid.
2236
The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.
2238
The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239
The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240
The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241
The certificate has expired.
2242
2243
2244
2261
The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263
Failed to initialize the certificate verification.
2264
2266
2267
2268
K-99
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.5 FTP transmission

Code
Description
22
Parameter error (e.g. the file name is NULL).
27
Parameter is invalid.
42
The specified protocol is unavailable.
52
The process is cancelled by a device reset.
55
A buffer shortage occurred.
56
The FTP connection is already open.
57
60
61
The connection has been interrupted.
62
The device is not connected to the network.
70
The network connection is busy.
450
The file has not been deleted.
451
The file transfer failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
452
The file transfer failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
530
Incorrect login name or password.
550
The specified folder does not exist.
552
The file operation failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
7.6 SMB transmission

Code
Description
42
52
55
57
62

70
4096
The host name is not specified.

The specified host name does not exist on the network.
4097
4098
The folder name is not specified.

The specified folder does not exist.
4099
4100
The specified file name is invalid.
4101
The specified file already exists and is write-protected.

The folder and the disk are write-protected.
4102
The specified media to be written is not formatted.

The file system of the specified media to be written is faulty.
4103
The server capacity is full.
4104
The server capacity has become full while writing data.
4105
Other errors to which an error code is not assigned.
10000
Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
12236
12239
12240
12241
12242
12243
12244
Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1 MB).
12263
been specified.
12264
12266
The user name is not specified.

Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
The user does not have write permission to the folder.
Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.

The user does not have write permission to the folder.
K-100
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Description
12267
12268
7.7 SMTP transmission

Code
Description
22
Invalid argument.
27
The file size is too large.
28
Insufficient memory of the device.
32
The pipe is broken.
42
51
Unable to reach the destination network.
52
The connection aborted by the network.
55
57
The socket is not connected.
58
60
The operation has timed out.
61
The connection is rejected.
62
67
The host is shut down.
70
The operation is expected to be blocked.
421
SMTP server error. Since the service is unavailable, the transfer channel is closed.
432
SMTP server error. The password must be changed.
450
SMTP server error. Unable to access to the mail box.
451
SMTP server error. The requested action has been cancelled because an error occurred while processing a job.
452
SMTP server error. Shortage of the system storage capacity.
453
SMTP server error. No E-mail massage.
454
SMTP server error. Temporary authentication failure.
458
SMTP server error. Unable to queue a message to the node.
459
SMTP server error. The node is not permitted.
499
SMTP server error. An unsupported SMTP error code of 400s is received from the SMTP server.
500
SMTP server error. Syntax error (command unrecognized).
501
SMTP server error. Syntax error in parameters or arguments.
502
SMTP server error. The command is not implemented.
503
SMTP server error. Bad sequence of commands.
504
SMTP server error. The command parameter is not implemented.
521
SMTP server error. The server does not receive E-mail messages.
530
SMTP server error. The access is rejected.
534
SMTP server error. The authentication mechanism is too weak.
535
SMTP server error. Authentication error.
538
SMTP server error. The requested authentication mechanism requires encryption.
550
SMTP server error. The requested action is not executed.
551
SMTP server error. The user is not connected locally.
552
SMTP server error. The requested E-mail action is cancelled.
553
SMTP server error. The requested action is not accepted.
554
An SMTP server error, or an internal error when sending data. The transaction failed.
555
SMTP server error. MAIL/RCPT parameter error.
599
SMTP server error. An unsupported SMTP error code of 500s is received from the SMTP server.
2236
2238
2239
2240
The certificate is not trusted.

2241
2242
2243
2244
2261
2263
K-101
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Description
2264
2266
2267
2268
3000
An unexpected error occurred.
3001
An unexpected error occurred within the library being used.
3002
An invalid channel is specified.
3003
SMTP server address is invalid.
3004
Parameter error (MIMEBodyHeader).
3005
Parameter error (DisplayName).
3006
Parameter error (character set).
3007
Parameter error (From address).
3008
Parameter error (To address).
3009
Parameter error (CC address).
3010
Parameter error (BCC address).
3011
Parameter error (pEmailSet is NULL).
3012
Parameter error (destination certificate is NULL).
3013
Parameter error (E-mail body).
3014
The HDD is disabled.
3015
The S/MIME function is disabled.
3016
The device certificate cannot be used in S/MIME (e.g. self-signed certificate error, the private key type is not RSA).
3018
An invalid encryption algorithm is specified.
3019
An invalid signature algorithm is specified.
3020
The E-mail address included in the destination certificate does not match the destination address (To/Cc/Bcc).
3021
The E-mail address included in the certificate does not match the sender (From) address.
3022
Format error of the certificate.
3023
Parameter error (Disposition-Notification-To).
3024
Message syntax error of the receiver side.
3025
The SMTP server does not support the STARTTLS command.
7.8 WebDAV transmission

Code
Description
22
The format of the URL of the target resource is invalid.

Parameter error.
27
Attempted to send data that exceeds the maximum transferrable size for transfer coding.
42
52
55
56
The connection has already been established.
57
The connection to the WebDAV server failed (including connection time out).
62
70
72
The connection has been interrupted with the condition that is insufficient to the specified size.
401
Authentication error.
407
Proxy authentication error.
1001
The server does not support WebDAV.

Unable to upload data to the server.
1002
The intermediate resource is not a collection (directory) (e.g. the specified folder does not exist).
1003
The target resource is a collection (directory).
1011
Although https is specified for the resource URL, it is unavailable because the SSL library is not included for the modularity.
1012
Although https is specified for the resource URL, the connection is interrupted because the WebDAV server certificate has
expired.
1013
The CONNECT method is issued to the proxy server to establish an SSL connection via a proxy, but it is rejected.
1017
A communication error occurred while sending a request.
1018
A communication error occurred while receiving a response.
1027
nContentLength exceeds the maximum transferable size.
1030
Although use of a proxy has been specified, the proxy setting information is unavailable.
1031
The connection to the proxy server failed (including connection time out).
K-102
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code
Description
1098
Failed in chunk TX to SharePoint Server.
1099
Other internal error occurred (e.g. memory shortage).
2236
2238
2239
2240

2241
2242
2243
2244
2261
2263
2264
2266
2267
2268
7.9 SMB browsing

Code
Description
32
42
57
62

The internal channel detected an error immediately before establishing communication.
67
The host is shut down.
4096
The group name/host name is not specified.

The specified group name/host name does not exist on the network.
4097

4098
Administrative shares do not exist.

The shared resource name is not specified.
The shared resource does not exist.
4099

4102
The specified media to be written is not formatted.

The file system of the specified media to be written is faulty.
4105
Other errors to which an error code is not assigned.
4352
The browser machine (master browser/backup browser) is not found.
4353
Unable to log in to the browser machine (master browser/backup browser).
4354
The sub folder does not exist.
4355
The request is not accepted due to an invalid call sequence etc.
4368
The number of groups is too large.
4369
The number of host PCs is too large.
4370
The number of shared resources is too large.
10000
12236
12239
12240
12241
12242
12243
12244
12263
been specified.
12264
12266
K-103
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code

Description
12267
12268
7.10 User authentication

Code
Description
Invalid parameter (e.g. the number of characters exceeds the limit, blank).
The authentication function setting is disabled.
Failed to resolve the name using the DNS server.
Unable to find the authentication server.
Failed to authenticate.
Failed to allocate memory.

An unexpected error occurred (which does not occur under normal usage conditions).
An authentication request is received while an internal task of the user authentication client is being performed.
The connection was interrupted while the user authentication was being performed.
10000
12236
12239
12240
12241
12242
12243
12244
12261
12263
been specified.
12264
12266
7.11 WebDAV client

Code
Description
The ID of the client that is not opened is specified.
The reception has timed out.
A reception error occurred.

An invalid request URL is specified.
Content-Length or the received data size exceeds the maximum transferable size.
The size of the message body is too large.

The size of the message body exceeds the maximum transferable size.

The process is cancelled by an internal reset.
Failed to connect to the WebDAV server.
An error occurred while sending data to the WebDAV server.
10
A timeout occurred while sending data to the WebDAV server.
11
Failed to connect to the proxy server.
12
The proxy server rejected the connection request.
13
Although use of a proxy has been specified, the proxy setting in-formation is unavailable.
14
Failed to authenticate the proxy server.
15
Other error was returned from the proxy server.
16
17
The process is cancelled because MIO_REQBODY_ERROR is specified by the device application.
2236
2238
2239
2240

2241
2242
2243
2244
K-104
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Code

Description
2261
2263
2264
2266
2267
2268
7.12 WS scan
Code
Description
The specified client is not registered.
Parameter is invalid.
The Web service or WS scan function is disabled.
Waiting for connection from CP.
The certificate of the destination computer is not valid when the validity period of a certificate is checked.
22
Invalid argument.
42
52
The connection aborted by the network.
53
55
57
The socket is not connected.
60
The operation has timed out.
70
The operation is expected to be blocked.
72
The RetrieveImage waiting period has timed out.
2236
2238
2239
2240

2241
2242
2243
2244
2261
2263
been specified.
2264
2265
Parameter of the certificate verification is invalid.
2266
2267
2268
K-105
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 8. FAX TROUBLE CODE
8. FAX TROUBLE CODE

The error in the transmission/reception system
The error in the Txx/Rxx system may be caused under the effect of line noise, etc. even in usual operating condition.
If the error arises often, output the activity report, fax setting list, protocol trace list, parameter list, address book list, group address list
and program list and obtain detailed information on the error status, conditions which may cause the error, etc. from the user and contact
the support center.
8.1 B0-**
Category
FAX board
error
Code No.
B0-01
Contents of error
How to correct
B0-03
FAX board error 1 (FAX ROM check sum Pull out and insert the Fax board to check its installation.
error)
If the trouble is not yet corrected, hardware of the fax board may be
FAX board error 2 (DPRAM check error) defective.
Replace the fax board in such a case.
FAX board error 3 (FAX Initialization NG)
B0-51
FAX board installation error (Line 1).
Pull out and insert the fax board to check its installation.
If the trouble is not yet corrected, check if the fax (main) is set to
[Unset] on the [System 2]-[Option board Status] screen in the service
mode.
If it is set to [Unset], set to [Set].
B0-52
FAX board installation error (Line 2).
Pull out and insert the FAX board to check its installation.
If the trouble is not yet corrected, check if the fax (Sub) is set to
[Unset] on the [System 2]-[Option board Status] screen in the service
mode.
If it is set to [Unset], set to [Set].
B0-02
8.2 B1-1*
Category
FAX driver
error
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
B1-10
Instance generation error or observer

registration error
Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
B1-11
Configuration space initialization NG
B1-12
Semaphore acquisition, release error
B1-13
Sequence error among main body tasks
B1-14
Message queue control error
B1-15
Main body - sequence error among FAX

boards
B1-16
FAX board nonresponse (Nonresponse

after initialization)
B1-17
ACK waiting timeout error
B1-18
Receiving undefined frame
B1-19
DMA transfer error
Pull out and insert the FAX board to check its installation.
8.3 B1-2*
Category
JC
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
B1-20
Soft error (Fax board side)
B1-22
Device error (GA LOCAL SRAM)
B1-23
Device error (DRAM)
B1-25
Device error (GA)

If the trouble is not yet corrected, hardware of the fax board may be
defective. Replace the fax board in such a case.
B1-26
Timeout error due to nonresponse from

codec control during suspension process
B1-27

communication control during suspension
process
B1-28

LINE control during suspension process
B1-29
Timeout error due to non-response from

the modem to voice response
8.4 B1-3*
Category
Driver error
(Fax board
side)
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
B1-30
Driver soft error
B1-31
Reception frame length error from main
B1-32
Reception frame header error from main
B1-33
232C i/f sequence error
K-106
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Category
Code No.

Contents of error
B1-34
DPRAM i/f sequence error
B1-35
DPRAM CTL/STS register error
B1-36
ACK waiting timeout
B1-37
DPRAM RESET reception
How to correct
8.5 B1-4*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
Soft error
(Fax board
side)
B1-40
MSG I/F error with job control
Soft error
B1-41
I/F error with driver
I/F error with B1-42

main
B1-43
B1-44
How to correct
Undefined command reception

Command frame length error
Command parameter length error
B1-45
Undefined parameter
B1-46
Command/response sequence error
8.6 B1-5*
Category
Line control
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
B1-50
External class instance acquisition error
B1-51
Job start error (starting job parameter

error/child job generation error)
B1-52
Doc access error (report buf access

error)
B1-53
Response wait timeout from external task
B1-54
Internal que table control error (create/

enque/deque)
8.7 B1-6*
Category
1
destination
control
Code No.
Contents of error
B1-60
Instance generation error
B1-61
Timeout error
B1-62
Interface error
B1-63
Message que control error
B1-64
Semaphore acquisition
release error
B1-65
Observer registration error
B1-66
Reception resource check error
B1-67
Deployment error of sending image

information
B1-68
Serialization error of receiving image
B1-69
Access error to quick memory data
How to correct
8.8 B1-7*
Category
Code No.
Page control B1-70
Contents of error
How to correct
Internal que table control error (create/

enque/deque)
B1-71
Instance generation error
B1-72
Timeout error
B1-73
Interface error
B1-74
Semaphore acquisition release error
B1-75
Observer registration error
B1-76
Unable to check TTI domain
B1-77
Error return from TTI rasterizer
B1-78
Receiving job generation error
B1-79
Sequence control error (line specification

fault, status mismatch, event mismatch)
K-107
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8.9 B1-8*
Category
Code No.
Page control B1-80
Contents of error
How to correct
Access error to quick sending memory

data
B1-81
BlockBuff acquisition error
B1-82
Sending block image error (Req, restore)
B1-83
Receiving block image error (Req, store)
B1-84
Storage error of receiving image

information
B1-85
Receiving data size logic error (Receiving

data are not multiples of dotline)
B1-86
ImageBuf acquisition (alloc) error
B1-87
Error return from

compressor
B1-88
BandBuf control error (newInstance/get/

free)
8.10 B1-9*
Category
USB
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
B1-90
USB IF error (OS notifies an error during

configuration setting after recovery from
the sleep or attach.)
B1-91
USB IF error (EndPoint1: Bulk Out

(command, transmitted image data))
(error retry 1 min. timeout)
B1-92
USB IF error (EndPoint2: Bulk In

(response, received image data)) (error
retry 5 sec. timeout)
B1-93
USB IF error (EndPoint3: Interrupt In (fax

board status)) (error retry 1 min. timeout)
B1-94
USB IF error (EndPoint4: Bulk Out (main

body status)) (error retry 3 sec. timeout)
B1-95
USB IF error (Attach not detected for 1

min. after recovery from sleep)
B1-96
USB IF error (Detach not detected for 1

min. after recovery from sleep)
8.11 T0*
Category
Sending
Sending
Sending
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
T00
T1 timeout. no response obtained from

the machine on the other end of the line.
(35 second)
Check that the address number is correct.
T01
T1 over after the mode has been

changed (35 seconds)
T02
DCN reception in DIS waiting
The remote station may not receive the data due to paper shortage,
full memory, etc.
T03
Unexpected command reception in DIS

waiting
T04
Not used
T05
FIF not matching with the remote station

(remote station without the function).
T06
DCN reception in CFR/FTT waiting
T07
Not used
T08
Training failure at 2400bps
The line may be in trouble. Check the line noise.
T09
No response to DCS
The line may be disabled because the user on the remote station
disconnected it.
8.12 T1*
Category
Sending
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
T10
Not used
T11
DCN reception while waiting for post

message responses
full memory, etc.
T12
Unexpected command reception while

waiting for post message responses
K-108
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
T13
No response while waiting for post

message responses
T14
Not used
T15
Not used
T16
Not used
T17
Not used
T18
No reception ability in a remote station
T19
Not used
Sending
-
How to correct
full memory, etc.
full memory, etc.
8.13 T2*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
T20
Not used
T21
Not used
T22
Not used
T23
Not used
T24
Not used
T25
Not used
T26
Not used
T27
Not used
T28
Timeout by RR/RNR (60 seconds)
T29
Not used
ECM
sending
-
How to correct
8.14 T3*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
T30
Not used
T31
Not used
T32
Fall back over by CTC
T33
Not used
T34
Not used
ECM
transmissio
n
T35
No responses to RR
T36
DCN reception to RR
T37
Not used
T38
SID is received when SEP is received
T39
Not used
ECM
sending
F code
polling tx
-
The line may be in trouble. Check the line noise.
8.15 T4*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
Calling
T40
Software error at calling
T41
Not used
T42
RTN/PIN reception
T43
Three continuous CRP signal reception
T44
Time error between frames at

transmission
T45
Not used
T46
Not used
T47
Not used
T48
Line disconnected due to no match as a

result of CSI check.
T49
Not used
Sending
Check
Destination
-
Telephone number may not be set on the remote station. Check the
CSI signal of the remote station in the protocol trace list.
8.16 T5*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
FAX-CSRC
T50
Host terminal ID inconsistency
T51
Not used
How to correct
-
K-109
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
T52
Not used
T53
Not used
T54
Not used
T55
Not used
T56
Not used
T57
Not used
T58
Calling by polling reception, but a remote

station does not have polling
transmission documents
T59
Not used
Polling
reception
-
Polling original may not be set on the remote station.
8.17 T6*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
Polling
transmissio
n
T60
Received the polling transmission

request (DTC), but there are no polling
transmission documents
Polling original may not be set on your machine. Polling TX is enabled

only when the polling transmission original is registered.
F-code
polling
transmissio
n
T61
Unsatisfactory conditions for receive

polling tx request.
Bulletin board original may not be set. Bulletin board TX is enabled

only when the bulletin board transmission original is registered.
F-code
polling
transmissio
n
T62
Box number specified by SEP is not

valid.
Bulletin board box number from the remote station may be incorrect.
T63
Not used
T64
Not used
T65
Not used
T66
Not used
T67
Not used
T68
Not used
T69
Not used
8.18 T7*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
T70
Not used
T71
Not used
T72
Not used
How to correct
Transmissio T73
n
Modem response waiting T.0 (60

seconds)
V34
T74
No changes in the V34 modem status
T75
V34 signal sending error
T76
CS2 is not turned to ON
T77
Not used
Transmissio T78
n
T79
Codec control soft ware error
Job control soft error at transmission
8.19 T8*
Category
Call control
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
T80
LOOP current detection NG when CML is

turned ON at calling
The line may not be connected.

Check the line connection status.
T81
Dial Tone detection NG when CML is

turned ON at calling
T82
Answer tone (CED/DIS) waiting timeout

after dialing at calling
T83
Busy tone detection at calling
T84
Line control dial error
T85
Short disconnection was detected after

LOOP current detection at calling
T86
Not used
T87
Not used
T88
Not used
K-110
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Category
Control unit
Code No.
T89
Contents of error
How to correct
When the control unit is connected, a

communication error is caused due to
capacity shortage and communication is
finished.
8.20 T9*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
T90
Not used
T91
Not used
T92
Not used
T93
Not used
T94
Not used
T95
When called, short disconnection of

LOOP current was detected during a call
T96
Not used
T97
Transmission request was received with

no fax board installed. *
T98
Transmission request of images that

cannot be transmitted were received. *
(Color images)
T99
Remote stations number is deleted while

waiting for abbreviated or one-touch redialing (redial / transmission / polling
reception) *
Call control
Transfer
Call control
* The corresponding error code is not displayed on the control panel even if the error occurs.
8.21 R0*
Category
Reception
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
R00
DCS was not received within 35 seconds

(T1 over)
The dialed telephone number may be incorrect.
R01
T1 timeout after EOM sending
R02
DCN reception in DCS waiting
disconnected it.
R03
Unexpected command reception in DCS

waiting
R04
FIF error of DCS
R05
Not used
R06
Not used
R07
Image information does not come in

image information waiting
R08
CD OFF while receiving image

information
R09
DCN reception in post message waiting
Reception
disconnected it.
8.22 R1*
Category
Reception
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
R10
Unexpected command reception in post

message waiting
R11
Command was not received which

waiting for post message
disconnected it.
R12
Timeout during EOL-EOL
R13
Not used
R14
Not used
R15
Not used
R16
Not used
R17
Not used
R18
Resource check error (line disconnected

due to ongoing communication)
R19
Not used
Reception
-
Space in the hard disk may become short. Unnecessary data should
be deleted to secure the space in the hard disk.
K-111
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8.23 R2*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
Reception
R20
Line disconnection by receive reject

function
Call was received from a user who is in the register of addresses to be

rejected.
CUG
reception
R21
No match of password in the closed

network RX setting
Check the password.
R22
No password received in the closed

network RX setting
Check the setting of closed network RX.
R23
Not used
R24
RR-RNR repeats for 2 minutes
R25
Command was not received while waiting for responses to RNR
R26
Unexpected command was received

while waiting for responses to RNR
R27
DCN reception while waiting for

responses to RNR
R28
The counter is abnormal of the post

messages received (PC/BC).
R29
Timeout (35 seconds) between frames

occurred
ECM
reception
8.24 R3*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
R30
Not used
R31
Not used
R32
Line disconnected because there is no

appropriate confidential user box while
automatic user box generation is
inhibited.
Confidential box No. received from the remote station may be

incorrect.
R33
DIS reception to DTC (German

specifications only)
F code
confidential
reception
R34
PWD was received when SUB was

received.
R35
Not used
R36
Not used
Reception
V34
-
R37
CS2 is not turned to ON.
R38
No change in V34 modem and status
R39
Not used
8.25 R4*
Category
Code No.
When called R40
Contents of error
Soft error when called
R41
Not used
R42
Not used
R43
Not used
R44
Not used
R45
Phase C timeout (NonECM reception

only)
R46
Not used
R47
Not used
R48
Not used
R49
DCN reception while waiting for image

information
Reception
Reception
How to correct
-
disconnected it.
8.26 R5*
Category
Reception
Code No.
Contents of error
R50
No. of error lines exceeds.
R51
Not used
R52
Not used
R53
Not used
How to correct
The line may be in trouble.
Check the line noise.
K-112
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Category
Code No.
R54
Not used
R55
Not used
R56
Not used
R57
Not used
R58
Not used
R59
Not used
Contents of error
How to correct
Contents of error
How to correct
8.27 R6*
Category
Reception
Code No.
R60
Reception image error (RTN/PIN

sending)
R61
Not used
R62
Not used
R63
Three continuous CRP signal reception
Reception

R64
Not used
R65
Not used
SEP polling
R66
SEP polling transmission request was

received without SEP polling
transmission ability
SUB
reception
R67
SUB was directed without SUB reception

ability
R68
Not used
R69
Communications are cut when EOR is

received.
ECM
reception

8.28 R7*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
ECM
reception
R70
Decode error occurred in ECM
Reception
R71
RTC detection error (No. of EOL is

smaller than FP.)
R72
Long original longer than a

predetermined length value is received
(1000 mm).
Longer original than specified is received from the remote station.
R73
Modem response waiting T.0 (60

seconds)
R74
Reception byte size error
R75
V34 signal sending error
R76
Unexpected command was received in

V34 mode phase C reception
V34
Reception
R77
Codec control error
R78
Codec control software error
R79
Job control soft error during reception
8.29 R8*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
How to correct
R80
Not used
R81
Not used
R82
Not used
R83
Not used
R84
Not used
R85
R-ISW request received when a machine is running in case of either reserved job
exists, image exists in memory, or jam
happened.
R86
Not used
R87
Not used
R88
Not used
R89
Not used
K-113
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8.30 R9*
Category
Code No.
Contents of error
R90
Not used
How to correct
R91
Not used
Turnaround
R92
When the turnaround function is not

provided, the line is disconnected if a
turnaround order (DTC) is received.
F-code
reception
R93
Unsatisfactory conditions for confidential

Rx request
Check the Confidential password.
R94
Unsatisfactory conditions for relay

request
Check the Relay password.
R95
Unsatisfactory conditions for forwarding

request
R96
Confidential box number specified by

SUB is not valid.
Confidential box No. received from the remote station may be

incorrect.
R97
Unsatisfactory conditions for PC-FAX RX request (Function, PW unmatching)
R98
Not used
Others
R99
Reception command was received from

the whole control side before reception
signals were detected.
K-114
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 9. DIAGNOSTIC CODES
9. DIAGNOSTIC CODES
9.1 Outline
The diagnostic code is a 22-digit hexadecimal code indicating a communication conditions and status.
The diagnostic code is printed on the activity report.
The purpose of the diagnostic code is to obtain detailed information of communication results and conditions so as to analyze
communication troubles.
9.2 Explanation
9.2.1 The diagnostic code
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
9.2.2 Information of communication results and conditions

Item
Description
bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Telephone
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
PSTN called Dial-in

(Japan)
(2) Communication
mode
Sending
Error page
resending
(3) Applied function

specification
Mixed size
Frame
Book mode 2in1transmission Original size Upside
transmission erasure
transmission
appointing
down
All pages/
transmission
Tx
cover
(4) One-time
communication
parameter
specification
Timer Tx
(not used)
CSRC
(5) Box Type/No.

(9th digit)
Relay
Confidential
Manual
Bulletin
transmission
(6) BOX No. (8th &

7th digits)
BOX No. 8th digit [BCD]
(7) BOX No.(6th &

5th digits)
(8) H_RES
specification 1 (HR)
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
(not used)
16pels/mm
not used
8pels/mm
(not used)
(9) V_RES
specification 1
400dpi
300dpi
200dpi
100dpi
15.4 l/mm
(not used)
7.7 l/mm
3.85 l/mm
(10) Coding
specification/H_RES
specification
(600dpi)
600dpi (H)
(not used)
(JPEG)
JBIG
MMR
MR
MH
THRU
(11) Original length

specification/V_RES
specification
(600dpi)
600dpi (V)
(not used)
(Legal)
(Letter)
A3
B4
A4
(not used)
(12) Original length

specification
(not used)
No limits
(Legal)
(Letter)
(not used)
B4
A4
(not used)
(13) Speed
specification 0
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
V.29-96
V.29-72
(not used)
V.27-48
V.27-24
(14) Speed
specification 1
V.17-144
V.17-120
V.17-96
V.17-72
(V.33-144)
(V.33-120)
(V.33-96)
(V.33-72)
(15) Speed
specification 2
V.34-192
V.34-168
V.34-144
V.34-120
V.34-96
V.34-72
V.34-48
V.34-24
(16) Speed
specification 3
(not used)
(not used)
V.34-336
V.34-312
V.34-288
V.34-264
V.34-240
V.34-216
(17) MSLT
specification
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
MSLT of resolution shown as vertical RES
(18) Communication
parameter
specification
ECM frame
size 0:256 /
1:64
ECM
DIAG
(CSRC)
(BFT)
(BTM)
PWD
SEP
SUB
(19) Remote station

coding specification
(not used)
(not used)
(JPEG)
JBIG
MMR
MR
MH
THRU
(20) Remote station

communication
ECM frame
size 0:256 /
1:64
ECM
DIAG
(CSRC)
(BFT)
(BTM)
PWD
SEP
SUB
Forwarding Polled
transmission transmission
PC-Fax
transmission
(RX/V2)
K-115
Group
One-touch
dialing
Abbreviated
dialing
Receiving
Recovery
Called
transmission turnaround
Bit0
(1) Types of call out / F network

called
called
(Japan)
Special
scanning
non
standard/Zfold/Long
Key pad
dialing
Polling Rx
Line used
line 1 / 2
V.34 appoint F-code

ECM
International
transmission transmission Specification mode
TX
transmission
BOX No. 9th digit [BCD] (Top)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Item
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 9. DIAGNOSTIC CODES

Description
bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
parameter
(capability)
(21) BOX no (4th &
3rd digit)
BOX No. 3rd digit [BCD]
(22) BOX no. (2nd &

1st digits)
BOX No. 2nd digit [BCD]
BOX No. 1st digit [BCD]
K-116
Bit1
Bit0
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 10. NETWORK FAX ERROR CODE
10. NETWORK FAX ERROR CODE

When there occurs any trouble with this machine, the error screen is displayed. And on this error screen, the following error message is
shown. Take a necessary step referring to the table given below.
10.1 Error code list of the transmission system

Classification
Connection
error
Code
Details of the error
Redial
Corrective Action
N10
Server connection error
Yes
Check the condition of the other party machine.

Check the network setting of local machine.
Ask the network administrator if the network is
operating normally.
N11
Connection declined by the other party machine
No
Reception is declined.
N12
Disconnection of the line
Yes
Check to see if there occurs any abnormal condition

with the network, such as the disconnection of a
cable.
N13
No response received from the network
No

Check the network setting of local machine.
Ask the network administrator if the network is
operating normally.
N14
Mail delivery error
No

Send it again after waiting for a while.
Remote reset
N15
Connection reset by the other party machine
Yes

Remote busy
N16
Remote machine is busy
Yes

LAN access
N17
Communication time out
Yes

Network
N18
Network
No
Check the each settings.

Check to see if there occurs any abnormal
condition with the network, such as the
disconnection of a cable.
After turning off and on the main power switch,
send it again.
Memory error
N20
Memory overflow
No
The memory is full.

Check to see if there is any other job being
handled.
With the number of transmission sheets reduced
or the resolution for read reduced, send it again.
HDD error
N21
HDD error
No
HDD is full.
Delete unnecessary files.
Conversion
error
N22
Conversion error
No
After turning off and on the main power switch, send

it again.
Memory
overflow
N25
Memory overflow
No
The memory is full.

Check to see if there is any other job being
handled.
Forward TX
N35
A request for transmission has been received with

the NetFAX with the Function Settings OFF. (A
request for transfer of the IP address FAX while the
IP Address FAX function is being OFF in the service
mode.)
No
N36
A request has been received for transmission of

images that cannot be sent.
No
10.2 Error code list of the reception system

Classification
Code
Corrective Action
SMTP
reception
N50
SMTP reception error
When the SMTP reception does not start in 60 minutes

after connection for an incoming call, this error may be
resulted.
Ask the sender to send it again.
Decode
N51
In excess of the length specified for reception
Ask the sender to send it again after the length of the text
being reduced.
N52
In excess of the number of pages specified for

reception
Ask the sender to send it again after the number of text

sheets being reduced.
K-117
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Classification
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 10. NETWORK FAX ERROR CODE
Code
Corrective Action
N53
File error
Ask the sender to send it again in a correct file format as

shown below.
Internet Fax: TIFF
IP Address Fax: PDF or TIFF
N54
Decode error
The data has been received in an incorrect format. Ask the

sender to send it again in a correct format.
K-118
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. Open API RELATED TROUBLE
11. Open API RELATED TROUBLE

11.1 Outline
Through the Certification Management System provided by OpenAPI, if error is found in communication between the machine and
interacting applications developed by company other than KM, an error message is displayed.
11.2 Supported Version

The Certification Management System provided by OpenAPI supports function version 3 of the machine. Confirm that Function Version is
version 3 from [Utility] [Device Information] in the machine.
11.3 Types of Trouble

The Certification Management System provided by OpenAPI certificates and manages communication between MFP and non-KM
applications that run on the computer connected to the machine. If trouble is detected, the trouble message is displayed on the control panel
of the machine or the screen of the computer on which the applications run. Trouble messages displayed on the control panel of the
machine and actions are described below.
NOTE
A message that appears on the computer screen may be different depending on the appliaction being used for communication.
The corresponding action may be different, so contact the application vendor for an appropriate action.
Examples of trouble messages
Application has expired.
Failed to start the registered application.
11.4 Solution
The below describes the OpenAPI certification related trouble messages displayed on the control panel of the machine and actions, dividing
them by possible situation.
11.4.1 When using an application

No.
1
Symptom and message

When starting an application, the following message is
displayed: Application has expired. Failed to start the
registered application.
When starting the machine, the following message is
displayed: The Enhanced Server Authentication
application has expired. Change the User
Authentication method to one other than Enhanced
Server Authentication.

displayed: Failed to start the registered application.
Please contact your service representative.
Action
1. In [Administrator Settings] [System Settings] [Date/Time Settings],
check that the date and time that is set is same as the actual date and time. If
a
wrong date and time is set, correct it.
2. Contact the application vendor and obtain a new Solution Key (or the
application software itself). Using it, perform the steps below.
1) Delete the application.
2) Using the Solution Key (or the application software itself), register the
application again.
In [System1] [Marketing Area], change the marketing area of the machine
to the one that was selected when the application was registered.

displayed: The enhanced server authentication
application cannot be used. Please contact your service
representative.
3
In the screen saver application, after a time set, the

screen saver does not work.
1. In [Administrator Settings] [System Settings] [Date/Time Settings],

check that the date and time that is set is same as the actual date and time. If
a wrong date and time is set, correct it.
2. Contact the application vendor and obtain a new Solution Key (or the
application software itself). Using it, perform the steps below.
1) Delete the application.
2) Using the Solution Key (or the application software itself), register the
application again.
3. In [System1] [Marketing Area], change the marketing area of the
machine to the one that was selected when the application was registered.
11.4.2 After rewriting the firmware of the machine

No.
1
Symptom and message

displayed: Failed to start the registered application.
Please contact your service representative.
Action
After deleting the application in question, register the application again.
K-119
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. Open API RELATED TROUBLE

displayed: The enhanced server authentication
application cannot be used. Please contact your service
representative.
In the screen saver application, after a time set, the
screen saver does not work.
K-120
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 12. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY

THE TROUBLE CODE
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE TROUBLE CODE

12.1 Machine is not energized at all (DCPU operation check)
12.1.1 Contents
Trouble type
Machine is not energized at all
Trouble code
Rank
Detection timing
Trouble isolation
Main power switch (SW1)

12.1.2 Procedure
Step
Check item
Location of
electrical
components
Result
Action
S-2
NO
Check the WIRING from the wall outlet to

SW1 CN1.
NO
Change DCPU.
Is a power voltage supplied across CN1-1, 3 on DCPU?
1
2
Are the fuses on DCPU conducting?
Is DC24 V being output from CN5-7, 8 on DCPU?
P-4
NO
Change DCPU.
Is DC5 V being input to CN4-5 to 7 on DCPU?
P-3
NO
Change DCPU.
Is DC5 V being input to CN2-3 on PRCB? (LED on PRCB does

not blink.)
I-21
NO
Change DCPU.
YES
Change PRCB.
12.2 Fusing heaters do not operate

12.2.1 Contents
Trouble type
Fusing heaters do not operate
Trouble code
Rank
Detection timing
Trouble isolation

Right door switch (SW2)
Fusing unit
12.2.2 Procedure
Location of
electrical
components
Result
Action
Is the power source voltage applied across CN6-1, 6 on

DCPU?
During this time, the right door should be closed.
F-26
NO
Check wiring from power outlet to SW1 to

DCPU to CN5 to SW2 to PRCB CN16.
Is the power source voltage applied across CN30-4 and 9?
D-26
YES
Change fusing unit.
NO
Change DCPU.
Step
1
2
Check item
12.3 Power is not supplied to option

12.3.1 DF-621
(1) Procedure
Step
Check item
Location of
electrical
components
Result
Action
Is DC24 V being output from CN90 on DF-621?
X-7
YES
Malfunction in DF-621.
Is DC24 V being output from CN6-1 on DCPU?
P-5
NO
Check wiring from DCPU to DF-621.
YES
Change DCPU.
NO
Malfunction in DF-621.
Is the fuse on DCPU conducting?
K-121
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 12. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY

THE TROUBLE CODE
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3.2 PC-109/PC-208/PC-409
(1) Procedure
Step
1
2
3
Check item
Location of
electrical
components
Result
Action
Is DC24 V being applied to CN84-1?
L-25
NO
Malfunction in cabinet.
Is DC24 V being output from CN6-3 on DCPU?
P-6
NO
Check wiring from DCPU to CN6 to

cabinet.
YES
Change DCPU.
NO
Malfunction in cabinet.
Link to the wiring diagram of PC-109 (PDF format, 1MB)

12.3.3 FS-527/FS-529
(1) Procedure
Step
Check item
Location of
electrical
components
Result
Action
Are DC24 V being applied to CN83L-1?
L-23
NO
Are DC24 V being applied to CN6-2 on DCPU?
P-5
NO
Check wiring from DCPU to finisher.
YES
Change DCPU.
NO
Malfunction in finisher.

Link to the wiring diagram of FS-529 (PDF format, 1MB)
K-122
Malfunction in finisher.
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 13. TROUBLESHOOTING OF i-Option
13. TROUBLESHOOTING OF i-Option

13.1 Structure of license management
The functions available with i-Option can be activated by entering License code to the MFP.
License code is issued and controlled by License Management System (LMS).
To prevent unauthorized use of the license code, each MFP is identified individually so that the license code cannot be activated unless it
matches with the authorized MFP.
13.2 License management information

Since license code needs to identify each MFP, it is issued using the serial number of MFP and unique value that is generated inside MFP.
The unique value is stored to the NVRAM board (NRB) on the MFP board and at the same time some parts of it are memorized by
EEPROM (IC51). The activated function cannot be used unless the both figures conform.
Since these figures are out of target of NVRAM data back, when any trouble occurs at either nonvolatile memory or either of them is
replaced with new one, license management error is generated due to discordance of the figures.
13.3 Error message

13.3.1 License management error
When abnormal value is detected in the license management information that is stored to the NVRAM board (NRB) or EEPROM (IC51), or
some values are detected cleared, warning is issued to let the user know the abnormality.
The abnormality is detected at the timing of start-up or restart due to any condition.
When the abnormality is detected, the corresponding i-Option function cannot be used, other ordinal functions, however, such as copy,
scanning, print or etc, can be used without interruption.
(1) Example of error message
License management error occurred.
(2) Main reasons of trouble

The following shows the possible trouble factors and their countermeasure.
Board replacement
Countermeasure
When NVRAM board (NRB) on MFP board is replaced with new

one.
Repair -> Activation
When EEPROM (IC51) is replaced with new one.
Repair
When NVRAM board (NRB) and EEPROM (IC51) are replaced

with the new ones at the same time.
Initialize -> Activation
When mounting the NVRAM board (NRB) of the machine whose

function(s) have already been activated.
When mounting the EEPROM (IC51) of the machine whose

function(s) have already been activated.
When mounting the NVRAM board (NRB) and the EEPROM

(IC51) of the machine whose function(s) have already been
activated.
K-123
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 14. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM
14. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

14.1 How to read element data
As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for State Confirmation available from Service Mode can be used to
isolate the cause of the image problem.
14.1.1 Table number
Vdc-K
Shows the developing bias value of toner when an image is produced.

Standard values: around 400 V (100 V to 750 V)
Relevant components: Developing unit, drum unit, high voltage unit (HV)
Vg-K
Shows the grid voltage value of toner when an image is produced.

Standard values: around 500 V (200 V to 900 V)
Relevant components: Developing unit, drum unit, high voltage unit (HV)
14.1.2 Level history 1
TCR-K
Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments).

Standard value: 4 to 8 %
Relevant components: TCR sensor
Fusing temperature (Main)

Fusing temperature (Sub)
Shows the temperature of the each part of the fusing unit (in 1 C increments).
Relevant components: Fusing unit
K-124
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Drum temperature
Shows the temperature of the drum unit (in 1 C increments).

Relevant components: Drum unit
14.1.3 Level history 2
ATVC
Shows the latest ATVC level (which varies according to the paper type, environment or durability).
300 V to 3800 V (ATVC)
Relevant components: High voltage unit (HV), transfer roller unit
14.2 How to identify problematic part

This chapter is divided into two parts: Initial check items and Troubleshooting procedure by a particular image quality problem.
When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the Initial check items and, if the cause is yet to be identified, go to
Troubleshooting procedure by a particular image quality problem.
14.2.1 Initial check items

(1) Initial check items 1
Determine if the failure is attributable to a basic cause or causes.
Section
Step
Paper
Original
Check Item
Result
Action
Recommended paper is used.
NO
Instruct user.
Paper is damp.
YES
Replace paper.
Instruct user on proper paper storage.
Original not flat.
YES
Correct
Faint original (light pencil, etc.)
YES
Instruct user.
Highly transparent original (OHP film, etc.)
YES
Instruct user.
Dirty or scratched original glass.
YES
Clean or Replace.
PM parts
PM parts relating to image formation have reached the

end of cleaning/replacement cycles.
YES
Clean or Replace.
Adjustment items
There are settings that can be readjusted to remedy

the image failure.
YES
Readjust.
(2) Initial check items 2

Determine if the failure is attributable to the Scanner system or the Printer system.
Check Item
Make copies at different zoom ratios.
Result
Cause
Full size
Scanner system
Reduction
K-125
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Check Item
Result
Cause
Full size
Printer system
Reduction
14.3 Solution (Scanner system)

Solution
NOTE
Typical faulty image samples shown in the following are all printed with A3 setting.
14.3.1 Scanner system: Blank copy or black copy

(1) Typical faulty images
[1]
[1]
[2]
Blank copy
[2]
Black copy
(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
PWBs and connection

cables
Connectors are securely connected with no bent pins

and no breaks in the connection cables.
NO
Reconnect.
Replace the connection cable.
Exposure unit/LED
exposure unit
The exposure lamp comes on.
NO
Change exposure lamp.

Change exposure unit/LED
exposure unit.
Inverter board
Connectors on the inverter board are connected

properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after performing step

3.
NO
Change inverter board.
4
5
MFP board
6
7
CCD unit
Connectors on the MFP board are connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.

5.
NO
Change MFP board.
Connectors on the CCD board are connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
K-126
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Section
Check Item
Result

7.
NO
Action
Change CCD unit.
14.3.2 Scanner system: Low image density or rough image

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Shading sheet
Shading sheet is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Mirrors/lens/original glass
Mirrors, lens and/or original glass are dirty.
YES
Clean.
Exposure lamp
Exposure lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean.
PWBs and connection

cables

NO
Reconnect.
MFP board
NO
Reconnect.

5.
NO
Change MFP board.
NO
Reconnect.

7.
NO
Change CCD unit.
6
7
CCD unit
14.3.3 Scanner System: Foggy background

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD

Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Sunlight or any other extraneous light enters the

machine.
YES
Protect the copier from extraneous

light.
Original
Original is damaged or dirty.
YES
Change original.
Original cover
Original pad is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Original cover does not lie flat.
YES
Replace original cover if it is

deformed or the hinges are broken.
4
5
Shading sheet
YES
Clean.
Mirrors/lens/original glass/ Mirrors, lens, original glass and/or reflectors are dirty.
reflectors
YES
Clean.
Exposure lamp
YES
Clean.
PWBs and connection

cables

NO
Reconnect.
MFP board
NO
Reconnect.
K-127
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Section
10
11
CCD unit
12
Check Item
Result

9.
NO
Change MFP board.
Action
NO
Reconnect.

11.
NO
Change CCD unit.
14.3.4 Scanner system: Black streaks or bands


Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Original
YES
Change original.
Original cover
YES
Clean.
YES

3
4
Shading sheet
YES
Clean.
reflectors
YES
Clean.
Exposure lamp
YES
Clean.
PWBs and connection

cables

NO
Reconnect.
MFP board
NO
Reconnect.

8.
NO
Change MFP board.
NO
Reconnect.

10.
NO
Change CCD unit.
9
10
CCD unit
11
14.3.5 Scanner system: Black spots

AA

Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Original
YES
Change original.
Original cover
YES
Clean.
Original glass
Original glass is dirty.
YES
Clean.
K-128
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Section
Check Item
Result

3.
NO
Action
Change exposure unit.
Change LED exposure unit.
Change CCD unit.
14.3.6 Scanner system: White streaks or bands


Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Original
YES
Change original.
Original cover
YES
Clean.
YES

3
4
Shading sheet
YES
Clean.
reflectors
YES
Clean.
Exposure lamp
YES
Clean.
The white lines or bands are blurry or opaque.
YES
Change exposure unit.

Change LED exposure unit.
Change CCD unit.
14.3.7 Scanner system: Uneven pitch


Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Scanner motor
Scanner motor drive is being transmitted.
NO
Correct or change drive coupling

mechanism.
Exposure lamp
Exposure lamp harness is not hooked.
NO
Correct.
Scanner drive cable
Scanner drive cable is taut.
NO
Correct the wiring or replace the

cable.
Scanner rails
Scanner rails are scratched or dirty.
NO
Clean or change.
PWBs and connection

cables

NO
Reconnect.
MFP board
7
8
CCD unit
NO
Reconnect.

6.
NO
Change MFP board.
NO
Reconnect.
K-129
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Section
Check Item
Result

8.
NO
Action
Change CCD unit.
14.4 Solution (Printer system)

Solution
NOTE
Typical faulty image samples shown in the following are all printed with A3 setting.
14.4.1 Printer system: Blank copy or black copy

[1]
[1]
[2]
Blank copy
[2]
Black copy

Step
1
Section
Imaging unit (blank copy)
2
3
Check Item
Result
Action
Developing unit drive is being transmitted.
NO

mechanism.
Image transfer current contact terminal is dirty or

deformed.
YES
Clean or correct.
Developing bias contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean or correct.
Imaging unit (black copy)
Drum unit charge contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean or correct.
PH unit
PH shutter (shutter in the path of the laser beam from

the PH unit to the drum) opens and closes properly.
NO
Correct.
PWBs

on the printer control board or PH Unit.
NO
Correct.

6.
NO
Change drum unit.

Change PH unit.
Change High voltage unit.
Change printer control board.
14.4.2 Printer system: Low image density or rough image

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Maximum Density
Adjustment
Confirm the following setting is set to [lighter] side;

[Administrator Settings] [Expert Adjustment]
[Maximum Density Adjustment]
YES
Make setting again.
Imaging unit
The drum unit, developing unit, or the developer is

used to the extent that its life value has been
exceeded.
YES
Replace the unit whose life value has

been reached.
K-130
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Step
Section
3
4
Check Item
Result
Action
Image transfer current contact terminal is dirty or

deformed.
YES
Clean or correct.
Developing bias contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean or correct.
State Confirmation
Level History 1 (Service
Mode)
Check TCR data. (specified rang: 4 to 8 %)
NO
Go to next step.
Level history data check

results
Low TCR
YES
Go to step 8.
TCR falling within specified range
YES
Go to step 7.
PH unit
The surface of the PH window is dirty.
YES
Clean with cleaning jig.
Image Process
Adjustment TCR Toner
Supply (Service Mode)
Toner is properly supplied when TCR toner supply is

run.
NO
Go to next step.
10
Image Process
Adjustment
Gradation Adjust
(Service Mode)
Execute the Maximum Density Adjustment.

Conv. Value falls within the specified range as
checked through gradation adjust.
Dark: 0 100
Highlight: 0 60
YES
Go to step 11.
11
Service Mode Max

Image Density Adj
Select [Service Mode] [Image Process Adjustment]

[Max Image Density Adj].
The image problem can be corrected by selecting an
Max Image Density Adj setting toward the + end.
YES
Make setting again.

11.
NO
12
Change drum unit.

Change PH unit.
Change high voltage unit.
14.4.3 Printer system: Foggy background

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD

Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Sunlight or any other extraneous light enters the

machine.
YES
Protect the copier from extraneous

light.
The drum unit or the developer is used to the extent

that its life value has been exceeded.
YES

been reached.
Comb electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean or correct.
Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean or correct.
Erase lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Is there continuity across the erase lamp?
NO
Change erase lamp.
Imaging Unit
Erase lamp
6
7
Service Mode
Gradation Adjust

[Gradation Adjust].
The image problem can be corrected by executing the
gradation adjustment.
YES
Make setting again.
Service Mode Image

Background Adj

[Image Background Adj].
The image problem can be corrected by selecting an
Image Background Adj setting toward the + end.
YES
Make setting again.

10.
NO
K-131
Change drum unit.

Change developing unit.
Change PH unit.
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.4.4 Printer system: Black streaks or bands in sub scan direction


Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Paper path
Toner is on the paper path.
YES
Clean.
Imaging unit

YES

been reached.
Drum is scratched.
YES
Change drum unit.
Appearance is dirty.
YES
Clean
Fusing rollers are dirty or scratched.
YES
Change fusing unit.

4.
NO
Change drum unit.

Fusing unit
14.4.5 Printer system: Black streaks or bands in main scan direction


Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Paper path
YES
Clean.
Imaging unit

YES

been reached.
Drum is scratched.
YES
Change drum unit.
YES
Clean.
Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
YES
Change transfer roller unit.
Paper path
There is foreign matter on paper path.
YES
Remove foreign matter.
Image transfer paper separator fingers are damaged

or dirty.
YES
Clean or change.
YES
Change fusing unit.

7.
NO
Change drum unit.

7
8
9
Fusing unit
-
K-132
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.4.6 Printer system: Black spots

AA

Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Paper path
YES
Clean.
Imaging unit
Drum is scratched.
YES
Change drum unit.
YES
Clean.
Fusing unit
YES
Change fusing unit.
Imaging unit
Comb electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean or correct.
Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean or correct.
Erase lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Is there continuity across the erase lamp?
NO
Change erase lamp.

8.
NO
6
7
Erase lamp
8
9
Change drum unit.

14.4.7 Printer system: White streaks or bands in sub scan direction


Step
1
Section
Imaging unit
Check Item
Result
Action
Transfer roller is dented or scratched.
YES
The drum unit, developing unit, paper dust remover or

the transfer roller unit is used to the extent that its life
value has been exceeded.
YES

been reached.
Drum is scratched.
YES
Change drum unit.
YES
Clean.
Fusing unit
YES
Change fusing unit.
PH unit
Window glass of the PH unit is dirty.
YES
Clean.

6.
NO
Change drum unit.

K-133
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.4.8 Printer system: White streaks or bands in main scan direction


Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
The drum unit, developing unit, paper dust remover or

the transfer roller unit is used to the extent that its life
YES

been reached.
Imaging unit
Drum is scratched.
YES
Change drum unit.
YES
Clean.
Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
YES
Paper path
There is foreign matter on paper path.
YES
Remove foreign matter.
Image transfer paper separator fingers are damaged

or dirty.
YES
Clean or change.
YES
Change fusing unit.
Window glass of the PH unit is dirty.
YES
Clean.

8.
NO
Change drum unit.

6
7
Fusing unit
PH unit
14.4.9 Printer system: Void areas


Step
Section
Imaging unit
Check Item
Result
Action
The developing unit, paper dust remover or the

transfer roller unit is used to the extent that its life
YES

been reached.
Drum is scratched.
YES
Change drum unit.
YES
Clean.
Transfer roller is dented or scratched.
NO
Fusing unit
Fusing rollers are scratched or deformed.
YES
Change fusing unit.

5.
NO
Change drum unit.

K-134
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.4.10 Printer system: Smears on back of paper

AA
Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Paper path
YES
Clean.
Transfer roller is dirty.
YES
Fusing unit
Fusing roller is dirty.
YES
Change fusing unit.
14.4.11 Printer system: Uneven image density


Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Imaging unit
The drum unit, developing unit, or the developer is

used to the extent that its life value has been
exceeded.
YES

been reached.
The transfer roller unit is used to the extent that its life
YES
Transfer roller is dirty or deformed.
YES

1.
NO
3
4
14.4.12 Printer system: Gradation reproduction failure

K-135
Change drum unit.

bizhub 423/363/283/223

Step
1
Section
Maximum Density
Adjustment
State Confirmation
Level History 1 (Service
Mode)
Level history data check

results
Check Item
Result
Action
Confirm the following setting is set to [lighter] or

[Darker] side; [Administrator Settings] [Expert
Adjustment] [Maximum Density Adjustment]
YES
Make setting again.
The developing unit or the developer is used to the

extent that its life value has been exceeded.
YES

been reached.
Check TCR data. (specified rang: 4 to 8 %)
NO
Go to next step.
Low TCR
YES
Go to step 6.
High TCR or TCR falling within specified range
YES
Go to step 7.
Image Process
Adjustment TCR Toner
Supply (Service Mode)
Toner is properly supplied when TCR toner supply is

run.
NO
Go to next step.
Image Process
Adjustment Gradation
Adjust (Service Mode)
Execute the Maximum Density Adjustment.

Conv. Value falls within the specified range as
checked through gradation adjust.
Dark: 0 100
Highlight: 0 60
YES
Go to next step.
Transfer roller is dirty or deformed.
YES

8.
NO
Change drum unit.

14.4.13 Printer system: Uneven pitch


Step
Result
Action
The developing unit or the developer is used to the

extent that its life value has been exceeded.
YES

been reached.
Developing unit drive is being transmitted.
NO

mechanism.
Drum and transfer roller drive is being transmitted.
NO

mechanism.
Section
Imaging unit
Check Item
Transport section
Registration roller unit drive is being transmitted.
NO

mechanism.
Fusing Section
Fusing unit drive is being transmitted.
NO

mechanism.
Imaging unit
Ds collar is dirty.
YES
Clean.
PH unit
PH unit is securely installed.
YES
Correct.

7.
NO
Change drum unit.

K-136
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 15. IC PROTECTOR
15. IC PROTECTOR
15.1 Outline
To increase product safety, this MFP has an IC protector (ICP) installed in each board. ICP is a component that protects IC. If the amount of
the current supplied to the electrical parts such as motor exceeds the set level, ICP trips to protect IC from over current.
The following list contains ICP installed in each board, related devices, and symptoms that occur when ICP trips.
15.2 IC protector list

15.2.1 bizhub C220/C280/C360
(1) Printer control board
When ICP trips
ICP No.
ICP6
Symbol
FM2
Target part name
Symptom in each load
Cooling fan motor
Trouble code and

others
C5356
15.2.2 DF-621
(1) DF control board
When ICP trips
ICP No.
Symbol
Target part name
Trouble code and

others
F1
M4
Glass cleaning motor
F2
M2
Document feed motor
ADF paper feed section JAM
F3
DC to DC converter input section 24V

line
Unable to produce DC5V in ADF and MFP

unable to detect ADF
F4
PS3
ADF image reading section JAM
PS4
F5
M1
Document reading motor
ADF image reading section JAM
F6
SD2
Stamp solenoid
Unable to place a stamp
SD1
Document exit roller release solenoid
ADF turnover section JAM
F7
FM1
Cooling fan trouble
C8302
F8
M3
Reading roller release motor
Before reading pressure welding alienation

mechanism trouble
C8101
CL1
Document feed clutch
ADF paper feed section JAM
CL2
Document registration clutch
F9
C8107
15.2.3 PC-109/PC-208
(1) PC Control board
When ICP trips
ICP No.
Symbol
Target part name
Trouble code and

others
ICP1
M31
M41
Tray 3 paper feed motor

Paper feed drive malfunction, paper feed JAM
ICP2
M42
Tray 4 vertical transport motor
ICP3
M32
ICP5
ICP6
M33
M43
DC to DC converter for 5V power supply Unable to be detected

Tray 3 lift-up motor
Lift up mechanism failure
C0206
C0208
15.2.4 PC-409
(1) PC Control board
When ICP trips
ICP No.
Symbol
Target part name
Trouble code and

others
ICP1
M51
Paper feed motor
ICP2
M52
Vertical transport motor
ICP3
M53
Division board position motor
Paper feed drive malfunction, Division board

position motor malfunction
C0213
ICP4
M54
Shift motor
Paper feed drive malfunction, Shift motor

malfunction
C0214
C0215
ICP5
M55
Elevator motor
Paper feed drive malfunction, Elevator motor

malfunction
C0209
C0210
K-137
bizhub 423/363/283/223

When ICP trips
ICP No.
ICP6
Symbol
-
Target part name
DC to DC converter for 5V power supply Unable to be detected
Trouble code and

others
-
15.2.5 JS-505
(1) JS control board
When ICP trips
ICP No.
Symbol
Target part name
Trouble code and

others
F1
FN main power switch
Unable to supply 24V to FN and MFP unable to

detect FN
C1004
F2
DC to DC converter input section 24 V

line
Unable to produce DC5V in FN and MFP

unable to detect FN
C1004
C11A1
F3
CL1
Roller pressure/retraction clutch
Exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction
F4
T1FDTB/
LED
Lower tray paper full detect board/PR
Continuous tray 1 full detection
T2FDTB/
LED
Upper tray paper full detect board/PR
Continuous tray 2 full detection
F6
M2
Shift motor
Shift motor drive failure
C1182
F7
M1
Transport motor
Transport section JAM
15.2.6 FS-527
(1) FS control board
When ICP trips
ICP No.
Symbol
Target part name

No operation (Due to no power supply to CPU,
FS connection not detected)
Trouble code and

others
F1
Between connection with MFP and 24V

power line
F3
24V to 5V DC to DC converter
F4
5V to 3.3V DC to DC converter
F5
M1
Paper passage motor/1
JAM between MFP and the paper receiving

section
F6
M3
JAM between RU and the intermediate section
F7
M4
Conveyance motor
JAM between the intermediate and lower path

sections
F8
M5
Exit motor
JAM or multiple sheets/sets ejection JAM

between the accommodation and exit sections.
F9
M11
Stapler movement motor
Stapler movement drive failure
C11B0
F10
M13
Alignment plate motor
Alignment plate motor drive malfunction
C1190
F11
M14
Leading edge stopper motor
C1194
F12
SD1
Accommodation paddle solenoid
Accommodation section JAM
F13
M16
Tray 2 shift motor
Shift motor drive failure
C1182
F14
M2
Duplex path switching motor
Duplex path switching motor drive malfunction

(Paper may be fed in the mode where this
motor does not operate)
C11E0
F15
M6
Upper lower path switching motor
Upper lower path switching motor drive

malfunction (Paper may be fed when no
finishing options are selected.)
C11E1
F16
M8
Tray 1 path switching motor
Tray 1 path switching motor drive malfunction

(Paper may be fed when it is not ejected to the
tray 1.)
C11E2
F17
M17
Tray 3 exit roller retraction motor
Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction failure

(Only when JS is installed)
C11A7
F18
M9
Exit roller retraction motor
Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction failure
C11A1
F19
M10
Accommodation roller retraction motor
Accommodation roller pressure/ retraction

failure
C11A2
F20
M100
Punch motor/1
Punch motor drive malfunction (Only during the

initial operation or the punch operation in punch
mode)
C11C0
F21
M18
Stapler motor
Staple drive failure (Paper may be fed when

stapling is not selected)
C11B2
F22
M15
Elevate motor
C1183
K-138
bizhub 423/363/283/223

When ICP trips
ICP No.
F23
Symbol
Target part name
M12
Accommodation paddle motor
F25
M15
Elevate motor
C1183
F26
PS200
Punch motor drive malfunction
C11C0
PS300
PS100
Punch home sensor/1
Stapler home sensor

Stapler self-priming sensor
Staple drive failure (Likely to staple repeatedly

depending on conditions)
C11B2
Staple empty sensor
F27
F29
F30
Accommodation section JAM (Depending on

conditions, paper may be ejected when no
finishing options are selected.)
Trouble code and

others
JAM
PS1
PS2
PS10
Registration sensor
PS30
PS9
Lower path sensor
PS16
Tray 2 paper detection sensor
JAM
15.2.7 SD-509
(1) SD drive board
When ICP trips
ICP No.
F1
Symbol
Target part name
PS43
PS44
F2
F3

Saddle section JAM
Trouble code and

others
-
No operation (Due to no power supply to CPU,

SD connection is not detected)
M24
Center staple alignment motor/F
Center-staple front adjust drive motor

malfunction
C1114
F4
M23
Center staple alignment motor/R
Center-staple rear adjust drive motor

malfunction
C1150
F5
M20
Center-staple lead edge stopper motor

malfunction
C1113
F7
M26
Center fold plate motor
Center-staple knife drive motor malfunction
C1115
F8
Saddle stapler
Saddle stapler drive failure
C11B5
F9
SD3
Leading edge grip solenoid
Misalignment, misalignment of sheets in a copy

set, and misaligned saddle stitch and fold
positions
F10
Stapler home sensor
C11B5
Staple empty sensor 1
Center-stapler drive failure or staple empty

indication
Staple empty sensor 2
F11
M25
C1116
F12
M25
C1116
F13
M21
Upper paddle motor
Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction

(trailing edge)
C1156
F14
M22
Lower paddle motor
Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction

(Leading edge)
C1158
15.2.8 FS-529
(1) FS control board
When ICP trips
ICP No.
Symbol
Target part name
Trouble code and

others
R1
Not functioning
CP1
24V to 3.3V DC to DC converter
Not functioning
PS1
PS2
Paper surface detect sensor/1
PS3
PS4
PS6
K-139
bizhub 423/363/283/223

When ICP trips
ICP No.
CP2
Symbol
Target part name
Trouble code and

others
PS7
Paper empty sensor
PS8
Alignment plate home sensor/F
PS9
Alignment plate home sensor/R
PS10
PS11
Stapler home sensor
PS12
PS13
PS14
Staple home position sensor
Staple self prime sensor
Staple empty sensor
PS1
Not functioning
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS6
PS7
Paper empty sensor
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
Stapler home sensor
PS12
PS13
PS14
CP3
M1
Pick up roller position motor
C11A1
CP10
M1
Pick up roller position motor
C11A1
CP4
M3
Alignment motor/F
Alignment plate F drive malfunction
C1191
CP5
M2
Tray up/down motor
C1183
CP6
M4
Alignment motor/R
Alignment plate R drive malfunction
C1190
CP7
SD3
Alignment stopper solenoid
C1194
CP12
SD2
Paddle solenoid
Paper exit failure, JAM
CP15
SD1
Paper surface detect solenoid
F2
SW1
Front door switch
There is an open component. appears.
C1183
-
CP8
M5
Conveyance motor/1
Conveyance JAM
CP9
M6
Conveyance motor/2
Conveyance JAM
CP17
M7
Stapler movement drive malfunction
C11B0
CP19
SD5
Belt retract solenoid
Belt movement malfunction
C1181
C1301
FM1
Fan motor
Fan motor drive malfunction
CP20
SD4
Flapper solenoid
JAM upon duplex printing
F1
M8
Stapler motor
Staple drive malfunction
K-140
C11B2
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423
1.1.1 Scanner section
For fluorescent lamp
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Angle sensor (PS202)
[2]
Original size detection sensor/2 (PS205)
[3]
CCD board (CCDB)
[4]
Original cover switch (RS201)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
L-1

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
For LED lamp
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
CCD board (CCDB)
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
L-2

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.1.2 Front side

(1) Board/switch/sensor/others
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
USB board (USBB)
[2]
Fax speaker (SP1)
[3]
Front door sensor (PS5)
[4]
Total counter (CNT)
[5]
L-3

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.1.3 Back side

(1) Load/sensor/switch
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
PC motor (M2)
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
L-4

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Board
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
SO DIMM (DIMM)
[2]
NVRAM board (NRB)
[3]
[4]
[5]
MFP board (MFPB)
[6]
[7]
High voltage unit (HV1)
[8]
L-5

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.1.4 Left side
[2]
[1]
[1]
PH unit
[2]
1.1.5 Right side
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
L-6

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Right lower door switch (SW2)
[5]
Service port cover sensor (PS6)
1.1.6 Duplex/Switchback/Fusing section
[1]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Duplex unit door sensor (PS91)
[6]
L-7

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.1.7 Manual bypass tray
[9]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Manual paper empty sensor (PS82)
[5]
Manual multi FD sensor /1 (PS84)
[6]
[7]
[8]
Manual FD size sensor (VR81)
[9]
Manual paper detection sensor (PS81)
L-8

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.1.8 Tray 1
[11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[10]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Tray 1 paper empty sensor (PS15)
[4]
Tray 1 paper feed sensor (PS11) *
[5]
[6]
Tray 1 near empty sensor (PS14)
[7]
Tray 1 paper CD size detect sensor/2 (PS17)
[8]
[9]
Tray 1 paper FD sensor board (PSDB11)
[10]
Tray 1 detection sensor (PS13)
[11]
*: Mounted on bizhub 423 only
L-9

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.1.9 Tray 2
[1]
[13]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[11]
[6]
[7]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28) *1
[4]
[5]
Tray 2 paper feed sensor (PS21) *2
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
*1: Reflector type only for bizhub 423

*2: Mounted on bizhub 423 only
L-10

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.2 DF-621/SP-501
1.2.1 Load
[8]
[9]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Stamp solenoid (SD2) *
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[2]
*: Option
1.2.2 Sensor/board
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
L-11

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
Document set sensor (PS1)
[4]
Mixed Original sensor/3 (PS11)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Upper door sensor (PS14)
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
1.3 PC-109/PC-208 (Option)

1.3.1 Tray 3
[13]
[1]
[12]
[2]
[11]
[4]
[3]
[10]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
Right lower door sensor (PS39)
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Tray 3 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS38)
[9]
[10]
Tray 3 paper FD sensor board (PSDTB31)
[11]
[12]
[13]
L-12

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.3.2 Tray 4
[12]
[11]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Tray 4 empty sensor (PS44)
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Tray 4 paper FD sensor board (PSDTB41)
[10]
[11]
[12]
L-13

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.3.3 Board/switch/others
[1]
[1]
1.4 PC-409 (Option)

1.4.1 Load
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Shift motor (M54)
[4]
L-14

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[5]
[6]
1.4.2 Sensor
[14]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[13]
[4]
[12]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Shift tray empty sensor (PS59)
[11]
[12]
[13]
Tray detection sensor (PS56)
[14]
L-15

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.4.3 Board/switch/others
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Main tray paper empty board (MTPEB)
[2]
[3]
Manual down control board (MDCB)
[4]
[5]
1.5 JS-505 (Option)

[13]
[14] [15]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Pressure/retraction home sensor (PS5)
[4]
Shift motor (M2)
[5]
[6]
[7]
Upper tray paper full detect board/LED (T2FDTB/LED)
[8]
Lower tray paper full detect board/LED (T1FDTB/LED)
[9]
Lower tray paper full detect board/PR (T1FDTB/PR)
[10]
[11]
Transport Motor (M1)
[12]
Upper tray paper full detect board/PR (T2FDTB/PR)
[13]
Roller pressure/retraction clutch (CL1)
[14]
L-16

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[15]
1.6 JS-603 (Option)
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
Tray3 full sensor (PS36)
[2]
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)
1.7 FS-527 (Option)

[14]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[13]
[3]
[12]
[5]
[11]
[6]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
L-17

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Exit motor (M5)
[13]
[14]
Elevate motor (M15)
[23]
[24]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[22]
[4]
[5]
[21]
[6]
[20]
[7]
[19]
[8]
[18]
[16]
[17]
[9]
[15]
[10]
[14]
[11]
[13]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
lower path sensor (PS9)
[5]
Punch hole full sensor (PS30)
[6]
[7]
Tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7)
[8]
Accommodation roller pressure sensor (PS13)
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Front door switch (SW1)
[13]
Tray2 shift home sensor (PS25)
[14]
Tray2 lower position sensor (PS21)
[15]
Tray2 lower position switch (SW3)
[16]
Tray2 upper position sensor (PS24)
[17]
Tray2 upper position switch (SW2)
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
Tray2 paper detection sensor (PS16)
[23]
[24]
Tray1 path sensor (PS6)
L-18

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Horizontal conveyance cover sensor (PS5)
[4]
[5]
[6]
1.8 FS-529 (Option)
[13]
[1]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[10]
[9]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Fan motor (FM1)
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Paper surface detect solenoid (SD1)
[9]
Alignment stopper solenoid (SD3)
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
L-19

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[15]
[2]
[14]
[3]
[13]
[4]
[12]
[7]
[11]
[6]
[5]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
Tray up/down operation sensor (PS4)
[14]
[15]
1.9 PK-517 (Option)
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Punch cam position sensor (PS200)
[2]
[3]
Punch pulse sensor/1 (PS300)
[4]
L-20

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.10 SD-509 (Option)
[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
L-21

DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Booklet tray full sensor (PS50)
[7]
[8]
Booklet tray near full sensor (PS48)
[9]
L-22
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR

LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1 BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2.1.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423
(1) Printer control board (PRCB)
[26]
[25]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[24]
[23]
[8]
[22]
[21]
[9]
[20]
[11]
[19]
[18]
[10]
[16]
[12]
[14]
[17]
[15]
[13]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
CN19
5 pin
[2]
CN20
9 pin
[3]
CN21
4 pin
[4]
CN22
6 pin
[5]
CN23
17 pin
[6]
CN25
3 pin
[7]
CN24
5 pin
[8]
CN1
9 pin
[9]
CN2
10 pin
[10]
CN4
12 pin
[11]
CN3
11 pin
[12]
CN5
16 pin
[13]
CN6
15 pin
[14]
CN7
12 pin
[15]
CN10
18 pin
[16]
CN9
7 pin
[17]
CN12
20 pin
[18]
CN11
19 pin
[19]
CN17
8 pin
[20]
CN28
26 pin
[21]
CN13
11 pin
[22]
CN16
9 pin
[23]
CN14
12 pin
[24]
CN15
16 pin
[25]
CN8
9 pin
[26]
CN18
7 pin
L-23

LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) MFP board (MFPB)
[22]
[3]
[21]
[1]
[20]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[19]
[18]
[2]
[8]
[17]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[16]
[12]
[13]
[15]
[14]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
DIMM2
200 pin
[2]
DIMM1
200 pin
[3]
PJ14
27 pin
[4]
PJ33
4 pin
[5]
PJ35
4 pin
[6]
PJ34
15 pin
[7]
PJ36
15 pin
[8]
PJ12
4 pin
[9]
PJ11
7 pin
[10]
PJ03
26 pin
[11]
PJ04
8 pin
[12]
PJ29
4 pin*
[13]
PJ02
6 pin
[14]
PJ26
4 pin
[15]
PJ01
15 pin
[16]
PJ15
24 pin
[17]
PJ19
8 pin
[18]
PJ05
9 pin
[19]
PJ16
4 pin
[20]
PJ07
14 pin
[21]
PJ30
5 pin
[22]
PJ28
3 pin
*: The [PJ29] is used only in the Europe area. However, it is limited to the machine by which it was equipped with the main power switch
(A2WUM600**) corresponding to AUTO POWER OFF SETTING.
L-24

LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for fluorescent lamp)

[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[8]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
PJ12
6 pin
[2]
PJ7
3 pin
[3]
PJ8
3 pin
[4]
PJ9
9 pin
[5]
PJ1
10 pin
[6]
PJ2
28 pin
[7]
PJ11
5 pin
[8]
PJ3
11 pin
[9]
PJ5
6 pin
[10]
PJ6
4 pin
(4) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) (for LED lamp)
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[3]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[4]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
PJ12
6 pin
[2]
PJ7
3 pin
[3]
PJ8
3 pin
[4]
PJ9
9 pin
[5]
PJ4
4 pin
[6]
PJ1
10 pin
[7]
PJ2
28 pin
[8]
PJ11
5 pin
[9]
PJ3
11 pin
[10]
PJ5
6 pin
[11]
PJ6
4 pin
(5) LED exposure drive board (LEDEDB) (for LED lamp)
[2]
[1]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
CN1
4 pin
[2]
CN2
6 pin
L-25

LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.1.2 DF control board (DFCB)

[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[19]
[7]
[18]
[2]
[17]
[8]
[16]
[9]
[14]
[15]
[12]
[10]
[11]
[13]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
J99
9 pin
[2]
J19
4 pin
[3]
J13
3 pin
[4]
J6
4 pin
[5]
J16
2 pin
[6]
J17
2 pin
[7]
J3
4 pin
[8]
J1
4 pin
[9]
J17
2 pin
[10]
J15
2 pin
[11]
J12
2 pin
[12]
J7
9 pin
[13]
J2
10 pin
[14]
J11
5 pin
[15]
J10
13 pin
[16]
J9
3 pin
[17]
J8
3 pin
[18]
J5
9 pin
[19]
J4
2 pin
2.1.3 PC Control board (PCCB)

(1) PC-109/PC-208
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
CN2
2 pin
[2]
CN10
10 pin
[3]
CN11
6 pin
[4]
CN9
9 pin
[5]
CN7
7 pin
[6]
CN8
13 pin
[7]
CN6
15 pin
[8]
CN5
8 pin
[9]
CN4
5 pin
[10]
CN3
14 pin
L-26

LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No.
CN No.
Pin
[11]
CN1
9 pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
(2) PC-409
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
PJ2
2 pin
[2]
PJ1
12 pin
[3]
PJ5
15 pin
[4]
PJ6
8 pin
[5]
PJ7
5 pin
[6]
PJ3
11 pin
[7]
PJ4
13 pin

(1) FS-527
[25]
[4]
[27]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[26]
[5]
[6]
[24]
[23]
[7]
[22]
[8]
[21]
[9]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[10]
[17]
[15]
[16]
[13]
[14]
[11]
[12]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
PJ8
12 pin
[2]
PJ29
3 pin
L-27

LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[3]
PJ9
8 pin
[4]
PJ30
6 pin
[5]
PJ10
5 pin
[6]
PJ11
13 pin
[7]
PJ12
8 pin
[8]
PJ13
9 pin
[9]
PJ14
14 pin
[10]
PJ16
16 pin
[11]
PJ17
15 pin
[12]
PJ19
17 pin
[13]
PJ20
5 pin
[14]
PJ21
10 pin
[15]
PJ22
10 pin
[16]
PJ23
7 pin
[17]
PJ24
6 pin
[18]
PJ25
5 pin
[19]
PJ1
4 pin
[20]
PJ2
3 pin
[21]
PJ3
2 pin
[22]
PJ4
11 pin
[23]
PJ5
7 pin
[24]
PJ27
3 pin
[25]
PJ6
4 pin
[26]
PJ28
4 pin
[27]
PJ7
12 pin
(2) FS-529
[19]
[18]
[1]
[20]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[17]
[16]
[7]
[8]
[14]
[15]
[11]
[12]
[9]
[10]
[13]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
CN14
11 pin
[2]
CN11
6 pin
[3]
CN12
2 pin
[4]
CN13
2 pin
[5]
CN4
7 pin
[6]
CN8
9 pin
[7]
CN1
3 pin
[8]
CN2
6 pin
[9]
CN5
9 pin
[10]
CN7
12 pin
[11]
CN9
7 pin
[12]
CN10
8 pin
[13]
CN6
10 pin
[14]
CN3
3 pin
[15]
CN18
4 pin
[16]
CN19
5 pin
[17]
CN16
2 pin
[18]
CN17
12 pin
[19]
CN20
4 pin
[20]
CN15
3 pin
L-28

LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.1.5 SD drive board (SDDB)

(1) SD-509
[1]
[12]
[2]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
No.
CN No.
Pin
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
PJ11
10 pin
[2]
PJ9
9 pin
[3]
PJ10
11 pin
[4]
PJ13
9 pin
[5]
PJ1
4 pin
[6]
PJ2
3 pin
[7]
PJ3
10 pin
[8]
PJ4
11 pin
[9]
PJ5
10 pin
[10]
PJ6
3 pin
[11]
PJ7
8 pin
[12]
PJ8
4 pin
L-29

LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.2 RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.2.1 bizhub 223/283/363/423
[1]
[17]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[7]
[12]
[11]
[8]
[10]
[9]
No.
CN No.
Pin
Location
No.
CN No.
Pin
Location
[1]
CN33
4 pin
D-25
[2]
CN604
2 pin
T-10
[3]
CN606
5 pin
S-11
[4]
CN602
2 pin
T-9
[5]
CN616
4 pin
T-10
[6]
CN28
4 pin
E-13
[7]
CN39
4 pin
E-23
[8]
CN6
11 pin
E-5
[9]
CN1
11 pin
E-2
[10]
CN7
2 pin
D-4
E-25
[11]
CN2
2 pin
E-1
[12]
CN35
2 pin
[13]
CN95
3 pin
E-7
[14]
CN13
4 pin
E-7
[15]
CN92
3 pin
K-23
[16]
CN93
6 pin
K-23
[17]
CN38
2 pin
E-24
L-30

LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[16]
[1]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[10]
[11]
[8]
[9]
No.
CN No.
Pin
Location
No.
CN No.
Pin
[1]
CN42
3 pin
D-14
[2]
CN86
7 pin
E-14
[3]
CN43
3 pin
E-9
[4]
CN61
4 pin
V-17
[5]
CN46
16 pin
E-21 to 22
[6]
CN54
7 pin
E-18
[7]
CN17
12 pin
E-11
[8]
CN14
2 pin
E-10
[9]
CN22
6 pin
E-12
[10]
CN15
2 pin
E-10
[11]
CN57
5 pin
E-17
[12]
CN53
2 pin
D-18
[13]
CN44
3 pin
D-22
[14]
CN56
2 pin
E-18
[15]
CN88
4 pin
D-21
[16]
CN59
5 pin
E-18
L-31
Location
bizhub 423/363/283/223
M TIMING CHART > 1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
M TIMING CHART
1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
1.1 Timing chart when the main power switch is turned ON

PC motor (M2)
Polygon motor (M5)

Charge corona
Developing bias
Developing bias
Erase lamp (LA)
Transfer
Image write start signal
Tray 1 paper feed clutch(CL11)
1.2 Timing chart in monochrome mode

1.2.1 Operating conditions
Paper size
A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Paper source
Tray1
M-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
M TIMING CHART > 1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
1.2.2 Timing chart

PC motor (M2)
Polygon motor (M5)

Charge corona
Developing bias
Developing bias
Erase lamp (LA)
Transfer
Print
Separation
Print

Image write start signal
Tray 1 paper feed clutch(CL11)
M-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
M TIMING CHART > 2. DF-621
2. DF-621
2.1 1-sided mode
Paper size
A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Zoom ratio
Full size
Sheet of original
2 originals
2.1.2 Timing chart

(PS3)
(CL2)
(M3) ST/SP
(M3) Brake
Document exit roller release
solenoid (SD1)
2.2 2-sided mode

Paper size
A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Zoom ratio
Full size
Sheet of original
2 originals
M-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
M TIMING CHART > 2. DF-621
2.2.2 Timing chart

(PS3)
(CL2)
(M3) ST/SP
(M3) Brake
solenoid (SD1)
M-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
M TIMING CHART > 3. JS-603
3. JS-603
3.1 Tray3 paper exit mode
Paper size
A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Sheet of original
2 originals
Type of original
1-side
3.1.2 Timing chart
Main body paper

exit signal
Paper passage
sensor/1 (PS1)
Paper passage
motor/1 (M1)
Speed Up
Speed Up
Speed Down
Speed Up
Speed Down
Speed Up
Speed Down
Release
Tray3 exit roller

retraction motor (M17)
Tray3 exit roller
retraction sensor (PS35)
M-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
M TIMING CHART > 4. FS-527/SD-509/PK-517
4. FS-527/SD-509/PK-517
4.1 Shift mode
Paper size
A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Sheet of original
2 originals
Type of original
1-side
4.1.2 Timing chart
Main body paper exit signal

Speed
Down
Speed
Up
Stop
Start

Stop
Start
Start
Exit motor (M5)

Elevate motor (M15)
Stop
Start
Stop
Down
Rise
Rise
Down
Shift
Shift
4.2 2 flat stitching staples mode

Paper size
A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Sheet of original
2 originals
Type of original
1-side
M-6
Down
Rise
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.2.2 Timing chart

Tray2 paper detection
sensor (PS16)
Speed
Up
Loop
Loop
Loop
Loop
Start
Align Start
Stop
Start
Switch Back Stop
Exit motor (M5)
Start
Back
Back
Stop
Start
Stop
Stop
Accommodation roller
Press
Press
Release
FD Align
Release
FD Align
FD Align
Stop
CD Align
CD Align
Stop
CD Align
Home Move
Second Staple
Point Move
Staple Point Move
Elevate motor (M15)
4.3 Center staples mode

Paper size
A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Sheet of original
2 originals
Type of original
1-side
M-7
Second Staple
Point Move
Home Move
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.3.2 Timing chart

Tray2 paper detection sensor (PS16)
Saddle staple motor
Saddle staple home sensor
4.4 Punch mode

Paper size
A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Sheet of original
2 originals
Type of original
1-side
M-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.4.2 Timing chart
Main body paper

exit signal
Speed Up
Speed Up
Loop
Loop

Exit motor (M5)
M-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
M TIMING CHART > 5. FS-529
5. FS-529
5.1 Shift mode
Paper size
A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Offset mode
Sort (shift)
Sheet of original
2 originals
Type of original
1-side
5.1.2 Timing chart

480 mm/s
Conveyance
motor/1 (M5)
172 mm/s
450mm/s
Conveyance
motor/2 (M6)
180mm/s
172mm/s
262
Up
degree/s
Pick up roller
position motor (M1)
262
Down degree/s
Alignment motor/F
(M3)
Alignment motor/R
(M4)
Inside
200mm/s
Outside 200mm/s
Inside
200mm/s
Outside 200mm/s

Inside
Stapler movement
motor (M7)
Outside
Stapler motor (M8)
5.2 1 flat stitching staple mode

Paper size
A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Offset mode
Sort (shift)
Sheet of original
2 originals
Type of original
1-side
M-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.2.2 Timing chart

480 mm/s
Conveyance
motor/1 (M5)
172 mm/s
450mm/s
Conveyance
motor/2 (M6)
180mm/s
172mm/s
Up
Pick up roller
position motor (M1)
Down
Alignment motor/F
(M3)
Alignment motor/R
(M4)
Inside
262
degree/s
262
degree/s
200mm/s
Outside 200mm/s
Inside
200mm/s
Outside 200mm/s

Inside
Stapler movement
motor (M7)
Outside
Stapler motor (M8)
5.3 2 flat stitching staples mode

Paper size
A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Offset mode
Sort (shift)
Sheet of original
2 originals
Type of original
1-side
M-11
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.3.2 Timing chart

480 mm/s
Conveyance
motor/1 (M5)
172 mm/s
450mm/s
Conveyance
motor/2 (M6)
180mm/s
172mm/s
Pick up roller
position motor (M1)
Alignment motor/F
(M3)
Alignment motor/R
(M4)
Up
262
degree/s
262
Down degree/s
Inside
200mm/s
Outside 200mm/s
Inside
200mm/s
Outside 200mm/s

Inside
Stapler movement
motor (M7)
Outside
Stapler motor (M8)
M-12
G N L
2 1
2 1
CN98-1
CN98-2
14 16-R
1 2 3
CN1
SW1
1 2
2 1
CN5AC-3
CN5AC-1
TUBE
TUBE
TUBE
8
26-J
IC heater kit *6
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
SW1
1 2 3
CN1
22-S
To PJ02
Tray 1 paper feed clutch
3 2 1
28-E
L N G
1 2
1 2
120/127V
3
1 2 3 4
CN2
CN4
220-240V
2
27-E
TUBE
CN5
1 2 3
CN2
CN2-8
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
CN7
4 3 2 1
6
PJ1
10
6-N
1 2
PJ1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ9
PJ12
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
(W)
(W)
Toner supply motor
Toner bottle motor
Power supply cooling fan motor
(W)
(W)
(W)
Image transfer
Developing bias
Photo conductor
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
To PJ14
11 19-S
PJ2
REYB/SCAN
Scanner relay board
10
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
Without
With EK-604/605
EK-604/605
11
PJ8
PJ11
PJ11
1 2 3 4 5
13 24-R
12
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
13
CN1
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
PJ7
PJ4
PJ6
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
PJ1
<A>
<B>
PJ2
CCDB
CCD board
To PJ01
12 17-S
CN18
14
PRCB
Printer control board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC5V
TCRSB ON
GND
IU_DETECT
NC
TCRSB
TCR sensor board
Switchback motor
CN42
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
CN24
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
CN86
M91
FM3
FM3
LVDS_CLK(-)
GND
LVDS_E(-)
LVDS_D(-)
LVDS_C(-)
LVDS_B(-)
LVDS_A(-)
GND
SI(-)
SO(-)
EN(-)
SCLK(-)
GND
1 2 3 4
Fusing unit cooling fan motor
15
CN4
14
1-T
3-O
16
Europe *7
PJ04
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PJ29
2 1
1 2
1 2 3 4
CN3
Transport motor
17
1 2 3
PS6
FM5
18
UN
Control panel
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ14
9-X
3 2 1
Temperature/humidity sensor
To PJ2
PJ01
1
50
DIMM1
UK-203
(Option)
NRB
NVRAM board
50
PJ13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
23-S
CN28
CN23
20
200
HD-516
(Option)
1 2 3 4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DIMM0
200
3-N
88
21
4 3 2 1
AU-102/201
(Option)
PJ19
1 2 3 4
2-J
PJ02
1 2 3 4 5 6
<B>
To PH unit
CN5
22
1 2 3 4
FK-508
(Option)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
23
CN39
1 2 3 4
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
LEDB1
Tray 1 LED board
24
FK-508
(Option)
25
26
*6 JAPAN : OPTION
EXCEPT JAPAN : NOT USE
*7 Europe only. However, it is limited to the machine

by which it was equipped with the main power switch
(A2WUM600**) corresponding to "AUTO POWER
OFF SETTING."
CW/CCW : CLOCK WISE / COUNTER CLOCK WISE
NC
CN25
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
4-T
27
27
Except 100/110V 100/110V
CN4AC
CN2-3
CN2-2
CN2-1
Fusing unit
CC/CV : 1/2 CURRENT / VOLTAGE SWITCHING
*5 JAPAN : NOT USE

EXCEPT JAPAN : OPTION
*3
*4
NC
PJ16
2-V
TXD : TRANSMISSION DATA
NC
PJ09
PJ01
1 2 3 4 5
NC
PJ02
1 2 3
CN16
RXD : RECEPTION DATA
*1
NC
NC
*2
PJ07
PJ05
Key counter(Option)
CN30
1
2
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
L
NC
N
EXIT SENSOR ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC24V
GND
TH SIDE ON
GND
TH CENTER ON
DC24V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
USBB
USB board
Without EK-604/605
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
CN7
CN21
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
PJ30
Erase lamp
KCT
PJ30
NC
PJ02
PJ01
2 1
1 2
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
CN35
CN33
CN33
DC24V
KCT ON
SET
GND
LA
USBB
USB board
1 2
CN6-3
CN6-6
DC3.3V
3RD_P/E_LED
DC3.3V
4TH_P/E_LED
FLM
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
RTS
RXD *1
TXD *2
CLK
CN5AC
PC-109/208/409
(Option)
26
1 2 3 4 5
6-N
CN84
DC24V
GND
CN85
DC3.3V
3RD_P/E_LED
DC3.3V
4TH_P/E_LED
FLM
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
RTS
RXD *1
TXD *2
CLK
25
5 4 3 2 1
EK-604/605(Option)
1 2 3 4 5
1 2
CNT
1 2 3
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13 11-T
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN15
Total counter
Front door sensor
PS5
With EK-604/605
2 1
1 2
Toner near empty switch
1 2 3
PS4
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN22
1 2
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
LEDB1
DC3.3V
CN38
RS1
PJ36
LEDB2
DC3.3V
CN6-5
CN83B
CN40
PJ35
20-J
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
1 2 3
CN6-2
1 2
To CN28
6-N
Cooling fan motor
CN92
CN93
TXD *2
GND
RXD *1
GND
CTS
RTS
LEDB2
DC3.3V
LEDB1
DC3.3V
RS1 ON
GND
PS4 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS5 ON
GND
DC3.3V
CNT ON
DC24V
LA ON
DC24V
FS-527/529
(Option)
24
PJ34
1 2 3
CN41
3 2 1
LEDB2
Tray 2 LED board
FM2
PJ03
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
M92
Duplex transport motor
CN44
CN83L
DC24V
NC
GND
GND
CN83A
TXD *2
GND
RXD *1
GND
CTS
RTS
CN606
23
PJ33
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
4 3 2 1
PS92
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
<A>
PJ21
Duplex unit door sensor
CN88
PS93
MFPB
MFP board
SC-507
(Option)
1 2 3
PS91
1 2 3 4
PJ12
PC thermistor
TEM/
HUM
DIMM
SO DIMM
2 1
1 2
TH1
PJ11
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
PS1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
1 2
CL1
To PJ03
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2
2 1
Tray 2 vertical transport clutch
Registration clutch
Registration sensor
21
CN1
CL22
CN56
CN59
CN53
CN46
20
CN2
19
1 2 3
11
PS28
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2
2 1
PC thermistor
TEM/
HUM
PJ15
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
TH1
PJ28
CN23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
2 1
1 2 3
PS1
PJ26
PJ01
CL1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
To PJ2
12 14-O
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
2 1
1 2
CL22
CN57
CN58
CN54
19
GND
K_HSYNC
GND
ENG_DATA
CTL_DATA
GND
ENG_BUSY
CTL_BUSY
IR_P_OFF
PD
NC
GND
TOD
GND
MOTION_EN
MC_P_OFF
DC5V
TXD *2
RXD *1
SET
FEED
SET_KEY_CNT
KEY_COUNT
TOTAL_CNT
SET_T_CNT
GND
bizhub 363/283/223
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
PS28
Registration clutch
Registration sensor
18
DC3.3V
GND
DC5V
GND
DC12V
GND
DC24V
DC24V
GND
GND
CN5-1
CN5-2
CN5-3
CN5-4
CN5-5
CN5-6
CN5-7
SW2-NO
CN5-9
CN5-10
PS91 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS93 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS92 ON
GND
DC3.3V
A
A
M92
B
B
LOCK
REM
GND
FM2
17
CN56
CN59
CN53
HEATER_RY
IR_P_OFF
MC_P_OFF
DC24V
WU_H_REM
SIDE_H_REM
CENTER_H_REM
ZERO_CROSS
DC24V
CN7-9
CN7-8
CN7-7
CN7-6
CN7-5
CN7-4
CN7-3
CN7-2
CN7-1
bizhub 423
CN57
CN58
CN54
PC motor
M1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M2
M2
M1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN98
M91
DC5V
Reset+
ResetGND
LVDS_CLK[-]
GND
LVDS_E[-]
LVDS_D[-]
LVDS_C[-]
LVDS_B[-]
LVDS_A[-]
GND
SI[-]
SO[-]
EN[-]
SCLK[-]
GND
LVDS_CLK[+]
GND
LVDS_E[+]
LVDS_D[+]
LVDS_C[+]
LVDS_B[+]
LVDS_A[+]
GND
SI[+]
SO[+]
EN[+]
SCLK[+]
GND
GND
MONITOR_OUT[+]
MONITOR_OUT[-]
GND
FD1_V0
FD2_V0
16
FM5
VBUS3
D3D3+
GND
15
PWM
LOCK
DC12V
GND
GND
MONITOR
WAKE_FAXMFP
WAKE_FAXSUBCPU
WAKE_FAXRING
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
GND
SET_T_CNT
TOTAL_CNT
KEY_COUNT
SET_KEY_CNT
FEED
SET
RXD *1
TXD *2
DC5V
MC_P_OFF
MOTION_EN
GND
TOD
NC
DOOR_OPEN
PD
IR_P_OFF
CTL_BUSY
ENG_BUSY
NC
CTL_DATA
ENG_DATA
GND
K_HSYNC
GND
4 3 2 1
DC5V
GND
DC12V
GND
LVDS_CLK(+)
GND
LVDS_E(+)
LVDS_D(+)
LVDS_C(+)
LVDS_B(+)
LVDS_A(+)
GND
SI(+)
SO(+)
EN(+)
SCLK(+)
GND
14
PS6 ON
GND
DC3.3V
GND
RX_P
RX_N
GND
TX_N
TX_P
GND
GND
D2+
D2VBUS2
VBUS4
D4D4+
GND
PJ11-1
PJ11-2
PJ11-3
PJ11-4
VBUS0
D0D0+
GND
GND
CN29
CN2
FL
CN28
DC5V
GND
DC12V
GND
POWER_MONITOR
GND
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC12V
LCDIN0(+)
LCDIN0(-)
GND
TXD_PANEL(+) *2
TXD_PANEL(-) *2
GND
BSYM(+)
BSYM(-)
PD
PANEL_UTY
SUB_SW
RXD_PANEL(+) *1
RXD_PANEL(-) *1
GND
BSYO(+)
BSYO(-)
NC
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
GND
DC12V
DC12V
NC
DC5V
GND
GND
VBUS1
D1D1+
GND
GND
MONITOR
WAKE_FAXMFP
WAKE_FAXSUBCPU
WAKE_FAXRING
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
VBUS0
D0D0+
GND
GND
13
CN61
PJ7
1 2 3
3 2 1
CN1
CN2
1 2
FL
Exposure
lamp
6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
LED lamp
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS201
CN10
CN9
CN1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
VR81
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Manual FD size sensor
PS81
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MCMB
1 2
2 1
Manual pick-up solenoid
3 2 1
Exposure lamp
PS82
PJ3
2 1
1 2
RS201
1 2
2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
PJ5
1 2
2 1
SP1
1 2 3
PS14
1 2 3
3 2 1
PS86
PS85
1 2 3
Paper separator
Paper separator
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
3 2 1
PS202
(W)
CN17
CN22
INVB
Inverter board
Manual paper feed clutch
PS84
DC24V
CL81 ON
DC24V
SD81 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS83 ON
3 2 1
DC3.3V
GND
PS84 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS85 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS86 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS82 ON
DC3.3V
PS81 ON
GND
GND
VR81 ON
DC3.3V
PS83
DC5V
TCRSB ON
GND
IU_DETECT
NC
SD81
A
A
B
B
LOCK
GND
REM
12
GND
LOCK
CLK
CW/CCW *3
REM
GND
GND
DC24V
Toner suction fan motor
CL81
CN14
CN15
GND
LOCK
CLK
GND
REM
GND
GND
DC24V
11
1 2 3 4 5
(R)
(R)
CN43
FM4
Tray 1 paper CD size

detect sensor/2
Fax speaker
Original cover switch
Machine condition monitor board
DC3.3V
PS28 ON
GND
NC
CL22 ON
DC24V
CL1 ON
DC24V
PS1 ON
GND
DC3.3V
GND
TH1 ON
DC3.3V
HUMI ON
GND
TEMP ON
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
(R)
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
M201
1 2 3
PS204
PJ1
1 2 3 4 5
CN12
CN6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN1
T_I_MON
T_V_MON
D_PWM
T_CC/CV *4
T_PWM
BAC_CLK
BAC_REM
BDC_PWM
G_PWM
C/F_REM
GND
DC24V
HV1
High voltage unit
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PS205
1 2 3
PS17
1 2 3
PS13
PSDB11
PS16
1 2
M11
1 2 3
3 2 1
T_I_MON
T_V_MON
D_PWM
T_CC/CV *4
T_PWM
BAC_CLK
BAC_REM
BDC_PWM
G_PWM
C/F_REM
GND
DC24V
GND
REM
LOCK
363/
283/
223
FM4
bizhub
NC
GND
M11
DC24V
PS16 ON
GND
DC3.3V
GND
SIZE4
PSDB11
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
PS13 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS17 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS14 ON
GND
DC3.3V
423
GND
SIZE4
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
bizhub
(W)
PSDB11
Angle sensor

detect sensor/1
FM1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3
PS24
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN3
Except Japan
CN8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
2 1
M3
B
B
A
A
GND
DC24V
GND
REM
LOCK
M4
M3
4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN13
M4
FM1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7-X
CN3
23-J
25-J
10
PJ1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN6
1 2 3
PS27
1 2 3
PS23
PSDB21
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5
CN11
CN14
3 2 1
PS25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN6
DC24V
CL21 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS22 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS25 ON
PS22
PS26
2 1
1 2
CL21
GND
SIZE4
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
NC
NC
NC
NC
M21
1 2
MK-719
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Japan
Vender
(Option)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PS21
PS25
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN17
CN6
3 2 1
DC5V
DC5V
TXD *2
RXD *1
GND
SET
FEED
NC
DC24V
CL21 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS22 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS25 ON
DC3.3V
PS21 ON
GND
NC
CN7
PSDB21
GND
M21
DC24V
PS26 ON
GND
DC3.3V
GND
SIZE4
PSDB21
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
PS23 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS27 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS24 ON
GND
DC3.3V
bizhub 363/283/223

CN90-1
CN92-1
CN84-1
CN90-2
CN92-3
CN84-2

detect sensor/1
PS22
DCPU
DC power supply
1 2
2 1
NO
CL21
Except 100/110V
21-J
CN13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 2 1
PS15
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CN1
DC24V
CL11 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS12 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS15 ON
NC
NC
NC
PS12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
100/110V
9 16-W
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PH unit
CN19
1 2
2 1
CN20
CN2
CL11
GND
GND
SOS
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
S/H
LD&POLYGON MOTOR_EN
PS11
Except Europe
CN13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
Europe *7
100/110V
A1UD-B001-0B
Aug.2012
PS15
DC24V
CL11 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS12 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS15 ON
DC3.3V
PS11 ON
GND
3 2 1
PJ04-1
PJ04-2
PJ04-3
PJ04-4
PJ04-5
PJ04-6
PJ04-7
PJ04-8
POLYGON MOTOR CLK

POLYGON MOTOR LOCK
LD&POLYGON MOTOR_EN
GND
DC24V
CN7
(W)
COM
Tray 2 paper FD sensor board
POWER_MONITOR
GND
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC12V
CN2-1
CN2-2
CN2-3
CN2-4
CN2-5
CN2-6
CN2-7
CN2-9
CN2-10
(R)
CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9

detect sensor/2
bizhub 423
DC3.3V
GND
DC5V
GND
DC12V
GND
DC24V
DC24V
GND
GND
HEATER_RY
IR_P_OFF
MC_P_OFF
DC24V
WARM_UP_HEATER_REM
SIDE_HEATER_REM
CENTER_HEATER_REM
ZEROCROSS
DC24V
DC24V
DC24V
DC24V
GND
GND
GND
PS12
CN2
(W)
L
NC
N
F-L
F-N-CENTER
F-N-SIDE
F-N-WARM_UP
F-L
F-N-CENTER
F-N-SIDE
SW2
Right lower door switch
CN80
NC
GND
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
DC24V
GND
DC12V
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
NC
NC
GND
GND
NC
DC24V
DC24V
GND
DC12V
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
Original size detection sensor/1
CN95
Original size detection sensor/2 *5
Scanner motor
A
A
B
B
DC24V
DC24V
M201
CN602
CN604
CN605 CN616
DC5V
READY_LED
DC5V
ERROR_LED
bizhub 363/283/223
DC5V
GND
PS202 ON
MONITOR_OUT[+]
MONITOR_OUT[-]
CLOSE
GND
DC5V
READY_LED
DC5V
ERROR_LED
CL11
1 2
L
NC
N
CN1
DC24V
DC24V
GND
GND
DC12V
GND
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
NC
CN606-1
CN606-2
CN606-3
CN606-4
NC
PS28 ON
GND
DC3.3V
CL22 ON
DC24V
CL1 ON
DC24V
PS1 ON
GND
DC3.3V
GND
TH1 ON
DC3.3V
HUMI ON
GND
TEMP ON
Scanner home sensor
DC24V
FL_REM
GND
(R)
(W)
(W)
CN4AC-1
CN4AC-2
CN4AC-3
CN4AC-4
CN4AC-1
CN4AC-2
CN4AC-3
CN81
DC24V
DC24V
GND
GND
DC12V
GND
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
PS205_REM
FD2_V0
GND
PS204_REM
FD1_V0
GND
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
NC
DC24V
FL_REM
GND
FAN_REM
GND
FAN_LOCK
N.C
bizhub 423
DC24V
LAMP_REM
GND
(R)
CN2AC
CN2AC
READY
CLOSE
PAGE_ON
WAKE_ADF
ADF_TXD *2
GND
ADF_RXD *1
GND
DC5V
LED lamp
GND
DC24V
LAMP_REM
GND
MFP board cooling fan motor
CN1AC
CN6AC
CN3AC
(R)
CN81
(W)
Main power
switch
(R)
(R)
(R)
(L)
(N)
(G)
CN89
CN6-1
CN6-4
CN91
CATHODE
CATHODE
CATHODE
ANODE
ANODE
ANODE
LEDEDB
LED exposure
drive board
CN4-1
CN4-2
CN4-3
CN4-4
CN4-5
CN4-6
CN4-7
CN4-8
GND
MONITOR_OUT[+]
MONITOR_OUT[-]
GND
FD1_V0
FD2_V0
GND
PAGE_ON
GND
WAKE_ADF
CLOSE
20DEG
HOME
FAN_LOCK
RXD_ADF *1
GND
TXD_ADF *2
READY
SM_CLK_IR
SM_ENABLE
SM_CWB
SM_CRNT
LAMP_REM
FAN_REM
SIZE_REM
ERROR_LED
READY_LED
GND
CN61
Service port cover sensor
LCDIN0(+)
LCDIN0(-)
GND
TXD_PANEL(+) *2
TXD_PANEL(-) *2
GND
BSYM(+)
BSYM(-)
PD
PANEL_UTY
SUB_SW
RXD_PANEL(+) *1
RXD_PANEL(-) *1
GND
BSYO(+)
BSYO(-)
NC
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
GND
DC12V
DC12V
bizhub 423/363/283/223 Overall wiring diagram
PLUG
(L)
(N)
(G)
CN6AC
Fuse
CN1AC
PLUG
CN1AC
HT-507
Condensation prevention heater *6
Defogger heater power supply *6
CN90
DC24V
GND
READY
CLOSE
PAGE_ON
WAKE_ADF
ADF_TXD *2
GND
ADF_RXD *1
GND
DC5V
DF-621
bizhub 423 : Standard
bizhub 363 : Standard (North America & Europe only)
bizhub 283/223 : Option
GND
MONITOR_OUT[+]
MONITOR_OUT[-]
GND
FD1_V0
FD2_V0
GND
PAGE_ON
GND
WAKE_ADF
CLOSE
20DEG
HOME
FAN_LOCK
TXD_ADF *2
GND
RXD_ADF *1
READY
SM_CLK
SM_ENABLE
SM_CWB
SM_CRNT
LAMP_REM
FAN_REM
SIZE_REM
ERROR_LED
READY_LED
GND
DC5V
GND
PS201 ON
CN606
ANODE
ANODE
ANODE
CATHODE
CATHODE
CATHODE
N-1
bizhub 223/283/363/423 Wiring diagram (a1udm0nc801db.pdf 0.8 Mb)
DC24V
DC5V
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
28
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH
INPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
28
LOCATION
3-T
CLOSED END CONNECTORS

EXTRA LARGE
LARGE
MEDIUM
SMALL
POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
#110 WITH HOUSING
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
DESTINATION
DESCRIPTION
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
20 20-L
CN4AC
CN2-4
CN2-3
CN2-2
CN2-1
1.1 Main body
1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
N WIRING DIAGRAM
bizhub 423/363/283/223
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
bizhub 423/363/283/223
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 1. bizhub 223/283/363/423
bizhub 223/283/363/423 Wiring diagram A3 size (1/4) (a1udm0nc814db.pdf 0.7 Mb)

N-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
N WIRING DIAGRAM > 2. Option
2. Option
2.1 Wiring diagram list
2.1.1 Option wiring diagram
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
Reverse automatic document feeder DF-621
[2]
Finisher FS-529
[3]
[4]
Job separator JS-603 *
[5]
Punch kit PK-517 *
[6]
Finisher FS-527
[7]
Saddle stitcher SD-509
[8]
[9]
[10]
*The description is made in the wiring diagram of FS-527.
N-3
A143-B001-0A
Apr.2010
J9
J11
J7
3 2 1
J10
J5
3 2 1
Reading roller release

position sensor
PS11
3 2 1
PS10
3 2 1
PS9
3 2 1
PS2
3 2 1
PS1
PS3
VR1
PS8
PS6
3 2 1
PS7
3 2 1
PS5
3 2 1
Reading roller
release motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
NC
J99
NC
J19
PS4
3 2 1
J4
3 2 1
3 2 1
J17
PS14
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J16
Glass cleaning roller

home sensor
1 2 3 4 5
J14
DFCB
DF control board
J12
Upper door sensor
PS13
3 2 1
J13
1 2 3
J6
Document exit sensor
M3
3 2 1
2 1
2 1
1 2 3
J3
J2
NC
Document FD
size sensor/2
PS12
CN5
Document FD
size sensor/1
1 2 3 4 5
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
From the copier

1 2
1 2 3
1 2
1 2
CL1
1 2 3 4
1 2
1 2
CL2
1 2 3 4
2 1
1 2
SD1
A
A
B
B
M4
2 1
1 2
SD2
1 2 3 4
J8
FM1
A
A
B
B
DC5V
GND
PS13 ON
M2
DC5V
DC5V
PS4 ON
PS5 ON
GND
Document FD
size sensor/3
J15
M1
Document reading motor

A
A
B
B
M1
DC5V
GND
PS14 ON
FM1 ON
GND
FM1 LOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6
SD2 ON
DC24V
Document CD
size sensor
M2
Document feed motor
6 5 4 3 2 1
Stamp solenoid
(Option)
SD1 ON
DC24V
DC3.3V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
PS7 ON
PS6 ON
PS8 ON
VR1 ON
GND
Document registration
sensor
M4
CN1
Document exit roller

release solenoid
CL2 ON
DC24V
1 2 3 4
CN3
Document feed clutch

CL1 ON
DC24V
Document set sensor
DC5V
GND
PS12 ON
CN2
Document registration
clutch
CN90
DC24V
GND
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
PS1 ON
PS2 ON
PS9 ON
PS10 ON
PS11 ON
PS3 ON
GND
Separation roller
sensor
CN4
DF-621 Overall wiring diagram
M3
+
-
CN91
DC5V
GND
RXD *1
GND
TXD *2
WAKE
PAGE_ON
CLOSE
READY
Mixed original
sensor/1
N-4
Mixed original
sensor/2
DF-621 Wiring diagram (a143m0nc801da.pdf 1.0 Mb)

Mixed original
sensor/3
DC24V
DC5V
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW

EXTRA LARGE
LARGE
MEDIUM
SMALL
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
#110 WITH HOUSING
DESTINATION
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
20 20-L
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.2 Reverse automatic document feeder DF-621
A0U7-B001-0A
Jul.2009
SD1
SD2
M2
M1
1 2
Paper surface
detect solenoid
1 2
CN13
Pick up roller
position motor
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN12
CN5
Tray up/down motor
1 2
2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
DC24V
SD1 ON
CN11
M1
B
B
A
A
M2
+
-
CN6
CN14
CN4
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SW1
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SD4
3 2 1
1 2 3
M5
2 1
1 2
3 2 1
SD5
7-C
2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN15
NC
CN10
SD3
4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
CN16
CN17
CN8
M6
M4
M3
4 3 2 1
CN18
CN7
TUBE
4-F
M7
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
CN1
FSCB
FS control board
CN20
CN2
NC
CN9
FM1
2 1
5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
1 2
2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CN3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DC24V
SD2 ON
Paddle solenoid
1 2 3 4
Staple
5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
PS14
PS13
3 2 1
PS12
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PS11
PS10
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN19
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 3 2 1
From the copier

6 5 4 3 2 1
Alignment stopper
solenoid
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
PS7
1 2 3
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS6
Paper empty
sensor
NC
PS9 ON
GND
DC5V
PS8 ON
GND
DC5V
PS7 ON
GND
DC5V
Fan motor
1 2 3
Tray lower
limit sensor
PS6 ON
GND
DC5V
NC
NC
NC
DC5V
PS4 ON
GND
Alignment motor/F
SD5 ON
DC24V
GND
FM1_LOCK
DC24V
Stapler movement
motor
PS8
Alignment plate
home sensor/R
1 2 3
Tray up/down
operation sensor
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Alignment plate
home sensor/F
PS9
Paper surface
detect sensor/2
NC
PS3 ON
GND
DC5V
PS2 ON
GND
DC5V
B
B
M3
A
A
B
B
M4
A
A
DC24V
SD3 ON
Alignment motor/R
STAPLER MOTOR
+
+
M7
B
B
A
A
Conveyance motor/2
Paper surface
detect sensor/1
PS1 ON
GND
DC5V
NC
CTS
RTS
GND
TXD *2
GND
RXD *1
A
B
B
A
DC24V
DC24V
A
B
B
A
DC24V
DC24V
Paper passage
sensor/1
GND
GND
DC24V
Paper passage
sensor/2
DC5V
GND
PS10 ON
DC5V
GND
PS11 ON
DC5V
GND
PS12 ON
DC5V
GND
PS13 ON
Stapler home
sensor
3
Pick up roller
position sensor
Belt position
sensor
M6
1
Leading edge
stopper home
sensor
M5
SD4 ON
DC24V
CN20-1
CN20-2
CN20-3
CN20-4
(W)
Conveyance motor/1
(W)
FS-529 Overall wiring diagram
NO
Flapper solenoid
NC
DC5V
GND
PS14 ON
DC5V
STP_HP
STP_READY
STP_LS
GND
NC
Staple-4
Staple-3
Staple-2
Staple-1
LK_PTH
LK_SW
DC24V
(W)
N-5
COM
FS-529 Wiring diagram (a0u7m0nc801da.pdf 1.2 Mb)

Front door switch
LOCATION
DC24V
DC5V
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW

EXTRA LARGE
LARGE
MEDIUM
SMALL
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
#110 WITH HOUSING
DESTINATION
20 20-L
DESCRIPTION
*2
*1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.3 Finisher FS-529
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
PJ5JSCB
2 1
1 2
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
1 2
PJ1T1FDTB/LED
1 2 3 4
2 1
PJ1T1FDTB/PR
1 2
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
PJ1T2FDTB/LED
1 2 3 4
PJ8JSCB
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
PJ2JSCB
PJ7JSCB
JSCB
JS control board
PJ1JSCB
4 3 2 1
PJ1T2FDTB/PR
CN1
GL
DC5V
PS
GND
T2FDTB/PR
Upper tray paper full
detect board/PR
CN2
GND
ANODE
T2FDTB/LED
Upper tray paper full
detect board/LED
1 2 3 4 5 6
From the copier
6 5 4 3 2 1
GR
4 3 2 1
M1
NC
GL
DC5V
PS
GND
GND
ANODE
GL
DC5V
PS
GND
GND
ANODE
GY
GY
GY
GY
GL
DC5V
PS
GND
Transport motor
M1
CN4
T1FDTB/PR
Lower tray paper full
detect board/PR
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ1
B
A
B
A
PS3
PS1
1 2 3
PS2
1 2 3
PS4
1 2 3
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
Ferrite core
Tube
Ferrite core
PS6
PJ2
Shift home sensor
GY
GY
GND
ANODE
T1FDTB/LED
Lower tray paper full
detect board/LED
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN52
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
RXD *1
GND
TXD *2
GND
CTS
RTS
PJ4
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN3
CN51
GR
GR
GR
R
GND
GND
NC
DC24V
PS6 ON
GND
DC5V
PS4 ON
GND
DC5V
NC
NC
NC
PS2 ON
GND
DC5V
PS1 ON
GND
DC5V
PS3 ON
GND
DC5V
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ5
PJ6
Front door sensor
1 2
PJ6JSCB
NC
5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
M2
1 2 3 4
M3
1 2
PJ4JSCB
NC
PJ10JSCB
PJ3JSCB
NC
CN6
PJ9JSCB
M3
NC
NC
NC
+
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ7
M2
A
B
A
B
Route change motor
N-6
PJ8
2.5 Job separator JS-603

GY
GY
GY
GY
NOTE
The description is made in the wiring diagram of Finisher FS-527.
GY
GY
GY
GY
JS-505 Wiring diagram (a0d5m0nc801da.pdf 300 kb)

Shift motor
JS-504 Overall wiring diagram
TXD : Transmission data
*2
RXD : Reception data
*1
DC24V
DC5V
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
A0D5-B001-1A
Aug.2007

LARGE
MEDIUM
SMALL
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
DESTINATION
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
20 20-L
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.4 Job separator JS-505
CN5
GR
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.6 Punch kit PK-517

NOTE
The description is made in the wiring diagram of Finisher FS-527.
N-7
PS9
PS24
PS12
PS13
PS21
PS25
PS26
M6
M8
M9
CN94
1 2
M10
A0HR-B001-0A
Jul.2009
Tray1 path switching motor
Tray2 shift home sensor
Tray2 lower position sensor
Tray2 upper position sensor
CN93
1 2
CN92
PJ14
NC
NC
PS8 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS6 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS22 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS14 ON
GND
DC3.3V
NC
PS13 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS12 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS24 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS9 ON
GND
PS7 ON
GND
DC3.3V
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
PS26 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS25 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS21 ON
GND
DC3.3V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M10_REM
GND
GND
M9_REM
M8_REM
GND
GND
M6_REM
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ27
CCW *4
NC
CW *3
PJ16
1 2
PJ19
DC5V
PUNCH_PLS_PS ON
GND
DC5V
PUNCH_CAM_PS ON
GND
DC5V
PUNCH_HOME_PS ON
GND
SET
GND
PJ21
1 2
PJ11
PJ12
PJ30
NC
NC
NC
NC
M17_REM
GND
SET
GND
PS35 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS36 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PJ9
CN91
NC
PS5 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS2 ON
GND
PS3 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS1 ON
GND
CN214
PJ10
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
Accommodation paddle
motor
Exit motor
PJ7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
CN72
4 3 2 1
Conveyance motor
CN71
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3
M3
M15
1 2 3
CN41
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
PJ4
M15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Elevate motor
CN62
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2
1 2 3
PJ13
PJ6
PS7
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
4 3 2 1
CN61
2 1
NC
NC
SD1_REM
DC24V
SD1
solenoid
CN133
5
6
For Sweden
PK-517(Option)
7
8
PK-517(Option)
1 2 3
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Leading edge stopper

home sensor
Alignment plate
home sensor
PJ5
1 2 3
JS-603(Option)
PS36
PS35
1 2
1 2
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3
10
Tray2 upper position switch
Tray2 lower position switch
M1
M2
PS1
11
1 2 3
1 2
12
CW : CLOCK WISE
CCW : COUNTER CLOCK WISE
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
*4
4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
*3
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
CN25
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
13
13
*2
4 3 2 1
*1
Horizontal transport unit
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
TUBE
3 2 1
PJ23
PJ25
PJ28
PJ29
FERRITE CORE
PS3
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PJ1
4 3 2 1
GND
GND
NC
DC24V
FERRITE CORE
M2
REM
NC
GND
TUBE
M1
B
A
B
A
4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ24
From the copier
1 2 3 4 5 6
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
NC
12
PS2
Front door switch
CN100b
CN100a
SET
RXD *1
GND
TXD *2
GND
CTS
RTS
11
PS5
1 2 3
3 2 1
PJ2
PJ3
1 2 3
6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
SW1
2 1
COM
SW3
(R)
COM
SW2
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ20
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
M17
1 2 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
Staple unit
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
2 1
M16
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
PS17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3
PS100
1 2
Tray2 paper
detection sensor
CN172
PS20
PS200
1 2 3
3 2 1
PJ17
1 2 3
PS300
1 2 3
CN173
PS16
M100
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3
FSCB
FS control board
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
NO
COM
NO
(R)
10
SW1_NO
NC
SW1_COM
Tray2 shift motor
CN53
CN202
NC
M16_BK
M16_REM
CW *3
CW *3
CCW *4
CCW *4
GND
EMPTY
SELFPRIMING
HOME
DC5V
FN_RXD *1
FN_RXD_GND *1
FN_TXD *2
FN_TXD_GND *2
FN_CTS
FN_RTS
(W)
CN111
CN174
PS18
PS101
CN175
PS19
PS301
1 2 3
PJ8
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
CN82
CN81
M13
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
M11
M101
CN83
CN191
M14
PS14
1 2 3
1 2 3
PS22
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
Saddle path sensor
CN131
PS30
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
PS6
1 2 3
Registration sensor
CN132
PS11
PS8
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3
CN142
PS10
Upper path sensor
CN143
CN144
M3
Tray1 path sensor
M4
Tray1 full sensor
CN141
M14
M11
M13
CN196
CN118 CN117
CN116
Upper door sensor
CN197
CN198
CN115 CN114
CN113
CN112
Punch motor/2
CN199
PS19 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS18 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS16 ON
GND
PS20 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS17 ON
GND
DC3.3V
CN171
CN52
ST
ST_UNIT
COM
CN192
CN195
CN121
CN123
NO
(R)
NO
Punch home sensor/2
Punch motor/1
CN191
CN191
CN194
CN193
CN126
CN123
CN125
(W)
(W)
CN120 CN119
Tray3 exit roller

retraction motor
CN124
M5
1 2 3
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
GND
VM
FG
PWM
CW/CCW *3*4
CN73
M5
M4
CN167
Tray3 exit roller

retraction sensor
M12
M12
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3
CN101
CN212
CN213
CN211
DC5V
GND
START/STOP
CLOCK
CW/CCW *3*4
LD
H/L
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
CN166
CN164
CN165
CN162
CN163
CN161
Tray1 path switching home sensor
DC5V
PS10 ON
GND
PS11 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS30 ON
GND
CN145
CN146
Punch home sensor/1
CN122
Tray3 full sensor
FS-527 Overall wiring diagram
Lower path sensor
N-8
FS-527 Wiring diagram (a0hrm0nc801da.pdf 1.8 Mb)
CN23
DC24V
DC5V
14
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
1 2 3
LOCATION
1 2 3
CN1301
14

EXTRA LARGE
LARGE
MEDIUM
SMALL
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
#110 WITH HOUSING
DESTINATION
DESCRIPTION
20 20-L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
PJ22
SET
RXD *1
GND
TXD *2
GND
CTS
RTS
CN1300
SD-509(Option)
2.7 Finisher FS-527

bizhub 423/363/283/223
N-9
SD-509 Wiring diagram (a10dm0nc801da.pdf 1.1 Mb)
A10D-B001-0A
Jul.2009
PS41
PS42
PS43
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
PJ3
PS44
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ13
1 2 3
M22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PJ12
PJ6
1 2
2 1
1 2
2 1
Lower paddle
motor
Center fold
plate motor
PJ1
TUBE
PJ8
M20
4 3 2 1
Leading edge
grip solenoid
CN81
M20
1 2 3 4 5 6
4 3 2 1
SD3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ2
1 2
1 2
M26
CN62
CN21
CN61
Upper paddle
motor
CN51
1 2 3 4 5
SDDB
SD drive board
PJ5
M21
PS50
1 2 3 4
Center fold
roller motor
CN52
M21
M22
1 2 3 4 5
M24
1 2 3 4
PJ7
PJ4
M25
M25
M23
SADDLE_ST_CCW *4
SADDLE_ST_CCW *4
NC
SADDLE_ST_CW *3
SADDLE_ST_CW *3
SADDLE_ST_HOME
SADDLE_ST_1M_EMPTY
SADDLE_ST_GND
SADDLE_ST_2M_EMPTY
SADDLE_ST_5V
CN41
M23
M24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ9
CN31
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC5V
PS43 ON
GND
PS42 ON
GND
DC5V
PS41 ON
GND
DC5V
DC5V
GND
CONT
CLK
F/R
LD
H/L
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
CN135
CN137
PS50 ON
GND
DC5V
PS48 ON
GND
DC5V
DC5V
PS44 ON
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CN91
GND
VM
FG
PWM
CW/CCW *3*4
GND
VM
FG
PWM
CW/CCW *3*4
Center staple
alignment motor/R
CN71
A
A
B
B
A
A
B
B
M26 CCW *4
NC
M26 CW *3
Stapler unit
Paper detection
sensor/1
CN93
CN92
Center staple
alignment motor/F
CN136
CN131
SD3_REM
NC
DC24V
Center staple alignment

home sensor/F
CN72
Booklet tray
full sensor
A
B
A
B
CN23
MAIN_BOARD_CTS
MAIN_BOARD_RTS
MAIN_BOARD_RXD_GND *2
MAIN_BOARD_RXD *2
MAIN_BOARD_TXD_GND *2
MAIN_BOARD_TXD *2
SADDLE_SET
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
SD-509 Overall wiring diagram
CN94

home sensor/R
Paper detection
sensor/2
CN132
PS48 ON
GND
DC5V
MAIN_BOARD_CTS
MAIN_BOARD_RTS
MAIN_BOARD_RXD_GND *2
MAIN_BOARD_RXD *2
MAIN_BOARD_TXD_GND *2
MAIN_BOARD_TXD *2
SADDLE_SET
CN25
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
Leading edge
stopper motor
1 2 3
3 2 1
PS48
CN134
CN133
DC5V
GND
PS48 ON
Booklet tray
near full sensor
FS-527(Option)
CN103
1 2 3
PS45
1 2 3
PS47
NC
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PS47 ON
GND
DC5V
PS45 ON
GND
DC5V
1 2 3
PJ11
CN101
Center fold plate

home sensor
PJ10
CN102

home sensor
DC24V
DC5V
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
LOCATION

EXTRA LARGE
LARGE
MEDIUM
SMALL
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
#110 WITH HOUSING
DESTINATION
DESCRIPTION
20 20-L
CCW : COUNTER CLOCK WISE
CW : CLOCK WISE
*4
*3
*2
*1
2.8 Saddle stitcher SD-509

bizhub 423/363/283/223
A1V4-B001-2A
Apr.2010
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
4
3 2 1
PS5B
3 2 1
PS5C
3 2 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PS5D
CN1
1 2 3
MDCB
PCREYB
PC relay board
CN1
1
3 2 1
CN2
PJ1
B<W> A<BL>
PCREYB
B<W>
A<BL>
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
2
3
4
PJ4
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
PS5E
2 1
M53
2 1
M54
2 1
M55
3 2 1
PS57
3 2 1
PS58
3 2 1
PS59
1 2 3
PS54
1 2 3
CN20
PS55
PCCB51
PC control board
3 2 1
PS5A
DC5V
MTPEB ON
GND
PJ3
M53
NC
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
PJ4-1
PJ4-2
PJ4-3
PJ4-4
PJ4-5
PJ4-6
PJ4-7
PJ4-8
PJ4-9
PJ4-10
PJ4-11
PS5E ON
+
M53
+
M54
+
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
M55
NC
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC
NC
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
PS5E ON
Shift motor sensor
M55
+
M54
+
Right lower door sensor
PJ5
1 2 3
PS52
1 2 3
PS53
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Paper empty sensor
PS51
1 2 3
M52
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
M51
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
SD51
10
PS56
1 2 3
5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ1
PJ2
PJ7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
11
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2
2 1
1 2
4 3 2 1
CN1
TUBE
From the copier
11
CN25
10
PJ6
M51
CN30
PS55 ON
GND
DC5V
PS54 ON
GND
DC5V
PS53 ON
GND
DC5V
DC5V
PS52 ON
GND
DC5V
PS51 ON
GND
Paper feed sensor
M52
Vertical transport motor
Paper feed motor
3 2 1
3 2 1
CN2
CN3
HREYB
Dehumidification
heater relay board
NC
CN1
12
12
*2
13
SW51
13
14
DC24V
DC5V
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
14
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW

EXTRA LARGE
LARGE
MEDIUM
SMALL
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
#110 WITH HOUSING
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
20 20-L
DESTINATION
Japan : Standard
Except Japan : Not use
*1
DH
1 2
1 2 3
L
NC
N
CN45
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
Tray lock solenoid
N
NC
L
PC-409 Overall wiring diagram
CN1
CN1AC
Dehumidification
heater
(W)
(W)
2
1
Dehumidification heater switch
CN85
GND
DC24V
DC24V
SD51 ON
DC5V
PS56 ON
GND
LEDB51_LED
DC3.3V
LEDB51
Tray 3 LED board
NC
NC
NC
CLK
TXD *2
RXD *1
RTS
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
FLM
CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9
CN1-10
CN1-11
3
Elevator motor
Shift motor
N-10
Division board position sensor
PC-409 Wiring diagram (a1v4m0nc803da.pdf 1.3 Mb)

MTPEB
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.9 Paper feed cabinet PC-409
CN31
1 2 3
CN8
CN6
1 2 3 4 5
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN1
CN3
CN1
M42
M41
3 2 1
PS46
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
PS44
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN9
PS43
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CN2
PS47
CN10
PS48
1 2 3
PCCB31
PC control board
CN4
PS41
1 2 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN11
5 4 3 2 1
2 1
PS42
CN1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 2 1
PS31
1 2
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2
CN1
CN1
TUBE
From the copier
*2
*1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
M43
A1V4-B001-1A
Apr.2010
3 2 1
3 2 1
2 1
PS38
PS37
M33
3 2 1
PS32
2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
M32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3
GND
SIZE4
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
PSDTB41
NC
PS48 ON
GND
DC5V
PS47 ON
GND
DC5V
Tray 4
detection sensor
GND
M43 ON
PS42 ON
GND
DC5V
GND
SIZE4
SIZE3
PSDTB41
SIZE2
SIZE1
PS41 ON
GND
DC5V
M31
Tray 4 CD paper
size sensor/2
1 2
CN16
CN7
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
CN17
DC5V
GND
PS33 ON
DC5V
GND
PS34 ON
NC
NC
NC
GND
PS36 ON
DC5V
DC5V
GND
PS39 ON
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M31
Tray 3 vertical
transport motor
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
M32
Tray 4 CD paper
size sensor/1
3 2 1
DC5V
GND
PS43 ON
DC5V
GND
PS44 ON
3 2 1
PS34
NC
NC
NC
NC
3 2 1
PS36
Tray 3
paper empty sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PS39
Tray 3 vertical
transport sensor
3 2 1
Tray 3 CD paper
size sensor/1
DC5V
GND
PS32 ON
M33 ON
GND
PSDTB31
Tray 4 empty sensor
CN18
Tray 3
detection sensor
DC5V
GND
PS37 ON
DC5V
GND
PS38 ON
DC5V
GND
PS31 ON
SIZE1
SIZE2
SIZE3
SIZE4
GND
CN39
CN45
CN1
PSDTB31
GND
PS46 ON
DC5V
SET
GND
NC
PS33
Tray 3 CD paper
size sensor/2
CN38
PSDTB31
Tray 3 paper FD
sensor board
SIZE1
SIZE2
SIZE3
SIZE4
GND
Tray 4 vertical
transport sensor
NC
CN1
3 2 1
3 2 1
CN2
CN3
HREYB
Dehumidification
heater relay board
SW31
20 20-L
DC24V
DC5V
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW

EXTRA LARGE
LARGE
MEDIUM
SMALL
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
#110 WITH HOUSING
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
Japan : Standard
DESTINATION
DH
1 2
1 2 3
L
NC
N
CN84
CN36
CN1AC
Dehumidification
heater
CN85
GND
DC24V
M42
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
NC
LEDB41_LED
DC3.3V
LEDB41
Tray 4 LED board
LEDB31_LED
DC3.3V
LEDB31
Tray 3 LED board
N
NC
L
(W)
(W)
2
1
M41
CLK
TXD *2
RXD *1
RTS
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
FLM
CN37
N-11
Tray 4 vertical
transport motor
PSDTB41
Tray 4 paper FD
sensor board
bizhub 423/363/283/223
N-12
CN16
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
CN1
NC
CN8
CN6
NC
CN5
PCCB31
PC control board
CN4
NC
CN10
CN3
NC
CN2
NC
CN9
CN1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN11
5 4 3 2 1
2 1
M32
M31
1 2
2 1
1 2
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
CN1
TUBE
From the copier
CN45
*2
*1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 2 1
PS31
2 1
1 2 3 4 5
CN17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS32
2 1
PS38
PS37
M33

3 2 1
DC5V
GND
PS33 ON
DC5V
GND
PS34 ON
NC
NC
NC
GND
PS36 ON
DC5V
DC5V
GND
PS39 ON
4 3 2 1
Tray 3 vertical
transport motor
M32
Tray 3 CD paper
size sensor/1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CN7
M31
CN1
Tray 3 CD paper
size sensor/2
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS34
A1V4-B001-0A
Apr.2010
3 2 1
PS36
Tray 3
paper empty sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PS39
Tray 3 vertical
transport sensor
CN18
Tray 3
detection sensor
DC5V
GND
PS32 ON
M33 ON
GND
PS33
PSDTB31
CN84
DC5V
GND
PS37 ON
DC5V
GND
PS38 ON
DC5V
GND
PS31 ON
SIZE1
SIZE2
SIZE3
SIZE4
GND
PSDTB31
NC
CN1
3 2 1
3 2 1
CN2
CN3
HREYB
Dehumidification
heater relay board
SW31
20 20-L
DC24V
DC5V
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW

EXTRA LARGE
LARGE
MEDIUM
SMALL
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
#110 WITH HOUSING
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
Japan : Standard
DESTINATION
DH
1 2
1 2 3
L
NC
N
PSDTB31
Tray 3 paper FD
sensor board
SIZE1
SIZE2
SIZE3
SIZE4
GND
GND
DC24V
CN1AC
Dehumidification
heater
CN85
CLK
TXD *2
RXD *1
RTS
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
FLM
LEDB31_LED
DC3.3V
LEDB31
Tray 3 LED board
N
NC
L
(W)
(W)
2
1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub

223/283/363/423 > 1. INTERFACE SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423

1. INTERFACE SECTION
1.1 Configuration
1.1.1 Rear side 1
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2)
[2]
Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1)
[3]
Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1)
[4]
USB port (Type A) USB2.0/1.1
[5]
USB port (Type B) USB2.0/1.1
[6]
Network connector (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T)
1.1.2 Rear side 2
[1]
[1]
Power code
O-1
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 2. SCANNER

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. SCANNER SECTION
2.1 Configuration
[3] [2]
[1]
[15]
[14]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[13]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Exposure unit
[8]
Mirror unit
[9]
[10]
Lens
[11]
CCD unit
[12]
[13]
USB board (USBB)
[14]
CCD board (CCDB)
[15]
Original size detection sensor/2 (PS205) *
*: Option
2.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
Scanner drive cable/R
[3]
[4]
Mirror unit
[5]
Exposure unit
[6]
Scanner drive cable/F
2.3 Operation
2.3.1 When the power is ON
1. The exposure unit moves from the scanner standby position to the home position.
O-2

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. The exposure unit moves from the home position to the shading position (under the shading correction sheet) and stops (in scanning
direction).
3. The exposure lamp turns ON and the gain value of the CCD sensor output voltage to R, G, and B is adjusted.
4. After adjusting the gain value, a shading correction is performed. The exposure lamp goes out when the correction is completed.
5. The exposure unit moves in the returning direction and stops at the home position.
6. The exposure unit moves in the scanning direction and stops at the scanner standby position.
[5] [4]
[3]
[5] [4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[7]
[1]
Scanning direction
[2]
Returning direction
[3]
Scanner standby position
[4]
Shading position
[5]
Home position
[6]
Scanner movement
[7]
The exposure lamp (FL) turns ON and a gain adjustment

and shading correction are made.
2.3.2 Control when the Start key is pressed

(1) Original scanning mode
Original scanning mode has two types: Original cover mode and DF mode.
(a) Original cover mode

1. Turning the Start key ON will turn the exposure lamp ON (at the scanner standby position).
2. The exposure unit moves in the returning direction and stops at the shading position. At the shading position, the gain adjustment is
made.
3. The exposure unit moves in the returning direction and stops at the scan start position.
4. To start a scan, the exposure unit moves from the scan start position to the leading edge of the image while performing shading
correction.
The exposure unit will start reading the image from the leading edge of the image.
The exposure unit will finish reading the image at the trailing edge of the image.
5. The exposure lamp will be OFF when the reading is complete.
6. The exposure unit moves in the returning direction and stops at the home position.
Then the exposure unit moves in the scanning direction and stops at the scanner standby position. It scans only once even for the
color-scans, since R, G, and B data will all be memorized in one scanning.
O-3

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[5]
[6] [4][3] [2]
[1]
[9]
[7] [8]
[6]
[5]
[4] [3] [2]
[10]
[11]
[9]
[1]
Original
[2]
Scanner standby position
[3]
Leading edge of the image
[4]
Shading position
[5]
Scan start position
[6]
Home position
[7]
Scan
[8]
Return
[9]
Trailing edge of the image
[10]
Scanner movement
[11]
Exposure lamp (FL) ON
(b) DF mode
The original fed by the reverse automatic document feeder will be read at the original DF glass. The exposure unit will move to the
reading position and stops. The original will be read as it is transferred.
[1]
[2]
[1]
DF original glass
[2]
Reading position
(2) Original scanning control
The light reflected off the exposed original reaches the CCD sensor via the lens.
The CCD sensor outputs an electric signal (analog) that varies according to the intensity of the light.
One CCD sensor has a photoreceiver that individually responds to each of the three primary colors of R, G, and B.
The electric signal is converted to digital data for each of R, G, and B by the CCD board, becoming individual digital signals.
Analog-to-digital conversion is made according to an instruction given by the MFP board.
O-4

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[3]
G
B
[4]
4.7 m
4.7 m
[1]
CCD sensor
[2]
Scanning direction
[3]
Sub scanning direction
[4]
Main scanning direction
(a) Calibration
The following adjustment and correction (calibration) are made before the original is scanned, so that the image of the original can be
adequately read. For details, see O.15. IMAGE PROCESSING.
Gain adjustment
Shading correction
2.3.3 Original scanning area

Original scanning areas vary depending on a scanning mode.
(1) Original cover mode

Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm
Sub scanning direction: Max. 431.8 mm
(2) DF mode
Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm
Sub scanning direction: Max. 1,000.0 mm
2.3.4 Original size detection control

(1) Detection method
For detection of the original size, the reflective original size detection sensors detect the length of the original while the CCD detects the
width of the original.
[7]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[3] [4]
[1] [2]
[4]
[9]
[3]
[10]
[1]
[1]
Exposure unit
[2]
CCD unit
[3]
[4]
Original size detection sensor/2 (PS205) *
[5]
346.1 mm
[6]
318.0 mm
O-5

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[7]
Original read position
[8]
Original standard position
[9]
[10]
*: Option
For the original of an irregular size, the nearest standard size on the large side is applied to it.
(2) Original size judgement

NOTE
Table 1 or 2 can be selected in the Service Mode.
(a) Criterion (Metric area & china area)

Table 1
Original
size
detection
sensor/1
Main scanning width (mm)

Up to 225.0
Up to 261.5
Up to 275.0
275.1 or
over
A4S
B5
B5
16K
A4
FLS
B4
8K
A3
0 to 130.0
Up to 153.0
Up to 187.0
Up to 200.0
Up to 215.0
OFF
No original
A5S
B5S
16KS
ON
A3
Table 2
Original size
detection sensor
2*
0 to 130
Up to
143.9
Up to
153
Up to
187
Up to
200
Up to
213
Up to
220.9
Up to
225
Up to
261.5
Up to
274.7
Up to
284.4
284.5 or
over
OFF
OFF
No
original
51/2
81/2 S
A5S
B5S
16KS
A4S
81/2
11 S
B5
16K
81/2
11
A4
ON
OFF
A3
FLS
FLS
FLS
81/2
14
B4
8K
11 17
A3
ON
A3
*: Option
(b) Criterion (Inch area)

Table 1
Original size detection

sensor/1
0 to 130.0
Up to 144.7
Up to 220.9
Up to 221.0
OFF
No original
51/2 81/2 S
81/2 11 S
81/2 11
ON
11 17
81/2 14
11 17
Table 2
Original size
detection sensor
2*
0 to 130
Up to
143.9
OFF
OFF
No
original
51/2
81/2 S
A5S
B5S
A4S
ON
OFF
A3
ON
A3
Up to 153 Up to 187 Up to 213
Up to
220.9
B5
81/2 11
A4
FLS
FLS
FLS
81/2 14
B4
11 17
A3
The image processing has following items. For details, see O.15. IMAGE PROCESSING.
O-6
284.5 or
over
2.3.5 Image processing
Photoelectric conversion
Analog-to-digital conversion
Up to
284.4
81/2 11
S
*: Option
Scanner section image processing block diagram
Up to 225 Up to 262
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 3. WRITE

SECTION (PH S...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)

3.1 Configuration
[10]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
Laser aperture
[2]
G2 lens
[3]
Index lens
[4]
Index board (INDEXB)
[5]
Laser drive board (LASDB)
[6]
Collimator lens
[7]
Cylindrical lens
[8]
Polygon motor (M5)
[9]
G1 lens
[10]
Index mirror
3.2 Operation
3.2.1 Laser exposure process
1. The laser light emitted from the semiconductor laser on the laser drive board is incident upon the polygon mirror via the collimator lens and
the cylindrical lens.
2. The polygon mirror has seven faces, being turned at high speeds by the polygon motor.
3. The light reflected off the polygon mirror illuminates the surface of the photo conductor via the G1 lens and G2 lens.
4. The light reflected off the polygon mirror scans the surface of the photo conductor as the polygon mirror rotates.
[1]
[3]
[12]
[2]
[4]
[5] [6]
[11]
[7]
[8] [9]
[10]
[1]
Photo conductor
[2]
G2 lens
[3]
Index mirror
[4]
G1 lens
[5]
Polygon mirror
[6]
Polygon motor (M5)
[7]
Cylindrical lens
[8]
Index lens
[9]
Collimator lens
[10]
Laser drive board (LASDB)
[11]
Index board (INDEXB)
[12]
Laser light scanning the surface of the photo conductor

(main scanning)
3.2.2 Laser emission timing

The index sensor has a function of keeping the same laser light emission timing per every one line in the main scanning direction.
When a ready signal is detected after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after a print cycle has been started, the MFP board
outputs a laser ON signal.
The laser ON signal triggers the firing of each laser light which illuminates the index board via the polygon mirror, G1 lens, and index mirror.
This generates an index signal.
O-7
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 3. WRITE

SECTION (PH S...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
The index signal controls the laser light emission timing for each line in the main scanning direction.
3.2.3 Advance polygon rotation

To shorten the first print time, the polygon motor is energized before a print command is issued.
This timing starts when a original is loaded or a key on the control panel is pressed.
If no print command is received during the advance energization, the motor is then deenergized.
3.2.4 Laser emission stop

Emission of the laser beam is stopped if any of the following conditions is encountered during printing:
At the end of a print job or a print job is interrupted by a paper empty condition or similar event.
The front door or any other door is opened.
A misfeed occurs.
A malfunction occurs.
3.2.5 Laser emission area

(1) Main scanning direction
The print start position in the main scanning direction is determined by the main scanning print start signal (HSYNC) that is output from
the MFP board and the width of the paper.
The laser emission area is determined by the paper size.
The area on either edge of the paper is, however, a void image area.
(2) Sub scanning direction

The print start position in the sub scanning direction is determined by the image write start signal (VSYNC) that is output from the MFP
board and the length of the paper.
The laser emission area is determined by the paper size.
The area on either edge of the paper is, however, a void image area.
Void image area
Mode
Main scanning direction
Sub scanning direction
3 mm/0.118 inches from the edge of the paper
Copy
PC print
4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the leading edge of the paper
3 mm/0.118 inches from the edge of the paper
3 mm/0.118 inches from the trailing edge of the paper
4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the edge of the paper
4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the leading edge of the paper
4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the edge of the paper
4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the trailing edge of the paper
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Void image area along the edge of the paper
[3]
Void image area along the trailing edge of the paper
[2]
O-8
Void image area along the leading edge of the paper
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 4. TONER

SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. TONER SUPPLY SECTION

4.1 Configuration
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Toner bottle
[2]
Toner hopper
[3]
[4]
[2]
4.2 Drive
4.2.1 Toner bottle drive
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
Toner bottle holder
4.2.2 Toner hopper drive
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Toner agitating blade/1
[2]
[3]
Toner conveying screw
[4]
O-9

SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Toner flow
The TCR sensor mounted in the developing unit detects the T/C ratio in the developing unit. Toner is supplied from the toner bottle to the
toner hopper and from the toner hopper to the developing unit according to the T/C ratio detected by the TCR sensor and the amount of
toner consumed.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Developing unit
[2]
Toner bottle (cross-sectional view)
[3]
Toner replenishing port
[4]
Toner hopper
[5]
[6]
[7]
Toner flow
4.3.2 Toner replenishing mechanism

(1) Toner supply from toner bottle to toner hopper
The toner bottle motor provides the drive for replenishing toner from the toner bottle to the toner hopper.
Energization of the toner bottle motor results in the toner bottle being rotated. The toner bottle is provided with a toner replenishing port.
Load the toner bottle in the main body with the toner replenishing port facing up. During rotation of the toner bottle through one complete
turn, toner is supplied to the toner hopper at timing at which the toner replenishing port faces downward.
The toner bottle home sensor detects the toner bottle at its home position (with the toner replenishing port facing up).
(2) Toner supply from toner hopper to developing section

The toner supply motor provides the drive for replenishing toner from the toner hopper to the developing section.
Energization of the toner supply motor results in toner agitating blade/1 and toner conveying screw being rotated.
Rotation of toner agitating blade/1 results in the toner in the toner hopper being agitated. It also moves toner agitating blade/2 up and
down, so that toner in the toner hopper is fed onto the toner conveying screw.
Toner agitating blade/2 is mounted with a magnet. The toner near empty switch mounted on the outside of the toner hopper detects
vertical movements of toner agitating blade/2 during a toner near empty condition.
Rotation of the toner conveying screw results in the toner in the toner hopper being conveyed onto the developing unit.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Magnet
[4]
[5]
4.3.3 Toner replenishing control

The toner replenishing control is performed through two different control modes: toner replenishing control to the toner hopper and toner
replenishing control to the developing unit.
O-10

SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Toner replenishing control to toner hopper

Only while the toner bottle motor is being energized, the toner near empty switch is used to monitor the amount of toner still available for
use in the toner hopper.
(a) Operation
1. Energization of the toner bottle motor is checked and, if it is found that the toner bottle motor is energized, detection control is started.
2. Outputs from the toner near empty switch are monitored.
When the magnet on the toner agitating blade/2 lowers down to the position of the toner near empty switch during energization of the
toner bottle motor, the main body determines that toner in the toner hopper is decreasing.
3. Having made the decision that the toner in the toner hopper is decreasing, the main body rotates the toner bottle one complete turn to
supply toner to the toner hopper.
4. After the toner has been supplied to the toner hopper, the operation returns to step 1 and the output from the toner near empty switch is
monitored. If the main body determines a second time that the toner in the toner hopper is decreasing, the toner bottle is rotated one
complete turn and toner is additionally supplied to the toner hopper. This operation is referred to as continuous toner replenishing
sequence. In the toner near empty condition detection control, the number of continuous toner replenishing sequences is monitored
and the toner near empty condition is determined based on the number of sequences.
5. The above steps of operation are repeated to control the amount of toner in the toner hopper.
NOTE
If the front door is opened while toner is being supplied to the toner hopper, the toner bottle motor is deenergized and the
toner replenishing sequence is canceled.
[6]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Toner agitating blade/2 (when the toner is full)
[2]
Toner agitating blade/2 makes a vertical movement.
[3]
Toner agitating blade/2 (when the toner decreases)
[4]
[5]
Toner level (small amount of toner left)
[6]
Toner level (toner full)
[7]
Magnet
(2) Toner replenishing control to developing unit

The amount of toner supplied is determined based on the result of detection made by the TCR sensor.
(a) Detection process

Only while the developing unit is energized (PC motor is energized), the T/C ratio in the developing unit is monitored with the TCR
sensor.
1. Energization of the PC motor is checked and, if it is found that the PC motor is being energized, the detection process is started.
2. The output from the TCR sensor is monitored for a predetermined period of time and the amount of toner to be supplied is calculated.
3. The toner supply motor is energized for the calculated amount of toner to be supplied (toner supply time) and toner is supplied from
the toner hopper to the developing unit.
4.3.4 T/C ratio recovery control

When images that would consume a large amount of toner (images having a high image density) are printed continuously, the T/C ratio in
the developing unit may be reduced. In such cases, toner is forcibly supplied.
If the T/C ratio is decreased during a print cycle, that print cycle is interrupted and toner is forcibly supplied.
No print cycle can be run during the toner supply sequence.
The toner supply sequence is terminated as soon as a predetermined value of T/C ratio is recovered.
(Maximum 145 sec.: toner supply 116 sec. + developing unit agitation 29 sec.)
4.3.5 Manual Toner Add control

A function of the Service Mode (Manual Toner Add) may also be used to supply toner forcibly.
Service Mode / Imaging Process Adjustment / Manual Toner Add / Black
No print cycle can be run during the toner supply sequence.
The toner supply sequence is terminated as soon as a predetermined value of T/C ratio is recovered.
(Maximum 145 sec.: toner supply 116 sec. + developing unit agitation 29 sec.)
O-11

SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.3.6 Toner level detection control

(1) Toner near empty detection control
A toner near empty condition is detected based on the number of continuous toner replenishing sequences (the number of times the
toner bottle is continuously rotated) in which toner is supplied from the toner bottle to toner hopper.
The main body determines that there is a toner near empty condition when the number of continuous toner replenishing sequences for
the toner hopper reaches predetermined number.
(a) Warning display function

The warning screen to be displayed when a toner near-empty is detected can be enabled or disabled in the System 2 / Unit Change /
Warning display in the Service Mode.
When the warning screen display is set to Yes, the message notifying the user that the toner bottle needs replacing is displayed.
(Replace toner bottle)
Printing can be continued even after the message is displayed.
When the warning screen display is set to No, the message notifying the user that the toner bottle needs replacing is not displayed.
Printing can be continued without having the message displayed.
Approximately 600 printed pages can be produced in the standard job mode during the period that begins when a toner near empty
condition is detected and ends when a toner empty condition is detected.
NOTE
The number of printed pages represents a value that is calculated based the amount of toner consumed when the machine is
used in the standard job mode. It varies depending on how the machine is used by the user.
For details of the standard job mode, see F.5.1 Life value of consumables and parts.
(2) Toner empty detection control

The main body determines that there is a toner empty condition when any of the following conditions is detected.
(a) Toner empty condition detected through monitoring the cumulative amount of toner supplied
The cumulative amount of toner supplied after the toner near empty condition has been detected is monitored and, when a
predetermined value is detected, the main body determines that there is a toner empty condition.
(b) Toner empty condition detected based on detection of a malfunction of an abnormally low toner density
detected by TCR sensor
When a malfunction of C2557 Abnormally low toner density detected TCR sensor is detected after the toner near empty condition has
been detected, the main body determines that there is, not a malfunction, but a toner empty condition.
(c) Toner empty condition detected based on a reduced T/C ratio

If the T/C ratio remains below a predetermined threshold value after the completion of a T/C ratio recovery control, the main body
determines that there is a toner empty condition.
(3) Unit change function

The warning screen to be displayed when a toner empty is detected can be enabled or disabled in the System 2 / Unit Change / Unit
Change / Toner Bottle in the Service Mode.
When the warning screen display is set to User, the message that prompts the user to replace the toner bottle with a new one is
displayed. (The toner needs to be replaced. Follow the instructions to replace the toner bottle and close the supply door.)
When the warning screen display is set to Service, the message that prompts the user to call the service representative is displayed.
(There is no toner. Contact your service representative.)
O-12

SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(4) Toner level display

(a) Toner near empty display (typical)
(b) Toner empty display (typical)
[1]
[1]
[2]
Replaced by user
[2]
Replaced by service engineer
(5) Resetting the toner near empty and toner empty conditions
Either the toner replenishing control to toner hopper or toner replenishing control to developing unit is performed (both may be
performed in some cases) if the toner bottle is replaced with a new one after a toner near empty condition and a toner empty condition
have been detected.
The toner near empty/empty display is reset when the control is normally terminated.
Initiation of a new print cycle is prohibited during execution of the toner replenishing control to toner hopper and toner replenishing
control to developing unit after the toner bottle has been replaced with a new one.
See the relevant pages for more details of the toner replenishing control to toner hopper and toner replenishing control to developing
unit.
(a) Precaution when replacing toner bottle

The toner bottle is not provided with any mechanism that detects the amount of toner still available for use in the bottle. Therefore,
make sure that the toner near empty or toner empty message is displayed before replacing the new toner bottle. Do not replace with the
new toner bottle until the toner near empty or toner empty message is displayed.
The toner amount data (level gauge) of the control panel determines that Toner bottle is replaced with new one after toner empty
status changes to the normal status, and the Toner amount data is reset to zero.
Therefore, in cases where the toner bottle is replaced with a new one before the toner near empty or toner empty message is
displayed, the Toner amount data fails to be cleared, which creates the conflicting indicators of Toner amount data displayed on the
control panel and the Toner current level in the toner bottle.
Toner amount data displayed on the control panel may highlight the phenomenon of toner still remaining in the toner bottle even though
the toner empty indicator is activated.
O-13

SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[1]
Toner amount data (level gauge)
4.3.7 Main body interior temperature measurement system

The temperature/humidity sensor is located on the back panel of the main body. It is used to measure the temperature and humidity inside
the main body.
The measured data is used as environmental information for various other types of control.
[1]
[1]
O-14
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 5. IMAGING

UNIT SECTIO...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. IMAGING UNIT SECTION (IU SECTION)

5.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[3]
[1]
Imaging unit (IU)
[2]
Drum unit
[3]
Developing unit
[4]
Recycling section
[5]
Cleaning section
[6]
Photo conductor section
[7]
Developing section
[8]
Charging section
5.2 Drive
5.2.1 Drum unit
[2]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[5]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
PC motor (M2)
[2]
Toner collecting screw/2
[3]
Drum unit
[4]
[5]
Toner agitating roller
O-15
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 5. IMAGING

UNIT SECTIO...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.2.2 Developing unit
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
PC motor (M2)
[3]
[2]
Developing roller
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Outline
The imaging unit (IU) of this machine can be physically divided into the drum unit and developing unit. It is further divided into the charging,
photo conductor, developing, cleaning, and recycling sections.
The developing unit is replaced once in four times of replacement of the drum unit and developer.
Model
Life
Drum unit
Developer
Developing unit
bizhub 423
120,000 counts
120,000 counts
480,000 counts
bizhub 363
110,000 counts
110,000 counts
440,000 counts
bizhub 283
100,000 counts
100,000 counts
400,000 counts
bizhub 223
80,000 counts
80,000 counts
320,000 counts
5.3.2 Imaging unit detection
The imaging unit of the main body consists of the drum unit and the developing unit that are treated as one imaging unit.
A signal from the TCR sensor is used to determine whether or not the imaging unit is installed in the main body.
If there is a signal, the main body determines that the imaging unit is installed in it.
If there are no signals, the main body determines that the imaging unit is not installed in it.
O-16
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 6. DRUM

UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. DRUM UNIT SECTION

6.1 Configuration
[2]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Separation claw
[3]
[4]
Charge corona
[5]
Photo conductor
[6]
6.2 Drive
[2]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[5]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
PC motor (M2)
[2]
[3]
Drum unit
[4]
[5]
The PC motor provides the drive for the photo conductor which is rotated via the drive gear.
Toner collecting screw/1 and toner agitating roller are also driven by the PC motor via the photo conductor.
Toner collecting screw/2 is also driven by the PC motor via the photo conductor and toner agitating roller.
O-17

UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Charge corona control
The comb electrode deposits a charge evenly across the surface of the photo conductor through a grid mesh.
The corona unit has a comb electrode that discharges only toward the grid mesh. This results in the amount of ozone produced being
smaller than with the wire electrode.
[2] [3]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Charge corona
[2]
Comb electrode
[3]
Grid mesh
[4]
Photo conductor
[5]
Direction of rotation of photo conductor
6.3.2 Photo conductor cleaning mechanism

(1) Cleaning using cleaning blade
Part of the toner that is left on the surface of the photo conductor is scraped off by the cleaning blade.
The cleaning blade is not provided with any cleaning blade retraction mechanism. It is pressed up against the surface of the photo
conductor at all times.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Cleaning blade
[4]
Photo conductor
[5]
(2) Photo conductor backward rotation control

When the gap between the photo conductor and cleaning blade is clogged up with foreign matter (paper dust, toner, etc.), the cleaning
blade becomes unable to clean the surface of the photo conductor properly, resulting in a faulty image (the cleaning blade fails to remove
toner completely).
To prevent the cleaning blade from failing to remove toner completely, the photo conductor is rotated backward at predetermined time
intervals. Turning the photo conductor backward will let the foreign matter surface on the surface of the photo conductor. The photo
conductor is thereafter turned forward, so that the foreign matter can be removed by the cleaning blade.
O-18

UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Each time the cumulative time counter of the photo conductor exceeds a predetermined time (equivalent to 100 printed pages of A4
paper), the PC motor is rotated backward and forward, so that foreign matter (paper dust, toner, etc.) clogged in the gap between the
cleaning blade and the surface of the photo conductor can be removed.
6.3.3 Erase mechanism

Part of the toner that is left on the surface of the photo conductor is scraped off by the cleaning blade. A voltage is applied at this time to the
cleaning blade to charge the surface of the photo conductor, thereby making the surface potential uniform. The surface of the photo
conductor is thereafter irradiated with the light from the erase lamp, which neutralizes any surface potential left on the surface of the photo
conductor.
The erase lamp is mounted on the main body frame.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
Erase lamp (LA)
[2]
Charge corona
[3]
Photo conductor
[4]
Cleaning blade
[5]
6.3.4 Ozone suction function

The comb electrode generates ozone as it discharges.
When the photo conductor is exposed to a predetermined amount of ozone for a predetermined period of time, the sensitivity of the surface
of the photo conductor becomes no longer uniform, resulting in uneven sensitivity. Uneven sensitivity on the surface of the photo conductor
results in white bands or other print image defects.
To prevent the photo conductor from developing the uneven sensitivity problem, the ozone filter is mounted on the main body frame. The
ozone filter removes ozone from the air drawn by the cooling fan motor.
[1]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Ozone filter
[2]
Charge corona
[3]
Photo conductor
[4]
Air flow
[5]
O-19

UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.3.5 Drum dry control

The photo conductor is rotated idly without the system performing any image forming processes (drum charge, exposure, erase, etc.).
The drum dry sequence is automatically executed (for about 1 min.), if a predetermined condition is met during the predrive after the power
has been turned ON and when the main body is reset from the sleep mode.
(1) Manual drum dry control

The manual drum dry sequence is run by pressing the start key in Utility / Administrator Settings / System Settings / Expert Adjustment /
Drum Dry. During the sequence, the photo conductor is rotated for about 1 min.
During the execution of the drum dry sequence, no print cycle can be run, but a print job can be registered. The message Drum Dry is on
going. Please wait. appears on the control panel.
The drum dry sequence may be terminated in mid operation by pressing the stop key.
The manual drum dry sequence must be executed before the developing unit is replaced with a new one or the developer is changed.
For the procedures and other details, see I.6.7.31 Drum Dry.
(2) Auto drum dry control

Ozone stagnant in the charging section may change properties of the photo conductor, which results in a reduced initial surface potential
and an increased potential after exposure. As a result, there may be uneven densities between areas which face the charge corona and
those not.
To eliminate such a phenomenon, an auto drum dry sequence is executed, if the power is turned ON or the main body is reset from the
sleep mode after the period of time during which the PC motor remains deenergized exceeds a predetermined period of time (six hours).
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Charge corona
[3]
Photo conductor
[2]
The setting for the auto drum dry function may be changed using Service Mode / System 2 / Auto Drum Dry (the default setting is No).
6.3.6 Measure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor mechanism
The PC thermistor located immediately below the image transfer roller functions to measure the temperature of the area around the photo
conductor inside the main body.
The measured data is used for various controls.
O-20

UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Image transfer roller
[2]
Photo conductor
[3]
Registration roller
[4]
PC thermistor (TH1)
6.3.7 Drum unit detection
The developing mechanism of the main body consists of the drum unit and the developing unit that are treated as one imaging unit.
No new article detection functions are provided. If the drum unit is replaced with a new one, therefore, the Drum Unit Rotation Time
counter must be reset using Service Mode / Counter / Life.
(1) Drum unit rotation time
6.3.8 Drum unit life detection

The life counter of the drum unit controls detection of life of the drum unit.
The counter value is recorded in the service EEPROM of the main body.
Controlled item
Counting unit
Drum unit rotation time
M*
*: M represents a code that denotes the drum unit rotation time.
(1) Drum unit rotation time counter life determination

If the counter value of drum unit rotation time reaches the threshold, the machine determines that the drum unit has reached a new state.
O-21

UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[9]
[1]
Drum unit (new article)
[2]
[3]
Alarm threshold value
[4]
[5]
Normal display
[6]
L code display (Replacement alarm display: Drum unit

rotation time excess)
[7]
Replacement alarm display
[8]
Image guaranteed range
[9]
Outside image guaranteed range
(a) Drum unit rotation time counter life criteria

State
Display
Criteria
Normal
Normal
(print enabled: within image guaranteed range)
Less than the drum unit rotation time threshold
Drum unit rotation time

excess
(Reaching life)
L code display
(print enabled: outside image guaranteed range)
Equal to or more than the drum unit rotation time

threshold and less than the replacement alarm
threshold
Replacement alarm

Equal to or more than the drum unit rotation time

replacement alarm threshold and less than the life
stop threshold
Life stop *
Life stop display (print prohibited)
Equal to or more than the drum unit rotation time life

stop threshold
*: Life stop may be disabled using Service Mode / Enhanced Security / Life Stop Setting / Stop; however, print image quality is not
guaranteed in this case. For more details, see Service Mode.
(2) Drum unit life display

The L code screen is displayed when the value of the drum unit rotation time counter reaches the drum unit rotation time threshold (print
enabled, outside image guaranteed range).
The life reaching screen is displayed when the value of the drum unit rotation time counter reaches the replacement alarm threshold (print
L code
Target unit
L code
Target unit
L-4
Drum unit
L-6
Developer
L-7
Ozone filter
L-8
Paper dust remover
L-9
Developing unit
L-10
Transfer unit
L-11
Fusing unit
The life stop screen is displayed when the value of the drum unit rotation time counter reaches the life stop threshold (print prohibited).
O-22

UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(a) L code display (typical)
[1]
[1]
[2]
L code key
[2]
L code display (displayed when the L code key is

touched)
(b) Replacement alarm display (typical)
(c) Life stop display (typical)
6.3.9 Life value of drum unit

NOTE
The life of consumables varies depending on how the user uses the machine. For details, see F.5.1 Life value of consumables
and parts.
Model
Excess (reaching the life value)
Replacement alarm
Life stop
bizhub 363/423
3,921 M
4,313 M
4,901 M
bizhub 223/283
4,845 M
5,329 M
6,056 M
6.3.10 Ozone filter new article detection

No new article detection functions are provided. If the ozone filter is replaced with a new one, therefore, the Ozone Filter Use Time counter
must be reset using Service Mode / Counter / Life.
O-23

UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Ozone filter use time
6.3.11 Ozone filter life detection

The life counter of the ozone filter controls detection of life of the ozone filter.
Controlled item
Counting unit
Number of printed pages produced using the currently installed ozone filter
Count
(1) Ozone filter counter life determination

If the number of printed pages produced using the currently installed ozone filter reaches the threshold, the machine determines that the
ozone filter has reached a new state.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Ozone filter (new article)
[2]
[3]
Normal display
[4]
L code display (number of printed pages produced using

the currently installed ozone filter is exceeded)
[5]
[6]
(a) Criteria based on the counter that counts the number of printed pages produced using the currently installed
ozone filter
State
Display
Criteria
Normal
Normal
Less than the threshold value of the number of printed

pages produced using the currently installed ozone
filter
Number of printed pages

produced using the
currently installed ozone
filter is exceeded
(Reaching life)
L code display
Equal to or more than the threshold value of the

number of printed pages produced using the currently
installed ozone filter
(2) Ozone filter life display

The L code screen is displayed when the number of printed pages produced using the currently installed ozone filter counter reaches the
life threshold (print enabled, outside image guaranteed range).
L code
Target unit
L code
Target unit
L-4
Drum unit
L-6
Developer
L-7
Ozone filter
L-8
Paper dust remover
L-9
Developing unit
L-10
Transfer unit
L-11
Fusing unit
O-24

UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[1]
[2]
L code key
[2]

touched)
6.3.12 Life value of ozone filter

NOTE
and parts.
Model
bizhub 363/423
bizhub 223/283

150,000 counts
O-25

223/283/363/423 > 7. DEVELOPING SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. DEVELOPING SECTION
7.1 Configuration
[7]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[1]
Developing roller
[2]
1st toner conveying screw
[3]
2nd toner conveying screw
[4]
[5]
Toner filter (Developing unit side)
[6]
3rd toner conveying screw
[7]
Toner replenishing port
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Cleaning blade
[12]
Drum unit
[2]
Developing roller
7.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
PC motor (M2)
[3]
The developing roller is driven by the PC motor via the drive gear.
O-26

bizhub 423/363/283/223
The toner conveying screw is driven by the PC motor via the developing roller.
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Toner flow
(1) Fresh toner
Toner fed off from the toner hopper of the toner supply section is agitated and mixed with the developer by the three toner conveying
screws and conveyed onto the developing roller.
(2) Recycled toner

The residual toner on the surface of the photo conductor after the image transfer is collected by the photo conductor cleaning mechanism
of the imaging unit and recycled back to the developing unit for reuse.
The cleaning blade pressed up against the surface of the photo conductor scrapes residual toner off the surface. The toner is then
conveyed by toner collecting screws 1/2 to the developer mixing chamber. Because the toner is thus recovered back to the developer
mixing chamber, there is no waste toner box mounted in the main body.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Path of fresh toner supplied from toner supply section
[2]
Path of recycled toner recovered from surface of photo

conductor
[3]
Photo conductor
[4]
Developing roller
7.3.2 Developing roller

The developer (carrier and toner) in the developer mixing chamber is conveyed onto the point of development by the toner conveying
screws and the developing roller.
The developing roller consists of an outer sleeve roller and an inner magnet roller.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Developing roller
7.3.3 HMT (High grade Micro Toning) development

With the HMT method, the magnetic developer brush does not rub against the surface of the photo conductor (the images). Accordingly,
sharper line images can be reproduced, involving no uneven image density at the trailing edge or thin lines and achieving even finer
reproduction of the solid image areas.
O-27

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[1]
[2]
Developing roller
[2]
Photo conductor
7.3.4 Developing bias

The developing bias voltage (Vdc) is applied to the developing roller so that an adequate amount of toner is attracted onto the surface of the
photo conductor.
In addition to the negative DC component, AC voltage is applied during development to help toner to be attracted more easily to the surface
of the photo conductor.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Developing bias terminal
[3]
Photo conductor
[2]
Developing roller
7.3.5 Developer scattering preventive mechanism

To prevent the image and machine interior from being dirtied, the toner suction fan motor draws air so that toner particles rising up in the
developing unit can be trapped.
A suction duct is provided for the IU (developing unit). As air is drawn by the toner suction fan motor, toner particles rising up during
development are removed from the air that passes through the suction duct.
The toner suction fan motor rotates when the PC motor is energized.
The toner filter on the developing unit side and that on the main body rear side trap toner particles from the air drawn by the toner suction
fan motor.
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Toner filter (developing unit side)
[2]
Toner suction duct
[3]
[4]
Toner filter (main body rear side)
[5]
7.3.6 TCR sensor control

The TCR sensor is located on the underside of the developing unit. The sensor is a noncontact magnetic type that measures permeability
(bulk density) of the toner and carrier to thereby detect the toner-to-carrier ratio (T/C).
Adjustment of the TCR sensor is made when the developing unit or developer is changed.
O-28

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Developing roller
(1) TCR sensor adjust
7.3.7 Developing unit detection
The developing mechanism of the main body consists of the drum unit and the developing unit that are treated as one imaging unit.
No new article detection functions are provided. If the developing unit is replaced with a new one, therefore, the Developing Unit Rotation
Time counter must be reset using Service Mode / Counter / Life. (Resetting Developing Unit Rotation Time will also reset Developer
Replace Counter and Developer Use Time.)
NOTE
The following functions must be executed when the developing unit is replaced with a new one:
1. Before the developing unit is replaced with a new one, a manual drum dry sequence must be executed using Administrator
Settings / System Settings / Expert Adjustment / Drum Dry.
2. Before the developing unit is replaced with a new one, reset Developing unit rotation time using Service Mode / Counter /
Life.
3. After the developing unit is replaced with a new one, adjust the TCR level using Service Mode / Imaging Process Adjustment /
TCR Sensor Adjust / Auto Adj. / Black.
For the procedures and other details, see F.6.3.2 Replacing the developing unit.
(1) Developing unit rotation time
O-29

bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Manual drum dry
7.3.8 Developing unit life detection

The life counters of the developing unit and developer are used to control detection of the life of the developing unit.
Controlled item
Counting unit
Developing unit rotation time
M*
Developer use time
M*
*: M is a code that denotes the developing unit rotation time and developer use time.
(1) Developing unit counter life determination

Each of the developing unit rotation time counter and the developer use time counter has its own threshold value. If the developing unit
rotation time counter value and the developer use time counter value reach their respective threshold values, the main body determines
that the drum unit has reached a new state.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[8]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[9]
[1]
Developing unit (new article)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Normal display
[6]
L code display (Replacement alarm display)
[7]
[8]
[9]
(a) Developing unit rotation time counter life criteria

State
Display
Criteria
Normal
Normal
Less than the developing unit life threshold
Developing unit rotation

time excess
(Reaching life)
L code display
Equal to or more than the developing unit life

threshold; and equal to or more than the developer
use time threshold and less than the developer
replacement alarm threshold
O-30

bizhub 423/363/283/223
State
Display
Criteria
Replacement alarm


replacement alarm threshold and less than the
developer life stop threshold
Life stop *

life stop threshold
(2) Developing unit life display

The L code screen is displayed when the values of the developing unit rotation time counter and the developer use time counter reach the
life thresholds (print enabled, outside image guaranteed range).
L code
Target unit
L code
Target unit
L-4
Drum unit
L-6
Developer
L-7
Ozone filter
L-8
Paper dust remover
L-9
Developing unit
L-10
Transfer unit
L-11
Fusing unit
The life stop screen is displayed when the values of the developing unit rotation time counter and the developer use time counter reach
the life stop thresholds (print prohibited).
[1]
[1]
[2]
L code key
[2]
O-31

touched)

bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.3.9 Life value of developing unit

NOTE
and parts.
Model
bizhub 363/423
Counter
Excess (reaching the life

value)

time
Developer use time
bizhub 223/283

time
Developer use time
Replacement alarm
Life stop
15,684M
15,684M
15,684M
3,921M
4,313M
4,901M
19,380M
19,380M
19,380M
4,845M
5,329M
6,056M
7.3.10 Developer new article detection

No new article detection functions are provided. If the developer is replaced with a new one, therefore, the Developer Unit Rotation Time
counter must be reset using Service Mode / Counter / Life. (When Developer Use Time is reset, Developer Replace Counter is
incremented by one. Developer Replace Counter should not be reset.)
NOTE
The following functions must be executed when the developer is replaced with a new one:
1. Before the developer is replaced with a new one, a manual drum dry sequence must be executed using Administrator Settings /
System Settings / Expert Adjustment / Drum Dry.
2. Before the developer is replaced with a new one, reset Developer use time using Service Mode / Counter / Life.
3. After the developer is replaced with a new one, adjust the TCR level using Service Mode / Imaging Process Adjustment / TCR
Sensor Adjust / Auto Adj. / Black.
For the procedures and other details, see F.6.3.3 Replacing the developer.
(1) Developer use time
O-32

bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Manual drum dry
7.3.11 Developer life detection

The life counter of the developer controls detection of life of the developer.
Controlled item
Counting unit
Developer use time
M*
*: M represents a code that denotes the developer use time.
(1) Developer use time counter life determination

If the counter value of developer use time reaches the threshold, the machine determines that the developer has reached a new state.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[9]
[1]
Developer (new article)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Normal display
[6]
L code display (Replacement alarm display: Developer

use time excess)
[7]
[8]
[9]
(a) Developer use time counter life criteria

State
Display
Criteria
Normal
Normal
Less than the developer use time threshold
Developer use time

excess
(Reaching life)
L code display
Equal to or more than the developer use time

threshold
Replacement alarm

Equal to or more than the developer use time

stop threshold
O-33

bizhub 423/363/283/223
State
Life stop *
Display
Criteria
Equal to or more than the developer use time life stop
threshold
(2) Developer life display

The life reaching screen is displayed when the value of the developer use time counter reaches the life threshold (print enabled, outside
image guaranteed range).
The L code screen is displayed when the value of the developer use time counter reaches the developer use time threshold (print
L code
Target unit
L code
Target unit
L-4
Drum unit
L-6
Developer
L-7
Ozone filter
L-8
Paper dust remover
L-9
Developing unit
L-10
Transfer unit
L-11
Fusing unit
The life stop screen is displayed when the value of the developer use time counter reaches the life stop threshold (print prohibited).
[1]
[1]
[2]
L code key
[2]
O-34

touched)

bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.3.12 Life value of developer

NOTE
and parts.
Model
Replacement alarm
Life stop
bizhub 363/423
3,921M
4,313M
4,901M
bizhub 223/283
4,845M
5,329M
6,056M
O-35
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 8. IMAGE

TRANSFER/SEPA...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. IMAGE TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION

8.1 Configuration
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
Charge neutralizing needle
[3]
PC thermistor (TH1)
[4]
Registration roller
[2]
8.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[1]
PC motor (M2)
8.3 Operation
8.3.1 Image transfer roller control
To transfer the toner image formed on the photo conductor onto the paper, the image transfer voltage supplied from the high voltage unit is
applied to the image transfer roller.
Resistance of the image transfer roller changes with an environmental change, durability, and other factors. To maintain an optimum output
voltage, fixed current is passed through the image transfer roller and the voltage being output at that time is detected. An appropriate image
transfer voltage is determined based on the measured voltage and other information such as type of paper used, temperature and
humidity, and 1-sided/2-sided.
(1) Execution timing

The image transfer roller control is executed when a print job is received under any of the following conditions:
Main power switch is turned ON
Sub power switch is turned ON
The threshold value of a change in machine interior temperature is exceeded.
8.3.2 Image transfer roller cleaning

In order to remove the remaining toner on the image transfer roller, -/+ (DC) charge is applied alternately to transfer the remaining toner on
the image transfer roller to the photo conductor.
The cleaning blade then scrapes off the toner on the surface of the photo conductor.
O-36

TRANSFER/SEPA...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
HV
[3] [2]
[1]
[3]
Cleaning blade
[2]
Photo conductor
8.3.3 Image transfer current upper/lower limit control

The image transfer voltage is determined through the image transfer roller control depends on the environmental conditions. A manual fineadjusting function is also available to achieve an even more optimum image transfer voltage for each type of paper. If, however, a user uses
two types of paper, one having resistance that greatly differs from that of the other, the image transfer voltage is optimized so as to suit
either one of the two types of paper. In this case, an optimum transfer result is not obtained with the other type of paper.
In image transfer current upper/lower limit control, the current that flows through the image transfer section during the print cycle is
measured and the output voltage is automatically controlled (by selecting Service Mode / Imaging Process Adjustment / Transfer Voltage
Fine Adj. / Auto) so that current that falls within an appropriate range flows. The main body can therefore respond to widely ranging types of
paper available in the market without having to make fine-adjustments of the image transfer voltage.
No manually adjusted values are valid during this control.
[User Paper Settings] permits even more optimum image quality for a specific type of paper. The image transfer current upper/lower limit
control does not govern the type of paper to which [User Paper Settings] is applied even during the execution of the control. The result of
manual fine-adjustments is therefore applicable to the specified type of paper.
8.3.4 Charge neutralization and separation of paper

To neutralize any residual potential on the paper which has undergone the image transfer process, there is a charge neutralizing needle
mounted on the guide plate after the image transfer roller. The charge neutralizing needle applies an optimum separation output bias
voltage to the paper to separate it properly based on the information on the type of paper, temperature and humidity, and paper
information (first side or second side).
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
HV
Charge neutralizing needle
[2]
Photo conductor
8.3.5 Measure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor mechanism
The PC thermistor located immediately below the image transfer roller functions to measure the temperature of the area around the photo
conductor inside the main body.
The measured data is used for various controls.
[1]
O-37

TRANSFER/SEPA...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
PC thermistor (TH1)
8.3.6 Image transfer roller new article detection

No new article detection functions are provided. If the Image transfer roller is replaced with a new one, therefore, the Transfer Roller Unit
(1) Number of printed pages produced using the currently installed Image transfer roller
8.3.7 Image transfer roller life detection

The life counter of the image transfer roller controls detection of life of the image transfer roller.
Controlled item
Counting unit
Number of printed pages produced using the currently installed Image transfer roller
sheet
(1) Image transfer roller counter life determination

If the counter value of image transfer roller reaches the threshold, the machine determines that the image transfer roller has reached a
new state.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Image transfer roller (new article)
[2]
[3]
Normal display
[4]
L code display (number of printed pages produced using

the currently installed image transfer roller is exceeded)
[5]
[6]
(a) Transfer roller counter life criteria

State
Normal
Display
Criteria
Less than the threshold value of the number of printed
pages produced using the currently installed image
transfer roller
Normal (print enabled)
Number of printed pages

produced using the
L code display
currently installed image
transfer roller is exceeded
(Reaching life)
Equal to or more than the threshold value of the

number of printed pages produced using the currently
installed image transfer roller
(2) Transfer roller life display

The L code screen is displayed when the number of printed pages produced using the currently installed Image transfer roller counter
reaches the life threshold (print enabled, outside image guaranteed range).
L code
Target unit
L code
Target unit
L-4
Drum unit
L-6
Developer
L-7
Ozone filter
L-8
Paper dust remover
L-9
Developing unit
L-10
Transfer unit
O-38

TRANSFER/SEPA...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
L code
L-11
Target unit
L code
Target unit
Fusing unit
[1]
[1]
[2]
L code key
[2]

touched)
8.3.8 Life value of image transfer roller

NOTE
and parts.
Model
bizhub 363/423
bizhub 223/283

150,000 counts
O-39
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 9. PAPER

FEED SECTION ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9. PAPER FEED SECTION (MANUAL BYPASS TRAY)

9.1 Configuration
[12]
[13]
[1]
[11]
[9] [10]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Paper side guide plate (front)
[5]
Manual CD size sensor (VR81)
[6]
Manual separation roller
[7]
[8]
[9]
Paper side guide plate (rear)
[10]
Manual paper feed roller
[11]
[12]
[13]
9.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Up/down control
The paper lift-up plate is moved up and down by the transport motor.
(1) Up operation
The manual pick-up solenoid is energized for a predetermined period of time during rotation of the transport motor. This unlocks the paper
lift-up plate clutch (mechanical) and the driving force of the transport motor is transmitted to the paper lift-up cam.
As the paper lift-up cam rotates, the paper lift-up plate which has so far been pushed down by the paper lift-up cam is raised to the paper
feed position by the spring.
O-40

FEED SECTION ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Down operation

The manual pick-up solenoid is energized for a predetermined period of time during rotation of the transport motor. This rotates the paper
lift-up cam, so that the cam pushes the paper lift-up plate down into its standby position.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5] [4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Paper lift-up plate clutch (mechanical)
[5]
Paper lift-up cam
[6]
Paper lift-up plate
[7]
Spring
(3) Operation timing

(a) Move to paper feed position (up)
At the start of a manual paper feed sequence, the paper lift-up plate is raised to the paper feed position.
After the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the manual pick-up solenoid is deenergized. The paper lift-up plate is stopped at the
paper feed position.
The manual lift-up position detection plate mounted coaxially with the paper lift-up cam rotates in synchronism with the paper lift-up
cam. When the paper lift-up plate is raised, the manual lift-up position sensor which has been unblocked by the manual lift-up position
detection plate is blocked. Then, the machine determines that the paper lift-up plate is raised to the paper feed position.
If the manual lift-up position sensor remains blocked even after the manual pick-up solenoid has been deenergized, the machine
determines that the paper lift-up plate is at the paper feed position.
As the paper level lowers during paper feed, the spring pushes up the paper lift-up plate, so that the paper stack is pushed up to the
optimum paper feed position.
(b) Move to standby position (down)

The paper lift-up plate is lowered if there is no print job that uses the manual bypass tray and the paper exit sensor detects a sheet of
paper fed from the manual bypass tray.
The paper lift-up plate is lowered if the above conditions are met even during execution of another job.
If a manual paper empty condition is detected at the paper feed position, the paper lift-up plate is lowered to the standby position.
If a paper misfeed occurs, the paper lift-up plate is stopped at the paper feed position. When the transport motor rotates stably after the
misfeed is cleared, the paper lift-up plate is lowered to the standby position.
After the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the manual pick-up solenoid is deenergized. The paper lift-up plate is stopped at the
standby position. As the paper lift-up plate lowers, the manual lift-up position sensor is unblocked. The main body determines that the
paper lift-up plate is at the standby position based on the fact that the manual lift-up position sensor is unblocked even after the manual
pick-up solenoid has been deenergized.
O-41

FEED SECTION ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Paper lift-up cam
[2]
Manual lift-up position detection plate
[3]
[4]
Paper lift-up plate
[5]
Standby position
[6]
Paper feed position
9.3.2 Paper feed control

(1) Pick-up control
Paper feed operations of the manual bypass tray are driven by the transport motor.
The manual pick-up solenoid is energized by a print start signal and the paper is raised to the paper feed position.
After the paper is raised to the paper feed position, the manual paper feed clutch is energized.
When the manual paper feed clutch is energized, the drive from the transport motor is transmitted to the paper feed roller, so that the
paper can be fed in.
The paper feed roller feeds the paper onto the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
When the last sheet of paper for the print job fed from the manual bypass tray is transported onto the tray 2 vertical transport roller, the
manual paper feed clutch is deenergized to stop the paper feed roller from rotating.
If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor does not detect paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine
determines that there is a paper misfeed at the manual bypass tray. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time if a paper
misfeed is detected. If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is still unable to detect paper, the machine determines that there is a paper
misfeed at the manual bypass tray (paper feed retry control).
The manual pick-up solenoid is energized and the paper is lowered to the standby position.
[1]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Paper
(2) Separation control

The separation roller is pressed up against, and driven by, the paper feed roller. A torque limiter is mounted on the shaft of the separation
roller.
The acting pressure of the paper feed roller/separation roller/torque limiter serves as the limit torque for preventing double feed.
O-42

FEED SECTION ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
When there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the separation roller and paper feed roller, the limit torque is
exceeded and the separation roller follows the rotation of the paper feed roller.
If there are two or more sheets of paper between the separation roller and paper feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction
force of the paper, so that the separation roller stops rotating.
Because of the stationary separation roller, the lower sheet of paper in contact with the separation roller is not fed in, so that the first sheet
of paper is properly separated from the second sheet of paper.
(3) Paper misfeed display

NOTE
Different paper misfeed displays appear depending on the settings made in System 2 / JAM Code Display Setting of the
Service Mode.
(a) Typical
(b) System 2 / JAM Code Display Setting
(4) Periodically replaced parts

The paper feed roller and separation roller are periodically replaced parts. These two rollers must be replaced with new ones at the same
time.
Neither the paper feed roller nor separation roller is provided with a new article detection mechanism. When the two rollers are replaced
with new ones, the Manual Tray counter must be reset to zero using Counter / Life of the Service Mode.
The number of times the manual bypass tray has been subjected to paper feed operations can be checked with the Manual Tray counter
of the Service Mode.
Periodical replacement cycle
Paper feed operations 200,000 times
For details of the applicable replacement procedures for the paper feed roller and separation roller and the Service Mode, see F.6.6.1
Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller, F.6.6.2 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy and I.11.12.2 Life.
O-43

FEED SECTION ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[3]
Service Mode/Counter reset screen
[2]
9.3.3 Paper size detection control

The size of the paper loaded in the manual bypass section is detected by the combination of ON or OFF positions of the three manual multi
FD sensors and the manual CD size sensor.
Moving the paper guide rotates the size detection gear and the manual CD size sensor's detector located on the same axis of rotation as the
size detection gear. With the rotation of the manual CD size sensor's detector, a value is detected and used to calculate the paper width.
Metric area
Paper size detected
Manual multi FD
sensor /1
Manual multi FD
sensor /2
Manual multi FD
sensor /3
A6S
B6S
A5
Manual CD size sensor

Unit: mm
80 to less than 115
OFF
OFF
OFF
B5
115 to 144 inclusive

A5S
B5S
169 to less than 196
A4S
ON
OFF
OFF
Letter (8-1/2 11)
A4
FLS (8 13)*

ON
ON
OFF
Legal (8-1/2 14)

B4
Ledger (11 17)

ON
ON
ON
A3

*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS (8 13). 8 13, 8-1/8 13-1/4, 8-1/4 13, 8-1/2 13
Inch area
Paper size detected
Manual multi FD
sensor /1
Manual multi FD
sensor /2
Manual multi FD
sensor /3
A6S

OFF
OFF
OFF
Executive (7-1/4 10-1/2)

Invoice S (5-1/2 8-1/2 S)
Unit: mm
80 to less than 115
B6S
Invoice (5-1/2 8-1/2)

ON
OFF
OFF
O-44

FEED SECTION ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Paper size detected
Manual multi FD
sensor /1
Manual multi FD
sensor /2
Manual multi FD
sensor /3

Unit: mm
Executive S (7-1/4
10-1/2 S)
Letter S (8-1/2 11 S)
Letter (8-1/2 11)
A4
Foolscap (8 13)*
ON
ON
OFF
Legal (8-1/2 14)

B4
Ledger (11 17)

ON
ON
ON
A3

*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for Foolscap (8 13). 8 13, 8-1/8 13-1/4, 8-1/4 13, 8-1/2 13
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Manual CD size sensor (VR81)
9.3.4 Paper empty detection

The manual paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition in the manual bypass section.
O-45

FEED SECTION ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
Actuator (Paper full position)
[2]
Actuator (Paper empty position)
9.3.5 Remaining paper detection control

(1) Paper near-empty control
The manual bypass tray is not mounted with any near-empty detection mechanism.
(2) Paper empty control

(a) Paper conditions
The manual bypass tray is provided with the manual paper empty sensor (interrupter-type photosensor) and the manual paper
detection sensor (reflector-type photosensor).
The following three types of paper conditions are detected according to the combination of the states of the manual paper empty sensor
and manual paper detection sensor:
Paper remaining
Paper not loaded in place
Paper empty
(b) Manual paper empty sensor

When the paper is loaded in the manual bypass tray, the paper empty detection actuator is pressed and lowered by the paper. The
paper empty detection actuator is lowered to block the manual paper empty sensor.
When there is no paper on the manual bypass tray, the paper empty detection actuator is raised. The paper empty detection actuator is
raised to unblock the manual paper empty sensor.
O-46

FEED SECTION ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
[1]
[3]
Actuator (Paper empty position)
[2]
[1]
[2]
Actuator (Paper full position)
(c) Manual paper detection sensor

When paper is loaded on the manual bypass tray, the manual paper detection sensor detects whether or not there is paper.
If the paper lift-up plate is located at the standby position (lower position), however, the detection result is not incorporated under any of
the following conditions because of the limited detection range of the manual paper detection sensor.
At the start of paper feed from the manual bypass tray
The power switch is turned ON
The machine exits the sleep mode
[1]
[1]
(d) Paper condition determination conditions

Paper conditions
Paper remaining
Blocked (Paper remaining)
Paper remaining
Paper not loaded in place
Blocked (Paper remaining)
Paper empty
Unblocked (No paper)
O-47
No paper
Paper remaining
No paper

FEED SECTION ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Paper empty and paper set failure displays
O-48

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY 1/TRAY 2)

10.1 Configuration
10.1.1 Tray 1
(1) Electrical parts configuration
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Tray 1 paper feed sensor (PS11) *
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
*: Dedicated to bizhub 423. bizhub 423 has a faster paper feed speed than bizhub 223/283/363 and a short distance between sheets of
paper. The paper feed sensor is installed for paper feed control purposes.
(2) Mechanical parts configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Tray 1 paper feed roller
[3]
[4]
Tray 1 paper lift-up plate
[5]
Paper guide (CD)
[6]
Paper guide (FD)
[7]
Paper length detection plate
O-49

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10.1.2 Tray 2
(1) Electrical parts configuration
[10] [11] [12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Tray 2 paper feed sensor (PS21) *2
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
*1: The type of the sensor differs between bizhub 223/283/363 and bizhub 423. bizhub 423 incorporates a reflector type and, as a result, is
not provided with any actuator for detecting paper feed.
*2: Dedicated to bizhub 423.
(2) Mechanical parts configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[1]
Tray 2 vertical transport roller
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Paper guide (CD)
[7]
Paper guide (FD)
[8]
Paper length detection plate
O-50

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
The drive parts are arranged in the same way in tray 1 and tray 2. If the description that follows is not identified with tray 1 or tray 2, it is
applicable to both tray 1 and tray 2 in terms of mechanism and control.
The transport motor of each paper feed tray drive the tray 1 and tray 2 paper feed roller section.
The drive section of each paper feed tray has a clutch that controls rotation of the paper feed roller section.
10.2.1 Layout of sensors and rollers
[1]
[2]
[15] [16]
[14]
[3]
[4]
[13]
[5]
[12]
[6]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[1]
Registration roller
[2]
[3]
Paper transport to image transfer section
[4]
Paper transport in vertical transport section
[5]
Manual bypass tray
[6]
[7]
Paper transport from manual bypass tray
[8]
Paper transport from optional paper feed cabinet
[9]
Paper transport from tray 2
[10]
Tray 2
O-51

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[11]
Tray 2 paper feed roller/Tray 2 paper feed sensor (PS21)

*1
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
Tray 1
[16]
Tray 1 paper feed roller/Tray 1 paper feed sensor (PS11)

*1
*1: Dedicated to bizhub 423.

*2: The type of the sensor and the position at which the sensor is disposed differ between bizhub 223/283/363 and bizhub 423. (The illustration
shows, as an example, the location of the sensor in bizhub 423.)
bizhub 423 incorporates a reflector type and, as a result, is not provided with any actuator for detecting paper feed.
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Up/down control
Tray 1 and tray 2 are controlled in the same control procedure.
(1) Up operation
The paper lift-up plate B is located under the paper lift-up plate A.
The lift-up plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is connected to the paper lift-up plate B.
When the drive shaft of the lift-up motor rotates, the paper lift-up plate B raises the paper lift-up plate A.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Lift-up motor (M11/M21)
[2]
Paper lift-up plate B
[3]
Paper lift-up plate A
[4]
Upper limit sensor (PS12/PS22)
(a) Upper position
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Actuator of upper limit sensor (Upper position: Paper full)
[2]
Light blocking plate of upper limit sensor (Lower position:

Unblocked)
[3]
Paper lift-up plate A (Upper position)
[4]
Upper limit sensor (PS12/PS22) (Unblocked)
[5]
Paper lift-up plate B (Upper position)
(2) Down operation

When the paper feed tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling of the lift-up motor and the lift-up plate drive shaft are disconnected from
each other.
When the driving force of the lift-up motor is released from the lift-up plate drive shaft, the paper lift-up plate starts lowering by its own
weight.
O-52

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(a) Down position
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1]
Actuator of upper limit sensor (Lower position: Low

paper level or open paper feed tray)
[2]
Light blocking plate of upper limit sensor (Upper position:

Blocked)
[3]
Paper lift-up plate A (Lower position)
[4]
Upper limit sensor (PS12/PS22) (Blocked)
[5]
Paper lift-up plate B (Lower position)
(3) Operation timing

(a) When the paper feed tray is slid in
When the paper feed tray is slid into the machine, the tray detection sensor is blocked. The machine then determines that the paper
feed tray is slid into position.
The paper lift-up plate is at the lower position when the paper feed tray is slid out, so that the upper limit sensor is unblocked.
Determining that the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper liftup plate.
When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the paper lift-up plate has been started, the upper
limit sensor is blocked.
Determining that the upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-up motor to complete the up operation of the paper lift-up
plate.
Control is provided to make sure that only one paper feed tray performs the up operation at one time.
If the paper feed tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lift-up plate and accordingly the tray detection sensor is unblocked,
the up operation of the paper lift-up plate is terminated.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Paper feed tray
[2]
Detection plate
[3]
Tray detection sensor (PS13/PS23)
[4]
Near empty sensor (PS14/PS24)
(b) During a print cycle

When the amount of paper decreases as the machine keeps printing, the pick-up roller will gradually come down to unblock the upper
limit sensor. The lift-up motor will rotate again to lift up the paper lift-up plate.
When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor will stop to complete the up operation of the paper lift-up plate.
The sequence of these operations is repeated to keep the constant pressure (paper take-up pressure) between the pick-up roller and
the paper stack regardless of the amount of paper still available for use.

Tray 1 and tray 2 are controlled in the same control procedure.
(1) Pick-up control

The paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the print start signal.
O-53

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
The driving force of the transport motor is transmitted to the pick-up roller and paper feed roller when the paper feed clutch is energized.
These rollers rotate to pick up and feed a sheet of paper into the machine.
(2) Separation control

The separation roller is pressed up against, and driven by, the paper feed roller. A torque limiter is mounted on the shaft of the separation
roller.
When there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the separation roller and paper feed roller, the limit torque is
If there are two or more sheets of paper between the separation roller and paper feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction
force of the paper, so that the separation roller stops rotating.
Because of the stationary separation roller, the lower sheet of paper in contact with the separation roller is not fed in, so that the first sheet
of paper is properly separated from the second sheet of paper.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Pick-up roller
[2]
Paper feed roller
[3]
Separation roller
[4]
Paper
(3) Paper feed roller section noise reduction mechanism

During a paper separation sequence, the paper feed roller may vibrate to produce a large operating noise. To reduce the operating noise,
the rotation shaft of the paper feed roller is mounted with a paper feed roller spring.
[2]
[5] [4]
[3]
[1]
[1]
Paper feed roller section
[2]
Pick-up roller
[3]
Paper feed roller spring
[4]
Separation roller
[5]
Paper feed roller
(4) Paper feed retry control

If the specified sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the start of the paper feed
sequence, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed
is detected in a print job. A paper misfeed results if the specified sensor is still unable to detect the paper even after the paper feed retry
sequence, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed.
Paper feed retry control
Paper port
Sensor name
Manual bypass tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (Option: PC-109/208)
Tray3 vertical transport sensor (PS36)
Tray 4 (Option: PC-208)
No paper feed retry control is performed.
O-54

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(5) Paper feed speed reduction control

(a) bizhub 423 (Tray 1/Tray 2)
If there is a small paper-to-paper distance relative to the preceding sheet of paper when the current sheet of paper reaches the paper
feed sensor during a multi-print cycle, the paper feed clutch is temporarily deenergized to thereby retard the paper feed timing of the
current sheet of paper. An appropriate paper-to-paper distance can thereby be ensured.
(b) bizhub 423 (Manual bypass tray)

If there is a small paper-to-paper distance relative to the preceding sheet of paper when the current sheet of paper reaches the tray 2
vertical transport sensor during a multi-print cycle, the paper feed clutch is temporarily deenergized to thereby retard the paper feed
timing of the current sheet of paper. An appropriate paper-to-paper distance can thereby be ensured.
(c) bizhub 223/283/363 (Tray 2/Manual bypass tray)

If there is a small paper-to-paper distance relative to the preceding sheet of paper when the current sheet of paper reaches the tray 2
vertical transport sensor during a multi-print cycle, the paper feed clutch is temporarily deenergized to thereby retard the paper feed
timing of the current sheet of paper. An appropriate paper-to-paper distance can thereby be ensured.
The paper feed speed reduction control is not performed for continuous paper feeding from tray 1, because, in this case, the paper
does not move past the tray 2 vertical transport sensor. (The paper feed sensor is mounted only on bizhub 423.)
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
Preceding sheet
[2]
Paper-to-paper distance
[3]
Paper feed sensor (PS11/PS21)
[4]
Sheet of paper being controlled
(6) Paper feed control

(a) Tray 1
The tray 1 paper feed roller feeds the paper onto the registration roller.
The tray 1 paper feed sensor located downstream of the tray 1 paper feed roller detects the paper fed from the tray 1 paper feed roller.
If the paper feed timing of the paper fed from the tray 1 paper feed roller is earlier than a predetermined value, the tray 1 paper feed
clutch is deenergized to correct the paper feed timing. For more details, see Paper feed speed reduction control. (The paper feed
sensor is mounted on bizhub 423 only.)
When the paper fed from the tray 1 paper feed roller moves past the registration roller and reaches a predetermined position, the tray 1
paper feed clutch is deenergized to disconnect the driving force of the transport motor. The tray 1 pick-up roller and tray 1 paper feed
roller follow the movement of the paper, continuing rotating. The tray 1 pick-up roller and tray 1 paper feed roller stop rotating as soon
as the paper moves past them.
If the registration sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the main body determines
that there is a paper misfeed. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed is detected (paper feed retry
control). If the registration sensor is still unable to detect the paper, the main body determines that there is a paper misfeed at tray 1
and displays the message of PAPER JAM on the control panel.
For details of paper misfeed detection conditions, see TROUBLESHOOTING / JAM DISPLAY / List of the JAM code for the main
body.
(b) Tray 2
The tray 2 paper feed roller feeds the paper onto the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
The tray 2 paper feed sensor located downstream of the tray 2 paper feed roller detects the paper fed from the tray 2 paper feed roller.
If the paper feed timing of the paper fed from the tray 2 paper feed roller is earlier than a predetermined value, the tray 2 paper feed
clutch is deenergized to correct the paper feed timing. For more details, see Paper feed speed reduction control. (The paper feed
sensor is mounted on bizhub 423 only.)
When the tray 2 vertical transport sensor detects the leading edge of the paper fed from the tray 2 paper feed roller, the tray 2 paper
feed clutch is deenergized to disconnect the driving force of the transport motor. The tray 2 pick-up roller and tray 2 paper feed roller
follow the movement of the paper, continuing rotating. The tray 2 pick-up roller and tray 2 paper feed roller stop rotating as soon as the
paper moves past them.
Different models of bizhub use different types of the tray 2 vertical transport sensor.
bizhub 423 incorporates a reflector type. As the paper moves past the sensor, the sensor receives a sensor light reflected off the paper.
The main body thereby determines that a sheet of paper has moved past the sensor.
bizhub 223/283/363 incorporates an interrupter type. When the paper moves past the sensor, the leading edge of the paper pushes the
actuator. This blocks or unblocks the sensor light, so that the main body determines that a sheet of paper has moved past the sensor.
bizhub 423 uses the reflector type, because it transports paper at higher speeds than the other models.
O-55

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2]

(For bizhub 423)
[3]
Actuator of tray 2 vertical transport sensor

(For bizhub 223/283/363)
[4]

(For bizhub 223/283/363)
If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time, the main body determines that there is a paper misfeed. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed
is detected (paper feed retry control). If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is still unable to detect the paper, the main body determines
that there is a paper misfeed at tray 2.
For details of paper misfeed detection conditions, see TROUBLESHOOTING / JAM DISPLAY / List of the JAM code for the main
body.
(7) Paper misfeed display

NOTE
Different paper misfeed displays appear depending on the settings made in System 2 / JAM Code Display Setting of the
Service Mode.
(a) Tray 1 (typical)
(b) Tray 2 (typical)
O-56

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(c) System 2 / JAM Code Display Setting
(8) Downstream exit control during multi-print cycle

The following terms are used for convenience' sake throughout this chapter.
Upstream: Refers to the source side of paper supply relative to the paper feeding direction
Downstream: Refers to the destination side of paper transport relative to the paper feeding direction
If a paper misfeed occurs at the paper feed section which is upstream in paper transport, the print cycle is not brought to an immediate
stop; rather, the machine allows a sheet of paper, for which the print cycle is to be completed at a downstream side, to continue
undergoing the current print cycle and feeds the printed page out after completion of the current print cycle.
(a) Types of paper misfeed governed by downstream exit control

Misfeed at tray 1
Misfeed at tray 2
Misfeed at tray 3 (PC-208)
Misfeed at tray 3 (PC-409) *
Misfeed at tray 4 (PC-208)
Misfeed at manual bypass tray section
Misfeed at vertical transport section

*: Excluding misfeed at tray 3 when the main body is mounted with the optional paper feed cabinet PC-409
(b) Paper pass (In the case of the tray 2)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[14]
[13]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[12]
[8]
[11]
[9]
[10]
[1]
Paper exit/switchback roller
[2]
Duplex transport roller/1
[3]
Pressure roller
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Registration roller
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Transport paper from paper feed section (tray 2)
[12]
Photo conductor
[13]
Heating roller
[14]
(c) 1-sided printing

Operation 1
O-57
bizhub 423/363/283/223

FEED SECTION...
In consecutive 1-sided printing, the 4th sheet causes a jamming
at the paper feed tray section. [3]
The 1st sheet after an image transfer is remained at the fusing
section and the paper exit section. [4]
The 2nd sheet before an image transfer is remained at the
vertical conveyance section and the registration section. [5]
The 3rd sheet before an image transfer is remained at the paper
feed section and the registration section. [6]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[1]
Sheet before a 1-sided image transfer
[2]
Sheet after a 1-sided image transfer
[3]
4th sheet: Jamming
[4]
1st sheet
[5]
2nd sheet
[6]
3rd sheet
Operation 2
[3]
Stop the feeding and conveying operation of the 4th sheet. [1]
Exit the 1st sheet. [2]
Transfer/fuse images on the 2nd sheet. [3]
Convey the 3rd sheet to transfer images. [4]
[2]
[4]
[1]
Operation 3
Exit the 2nd sheet. [1]
Fuse the 3rd sheet to exit paper. [2]
[2]
[1]
(d) 2-sided printing

Operation 1
O-58

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
In consecutive 2-sided printing, the 4th sheet causes a jamming

at the paper feed tray section. [4]
The 1st sheet after a 2-sided image transfer is remained at the
paper exit section. [5]
The 2nd sheet after a 1-sided image fusing is remained at the
duplex section. [6]
The 3rd sheet before an image transfer is remained at the vertical
conveyance section and the registration section. [7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[1]
Sheet before a 1-sided image transfer
[2]
[3]
[4]
4th sheet: Jamming
[5]
1st sheet
[6]
2nd sheet
[7]
3rd sheet
Operation 2
[4]
Stop the feeding and conveying operation of the 4th sheet. [1]
Exit the 1st sheet. [2]
Transfer/fuse 2-sided images on the 2nd sheet. [3]
Transfer/fuse 1-sided images on the 3rd sheet to convey it to the
duplex section. [4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Operation 3
Exit the 2nd sheet. [1]
Stop the 3rd sheet at the duplex section. [2]
[1]
[2]
Operation 4
The 3rd sheet of paper left in the duplex section should be removed by opening the duplex section cover.
NOTE
3rd sheets are conveyed to the duplex section which allowed removing a jamming easily. 2-sided images are not printed on a
sheet conveyed to the duplex section.
O-59

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223

The pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller are periodically replaced parts. These three rollers must be replaced with new
ones at the same time.
None of the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller is provided with a new article detection mechanism. When the three
rollers are replaced with new ones, the 1st. or 2nd. counter must be reset to zero using Counter / Life of the Service Mode.
The number of times tray 1/tray 2 has been subjected to paper feed operations can be checked with the 1st./2nd. counter of the Service
Mode.
For details of the applicable replacement procedures for the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller and the Service Mode,
see F.6.6.3 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller, F.6.6.5 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller, F.6.6.4
Replacing the tray 1 separation roller, F.6.6.6 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller, and I.11.12.2 Life.
[1]
[1]
[2]
Paper feed roller/Pick-up roller/Separation roller
[2]
10.3.3 Paper size detection control

(1) Main scanning direction
The size in the main scanning direction is detected based on the combination of paper CD size detect sensor/1 and paper CD size detect
sensor/2 being unblocked or blocked.
The paper CD size detect sensor/1 and paper CD size detect sensor/2 are unblocked or blocked by the paper width detection plate
provided in the paper width guide plate.
(2) Sub scanning direction

The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of ON or OFF position of switches 1 to 4 mounted on the
paper FD sensor board.
Each of switches 1 to 4 is turned ON or OFF by the paper length detection plate connected to the paper length guide plate.
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Paper CD size detect sensor/2 (PS17/PS27)
[2]
[3]
Paper CD size detect sensor/1 (PS16/PS26)
[4]
Detection plate
[5]
Paper guide (CD)
[6]
Paper guide (FD)
[7]
Switch 4 (SW4)
[8]
Switch 3 (SW3)
[9]
Switch 2 (SW2)
[10]
Switch 1 (SW1)
[11]
Paper FD sensor board (PSDB11/PSDB21)
O-60

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Paper size determination

Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will decide a paper size.
Paper FD sensor board
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
Paper CD size detect

sensor/1

sensor/2
A3
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
Blocked
Unblocked
B4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Blocked
Unblocked
A4S
ON
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
Unblocked
Unblocked
ON/OFF
ON
ON
ON
Blocked
Unblocked
B5S
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Unblocked
Unblocked
B5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Blocked
Unblocked
ON/OFF
ON
ON
ON
Unblocked
Unblocked
Ledger (11 17)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Blocked
Blocked
Legal (8-1/2 14)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Unblocked
Unblocked
Letter S (8-1/2 11 S)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Unblocked
Unblocked
Letter (8-1/2 11)
ON
ON
ON
ON
Blocked
Blocked
Paper size
A4
A5S
Invoice S
FLS *
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Unblocked
Unblocked
K8 S (270 mm 390 mm)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Blocked
Blocked
K16 (270 mm 195 mm)
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Blocked
Blocked
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS. 220 330 mm, 8 13, 8-1/8 13-1/4, 8-1/4 13, 8-1/2 13
Switch/sensor states
Physical state
Switch/sensor
Paper FD sensor board: Switches 1 to 4
Tray 1 paper CD size detect sensor/1, 2
Tray 2 paper CD size detect sensor/1, 2
HIGH signal
LOW signal
OFF
ON
Blocked
Unblocked
10.3.4 Paper level detection control

The paper level detection control is performed under any of the following conditions:
Tray 1/tray 2 is closed in position
The up/down control of the paper lift-up plate is completed
(1) Paper near-empty detection

The near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the paper feed tray.
As paper is consumed, the position of the near empty detection actuator provided at the lift-up plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is
raised.
When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the near empty sensor is blocked, the machine detects a nearempty condition.
A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use becomes about 50 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in
terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).
O-61

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Actuator
[3]
Paper lift-up plate B (upper position)
[4]
[5]
Pick-up roller
[6]
Paper lift-up plate A (upper position)
(2) Paper empty detection

The tray 1 and tray 2 use the same control system to detect a paper empty condition.
A paper empty condition is detected by the tray detection sensor, upper limit sensor, and paper empty sensor.
Based on the combination of detection signals from each of the sensors, a paper empty condition is detected.
Sensor
Paper empty
Paper empty sensor
Unblocked
Blocked
Upper limit sensor
Unblocked
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[5] [4]
[1]
Pick-up roller
[2]
Paper feed roller
[3]
Paper feed sensor (PS11/PS21) (bizhub 423 only)
[4]
Paper empty detection plate (Lower position: paper

empty)
O-62

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[5]
Paper empty sensor (PS15/PS25)
[7]
Paper empty detection plate (Upper position: paper

remaining)
[6]
(3) Paper level display

The amount of paper is indicated by the LED on the right side of each paper feed tray and by the screen of the control panel.
The following shows how the paper level is displayed.
Paper feed tray condition
Empty
Near empty
Other statuses
(Including during lift-up and no paper feed tray
conditions)
LED
ON
Blinking *
OFF
*: The LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode / System 1 / Machine State LED Setting / Paper Remainder.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Tray3 LED board (LEDB31) (For option PC-109/208)
[3]
Tray3 LED board (LEDB51) (For option PC-409)
[4]
[5]
Paper near empty display
[6]
Paper empty display
10.3.5 Paper feed tray locking mechanism

The paper feed tray is provided with a locking mechanism.
(1) Unlocking the paper feed tray

Withdrawing the knob of the paper feed tray to the front will disengage the tray lock pawl provided on the right side of the paper feed tray.
The paper feed tray can be pulled out of the machine by continuing pulling the knob with the tray lock pawl disengaged.
Rollers are provided for the right and left tray rails. They reduce the operating force required for sliding in/out the paper feed tray.
(2) Locking the paper feed tray

Pushing the knob of the paper feed tray all the way toward the rear will allow the paper feed tray to be slid into the machine.
When the paper feed tray is inserted all the way in place, the tray lock pawl provided on the right side of the paper feed tray locks the tray
in place.
O-63

FEED SECTION...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Lock pawl
[2]
Lock lever
[3]
Knob
[4]
Roller
O-64

223/283/363/423 > 11. REGISTRATION SECTI...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11. REGISTRATION SECTION

11.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Registration roller
[4]
[2]
11.2 Drive
[1]
[1]
[2]
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Registration control
The transport motor provides the drive for the registration roller.
The registration clutch is connected to the registration roller. When the registration clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport
motor is transmitted to the registration roller. This rotates the registration roller.
The paper will create a loop between the tray 1 paper feed roller (or tray 2 vertical transport roller/manual paper feed clutch) and the
registration roller when the paper is being conveyed in order to correct the skew.
The registration roller is controlled in order to synchronize the timing the unit starts writing the image and conveying paper.
(1) Adjustment
The amount of the loop of the paper can be adjusted in the Service Mode / Machine / Printer Reg. Loop Adj.. Changing the adjustment
value will change the OFF timing of the tray 1 paper feed clutch (or tray 2 vertical transport clutch).
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
O-65
Actuator

bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.2 Registration roller paper dust remover mechanism

The paper dust remover is disposed so as to be in contact with the registration roller (driven side) in order to remove paper dust from the
registration section.
The paper dust remover is pressed up against the registration roller (driven side) at all times and is not provided with any retraction
mechanism.
[2]
[1]
[1]
Paper dust remover
[2]
Registration roller
11.3.3 Paper dust remover new article detection

No new article detection functions are provided. If the paper dust remover is replaced with a new one, therefore, the Paper Dust Remover
Rotation Time counter must be reset using Service Mode / Counter / Life.
(1) Paper dust remover rotation time
11.3.4 Paper dust remover life detection

The life counter of the paper dust remover controls detection of life of the paper dust remover.
Controlled item
Counting unit
Paper dust remover rotation time
M*
*: M represents a code that denotes the paper dust remover rotation time.
(1) Paper dust remover rotation time counter life determination

If the counter value of paper dust remover rotation time reaches the threshold, the machine determines that the paper dust remover has
reached a new state.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Paper dust remover (new article)
[2]
[3]
Normal display
[4]
L code display (Paper dust remover rotation time excess)
[5]
[6]
O-66

bizhub 423/363/283/223
(a) Paper dust remover rotation time counter life criteria

State
Display
Criteria
Normal
Normal (print enabled)
Less than the paper dust remover rotation time

threshold
Paper dust remover

rotation time excess
(Reaching life)
L code display
Equal to or more than the paper dust remover rotation

time threshold
(2) Paper dust remover life display

The L code screen is displayed when the value of the paper dust remover rotation time counter reaches the life threshold (print enabled,
outside image guaranteed range).
L code
Target unit
L code
Target unit
L-4
Drum unit
L-6
Developer
L-7
Ozone filter
L-8
Paper dust remover
L-9
Developing unit
L-10
Transfer unit
L-11
Fusing unit
[1]
[1]
[2]
L code key
[2]

touched)
11.3.5 Life value of paper dust remover

NOTE
and parts.
Model
bizhub 363/423
3,921M
bizhub 223/283
4,845M
O-67
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 12. FUSING

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12. FUSING SECTION

12.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[1]
Paper transport roller
[2]
Paper transport roll
[3]
Fusing separation claw
[4]
Pressure roller
[5]
Heating roller fusing heater lamp (FH)
[6]
Heating roller thermostat (TS)
[7]
Heating roller thermistor (TH2)
[8]
[2]
12.2 Drive
[2]
[1]
[1]
Heating roller
12.3 Operation
12.3.1 Fusing roller drive control
Drive of the fusing unit is controlled by the transport motor.
The transport motor drives the heating roller and the pressure roller is driven by the heating roller.
12.3.2 Fusing temperature control

The surface temperature of the heating roller is detected using thermistors and the corresponding heater lamps are turned ON or OFF as
necessary to maintain the set fusing temperature.
O-68

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
0
[1]
Power switch ON
[2]
During the warm-up cycle
[3]
Warm-up completed
[4]
In standby state
[5]
Print start command
[6]
During a print cycle
[7]
In standby state
[8]
Sleep mode
[9]
Warm-up complete temperature
(1) Temperature control during warm-up

Control is provided until the heating roller reaches the predetermined temperature.
(a) Control start timing

The power switch is turned ON.
The main body leaves the sleep mode.
A door is closed.
(b) Control termination timing

The heating roller reaches a predetermined temperature.
A door is opened.
(2) Temperature control during stand-by

Controlled so as to make the temperature of the heating roller suitable for printing. Also controlled so as to shorten the period of time it
takes the main body to enter the print mode.

At the end of the warm-up control
At the end of a print cycle

At the start of a print cycle
A door is opened.
A malfunction occur.
(3) Temperature control during printing

The heating roller temperature is controlled according to the type of media and environmental conditions in order to achieve good fusing
performance.

A print request is received.

A malfunction or media misfeed occurs.
A door is opened.
At the end of a print cycle
(c) Print control temperatures

The heating roller temperature is set according to the type of media, main body interior temperature (as measured by the temperature/
humidity sensor), and so on.
O-69

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(4) Temperature control during sleep mode

The heating roller fusing heater lamp is turned OFF during the sleep mode.
12.3.3 Protection from abnormal temperatures

(1) Heating roller thermistor protection (software)
The heating roller thermistors are connected via a short-circuit connector. If a connection failure occurs in the heating roller thermistor as
a result of the thermistor's not being connected via the short-circuit connector, a heater remote is cut off.
If the above condition is detected, the machine displays the malfunction code representing a warm-up failure and prohibits the initiation of
a new copy cycle. (This is an ordinary detection of a warm-up failure.)
When the heating roller thermistor detects a predetermined temperature due to an abnormally high temperature as a result of a faulty triac
or remote driver, the main body displays a malfunction code representing an abnormally high temperature and prohibits the initiation of a
new copy cycle. (This is an ordinary detection of a malfunction of an abnormally high temperature.)
(2) Heating roller thermistor protection (hardware)

A different protection is provided when the CPU overruns, becoming unable to detect the malfunction of an abnormally high temperature.
If the heating roller thermistor detects a predetermined temperature, the heater relay of the power supply unit is turned OFF through the
printer control board and the power supply to each of the heating roller fusing heater lamps is shut down. If the detected temperature
thereafter decreases, the heater relay is turned ON again and supply of power to the heater lamps is resumed. The sequence of these
operations is repeated until the CPU recovers from the overrun and becomes able to detect the malfunction of an abnormally high
temperature. This control allows the power supply to each of the heater lamps to be shut down before the corresponding thermostat
operates. It thereby suppresses damage to the Fusing Unit itself.
(3) Heating roller thermostat protection

If detection of the abnormally high temperature is not possible due to a defective heating roller thermistor or other reason, the heating
roller thermostat comes into play to shut down the power supply to each of the heating roller fusing heater lamps. The heating roller
thermostat is rated at the predetermined temperature. (Ordinary protection against abnormally high temperatures)
12.3.4 Paper feed wait control

If Thick 1/2, User Paper Settings (Thick 1/2), postcards, envelopes, or letterhead is selected, the transport motor is deenergized at the start
of the print cycle regardless of the paper size, thereby delaying the paper feed sequence three sec.
The paper feed wait control is performed only for the first sheet of paper.
12.3.5 Paper-to-paper distance control

Degraded fusing performance results due to a reduced temperature at the fusing section, if a continuous print cycle is run to produce printed
pages on thick paper. To prevent this, a predetermined paper-to-paper distance is provided, thereby preventing the temperature of the
fusing section from decreasing and maintaining an intended level of fusing performance.
The paper-to-paper distance control is performed for the second and subsequent sheets of paper.
The control is applicable to Thick 1/2, User Paper Settings (Thick 1/2), envelopes, postcards, and letterhead.
The control is enabled or disabled by so setting in [Fusing Productivity Choice] available from the Service Mode.
12.3.6 Curl prevention control

Paper after the fusing process can be prevented from curling by delaying the paper feed sequence according to the type of the paper
selected.
Timing at which to execute the control can be changed using [Print Interval Extension] of the Service Mode.
12.3.7 Fusing unit new article detection

No new article detection functions are provided. If the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, therefore, the Fusing Unit Rotation Time
(1) Fusing unit rotation time
12.3.8 Fusing unit life detection

The life counter of the fusing unit controls detection of life of the fusing unit.
Controlled item
Counting unit
Fusing unit rotation time
M*
O-70

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
*: M represents a code that denotes the fusing unit rotation time.
(1) Fusing unit rotation time counter life determination

If the counter value of fusing unit rotation time reaches the threshold, the machine determines that the fusing unit has reached a new
state.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[9]
[1]
Fusing unit (new article)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Normal display
[6]
L code display (Replacement alarm display: Fusing unit

rotation time excess)
[7]
[8]
[9]
(a) Fusing unit rotation time counter life criteria

State
Display
Criteria
Normal
Normal
Less than the fusing unit rotation time threshold
Fusing unit rotation time

excess (Reaching life)
L code display
Equal to or more than the fusing unit rotation time

threshold
Replacement alarm

Equal to or more than the fusing unit rotation time

stop threshold
Life stop *
Equal to or more than the fusing unit rotation time life

stop threshold
(2) Fusing unit life display

The life reaching screen is displayed when the value of the fusing unit rotation time counter reaches the life threshold (print enabled,
outside image guaranteed range).
The L code screen is displayed when the value of the fusing unit rotation time counter reaches the fusing unit rotation time threshold (print
L code
Target unit
L code
Target unit
L-4
Drum unit
L-6
Developer
L-7
Ozone filter
L-8
Paper dust remover
L-9
Developing unit
L-10
Transfer unit
L-11
Fusing unit
The life stop screen is displayed when the value of the fusing unit rotation time counter reaches the life stop threshold (print prohibited).
O-71

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[1]
[2]
L code key
[2]

touched)
12.3.9 Life value of fusing unit

NOTE
and parts.
Model
Replacement alarm
Life stop
bizhub 423
14,800 M
15,800 M
16,440 M
bizhub 363
16,130 M
17,200 M
17,920 M
bizhub 223/283
19,930 M
21,350 M
22,300 M
O-72

EXIT/SWITCHB...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13. PAPER EXIT/SWITCHBACK SECTION

13.1 Configuration/Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Paper exit/switchback roll
13.2 Operation
13.2.1 Transport control
(1) Paper transport path
The paper exit/switchback roller is driven by the switchback motor.
The duplex transport roller 1 is driven by the duplex transport motor.
In 1-sided printing, the paper exit/switchback roller rotates forward and the paper transported from the fusing section is ejected onto the
paper exit tray. In the second print cycle in 2-sided mode, the paper is ejected in the same manner.
(2) Duplex transport

In the first print cycle in 2-sided mode, the paper transported from the fusing section is transported to the paper exit direction. When the
paper reaches a predetermined position, the paper exit/switchback roller rotates backward to convey the paper to the duplex transport
roller 1. For details, see O.14.1 Configuration/Drive.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Duplex transport roller 1
[4]
[5]
2-sided mode paper path
[6]
O-73
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 14. DUPLEX

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14. DUPLEX SECTION

14.1 Configuration/Drive
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
14.2 Operation
14.2.1 Paper transport control
Paper transported from the paper exit/switchback section is transported to the internal duplex section by the duplex transport roller 1.
Paper is transported to the registration section by the duplex transport roller 2 and 3 to re-transport the paper.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[17]
[4]
[16]
[15]
[5]
[14]
[13]
[6]
[12]
[11] [10] [9]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
Registration roller
[14]
Photo conductor
[15]
[16]
Fusing roller (Heating roller/Pressure roller)
[17]
O-74

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Transport roller control

The duplex transport roller 1, duplex transport roller 2 and duplex transport roller 3 are connected to duplex transport motor. When the
duplex transport motor is energized, these rollers start rotating to transport paper.
(2) Paper entrance control

The paper transported from the fusing section is temporarily fed in the paper exit direction. When the paper reaches a predetermined
position, the switchback motor of the exit section is rotated backward. Then, the paper exit/switchback roller is rotated backward, so that
the paper is fed to the duplex transport roller 1.
When the paper reaches a predetermined position, the duplex transport motor of the duplex section is energized. The duplex transport
roller 1 is then rotated to transport the paper fed from the paper exit section to the duplex transport roller 2.
The duplex unit upper transport sensor located downstream of the duplex transport roller 2 along the paper path detects the leading edge
of the paper transported from the duplex transport roller 1.
The paper is transported from the duplex transport roller 2 to the duplex transport roller 3.
(3) Duplex paper feed control

The duplex unit lower transport sensor located upstream of the duplex transport roller 3 along the paper path detects the leading edge of
the paper transported from the duplex transport roller 2.
When the leading edge of the paper moves past the duplex unit lower transport sensor and reaches the specified position, the duplex
transport motor is deenergized to stop the transport of the paper temporarily (re-feeding position).
At predetermined paper feed timing, the duplex transport motor is energized to resume the transport of the paper.
The paper is fed from the duplex transport roller 3 onto the registration roller at the vertical transport part.
14.2.2 Duplex circulation control

The duplex circulation control is performed differently according to the length of the paper.
Paper length
Duplex circulation control
Lower limit
Upper limit
Letter (215.9 mm)
Ledger (431.8 mm)
One-sheet circulation operation
B5 (182 mm)
Letter (215.9 mm)
Two-sheet circulation operation
(1) One-sheet circulation operation

Operation 1
The first sheet of paper is taken up and fed in from the main body
drawer and the main body starts the first print cycle to produce the
print image of the second page of the original [2].
[2]
Operation 2
[2]
The 1-sided print is transported to the paper exit/switchback

section.
When the paper reaches a predetermined position, the direction of
rotation of the paper exit/switchback roller is changed and the 1sided print is transported toward and into the duplex unit.
Operation 3
O-75
bizhub 423/363/283/223

SECTION
The 1-sided print, which is being fed through the duplex section, is
temporarily stopped at the re-transport position and then retransported.
[2]
Operation 4
The main body carries out the second print cycle to produce the
print image of the first page of the original [1] on the other side of
the 1-sided print.
[1] [2]
Operation 5
The first 2-sided print is fed out to the exit section of the main
body.
At the same time that the first 2-sided print is fed out of the main
body, the image of the fourth page of the original [4] is printed on
the second sheet of paper.
[2]
[1]
[4]
Steps 2 through 5 are repeated.
(2) Two-sheet circulation operation

Operation 1
The first sheet of paper is taken up and fed in from the main body
drawer and the main body starts the first print cycle to produce the
print image of the second page of the original [2].
[2]
Operation 2
[2]
The 1-sided print is transported to the paper exit/switchback

section.
rotation of the paper exit/switchback roller is changed and the 1sided print is transported toward and into the duplex unit.
At the same time that the 1-sided print is transported, the second
sheet of paper is taken up and fed into the main body.
Operation 3
O-76

SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
The print image of the fourth page of the original is produced on

the second sheet of paper [4] and the paper is transported to the
paper exit/switchback section.
At the same time, the first 1-sided print is transported through the
duplex section.
[4]
[2]
Operation 4
The main body produces the print image of the first page of the
original [1] on the first 1-sided print.
At the same time that the image of the first page of the original is
printed, the third sheet of paper is taken up and fed into the main
body.
The second 1-sided print is transported through the duplex section.
[1] [2]
[4]
Operation 5
While feeding the first 2-sided print out, main body produces the
print image of the 6th page of the original [6] on the third sheet of
paper.
The second 1-sided print is stopped immediately after the duplex
transport roller 3 and waits until the third sheet of paper undergoes
the print process for printing the print image of the 6th page of the
original.
[2]
[1]
[6]
[4]
Operation 6
[2]
[1]
The third 1-sided print is transported to the paper exit/switchback

section.
rotation of the paper exit/switchback roller is changed and the third
1-sided print is transported toward and into the duplex unit.
At the same time, a sequence is started to re-feed the second 1sided print that has been in the standby state in the duplex unit.
[6]
[4]
Operation 7
[2]
[1]
[3] [4]
[6]
The main body carries out the first print cycle for the second sheet
of paper to produce the print image of the third page of the original
[3].
At the same time, the third 1-sided print is transported through the
duplex section.
At the same time, the forth sheet of paper is taken up and fed into
the main body.
Operation 8
O-77
bizhub 423/363/283/223
While feeding the second 2-sided print out, main body produces
the print image of the 8th page of the original [8] on the fourth
sheet of paper.
The third 1-sided print is stopped immediately after the duplex
transport roller 3 and waits until the fourth sheet of paper
undergoes the print process for printing the print image of the 8th
page of the original.
[4]
[3] [2]
[1]

SECTION
[8] [6]
Steps 6 through 8 are repeated.
O-78

PROCESSING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15. IMAGE PROCESSING

15.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram
1. Photoelectric conversion
CCD sensor board

2. Analog-to-digital conversion
To the MFP board
The following detail the image processing operations performed by the scanner section.
1. A reduction type CCD sensor is used to read the light reflected off the original and convert the optical data to a corresponding electric
signal. To make data processing faster, data transfer and output are done through two channels, one for even-numbered pixels and the
other for odd-numbered pixels.
2. The odd and even analog signals output from the CCD sensor chips are synthesized to form a single string of signal data which is in
turn converted to 10-bit digital signals (1024 gradation levels).
The image data is transmitted to MFP board on the write section through the interface cable.
O-79

PROCESSING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15.2 Write section image processing block diagram

From scanner section
MFP board
1. Shading correction
2. Line-to-line variation
correction/color
aberration correction
16. Frame memory
17. Output buffer memory

3. Detection of security pattern
18. BTC expansion
4. Free erase
19. Resolution conversion
processing in the main
scanning direction/move
ment processing
5. ACS control
6. AE processing
20. Resolution conversion
processing in the sub
scanning direction
7. Image data editing
21. Color conversion

processing
V to K
8. Image area discrimination

Monochrome data creation
Mode other than

photo
9. Miscellaneous processing
(improved reproduction of
black text, edge emphasis,
smoothing and color balance)
23. Area discrimination FEET
24. Interpolation
10. BTC compression
11. Input buffer memory
Gamma correction
12. JBIG compression
26. Error diffusion

(binary)
13. File (code) memory

DRAM:2GB (standard)
HDD:250GB (standard)
14. JBIG expansion
22. Embedment of security

pattern
25. Gamma correction
27. Screening
28. Speed conversion
Modulation
15. Memory access coordinator
To PH unit
The following detail the image processing operations performed by MFP board on the Write section.
1. Correct variations in reading caused by pixel-to-pixel variations in sensitivity of the CCD sensor and uneven light distribution by the
exposure lamp. A peak-hold-type shading correction is performed, in which the maximum value of two or more readings of two or more
lines is taken to prevent effect due to dust or dirt on the shading sheet.
2. To correct differences in the position of each chip of CCD sensors R, G, and B, FIFO memory is adopted to match the output timing.
Also correct color aberration of the lens.
3. The security pattern created during printing on this machine is detected and copying is enabled or disabled through a password (when
the security kit SC-507 is mounted).
4. If outer document elimination is selected from the control panel, document area determination processing is performed for each line
within the document area data acquired during prescan. Then, the START and END positions of the document area in the main
scanning direction are detected and the area outside the START and END positions is erased as the outside-the-document area.
5. The scanning area is divided into multiple blocks. The ratio of color or monochrome is calculated for each of these blocks. The machine
then determines whether the entire original is colored or monochrome.
6. A histogram of lightness for AE processing is generated. The AE level of the document is determined based on this histogram and AE
processing is performed.
7. R, G, and B data are then converted to value and color component data for adjustments of saturation, lightness, and hue.
8. Each image area, whether it is a color edge area, black edge area, dot area, or a continuous gradation area, is discriminated.
9. Other types of processing performed are the improved reproduction of black text, edge emphasis, smoothing and color balance.
10. Each Image data of R, G, and B is compressed to reduce the consumption of data capacity.
11. Temporarily stores the BTC-compressed image data.
12. The stored image data is compressed in the JBIG (Joint Bi-level image Experts Group) format.
13. Each Image data of R, G, and B in the copy, print, scan, and fax mode is stored. In PS printing, multi-valued data of Y, M, C, and K is
stored.
O-80
bizhub 423/363/283/223

PROCESSING
14. The image data read from the file memory is uncompressed through a method in a reverse way of JBIG compression. At this time,
image rotating or sorting processing is conducted.
15. JBIG image data are expanded in the frame memory.
16. Each Image data of R, G, and B is stored in the frame memory.
17. Temporarily stores the image data output from the frame memory.
18. The image data is expanded through a method opposite to that used in the BTC compression.
19. FIFO memory is used to enlarge or reduce images in the main scanning direction. The image is enlarged by increasing the number of
data readings and reduced by decreasing the number of data readings.
20. Reduction processing is conducted in sub scanning direction. No processing is done at same size or zoom, but at reduction, the lines
are thinned out.
21. When copying in a photo mode or making PC print, the V data is converted to the K density data. Also, the masking processing, which
compensates for the deviation in the spectral reflection characteristics of the toner, and UCR/BP processing are performed on the image
data.
For PS printing, multi-valued data of Y, M, C, and K are stored and there is no need of converting or processing those data.
22. The security pattern is embedded in the image data. Either enabling copying through a password or unconditionally prohibiting copying
can be selected from the control panel for the security pattern to be embedded (when the security kit SC-507 is mounted).
23. Edge of letter and lineal drawing gets area discrimination and FEET processing is conducted according to the discrimination result.
24. When FEET processing is conducted, interpolation is done so that no influence is given to continuous gradation portion.
25. Makes the necessary corrections so that the printed gradations have linear characteristics, since the image density of the input image
data is not directly proportional to that of the printed image because of the changing developing and photo conductor characteristics.
26. In photo mode during copying and PC print, the image is processed as multi-valued data (8-bit data). In any mode other than photo, the
error diffusion method is employed to process the image as binary (1-bit) data.
27. Creates the density distribution of a predetermined pattern to enable outstanding gradation reproduction.
28. Adjust the processing speed in the board (main scanning) to conform to the input processing speed. The laser is emitted according to
the laser intensity information.
O-81
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 16. POWER

SUPPLY SECTI...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16. POWER SUPPLY SECTION

16.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON
16.1.1 Configuration
16.1.2 Operation
When the main power switch is turned ON, power is supplied from the DC power supply unit to the following components.
Voltage
Power supplied to
24V
Printer control board, Scanner relay board
12V
Printer control board, MFP board, Control panel, Scanner relay board, CCD board
5.1V
Printer control board, MFP board, Control panel, Scanner relay board, CCD board, USB board
3.3V
16.1.3 Auto power OFF system

NOTE
This function is used only in the Europe area. However, it is limited to the machine by which it was equipped with the main power
switch (A2WUM600**) corresponding to "AUTO POWER OFF SETTING."
The main power switch is mounted with a function that automatically turns it OFF.
Using Utility Administrator Settings System Settings Power Save Settings Auto Power OFF Setting, the time of day can
be set at which to turn OFF the power.
NOTE
Default setting
Turning OFF (Yes: 20:00)
For details, see I.6.1.5 Auto Power OFF Setting.
[1]
[1]
Main power switch (SW1) (Front view)
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
O-82
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 16. POWER

SUPPLY SECTI...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
Power input line (Connect with the power plug)
[2]
Control signal line (Connect with the MFP board)
[3]
Power output line (Connect with the DC power supply)
[4]
Main power switch (SW1) (Rear view)
16.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON

16.2.2 Operation
When the sub power switch is turned ON, MFP board detects it and sends a control signal to the DC power supply through the printer
control board.
The DC power supply then supplies 3.3V DC, 5.1V DC, 12V DC, and 24V DC to all PWBs and options. It also turns ON the relays in the
PWBs and power can be supplied to the heater lamp.
16.3 Power cables

[1]
[1]
Power code
16.3.2 Operation
The main body uses a single outlet.
Power supply: 100V 15A, 110V 15A, 120V 12A, 127V 12A, 230V 8A
O-83
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 17. FAN

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17. FAN CONTROL

17.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
17.2 Operation
17.2.1 Function
Motor name
Function (purpose)
Draws outside air into the inside of the machine to prevent the temperature of the
DC power supply, PH section, and other parts from rising.
A white belt may occur on the image because of the lower sensitivity of the photo
conductor due to ozone accumulated around the photo conductor charge corona.
In order to avoid this trouble, ozone filter removes the ozone inside the photo
conductor charge corona to keep the sensitivity of the photo conductor.
Ozone accumulated the around photo conductor charge corona will be absorbed
by ozone filter and be removed.
Discharges heat out of the main body to prevent the temperature of the toner
bottle from rising.
Heat from the power supply unit is discharged out of the main body by the fusing
unit cooling fan motor to thereby prevent the temperature at the power supply unit
from rising.
Toner particles airborne in the imaging unit are drawn in adsorbed by the toner
filter.
Blows outside air against the MFP board to prevent the temperature of the board
from rising.
17.2.2 Control condition

Motor name
(FM1)
Control
ON
Control conditions
The transport motor remains energized
O-84
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 223/283/363/423 > 17. FAN

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Motor name
Control
Control conditions
OFF
The transport motor remains deenergized
ON (high speed)
During a predetermined period of time after the completion of a

warm-up cycle
When printing
ON (medium speed)
An open door is detected during a print cycle

In a state not corresponding to ON (high speed) or OFF conditions
A fusing-related malfunction occurs
ON (low speed)

(FM3)

(FM5)
OFF
During a warm-up cycle

A malfunction not associated with fusing occurs
When the door is open
ON
During a predetermined period of time after the completion of a

warm-up cycle
When printing
OFF
In a state not corresponding to ON conditions
ON
The PC motor remains energized
OFF
The PC motor remains deenergized
ON (high speed)
During predrive after the main power has been turned ON

When printing
ON (medium speed)
ON (low speed)
Remains energized at all times after the completion of the predrive

after the power has been turned ON
OFF
In main power OFF state
O-85

223/283/363/423 > 18. COUNTER INFORMATION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
18. COUNTER INFORMATION

18.1 Configuration
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
Electronic counter
[3]
Total counter
[4]
MFP board (MFPB)
[5]
Key counter (option)

Name
Function
Total counter
Shows the cumulative number of copies made in all copy modes

A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it
Electronic counter
Shows the cumulative number of copies made or printed pages produced in each of different
copy or print modes
Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it
Key counter (option)
The counter that disables copying when counting the predetermined number of copies
A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
Counts one when a paper take-up start signal or image forming start signal, whichever occurs
earlier, is applied to it
The count timing can be selected using BILLING SETTING / Management Function Choice /
Key Counter Only of the service mode.
If Paper feed is selected, the count is incremented when the paper is fed in (default setting).
If Paper out is selected, the count is incremented when the paper is fed out of the main body.
For details, see I.13.3.5 Management Function Choice-Key Counter Only.
O-86
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-621 > 1. PAPER FEED PATH
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-621

1. PAPER FEED PATH
1.1 In 1-sided mode
[5]
[7]
[8]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[9]
[1]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[16]
[15]
[17]
[1]
Document feed path
[2]
[3]
Document pick-up roller
[4]
Document separation roller
[5]
[6]
Document registration path
[7]
[8]
Document registration roller
[9]
Document transport path
[10]
Document reading roller/1
[11]
[12]
Document reading path
[13]
Original glass cleaning roller
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
Document exit path
1.2 In 2-sided mode

[2]
[3/7]
[1]
[5/9]
[4/8]
[6]
[1]
Document feed path
[2]
Document registration path
[3]
Document transport path (1st side)
[4]
Document reading path (1st side)
[5]
Document switchback path (switchback)
[6]
Document second feed path (2nd side)
[7]
Document transport path (2nd side)
[8]
Document reading path (2nd side)
[9]
Document exit path
PA-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-621 > 2. CONFIGURATION
2. CONFIGURATION
2.1 Section configuration
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[8]
[6]
[7]
[1]
Document set section
[2]
Document feed section
[3]
Document registration section
[4]
Document transport section
[5]
Document reading section
[6]
Document exit /switchback section
[7]
Document second feed section
[8]
Document exit tray section
2.2 Electrical parts configuration
[2]
[1]
[25]
[24]
[3]
[4]
[23]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[22]
[8]
[21]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[19]
[17]
[20]
[18]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
Mixed original sensor/1 (PS9)
[17]
[18]
[19]
Glass cleaning roller (M4)
[20]
[21]
Stamp solenoid (option) (SD2)
[22]
[23]
[24]
PA-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[25]
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-621 > 2. CONFIGURATION
PA-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-621 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
3.1 Paper feed drive
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Document registration roll
[6]
[7]
[8]
Document feed roller
The document feed motor drives the document feed section.

The drive section of the document feed roller has the document feed clutch that controls rotation of the document feed roller section
(document pick-up roller/document feed roller/document separation roller)
The drive section of the document registration roller has the document registration clutch that controls rotation of the document registration
roller.
3.2 Transport/paper exit drive

[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
Document exit roll
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Document reading roll
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
The document reading motor drives the document reading section and document exit section.
The document reading motor rotates backward to allow the second feed of the document to be performed during switchback in the 2-sided
mode.
The document reading roll is equipped with a pressure/release mechanism. The pressure is released when the trailing edge of the original
moves past the roller.
The document exit roll is equipped with a pressure/release mechanism. The pressure is released when the original is fed in a second time
so that its second side can be read.
PA-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-621 > 3. DRIVE
3.3 Original glass cleaning drive

[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
The glass cleaning motor drives the original glass cleaning roller.
PA-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-621 > 4. OPERATION
4. OPERATION
4.1 Document set section
4.1.1 Original size detection mechanism
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Document feed tray
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
(1) Detecting the width of the original 1

The width of the original will be detected by the document CD size sensor under the document feed tray.
When the document guide plates are moved in or out crosswise to fit the size of the original, the size detection gear is rotated, so that the
detection portion of the document CD size sensor mounted on the same shaft as the gear is rotated. The width of the original is calculated
based on the value detected as a result of the rotation of the gear.
The document is to be loaded in the document feed tray by aligning it with reference to the center of the document feed tray in the
standard mode. In the mixed original mode, however, the document is aligned with reference to the rear side of the document guide
plates.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Adjust the document guide plates (center alignment)
[2]
Document guide plates
[3]
Original (standard mode)
[4]
Align the original with narrow width with the rear side of
the document guide plates (rear alignment)
[5]
Original with narrow width (mixed original mode)
[6]
Original with wide width (mixed original mode)
(2) Detecting the width of the original 2

The width of the original in the mixed original/AMS mode will be detected by the mixed original size sensor/1, 2 and 3 located before the
document registration roller.
(3) Detecting the length of the original 1

The length of the original will be detected by the document FD size sensor/1, 2, and 3.
PA-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(4) Detecting the length of the original 2

The length of the original in the mixed original/AMS mode will be detected by the reading roller sensor (reflector type). The length of the
original is calculated based on the period of time during which the sensor remains activated.
(5) Original size detection

The original size is determined by the combination of the results of detection made of the width and length of the original.
(a) Standard mode

Metric area
Original size detected
A3
Document FD size sensor
Unit: mm
ON
ON
ON
Over 286.2 and up to 307
A4S
ON
ON
OFF
Over 190.6 and up to 236.5
A4
OFF
OFF
OFF
A5S
OFF
OFF
OFF
Over 136 and up to 163
A5
OFF
OFF
OFF
A6S
OFF
OFF
OFF
114.5 or under
B4
ON
ON
ON
B5S
ON
OFF
ON
Over 163 and up to 190.6
B5
OFF
OFF
OFF
B6S
OFF
OFF
OFF
Ledger (11 17)
ON
ON
ON
Legal (8.5 14)
ON
ON
ON
Letter S (8.5 11)
ON
OFF
OFF
Letter (8.5 11)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Foolscap (8 13)
ON
ON
ON
Foolscap (8.25 13)
ON
ON
ON
Foolscap (8.5 13)
ON
ON
ON
Foolscap (8.65 13)
ON
ON
ON
Foolscap (8.125 13.25)
ON
ON
ON
Foolscap (8.5 13.5)
ON
ON
ON
Inch area
Unit: mm
A3
ON
ON
ON
A4S
ON
ON
OFF
A4
OFF
OFF
OFF
B4
ON
ON
ON
B5S
ON
OFF
ON
B5
OFF
OFF
OFF
Ledger (11 17)
ON
ON
ON
Legal (8.5 14)
ON
ON
ON
Letter S (8.5 11)
ON
OFF
OFF

Letter (8.5 11)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Invoice S (8.5 5.5)
OFF
OFF
OFF
158.7 or under
Invoice (8.5 5.5)
OFF
OFF
OFF
China area
A3
Unit: mm
ON
ON
ON

A4S
ON
ON
OFF
A4
OFF
OFF
OFF
A5S
OFF
OFF
OFF

A5
OFF
OFF
OFF
A6S
OFF
OFF
OFF
114.5 or under
8K (270 mm 390 mm)
ON
ON
ON
16K (195 mm 270 mm)
OFF
OFF
OFF
16K S (195 mm 270 mm)
ON
OFF
OFF
PA-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(b) Mixed original mode

Metric area

(Paper length)
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
A3
B4
A4S
A4
Over 214
Over 286.2

1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
B5
ON
ON
OFF
A5
152 or under
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Ledger (11 17)

Letter S (8.5 11)
Over 220
Letter (8.5 11)
220 or under
B4
A4S
B5S
Over 186
OFF
OFF
OFF
B5
ON
ON
ON
A5
152 or under
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
A4S
B5S
A5S
A5
B5S
A5S
A5S
B6S
152 or under
B6S
OFF
OFF
OFF
A6S
114.5 or under
OFF
OFF
OFF

(Paper length)
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
Inch area
A3
B4
B5
Over 261
Over 286.2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
214 or under
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
220 or under
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Letter (8.5 11)

B4
A4S
B5S
Over 186
B5
186 or under
Legal (8.5 14)

Invoice S (8.5 5.5)
Letter S (8.5 11)
Over 284
3
ON
OFF
Over 284
2
ON
OFF
Ledger (11 17)

Letter S (8.5 11)
1
ON
A4
Legal (8.5 14)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
144 or under
ON
ON
OFF
Invoice (8.5 5.5)

B5S
OFF
OFF
OFF
Invoice S (8.5 5.5)
158.7 or under
OFF
OFF
OFF

(Paper length)
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
China area
A3
Over 214
8K (270 mm 390 mm)

A4S

1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
A4
ON
ON
ON
16K (195 mm 270 mm)
ON
ON
OFF
Over 281
PA-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223

(Paper length)
Unit: mm
A5
Unit: mm
152 or under
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Over 199
ON
OFF
OFF
8K (270 mm 390 mm)

A4S
16K S (195 mm 270 mm)
OFF
OFF
OFF
16K (195 mm 270 mm)

ON
ON
ON
A5
152 or under
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
A4S
16K S (195 mm 270 mm)
A5S
Over 152
OFF
OFF
OFF
A5
152 or under
ON
ON
OFF
16K S (195 mm 270 mm)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
A5S
A5S
ON
OFF
OFF
A6S
114.5 or under
OFF
OFF
OFF
4.1.2 Original set detection control

When original is loaded on the document feed tray, the document set sensor detects whether or not there is original.
If no original is loaded when the document pick-up roller is in the standby position, the document set sensor actuator blocks the document
set sensor and it is determined that no original is loaded.
When original is loaded on the document feed tray, the leading edge of the original pushes the document sensor actuator so that the
document set sensor is unblocked. It is determined that original is loaded.
When the start key is pressed, the document pick-up roller moves (lowers) to the feed position, so that the original is fed by the document
pick-up roller up to the document feed roller.
When the leading edge of the original moves past the document feed roller, the separation roller sensor is blocked and it is determined that
feeding of the original is started.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Document stopper (standby position)
[6]
Document set sensor actuator (no original)
[7]
4.2 Document feed section

The document feed section consists of the document pick-up rollers, document feed roller and document separation roller.
The document feed motor provides the device for the document pick-up section.
The document feed clutch is connected to the document pick-up section. When the document feed clutch is energized, the drive of the
document feed motor is transmitted to the document pick-up section. This rotates the document pick-up section.
The document separation roller is pressed up against the document feed roller and thus follows the rotation of the document feed roller.
4.2.1 Pick-up roller up/down control

(1) Up control
When a job is completed, the document feed motor starts rotating backward. Then, the swing arm mounted on the same shaft as the
document feed roller is rotated backward to thereby raise the document pick-up roller to the standby position.
The document pick-up roller is fixed at the raised position by a flat spring.
When the swing arm is raised to the standby position, the document stopper is lowered by its own weight and fixed by the lock pawl of the
swing arm. The document stopper is unlocked when the swing arm lowers.
The document stopper has two functions: one, to align the leading edges of the originals loaded in the standby state; and, two, to prevent
the leading edge of the original from advancing over the pick-up position into the feed section.
PA-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Swing arm (standby position)
[2]
Document stopper
[3]
Swing arm (feed position)
[4]
[5]
(2) Down control

When the start key is pressed, the document feed motor starts rotating forward and the document feed clutch is energized. The rotation
shaft of the swing arm mounted on the same shaft as the document feed roller is rotated forward, so that the document pick-up roller is
lowered to the feed position.
The document stopper is unlocked when the swing arm lowers.
4.2.2 Document feed/separation control

When the start key is pressed, the document feed motor starts rotating forward and the document feed clutch is energized, so that the
document feed roller rotates forward (in the direction of feeding the original).
The rotation shaft of the swing arm mounted on the same shaft as the document feed roller is rotated forward, so that the document pick-up
roller is lowered to the feed position. The document pick-up roller is rotated by a drive belt to thereby feed the original onto the document
feed roller.
(1) Separation/feed operation

1. The document separation roller is pressed up against, and driven by, the document feed roller. A torque limiter is mounted on the shaft of
the document separation roller.
2. The acting pressure of the document feed roller/document separation roller/torque limiter serves as the limit torque for preventing double
feed.
3. When there is no original or only one sheet of original between the document separation roller and the document feed roller, the limit
torque is exceeded and the separation roller follows the rotation of the document feed roller.
4. If there are two or more sheets of original between the original separation roller and the document feed roller, the limit torque is greater
than the friction force of the original, so that the document separation roller stops rotating.
5. Because of the stationary document separation roller, the lower sheet of original in contact with the separation roller is not fed in, so that
the first sheet of original is original separated from the second sheet of original.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Original

The document pick-up roller, document feed roller, and document separation roller are periodically replaced parts. These three rollers
must be replaced with new ones at the same time.
PA-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
None of the document pick-up roller, document feed roller, and document separation roller is provided with a new article detection
mechanism. When the three rollers are replaced with new ones, the ADF Feed counter must be reset to zero using Counter/ Life of the
Service Mode.
The number of times the DF has been subjected to paper feed operations can be checked with the ADF Feed counter of the Service
Mode.
For details of the applicable replacement procedures for the document pick-up roller, document feed roller, and document separation
roller and the Service Mode, see F.7.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller / feed roller and F.7.1.4 Replacing the separation roller.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Document feed roller assy
[2]
Document separation roller assy
[3]
Document pick-up roller assy
[4]
4.3 Document registration section

The document feed motor provides the drive for the document registration roller.
The document registration clutch is connected to the document registration roller. When the document registration clutch is energized, the
driving force of the document feed motor is transmitted to the document registration roller. This rotates the document registration roller.
The original will create a loop between the document feed roller (document exit roller for the second feed of the document for reading of
the 2nd side of the original) and the document registration roller when the original is being conveyed in order to correct the skew.
4.3.1 Document registration loop formation process

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The document registration sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
The document registration roller remains stationary.
Because the document feed roller continues rotating to feed the original, a loop is formed at the leading edge of the original.
The loop corrects skew in the original.
The document registration roller is started to rotate to transport the original.
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[1]
Document (1st side)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
PA-11
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[7]
[8]
Document (2nd side)
4.3.2 Adjustment of document registration loop amount

The amount of the loop of the original can be adjusted in the Service Mode / ADF / Registration Loop Adj.. Changing the adjustment value
will change the ON/OFF timing of the document registration clutch. This varies the amount of loop in the original.
4.4 Document reading section

The document reading motor provides the drive for the document reading roller/1 and 2, and document exit roller.
The original transported from the document registration section will be transported to the document exit/switchback section by the
document reading roller/1 and 2, and the document exit roller.
When the leading edge of the original moves past the document reading roller/1, the reading roller sensor (reflector type) disposed
downstream of the roller detects the original. The length of the original is also detected based on the period of time during which the
sensor remains activated.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
Document exit roll
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
4.4.1 Document reading roller pressure/release control

When the trailing edge of the original moves past the document reading roller/1, the document reading roller/1 acts to push the original, so
that the document transport speed increases instantaneously. This results in an image being read unevenly. (Fluctuations in the document
transport speed)
To prevent this problem from occurring, the document reading roller/1 is released using the reading roller release motor. When the
document reading roller/1 is released, no thrust force is transmitted to the original.
After the document reading roller/1 is released, the original is transported only by document reading roller/2.
(1) Pressure/release operation

When the reading roller release motor is energized, the pressure/release gear is rotated and the cam mounted on the same shaft as the
pressure/release gear is rotated.
Then, the cam pushes down the rotation shaft of the document reading roll, so that the document reading roll is released from the
document reading roller.
The pressure/release gear is provided with a semi-circular light blocking plate. When the gear rotates a half turn, the reading roller release
position sensor is unblocked and blocked. Then, a condition is detected in which the document reading roller is released. (Blocked:
released; unblocked: pressed)
PA-12
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
Pressure/release gear
[3]
Cam
[4]
[5]
[6]
4.4.2 DF original glass contamination prevention control

(1) DF original glass cleaning
A line can occur in the image read from the original if the DF original glass is contaminated with dust or dirt. The DF original glass
cleaning mechanism prevents this fault from occurring.
A half face of the original glass cleaning roller is provided with the original glass cleaning brush. While the original is being read, the
original glass cleaning brush faces up. When the DF original glass is to be cleaned, the original glass cleaning roller rotates, so that the
original glass cleaning brush faces the DF original glass.
The original glass cleaning roller rotates to remove dust sticking to the DF original glass.
The original glass cleaning roller is rotated by the glass cleaning motor. During cleaning, the original glass cleaning roller rotates forward
(counterclockwise in the illustration) and, when the job is completed, it rotates backward (clockwise in the illustration).
The drive coupling gear is provided with a cylindrical light blocking plate that is partly cut out. As the gear rotates, the glass cleaning roller
home sensor is unblocked and blocked. This detects the original glass cleaning brush at its home position. (Blocked: original reading
position; unblocked: home position)
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Original glass cleaning brush
[5]
Original glass cleaning roller (home position)
[6]
DF original glass
PA-13
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[7]
Original glass cleaning roller (cleaning position)
(2) DF original glass cleaning operation

Condition
Predrive
Sub power switch ON

Existing from sleep
Before starting reading
Cleaning operation
Rotates the original glass cleaning brush one complete turn to check
for its correct operation. (forward rotation)
Rotates the original glass cleaning brush one complete turn to
perform cleaning. (forward rotation: default setting)
Rotates the original glass cleaning brush one complete turn to
perform cleaning for every two originals during continuous reading of
originals. (forward rotation)
Rotates the original glass cleaning brush three complete turns to
perform cleaning for each original during continuous reading of
originals, if [Original Setting] [Despeckle]*1 is selected. (forward
During reading
Start key ON
rotation)
Because the original glass cleaning brush is rotated three complete
turns to perform the cleaning, however, the original-to-original
distance is widened than at normal timing. This results in reduced
productivity in reading the originals.
No original glass cleaning sequence is performed between originals
during continuous reading of originals, if [System2] [ADF Scan
Glass Contamin. Set.] [Feed Cleaning Settings] [0]*2 is
selected in the Service Mode.
After completing reading last original
The original glass cleaning brush tends to curl if repeatedly operated

in one direction only, resulting in poor cleaning performance. To
straighten the brush, it is rotated one complete turn in the backward
direction when reading of the last original is completed. (backward
rotation)
*1: Despeckle mode setting screen
*2: Feed cleaning settings screen
4.5 Document exit section

The document reading motor provides the drive for the document exit roller. (the same drive source as that for the document reading
section)
As the document exit roller rotates forward, the original fed off from the document reading section is fed into the document exit tray (1sided mode).
By rotating the document exit roller backward, the original fed off from the document reading section is subjected to a switchback
sequence, so that the original is fed onto the document second feed section and the 2nd side of the 2-sided original is read.
Turning over the original through the switchback sequence, however, involves the order of page numbers of the originals becoming out of
correct order. To ensure that the originals are in the correct order of page numbers when fed out, each original is turned over a second
time before being fed out into the document exit tray (each 2-sided original undergoes switchback operations of a total of two times in the
2-sided mode).
PA-14
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[12]
[7]
[11]
[10]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[8]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Document exit sensor actuator
[9]
Paper guide
[10]
Document exit roll
[11]
[12]
4.5.1 Document switchback/second feed control (in the 2-sided mode only)
When the leading edge of the original moves past the document reading roller/2, the document exit sensor disposed downstream of the
roller is blocked, which detects the leading edge of the original.
When the leading edge of the original reaches the document exit roller, the document exit roller feeds the original toward the document exit
tray side.
The document reading motor is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the trailing edge of the original has been
detected. (At this time, the trailing edge of the original has moved past the paper guide.)
The document reading motor is rotated backward. Then, the document exit roller and document reading roller/1 and 2 are rotated backward
to transport the original into the document second feed section (switchback operation).
This control is performed in the 2-sided mode only.
[2]
[1]
[3]
PA-15
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
Document exit operation
[3]
Paper guide
[2]
2-sided original second feed operation
4.5.2 Document 2nd side registration control (in the 2-sided mode only)
When the original reaches the document registration roller, the document registration sensor detects the leading edge of the 2nd side of the
original.
In the same manner as with the 1st side of the original, a loop is formed in the original to thereby correct any skew in the original. For more
details, see PA.4.3 Document registration section.
4.5.3 Document exit roller pressure/release control (in the 2-sided mode only)
After the original has been correctly registered, the document registration roller starts rotating to feed the original onto the document
transport section.
The document exit roller release solenoid is energized before the leading edge of the 2nd side of the original reaches the document reading
roller/1.
The document exit roller release solenoid pushes down the rotation shaft of the document exit roll, which releases the document exit roll
from the document exit roller. When the document exit roll is released, the document transport force is no longer transmitted to the original.
After the document exit roller is released, the original is transported only by the document registration roller.
The document reading motor, which has been rotated backward during the second feed of the original, is deenergized. The document
reading motor is then rotated forward. The document exit roller and the document reading roller/1 and 2 are rotated forward.
When the original reaches the document reading roller/1, the original is transported to the document reading section.
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Document exit roll
[5]
4.5.4 Faxed document stamp function

Mounting the optional Stamp unit SP-501 allows a stamp to be placed on a faxed document.
The stamp solenoid located upstream of the document exit roller is energized when the original is about to be fed out and the stamp
mounted on the solenoid plunger is pressed against the surface of the original. This places a faxed mark (+) on the surface of the original.
This function is enabled when System2/Stamp/Set*1 (default setting: Unset) is turned ON using the Service Mode and the user selects
Scan settings/Application/TX Stamp*2 (default setting: OFF) on the FAX/Scan screen.
This function is not used for Copy or Scan.
PA-16
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Original
[2]
[3]
Stamp solenoid (SD2)
[4]
Stamp
*1: Stamp mounting setting screen
*2: TX Stamp setting screen
4.6 Original feed operation

4.6.1 Document transport operation flow in the 1-sided mode
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7] [8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
Document feed roller/Document separation roller
[3]
Document registration sensor (SP3)
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
PA-17
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
When the original is set, the document set sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
When the start key is pressed, the original glass cleaning roller rotates one complete turn to clean the original glass.
The document pick-up roller lowers and the document stopper is unlocked, so that the original is transported onto the document feed roller.
The document separation roller separates the original one sheet at a time and the document feed roller feeds the original onto the document
registration roller.
The document registration sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
A registration loop is formed in the original to thereby correct any skew in the original.
The document registration roller feeds the original onto the document reading roller/1.
The document reading roller/1 feeds the original onto the original glass cleaning roller and document reading roller/2.
The reading roller sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
The scanner section reads the image of the 1st side of the original.
The document reading roller/2 feeds the original onto the document exit roller.
The document exit sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
The document reading roller/1 is released.
The document exit roller feeds the original out into the document exit tray.
When the job is completed, the original glass cleaning roller rotates backward to clean the original glass.
The document pick-up roller raises and the document stopper is locked in position.
4.6.2 Document transport operation flow in the 2-sided mode

Operation in the 2-sided mode consists of the three processes of Reading the 1st side, Reading the 2nd side, and Rearranging the
original in order of page numbers (so that the original is fed through the DF a total of three times).
(1) Process
1. When the original is set, the document set sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
NOTE
PROCESS 1: Reading the 1st side of the 2-sided original (Step1 to Step13)
[3] [2] [1]

[4]
[5]
[6] [7] [8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
2. When the start key is pressed, the original glass cleaning roller rotates one complete turn to clean the original glass.
3. The document pick-up roller lowers and the document stopper is unlocked, so that the original is transported onto the document feed
roller.
4. The document separation roller separates the original one sheet at a time and the document feed roller feeds the original onto the
document registration roller.
5. The document registration sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
6. A registration loop is formed in the original to thereby correct any skew in the original.
7. The document registration roller feeds the original onto the document reading roller/1.
8. The document reading roller/1 feeds the original onto the original glass cleaning roller and document reading roller/2.
9. The reading roller sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
10. The scanner section reads the image of the 1st side of the original.
11. The document reading roller/2 feeds the original onto the document exit roller.
12. The document exit sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
13. The document reading roller/1 is released.
14. The document exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the original.
NOTE
PROCESS 2: Reading the 2nd side of the 2-sided original (Step14 to Step 26)
PA-18
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3] [2] [1]

[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
The document exit roller stops rotating and then starts rotating backward to transport the original onto the document registration roller.
The document registration sensor detects the leading edge of the 2nd side of the 2-sided original.
The document exit roller is released.
The document reading roller/1 and 2 and the document exit roller stop rotating and then start rotating forward.
The scanner section reads the image of the 2nd side of the 2-sided original.
The document exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the original.
NOTE
PROCESS 3: Rearranging the original in order of page numbers (Step27 to Step 41)
When the 2nd side of the original is read, the original is turned over and fed through the DF. If the original is fed out directly
into the document exit tray, the order of page numbers of the original becomes out of correct order. To prevent this from
occurring, the original is turned over a second time and fed through the DF after its 2nd side has been read.
At this time, the image of the original is not read.
This operation is performed even if the 2-sided original is a one-page original.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
The document exit roller stops rotating and then starts rotating backward to transport the original onto the document registration roller.
The document registration sensor detects the leading edge of the 2nd side of the 2-sided original.
The document exit roller is released.
The document reading roller/1 and 2 and the document exit roller stop rotating and then start rotating forward.
The document exit roller feeds the original out into the document exit tray.
When the job is completed, the original glass cleaning roller rotates backward to clean the original glass.
The document pick-up roller raises and the document stopper is locked in position.
4.7 Raised/lowered position detection mechanism

4.7.1 Document exchange detection control
An angle detection mechanism is provided to detect the operation of exchanging originals when the DF is used as the original cover of the
main body.
When the DF is raised to an angle of about 20 degrees or more, the detection lever is pushed up by a spring. The angle sensor that has
been blocked by the detection lever is now unblocked. It is, as a result, detected that the DF is raised to an angle of 20 degrees or more.
When, on the other hand, the DF is lowered to an angle of about 20 degrees or less, the detection lever is pushed down. Then, the angle
sensor, which has been unblocked, is blocked, so that it is detected that the DF is lowered to an angle of 20 degrees or less.
When the DF state undergoes changes from a condition of being fully lowered to a condition of being raised to an angle of 20 degrees or
more and then to a condition of being lowered to an angle of 20 degrees or less, it is determined that an original is placed manually on
the original glass.
4.7.2 DF raised/lowered position detection mechanism

The DF raised/lowered position detection mechanism is provided to detect that the DF or the original cover is raised or lowered.
The magnet installed in the DF is brought near to the original cover switch (reed switch) at the scanner section when the DF is lowered. This
actuates the original cover switch. Then, the main body determines that the DF is lowered.
When determining that a document is placed manually on the original glass through the document exchange detection control described
above, the main body starts performing the control of detecting the size of the original placed on the original glass.
PA-19
bizhub 423/363/283/223
If the DF is raised to an angle of 20 degrees or less, the main body does not perform the control of detecting the size of the original placed
on the original glass.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
Original cover switch (RX201)
4.8 Cooling inside the unit

The DF cooling fan motor functions to cool the DF control board, document feed motor, and document reading motor in the DF.
It discharges heat generated inside the DF out through the exhaust port.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
PA-20
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-109/PC-208 > 1. PAPER FEED

PATH
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-109/PC-208

1. PAPER FEED PATH
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Paper feed from the 3rd tray
[2]
Transportation to main body
[3]
Transportation in PC
[4]
Paper feed from the 4th tray
PB-1
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-109/

PC-208 > 2. CONFIGURATION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. CONFIGURATION
[21] [22] [23]
[20]
[1] [2]
[3]
[19]
[4]
[18]
[17]
[5]
[16]
[6]
[15]
[14]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[1]
[2]
Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS33)
[3]
[4]
Tray4 vertical transport sensor (PS46) *
[5]
Tray3 paper empty sensor (PS34)
[6]
Tray4 empty sensor (PS44) *
[7]
Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS43) *
[8]
Tray4 vertical transport motor (M42) *
[9]
Tray4 paper feed motor (M41) *
[10]
Tray4 near empty sensor (PS42) *
[11]
Tray4 lift-up motor (M43) *
[12]
Tray4 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS47) *
[13]
Tray4 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS48) *
[14]
Tray4 paper FD sensor board (PSDTB41) *
[15]
Tray4 detection sensor (PS41) *
[16]
Tray3 paper FD sensor board (PSDTB31)
[17]
Tray3 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS38)
[18]
Tray3 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS37)
[19]
Tray3 detection sensor (PS31)
[20]
Tray3 lift-up motor (M33)
[21]
Tray3 near empty sensor (PS32)
[22]
Tray3 paper feed motor (M31)
[23]
Tray3 vertical transport motor (M32)
*: Dedicated to PC-208.
2.2 Mechanical parts configuration

[1]
[13]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[7]
[8]
[1]
[2]
Tray 3 vertical transport roll
[3]
Tray 3 separation roller *2
[4]
Tray 4 vertical transport roll *1
[5]
Tray 4 vertical transport roller *1
[6]
Tray 3 paper guide (CD)
[7]
Tray 4 paper guide (CD) *1
[8]
Tray 4 paper lift-up plate *1
[9]
Tray 4 paper guide (FD) *1
[10]
Tray 3 paper guide (FD)
PB-2
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-109/

PC-208 > 2. CONFIGURATION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[11]
[13]
Tray 3 paper feed roller *2
[12]
Tray 3 pick-up roller *2
*1: Dedicated to PC-208.

*2: The paper feed roller is arranged in the same way in tray 3 and tray 4. If the description that follows is not identified with tray 3 or tray 4, it is
PB-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-109/PC-208 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
[13]
[14]
[1] [2]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8] [7]
[1]
[2]
Tray 3 vertical transport roll
[3]
[4]
[5]
Tray 4 vertical transport roll *
[6]
Tray 4 vertical transport roller *
[7]
Tray 4 paper feed roller *
[8]
Tray 4 separation roller *
[9]
Tray 4 pick-up roller *
[10]
[11]
Tray4 vertical transport motor (M42) *
[12]
Tray4 paper feed motor (M41) *
[13]
Tray3 paper feed motor (M31)
[14]
Tray3 vertical transport motor (M32)
The drive parts are arranged in the same way in tray 3 and tray 4. If the description that follows is not identified with tray 3 or tray 4, it is
The paper feed motor of each paper feed tray drive the tray 3 and tray 4 paper feed roller section.
The vertical transport motor of each paper feed tray drive the tray 3 and tray 4 vertical transport roller section.
PB-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-109/PC-208 > 4. OPERATION
4. OPERATION
4.1 Up/down control
The tray 3 and tray 4 are controlled in the same control procedure.
4.1.1 Up operation
The paper lift-up plate B is located under the paper lift-up plate A.
The lift-up plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is connected to the paper lift-up plate B.
When the drive shaft of the lift-up motor rotates, the paper lift-up plate B raises the paper lift-up plate A.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Paper lift-up plate B
[3]
Paper lift-up plate A
[4]
(1) Upper position
[1]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Actuator of upper limit sensor (Upper position: paper full)
[2]
Light blocking plate of upper limit sensor (Lower position:

unblocked)
[3]
Paper lift-up plate A (Upper position)
[4]
Upper limit sensor (PS33/PS43) (Unblocked)
[5]
Paper lift-up plate B (Upper position)
4.1.2 Down operation

When the paper feed tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling of the lift-up motor and the lift-up plate drive shaft are disconnected from
each other.
When the driving force of the lift-up motor is released from the lift-up plate drive shaft, the paper lift-up plate starts lowering by its own
weight.
(1) Down position
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
PB-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
Actuator of upper limit sensor (Lower position: Low paper

level or open paper feed tray)
[2]
Light blocking plate of upper limit sensor (Upper position:

Blocked)
[3]
Paper lift-up plate A (Lower position)
[4]
Upper limit sensor (PS33/PS43) (Blocked)
[5]
Paper lift-up plate B (Lower position)
4.1.3 Operation timing

(1) When the paper feed tray is slid in
When the paper feed tray is slid into the machine, the tray detection sensor is blocked. The machine then determines that the paper feed
tray is slid into position.
The paper lift-up plate is at the lower position when the paper feed tray is slid out, so that the upper limit sensor is unblocked.
Determining that the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper lift-up
plate.
When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the paper lift-up plate has been started, the upper limit
sensor is blocked.
Determining that the upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-up motor to complete the up operation of the paper lift-up
plate.
If the paper feed tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lift-up plate and accordingly the tray detection sensor is unblocked,
the up operation of the paper lift-up plate is terminated.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Paper feed tray
[2]
Detection plate
[3]
[4]
(2) During a print cycle

When the amount of paper decreases as the machine keeps printing, the pick-up roller will gradually come down to unblock the upper
limit sensor. The lift-up motor will rotate again to lift up the paper lift-up plate.
When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor will stop to complete the up operation of the paper lift-up plate.
The sequence of these operations is repeated to keep the constant pressure (paper take-up pressure) between the pick-up roller and the
paper stack regardless of the amount of paper still available for use.
4.2 Paper feed control

The tray 3 and tray 4 are controlled in the same control procedure.
4.2.1 Pick-up control

The paper feed motor is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the print start signal.
The driving force of the paper feed motor is transmitted to the pick-up roller and paper feed roller. These rollers rotate to pick up and feed a
sheet of paper into the machine.
4.2.2 Separation control

The separation roller is driven via a torque limiter in a direction opposite the paper transport direction.
The separation roller is pressed up against the paper feed roller by the pressure of a spring and an acting pressure generated from torque of
the torque limiter.
When there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the separation roller and the paper feed roller, the limit torque is
If there are two or more sheets of paper between the separation roller and the paper feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction
force of the paper, so that the separation roller is rotated backward.
The backward rotation of the separation roller causes the lower sheet of paper in contact with the separation roller to be pushed backward in
the direction of the paper feed tray, so that the lower sheet of paper is properly separated.
PB-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Pick-up roller
[2]
Paper feed roller
[3]
Separation roller
[4]
Paper
4.2.3 Paper feed retry control

If the specified sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the start of the paper feed
sequence, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed is
detected in a print job. A paper misfeed results if the specified sensor is still unable to detect the paper even after the paper feed retry
sequence, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed.
Paper feed retry control
Paper port
Sensor name
Tray 3 (Option: PC-109/208)

(1) Paper transport path
[1]
[2]
[3]
[17]
[16]
[4]
[11]
[15]
[14]
[12] [13]
[7]
[10]
[8] [9]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Registration roller
[2]
[3]
Paper transport to registration section
[4]
Paper transport in tray 2 vertical transport section
[5]
Paper transport in tray 3/4 vertical transport section
[6]
Tray 4 *
[7]
Paper transport from tray 4 *
[8]
Tray 4 paper feed roller *
[9]
Tray 4 vertical transport roller *
[10]
Tray4 vertical transport sensor (PS46) *
[11]
Tray 3
[12]
[13]
[14]
PB-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[15]
[17]

[16]
(2) Tray 3
The tray3 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray 3 vertical transport roller detects the paper fed from the tray 3 paper
feed roller.
The tray 3 vertical transport roller feeds the paper onto the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
The tray 2 vertical transport sensor located upstream of the tray 2 vertical transport roller detects the paper fed from the tray 3 vertical
transport roller.
The tray 2 vertical transport roller feeds the paper onto the registration roller.
The registration sensor located upstream of the registration roller detects the paper fed from the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
When the paper fed from the tray 3 paper feed roller moves past the tray 3 vertical transport roller and reaches a predetermined position,
the tray3 paper feed motor is deenergized to disconnect the driving force. The tray 3 pick-up roller and tray 3 paper feed roller follow the
movement of the paper, continuing rotating. The tray 3 pick-up roller and tray 3 paper feed roller stop rotating as soon as the paper moves
past them.
If the tray3 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine
determines that there is a paper misfeed. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed is detected (paper feed
retry control). If the tray3 vertical transport sensor is still unable to detect the paper, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed
at tray 3 and displays the message of "PAPER JAM" on the control panel.
If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time at the leading
edge of the paper has moved past the tray3 vertical transport sensor, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed at the tray 3
vertical transport section and displays the message of PAPER JAM on the control panel. For details of paper misfeed detection
conditions, see TROUBLESHOOTING / JAM CODE / List of the JAM code for the main body.
(3) Tray 4
The tray4 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray 4 vertical transport roller detects the paper fed from the tray 4 paper
feed roller.
The tray3 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray 3 vertical transport roller detects the paper fed from the tray 4 vertical
transport roller.
The tray 2 vertical transport sensor located upstream of the tray 2 vertical transport roller detects the paper fed from the tray 3 vertical
transport roller.
The tray 2 vertical transport roller feeds the paper onto the registration roller.
The registration sensor located upstream of the registration roller detects the paper fed from the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
When the tray4 vertical transport sensor disposed downstream of the tray 4 vertical transport roller on the paper feed path detects the
leading edge of the paper fed from the tray 4 paper feed roller, the tray4 paper feed motor is deenergized to disconnect the driving
force.The tray 4 pick-up roller and tray 4 paper feed roller follow the movement of the paper, continuing rotating. The tray 4 pick-up roller
and tray 4 paper feed roller stop rotating as soon as the paper moves past them.
When the paper fed from the tray 4 paper feed roller moves past the tray 4 vertical transport roller and reaches a predetermined position,
the tray4 paper feed motor is deenergized to disconnect the driving force. The tray 4 pick-up roller and tray 4 paper feed roller follow the
movement of the paper, continuing rotating. The tray 4 pick-up roller and tray 4 paper feed roller stop rotating as soon as the paper moves
past them.
If the tray4 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine
determines that there is a paper misfeed. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed is detected (paper feed
retry control). If the tray4 vertical transport sensor is still unable to detect the paper, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed
at tray 4 and displays the message of PAPER JAM on the control panel.
If the tray3 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time at the leading
vertical transport section and displays the message of PAPER JAM on the control panel.
If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time at the leading
vertical transport section and displays the message of PAPER JAM on the control panel.
For details of paper misfeed detection conditions, see TROUBLESHOOTING / JAM CODE / List of the JAM code for the main body.
4.2.5 Paper misfeed display

NOTE
Different paper misfeed displays appear depending on the settings made in System 2/ JAM Code Display Setting of the Service
Mode.
PB-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Tray3 (typical)
(2) Tray4 (typical)
(3) System 2/ JAM Code Display Setting
4.2.6 Periodically replaced parts

None of the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller is provided with a new article detection mechanism. When the three rollers
are replaced with new ones, the 3rd. or 4th. counter must be reset to zero using Counter/ Life of the Service Mode.
The number of times tray 3/tray 4 has been subjected to paper feed operations can be checked with the 3rd./4th. counter of the Service
Mode.
see F.8.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller, F.8.1.2 Replacing the feed roller, F.8.1.1 Replacing the separation roller and I.11.12.2 Life.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
PB-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.3 Paper size detection control

4.3.1 Main scanning direction
The size in the main scanning direction is detected based on the combination of CD paper size sensor/1 and CD paper size sensor/2 being
unblocked or blocked.
The CD paper size sensor/1 and CD paper size sensor/2 are unblocked or blocked by the paper width detection plate provided in the paper
width guide plate.
4.3.2 Sub scanning direction

The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of ON or OFF position of switches 1 to 4 mounted on the paper
FD sensor board.
Each of switches 1 to 4 is turned ON or OFF by the paper length detection plate connected to the paper length guide plate.
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
CD paper size sensor/2 (PS38/PS48)
[2]
[3]
CD paper size sensor/1 (PS37/PS47)
[4]
Detection plate
[5]
Paper guide (CD)
[6]
Paper guide (FD)
[7]
Switch 4 (SW4)
[8]
Switch 3 (SW3)
[9]
Switch 2 (SW2)
[10]
Switch 1 (SW1)
[11]
Paper FD sensor board (PSDTB31/PSDTB41)
4.3.3 Paper size determination

Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will decide a paper size.
Paper FD sensor board
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4

sensor/1

sensor/2
A3
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
Blocked
Unblocked
B4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Blocked
Unblocked
A4S
ON
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
Unblocked
Unblocked
A4
ON/OFF
ON
ON
ON
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper size
B5S
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Unblocked
Unblocked
B5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Blocked
Unblocked
A5S
Invoice S
ON/OFF
ON
ON
ON
Unblocked
Unblocked
Ledger (11 17)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Blocked
Blocked
Legal (8-1/2 14)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Unblocked
Unblocked
Letter S (8-1/2 11 S)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Unblocked
Unblocked
Letter (8-1/2 11)
ON
ON
ON
ON
Blocked
Blocked
FLS *
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Unblocked
Unblocked
K8 S (270 mm 390 mm)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Blocked
Blocked
K16 (270 mm 195 mm)
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Blocked
Blocked
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS. 220 330 mm, 8 13, 8-1/8 13-1/4, 8-1/4 13, 8-1/2 13
PB-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Switch/sensor states
Physical state
Switch/sensor
HIGH signal
LOW signal
OFF
ON
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper FD sensor board: Switches 1 to 4

Tray3 CD paper size sensor/1, 2
Tray4 CD paper size sensor/1, 2
4.4 Paper level detection control

The paper level detection control is performed under any of the following conditions:
Tray 3/tray 4 is closed in position
The up/down control of the paper lift-up plate is completed
4.4.1 Paper near-empty detection

The near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the paper feed tray.
As paper is consumed, the position of the near empty detection actuator provided at the lift-up plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is raised.
When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the near empty sensor is blocked, the machine detects a nearempty condition.
A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use becomes about 50 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in
terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Actuator
[3]
Paper lift-up plate B (upper position)
[4]
[5]
Pick-up roller
[6]
Paper lift-up plate A (upper position)

The tray 3 and tray 4 use the same control system to detect a paper empty condition.
A paper empty condition is detected by the tray detection sensor, upper limit sensor, and paper empty sensor.
Based on the combination of detection signals from each of the sensors, a paper empty condition is detected.
Sensor
Paper empty
Paper empty sensor
Unblocked
Blocked
Upper limit sensor
Unblocked
PB-11
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Pick-up roller
[2]
Paper feed roller
[3]
Paper empty detection plate (Lower position: paper empty)
[4]
Paper empty sensor (PS34/PS44)
[5]
[6]
Paper empty detection plate (Upper position: paper

remaining)
4.4.3 Paper level display

The paper level is indicated by the LED on the right side of each paper feed tray and by the screen of the control panel.
Empty
Near empty
Other statuses
conditions)
LED
ON
Blinking *
OFF
*: The LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode/System 1/Machine State LED Setting/Paper Remainder.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Tray3 LED board (LEDB31) (For option PC-109/208)
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Paper empty display
4.5 Paper feed tray locking mechanism

The paper feed tray is provided with a locking mechanism.
PB-12
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.5.1 Unlocking the paper feed tray

Withdrawing the knob of the paper feed tray to the front will disengage the tray lock pawl provided on the right side of the paper feed tray.
The paper feed tray can be pulled out of the machine by continuing pulling the knob with the tray lock pawl disengaged.
Rollers are provided for the right and left tray rails. They reduce the operating force required for sliding in/out the paper feed tray.
4.5.2 Locking the paper feed tray

Pushing the knob of the paper feed tray all the way toward the rear will allow the paper feed tray to be slid into the machine.
When the paper feed tray is inserted all the way in place, the tray lock pawl provided on the right side of the paper feed tray locks the tray in
place.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Lock pawl
[2]
Lock lever
[3]
Knob
[4]
Roller
PB-13
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-409 > 1. PAPER FEED PATH
PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-409

1. PAPER FEED PATH
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1]
Paper feed from LCC
[2]
Transportation to main body
[3]
Main tray
[4]
Move from the shift tray to the main tray
[5]
Shift tray
PC-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-409 > 2. CONFIGURATION
2. CONFIGURATION
2.1 Section configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Paper feed section
[3]
Shift tray section
[2]
Main tray section

[1]
[2]
[25]
[3]
[4]
[24]
[23]
[5]
[6]
[22]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[21]
[11]
[12]
[20]
[13]
[14]
[19]
[15]
[16]
[18]
[17]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Tray3 LED board (LEDB51)
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
Shift motor (M54)
[15]
Manual down control board (MDCB)
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
PC-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-409 > 2. CONFIGURATION
2.3 Mechanical parts configuration

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[21]
[20]
[19]
[5]
[18]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[17]
[9]
[16]
[15]
[10]
[14]
[11]
[13]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Paper feed roller
[5]
Separation roller
[6]
Pick-up roller
[7]
[8]
Elevator take-up axis
[9]
Shifter drive shaft
[10]
Shift motor (M54)
[11]
Division board (front)
[12]
Division board drive plate
[13]
Shifter (shift position)
[14]
Shifter (home position)
[15]
Shifter drive belt
[16]
Shift tray
[17]
[18]
Division board (rear)
[19]
Main tray
[20]
Tray lock lever
[21]
PC-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-409 > 3. OPERATION
3. OPERATION
3.1 Up/down control
3.1.1 Up operation
A lifting cable is connected to the main tray and the main tray is held in the horizontal position by the elevator take-up axis.
When the elevator motor rotates forward, the elevator take-up axis takes up the cable to thereby raise the main tray.
3.1.2 Down operation

When the elevator motor rotates backward, the elevator take-up axis reels out the cable to thereby lower the main tray.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Lifting cable
[2]
Main tray
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
3.1.3 Operation timing

(1) When the paper feed tray is slid in
When the paper feed tray is slid into the machine, the tray detection sensor is blocked. The machine then determines that the paper feed
tray is slid in position.
The main tray is lowering when the paper feed tray is slid out, so that the lift-up upper limit sensor is unblocked.
Determining that the lift-up upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the elevator motor rotate forward to start the up operation of
the main tray.
When the paper stack on the main tray is raised to a predetermined level after the up operation of the main tray is started, the paper
pushes up the actuator, so that the actuator blocks the lift-up upper limit sensor.
Determining that the lift-up upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the elevator motor to complete the up operation of the main
tray.
If the manual down key is pressed during the up operation of the main tray, the machine terminates the up operation of the main tray.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Paper feed roller
[2]
Actuator
[3]
Pick-up roller
[4]
[5]
Paper pushing up the actuator
(2) During a print cycle

As paper is consumed, the pick-up roller gradually lowers and the lift-up upper limit sensor is unblocked.
Determining that the lift-up upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the elevator motor rotate forward to start the up operation of
the main tray.
When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the main tray has been started, the actuator blocks the
lift-up upper limit sensor.
PC-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Determining that the lift-up upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the elevator motor to complete the up operation of the main
tray.
The sequence of these operations is repeated to keep the constant pressure (paper take-up pressure) between the pick-up roller and the
paper stack regardless of the amount of paper still available for use.
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Actuator
[2]
[3]
Pick-up roller
[4]
When the paper level lowers, the main tray is raised.
[5]
Separation roller
[6]
Paper feed roller
(3) During manual down operation

When the manual down key is pressed, the elevator motor rotates backward. As the elevator motor rotates backward, the elevator takeup axis reels out the cable to thereby lower the main tray.
When the main tray lowers and the lift-down lower limit sensor detects the lower limit position (the sensor is blocked), the elevator motor
stops rotating backward.
When the lift-down over run detection gear blocks the lift-down over run sensor while the main tray is lowering, the main body determines
that there is a condition of LCT Lift Failure.
When the main tray lowers to the lower limit position, the tray lock solenoid is energized. This disengages the tray lock lever from the
paper feed tray and thus unlocks the paper feed tray. The paper feed tray is then pushed to the front (several centimeters) by a spring.
Then, the paper feed tray can be slid out.
The paper feed tray cannot be slid out when the main tray is in the raised position. The press of the manual down key does not unlock the
paper feed tray, either, if the power is turned OFF.
If it is absolutely necessary to slide out the paper feed tray with the power turned OFF in order to service the machine or for similar
purposes, a screwdriver or a similar bar may be inserted into the tray unlock hole provided in the back panel of the paper feed unit. This
disengages the tray lock lever, so that the paper feed tray can be slid out.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[6]
[8]
[1]
Main tray
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Paper feed tray
[7]
Manual down key

(Manual down control board MDCB)
[8]
Tray lock lever
[9]
Tray unlock hole
[10]
PC-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.2 Paper feed control

3.2.1 Pick-up control
The paper feed motor is energized by the print start signal.
The pick-up roller and paper feed roller pick up a sheet of paper and transports it onto the paper feed roller by the driving force of the paper
feed motor.
The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the vertical transport roller.
The paper feed motor is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the paper feed sensor detects the leading edge
of the paper.
The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller are driven by the moving paper, continuing to rotate.
The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller stop rotating as the paper moves past them.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Paper feed roller
[6]
[7]
Separation roller
[8]
Pick-up roller
3.2.2 Separation control

The separation roller is driven via a torque limiter in the direction opposite the paper transport direction.
The separation roller is pressed against the paper feed roller by the operating pressure generated by pressure of the spring and torque of
the torque limiter.
The operating pressure of the paper feed roller, separation roller, and the torque limiter serves as the limit torque for double feed prevention.
If there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the separation roller and the paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded,
so that the separation roller follows the rotation of the paper feed roller.
If there are two or more sheets of paper between the separation roller and the paper feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction
force of the paper, so that the separation roller rotates backward.
The backward rotation of the separation roller allows the lower sheet of paper in contact with the separation roller to be returned back into
the main tray. This properly separates the sheets of paper.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Pick-up roller
[2]
Paper feed roller
[3]
Separation roller
[4]
Paper
3.2.3 Paper level detection control

(1) Paper near-empty detection of the main tray
The paper level of the main tray is determined by counting the number of times the elevator motor sensor is activated/deactivated. The
count is then calculated to determine a corresponding paper level.
The paper level is measured when the power is turned ON, the power save mode is released and a paper feed tray is inserted.
Determination of main tray paper level (paper level
determination accuracy 31 sheets)
Count
30 or less
31 to 193
194 or over
1,250 sheets
(194 - count) 61 8 sheets
0 sheets
PC-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
(2) Paper near-empty detection of the shift tray

The shifter home position sensor and shift tray empty sensor detect the paper level of the shift tray.
If the shift tray empty sensor detects paper (is blocked) when the shifter is at the home position, the paper level of the shift tray is
determined to be 1,250 (sheets). If the shift tray empty sensor detects no paper (is unblocked), the paper level of the shift tray is
determined to be 0 (sheets).
(3) Paper level determination control

The total number of sheets still available for use on the main tray and the shift tray is translated to a corresponding number of sheets in
unit of 50 sheets (0 to 50 steps) to serve as the paper level.
No. of steps
3 or less
4 to 50
Paper near empty
Paper loaded
Paper level determination

(1) Paper empty detection of the main tray
The main tray paper empty board and paper empty sensor detect a paper empty condition of the main tray.
The machine determines that there is a paper empty condition in the main tray, if the reflector type photosensor on the main tray paper
empty board mounted on the frame of the paper feed cabinet detects no paper and the paper empty sensor is unblocked.
When the paper empty condition of the main tray is detected, the shifter is operated and the paper stack loaded in the shift tray is moved
onto the main tray.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Main tray
[3]
Shifter
[4]
Shift tray
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
(2) Paper empty detection of the shift tray

The shift tray empty sensor and shift home position sensor detect a paper empty condition of the shift tray.
PC-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
The machine determines that there is a paper empty condition in the shift tray, if the shift tray empty sensor is unblocked with the shifter
located at its home position.
(3) Paper empty condition determination control

When a paper empty condition is detected in both the main tray and the shift tray, the machine determines that the paper feed tray runs
out of paper and displays a paper empty message on the control panel.
3.3 Paper shift control

3.3.1 Overview of paper shift operation
When a paper empty condition of the main tray is detected, the shifter is operated and the paper stack loaded in the shift tray is moved onto
the main tray.
(1) Operation
1. The main tray is lowered to the lift-down lower limit position.
2. The division board moves from the home position to the retracted position.
3. The shifter moves from the home position to the stop position. This allows the paper stack loaded in the shift tray to be moved onto the
main tray.
4. The shifter returns to the home position.
5. The division board returns from the retracted position to the home position.
6. The main tray is raised.
3.3.2 Division board drive mechanism

The division board position motor drives the division board.
When the division board position motor is energized, the division board drive gear is rotated, so that the division board drive plate moves to
the front or rear. As a result, the division boards at the front and rear move from the home position to the retracted position.
The division board drive gear is provided with a light blocking plate. Accordingly, rotation of the division board drive gear blocks or unblocks
the division board position sensor. The position of the division board is detected by the position of the light blocking plate.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Division board (rear)
[2]
Division board drive gear
[3]
[4]
[5]
Division board drive plate
[6]
Division board (front)
3.3.3 Shifter drive mechanism

The shift motor drives the shifter.
When the shift motor rotates forward, the shifter drive belt rotates, so that the shifter moves from the home position to the stop position.
When the shift motor rotates backward, the shifter moves from the stop position to the home position.
The shifter home position sensor, shifter stop position sensor, and shift motor sensor detect the position of the shifter.
If the shifter is in contact with the paper stack loaded in the main tray after the paper stack is moved from the shift tray to the main tray, the
up operation of the main tray may be impeded by friction. The shift motor is therefore rotated backward for a predetermined number of
pulses after the shifter is brought to a stop and the shifter is thereby moved toward the home position. The shift motor sensor detects the
amount of the backward rotation of the shift motor.
PC-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Shifter
[3]
[4]
Shift motor (M54)
[5]
3.4 Paper misfeed display

NOTE
Different paper misfeed displays appear depending on the settings made in System 2/ JAM Code Display Setting of the Service
Mode.
3.4.1 Tray3 (typical)
3.4.2 System 2/ JAM Code Display Setting
3.5 Paper level display

The paper level is indicated by the LED on the right side of each paper feed tray and by the screen of the control panel.
Empty
Near empty
Other statuses
conditions)
LED
ON
Blinking *
OFF
*: The LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode/System 1/Machine State LED Setting/Paper Remainder.
PC-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Tray3 LED board (LEDB51)
[4]
[5]
Paper empty display
3.6 Periodically replaced parts

None of the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller is provided with a new article detection mechanism. When the three rollers
are replaced with new ones, the LCT Parts counter must be reset to zero using Counter/ Life of the Service Mode.
The number of times LCT Parts has been subjected to paper feed operations can be checked with the LCT Parts counter of the Service
Mode.
see F.9.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller, F.9.1.2 Replacing the feed roller, F.9.1.1 Replacing the separation roller, and I.11.12.2 Life.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
PC-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PD THEORY OF OPERATION JS-505 > 1. PAPER PATH
PD THEORY OF OPERATION JS-505

1. PAPER PATH
1.1 Exit to the lower tray
1.2 Exit to the sub tray
PD-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PD THEORY OF OPERATION JS-505 > 2. CONFIGURATION
2. CONFIGURATION
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Upper tray
[2]
Lower tray
[3]
Paper shift mechanism
[4]
Transport path switching mechanism
PD-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PD THEORY OF OPERATION JS-505 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Retraction motor (M3)
[4]
Lower tray exit roller
[5]
Shift motor (M2)
[6]
Upper tray exit roller
PD-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PD THEORY OF OPERATION JS-505 > 4. OPERATION
4. OPERATION
4.1 Transport/exit section
4.1.1 Paper transport
Drive from the transport motor causes the corresponding exit roller to rotate, thereby transporting the paper into the main or upper tray.
The transport motor is energized a predetermined period of time after the paper has activated the paper exit sensor of the copier.
Drive of the transport motor rotates the exit roller, so that paper is transported into the corresponding tray.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4.1.2 Transport path switching

The paper transport path is adequately switched to ensure that the paper is transported properly into the main or upper tray as necessary.
The retraction motor is energized to operate the paper path switching guide, so that the paper is directed into the correct tray.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Paper path switching guide
[3]
[4]
(1) Overview
Paper path switching is done by the paper path switching guide. The paper path switching guide is swung up or down at the following
timings.
Guide moving direction
Operation
Guide swung up (to feed paper into lower tray)
Lower tray selected for exit port, 2-sided print, sort selected
Guide swung down (to feed paper into upper tray)
Upper tray selected for exit port
PD-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
Guide swung up
(to feed paper into lower tray)
[1]
Guide swung down

(to feed paper into upper tray)
(2) Operation
The retraction motor is used to swing up or down the paper path switching guide. The retraction motor, when energized, swings the paper
path switching guide up or down.
The retraction home sensor detects the position of the paper path switching guide, either in the raised or lowered position.
The paper path switching guide is detected at its raised or lowered position when the sensor is blocked or unblocked by a cam.
Guide moving direction
Retraction home sensor
Guide swung up (to feed paper into lower tray)
Blocked
Guide swung down (to feed paper into upper tray)
Unblocked
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Cam
[4]
Retraction home sensor (PS4)
(a) Predrive
The following operations are performed before the paper path switching operation when the copier is turned ON or released from the
sleep mode, or a malfunction is reset.
Part
Operation
Retraction motor
The retraction motor is energized to swing up the paper path switching guide into its raised
position (to feed paper into the lower tray).
The retraction motor is deenergized a predetermined period of time after the sensor has been
blocked.
(b) Operation from the lowered position (exit to lower tray) to the raised position (exit to upper tray)
1. The predrive sequence is run (only when the copier is turned or released from the sleep mode, or a malfunction is reset).
2. The exit position of the tray is determined according to whether the retraction home sensor is blocked or unblocked.
3. If the retraction home sensor is blocked, it is determined that the paper path switching guide is in its raised position (to feed paper into
the lower tray). If the sensor is unblocked, it is then determined that the paper path switching guide is in its lowered position (to feed
paper into the upper tray).
4. If the paper path switching guide is in its raised position (to feed paper into the lower tray), the retraction motor is energized. After the
retraction home sensor is thereafter unblocked, the retraction motor is deenergized.
PD-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
Before switching
After switching
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Retraction motor
[2]
[3]
Cam
[4]
(c) Paper exit into the upper tray

1. The predrive sequence is run (only when the copier is turned or released from the sleep mode, or a malfunction is reset).
2. The exit position of the tray is determined according to whether the retraction home sensor is blocked or unblocked.
3. If the retraction home sensor is blocked, it is determined that the paper path switching guide is in its raised position (to feed paper into
the lower tray). If the sensor is unblocked, it is then determined that the paper path switching guide is in its lowered position (to feed
paper into the upper tray).
4. If the paper path switching guide is in its lowered position (to feed paper into the upper tray), the retraction motor is energized. After the
retraction home sensor is thereafter blocked, the retraction motor is deenergized.
[1]
[2]
Before switching
After switching
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
Retraction motor
[2]
PD-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[3]
Cam
[4]
4.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism

Each tray is mounted with a tray paper full detect board that detects a full-of-paper condition of the tray.
The tray paper full detect board consists of an LED and a PR (photoreceiver). When the paper stack blocks the LED light for a
predetermined period of time, it is determined that the tray is in the full-of-paper condition. This is relayed to a corresponding message on
the control panel.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Upper tray paper full detect board/PR (T2FDTB/PR)
[2]
Lower tray paper full detect board/PR (T1FDTB/PR)
[3]
Lower tray paper full detect board/LED (T1FDTB/LED)
[4]
Upper tray paper full detect board/LED (T2FDTB/LED)
4.1.4 Lower tray exit roller pressure/retraction

The lower tray is provided with an exit roller pressure/retraction mechanism that allows paper to be temporarily fed into the lower tray when
a 2-sided print cycle is commanded.
When a pressure/retraction command is received, the roller pressure/retraction clutch is energized. Then, the lifting cam is rotated a half
turn, which causes the lifting plate to swing up and down, so that the exit roller is pressed and released.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Lifting cam
[3]
Lifting plate
[4]
(1) Exit roller pressure/retraction overview

The exit roller is normally in its pressed condition. It is released during a 2-sided print cycle.
When the copier is turned or released from the sleep mode, or a cover open/close, the roller pressure/retraction clutch is energized to
bring the exit roller into its pressed condition, which is done to determine the condition of the exit roller.
Roller pressure/release condition
Normal printing
Pressed
2-sided printing
The copier is turned or released from the sleep mode, or a cover open/close
Pressed released pressed
(2) Exit roller pressure/retraction operation

When the roller pressure/retraction clutch is energized, the lifting cam is rotated a half turn. The lifting plate is then raised and lowered to
complete a pressure/retraction operation.
Whether the pressure/retraction home sensor is blocked or unblocked determines the condition of the exit roller, either pressed or
released.
When the pressure/retraction home sensor is blocked and unblocked, the roller pressure/retraction clutch is deenergized to stop the
operation.
PD-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Lifting plate position
Pressed
Blocked
Raised
Released
Unblocked
Lowered
[1]
[2]
Pressed condition
[1]
[3]
Lifting cam
Released condition
[3]
[2]
Lifting plate
4.2 Paper shift section

4.2.1 Paper shift mechanism
The exit roller is shifted its position during paper exit so that print jobs can be offset, one job from another.
To offset print jobs, the shift section is moved.
The shift section is moved by drive supplied from the shift motor. The motion is controlled by the shift home sensor that is blocked or
unblocked.
The shift operation is executed when the sort function is used on the control panel.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Shift section
[3]
Shift motor (M2)
[3]
[2]
4.2.2 Shift operation overview

At a predetermined timing during paper exit into the lower tray, the shift motor is energized to slide the shift section in a direction
perpendicular to the feeding direction.
Receiving a shift operation command, the shift motor is energized, causing the shift section to slide.
The position of the shift section is controlled using the shift home sensor. The position is detected as the shift home sensor is blocked or
unblocked.
The shift home sensor is normally blocked.
When the sort function is used on the control panel, the shift motor is energized and the shift section is made to slide until the shift home
sensor is unblocked.
A predetermined period of time after the shift section has been moved (for sorting), the shift motor is energized to slide the shift section until
the shift home sensor is blocked.
PD-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
[2]
[3]
Normal position
[1]
Shift section
[3]
Shift home sensor
Shift position
[2]
PD-9
Paper
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PE THEORY OF OPERATION JS-603 > 1. PAPER PATH
PE THEORY OF OPERATION JS-603

1. PAPER PATH
PE-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PE THEORY OF OPERATION JS-603 > 2. CONFIGURATION
2. CONFIGURATION
[1]
[1]
Conveyance/exit section
PE-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PE THEORY OF OPERATION JS-603 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
PE-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PE THEORY OF OPERATION JS-603 > 4. OPERATION
4. OPERATION
4.1 Conveyance/exit section
4.1.1 Paper conveyance
Drive from the paper passage motor/1 causes the corresponding exit roller to rotate, thereby conveying the paper into the tray.
The paper passage motor/1 is energized a predetermined period of time after the paper has activated the paper passage sensor/1.
Drive of the paper passage motor/1 rotates the exit roller, so that paper is conveyed into the tray.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Exit roller
4.1.2 Conveyance path switching

The horizontal conveyance section of FS-527 is provided with a conveyance path switching mechanism for conveying paper onto JS-603.
For details of the mechanism, see PF.3.1 Configuration of FS-527.
4.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism

The tray3 full sensor is located at the exit of the tray, detecting a full-of-paper condition of the tray.
The actuator is operated each time paper is fed into the tray. When the level of paper fed into the tray reaches a predetermined value
(capacity), the sensor is blocked and the main body determines that the tray is full of paper.
The number of sheets of paper that is detected as a full-of-paper condition is 100 sheets in terms of plain paper.
The number of sheets of paper detected as a full-of-paper condition, however, varies depending on the environmental conditions and the
amount of curl in paper.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Actuator
4.1.4 Exit roller pressure/retraction

The tray is provided with an exit roller pressure/retraction mechanism that allows paper to be temporarily fed into the tray when a 2-sided
print cycle is commanded.
When a pressure/retraction command is received, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized. Then, the lifting cam is rotated a half
turn, which causes the lifting lever to swing up and down, so that the exit roller is pressed and retracted.
PE-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Pressure
Retraction
[2]
[3]
[1]
Lifting cam
[2]
Lifting lever
[3]
Exit roller
[4]
[5]

The exit roller is normally in its retracted condition. It is pressed during a 2-sided print cycle and paper exit into tray 3.
When the main body is turned or retracted from the sleep mode, or a cover open/close, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized to
bring the exit roller into its retracted condition, which is done to determine the condition of the exit roller.
Roller pressure/retraction condition
Normal printing
Retracted
2-sided printing (except for small size paper)
Retracted pressed retracted
The main body is turned or retracted from the sleep mode

When the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized, the lifting cam is rotated a half turn. The lifting lever is then raised and lowered to
complete a pressure/retraction operation.
Whether the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked or unblocked determines the condition of the exit roller, either pressed or
retracted.
When the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked and unblocked, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is deenergized to stop the
operation.
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor
Pressed
Blocked
Retracted
Unblocked
PE-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Lifting cam
[2]
Exit roller
[3]
Lifting lever
[4]
[5]
PE-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 1. PAPER FEED PATH
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527

1. PAPER FEED PATH
1.1 Tray1
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Tray1
[2]
Tray1 exit roller
[3]
Tray1 path switching gate
[4]
Paper path from the horizontal conveyance unit
1.2 Tray2
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Bypass route
[2]
Tray2
[3]
[4]
Upper lower path switching gate
PF-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 1. PAPER FEED PATH
1.3 Stapling
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Bypass route
[2]
Tray2
[3]
Tray2 exit roller
[4]
Alignment section
[5]
Stapler
[6]
[7]
PF-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 2. CONFIGURATION
2. CONFIGURATION
The following sections are combined in a single unit: the horizontal conveyance section, conveyance section, alignment section, tray1, tray2,
and stapler section.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Conveyance section
[2]
Alignment section
[3]
Tray1
[4]
Tray2
[5]
Stapler section
[6]
Horizontal conveyance section
PF-3
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 3. HORIZONTAL

CONVEYANCE SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

3.1 Configuration
The horizontal conveyance section is composed of the duplex path switching sensor, paper passage sensor/1, horizontal conveyance cover
sensor, paper passage sensor/2, paper passage motor/1, and duplex path switching motor.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Horizontal conveyance cover sensor (PS5)
[6]
3.2 Horizontal conveyance mechanism

The horizontal conveyance section conveys paper fed out from the main body to the finisher.
The paper passage motor/1 provides drive for the conveyance rollers.
On the finisher side, drive from the paper passage motor/1 conveys the paper into the finisher.
Horizontal conveyance section
Main body side
Finisher side
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
PF-4
Conveyance roller
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 3. HORIZONTAL

CONVEYANCE SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3.2.2 Conveyance path switching motor mechanism

The horizontal conveyance section is provided with a paper path switching mechanism for conveying paper fed from the fusing section onto
the duplex section or tray 3 (when another option of JS-603 is mounted).
The paper path is changed by the duplex path switching motor and the path switching guide.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
Path switching guide
(1) Operation
The path switching guide swings up or down when the duplex path switching motor is energized.
The duplex path switching sensor detects the position of the path switching guide, either the swung-up or swung-down position. The
sensor is blocked or unblocked by the cam to detect the swung-down or swung-up position of the path switching guide as detailed below.
Path switching guide position
Swung-up position (paper to finisher)
Unblocking
Swung-down position (paper to duplex section)
Blocking
PF-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.1 Configuration
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1]
Tray1 exit roller
[2]
Tray2 exit roller
[3]
Exit motor (M5)
[4]
Switchback roller
[5]
[6]
Registration roller
[7]
4.2 Drive
[1]
[8]
[9]
[7]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Tray1 exit roller
[2]
Tray2 exit roller
[3]
Exit driven roller
[4]
Conveyance roller 1
PF-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[5]
Paper passage roller
[6]
Conveyance roller 2
[7]
[8]
[9]
Exit motor (M5)
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Upper lower path switching gate
The upper lower path switching gate switches paper to different routes that go to individual trays and SD-509.
The paper exit command from the main body moves the upper lower path switching gate up or down as necessary.
(1) Upper lower path switching gate operation

The upper lower path switching motor drives the route change gate.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
4.3.2 Tray1 path switching gate

The tray1 path switching gate changes the paper conveyance path between one toward the tray1 and one toward the bypass route.
(1) Tray1 path switching gate operation

The tray1 path switching gate is operated by the tray1 path switching motor.
When the tray1 path switching motor is energized, the tray1 path switching gate swings up or down.
The tray1 path switching home sensor detects the position of the tray1 path switching gate, either the swung-up or swung-down position.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
PF-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.3.3 Conveyance operation

(1) Tray1 conveyance
The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed via the registration roller and guided into the tray1 by the upper
lower path switching gate and tray1 path switching gate. It is then fed out into the tray1 by the tray1 exit roller.
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
Tray1
[3]
Tray1 exit roller
[4]
Registration roller
[5]
(2) Tray2 conveyance

The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed onto the alignment section by way of the registration roller,
paper passage roller, switchback roller, and lower path roller.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Paper passage roller
[2]
Tray2
[3]
Lower path roller
[4]
Switchback roller
[5]
Registration roller
(3) Bypass route

The bypass route is provided to eliminate any time loss during stapling operation relative to the subsequent sheet of paper and to achieve
high productivity.
The following describe how two copy sets/stacks are produced as an output, each consisting of two sheets of paper stapled together.
(a) For the 1st copy

The bypass route is not used for the paper path for the first copy set/stack.
(b) For the 2nd copy

The first sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack passes through the path to tray2, but is fed and temporarily brought into a standby
state on the conveyance path to the SD-509 by the switchback roller.
The second sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack is then conveyed and fed into the bypass route.
At the same time that the first copy set/stack is fed out, the first and second sheets of the second copy set/stack are conveyed onto the
alignment section.
PF-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223

[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
SD-509
[1]
Bypass route
[2]
Tray2
[3]
Switchback roller
[4]
Conveyance path to the SD-509
(4) Conveyance to SD-509

The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is further conveyed onto the path toward tray2 and, when the trailing edge of
the paper moves past the lower path sensor, the switchback roller is brought to a temporary stop.
The switchback roller is thereafter turned backward, so that the paper is conveyed into the SD-509.
[1]
[2]
SD-509
[1]
[2]
PF-9
Switchback roller
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 5. EXIT TRAY SECTION
5. EXIT TRAY SECTION

5.1 Drive
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
Elevate motor (M15)
[3]
Lift belt
[2]
Tray2
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Tray lift
(1) Tray lift operation
The driving force of the worm gear mounted on the shaft of the elevate motor drives the lift belt.
The tray2 moves up or down depending on the direction in which the lift belt is driven.
PF-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Elevate motor (M15)
[2]
[3]
Lift belt
[4]
[5]
[6]
Tray2 upper position sensor (PS24)
[7]
Tray2
(2) Paper detection

The tray2 upper position sensor keeps the specified distance between the upper surface of the paper exited to the tray2 and the paper
exit opening to eliminate the misalignment of the exited paper.
The tray2 upper position sensor and tray2 lower position sensor detect a full-of-paper condition of the tray2.
When both of these sensors are activated, a corresponding message appears on the control panel.
The tray2 lower position switch detects the lower limit of the tray.
5.2.2 Exit to tray1

The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is fed out into the tray1 by the tray1 exit roller by way of the registration roller
and paper passage roller.
The upper lower path switching gate and tray1 path switching gate are also operated to convey the paper into the tray1.
The paper passage motor/2 provides drive for the tray1 exit roller.
[2]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
PF-11
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
Tray1 exit roller
[2]
Tray1
[3]
[4]
[5]
5.2.3 Exit to tray2
The exit motor is energized to convey paper onto tray2.

To collect sheets of paper in the alignment section during stapling, the exit roll is temporarily retracted.
When the stapling operation is completed, the exit roll is pressed, so that the paper is fed out into tray2.
The exit roller retraction motor provides drive for retraction of the exit roll.
(1) Normal paper exit operation

When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2 exit roller, the exit motor is energized and the paper
is conveyed onto tray2.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Exit motor (M5)
[2]
Tray2 exit roller
(2) Paper exit operation during stapling

When the leading edge of the paper reaches the paper exit sensor of the main body, the exit roller retraction motor is energized to retract
the exit roll.
After the paper is processed, the exit roller retraction motor is energized to press the exit roll and the paper is fed out by drive from the
exit motor.
PF-12
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
Before pressure
After pressure
[1]
[2]
Exit motor (M5)
[3]
Tray2 exit roller
[4]
Exit roll
5.2.4 Tray2 shift control

The tray2 is moved to the front or rear in order to offset one copy set/stack with respect to another in the sort or group mode.
The tray2 shift motor provides drive for the front-to-rear shift motion of the tray2.
[1]
[2]
PF-13
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
Tray2
(1) Tray1 shift operation

When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2 exit roller in the sort/group mode, the tray2 shift
motor is energized to perform the shift operation.
When the tray2 shift motor is energized, the shift frame is moved to the right or left via a gear train, which results in tray2 operatively
connected to the shift frame being moved to the right or left.
If a command for the next paper is received, the tray2 shift motor is energized again to perform the shift operation.
The shift position of the tray2 is controlled by the tray2 shift home sensor. The sensor is activated when the tray2 is at its home position
(ordinary position).
The amount of shift operation is 30 mm.
30 mm
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Tray2
[4]
Shift frame
PF-14
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 6. ALIGNMENT SECTION
6. ALIGNMENT SECTION
6.1 Drive
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Alignment plate
[3]
[2]
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Alignment plate
The alignment plates align sheets of paper in the crosswise direction inside the finisher.
The alignment plate motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to open/close the alignment plates to perform the alignment of the paper.
The alignment plate motor rotates to open/close the alignment plates via the alignment plate belts.
The alignment plate home sensor detects the home position of the alignment plates.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Alignment plate
[3]
[2]
6.2.2 Alignment section conveyance mechanism

The paper fed out from the main body falls in the alignment section by its own weight.
The accommodation paddle motor operates the accommodation paddle to convey paper reliably onto the alignment section.
PF-15
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 6. ALIGNMENT SECTION
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
PF-16
Rewind paddle
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 7. STAPLER
7. STAPLER
7.1 Drive
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Stapler unit
[4]
[5]
Belt
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Stapler movement
(1) Stapler movement operation
The stapler movement motor moves the stapler.
Rotation of the stapler movement motor drives the belt through the pulley, which moves the stapler mounted on the belt.
The stapler home sensor/1 becomes the stapler's home position. In the two-point stapling mode, the stapler is stopped at a position a
given distance relative to the stapler home sensor/2.
In the one-corner stapling mode using A4 or A3 paper, the stapler stops at the stapler home sensor/1 to staple sheets. For any other
paper size, the stapler stops a position a predetermined distance away relative to the stapler home sensor/1 to staple sheets.
PF-17
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527 > 7. STAPLER
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
Stapler
[3]
[2]
Belt
7.2.2 Stapler control

The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor.
(1) Stapling operation

In the stapling operation, the stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the paper. Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side
and bent at the clincher side.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Stapler (clincher side)
[2]
Paper
[3]
Stapler (stapler side)
[4]
Stapler motor (M18)
(2) Staple control

(a) Stapling
After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the stapler motor performs the stapling operation.
The stapling operation is completed when the stapler home sensor in the stapler detects the home position and turn ON.
(b) Clogged staple detection

The main body determines that staples have been jammed, if the stapler home sensor is not activated within a predetermined period of
time after it has been deactivated during a stapling operation. The stapler motor is then rotated backward to bring the stapler back to its
home position.
(c) Staple detection and cartridge detection

When the staples run out, or if there is no cartridge loaded in position, the staple empty switch turns ON and the main body displays a
corresponding staple empty message on the control panel.
PF-18
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-529 > 1. PAPER PATH
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-529

1. PAPER PATH
PG-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-529 > 2. CONFIGURATION
2. CONFIGURATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Conveyance section
[2]
Exit tray section
[3]
Alignment section
[4]
Staple section
PG-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-529 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Exit roller
[4]
PG-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PG THEORY OF OPERATION FS-529 > 4. OPERATION
4. OPERATION
4.1 Conveyance section
Drive from the conveyance motor/1 and conveyance motor/2 cause the corresponding roller to rotate, thereby conveying the paper into the
tray.
After it is determined that the paper has been fed out of the main body, the conveyance motor/1 and conveyance motor/2 are energized.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
4.1.2 Conveyance path switching

The conveyance path is switched to conveyance paper onto the duplex section.
The paper path switching guide works to switch the conveyance path as necessary. The lever is operated to swing up and down the paper
path switching guide when the flapper solenoid is energized.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
Lever
4.1.3 Tray exit roller pressure/retraction
The exit roller is retracted as necessary in order to conveyance the paper from the main body temporarily onto the alignment section.
After the alignment operation is completed, the exit roller is pressed again, so that the paper is fed into the tray.
The exit roller is pressed or retracted by the pickup roller position motor.
The exit roller is moved up or down via a gear train when the pick up roller position motor is energized.
PG-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[1]
Exit roller
[3]
[3]
[2]

The exit roller is normally in its retracted condition.
When the main body is turned or retracted from the sleep mode, or a cover open/close, the pick up roller position motor is energized to
bring the exit roller into its retracted condition, which is done to determine the condition of the exit roller.

When the pick up roller position motor is energized, the gear is rotated. The exit roller is then raised and lowered to complete a pressure/
retraction operation.
Whether the pick up roller position sensor is blocked or unblocked determines the condition of the exit roller, either pressed or retracted.
Pressed
Unblocked
Retracted
Blocked
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
PG-5
Actuator
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.2 Alignment section

4.2.1 Drive
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Alignment plate/F
[2]
Alignment plate/R
[3]
[4]
4.2.2 Operation
(1) Alignment section
The alignment section performs stapling, aligning, sorting, and offsetting.
The paper is conveyed, one sheet at a time, onto the alignment section for subsequent necessary operation.
(2) Alignment plate

The alignment plate/F and alignment plate/R align the paper.
The alignment plate/F and alignment plate/R are driven by the alignment motor/F and alignment motor/R, respectively.
The alignment plate home sensor/F and alignment plate home sensor/R detect the position of the alignment plate/F and alignment plate/
R, respectively.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
(3) Shift control

In the sort or group copy mode, the alignment plate shifts to the front or rear. This stacks copy sets/stacks in a saw tooth manner, each
being offset by about 30 mm with respect to the others.
The registration in normal print mode varies depending on the paper size, stapling position, and the position of the alignment plate during
paper exit.
PG-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
30 mm
[2]
[1]
Alignment plate/R
[2]
Alignment plate/F
4.3 Stapler
4.3.1 Drive
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Stapler
[4]
Drive belt
4.3.2 Operation
(1) Stapler movement
The stapler movement motor moves the stapler.
The stapler movement motor rotates to drive the belt, which in turn moves the stapler unit.
The stapling position is controlled based on the number of pulses generated by the stapler movement motor. No position sensors are
provided for back corner stapling and two-point stapling.
The stapler home sensor determines the home position of the stapler, as that may be needed when the stapler is brought to a stop at an
irregular position during, for example, a malfunction. In such cases, the stapler is moved until the stapler home sensor is blocked.

The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor.
In the stapling operation, the stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the paper. Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side
and bent at the clincher side.
PG-7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[1]
Stapler motor (M8)
[2]
Clincher
4.4 Exit tray section

4.4.1 Drive
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Exit roller
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Tray up/down operation sensor (PS4)
[8]
4.4.2 Operation
(1) Tray up/down
When the tray up/down motor is energized, the corresponding arm is operated via a gear train to raise the tray.
The upper limit of motion of the tray is established by a stopper provided in the finisher.
The tray is lowered as the motor rotates backward.
The tray lower limit sensor detects the lower limit of motion of the tray.
PG-8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
Exit tray
[2]
Arm
(2) Full-of-paper condition detection

The paper surface detect sensor/1 and paper surface detect sensor/2 detect a full-of-paper condition in the tray. If the paper surface
detect sensor/1/2 is not blocked (unblocked) even when the paper surface detect solenoid is energized, the main body determines that
the tray is full of paper.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Actuator
[3]
[4]
PG-9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PH THEORY OF OPERATION PK-517 > 1. UNIT CONFIGURATION
PH THEORY OF OPERATION PK-517

1. UNIT CONFIGURATION
[1]
[2]
[1]
Punch section
[2]
PH-1
Punch scraps box section
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PH THEORY OF OPERATION PK-517 > 2. PAPER PATH
2. PAPER PATH
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Punch kit
[3]
Paper path from the main body
[2]
PH-2
Punch scraps box
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PH THEORY OF OPERATION PK-517 > 3. CONFIGURATION
3. CONFIGURATION
PH-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PH THEORY OF OPERATION PK-517 > 4. OPERATION
4. OPERATION
4.1 Skew correction mechanism
For punch operation, a loop is formed in the paper at the conveyance roller to correct skew.
The paper passage sensor/1 detects the leading edge of the paper and the conveyance roller forms a loop in the paper.
The paper passage motor/1 is then energized after a given period of time after the paper passage sensor/1 is activated by the leading edge
of the paper, this causes the conveyance roller to start turning.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Conveyance roller
[2]
4.2 Punch mechanism

The paper passage sensor/1 will detect the trailing edge of the paper and stop feeding the paper after the lapse of a predetermined period
of time.
The drive cam will be rotated by the punch motor/1(2) to move the slide cam back and forth. The slide cam will move the puncher down to
make the punch hole at the back edge of the paper. (The punch hole will be made sheet by sheet.)
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
Paper feed direction
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]

[2]
Slide cam
[3]
Puncher
[4]
4.3 Punch status detection

The punch status is detected by the punch cam position sensor, punch home sensor/1, and the punch pulse sensor/1.
PH-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PH THEORY OF OPERATION PK-517 > 4. OPERATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Punch cam position sensor (PS200)
[3]

[2]

4.4 Punch trash box full detection mechanism

The punch trash box is provided with the punch hole full sensor. When a punch waste is detected, the corresponding message is displayed
on the control panel.
The punch hole full sensor is a reflector type sensor that detects height of the punch trash.
Punch hole full sensor also detects whether or not the punch trash box is mounted.
Punch dust full message will be displayed on the control panel when the punch trash box is not mounted.
[1]
[1]
PH-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PI THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509 > 1. PAPER FEED PATH
PI THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509

1. PAPER FEED PATH
PI-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PI THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509 > 2. CONFIGURATION
2. CONFIGURATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Alignment section
[3]
Exit section
[2]
PI-2
Stapler
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PI THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509 > 3. ALIGNMENT SECTION
3. ALIGNMENT SECTION
3.1 Drive
[2]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[1]
Alignment plate/F
[2]
Alignment plate/R
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
3.2 Operation
3.2.1 Alignment
In the folding/saddle stitching mode, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R aligns paper.
The center staple alignment motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to move the alignment plates, thereby aligning paper in the main
scanning direction.
The leading edge stopper motor is rotated to raise the leading edge stopper up to a position of the paper to be stored, thereby aligning
paper in the sub-scanning direction.
[1]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Paddle
[2]
[3]
Alignment plate/R
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
PI-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[9]
[10]
Alignment plate/F
(1) Alignment operation

The center staple alignment motor/F and /R rotate to open/close the alignment plates via the alignment belts.
The center staple alignment home sensor/F and /R detect the home position of the alignment plates.
The leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the leading edge stopper in the vertical direction via the belt.
(2) Alignment control

When the first sheet of paper undergoes a switchback operation, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R start rotating to bring the
alignment plates closer to each other and then bring them to a stop at the standby positions at which they are apart from each at a
distance slightly wider than the paper width.
The center staple alignment motor/F and /R perform the alignment operation by rotating in the forward and reverse direction to move the
alignment plate back and forth after a specified period of time since the saddle path sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.
The paper alignment operation in the main scanning direction is performed each time a sheet of paper is fed in.
(3) Paddle control

After the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the saddle path sensor has detected the leading edge of the paper, the upper
paddle motor is rotated to align the paper in the sub-scanning direction.
The paddles are rotated each time a sheet of paper is fed in.
3.2.2 Stopper
At the leading edge stopper, papers in sub scanning direction are aligned, and papers conveyed to the aligning section are conveyed to the
specified position.
The leading edge grip holds the paper when moving it to a specified position, or when stapling or folding it.
(1) Stopper operation

The leading edge stopper motor moves the leading edge stopper up and down in accordance with the paper size. The leading edge
stopper home sensor detects the home position.
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Leading edge grip
[4]
[5]
(2) Stopper control

(a) Folding mode
After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON and the sheets of paper are held in place.
PI-4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets
to the folding position.
(b) Saddle stitching mode

After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON and the sheets of paper are held in place.
After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets
to the saddle stitching position.
After stapling operation was completed, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R opens the alignment plates and the leading edge
stopper motor starts rotating to move the leading edge stopper further down and lower the paper to the folding position.
PI-5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PI THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509 > 4. STAPLER
4. STAPLER
4.1 Drive
[1]
[2]
[1]
Staple motor
[2]
Drive gear
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Stapling
The stapling operation is performed by the staple motor.

In the stapling operation, the staple motor in the stapler pushes out the paper press section to the clincher by the drive gear to hold the
paper and punch out the staple. Then, the staple is bent in the clincher.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Staple motor
[2]
Drive gear
[3]
Clincher
[4]
Stapler
[5]
Staple
(2) Staple control

(a) Stapling
After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the staple motor performs the stapling operation.
The stapling operation is completed when the sensor in the stapler detects the home position and turn ON.
PI-6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PI THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509 > 4. STAPLER
(b) Clogged staple detection

During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the staple motor rotates in the reverse direction to
replace the stapler to the home position if the sensor in the stapler does not turn ON after a specified period of time since it turn OFF.
PI-7
PI THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509 > 5. FOLDING/SADDLE

STITCHING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING
5.1 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Folding plate
[2]
Folding roller
[3]
[4]
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Folding plate
The center fold plate motor drives the folding plate.
(1) Folding plate operation

The center fold plate motor rotates the crank shaft a half turn via the gear and pushes the paper to the nip section with the folding plate.
The folding rollers draw and fold the paper.
The position of the leading edge stopper controls the folding position.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Fold plate
[2]
Crank shaft
[3]
[4]
Paper
PI-8

STITCHING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[5]
[6]
Folding roller
(2) Folding plate control

The center fold plate motor turns ON and sticks out the folding plate to the paper after a specified period of time since the leading edge
stopper stops at the folding position.
The center fold plate motor stops when the folding plate reciprocates and the center fold plate home sensor turns ON.
5.2.2 Folding conveyance

The center fold roller motor drives the folding roller.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Folding roller
[2]
(1) Folding conveyance control

The center fold plate motor turns ON after the leading edge stopper stops at the folding position.
When the center fold plate motor turns ON the center fold plate home sensor, the center fold roller motor turns ON and folds the paper.
The center fold roller motor stops after a specified period of time since the paper detection sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper
bundle.
[1]
[1]
(2) Folding roller control

Different folding roller controls are performed depending on the number of sheets of paper and the size of the paper.
PI-9

STITCHING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(a) The paper width is 215.9 mm or more and the number of sheets of paper is less than six
When the center fold plate home sensor is deactivated after the center fold plate motor has been energized, the center fold roller motor
is energized to start rotating at low speed.
The folding roller is made to start rotating at high speed after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after it has started rotating.
When the paper detection sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the leading edge stopper motor is energized to raise the
leading edge stopper to the alignment position defined according to the paper size.
(b) Other than above

The center fold roller motor is energized to start rotating at low speed a predetermined period of time before the paper stack reaches
the center fold position.
The center fold plate motor is energized and, after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the center fold plate home sensor
has been deactivated, the folding roller is made to start rotating at high speed.
When the paper detection sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the leading edge stopper motor is energized to raise the
leading edge stopper to the alignment position defined according to the paper size.
PI-10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PI THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509 > 6. EXIT SECTION
6. EXIT SECTION
6.1 Configuration
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Exit
The paper fed out by the center fold roller motor is stacked in the tray by its own weight.
(1) Full-of-paper detection

The capacity of the tray varies depending on the number of sheets of paper in the paper sets/stacks fed into the tray and detection of a
full-of-paper condition cannot be made based on the number of sheets of paper stacked in the tray.
The main body therefore counts the number of sheets of paper stacked and detects a full-of-paper condition when a predetermined
number of sheets of paper is reached.
If the booklet tray full sensor remains activated for a predetermined period of time, the main body determines that paper can no longer be
fed into the tray and that there is a full-of-paper condition in the tray.
(2) Full-of-paper detection conditions

The booklet tray full sensor is activated.
The booklet tray near full sensor is activated when the power switch is turned ON.
The number of sets/stacks stacked in the tray reaches a predetermined value during copying.
A set/stack having a paper length different from that fed out earlier is fed out.
The main body does not determine that there is a full-of-paper condition in the tray under any condition other than above.
PI-11
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION EK-604/EK-605/SC-507 > 1. EK-604
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION EK-604/EK-605/SC-507

1. EK-604
1.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
USB terminal (extension)
[3]
Local Interface Kit EK-604
[2]
USB terminal (standard)
1.2 Operation
The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.
Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard input.
PJ-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION EK-604/EK-605/SC-507 > 2. EK-605
2. EK-605
2.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
USB terminal (extension)
[3]
[2]
USB terminal (standard)
2.2 Operation
The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.
Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard input.
The local interface kit is mounted when the voice guidance function and functions interacting with the portable phone or PDA (portable data
terminal) compatible with Bluetooth are to be used. It has a built-in speaker and Bluetooth communication receiver.
Using Bluetooth, the user can print files directly from the portable phone, download and print PDF or other files from the portable phone, or
save them in a box.
If an XHTML file is downloaded from the portable phone, an image file can be downloaded from the URL described in XHTML and printed
as an image onto a location specified in the XHTML document.
[2]
[1]
[1]
Portable phone, PDA
[2]
PJ-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION EK-604/EK-605/SC-507 > 3. SC-507
3. SC-507
3.1 Configuration
[1]
[1]
Security Kit SC-507
3.2 Operation
The security kit offers the copy guard (copy prohibited) and password copy functions in addition to the conventional copy protect function.
The copy guard security pattern or password copy security pattern printed on the original is detected to thereby prevent unauthorized copies
from being produced.
The copy guard security pattern and password copy security pattern can be detected only by the Konica Minolta machine mounted with the
copy guard and password copy functions.
Copy
Print
Detecting the copy
guard security pattern to discard the
job.
Making a copy from an

output produced by adding the copy guard security pattern or password
copy security pattern.
Copying enabled through
password input.
PJ-3
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PK THEORY OF OPERATION AU-102/AU-201 > 1. AU-102
PK THEORY OF OPERATION AU-102/AU-201

1. AU-102
1.1 Configuration
[2]
[1]
[1]
Authentication unit (AU-102)
[2]
Finger
1.2 Operation
A finger vein pattern is used for personal identification.
Vein patterns are inside the body and cannot be visually recognized. This makes vein patterns extremely difficult to forge or falsify. The vein
pattern authentication system can provide high security.
With ultra-red LED radiation, a finger vein pattern is captured by camera and its image is created. The vein pattern image is registered and a
person can be identified if the person's vein pattern matches the registered one at the time of user authentication.
PK-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PK THEORY OF OPERATION AU-102/AU-201 > 2. AU-201
2. AU-201
2.1 Configuration
Abcde Fgdhi
ABCDE_Co.
[1]
[1]
[2]
Authentication unit (AU-201)
[2]
Non-contact IC card
2.2 Operation
A non-contact IC card, such as an employee ID card, is used for personal identification.
The system supports the communications protocol in compliance with Type A, Type B, and Felica (Type C) of ISO14443.
It can be used that the card corresponded to Felica, TypeA, SSFC (Shared Security Formats Cooperation), FCF (Felica common-use
format), or FCF campus.
Simply placing the IC card on the authentication unit will let the unit read the data from the card.
PK-2
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FK-508 > 1. COMMUNICATION

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FK-508

1. COMMUNICATION CONTROL
1.1 FIF bits of DIS, DTC and DCS
NOTE
Considered to be A4 width when the DIS recording paper width is invalid (1, 1).
Becomes a FIF error when the DCS recording paper width is invalid (1, 1).
Considered to be unlimited when the DIS recording paper length is invalid (1, 1).
Considered to be unlimited when the DCS recording paper length is invalid (1, 1).
The DCS recording paper length in a machine is made to be of the same length as that in a remote station and is sent.
Considered to be 2400bps when the DIS transmission speed is an undefined value.
Becomes a FIF error when the DCS transmission speed is an undefined value.
Considered to be 40ms instruction when the MSLT of DCS is an undefined value.
Considered to have mm ability when DIS inch ability and mm ability are both set to OFF.
Considered to be 200*100 pels/inch when the DCS resolution receives the inch instruction at 3.851/mm.
Becomes a FIF error when more than one of bit41, 42 and 43 are set to on in the resolution of DCS.
Becomes a FIF error when DCS receives the MMR instruction without ECM.
Becomes a FIF error when DCS receives the file transfer (BFT) instruction without ECM.
Becomes a FIF error when DCS shows an instruction which exceeds the ability of the machine.
FIF of DIS/DTC is not sent if last octet is 0.
DCS sends FIF whose length is the same as that of the machine.
When undefined signals are received, they are received and ignored in consideration of the future expansion. (not an error)
1.1.1 FIF data configuration list (DIS/DTC)

(1) Octet 4
bit
Function
T.37 Internet fax (Simple mode)
Reserved
T.38 real time Internet fax
Third generation mobile network
0
0
Reserved
V.8 ability
ECM frame
Reserved
Contents
Default
0
1: 64 octet
0: 256 octet
0
0
(2) Octet 5
bit
Function
Contents
Default
Ready for polled transmission
1: polled transmission documents exist

0: no polled transmission documents
10
Receiver ability
1: Reception is possible.
0: Reception is impossible.
11
Transmission speed ability
Refer to *1.
12
13
14
15
R8*7.71/mm and / or 200*200 pels/25.4 mm
16
Two-dimensional coding ability
1
1: MR
0: MH
@) Changes to 0 or 1 according to a status of devices.
*1: Transmission speed ability (bit 11, 12, 13 and 14)

11
12
13
14
V27 ter fall back mode
24
V27 ter
48, 24
V29
96, 72
V27 ter & V29
96, 72, 48, 24
V27 ter & V29 & V17
144, 120, 96, 72, 48, 24
Contents
Transmission speed
(3) Octet 6
bit
17
Function
Recording paper width ability
Contents
bit 17,18
0,0=A4
0,1=A3
1,0=B4
PL-1
Default
0

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
bit
Function
18
19
Recording paper length ability
20
21
Minimum scan line time ability
Contents
Default
1,1=Invalid
bit 19,20
0,0=A4
0,1=Unlimited
1,0=B4
1,1=Invalid
Refer to *2.
22
23
24
Expansion field
*2: Minimum scan line time ability (bit 21, 22 and 23)
21
22
23
3.851/mm --- 20 ms
Contents
7.71/mm --- 20 ms
3.851/mm --- 40 ms
7.71/mm --- 40 ms
3.851/mm --- 10 ms
7.71/mm --- 10 ms
3.851/mm --- 10 ms
7.71/mm --- 5 ms
3.851/mm --- 5 ms
7.71/mm --- 5 ms
3.851/mm --- 40 ms
7.71/mm --- 20 ms
3.851/mm --- 20 ms
7.71/mm --- 10 ms
3.851/mm --- 0 ms
7.71/mm --- 0 ms
(4) Octet 7
bit
Function
25
Reserved
26
Non-compression mode
27
Error correction mode (ECM) ability
Contents
Default
0
28
29
Reserved
30
Reserved
31
T.6 coding (MMR) ability
32
Expansion field
0
1: with ECM
0: without ECM
0: fixed
0
0
0
1: with MMR
0: without MMR
1
1
(5) Octet 8
bit
Function
Contents
Default
33
Field not valid
34
Multi-selective polling
35
Polled sub-address
36
T.43 coding ability
37
Plain Interleave
38
32K ADPCM voice coding
39
Reserved
40
Expansion field
1: Ability
0: No ability
(6) Octet 9
bit
Function
Contents
Default
41
R8*15.41/mm
42
300*300 pels/25.4 mm
1
0
43
R16*15.41/mm and / or 400*400 pels/25.4 mm
44
inch ability
45
mm ability
46
Minimum scan line time ability of high resolution
47
Selective polling
48
Expansion field
1
0: T15.4=T7.7
1: T15.4=1/2T7.7
PL-2

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(7) Octet 10
bit
Function
Contents
Default
49
Sub address ability
50
Password
51
Ready for data file transmission (polling)
52
Reserved
53
BFT transfer ability
54
DTM transfer ability
55
EDI transfer ability
56
Expansion field
(8) Octet 11
bit
Function
Contents
Default
57
BTM transfer ability
58
Reserved
59
Character or mixed mode documents ready for Tx

(polling)
60
Character mode ability
61
Reserved
62
Mixed mode ability
63
Reserved
64
Expansion field
(9) Octet 12
bit
Function
65
Processible mode (T.505)
66
Digital network ability
67
Full-duplex communication ability
68
JPEG coding ability
69
Full color mode
Contents
Default
0
0
1: Full-duplex
0: Half-duplex
0
0
0
70
0: Fixed
71
12 bits / pixel component
72
Expansion field
(10) Octet 13
bit
Function
Contents
Default
73
No sub sampling (1:1:1)
74
Custom illuminance
75
Custom gamut range
76
North America Letter (215.9*279.4) ability
77
North America Legal (215.9*355.6) ability
78
Single progression sequential coding (T.85) basic

ability
79
Single progression sequential coding (T.85) optional

LO ability
80
Expansion field
(11) Octet 14
bit
Function
Contents
Default
81
HKM key management capability
82
RSA key management capability
83
Override capability
84
HFX40 cipher capability
85
Alternative cipher number 2 capability
86
Alternative cipher number 3 capability
87
HFX40-I hashing capability
PL-3

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
bit
88
Function
Contents
Expansion field
Default
1
(12) Octet 15
bit
Function
Contents
Default
89
Alternative hashing system number 2 capability
90
Alternative hashing system number 3 capability
91
Reserved
92
T.44 (Mixed raster content)
93
94
95
Page length maximum strip size for T.44

(Mixed raster content)
96
Expansion field
(13) Octet 16
bit
Function
Contents
Default
97
Color/gray-scale 300 pels/25.4 mm x 300 lines/25.4

mm or 400 pels/25.4 mm x 400 lines/25.4 mm
resolution
98
100 pels/25.4 mm x 100 lines/25.4 mm for color/gray

scale
99
Simple phase C BFT negotiations capability
100
Extended BFT negotiations capability
101
Internet selective polling address (ISP)
102
Internet routing address (IRA)
103
Reserved
104
Expansion field
(14) Octet 17
bit
Function
Contents
Default
105
600 pels/25.4 mm x 600 lines/25.4 mm
106
1200 pels/25.4 mm x 1200 lines/25.4 mm
107
300 pels/25.4 mm x 600 lines/25.4 mm
108
400 pels/25.4 mm x 800 lines/25.4 mm
109
600 pels/25.4 mm x 1200 lines/25.4 mm
110
Color/gray-scale 600 pels/25.4 mm x 600/25.4 mm

resolution
111

resolution
112
Expansion field
(15) Octet 18
bit
Function
Contents
Default
113
Double sided printing capability (alternate mode)
114
Double sided printing capability (continuous mode)
115
Black and white mixed raster content profile (MRCbw)
116
T.45 (run length color encoding)
117
Shared date memory capacity
118
0
bit 117,118
0,0=Disable
0,1= Level 1=1.0 Mbytes
1,1= Level 3=unlimited
(i.e. 32 Mbytes or more)
0
0
119
Reserved
120
Expansion field
(16) Octet 19
bit
Function
Contents
Default
121
Flow control capability for T.38 communication
122
K>4
PL-4

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
bit
Function
123
Internet aware T.38 mode fax device
124
T.89 (Application profiles for ITU-T T.88)
Contents
0
Refer to *3.
125
126
127
Default
0
sYCC-JPEG coding
*3: T.89 (Application profile for ITU-T T.88)

124
125
126
Not used
Contents
Profile 1
Profile 2
Profile 3
Profile 2 and 3
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1.1.2 FIF data configuration list (DCS)

(1) Octet 4
bit
Function
Contents
Default
T.37 Internet fax (Simple mode)
Reserved
T.38 Real time Internet fax
Third generation mobile network
Reserved
Invalid
Invalid
Reserved
(2) Octet 5
bit
Function
9
10
Reception command
11
Transmission speed instruction
Contents
Default
0: fixed
Refer to *1.
12
13
14
15
R8*7.71/mm or 200*200 pels/25.4 mm
1: 7.71/mm
0: 3.851/mm
16
Two-dimensional coding instruction
1: MR
0: MH
*1: Transmission speed appointment (bit 11, 12, 13 and 14)

11
12
13
14
24/V27 ter
48/V27 ter
96/V29
72/V29
144/V17
120/V17
96/V17
72/V17
Contents
(3) Octet 6
bit
17
Function
Recording paper width instruction
Contents
bit 17,18
0,0=A4
PL-5
Default
@

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
bit
Function
Contents
18
19
Recording paper length instruction
20
21
Minimum scan line time instruction
bit 19,20
0,0=A4
0,1=Unlimited
1,0=B4
1,1=Invalid
Refer to *2.
22
23
24
Default
0,1=A3
1,0=B4
1,1=Invalid
@
Expansion field
*2: Minimum scan line time instruction (bit 21, 22 and 23)
21
22
23
Contents
20 ms
40 ms
10 ms
5 ms
0 ms
(4) Octet 7
bit
Function
Contents
Default
25
Reserved
26
Non-compression mode
27
Error correction mode (ECM) instruction
1: with ECM
0: without ECM
28
Frame size instruction
1: 64 octet
0: 256 octet
29
Reserved
30
Reserved
31
T.6 coding (MMR) instruction
32
Expansion field
1: with MMR
0: without MMR
@
@
(5) Octet 8
bit
33
Function
Contents
Field Not valid
Default
0
34
0: fixed
35
0: fixed
0
0
36
T.43 Coding
37
Plain Interleave
38
32K ADPCM Voice coding
39
Reserved
40
Expansion field
(6) Octet 9
bit
Function
Contents
Default
41
R8*15.41/mm
42
300*300 pels/25.4 mm
43
R16*15.41/mm or 400*400 pels/25.4 mm
44
inch/mm instruction
45
Arbitrary
46
Arbitrary
47
48
1: mm setting
0: inch setting
0: fixed
Expansion field
0
@
PL-6

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(7) Octet 10
bit
Function
49
Sub address transmission
50
Password (SID) transmission
Contents
Default
@
@
51
0: fixed
52
Reserved
53
BFT transfer
54
DTM transfer
55
EDI transfer
56
Expansion field
(8) Octet 11
bit
Function
57
BTM transfer
58
Reserved
Contents
Default
0
0
59
0: fixed
60
Character mode
61
Reserved
62
Mixed mode
63
Reserved
64
Expansion field
(9) Octet 12
bit
Function
Contents
Default
65
Processible mode (T.505)
66
Digital network ability
67
Full-duplex communication instruction
68
JPEG coding
69
Full color mode
0
0
1: Full-duplex
0: Half-duplex
70
Default Huffman table use
71
12 bits / pixel component
72
Expansion field
(10) Octet 13
bit
Function
Contents
Default
73
No sub sampling (1:1:1)
74
Custom illuminance
75
Custom gamut range
76
North America Letter (215.9*279.4)
77
North America Legal (215.9*355.6)
78
Single progression sequential coding (T.85) basic
79
Single progression sequential coding (T.85) optional

LO
80
Expansion field
(11) Octet 14
bit
Function
81
HKM key management selected
82
RSA key management selected
83
Override mode selected
84
HFX40 cipher selected
85
Alternative cipher number 2 selected
86
Alternative cipher number 3 selected
Contents
Default
0
PL-7

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
bit
Function
Contents
Default
87
HFX40-I hashing selected
88
Expansion field
(12) Octet 15
bit
Function
Contents
Default
89
Alternative hashing system number 2 selected
90
Alternative hashing system number 3 selected
91
Reserved
92
93
94
95
Page length maximum strip size for T.44 (Mixed raster

content)
96
Expansion field
(13) Octet 16
bit
Function
Contents
Default
97
Color/gray-scale 300 pels/25.4 mm x 300 lines/25.4

mm or 400 pels/25.4 mm x 400 lines/25.4 mm
resolution
98
100 pels/25.4mm x 100 lines/25.4 mm for color/gray

scale
99
Simple phase C BFT negotiations capability
100
0: Fixed
101
0: Fixed
102
Internet routing address (IRA) Transmission
103
Reserved
0
0
104
Expansion field
(14) Octet 17
bit
Function
Contents
Default
105
600 pels/25.4 mm x 600 lines/25.4 mm
106
1200 ples/25.4 mm x 1200 lines/25.4 mm
107
300 pels/25.4 mm x 600 lines/25.4 mm
108
400 pels/25.4 mm x 800 lines/25.4 mm
109
600 pels/25.4 mm x 1200 lines/25.4 mm
110

resolution
111

resolution
112
Expansion field
(15) Octet 18
bit
Function
113
Double sided printing selected (alternate mode)
114
Double sided printing selected (continuous mode)
115
116
T.45 (run length color encoding)
117
Shared date memory required
118
Contents
Default
0
0
0: Fixed
bit 117,118
0,0=not used
1,1= Level 3=unlimited
(i.e. 32 Mbytes or more)
0
0
119
Reserved
120
Expansion field
PL-8

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(16) Octet 19
bit
Function
Contents
Default
121
Flow control capability for T.38 communication
122
K>4
123
Internet aware fax device operating in T.38 mode
124
T.89 (Application profiles for ITU-T T.88)
0
Refer to *3.
125
126
127
0
0
sYCC-JPEG coding
*3: T.89 (Application profile for ITU-T T.88)

124
125
126
Not used
Contents
Profile 1
Profile 2
Profile 3
Invalid
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1.2 Modem fallback sequence

Fallback sequences of TCF and CTC are shown as follows:
1.2.1 V17, V29, and V27 ter

Ability of a remote station
TCF fallback sequence
V27 ter/V29
96/V.29 -> 72/V.29 -> 48/V.27 ter -> 24/V27 ter
V27 ter/V29/V33 V17
144/V.17 -> 120/V.17 -> 96/V.17 -> 72/V.17 -> 48/V.27 ter -> 24/V27 ter
On the transmission side: If PPR is received four times, a modem is set in the fallback state.
On the reception side: In case of sending PPR, when the number of error frames exceeds the FP value, a modem is set in the fallback state.
1.2.2 V34
Line quality is always water by modem. Optimum speed is automatically selected on-the-fly.
1.3 V8/V34 sequence

1.3.1 V34
(1) Outline
The 33.6kbps data transmission method and protocol including the V8 protocol. As for each of full-duplex and half-duplex, startup
handshake until data transmission starts is divided into four phases, phase1 to 4, and signals used in each phase are regulated.
(2) Features
Full-duplex (echo canceler method) / Half-duplex method are regulated (for data / FAX respectively)
2400, 3000 and 3200 symbols / sec (mandatory) and 2743, 2800 and 3429 symbols / sec (option) QAM synchronous transmission at
each symbol rate
Communication at each signal rate of 33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800 and
2400 bps
Four-dimensional-symbol trellis coding
A 200bps sub channel which can be used as an asynchronous second channel (option)
Negotiation in which characteristics of a line is measured before transmission starts and the maximum communication speed is achieved
by finely adjusting the transmission parameter, based on the result of measurement (carrier / frequency / equalizer / symbol rate / level,
etc.)
Data transmission in the super frame with the hierarchical structure
PL-9

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.3.2 Sample of a signal procedure at sending two pages

(1) Beginning of communications to beginning of 1st page transmission
Change and determination
of the V 8 communication
ability and directions
Phase 2
Determination of the Modulation
Mode for measuring line
characteristics, and then
measurement
75 5 ms
Control channel startup

(establishment) procedure
Phase 3
Training of equalizer (main channel speed determination, etc.)
70 5 ms
Main channel re-synchronization procedure

(establishment of main channel)
70 5 ms
70 5 ms
CNG
INFO0c
Call
Terminal
CM CJ
L1
L2
S S PP TRN
PPh ALT MPh MPh E
Flags
TSI DCS Flags
"1"
(Note)
S S
PP
B1
Image
Data
A A
PPh ALT MPh MPh E NSF CSI DIS
CFR
Flags
Flags
JM
INFOh
ANSam
INFO0a
Answer
Terminal
75 5 ms
Network Interaction
Primary
Channel
Equalizer
Training
Line Probing
Modern Parameter
Exchange
Primary
Channel
Resync.
T.30 Fax Handshaking
Note - The string of consecutive 1s shall be followed by the 4T of scrambled ones defined in 12.6.3/V34.
(2) Signals between pages

Main channel re-synchronization procedure
Control channel re-synchronization procedure
Image
Data
Sh
ALT
Sh
PPS-MPS
Source Terminal
Flags
"1"
S S
PP
B1
Image
Data
Recipient Terminal
Sh
Sh
ALT
Flags MCF
Flags
(3) 2nd page transmission termination to communication termination

Control channel re-synchronization procedure
Image
Data
Sh
ALT
Sh
PPS-EOP
Source Terminal
Flags
DCN
"1"
Line Disconnect
Recipient Terminal
Sh
Sh
ALT E
Flags
MCF
Line Disconnect
Flags
Note - Some terminals may disconnect the line immediately after sending DCN without sending consecutive 1s.
1.3.3 Procedure details

(1) Phase 1 (V8) ....Beginning of connection between a calling modem and a called modem
When ANSam / ANS is detected
(CI must be sent three times or more)
1 sec
Calling
CI,CI,CI(*1)
When JM is detected twice or more

0.5 sec or more
75 5 ms
(ecno canceler is OFF.)
Te
CM,CM,CM(*2) CJ
To Phase 2
ANSam (*3)
Called
0.2 sec or more
JM,JM,JM
75
5 ms
To Phase 2
5 1 sec or less
When CM is detected When CJ or Tone B is detected

twice or more
*1: One of no signals / C1 / CNG (T.30) / CT (V.25)

*2: V.34 full-duplex ability in the modulation mode bit is ON.
*3: ANSam of phase inversion is sent. Phase inversion is an option in case of supporting only half-duplex. When CM or valid signal from the
calling side is not detected, the procedure is moved to T.30, etc. after 75 5 ms interval.
PL-10

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(a) Signal Definition

Signal type
CI
(Call indicator)
Signal direction
call called
Meaning
Signal
speed
Function display
on the calling side
V21(L)
(300 bps)
Timing of transmission
Start:
after 0.4 seconds after line connection from ON condition (in
the following format)
Stop:
when 3 period or more has passed after ANSam / ANS is
detected
ON
OFF
ON: 3period< T < 2sec

OFF: 0.4sec < T < 2sec
[Comments]
CI is a signal to carry call function.
The calling side send CI, CT (Call Tone - V25) or CNG.
CI transmission and detection are optional.
The ON minimum time (=3 Period) is of duration of three CI signals in the following format.
ANSam
(Modified Answer
Tone)
V.8 procedure on
the called side
CM
(Call Menu)
Modulation mode
etc. on the calling
side
When 0.2 seconds or more has passed after reception
[Comments]
Essential for a called machine which supports the V8 procedure.
2100 Hz sinewave is phase-inverted by 400 +/-25 ms periods, then amplitude modulated by 15 +/-0.1 Hz sinewave
Average value of modulation factor (x) 0.8 +/- .01 < x < 1.2 +/- .01
Average transmission power compliant to V2
2100 +/- 200 Hz external power is smaller than the average power by 24 dB or more.
(300 bps)
V.21(L)
Start:
Te (0.5 sec. Te 1 sec.) has passed after CI transmission
stops
Stop:
When two or more JM are detected
[Comments]
CM is a signal which carries call function, modulation modes, protocols and GSTN access.
The first information category is call function.
Protocols and GSTN access category are added when the calling side has ability and when needed to inform to a
remote station.
CJ
CM termination
(300 bps)
V.21(L)
When CM is completed
[Comments]
START bit (0) and STOP bit (1) are added to 1 octet of all bit 0.
Stop bit
Start bit
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7
Signal format
0
JM
(Joint Menu)
Display of common
ability on both
calling and called
sides
(300 bps)
V.21(H)
Start:
When two or more same CM are received
Stop:
When CJ is received or receives a signal matching the
selected Modulation Mode from the calling side
[Comments]
JM is a response signal to CM and of the same format as the received CM.
The fist information category is Call Function as same as CM.
Modulation mode sets the common bit on calling and called sides and sends by the same octet as received CM.
When there is no common ability, all bits are set to 0 and send by the same octet as received CM.
The minimum item No. is selected from the common bits to determine the actual Modulation Mode.
Protocol is added when it is included in received CM and needed to instruct.
GSTN access is added when it is included in received CM and needed to instruct.
Bit 6 is set to ON when needed to show ability. Bit 5 is set to the same one as received CM
(b) Signal format

1. Preamble: a signal added before each signal when CI, CM and JM signals are sent.
Format: 1111111111 +0000000001 (for CI)
Format: 1111111111 +0000001111 (for CM and JM)
2. Common format among each signal CI, CM and JM
Start Bit (=0) is put at the top and Stop Bit (=1) is put at the end of each octet.
PL-11

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Start bit
b0
b1
Head octet
b2
b3
b4
4 bits
b5
b0
Expansion octet
b7
3 bits
(1)
Start bit
b6
Stop bit
(2)
b1
b2
3 bits
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
2 bits
Stop bit
(3)
(1): Category tag (tags which represent information types)

Bit assignment
b0
b1
b2
Meaning (information type)
Included signal
b3
...
Call Func
Top of CM, JM / CI
...
Modulation Mode
CM / M
...
Protocols
CM / M
...
GSTN access
CM / M
...
PCM modem ability
CM / JM
(2): Option bit (Differs depending on category tags. See the next item, bit definition.)
(3): Additional option bit (Differs depending on category tags. See the next item, bit definition.)
1.3.4 Common signal bit definition

(1) Call function (1 octet)
Top octet
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Meaning
(Call Function category tag)
Defined by ITU-T
PSTN multi-media terminal
V18 text phone
Video tex
FAX transmission from the calling terminal
FAX reception in the calling terminal
Data transmission / reception
Expansion octet = with call function represented by next octet
b5
b6
b7
(Other than the above = Reserved)
(2) Modulation mode (3 octets)

1st octet
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
Meaning
Item No.
(Modulation mode category tag, b4 = 0 is first octet)

0/1
PCM modem ability disabled/enabled

0/1
0/1
V34 full-duplex ability disabled/enabled
V34 half-duplex ability disabled/enabled
2nd octet
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Meaning
Item No.
(b3, 4 and 5=0, 1, 0 means expanded oct.)
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
V32bis / V32 ability disabled / enabled
V22bis / V22 ability disabled / enabled
V17 ability disabled / enabled
V29 half-duplex ability disabled / enabled (used in T.30)
V27ter ability disabled / enabled
3rd octet
b0
b1
b2
0/1
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Meaning
V26ter ability disabled / enabled
0/1
0/1
Item No.
(b3, 4 and 5=0, 1, 0 means expanded oct.)

8
V26bis ability disabled / enabled
V23 full-duplex ability disabled / enabled
10
PL-12

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Meaning
0/1
0/1
Item No.
V23 half-duplex ability disabled / enabled
11
V21 ability disabled / enabled
12
(3) Protocols (1 octet)

Protocols (1 octet)
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Meaning
(Protocols category tag)
V42 LAPM protocol
Protocol represented by expanding octet
b5
b6
b7
(4) GSTN access (1 octet)

GSTN access (1 octet)
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
Meaning
(GSTN access category tag)
0/1
Celluler connection in the calling side

0/1
Celluler connection in the called side

0/1
0: Analog network connection

1: Digital network connection
(5) PCM modem capability (1 octet)

b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Meaning
(PCM modem category tag)
0/1
V.90 analog modem capability

0/1
V.90 digital modem capability

0/1
V.91 capability
1.3.5 Phase 2 (Probing) ..... V.34 basic setting

Exchange of modulation ability
Measurement of line characteristics (bi-direction)
Determination and exchange of compensation values to line characteristics (compensation values of maximum data rate, transmission level,
pre-emphasis (*))
*: linear equalizer for compensating amplitude distortion
10 ms
Calling
INFO0c
160 ms 550 ms+RTDEc or less
L2
L1
70
*1
To Phase 3
40 10 ms
Called
INFO0a
25 ms
5 ms
INFOh
670 ms or less
*2
50 ms or more 10 ms
2400 Hz tone signal output from the called side (Level is a set value -1dB).
1800 Hz guard tone (Level is a set value -7dB) is output simultaneously from the called side.
2400 Hz tone signal output from the called side (Phase inversion of A).
1800 Hz guard tone.
1200 Hz tone signal output from the called side

1200 Hz tone signal output from the calling side (Phase inversion of B)
INFO 0x
Binary signal for indicating auto modulation option signal (x=a/c: a: called side, c: calling side)
L1, L2
Signal for conditioning line characteristics (tone synthesis at the interval of 150 Hz from 150 to 3750 Hz (except for 900, 1200,
1800 and 2400 Hz))
L1: 160ms, Level= Set value+6dB
L2: Maximum 550ms+TRDEx, Level = Set value
INFO h
Binary signal for indicating parameters used in Phase 3 (training of main channel equalizer). This signal is sent from a modem
receiving main channel data to a transmitting modem.
*1: INFO 0c Bit28 OFF

*2: INFO 0a Bit28 OFF
<INFO 0x Bit Assignment>

Bits (LSB-MSB)
Value
0-3
1111
4-11
01110010
Meaning
Fill Bits
Bit string for frame synchronization
PL-13

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Bits (LSB-MSB)
Value
12
0/1
2743 symbol / sec support
Meaning
13
0/1
14
0/1
15
0/1
Ability to transmit at low carrier frequency at 3000 symbol / sec
16
0/1
Ability to transmit at high carrier frequency at 3000 symbol / sec
17
0/1
Ability to transmit at low carrier frequency at 3200 symbol / sec
18
0/1
Ability to transmit at high carrier frequency at 3200 symbol / sec
19
0/1
3429 symbol / sec transmission
20
0/1
Ability to lower the transmission level than a preset value
21-23
0 to 5
24
0/1
1=INFO 0 is sent from the CME modem
25
0/1
1664 signal point (33.6 K) ability
26-27
0 to 3
28
0/1
Maximum tolerance of symbol rates between transmission and reception

0: 2400, 1:2743, 2:2800, 3:3000, 4:3200, 5:3429 symbol / sec
Clock source transmission 0: internal, 1: external, 2: synchronous to the reception clock, 3:

Reserved
1=Correct INFO 0 frame is received during error recovery
29-44
CRC
45-48
1111
Fill Bits
<INFO h Bit Assignment>

Bits (LSB-MSB)
Value
Meaning
0-3
1111
4-11
01110010
Fill Bits
12-14
0 to 7
15-21
0 to 127
22
0/1
23-26
0-10
Pre-emphasis filer index No.which is used for data transmission
27-29
0-5
Symbol rate of data transmission 0: 2400 ... 5: 3429 (symbol / sec)
30
0/1
Selection of parameters used for TRN. 4 points / 16 points
Bit string for frame synchronization (transmitted from the left side)
Output reduction width demanded by the reception modem (dB)
When *the modem on the transmitting side can not reduce output* at INFO 0, the value is set to
0.
The length of TRN which the modem of the transmitting side send in the Phase 3 (x 35 ms)
High carrier is user for data mode Tx.
31-46
CRC
47-50
1111
Fill Bits
1.3.6 Phase 3 .....Training of the main channel equalizer

Band division full-duplex method
Transmission and reception of Phase 3 signals (S, , PP, TRN) are executed by using parameter values which are determined by
exchanging INF Oh. (symbol rate, carrier frequency, pre-emphasis filter and transmission level)
Phase3
Calling
S S PP
128T 16T 288T
Called
TRN
Control channel start-up procedure
32T
16T or more
PPh
ALT
70 5 ms
PPh
* : Symbol interval
MPh
MPh
control channel data
MPh
MPh
120T or less
ALT
32T or less Between 16T and 120T
The speed of the following signals (Phase 3) are determined by INFOh. (The following signals are used in the main channel in the halfduplex procedure.)
S
Signal which sends alternately 0 point and a point which rotated 0 point counterclockwise by 90 degrees
Signal which sends alternately a point which rotated 0 point counterclockwise by 180 degrees and a point which rotated 0 point
counterclockwise by 270 degrees
PP
Special signal which is sent from a remote station for adjusting an equalizer
TRN
Training signal. (Symbol rate and duration are determined in INFOh.)
(1) Control channel signal

The following signals are used for establishing the control channel or re-synchronization and retrain. (peculiar to half-duplex procedure)
Modulation
method
1200 / 2400bps QAM modulation (600 0.01 symbols / sec). However, training and synchronous signals are 1200bps.
Calling modem: Carrier (=1200Hz 0.01% (level = set value))
Called modem: Carrier (=2400Hz 0.01% (level = set value-1dB)) + Guard tone (=1800Hz 0.01% (level = set value-7dB))
Sh
Signal which sends alternately 0 point and a point which rotated 0 point counterclockwise by 90 degrees (the same as S)
PL-14

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Signal which sends alternately a point which rotated 0 point counterclockwise by 180 degrees and a point which rotated 0
point counterclockwise by 270 degrees (the same as S)
AC
Signal which send alternately 0 point and a point which rotated 0 point by 180 degrees
PPh
Special signal which is sent from a remote station for adjusting an equalizer (used when the initial of the control channel and
re-synchronization are executed)
ALT
Signal which scrambled alternate signals of 0 and 1 (1200bps)
MPh
Binary signal used for exchanging parameters of the modulation method when data is actually sent and received by using the
main channel
(Both type 0 and type 1 (type 0+pre-recording coefficient) must be received.)
(When type 0 is received, pre-recording coefficient is considered to be 0 and never functions.)
1, binary of 20 bit, which represents the beginning of user data transmission on the control channel
(2) MPh (type 0) bit assignment

Bits (LSB-MSB)
Value
0-16
All bit 1
17
Start bit
18
MP signal type
19
Reserved
20-23
1 to 14
24-26
0,0,0
27
0/1
28
29-30
Meaning
Maximum transmission rate from the calling modem to the called modem (x 2400) *1
Reserved
Control channel data transmission rate which is selected by the opposed transmitter
1200bps / 2400 bps
Reserved
Trellis coding device selection *2
(00: 16 state, 10: 32 state, 01: 64 state and 11: Reserved)
31
0/1
Non-linear encoder parameter selection for the terminal transmitter of a remote station *2
(0: =0, 1: 0.3125)
32
0/1
Parameter (shaping) selection when the data rate is determined within each symbol rate *2
(0: Minimum, 1: Expanded)
33
Reserved
34
Start bit
35-49
Communication speed mask (0/1=Ability of both modems disabled / enabled)

(Bit35=2400 bps ... Bit46=28.8 kbps, Bit47=31.2 kbps, Bit48=33.6 kbps and Bit49=Reserved)
50
0/1
51
Start bit
52-67
Reserved
68
Start bit
0,0,0
Fill Bits
69-84
85-87
Use of control channel imbalance data rate No / Yes
CRC
*1: 13 and 14 are used when the opposed modem supports up to 1664 points
*2: Set to 0 on the transmitting modem.
(3) MPh (type 1) bit assignment

Bits (LSB-MSB)
Value
0-16
All bit 1
17
Start bit
18
MP signal type
Reserved
19
20-23
1 to 14
24-26
0,0,0
27
0/1
28
29-30
Meaning
Maximum transmission rate from the calling modem to the called modem (x 2400) *1
Reserved
Control channel data transmission rate which is selected by the opposed transmitter 1200bps /
2400 bps
Reserved
Trellis coding device selection *2
(00: 16 state, 10: 32 state, 01: 64 state and 11: Reserved)
31
0/1
Non-linear encoder parameter selection for the terminal transmitter of a remote station *2
(0: =0, 1: 0.3125)
32
0/1
Parameter (shaping) selection when the data rate is determined within each symbol rate *2
(0: Minimum, 1: Expanded)
33
Reserved
34
Start bit
35-49
Communication speed mask (0/1=Ability of both modems disabled / enabled)

(Bit35=2400 bps ... Bit46=28.8 kbps, Bit47=31.2 kbps, Bit48=33.6 kbps and Bit49=Reserved)
PL-15

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Bits (LSB-MSB)
Value
50
0/1
51
Meaning
Use of control channel imbalance data rate No / Yes
Start bit
52-67
Pre-coding coefficient h(1) Real
68
Start bit
69-84
Pre-coding coefficient h(1) Imaginary
85
Start bit
Start bit
86-101
102
103-118
Pre-coding coefficient h(2)Imaginary
119
Start bit
120-135
136
Start bit
137-152
Pre-coding coefficient h(3)Imaginary
153
Start bit
154-169
Reserved
170
Start bit
171-186
CRC
187
Fill Bits
*1: 13 and 14 are used when the opposed modem supports up to 1664 points
*2: Set to 0 on the transmitting modem.
1.3.7 Re-synchronization procedure / Startup procedure

A procedure required to switch control channel and main channel in the half-duplex procedure
A procedure which includes another modulation parameter exchanging is especially called the startup procedure. (used for changing the
communication speed)
(1) Startup procedure

Control channel startup procedure (By exchanging MPh, the communication speed is changed.)
Control channel re-synchronization procedure is not used.
(2) Re-synchronization procedure

Control channel re-synchronization.
See signals related to control channels for signal names and change method.
24T
Main channel data
Transmitting modem
16T and more
8T
Sh
ALT
Sh
120T or less
70 5 ms
Receiving modem
Sh
Sh
24T
8T
ALT
Between 16T and 120T
Main channel re-synchronization procedure and Turn-off

The receiving modem re-synchronizes the main channel by using the PP signal. After B1, starts receiving Primary Data.
The transmitting modem sends the scrambled 1s for 35ms after Primary Data transmission has been completed.
Both modems move to the control channel re-synchronization procedure or the control channel startup procedure.
S
Signal which sends alternately 0 point and a point which rotated 0 point counterclockwise by 90 degrees
Signal which sends alternately a point which rotated 0 point counterclockwise by 180 degrees and a point which rotated 0
point counterclockwise by 270 degrees
PP
Special for adjusting an equalizer
B1
High-speed signal of one frame length which is sent at the end of a series of startup sequence in the selected modulation
parameter.
128T
Transmitting modem Control channel data
Turn-off
35 ms
16T
PP
B1
Main channel
Data
Scrambled 1s
70 5 ms
70 5 ms
To Control channel re-synchronization / Control channel startup procedure
Receiving modem
Control channel data
1.3.8 Others
(1) Minimum reception signal level (RLSD) (half-duplex mode only)
The reception circuit is turned to ON when the signal becomes 43 dBm or more.
When the signal becomes 48 dBm or less, the reception circuit is turned OFF within 20 to 25ms after it has exceeded the thresh old.
PL-16

CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Data frame structure

All data transmitted in V.34 (after the Phase 4) is treated in the following frame format.
J: The number of data frames within one super frame
P: The number of mapping frames within one data frame
280 ms
Super frame
...
J-1
40 or 35 ms
Data frame
Mapping frame
Four-dimensional symbol
J=0
K=0
...
P-1
Modulation Speed
2400 baud
12
2743 baud
12
2800 baud
14
3000 baud
15
3200 baud
16
3429 baud
15
PL-17
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PL THEORY OF OPERATION FK-508 > 2. FUNCTION
2. FUNCTION
2.1 Telephone function
2.1.1 TEL/FAX switching
(1) Outline
A function to switch telephone and FAX automatically after reception. Depends on Country spec.
(2) Operation
1. When CNG is not detected for 2 seconds (or 4 seconds, following parameter) after line seizure, this function sends voice response
message 1 and continues CNG detection.
2. If voice response 1 is sent and CNG detection is continued for 4 seconds but could not be detected, external ringer is sent to the
externally installed phone.
3. When CNG is not detected for a given period (Default is 20 seconds. Changeable by address parameters), this function stops external
ringer transmission and becomes fax reception after the voice response message 2 is sent.
4. This function detects OFF-HOOK of the external telephone during external ringer transmission only.
5. When OFF-HOOK of the external telephone is detected during external ringer transmission, the line is connected to the external
telephone. Even if you use the telephone, you can manually switch to the fax reception after that.
6. When CNG is detected during the above-mentioned external ringer transmission, External ringer transmission is stopped and the fax
reception starts.
Line seizure
CNG detection term
2 seconds
(1)
Voice response
message 1
Voice response
message 2
External ringer
4 seconds
(2)
No.
FP
Fax reception
started,
ANsam sent
External phone off-hook

detection term
(3)
Address
Value
Tel-Fax switching
External telephone offbook detection function
Meaning and purpose
0x0e0095
bit5
0: No
1: Normal (RBT
transmission)
Default
Those with a
Note
RBT transmission
time
External ringer
transmission time (3) (in
steps of 1 second)
0x0e00eb
unit: 1000 ms, HEX
0x14
(20 sec.)
A serviceman setting by
address setting
Tel-Fax switching
parameter
Time from vocal response

to RBT transmission
(CNG detection waiting
time 2)
0x0e0095
bit7
0: 2 sec
1: 4 sec
Same as the above
Tel-Fax switching
parameter
Time from reception to

voice response
transmission (CNG
detection waiting time 1)
0x0e0095
bit6
0: 4 sec
1: 2 sec
Same as the above
Tel-Fax switching
parameter
TEL/FAX switching ON
response details
0x0e0095
bit3
0: Voice response + RBT

transmission
Same as the above
2.2 F-code
F-code is a function to realize confidential transmission / bulletin board polling / relay transmission by using SUB, SEP and SID signals.
To be more specific, a machine which can open a box on the memory is called a F code compliant center machine and a machine
which can access to a center machine by using the F code function is called a F-code compliant machine. The center machine can have
plural boxes and they are used as the confidential box, bulletin board box and relay box respectively.
Function
Outline
Signals to be used
SUB
SEP
Confidential Sent to the center

Used Not
transmissio machine which opens a
n
confidential box by
appointing the confidential
box No. (The center
machine has memory
reception to the
confidential box.)
Bulletin
board
polling
By appointing a box No. in Not

the center machine which
opens a bulletin board,
contents are polled.
SID
Optional
Used Not
Required function
SUB = Appointment of a
confidential box
SID = Password
Registration = Message
adding
bulletin board box
Registration = Message
overwriting With a mode
which is not deleted by
polling
PL-18
Remarks
Each box
No. =
Contents of
a signal (20
digits or
less)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Signals to be used
Function
Outline
Relay
transmissio
n
Requesting relay to the

relay machine which
opens a relay box (No.) in
which a broadcasting
transmission remote
station is registered.
SUB
SEP
Used Not
Required function
SID
Used
Remarks
relay box (No.)
SID = Password
2.2.1 Signal format

(1) Contents of signals
Item / Signal Name
SUB/SEP
SID
Characters
0 to 9 only (* and # must not be used.)
0 to 9, * and #
Password
Contents
Box No.
No. of digits
Arbitrary between 1 and 20
Space between digits
Prohibited
Others
Impossible to designate more than one box
(a) FIF (SUB/SEP/SID) common

The last digit is left-justified. The remaining are filled with space (0x20)
eg.) 12345
FCF
FIF
FCS
35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(2) DIS/DTC/DCS bit condition

Bit No.
Meaning
DIS/DTC
DCS
47
Selective polling ability
DIS = ON when SEP reception is possible

DTC = ON when SEP is transmitted
0: fixed
49
Sub address ability / function
ON when SUB reception is possible
ON when SUB transmission is possible
50
Password / sender ID
DIS = ON when SID reception is possible

DTC = ON when SID is transmitted
ON when SID is transmitted
2.2.2 F-code confidential transmission
F-code compliant center machine
(1)
F-code compliant machine
Remote entry
(2)
SUB/
( SID)
Confidential
Box
Box No.
Print
Box No.
(3)
(4)
1. The confidential box is registered in the center machine.

Registration of confidential box No. and name
Registration of communication password
Registration of box password
2. Transmission operation on the transmitting side
Specification of confidential box No.
3. Reception in the center machine
Automatic output of confidential communication report
4. Printing in the center machine
Output by entering an access protect No.
(1) BOX specifications

Confidential box No.
Represented by a nine digit number. Operationally between 1 and 999999999. You can not open
the same box number as the bulletin board No. which has been already opened.
Communication password
Possible to use.
PL-19
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Confidential BOX name
Possible to resister up to 10 characters.
Erased at printing
Erased on every page after output.
Box password
Represented by a four digit number between 0000 and 9999.
No. of files in confidential box
100 files at the maximum including bulletin board.
(2) Example of the protocol sequence

Calling
Called
Call
(NSF)/(CSI)/DIS
SID/SUB/(TSI)/DCS
TCF
CFR
PIX
EOM
MCF
(NSF)/(CSI)/DIS
(TSI)/DCS
TCF
CFR
PIX
EOP
MCF
DCN
2.2.3 F-code bulletin board polling

Box No.
Local storing (2)

F-code compliant
center machine
(1)
F-code compliant machine
Bulletin
board
SEP
Remote output
(3)
Printing
Deletion
Box No.
Box No.
Box No.
1. Registration of the bulletin board box in the center machine

Registration of the bulletin board No. and name
2. Storing documents in the bulletin board
3. Operations for polling reception on the compliant machine
Appointment of bulletin board No.

Bulletin board box No.
Represented by a nine digit number. Operationally between 1 and 999999999. You can not open
the same box number as the confidential box which has been already opened.
Bulletin board password
No
Bulletin board box name
Yes 10 character max
Erased at printing
Not erased when printed.
Erased at polling
Not erased when polled.
Access protect No.
No
No. of document registration to the

bulletin board box
Only once. If already exist, it is overwritten.
PL-20
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Example of protocol sequence

Calling
Called
Call
(NSF)/(CSI)/DIS
SEP/(CIG)/DTC
(TSI)/DCS
TCF
CFR
PIX
EOM
MCF
(NSF)/(CSI)/DIS
(TSI)/DCS
TCF
CFR
PIX
EOP
MCF
DCN
2.2.4 F-code relay transmission

Calling
Called
Call
(NSF)/(CSI)/DIS
SID/SUB/(TSI)/DCS
TCF
CFR
PIX
EOM
MCF
(NSF)/(CSI)/DIS
(TSI)/DCS
TCF
CFR
PIX
EOP
MCF
DCN
NOTE
This machine is only relay requests and do not function as a relaying station.
1. The relay box is registered in the relaying station.
Registering relay box No., relay password and relay group No.
2. Registration of group
Registering final destinations in the group No.
3. Transmission operation in the relay requesting station
Instructs relay box no. and relay password.
4. Transmission to the final remote stations registered in the group
5. Possible to printed relayed documents on the relaying station (depends on the parameter setting)

Relay box
Possible to register up to 5.
Relay box No.
Any box number that can range between 1 and 999999999
Relay password
Any 8-digit number
Relay BOX name
To be assignable
Access protect No.
No
Final destination designation
Possible only to register in the relay box by appointing the group.
File erasure after transfer
Always erased
Conditions to erase box by operations
Only when there are no files of received messages in the relay box, box can be erased.
PL-21
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Protocol sequence example

Calling
Called
Call
(NSF)/(CSI)/DIS
SID/SUB/(TSI)/DCS
TCF
CFR
PIX
EOM
MCF
(NSF)/(CSI)/DIS
(TSI)/DCS
TCF
CFR
PIX
EOP
MCF
DCN
2.3 Transmission function

2.3.1 Original scan mode
The original scan mode is roughly classified by the regular original scan and the irregular original scan.
Regular original
Irregular original
Normal mode
Irregular mode
Mode selection
Default setting
Mixed original mode
Scan setting
(1) Scan mode default setting

The scan mode can be set by using the function parameter of the service mode. The default is the ADF irregular mode.
Paper size detection
Default
Frame erasure
Irregular
mode
Trailing edge detection
Yes
Trailing edge erasure may not be

done.
Normal
mode
ADF paper size sensor
Automatically selected when using the page

related application function (book transmission,
etc.).
Frame erasure of all sides
2.4 Reception function

2.4.1 Reduction / division of reception
Parameters related to reduction / division are set on the [Utility/Counter] > [Administrator Setting] > [Fax Setting] > [TX/RX Setting]. There
are two parameters as follows:
Min. Reduction for RX Print: 96, 95, 94, ..., 87: a
Print Separate Fax Pages: ON, OFF: b
The reception recording mode is determined by the above-mentioned parameters, a and b.
(1) Auto reduction reception mode

a = Dont care (except 100)
b = OFF
The received documents are automatically reduced in the range of 35 to 96 %.
Page division recording reception mode
a = 96, 95, ..., 87
b = ON
Documents are reduced to three reduction rate (90 %, 86 %, or 82 %) determined by the width of received documents and the selected
recording paper. When they are still larger than a paper size, they are reduced to a value in a for the division recording.
90% = Fixed value
86%, 82% = Reduction rate determined by the main scanning direction
The paper selection and division are determined in accordance with the following figure.
(2) Paper selected for division printing, magnification

(a) A4SEF width at reception
Original
length=Receiv Optimum
ed original
paper
size*(1/a)
152mm or less A5LEF
Selected paper size / Division operation

Priority 1
A5LEF / a
%
Priority 2
A5SEF / 69
%
Priority 3
Priority 4
A4SEF / a
%
A4LEF / a
%
PL-22
Priority 5
B5SEF / 84
%
Priority 6
Priority 7
Priority 8
B5LEF / a
%
B4SEF / a
%
A3SEF / a
%
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Original
ed original
paper
size*(1/a)

Priority 1
Priority 2
Priority 3
Priority 4
153 to 311mm
A4SEF
A4SEF / a
%
A4LEF / a
%
B4SEF / a
%
A3SEF / a
%
312 to 384mm
B4SEF
B4SEF / a
%
B5LEF / a
%
B5SEF / 84
%
A3SEF / a
%
Over 384mm
A3SEF
A3SEF / a
%
A4LEF / a
%
B5SEF / 84
%
Priority 5
Priority 6
Priority 7
Priority 8
Priority 5
Priority 6
Priority 7
Priority 8
A4LEF / a
%
A4SEF / a
%
a : Set magnification
(b) B4SEF width at reception

Original
ed original
paper
size *(1/a)

Priority 1
Priority 2
Priority 3
Priority 4
189mm or less B5LEF
B5LEF / a
%
B5SEF / 71
%
B4SEF / a
%
A4SEF / 82
%
A4LEF / a
%
A3SEF / a
%
189 to 384mm
B4SEF
B4SEF / a
%
B5LEF / a
%
B5SEF / 71
%
A3SEF / a
%
A4LEF / a
%
A4SEF / 82
%
Over 384mm
A3SEF
A3SEF / a
%
A4LEF / a
%
A4SEF / 82
%
Priority 5
Priority 6
Priority 7
Priority 8
(c) A3SEF width at reception

Original
ed original
paper
size *(1/a)

Priority 1
Priority 2
Priority 3
219mm or less A4LEF
A4LEF / a
%
A4SEF / 69
%
B4SEF / 85
%
Over 219mm
A3SEF / a
%
A4LEF / a
%
A4SEF / 69
%
A3SEF
Priority 4
A3SEF / a
%
-
2.4.2 Cassette / paper selection

The cassette and paper selection is performed by using two parameters of the [Utility/Counter] > [Administrator Setting] > [Fax Setting] >
[TX/RX Setting].
Print Paper Selection: Auto Select, Fixed Size, Priority Size: a
Tray Selection for RX Print: Auto, Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3 and Tray 4: b
When b is fixed to tray 1, 2, 3 or 4, a becomes invalid.
Only when b is set to Auto, a becomes valid.
Only A3, B4 and A4 sizes can be selected for the fixed size and preferential size modes.
Bypass cannot be specified as fix-tray.
Page dividing function becomes invalid when the tray is fixed.
2.4.3 Compulsory memory reception

The function to enable to print out by operations without printing out documents at reception in the FAX communications.
(1) Related settings

(a) Compulsory memory reception function
Set in the Service menu > [FAX] > [System].
When this setting is set to OFF, display and actions related to the Compulsory memory reception are not performed. In addition, you
can not perform operations. If this setting is not set, the following Compulsory memory reception function used is also set to disabled.
(b) Compulsory memory reception function use

Set in the [Utility/Counter] > [Administrator Setting] > [Fax Setting] > [Function Setting].
When this setting is set to disabled, the compulsory memory reception actions are not performed at reception. In addition, you can not
display, erase and print the compulsory memory reception documents. The compulsory memory reception documents are displayed on
the main menu irrelevant to this setting.
(c) Compulsory memory reception password

Within eight digits (eight-digit number)
This setting is required to display, delete or print the compulsory memory reception documents.
PL-23
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Operation
(a) Necessary conditions for this function
When there is the compulsory memory reception function, and it is used, the compulsory memory reception action is performed.
(b) Line seizure

It is possible to receive up to 100 compulsory memory reception jobs including the normal reception and the substitute reception. When
100 compulsory memory reception jobs are received, machine will not catch the line. (Except the case that the polled transmission
documents and bulletin board documents are registered.)
(c) Reception
When the reception is performed in the compulsory memory reception mode, printing is not performed even with recording paper and
the reception is performed in memory as the compulsory memory reception documents.
The same as in the polled reception and manual reception.
The auto forwarding setting is neglected in this mode, and the compulsory memory reception is performed.
When SUB is received, related applications will start.
(d) Setting change

When there are received compulsory memory reception documents, even if the compulsory memory reception setting is set to invalid in
the utility mode, the compulsory memory reception file is not printed.
For printing, the compulsory memory reception setting is required to be set to ON.
2.4.4 Closed reception (Junk FAX)

The closed reception function used only at the time of the reception by using the F-code SID signal.
NOTE
You can not use this function with the F-code communications.
(1) Closed reception function

Set in the service menu > [FAX] > [System].
(2) Closed reception function use

When this setting is set to disabled, the closed reception actions are not performed at reception.
(3) Closed reception password

8 digits or less (Utility Mode setting, 0 to 9, * and #)
2.5 Management function

2.5.1 Operation without the key counter
(1) Related settings
(a) Transmission without the key counter
Set in the Service menu > [FAX] > [System].
FAX transmission is inhibited when this setting is set to OFF and there is no key counters (default).
FAX operations without the key counter
The following show the settings without the key counter and whether operations / actions start requests are accepted or not.
Operation
When disabled
When enabled
Transmission
No
Yes
Polling reception
No
Yes
Manual reception
No
Yes
Auto FAX communication /Printer data

reception /Auto print
Yes
Yes
Report printing in the utility mode (FAX)
No
No
Report printing
No
No
Remarks
Report print in the utility mode (copy)

No
No
Pulling out the key counter during FAX operations
The following show settings and their actions when the key counter is pulled out during actions
Actions
When disabled
When enabled
While scanning the quick memory

transmission
Stop scanning (transmitted

those already scanned)
No influence
While scanning the memory transmission
Stop scanning (does not

transmit)
No influence
FAX communication
No influence
No influence
While printing the FAX reception
No influence
No influence
While printing the printer
No influence
No influence
While printing the auto report
No influence
No influence
During report print of the utility mode (FAX)
No influence
No influence
PL-24
Remarks
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Actions
When disabled
When enabled
During report print of 36 modes
Follows DIPSW 1-0
Follows DIPSW 1-0
While report print of the utility mode
Follows DIPSW 1-0
Follows DIPSW 1-0
PL-25
Remarks
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > INFORMATION FOR

PARTS GUIDE MANUAL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition)

INFORMATION FOR PARTS GUIDE MANUAL
To find correct Parts No., refer to the HOW TO MAKE THE BEST USE OF THIS MANUAL in the following page.
NOTICE
This parts guide manual is 1st edition and will not be updated. Please ask your parts administrator about the newest parts information.
Q-1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > HOW TO MAKE THE BEST
USE OF THIS ...
HOW TO MAKE THE BEST USE OF THIS MANUAL

1. When you order, please check the proper figures beforehand that are on Our Parts Guide Manual, and order with the appropriate figures.
2. For screws, Nuts, Washers, retaining rings and Pins which are used in this model, one letter is shown on the Standard parts column of
Parts list and exploded diagrams.
3. In order to maintain safety of the product, some specific parts composed of this product are set up as "essential safety parts".
4. The assigned parts number for the "essential safety parts" is indicated as "SP00-****".
When replacing these parts, follow precautions for disassembling and installing which are listed in the Service Manual.
Do not use any parts that are not set up as
5. means that there are exclusive parts for each destination.
Please check the appropriate destination when you order.
6. Revision Mark
Marked as on the illustration shows that the revision has been made.
7. All rights reserved. (any reprints or quotations are prohibited.)
Use of this parts guide manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Q-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > SYSTEM OUTLINE
SYSTEM OUTLINE
*1: bizhub 423: Standard.
*5: bizhub 423: Standard.
bizhub 363: Standard area for A,B,C and G1.

bizhub 363: Option area for except A,B,C and G1.
bizhub 283/ 7828/ 223: Option.
* About area code from A to K, please see destination table.
* About Standard area model bizhub 423 and 363,
please refer to DF-621.
*1
bizhub 363: Standard area for A,B,C and G1.

bizhub 363: Option area for except A,B,C and G1.
bizhub 283/ 7828/ 223: Standard area for A.
bizhub 283/ 7828/ 223: Option area for except A.
* About area code from A to K,
please see destination table.
7
14
*2
1
5
18
15
*5
*3
17
*4
13
*2: Japan Only

*3: Non Bluetooth Type
*4: Bluetooth Type
12
No.
16
11
10
Description
Model
DIGITAL MFP B/W
bizhub 223/bizhub 283/bizhub 363/bizhub 423/bizhub 7828
DOCUMENT FEEDER
DF-621
OTHER OPTION
OC-509
SORTER/FINISHER
FS-527
SORTER/FINISHER
FS-529
SORTER/FINISHER
SD-509
STACKER
JS-505
STACKER
JS-603
PUNCH UNIT
PK-517
10
PAPER FEEDER
PC-109
11
PAPER FEEDER
PC-208
12
PAPER FEEDER
PC-409
13
OTHER OPTION
MK-726
14
OTHER OPTION
HT-507
15
OTHER OPTION
FK-508
16
OTHER OPTION
EK-604
17
OTHER OPTION
EK-605
18
OTHER OPTION
HD-518
Q-3
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > 1. DIGITAL MFP B/W

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1. DIGITAL MFP B/W (bizhub 223/bizhub 283/bizhub 363/bizhub 423/bizhub 7828)

DIAGRAM OF MAIN PARTS SECTION
Please refer to DF-621
REAR SIDE
14
20
21
22
5
3
2
19
18
17
10
8
9
7
11
16
12
15
13
[1]
EXTERNAL PARTS
[2]
IR COVER
[3]
OPERATION PANEL SECTION
[4]
CCD SECTION
[5]
SCANNER SECTION
[6]
SCANNER DRIVE SECTION
[7]
PRINT HEAD/ POWER SUPPLY SECTION
[8]
OZONE DUCT/ FAN MOTOR SECTION
[9]
IU SECTION
[10]
HOPPER SECTION
[11]
1ST PAPER FEED SECTION
[12]
2ND PAPER FEED SECTION
[13]
IU/ CASSETTE RAIL SECTION
[14]
CASSETTE SIZE SECTION
[15]
CASSETTE SECTION
[16]
MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
[17]
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
[18]
FUSING SECTION
[19]
PAPER EXIT SECTION
[20]
HOPPER/ PAPER FEED DRIVE SECTION
[21]
MAIN DRIVE SECTION
[22]
REAR FRAME SECTION
[23]
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
[24]
WIRING
[25]
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS
[26]
ACCESSORY PARTS
Q-4
23

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.1 EXTERNAL PARTS

P1
1
4
3
2
3
c
b
5
5
a
LEDB1
a
24
6
LEDB2
12
14
9 a PS5
26
27
8 9
13
11
CNT
10
15
16
25
17
18
13
23
d
22
21
Description
19
ServiceManual
20
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A0ED161001
Tray
2 A1UD162001
Cover /Upper
3 A02E941700
Label Jam/Adu
4 A1UD161800
Cover
5 A1UD161500
Mounting Plate
2
1

6 A00JH00D00
PWB Assembly LED1
7 A00J168301
Light blocking Cover
8 A0ED162600
Lens
9 A0ED162700
Light blocking Plate
10 A1UD163002
Cover
11 9J06323501
BRACKET
12 A108M50100
Photointerrupter
13 A1UD106100
Cushion
14 A1UD160901
Cover
15 A011946200
Label Emperon
16 A0ED946500
Label
17 A1UD941300
Label
18 A1UD160102
Cover /Front
19
A,A1
1033440203 STOPPER RING
20 A00J945500
Logo Mark
21 A1UD160300
Cover /Left front
22 A1UD160501
Cover /Front
23 A1UD160202
Cover /Front
24 A1UDN12601
Indicating Wiring
25 A1UG942200
Label
{bizhub 223}
25 A1UF942200
Label
{bizhub 283}
25 A1UE942200
Label
{bizhub 363}
25 A1UD942200
Label
{bizhub 423}
Q-5

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1
25 A1UF942500
Label
26 A02E941800
Label Number 1
{bizhub 7828}
27 A02E941900
Label Number 2
1 a
V153030803
Screw
1 b
V116030804
Screw
1 c
V137030803
screw
1 d
V137030804
screw
1 e
V137031004
SCREW
1 f
V153040804
screw
1 g
V153041003
screw
P2
1
a
8
a
18
18
b
a
6
2
5
b
d
10
4
b
16
17
11
b
b
15
13
12
b
a
See P44-8
14
See P44-8
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A1UD164101
Cover
2 A1UD164001
Cover
3 A00J945000
Label Only connect
4 A02E148400
Filter
5 A1UD133400
Plate spring
6 A1UD130301
Shield Cover
7 A1UD161301
Read Cover /Rear
8 A1UD171301
Read Cover
9 A1UD162600
Cover /Right rear
10 A1UD162800
Cover
11 A1UD162502
Cover
12 A1UD161201
Read Cover /Rear
13 A1UD162202
Tray /Left
14 A1UD160701
Cover /Left
15 A1UD160601
Cover /Left
16 A1UD161101
Cover /Rear
17 A1UD161001
Cover /Rear
18 A1UDM90400
Gasket
C,D1,D3,F2,G1,I,K
C,D1,D3,F2,G1,H,I,J,K
2 a
V116030804
Screw
2 b
V137030804
screw
Q-6

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2 c
V153030803
Screw
2 d
V137030603
screw
1.2 IR COVER
P3
6
2
See P44-11
9
27
25
26
2
28
10
2
b
b
c
See P44-3
21
19
a
11
23
c
22
29
2
24
c
20
19
RS201
e
e
See P44-3
17
16
13
14
See P44-4
MCMB
See P44-4
See P44-6
See P44-6
Description
18
15
12
15
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A0ED940300
Label Print Side
2 A00J169200
Shoulder screw
3 A00J940200
Label
A,A1
3 A00J940100
Label Legal Restiriction
B,G2
4 A0ED268300
Holding Plate
5 A0EDR72700
Original Glass Assy
6 A1UD170500
Read Cover /Right rear
7 A02E167700
Cover
8 A1UD170400
Read Cover /Right
9 A00J169100
Cover
10 A1UD171101
Read Cover
11 A1UD171500
Read Cover
12 A0ED170100
Read Cover /Front
13 A1UDM50200
Lead Switch
14 A00J168902
3
3
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
15 A00J168202
Lens /B
16 A00J168503
Light blocking Cover /C
Machine condition monitor board

(MCMB)
17 A00JH00E00
PWB Assembly LED2
18 A0EDN14500
Scanner Wiring /5
19 A0ED268800
Holding Plate
20 A0ED268100
Cushion
21 A1UDR70311
Slit Glass Assy
22 A0ED268700
Regulating Plate
23 A0ED267500
Cover
24 A1UD170302
Read Cover /Left
Q-7

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3
25 A1UD171700
Cover /Rear
26 A1UD170200
Read Cover /Rear
27 A1UD170700
Read Cover
28 A0ED268200
Holding Plate
29 A0ED170600
Read Cover Upper F
3 a
V116030803
Screw
3 b
V116030804
Screw
3 c
V127030604
screw
3 d
V137030803
screw
3 e
V153030803
Screw
3 f
V121030804
screw
3 g
V115030603
Screw
1.3 OPERATION PANEL SECTION

P4
See P44-7
1
2
3
See P44-5
c
27
26
d
24
25
12
g
23
m
m
11
12
13
e
f
8
7
28
24
22
10
g
h
g
16
12
21
14
15
17
19
20
18
g
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
Description
1 A1UD171600
Read Cover
2 A1UD171202
Read Cover /Inside
3 A1UD171400
Read Cover
4 A0P0M70503
Panel assembly
A,A1
4 A0P0M70603
Panel assembly
B,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,G2,I,K
4 A0P0M70703
Panel assembly
4 A0P0M70802
Panel assembly
5 A1UDN12D00
Ope.unit Cable
6 A1UD167900
Cover
7 A1UD192200
Shoulder screw /1
8 A1UD192700
Compressing Coil spring
9 A1UD192000
Washer
10 A1UD191500
Mounting Plate
11 A1UD192400
Shoulder screw /2
12 A1UD192900
Washer
13 A1UD191400
Arm
Q-8
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4
14 A1UD192500
Handle
15 A1UD192300
Lever
16 A0ED192600
Pulling Spring
17 A1UD191300
Arm
18 A1UD169400
Cover
19 A1UD191600
Mounting Plate
20 A1UD168000
Cover
21 A1UD192800
Support Shaft
22 A1UD171000
Read Cover /Right front
23 A1UD191200
Mounting Plate
24 A00J191900
Washer
25 A00J191700
Collar
26 A1UD191100
Mounting Plate
27 A00J191800
Support Screw
28 A1UD193000
Stopper
4 a
V137030803
screw
4 b
V153030803
Screw
4 c
V116030803
Screw
4 d
V137030603
screw
4 e
V205060003
washer
4 f
V195060003
nut
4 g
V116030603
Screw
4 h
V153031003
screw
4 k
V217040001
E Ring
4 m
V217030001
E Ring
1.4 CCD SECTION

P5
6
5
3
PS205
12
5
CCDB
PS204
7
2
11
a
13
8
14
9
10
14
4
13
13
14
b
14
13
23
16
15
22
USBB
17
19
9
e
18
22
9
20
21
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A1UDN10400
Scanner Wiring /4
A,A1,B,G2
1 A1UDN10901
Scanner Wiring /9
C,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,H,I,J,K
Q-9

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5
9335140081 SOLID STATE SWITCH

(PS204)

(PS205)
4036307501 TAPE
5 A1UDM90200
Gasket
6 A1UD279000
Mounting Plate /ASSY
7 A1UDR71700
CCD ASSY
8 A0ED281700
Mounting Plate
9 A0ED262500
Seal
10 A0ED267300
Cushion
11 A1UDN10000
Interface Cable
12
13 A0ED268500
Seal
14 A0ED268400
Seal
15 A00J265300
Regulating Plate
16 A0P0H02500
PWB assembly(PWB-UCN
USB board (USBB)
ASSY)
17 A1UD281800
Mounting Plate
18 A1UDN14001
Interface Cable
A,A1,B,G2
18 A1UDN14101
Interface Cable
19 A0ED263200
Seal
20 A0ED262400
Seal
21 A0ED262300
Cover
22 A0ED262700
Seal
23 A0ED262600
Seal
D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,I,K
CCD board (CCDB)
9326120061 FERRITE CORE
5 a
V137030603
screw
5 b
V116030603
Screw
5 c
V111020603
screw
5 d
V127030604
screw
5 e
V153030803
Screw
Q-10

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.5 SCANNER SECTION

P6
a
13
4
b
25
2
b
1
a
10
22
21
21
13
c
13
13
2
b
11
13
7
23
20
23
22
21
14
24
21
a
14
12
13
17
19
18
13
d
c
16
15
Description
13
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A0ED270700
Mounting Plate
2 A0ED270900
Pressing Plate
3 A0ED270600
Guide
4 A0EDM31000
Lamp
5 A02E270800
Seal
6 A0ED270500
Holder
7 A0ED271300
Plate spring
8 A0ED270800
Mounting Plate
9 A0ED271200
Mirror
10 A0ED270400
Mounting Plate
11 A0EDR72800
1st Slider Assy
12 A0ED275100
Wire
13 A0ED273600
Pulley
14 A0ED273700
Mounting Plate
15 A0ED281200
Guide
16 A0ED276200
Mounting Plate
17 A0ED276301
Pulling Spring
18 A0ED274000
Guide Part
19 A0ED273900
Pulley
20 A0ED273400
Mounting Plate
21 A0ED274400
Plate spring
22 A0ED274200
Vibrationproof Plate
23 A0ED274300
Mirror
24 A0ED273300
Mounting Plate
25 A0ED275200
Wire
6 a
V137030603
screw
6 b
V116030603
Screw
6 c
V218040086
E ring
Q-11

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6 d
V127030604
screw
1.6 SCANNER DRIVE SECTION

12
INVB
P7
b
13
5
PS202
c
14
6
3
11
15
10
M201
16
31
a
13
REYB/SCAN
b
a
27
17
28
29
c
18
18
30
26
30
PS201
25
24
18
17
18
18
18
23
18
19
21
23
a
22
18
18
20
b
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 4556M90100
FERRITE CORE
2 A1UDN10800
Scanner Wiring /8
3 A1UDH00100
PWB Assembly(PWB-IF
ASSY)
4 A1UDN10600
Scanner Wiring /6
5 A0EDM41000
Inverter unit
6 V502010033
spacer
8 A1UDN10100
1
1
Scanner relay board (REYB/

SCAN)

Scanner Wiring /1
Stepping motor
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
9 A02EM10A00
10 A0ED275600
11
12 A1UD262800
Mounting Plate
13 A0ED275302
Pulley
14 A00J280200
Lever
15
16 A0ED275400
Shaft
17 A1UD276500
Bushing
18
19 A1UD262200
Mounting Plate
20 A1UD265400
Mounting Plate
21 A0ED281600
Guide
Belt 210L
4037090301 PHOTO INTERRUPTER
4036172001 PRESSURE SPRING
4581162501 SEAL
22 A1UD261600
Mounting Plate
23 A00J276300
Guide Part
24 A0ED263300
Seal
25
26 A0ED262200
Cover
Q-12

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7
27 A1UDN10200
Scanner Wiring /2
28 A0ED275700
Pulling Spring
29 A1UD276000
Mounting Plate
30 A1UD263000
Seal
31 A0ED275501
Pulley 117T
7 a
V116030603
Screw
7 b
V137030603
screw
7 c
V116030803
Screw
7 d
V218060086
E ring
1.7 PRINT HEAD/POWER SUPPLY SECTION

3
P8
2
c
1
d
a
a
9
10
9
5
PH
11
11
HV1
See P43
d
See P43
6
7
11
11
12
14
13
See P43
11
DCPU
15
13
e
e
e
16
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A1UD104001
Mounting Plate
2 A1UD104101
Holder
3 A1UD104201
Cover
4 A1UD131000
Cover
5 A1UDM40301
High voltage unit
6 A1UDN11600
Heater Relay harness /1
4030204001 BRACKET
4128197901 SHOULDER SCREW
High voltage unit (HV1)

A,A1
10 A1UFR70300
PRINT HEAD ASSY
PH unit
{bizhub 223/283/7828}
10 A1UDR71300
PRINT HEAD ASSY
PH unit
{bizhub 363/423}
11 A1UD104500
Seal
A,A1,B,F1,G2
12 A1UDM40002
Power supply
A,A1
12 A1UDM40102
Power supply
B,F1,G2,H
12 A1UDM40202
Power supply
C,D1,D3,F2,G1,I,J,K
13 A1UD102600
Seal
14 A1UD100601
Reinforce Plate
15 V651010002
connector
16 A1UD120601
Reinforce Plate
Q-13

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8 a
V137030803
screw
8 b
V116030803
Screw
8 c
V153030803
Screw
8 d
V144030803
SCREW
8 e
V116030603
Screw
1.8 OZONE DUCT/FAN MOTOR SECTION

P9
1
2
3
5
6
7
FM4
16
5
8
17
b
b
15
c
14
FM5
13
11
FM1
e
10
11
12
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A1UD135701
Top plate
2 A1UDN12A00
Neutralizing Wiring
3 A1UD136100
Seal
4 A1UDR71800
Ozone Duct Assy
5 A1UD136400
Seal
6 A1UD135100
Filter
7 A1UD135301
Holding Plate
4040209401 SEAL
4040016301 DUCT

(FM1)
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
10 A1UDM10500
Fan motor
11 A1UD130700
Seal
12 A02E148400
Filter
13 A0EDM10500
Fan motor
14 A1UD131300
Duct
15
16 A1UD130900
Duct
17 9J03M10000
FAN MOTOR

(FM5)
4040209501 SEAL
9 a
V116030603
Screw
9 b
V153030803
Screw
9 c
V137030803
screw
9 d
V137030603
screw
Q-14

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9 e
V116033003
Screw
9 f
V116030803
Screw
1.9 IU SECTION
P 10
30
4
5
6
7
9
10
15
14
18
c
20
21
16
13
17
10
9
8
11
22
12
19
26
TCRSB
27
d
25
24
21
28
29
23
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
10
4040526001 SEAL
10
10
1139525001 PLATE SPRING
10
10
4163523801 SEAL
10
4163520801 SEAL
10
4163520501 SHUTTER
10
4163529801 ROLL
10
4163522601 HOLDER
10
10
4021522501 SEAL
10
11
4661315501 WASHER
10
12
4163522101 SEAL
10
13
4163520701 SEAL
10
14
4163523701 SEAL
10
15
4163520901 SEAL
10
16
4163524001 SEAL
10
17
4163523901 SEAL
10
18 A1UD371000
Gear
10
19 A1UDR90000
Panel heater Kit
10
20 A1UD370900
Gear
10
21
10
22
4163522401 GEAR 20T
10
23
4040522201 COVER
10
24
4040522301 SEAL
10
25 A1UD370700
A,A1
Filter
Q-15

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10
26 A0TKH00200
PWB Assembly(PWB-TCR
ASSY)
10
27 A1UD370601
Seal
10
28 A1UD370500
Holder
10
29
10
30 A1UDR71100
Developing UNIT
4040521101 SEAL
10 a
V112030621
screw
10 b
V115030803
Screw
10 c
V218040086
E ring
10 d
V153031003
screw
10 e
V153030803
Screw
10 f
V218030086
E ring
10 g
V149030803
screw
1.10 HOPPER SECTION

P 11
4
5
2
a
1
7
3
8
2
9
13
10
30
29
7
11
28
27
14
12
26
25
b
15
24
19
16
18
23
17
c
e
20
22
21
d
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
SW 1
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
11
1 A1UFR70000
Hopper Assy
A,A1,{bizhub 223/283}
11
1 A1UDR71400
Hopper Assy
A,A1,{bizhub 363/423}
11
1 A1UFR70100
Hopper Assy
B,G2,{bizhub 223/283}
11
1 A1UDR71500
Hopper Assy
B,G2,{bizhub 363/423}
1
1
1
11
1 A1UFR70200
Hopper Assy
C,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,H,I,J,K,
I
{bizhub 223/283/7828}
11
1 A1UDR71600
Hopper Assy
{bizhub 363/423}
11
11
3 A1UD410700
11
11
11
1151502301 SUPPORT
I
C
4030538702 STOPPER
4030538801 TORSION SPRING
4030538001 HOLDER
11
1165532501 PIN
11
1165532703 SEAL
Joint
Q-16

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11
9 A1UD411000
11
10 A1UD410800
Collar
11
11 A1UD410900
Cushion
11
12 A1UD410300
11
13 A1UF940600
Label
{bizhub 223/283/7828}
11
13 A1UD940600
Label
{bizhub 363/423}
11
14 A1UD410100
Stopper
11
15
11
16 A1UD410400
Pulling Coil spring
11
17 A1UD410601
Handle
11
18
11
19 A1UD410200
Claw
11
20 A1UD102801
Stopper
11
21 4038M60000
SEESAW-SWITCH
11
22
11
23 A1UDN11300
AC Power source harness
11
24 A1UD103401
Light blocking Sheet
11
25
4030539801 COLLAR
11
26
4030538302 SHUTTER
11
27
4030538601 TENSION SPRING
11
28
4030538401 SEAL
4040532201 STOPPER
A,A1,B,G2,{bizhub
363/423}
4011534701 STOPPER
B,G2,{bizhub 223/283}
11
29
11
30
4030539301 HANDLE
1250230101 SCREW
11 a
V147030803
screw
11 b
V151031403
screw
11 c
V116041203
Screw
11 d
V116030603
Screw
11 e
V137030603
screw
P 12
1
a
14
2
13
3
4
b 5
6
RS1
d c
M4
11
c
9
12
10
Page Key
12
Parts No.
1 V651010001
Description
ServiceManual
connector
Destinations
Clas
s
D
Q-17
Quan
tity
1

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12
4030538502 SEAL
12
1165530801 SHUTTER
12
12
5 9334271011
12
4011533901 PLATE NUT
12
4030537901 GEAR 14/19T
12
8 A1UD400801
Toner supply Gear
12
9 A02EM10400
Stepping motor
12
10 A1UD400900
12
11 A1UD400700
12
12
12
SWITCH
Toner supply Gear
Toner supply Gear
12 A1UDR70411
Sub Hopper Assy
13 A1UDN12500
Supply Drive harness
14 A1UD102401
Mounting Plate
1
5
12 a
V153030803
Screw
12 b
V116031003
Screw
12 c
V218040086
E ring
12 d
V136030603
screw
1.11 1ST PAPER FEED SECTION

P 13
CL11
30
6
PS15
8
PS11
4
29
28
10
PS12
27
g
21
26
22
20
24
12
25
13
15
14
19
16
11
23
12
13
a
18
2
15
2
16
17
b
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Clutch
13
1 A00FM20000
13
13
13
4 A1UD560600
Shoulder screw
13
5 A1UD560102
Frame
13
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4131300301 BUSHING
4040309601 SHAFT
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 423}
6 A108M50100
Photointerrupter
13
7 A1UD564901
Mounting Plate
13
8 A0EDM50100
Photoreflector
13
9 A1UD104400
Mounting Plate

(PS15)
Q-18

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13
10 A1UD564101
Frame
13
11 A1UD101801
Mounting Plate
13
12 A02E561100
Clutch
13
13 A00J563600
Roller
13
14 A1UD560700
13
15 56AA40490
SHAFT STOPPER 4
13
16 A1UD560500
Cushion
13
17 A1UD560200
Guide Plate
13
18
4030300801 GEAR 29T
13
19
4425301601 GEAR 32T
13
20 A00J564000
Shaft /P
13
21 A1UD560401
Shaft
13
22
13
23 A00J560302
13
24
13
25 A00J560100
13
26
13
27 A1UEN12700
Paperfeed Wiring /1
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} D
13
27 A1UDN12700
Paperfeed Wiring /1
{bizhub 423}
13
28 A1UD561100
Lever
13
29 A00J566801
Torsion Spring
13
30
1065308601 BUSHING
Torsion Spring
4040309701 SHAFT
Paper feed Holder
4425301301 GEAR 30T
4030301612 ACTUATOR
13 a
V218040086
E ring
13 b
V137030603
screw
13 c
V136030803
screw
13 d
V153030803
Screw
13 e
V217040001
E Ring
13 f
V218030086
E ring
13 g
V237200850
Pin
P 14
1
2
3
21
5
6
a
a
b
d
20
19
7
18
14
17
b
16
15
10
d
11
15
12
b
13
Page Key
14
Parts No.
1
Description
ServiceManual
4030303901 SHAFT
Destinations
Clas
s
D
Q-19
Quan
tity
1

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14
4030307901 GUIDE
14
4030308001 GUIDE
14
4030307701 GUIDE
14
5 A0ED563900
Torque limiter
14
6 A00J563600
Roller
14
7 A00J564700
Holder /S
14
8 56AA40490
SHAFT STOPPER 4
14
9 A1UD563100
Cushion
14
10 A00J564600
Mounting Plate /S
14
11 A1UD562600
Guide
14
12
4030302505 Bracket
14
13 57GA61560
SCREW PROTECTION
CUSHION/1
14
14 A1UD564600
Reinforce Plate
14
15 26NA20300
SEPARATE ROCKING
COLLAR
14
16
4030303701 REINFORCE PLATE
14
17
14
18 A1UD563200
Spacer
14
19
4030307801 LEVER
14
20
4030302702 GUIDE
14
21 A0P0561600
{bizhub 423}
Torque limiter /S
14 a
V218040086
E ring
14 b
V137030603
screw
14 c
V218030086
E ring
14 d
V137030803
screw
14 e
V116030403
Screw
14 f
V116030803
Screw
14 g
V136030803
screw
1.12 2ND PAPER FEED SECTION

P 15
8
7
a
6
a
2
CL22
4
3
1
16
24
22
23
22
15
b
10
14
21
PS28
17
18
19
PS28
13
20
10
26
12
25
a
b
11
Q-20

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Clutch

(CL22)
15
1 A1UDM20100
15
15
3 A1UD564401
Frame
15
4 A1UD562100
Roller
15
5 A1UD561400
Weight
15
15
7 A1UD561200
Guide Plate
15
8 A1UD572400
15
9 A1UD570500
15
10
Destinations
4131353202 BUSHING
4030311202 GUIDE PLATE
Clas
s
Quan
tity
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} D
{bizhub 423}
Guide
Guide
15
11 A1UD564300
Frame
15
12 A1UD561801
Mounting Plate
15
13
1200521204 PIN
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} D
15
14
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} C
15
15 A1UD561600
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} D
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} B
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} D
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} D
{bizhub 423}
Conveyance Actuator
(PS28)
15
16 A108M50100
Photointerrupter
15
17 A1UEN12400
Conveyance Drive
harness /2
15
18
15
19 A0EDM50100
Photoreflector
15
20 A1UD561900
Mounting Plate
{bizhub 423}
15
21 A1UDN12400
Conveyance Drive
harness /2
{bizhub 423}
15
22
4030310801 GUIDE
15
23
4030303203 GUIDE
15
24 A1UD561500
Cushion
15
25 A1UD570300
Mounting Plate
15
26 A1UD570400
1134304101 COLLAR
(PS28)
Guide
15 a
V217060001
E Ring
15 b
V137030603
screw
15 c
V153030803
Screw
15 d
V116030603
Screw
Q-21

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 16
3
2
CL21
4
5
P S2 1
PS25
28
26
3
27
PS22
25
g
19
20
18
21
24 16
c
11
22
17
14
16
10
23
12
d
e
29
11
12
13
b
14
15
c
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Clutch
16
1 A00FM20000
16
16
3 A1UD560600
Shoulder screw
16
4 A1UD565101
Frame
Destinations
5 A108M50100
Photointerrupter
16
6 A1UD564901
Mounting Plate
16
7 A0EDM50100
Photoreflector
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 423}
16

(PS25)
Quan
tity
4131300301 BUSHING
16
Clas
s
4030301612 ACTUATOR
16
9 A1UD564200
Frame
16
10 A1UD103300
Mounting Plate
16
11 A00J563600
Roller
16
12 56AA40490
SHAFT STOPPER 4
16
13
16
14 A1UD560500
Cushion
16
15 A1UD560200
Guide Plate
16
16 A02E561100
Clutch
16
17
16
18 A00J564000
Shaft /P
16
19 A1UD560401
Shaft
16
20
16
21 A00J560302
16
22
16
23 A00J560100
16
24
16
25 A1UEN12800
Paperfeed Wiring /2
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} D
16
25 A1UDN12800
Paperfeed Wiring /2
{bizhub 423}
16
26 A1UD561100
Lever
16
27 A00J566801
Torsion Spring
4030300801 GEAR 29T
4425301601 GEAR 32T
1065308601 BUSHING
Torsion Spring
4040309701 SHAFT
Paper feed Holder
4425301301 GEAR 30T
Q-22

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16
28
16
29 A1UD560700
4040309601 SHAFT
16 a
V218040086
E ring
16 b
V218030086
E ring
16 c
V137030603
screw
16 d
V136030803
screw
16 e
V153030803
Screw
16 f
V217040001
E Ring
16 g
V237200850
Pin
P 17
3
4
19
18
17
a
f
14
15
16
5
7
12
10
b
c
13
8
d
10
11
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
17
4030303901 SHAFT
17
4030307901 GUIDE
17
4030308001 GUIDE
17
4030307701 GUIDE
17
5 A00J564700
Holder /S
17
6 56AA40490
SHAFT STOPPER 4
17
7 A1UD563100
Cushion
17
8 A00J564600
Mounting Plate /S
17
9 A1UD562600
Guide
SEPARATE ROCKING
COLLAR
17
10 26NA20300
17
11
4030302505 Bracket
17
12
17
13
17
14
4030302702 GUIDE
17
15 A1UD563200
Spacer
17
16
4030307801 LEVER
17
17 A00J563600
Roller
17
18 A0ED563900
Torque limiter
17
19 A0P0561600
Torque limiter /S
E ring
17 a
V218040086
Q-23

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17 b
V218030086
E ring
17 c
V136030803
screw
17 d
V137030803
screw
17 e
V116030403
Screw
17 f
V137030603
screw
17 g
V116030803
Screw
1.13 IU/CASSETTE RAIL SECTION

P 18
15
SP1
2
a
12
10
a
a
16
11
14
17
19
18
a
20
3
4
29
d
13
b
21
22
a
e
22
27
e
23
f
28
k
27
26
h
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
25
a
h
Page Key
24
23
25
g
26
Destinations
Chaging Wiring
Clas
s
Quan
tity
18
1 A1UDN12H00
18
4030210201 HOLDER
18
4030211501 CONTACT
18
4030211301 CONTACT
18
4030211201 CONTACT
18
18
7 A1UDN12J00
18
18
9 A1UDN12G00
Separating Wiring
1165215301 CONTACT
Developing Wiring
18
10
1129730301 LABEL HI-VOL CAUTION
18
11
4030201903 Guide
18
12
4011204701 SEAL
18
13
18
14
1165214201 EARTH GROUND
18
15 4040M40100
LOUDSPEAKER
18
16 A1UDN12F00
Transfer Wiring
18
17
18
18 A1UD105302
Holder
18
19 A1UD131400
Mounting Plate
20 A1UDN11400
Fixing Relay harness /

100V
18
Fax speaker (SP1)
1164215501 CONTACT
A,A1
Q-24

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B,C,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,G2,H
D
,I,J,K
Mounting Plate
Rail
23 A1UD102500
Guide
18
24 A1UD105001
Ground Plate
18
25 A1UD101600
Stopper
18
26 A1UD106001
Guide
18
27 A1UD100802
Rail
18
28
4030208101 SPACER
18
29
4030211401 CONTACT
18
20 A1UDN11500
Fixing Relay harness
18
21 A1UD132100
18
22 A1UD100701
18
18 a
V137030603
screw
18 b
V153030803
Screw
18 c
V115030603
Screw
18 d
V153031003
screw
18 e
V153041003
screw
18 f
V137041003
screw
18 g
V116030803
Screw
18 h
V137030803
screw
18 k
V137031203
screw
1.14 CASSETTE SIZE SECTION

P 19
1
a
3
M11
5
7
PS13
PSDB11
P S1 4
PS16
10
PS17
14
13
11
b
12
10
a
M2 1
4
15
PS23
PSDB21
7
PS24
9
10
PS27
PS26
14
7
13
11
12
10
Page Key
Parts No.
19
1 A1UDN12K01
19
19
19
Description
ServiceManual
Paperfeed Detection
harness /1
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4011301201 HOLDER
19
5 9J06M10300
MOTOR
19
6 A0ED627500
Holder

Q-25

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19
7 A108M50100
19
19
19
10
Photointerrupter

Tray 1 paper CD size detect
sensor/1 (PS16)
sensor/2 (PS17)
sensor/1 (PS26)
sensor/2 (PS27)
4030308301 HOLDER
Paperfeed Detection
harness /2
19
11 A108R90000
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
19
12 A1UD634600
Mounting Plate
19
13

4030309101 LEVER
19
14
19
15 A1UDN12M01

(PSDB11)
(PSDB21)
4037010401 PWB ASSY
19 a
V116033003
Screw
19 b
V137030603
screw
1.15 CASSETTE SECTION

P 20
See P21-21
2
3
6
4
a
7
5
8
1
b
a
2
3
6
11
a
10
See P21-21
8
a
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
20
1 A00J942202
Label FD
20
2 A02E941300
Label Fd
20
3 A02E941500
Label Cd
20
4 A1UD625300
Holder
20
5 A0ED625400
20
6 A0ED940100
Label Paper
Q-26

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
20
7 A1UD625101
Cover
20
8 A0ED625201
Handle
20
9 A0ED625000
Cover
20
10 A1UD635101
Cover
20
11 A0ED625301
Holder
20 a
V153041003
screw
20 b
V153030803
Screw
P 21
1
2
2 UNIT
b
c
7
c
7
8
5
20
19
18
10
11
7
d
12
d
b
d
7
b
13
17
14
15
16
A See P22
21
b
Page Key
21
1 A0ED620500
Lifting Plate
21
4030322601 FRICTION SHEET
21
4030320601 LEVER
21
4 A0ED631600
Lifting Shaft
21
5 A0ED620700
Actuator
21
6 A0ED622100
Ground Plate
21
7 A0ED623400
Roll
21
8 A0ED633100
Reinforce Plate /Right rear
21
9 A0ED620200
Guide
Lock Lever
21
10 A0ED625500
11
4163529301 SCREW
Destinations
Quan
tity
Description
21
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Parts No.
21
12 A0EDF62200
Caulking(Mounting Plate
cassette)
21
13 A0ED625700
Release Lever
21
14 A0ED635801
Pulling Coil spring
21
15 A0ED620113
Paper feed Cassette
21
16
21
17 A0ED623200
Reinforce Plate /Left rear
21
18 A02ER73400
Regulating Plate Assy
21
19
21
20 A02E622300
Guide plate
21
21 A0EDF62300
1st Cassette
Screw
21 a
4002310801 LEVER
4030322812 GUIDE
V116030803
Q-27

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
21 b
V153030803
Screw
21 c
V221040050
ring
21 d
V217040001
E Ring
P 22
2 UNIT
See P21
7
6
9
7
3
13
10
11
12
b
14
b
c
15
5
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
22
1 A0ED620901
Regulating Plate /Rear
22
2 A0ED621000
Guide
22
3 A02E622700
Cushion
10
22
LABEL CARRYING
4002730601
CAPACITY
22
4163529301 SCREW
22
6 A0ED621101
22
4037320401 KNOB
22
4537331701 GUIDE
22
9 A0EDF62100
Rack /Front
Caulking(Regulating Plate/
ASSY)
22
10
22
11 A0ED621300
4011302101 WASHER
Lever
22
12 A0ED621400
Pulling Coil spring
22
13 A0ED620601
Shoulder screw
22
14 A02E622400
Gear 14T
22
15 A0ED621901
Mounting Plate
22 a
V137030603
screw
22 b
V144040603
SCREW
22 c
V217060001
E Ring
Q-28

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.16 MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION

P 23
See P24-17
a
b
Page Key
23
Parts No.
1 A1UD590700
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Cover
1
1
23
2 A02E940901
Scale
A,A1,C,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,H
C
,I,J,K
23
2 A02E940800
Scale
B,G2
23
3 A0ED940200
Bypass Label
23
4 A1UD590600
Cover
23 a
V116030804
Screw
23 b
V137040803
SCREW
23 c
V137030804
screw
Q-29

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 24
17
16
2
See P25
See P26
PS86
PS84
3
6
3
4
PS85
15
a
14
10
11
10
PS82
10
13
8
12
a
a
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
24
1 A0ED590900
Cover
24
2 A02E598400
Actuator
24

Photointerrupter

24
4 A108M50100
24
24
6 A0ED598700
Holder
24
7 A02E591801
Cover
24
8 A0ED590800
Tray
1134304202 SHAFT
24
9 9J06323501
BRACKET
24
10 A1UD598600
Seal
24
11 A108R90000
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
24
12 A02E598200
Actuator
24
13

(PS82)
24
14 A1UDN12B00
Paperfeed Detection
harness /3
24
15 A0ED591000
Mounting Plate
24
16 A02E591100
Tray
24
17 A1UDR70600
Bypass Tray Assy
Screw
24 a
V153030803
Q-30

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 25
See P24
B
b
15
14
2
PS83
16
13
SD81
CL81
17
8
d
10
11
12
26
e
25
24
23
20
18
19
22
a
h
21
20
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
25
1 A02E595600
Bracket
25
2 A108M50100
Photointerrupter
25
3 A02E595201
Bracket
25
4 9J06M20000
SOLENOID
25
5 A1UDM20100
Clutch
25
6 A1UD595500
Gear
25
25
8 A02E595100
25

(PS83)
4038323701 SHIELD PLATE

Clutch assy
4131300301 BUSHING
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
25
10 A02E595400
Gear 22T
25
11 A02E596002
Cam
25
12 A02E595302
Shaft
25
13 A1UD595700
Shaft
25
14 A1UD594101
Guide
25
15 A02E591200
Cover
25
16 A1UD591300
Mounting Plate
25
17 A00F623200
Roller
25
18 A02E594500
Torsion spring
25
19 A02E594600
Lever
25
20 A1UD595900
25
21 A1UD590100
Guide
25
22 A1UD591500
Guide
25
23 A1UD590200
Guide
25
24 A1UD594200
Guide
25
25
25
26 A02E596100
Gear 30T
4131353202 BUSHING
25 a
V153030803
Screw
25 b
V137030603
screw
25 c
V217050001
E ring
Q-31

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
25 d
V217040001
E Ring
25 e
V218060086
E ring
25 f
V218040086
E ring
25 g
V233201050
pin
25 h
V137030803
screw
P 26
See P24
6
a
12
10
14
PS81
11
13
14
b
15
VR81 17
16 d
18
20
38
c
19
b
a
37
21
22
32
31
3 5 36
b
b
30
29
23
34
33
28
24
32
27
25
39
g
25
g
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
26
f
26
g
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
26
1 A02E593400
Brake
26
2 A02E593300
Brake
26
3 A02E592400
Regulating plate
26
4 A02E593200
Brake
26
5 A02E592300
Regulating plate
26
26
7 A0ED592201
Lifting Plate
8 A1UDN12C01
Paperfeed Detection
harness /4
26
26
9 A1UD599200
Seal
26
10 A02E593700
Seal
26
11 A0ED599100
Mounting Plate
Photoreflector

(PS81)
26
12 A0EDM50100
26
13 A0ED599000
Ground Plate
26
14 A1UD598100
Friction Plate
26
15 A02EG62100
Caulking Gear Mounting

Plate
26
16 A02E598300
Gear 40T
26
17 A02E592100
Gear 20T
26
18 V801300006
RESISTOR
26
19 A02E598100
Bracket
26
20 A02E593500
Earth ground
26
21 A1UD592800
Reinforce Plate
26
22 A0ED593600
Ground Plate
26
23 A0ED590500
Holder
Manual FD size sensor (VR81)
Q-32

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
26
24 A0ED591900
Cushion
26
25 A02E592500
Pressure spring
26
26 A02E592600
Hold plate
26
27
26
28 A02E597200
Bracket
26
29 A0ED597100
Holder
26
30 A02E597600
Guide
26
31
26
32 A0ED599300
Guide
26
33 A02E597301
Reinforce plate
26
34
4030348901 SEAL
26
35
26
36
4030340301 GUIDE
26
37 A0ED591700
Cushion
26
38 A0ED593100
Brake Part
26
39 A0ED593900
Hold Plate
4034015101 SEPARATION ROLLER
26 a
V116030804
Screw
26 b
V153030803
Screw
26 c
V153030603
screw
26 d
V111170403
screw
26 e
V145030803
screw
26 f
V137030803
screw
26 g
V137030603
screw
26 h
V218030086
E ring
1.17 PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION

P 27
See P28-33
d
3
b
a
2
1
f
a
13
14
g
12
9
h
11
10
k
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
27
1 A1UD101500
Shaft
27
2 A1UD103900
Guide
27
3 A1UD103800
Stopper
27
4 A1UD103700
Wire
Q-33

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
27
5 A1UD101300
Pulling Coil spring
27
6 A1UD810400
Cover
27
27
8 A1UD711200
Stopper
27
27
4030103301 COVER
10 A1UDR7A000
Supporting point Caulking

Assy
27
11 A1UD121000
Shaft
27
12 A1UD105200
Cover
27
13 A1UD132400
Mounting Plate
27
14 A1UD120700
Reinforce Plate /Right front
27 a
V137030603
screw
27 b
V116040804
Screw
27 c
V137032003
screw
27 d
V137030803
screw
27 e
V137030804
screw
27 f
V137040803
SCREW
27 g
V218030086
E ring
27 h
V153041003
screw
27 k
V153030803
Screw
P 28
3
33
3
D
See P29
See P30
See P31
a
31
29
30
28
27
d
32
13
h
25
26
23
22
8
12
e
14
24
13
16
a
15
19
FM2
21
16
20
19
10
17
11
Page Key
Parts No.
18
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
28
1 A1UD811000
Stopper
28
2 A1UD814000
28
28
4 A1UD810300
28
28
Handle
5 A1UD810100
Cover
6 A1UD810200
Door
28
7 A1UD712500
Mounting Plate
28
28
9 A11U815000
28
10 A1UD710101
4661315501 WASHER
Pin
Mounting Plate
Q-34

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
28
11 A1UD711900
Ground Part
28
12 A1UD812200
Ground Plate
28
13 A1UD712300
Seal
28
14 A1UD712700
Seal
28
15
28
16 A1UD712100
Seal
28
17 A1UD710301
Lock Claw /Front
28
18 A1UD711300
Torsion Spring
28
19
28
20 9J03M10000
FAN MOTOR
4012352412 GUIDE
4163529301 SCREW
28
21 A1UD710500
Mounting Plate
28
22 A1UD710400
Claw
28
23 A1UD711000
Mounting Plate
28
24 A1UD712200
Seal
28
LABEL HI-TEMP
4138586601
CAUTION
25
28
26 A1UD710800
Reinforce Plate
28
27 A1UD712800
Reinforce Plate
28
28 A1UD711101
Gear
28
29 A1UD710200
Mounting Plate
28
30 A1UD710900
Ground Plate
28
31 A1UD812900
Actuator
28
32 A02E813100
Torsion spring
28
33 A1UDR70700
Vertical Conveyance Assy
28 a
V153030803
Screw
28 b
V218060086
E ring
28 c
V153031004
screw
28 d
V217040001
E Ring
28 e
V116030803
Screw
28 f
V137030803
screw
28 g
V137030603
screw
28 h
V153040803
screw
P 29
See P28
D
1
2
5
2
3
4
5
16
32
30
31
CL1
31
a
a
33
34
35
18
17
36
9
b
30
a
13
14
12
PS1
21
29
b
11
10
15
37
21
25
12
b
16
17
28
38
26
b
18
27
b
19
20
21
26
39
22
25
21
a
24
c
a
23
Q-35

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Guide
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
29
1 A1UD812700
29
29
3 A1UD711800
Torsion Coil spring
29
4 A1UD814100
Holding Part
29
29
6 A1UD810900
29
7 A1UDN13200
29
8 A108R90000
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
29
9 A1UD700300
Holder
29
10 A1UD710700
Holder
29
11 A1UD712000
Contact
29
12
29
13
1164352901 BRACKET
29
14
4030350401 ACTUATOR
29
15
29
16
29
17
1164420602 BUSHING
29
18
1164420902 CONTACT
29
19 A1UD713000
29
20
1164421801 HOLDER
29
21
1164354901 BUSHING
29
22
1164350801 GEAR 18T
29
23
1164351501 GEAR 13T
29
24
1164351402 EARTH GROUND
29
25
29
26
4030350501 GUIDE
29
27
29
28
9372271022 THERMISTOR
29
29
1164420204 NEUTRALIZING NEEDLE
29
30
4011351201 WASHER
29
31
4011302001 WASHER
29
32 A1UDM20000
Clutch
29
33 A1UD700200
Roller
29
34
4011350901 ROLLER
29
35
4040077800 PAPER DUST REMOVER
29
36
4030350109 Holder
4163529301 SCREW
4497311601 ROLL
29
37 V800500300
29
38
29
39 A1UDR70500
Guide
Conveyance Detection
harness
Contact
FIXED POWER
RESISTORS
4030422001 CONTACT
Transfer Roller Assy
29 a
V217050001
E ring
29 b
V153030803
Screw
29 c
V145030803
screw
Q-36

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 30
1
1
b
2
a
13
4
18
15
14
5
PS93
13
16
14
19
PS91
b
a
17
a
b
13
8
1
2
b
10
13
11
11
11
a
11
12
13
See P28
13
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
30
1 A1UD810500
30
30
3 A1UD812300
Ground Plate
30
4 A1UDN12P01
ADU Relay harness
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Roller
4497311601 ROLL
PHOTO INTERRUPTER

(PS93)
30
5 A108R90000
30
4030374201 BRACKET
30
4030374001 ACTUATOR
30
30
9 A1UD813400
Guide
30
10 A1UD811100
Guide
30
11 A1UD814100
Holding Part
30
12 A1UD812800
Guide
30
13 A02E815200
BUSHING
30
14 A1UD811600
Gear
30
15 A1UD812600
Ground Plate
30
16 A108M50100
Photointerrupter
30
17 A02E810800
Bracket
30
18 A1UD813700
Gear
30
19 A1UD814201
Ground Part
30 a
V217040001
E Ring
30 b
V153030803
Screw
30 c
V153031004
screw
Q-37

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 31
5
See P28
PS92
M92
9
7
10
8
d
11
3
c
10
d
12
2
d
10
12
19
10
17
15
18
17
c
13
16
16
16
14
16
14
c
Page Key
31
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A1UDN12N01
Conveyance Drive
harness /1
31
2 A1UDR7A100
ADU Drive Caulking Assy
31
3 A1UD812100
Ground Plate
31
4 A1UDM10100
Stepping motor
31
5 A108M50100
Photointerrupter
Duplex unit upper transport

sensor (PS92)
31
6 A1UD811700
Gear
31
7 A1UD813900
Flange
31
8 A1UD813800
Timing belt
31
9 A1UD811300
Timing belt
31
10 A02E811900
Flange
31
11 A1UD813200
Gear
31
12 A1UD813600
Gear
31
13 A1UD711500
Guide Plate
31
14 A1UD712600
Plate spring
31
15 A1UD711700
Ground Plate
31
16
31
17 A1UD711600
31
18
31
19 A02E811300
4030312201 ROLL
Compressing Spring
4030312101 SHAFT
Timing Belt 264L
31 a
V118030603
screw
31 b
V116030603
Screw
31 c
V153030803
Screw
31 d
V217040001
E Ring
Q-38

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.18 FUSING SECTION

P 32
PS3
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
32
1 A1UDR70810
Fusing Unit 100V
A,A1
32
1 A1UDR70910
Fusing Unit 120V
B,F1,G2
32
1 A1UDR71010
Fusing Unit 200V
C,D1,D3,F2,G1,I,J,K
32 a
V116030803
Screw
Q-39

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.19 PAPER EXIT SECTION

P 33
1
a
2
11
3
10
9
FM3
4
3
5
c
3
6
b
8
3
7
c
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
33
1 A1UD941400
Label
33
2 A1UD890100
Cover
33
33
4 4556M10000
FAN MOTOR
4163529301 SCREW
(FM3)
33
5 A1UD890700
Ground Plate /Upper
33
6 A1UD890800
Torsion Coil spring
33
7 A1UD892100
Mounting Plate /Front
33
8 A1UD890500
Ground Plate /Lower
33
9 A1UD890401
Guide
33
10 A1UDN12E00
ADU Wiring
33
11
4038585601 NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
33 a
V153030804
screw
33 b
V153030803
Screw
33 c
V137030803
screw
33 d
V137030603
screw
Q-40

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 34
1
2
b
M91
5
d
6
c
4
d
8
16
7
7
e
15
7
11
10
10
7
9
f
14
12
11
13
e
12
12
12
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
34
1 A1UDM10100
Stepping motor
34
2 A1UD892800
34
3 A1UD891800
34
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Mounting Plate /ASSY
Torsion Coil spring /1
4 A1UD891600
34
5 A1UD891100
Lever /1
34
6 A1UD891500
Lever /2
34
7 A1UD892900
Roll
34
8 A1UD891000
Paper exit Roller
34
4025598401 SHAFT
34
10 A1UD890600
Torsion Coil spring
34
11 A02E815200
BUSHING
34
12
34
13 A1UD892200
34
14 A1UD890201
Guide
34
15 A1UD892600
Pulley
34
16 A1UD892700
4163529301 SCREW
Mounting Plate
Timing belt
34 a
V118030603
screw
34 b
V153030803
Screw
34 c
V137030603
screw
34 d
V217030001
E Ring
34 e
V217040001
E Ring
34 f
V145030803
screw
Q-41

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.20 HOPPER/PAPER FEED DRIVE SECTION

P 35
a
1
PS 4
2
3
12
6
7
M3
8
9
a
4
10
11
b
a
14
13
15
16
17
22
23
21
20
18
19
24
25
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
35
1 A1UD218900
Mounting Plate
35
2 A108M50100
Photointerrupter
35
3 A1UD218601
Holder
35
4 A1UDR70200
Hopper Drive Motor Assy
35
5 A1UD218100
Gear
35
6 A1UD218200
35
ServiceManual
26
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Gear
7 A1UD218700
Mounting Plate
35
8 A1UD218301
Gear
35
9 A1UD218500
35
10 A1UD218400
Joint
35
11 A1UD219000
Washer
35
12 A1UDR70100
Hopper Drive Assy
35
13 A1UD211401
Mounting Plate
35
14 A1UD210300
Gear
35
15 A1UD210401
Gear
35
16 A1UD210201
Gear
35
17 A1UD210601
Gear
{bizhub 423}
35
18 A1UD210001
Holder
{bizhub 423}
35
19 A1UD210900
Gear
{bizhub 423}
35
20 A1UD211300
Gear
{bizhub 423}
35
21 A1UD212000
Gear
{bizhub 423}
35
22 A1UD210500
Gear
35
23 A1UE210700
Gear
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} C
35
24 A1UE210800
Gear
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} C
35
25 A1UE211000
Gear
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} C
35
26 A1UE210101
Holder
{bizhub 223/283/363/7828} D
35 a
V153030803
Screw
35 b
V137030803
screw

{bizhub 423}
Q-42

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.21 MAIN DRIVE SECTION

P 36
a
a
M2
1
2
6
M1
d
e
24
b
9
23
22
21
10
18
11
13
12
20
19
14
17
16
15
b
b
Page Key
Parts No.
36
1 A1UDM10000
36
36
36
Description
ServiceManual
DC Brushless motor

PC motor (M2)
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4030252401 SHAFT
4030252303 Shaft
4030251801 GEAR 18T
36
4030251701 GEAR 21T
36
4030252501 BRACKET
36
4030251601 GEAR 24T
36
4030251501 GEAR 28/49T
36
36
10
4030250501 GEAR 58/67T
36
11
4030250601 GEAR 23/60T
36
12
4030251201 GEAR 19/44T
36
13
4030253104 Spring
36
14
4163529301 SCREW
36
15
4030251101 GEAR 42T
36
16
4030251001 GEAR 49T
36
17
4030252601 GEAR 32/35T
36
18
4040254501 GEAR 29T
36
19
4030253501 GEAR 27T
36
20 4030R71200
BRACKET ASSY
36
21 A1UD211600
Gear
36
22 A1UD220600
Gear
36
23
36
24 A1UDR70000
Main drive Assy
4040255201 GEAR 26T
36 a
V116030603
Screw
36 b
V153030803
Screw
36 c
V116030803
Screw
36 d
V218030086
E ring
Q-43

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
36 e
V217030001
E Ring
36 f
V218060086
E ring
1.22 REAR FRAME SECTION

P 37
2
d
1
22
a
17
f
e
16
a
b
15
SW2
a
18
23
14
21
19
13
12
c
c
a
20
TEM/HUM
11
b
f
10
8
h
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
37
1 A1UD105101
Reinforce Cover
{bizhub 423}
37
1 A1UD105101
Reinforce Cover
A,A1,B,C,G2,{bizhub 363}
37
2 A1UD102300
Mounting Plate
37
3 9J06M60100
MICRO SWITCH
37
4 A1UD133700
Mounting Plate
37
5 A1UD133800
Mounting Plate
37
37
7 A1UD133900
37
37
9 A1UD132700
37
10 A1UD133100
Right lower door switch (SW2)
1164205101 GUIDE
Torsion Coil spring
4030208001 RUBBER FOOT

Mounting Plate
Holder
(TEM/HUM)
37
11 A0P0M50400
Humidity sensor
37
12 A1UD101001
Mounting Plate
37
13 A1UDN13100
FNS Relay harness
37
14 A1UDN11100
AC Wiring /120V
B,G2
37
15 A1UD106200
Reinforce Cover /2
{bizhub 223/283/7828}
15 A1UD106200
Reinforce Cover /2
D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,I,J,K,
{bizhub 363}
Mounting Plate
A,A1
A,A1,B,G2
37
37
16 A1UD131200
37
17
37
18 A1UD131101
Mounting Plate
B,G2
37
19 A1UD134101
Mounting Plate
37
20 A1UDN11200
AC Wiring /230V
37
21 A1UDN11000
AC Wiring /100V
A,A1
37
22 A0EDN30001
Power source Cord /100V
A,A1
4037223902 BRACKET
Q-44

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
37
22 A1UDN30000
Power code /120V
B,G2
37
23 A1UD133000
Ground Plate spring
37 a
V116030603
Screw
37 b
V116040803
Screw
37 c
V137030603
screw
37 d
V137030803
screw
37 e
V116031603
Screw
37 f
V153030803
Screw
37 g
V149030803
screw
37 h
V137031203
screw
1.23 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

P 38
8
3
4
9
b
DIMM
b
9
11
10
1
b
a
NRB
20
19
MFPB
12
4
17
18
13
16
15
b
14
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
38
1 A0EDM72000
HDD
{bizhub 423}
38
1 A0EDM72000
HDD
A,A1,{bizhub 223/283}
38
1 A0EDM72000
HDD
38
2 A0P0N15200
Cable
{bizhub 423}
38
2 A0P0N15200
Cable
A,A1,{bizhub 223/283}
38
2 A0P0N15200
Cable
38
3 A0P0N15100
Cable
{bizhub 423}
38
3 A0P0N15100
Cable
A,A1,{bizhub 223/283}
38
3 A0P0N15100
Cable
38
4 A0P0144300
Shoulder screw
{bizhub 423}
38
4 A0P0144300
Shoulder screw
A,A1,{bizhub 223/283}
38
4 A0P0144300
Shoulder screw
38
5 A0P0144400
Bushing
{bizhub 423}
38
5 A0P0144400
Bushing
A,A1,{bizhub 223/283}
38
5 A0P0144400
Bushing
38
6 A1UD133200
Ground Plate spring
38
7 A0P0147300
Mounting Plate
38
8 V865300026
MEMORY MODULES
SO DIMM (DIMM)
Q-45

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
38
38
10 A1UD132300
4004182902 CUSHION
Ground Plate
38
11 A1UD130800
Rail
38
12 A0P0144701
Rail
38
13 A1UDH02002
PWB assembly (PWBMFP ASSY)
MFP board (MFPB)
{bizhub 223/283/7828}
38
13 A1UDH02102
PWB assembly (PWBMFP ASSY)
MFP board (MFPB)
{bizhub 363/423}
38
14 A1UD133300
Ground Plate spring
38
15 A1UDN12Y00
Cooling Relay harness
38
16 A1UDN12R00
Control Power source

harness
38
17 A1UDN12W00
Controller Control harness
38
18 A1UD130600
Mounting Plate
38
19 A1UD140102
Connecting Plate
{bizhub 423}
38
19 A1UD140102
Connecting Plate
A,A1,{bizhub 223/283}
38
19 A1UD140102
Connecting Plate
38
20 A1UD140002
Mounting Plate
{bizhub 423}
38
20 A1UD140002
Mounting Plate
A,A1,{bizhub 223/283}
38
20 A1UD140002
Mounting Plate
38 a
V118030403
screw
38 b
V116030603
Screw
V
4
P 39
7
12
9
6
c
a
1
8
PS6
10
21
11
a
PRCB
20
13
a
19
14
19
20
15
16
18
17
Page Key
Description
ServiceManual
1 A108M50100
Photointerrupter
Service port cover sensor (PS6)
39
2 A1UDN13300
Controller Detection
harness
39
3 A1UDM90300
Gasket
39
4 A1UD133600
Mounting Plate
39
5 A0ED137300
Ground Plate
39
39
7 A1UD131600
39
8 A1UD131801
39
Parts No.
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Cover
Cover
4025228301 SCREW
Q-46

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
39
9 A0P0147401
Mounting Plate
39
10 A0ED131900
Cover
39
11 A1UD134000
Screw
39
12 A1UD131700
Mounting Plate
39
13 A1UD130203
Cover
39
14 A1UD132900
Ground Plate spring
39
15 A1UD132800
Ground Plate spring
39
16 57GA61560
SCREW PROTECTION
CUSHION/1
39
17 A1UD133500
Insulating Film
39
18 A1UD130102
Mounting Plate
39
19 A1UD104500
Seal
39
20 V502010041
BUSHING
21 A1UDP00001
After PWB Assembly

(PWB-MC ASSY)
39
A,A1,B,F1,G2
39 a
V116030603
Screw
39 b
V137030603
screw
39 c
V116030804
Screw
39 d
V118030603
screw
39 e
V116030803
Screw
1.24 WIRING
P 40
(PRCB)
CN11
(HV1)
1
(SW2)
CN23
CN24
CN28
CN1
CN2
CN63
(M2)
CN4
CN9
CN10
CN3
CN7
CN6
CN5
CN64
(M1)
CN16
(PS83)
CN54
CN14
(CL81)
CN46
(DCPU)
CN22
CN7
CN5
CN17
CN43
(FM4)
CN15
(SD81)
CN57
Page Key
Parts No.
CN52
(TEM/HUM)
CN85
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
40
1 A1UGN12001
Main body Relay harness /

1
{bizhub 223}
40
1 A1UFN12001

1
{bizhub 283/7828}
40
1 A1UEN12001

1
{bizhub 363}
40
1 A1UDN12001

1
{bizhub 423}
Q-47

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 41
(PRCB)
CN13
CN16
CN21
CN18
Japan Only
CN8
CN89
CN14
CN86
CN15
CN38
(RS1)
CN81
CN97
(PS4)
Japan Only
CN33
CN13
CN30
CN35
CN37
(PS5)
CN12
(M3)
CN3 6
(CNT)
CN39
CN95
(FM1)
CN1
CN6
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
41
1 A1UEN12X01

2
A,A1,{bizhub
223/283/363/7828}
41
1 A1UDN12X01

2
A,A1,{bizhub 423}
41
1 A1UEN12101

2
B,C,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,G2,H
,I,J,K,{bizhub
D
223/283/363/7828}
41
1 A1UDN12101

2
B,C,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,G2,H
D
,I,J,K,{bizhub 423}
Q-48

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 42
CN91
(REYB/SCAN)
1
PJ1
P J9
Japan Only
(to Option: IR heater Kit)
C N 90
(to Option: Document Feeder)
CN92
CN80
CN93
CN81
CN22
(PRCB)
(DCPU)
CN84
(to Option: Paper Feeder)
CN3
CN6
CN615
CN607
(PS202)
CN620
(SP1)
CN614
(PRCB)
CN604
(RS201)
(REYB/SCAN)
CN605
PJ3
PJ11
CN606
(USBB)
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
42
1 A1UDN12S01
Power source Wiring
A,A1
42
1 A1UDN13400
Power source Wiring
B,C,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,G2,H
D
,I,J,K
42
2 A1UDN10301
Scanner Wiring /3
A,A1,B,G2
42
2 A1UDN10701
Scanner Wiring /7
Q-49

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.25 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS

P 43
10
26
21
16
11
31
36
32
37
33
38
29
34
39
30
35
40
11.1
11.5
Black
15.2
1.3
2. 4
13.2
28
2.8
12
2
10
27
22
17
16.5
Black
19.9
18.5
6 .2
16
15.2
1.3
2.4
21.5
0.1
33
26.3
11.5
28
23
18
13
6.8
25
0.2
7.3
5.2
13
26.3
4.8
11.5
24
19
14
8.4
White
31.4
8.5
9.2
2.8
11.2
8.4
Black
25
Nylon 20
15
10
18
6.2
11.5
10
7.2
14.4
5.0
Page Key
20
15.8
11
11.5
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
43
990559601 CORD CLAMP
43
43
3 V500010003
Saddle
43
4 V500010005
saddle
43
5 V500010007
saddle
43
6 V500010008
saddle
43
7 V500010013
saddle
43
8 V500010020
Saddle
43
9 V500010046
saddle
43
10 V500010054
SADDLE
43
11 V500010055
SADDLE
43
12 V500010061
saddle
43
13 V500020019
clamp
43
14 V500020020
clamp
43
15 V500020039
clamp
A,A1,B,F1,G2
43
16 V500020042
locker
43
17 V500020082
Clamping for FFC
43
18 V500020084
Clamping for FFC
43
19 V570010021
Saddle
43
20 V570010023
saddle
43
21 V570010026
saddle
43
22 V570010027
saddle
43
23 V570010028
saddle
43
24 V570010031
holder
43
25 V570010046
SADDLE
43
26 V500020052
bushing
43
27
4030205301 SPACER (BLACK)
43
28
4030205401 SPACER (WHITE)
D
D
D
A,A1,B,G2
Q-50

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1.26 ACCESSORY PARTS

P 44
1
2
3
3
See P3
See P3
5
7
8
See P4
See P2
See P3
See P4
9
10
11
See P3
Page Key
44
Parts No.
Description
1 A0ED166200
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
Holder
Quan
tity
A,A1,C,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,H
D
,I,J,K
44
2 A0ED166100
Installing Spacer
44
3 A00J169100
Cover
44
4 A02E167700
Cover
44
5 A0PD160200
Pen
44
6 A1UD171800
Seal
44
7 V116030803
Screw
44
8 A02E161600
Seal
44
9 A0EDN30201
Power source Cord /230V
44
9381430031 POWER CORD
D1,D3,F2,G1,I,K
1
1
44
10 A02E942000
Label Metric
A,A1,C,D1,D3,F1,F2,G1,H
C
,I,J,K
44
10 A02E942100
Label Inch
B,G2
44
11 A00J940100
Label Legal Restiriction
1.27 MAINTENANCE LIST

The items with no Page/Key numbers are not handled as spare parts.
No.
Section
PM Parts Description
Maintenance Cycle
(K=1,000)
QTY
Parts No.
Destinations
Page/Key
Note
Replace
1
2
Manual
bypass tray
Manual bypass tray feed

roller
1
1
200k *2
200k *2
A00F623200
4034015101
P25-17
P26-31
*4
*4
3
4
5
Tray1
Tray1 pick-up roller

Tray1 feed roller
Tray1 separation roller
assy
1
1
1
300k *2
300k *2
300k *2
A00J563600
A00J563600
A00J563600
P13-13
P13-13
P14-6
*4
*4
*4
6
7
8
Tray2
Tray2 pick-up roller

Tray2 feed roller
Tray2 separation roller
assy
1
1
1
300k *2
300k *2
300k *2
A00J563600
A00J563600
A00J563600
P16-11
P16-11
P17-17
*4
*4
*4
Q-51

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9
10
11
12
Conveyance
section
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
4
1
1
1
900k
900k
900k
150k *2
1164354901
1164350801
1164351501
4040077800
Fusing section Fusing Unit 100V

Fusing Unit 100V
Fusing Unit 100V
Fusing Unit 100V
Fusing Unit 120V
Fusing Unit 120V
Fusing Unit 120V
Fusing Unit 120V
Fusing Unit 200V
Fusing Unit 200V
Fusing Unit 200V
Fusing Unit 200V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
450k *3
450k *3
420k *3
340k *3
450k *3
450k *3
420k *3
340k *3
450k *3
450k *3
420k *3
340k *3
A1UDR70800
A1UDR70800
A1UDR70800
A1UDR70800
A1UDR70900
A1UDR70900
A1UDR70900
A1UDR70900
A1UDR71000
A1UDR71000
A1UDR71000
A1UDR71000
25
Transfer
section
150k *2
A1UDR70500
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Processing
section
Drum unit
Developer
Developing unit
Toner filter(Developing
unit)
Toner filter(Main body)
Ozone filter
Toner bottle
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
120k *3
110k *3
100k *3
80k *3
120k *3
110k *3
100k *3
80k *3
480k *3
440k *3
400k *3
320k *3
120k *3
110k *3
100k *3
80k *3
480k *3
440k *3
400k *3
320k *3
150k *3
25k
25k
17.5k
17.5k
A1UDR71100
A1UDR71100
A1UDR71100
A1UDR71100
A1UD370700
A1UD370700
A1UD370700
A1UD370700
A02E148400
A02E148400
A02E148400
A02E148400
A1UD135100
-

Timing roller gear 18T
Timing roller gear 13T
Paper dust remover
P29-21
P29-22
P29-23
P29-35
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 363}
{bizhub
283/7828}
{bizhub 223}
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 363}
{bizhub
283/7828}
{bizhub 223}
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 363}
{bizhub
283/7828}
{bizhub 223}
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P32-1
P29-39
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 363}
{bizhub
283/7828}
{bizhub 223}
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 363}
{bizhub
283/7828}
{bizhub 223}
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 363}
{bizhub
283/7828}
{bizhub 223}
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 363}
{bizhub
283/7828}
{bizhub 223}
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 363}
{bizhub
283/7828}
{bizhub 223}
{bizhub 423}
{bizhub 363}
{bizhub
283/7828}
{bizhub 223}
P10-30
P10-30
P10-30
P10-30
P10-25
P10-25
P10-25
P10-25
P2-4
P2-4
P2-4
P2-4
P9-6
*5
*5
*5
*5
*6
*6
*6
*6
*5
*5
*5
*5
*6
*6
*6
*6
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1: The parts can be replaced either by user or service engineer.

*3: Field standard yield refer Service manual: Field Service P.27
*5: The drum unit and toner filter (Developing unit) should be replaced with new ones at the same time.
*6: The drum unit and toner filter (Main body) should be replaced with new ones at the same time.
1.28 DESTINATION
Destinatio
n No.
A1
A2
B
Destinations
JAPAN
D1
Hz
Model No.
100 50/6 A1UD001/A1UE001/A1UF001/A1UG001

0
JAPAN
USA, CANADA
120
EUROPEAN TYPE
220 50/6 A1UD021/A1UE021/A1UF021/A1UG021

-24
0
0
S.E
ASIA
TYPE
60
A1UD011/A1UD012/A1UE011/A1UE012/A1UF011/A1UF012/
A1UG011
THAILAND,SRI
220 50/6 A1UD041/A1UE041/A1UF041/A1UG041
LANKA,SINGAPORE,MALAYSIA,HONG -24
0
KONG,
0
PAKISTAN,INDIA,BANGLADESH,INDON
ESIA
Q-52

(bizhub 223/b...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D3
E
AUSTRALIA,NEW ZEALAND
SAUDI ARABIA
127
SAUDI ARABIA
220 50/6 A1UD041/A1UE041/A1UF041/A1UG041

-24
0
0
C.S AMERICA
220 50/6 A1UD041/A1UE041/A1UF041/A1UG041

-24
0
0
C.S AMERICA
120
F2
G1
220 50/6 A1UD041/A1UE041/A1UF041/A1UG041

-24
0
0
PHILIPPINES
F1
OCEAI
NA
TYPE
G2
60
60
A1UD0M1/A1UE0M1/A1UF0M1/A1UG0M1
A1UD011/A1UE011/A1UF011/A1UG011
TAIWAN
JORDAN, LEBANON, SYRIA, SOUTH AFRICA,

IRAQ, IRAN, N.YEMEN, CAMEROON, UAE,
BAHRAIN, OMAN, QATAR, KUWAIT, KENYA,
TUNISIA, IVORY COAST, MOROCCO
220 50/6 A1UD041/A1UE041/A1UF041/A1UG041

-24
0
0
CHINA
220 50/6 A1UD081/A1UE081/A1UF081/A1UF082/A1UG081

-24
0
0
KOREA
220 50/6 A1UD041/A1UE041/A1UF041

-24
0
0
Q-53
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > 2. DOCUMENT FEEDER

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. DOCUMENT FEEDER (DF-621)

2.1 EXTERNAL PARTS
P1
ACCESSORY PARTS
27
1
5
DFCB
ACCESSORY PARTS
FM1
21
27
23
22
8
3
9
13
5
21
20
3
3
28
26
ACCESSORY PARTS
24
5
21
25
10
11
19
17
18
ACCESSORY PARTS
29
31
18
31
17
13
ACCESSORY PARTS
13
16
32
12
32
15
2
30
ACCESSORY PARTS
ServiceManual
14
Quan
tity
Parts No.
Description
1 A143PP2S01
Rear Cover
2 A143PP0900
Screw
3 A143PP0J00
Screw
4 A143PP8Q01
Wire Harness Assy
5 A143PP0A00
Screw
6 A143PP7Y00
PW Board Assy
7 A143PP2K00
Hinge-R
8 A143PP7M00
Screw
9 A143PP2A00
Seal
10 A143PP2901
Magnet
11 A143PP0C00
Screw
12 A143PP2T01
Front Cover
13 A143PP8G00
Screw
14 A143PP8E01
Screw
15 A143PP8D01
Wire Harness Assy
16 A143PP2601
Reinforce Plate
17 A143PP2Q00
Film
18 A143PP2R00
Film
19 A143PP2402
Base Frame
20 A143PP2J00
Hinge-L
21 A143PP0H00
Screw
22 A143PP2701
Reinforce Plate
23 A143PP0200
Fan Motor
24 A143PP2501
Cover
25 A143PP8C01
Wire Harness Assy
26 A143PP8F00
Wire Harness Assy
27 A143113901
Hinge Cover
Q-54
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1
28 A143PP6N00
Label
29 A143PP6Q00
Label
30 A143PP6P00
Label
31 A143114500
Screw_twostep
32 A143114600
Screw
P2
1
2
1
4
2
2
2
2
10
24
16
11
5
1
6
11
8
7
10
23
12
9
8
14
13
22
15
13
21
21
14
15
16
16
17
17
16
20
18
19
Description
20
19 18
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A143PP2B01
Sponge
2 A143PP0F01
Screw
3 A143PP1602
Rear Frame Stake
4 A143PP1501
Front Frame Stake
5 A143PP0G01
Screw
6 A143PP2801
Cover
7 A143PP8100
Roll
8 A143PP0A00
Screw
9 A143PP8200
Roll
10 A143PP2G01
Roll Assy
11 A143PP2H01
Roll Assy
12 A143112301
White_Sheet
13 A143PP8400
Roll
14 A143PP8600
Washer
15 A143PP8300
Holder
16 A143PP0S01
Retaining Ring
17 A143PP6800
Neuralizing Brush
18 A143PP0B00
Screw
19 A143PP8900
Torsion Spring
20 A143PP8800
Tension Spring
21 A143PP3S00
Pin
22 A143PP8700
Shaft
23 A143PP8500
Bushing
24 A143PP1D01
Lever
Q-55
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.2 PAPER FEED TRAY SECTION

1
P3
PS8
PS7
4
PS6
4
5
6
8
5
7
9
7
11
13
10
17
VR1
12
12
11
11
11
11
16
11
14
15
11
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A143PP6J01
Regulating Plate
2 A143PP6G01
Regulating Plate
3 A143PP6B01
Cover
4 A143PP4800
Photointerrupter
5 A143PP6C01
Lever
6 A143PP6H01
Lever
7 A143PP6F01
Rack
8 A143PP0B00
Screw
9 A143PP6K01
Gear 40T
10 A143PP6M01
Holder
11 A143PP0A00
Screw
12 A143PP0M00
Screw
13 A143PP6X00
PW Board Assy
14 A143PP6E01
Tray
15 A143PP6D01
Neuralizing Brush
16 A143PP0900
Screw
17 A143PP7001
Wire Harness Assy

Q-56
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.3 PAPER TAKE-UP SECTION

P4
ACCESSORY PARTS
17
16
1
3
2
2
7
11
10
8
9
6
7
10
8
15
12
8
14
8
8
13
12
12
10
8
11
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
Description
1 A143PP5P02
Left Cover
2 A143PP5F01
Pressure Spring
3 A143PP5R01
Knob
4 A143PP5V00
Tension Spring
5 A143PP5Q01
Cover
6 A143PP8U00
Sponge
7 A143PP6A02
Plate Spring
8 A143PP0801
Screw
9 A143PP5X00
Sponge
10 A143PP7M00
Screw
11 A143PP1400
Shaft
12 A143PP5D01
Roller
13 A143PP5E00
Shaft
14 A143PP6500
Torsion Spring
15 A143PP7301
Wire Harness Assy
16 A143PP8T00
Sponge
17 A143PP7W00
Label Originai Size
Q-57
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P5
3
4
PS2
5
10
PS3
6
7
11
9
12
PS1
8
PS 9
4
4
4
PS10
PS11
13
14
16
15
Description
1 A143PP6Y02
Wire Harness Assy
2 A143PP5N01
Bracket
3 A143PP0801
Screw
4 A143PP4800
Photointerrupter
5 A143PP6900
Tension Spring

(PS3)
Destinations
Quan
tity
Parts No.
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Page Key
6 A143PP7401
Solid State Switch
7 A143PP0D00
Screw
8 A143PP1Y00
Sponge
9 A143PP6800
Neuralizing Brush
10 A143PP6000
Torsion Spring
11 A143PP5H01
Lever
12 A143PP5G01
Lever
13 A143PP5K01
Lever
14 A143PP5M01
Lever
15 A143PP5J01
Lever
16 A143PP1W00
Neuralizing Brush
Q-58

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P6
4
11
12
10
9
11
3
7
8
13
See P.4-15
15
16
1
1
14
1
17
18
26
25
42
5
19
1
41
20
40
21
39
23
38
22
31
32
16
5
30
32
15
5
37
33
29
28
24
5
36
27
35
34
26
1
25
ACCESSORY PARTS
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A143PP5501
Retaining Ring
2 A143PP4W01
Gear 20T
3 A143PP5W00
Torsion Spring
4 A143PP4X01
Holder
5 A143PP4S00
Pin
6 A143PP1N00
Bushing
7 A143PP0801
Screw
8 A143PP6401
Bracket
9 A143PP6300
Film
10 A143PP5U01
Stopper
11 A143PP6100
Film
12 A143PP6200
Film
13 A143PP5T01
Stopper
14 A143PP4V01
Lever
15 A143PP5301
Stopper
16 A143PP5200
Roller
17 A143563300
TIMING BELT 67L
18 A143PP5000
Pulley 21T
19 A143563100
Roller
20 A143PP5C01
Shaft
21 A143PP5402
Shaft
22 A143PP5101
Coupling
23 A143PP4Y00
Holder
24 A143PP4R01
Lever
25 A143PP4U01
Torsion Spring
26 A143PP4T01
Holder
27 A143PP5B01
Stop Ring
28 A143PP5901
Bushing
29 A143PP5601
Coupling
30 A143PP6601
Coupling
Q-59
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6
31 A143PP0100
Separation Roller Assy
32 A143PP4N00
Pad
33 A143PP4J00
Pressure Spring
34 A143PP6R01
Label
35 A143PP4M02
GUIDE
36 A143PP4P01
Film
37 A143PP4Q00
Guide Film
38 A143PP0000
Friction Sheet Assy
39 A143PP5A00
Pulley 19T
40 A143PP5Y01
Flange
41 A143PP6700
Film
42 A143PP5S00
Film

P7
26
7
25
9
7
10
27
24
31
30
15
12
23
10
8
15
29
28
38
32
15 15
38
36
22
21
33
35
15
14
4
5
6
34
15
18
37
19
20
38
9
15
18
17
10
13
14
15
15
8
38
14
16
11
12
10
10
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A143PP1H01
Roller
2 A143PP1F01
Roller
3 A143PP0U00
Film
4 A143PP1J01
Roller
5 A143PP1800
Film
6 A143PP1N00
Bushing
7 A143PP0S01
Retaining Ring
8 A143PP0900
Screw
9 A143PP1P00
Bushing
10 A143PP0P00
Retaining Ring
11 A143PP1K01
Knob
12 A143PP1M00
Ball Bearing
13 A143PP0Y00
Blacket
14 A143PP7P00
Screw
15 A143PP0Q00
Retaining Ring
16 A143PP3T01
Arm
Q-60

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7
17 A143PP3V01
Torsion Spring
18 A143PP3S00
Pin
19 A143PP3R01
Shaft
20 A143PP1000
Holder
21 A143PP3W01
Torsion Spring
22 A143PP3U01
Arm
23 A143PP3X00
Pin
24 A143PP3Y01
Lever
25 A143PP3900
Gear 25T
26 A143PP7D00
Lever
27 A143PP8W00
Guide Film
28 A143PP1201
Torsion Spring
29 A143PP0X00
Film
30 A143PP7V01
Spacer
31 A143PP0T01
Guide
32 A143PP2100
Cushion
33 A143PP0W00
Film
34 A143PP0V01
Guide
35 A143PP4001
Shaft
36 A143PP1S00
Washer
37 A143PP1101
Torsion Spring
38 A143PP4101
Roll
P8
3
2
35
28
27
29
1
1
11
1
6
7
12
10
9
30
PS4
26
16
12 31
12
12
11
11
P S5
32
18
38
34
15
13
25
33
45
43
11
44
12
14
M4
15
36
15
37
1
39
12
38
42
24
16
23
39
40
22
14
18 PS13
19
20
21
15
16
17
41
41
Description
40
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A143PP0900
Screw
10
2 A143PP7T00
Guide Film
3 A143PP1E01
Film
4 A143PP2202
Film
5 A143PP7H00
Screw
6 A143PP2000
Cushion
7 A143PP1Y00
Sponge
8 A143PP1A00
Lever
Q-61
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8
9 A143PP1B00
Torsion Spring
10 A143PP1301
Guide
11 A143PP1X00
Neuralizing Brush
12 A143PP1T00
Wiring Sadle
13 A143PP6V02
Motor
14 A143PP7R00
Specer
15 A143PP7M00
Screw
16 A143PP0Q00
Retaining Ring
17 A143PP4A01
Gear 50T

Glass cleaning roller home sensor
(PS13)
18 A143PP4800
Photointerrupter
19 A143PP0P00
Retaining Ring
20 A143PP0R00
Retaining Ring
21 A143PP4H01
Flange
22 A143263000
TIMING BELT 100L
23 A143PP4B00
Pulley 14T
24 A143PP1Q00
Bushing
25 A143PP9B00
Brush
26 A143PP4600
Arm
27 A143PP1C00
Blacket
28 A143PP1V00
Blacket
29 A143PP1W00
Neuralizing Brush
30 A143PP7900
Solid State Switch
31 A143PP0D00
Screw
32 A143PP1U00
Blacket
33 A143PP4500
Arm
34 A143PP1701
Mounting Plate
35 A143PP7101
Wire Harness Assy
36 A143PP8B01
Wire Harness Assy
37 A143PP8A01
Wire Harness Assy
38 A143PP4D02
Bushing
39 A143PP4E00
Pressure Spring
40 A143PP4G01
Film
41 A143PP4F01
Film
42 A143PP4401
Guide
43 A143PP4901
Sheet
44 A143262501
Shaft
45 A143PP1G01
Roller
Q-62

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.5 DRIVE SECTION

P9
4
5
2
M2
25
7
1
24
23
5
24
M1
10
5
58
14
5
14
22
SD 1
21 M3
26
11
14
26
20
12
5
5
19
18
13
18
PS12
17
Page Key
Parts No.
9
9
16
15
14
14
Quan
tity
ServiceManual
1 A143PP6T00
Motor
2 A143PP6U00
Motor
3 A143PP8K01
Wire Harness Assy
4 A143PP8J01
Wire Harness Assy
5 A143PP0900
Screw
10
6 A143PP4301
Guide
7 A143PP7N00
Screw
8 A143PP2U02
Bracket
9 A143PP8F00
Wire Harness Assy
10 A143PP8N01
Wire Harness Assy
Solenoid Assy

solenoid (SD1)
Destinations
Clas
s
Description
11 A143PP2C00
12 A143PP1R00
Tension Spring
13 A143PP3Q01
Bracket
14 A143PP7M00
Screw
15 A143PP3N01
Cam
16 A143PP3P01
Gear
Reading roller release position

sensor (PS12)
17 A143PP4800
Photointerrupter
18 A143PP3M00
Screw
19 A143PP3K01
Bracket
20 A143PP0F01
Screw
21 A143PP0700
Motor
22 A143PP3D00
Blacket
23 A143PP3100
Tension Spring
24 A143PP8R00
Screw
25 A143PP3E02
Bracket
26 A143PP0E00
Screw
Q-63

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 10
2
1
1
5
4
4
6
CL1
7
13
14
CL2
15
16 1 7
4
12
18
11
19
12
20
10
4
22
26
25
23
21
24
20
34
PS14
27
33
31
32
4
29
30
28
6
4
4
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
10
1 A143PP8F00
Wire Harness Assy
10
2 A143PP8M01
Wire Harness Assy
10
3 A143PP8P01
Wire Harness Assy
10
4 A143PP0Q00
Retaining Ring
10
5 A143PP0900
Screw
10
6 A143PP3H00
BUSHING
10
7 A143PP3F00
Blacket
10
8 A143PP6W00
Clutch
Clutch

(CL2)
10
9 A143PP7500
10
10 A143PP3600
Pulley 29/43T
10
11 A143PP3701
Gear 30T
10
12 A143PP0R00
Retaining Ring
10
13 A143PP3801
Gear 50T
10
14 A143PP3C00
Shaft
10
15 A143PP3G00
Pin
10
16 A143PP3B01
Gear 22T
10
17 A143PP7A00
Specer
10
18 A143211200
TIMING BELT 160L
10
19 A143PP8V01
Flange
10
20 A143PP0S01
Retaining Ring
10
21 A143PP3300
Flange
10
22 A143211000
TIMING BELT 101L
10
23 A143PP3200
Pulley 21T
10
24 A143PP1902
Holder
10
25 A143PP3600
Pulley 28/40T
10
26 A143PP8H01
10
27 A143PP1M00
10
10
Wire Harness Assy
Ball Bearing
28 A143PP2X01
Pulley 28/40T
29 A143PP2Y01
PULLEY
Q-64

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10
30 A143210200
TIMING BELT 157L
10
31 A143PP2W00
Pulley 40T
10
32 A143PP3A01
Gear 27T
10
33 A143PP3J00
Bearing
10
34 A143PP3000
Shaft

P 11
1
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Page Key
11
Parts No.
Description
1 9J06PJG100
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
JIG
Quan
tity

No.
Section
Maintenance Cycle
(K=1,000)
QTY
1
2
3
Paper Take-up Section
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
2
1
1
Parts No.
Destinations
Page/Key
Replace
200K *1
200K *1
200K *1
A143PP5200
A143563100
A143PP0100
P6-16
P6-19
P6-31

2.8 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Hz
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
C
D
Destinations
A1
B
D1
Note
USA, CANADA
120
60
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
S.E ASIA
TYPE
220240
50/60
THAILAND,SRI
LANKA,SINGAPORE,MALAYSIA,HONGKONG,
PAKISTAN,INDIA,BANGLADESH,INDONESIA
Q-65
Model No.
A143-WY1
*2
*2
*2

(DF-621)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D3
F1
F2
G1
PHILIPPINES
E
F
OCEAINA
TYPE
G2
220240
50/60
220240
50/60
A143-WY1
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A143-WY1
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A143-WY1
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A143-WY1
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A143-WY1
TAIWAN
110
60
A143-WY1
220240
50/60
A143-WY1
JORDAN, LEBANON, SYRIA, SOUTH AFRICA, IRAQ, IRAN,

N.YEMEN, CAMEROON, UAE, BAHRAIN, OMAN, QATAR, KUWAIT,
KENYA, TUNISIA, IVORY COAST, MOROCCO
CHINA
220240
50/60
A143-WY1
KOREA
220240
50/60
A143-WY1
J
K
Q-66
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > 3. OTHER OPTION

(OC-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. OTHER OPTION (OC-509)

3.1 OC-509
P1
4
5
2
b
2
b
a
6
a
a
7
1
(L)
(R)
For A0ED
a
11
10
8
7
9
(L)
(R)
For A1UD, A1UE, A1UF, A1UG
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
1 A128173201
Read Cover
2 A02E169700
Hinge
3 A128173300
Read Cover
4 A02E169612
Holder
5 A128173101
Cover
9326282011 MAGNET
1139170302 SLIDER
1139170601 SEAL
1139170414 PAD
10 A128173400
Read Cover
(Model No.A128-WY2)
11 A128173500
Read Cover
(Model No.A128-WY2)
1 a
V116030804
Screw
1 b
V153041603
screw
1 c
V147031403
screw
3.2 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Destinations
A1
JAPAN
A2
JAPAN
B
C
D1
Hz
Model No.
100
50/60
A128WY1/A128WY2
USA, CANADA
120
60
A128WY1/A128WY2
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A128WY1/A128WY2
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A128WY1/A128WY2
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A128WY1/A128WY2
D
D3
Q-67

(OC-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
E
PHILIPPINES
F1
F2
G1
G2
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A128WY1/A128WY2
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A128WY1/A128WY2
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A128WY1/A128WY2
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A128WY1/A128WY2
TAIWAN
110
60
A128WY1/A128WY2
220240
50/60
A128WY1/A128WY2

CHINA
220240
50/60
A128WY1/A128WY2
KOREA
220240
50/60
A128WY1/A128WY2
J
K
Q-68
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > 4. SORTER/FINISHER

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. SORTER/FINISHER (FS-527)
4.1 EXTERNAL PARTS
P1
6
4
5
a
1
b
9
a
2
3
10
a
11
c
e
1 4 15
12
35
34
26
28
b
19
36
g
b
b
32
23
Description
21
b
24
29
31
38
f
25
30
17
h
27
33
18
d 13
14
16
a
d
b
ServiceManual
f
20
22
21
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A0HR172900
Cover
2 A0HR172300
Guide
3 A0HR170501
Mounting Plate
4 A0HR170100
Top Cover
5 A0HR172400
Suction Plate /3
6 A0HR170800
Upper Door
7 A0HR941000
Label
8 A0HR172800
Suction Plate /4
9 A0HR172601
Torsion Coil spring
10 A0HR171600
Hinge
11 A0HR130300
Wiring Plate /3
12 A0HR171500
Hinge
13
4643102003 BAND
14 9J08210101
SET PLATE
15 A0HR172100
Suction Plate /2
16
17 A0HR940000
Label
18 A0HR173500
Pressing Plate spring /1
19 A0HR171900
Pressing Plate
20 A0HR170000
Front Door
21 A0HR173000
Hinge
22 A0HR170700
Cover /2
23 A0HR171400
Hinge
24 A0HR171800
Cover /5
25 A0HR170600
Cover /1
26 A0HR170400
Drive Cover
27 A0HR170300
Cover
4426260702 MAGNET CATCH
Q-69

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1
28 A0HR171000
Cover /Right
29 A0HR173300
Support Plate
30 A0HR173100
Cover /Right
31 A0HR171200
Cover /3
32 A0HR171100
Cover /3
33 A0HR173200
Cover /Left
34 A0HR170900
Cover /Left
35 A0HR170200
Rear Cover
36
38 A0HR173800
Spacer
1 a
V153030803
Screw
1 b
V137030804
screw
1 c
V137030803
screw
1 d
V137030603
screw
1 e
V149030803
screw
1 f
V153040803
screw
1 g
V153040804
screw
1 h
V153031003
screw
4.2 FRAME SECTION

P2
15
6
a
13
a
PS30
12
g
c
d
a
11
5
4
f
c
d
16
e
10
f
SW1
7
8
a
9
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A0HR110401
3 A0HR173400
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Cover /9
4 A092145400
Shoulder screw
5 A0HR115200
Lever
6 A0HR911300
Cover
7 A0HR111100
Guide Switch
8 A0HR111501
Torsion Coil spring
9 A0HRG10000
Opening and shutting sw
Stay /2
14
10 9J06M60100
MICRO SWITCH
Q-70

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2
11 A0HR910900
12 A0HR910600
Punch Duct
13 A0HR115400
Ground Plate /Lower
14 A0HR111600
Sheet
15 A0HRN10501
FNS Wiring /6
16 A0HRN10102
FNS Wiring /2
16 A0HRN10103
FNS Wiring /2
2 a
V137030603
screw
2 b
V153030803
Screw
2 c
V137040803
SCREW
2 d
V144040603
SCREW
2 e
V116031603
Screw
2 f
V143040803
screw
2 g
V111030603
screw
P3
3
1
d
c
1
c
c
d
5
d
6
6
6
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 15AA10380
STOPPER RUBBER
2 A0HR116000
Mounting Plate
3 A0HR115400
Ground Plate /Lower
4 A0HR172700
Cover /8
5 A0HR111200
Mounting Plate
6 A0HR111400
Castor
7 A0HR111300
Mounting Plate
3 a
V143040803
screw
3 b
V144030603
Screw
3 c
V195080003
Nut
3 d
V137030603
screw
Q-71

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P4
a
2
4
8
1
a
3
c
7
10
b
FSCB
7
7
c
6
c
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
1 A0HRH10003
PWB-MC
2 A0HR130900
3 A0HR130500
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Wiring Guide /2
Wiring Plate /5
4 A0HR130700
Mounting Plate /2
5 A0HR130300
Wiring Plate /3
6 A0HR130400
Wiring Plate /4
7 V502010026
SUPPORT
8 A0HRN11700
FNS Wiring /16
9 A0HRN10002
FNS Wiring /1
spacer
10 V502010033
Destinations
4 a
V144030803
SCREW
4 b
V137030803
screw
4 c
V137030603
screw
Q-72

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.3 PAPER ENTRANCE SECTION

47
c
15
P5
16
17
b
2
c 12
4
16
18
14
PS11
9
10
a
5
PS 6
11
13
12
19
46
20
21
a
6
32 10
48
b 11
22
PS8
7
16
33
25
26
31
17
46
25
15
23
26
30
25
34
27
1
36
29
1
41
1
1
24
28
28
28
41
27
37
d
45 d
44
42
d
49
b
1
40
39
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A0DA701800
Flange
2 9J07501901
ROLL
3 A0HR222100
Pulling Coil spring
4 A0HRG21000
Cashime under tension
5 A0HR220600
Pulley 25T
6 A00J617800
BALL BEARING
7 A0HR222800
Conveyance Roll
8 A0HR223200
Tension Plate spring
9 A0HR224900
Shaft
10 A0HR226000
Conveyance Roll
11 A0HR226200
Shaft
12 A0HR226100
Plate spring
13 A0HR717000
Torsion Coil spring
14 A0HR712400
Sensor Arm
15
1200521304 SHAFT
Tray1 path sensor (PS6)

Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
16
17 9J08210401
COLLAR
18 A0HR712802
Guide Plate
19 A0HR713800
Mounting Plate /5
20 A0HR711900
21 A0HR711500
Sensor Arm /1
22 A0HR220500
Conveyance Roller
23
4131253701 BUSHING
24 A0HR710400
Guide Plate /5
25 A0HR716500
Neutralizing Brush
26 A0HR716400
Neutralizing Brush
27 A0HR716700
Neutralizing Brush
Q-73

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5
28 A0HR716800
Neutralizing Brush
29 A0HR717600
Guide
30 A0HR711001
Guide Plate /ASSY
31 A0HR716300
Mounting Plate
32 A0HR715601
Mounting Plate /8
33 A0HR711102
Guide Plate /12
33 A0HR711113
Guide Plate /12
34 A0HR711700
Sensor Arm
36 A0HR712100
Torsion Coil spring
37 A0HR940400
Label
39
40 A0HR717100
Neutralizing Brush
41 A0HR222700
42 A0HR223001
Conveyance Roll
Pressing Shaft
42 A0HR223012
Pressing Shaft
44 A0HR715700
Ground Spring
44 A0HR715711
Ground Spring
45 A0HR717200
Ground Plate spring
46
47 A0HRN10801
FNS Wiring /9
48 A0HRN11801
FNS Wiring /17
49 A0HR226400
Pulling Coil spring
4030104002 CATCH
5 a
V217040001
E Ring
5 b
V137030603
screw
5 c
V217030001
E Ring
5 d
V153030803
Screw
P6
M4
3
4
3
1
2
14
5
b
c
10
15
5
6 7
13
11
a a
c
8
e 34
c
17
18
16
a
12
PS10
b
a
33
22
30
34
34 e
36
19
36
36
32
31
36
35
34
e
g
33
20
e
a
21
28
22
a
e
27
23
c
12
29
26
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
f
3
5 c
2 5 24
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A0HRM10000
Stepping motor
2 A0HR222201
Mounting Plate
3 A0HR223700
Timing belt 168L
4 A0HR220800
Pulley 25/25/51T
Q-74

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6
5 A0DA701800
Flange
6 A0HR224600
Pulley 18/25T
7 A0HR224800
Shaft
8 A0HR221400
Timing belt 350L
9 A0HR220700
Pulley 25/25T
10 A0HR221300
Timing belt 230L
11 A0HR222301
Shaft
12 A00J617800
BALL BEARING
13 A0HR713601
Mounting Plate /3
14 A0HR130000
Wiring Guide /1
15
16 A0HR713700
Mounting Plate /4
17 A0HR710001
Guide Plate /1
18 A0HR714200
Guide Sheet /3
19 A0HR710100
Guide Plate /2
20 A0HR713301
Guide Plate /15
21 A0HR713101
Guide Plate /14
22
23 A0HR220600
6
6
4004454001 BALL BEARING
Pulley 25T
24 A0HR940200
Label
25 A0HR223500
Rotation Knob
26 A0HR225800
Pulley 25T
27 A0HR220100
Registration Roller /Lower
28 A0HR714800
Neutralizing Brush
29 A0HR710300
Guide Plate /4
30 A0HR220200
Conveyance Roller
31 A0HR710200
Guide Plate /3
32 A0HR713201
Mounting Plate /2
33 A0HR222600
Pulling Coil spring
34 A0HR224500
Registration Roll
35 A0HR220000
Registration Shaft /Upper
36 A0HR717800
Guide
6 a
V137030603
screw
6 b
V116030603
Screw
6 c
V217040001
E Ring
6 d
V217050001
E ring
6 e
V217060001
E Ring
6 f
V237200850
pin
6 g
V144030603
Screw
Q-75

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3 2
P7
8
1
a
2
1
47
10
6
42
12
39
46
45
PS9
40
22
10
13
39
46
20
43
14
15
37
a
36
34 35
37
a 2
33
f
16
37 38
23
44
29
a
2
c
20
37
a
19
21
44 23
4 4 23
32
31
17
22
18
44
25
23
24
2
26
2
a
27
30
a
29
28
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
Description
1 A0HR800700
Pulley 36T
2 A00J617800
BALL BEARING
3 A0HR224700
Gear 18T
4 A0HR710811
Guide Plate
5 A0HR716101
Mounting Plate /6
6 A0HR717400
Plate spring
7 A0HR717300
Plate spring
9 A0HR225600
Ground Spring
9 A0HR225611
Ground Spring
10 A0HR222700
Conveyance Roll
12 A0HR223001
Pressing Shaft
12 A0HR223012
Pressing Shaft
13 A0HR941100
Label
14 A0HR710502
Guide Plate /6
14 A0HR710513
Guide Plate /6
15 A0HR220400
Paper exit Roller
16 A0HR940300
Label
17 A0HR710900
Guide Plate
17 A0HR710911
Guide Plate
18
19 A0HR712000
Torsion Coil spring
20 A0HR714300
Guide Sheet
21 A0HR715800
Swing Guide
22 9J08210401
COLLAR
23 A0HR715900
Swing Guide
24
25 A0HR717500
Neutralizing Brush
26 A0HR940100
Label
27 A0HR715500
Open/close Knob
Q-76
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7
28 9J07331901
PULLEY 19T
29 A0DA701800
Flange
30 A0HR220300
Conveyance Roller
31 A0HR223600
Shaft
32 A0HR710601
Guide Plate
33 A0HR221600
Timing belt 110L
34 A0HR225300
Pulley 19/25T
35 A0HR220600
Pulley 25T
36 A0HR225900
Pulling Coil spring
37 A0HR225701
Torsion Coil spring
38 A0HR716000
Fixing Shaft
39 A0HR222900
Conveyance Roll
40 A0HR225200
Pressing Shaft
40 A0HR225211
Pressing Shaft
42 A0HR225500
Ground Spring /1
42 A0HR225511
Ground Spring /1
43
44 A0HR717700
Guide Sheet
45 A0HRN10900
FNS Wiring /10
46 A0HR226300
Pulling Coil spring
47 A0HR226500
Pulling Coil spring
lower path sensor (PS9)
7 a
V217040001
E Ring
7 b
V144030603
Screw
7 c
V153030803
Screw
7 d
V137030603
screw
7 e
V217020001
E ring
7 f
V237200850
pin

P8
M5
b b
9
b
8
a
a b
13
11
10
M9
18
b
g
27
25
e
f
10
13
29 2 9
e
28
35
12
26
25
29
29
29
30
31
29
24
32
29
29
e h
33
b
8 b
21
18
20
Description
Stepping motor
ServiceManual
Exit motor (M5)
Q-77
15
h
16
e
7
22
1 A0HRM10000
35
M1 0
e
PS12
23 21
34
e
19
Parts No.
30
31
Page Key
e
17
Destinations
Clas
s
C
Quan
tity
1

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2 A0HRG72000
Bunch exhaust drive motor

cashime
3 A0HR806400
Timing belt 104L
4 A0HR805700
Pulley 21/28T
5 A0HR805800
Pulley 33T
6 A0HR806200
Timing belt 174L
4131253701 BUSHING
9 A0HR808900
10 A0HR808300
Pulling Coil spring
11 A0HR807700
Shaft
12 A0HR807800
Gear 18T
13 A0HRA89600
Pressure touching
alienation motor
Gear 18T
13 A0HRA89611
PRESSURE TOUCHING
ALIENATION MOTOR

Accommodation roller retraction
motor (M10)
15 A0HR804400
Gear 22T
16 A0HR808700
Mounting Plate
17
18 A0HR807600
8
8
8
21
22 A0HR805200
Paper exit Roller
23 A0HR801400
Guide Sheet /Rear
24 A0HR809100
Cover
25 A0HR808800
Neutralizing Brush
26 A0HR808600
Gear 30T
27 A0HR807100
Arm /1
28 A0HR806500
Guide /Rear
29
4643502012 CUSHION
30
4643500701 HOLDER
31
4643500801 ROLLER
32 A0HR805000
Guide
33 A0HR809700
Arm /2
34 A0HR807000
Gear 30T
35 A0HR808000
Mounting Plate
Shaft
19 A0HR806300
Guide /Front
20 A0HR809400
Guide Sheet /Front
4643307802 GUIDE
8 a
V116030603
Screw
8 b
V217040001
E Ring
8 c
V217060001
E Ring
8 d
V237201250
Pin
8 e
V137030603
screw
8 f
V137030804
screw
8 g
V153040803
screw
8 h
V115260503
Screw
Q-78

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
M3
P9
4
5
1
2
11
b
a
10
8
12
9
24
34
35
33
13
34
15
36
f
32
f
31 30 g
8
33
34
33
46
29
28
h
c
25
19
e
M8
f
16 16
17
18
35
44 4 5
30
26
14
43
26 42 41
26 40
26 39
26
34
38
37
c
5
26
21
23
PS7
25
33
47
20
M6
24
c a
PS26
23
PS13
29
a
28
h
Page Key
Parts No.
48
27
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
23
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A0HRM10000
Stepping motor
2 A0HR804100
Mounting Plate
3 A0HR801300
Pulling Coil spring
4 A0HR803900
Timing belt 142L
4
2
4131253701 BUSHING
7 A0HR803000
Cam
8 A0HR800600
Pulling Coil spring
9 A0HR804200
Shaft
10 A0HR820900
Swing Claw /2
11 A0HR820000
Swing Claw /1
12 A0HR821400
Torsion Coil spring
13 A0HR821000
Torsion Coil spring
14 A0HR821100
Lever
15 A0HR821300
Lever
16 A083705400
Gear 20T
17 A0HR820800
Light blocking Plate /2
18 A0HR820700
Light blocking Plate /1
19 A0HRA71400
Tray 2 change motor
20 A0HRA71300
Upper and lower change

motor

(M6)
21 A0HRG70000
Route change installation

board kashime
Tray1 path switching home

sensor (PS7)
Accommodation roller pressure
sensor (PS13)
Upper lower path switching
sensor (PS26)
23
24 A0HR808500
Bushing
25 A0HR809800
Neutralizing Brush
Q-79

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9
26 A0HR806600
Holding Sheet
27 A0HR800000
Guide /Upper
28 A0HR809600
Guide
29 A0HR801500
Neutralizing Brush
30 A0HR731700
Paddle /1
31 A0HR734600
Stopper
32 A0HR800300
Shaft
33 A0HR800400
Roll
34 A0HR801200
Pulling Coil spring
35 A0HR800800
Shaft
36 A0HR800100
Mounting Plate
37 A0HR733501
Drum /3
38 A0HR733100
Torsion Coil spring
39 A0HR733300
Cushion
40 A0HR731100
Arm
41 A0HR731900
Shaft /3
42 A0HR730300
Pulley 19T
43 A0HR731800
Drum /1
44 9J07331901
PULLEY 19T
45 A0HR733000
Timing belt 106L
46
47 A0HR804400
48 A0HR809900
4349138001 FLANGE
Gear 22T
Mounting Plate
9 a
V137030603
screw
9 b
V116030603
Screw
9 c
V217040001
E Ring
9 d
V237201250
Pin
9 e
V218040086
E ring
9 f
V217030001
E Ring
9 g
V237200850
pin
9 h
V136030603
screw
9 k
V115260503
Screw
Q-80

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4.5 ALIGNMENT/STAPLER SECTION

P 10
1
2
8
4
b
a
5
6
b
a
21
22
20
PS16
23 24
22
10
25
19
e
9
29
M13
26
c
PS20
17
a
17
12
13
27
28
15
18
33
a
11
PS17
14
b
2
16
15
a
a
32
31
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
10
1 A0HR740100
10
1 A0HR740111
10
2 A0HR741400
Plate spring /1
10
3 A0HR721800
Guide Sheet /1
10
4 A0HR740300
Regulating Plate /Front
10
4 A0HR740311
10
5 A0HR741600
10
6 A0HR740200
10
6 A0HR740211
10
7 A0HR741500
Plate spring /2
10
8 A0HR740400
Tape
10
9 A0HR720101
Regulating Tray
10
10 A0HR721300
Slide Holder /2
10
11 A0HR741000
Pulley 24T
10
12 A0HRG72500
Adjustment board kashime
10
13 A0HR720900
Pulling Coil spring
10
14 A0HR722300
Cover
10
15 A0HR722200
Guide Sheet /2
10
16 A0HR721900
Adjusting Plate
Alignment plate home sensor

(PS17)
Leading edge stopper home
sensor (PS20)
10
17
10
18 A0HR740600
Mounting Plate
10
19 A0HR740900
Pulley 24/48T
10
20 A0HR741100
Timing belt 118L
10
21 A0HR721200
Slide Holder /1
10
22 A0HR722400
Guide Sheet /3
10
23 A0HR740800
Shaft
Q-81

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10
24
10
25 A0HR740700
10
26 A0HRG72400
10
Tray2 paper detection sensor

(PS16)
Timing belt 752L
Adjustment bed plate
27 A0HR720300
Stopper /Middle
10
28 A0HR722500
Regulating Sheet
10
29 A083M10000
Stepping motor
10
31 A0HR897100
Pulling Coil spring
10
32 A0HR897001
Actuator /1
10
33 A0HR897200
Sensor Pedestal
10 a
V137030603
screw
10 b
V153030803
Screw
10 c
V143030603
SCREW
10 d
V116030603
Screw
10 e
V217040001
E Ring
V
3
44
50
f
g
45
36
f
35
43
42
46
40
41
c
a
34
35
33
a b
26
28
27
12
20
M 14
48
22
b
15
19
21
18
Page Key
Parts No.
17
A
A
PS19
Description
13
d
M11
20
c
a
11
19
PS18
47
30
29
23
b
c
9
31
25
24
7
10
f
37
32
36
3 9 h 36
38
51
c
a
35
49
40
f
k
3 6 52
35
B
e
P 11
14
16
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
11
1 A0HR750300
Cover
11
2 9J08560101
STAPLER UNIT
11
3 A0HR751402
Stapler Guide
11
4 A0HR721400
Shaft
11
5 A0HR721300
Slide Holder /2
11
6 A0HR740400
Tape
11
7 A0HR722200
Guide Sheet /2
11
8 A0HR720501
Stopper /Rear
11
4643540801 BELT 212.5L
11
10 A0HR721200
Slide Holder /1
11
11 A0HR722000
Timing belt 138L
11
12 A0HR740900
Pulley 24/48T
11
13 A083M10000
Stepping motor
11
14 A0HR761600
Knob

(M14)
Q-82

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11
15 A0HR761500
Pulley 30/42T
11
16 A0HRG72100
11
17 A0HR762100
Pulling Coil spring
11
18 A0HRG72200
Bed plate kashime
11
19 A0HR761300
Mounting Plate
11
20

11
21 A0HRM10000
Stepping motor
11
22 A0HR761400
Guide Rail
11
23 A0HR762600
Pulling Coil spring
11
24 A0HR760700
Pulley 30/63T
11
25 A0HR760800
Timing belt 158L
11
26 A0HR760400
Timing belt 918L
11
27 A0HR760300
Shaft
11
28 A0HR741200
Shaft
11
29 A0HR741300
Pulley
11
30 A0HR721500
Timing belt 600L
11
31 A0HRG72500
11
32 A0HR741000
Pulley 24T
11
33 A0HR720900
Pulling Coil spring
11
34 A0HR762200
Stapler Table
11
35 A0HR750800
Shaft
11
36 A0HR751300
Roll
11
37 A0HR751100
Guide Shaft
11
38 A0HR751200
Holder /2
11
39 A0HR750700
11
40 A0HR751500
Collar
11
41 A0HR751000
Holder /1
11
42
11
43 A0HR760500
Slide Part
11
44 A0HR750101
Adjusting Plate
11
45 A0HR750201
Base frame
11
46 A0HR760600
Holder
11
47 A0HR720400
Stopper /Front
11
48 A0HR762500
Adjusting Plate
11
49 A0HRG72300
Neck appearance board
11
50 9J08P00100
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
11
51 A0HR762700
Protection Part
11
52 A0HR762800
1500266012 WAVE WASHER
11 a
V217040001
E Ring
11 b
V137030603
screw
11 c
V153030803
Screw
11 d
V143030603
SCREW
11 e
V217060050
E ring
11 f
V116030603
Screw
11 g
V218040086
E ring
11 h
V217030001
E Ring
11 k
V137030803
screw
Q-83

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19
b
b
3
21
23
22
13
g 16 a
a
3 d
P 12
20
37
a 11
f
SD1
c
5
12
d 9
h
17 18
b
14
15 g
10
13
13
3
a
16
21
a
18
h
17 20
16
M12
a 16
19
13
25
34
24
28
29
35
14
24
26
28
36
28
k
29
30
28 30 33
28
27
a a
13
b
f
28
32
m k
20
28
29
31
28
30
28 3 0
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
12
1 A0HR734700
Cover
12
2 A0HRM20000
Flaper solenoid
12
12
4 A0HR732000
12
Accommodation paddle solenoid

(SD1)
4131253701 BUSHING
Mounting Plate
4643521903 DRUM
12
6 A0HRA73200
Under Paddle driving

motor
12
7 A0HR735000
Spacer
12
8
9
12
ServiceManual
Accommodation paddle motor

(M12)
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4349211502 COLLAR
12
10 A0HR731500
Pulley 24T
12
11 A0HR732500
Gear 22/24T
12
12 A0HR732100
Timing belt 196L
12
13
12
14 A0HR734200
Guide Sheet /1
12
15 A0HR734100
Guide /3
12
16 A0HR730800
Roller
12
17 A0HR734400
Weight
12
18 A0HR734500
Shaft
12
19 A0HR731200
Timing belt 100L
12
20 9J07331901
PULLEY 19T
12
21 A00J617800
BALL BEARING
12
22 A0HR730101
Guide /ASSY
12
23 A0HR735500
Neutralizing Brush /1
12
24 A0HR733300
Cushion
12
25 A0HR734000
Guide /2
12
26 A0HR730500
Shaft /2
12
27 A0HR730400
Arm
12
28 A0HR734801
Paddle /2
4349138001 FLANGE
Q-84

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12
29 A0HR735100
Drum /2
12
30 A0HR735600
Neutralizing Brush /2
12
31 A0HR730300
Pulley 19T
12
32 A0HR734900
Timing belt 112L
12
33 A0HR735200
Stopper
12
34 A0HR733501
Drum /3
12
35 A0HR733200
Torsion Coil spring
12
36 A0HR730200
Shaft /1
12
37 A0HR735700
Guide Sheet /2
12 a
V217040001
E Ring
12 b
V137030603
screw
12 c
V136030603
screw
12 d
V192030409
screw
12 e
V115260403
Screw
12 f
V237200850
pin
12 g
V237201050
pin
12 h
V153030803
Screw
12 k
V233200650
pin
12 m
V217030001
E Ring
4.6 ELEVATE DRIVE SECTION

3
a
14
2
5
b
1
P 13
15
16
M15
13
f
d
PS22
18
19
PS14
b
4
9
c
17
9
8
e
10
17
20
12
d
11
7
23
22
23
21
c
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
13
1 A0HR892900
Worm
13
2 A0HR893000
Shaft
13
3 A0HR892800
Gear 43T
13
4 A00J617800
BALL BEARING
13
5 A0PNM10200
DC Brushless motor /20
13
6 A0HR893200
Mounting Plate
13
13
8 A0HR893100
Shaft
13
9 A0HR894200
Connecting Pin
Elevate motor (M15)
1079553001 BUSHING
Q-85

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13
10 A0HR892400
Worm wheel
13
11 A0HR892300
Gear 18T
13
12 A0HR893600
Mounting Plate
13
13
13
14 9J08210401
COLLAR
13
15 A0HR892500
Actuator
13
16
Neutralizing Brush
13
17
1200521304 SHAFT

13
18 A0HR892600
13
19
13
20 A0HR890901
Mounting Plate
13
21 A0HR890300
Tray /1
13
22 A0HR890200
Tray /2
13
23 A0HR904000
Cushion
13 a
V115030803
Screw
13 b
V217040001
E Ring
13 c
V137040803
SCREW
13 d
V137030603
screw
13 e
V217060050
E ring
13 f
V144030603
Screw
P 14
19
1
a
a
5
18 3
5
3
4
b
17
11
c
10
6
2
8
2
13
16 15
10
PS21
14
c
d
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
14
1 A0HR891000
Shaft
14
2 13QE75010
BEARING/A
14
3 A0HR894200
Connecting Pin
14
4 A0HR893700
Pulley 24T
14
5 A0HR890800
Flange
14
6 A0HR890500
Timing belt 1401L
14
7 A0HR892200
Reinforce Plate
14
8 A0HR891800
Pulley 24T
14
9 A0HRG89500
Front fulcrum kashime
Q-86

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14
10
14
11 A0HRG89400
14
12
14
13
Rear fulcrum kashime
9331220031 MICRO-SWITCH

(PS21)
14
14 A0HRG89300
Detection sw installation
board Cashime
14
15 A0HR891200
Spring
14
16 A0HRG89200
Actuata kashime
14
17 A0HR892100
Auxiliary Plate
14
18 A0HR890600
Gear 19T
14
19 A0HR890700
Pulley 24T
14 a
V217080001
E ring
14 b
V137030803
screw
14 c
V217060001
E Ring
14 d
V144030603
Screw
14 e
V217040001
E Ring
14 f
V115231003
Screw
4.7 ELEVATE/SHUTTER DRIVE SECTION

P 15
a
1
2
31
b
d
22
M16
33
11
12
k
10
c
7
22
PS25
18
17
19
20
32
22
a
c
7
3
b
25
7
b
13
5
c
21
16
h
15
14
30
22 d
29
2
2
e
25
24
26
b
22
Parts No.
Description
e
d
27
e
Page Key
23
28
22
ServiceManual
e
d
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
15
1 A0HR900000
Mounting Plate /Upper
15
2 A0HR903000
Shaft
15
3 A0HR902900
Roll
15
4 A0HRG89000
Going up and down tray

top kashime
15
15
6 A0HR903600
15
4643460401 ROLL
Shaft
15
8 A0HR902100
Support Shaft
15
9 A00J211200
Ball Bearing
Q-87

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15
10 A0HR901800
Timing belt 192L
15
11 A01GM10000
BRUSH MOTOR
15
12
15
13 A0HR902700
Mounting Pedestal
1
1
15
14 A0HR902800
Collar /1
15
15 A0HR902600
Compressing Coil spring /1
15
16 A0HR902300
Rotation Shaft /1
15
17 A0HR902200
Worm
15
18 A0HR901500
Shaft /1
15
19 A0HR901400
Gear 40T
15
20
15
21 A0HR901900
Connecting Plate
15
22 A0HR903200
Mounting Plate
15
23 A0HR903300
Rail
15
24 A0HR891500
Plate spring
15
25 A0HR891400
Mounting Plate
15
26 A0HR900300
Mounting Plate
15
27 A0HR900801
Cover Base frame
15
28 A0HR900901
Cover Tray
15
29 A0HR900400
Mounting Plate
15
30 A0HR891600
Plate spring
15
31 A0HR903400
Rail
15
32 A0HR900202
Mounting Plate
15
33 A0HRN11100
FNS Wiring /12
15 a
V137040803
SCREW
15 b
V116040803
Screw
15 c
V217040001
E Ring
15 d
V137030803
screw
15 e
V144030803
SCREW
15 f
V137030603
screw
15 g
V217060001
E Ring
15 h
V116030803
Screw
15 k
V116030603
Screw
Q-88

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 16
1
2
1
b
16
14
a
5
13
15
c
PS24
6
9
5
9
10
6
7
15
10
8
10
12
10
b
5
7
10
11
10
11
11
11
5
11
7
Page Key
Parts No.
11
5
7
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
16
1 A0HR903800
Actuator /Rear
16
2 A0HR897300
Actuator /2
16
3 A0HR897500
Mounting Plate
16
16
4643460401 ROLL
16
6 A0HR750800
16
16
16
9 A0HR903900
16
Shaft
Guide Cover /2
10 A0HR901001
Guide /3
16
11 A0HR901101
Guide /1
16
12 A0HR901300
Receiving Plate /2
16
13 A0HR901603
Guide /5
16
14 A0HR901200
Receiving Plate /1
16
15 A0HR941200
Label
16
16 A0HRN11003
FNS Wiring /11
16 a
V116030803
Screw
16 b
V137030603
screw
16 c
V137030803
screw
Q-89

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P 17
c
3
1
b
c
5
23
21
c
6
20
c
7
14
g
8
e
18
19
f
h
14
g
15
16
14
PS5
14
12
10
8
22
13
17
11
f
c
c
Page Key
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Description
17
1 A0HR160300
Rear Cover
17
2 A0HR160500
Cover
17
3 A0HR160401
Cover Side plate /Right
17
4 A0HR100700
Pin
17
5 A0HR703000
Wiring Guide /2
17
6 A0HR100001
Guide Plate /Lower
17
7 A0HRG73100
Mounting Plate Assy
17
8 40AA32290
MAGNET CATCH
17
Horizontal conveyance cover

sensor (PS5)
Destinations
Clas
s
Parts No.
17
10 A0HR701200
Mounting Plate
17
11 A0HR100600
Installing Pedestal /Front
17
12 A0HR702200
Fixing Plate /7
17
13 A0HR100200
Fixing Part /Front
17
14 A0HR703200
Guide Film /4
17
15 A0HR703300
Guide Film /5
17
16 A0HR701300
Guide Film /1
17
17 A0HR701600
Swing Guide /Lower
17
18 A0HRG73000
Support Plate Assy
17
19 A0HR100400
Fixing Part /Rear
17
20 A0HR100900
Installing Pedestal /Rear
17
21 A0HR702700
Wiring Guide /1
17
22 A0HRN11400
FNS Wiring /15
17
23 A0HR703400
Ground Part
17 a
V137030804
screw
17 b
V153040804
screw
17 c
V153030803
Screw
17 d
V116030803
Screw
17 e
V137030603
screw
Q-90

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17 f
V116040803
Screw
17 g
V145030803
screw
17 h
V153030804
screw
P 18
a
1
b
3
b
b
b
4
20
19
20 a
21
PS1
5
a
18
16
c
15
14
12
14
17
7
13
13
8
12
11
10
b
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
18
1 A0HR160200
Top Right Cover
18
2 A0HR702600
Mounting Plate
18
3 A0HR230201
Holder
18
4 A0HRR90000
Solid State Switch
18
5 A0HR700600
Mounting Plate /1
18
6 A0HR700101
Guide Plate /A
18
7 A0HR701700
Guide Film /3
18
8 A0HR700900
Entrance Guide /1
18
9 A0HR701001
Entrance Guide /2
18
10 A0HR701100
Detecting Lever
18
11 A07R812700
Suction Plate /1
18
12 A0HR212700
Idler Roll /1
18
13 A0HR212800
Idler Shaft /1
18
14 A0HR213500
Spring
18
15 A0HR813100
Sheet
18
16 A0HR811101
Guide
18
17 A0HR702400
Support Shaft /2
18
18 A0HR813200
Sheet
18
19 A0HR702900
Ground Plate
18
20
18
21 A0HRN11200
4036365901 COLLAR
FNS Wiring /13
18 a
V153030804
screw
18 b
V153030803
Screw
18 c
V217020001
E ring
Q-91

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 19
b
16
15
a
a
17
b
1
1
17
18
c
14
c
c
14 c
c
14
14
2
c
2
3
4
b
b
13
19
5
12
PS2
8
7
7
9
6
7
11
10
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
19
1 A0HR160001
Top Left Cover
19
1 A0HR160012
Top Left Cover
19
2 A0HR213500
Spring
19
3 A0HR212800
Idler Shaft /1
19
4 A0HR212700
Idler Roll /1
19
5 A07R812700
Suction Plate /1
19
6 A0HR700202
Guide Plate /Left
19
7 A0HR703200
Guide Film /4
19
8 A0HR702000
19
9 A0HR703300
Guide Film /5
19
10 A0HR701400
Swing Guide /Upper
19
11 A0HR701500
Guide Film /2
19
12 A0HRR90000
Solid State Switch
19
13 A0HR700600
Mounting Plate /1
19
14 A0HR212600
Idler Roll /3
19
15 A0HR701900
Support Plate /2
19
16 A0HR702800
Ground Terminal
19
17 A0HR212400
Conveyance Plate Spring
19
18 A0HR212500
Idler Shaft /3
19
19 A0HRN11300
FNS Wiring /14
19 a
V153041004
screw
19 b
V153030803
Screw
19 c
V217040001
E Ring
Q-92

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11
b
12
a
b
d
4 5
6
3
21
18
19
15
M2
f
20
32
22
37
32
b
a 16
1
b
17 d
13
a
3
b
M1
PS3
14
9 10
P 20
15
35
34
33
36
32
31
23
23
30
24
25
29
24
25
b
26
a
28
27
a
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
20
1 A0HRM10000
Stepping motor
20
2 A0HR213800
Mounting Plate
20
3 A0HR210300
Flange
20
4 A0HR213600
Flange
20
5 A0HR213000
Drive Belt /3
20
6 A0HR210200
Pulley 14/26T
20
7 A0HR211000
Pulley 28T
20
8 A0HR211600
Drive Belt /1
20
9 A0HR212000
Pulley 21/25T
20
10 A0HR211900
Drive Belt /5
20
11 A0HRG72800
Swing Plate Assy
20
12 A0HR213200
Pulling Coil spring /5
20
13 A0HR213701
Ring
20
14 A0HR213300
Gear 19T
20
15 A0HR700300
Support Plate /Right
20
16 A0HRG72900
Bracket Assy
20
17
20
18 A0HR810200

20
19 A083705400
Gear 20T
20
20 A0HRA71400
Tray 2 change motor
20
21 A0HR810300
20
22 A0HR810401
20
20

(PS3)
Arm
Guide Plate
23 A0HR211200
Drive Roller /1
24 A0HR211800
Fixing Plate /4
20
25 A02E815200
BUSHING
20
26 A0HR210700
Ground Part /2
20
27
20
28 A0HR214000
20
29 A0HR703100
1079553001 BUSHING
Fixing Plate /5
Wiring Guide /3
Q-93

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
20
30 A0HR210500
Drive Roller /3
20
31 A0HRG72600
Mounting Plate Assy
20
32 A00J211200
Ball Bearing
20
33 A0HR213100
Pulley 28T
20
34 A0HR210900
Drive Belt /2
20
35 A0HR210100
Drive Belt /4
20
36 A0HR211100
Fixing Plate /2
20
37 A0HRG72700
Fixing Plate Assy
20 a
V153030803
Screw
20 b
V217040001
E Ring
20 c
V116030803
Screw
20 d
V217030001
E Ring
20 e
V115260503
Screw
20 f
V218040086
E ring
4.9 WIRING
CN82
CN81
CN171
(PS17)
CN172
(PS20)
P 21
CN173
(PS16)
CN83
PJ8A
(FSCB)
PJ17A
(FSCB)
CN175
(PS19)
CN174
(PS18)
CN123
CN112
CN117
CN114
CN111
CN116
CN113
CN121
CN122
CN119
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
21
1 A0HRN10401
FNS Wiring /5
21
2 A0HRN10701
FNS Wiring /8
Q-94

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P 22
1
GND2
CN53
GND2
CN51
CN202
Page Key
22
C N 201
Parts No.
ServiceManual
Description
1 A0HRN10300
Clas
s
Destinations
FNS Wiring /4
CN141 (PS14)
CN142 (PS22)
CN93 CN161 CN92
(M9) (PS7) (M8)
CN41 (M15)
CN71
(M 3 )
CN61
(SD1)
CN73 (M5)
P 23
CN94
(M10)
CN214
(PS26)
CN164
CN53
CN52
CN101 (M16)
(M101)
CN145
CN167
(PS13)
CN91 (M6)
CN72
(M4)
CN191
Quan
tity
CN202
CN111
CN162
CN143
CN121
CN212
CN62
CN166 (PS12)
PJ21A
(FSCB)
PJ27A
(FSCB)
PJ5A
(FSCB)
PJ6A
(FSCB)
PJ4A
(FSCB)
Page Key
Parts No.
PJ7A
(FSCB)
PJ28A
PJ9A
(FSCB)
(FSCB)
PJ29A
(FSCB)
Description
PJ30A
(FSCB)
PJ11A
(FSCB)
PJ12A
(FSCB)
PJ10A
(FSCB)
ServiceManual
Q-95
PJ14A
(FSCB)
PJ16A
(FSCB)
PJ20A
PJ19A (FSCB)
(FSCB)
CN211 (PS21)
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
23
1 A0HRN10602
FNS Wiring /7

P 24
6
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
15
20
25
30
35
40
11
10.7
7.2
9.2
19.8
15.8
11.5
8.5
14.4
11.2
11.5
15.2
7.3
18.5
4.8
4
White
15.2
2. 8
26.3
6.2
10
5
5.3
25
26.3
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
24
1 V500010005
saddle
24
2 V500010007
saddle
24
3 V500010020
Saddle
24
4 V500010046
saddle
24
5 V500020037
clamp
24
6 V500020052
bushing
24
7 V570010021
Saddle
24
8 V570010026
saddle
24
9 V570010027
saddle
24
10 V570010028
saddle
24
11 V570010046
SADDLE
Q-96
Quan
tity

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P 25
2
3
10
10
12
12
10
10
11
11
11
11
13
14
15
8
16
Page Key
Parts No.
ServiceManual
Description
Clas
s
Destinations
Quan
tity
25
1 A0HR116501
Mounting Plate /Rear
25
2 A0HR115101
Mounting Plate /Rear
25
3 A0HR115001
25
4 A0HR116600
Mounting Plate
25
5 A0HR116401
25
6 A0HR116700
Spacer
25
7 A0HR701300
Guide Film /1
25
8 A0HR700700
Entrance Guide /D
25
9 A0HR700001
Guide Plate /D
25
10 V116030803
Screw
25
11 V116031603
Screw
25
12 V116040803
Screw
25
13 V137040803
SCREW
25
14 A02E193400
Shoulder screw
25
15 A0HR890100
Tray /1
25
16 A0HR890200
Tray /2

No.
Section
Maintenance Cycle
(K=1,000)
QTY
Parts No.
Destinations
Page/Key
Replace
PAPER EXIT SECTION
Upper Paddle
800K
A0HR731700
P9-30
ALIGNMENT/STAPLER
SEC-
Lower Paddle
800K
A0HR734801
P12-28
4.13 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
Destinations
Q-97
Hz
Model No.
Note

(FS-527)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A
A1
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
B
C
D1
USA, CANADA
120
60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
220240
50/60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
D
D3
PHILIPPINES
E
F1
F
F2
G1
G2
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
TAIWAN
110
60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
220240
50/60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2

CHINA
220240
50/60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
KOREA
220240
50/60
A0HR-WY1/A0HR-WY2
J
K
Q-98

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. SORTER/FINISHER (FS-529)
5.1 EXTERNAL PARTS
c
P1
24
d
7
6
b
6
b
a
21
20
2
b
19
b
b
b
19
28
22
10
18
23
13
d
11
e
25
c
16
26
14
15
17
27
b
12
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
A0U7PP6V01
Mounting Plate
A0U7PP2N00
SLIDE RAIL
A0U7PP7E00
MOUNTING PLATE
A0U7PP9W00
COVER
A0U7PP4P00
REAR COVER
A0U7PP9400
CUSHION
A0U7PP6S00
COVER
A0U7PP4600
UPPER COVER
A0U7PP7C00
GUIDE
10
A0U7PPB100
Cushion
11
A0U7PP5800
Cover
12
A0U7PP4N01
Front Cover
13
A0U7PP6J00
HOLDER
14
A0U7PPAX01
Pressing Spring
15
A0U7PP9K00
HOLDER
16
A0U7PP7P00
MOUNTING PLATE
17
A0U7PP6U01
Rail
18
A0U7PPAM01
Roller Assy
19
A0U7PPAN01
Roller Assy
20
A0U7PPAP01
Roller Assy
21
A0U7PP8P00
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
22
A0U7PP6701
Cover
23
A0U7PPB001
Shoulder Screw
24
A0U7PP3J01
Hamess
25
A0U7PPB900
Label
26
A0U7PPBA00
Label
27
A0U7PPAU00
Cushion
Q-99

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
1
28
A0U7PPAV00
Cushion
A0U7PP1600
SCREW
A0U7PP1400
SCREW
A0U7PPAE00
Screw
A0U7PPAJ00
Screw
A0U7PP0400
SCREW
A0U7PPAH00
Screw
5.2 ELEVATE TRAY SECTION

P2
20
18
21
a
b
22
19
8
19
5
6
17
12
10
28
16
29
11
13
23
9
30
22
12
14
15
b 8
24
10
g
8
27
26
25
e
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
A0U7PPC100
GEAR
A0U7PPB300
Cushion
A0U7PPB200
Cushion
A0U7PP8T00
CUSHION
A0U7PP6G01
Cover
A0U7PP1300
BUSHING
A0U7PP0X00
STOPPER RING
A0U7PP4J01
Roll
A0U7PP5W00
ARM
10
A0U7PP4H01
Arm
11
A0U7PP9201
Torsion Spring
12
A0U7PP8000
SHAFT
13
A0U7PPAT00
Shaft
14
A0U7PP7R01
Shaft
15
A0U7PP9101
Torsion Spring
16
A0U7PPC001
Shutter
17
A0U7PPBY00
Shutter
18
A0U7PP4E01
Tray
19
A0U7PP6W00
GUIDE
20
A0U7PP4S00
COVER
21
A01FPP1H00
CUSHION
Q-100

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2
22
A0U7PP8S01
Shoulder Screw
23
A0U7PP5901
Rail
24
A0U7PP6M01
Cover
25
A0U7PP9X00
COVER
26
A0U7PPBC00
Reinforce Plate
27
A0U7PP1200
BUSHING
28
A0U7PPBV00
Guide
29
A0U7PP4F01
Sub Tray
30
A0U7PP4G01
Sub Tray
V231201450
pin
A0U7PP0F00
E RING
A0U7PP0400
SCREW
A0U7PP1700
SCREW
A0U7PP1500
SCREW
A0U7PPBE00
Screw
V231201250
pin
A0U7PP0V00
E RING
A0U7PPBX00
E ring
A0U7PPBW00
Washer
A0U7PPBD00
Screw
5.3 PAPER ENTRANCE SECTION

P3
28
28
5
d
27
a
26
25
24
10
11
4
8
13
12
17
19
18
18
18
17
13
23
14
18
29
21 22
21
16
28
15
20
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
A0U7PP4501
Holder
A0U7PP0U00
STOPPER RING
A0U7PP9Q00
GEAR
A0U7PP0S00
BUSHING
A0U7PP9P00
GEAR
A0U7PP9N00
GEAR
A0U7PP4100
HOLDER
A0U7PP1W00
CUSHION
Q-101

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3
A0U7PP4401
Lever
10
A0U7PP8800
TORSION SPRING
11
A0U7PP8400
ROLLER
12
A0U7PP7Q00
SHAFT
13
A0U7PP8701
Tension Spring
14
A0U7PP4700
LEVER
15
A0U7PP4200
STOPPER
16
A0U7PP3U01
Guide
17
A0U7PP8600
GUIDE
18
A0U7PP8500
Tension Spring
19
A0U7PP3T01
Guide
20
A0U7PP9G00
HOLDER
21
A0U7PP2K00
ROLLER
22
A0U7PP3V01
Holder
23
A0U7PP3W00
HOLDER
24
A0U7PP3X00
HOLDER
25
A0U7PP8Y00
TENSION SPRING
26
A0U7PP6R01
Plate Spring
27
A0U7PP4301
Hook
28
A0U7PP1A00
SHOULDER SCREW
29
A0U7PPB001
Shoulder Screw
A0U7PP1500
SCREW
A0U7PP0200
SCREW
A0U7PP0V00
E RING
A0U7PPC400
Screw
P4
37
1
36
3
a
3
38
32
17
33
10
30
31
c
35
5
6
39
8
9
8
a
30
34
c
10
9
c
11
12
14
29
5
c
PS10
28
15
13
27
24
d
d f 26 25
b
FM1
SD5
18
19 20 21
d
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
16 d
Destinations
23
22
Clas
s
Quan
tity
A0U7PP7W00
SHAFT
A0U7PP5A00
HOLDER
A0U7PP4000
GEAR
A0U7PP1100
BUSHING
A0U7PP0U00
STOPPER RING
Q-102

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4
A0U7PP7X00
SHAFT
A0U7PP8J00
TORSION SPRING
A0U7PP2K00
ROLLER
A0U7PP7M00
PLATE SPRING
10
A0U7PP1W00
CUSHION
11
A0U7PP5B00
LEVER
12
A0U7PP8800
TORSION SPRING
13
A0U7PP0900
PHOTOINTERRUPTER
14
A0U7PP8H00
TORSION SPRING
15
A0U7PP7G01
Mounting Plate
16
A0U7PP3P00
HARNESS
17
A0U7PP5000
GUIDE
18
A0U7PPA500
Solenoid
19
A0U7PPBU00
Tension Spring
20
A0U7PP6P00
GEAR
21
A0U7PP8N02
Tension Spring
22
A0U7PP5J00
KNOB
23
A0U7PP6K01
Lever
24
A0U7PP6N00
COVER
25
A0U7PP3301
Mounting Plate
26
A0U7PP1K00
GEAR
27
A0U7PP3201
Mounting Plate
28
A0U7PP2300
FUN MOTOR
29
A0U7PP3K01
Harness
30
A0U7PP8G00
PRESSING SPRING
31
A0U7PPB001
Shoulder Screw
32
A0U7PP4X00
GUIDE
33
A0U7PP4Y00
GUIDE
34
A0U7PP4M00
GUIDE
35
A0U7PP4W00
GUIDE
36
A0U7PP8B00
ROLLER
37
A0U7PP3Y00
GEAR
38
A0U7PP5101
Joint
39
A0U7PPBS00
Label
A0U7PP0400
SCREW
A0U7PP0V00
E RING
A0U7PP1500
SCREW
A0U7PP1400
SCREW
A0U7PP0200
SCREW
V231201250
pin
A0U7PP0600
SCREW
Fan motor (FM1)
Q-103

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P5
a
3
4
12
5
11
b
a
11
9
6 a
6
21
13
10
17
14
15
34
22
16
17
10
29
a
35
28
6
6
31
c a
36
4
a
a
5
23
19
a a
33
18
30
32
4
20
26
28
PS12
c
31 a
27
6
b
M1
25
24
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
A0U7PP1E00
FLANGE
A0U7PP9H00
PULLEY
A0U7PP0P00
TIMING BELT
A01FPP1800
PULLEY 22T
A0U7PP1100
BUSHING
A0U7PP0S00
BUSHING
A0U7PP9D00
ARM
A0U7PP4V01
Lever
A0U7PPB501
Pressing Spring
10
A0U7PPB400
Pressing Spring
11
A0U7PP6H00
LEVER
12
A0U7PP7T00
SHAFT
13
A0U7PP7U01
Shaft
14
A0U7PP4Q00
ROLL
15
A0U7PP2F00
SHAFT
16
A0U7PP7D00
GUIDE
17
A0U7PP7900
PLATE SPRING
18
A0U7PP4T01
Holder
19
A0U7PP9900
Harness
20
A0U7PP9801
MOTOR
21
A0U7PP3100
MOUNTING PLATE
22
A0U7PP4U01
Holder
23
A0U7PP3E01
Harness
24
A0U7PP3R00
MOTOR
25
A0U7PP7600
MOUNTING PLATE
26
A0U7PP0900
PHOTOINTERRUPTER
27
A0U7PP6X00
MOUNTING PLATE
28
A0U7PP8R01
Neutralizing Brush
29
A0U7PP9001
Neutralizing Brush
Q-104

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5
30
A0U7PPB801
Neutralizing Brush
31
A0U7PP8E01
Roller
32
A0U7PPAF00
Timing Belt
33
A0U7PP8301
Shaft
34
A0U7PP7F00
GUIDE
35
A0U7PPB600
Sheet
36
A0U7PPB700
Sheet
A0U7PP0V00
E RING
A0U7PP1400
SCREW
V231201250
pin
A0U7PP0400
SCREW
A0U7PPA700
PIN
P6
1
2
24
f
23
2
3
7
22
b 16
b c 15
2
5
9
c
d
9 19 18
14
13
17
16
b
21
c 15
c b
10
20 19
11
5
2
9
14
13
8
10
12
d
e
d
11
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
A0U7PP5E00
PULLEY
A0U7PP1100
BUSHING
A0U7PP0W00
STOPPER RING
A0U7PP2T00
JOINT ASSY
A0U7PP1E00
FLANGE
A0U7PP7S00
SHAFT
A0U7PP8F01
Roller
A0U7PP9E00
GUIDE
A0U7PP0R00
ROLLER BEARING
10
A0U7PP2G00
BELT
11
A0U7PP5T00
LEVER
12
A0U7PP9R00
SHEET
13
A0U7PP9C00
HOLDER
14
A0U7PP5R01
Holder
15
A0U7PP2M00
ROLLER
16
A0U7PP1J00
ROLLER
17
A0U7PP2700
HOLDER
18
A0U7PP2B00
HOLDER
Q-105

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6
19
A0U7PP9V00
GUIDE
20
A0U7PP9A00
HOLDER
21
A0U7PP9S00
SHEET
22
A0U7PP9F00
GUIDE
23
A0U7PP6T01
Guide
24
A0U7PPBT00
Collar
A0U7PPA700
PIN
V231201050
pin
V217030001
E Ring
A0U7PP0V00
E RING
A0U7PP0U00
STOPPER RING
A0U7PP1400
SCREW
P7
2
1
M5
2
3
30
b
7
c
2
3
4 a
8
12
11
13
10
14
11 31
29
28
d
16 1 5
28
16 1 5
17
26
16
18
15
17
a 18
16
15
17
27
25
24
17
22
23
a a
16
19
15
18
17
19
20
PS13
21
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
A0U7PP1H00
MOTOR
A0U7PP8S01
Shoulder Screw
A0U7PPAK00
Rubber
A0U7PP7300
MOUNTING PLATE
A0U7PP0G00
TIMING BELT
A0U7PP5500
PULLEY
A0U7PP0K00
TIMING BELT
A0U7PP9M00
PULLEY
A0U7PP5300
PULLEY
10
A0U7PP0J00
TIMING BELT
11
A0U7PP1E00
FLANGE
12
A0U7PP8900
TENSION SPRING
13
A0U7PP2X00
MOUNTING PLATE
14
A0U7PP2Y00
MOUNTING PLATE
15
A0U7PP4900
ARM
16
A0U7PP4A00
ROLLER
17
A0U7PP8A00
PRESSING SPRING
18
A0U7PP4800
HOLDER
Q-106

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7
19
A0U7PP4B00
HOLDER
20
A0U7PP3B01
Harness
21
A0U7PP0900
PHOTOINTERRUPTER
22
A0U7PP5X00
GUIDE
23
A0U7PP2600
GEAR
24
A0U7PP5V00
LEVER
25
A0U7PP1100
BUSHING
26
A0U7PP0W00
STOPPER RING
27
A0U7PP7Y00
SHAFT
28
A0U7PP5U00
ARM
29
A0U7PP0Y00
BUSHING
30
A0U7PP3F00
HARNESS
31
A0U7PP1900
SHOULDER SCREW
A0U7PP0400
SCREW
A0U7PP0E00
E RING
A0U7PP0V00
E RING
A0U7PP1400
SCREW
5.5 ALIGNMENT SECTION

P8
35
1
36
5
13
12
4
14
16
5
2
34
25
10
17
11
24
13
23
12
a
18
21
20
22
26
b
14
15
20
18
33
SD3
17
27
PS 7
28
d 32
19
26
29
M4
M3
30
e
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
31
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
A0U7PP6C02
Guide
A0U7PP8S01
Shoulder Screw
A0U7PP6600
GUIDE
A0U7PP8Q00
CUSHION
A0U7PP1T00
PRESSING SPRING
A0U7PP6B01
Guide
A0U7PP6Q02
Guide
A0U7PP2100
PAD
A0U7PP2000
PAD
10
A0U7PP9J00
LEVER
11
A0U7PP1S00
TORSION SPRING
Q-107

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8
12
A0U7PP1R00
GUIDE
13
A0U7PP7K00
HOLDER
14
A0U7PP8Q00
CUSHION
15
A0U7PP5K00
HOLDER
16
A0U7PPBN00
Cushion
17
A0U7PP8C00
PRESSING SPRING
18
A0U7PP6800
STOPPER
19
A0U7PP7700
MOUNTING PLATE
20
A0U7PP9700
CUSHION
21
A0U7PP5G02
Rack
22
A0U7PP8100
SHAFT
23
A0U7PP5H01
Rack
24
A0U7PP6900
Stopper
25
A0U7PP5M00
HOLDER
26
A0U7PP1000
BUSHING
27
A01FPP0R00
SOLINOID ASSY
28
A0U7PP3Q00
HARNESS
29
A0U7PP3D00
HARNESS
30
A0U7PPA100
MOTOR
31
A0U7PPA000
MOTOR
32
A0U7PP0900
PHOTOINTERRUPTER
33
A0U7PP7800
MOUNTING PLATE
34
A0U7PPBQ00
Sheet
35
A0U7PPBR00
Sheet
36
A0U7PPC300
Sheet
A0U7PP0V00
E RING
A0U7PP1500
SCREW
A0U7PPBP00
Screw
A0U7PP1400
SCREW
A0U7PP0300
SCREW
M6
10
11
P9
11 11
12
9
2
3
c
4
8
7
a
13
13
13
15
19
16
38
b
14 d
SD2
20
e
17
e 20
18
18
22
18
18
17
21
23
PS9
24
25
b
PS8
26
26
36
35
28
22
23
24
34
27
28
29
30
32
34
33
31
28
37
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Q-108
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9
A0U7PP1H00
MOTOR
A0U7PP3000
MOUNTING PLATE
A0U7PP5F00
PULLEY
A0U7PP1U00
TRNSION SPRING
A0U7PP2500
GEAR
A0U7PPA400
SOLENOID
A0U7PP5Q00
GEAR
A0U7PP1E00
FLANGE
A0U7PP0H00
TIMING BELT
10
A0U7PP0N00
TIMING BELT
11
A0U7PP8S01
Shoulder Screw
12
A0U7PP7400
MOUNTING PLATE
13
A0U7PPAK00
Rubber
14
A0U7PP8X00
TENSION SPRING
15
A0U7PP4C00
ROLL
16
A0U7PP3700
MOUNTING PLATE
17
A0U7PP2S00
PADDLE ASSY
18
A0U7PP2R00
PADDLE ASSY
19
A0U7PP8200
SHAFT
20
A0U7PP2C00
ROLLER
21
A0U7PP3A00
HARNESS
22
A0U7PP1100
BUSHING
PHOTOINTERRUPTER

(PS8)
(PS9)
23
24
A0U7PP7H00
MOUNTING PLATE
25
A0U7PP7B00
GUIDE
26
A0U7PP1R00
GUIDE
27
A0U7PP7A00
GUIDE
28
A0U7PP8D00
PRESSING SPRING
29
A0U7PP5N00
HOLDER
30
A0U7PP6F01
Rack
31
A0U7PP6D00
HOLDER
32
A0U7PP6501
Rack
33
A0U7PP6E00
HOLDER
34
A0U7PP1W00
CUSHION
35
A0U7PPB001
Shoulder Screw
36
A0U7PP6A00
HOLDER
37
A0U7PP3M01
Harness
38
A0U7PP9500
CUSHION
A0U7PP0400
SCREW
A0U7PP1400
SCREW
A0U7PP0V00
E RING
V217030001
E Ring
A0U7PP0F00
E RING
A0U7PP0900
Q-109
I
2

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.6 STAPLER SECTION

P 10
35
2
c
8
b
38
37
4
39
6
5
42
34
40
PS14
PS2
PS3
36
33
41
b
11
19
14
13 h
15
12
19
g
a
22
16
32
PS11
SD1
21
d
19
24
20
25
19
b
26
30
27
43
e
28
Parts No.
Description
b 31
10
M7
23
17
18
Page Key
ServiceManual
Destinations
30
S W1
29
Clas
s
Quan
tity
10
A0U7PP2400
PULLEY
10
A0U7PP2W00
MOUNTING PLATE
10
A0U7PP8K00
TENSION SPRING
10
A0U7PP6Y00
MOUNTING PLATE
10
A0U7PP3901
Harness
PHOTOINTERRUPTER

sensor (PS14)
(PS2)
(PS3)
10
10
A0U7PP7500
MOUNTING PLATE
10
9J08P00100
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
10
A0U7PP1G00
CUSHION
10
10
A0U7PP5700
HOLDER
10
11
A0U7PP5C01
Lever
10
12
A01FPP0V00
TENSION SPRING
10
13
A0U7PP2U00
MOUNTING PLATE
10
14
A0U7PP5600
HOLDER
10
15
A0U7PP2200
LEVER
10
16
A0U7PP7101
Mounting Plate
10
17
A0U7PP4R00
LEVER
10
18
A0U7PP8U00
TENSION SPRING
10
19
A0U7PP1W00
CUSHION
10
20
A0U7PP2P00
MOUNTING PLATE
A0U7PP0900
10
21
10
22
A0U7PP3N01
Harness
10
23
A0U7PP5400
GEAR
10
24
A0U7PP7V00
SHAFT
A0U7PPAC00
Solenoid
Paper surface detect solenoid

(SD1)
Q-110

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10
25
A0U7PP7N01
Guide
10
26
A0U7PP9U00
GEAR
10
27
A0U7PP1800
SHOULDER SCREW
10
28
A0U7PP0800
MICRO SWITCH
10
29
A0U7PP9B00
LEVER
10
30
A0U7PP8W01
Tension Spring
10
31
A0U7PP2V01
Mounting Plate
10
32
A0U7PPA200
MOTOR
10
33
A0U7PP5200
HOLDER
10
34
A0U7PP7J00
MOUNTING PLATE
10
35
A01FPP5X00
STAPLER UNIT
10
36
A0U7PP1N00
SHAFT
10
37
A0U7PP2H00
GUIDE
10
38
A0U7PP3G01
Harness
10
39
A0U7PP5S00
LEVER
10
40
A0U7PP8M00
TENSION SPRING
10
41
A0U7PP7000
MOUNTING PLATE
10
42
A0U7PP0M00
TIMING BELT
10
43
A0U7PP3801
Harness
10
A0U7PP0400
SCREW
10
A0U7PP1400
SCREW
10
A0U7PP0700
SCREW
10
A0U7PP0100
SCREW
10
A0U7PPC200
Screw
10
A0U7PP0300
SCREW
10
A0U7PP0U00
STOPPER RING
10
A0U7PPBK00
Screw
5.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

P 11
28 a
28
27
a
2
FSCB
b
3
23
26
SD4
PS4
M2
22
b
7
18
21
18
PS 6
10
d
25
17
8
13
P S1
20
14
16
24
15
9
13
11
19
14
12
c 11
Page Key
11
Parts No.
Description
A0U7PP5D01
Guide
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
D
Q-111
Quan
tity
1

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11
A0U7PPAW01
Cushion
11
A0U7PP3C01
harness
11
A0U7PPAA00
MOUNTING PLATE
11
11
A0U7PPAB00
A0U7PPAR00
PHOTOINTERRUPTER

(PS4)
Motor Assy
PHOTOINTERRUPTER

1
1
11
11
A0U7PPBF00
Gear
11
A0U7PP3601
Mounting Plate
11
10
A0U7PP6000
GEAR
11
11
A0U7PPBG00
Collar
11
12
A0U7PP6300
GEAR
11
13
A0U7PPBB00
Spacer
11
14
A0U7PPA600
WASHER
11
15
A0U7PPBJ01
Gear
11
16
A0U7PPBH00
Gear
11
17
A0U7PP9600
TENSION SPRING
11
18
A0U7PP8S01
Shoulder Screw
11
19
A0U7PP3401
Mounting Plate
11
20
A0U7PP6401
Holder
11
21
A0U7PP7200
MOUNTING PLATE
11
22
A0U7PP3500
MOUNTING PLATE
11
23
A0U7PPAD00
Solenoid
11
24
A0U7PP1W00
CUSHION
11
25
A0U7PP5P00
LEVER
11
26
A0U7PP3H01
Harness
11
27
A0U7PP3S02
PWB Assembly
11
28
A0U7PPAG00
Spacer
11
A0U7PP0400
SCREW
11
A0U7PP1400
SCREW
11
A0U7PP0V00
E RING
11
A0U7PP0100
SCREW
A0U7PP0900
Q-112

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P 12
1
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
15.2
18.5
4
7. 2
15.8
L=100
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
12
A0U7PP0C00
CODE CLAMP
12
A0U7PP0D00
CODE CLAMP
12
A0U7PP0A00
EDGE COVER
12
A0U7PP0B00
SADDLE
12
4688675101
CABLE TIE
5.9 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Destinations
A1
JAPAN
A2
JAPAN
B
C
D1
F1
F
F2
G1
G2
Model No.
100
50/60
A0U7WY1
USA, CANADA
120
60
A0U7WY1
220240
50/60
A0U7WY1
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A0U7WY1
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A0U7WY1
220240
50/60
A0U7WY1
PHILIPPINES
Hz
EUROPEAN TYPE
D
D3
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A0U7WY1
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A0U7WY1
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A0U7WY1
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A0U7WY1
TAIWAN
110
60
A0U7WY1
220240
50/60
A0U7WY1

Q-113
Quan
tity

(FS-529)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
J
K
CHINA
220240
50/60
A0U7WY1
KOREA
220240
50/60
A0U7WY1
Q-114

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. SORTER/FINISHER (SD-509)
6.1 EXTERNAL PARTS
P1
a
a
1
10
a
b
2
9
8
c
7
3
5
b
4
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
1 A10D402300
Cover /Right
2 A10D940100
Label
3 A10D402100
Cover /Front
4 A10D401600
Roll
5 A10D401400
Lever
6 A10D401700
Shaft
7 A10D401900
Torsion Coil spring
8 A10D401800
Shaft
9 A10D401500
Mounting Plate
10 A10D402200
Cover /Upper
1 a
V137030804
screw
1 b
V217040050
E ring
1 c
V143040803
screw
Q-115

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.2 FRAME SECTION

b
1
P2
c
1
9
b
2
b
c
3
b
e
c
6
8
7
b
4
7
b
d
3
c
e
e
Quan
tity
1 A10D401300
Mounting Plate
2 A10D403000
Slide Shaft
2 A10D403100
Lifting Stay
3 A10D405000
Plate spring
4 A10D426800
Shaft
5 A10D400700
Stay
6 A10D400300
Mounting Stay /1
7 15AA10380
STOPPER RUBBER
8 A10D426900
Ground Plate
9 A10D409500
Lock Cam
SHAFT MOUNTING
PLATE
10 13QE42441
Destinations
Clas
s
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Page Key
2 a
V184061003
Screw
2 b
V137040803
SCREW
2 c
V144030603
Screw
2 d
V116040803
Screw
2 e
V144040603
SCREW
Q-116

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
P3
a
15
b
15
3
14
12
13
SDCB
h
16
3
1
5
k
11
17
10
16
c
16
17
17
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A10D404900
Cover
2 A10D409000
Wiring Guide /1
3 V502010026
SUPPORT
4 A10D400501
Mounting Plate
5 A10DH10003
PWB-SD
6 A10D400900
Support Shaft /1
7 A10D402000
Support Part
7 A10D402011
Support Part
8 A10D400800
Guide Arm
8 A10D400811
Guide Arm
9 A10D401000
Support Shaft /2
10 A10D410000
Collar
11 A10DG40800
Lock lever
12 A10D409900
Lock Spring
13 A10D409800
Lock Shaft
14 A10D400600
Mounting Plate /1
14 A10D400611
Mounting Plate /1
15 V502010032
spacer
16
1200521304 SHAFT
17 9J08210401
COLLAR
3 a
V137030803
screw
3 b
V116030803
Screw
3 c
V137030603
screw
3 d
V144030603
Screw
3 e
V217040050
E ring
3 f
V217030050
E ring
3 g
V217080050
E ring
3 h
V217060001
E Ring
3 k
V116030603
Screw
Q-117

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.3 PAPER CEASE UNIT

P4
b
2
c
6
M25
4
19 6
e
4
17 4
a
18
e
PS47
f
e
e
g
16
15
14
g
13
10
f
g
12
c
h
M26
11
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A10D409100
Wiring Guide /2
2 13QJ77120
MOTOR GEAR 16T
3 A10D415500
Mounting Plate /1
4 13QJ75520
DRIVING SHAFT
HOLDER
5 13QJ77190
Idling Gear /2 45/15T
6 V502010014
support
7 13QJ77180
Idling Gear 3 25T
8 13QJ77160
IDLING GEAR /1 35/15T
9 13QJ77170
10 A10D430100
Idling Shaft /1
11 120H80012
FNS Drive Motor /1
12 13QJ77110
PAPER FOLDING WORM
13 120H18040
MOTOR MOUNTING
PLATE
14 A11R915303
Drive Casing
15 A10D430200
Idling Shaft /2
16 A10D430300
Idling Shaft /3
17 13QJ77130
18 A10D426500
Guide
19 15AA80050
DC Brushless Motor /40
20 A10D432200
Cushion
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
4 a
V137030803
screw
4 b
V116031003
Screw
4 c
V192030409
screw
4 d
V144030603
Screw
4 e
V217060001
E Ring
4 f
V137040803
SCREW
4 g
V116030603
Screw
Q-118

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4 h
V116030803
1
3
b
5
b
7
c
8
3
2
P5
2
Screw
b
b
5 c
10
33
12
d
8
13
9
11
e
PS50
14
16
15
19
b
18
7
20 2 1
27
4
h
8
26
28
b
25
31
29
30
32
g
23
31
6
Description
24 b
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 13QJ43501
DRIVE REINFORCE
PLATE
2 A11R916501
Idling Gear/3 23T
3 A11R916400
Drive Gear /2 32T
4 A10D416900
Folding Roller /2
5 13QJ77140
Driving Gear 1 24T
6 13QJ44300
PRESSING SPRING A
7 123Y45261
STOPPRE RUBBER
8 A00V240600
BALL BEARING
9 A10D430500
Support Shaft /Rear
10 A10DG40700
Occasion arm/2
11 A10DG40600
Occasion arm/4
12
13 A10D421301
Mounting Plate /3
14 A10D427400
Sensor Shaft
15 A10D426702
Sensor Spring
16 A10D426302
Actuator
17 A10D426200
Guide
18 A0HR717500
Neutralizing Brush
19 A10D416100
Gear 42T
20 A10D416401
Support Shaft /Front
21 A10D416501
Folding Arm /1
22 A10D940200
Label
23 20AL48470G
Jam Release Knob
24 A10D415200
Folding Arm /3
25 A10D415700
Support Shaft /Front
26 A10D417600
Cushion
27 A10D421202
Conveyance Guide /1
28 A10D417000
Guide
Q-119
Destinations
22

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5
29 A10D415800
Mounting Plate
30 A10D416600
Torsion Coil spring
31 A10D416200
Gear 20T
32 A10D416800
Folding Roller /1
33 A10DN10300
FNS Wiring /4
5 a
V217040050
E ring
5 b
V217060001
E Ring
5 c
V237301850
Pin
5 d
V137030603
screw
5 e
V116040603
Screw
5 f
V217030050
E ring
5 g
V116041203
Screw
5 h
V116030603
Screw
6.4 UPPER STAPLER SECTION

19 20
a
a
PS43
2
c
M21
29
P6
17
16
16
5
e
9
h
17
c 12
10
6
7
13
10
d
c
22
18
17
15
10
11
21
12
25
16
14
16
17
16
12
d
16
12
13
12
13
12
d
28
14
c 12
12
c
d
12
11
10
c 23
10
24
a
a
10
f
27
26
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A11RM10111
2 A10D413300
Mounting Plate
3 13GQ45490
COLLAR B
4 A11R729600
Drive Belt/5 122L
5 A11R728200
Drive Pulley 22T
6 A11R729400
Idling Gear/2 72T
7 15AA43140
Belt Holding Part
8 A10D929501
Shaft
4131253701 BUSHING
10 A10D431500
Paddle /4
11 A10D431600
Support Part /2
12 A10D431401
Paddle /3
13 A10D404500
Support Part
14 A10D431300
Guide
15 A10D403500
Guide Plate /1
Q-120

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6
16 A10D404200
Guide
17 A10D406000
Guide
18 A10D404000
Conveyance Guide
19
20 A10D404300
Sensor Plate /1
21 A10D403300
Support Plate /1
22 A10D426900
Ground Plate
23 A10D409200
Neutralizing Brush
24 A10D430900
Guide
25 A10D929800
Guide Sheet
26 A10D929300
Stapler Unit
27 A10D929400
Mounting Plate
28 A10D403700
Drive Shaft /4
29 A11R729500
Drive Gear /4

6 a
V144030603
Screw
6 b
V118030603
screw
6 c
V217040050
E ring
6 d
V237301050
pin
6 e
V116030603
Screw
6 f
V137040803
SCREW
6 g
V116040803
Screw
6 h
V217060001
E Ring
6 k
V115260403
Screw
P7
1
2
31 PS41
6 e
M23
4
f
10
19
10
PS42
d
4
M24
11
28
13
27
24
10
12
7
6
10 9
30
a
29
13
21
24
14
16
26
17
e
e
b
25
19
15
21
23
16
15
20
32 1
21
21
e
g
22
19 25
18
19
g
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Center staple alignment home

sensor/R (PS41)
Center staple alignment home
sensor/F (PS42)
9314120091 MOTOR
Center staple alignment motor/R

(M23)
Center staple alignment motor/F
(M24)
Q-121

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7
3 A10D408500
Mounting Plate
4 A10DG40200
Tension board
5 A11R731200
Adjusting Spring /1
6 A10D408100
Idling Gear /1
7 A11R731500
Protection Sheet
8 13QE76640
Idling Pulley 19T
9 A10D408200
Regulating Belt
10 15AA43140
Belt Holding Part
11 A10D408000
Guide Shaft /1
12 A10D407400
Regulating Pedestal /Rear
13 A10D409300
Guide Sheet
14 A10D407100
15 A0HR741600
16 A10D417500
Guide Sheet
17 A10D407300
Regulating Pedestal /Front
18 A10D413100
Guide Shaft
19 A11R731100
Stopper Rubber
20 A10D408800
Mounting Plate
21 A10D408600
Guide Bearing /A
22 A10D407501
23 A10D407900
Guide Sheet /Front
24 A10D432100
Guide Sheet
25 A11R726400
Support Plate /8
26 A10D407600
27 A11R731000
Guide Shaft /3
28 A10D407200
29 A10DG40100
Guidance stay/2 kashime
30 A10D407700
Mounting Plate
31 A10DN10200
FNS Wiring /3
32 A10D417700
Guide Sheet /Rear
7 a
V126030603
screw
7 b
V137030603
screw
7 c
V137040803
SCREW
7 d
V116030603
Screw
7 e
V153030803
Screw
7 f
V217060001
E Ring
7 g
V217040050
E ring
Q-122

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.5 LOWER STAPLER SECTION

P8
25
26
b 27
M22
3
29
28
24
g
f
23
22
21
5
b
5
11
19
20
17
18
13
10
a
6
13
b
13
PS44
13
12
11
10
e
16
4
15
8
14
30
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A10D404700
Electrostaticproof Brush /1
2 A10DG40400
Stopper stay
5 A10D405800
Paddle /2
6 A11P897801
Support Part /1
7 A10D405100
Drive Shaft /4
9 A00J816400
8
8

4131253701 BUSHING
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
STOPPER
10 A10D406500
Guide
11 A10D406100
Guide
12 A10D406200
Guide
13 A10D405900
Guide
14 A10D413600
Open/close Spring /Front
15 A10D404100
Guide Plate /2
16 A11R731600
Support Block
17 A10DN10500
FNS Wiring /6
18
19 A10D413500
Open/close Spring /Rear
20 A10D406300
Guide
21 15AA43140
Belt Holding Part
22 A11R729600
Drive Belt/5 122L
23 A11R729400
Idling Gear/2 72T
24 A10D405700
Mounting Plate
25 A11RM10111
26 A11R729500
Drive Gear /4
27 13GQ45490
COLLAR B
28 A11R728200
Drive Pulley 22T
29 13GQ76020
SHAFT HOLDER A
Q-123

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8
Release Label /7
8 a
30 A11P940800
V144030603
Screw
8 b
V217040050
E ring
8 c
V237301050
pin
8 d
V116030603
Screw
8 e
V153030803
Screw
8 f
V217060001
E Ring
8 g
V115260403
Screw
8 h
V137030603
screw
P9
39
a
7
b
7
b
42
M20
k
38
c 37
40 c
41
c
32
37 m 40
36 m
c
35
34
c c
32
31
c
33
26 c
27
28
30
a
22
b
b
4
29
11
c
15
h
21
k
a
16
ServiceManual
12 13
f
17
20 h
19
Description
12
14
22
p
b
24
25 SD3
a
a 24 23
a
a
10
43
a 14
b
PS45
18
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A11R730900
Electrostaticproof Brush /4
2 A11R731800
Protection Sheet
3 A11R729200
Idling Pulley 20T
4 25AA47670
Guide Screw
5 A10DG40500
Support board/7
6 A11R722401
Stopper Belt 600L
7 A11R721300
Slide Shaft
8 A10D413200
Stopper
9 A10D412600
Wiring Arm
10 A10D412500
Wiring Arm
11 12ER40350
STICKING PART
12 A10D412800
Support Shaft /3
13 A10D412700
Mounting Plate
14 12AA75560
DRIVEN SHAFT HOLDER
15 A10D412300
Stopper Plate
16 A10D413000
Drive Lever

sensor (PS45)
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
17
18 A10D430700
Mounting Plate
19 A10D404800
Cover
20 A10D414300
Torsion Spring /3
Q-124

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9
21 A10D414200
Torsion Spring /2
22 A10D413400
Pressing Part
23 A10DM20000
Plunger solenoid
24 A10D412901
Holding Rubber
25 A11R722500
Guide Part
26 15JL429400
COLLAR
27 A11R727700
Idling Pulley 20T
28 A10D414100
Torsion Spring /1
29 A10D413700
Support Shaft /4
30 A11R728000
Support Plate /10
31 A11R722700
Drive Belt/3 436L
PAPER LIFT UP LEVER

322076010 SHAFT HOLDER
32
33 13NG15050
Tension Roller
34 A11R732500
Tension Spring /1
35 A10D431200
Support Plate /ASSY
36 A11R722900
Drive Belt/4 126L
37 13GQ45490
COLLAR B
38 13QJ76600
Motor Pulley 20T
39 A10D408900
Support Plate
40 12VR76600
PAPER FEED PULLEY/B

20T
41 A10D431100
Drive Shaft /2

(M20)
42 A10DM10000
Stepping motor
43 A10DN10100
FNS Wiring /2
9 a
V217030050
E ring
9 b
V116030603
Screw
9 c
V217040001
E Ring
9 d
V116030803
Screw
9 e
V218060086
E ring
9 f
V144030603
Screw
9 g
V218040086
E ring
9 h
V111020403
screw
9 k
V233201050
pin
9 m
V237200850
pin
9 n
V137030603
screw
9 p
V233200850
pin
Q-125

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.6 WIRING
1
P 10
CN101
(PS45)
CN71
(M24)
CN102
(PS47)
CN93
(PS42)
CN21
(M26)
CN61
CN31
CN41
(M25)
CN72
(M23)
CN135
PJ1A
(SDCB)
CN52
(M21)
PJ12A
(SDCB)
PJ10A
(SDCB)
PJ9A
(SDCB)
CN81
(M20)
CN137
CN103
CN94
(PS43)
PJ2A
(SDCB)
PJ4A
(SDCB)
CN51
(M22)
CN91
PJ8A
(SDCB)
PJ7A
(SDCB)
PJ6A
(SDCB)
PJ5A
(SDCB)
PJ3A
(SDCB)
PJ13A
(SDCB)
CN23
CN25
Page Key
10
Parts No.
1 A10DN10003
Description
CN132
ServiceManual
FNS Wiring /1
Destinations
Clas
s
D
Q-126
Quan
tity
1

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P 11
1
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
6
15.2
9.2
18.5
11.5
7.3
4 .8
3
White
2.8
6. 2
L=104
8.5
11.2
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
11
1 V500010005
saddle
11
2 V500010020
Saddle
11
3 V500010046
saddle
11
4 V501010001
band
11
5 V570010021
Saddle
11
6 V570010026
saddle
Q-127
Quan
tity

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.8 ACCESSORY PARTS

9
P 12
30
e
10
PS48
a
11
17
12
13
31
14
29
15
18
20
15
28
16
19
28
3
26
28
27
25
20
24
4
23
21
7
d
22
8
c
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
12
1 A10D400400
Slide Rail /Right
12
2 129U10322H
Slide Rail /Left
12
3 A10D940000
Label
12
4 129U10460
STOPPER SCREW
12
5 V116030603
Screw
12
6 V153030804
screw
12
7 V137030803
screw
12
8 V118040403
screw
12
Booklet tray near full sensor

(PS48)
COLLAR
13 A10D427200
Mounting Plate /B
12
14 A10D427001
Lever /2
12
15 A10D427300
Cushion
12
16 A10D427100
Mounting Plate /A
12
17 A10D425501
Lever /1
12
17 A10D425512
Lever /1
12
18 A10D426401
Sheet
12
19 A10D425600
Roll
12
20 A10D426000
Torsion Coil spring
12
21
12
22 A10D425800
Tray /1
12
23 A10D425701
Tray /2
12
24 A10D426600
Tray /3
12
25 A10D424103
Cover
12
26 A10D424600
Pulling Coil spring
12
27 A10D424501
Mounting Plate
12
10 A10D426111
12
11
12
12 9J08210401
12
Mounting Plate
1200521304 SHAFT
Q-128

(SD-509)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12
28 9J07810000
SHOULDER SCREW
12
29 A10D425901
Guide
12
30 A10DN10401
FNS Wiring /5
12
31 A10D427500
Mounting Plate
12 a
V153040803
screw
12 b
V153031003
screw
12 c
V153030803
Screw
12 d
V153030804
screw
12 e
V118040403
screw
6.9 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Destinations
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
C
D1
D3
F1
F2
G1
G2
A10D-WY1
USA, CANADA
120
60
A10D-WY1
220240
50/60
A10D-WY1
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A10D-WY1
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A10D-WY1
220240
50/60
A10D-WY1
PHILIPPINES
Model No.
EUROPEAN TYPE
Hz
A1
B
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A10D-WY1
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A10D-WY1
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A10D-WY1
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A10D-WY1
TAIWAN
110
60
A10D-WY1

220240
50/60
A10D-WY1
CHINA
220240
50/60
A10D-WY1
KOREA
220240
50/60
A10D-WY1
J
K
Q-129
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > 7. STACKER (JS-505)
7. STACKER (JS-505)
7.1 EXTERNAL PARTS
REVISED EDITION
DATE
SEPTEMBER
2008
P1
3
1
11
13
12
13
1
1
13
13
5
d
a
c
a
JSCB
9
10
8
b
6
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A083895202
Tray
1 A083895213
Tray
2 A083895800
Cushion
3 A083895501
Table
4 A083895700
Torsion spring
5 A083895900
Cushion
6 A083895000
Tray
7 A083895301
Tray
8 A083100800
Bracket
9 A083H10003
Control Board Assy
10 A083101300
Earth ground
11 A083160101
Rear cover
12 A083101200
Earth ground
13 A083101600
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
Cushion
1 a
V153030803
Screw
1 b
V153041003
screw
1 c
V116030803
Screw
1 d
V137030603
screw
Q-130
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.2 PRESSURE/RELEASE SECTION

P2
22
1
10
PS5
21
20
1
c
19
T2FDTB/PR
1
c
3
a
2 1
c
e
3
a
2
T1FDTB/PR
17
19
5
18
f 10
12
16
12
11
e
12
12
6
15
14
10
13
d
9
7
8
e
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A083890100
Roll
2 A083890300
Plate spring
3 A083891800
Shaft
4 A083891400
Plate spring
5 A083900300
Bracket
4658351602 Bushing
7 A083722100
Bushing
8 A083900100
Cam
9 A083900000
Shaft
10
11 A083720600
4131253701 BUSHING
Holder
12 A083701600
Guide
13 A083720001
Holder
14 A083890800
Neutralizing brush
15 A083890000
Roller
16 A083891102
Plate spring
17 A083N10400
Wire Harness Assy
18 A083N10300
Wire Harness Assy
Lower tray paper full detect board/

PR (T1FDTB/PR)
Upper tray paper full detect board/
PR (T2FDTB/PR)
19 A083H10100
PWB Assy
20 A083210700
Gear 32T
21 A083900400
Bracket
22
23 A083105600

(PS5)
Cover /1
(A083-0Y1,-WY1,-WY2)
2 a
V217020001
E ring
2 b
V218060086
E ring
2 c
V137030503
screw
Q-131
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2 d
V116030803
Screw
2 e
V153030803
Screw
2 f
V218040086
E ring
7.3 SHIFT DRIVE SECTION
31
P3
5
b
30
a
6
a
29
b
28
8
27
e
PS6
a
M2
f
10
12
11
25
12
24
21
12
24
17
T2FDTB/LED
13
24
26
17
24
14
15
17
16
T1FDTB/LED
23
17
22
9
c
a
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A083721101
Flange
2 A083721400
Gear 34T
3 A083721900
Collar
4 A083722200
Washer
5 A083720500
Timing belt 98L
6 A083721300
Gear 18/24T
7 A083R7A100
Tension Stake 2 Assy
8 A083720100
Pulley 57/26T
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
Description
c
21
19
20
18
PS3

Shift motor (M2)
10 A083M10000
Stepping motor
11 A083100101
Base frame
12 A083102000
Cover
13 A083100700
Holder
14 A083100400
Gear 16T
15 A083100500
Knob
16 A083940000
Label
17 A083101500
Shoulder screw
18 A083100300
Cover
19 A083720900
Shaft
20 A083101000
Spacer
21 4683M70000
PWB Assy
22 A083N10600
Wire Harness Assy
Lower tray paper full detect board/

LED (T1FDTB/LED)
Upper tray paper full detect board/
LED (T2FDTB/LED)
Q-132
bizhub 423/363/283/223
23 A083N10500
Wire Harness Assy
24 A083101600
Cushion
25 A083101411
Reinforce Plate
26 A083101100
Spacer
27 A083R7A000
Shift Stake Assy
28 A083R7A400
Tension Stake 1 Assy
29 A083720800
Tension spring
30 A083721000
Pulley 15T
31 A083720400
Timing belt 210L
3 a
V137030603
screw
3 b
V218040086
E ring
3 c
V153030803
Screw
3 d
V116030803
Screw
3 e
V137030803
screw
3 f
V135030603
screw
7.4 DRIVE SECTION

P4
21
22
a
f
23
CL1
M3
24
26
b
27
25
20
19
26
k
h
17
18
29
28
b
16
15
c
d
PS4
b
14
M1
13
11
12
g
8
10
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A083R70000
Exit Paper Change Drive
2 A083R7A500
Exit Paper Change Drive

Stake Assy
3 A083705800
Shield plate
4 A083705400
Gear 20T
5 A083705100
Lever
6 A083705000
Guide
7 A083705900
Guide
8 A083100600
Gear 14T
2
1
Description
4024219001 BUSHING
Destinations
10 A083890500
Roller
11 A083210000
Gear 24/36T
12 A083R7A300
Drive Motor Stake Assy
Q-133
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13 9J08M10600
MOTOR
14 A083211500
Bracket
Transport Motor (M1)
15 A083211600
Ring
16 A083210100
Gear 15/24T
17 A083210400
Gear 30T
18 A083R7A200
Drive 1 Stake Assy
19 A083210500
Gear 19/19T
20 A083211700
Bracket
21 A083105100
Bracket

(CL1)
22 A02EM20000
Clutch
23 A083211200
Shaft
24
25 A083210200
26
27 A083210600
Gear 16T
28 A083210300
Gear 19T
29
4131253602 PIN
Gear 15T
4658351602 Bushing
4 a
V217050001
E ring
4 b
V153030803
Screw
4 c
V115260503
Screw
4 d
V218040086
E ring
4 e
V116030803
Screw
4 f
V137030603
screw
4 g
V217040001
E Ring
4 h
V217060001
E Ring
4 k
V217030001
E Ring

18
a
19
20
16
14
c
19
20
17
13
PS1
13
3
18
19
20
21
22
PS2
P5
23
14
18
18
15
21
c
19
12
5
20
5
4
6
4
8
7
25
a
26
a
a
26
10
25
11
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
1 A083160401
Top cover
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
C
Q-134
Quan
tity
1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2 A083700800
Actuator
3 A083160202
Top cover
4 A083701500
Guide
5 A083891300
Lever
6 A083891200
Lever
7 A083890900
Neutralizing brush
8 A083700100
Guide
9 A083160000
Front cover
10 A083160500
Front cover
11 A083100002
Frame
12 A083891001
Earth ground
13 A083700600
Bracket

14
15 A083101600
Cushion
16 A083700500
Torsion spring
17 A083700400
Actuator
18 A083890100
Roll
19 A083890400
Plate spring
20 A083891800
Shaft
21 A083891500
Plate spring
22 A083700001
Guide
23 A083700900
Torsion spring
24 A083891900
Guide
25 A083892000
Lever
26 A083892100
Lever
5 a
V153030803
Screw
5 b
V218040086
E ring
5 c
V217020001
E ring
5 d
V137030803
screw
7.6 WIRING
P6
1
CN100
PJ1A
GND2
PJ2A
2
CN63
PJ61
PJ6A
CN44
PJ4A
GND2b
GND2a
Q-135
bizhub 423/363/283/223

ServiceManual
Description
Clas
s
Destinations
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A083N10000
Wire Harness Assy
2 A083N10101
Wire Harness Assy
P7
1
PJ73
CN89
PJ7A
PJ72
CN84
PJ75
PJ74
CN92
PJ8A
GND1b
CN87
PJ76
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A083N10201
Description
PJ71
GND1a
ServiceManual
Wire Harness Assy
Destinations
Clas
s
D
Q-136
Quan
tity
1
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P8
1
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
5. 2
11.5
7.3
4.8
9.2
11.5
8.5
11.2
5
31.4
18
Description
ServiceManual
Parts No.
1 V500010003
Saddle
2 V500010020
Saddle
3 V500010005
saddle
4 V570010021
Saddle
5 V570010031
holder
Q-137
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
Quan
tity
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.8 ACCESSORY PARTS
P9
unique parts for the model of A02E/A02F

3
6
9
5
8
4
7
8
12
13
10
14
1 5 15 1 5
4
4
15 16 16
11
unique parts for the model of A0ED
Clas
s
3 A083N10700
Wire Harness Assy
4 V116030804
Screw
5 A083105000
Shoulder screw
6 A083100900
Earth ground
7 A083105300
Bracket
8 V116041804
Screw
9 V570010031
holder
Spacer
(Model No. A083-0Y1/WY1)
10 A083101700
Destinations
Quan
tity
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Page Key
11 A083101800
Spacer
12 A083101900
Ground Plate
Shoulder screw
Cover
Screw
13 A083105400
14 A083105500
15 V153030803
7.9 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
B
C
Destinations
Hz
A1
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
Model No.
A083-0Y0/A083-0Y1/A083-WY2
USA, CANADA
120
60
A083-0Y0/A083-0Y1/A083-WY2
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A083-0Y0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2
Q-138
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D1
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A083-WY0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A083-WY0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2
220240
50/60
A083-WY1/A083-WY2
D
D3
PHILIPPINES
E
F1
F
F2
G1
G2
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A083-WY0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A083-WY0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A083-WY0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A083-0Y0/A083-0Y1/A083-WY2
TAIWAN
110
60
A083-WY0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2
220240
50/60
A083-WY0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2

CHINA
220240
50/60
A083-WY0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2
KOREA
220240
50/60
A083-WY0/A083-WY1/A083-WY2
J
K
Q-139
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. STACKER (JS-603)
8.1 JS-603
P1
ACCESSORY PARTS
2
1
34
33
20
b
PS36
b
32
b
21
h
30
29
a
24
14
31
M1 7
6
c
PS35
11
8
7
12 11
20 f
22
28
17
b 5
18
d
b
19
14
d
a
15
e
16
27
25
d
23
24
26
10
13 11
14
12
d
14
11
b
a
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A10F812400
Holder
2 A10F165100
Top Cover
3 A10F811300
Gear 17T
4 A10F811500
Cam
Tray3 exit roller retraction motor

(M17)
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
5 A10FA21100
Retraction drive motor
6 A10F812203
Mounting Plate
7 A10F811900
Shaft
8 A10F812100
Mounting Plate
4131253701 BUSHING
10 A10F813300
Arm /Front
11 9J07431401
STOPPER
12 A10F812500
Torsion Coil spring
13 A10F813500
Arm /Middle
14 A10F811600
Roller
15 A10F811200
Shaft
16 A10F811700
Shaft
17 A10F811401
Lever
18 A10F813400
Arm /Rear
19 A10F812301
Lever
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor

(PS35)
20
21 A10F812000
Plate spring
22 A10F811001
Guide Plate
23 A0HR230201
Holder
24 A02E815200
BUSHING
25 A10F813000
Neutralizing Brush
Q-140
bizhub 423/363/283/223
26 A10F230000
Roller
27 A10F812600
Neutralizing Brush
28 A10F812900
Neutralizing Brush
29 A092145400
Shoulder screw
30 A10F230400
Holder
31 A10F230300
Holder
32 A10F230101
Gear 20T
33 A10FN10000
FNS Wiring /1
34 V153030803
Screw
1 a
V153030803
Screw
1 b
V217040001
E Ring
1 c
V115260503
Screw
1 d
V217020001
E ring
1 e
V217060001
E Ring
1 f
V233201250
pin
1 g
V137030603
screw
1 h
V116030603
Screw

P2
6
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
7.3
4.8
Page Key
Parts No.
1 V500010020
Description
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
Saddle
8.3 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
B
C
Destinations
Hz
100
50/60
50/60
Model No.
A1
JAPAN
A2
JAPAN
200
USA, CANADA
120
60
A10F-WY1
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A10F-WY1
Q-141
A10F-WY1
Quan
tity
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D1
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A10F-WY1
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A10F-WY1
220240
50/60
A10F-WY1
D
D3
PHILIPPINES
E
F1
F
F2
G1
G2
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A10F-WY1
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A10F-WY1
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A10F-WY1
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A10F-WY1
TAIWAN
110
60
A10F-WY1
220240
50/60
A10F-WY1

CHINA
220240
50/60
A10F-WY1
KOREA
220240
50/60
A10F-WY1
J
K
Q-142
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > 9. PUNCH UNIT (PK-517)
9. PUNCH UNIT (PK-517)

9.1 PK-517
P1
1
ACCESSORY PARTS
2
5
a
15
7
4
6
b
b
8
PS200
PS100
PS101
PS300
PS301
M100
M101
14
11
11
12
12
9
13
10
13 12
12 11
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A10E911400
Shoulder screw
2 A10E910400
Mounting Plate /1
3 A10E940000
Label
4 A10E940100
Label
5 A10E910501
Collection Box
6 A10E911200
Spacer
4512700100 Guide
4512253401 GUIDE
B,C,D1,D3,E,F1,F2,G1,G2
,H,I,J,K (2/3HOLES)
C
9 A10E911001
Guide Plate /Upper
10 A10E911101
Guide Plate /Lower
B,C,D1,D3,E,F1,F2,G1,G2
,H,I,J,K (EXCEPT
SWEDEN)
C
1
1
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
Description
11
11 13NK50380
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
C
12 13NK50380
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
C
13 13NK50380
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
C
B,C,D1,D3,E,F1,F2,G1,G2
,H,I,J,K (2/3HOLES)
C
Punch Unit (2 Holes)

(PS200)
A,A1 (2HOLES)
Punch Unit (2/3 Holes)

(PS200)
B,C,D1,D3,E,F1,F2,G1,G2
,H,I,J,K (2/3HOLES)
C
Punch Unit (4 Holes)

(PS200)
B,C,D1,D3,E,F1,F2,G1,G2
,H,I,J,K (4HOLES)
C
14 A10ER70000
14 A10ER70100
14 A10ER70200
Q-143
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Punch Unit (4 Holes/

Sweden)
14 A10ER70300

(PS200)
C (4HOLES/SWEDEN)
15 A10EN10001
FNS Wiring /1
A,A1,B,C,D1,D3,E,F1,F2,
G1,G2,H,I,J,K (EXCEPT
SWEDEN)
15 A10EN10100
FNS Wiring /2
C (SWEDEN)
1 a
V153030803
Screw
1 b
V137030503
screw

P2
6
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
7.3
4.8
8.5
11.2
3
14.2
11.4
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Page Key
Parts No.
1 V500010020
Saddle
2 V570010021
Saddle
3 V570010025
saddle
Description
Destinations
9.3 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Destinations
Hz
100
50/60
Model No.
A1
JAPAN
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
USA, CANADA
120
60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
A10E-WG1
S.E ASIA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
B
C
D1
THAILAND,SRI
Q-144
A10E-W01
Quan
tity
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D3
E
F1
F
F2
G1
G
G2
H
I
J
K
OCEAINA
TYPE

220240
50/60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
PHILIPPINES
220240
50/60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
TAIWAN
110
60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21

220240
50/60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
CHINA
220240
50/60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
KOREA
220240
50/60
A10E-W11
A10E-W21
Q-145
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition) > 10. PAPER FEEDER

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10. PAPER FEEDER (PC-109)

10.1 EXTERNAL PARTS
P1
a
15
d
16
11
d
b
5
6
7
LEDB31
13
b
12
10
a
a
c
17
17
14
9
Destinations
Clas
s
Rear Cover
A1
1 A1V4611200
Rear Cover
B,C,D1,D3,F1,G2,H,I,J,K
2 A1V4610500
Right Rear Cover
3 A1V4610700
Right Lower Cover
4 A1V4610600
Right Front Cover
5 A00JH00D00
PWB Assembly LED1
6 A00J168400
7 A0ED162600
Lens
8 A0ED162700
9 A1V4610800
Front Right Cover
10 A093940100
Label Indication 3rd
11 A0XW602500
Cover
12 A0XWN12300
Indicating Wiring /2
13 A1V4N12500
Indicating Relay harness /

2
14 A1V4610100
Left Cover
15 A093940700
Label
16 A093940800
Label
17 A1V4610400
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
1 A1V4610200
1
1
ServiceManual
A1
Front Lower Cover
1 a
V137040804
screw
1 b
V153030803
Screw
1 c
V137040803
SCREW
1 d
V116040803
Screw
Q-146
Quan
tity

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10.2 FRAME SECTION

P2
M 32
M31
3
b
5
c
2
1
b
5
c
e
d
d
e
e
d
e
e
d
e
e
4
e
8
d
d
10
8
8
d
f
g
e
d
e
e
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A1V4N10600
Paperfeed Drive harness /

3
2 9J08M10600
MOTOR
4 A1V4601701
6 A0XW601000
2
2
2
2
Description
7
e
d
8
10
g
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Holder
7 A0XW601500
Reinforce Plate
8 A0ED623400
Roll
9 A0XW601600
Rail
Stopper

(M32)
4348020201 FRAME ASSY

Rail
4348303001 GEAR 27T
10 A1V4601900
2 a
V116040803
Screw
2 b
V116030603
Screw
2 c
V218040086
E ring
2 d
V143040803
screw
2 e
V137040803
SCREW
2 f
V217040001
E Ring
2 g
V116030803
Screw
Q-147

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19
b
PCCB31
15
P3
16
17
18
20
20
SW31
HREYB
21
20
e
20
14
22
23
DH
9
13
8
e
g
e
e
10
e
6
11
e
10
12
e
10
Destinations
Clas
s
Heater Relay harness
A1
PWB Assy
A1
Lifting Pedestal /Rear
Support Plate /Right rear
Lifting Pedestal /Front
10 A1V4603600
Fixing Part
11 A1V4608100
Support Plate /Right front
12 A1V4608200
Support Plate /Left front
13 A1V4608400
Support Plate /Left rear
14 A1V4N10300
Paperfeed Relay harness /

3
15 A1V4H00102
PWB Assembly(PWB-CAB
1st ASSY)
16 A1V4N10001

1
17
18 A093M60000
Rocker switch
A1
19 A1V4609500
Protection Sheet
A1
20 V502010033
spacer
A1
21 A1V4609100
Mounting Plate
A1
22 A0XW601100
23
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
1 A1V4N10101
2 A093H00100
4 A1V4603701
5 A1V4608300
7 A093M30001
Panel heater
8 A1V4603100
9 A1V4608500
ServiceManual
4348200601 BRACKET
4061101000 Castor
A1
4348203605 Bracket
4425374501 HOLDER
3 a
V137030603
screw
3 b
V116040803
Screw
3 c
V143040803
screw
3 d
V116030803
Screw
3 e
V137040803
SCREW
Q-148
Quan
tity

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3 f
V137040603
screw
3 g
V116040804
Screw
P4
17
M33
1
3
PSDTB31
PS38
PS31
15
PS37
14
7
8
14
1 3 12
PS32
11 c
12
2
10
16
c
Page Key
Parts No.
1 9J06M10300
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Description
ServiceManual
MOTOR

Tray 3 CD paper size sensor/1
(PS37)
(PS38)
4 A093651300
4030304702 HOLDER
4011301201 HOLDER
Pressure spring

(PSDTB31)
4037010401 PWB ASSY
4030309101 LEVER
4030304603 BRACKET
10
4030304901 BRACKET
11
4030304802 BRACKET
12
13
4030308301 HOLDER
14 A093651400
15
16 50GA627101
17
Pressure spring
4030320802 BRACKET
LIFTING STAY
4348681001 WIRE HARNESS ASSY
4 a
V116033003
Screw
4 b
V116040803
Screw
4 c
V137030603
screw
Q-149

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P5
1
a
2
3
b
d
10
6
12
11
12
a
c
13
7
7
5
7
13
11
12
15
12
7
7
b
14
c
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4348305301 PAWL
4348305401 BRACKET
3 A093564100
Torsion spring
4 A093165200
Claw
5 A093564000
Pressure spring
4348306401 BRACKET
4030312201 ROLL
8 A0XW607203
Door
9 A0XW615100
Mounting Plate
10 A0XW615000
Band
11 A0XW615300
12
4349164101 WASHER
13
4348307101 SHAFT
14 A0XW607111
Guide
15 A0XW616000
5 a
V153030803
Screw
5 b
V137040803
SCREW
5 c
V153041003
screw
5 d
V116041003
Screw
Q-150

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

c
1
P6
6
d
b
b
18
51
7
8
5
2
17
4
e
3
b
19
10
11
5
PS39
PS36
14
45
43
16
12 13
g
49
47
20
45
PS34 44
50
36
26
15
e
b
38
9
33
39
9
g
37
36
Description
29
27
28
30
36
Parts No.
37
42
40
Page Key
41
b
24
25
b
PS33
22
45
35
21
46
48
23
b
e
32
34
30
31
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A0XW604300
Mounting Plate
2 A0XW603900
GEAR 30T
4348304801 GEAR 19/40T
4348302901 GEAR 32T
4348303101 GEAR 19/32T
4348302801 GEAR 22T
4131353202 BUSHING
8 A0XWG56000
10
11 A0XW603501
Reinforce Plate
12 A0XW603001
Mounting Plate
13
14 A1V4N10700
Paperfeed Detection
harness /3
15 A0ED563900
Torque limiter
16
4348301104 ROLLER
17
18
4030310501 GUIDE
19
4061560000 GUIDE
20
4348304403 FRAME
21
4030307801 LEVER
22
23
4040561200 Spacer
24
4040561000 Spacer
25
4030303901 SHAFT
26
4030301401 BRACKET
27
4030301301 HOLDER
Frame
4131300301 BUSHING

(PS36)
4030301612 ACTUATOR
Q-151

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6
28 A093563600
Guide
29 A0ED563700
Shaft
30
31 A0XW603800
32
33
4030300202 HOLDER
34
35
1067250101 PIN
36 A00J563600
Roller
37 A00J563500
Clutch
38
4425301601 GEAR 32T
39
4030300801 GEAR 29T
40
4030300301 SHAFT
41
1065308601 BUSHING
42
43
4030302002 SHAFT
44
4425301301 GEAR 30T
Cover
45 A1V4R90000
46
47 A093561400
48
49 A00J567300
50
51 A0XW604200
Mounting Plate
Photointerrupter

(PS34)
4030301004 Frame
Torsion spring
4348304701 SHAFT
Release Lever
4040309701 SHAFT
6 a
V116030603
Screw
6 b
V218040086
E ring
6 c
V217040001
E Ring
6 d
V217060001
E Ring
6 e
V137030603
screw
6 f
V116040803
Screw
6 g
V218030086
E ring
6 h
V136030803
screw
6 k
V116030803
Screw
6 m
V237200850
Pin
Q-152

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10.5 PAPER TRAY UNIT

2
P7
3
4
1
30
36
33
34
35
37
38
7
30
6
8
10
9
c
3
11
11
40
g
32
41
12
31
17
30
13
15
39
14
18
a
a
b
a
43
30
16
29
b
42
19
20
24
23
28
21
25
26
22
b
6
b
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
27
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A0XW604701
Regulating Plate /ASSY
2 A0ED621000
Guide
3 A02E622700
Cushion
4 A0ED620601
Shoulder screw
5 A02E622400
Gear 14T
4163529301 SCREW
LABEL CARRYING
4002730601
CAPACITY
9 A0ED621101
Rack /Front
10
4537331701 GUIDE
11
4037320401 KNOB
12 A0ED621400
Pulling Coil spring
13 A0ED621300
Lever
14
15 A0XWG60000
Rogulating Plate
16 A02E941300
Label Fd
17 A0XW604900
Lifting Plate
18 A0ED625500
Lock Lever
19 A0ED625700
Release Lever
20 A0ED625800
Pulling Coil spring
21 A1V4605300
Holder
22 A0ED625400
23 A0ED940100
Label Paper
24 A1V4605100
Front Cover 3rd
25 A0ED625201
Handle
26 A0ED625000
Cover
27 A0XW604800
Mounting Plate
28
4011302101 WASHER
4002310801 LEVER
Q-153

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7
29 A0ED623200
30 A0ED623400
Roll
31 A0XW605013
Paper feed Cassette
32
4030322303 Earth ground
33 A00J622900
34
4030322812 GUIDE
Guide Plate
35
4037321312 REGULATING PLATE
36 A0XW616400
Lifting Shaft
37 A0ED620700
Actuator
38 A0ED623100
Label FD
39 A00J942202
40
41 A0XW605200
Guide
42 A0XWG61000
MOUNTING PLATE
43 A02E941500
Label Cd
4030320601 LEVER
7 a
V217040001
E Ring
7 b
V153030803
Screw
7 c
V137030603
screw
7 d
V217060001
E Ring
7 e
V153041003
screw
7 f
V144040603
SCREW
7 g
V116030803
Screw
10.6 RECIPT TRAY

P8
b
a
3
4
2
5
6
c
a
b
4
a
11
15
14
8
b
9
12
13
10
c
b
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A093630100
Cassette
2 A0XW605013
Paper feed Cassette
3 A0ED623100
4 A0ED623400
Roll
6 A0ED625500
4163529301 SCREW
Lock Lever
Q-154
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8
7 A0ED625700
Release Lever
8 A0ED625800
Pulling Coil spring
9 A0ED625301
Holder
10 A0ED625400
11 A1V4604600
Front Cover 4th
12 A0ED625201
Handle
13 A0ED625000
Cover
14 A0ED623200
15 A0XWG61000
MOUNTING PLATE
8 a
V217040001
E Ring
8 b
V153030803
Screw
8 c
V153041003
screw

P9
1
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
9.2
11.5
7. 3
4. 8
3
White
2.8
6.2
8. 5
11.2
5
31.4
18
Description
ServiceManual
Parts No.
1 V500010005
saddle
2 V500010020
Saddle
3 V500010046
saddle
4 V570010021
Saddle
5 V570010031
holder
Q-155
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
Quan
tity

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P 10
1
4
3
5
8
1
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
Quan
tity
10
1 A1V4603501
Cover
10
2 A1V4603800
Installing Leg
10
3 A1V4603400
Mounting Plate
10
4 V116040804
Screw
19
10
5 A1V4609300
Ground Plate
10
6 A093104300
Stop plate
10
7 A1V4609200
Fixing Plate
10
8 A02E942000
Label Metric
10
9 A02E942100
Label Inch

No.
Section
Maintenance Cycle
(K=1,000)
QTY
1
2
3
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
1
1
1
Parts No.
Destinations
Page/Key
Replace
300K *1
300K *1
300K *1
A00J563600
A00J563600
A00J563600
P6-36
P6-36
P6-36

10.10 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
B
C
Note
Destinations
Hz
Model No.
A1
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
USA, CANADA
120
60
A1V4-WY1
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY1
Q-156
A1V4-001
*2
*2
*2

(PC-109)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D1
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY1
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY1
220240
50/60
D
D3
PHILIPPINES
E
F1
F
F2
G1
G2
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A1V4-WY1
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY1
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY1
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A1V4-WY1
TAIWAN
110
60
A1V4-WY1
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY1

CHINA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY1
KOREA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY1
J
K
Q-157

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

11.1 EXTERNAL PARTS
P1
a
15
16
3
5
6
7
LEDB31
13
b
12
10
LEDB41
a
b
5
c
6
17
17
14
11
7
8
9
Destinations
Clas
s
Rear Cover
A1
1 A1V4611200
Rear Cover
A1,B,C,D1,D3,F1,G2,H,I,J,
C
K
2 A1V4610500
Right Rear Cover
3 A1V4610700
Right Lower Cover
4 A1V4610600
Right Front Cover
5 A00JH00D00
PWB Assembly LED1
6 A00J168400
7 A0ED162600
Lens
8 A0ED162700
9 A1V4610300
Front Right Cover
10 A093940100
11 A093940200
Label Indication 4th
12 A0XWN11100
13 A1V4N11200

1
14 A1V4610100
Left Cover
15 A093940700
Label
16 A093940800
Label
17 A1V4610400
Front Lower Cover
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
1 A1V4610200
ServiceManual
A1
1 a
V137040804
screw
1 b
V153030803
Screw
1 c
V137040803
SCREW
Q-158
Quan
tity

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.2 FRAME SECTION

a
M3 2
M31
P2
3
b
5
c
2
1
M4 1 M 4 2
b
a
5
c
b
e
5
11
d
d
3
b
e
d
e
e
d
e
e
4
e
8
d
d
10
8
8
d
f
g
e
d
e
e
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A1V4N10600
Paperfeed Drive harness /

3
2 9J08M10600
MOTOR
4 A1V4601701
6 A0XW601000
2
2
2
Description
7
e
d
8
10
g
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Holder
7 A0XW601500
Reinforce Plate
8 A0ED623400
Roll
9 A0XW601600
Rail
Stopper

(M42)

Rail
4348303001 GEAR 27T
10 A1V4601900
11
2 a
V116040803
Screw
2 b
V116030603
Screw
2 c
V218040086
E ring
2 d
V143040803
screw
2 e
V137040803
SCREW
2 f
V217040001
E Ring
2 g
V116030803
Screw
Q-159

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19
b
17
18
20
20
PCCB31
15
P3
16
SW31
HREYB
21
20
6
e
20
14
e
DH
22
d
e
e
7
9
13
8
e
f
e
e
10
11
f
e
6
10
12
e
10
Destinations
Clas
s
A1
PWB Assy
A1
10 A1V4603600
Fixing Part
11 A1V4608100
12 A1V4608200
13 A1V4608400
14 A1V4N10300

3
15 A1V4H00002
PWB Assembly(PWB-CAB
ASSY)
16 A1V4N10002

1
17
18 A093M60000
Rocker switch
A1
19 A1V4609500
Protection Sheet
A1
20 V502010033
spacer
A1
21 A1V4609100
Mounting Plate
A1
22 A1V4N10400

4
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A1V4N10101
2 A093H00100
4 A1V4603701
5 A1V4608300
7 A093M30001
Panel heater
8 A1V4603100
9 A1V4608500
Description
ServiceManual
4348200601 BRACKET
4061101000 Castor
A1
4348203605 Bracket
3 a
V137030603
screw
3 b
V116040803
Screw
3 c
V143040803
screw
3 d
V116030803
Screw
3 e
V137040803
SCREW
Q-160
Quan
tity

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3 f
V116040804
Screw
P4
17
M33
1
3
4
PSDTB31
PS38
PS31
15
PS37
14
7
8
PS32
M43
1 3 12
11 c
18
14
12
2
10
1
16
3
PSDTB41
c
4
PS48
PS41
15
PS47
14
14
13 12
7
8
2
9
c
10
Page Key
Parts No.
1 9J06M10300
PS42
11 c
12
2
16
c
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Description
ServiceManual
MOTOR

(PS47)
(PS48)
4 A093651300
4030304702 HOLDER
4011301201 HOLDER
Pressure spring

(PSDTB41)
4037010401 PWB ASSY
4030309101 LEVER
4030304603 BRACKET
10
4030304901 BRACKET
11
4030304802 BRACKET
12
13
4030308301 HOLDER
14 A093651400
15
16 50GA627101
17
18
Pressure spring
4030320802 BRACKET
LIFTING STAY
4 a
V116033003
Screw
4 b
V116040803
Screw
4 c
V137030603
screw
Q-161

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P5
1
a
2
3
b
d
10
6
12
11
12
a
c
13
7
7
5
7
13
11
12
15
12
7
7
b
14
c
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4348305301 PAWL
4348305401 BRACKET
3 A093564100
Torsion spring
4 A093165200
Claw
5 A093564000
Pressure spring
4348306401 BRACKET
4030312201 ROLL
8 A0XW607203
Door
9 A0XW615100
Mounting Plate
10 A0XW615000
Band
11 A0XW615300
12
4349164101 WASHER
13
4348307101 SHAFT
14 A0XW607111
Guide
15 A0XW616000
5 a
V153030803
Screw
5 b
V137040803
SCREW
5 c
V153041003
screw
5 d
V116041003
Screw
Q-162

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.4 UPPER PAPER TAKE-UP SECTION

c
1
P6
6
d
b
b
18
51
7
8
5
2
17
4
e
3
b
19
10
11
5
PS39
PS36
14
45
43
16
12 13
g
49
47
20
45
PS34 44
50
36
26
15
e
b
38
9
33
39
9
g
37
36
Description
29
27
28
30
36
Parts No.
37
42
40
Page Key
41
b
24
25
b
PS33
22
45
35
21
46
48
23
b
e
32
34
30
31
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A0XW604300
Mounting Plate
2 A0XW603900
GEAR 30T
4348304801 GEAR 19/40T
4348302901 GEAR 32T
4348303101 GEAR 19/32T
4348302801 GEAR 22T
4131353202 BUSHING
8 A0XWG56000
4131300301 BUSHING
10
11 A0XW603501
Reinforce Plate
12 A0XW603001
Mounting Plate
13
Frame
4030301612 ACTUATOR
14 A1V4N10700
Paperfeed Detection
harness /3
15 A0ED563900
Torque limiter
16
4348301104 ROLLER
17
18
4030310501 GUIDE
19
4061560000 GUIDE
20
4348304403 FRAME
21
4030307801 LEVER
22
23
4040561200 Spacer
24
4040561000 Spacer
25
4030303901 SHAFT
26
4030301401 BRACKET
27
4030301301 HOLDER
28 A093563600
Guide
Q-163

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6
29 A0ED563700
30
Shaft
31 A0XW603800
32
6
6
33
4030300202 HOLDER
34
35
1067250101 PIN
36 A00J563600
Roller
37 A00J563500
Clutch
38
4425301601 GEAR 32T
39
4030300801 GEAR 29T
40
4030300301 SHAFT
41
1065308601 BUSHING
42
43
4030302002 SHAFT
44
4425301301 GEAR 30T
Cover
45 A1V4R90000
46
47 A093561400
48
49 A00J567300
50
51 A0XW604200
Mounting Plate
Photointerrupter
4030301004 Frame
Torsion spring
4348304701 SHAFT
Release Lever
4040309701 SHAFT
6 a
V116030603
Screw
6 b
V218040086
E ring
6 c
V217040001
E Ring
6 d
V217060001
E Ring
6 e
V137030603
screw
6 f
V116040803
Screw
6 g
V218030086
E ring
6 h
V136030803
screw
6 k
V116030803
Screw
6 m
V237200850
Pin
Q-164

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.5 LOWER PAPER TAKE- UP SECTION

c
1
P7
6
d
b
b
18
7
8
5
2
17
4
e
3
b
19
10
11
PS46
14
43
16
12 13
g
49
47
20
45
PS44 44
50
36
26
15
e
b
38
9
33
39
9
g
37
36
Description
29
27
28
30
36
Parts No.
37
42
40
Page Key
41
b
24
25
b
PS43
22
45
35
21
46
48
23
b
e
32
34
30
31
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A0XW604300
Mounting Plate
2 A0XW603900
GEAR 30T
4348304801 GEAR 19/40T
4348302901 GEAR 32T
4348303101 GEAR 19/32T
4348302801 GEAR 22T
4131353202 BUSHING
8 A0XWG56000
10
11 A0XW603501
Reinforce Plate
12 A0XW603001
Mounting Plate
13
14 A1V4N11000
Paperfeed Detection
harness /4
15 A0ED563900
Torque limiter
16
4348301104 ROLLER
17
18
4030310501 GUIDE
19
4061560000 GUIDE
20
4348304408 Frame
21
4030307801 LEVER
22
23
4040561200 Spacer
24
4040561000 Spacer
25
4030303901 SHAFT
26
4030301401 BRACKET
27
4030301301 HOLDER
Frame
4131300301 BUSHING

(PS46)
4030301612 ACTUATOR
Q-165

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7
28 A093563600
Guide
29 A0ED563700
Shaft
30
31 A0XW603800
32
33
4030300202 HOLDER
34
35
1067250101 PIN
36 A00J563600
Roller
37 A00J563500
Clutch
38
4425301601 GEAR 32T
39
4030300801 GEAR 29T
40
4030300301 SHAFT
41
1065308601 BUSHING
42
43
4030302002 SHAFT
44
4425301301 GEAR 30T
45 A1V4R90000
46
47 A093561400
48
49 A00J567300
50
Mounting Plate
Photointerrupter

Tray 4 empty sensor (PS44)
4030301004 Frame
Torsion spring
4348304701 SHAFT
Release Lever
4040309701 SHAFT
7 a
V116030603
Screw
7 b
V218040086
E ring
7 c
V217040001
E Ring
7 d
V217060001
E Ring
7 e
V137030603
screw
7 f
V116040803
Screw
7 g
V218030086
E ring
7 h
V136030803
screw
7 k
V116030803
Screw
7 m
V237200850
Pin
Q-166

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

2
2UNIT
Except Key 21, 24
30
4
5
34
33
36
35
P8
37
38
7
30
6
8
10
9
c
3
11
11
40
g
32
41
12
31
17
30
13
15
39
14
18
a
a
b
a
43
30
16
29
b
42
19
20
24
23
28
21
25
26
22
b
6
b
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
27
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A0XW604701
Regulating Plate /ASSY
2 A0ED621000
Guide
3 A02E622700
Cushion
4 A0ED620601
Shoulder screw
5 A02E622400
Gear 14T
4163529301 SCREW
12
4002730601
9 A0ED621101
LABEL CARRYING
CAPACITY
Rack /Front
10
4537331701 GUIDE
11
4037320401 KNOB
12 A0ED621400
Pulling Coil spring
13 A0ED621300
Lever
14
15 A0XWG60000
Rogulating Plate
16 A02E941300
Label Fd
17 A0XW604900
Lifting Plate
18 A0ED625500
Lock Lever
19 A0ED625700
Release Lever
20 A0ED625800
Pulling Coil spring
21 A1V4605300
Holder
(3rd)
21 A0ED625301
Holder
(4th)
22 A0ED625400
23 A0ED940100
Label Paper
24 A1V4605100
Front Cover 3rd
(3rd)
24 A1V4604600
Front Cover 4th
(4th)
25 A0ED625201
Handle
26 A0ED625000
Cover
4011302101 WASHER
Q-167

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8
27 A0XW604800
28
29 A0ED623200
Mounting Plate
30 A0ED623400
Roll
31 A0XW605013
Paper feed Cassette
32
33 A00J622900
34
35
36 A0XW616400
8
8
4002310801 LEVER
4030322303 Earth ground
4030322812 GUIDE
Lifting Shaft
37 A0ED620700
Actuator
38 A0ED623100
39 A00J942202
Label FD
40
41 A0XW605200
Guide
42 A0XWG61000
MOUNTING PLATE
43 A02E941500
Guide Plate
4030320601 LEVER
Label Cd
8 a
V217040001
E Ring
8 b
V153030803
Screw
8 c
V137030603
screw
8 d
V217060001
E Ring
8 e
V153041003
screw
8 f
V144040603
SCREW
8 g
V116030803
Screw

P9
1
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
9.2
11.5
7. 3
4. 8
3
White
2.8
6.2
8. 5
11.2
5
31.4
18
Description
ServiceManual
Parts No.
1 V500010005
saddle
2 V500010020
Saddle
3 V500010046
saddle
4 V570010021
Saddle
Q-168
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key
Quan
tity

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9
5 V570010031
holder

P 10
1
4
3
5
8
1
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
Quan
tity
10
1 A1V4603501
Cover
10
2 A1V4603800
Installing Leg
10
3 A1V4603400
Mounting Plate
10
4 V116040804
Screw
19
10
5 A1V4609300
Ground Plate
10
6 A093104300
Stop plate
10
7 A1V4609200
Fixing Plate
10
8 A02E942000
Label Metric
10
9 A02E942100
Label Inch

No.
Section
Maintenance Cycle
(K=1,000)
QTY
1
2
3
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
1
1
1
1
1
1
Parts No.
Destinations
Page/Key
Replace
300K *1
300K *1
300K *1
300K *1
300K *1
300K *1
A00J563600
A00J563600
A00J563600
A00J563600
A00J563600
A00J563600
P6-36
P6-36
P6-36
P7-36
P7-36
P7-36

11.10 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
A1
Note
Destinations
JAPAN
Q-169
Hz
100
50/60
Model No.
A1V4-002
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2

(PC-208)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A2
B
C
D1
JAPAN
200
USA, CANADA
120
60
A1V4-WY2
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY2
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY2
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY2
220240
50/60
D
D3
PHILIPPINES
E
F1
F
F2
G1
G2
50/60
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A1V4-WY2
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY2
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY2
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A1V4-WY2
TAIWAN
110
60
A1V4-WY2

220240
50/60
A1V4-WY2
CHINA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY2
KOREA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY2
J
K
Q-170

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

12.1 EXTERNAL PARTS
P1
a
15
d
16
11
d
b
5
6
7
LEDB51
13
b
12
10
17
a
c
14
9
Destinations
Clas
s
Rear Cover
A1
1 A1V4611200
Rear Cover
A1,B,C,D1,D3,F1,G2,H,I,J,
C
K
2 A1V4610500
Right Rear Cover
3 A1V4610700
Right Lower Cover
4 A1V4610600
Right Front Cover
5 A00JH00D00
PWB Assembly LED1
6 A00J168400
7 A0ED162600
Lens
8 A0ED162700
9 A1V4610800
Front Right Cover
10 A093940100
11 A0XW602500
Cover
12 A0XWN12300
13 A1V4N12500

2
14 A1V4610100
Left Cover
15 A093940700
Label
16 A093940800
Label
A1
17 A093940400
Label A4
A1,C,D1,D3,F1,H,I,J,K
17 A093940300
Label Letter
B,G2
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
1 A1V4610200
ServiceManual
1 a
V137040804
screw
1 b
V153030803
Screw
1 c
V137040803
SCREW
1 d
V116040803
Screw
Q-171
Quan
tity

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.2 FRAME SECTION

M52
M51
P2
3
b
5
c
1
b
c
e
6
d
e
e
d
4
e
e
g
g
f
10
e
9
9
g
e
g
8
e
e
8
e
Page Key
2
Parts No.
1
Description
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Quan
tity
2 9J08M10600
4 A1V4609400
4348303001 GEAR 27T
7 A0XW601000
9 A0XW602300
MOTOR

Destinations

Protection Cover
Holder
1151330001 SCREW
10 A1V4609600
Rail
Reinforce Plate
2 a
V116040803
Screw
2 b
V116030603
Screw
2 c
V218040086
E ring
2 d
V143040803
screw
2 e
V137040803
SCREW
2 f
V127030604
screw
2 g
V136040803
screw
Q-172

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19
25
23
18
20
SW51
HREYB
30
c
f
33
P3
26
PS56
27 28
20
b
16
24
SD51
4
29
21
31
6
20
32
20
c
b
c
DH
PCCB51
22
c
7
15
9
14
13
17
c
e
c
c
10
11
10
12
c
10
Destinations
Clas
s
A1
PWB Assy
A1
10 A1V4603600
Fixing Part
11 A1V4608100
12 A1V4608200
13 A1V4608400
14 A0XWN12700

5
15 434801010A
PWB ASSY
16 A1V4N12001

2
17 A093103500
Bracket
18 A093M60000
Rocker switch
A1
19 A1V4609500
Protection Sheet
A1
20 V502010033
spacer
A1
21 A1V4609100
Mounting Plate
A1
22 A1V4N12400

2
23
24
9321262043 SOLENOID
25
26
4444350602 Shaft
27
1075376002 LEVER
28 A093651500
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
1 A1V4N10101
2 A093H00100
4 A1V4603701
5 A1V4608300
7 A093M30001
Panel heater
8 A1V4603100
9 A1V4608500
ServiceManual
4425376301 COVER
4061101000 Castor
A1
Pressure spring
Q-173
Quan
tity

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3
29
4425374501 HOLDER
30
31
4425375802 PAWL
32
4640371001 LEVER
33
4425024001 BRACKET
3 a
V137030603
screw
3 b
V116030803
Screw
3 c
V137040803
SCREW
3 d
V218030086
E ring
3 e
V116040804
Screw
3 f
V116030603
Screw

P4
1
a
2
3
b
d
10
6
4
7
12
11
12
a
c
13
7
19
18
12
15
12
16
14
c
9
17
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4348305301 PAWL
4348305401 BRACKET
3 A093564100
Torsion spring
4 A093165200
Claw
5 A093564000
Pressure spring
4348306401 BRACKET
4030312201 ROLL
8 A0XW607203
Door
9 A0XW615100
Mounting Plate
10 A0XW615000
Band
11 A0XW615300
12
4349164101 WASHER
13
4348307101 SHAFT
14 A0XW607611
Guide
15 A0XW616000
16
4348301701 GUIDE
17
4348313303 Guide
Q-174

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4
18
4348313401 GUIDE
19
4348301603 Guide
4 a
V153030803
Screw
4 b
V137040803
SCREW
4 c
V153041003
screw
4 d
V116041003
Screw
4 e
V137030803
screw

c
P5
6
d
7
8
10
16
f
2
12
11
4
e
PS52
b
PS55
14
PS51
41
18
43
15
13
12
47
45
43
P S5 3
40
34
33
b
e
30
9 b
36
27
9
b
24
25
49
38
35
h
26
33
37
42
39
m
7 d
e
48
23
PS54
22
17
43
m
20
19
44
46
21
28
g
31
34
33
32
29
Description
ServiceManual
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A093566901
4348304801 GEAR 19/40T
4348303101 GEAR 19/32T
4348302901 GEAR 32T
4348303201 GEAR 20T
4348302801 GEAR 22T
4131353202 BUSHING
8 A0XWG56100
Bracket
Frame Assy
4131300301 BUSHING
10 A0XW604200
11
4348306702 BRACKET
12
13
4348302501 ACTUATOR
14
4348301402 BRACKET
15
4348301104 ROLLER
16
17
4348300503 FRAME
18 A0XWN12100
19
Cover
Destinations
Clas
s
Page Key

Paperfeed Detection
harness /1
4061560500 LEVER
Q-175

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5
20
21
4040561200 Spacer
22
4040561000 Spacer
23
4030303901 SHAFT
24
4030301401 BRACKET
25
4030301301 HOLDER
26
4030307701 GUIDE
27 A0ED563900
28
29
4030302505 Bracket
30
4348300201 HOLDER
31
4348307601 GUIDE
32
4348306201 GUIDE
33 A00J563600
Roller
34 A00J563500
Clutch
35
4425301601 GEAR 32T
36
4030300801 GEAR 29T
37
4030300301 SHAFT
38
39
1065308601 BUSHING
40
4348302601 BRACKET
41
4030302002 SHAFT
42
4425301301 GEAR 30T
43 A1V4R90000
44
4348300101 FRAME
45
46
4348304701 SHAFT
47
4348300701 LEVER
48
4040309701 SHAFT
49 A0ED563700
Shaft
Torque limiter
Photointerrupter

5 a
V116030603
Screw
5 b
V218040086
E ring
5 c
V217040001
E Ring
5 d
V217060001
E Ring
5 e
V137030603
screw
5 f
V116040803
Screw
5 g
V218030086
E ring
5 h
V136030803
screw
5 k
V116030803
Screw
5 m
V237200850
Pin
Q-176

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

8
6 c
29
10
27
26
g
11
a
a
2
30
28
P6
3
b
3
12
25
g
24
e
14
19
a
21
23
15
a
18
17
a
13
20
MDBC
16
a
22
a
18
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4348730601 LABEL MAX
4425371501 PULLEY
4425377001 COVER
5 A1V4606100
4425376204 BRACKET
4640371112 BRACKET
4444350402 STAKE
10
4348020602
11
4348730701 LABEL MAX
12
13 A0XW615900
14
15
4348730901 LABEL PAPER POSITION
16 A0XW605801
Cover
16 A0XW606000
Cover
B,G2
17
4348312302 COVER
18
4163529301 SCREW
19 A0XW605700
20
21 A1V4611500
Handle
22 A093940611
Label Push
23 A1V4605600
Cover
24 A093940500
Label Paper Supply
25
4444377813 BASE FRAME
26
4348310323 Regulating Plate
27
4348311712 Seal
Mounting Plate
REGULATING PLATE
ASSY
Regulating Plate
Mounting Plate
4640600201 PWB Assy
Q-177

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6
28
4425734401 LABEL A4 ONLY
28
4425734301 LABEL LETTER ONLY
B,G2
29
4348311902 SEAL
30
REGULATING PLATE
4348020502
ASSY
6
6 a
V137040803
SCREW
6 b
V218040086
E ring
6 c
V137030603
screw
6 d
V218030086
E ring
6 e
V153040803
screw
6 f
V149020603
screw
6 g
V144040603
SCREW
P7
a
2
b
7
c
6
5
a
4
PS5E
g
d
e
8
24
25
10
28
26
M53
11
13
23
27
16
4
12
14 e
15
17
6
c
18
19
20
21
d
22
21
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4479370202 SPACER
4479370302 SPACER
B,G2
4479370501 SHAFT
4479370402 SHAFT
4348311102 Reinforce plate
4444352601 BUSHING

(PS5E)
4425372601 GEAR 14/63T
4479371501 SHAFT
10
4479371301 GEAR 40T
11
4425372301 GEAR 16/20T
12
4425373102 BRACKET

(M53)
13
4348075103 MOTOR ASSY
14
4348020701 BASE FRAME ASSY
15
4479371401 CAM
16
4348310901 SHAFT
Q-178

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7
17
18
4479371801 STOPPER
19
4444352401 COLLAR
20
21
4061570100 Shoulder screw
22
4348020801 COUPLING ASSY
23
4479370601 SHAFT
24
25
4479370801 LEVER
26
4061570000 Shoulder screw
27
28
1136357501 COLLAR
7 a
V153030803
Screw
7 b
V116030803
Screw
7 c
V218040086
E ring
7 d
V137040803
SCREW
7 e
V231301250
pin
7 f
V218030086
E ring
7 g
V115260603
Screw
7 h
V217040001
E Ring
P8
g
27
f
2
a a
PS5D
22
f
31
17
34
PS5B
33
PCREYB
17
35
9
10
11
29
36
28
27
22
37
8
10
MTPEB
11
30
32
22 26
37
25
e
PS5C
21
10
13
23
PS59
12
22
19 20
16
17
14
10
15
11
11
24
17
18
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4444374101 ACTUATOR
4444374401 COVER
4479010503 PWB Assy
4425377401 BRACKET
4425373301 RAIL
4425373203 ARM
4425374101 STOP PLATE
4425373501 DETECTING PLATE
10
4425374001 ROLL
Q-179

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8
11
12
4444350801 WASHER
13
4425374701 TIMING BELT 740L
14
4425374202 PULLEY 20T
15
4425023101 AXLE PLATE
16
4425373402 BRACKET

(PS5B)
(PS5C)
(PS5D)
17
18
4425377601 BRACKET
19
20
4425377201 LEVER
21
22
1134304701 BUSHING
23
4425374402 SHAFT
24
4425375503 GEAR 30T
25
4479374501 GEAR 14T
26
4479374802 GEAR 34T
27
4425371401 WIRE
28
4425377503 BRACKET

(MTPEB)
29
4425010404 PWB Assy
30
4348311601 BRACKET
31
4479374401 SHAFT
32
4425303901 SHAFT
33
4444374201 BRACKET
34
1136357501 COLLAR
35
4444352201 WASHER
36
4425374302 PULLEY 22T
37
4425371001 GUIDE
8 a
V137040803
SCREW
8 b
V137030603
screw
8 c
V137030803
screw
8 d
V111030603
screw
8 e
V218040086
E ring
8 f
V218060086
E ring
8 g
V231301450
pin
8 h
V137040603
screw
Q-180

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4
4
P9
20
M55
18
19
12
a
PS5A
17
11
1
3
21
d
9
16
a
3
4
18
c d
15
d
14
22
3
c
b
6
M54
10
11
PS58
12
PS57
7
12
a
a
13
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
4640370403 LIFTING PLATE
1075370901 SPACER
1075370813 HOLDER
1075375501 SPACER
1075376901 GROUND PLATE
9
9
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
4425373102 BRACKET
4425372301 GEAR 16/20T
10
4425375401 GEAR 18/63T
11
4425372902 SYNCHRONIZING DISK
B,G2
Shift motor (M54)

12
13 A1V4605900
14
4479374601 GEAR 43T
15
16
4479374102 GEAR 23/45T
17
4425372601 GEAR 14/63T
18
4425373001 BRACKET
19
4425379901 CUSHION
20
21
4479020301 MOUNTING PLATE
22 A0XWN12601
Protection Cover
Paperfeed Wiring /6
9 a
V137040803
SCREW
9 b
V115260603
Screw
9 c
V218030086
E ring
9 d
V218040086
E ring
Q-181

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P 10
10
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
15
20
25
30
35
40
11
1
5
31.4
1.3
2.4
3.6
18
16.2
5.2
3. 6
12.1
11.5
9. 2
L=104
11.5
8.5
7.3
11.2
4.8
10
5
7.6
6. 4
5. 4
15
19
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
10
10
2 V500010003
Saddle
D
D
10
3 V500010005
saddle
10
4 V500010020
Saddle
10
5 V500010023
clip
10
6 V500020010
clip
10
7 V500020011
clip
10
8 V501010001
band
10
9 V570010021
Saddle
10
10 V570010022
saddle
10
11 V570010031
holder
Q-182
Quan
tity

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P 11
1
4
3
5
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
Quan
tity
11
1 A1V4603501
Cover
11
2 A1V4603800
Installing Leg
11
3 A1V4603400
Mounting Plate
11
4 V116040804
Screw
19
11
5 A1V4609300
Ground Plate
11
6 A093104300
Stop plate
11
7 A1V4609200
Fixing Plate

No.
Section
Maintenance Cycle
(K=1,000)
QTY
1
2
3
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
1
1
1
Parts No.
Destinations
Page/Key
Replace
300K *1
300K *1
300K *1
A00J563600
A00J563600
A00J563600
P5-33
P5-33
P5-33

12.9 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Hz
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
C
D
Destinations
A1
B
D1
Note
Model No.
A1V4-003
USA, CANADA
120
60
A1V4-W13
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY3
S.E ASIA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY3
THAILAND,SRI
Q-183
*2
*2
*2

(PC-409)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D3
F1
F2
G1
PHILIPPINES
E
F
OCEAINA
TYPE
G2
220240
50/60
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY3
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A1V4-WY3
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY3
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY3
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A1V4-WY3
TAIWAN
110
60
A1V4-W13
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY3

CHINA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY3
KOREA
220240
50/60
A1V4-WY3
J
K
Q-184

(MK-726)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13. OTHER OPTION (MK-726)

13.1 MOUNT KIT
P1
2
2
3
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A1UDN14A00
Interface Cable
2 A1UD132200
Shoulder screw
3 A1UDN14B00
Power source Cable
5 A00J943800
1 a

V116030603
Label
Screw
Q-185

(MK-726)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P2
1
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
10
1.3
2. 4
9. 2
11.5
16.5
4
11.5
28
5
15.2
18.5
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
2 V500010005

saddle
D
D
3 V500010061
saddle
4 V500020042
locker
5 V570010026
saddle
13.3 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Destinations
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
C
D1
D3
F1
F2
G1
G2
A2A0-WY0
USA, CANADA
120
60
A2A0-WY0
220240
50/60
A2A0-WY0
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A2A0-WY0
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A2A0-WY0
220240
50/60
PHILIPPINES
Model No.
EUROPEAN TYPE
Hz
A1
B
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A2A0-WY0
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A2A0-WY0
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A2A0-WY0
A2A0-WY0
C.S AMERICA
120
60
TAIWAN
110
60
A2A0-WY0
220240
50/60
A2A0-WY0

Q-186
Quan
tity

(MK-726)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
J
K
CHINA
220240
50/60
A2A0-WY0
KOREA
220240
50/60
A2A0-WY0
Q-187

(HT-507)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14. OTHER OPTION (HT-507)

14.1 HT-507
P1
a
a
a
a
Page
Key
Parts No.
Description
Service Manual
Destinations
Class
Quantity
1 A159287100
Mounting Plate
2 A159M30000
Panel heater
3 V570010046
SADDLE
screw
1 a
V137030603
14.2 DESTINATION
Destination No.
A
Destinations
A1
JAPAN
A2
JAPAN
USA, CANADA
EUROPEAN TYPE
D1
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
OCEAINA
TYPE
D
D3
E
F
G
PHILIPPINES
F1
SAUDI ARABIA
F2
SAUDI ARABIA
G1
C.S AMERICA
G2
C.S AMERICA
TAIWAN
JORDAN, LEBANON, SYRIA, SOUTH AFRICA, IRAQ, IRAN, N.YEMEN,

CAMEROON, UAE, BAHRAIN, OMAN, QATAR, KUWAIT, KENYA,
TUNISIA, IVORY COAST, MOROCCO
CHINA
KOREA
Q-188
Hz
100
50/60
Model No.
A159W01

(FK-508)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15. OTHER OPTION (FK-508)

15.1 FAX KIT
P1
Page Key
Parts No.
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
1 A22MH01W06
CONTROL BOARD ASSY
B, C, D1, D3, F1, F2, G1,

G2, I, J, K
1 A22MH01A06
CONTROL BOARD ASSY
A1
2 127A90020
MODULAR WIRING 1
15.2 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Destinations
Model No.
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
USA, CANADA
120
60
A22M-011
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A22M-021
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A22M-041
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A22M-051
A22M-0E1
220240
50/60
C
D1
D
D3
PHILIPPINES
E
F1
F2
G1
Hz
A1
B
G2
A22M-W01
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A22M-011
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A22M-011
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A22M-011
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A22M-011
TAIWAN
110
60
A22M-071

220240
50/60
A22M-0K1
Q-189

(FK-508)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
J
K
CHINA
220240
50/60
A22M-081
KOREA
220240
50/60
A22M-091
Q-190

(EK-604)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16. OTHER OPTION (EK-604)

16.1 EK-604
P1
a
1
b
6
4
3
ServiceManual
Destinations
Quan
tity
Parts No.
1 A0P0148500
Mounting Plate /1
2 A0P0947600
Label
3 A0P0N15400
Cable
4 A0P0148401
Mounting Plate /2
5 A0P0M72600
Speaker
6 A0P0148600
Holding Plate
7 A0P0H02700
PWB assembly(PWB-HUB
ASSY)
Description
Clas
s
Page Key
1 a
V111020603
screw
1 b
V116030603
Screw
Q-191

(EK-604)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P2
6
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
5.2
11.5
2
7.6
6. 4
5.4
ServiceManual
Description
Clas
s
Page Key
Parts No.
Destinations
1 V500010003
Saddle
2 V500010023
clip
16.3 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Destinations
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
C
D1
D3
E
F1
F2
G1
G2
Model No.
A0YC-WY2
USA, CANADA
120
60
A0YC-WY2
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY2
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY2
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY2
PHILIPPINES
220240
50/60
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A0YC-WY2
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY2
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY2
Hz
A1
B
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A0YC-WY2
TAIWAN
110
60
A0YC-WY2

220240
50/60
A0YC-WY2
CHINA
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY2
Q-192
Quan
tity

(EK-604)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K
KOREA
220240
Q-193
50/60
A0YC-WY2

(EK-605)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17. OTHER OPTION (EK-605)

17.1 EK-605
P1
9
a
8
11
b
2
7
10
b
b
Description
ServiceManual
Destinations
Clas
s
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A0P0148500
Mounting Plate /1
2 A0P0947600
Label
3 A0P0N15400
Cable
4 A0P0148403
Mounting Plate /2
5 A0P0M72600
Speaker
6 A0P0148600
Holding Plate
7 A0P0H02700
ASSY)
8 A0P0149500
Spacer
9 A0P0M72500
Unit
10 A0YC130200
Protection Film
11 A0YC130100
Cover
1 a
V111020603
screw
1 b
V116030603
Screw
1 c
V195020003
nut
Q-194

(EK-605)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

P2
6
11
16
21
26
31
36
12
17
22
27
32
37
13
18
23
28
33
38
14
19
24
29
34
39
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
5.2
11.5
2
7.6
6. 4
5.4
Description
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Page Key
Parts No.
Destinations
1 V500010003
Saddle
2 V500010023
clip
17.3 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Destinations
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
C
D1
D3
E
F1
F2
G1
G2
Model No.
A0YC-WY1
USA, CANADA
120
60
A0YC-WY1
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY1
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY1
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY1
PHILIPPINES
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY1
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A0YC-WY1
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY1
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY1
Hz
A1
B
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A0YC-WY1
TAIWAN
110
60
A0YC-WY1

220240
50/60
A0YC-WY1
CHINA
220240
50/60
A0YC-WY1
Q-195
Quan
tity

(EK-605)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
K
KOREA
220240
Q-196
50/60
A0YC-WY1

(HD-518)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
18. OTHER OPTION (HD-518)

18.1 HARD DISC KIT
P1
4
7
ACCESORRY PARTS
b
5
4
5
4
Description
ServiceManual
Clas
s
Destinations
Quan
tity
Page Key
Parts No.
1 A0P0148500
Mounting Plate /1
2 A0P0947600
Label
3 A0P0N15400
Cable
4 A0P0148404
Mounting Plate /2
5 A0P0M72600
Speaker
6 A0P0148600
Holding Plate
7 A0P0H02700
ASSY)
8 A0YC130200
Protection Film
9 A1UDM90100
Gasket
(Model No.A0YC-WY4)
10 A1UDM90500
Gasket
(Model No.A0YC-WY4)
11 A1UD148701
Mounting Plate
(Model No.A0YC-WY4)
1 a
V111020603
screw
1 b
V116030603
Screw
18.2 DESTINATION
Destination
No.
A
Destinations
Hz
Model No.
A1
JAPAN
100
50/60
A2
JAPAN
200
50/60
USA, CANADA
120
60
A2AC-WY1
EUROPEAN TYPE
220240
50/60
A2AC-WY1
S.E ASIA
TYPE
THAILAND,SRI
220240
50/60
A2AC-WY1
OCEAINA
TYPE
220240
50/60
A2AC-WY1
B
C
D1
D
D3
Q-197

(HD-518)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
PHILIPPINES
E
F1
F
F2
G1
G2
220240
50/60
SAUDI ARABIA
127
60
A2AC-WY1
SAUDI ARABIA
220240
50/60
A2AC-WY1
C.S AMERICA
220240
50/60
A2AC-WY1
C.S AMERICA
120
60
A2AC-WY1
TAIWAN
110
60
A2AC-WY1
220240
50/60
A2AC-WY1

CHINA
220240
50/60
A2AC-WY1
KOREA
220240
50/60
A2AC-WY1
J
K
Q-198
R TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE BASED ON REPORTS FROM THE

FIELD > 1. PAPER JAM
bizhub 423/363/283/223
R TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE BASED ON REPORTS FROM THE FIELD

1. PAPER JAM
1.1 Original
1.1.1 J66-02, J66-12
Symptom
After placing original on DF and pressing the start key, it indicates J66-02/J66-12 (DF Paper feeding section jam) before taking up the
original. Copy and FAX using DF cannot be performed.
Cause
On stand-by, the pick-up roller for original must move up to the home position (upper side). However, it remains low, and original paper
jam is detected when feeding original.
The stopper that holds the pick-up roller at home position does not support enough connection, which makes it fall easily and the pick-up
roller gets lowered.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Cover
[2]
Rear side
[3]
Connection
[4]
Stopper
Countermeasure
If paper jam of original often occurs, replace the shaft and the lever with the improved parts.
Part No.: Shaft [A143PP5C02]
Part No.: Shaft [A143PP5403]
Part No.: Lever [A143PP4R02]
Note
When replacing the shaft and the lever, replace all three of them with the improved parts. Do not replace single part alone.
The following functions are improved for securing stopper connection.
The form of Lever [A143PP4R02] is improved.
For Shaft [A143PP5402], gap position for installing the stopper is modified.
For Shaft [A143PP5403], gap position for installing the fixing ring is modified.
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Shaft [A143PP5402]
[2]
Lever [A143PP4R02]
[3]
Shaft [A143PP5403]
[4]
Conventional part
[5]
Improved form of Lever
[6]
Improved part
1.2 Main body

1.2.1 J11-01, J12-01: #1
Symptom
When feeding paper from tray1, paper jam is indicated. (Jam code: J11-01)
R-1

bizhub 423/363/283/223
When inserting tray (Tray 1/Tray 2), lever at paper feed section breaks.
Cause
When the paper feed tray is inserted with unexpectedly strong force, the lever breaks due to the impact on the lever at the paper feed
section. The lever is damaged, causing the paper to jam.
Part No. : Lever (Pick release) [A1UD561100A]
Note
Lever breakage is reported only with Tray 1 /Tray 2.
The lever for Tray 1/Tray 2 has different form from the one for paper feed unit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Vertical transport Assy
[2]
Lever (Pick release) : Tray 2
[3]
[2]
Lever (Pick release)
[1]
[2]
[1]
Paper feed section flame
R-2

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Lever (Pick release) : Conventional part
[2]
Lever (Pick release) : Improved part
[3]
Reinforced section is added to increase the lever strength
[4]
The form is improved to increase the strength
Countermeasure
If the lever at the paper feed section is broken, replace with the improved part for better strength.
Part No. : Lever (Pick release) [A1UD561101B]
Related trouble
R.1.2.2 J11-01, J12-01: #2
1.2.2 J11-01, J12-01: #2

Symptom
When feeding paper from tray1, paper jam is indicated. (Jam code: J11-01 )
The right rear side of paper feed tray breaks when it is slid into the machine/cabinet. (Tray 1, Tray 2 and Optional paper feeding tray
PC-109, PC-208)
In some case, the lever at the paper feed section breaks as well. (The symptom is found only with Tray 1 and Tray 2.)
Note
The lever for Tray 1/Tray 2 and the lever for paper feed unit use different form of part.
Cause
If the paper feed tray is slid with greater than estimated force, it may result in breakage due to the impact on the right rear part of the tray.
The right rear part of the tray is damaged, causing the paper to jam.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Lever at paper feed section
[2]
Slid with greater than estimated force
[3]
The right rear part of paper feed tray
[4]
Paper feed tray breaks
Countermeasure
(a) Preventive action
To prevent the breakage, install the countermeasure parts (Mounting Part Kit) that reduces the force to the contact of the paper feed
tray and the paper feed section lever.
Part No. : Mounting part kit [A1UDR90200]
Mounting part
Hold Sheet
R-3

bizhub 423/363/283/223
(a) How to install

1. Remove dirt, dust and oil from the mounting part and hold sheet pasting surface [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
Paper feed tray resin block
[2]
Mounting section / Hold sheet pasting surface
[2]
Double sided tape protection
2. Remove the double sided tape protection [2] of the mounting part [1].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Mounting part
3. Apply the mounting part [1] by placing it against the pasting reference 1 of the resin block [2] on paper feed tray.
[2]
[1]
[1]
Mounting part
[2]
R-4

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Pasting reference 1
[2]
Paste against the reference
[3]
Mounting part
4. Remove the double sided tape protection of hold sheet.

5. Paste the edge of hold sheet [4] against the reference 2 [1] of resin block on paper feed tray.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Pasting reference 2
[2]
Pasting reference 3
[3]
Mounting part
[4]
Hold sheet
6. Past the hold sheet while covering the mounting part to fit the form of the mounting part.
Note
Paste the hold sheet to fit pasting reference 3.
7. Paste the rear edge of the hold sheet [1] while folding it.
[1]
[2]
[3]
R-5

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
Hold sheet
[2]
Fold the hold sheet and paste it to fit the reference 3.
[3]
Fold the hold sheet to paste the rear edge of the hold
sheet.
As built
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Mounting part (countermeasure part)
[4]
Hold sheet (countermeasure part)
Note
Paste the hold sheet completely. Mounting part alone does not serve efficiently.
(b) Countermeasure for breakage

If the paper feed tray is broken, replace it with the improved form part.
Part No. : [A0ED620115] for Tray 1/Tray 2
Part No. : [A0XW605015] for optional paper feed cabinet (PC-109/PC-208)
Conventional part
[1]
[2]
[1]
Paper feed lever
[2]
R-6
Paper feed tray resin block part (conventional)

bizhub 423/363/283/223
Improved part
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Paper feed lever
[2]
Paper feed tray resin block part (improved)
[3]
Added reinforcement rib
Related trouble
R.1.2.1 J11-01, J12-01: #1
1.2.3 J12-01, J12-40

Symptom
Paper jam (J12-01/J12-40) occurs on the paper feeding section in Tray 2.
Dog-ear occurs on the leading edge of the paper fed from Tray 2.
Note
It more likely occurs with thin paper or paper printed on one side.
Cause
To avoid jam, the guide of paper feed side * is designed to be higher than the guide of vertical transport side *.
Because of the variation in production, the guide of paper feed side is lower than the guide of vertical transport side, which makes the
paper edge stuck in the guide of vertical transport side, resulting in the paper edge getting folded. (Dog-ear)
In case of large gap of the guides, paper front edge goes under the guide of vertical transport, which results in paper jam.
Note
*: Since this is caused by a component specialized for paper feed section in Tray 2, this trouble does not occur with other
trays.
R-7

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
Paper feeding unit
[2]
Tray 2 Paper feed section
[3]
Normal state
[4]
When dog-ear / paper jam occurs
[5]
Paper from edge goes into the gap of the guide
[6]
Guide of vertical transport side
[7]
Guide of paper feed side
[8]
Paper
Countermeasure
In case paper jam or dog-ear occurs, replace the paper guide of paper feed side with the paper guide with improved form.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Guide (lower paper feed R)
[2]
Conventional part
Guide (lower paper feed L)

Part with improved form
Guide (lower paper feed

R)
Part No.: [A3EW562701]
R-8

bizhub 423/363/283/223

L)
Part No.: [AIUD562612]
The form of the guide plate of paper feed side is improved to gain allowance and breathability, compare to the conventional parts.
1.3 Optional paper feed tray/cabinet

1.3.1 J30-01
Symptom
When feeding paper from PC-409, paper jam is indicated. (Jam code: J30-01)
Cause
When feeding paper from PC-409, a paper gets too closer to the one previously fed. As a result, Jam occurs because the sensor prior to the
registration roller cannot pick up the rear edge of the paper in front.
Countermeasure
Check the version of the firmware. If the version is lower than the followings, update the firmware to the following versions (or above).
Program name: bizhub 423/363/283/223 MFP Firmware
File name to download: [A1UD0Y0-F000-G00-C2.exe]
1.4 Optional finisher

1.4.1 J72-17
Symptom
When using Finisher FS-529 for paper size B4 or larger, paper jam occurs
Cause
Paper jam removal lever is not locked completely, which blocks the paper transport. (Jam code: J72-17)
Firmware defect of FS-529
R-9

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[2]
[1]
[1]
Lock lever
[2]
Lock lever shaft
Countermeasure
Check if the paper jam removal lever is locked. Close the lever correctly if it is not locked completely.
Check the version of the firmware. If the version is lower than the followings, update the firmware to the following versions (or above).
Firmware version: [A0U70Y0-0071-G01-04]
In case paper jam still occurs after upgrading the firmware, take the following actions.
1. Check the model No. of the Finisher.
If the model No. is A0U7-WY2, go to step 2.
If the model No. is other than A0U7-WY2, attach the sheet to the lower guide of paper entrance.
Part No.: Sheet [A0U7PPCR 00]
[p/n: AU07 PPCR 00]
2. Check if the screws of conveyance roller unit are secured. If they are loose, fasten them.
Check the positioning dowel of conveyance roller unit. If it is not positioned correctly, loosen the screws and adjust them so the
positioning dowel is fixed correctly. Fasten the screws again.
R-10

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[1]
Screw (two pieces)
[2]
Positioning dowel (two pieces)
3. Check step 2. If no problems are found, perform the followings.

Prepare PET sheet of the following size.
PET sheet size: 3 mm x 10 mm (thickness=0.1 mm)
Remove the lock lever from the lock lever shaft.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Lock lever
[2]
Lock lever shaft
Attach PET sheet with double sided tape on D cut part of lock lever shaft.
PET sheet size: 3 mm x 10 mm (thickness=0.1 mm)
D cut section of the lock lever shaft on larger scale
[1]
[2]
[1]
PET sheet
[2]
R-11
Lock lever shaft
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Note
Attach the PET sheet within the D cut section of the lock lever shaft.
Install the lock lever to the lock lever shaft.
Note
Make sure that the lock lever is not loose.
R-12

FIELD > 2. IMAGE TR...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. IMAGE TROUBLE
2.1 When using fax, the sent image is shrunk at the receiving machine
Symptom
When using fax, the sent image is shrunk at the receiving machine. (Normal size of faxing is intended.)
Cause
When Inside Body Text or Outside Body Text is set in [Utility] -> [Administrator Settings] -> [Fax Settings] -> [Header/Footer Position] > [Header Position] at the sending machine, and [Communication setting] -> [Fax sender setting] on Fax/Scan screen is set as OFF,
the undesired white line (margin) is added to the sent image.
The receiving machine recognizes the added margin as a part of the sent image, and automatically shrinks the image to print.
Countermeasure
Check the version of the firmware of the sending machine. If the version is lower than the followings, update the firmware to the following
versions (or above).
Program name: MFP Firmware [G00-C2]
2.2 Black line on paper edge in the main scanning direction

Symptom
Black line appears in the main scanning direction (CD) in the image on the paper edge.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Printing direction
[2]
Black line in the main scanning direction
[3]
In some case, the entire paper edge appears black.
Cause
Some amount of the developer enter the sliding area between the Ds Collar and the shaft of developing roller, and the inner surface of the
Ds Collar gets worn.
Some amounts of the developer get stuck between the Ds Collar, which blocks the Ds collar rotation, and the Collar will be fixed. Due to
this, specific area of the collar will continue to contact the drum, causing the outer surface of the collar to wear. When Ds collar wears, it
cannot keep the correct distance between the drum and developing roller, which causes the abnormal image (black line in the main
scanning direction).
Countermeasure
When abnormal image occurs, follow the steps in trouble shooting.
If the symptom cannot be improved, Ds collar may be worn. Replace the Ds collar and related parts *.
Part No. Ds Collar kit [A1UDR90100]
Note
*: When replacing the Ds collar, replace the entire Ds Collar kit.
R-13

FIELD > 2. IMAGE TR...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5] [2]
[5]
[3]
[1]
Collar (collar: black) [4068372000]
[2]
Ds collar [A1UD371700]
[3]
Compressing coil spring [A1UD371800]
[4]
Bushing [A1UD371600]
[5]
Collar (collar: transparent) [4068371900]
(1) Ds Collar kit
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1]
Collar (collar: transparent) [4068371900] x 2 pieces
[2]
Collar (collar: black) [4068372000] x 2 pieces
[3]
Ds collar [A1UD371700] x 2 pieces
[4]
Bushing [A1UD371600]
[5]
Compressing coil spring [A1UD371800]
R-14

FIELD > 3. OPERATIN...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. OPERATING NOISE
3.1 DF Operation noise
Symptom
Operation noise occurs when starting feed of the original.
Operation noise occurs during the feed of the original.
Operation noise occurs when finishing feed of the original.
Cause
(1) Operation noise occurs as pickup roller moves up/down.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[1]
Pickup arm
[2]
Pickup roller
[3]
Torque limiter (Pickup roller shaft)
[4]
Separation roller holder
When the roller goes up/down while the pickup roller feeding the original, operation noise occurs.
The original stopper hits the pickup arm when pickup roller goes down.
The separation roller holder vibrates when pickup roller goes down.
The pickup roller shaft vibrates when pickup roller goes down.
The pickup roller hits the upper guide when it goes up.
Ref: PA.4.2.1 Pick-up roller up/down control
(2) Cleaning noise of DF Original Glass

When the original glass cleaning roller rotates to clean the DF original glass surface, operation noise occurs. (motor noise, cleaning
brush working noise on the DF original glass, etc.)
Ref: PA.4.4.2 DF original glass contamination prevention control
Countermeasure
If the feeding noise is too loud, perform the following step.
(1) Replace the applicable parts of pickup roller with the improved parts.
Replace the stopper with the one mounted with damper to reduce the shock.
Part No.: Stopper (Rear side) [A143PP5U02] x 1 piece
Part No.: Stopper (Front side) [A143PP5T02] x 1 piece
Part No.: Damper [A143PP9G00] x 2 pieces
R-15

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Pickup roller
[2]
Stopper + Damper
[3]
Pickup arm
Attach cushioning to the separation roller holder to reduce vibration.

Part No.: Cushioning [A143PP9D00] x 3 pieces
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
Separation roller holder
[2]
[2]
Cushioning
Add a washer ring (0.5 mm thick) in between Bushing on pickup roller shaft and Torque Limiter to reduce vibration.
Improved component - Part No.: Washer [A143PP9E00] x 1 piece
R-16

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[1]
Torque limiter
[2]
Washer
Attach cushioning to the part on the upper guide that pickup roller hits in order to reduce shock.
Part No.: Cushioning [A143PPF00] x 2 pieces
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Upper guide
[2]
Cushioning
(2) Changing DF Original Glass Contamin. Setting in service mode

If the cleaning noise of DF original glass is too loud, change [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.] as required in service mode.
Ref: I.11.11.11 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.
R-17
bizhub 423/363/283/223

Note
Change [Split Line Detection Setting / ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity] of DF slit glass to Not Set in order not to
detect DF slit glass contamination. In that case, it does not clean DF slit glass even if it is contaminated. When dirt is on the
glass, some lines will appear in FD direction on printed image, scanned image and faxed image.
(a) ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity

In service mode, select [System 2] -> [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.] -> [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity] -> [Low] or [Not
Set].
If [Low] is selected, the contamination on DF original glass will not be easily scanned. In this way, cleaning frequency of DF original
glass may be reduced.
If [Not Set] is selected, DF original glass will not be scanned. It does not clean DF original glass when Job is completed, either.
Ref: I.11.11.11.(1) ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity
Note
If [Not Set] is selected, it indicates NG when forced pre-scan is attempted by selecting [Service Mode]->[Machine] -> [ADF
Scan Glass Contamination].
(b) Feed Cleaning Settings

In service mode, select [System 2] -> [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.] -> [Feed Cleaning Settings] -> [0].
When [0] is selected, it does not operate original glass cleaning between originals for sequential original reading.
Ref: I.11.11.11.(3) Feed Cleaning Settings
Note
If [0] is selected for [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Warn/Level] / [Feed Cleaning Settings], some lines will easily appear in FD
direction on printed image, scanned image and faxed image.
3.2 Noise from line monitor when telephone is off-hook

Symptom
Unpleasant distortion noise is heard from the line monitor with the telephone off-hooked when you listen to a voice response, which
interrupts the voice.
Cause
The cutoff frequency of low-pass filter circuit on FAX board is inadequate, which makes the unpleasant distortion noise from the line
monitor.
Countermeasure
To reduce the noise from the line monitor, replace FK-508 board with the improved part.
Part No.: FK-508 board (improved part) [A22MH01W1B]
Note
Improved: Cutoff frequency of low-pass filter circuit on FAX board is changed.
R-18
bizhub 423/363/283/223

FIELD > 4. TROUBLE ...
4. TROUBLE CODE
4.1 C0208, C0206
Symptom
Randomly, it indicates C-0206, C-0208: Tray 3 lift-up failure, Tray 4 lift-up failure.
Cause
The length of the line of induction for transport drive that connects the main body and paper feed cabinet (PC-208) is too short, which may
cause connection failure at the connector.
Problem of the firmware: When recovering from sleep mode or when sub-power switch is ON, drive signal of lift-up motor is sent by
cabinet-side control board regardless of the command from the printer control board. Due to the signal, lift-up motor rotates for a short
time, and the paper lift-up board goes up a little. When this operation is repeated, the paper lift-up board is lifted up to the position beyond
specification, causing C-0206, C-0208: Tray 3 lift-up failure, Tray 4 lift-up failure detected. Especially, C-0208: Tray 4 lift-up failure
tends to be detected since the tray is not frequently used. (The paper lift-up board goes down when the tray is pulled out. Thus, C0206:
Tray 3 lift-up failure is less likely detected because Tray 3 is used with higher frequency.
Countermeasure
1. Follow the steps in the Troubleshooting.
K.3.5.4 C0206, C0208
2. In case Troubleshooting does not solve the problem, replace with induction line with extended cables, and update the firmware to the
following version (or above).
Part No. Transport drive line of induction/1 [A1UDN12C02]
Induction line for transport drive / 1 [A1UDN12C02]
4.2 CC211
Symptom
Freezes at KONICA MINOLTA logo / hourglass pointer
CC211: Authorization device global error
CD390: Non-volatile data alert
Cause
Connector of NVRAM board is damaged for some reason. It causes connection failure of NVRAM.
Countermeasure
Re-install NVRAM board. If it does not improve the symptom, replace MFP board.
Part No.: Board Assy. (PWB-MFP Assy.) :[A1UDH02002 (bizhub 223/283/7828)]
Part No.: Board Assy. (PWB-MFP Assy.) :[A1UDH02102 (bizhub 363/423)]
4.3 CD004
Symptom
CD004 occurs.
CFA14 occurs.
Cause
Problem of the firmware.
R-19
bizhub 423/363/283/223

FIELD > 4. TROUBLE ...
Countermeasure
Check the firmware version of the machine. If not the version below, install the following firmware version (or later version).
4.4 CD390
Symptom
CD390: Non-volatile data alert
Cause
Countermeasure
Part No.: Board Assy. (PWB-MFP Assy.) :[A1UDH02002 (bizhub 223/283/7828)]
Part No. Board Assy. (PWB-MFP Assy.) :[A1UDH02102 (bizhub 363/423)]
4.5 CFA14
Symptom
CD004 occurs.
CFA14 occurs.
Cause
Problem of the firmware.
Countermeasure
Check the firmware version of the machine. If not the version below, install the following firmware version (or later version).
4.6 CB120
Symptom
When the receiver is picked up on the ringtone, busy sound is heard. When it is hung up, CB120 occurs.
Cause
Problem of the firmware: The signal which is not supposed to be recognized as incoming is recognized as one, and is recognized as an
error.
Countermeasure
Update the firmware to the following version (or above).
4.7 CR11
Symptom
CR11 occurs when G3-FAX is received from a particular machine (Competitor's machine: CANON FAX machine).
Cause
Problem of the firmware: A failure occurs in the modem device when shifting to receiving phase D, which disconnects the communication.
Countermeasure
File name to download : [A1UD0Y0-F000-G00-C2.exe]
R-20

FIELD > 5. ERROR ME...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. ERROR MESSAGE/ABNORMAL DISPLAY

5.1 Freezes at KONICA MINOLTA logo / hourglass pointer.
Symptom
CD390: Abnormal non-volatile data
Cause
Countermeasure
Part No. Board Assy. (PWB-MFP Assy.) :[A1UDH02002 (bizhub 223/283/7828)]
Part No. Board Assy. (PWB-MFP Assy.) :[A1UDH02102 (bizhub 363/423)]
5.2 Freezes at KONICA MINOLTA logo / hourglass pointer when recovering from sleep mode.
Symptom
Print job (print / FAX) won't be printed in sleep mode.
The operation panel freezes at the KM logo / blank screen.
It can be recovered by power OFF / ON
Cause
Problem of the firmware: Loop process is performed when a trap is requested and is normally finished after 15 times, but was instead
finished after 16 times. The value was written beyond the allocated sequence region, causing a stack smash resulting in the panel freeze.
Countermeasure
Check the firmware version. If it is not the following version, install the following version (or above) of firmware.
File name to download : [A1UD0Y0-F000-G00-C8.exe]
R-21

FIELD > 6. MALFUNCT...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. MALFUNCTION
6.1 Dog-ear occurs on the paper fed from tray 2
Symptom
Jam (J12-01 / J12-40) occurs at the paper feed section of Tray 2.
Dog-ear on the leading edge occurs at the paper feed section of Tray 2.
Note
This occurs especially with thin paper or paper printed on one side.
Cause
To avoid jam, the guide of paper feed side * is designed to be higher than the guide of vertical transport side *.
Because of the variation in production, the guide of paper feed side is lower than the guide of vertical transport side, which makes the
paper edge stuck in the guide of vertical transport side, resulting in the paper edge getting folded. (Dog-ear)
When there is large gap between the guides, paper edge goes under the guide of vertical transport side, which causes paper jam.
Note
*: This problem occurs only at Tray 2.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
Paper feed unit
[2]
Tray 2 Paper feed section
[3]
Normal state
[4]
When dog-ear / paper jam occurs
[5]
Paper from edge goes into the gap of the guide
[6]
Guide of vertical transport side
[7]
[8]
Paper
Countermeasure
In case paper jam or dog-ear occurs, replace the paper guide of paper feed side with the paper guide with improved form.
R-22

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[1]
Guide (lower paper feed R)
[2]
Conventional part
Guide (lower paper feed L)

Part with improved from

R)
Part No.: [A3EW562701]

L)
Part No.: [AIUD562612]
The form of the guide plate of paper feed side is improved to gain allowance and breathability, compare to the conventional parts.
6.2 At "Default Copy Settings", the default setting of "Original Quality" cannot be changed.
Symptom
The Original Quality cannot be registered in Default Copy Settings even if it is changed by settings of [Utility] -> [User Settings] ->
[Copier Settings] -> [Default Copy Settings] and registered at the [Current Setting].
Cause
Problem of the firmware: A common process is used to set Factory default and Current Setting of the Original Quality and Text is
always set in that process.
Countermeasure
Program name : MFP Firmware [G00-B5]
File name to download : [A1UD0Y0-F000-G00-B5.exe]
6.3 E-mail is always selected when FAX address is selected

Symptom
When an abbreviated address other than FAX is selected, a default document name is required to be set. Once default document name is
set, E-mail setting is always selected.
Cause
Problem of the firmware: A default document name needs to be set when selecting an abbreviated address other than FAX. Though a
default document name does not need to be set when setting an address only for FAX, the registration screen appears for default
document name setting. Once default document name is set, E-mail setting is always selected.
R-23

bizhub 423/363/283/223
Countermeasure
Program name: MFP Firmware [G00-B5]
File name to download: [A1UD0Y0-F000-G00-B5.exe]
6.4 Remaining amount of toner is not displayed correctly

Symptom
Remaining toner amount displayed on PSWC etc. is different between sleep mode and after printing.
Cause
The information of remaining toner amount is obtained from the backup memory when the Power is ON or the machine restarts from sleep
mode, but the information of toner consumption rate is updated at the start of printing. Therefore, the consumption rate is 0% (toner full)
right after the machine boots up.
Countermeasure
1. Update the firmware to the following version (or above).
6.5 Ozone Smell

Symptom
Ozone smell during printing *
Note
* The standard machine is equipped with the ozone filter for enzymatic degradation of ozone generated in the machine. The
amount of ozone exhausted to outside of the machine is lower than product specification, which does not affect human body or
environment.
[1]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Ozone filter (Standard feature)
[2]
Charge corona
[3]
Photo conductor
[4]
Air flow
[5]
Countermeasure
For sensitive customer against ozone smell, install an additional ozone filter, which is an After part.
Part No. : Ozone filter [A1UDP00100]
R-24

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[1]
Ozone filter (After part)
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[1]
[1]
Photo conductor
[2]
Charge corona
[3]
Ozone filter (Standard part)
[4]
[5]
Air flow
[6]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
(1) How to install

1. Open the right door. Open the 2 claws [2] of registration unit to unlock, and raise the registration unit [1].
Note
Be careful not to damage the code of registration unit [1].
R-25

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the 2 screws [2] from the cooling fan motor [1].
[1]
[2]
3. Raise the cooling fan motor [1].

Note
Be careful not to damage the code of cooling fan motor [1].
[1]
4. Install the ozone filter [1].
Note
The ozone filter [1] does not have a front or back side. However, the notches [2] must be in the position as shown.
R-26

bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
5. Install the cooling fan motor, and fix with two screws.
Note
Do not install the cooling fan motor in the wrong direction. Install the cooling fan motor in the direction to release the
exhaust toward outside of the machine (the arrow on the fan must point the outside of the machine.)
6. Install the registration unit, and close the right door.
6.6 Print job won't be printed in sleep mode

Symptom
When receiving Print Job (print/FAX) in sleep mode, it won't recover and the Print Job won't be completed.
The operation panel freezes at the KM logo/blank screen.
Can be recovered by power OFF/ON.
Cause
Problem of the firmware: Loop process is performed when a trap is requested and is normally finished after 15 times, but was instead
finished after 16 times. The value was written beyond the allocated sequence region, causing a stack smash resulting in the panel freeze.
Countermeasure
Check the version of the firmware. If it is not the following version, install the firmware of the following version (or above).
6.7 Print Job does not resume after loading paper for paper empty detection
Symptom
Print Job does not resume after loading paper for paper empty detection.
The operation panel locks up and freezes.
Can be recovered by power OFF/ON.
Cause
Problem of the firmware.: There was a problem in the timing of erasing transfer parameter, which is management information, so the
information could not be received.
Countermeasure
6.8 Unable to communicate between CSRC server and MFP

Symptom
MFP doesn't receive a data acquisition request file while CSRC server requesting it and consequently the communication may not be
established (HB: Heart Beat file won't be sent).
Cause
Problem of the firmware. : Although resending function is not applied to the HB-transmission, the HB-transmission won't be sent when the
number of resends reaches its maximum value.
Countermeasure
Program name: MFP Firmware [G00-D1]
File name to download: [A1UD0Y0-F000-G00-D1.exe]
R-27

FIELD > 7. PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. PARTS
7.1 Lever (paper feed section) is broken
Symptom
When inserting tray (Tray 1/Tray 2), lever at paper feed section breaks.
Cause
When the paper feed tray is inserted with unexpectedly strong force, the lever breaks due to the impact on the lever at the paper feed
section. The lever is damaged, causing the paper to jam.
Part No. : Lever (Pick release) [A1UD561100A]
Note
Lever breakage is reported only with Tray 1 /Tray 2.
The lever for Tray 1/Tray 2 has different form from the one for paper feed unit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Vertical transport Assy
[2]
[3]
[2]
Lever (Pick release)
[1]
[2]
[1]
Paper feed section flame
R-28

FIELD > 7. PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Lever (Pick release) : Conventional part
[2]
Lever (Pick release) : Improved part
[3]
Reinforced section is added to increase the lever strength
[4]
The form is improved to increase the strength
Countermeasure
If the lever at the paper feed section is broken, replace with the improved part for better strength.
Part No. : Lever (Pick release) [A1UD561101B]
Related trouble
R.7.2 The right rear side of the paper feed tray is broken
7.2 The right rear side of the paper feed tray is broken
Symptom
The right rear side of paper feed tray breaks when it is slid into the machine/cabinet. (Tray 1, Tray 2 and Optional paper feeding tray
PC-109, PC-208)
In some case, the lever at the paper feed section breaks as well. (The symptom is found only with Tray 1 and Tray 2.)
Note
The lever for Tray 1/Tray 2 and the lever for paper feed unit use different form of part.
Cause
If the paper feed tray is slid with greater than estimated force, it may result in breakage due to the impact on the right rear part of the tray.
The right rear part of the tray is damaged, causing the paper to jam.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Slid with greater than estimated force
[3]
The right rear part of paper feed tray
[4]
Paper feed tray breaks
Countermeasure
(1) Preventive action
To prevent the breakage, install the countermeasure parts (Mounting Part Kit) that reduces the force to the contact of the paper feed
tray and the paper feed section lever.
Part No. : Mounting part kit [A1UDR90200]
Mounting part
Hold Sheet
R-29

FIELD > 7. PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(a) How to install

1. Remove dirt, dust and oil from the mounting part and hold sheet pasting surface [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Mounting section / Hold sheet pasting surface
[2]
Double sided tape protection
2. Remove the double sided tape protection [2] of the mounting part [1].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Mounting part
3. Apply the mounting part [1] by placing it against the pasting reference 1 of the resin block [2] on paper feed tray.
[2]
[1]
[1]
Mounting part
[2]
R-30

FIELD > 7. PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Pasting reference 1
[2]
Paste against the reference
[3]
Mounting part
4. Remove the double sided tape protection of hold sheet.

5. Paste the edge of hold sheet [4] against the reference 2 [1] of resin block on paper feed tray.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Pasting reference 2
[2]
Pasting reference 3
[3]
Mounting part
[4]
Hold sheet
6. Past the hold sheet while covering the mounting part to fit the form of the mounting part.
Note
Paste the hold sheet to fit pasting reference 3.
7. Paste the rear edge of the hold sheet [1] while folding it.
[1]
[2]
[3]
R-31

FIELD > 7. PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
Hold sheet
[2]
Fold the hold sheet and paste it to fit the reference 3.
[3]
Fold the hold sheet to paste the rear edge of the hold
sheet.
As built
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Mounting part (countermeasure part)
[4]
Hold sheet (countermeasure part)
Note
Paste the hold sheet completely. Mounting part alone does not serve efficiently.
(2) Countermeasure for breakage

If the paper feed tray is broken, replace it with the improved form part.
Part No. : [A0ED620115] for Tray 1/Tray 2
Part No. : [A0XW605015] for optional paper feed cabinet (PC-109/PC-208)
Conventional part
[1]
[2]
[1]
Paper feed lever
[2]
R-32
Paper feed tray resin block part (conventional)

FIELD > 7. PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Improved part
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Paper feed lever
[2]
Paper feed tray resin block part (improved)
[3]
Added reinforcement rib
Related trouble
R.7.1 Lever (paper feed section) is broken
7.3 Hook of DF-open/close-lever is broken

Symptom
Open/close-lever of DF cover does not operate, and DF cover cannot be opened. If you force the cover open, the rear hook will receive
too much stress and then be broken.
Cause
(1) DF cover lock structure
When open/close-lever of DF cover is lifted up, the hook mounted on the front/rear side of the same shaft of the lever is released,
enabling DF cover to open. In the same way, by holding DF cover in the proper position and closing it slowly, the hooks are latched to
lock the DF cover.
When closing DF cover, the open/close-lever lifts up once, and then returns to the original position.
(2) Operation which occurs the symptom

1. When you close the DF cover while strongly pushing the handle of its open/close lever with your palm, the handle bends to the opposite
side.
Note
By lifting up the DF cover and open/close-lever at the same time by palm, it interrupts the lift-up movement of the open/
close lever.
[1]
[2]
[1]
DF cover
[2]
Close the DF cover while pressing open/close-lever by

palm.
2. When the open/close-lever bends, the front hook does not latch on the shaft as supposed to, leaving the front side of the DF cover
unstable. (The rear side of the hook is latched on the proper position.)
Because of the unstable state of the front hook, the open/close-lever interrupts the DF cover, disabling the operation.
R-33

FIELD > 7. PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Since the DF cover is not closed correctly, the operation panel indicates door-open alert, which interrupts the Job.
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[1]
Release lever
[2]
Front hook
[3]
Front hook (not latched on the shaft)
[4]
Rear hook (latched on the shaft correctly)
[5]
Shaft
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
DF cover
[2]
Front side of DF cover is not latched
[3]
Release lever
3. Because the open/close-lever cannot be operated, if DF cover is lifted up with strong force, it gives a large impact on the latched rear
side hook, resulting in the hook breakage.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Lift up the DF cover
[2]
R-34
Rear side hood breaks

FIELD > 7. PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[1]
Whitening occurs on the hook, and breaks
[2]
Rear hook
Countermeasure
(1) Preventive action
To prevent the rear hook breakage, mount the reinforcement part on the open/close-lever.
Part. No.: Reinforcement part [A143P18100]
Procedure of attaching reinforcement part
1. Open the open/close-lever as shown, so you can see the surface to apply the reinforcement part.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Open/close-lever
[2]
Open in the direction as the arrow shows.
[2]
Reinforcement part pasting surface
[1]
[2]
[1]
Open/close-lever
2. Apply the reinforcement part on the pasting reference 1.

For front-back direction, place the reinforcement part in the center of open/close lever.
Note
Make sure that the reinforcement part is applied within the reference surface 2.
R-35

FIELD > 7. PARTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Pasting reference surface 1
[2]
Pasting reference surface 2
[3]
Reinforcement part
[2]
Paste in the center of front-back direction
[1]
[2]
[1]
Reinforcement part
(2) Countermeasure for breakage

When the rear hook is broken, replace with the strengthened open/close-lever Assy (knob).
Part No. Knob [A143PP5R03]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
Open/close-lever
[2]
Front hook
[3]
Open/close-lever (conventional)
[4]
Open/close-lever (improved)
[5]
Strengthen by improved form
R-36
bizhub 423/363/283/223
S LAYOUT DRAWINGS FOR RELATED PARTS BY EACH TROUBLE

CODE > 1. C0001
S LAYOUT DRAWINGS FOR RELATED PARTS BY EACH TROUBLE CODE

1. C0001
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
S-1

CODE > 2. C0202
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. C0202
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING/2

PS12
PS15
PS11
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN14
(12pin)
NC
GND
M11
DC24V
PS16 ON
GND
DC3.3V
GND
SIZE4
PSDB11
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
PS13 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS17 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS14 ON
GND
DC3.3V
CN23
(17pin)
CL11
PRCB
CN12
CN25
(3pin)
bizhub 363/283/223
CN19
(5pin)
bizhub 423
CN8
(9pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING (PRCB)
CL11
PS12
PS15
3 2 1
3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN24
(5pin)
CN1
(9pin)
CN2
1 2
2 1
CN12
(20pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN7
(12pin)
CN6
(15pin)
RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
CN1
S-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
DC24V
CL11 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS12 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS15 ON
NC
NC
NC
CN1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC24V
CL11 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS12 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS15 ON
DC3.3V
PS11 ON
GND
1 2 3
PS14
1 2 3
PS17
detect sensor/2
CN5
(16pin)
1 2 3
PS13
CN9
(7pin)
(19pin)
CN4
(12pin)

detect sensor/1
CN3
(11pin)
PJ1
PSDB11
1 2 3
PS16
CN1
1 2
M11
CN17
(8pin)
1 2
2 1
PSDB11
CN28
(26pin)
CN2
GND
SIZE4
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
1 2 3 4 5
CN2
(10pin)
CN13
CN13
PRCB

CODE > 3. C0204
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. C0204

CN15
(16pin)
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
PS25
PS21
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
GND
M21
DC24V
PS26 ON
GND
DC3.3V
GND
SIZE4
PSDB21
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
PS23 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS27 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS24 ON
GND
DC3.3V
CN24
(5pin)
CN14
(12pin)
PS22
CN11
CL21
PRCB
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
bizhub 363/283/223
CN19
(5pin)
bizhub 423
CN8
(9pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
CL21
PS22
PS25
3 2 1
3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN1
(9pin)
CN7
1 2
1 2
2 1
PSDB21
2 1
CN12
(20pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN7
(12pin)
CN6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DC24V
CL21 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS22 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS25 ON
NC
NC
NC
NC
1 2 3
PS24
DC24V
CL21 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS22 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS25 ON
DC3.3V
PS21 ON
GND
NC
1 2 3
PS27
1 2 3
PS23

detect sensor/2
PJ1
PSDB21
CN5
(16pin)
PS26
detect sensor/1
CN9
(7pin)
CN11
CN4
(12pin)
1 2 3
CN3
(11pin)
CN6
1 2
M21
CN17
(8pin)
CN7
GND
SIZE4
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
1 2 3 4 5
CN2
(10pin)
CN28
(26pin)
CN14
CN14
PRCB
CN6
(15pin)
CN6
S-3

CODE > 4. C0206, ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. C0206, C0208
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING/2[PC-208]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING/1[PC-109/PC-208]
BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING (PCCB31)
CN1
(9pin) CN2
(2pin)
CN3
(14pin)
CN10
(10pin)
CN4
(5pin)
CN11
(6pin)
CN5
(8pin)
CN9
(9pin)
CN6
(15pin)
CN7
CN8 (7pin)
(13pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM/2[PC-208]
PCCB31
PC control board
CN10
SIZE1
PS41 ON
GND
DC5V
DC5V
GND
PS43 ON
DC5V
GND
PS44 ON
NC
NC
NC
NC
CN8
GND
M43 ON
PS42 ON
GND
DC5V
GND
SIZE4
SIZE3
PSDTB41
SIZE2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN38
Tray 3 vertical
transport sensor
Tray 3
paper empty sensor
WIRING DIAGRAM/1[PC-109/PC-208]
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 2 1
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DC5V
GND
PS32 ON
M33 ON
GND
CN4
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PCCB31
PC control board
CN6
S-4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PS42
CN18
1 2 3
M43
1 2 3
3 2 1
3 2 1
CN1
PS41
PS43
PS44
Tray 4 empty sensor
PS39
3 2 1
PS36
3 2 1
Tray 4
detection sensor
PS34
3 2 1
PSDTB41
PS33
2 1
PSDTB41
Tray 4 paper FD
sensor board
M33
3 2 1
DC5V
GND
PS33 ON
DC5V
GND
PS34 ON
NC
NC
NC
GND
PS36 ON
DC5V
DC5V
GND
PS39 ON
PS32
GND
SIZE4
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
1 2 3 4 5
S-5
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS5C
PS5B
2 1
2 1
2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS5A
PS59
PS58
PS57
M55
M54
M53
PS5E
Shift motor sensor
Elevator motor
Shift motor
PJ1
CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9
CN1-10
CN1-11
PJ4-1
PJ4-2
PJ4-3
PJ4-4
PJ4-5
PJ4-6
PJ4-7
PJ4-8
PJ4-9
PJ4-10
PJ4-11
CN1
B<W> A<BL>
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M53
M54
M55
PS5E ON
NC
NC
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC
PCREYB
PJ3
+
+
M54
+
M55
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
M53
PS5E ON
B<W>
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN2
A<BL>
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DC5V
MTPEB ON
GND
3 2 1
PS5D
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MTPEB
1 2 3
MDCB
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CODE > 5. C0209
5. C0209

(PS5A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PCREYB
PC relay board
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PCCB51
PC control board
PJ4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1
2
3
4
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1

CODE > 6. C0210
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. C0210


(PS5A)

(PS57)
PJ1
(12pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM/2
PCREYB
PC relay board
PJ2
(2pin)
CN1
CN2
PJ5
(15pin)
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PCCB51
PC control board
M54
M55
M53
+
NC
NC
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ7
(5pin)
PS5E ON
PJ4
PJ3
PJ6
(8pin)
CN1
B<W> A<BL>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PJ3
(11pin)
PJ4-1
PJ4-2
PJ4-3
PJ4-4
PJ4-5
PJ4-6
PJ4-7
PJ4-8
PJ4-9
PJ4-10
PJ4-11
CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9
CN1-10
CN1-11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PCREYB
PJ4
(13pin)
1
2
3
4
+
+
M54
+
M55
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
M53
PS5E ON
A<BL>
CN2
PCCB51
PC control board
NC
PJ5
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
WIRING DIAGRAM/1
B<W>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PS55 ON
GND
DC5V
PS54 ON
GND
DC5V
PS53 ON
GND
DC5V
DC5V
PS52 ON
GND
DC5V
PS51 ON
GND
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4
CN20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
S-6
Paper feed sensor
DC5V
MTPEB ON
GND
3 2 1
PS57
M55
M54
M53
PS5E
2 1
3 2 1
PS58
Paper empty sensor
2 1
3 2 1
PS59
Shift motor
2 1
3 2 1
PS5A
Elevator motor
PS51
PJ1
PS52
3 2 1
PS5B
Shift motor sensor
PS53
3 2 1
PS5C
PS54
3 2 1
PS5D
PS55
1 2 3
MDCB
MTPEB
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
3 2 1

CODE > 7. C0211
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. C0211


(PS83)

CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
CN8
(9pin)
CN19
(5pin)
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN14
(12pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
CN24
(5pin)
CN1
(9pin)
CN2
(10pin)
CN28
(26pin)
CN3
(11pin)
CN17
(8pin)
CN11
(19pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN5
(16pin)

CN12
(20pin)
Transport motor
Manual paper feed clutch
Manual pick-up solenoid
WIRING DIAGRAM
M1
CL81
SD81
PS83
3 2 1
2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DC24V
CL81 ON
DC24V
SD81 ON
DC3.3V
GND
PS83 ON
CN15
CN14
1 2
CN15
CN
M1
GND
LOCK
CLK
GND
REM
GND
GND
DC24V
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
CN3
CN7
(12pin)
CN6
(15pin)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 1
CN10
(18pin)
CN9
PRCB
S-7
CN4
(12pin)

CODE > 8. C0212
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. C0212
PCCB51
PC control board
PJ7
PJ2
(2pin)
DC24V
SD51 ON
DC5V
PS56 ON
GND
PJ1
(12pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
5 4 3 2 1
PJ5
(15pin)
PJ3
(11pin)
PJ4
(13pin)
S-8
1 2 3
1 2 3
SD51
PS56
PJ7
(5pin)
Tray lock solenoid
PJ6
(8pin)
S-9
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS5C
PS5B
2 1
2 1
2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS5A
PS59
PS58
PS57
M55
M54
M53
PS5E
Shift motor sensor
Elevator motor
Shift motor
PJ1
+
+
M54
+
M55
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
M53
PS5E ON
B<W>
PCREYB
CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9
CN1-10
CN1-11
PJ4-1
PJ4-2
PJ4-3
PJ4-4
PJ4-5
PJ4-6
PJ4-7
PJ4-8
PJ4-9
PJ4-10
PJ4-11
CN1
B<W> A<BL>
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M53
M54
M55
PS5E ON
NC
NC
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC
PJ3
CN2
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A<BL>
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN2
DC5V
MTPEB ON
GND
3 2 1
PS5D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MTPEB
1 2 3
MDCB
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

(M53)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CODE > 9. C0213
9. C0213

(PS5E)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PCREYB
PC relay board
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PCCB51
PC control board
PJ4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1
2
3
4
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS5C
PS5B
2 1
2 1
2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS5A
PS59
PS58
PS57
M55
M54
M53
PS5E
Shift motor sensor
Elevator motor
Shift motor
PJ1
CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9
CN1-10
CN1-11
PJ4-1
PJ4-2
PJ4-3
PJ4-4
PJ4-5
PJ4-6
PJ4-7
PJ4-8
PJ4-9
PJ4-10
PJ4-11
CN1
B<W> A<BL>
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+
M53
M54
M55
PS5E ON
NC
NC
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC

(PS5C)
PCREYB
PJ3
+
+
M54
+
M55
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
M53
PS5E ON
B<W>
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN2
A<BL>
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DC5V
MTPEB ON
GND
3 2 1
PS5D
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MTPEB
1 2 3
MDCB
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CODE > 10. C0214
10. C0214

WIRING DIAGRAM
PCREYB
PC relay board
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PCCB51
PC control board
PJ4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1
2
3
4
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
S-10
S-11
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS5C
PS5B
2 1
2 1
2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS5A
PS59
PS58
PS57
M55
M54
M53
PS5E
Shift motor sensor
Elevator motor
Shift motor
PJ1
PCREYB
CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN1-8
CN1-9
CN1-10
CN1-11
PJ4-1
PJ4-2
PJ4-3
PJ4-4
PJ4-5
PJ4-6
PJ4-7
PJ4-8
PJ4-9
PJ4-10
PJ4-11
CN1
B<W> A<BL>
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M53
M54
M55
PS5E ON
NC
NC
GND
GND
DC5V
DC5V
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC
PJ3
+
+
M54
+
M55
DC5V
DC5V
GND
GND
M53
PS5E ON
B<W>
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN2
A<BL>
MDCB ON
PS5D ON
PS5C ON
PS5B ON
MTPEB ON
PS5A ON
PS59 ON
PS58 ON
PS57 ON
GND
NC
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DC5V
MTPEB ON
GND
3 2 1
PS5D
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MTPEB
1 2 3
MDCB
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CODE > 11. C0215
11. C0215
Shift motor (M54)

WIRING DIAGRAM
PCREYB
PC relay board
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PCCB51
PC control board
PJ4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1
2
3
4
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
bizhub 423/363/283/223

CODE > 12. C1004,...
12. C1004, CC155

PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING/1[FS-527]
S-12
bizhub 423/363/283/223

CODE > 13. C1081,...
13. C1081, C11B5

S-13

CODE > 14. C1113
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14. C1113
BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING (SDDB)
PJ8
(4pin)
PJ7
(8pin)
PJ11
(10pin)
PJ9
(9pin)
PJ6
(3pin)
PJ5
(10pin)
PJ4
(11pin)
PJ3
(10pin)
PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
SDDB
SD drive board
PS47 ON
GND
DC5V
PS45 ON
GND
DC5V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Leading edge
stopper motor
PJ10
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
CN101
1 2 3
1 2 3
PS45
home sensor
PJ8
SDDB
SD drive board
PS47
Center fold plate
home sensor
M20
A
B
A
B
4 3 2 1
CN102
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN103
CN81
M20
S-14
PJ10
(11pin)
PJ13
(9pin)

CODE > 15. C1114
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15. C1114

motor/F (M24)

home sensor/F (PS42)
PJ8
(4pin)
PJ7
(8pin)
PJ11
(10pin)
PJ9
(9pin)
PJ6
(3pin)
PJ5
(10pin)
PJ4
(11pin)
PJ3
(10pin)
PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN71
CN72
1 2 3 4
PS42
PS41
M23
M24
Center staple
alignment motor/R
Center staple
alignment motor/F
CN92
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
PS43

home sensor/R
CN93
3 2 1

home sensor/F
CN94
2 3
1 2 3
Paper detection
sensor/1
1 2 3
M24
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M23
A
A
B
B
A
A
B
B
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN91
PJ7
DC5V
PS43 ON
GND
PS42 ON
GND
DC5V
PS41 ON
GND
DC5V
SDDB
SD drive board
PJ9
S-15
PJ10
(11pin)
PJ13
(9pin)

CODE > 16. C1115
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16. C1115

PJ8
(4pin)
PJ7
(8pin)
PJ11
(10pin)
PJ9
(9pin)
PJ6
(3pin)
PJ5
(10pin)
PJ4
(11pin)
PJ3
(10pin)
PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
SDDB
SD drive board
PS47 ON
GND
DC5V
PS45 ON
GND
DC5V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Center fold
plate motor
PJ10
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
1 2 3
CN101
1 2 3
CN102
1 2
CN103
CN21
M26
1 2 3
PS45
home sensor
PJ2
PS47
Center fold plate
home sensor
M26 CCW *4
NC
M26 CW *3
3 2 1
S-16
PJ10
(11pin)
PJ13
(9pin)

CODE > 17. C1116
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17. C1116
PJ8
(4pin)
PJ7
(8pin)
PJ11
(10pin)
PJ9
(9pin)
PJ6
(3pin)
PJ5
(10pin)
PJ4
(11pin)
PJ3
(10pin)
PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin)
Center fold
roller motor
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN41
M25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
M25
DC5V
GND
CONT
CLK
F/R
LD
H/L
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ4
SDDB
SD drive board
S-17
PJ10
(11pin)
PJ13
(9pin)

CODE > 18. C1150
bizhub 423/363/283/223
18. C1150

PJ8
(4pin)
PJ7
(8pin)
PJ11
(10pin)
PJ9
(9pin)
PJ6
(3pin)
PJ5
(10pin)
PJ4
(11pin)
PJ3
(10pin)
PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN71
CN72
1 2 3 4
PS42
PS41
M23
M24
Center staple
alignment motor/R
Center staple
alignment motor/F
CN92
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
PS43

home sensor/R
CN93
3 2 1

home sensor/F
CN94
2 3
1 2 3
Paper detection
sensor/1
1 2 3
M24
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M23
A
A
B
B
A
A
B
B
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN91
PJ7
DC5V
PS43 ON
GND
PS42 ON
GND
DC5V
PS41 ON
GND
DC5V
SDDB
SD drive board
PJ9
S-18
PJ10
(11pin)
PJ13
(9pin)

CODE > 19. C1156
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19. C1156


PJ8
(4pin)
PJ7
(8pin)
PJ11
(10pin)
PJ9
(9pin)
PJ6
(3pin)
PJ5
(10pin)
PJ4
(11pin)
PJ3
(10pin)
PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin)
PS42
PS41
PS50
PS44
CN132
1 2 3
PS43
1 2 3
PS48 ON
GND
DC5V
CN131
3 2 1
Paper detection
sensor/2
1 2 3
1 2 3
Booklet tray
full sensor
CN92
1 2 3
3 2 1

home sensor/R
CN93
1 2 3
1 2 3

home sensor/F
CN94
PJ5
SDDB
SD drive board
1 2 3
3 2 1
Paper detection
sensor/1
M22
M21
GND
VM
FG
PWM
CW/CCW *3*4
GND
VM
FG
PWM
CW/CCW *3*4
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
CN137
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN91
PS50 ON
GND
DC5V
PS48 ON
GND
DC5V
DC5V
PS44 ON
GND
1 2 3 4 5
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN135
1 2 3 4 5
PJ13
CN136
Lower paddle
motor
M22
SDDB
SD drive board
PJ9
DC5V
PS43 ON
GND
PS42 ON
GND
DC5V
PS41 ON
GND
DC5V
Upper paddle
motor
M21
CN51
CN52
WIRING DIAGRAM
FS-527(Option)
S-19
PJ10
(11pin)
PJ13
(9pin)

CODE > 20. C1158
bizhub 423/363/283/223
20. C1158

Lower paddle motor

(M22)
PJ8
(4pin)
PJ7
(8pin)
PJ11
(10pin)
PJ9
(9pin)
PJ6
(3pin)
PJ5
(10pin)
PJ4
(11pin)
PJ3
(10pin)
PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin)
PS42
PS41
PS50
PS44
CN132
1 2 3
PS43
1 2 3
PS48 ON
GND
DC5V
CN131
3 2 1
Paper detection
sensor/2
1 2 3
1 2 3
Booklet tray
full sensor
CN92
1 2 3
3 2 1

home sensor/R
CN93
1 2 3
1 2 3

home sensor/F
CN94
PJ5
SDDB
SD drive board
1 2 3
3 2 1
Paper detection
sensor/1
M22
M21
GND
VM
FG
PWM
CW/CCW *3*4
GND
VM
FG
PWM
CW/CCW *3*4
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
CN137
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN91
PS50 ON
GND
DC5V
PS48 ON
GND
DC5V
DC5V
PS44 ON
GND
1 2 3 4 5
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN135
1 2 3 4 5
PJ13
CN136
Lower paddle
motor
M22
SDDB
SD drive board
PJ9
DC5V
PS43 ON
GND
PS42 ON
GND
DC5V
PS41 ON
GND
DC5V
Upper paddle
motor
M21
CN51
CN52
WIRING DIAGRAM
FS-527(Option)
S-20
PJ10
(11pin)
PJ13
(9pin)

CODE > 21. C1181
bizhub 423/363/283/223
21. C1181

BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING (FSCB)
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
3 2 1
CN10
(8pin)
CN5
(9pin)
CN7
FSCB
FS control board
CN7
(12pin)
S-21
SD5 ON
DC24V
GND
FM1_LOCK
DC24V
M5
M6
A
B
B
A
DC24V
DC24V
A
B
B
A
DC24V
DC24V
5 4 3 2 1
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
1 2 3
2 1
3 2 1
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M6
M5
SD5
FM1
Fan motor
CN6
(10pin)
CN9
(7pin)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN3
(3pin)
CN19
Conveyance motor/1
CN18
(4pin)
CN17
Conveyance motor/2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DC5V
GND
PS10 ON
DC5V
GND
PS11 ON
DC5V
GND
PS12 ON
DC5V
GND
PS13 ON
CN1
(3pin)
CN2
(6pin)
Belt position
sensor
CN16
(2pin)
CN19
(5pin)
Pick up roller
position sensor
CN20
CN14
CN13
(11pin)
CN17 (4pin)
(2pin)
(12pin)
CN15
CN11
CN4
(3pin)
(6pin)
(7pin)
Stapler home
sensor
CN8
(9pin)
FSCB
FS control board
Paper passage
sensor/2
CN12
(2pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM

CODE > 22. C1182
bizhub 423/363/283/223
22. C1182
WIRING DIAGRAM/1[JS-505]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING/1[JS-505]
JSCB
JS control board
PJ4
Shift motor (M2)
PJ7
PS6 ON
GND
DC5V
PS4 ON
GND
DC5V
PS5 ON
GND
DC5V
PS2 ON
GND
DC5V
PS1 ON
GND
DC5V
PS3 ON
GND
DC5V
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
PJ71
PJ72
PJ73
1 2 3
1 2 3
PS1
PS3
Front door sensor
1 2 3
PS2
PS5
PS4
1 2 3
PS6
Shift home sensor
1 2 3
M2
Shift motor
1 2 3
PJ74
PJ76
4 3 2 1
PJ75
CN42
CN44
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
4 3 2 1
GY
GY
GY
GY
A
B
A
B
M2

BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING(FSCB)[FS-527]
WIRING DIAGRAM/2[FS-527]
PJ6
PJ29 PJ30
PJ7
(3pin) (6pin)
(4pin) (12pin)
PJ8
PJ9
PJ10
PJ28
(12pin)
(8pin) (5pin)
(4pin)
CN211
1 2 3
PS21
1 2 3
PS25
CN213
CN214
GND
EMPTY
SELFPRIMING
HOME
DC5V
PJ20
1 2 3
PS26
5 4 3 2 1
ST_UNIT
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ST
S-22
3 2 1
1 2
PJ5
PJ17
(15pin)
1 2 3
2 1
FSCB
FS control board
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
PS26 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS25 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS21 ON
GND
DC3.3V
1 2 3 4 5
CN212
1 2 3 4
CN202
CN53
CN52
PJ16
(16pin)
PJ24
(6pin)
Staple unit
M16
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
(5pin)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
M16_BK
M16_REM
CW *3
CW *3
CCW *4
CCW *4
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
NC
Tray2 shift motor
PJ21
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)
FSCB
FS control board

CODE > 23. C1183
bizhub 423/363/283/223
23. C1183
23.1 FS-527

Elevate motor (M15)

Tray2 lower position
osit
switch
(SW3)
Tray2 upper position

sensor (PS24)
FSCB
FS control board
Tray2 lower position switch
Front door switch
SW1
Elevate motor
1 2 3
1 2 3
COM
(R)
NO
COM
NO
(R)
(W)
COM
NO
(R)
3 2 1
(W)
1 2 3
(W)
CN162
3 2 1
CN161
1 2 3
1 2 3
CN163
CN164
1 2 3
CN166
1 2 3
CN167
1 2 3
CN211
CN212
CN213
CN214
3 2 1
1 2 3
S-23
PS9
Lower path sensor
PS7
2 1
3 2 1
SW1_NO
NC
SW1_COM
PS24
NO
COM
PS12
PS13
PS21
PJ17
(15pin)
PS25
PJ4
PS26
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FSCB
FS control board
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
1 2 3
1 2 3
(16pin)
SW3
M15
CN41
(5pin)
PJ24
(6pin)
SW2
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
DC5V
GND
START/STOP
CLOCK
CW/CCW *3*4
LD
H/L
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
M15
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
PJ16
Tray2 upper position switch
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)
NC
NC
PJ6
PJ7
PJ29 PJ30
(4pin) (12pin)
(3pin) (6pin)
PJ9
PJ8
PJ28
PJ10
(4pin)
(8pin) (5pin)
(12pin)
PS26 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS25 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS21 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PJ21
PS13 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS12 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS24 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS9 ON
GND
PS7 ON
GND
DC3.3V
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN165
PJ3
PJ2
FSCB
FS control board

CODE > 23. C1183
bizhub 423/363/283/223
23.2 FS-529

Paper surface detect

sensor/2 (PS3)
Tray up/down
operation sensor
Paper surface
detect sensor/2
Paper surface
detect sensor/1
FSCB
FS control board
CN8
(9pin)
Tray lower
limit sensor
CN12
(2pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PS6
PS4
PS3
PS2
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
CN12
+
-
M2
CN14
CN20
CN13
(11pin)
(4pin)
CN17
(2pin)
(12pin)
CN11
CN15
CN4
(6pin)
(3pin)
(7pin)
1 2
CN16
(2pin)
CN19
(5pin)
CN3
(3pin)
CN6
(10pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(8pin)
CN5
(9pin)
CN7
(12pin)
S-24
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
PS3 ON
GND
DC5V
PS2 ON
GND
DC5V
CN18
(4pin)
Tray up/down motor
M2
PS6 ON
GND
DC5V
NC
NC
NC
DC5V
PS4 ON
GND
CN1
(3pin)
CN2
(6pin)
CN5
CN4
FSCB
FS control board

CODE > 24. C1190
bizhub 423/363/283/223
24. C1190
24.1 FS-527

(M13)
Tray2 paper
detection sensor

home sensor
Alignment plate
home sensor
M14
M11
M13
PS19
PS18
PS16
PS20
PS17
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
CN81
CN83
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
PJ16
(16pin)
PJ24
(6pin)
PJ17
(15pin)
PJ8
S-25
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M13
M11
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
M14
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PS19 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS18 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS16 ON
GND
PS20 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS17 ON
GND
DC3.3V
(5pin)
FSCB
FS control board
PJ17
CN171
1 2 3
CN172
1 2 3
CN173
1 2 3
CN174
CN175
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
CN82
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PJ7
PJ29 PJ30
PJ6
(3pin) (6pin)
(4pin) (12pin)
PJ8
PJ9
PJ10
PJ28
(4pin)
(12pin)
(8pin) (5pin)

CODE > 24. C1190
bizhub 423/363/283/223
24.2 FS-529

B
B
M3
A
A
B
B
M4
A
A
DC24V
SD3 ON
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CN16
(2pin)
CN19
(5pin)
CN1
(3pin)
CN2
(6pin)
Paper empty
sensor
CN14
CN20
CN14
CN13
(4pin)
(11pin)
CN17
(2pin)
(12pin)
CN15
CN11
CN4
(3pin)
(6pin)
(7pin)
Alignment plate
home sensor/F
FSCB
FS control board
CN8
(9pin)
Alignment plate
home sensor/R
CN12
(2pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PS9
PS8
PS7
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
2 1
1 2
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN6
(10pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(8pin)
CN5
(9pin)
CN7
(12pin)
S-26
NC
PS9 ON
GND
DC5V
PS8 ON
GND
DC5V
PS7 ON
GND
DC5V
SD3
Alignment stopper
solenoid
CN3
(3pin)
M4
Alignment motor/R
CN18
(4pin)
M3
Alignment motor/F
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN6
FSCB
FS control board

CODE > 25. C1191
bizhub 423/363/283/223
25. C1191

Alignment plate home

sensor/F (PS8)
CN18
(4pin)
CN3
(3pin)
CN6
(10pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(8pin)
CN5
(9pin)
CN7
(12pin)
S-27
PS9
PS8
PS7
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
2 1
1 2
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
M4
SD3
NC
PS9 ON
GND
DC5V
PS8 ON
GND
DC5V
PS7 ON
GND
DC5V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
M3
Alignment stopper
solenoid
CN1
(3pin)
CN2
(6pin)
Alignment motor/R
CN16
(2pin)
CN19
(5pin)
Paper empty
sensor
B
B
M3
A
A
B
B
M4
A
A
DC24V
SD3 ON
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Alignment plate
home sensor/F
CN14
CN14
CN20
CN13
(11pin)
CN17 (4pin)
(2pin)
(12pin)
CN11
CN15
CN4
(6pin)
(3pin)
(7pin)
Alignment plate
home sensor/R
FSCB
FS control board
CN8
(9pin)
Alignment motor/F
CN12
(2pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN6
FSCB
FS control board

CODE > 26. C1194
bizhub 423/363/283/223
26. C1194
26.1 FS-527

Tray2 paper
detection sensor

home sensor
Alignment plate
home sensor
M14
M11
M13
PS19
PS18
PS16
PS20
PS17
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
CN81
CN83
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
PJ16
(16pin)
(5pin)
PJ24
(6pin)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ17
(15pin)
PJ8
S-28
PS19 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS18 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS16 ON
GND
PS20 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS17 ON
GND
DC3.3V
M13
M11
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
M14
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FSCB
FS control board
PJ17
CN171
1 2 3
CN172
1 2 3
CN173
1 2 3
CN174
CN175
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
CN82
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PJ29 PJ30
PJ6
PJ7
(3pin) (6pin)
(4pin) (12pin)
PJ9
PJ8
PJ10
PJ28
(8pin) (5pin)
(4pin)
(12pin)

CODE > 26. C1194
bizhub 423/363/283/223
26.2 FS-529
CN20
CN17 (4pin)
(12pin)
CN14
(11pin)
(3pin)
CN12
(2pin)
CN8
(9pin)
CN13
(2pin)
CN11
CN4
(6pin)
(7pin)
CN16
(2pin)
CN19
(5pin)
CN18
(4pin)

home sensor (PS14)
Leading edge
stopper home
sensor
3 2 1
Staple
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
+
+
CN8
CN20
STAPLER MOTOR
1 2 3 4
DC5V
GND
PS14 ON
DC5V
STP_HP
STP_READY
STP_LS
GND
NC
TUBE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN3
(3pin)
CN6
(10pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PS14
CN1
(3pin)
CN2
(6pin)
FSCB
FS control board
S-29
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(8pin)
CN5
(9pin)
CN7
(12pin)

CODE > 27. C11A1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
27. C11A1
27.1 FS-527

WIRING DIAGRAM
FSCB
FS control board
PJ16
M10_REM
GND
GND
M9_REM
M8_REM
GND
GND
M6_REM
NC
PJ6
PJ7
PJ29 PJ30
(4pin) (12pin)
(3pin) (6pin)
PJ8
PJ9
PJ10
PJ28
(4pin)
(8pin) (5pin)
(12pin)
PS13 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS12 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS24 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS9 ON
GND
PS7 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PJ9
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
S-30
CN161
1 2 3
PS13
PS12
PS24
PS9
PS7
CN163
1 2 3
M6
Lower path sensor
1 2 3
M8
1 2 3
CN165
CN166
CN91
CN92
CN93
CN167
1 2 3
M9
PJ17
(15pin)
1 2
M10
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
1 2
1 2 3
3 2 1
PJ24
(6pin)
1 2
3 2 1
PJ16
(16pin)
(5pin)
1 2
1 2 3
CN94
CN164
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
CN162
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)

CODE > 27. C11A1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
27.2 FS-529
CN16
(2pin)
CN19
(5pin)
CN1
(3pin)
CN2
(6pin)
Belt position
sensor
DC24V
SD1 ON
B
B
M1
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
Pick up roller
position sensor
CN11
CN14
CN20
CN13
(11pin)
(4pin)
CN17
(2pin)
(12pin)
CN11
CN15
CN4
(6pin)
(3pin)
(7pin)
Stapler home
sensor
FSCB
FS control board
CN8
(9pin)
Paper passage
sensor/2
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN12
(2pin)
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
3 2 1
2 1
1 2
CN6
(10pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(8pin)
CN5
(9pin)
CN7
(12pin)
S-31
Pick up roller
position motor
CN3
(3pin)
M1
Paper surface
detect solenoid
CN18
(4pin)
SD1
DC5V
GND
PS10 ON
DC5V
GND
PS11 ON
DC5V
GND
PS12 ON
DC5V
GND
PS13 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN7
FSCB
FS control board

CODE > 28. C11A2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
28. C11A2

Accommodation roller
pressure sensor (PS13)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PJ16
M10_REM
GND
GND
M9_REM
M8_REM
GND
GND
M6_REM
NC
PJ6
PJ7
PJ29 PJ30
(4pin) (12pin)
(3pin) (6pin)
PJ8
PJ9
PJ28
PJ10
(4pin)
(8pin) (5pin)
(12pin)
FSCB
FS control board
PJ9
PS13 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS12 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS24 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS9 ON
GND
PS7 ON
GND
DC3.3V
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
S-32
CN161
1 2 3
M6
PS13
PS12
PS24
PS9
PS7
CN163
1 2 3
M8
Lower path sensor
1 2 3
M9
1 2 3
CN165
CN166
CN91
CN92
CN93
CN167
1 2 3
M10
PJ17
(15pin)
1 2
3 2 1
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
1 2
1 2 3
PJ24
(6pin)
1 2
3 2 1
PJ16
(16pin)
(5pin)
1 2
1 2 3
CN94
CN164
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
CN162
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)

CODE > 29. C11A7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
29. C11A7
Tray3 exit roller

FSCB
FS control board
PJ12
SET
GND
PS35 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS36 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PJ6
PJ7
PJ29 PJ30
(4pin) (12pin)
(3pin) (6pin)
PJ8
PJ9
PJ10
PJ28
(4pin)
(8pin) (5pin)
(12pin)
PJ30
NC
NC
NC
NC
M17_REM
GND
WIRING DIAGRAM
6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN121
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN123
CN123
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
PJ17
(15pin)
S-33
1 2
1 2 3
CN124
1 2
1 2 3
M17
PS35
PS36
Tray3 full sensor
PJ24
(6pin)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Tray3 exit roller

retraction sensor
CN126
PJ16
(16pin)
(5pin)
1 2 3
CN125
CN122
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
Tray3 exit roller

retraction motor
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25

CODE > 30. C11B0
bizhub 423/363/283/223
30. C11B0
30.1 FS-527

(PS18)

(M11)
Tray2 paper
detection sensor

home sensor
Alignment plate
home sensor
M14
M11
M13
PS19
PS18
PS16
PS20
PS17
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
CN81
CN83
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
PJ16
(16pin)
(5pin)
PJ24
(6pin)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ17
(15pin)
PJ8
S-34
PS19 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS18 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS16 ON
GND
PS20 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS17 ON
GND
DC3.3V
M13
M11
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
M14
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FSCB
FS control board
PJ17
CN171
1 2 3
CN172
1 2 3
CN173
1 2 3
CN174
CN175
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
CN82
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PJ7
PJ29 PJ30
PJ6
(3pin) (6pin)
(4pin) (12pin)
PJ9
PJ8
PJ10
PJ28
(4pin)
(12pin)
(8pin) (5pin)

CODE > 30. C11B0
bizhub 423/363/283/223
30.2 FS-529

PS12
PS13
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
3 2 1
CN18
(4pin)
CN3
(3pin)
CN6
(10pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(8pin)
CN5
(9pin)
CN7
S-35
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FSCB
FS control board
CN7
(12pin)
M7
PS11
3 2 1
CN18
B
B
A
A
PS10
DC5V
GND
PS10 ON
DC5V
GND
PS11 ON
DC5V
GND
PS12 ON
DC5V
GND
PS13 ON
CN1
(3pin)
CN2
(6pin)
Belt position
sensor
CN16
(2pin)
CN19
(5pin)
Pick up roller
position sensor
CN14
CN20
CN13
(4pin)
(11pin)
CN17
(2pin)
(12pin)
CN11
CN15
CN4
(6pin)
(3pin)
(7pin)
Stapler home
sensor
CN8
(9pin)
FSCB
FS control board
Paper passage
sensor/2
CN12
(2pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
M7
Stapler movement
motor
bizhub 423/363/283/223

CODE > 31. C11B2,...
31. C11B2, C1402

31.1 FS-527
31.2 FS-529
S-36

CODE > 32. C11C0
bizhub 423/363/283/223
32. C11C0
FSCB
FS control board
PJ19
DC5V
PUNCH_PLS_PS ON
GND
DC5V
PUNCH_CAM_PS ON
GND
DC5V
PUNCH_HOME_PS ON
GND
SET
GND
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CN191
PJ29 PJ30
PJ6
PJ7
(3pin) (6pin)
(4pin) (12pin)
PJ8
PJ9
PJ10
PJ28
(12pin)
(8pin) (5pin)
(4pin)
PJ27
CCW *4
NC
CW *3
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN193
1 2 3
PS200
PS100
Punch home sensor/1
1 2 3
PS300
1 2 3
M100
PS101
CN195
CN192
1 2
1 2 3
PS301
For Sweden
PK-517(Option)
S-37
CN199
CN196 CN191
PJ17
(15pin)
1 2 3
M101
Punch motor/1
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Punch home sensor/2
(5pin)
PJ24
(6pin)
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
CN197
PJ16
(16pin)
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN198
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
Punch motor/2
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
CN191
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)
CN194
PK-517(Option)

CODE > 33. C11E0
bizhub 423/363/283/223
33. C11E0
33.1 FS-527

FSCB
FS control board
S-38
CN112
CN114
CN113
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2
1 2 3
PS5
PS2
PS3
PS1
M2
M1
1 2 3
1 2 3
CN115
1 2 3
CN116
CN118
3 2 1
PJ17
(15pin)
1 2 3
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ24
(6pin)
3 2 1
CN117
CN111
PJ16
(16pin)
(5pin)
1 2 3
4 3 2 1
CN120 CN119
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
3 2 1
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
PJ28
M1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)
PJ29
B
A
B
A
NC
PJ6
PJ7
PJ29 PJ30
(4pin) (12pin)
(3pin) (6pin)
PJ8
PJ28
PJ10
(4pin)
(8pin) (5pin)
(12pin)
PS5 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS2 ON
GND
PS3 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS1 ON
GND
PJ11
M2
WIRING DIAGRAM
REM
NC
GND

CODE > 33. C11E0
bizhub 423/363/283/223
33.2 JS-505
JSCB
JS control board
WIRING DIAGRAM
PJ7
PJ6
NC
CL1_REM
DC24V
M3
+
PS6 ON
GND
DC5V
PS4 ON
GND
DC5V
PS5 ON
GND
DC5V
PS2 ON
GND
DC5V
PS1 ON
GND
DC5V
PS3 ON
GND
DC5V
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
S-39
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN62
CN63
PJ61
1 2
PS6
PS4
PS5
PS2
PS1
PS3
CL1
M3
Route change motor
PJ71
2 1
1 2 3
Front door sensor
PJ72
1 2 3
PJ73
1 2 3
PJ74
1 2 3
PJ75
1 2 3
1 2
2 1
1 2 3
1 2
Shift home sensor
PJ76
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY

CODE > 34. C11E1
bizhub 423/363/283/223
34. C11E1

FSCB
FS control board
WIRING DIAGRAM
PJ9
PJ21
M10_REM
GND
GND
M9_REM
M8_REM
GND
GND
M6_REM
NC
PJ6
PJ7
PJ29 PJ30
(4pin) (12pin)
(3pin) (6pin)
PJ8
PJ9
PJ28
PJ10
(4pin)
(8pin) (5pin)
(12pin)
PS26 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS25 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS21 ON
GND
DC3.3V
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ11
(13pin)
S-40
CN211
1 2 3
1 2 3
M8
M6
PS26
PS25
PS21
CN213
CN91
CN92
CN214
1 2 3
M9
PJ17
(15pin)
1 2
M10
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
1 2
3 2 1
PJ24
(6pin)
1 2
1 2 3
PJ16
(16pin)
(5pin)
1 2
CN93
CN94
CN212
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
PJ27
(3pin)

CODE > 35. C11E2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
35. C11E2
FSCB
FS control board
WIRING DIAGRAM
PJ9
PJ16
M10_REM
GND
GND
M9_REM
M8_REM
GND
GND
M6_REM
NC
PJ6
PJ7
PJ29 PJ30
(4pin) (12pin)
(3pin) (6pin)
PJ8
PJ9
PJ28
PJ10
(4pin)
(8pin) (5pin)
(12pin)
PS13 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS12 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS24 ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC5V
PS9 ON
GND
PS7 ON
GND
DC3.3V
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
S-41
CN161
1 2 3
M6
PS13
PS12
PS24
PS9
PS7
CN163
1 2 3
M8
Lower path sensor
1 2 3
M9
1 2 3
CN165
CN166
CN91
CN92
CN93
CN167
1 2 3
M10
PJ17
(15pin)
1 2
3 2 1
PJ22
PJ20
(10pin)
(5pin)
PJ23
PJ21
PJ19
(7pin)
(10pin)
(17pin)
1 2
1 2 3
PJ24
(6pin)
1 2
3 2 1
PJ16
(16pin)
(5pin)
1 2
1 2 3
CN94
CN164
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ13
(9pin)
PJ14
(14pin)
PJ5
PJ4 (7pin)
(11pin)
PJ3
(2pin) PJ2
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin) PJ25
CN162
PJ11
(13pin)
PJ27
(3pin)

CODE > 36. C1301
bizhub 423/363/283/223
36. C1301
Fan motor (FM1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
FSCB
FS control board
CN19
CN12
(2pin)
CN8
(9pin)
SD5 ON
DC24V
GND
FM1_LOCK
DC24V
CN14
CN20
CN13
(11pin)
CN17 (4pin)
(2pin)
(12pin)
CN11
CN15
CN4
(6pin)
(3pin)
(7pin)
5 4 3 2 1
CN18
(4pin)
CN3
(3pin)
CN6
(10pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(8pin)
CN5
(9pin)
CN7
(12pin)
S-42
1 2
1 2 3
2 1
3 2 1
SD5
FM1
Fan motor
CN1
(3pin)
CN2
(6pin)
CN16
(2pin)
CN19
(5pin)

CODE > 37. C2201
bizhub 423/363/283/223
37. C2201

3 2 1
1 2
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
Front door sensor
Total counter
Erase lamp
LEDB1
Tray 1 LED board
1 2
RS1
PS4
PS5
CNT
LA
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2
1 2
CN35
1 2 3
CN40
CN38
CN13
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
CN41
LEDB1
DC3.3V
FM1
2 1
2 1
1 2
CN2
(10pin)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
B
B
A
A
GND
DC24V
GND
REM
LOCK
CN5
(16pin)
CN12
(20pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN7
(12pin)
CN8
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LEDB2
DC3.3V
LEDB1
DC3.3V
RS1 ON
GND
PS4 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS5 ON
GND
DC3.3V
CNT ON
DC24V
LA ON
DC24V
CN9
(7pin)
M4
CN11
(19pin)
CN4
(12pin)
M3
CN3
(11pin)
FM1
CN28
(26pin)
CN17
(8pin)
M3
CN1
(9pin)
CN16
(9pin)
CN13
(11pin)
M4
4 3 2 1
LEDB2
Tray 2 LED board
CN24
(5pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN14
(12pin)
LEDB2
DC3.3V
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN39
CN19
(5pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
CN95
CN8
(9pin)
CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
Toner bottle motor
Toner supply motor
CN15
PRCB
CN6
(15pin)
S-43
2 1
1 2

CODE > 38. C2253,...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
38. C2253, C2254

PC motor (M2)

CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
CN8
(9pin)
CN19
(5pin)
PC motor
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
M2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN14
(12pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
CN24
(5pin)
CN1
(9pin)
CN2
(10pin)
CN17
(8pin)
CN11
(19pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN4
(12pin)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
LOCK
CLK
CW/CCW *3
REM
GND
GND
DC24V
CN3
(11pin)
M2
CN28
(26pin)
CN5
(16pin)
CN4
CN12
(20pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN7
(12pin)
PRCB
CN6
(15pin)
S-44

CODE > 39. C2350
bizhub 423/363/283/223
39. C2350

(W)
(R)
Paper separator
Paper separator
Photo conductor
(R)
(R)
Developing bias
(W)
(W)
D
CN1
CN4
(12pin)
CN9
(7pin)
1 2 3
3 2 1
T_I_MON
T_V_MON
D_PWM
T_CC/CV *4
T_PWM
BAC_CLK
BAC_REM
BDC_PWM
G_PWM
C/F_REM
GND
DC24V
CN3
(11pin)
CN43
HV1
High voltage unit
CN2
(10pin)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN5
(16pin)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
FM4
T_I_MON
T_V_MON
D_PWM
T_CC/CV *4
T_PWM
BAC_CLK
BAC_REM
BDC_PWM
G_PWM
C/F_REM
GND
DC24V
GND
REM
LOCK
CN11
(19pin)
FM4
CN1
(9pin)
CN28
(26pin)
CN17
(8pin)
CN16
(9pin)
(W)
CN13
(11pin)
CN24
(5pin)
CN15
(16pin)
363/
283/
223
(W)
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN14
(12pin)
Image transfer
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
bizhub
423
(W)
CN19
(5pin)
bizhub
(W)
CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
CN8
(9pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Toner suction fan motor
CN12
(20pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN7
(12pin)
CN6
PRCB
CN6
(15pin)

CN43
S-45

CODE > 40. C2557,...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
40. C2557, C2558, C255C, C2564




CN3
(11pin)
1 2
Front door sensor
Total counter
Erase lamp
TCRSB
TCR sensor board
LEDB1
Tray 1 LED board
1 2
LEDB2
Tray 2 LED board
CN40
RS1
PS4
PS5
CNT
LA
CN29
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2
1 2
1 2
2 1
1 2
CN28
CN35
1 2 3 4
2 1
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
5 4 3 2 1
DC5V
TCRSB ON
GND
IU_DETECT
NC
CN8
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN15
CN24
FM1
B
B
A
A
GND
DC24V
GND
REM
LOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LEDB2
DC3.3V
LEDB1
DC3.3V
RS1 ON
GND
PS4 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS5 ON
GND
DC3.3V
CNT ON
DC24V
LA ON
DC24V
CN5
(16pin)
CN7
(12pin)
3 2 1
4 3 2 1
CN38
4 3 2 1
1 2 3
CN4
(12pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN41
CN39
1 2 3 4
M4
CN12
(20pin)
CN95
CN13
CN2
(10pin)
CN11
(19pin)
FM1
2 1
1 2 3 4 5
CN28
(26pin)
CN17
(8pin)
M3
DC5V
TCRSB ON
GND
IU_DETECT
NC
CN16
(9pin)
CN13
(11pin)
M4
4 3 2 1
LEDB1
DC3.3V
CN1
(9pin)
LEDB2
DC3.3V
CN24
(5pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN14
(12pin)
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
Toner bottle motor
CN19
(5pin)
M3
CN8
(9pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
Toner supply motor
CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
PRCB
CN6
(15pin)
CN13
CN28
CN38
S-46

CODE > 41. C2650,...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
41. C2650, C5601, C5602, CC163, CEEE3

S-47

CODE > 42. C3421,...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
42. C3421, C3423, C3721, C3723, C3821, C3823, C5501

CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)

CN8
(9pin)
CN19
(5pin)
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN14
(12pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
CN24
(5pin)
CN1
(9pin)
CN2
(10pin)
CN28
(26pin)
CN3
(11pin)
CN17
(8pin)
CN11
(19pin)
CN12
(20pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Fusing unit
100/110V
CN4AC
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
3 2 1
4 3 2 1
F-N-WARM_UP
F-N-SIDE
F-N-CENTER
F-L
CN4AC
4 3 2 1
F-N-SIDE
F-N-CENTER
F-L
CN30
Except 100/110V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN2
CN2
DCPU
DC power supply
EXIT SENSOR ON
GND
DC3.3V
DC24V
GND
TH SIDE ON
GND
TH CENTER ON
DC24V
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN16
PRCB
S-48
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN4
(12pin)
CN5
(16pin)
CN7
(12pin)
CN6
(15pin)

CODE > 43. C4101,...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
43. C4101, C4501


PH unit

CN19
(5pin)
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN14
(12pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
CN24
(5pin)
CN1
(9pin)
CN20
CN19
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
CN2
(10pin)
CN28
(26pin)
To PJ02
CN3
(11pin)
CN17
(8pin)
PRCB
POLYGON MOTOR CLK
POLYGON MOTOR LOCK
LD&POLYGON MOTOR_EN
GND
DC24V
CN8
(9pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
GND
GND
SOS
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
DC5V
S/H
LD&POLYGON MOTOR_EN
CN20
(9pin)
CN18
CN11
(19pin)
CN12
(20pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN4
(12pin)
CN5
(16pin)
CN7
(12pin)
22-S
PH unit
CN6
(15pin)
S-49

CODE > 44. C5102,...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
44. C5102, C5103


CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
CN8
(9pin)
CN19
(5pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Transport motor

CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
M1
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN14
(12pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN24
(5pin)
CN1
(9pin)
CN2
(10pin)
CN28
(26pin)
CN3
(11pin)
CN4
(12pin)
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN9
(7pin)
GND
LOCK
CLK
GND
REM
GND
GND
DC24V
CN11
(19pin)
CN5
(16pin)
M1
CN17
(8pin)
CN3
CN12
(20pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN7
(12pin)
PRCB
CN6
(15pin)
S-50

CODE > 45. C5351
bizhub 423/363/283/223
45. C5351
CN19
(5pin)
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
CN24
(5pin)
M3
FM1
2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3
3 2 1
CN2
(10pin)
CN28
(26pin)
CN3
(11pin)
CN9
(7pin)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
M3
CN5
(16pin)
FM1
B
B
A
A
GND
DC24V
GND
REM
LOCK
CN11
(19pin)
CN4
(12pin)
M4
CN17
(8pin)
M4
4 3 2 1
CN1
(9pin)
CN13
CN14
(12pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
CN95
CN8
(9pin)
CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
Toner bottle motor
Toner supply motor

(FM1)
CN8
CN12
(20pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN7
(12pin)
PRCB
CN6
(15pin)
CN95
S-51

CODE > 46. C5356
bizhub 423/363/283/223
46. C5356

CN15
(16pin)
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
CN24
(5pin)
PS91
PS93
PS92
M92
FM2
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
CN1
(9pin)
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
CN3
(11pin)
CN9
(7pin)
CN4
(12pin)
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN5
(16pin)
PS91 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS93 ON
GND
DC3.3V
PS92 ON
GND
DC3.3V
A
A
M92
B
B
LOCK
REM
FM2
GND
CN11
(19pin)
CN46
CN2
(10pin)
CN28
(26pin)
CN17
(8pin)
Cooling fan motor
CN14
(12pin)
Duplex transport motor
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN44
CN19
(5pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
CN88
CN8
(9pin)
CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
Duplex unit door sensor
CN5
CN12
(20pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN7
(12pin)
PRCB
CN6
(15pin)
CN44
CN
CN46
S-52
3 2 1
1 2 3

CODE > 47. C5370
bizhub 423/363/283/223
47. C5370
MFP board (MFPB)
BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING (MFPB)
PJ26
PWM
LOCK
DC12V
GND
FM5
PJ14
(27pin)
DIMM2
(200pin)
PJ07
(14pin)
PJ16
(4pin)
PJ05
(9pin)
MFPB
MFP board
DIMM1
(200pin)
PJ35
(4pin)
PJ33
(4pin)
PJ36
(15pin)
PJ34
(15pin)
4 3 2 1
CN61
PJ28
PJ30 (3pin)
(5pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
PJ12 (4pin)
PJ19
(8pin)
PJ11
(7pin)
PJ03
(26pin)
PJ04
(8pin)
PJ15
(24pin)
FM5
PJ29
(4pin)
PJ02
(6pin)
PJ01
(15pin)
PJ26
(4pin)
CN61
S-53

CODE > 48. C6102,...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
48. C6102, C6103


Scanner home sensor
(PS201)
MFP board (MFPB)
BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING (REYB/SCAN)

PJ28
PJ30 (3pin)
(5pin)
PJ14
(27pin)
DIMM2
(200pin)
PJ07
(14pin)
PJ12
(6pin)
PJ16
(4pin)
PJ05
(9pin)
DIMM1
(200pin)
PJ35
(4pin)
PJ33
(4pin)
PJ36
(15pin)
PJ34
(15pin)
PJ12 (4pin)
PJ6
(4pin)
PJ19
(8pin)
PJ7 (3pin)
PJ5 (6pin)
PJ11
(7pin)
PJ03
(26pin)
PJ8 (3pin)
PJ04
(8pin)
PJ3
(11pin)
PJ11
(5pin)
PJ2
(28pin)
PJ1
(10pin)
PJ15
(24pin)
PJ9
(9pin)
PJ4
(4pin)
PJ29
(4pin)
PJ02
(6pin)
PJ01
(15pin)
PJ26
(4pin)
Scanner home sensor
M201
PS201
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
REYB/SCAN
Scanner relay board
PJ2
GND
MONITOR_OUT[+]
MONITOR_OUT[-]
GND
FD1_V0
FD2_V0
GND
PAGE_ON
GND
WAKE_ADF
CLOSE
20DEG
HOME
FAN_LOCK
TXD_ADF *2
GND
RXD_ADF *1
READY
SM_CLK
SM_ENABLE
SM_CWB
SM_CRNT
LAMP_REM
FAN_REM
SIZE_REM
ERROR_LED
READY_LED
GND
Scanner motor
WIRING DIAGRAM
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC5V
GND
PS201 ON
PJ5
PJ8
GND
MONITOR_OUT[+]
MONITOR_OUT[-]
GND
FD1_V0
FD2_V0
GND
PAGE_ON
GND
WAKE_ADF
CLOSE
20DEG
HOME
FAN_LOCK
RXD_ADF *1
GND
TXD_ADF *2
READY
SM_CLK_IR
SM_ENABLE
SM_CWB
SM_CRNT
LAMP_REM
FAN_REM
SIZE_REM
ERROR_LED
READY_LED
GND
1 2 3
M201
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
A
B
B
DC24V
DC24V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
PJ14
MFPB
MF P board
REYB/SCAN
Scanner relay board
S-54

CODE > 49. C6704
bizhub 423/363/283/223
49. C6704
CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)
S-55

CODE > 50. C6751
bizhub 423/363/283/223
50. C6751

CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)
PJ16
(4pin)
DIMM1
(200pin)
CCDB
CCD board
PJ2
PJ35
(4pin)
PJ33
(4pin)
PJ36
(15pin)
PJ34
(15pin)
<A>
<B>
GND
SCLK(-)
EN(-)
SO(-)
SI(-)
GND
LVDS_A(-)
LVDS_B(-)
LVDS_C(-)
LVDS_D(-)
LVDS_E(-)
GND
LVDS_CLK(-)
DIMM2
(200pin)
PJ07
(14pin)
PJ05
(9pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PJ14
(27pin)
GND
SCLK(+)
EN(+)
SO(+)
SI(+)
GND
LVDS_A(+)
LVDS_B(+)
LVDS_C(+)
LVDS_D(+)
LVDS_E(+)
GND
LVDS_CLK(+)
PJ28
PJ30 (3pin)
(5pin)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ12 (4pin)
PJ19
(8pin)
PJ11
(7pin)
PJ03
(26pin)
PJ04
(8pin)
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PJ15
(24pin)
LVDS_CLK[-]
GND
LVDS_E[-]
LVDS_D[-]
LVDS_C[-]
LVDS_B[-]
LVDS_A[-]
GND
SI[-]
SO[-]
EN[-]
SCLK[-]
GND
LVDS_CLK[+]
GND
LVDS_E[+]
LVDS_D[+]
LVDS_C[+]
LVDS_B[+]
LVDS_A[+]
GND
SI[+]
SO[+]
EN[+]
SCLK[+]
GND
PJ29
(4pin)
PJ02
(6pin)
PJ01
(15pin)
PJ01
MFPB
MFP board
PJ26
(4pin)
S-56

CODE > 51. C6752
bizhub 423/363/283/223
51. C6752

CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)
S-57

CODE > 52. C6901 ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
52. C6901 - C6903, CA051 - CA053, CC164, CC190, CC191, CC211 - CC214, CC216,
CD002, CD004, CD00F, CD010, CD020, CD211, CD212, CD231, CD241, CD242, CD261,
CD271, CD272, CD401 - CD407, CE001 - CE007, CEEE1
MFP board (MFPB)
S-58

CODE > 53. C6F01
bizhub 423/363/283/223
53. C6F01
MFP board (MFPB)

S-59

CODE > 54. C8101
bizhub 423/363/283/223
54. C8101

Reading roller release position sensor

(PS12)
BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING (DFCB)

J16
J13
(2pin)
(3pin)
J6
(4pin)
J99
(9pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
DFCB
DF control board
DC5V
GND
PS12 ON
+
M3
-
J15
1 2 3 4 5
CN5
J17
(2pin)
J3
(4pin)
J1
(4pin)
3 2 1
J17
(2pin)
J11
(5pin)
J10
(13pin)
J2
(10pin)
J7
(9pin)
2 1
J15
(2pin)
J12
(2pin)
S-60
PS12
M3
Reading roller
release motor
J19
(4pin)
2 1
Reading roller release

position sensor
J4
(2pin)
J5
(9pin)
J8
(3pin)
J9
(3pin)

CODE > 55. C8107
bizhub 423/363/283/223
55. C8107

J16
J13
(2pin)
(3pin)
J6
(4pin)
J99
(9pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
J17
(2pin)
J4
(2pin)
J5
(9pin)
J8
(3pin)
J9
(3pin)
DFCB
DF control board
J8
DC5V
GND
PS13 ON
1 2 3
M4
J3
(4pin)
J1
(4pin)
3 2 1
PS13
1 2 3 4
M4
A
A
B
B
J17
(2pin)
J11
(5pin)
J10
(13pin)
J2
(10pin)
J7
(9pin)
J15
(2pin)
J1
DFCB
DF control board
J12
(2pin)
S-61
Glass cleaning roller

home sensor
J19
(4pin)
1 2 3 4

CODE > 56. C8302
bizhub 423/363/283/223
56. C8302


J13
J16
(3pin)
(2pin)
J6
WIRING DIAGRAM
J99
(9pin)
J17
(2pin)
J4
(2pin)
J5
(9pin)
J8
(3pin)
J9
(3pin)
FM1
J3
(4pin)
J19
(4pin)
J1
(4pin)
1 2 3
J11
(5pin)
J10
(13pin)
J2
(10pin)
J7
(9pin)
FM1 ON
GND
FM1 LOCK
J17
(2pin)
J15
(2pin)
J13
DFCB
DF control board
J12
(2pin)
S-62

CODE > 57. C9401,...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
57. C9401, C9402


Inverter board (INVB) or
CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)

BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING (LEDEDB)

PJ28
PJ30 (3pin)
(5pin)
CN2
(6pin)
PJ14
(27pin)
DIMM2
(200pin)
PJ07
(14pin)
CN1
(4pin)
PJ16
(4pin)
PJ05
(9pin)
DIMM1
(200pin)
PJ35
(4pin)
PJ33
(4pin)
PJ36
(15pin)
PJ34
(15pin)
PJ12 (4pin)
PJ19
(8pin)
PJ11
(7pin)
PJ03
(26pin)
BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING (REYB/SCAN)
PJ04
(8pin)
PJ12 (6pin)
PJ6
(4pin)
PJ7 (3pin)
PJ5 (6pin)
PJ15
(24pin)
PJ8 (3pin)
PJ29
(4pin)
PJ02
(6pin)
PJ01
(15pin)
PJ11
PJ3 (5pin) PJ2
(11pin)
(28pin)
PJ1
(10pin)
PJ9
PJ4 (9pin)
(4pin)
PJ26
(4pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
CN1
PJ4
PJ7
FAN_REM
GND
FAN_LOCK
N.C
DC24V
LAMP_REM
GND
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
PJ2
GND
MONITOR_OUT[+]
MONITOR_OUT[-]
GND
FD1_V0
FD2_V0
GND
PAGE_ON
GND
WAKE_ADF
CLOSE
20DEG
HOME
FAN_LOCK
TXD_ADF *2
GND
RXD_ADF *1
READY
SM_CLK
SM_ENABLE
SM_CWB
SM_CRNT
LAMP_REM
FAN_REM
SIZE_REM
ERROR_LED
READY_LED
GND
DC24V
FL_REM
GND
REYB/SCAN
Scanner relay board
CCDB
CCD board
PJ2
<A>
<B>
GND
SCLK(-)
EN(-)
SO(-)
SI(-)
GND
LVDS_A(-)
LVDS_B(-)
LVDS_C(-)
LVDS_D(-)
LVDS_E(-)
GND
LVDS_CLK(-)
REYB/SCAN
Scanner relay board
GND
SCLK(+)
EN(+)
SO(+)
SI(+)
GND
LVDS_A(+)
LVDS_B(+)
LVDS_C(+)
LVDS_D(+)
LVDS_E(+)
GND
LVDS_CLK(+)
INVB
Inverter board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN1
LEDEDB
LED exposure
drive board
PJ7
REYB/SCAN
Scanner relay board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LVDS_CLK[-]
GND
LVDS_E[-]
LVDS_D[-]
LVDS_C[-]
LVDS_B[-]
LVDS_A[-]
GND
SI[-]
SO[-]
EN[-]
SCLK[-]
GND
LVDS_CLK[+]
GND
LVDS_E[+]
LVDS_D[+]
LVDS_C[+]
LVDS_B[+]
LVDS_A[+]
GND
SI[+]
SO[+]
EN[+]
SCLK[+]
GND
DC24V
FL_REM
GND
1 2 3
GND
MONITOR_OUT[+]
MONITOR_OUT[-]
GND
FD1_V0
FD2_V0
GND
PAGE_ON
GND
WAKE_ADF
CLOSE
20DEG
HOME
FAN_LOCK
RXD_ADF *1
GND
TXD_ADF *2
READY
SM_CLK_IR
SM_ENABLE
SM_CWB
SM_CRNT
LAMP_REM
FAN_REM
SIZE_REM
ERROR_LED
READY_LED
GND
GND
DC24V
LAMP_REM
GND
4 3 2 1
PJ14
MFPB
MF P board
S-63
PJ01
MFPB
MFP board

CODE > 58. CC001
bizhub 423/363/283/223
58. CC001
CN20
(9pin)
CN18
(7pin)
CN8
(9pin)
CN19
(5pin)
CN22
(6pin)
CN21
(4pin)
CN23
(17pin)
CN25
(3pin)
CN14
(12pin)
CN15
(16pin)
CN13
(11pin)
CN16
(9pin)
CN24
(5pin)
CN1
(9pin)
CN2
(10pin)
CN28
(26pin)
CN3
(11pin)
CN17
(8pin)
CN11
(19pin)
CN12
(20pin)
WIRING DIAGRAM
PRCB
DC5V
DC5V
TXD *2
RXD *1
GND
SET
FEED
NC
CN17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vender
S-64
CN9
(7pin)
CN10
(18pin)
CN4
(12pin)
CN5
(16pin)
CN7
(12pin)
CN6
(15pin)
bizhub 423/363/283/223

CODE > 59. CC156,...
59. CC156, CC165

S-65

CODE > 60. CC170 ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
60. CC170 - CC174, CC180 - CC186

NVRAM board (NRB)
MFP board (MFPB)
S-66

CODE > 61. CD201 ...
bizhub 423/363/283/223
61. CD201 - CD203

Memory
MFP board (MFPB)
S-67

CODE > 62. CEEE2
bizhub 423/363/283/223
62. CEEE2
CCD board (CCDB)
S-68
j-10+%#/+01.6#+0%
7UGQHVJKUOCPWCNUJQWNFDGUVTKEVN[UWRGTXKUGFVQCXQKF
FKUENQUWTGQHEQPHKFGPVKCNKPHQTOCVKQP

Bizhub / Develop 223 Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub / Develop 223 Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE.........................................................................................................A-24

5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT...............................................................................................A-26

B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS..................................................................................................B-1

11. i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105........................................................................................................................C-22

12.1.1 General specifications.................................................................................................................................................C-24

D OVERALL COMPOSITION ...........................................................................................................D-1

3. Periodical replacement parts list..................................................................................................................................F-7

4. Periodical cleaning parts list........................................................................................................................................F-9

5. Concept of parts life...................................................................................................................................................F-10

5.1.1 bizhub 223/283..............................................................................................................................................................F-10

6. Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub 223/283/363/423....................................................................................F-12

7. Periodical maintenance procedure DF-621...............................................................................................................F-31

8. Periodical maintenance procedure PC-109/PC-208..................................................................................................F-37

9. Periodical maintenance procedure PC-409...............................................................................................................F-42

10. Periodical maintenance procedure JS-505..............................................................................................................F-48

11. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-527.............................................................................................................F-49

12. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-529.............................................................................................................F-52

1. Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items...................................................................................................................G-1

2. Units from which removing is prohibited.....................................................................................................................G-3

3. Notes when transporting the machine........................................................................................................................G-4

4.4.3 Inverter board (INVB) (for fluorescent lamp).................................................................................................................G-30

5.3.3 Rear cover/Left cover....................................................................................................................................................G-66

5.8.12 Alignment motor/F (M3), Alignment motor/R (M4)....................................................................................................G-107

6. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS..................................................................................................................G-131

2. TOUCH PANEL ADJUSTMENT...................................................................................................................................I-2

4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX REGISTRATION)..............................................................................................I-20

5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)......................................................................................................................................I-24

5.4 Scan/Fax Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................I-36

6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS)..................................................................................................................I-45

6.7.3 Printer Adjustment-Centering.........................................................................................................................................I-51

6.17 System Settings-Page Number Print Position........................................................................................................................I-71

6.33 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Home Settings...................................................................................................I-81

6.42 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-E-mail RX (POP).............................................................................................................I-101

6.54.1 SSDP Settings............................................................................................................................................................I-114

6.79.6 Sender Fax No............................................................................................................................................................I-135

6.91.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-151

7. UTILITY (OTHER SETTINGS).................................................................................................................................I-153

8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST.......................................................................................................................................I-155

9.2.4 F-Code TX....................................................................................................................................................................I-163

10. LIST OF SERVICE MODE......................................................................................................................................I-166

11. SERVICE MODE....................................................................................................................................................I-175

11.7.3 Using E-mail...............................................................................................................................................................I-194

11.12.3 Service Call Counter.................................................................................................................................................I-226

12. ENHANCED SECURITY........................................................................................................................................I-371

13. BILLING SETTING.................................................................................................................................................I-375

14. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION........................................................................................I-396

16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-621..................................................................................................................I-401

17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-109/PC-208.....................................................................................................I-404

18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-409..................................................................................................................I-405

19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-517..................................................................................................................I-408

20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-509..................................................................................................................I-409

3.2 Firmware rewriting from the control panel..................................................................................................................................J-7

5. ERROR CODE FOR THE INTERNET ISW..............................................................................................................K-90

Error code list for the Internet ISW..........................................................................................................................................K-90

6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE..............................................................................................................................K-92

7. NETWORK ERROR CODE.......................................................................................................................................K-98

8. FAX TROUBLE CODE............................................................................................................................................K-106

10. NETWORK FAX ERROR CODE...........................................................................................................................K-117

11. Open API RELATED TROUBLE...........................................................................................................................K-119

12. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE TROUBLE CODE............................................................................K-121

13. TROUBLESHOOTING OF i-Option.......................................................................................................................K-123

14. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM................................................................................................................................K-124

14.3.6 Scanner system: White streaks or bands..................................................................................................................K-129